P320 TRAINING COURSE

OCTOBER 2002
 P320 Training Course Summary

1st day

Morning 8h-12h

1. Presentation of the participants.

2. Presentation of the training program.
3. General presentation of the ALSPA P320 system
• Architecture/ equipments
• Interfaces
• Standard functions of the ALSPA system.
• Short presentation of SINCOR dedicated functions of the ALSPA system.
4. Presentation of existing documentation.

Afternoon 13h-17h

1. Presentation of 34,5kV distribution.

2. 34,5kV CB control
• Typical I/O interface
• Local/remote
• Manual/Auto
• Permissive to close.
3. Presentations of 480V distribution.
4. 480 V CB
• Typical I/O interface
• Manual/Auto
• Automatic change over to and from EDG.
5. Control of the turbines.
• Typical I/O interface.
• Mode ISOCHRONOUS/DROOP
• Mode VOLTAGE/REACTIVE POWER
• LOCAL mode.
• REMOTE MANUAL mode.
• REMOTE AUTOMATIC mode.
• FUEL CHANGE OVER.

1/14
 P320 Training Course Summary

2nd day (in G/S01 Substation)

Morning. 8h-12h

1. BLACK START / NORMAL START OF TURBINE

2. NORMAL STOP / STOP OF THE LAST TURBINE.
3. Physical presentation of P320’s equipments in GS-01
4. Start of the P320 system.
5. Stop of the P320 system.
6. Login Procedure.
7. Logout Procedure.
8. Authorizations and Access levels.
9. Review of basic functions of the CENTRALOG using the Displays created for the power
generation.
• Presentation of the new functionality of the CTRL-ABC display.
10. Alarms management.
11. Reports/Journal Displays

Afternoon 13h-17h

1. CENTRALOG configuration using MICRO-ETE.

• General presentation.
• Example of modification of an alarm variable definition.
• Generation of the new CENTRALOG database.
• Implementation of the new version of the database.

2. Workstation screen copy to the disk file.

(In the Main Control Room)

1. Physical presentation of P320’s equipments in the Control Room.

2. Use of the printer.

2/14
 P320 Training Course Summary

3rd day (in G/S01)

Morning 8h-12h

1. Operating of the electrical switchboard contactors.

2. Start of the turbine by the P320 with the automatic synchronization.
3. Control of the turbine in ISOCHRONOUS/VOLTAGE mode by the P320 (voltage set
point).
4. Control of the turbine in DROOP/REACTIVE POWER mode by the P320 (active and
reactive power set points).
5. Fuel change over from the P320.
6. Stop of a turbine from the P320.

Afternoon 13h-17h

1. Using of the HDSR.

• General presentation (frequency of the data acquisition).
• Using the HDSR to analyze the events.
• Using the HDSR to analyze the samples.
• Extraction of the data from the HDSR.
• Backup of the HDSR on the DAT tape.
• Extraction of the HDSR backup from the DAT tape.
• Access to the HDSR from the portable PC.
2. Priority of the turbines.
3. Configuration of the P320’s parameters for the load sharing function.
4. Configuration of the P320’s parameters for the load shedding function.
5. Practical presentation of the load sharing function.
• Automatic start of the second turbine by the P320, when the total LOAD is above of
defined value.
• Sharing of the load.
• Automatic stop of the turbine, when the LOAD decries.

3/14
 P320 Training Course Summary
4th day (in GS01)

Morning. 8h-12h

1. How to use the P8 console (for investigation in PLC sequences).

• Searching of the variable.
• Forcing of the variable.
2. Revue of the organization of the programs in the PLC’s.
3. Basic maintenance operation on the PLC’s.
• Replacement of the modules (THE POWER must be OFF).
• Configuration of the replaced module using the HHP pocket consol.
• Download of the program to the PLC by the P8 console.
• Verification of the MODBUS link.
• Configuration of the PCM module for the MODBUS link.
• Configuration of the FIP modules.
• Replacement of the battery in the CPU and the PCM module.

Afternoon 13h-17h

1. Extraction of the copy of the P320 displays to send it by the e-mail.

2. Creation of the ASCII files with the data from the HDSR to send it by e-mail.
3. Functioning of the CANTRALOG calculation modules PRISCA.
4. Implementation of the modification in the PRISCA modules.
5. Redundancy in the ALSPA P320 system.
6. Basic diagnostic of the P320 network.
7. Basic diagnostic of the CENTRALOG system.

4/14
 P320 Training Course Summary

5th day (in G/S01)

Morning 8h-12h

1. Practical operation of the MODBUS module replacement and configuration.

Afternoon 13h-17h

1. Questions and answers session.

5/14
21 MOTOR9 34
22 MOTOR9 33

4
4
4
25 MOTOR10 MOTOR10 42
26 41
SINCOR C.A. CA12-05-32-P-DR-418
EMCS GENERAL ARCHITECTURE DRAWING A565645-AD118
Page : 01/01
Rev/Date : X0/ 05/02/2001
 SINCOR INSDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS & SERVICES

Project Title: SINCOR, C. A. SINCOR Document N°: CA12-05-32-P-IX-411

UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT SINCOR Interface code : 2
SINCOR Document Class: 00
ALSTOM N° A565645 - AL111
Page/File : 1/CA120532PIX411
Rev./Date: X0/17/01/2001

SINCOR, C.A.
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
ALSTOM ENGINEERING
EMCS - 32-CS-411 - PLCs I/O LIST

REVISION INDEX

This document consist of the following number of pages:

REV. DATE: PAGES: REASON FOR ISSUE:

B0 23/06/1999 1 - 016 Issue for approval
0 30/09/1999 1 - 016 Issue as final
1 17/03/2000 Up dated
2 13/07/2000 Updated (Buffer Tank & Load Shedding)
X0 17/01/2001 As built

ALSTOM APPROVAL SINCOR APPROVAL

PREPARED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: PREPARED CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:

16/01/2001 16/01/2001 17/01/2001 / /19 / /19 / /19

 CELL01L
SINCOR

Pwr
P.S - IC693PWR330

1
CPU - IC693CPU351

2
NetFIP-IC693BEM340

TAP
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.

3
NetFIP-IC693BEM340

4
DI - IC693MDL646

5
Spare

Pwr
Pwr
Pwr
RACK 1
P.S - IC693PWR330 P.S - IC693PWR330 P.S - IC693PWR330

1
1
1
CPU - IC693CPU351 CPU - IC693CPU351 CPU - IC693CPU351

2
2
2
NetFIP-IC693BEM340 NetFIP-IC693BEM340 NetFIP-IC693BEM340

3
3
3
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT

Modbus - PCM301 Modbus - PCM301 Modbus - PCM301

4
4
4
DI - IC693MDL655 DI - IC693MDL655 DI - IC693MDL655

5
5
5
DO - IC693MDL753 DO - IC693MDL753 DO - IC693MDL753

6
6
6
AI - IC693ALG223 AI - IC693ALG223 AI - IC693ALG223

7
7
7
F8000 - Redondant
S8000 - Redondant

AO - IC693ALG392 AO - IC693ALG392 AO - IC693ALG392

8
8
8
Spare Spare Spare
PLCs CABINET N°1

CELL01R

9
9
9
Spare Spare Spare

Spare Spare Spare

10
10
10
EMCS - Alspa 8000 P320 System

Pwr

RACK 5
RACK 4
RACK 3

P.S - IC693PWR330
1
PLCs Configuration & Cards Assignment

CPU - IC693CPU351
2

NetFIP-IC693BEM340
TAP

GTB
GTC
GTA
3

NetFIP-IC693BEM340
4

DI - IC693MDL646
5

Spare
RACK 2
Class : 00

Page/File : 2/16
N° : A565645-AL111
N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411

Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Class : 00
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
N° : A565645-AL111
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
Page/File : 3/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :1
Slot :4
Card Type : IC693MDL646

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 DI Spare 1
2 XA0900A DI PLC Top Synchro - PLC Master 1
3 DI Spare 0
4 DI Spare 0
5 DI Spare 0
6 DI Spare 0
7 DI Spare 0
8 DI Spare 0
9 DI Spare 0
10 DI Spare 0
11 DI Spare 0
12 DI Spare 0
13 DI Spare 0
14 DI Spare 0
15 DI Spare 0
16 DI Spare 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Class : 00
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
N° : A565645-AL111
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
Page/File : 4/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :2
Slot :4
Card Type : IC693MDL646

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 DI Spare 1
2 XA0900B DI PLC Top Synchro - PLC Slave 1
3 DI Spare 0
4 DI Spare 0
5 DI Spare 0
6 DI Spare 0
7 DI Spare 0
8 DI Spare 0
9 DI Spare 0
10 DI Spare 0
11 DI Spare 0
12 DI Spare 0
13 DI Spare 0
14 DI Spare 0
15 DI Spare 0
16 DI Spare 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Class : 00
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
N° : A565645-AL111
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
Page/File : 5/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :3
Slot :4
Card Type : IC693MDL655

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 XA1A06 SG_1A-XA1A06 DI SG-1A Availability of (F & V) 1A06 4 0

2 ZSH1A04 SG_1A-ZSH1A04 DI SG-1A Open position Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 0
3 ZSL1A04 SG_1A-ZSL1A04 DI SG-1A Closed position Circuit Breaker1A-04 1 0
4 XA1A04 SG_1A-XA1A04 DI SG-1A Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 0
5 XAH1A04 SG_1A-XAH1A04 DI SG-1A General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 0
6 XHH1A04 SG_1A-XAHH1A04 DI SG-1A General Trip Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 0
7 EAH1A04 SG_1A-EAH1A04 DI SG-1A Critical Control Fault Circuit breaker 1A-04 1 0
8 ZLR1A04 SG_1A-ZLR1A04 DI SG-1A Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 0
9 ZSH400A GT_1A-ZSH400A DI GT-1A Open position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 3 0
10 ZSL400A GT_1A-ZSL400A DI GT-1A Closed position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 3 0
11 ZSA601A GT_1A-ZSA601A DI GT-1A Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1A 7 0
12 ZSA602A GT_1A-ZSA602A DI GT-1A Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1A 7 0
13 ZSA603A GT_1A-ZSA603A DI GT-1A Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1A 7 0
14 ZSA604A GT_1A-ZSA604A DI GT-1A Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1A 7 0
15 ZSA605A GT_1A-ZSA605A DI GT-1A GT-1A tripped 7 0
16 ZSA606A GT_1A-ZSA606A DI GT-1A GT-1A controlled by EMCS 7 1
17 ZSA607A GT_1A-ZSA607A DI GT-1A Permissive to close CB 34.5kV 7 0
18 ZSL1A01 SG_1A-ZSL1A01 DI SG-1A Closed position Circuit Breaker 1A-01 2 0
19 XA1A01 SG_1A-XA1A01 DI SG-1A Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-01 2 0
20 EAH1A01 SG_1A-EAH1A01 DI SG-1A Critical Control Fault Circuit breaker 1A-01 2 0
21 ZLR1A01 SG_1A-ZLR1A01 DI SG-1A Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-01 2 0
22 IH1A01 SG_1A-IAH1A01 DI SG-1A Max Current Fault bus A Circuit Breaker 1A-01 2 1
23 IH1B01 SG_1A-IAH1B01 DI SG-1B Max Current Fault bus B Circuit Breaker 1B-01 2 1
24 XAH500A TR_1A-XAH500A DI TR-1A General Alarm Transfo TR-1A (1A-04) 5 0
25 XHH500A TR_1A-XAHH500A DI TR-1A General Trip Transfo TR-1A (1A-04) 5 0
26 ZSA615A GT_1A-ZSA615A DI GT_1A CB 13.8 kV tripping too long 3
27 DI Spare 0
28 DI Spare 0
29 DI Spare 0
30 DI Spare 0
31 DI Spare 0
32 XA0134 PLC-XA0134 DI PLC PLC Card fault cabinet 01 - rack 3 - slot 4 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Class : 00
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
N° : A565645-AL111
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
Page/File : 6/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :3
Slot :5
Card Type : IC693MDL753

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 YZH1A04 DO SG-1A Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 0

2 YZL1A04 DO SG-1A Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 0
3 ZAH1A04 DO GT-1A Open position Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 0
4 ZAL1A04 DO GT-1A Close position Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 0
5 YR1A04 DO SG-1A Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1A-04 2 0
6 YZH1A01 DO SG-1A Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-01 2 0
7 YZL1A01 DO SG-1A Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-01 7 0
8 YR1A01 DO SG-1A Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1A-01 7 0
9 YZS601A DO GT-1A Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1A 7 0
10 YZS602A DO GT-1A Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1A 7 0
11 YZS603A DO GT-1A Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1A 7 0
12 YZS604A DO GT-1A Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1A 7 0
13 YZS608A DO GT-1A Permissive to switch GT-1A MCC to EDG supply 7 0
14 YZS609A DO GT-1A GT-1A normal start 7 0
15 YZS610A DO GT-1A GT-1A black start 7 0
16 YZS611A DO GT-1A Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1A 7 0
17 YZS612A DO GT-1A Fuel gas selection GT-1A 7 1
18 YZS613A DO GT-1A Diesel Fuel selection GT-1A 7 1
19 YZS614A DO GT-1A Naphta Fuel selection GT-1A 7 1
20 YZS615A DO GT-1A Process Run Status - GT_1A 2
21 YZH400A DO GT-1A Open order Q400A 3
22 DO Spare 0
23 DO Spare 0
24 DO Spare 0
25 DO Spare 0
26 DO Spare 0
27 DO Spare 0
28 DO Spare 0
29 DO Spare 0
30 DO Spare 0
31 DO Spare 0
32 YA902A DO PLC Watchdog - Fault system cab 01 - rack 03 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Class : 00
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
N° : A565645-AL111
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
Page/File : 7/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :3
Slot :6
Card Type : IC693ALG223

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 JI618A GT_1A-JI618A AI GT-1A Generator Active Power GT-1A 7 0

2 JI619A GT_1A-JI619A AI GT-1A Generator Reactive Power GT-1A 7 0
3 EI1A06 SG_1A-EI1A06 AI SG-1A Voltage Indicator 1A06 4 0
4 FI1A06 SG_1A-FI1A06 AI SG-1A Frequency Indicator 1A06 4 0
5 AI Spare 0
6 AI Spare 0
7 AI Spare 0
8 AI Spare 0
9 AI Spare 0
10 AI Spare 0
11 AI Spare 0
12 AI Spare 0
13 AI Spare 0
14 AI Spare 0
15 AI Spare 0
16 AI Spare 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Class : 00
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
N° : A565645-AL111
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
Page/File : 8/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :3
Slot :7
Card Type : IC693ALG392

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 YJ618A GT_1A-YJ618A AO GT-1A Generator Active Power Set Point GT-1A 7 0

2 YJ619A GT_1A-YJ619A AO GT-1A Generator Reactive Power Set Point GT-1A 7 0
3 YE620A GT_1A-YE620A AO GT-1A Voltage 34,5 KV Set Point GT-1A 7 0
4 AO Spare 0
5 AO Spare 0
6 AO Spare 0
7 AO Spare 0
8 AO Spare 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL111
Page/File : 9/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :4
Slot :4
Card Type : IC693MDL655

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 ZSH1A02 SG_1A-ZSH1A02 DI SG-1A Open position Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 0

2 ZSL1A02 SG_1A-ZSL1A02 DI SG-1A Closed position Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 0
3 XA1A02 SG_1A-XA1A02 DI SG-1A Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 0
4 XAH1A02 SG_1A-XAH1A02 DI SG-1A General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 0
5 XHH1A02 SG_1A-XAHH1A02 DI SG-1A General Trip Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 0
6 EAH1A02 SG_1A-EAH1A02 DI SG-1A Critical Control Fault Circuit breaker 1A-02 1 0
7 ZLR1A02 SG_1A-ZLR1A02 DI SG-1A Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 0
8 ZSH1B02 SG_1B-ZSH1B02 DI SG-1B Open position Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 0
9 ZSL1B02 SG_1B-ZSL1B02 DI SG-1B Closed position Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 0
10 XA1B02 SG_1B-XA1B02 DI SG-1B Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 0
11 XAH1B02 SG_1B-XAH1B02 DI SG-1B General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 0
12 XHH1B02 SG_1B-XAHH1B02 DI SG-1B General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 0
13 EAH1B02 SG_1B-EAH1B02 DI SG-1B Critical Control Fault Circuit breaker 1B-02 1 0
14 ZLR1B02 SG_1B-ZLR1B02 DI SG-1B Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 0
15 ZSH400C GT_1C-ZSH400C DI GT-1C Open position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 3 1
16 ZSL400C GT_1C-ZSL400C DI GT-1C Closed position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 3 1
17 ZSA601C GT_1C-ZSA601C DI GT-1C Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1C 7 0
18 ZSA602C GT_1C-ZSA602C DI GT-1C Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1C 7 0
19 ZSA603C GT_1C-ZSA603C DI GT-1C Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1C 7 0
20 ZSA604C GT_1C-ZSA604C DI GT-1C Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1C 7 0
21 ZSA605C GT_1C-ZSA605C DI GT-1C GT-1C tripped 7 0
22 ZSA606C GT_1C-ZSA606C DI GT-1C GT-1C controlled by EMCS 7 1
23 ZSA607C GT_1C-ZSA607C DI GT-1C Permissive to close CB 34.5kV 7 0
24 XAH500C TR_1C-XAH500C DI TR-1C General Alarm Transfo TR-1C (1A-02) 5 0
25 XHH500C TR_1C-XAHH500C DI TR-1C General Trip Transfo TR-1C (1A-02) 5 0
26 XAH501C TR_1C-XAH501C DI TR-1C General Alarm Transfo TR-1C (1B-02) 5 0
27 XHH501C TR_1C-XAHH501C DI TR-1C General Trip Transfo TR-1C (1B-02) 5 0
28 ZSA615C GT_1C-ZSA615C DI GT-1C CB 13.8 kV tripping too long 3
29 DI Spare 0
30 DI Spare 0
31 DI Spare 0
32 XA0144 PLC-XA0144 DI PLC PLC Card fault cabinet 01 - rack 4 - slot 4 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL111
Page/File : 10/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :4
Slot :5
Card Type : IC693MDL753

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 YZH1A02 DO SG-1A Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 0

2 YZL1A02 DO SG-1A Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 0
3 ZAH1A02 DO GT-1C Open position Circuit Breaker 1A-02 AND 1B-02 1 0
4 ZAL1A02 DO GT-1C Close position Circuit Breaker 1A-02 OR 1B-02 1 0
5 YR1A02 DO SG-1A Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 0
6 YZH1B02 DO SG-1B Open order Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 0
7 YZL1B02 DO SG-1B Close order Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 0
8 YR1B02 DO SG-1B Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 0
9 YZS601C DO GT-1C Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1C 7 0
10 YZS602C DO GT-1C Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1C 7 0
11 YZS603C DO GT-1C Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1C 7 0
12 YZS604C DO GT-1C Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1C 7 0
13 YZS608C DO GT-1C Permissive to switch GT-1C MCC to EDG supply 7 0
14 YZS609C DO GT-1C GT-1C normal start 7 0
15 YZS610C DO GT-1C GT-1C black start 7 0
16 YZS611C DO GT-1C Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1C 7 0
17 YZS612C DO GT-1C Fuel gas selection GT-1C 7 1
18 YZS613C DO GT-1C Diesel Fuel selection GT-1C 7 1
19 YZS614C DO GT-1C Naphta Fuel selection GT-1C 7 1
20 YZS615C DO GT-1C Process Run Status - GT_1C 2
21 YZH400C DO GT-1C Open order Q400C 3
22 DO Spare 0
23 DO Spare 0
24 DO Spare 0
25 DO Spare 0
26 DO Spare 0
27 DO Spare 0
28 DO Spare 0
29 DO Spare 0
30 DO Spare 0
31 DO Spare 0
32 YA902C DO Watchdog - Fault system cab 01 - rack 04 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL111
Page/File : 11/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :4
Slot :6
Card Type : IC693ALG223

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 JI618C GT_C-JI618C AI GT-1C Generator Active Power GT-1C 7 0

2 JI619C GT_C-JI619C AI GT-1C Generator Reactive Power GT-1C 7 0
3 AI Spare 0
4 AI Spare 0
5 AI Spare 0
6 AI Spare 0
7 AI Spare 0
8 AI Spare 0
9 AI Spare 0
10 AI Spare 0
11 AI Spare 0
12 AI Spare 0
13 AI Spare 0
14 AI Spare 0
15 AI Spare 0
16 AI Spare 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL111
Page/File : 12/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :4
Slot :7
Card Type : IC693ALG392

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 YJ618C GT_C-YJ618C AO GT-1C Generator Active Power Set Point GT-1C 7 0

2 YJ619C GT_C-YJ619C AO GT-1C Generator Reactive Power Set Point GT-1C 7 0
3 YE620C GT_C-YE620C AO GT-1C Voltage 34,5 KV Set Point GT-1C 7 0
4 AO Spare 0
5 AO Spare 0
6 AO Spare 0
7 AO Spare 0
8 AO Spare 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL111
Page/File : 13/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :5
Slot :4
Card Type : IC693MDL655

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 XA1B01 SG_1B-XA1B01 DI SG-1B Availability of (F & V) 1B-01 4 0

2 ZSH1B04 SG_1B-ZSH1B04 DI SG-1B Open position Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 0
3 ZSL1B04 SG_1B-ZSL1B04 DI SG-1B Closed position Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 0
4 XA1B04 SG_1B-XA1B04 DI SG-1B Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 0
5 XAH1B04 SG_1B-XAH1B04 DI SG-1B General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 0
6 XHH1B04 SG_1B-XAHH1B04 DI SG-1B General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 1
7 EAH1B04 SG_1B-EAH1B04 DI SG-1B Critical Control Fault Circuit breaker 1B-04 1 0
8 ZLR1B04 SG_1B-ZLR1B04 DI SG-1B Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 0
9 ZSH400B GT_1B-ZSH400B DI GT-1B Open position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 3 0
10 ZSL400B GT_1B-ZSL400B DI GT-1B Closed position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 3 0
11 ZSA601B GT_1B-ZSA601B DI GT-1B Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1B 7 0
12 ZSA602B GT_1B-ZSA602B DI GT-1B Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1B 7 0
13 ZSA603B GT_1B-ZSA603B DI GT-1B Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1B 7 0
14 ZSA604B GT_1B-ZSA604B DI GT-1B Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1B 7 0
15 ZSA605B GT_1B-ZSA605B DI GT-1B GT-1B tripped 7 0
16 ZSA606B GT_1B-ZSA606B DI GT-1B GT-1B controlled by EMCS 7 1
17 ZSA607B GT_1B-ZSA607B DI GT-1B Permissive to close CB 34.5kV 7 0
18 XAH500B TR_1B-XAH500B DI TR-1B General Alarm Transfo TR-1B (1B-04) 5 0
19 XHH500B TR_1B-XAHH500B DI TR-1B General Trip Transfo TR-1B (1B-04) 5 0
20 ZSA615B GT_1B-ZSA615B DI GT_1B CB 13.8 kV tripping too long 3
21 DI Spare 0
22 DI Spare 0
23 DI Spare 0
24 DI Spare 0
25 DI Spare 0
26 DI Spare 0
27 DI Spare 0
28 DI Spare 0
29 DI Spare 0
30 DI Spare 0
31 DI Spare 0
32 XA0154 PLC-XA0154 DI PLC PLC Card default cabinet 01 - rack 5 - slot 4 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL111
Page/File : 14/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :5
Slot :5
Card Type : IC693MDL753

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 YZH1B04 DO SG-1B Open order Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 0

2 YZL1B04 DO SG-1B Close order Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 0
3 ZAH1B04 DO GT-1B Open position Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 0
4 ZAL1B04 DO GT-1B Close position Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 0
5 YR1B04 DO SG-1B Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 0
6 YZS601B DO GT-1B Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1B 7 0
7 YZS602B DO GT-1B Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1B 7 0
8 YZS603B DO GT-1B Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1B 7 0
9 YZS604B DO GT-1B Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1B 7 0
10 YZS608B DO GT-1B Permissive to switch GT-1B MCC to EDG supply 7 0
11 YZS609B DO GT-1B GT-1B normal start 7 0
12 YZS610B DO GT-1B GT-1B black start 7 0
13 YZS611B DO GT-1B Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1B 7 0
14 YZS612B DO GT-1B Fuel gas selection GT-1B 7 1
15 YZS613B DO GT-1B Diesel Fuel selection GT-1B 7 1
16 YZS614B DO GT-1B Naphta Fuel selection GT-1B 7 1
17 YZS615B DO GT-1B Process Run Status - GT_1B 2
18 YZH400B DO GT_1B Open order Q400B 3
19 DO Spare 0
20 DO Spare 0
21 DO Spare 0
22 DO Spare 0
23 DO Spare 0
24 DO Spare 0
25 DO Spare 0
26 DO Spare 0
27 DO Spare 0
28 DO Spare 0
29 DO Spare 0
30 DO Spare 0
31 DO Spare 0
32 YA902B DO Watchdog - Fault system cab 01 - rack 05 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL111
Page/File : 15/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :5
Slot :6
Card Type : IC693ALG223

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 JI618B GT_1B-JI618B AI GT-1B Generator Active Power GT-1B 7 0

2 JI619B GT_1B-JI619B AI GT-1B Generator Reactive Power GT-1B 7 0
3 EI1B01 SG_1B-EI1B01 AI SG-1B Voltage Indicator 1B01 4 0
4 FI1B01 SG_1B-FI1B01 AI SG-1B Frequency Indicator 1B01 4 0
5 AI Spare 0
6 AI Spare 0
7 AI Spare 0
8 AI Spare 0
9 AI Spare 0
10 AI Spare 0
11 AI Spare 0
12 AI Spare 0
13 AI Spare 0
14 AI Spare 0
15 AI Spare 0
16 AI Spare 0
SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 411
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL111
Page/File : 16/16
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-411
Rack :5
Slot :7
Card Type : IC693ALG392

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref:

1 YJ618B GT_1B-YJ618B AO GT-1B Generator Active Power Set Point GT-1B 7 0

2 YJ619B GT_1B-YJ619B AO GT-1B Generator Reactive Power Set Point GT-1B 7 0
3 YE620B GT_1B-YE620B AO GT-1B Voltage 34,5 KV Set Point GT-1B 7 0
4 AO Spare 0
5 AO Spare 0
6 AO Spare 0
7 AO Spare 0
8 AO Spare 0
 SINCOR INSDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS & SERVICES

Project Title: SINCOR, C. A. SINCOR Document N°: CA12-05-32-P-IX-412

UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT SINCOR Interface code : 2
SINCOR Document Class: 00
ALSTOM N° A565645 - AL112
Page/File : 1/CA120532PIX412
Rev./Date: X0/17/01/2001

SINCOR, C.A.
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
ALSTOM ENGINEERING
EMCS - 32-CS-412 - PLCs I/O LIST

REVISION INDEX

This document consist of the following number of pages:

REV. DATE: PAGES: REASON FOR ISSUE:

B0 23/06/1999 1 - 015 Issue for approval
0 30/09/1999 1 - 015 Issue as final
1 16/03/2000 Up Dated
2 13/07/2000 Updated (Buffer Tank & Load Shedding)
X0 17/01/2001 As built
X1 20/09/2002 Additional motors for load shedding

ALSTOM APPROVAL SINCOR APPROVAL

PREPARED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: PREPARED CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:

16/01/2001 16/01/2001 17/01/2001 / /19 / /19 / /19

 CELL02L
SINCOR

Pwr
P.S - IC693PWR330

1
CPU - IC693CPU351
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.

2
NetFIP-IC693BEM340

TAP

3
NetFIP-IC693BEM340

4
DI - IC693MDL646

5
Spare

Pwr
Pwr
Pwr
P.S - IC693PWR330 P.S - IC693PWR330 P.S - IC693PWR330 RACK 1

1
1
1
CPU - IC693CPU351 CPU - IC693CPU351 CPU - IC693CPU351

2
2
2
NetFIP-IC693BEM340 NetFIP-IC693BEM340 NetFIP-IC693BEM340
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT

3
3
3
DI - IC693MDL655 DI - IC693MDL655 DI - IC693MDL655

4
4
4
DI - IC693MDL655 DI - IC693MDL655 DI - IC693MDL655

5
5
5
DO - IC693MDL753 DO - IC693MDL753 DO - IC693MDL753

6
6
6
Spare Spare
AI - IC693ALG223

7
7
7
Spare Spare
F8000 - Redondant
S8000 - Redondant

AI - IC693ALG223

8
8
Spare Spare 8
PLCs CABINET N°2

Modbus-PCM301
CELL02R

9
9
9

Spare Spare Spare

EMCS - Alspa 8000 P320 System

Spare Spare Spare

10
10
10
Pwr

RACK 5
RACK 4
RACK 3

P.S - IC693PWR330
1
PLCs Configuration & Cards Assignment

CPU - IC693CPU351
2

NetFIP-IC693BEM340
TAP

AUX1

NetFIP-IC693BEM340

AUX3
AUX2
4

DI - IC693MDL646
5

Spare
RACK 2
Class : 00

Page/File: 2/15
N° : A565645-AL112
N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412

Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 3/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :1
Slot :4
Card Type : IC693MDL646

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 DI 1
2 XA0901A DI PLC Top Synchro - PLC Master 1
3 DI 0
4 DI 0
5 DI 0
6 DI 0
7 DI 0
8 DI 0
9 DI 0
10 DI 0
11 DI 0
12 DI 0
13 DI 0
14 DI 0
15 DI 0
16 DI 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 4/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :2
Slot :4
Card Type : IC693MDL646

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 DI 1
2 XA0901B DI PLC Top Synchro - PLC Slave 1
3 DI 0
4 DI 0
5 DI 0
6 DI 0
7 DI 0
8 DI 0
9 DI 0
10 DI 0
11 DI 0
12 DI 0
13 DI 0
14 DI 0
15 DI 0
16 DI 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 5/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :3
Slot :3
Card Type : IC693MDL655

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 ZLR1A09 SG_1A-ZLR1A09 DI SG-1A Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-09 6 0

2 ZSL1A09 SG_1A-ZSL1A09 DI SG-1A Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1A-09 6 0
3 XA1A09 SG_1A-XA1A09 DI SG-1A Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-09 6 0
4 XAH1A09 SG_1A-XAH1A09 DI SG-1A General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1A-09 6 0
5 XHH1A09 SG_1A-XAHH1A09 DI SG-1A General Trip Circuit Breaker 1A-09 6 0
6 EAH1A09 SG_1A-EAH1A09 DI SG-1A Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1A-09 6 0
7 XR1A09 SG_1A-XR1A09 DI SG-1A Recloser operating 1A-09 6 0
8 ZLR1A08 SG_1A-ZLR1A08 DI SG-1A Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-08 6 0
9 ZSL1A08 SG_1A-ZSL1A08 DI SG-1A Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1A-08 6 0
10 XA1A08 SG_1A-XA1A08 DI SG-1A Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-08 6 0
11 XAH1A08 SG_1A-XAH1A08 DI SG-1A General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1A-08 6 0
12 XHH1A08 SG_1A-XAHH1A08 DI SG-1A General Trip Circuit Breaker 1A-08 6 0
13 EAH1A08 SG_1A-EAH1A08 DI SG-1A Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1A-08 6 0
14 XR1A08 SG_1A-XR1A08 DI SG-1A Recloser operating 1A-08 6 0
15 XA361A EE_361-XA361A DI EE-361 Rectifier fault EE-361 8 0
16 XA361B EE_361-XA361B DI EE-361 DC low voltage EE-361 8 0
17 XA361C EE_361-XA361C DI EE-361 Earth Fault - 32-EE-361 8 0
18 XA361D EE_361-XA361D DI EE-361 Failure EE-361 8 0
19 XA605A LS_1-XA605A DI LS_1 GT_A tripped for load shedding 3
20 XA605B LS_1-XA605B DI LS_1 GT_B tripped for load shedding 3
21 XA605C LS_1-XA605C DI LS_1 GT_C tripped for load shedding 3
22 DI Spare 0
23 DI Spare 0
24 DI Spare 0
25 DI Spare 0
26 DI Spare 0
27 DI Spare 0
28 DI Spare 0
29 DI Spare 0
30 DI Spare 0
31 DI Spare 0
32 XA0233 PLC-XA0233 DI PLC PLC Card default cabinet 02 - rack 3 - slot 3 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 6/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :3
Slot :4
Card Type : IC693MDL655

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 ZLR1A07 SG_1A-ZLR1A07 DI SG-1A Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-07 6 0

2 ZSL1A07 SG_1A-ZSL1A07 DI SG-1A Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1A-07 6 0
3 XA1A07 SG_1A-XA1A07 DI SG-1A Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-07 6 0
4 XAH1A07 SG_1A-XAH1A07 DI SG-1A General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1A-07 6 0
5 XHH1A07 SG_1A-XAHH1A07 DI SG-1A General Trip Circuit Breaker 1A-07 6 0
6 EAH1A07 SG_1A-EAH1A07 DI SG-1A Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1A-07 6 0
7 ZSA0001 MOTOR-ZSA0001 DI MOTOR Motor N°1 status 17 1
8 ZSA0002 MOTOR-ZSA0002 DI MOTOR Motor N°2 status 17 1
9 ZSA0003 MOTOR-ZSA0003 DI MOTOR Motor N°3 status 17 1
10 ZSA0004 MOTOR-ZSA0004 DI MOTOR Motor N°4 status 17 1
11 XHH0001 MOTOR-XHH0001 DI MOTOR Neutral resistance current 32 EE 2A 16 1
12 XHH0002 MOTOR-XHH0002 DI MOTOR Neutral resistance current 32 EE 2B 16 1
13 ZSLEE3A EARTH-ZSLEE3A DI EARTH Earth switch 32 EE 3A close position 16 1
14 ZSLEE3C EARTH-ZSLEE3C DI EARTH Earth switch 32 EE 3C close position 16 1
15 ZSLEE4A EARTH-ZSLEE4A DI EARTH Earth switch 32 EE 4A close position 16 1
16 ZSLEE4C EARTH-ZSLEE4C DI EARTH Earth switch 32 EE 4C close position 16 1
17 ZSA0009 MOTOR-ZSA0009 DI MOTOR Motor N°9 status 17 X1
18 DI Spare 0
19 DI Spare 0
20 DI Spare 0
21 DI Spare 0
22 DI Spare 0
23 DI Spare 0
24 DI Spare 0
25 DI Spare 0
26 DI Spare 0
27 DI Spare 0
28 DI Spare 0
29 DI Spare 0
30 DI Spare 0
31 DI Spare 0
32 XA0234 PLC-XA0234 DI PLC PLC Card default cabinet 02 - rack 3 - slot 4 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 7/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :3
Slot :5
Card Type : IC693MDL753

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 YZH1A09 DO SG-1A Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-09 6 0

2 YZL1A09 DO SG-1A Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-09 6 0
3 YZH1A08 DO SG-1A Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-08 6 0
4 YZL1A08 DO SG-1A Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-08 6 0
5 YZH1A07 DO SG-1A Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-07 6 0
6 YZL1A07 DO SG-1A Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-07 6 0
7 YZS0001 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°1 17 1
8 YZS0002 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°2 17 1
9 YZS0003 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°3 17 1
10 YZS0004 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°4 17 1
11 YZS0009 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°9 17 X1
12 DO Spare 0
13 DO Spare 0
14 DO Spare 0
15 DO Spare 0
16 DO Spare 0
17 DO Spare 0
18 DO Spare 0
19 DO Spare 0
20 DO Spare 0
21 DO Spare 0
22 DO Spare 0
23 DO Spare 0
24 DO Spare 0
25 DO Spare 0
26 DO Spare 0
27 DO Spare 0
28 DO Spare 0
29 DO Spare 0
30 DO Spare 0
31 DO Spare 0
32 YA903 DO PLC Watchdog - Fault system cab 02 - rack 03 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 8/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :4
Slot :3
Card Type : IC693MDL655

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 ZLR1B06 SG_1B-ZLR1B06 DI SG-1B Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-06 6 0

2 ZSL1B06 SG_1B-ZSL1B06 DI SG-1B Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1B-06 6 0
3 XA1B06 SG_1B-XA1B06 DI SG-1B Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-06 6 0
4 XAH1B06 SG_1B-XAH1B06 DI SG-1B General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-06 6 0
5 XHH1B06 SG_1B-XAHH1B06 DI SG-1B General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-06 6 0
6 EAH1B06 SG_1B-EAH1B06 DI SG-1B Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1B-06 6 0
7 ZLR1B07 SG_1B-ZLR1B07 DI SG-1B Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-07 6 0
8 ZSL1B07 SG_1B-ZSL1B07 DI SG-1B Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1B-07 6 0
9 XA1B07 SG_1B-XA1B07 DI SG-1B Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-07 6 0
10 XAH1B07 SG_1B-XAH1B07 DI SG-1B General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-07 6 0
11 XHH1B07 SG_1B-XAHH1B07 DI SG-1B General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-07 6 0
12 EAH1B07 SG_1B-EAH1B07 DI SG-1B Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1B-07 6 0
13 XR1B07 SG_1B-XR1B07 DI SG-1B Recloser operating 1B-07 6 0
14 XA371A EE_371-XA371A DI EE-371 Failure Battery Charger#1 EE-371 9 0
15 XA371B EE_371-XA371B DI EE-371 Failure Battery Charger#2 EE-371 9 0
16 XA371C EE_371-XA371C DI EE-371 Battery Charger Earth Fault EE-371 9 0
17 XA371D EE_371-XA371D DI EE-371 Rectifier Failure EE-371 9 0
18 XA371E EE_371-XA371E DI EE-371 DC low voltage Alarm EE-371 9 0
19 XAH500 TR_2-XAH500 DI TR-2 General Alarm Transfo TR-2 - (2A-02) 5 0
20 XHH500 TR_2-XAHH500 DI TR-2 General Trip Transfo TR-2 - (2A-02) 5 1
21 XA605A LS_1-XA605A DI LS_1 GT_A tripped for load shedding 3
22 XA605B LS_1-XA605B DI LS_1 GT_B tripped for load shedding 3
23 XA605C LS_1-XA605C DI LS_1 GT_C tripped for load shedding 3
24 DI Spare 0
25 DI Spare 0
26 DI Spare 0
27 DI Spare 0
28 DI Spare 0
29 DI Spare 0
30 DI Spare 0
31 DI Spare 0
32 XA0243 PLC-XA0243 DI PLC PLC Card default cabinet 02 - rack 4 - slot 3 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 9/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :4
Slot :4
Card Type : IC693MDL655

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 ZLR1B08 SG_1B-ZLR1B08 DI SG-1B Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-08 6 0

2 ZSL1B08 SG_1B-ZSL1B08 DI SG-1B Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1B-08 6 0
3 XA1B08 SG_1B-XA1B08 DI SG-1B Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-08 6 0
4 XAH1B08 SG_1B-XAH1B08 DI SG-1B General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-08 6 0
5 XHH1B08 SG_1B-XAHH1B08 DI SG-1B General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-08 6 0
6 EAH1B08 SG_1B-EAH1B08 DI SG-1B Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1B-08 6 0
7 ZLR1B09 SG_1B-ZLR1B09 DI SG-1B Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-09 6 0
8 ZSL1B09 SG_1B-ZSL1B09 DI SG-1B Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1B-09 6 0
9 XA1B09 SG_1B-XA1B09 DI SG-1B Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-09 6 0
10 XAH1B09 SG_1B-XAH1B09 DI SG-1B General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-09 6 0
11 XHH1B09 SG_1B-XAHH1B09 DI SG-1B General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-09 6 0
12 EAH1B09 SG_1B-EAH1B09 DI SG-1B Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1B-09 6 0
13 XR1B09 SG_1A-XR1B09 DI SG-1B Recloser operating 1B-09 6 0
14 ZSA0005 MOTOR-ZSA0005 DI MOTOR Motor N°5 status 17 1
15 ZSA0006 MOTOR-ZSA0006 DI MOTOR Motor N°6 status 17 1
16 ZSA0007 MOTOR-ZSA0007 DI MOTOR Motor N°7 status 17 1
17 ZSA0008 MOTOR-ZSA0008 DI MOTOR Motor N°8 status 17 1
18 ZSL EE 3B EARTH-ZSLEE 3B DI EARTH Earth switch 32 EE 3B Closed position 16 1
19 ZSL EE 3D EARTH-ZSLEE 3D DI EARTH Earth switch 33 EE 3D Closed position 16 1
20 ZSL EE 4B EARTH-ZSLEE 4B DI EARTH Earth switch 34 EE 4B Closed position 16 1
21 ZSA0010 MOTOR-ZSA0010 DI MOTOR Motor N°10 status 17 X1
22 ZSA0011 MOTOR-ZSA0011 DI MOTOR Motor N°11 status (spare) 17 X1
23 DI Spare 0
24 DI Spare 0
25 DI Spare 0
26 DI Spare 0
27 DI Spare 0
28 DI Spare 0
29 DI Spare 0
30 DI Spare 0
31 DI Spare 0
32 XA0244 PLC-XA0244 DI PLC PLC Card default cabinet 02 - rack 4 - slot 4 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 10/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :4
Slot :5
Card Type : IC693MDL753

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 YZH1B06 DO SG-1B Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-06 6 0

2 YZL1B06 DO SG-1B Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-06 6 0
3 YZH1B07 DO SG-1B Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-07 6 0
4 YZL1B07 DO SG-1B Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-07 6 0
5 YZH1B08 DO SG-1B Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-08 6 0
6 YZL1B08 DO SG-1B Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-08 6 0
7 YZH1B09 DO SG-1B Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-09 6 0
8 YZL1B09 DO SG-1B Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-09 6 0
9 YZS0005 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°5 17 1
10 YZS0006 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°6 17 1
11 YZS0007 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°7 17 1
12 YZS0008 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°8 17 1
13 YZS0010 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°10 17 X1
14 YZS0011 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°11 (spare) 17 X1
15 DO Spare 0
16 DO Spare 0
17 DO Spare 0
18 DO Spare 0
19 DO Spare 0
20 DO Spare 0
21 DO Spare 0
22 DO Spare 0
23 DO Spare 0
24 DO Spare 0
25 DO Spare 0
26 DO Spare 0
27 DO Spare 0
28 DO Spare 0
29 DO Spare 0
30 DO Spare 0
31 DO Spare 0
32 YA904 DO PLC Watchdog - Fault system cab 02 - rack 04 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 11/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :5
Slot :3
Card Type : IC693MDL655

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 ZSL2A02 SG_2A-ZSL2A02 DI SG-2A Closed Position 2A-02 10 0

2 XA2A02 SG_2A-XA2A02 DI SG-2A Availability of Circuit Breaker 2A-02 10 0
3 EAL2A02 SG_2A-EAL2A02 DI SG-2A Under voltage 2A-02 10 0
4 ZSL2A01 SG_2A-ZSL2A01 DI SG-2A Closed Position 2A-01 11 0
5 XA2A01 SG_2A-XA2A01 DI SG-2A Availability of Circuit Breaker 2A-01 11 0
6 ZSL2B07 SG_2B-ZSL2B07 DI SG-2B Closed Position 2B-07 10 0
7 XA2B07 SG_2B-XA2B07 DI SG-2B Availability of Circuit Breaker 2B-07 10 0
8 EAL2B07 SG_2B-EAL2B07 DI SG-2B Under voltage Alarm 2B-07 10 0
9 ZSL2A04 SG_2A-ZSL2A04 DI SG-2A Closed Position 2A04 12 0
10 ZSL2A06 SG_2A-ZSL2A06 DI SG-2A Closed Position 2A06 12 0
11 XA2A00 SG_2A-XA2A00 DI SG-2A Common Fault breakers- BUS A 12 0
12 ZSL2B01 SG_2B-ZSL2B01 DI SG-2B Closed Position 2B01 12 0
13 ZSL2B02 SG_2B-ZSL2B02 DI SG-2B Closed Position 2B02 12 0
14 ZSL2B03 SG_2B-ZSL2B03 DI SG-2B Closed Position 2B03 13 0
15 ZSL2B04 SG_2B-ZSL2B04 DI SG-2B Closed Position 2B04 12 0
16 ZSL2B05 SG_2B-ZSL2B05 DI SG-2B Closed Position 2B05 12 0
17 ZSL2B06 SG_2B-ZSL2B06 DI SG-2B Closed Position 2B06 12 0
18 DI Spare 0
19 DI Spare 0
20 DI Spare 0
21 DI Spare 0
22 DI Spare 0
23 DI Spare 0
24 DI Spare 0
25 DI Spare 0
26 DI Spare 0
27 DI Spare 0
28 DI Spare 0
29 DI Spare 0
30 DI Spare 0
31 DI Spare 0
32 XA0253 PLC-XA0253 DI PLC PLC Card default cabinet 02 - rack 5 - slot 3 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 12/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :5
Slot :4
Card Type : IC693MDL655

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 XA331 BP_331-XA331 DI BP-331 Common Fault BP-331 13 0

2 XA332 BP_332-XA332 DI BP-332 Common Fault BP-332 13 0
3 XA351 DP_351-XA351 DI DP-351 Common Fault DP-351 13 0
4 XA321 AP_321-XA321 DI AP-321 Fault HVAC AP-321 14 0
5 XA322 AP_322-XA322 DI AP-322 Fault HVAC AP-322 14 0
6 XAH373A EE_373-XAH373A DI EE-373 Fire detection panel fault 14 1
7 XAH373B EE_373-XAH373B DI EE-373 Prealarm smoke detection area #1 deleted 14 1
8 XAH373C EE_373-XAH373C DI EE-373 Fire detection alarm 14 1
9 XAH373D EE_373-XAH373D DI EE-373 Gas detection prealarm 14 1
10 XAH373E EE_373-XAH373E DI EE-373 Gas detection alarm 14 1
11 ZSL201 D_4103-ZSL201 DI D-4103 SDV201 closed position - diesel Tank 1
12 ZSH201 D_4103-ZSH201 DI D-4103 SDV201 Open position - diesel Tank 1
13 XAH001 D_4103-XAH001 DI D-4103 Fire detection alarm - diesel Tank 1
14 LAHH201 D_4103-LAHH201 DI D-4103 Level high high - diesel Tank 1
15 ZLR201 D_4103-ZLR201 DI D-4103 SDV201 remote mode - diesel Tank 1
16 XA201 D_4103-XA201 DI D-4103 SDV201 alarm - diesel Tank 1
17 DI Spare 0
18 DI Spare 0
19 DI Spare 0
20 DI Spare 0
21 DI Spare 0
22 DI Spare 0
23 DI Spare 0
24 DI Spare 0
25 DI Spare 0
26 DI Spare 0
27 DI Spare 0
28 DI Spare 0
29 DI Spare 0
30 DI Spare 0
31 DI Spare 0
32 XA0254 PLC-XA0254 DI PLC PLC Card default cabinet 02 - rack 5 - slot 4 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 13/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :5
Slot :5
Card Type : IC693MDL753

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 YZH2A02 DO SG-2A Open Order Incoming 2A-02 10 0

2 YZL2A02 DO SG-2A Close Order Incoming 2A-02 10 0
3 YZH2A01 DO SG-2A Open Order Bus Coupling 2A-01 11 0
4 YZL2A01 DO SG-2A Close Order Bus Coupling 2A-01 11 0
5 YZH2B07 DO SG-2B Open Order Incoming diesel 2B-07 10 0
6 YZL2B07 DO SG-2B Close Order Incoming diesel 2B-07 10 0
7 YZH201 DO D-4103 Open Order SDV - Diesel tank 1
8 YZL201 DO D-4103 Close Order SDV - Diesel tank 1
9 YMCBLOW DO LOW-V CB SEQUANCE IN MANUAL 0
10 YLVDIES DO SWITCH LOW-V TO DIESEL 0
11 DO Spare 0
12 DO Spare 0
13 DO Spare 0
14 DO Spare 0
15 DO Spare 0
16 DO Spare 0
17 DO Spare 0
18 DO Spare 0
19 DO Spare 0
20 DO Spare 0
21 DO Spare 0
22 DO Spare 0
23 DO Spare 0
24 DO Spare 0
25 DO Spare 0
26 DO Spare 0
27 DO Spare 0
28 DO Spare 0
29 DO Spare 0
30 DO Spare 0
31 DO Spare 0
32 YA905 DO PLC Watchdog - Fault system cab 02 - rack 05 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 14/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :5
Slot :6
Card Type : IC693ALG223

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 EI2A01B SG_2A-EI2B01B AI SG-2A Voltage measurement 2A-01B 15 1

2 II2B07 SG_2B-II2B07 AI SG-2B Current measurement 2B-07 15 0
3 XI1B06 SG_1B-XI1B06 AI SG-1B Power factor measurement 1B-06 6 0
4 II1B06 SG_1B-II1B06 AI SG-1B Current measurement 1B-06 6 0
5 XI1B07 SG_1B-XI1B07 AI SG-1B Power factor measurement 1B-07 6 0
6 II1B07 SG_1B-II1B07 AI SG-1B Current measurement 1B-07 6 0
7 XI1B08 SG_1B-XI1B08 AI SG-1B Power factor measurement 1B-08 6 0
8 II1B08 SG_1B-II1B08 AI SG-1B Current measurement 1B-08 6 0
9 XI1B09 SG_1B-XI1B09 AI SG-1B Power factor measurement 1B-09 6 0
10 II1B09 SG_1B-II1B09 AI SG-1B Current measurement 1B-09 6 0
11 AI Spare 0
12 AI Spare 0
13 AI Spare 0
14 AI Spare 0
15 AI Spare 0
16 AI Spare 0
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P IX 412
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AL112
Page/File: 15/15
Rev/Date: X0 / 21/09/2002

Cabinet : 32-CS-412
Rack :5
Slot :7
Card Type : IC693ALG223

Pt Tag Name Tag Name Address I/O Main Description Typical State Rev
PLC Centralog Type Equipment Ref :

1 EI2A01A SG_2A-EI2A01A AI SG-2A Voltage measurement 2A-01A 15 1

2 II2A02 SG_2A-II2A02 AI SG-2A Current measurement 2A-02 15 0
3 XI1A07 SG_1A-XI1A07 AI SG-1A Power factor measurement 1A-07 6 0
4 II1A07 SG_1A-II1A07 AI SG-1A Current measurement 1A-07 6 0
5 XI1A08 SG_1A-XI1A08 AI SG-1A Power factor measurement 1A-08 6 0
6 II1A08 SG_1A-II1A08 AI SG-1A Current measurement 1A-08 6 0
7 XI1A09 SG_1A-XI1A09 AI SG-1A Power factor measurement 1A-09 6 0
8 II1A09 SG_1A-II1A09 AI SG-1A Current measurement 1A-09 6 0
9 LI001 AI T-001 Diesel Tank level 1
10 AI Spare 0
11 AI Spare 0
12 AI Spare 0
13 AI Spare 0
14 AI Spare 0
15 AI Spare 0
16 AI Spare 0
 SINCOR GT_A 1/4
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT

Tagname Tag Name I/O Description HDSR State Unit Tag Adresse
P8 Centralog Type AGT AGT
DV GT_1A-DV SL AI GENERATOR VOLTS 1 1 kV DV HR 0001
SFL1 GT_1A-SFL1 SL AI TCEA LINE FREQUENCY 1 1 Hz SFL1 HR 0002
LKSPIN GT_1A-LKSPIN SL AI LOAD CONTROL SPINNING RESERVE LEVEL 1 1 MW LK90SPIN HR 0003
DWATRES GT_1A-DWATRES SL AI RESERVE GENERATOR POWER 1 1 MW DWATTRES HR 0004
L3 GT_1A-L3 SL DI TURBINE COMPLETE SEQUENCE 1 1 L3 HR 0200.00
L30DACN GT_1A-L30DACN SL DI ACCELARATING 1 1 L30D_ACN HR 0200.01
L30DB GT_1A-L30DB SL DI BASE LOAD 1 1 L30D_B HR 0200.02
L30DCD GT_1A-L30DCD SL DI ON COOLDOWN 1 1 L30D_CD HR 0200.03
L30DCDC GT_1A-L30DCDC SL DI OFF COOLDOWN 1 1 L30D_CDC HR 0200.04
L30DCOA GT_1A-L30DCOA SL DI COASTING DOWN 1 1 L30D_COA HR 0200.05
L30DCRN GT_1A-L30DCRN SL DI CRANKING 1 1 L30D_CRN HR 0200.06
L30DFLD GT_1A-L30DFLD SL DI FAST LOADING 1 1 L30D_FLD HR 0200.07
L30DFSD GT_1A-L30DFSD SL DI FIRED SHUTDOWN 1 1 L30D_FSD HR 0200.08
L30DFSN GT_1A-L30DFSN SL DI FULL SPEED NO LOAD 1 1 L30D_FSN HR 0200.09
L30DLD GT_1A-L30DLD SL DI LOADING 1 1 L30D_LD HR 0200.10
L30DP GT_1A-L30DP SL DI PEAK LOAD 1 1 L30D_P HR 0200.11
L30DPLD GT_1A-L30DPLD SL DI PART LOAD 1 1 L30D_PLD HR 0200.12
L30DPS GT_1A-L30DPS SL DI PRESELECTED LOAD 1 1 L30D_PS HR 0200.13
L30DRS GT_1A-L30DRS SL DI READY TO START 1 1 L30D_RS HR 0200.14
L30DRSZ GT_1A-L30DRSZ SL DI NOT READY TO START 1 1 L30D_RSZ HR 0200.15
L30DRUN GT_1A-L30DRUN SL DI RUN STATUS 1 1 L30D_RUN HR 0201.00
L30DSD GT_1A-L30DSD SL DI SHUTDOWN STATUS 1 1 L30D_SD HR 0201.01
L30DSPN GT_1A-L30DSPN SL DI SPINNING RESERVE 1 1 L30D_SPN HR 0201.02
L30DSTG GT_1A-L30DSTG SL DI STARTING 1 1 L30D_STG HR 0201.03
L30DSTP GT_1A-L30DSTP SL DI STOP SELECT 1 1 L30D_STP HR 0201.04
L30DSTR GT_1A-L30DSTR SL DI START SELECT 1 1 L30D_STR HR 0201.05
L30DSU GT_1A-L30DSU SL DI START UP STATUS 1 1 L30D_SU HR 0201.06
L30DSYN GT_1A-L30DSYN SL DI SYNCHRONIZING 1 1 L30D_SYN HR 0201.07
L30DULD GT_1A-L30DULD SL DI UNLOADING 1 1 L30D_ULD HR 0201.08
L30DVM GT_1A-L30DVM SL DI VOLTAGE MATCHING 1 1 L30D_VM HR 0201.09
SL DI SPARE HR 0201.10
SL DI SPARE HR 0201.11
SL DI SPARE HR 0201.12
SL DI SPARE HR 0201.13
SL DI SPARE HR 0201.14
SL DI SPARE HR 0201.15
L43FG GT_1A-L43FG SL DI GAS FUEL SELECTED 1 1 L43FG HR 0202.00
L43FL GT_1A-L43FL SL DI LIQUID FUEL SELECTED 1 1 L43FL HR 0202.01
L43FNAP GT_1A-L43FNAP SL DI NAPHTA FUEL SELECTED 1 1 L43FNAP HR 0202.02
L4HSD1 GT_1A-L4HSD1 SL DI DIESEL MOTOR PUMP - RUNNING STATUS TO P320 1 1 L4HSD1 HR 0202.03
L63HSDL GT_1A-L63HSDL SL DI HSD FUEL PRESSURE LOW 1 1 L63HSDL HR 0202.04
L4NAP1 GT_1A-L4NAP1 SL DI MASTER CONTROL RELAY - START NAPHTA PUMP 1 1 L4NAP1 HR 0202.05
L63NAPL GT_1A-L63NAPL SL DI NAPHTA FUEL PRESSURE LOW 1 1 L63NAPL HR 0202.06
L4HSD GT_1A-L4HSD SL DI MASTER CONTROL RELAY - 3WAY VALVE ON HSD 1 1 L4HSD HR 0202.07
L4NAP GT_1A-L4NAP SL DI MASTER CONTROL RELAY - 3WAY VALVE ON NAPHTA 1 1 L4NAP HR 0202.08
L33HSD GT_1A-L33HSD SL DI 3WAY VALVE HSD POSITION 1 1 L33HSD HR 0202.09
L33NAP GT_1A-L33NAP SL DI 3WAY VALVE NAPHTA POSITION 1 1 L33NAP HR 0202.10
L4FA GT_1A-L4FA SL DI MASTER CONTROL - START ADDITIVE PUMP 1 1 L4FA HR 0202.11
L86FA GT_1A-L86FA SL DI ADDITIVE DOSING SKID TROUBLE 1 1 L86FA HR 0202.12
L71FAL GT_1A-L71FAL SL DI ADDITIVE STORRAGE TANK LEVEL LOW 1 1 L71FAL HR 0202.13
L71FALL GT_1A-L71FALL SL DI ADDITIVE STORRAGE TANK LEVEL LOW LOW 1 1 L71FALL HR 0202.14
L30FA GT_1A-L30FA SL DI DOSING PUMP (88FA) TROUBLE - CHANGED OVER 1 1 L30FA HR 0202.15
L4NT GT_1A-L4NT SL DI TRIP ON NAPHTA:PURGE LINE WHEN STOP 1 1 L4NT HR 0203.00
L30ND GT_1A-L30ND SL DI 3WAY MOTOR VALVE (88ND) MOTOR TROUBLE 1 1 L30ND HR 0203.01
L63FD1L GT_1A-L63FD1L SL DI LIQUID FUEL PRESSURE SWITCH 1 1 L63FD1L HR 0203.02
L20FDX GT_1A-L20FDX SL DI INLET TO OFF-BASE LIQUID FUEL OIL SAFETY SD SV(20FD) 1 1 L20FDX HR 0203.03
L33FDO GT_1A-L33FDO SL DI LIQUID FUEL EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN VALVE - OPEN 1 1 L33FDO HR 0203.04
L33FDC GT_1A-L33FDC SL DI LIQUID FUEL EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN VALVE - CLOSED 1 1 L33FDC HR 0203.05
L52AC1A GT_1A-L52AC1 SL DI INCOMING Q501 IN SERVICE 1 1 L52AC1 HR 0203.06
L52AC2A GT_1A-L52AC2 SL DI INCOMING Q502 IN SERVICE 1 1 L52AC2 HR 0203.07
L52GX GT_1A-L52GX SL DI GENERATOR BREAKER CLOSED 1 1 L52GX HR 0203.08
XA400A GT_1A-XA400A SL DI GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER AVAILABLY L52GPLUG HR 0203.09
SL DI SPARE HR 0203.10
SL DI SPARE HR 0203.11
SL DI SPARE HR 0203.12
SL DI SPARE HR 0203.13
SL DI SPARE HR 0203.14
SL DI SPARE HR 0203.15
L5E GT_1A-L5E SL DI MANUAL TRIP - LOCAL 1 1 L5E_ALM HR 0204.00
L12H GT_1A-L12H SL DI ELECTRICAL OVERSPEED TRIP HP 1 1 L12H HR 0204.01
L12HP GT_1A-L12HP SL DI PROTECTIVE MODULE OVERSPEED TRIP HP 1 1 L12H_P_ALM HR 0204.02
L12HAC GT_1A-L12HAC SL DI PROTECTIVE MODULE ACCELERERATION TRIP HP 1 1 L12H_ACC_ALM HR 0204.03
L3A GT_1A-L3A SL DI TURBINE UNDERSPEED 1 1 L3A HR 0204.04
L28FDT GT_1A-L28FDT SL DI LOSS OF FLAME TRIP 1 1 L28FDT HR 0204.05
L63TF1H GT_1A-L63TF1H SL DI TURBINE AIR INLET DIFF PRESSURE ALARM 1 1 L63TF1H_ALM HR 0204.06
L63TFH GT_1A-L63TFH SL DI TURBINE AIR INLET DIFF PRESSURE SHUTDOWN 1 1 L63TFH_ALM HR 0204.07
L63QQ1H GT_1A-L63QQ1H SL DI MAIN LUBE OIL FILTER DIFF PRESSURE HIGH 1 1 L63QQ1H_ALM HR 0204.08
 SINCOR GT_A 2/4
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT

Tagname Tag Name I/O Description HDSR State Unit Tag Adresse
P8 Centralog Type AGT AGT
L63QTX GT_1A-L63QTX SL DI LOW LUBE OIL PRESSURE TRIP 1 1 L63QTX HR 0204.09
L63QAL GT_1A-L63QAL SL DI LUBE OIL PRESSURE LOW 1 1 L63QAL_ALM HR 0204.10
L26QA GT_1A-L26QA SL DI LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE HIGH 1 1 L26QA_ALM HR 0204.11
L26QT GT_1A-L26QT SL DI LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE HIGH TRIP 1 1 L26QT_ALM HR 0204.12
L63HQ1L GT_1A-L63HQ1L SL DI HYDRAULIC SUPPLY PRESSURE LOW 1 1 L63HQ1L_ALM HR 0204.13
L63HF1H GT_1A-L63HF1H SL DI HYDRAULIC FILTER DIFF PRESSURE HIGH 1 1 L63HF1H_ALM HR 0204.14
L86HD GT_1A-L86HD SL DI HYDRAULIC PROTECTIVE TROUBLE 1 1 L86HD HR 0204.15
L63HLL GT_1A-L63HLL SL DI LIQUID FUEL HYDRAULIC TRIP PRESSURE LOW 1 1 L63HLL_ALM HR 0205.00
L63HGL GT_1A-L63HGL SL DI GAS FUEL HYDRAULIC TRIP PRESSURE LOW 1 1 L63HGL_ALM HR 0205.01
L4IGVT GT_1A-L4IGVT SL DI INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL TROUBLE TRIP 1 1 L4IGVT HR 0205.02
L86GVA GT_1A-L86GVA SL DI INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL TROUBLE ALARM 1 1 L86GVA HR 0205.03
L30TXA GT_1A-L30TXA SL DI EXAUST TEMPERTURE HIGH 1 1 L30TXA HR 0205.04
L86TXT GT_1A-L86TXT SL DI EXAUST OVERTEMPERTURE TRIP 1 1 L86TXT HR 0205.05
L86TFB GT_1A-L86TFB SL DI EXAUST TERMOCOUPLES OPEN TRIP 1 1 L86TFB HR 0205.06
L30SPA GT_1A-L30SPA SL DI COMBUSTION TROUBLE 1 1 L30SPA HR 0205.07
L30SPT GT_1A-L30SPT SL DI HIGH EXHAUST TEMPERATURE SPREAD TRIP 1 1 L30SPT HR 0205.08
L39VTX GT_1A-L39VTX SL DI HIGH VIBRATION TRIP OR SHUTDOWN 1 1 L39VTX_ALM HR 0205.09
L39VA GT_1A-L39VA SL DI HIGH VIBRATION ALARM 1 1 L39VA HR 0205.10
L63FGL GT_1A-L63FGL SL DI GAS FUEL PRESSURE LOW 1 1 L63FGL_ALM HR 0205.11
L63ADL GT_1A-L63ADL SL DI ATOMIZING AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE LOW 1 1 L63ADL_ALM HR 0205.12
L49GH GT_1A-L49GH SL DI GENERATOR STATOR TEMPERATURE HIGH 1 1 L49GH_ALM HR 0205.13
L86TGT GT_1A-L86TGT SL DI GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL TRIP 1 1 L86TGT_ALM HR 0205.14
L52G GT_1A-L52G SL DI GENERATOR BREAKER TRIPPED 1 1 L52G_ALM HR 0205.15
L30WSA1 GT_1A-L30WSA1 SL DI WHEELSPACE TEMP DIFFERENCIAL HIGH 1 1 L30WSA1 HR 0206.00
L30WSA2 GT_1A-L30WSA2 SL DI WHEELSPACE TEMPERATURE HIGH 1 1 L30WSA2 HR 0206.01
L27BLN_A GT_1A-L27BLN_A SL DI BATTERY CHARGER AC UNDERVOLTAGE 1 1 L27BLN_ALM HR 0206.02
L63QQ2H GT_1A-L63QQ2H SL DI TRIP OIL FILTER DIFF PRESSURE HIGH 1 1 L63QQ2H_ALM HR 0206.03
L12HF GT_1A-L12HF SL DI CONTROL SPEED SIGNAL LOSS HP 1 1 L12HF HR 0206.04
L32DW GT_1A-L32DW SL DI GENERATOR BREAKER TRIP-REVERSE POWER 1 1 L32DW_ALM HR 0206.05
L30SPT5 GT_1A-L30SPT5 SL DI EXCESSIVE COMBUSTION TROUBLE 1 1 L30SPT5 HR 0206.06
L12HFLT GT_1A-L12HFLT SL DI LOSS OF PROTECTIVE HP SPEED INPUTS 1 1 L12H_FLTALM HR 0206.07
L3MP GT_1A-L3MP SL DI MASTER PROTECTIVE START CHECK ETR FAULT 1 1 L3MP_ALM HR 0206.08
L4FB GT_1A-L4FB SL DI TCEA 4 RELAY CIRCUIT FDBK (EXTRNL TRIP) 1 1 L4_FB_ALM HR 0206.09
L27X GT_1A-L27X SL DI GENERATOR PROTECTION UNDERVOLTAGE 1 1 L27X_ALM HR 0206.10
L63QV GT_1A-L63QV SL DI OIL DEMISTER FILTER DIFF PRESS HIGH 1 1 L63QV_ALM HR 0206.11
L30LOT GT_1A-L30LOT SL DI LUBE OIL TEMP HIGH TRIP 1 1 L30LOT_ALM HR 0206.12
L30BTT GT_1A-L30BTT SL DI BEARING METAL TEMP HIGH TRIP 1 1 L30BTT_ALM HR 0206.13
L86CBT GT_1A-L86CBT SL DI COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE POS TROUBLE TRIP 1 1 L86CBT_ALM HR 0206.14
L30LOA GT_1A-L30LOA SL DI BEARING DRAIN TEMPERATURE HIGH 1 1 L30LOA HR 0206.15
L30BTA GT_1A-L30BTA SL DI BEARING METAL TEMPERATURE HIGH 1 1 L30BTA HR 0207.00
L26AAH GT_1A-L26AAH SL DI ATOMIZING AIR TEMPERATURE HIGH 1 1 L26AAH_ALM HR 0207.01
L5E4 GT_1A-L5E4 SL DI EMERGENCY TRIP PB/GENERATOR COMPARTMENT 1 1 L5E4_ALM HR 0207.02
L5E5 GT_1A-L5E5 SL DI EMERGENCY TRIP PB/SWITCH GEAR BUILDING 1 1 L5E5_ALM HR 0207.03
L5E6 GT_1A-L5E6 SL DI EMERGENCY TRIP PB/CUSTOMER 1 1 L5E6_ALM HR 0207.04
L4BTT GT_1A-L4BTT SL DI TURB SHUTDOWN - NO 88BT FAN RUNNING 1 1 L4BTT_ALM HR 0207.05
L4FP_A GT_1A-L4FP_A SL DI PRE FIRE - ALARM 1 1 L4FP_ALM HR 0207.06
L4FT_A GT_1A-L4FT_A SL DI FIRE GT TRIP 1 1 L4FT_ALM HR 0207.07
L45HL_A GT_1A-L45HL_A SL DI DETECTION LEVEL 1.STAGE (20%) 1 1 L45HL_ALM HR 0207.08
L45HH GT_1A-L45HH SL DI DETECTION LEVEL 2.STAGE (50%) 1 1 L45HH_ALM HR 0207.09
L94EMCS GT_1A-L94EMCS SL DI GTG NORMAL STOP FROM EMCS 1 1 L94EMCS_ALM HR 0207.10
L4NT1 GT_1A-L4NT1 SL DI TRIP ON NAPHTA: PURGE LINE WHEN STOP 1 1 L4NT HR 0207.11
L86N GT_1A-L86N SL DI GEN. ELECTRICAL TROUBLE GT NORMAL STOP 1 1 L86N_ALM HR 0207.12
L30ALM GT_1A-L30ALM SL DI TCEA AUDIBLE ALARM DRIVER SIGNAL 1 1 L30ALM HR 0207.13
L4VLT GT_1A-L4VLT SL DI TURB SHUTDOWN - NO 88VL FAN RUNNING 1 1 L4VLT_ALM HR 0207.14
L12HFD_C GT_1A-L12HFD_C SL DI ALMTXT:'CONTROL SPEED SIGNAL TROUBLE - HP' 1 1 L12HFD_C HR 0207.15
L12HFD_P GT_1A-L12HFD_P SL DI ALMTXT:'PROTECTIVE SPEED SIGNAL TROUBLE - HP' 1 1 L12HFD_P HR 0208.00
L2SFT GT_1A-L2SFT SL DI ALMTXT:'STARTUP FUEL FLOW EXCESSIVE TRIP' 1 1 L2SFT HR 0208.01
L3LFLT GT_1A-L3LFLT SL DI ALMTXT:'LIQUID FUEL CONTROL FAULT' 1 1 L3LFLT HR 0208.02
L3SFLT GT_1A-L3SFLT SL DI ALMTXT:'START-UP SHUTDOWN <C> COMM FAILURE-TRIP' 1 1 L3SFLT_ALM HR 0208.03
L5E7 GT_1A-L5E7 SL DI EMERGENCY TRIP PB/ENCLOSURE 1 1 L5E7_ALM HR 0208.04
L86MP GT_1A-L86MP SL DI MASTER PROTECTIVE STARTUP LOCKOUT 1 1 L86MP HR 0208.05
L28FD GT_1A-L28FD SL DI FLAME DETECTOR TROUBLE 1 1 L28FD_ALM HR 0208.06
L3TFLT GT_1A-L3TFLT SL DI LOSS OF COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESS BIAS 1 1 L3TFLT HR 0208.07
L3IGVFLT GT_1A-L3IGVFLT SL DI INLET GUIDE VANE POSITION SERVO TROUBLE 1 1 L3IGVFLT HR 0208.08
L86TCI GT_1A-L86TCI SL DI COMPRESSOR INLET THERMOCOUPLES DISAGREE 1 1 L86TCI HR 0208.09
L86CB1 GT_1A-L86CB1 SL DI COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE POSITION TROUBLE 1 1 L86CB1 HR 0208.10
L39VD3_A GT_1A-L39VD3_A SL DI VIBRATION START INHIBIT 1 1 L39VD3_ALM HR 0208.11
L27BN GT_1A-L27BN SL DI BUS UNDERVOLTAGE - NO AUTO SYNCH 1 1 L27BN_ALM HR 0208.12
L27MC1NA GT_1A-L27MC1NA SL DI MCC UNDERVOLTAGE 1 1 L27MC1N_ALM HR 0208.13
L27QEL_A GT_1A-L27QEL_A SL DI DC MOTOR UNDERVOLTAGE (LUBE OIL) 1 1 L27QEL_ALM HR 0208.14
L30DE GT_1A-L30DE SL DI DIESEL CONTROLLER ENGINE TROUBLE 1 1 L30DE_ALM HR 0208.15
L33CPX1A GT_1A-L33CPX1A SL DI CO2 FIRE DAMPER ACCESSORY COMP.TROUBLE 1 1 L33CPX1_ALM HR 0209.00
L33CPX2 GT_1A-L33CPX2 SL DI CO2 FIRE DAMPER TURBINE COMP.TROUBLE 1 1 L33CPX2_ALM HR 0209.01
L33CPX4 GT_1A-L33CPX4 SL DI CO2 FIRE DAMPER GEARBOX COMP.TROUBLE 1 1 L33CPX4_ALM HR 0209.02
L33CPX7 GT_1A-L33CPX7 SL DI CO2 FIRE DAMPER GENERATOR COMP.TROUBLE 1 1 L33CPX7_ALM HR 0209.03
L33CPX9A GT_1A-L33CPX9A SL DI CO2 FIRE DAMPER EXCITER COMP.TROUBLE 1 1 L33CPX9_ALM HR 0209.04
L45CP_A GT_1A-L45CP_A SL DI PRES.SWITCH INITIAL/EXTEN.DISCHARGE LINE 1 1 L45CP_ALM HR 0209.05
 SINCOR GT_A 3/4
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT

Tagname Tag Name I/O Description HDSR State Unit Tag Adresse
P8 Centralog Type AGT AGT
L45CC_A GT_1A-L45CC_A SL DI CO2 BOTTLES WEIGHT LOW 1 1 L45CC_ALM HR 0209.06
L33CC_A GT_1A-L33CC_A SL DI CO2 SYSTEM BLOCKED 1 1 L33CC_ALM HR 0209.07
L3FF_A GT_1A-L3FF_A SL DI FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM FAILURE 1 1 L3FF_ALM HR 0209.08
L30BL1 GT_1A-L30BL1 SL DI BATTERY CHARGER #1 TROUBLE 1 1 L30BL1_ALM HR 0209.09
L30BL2 GT_1A-L30BL2 SL DI BATTERY CHARGER #2 TROUBLE 1 1 L30BL2_ALM HR 0209.10
L30TF_A GT_1A-L30TF_A SL DI TURBINE AIR INLET TROUBLE 1 1 L30TF_ALM HR 0209.11
L30QA_A GT_1A-L30QA_A SL DI AUXILIARY LUBE OIL PUMP (88QA) TROUBLE 1 1 L30QA_ALM HR 0209.12
L30HRX GT_1A-L30HRX SL DI HYDRAULIC RATCHET PUMP MOTOR TROUBLE 1 1 L30HRX_ALM HR 0209.13
L52WX_A GT_1A-L52WX_A SL DI SPARK PLUGS SUPPLY TROUBLE 1 1 L52WX_ALM HR 0209.14
L30QV GT_1A-L30QV SL DI OIL DEMISTER FAN TROUBLE 1 1 L30QV_ALM HR 0209.15
L71KO GT_1A-L71KO SL DI K.O.POT HIGH LEVEL SWITSH OVER TO GAS 1 1 L71KO_ALM HR 0210.00
L26FGDH GT_1A-L26FGDH SL DI FUELGAS TEMP.30K NOT REACH.CHANGE TO LIQ 1 1 L26FGDH_ALM HR 0210.01
L30WC1_A GT_1A-L30WC1_A SL DI ALMTXT:'COOLING WATER PUMP #1 FAULT' 1 1 L30WC1_ALM HR 0210.02
L30WC2_A GT_1A-L30WC2_A SL DI ALMTXT:'COOLING WATER PUMP #2 FAULT' 1 1 L30WC2_ALM HR 0210.03
L30BT1X GT_1A-L30BT1X SL DI TURBINE COMPT COOLING FAN #1 TROUBLE 1 1 L30BT1X_ALM HR 0210.04
L30BT2X GT_1A-L30BT2X SL DI TURBINE COMPT COOLING FAN #2 TROUBLE 1 1 L30BT2X_ALM HR 0210.05
L30VL1X GT_1A-L30VL1X SL DI GAS COMPT COOLING FAN #1 TROUBLE 1 1 L30VL1X_ALM HR 0210.06
L30VL2X GT_1A-L30VL2X SL DI GAS COMPT COOLING FAN #2 TROUBLE 1 1 L30VL2X_ALM HR 0210.07
L63FLZ GT_1A-L63FLZ SL DI ALMTXT:'LIQUID FUEL PRESSURE LOW' 1 1 L63FLZ_ALM HR 0210.08
L30FGH1 GT_1A-L30FGH1 SL DI FUEL GAS HEATER GROUP #1 TROUBLE 1 1 L30FGH1_ALM HR 0210.09
L30FGH2 GT_1A-L30FGH2 SL DI FUEL GAS HEATER GROUP #2 TROUBLE 1 1 L30FGH2_ALM HR 0210.10
L30FGH3 GT_1A-L30FGH3 SL DI FUEL GAS HEATER GROUP #3 TROUBLE 1 1 L30FGH3_ALM HR 0210.11
L33FG12O GT_1A-L33FG12O SL DI FUEL GAS SSD VALVE 20FG12 NOT OPEN 1 1 L33FG12O_ALM HR 0210.12
L33FG12C GT_1A-L33FG12C SL DI FUEL GAS SSD VALVE 20FG12 NOT CLOSED 1 1 L33FG12C_ALM HR 0210.13
L33FG11O GT_1A-L33FG11O SL DI FUEL GAS SSD VALVE 20FG11 NOT OPEN 1 1 L33FG11O_ALM HR 0210.14
L33FG11C GT_1A-L33FG11C SL DI FUEL GAS SSD VALVE 20FG11 NOT CLOSED 1 1 L33FG11C_ALM HR 0210.15
L33PLO GT_1A-L33PLO SL DI ALMTXT:'LIQUID DRAIN VLV NOT OPEN PURGE INH' 1 1 L33PLO_ALM HR 0211.00
L33PLC GT_1A-L33PLC SL DI ALMTXT:'LIQUID DRAIN VLV NOT CLOSED START INH' 1 1 L33PLC_ALM HR 0211.01
L33FDO GT_1A-L33FDO SL DI LIQUID FUEL VALVE ESD VALVE NOT OPEN 1 1 L33FDO_ALM HR 0211.02
L33FDC GT_1A-L33FDC SL DI LIQUID FUEL VALVE ESD VALVE NOT CLOSED 1 1 L33FDC_ALM HR 0211.03
L63FD1 GT_1A-L63FD1 SL DI LIQUID FUEL PRESSURE LOW (L20FD1) 1 1 L63FD1_ALM HR 0211.04
L3FGM GT_1A-L3FGM SL DI FUELGAS FLOW MINIMUM NOT REACHED 1 1 L3FGM_ALM HR 0211.05
L26FGH GT_1A-L26FGH SL DI FUELGAS TEMP.HIGH- CHANGE OVER TO LIQUID 1 1 L26FGH_ALM HR 0211.06
L26FGDIF GT_1A-L26FGDIF SL DI FUELGAS TEMP.30K NOT REACHED 1 1 L26FGDIF_ALM HR 0211.07
L33FGVO GT_1A-L33FGVO SL DI FUELGAS VENT (20FGV OFF BASE) NOT OPEN 1 1 L33FGVO_ALM HR 0211.08
L33FGVC GT_1A-L33FGVC SL DI FUELGAS VENT (20FGV OFF BASE) NOT CLOSED 1 1 L33FGVC_ALM HR 0211.09
L49FM GT_1A-L49FM SL DI FLOW DIVIDER MOTOR OVERLOAD 1 1 L49FM_ALM HR 0211.10
L3HXALM GT_1A-L3HXALM SL DI GAS WARNING SYSTEM FAILURE 1 1 L3HX_ALM HR 0211.11
SL DI SPARE HR 0211.12
SL DI SPARE HR 0211.13
SL DI SPARE HR 0211.14
SL DI SPARE HR 0211.15
L3ACS GT_1A-L3ACS SL DI AUXILIARY CHECK (SERVOS) 1 1 L3ACS HR 0212.00
L3VOTE_Q GT_1A-L3VOTE_Q SL DI TMR VOTING STATUS 1 1 L3VOTE_Q HR 0212.01
L27BN GT_1A-L27BN SL DI BUS UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY 1 1 L27BN HR 0212.02
L27BZ GT_1A-L27BZ SL DI BUS UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY 1 1 L27BZ HR 0212.03
L27QEL GT_1A-L27QEL SL DI EMERGENCY LUBE OIL PUMP UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY 1 1 L27QEL HR 0212.04
L14HR GT_1A-L14HR SL DI HP SPEED - ZERO SPEED 1 1 L14HR HR 0212.05
L28FDSCK GT_1A-L28FDSCK SL DI FLAME DETECTOR TROUBLE 1 1 L28FDSCK HR 0212.06
L43O GT_1A-L43O SL DI CONTROL MODE = OFF 1 1 L43O HR 0212.07
L86CB GT_1A-L86CB SL DI CMPRSS BLEED VALVE OR IGV POS LOCKOUT 1 1 L86CB HR 0212.08
L4Y GT_1A-L4Y SL DI LOSS OF MASTER PROTECTIVE\TURBINE TRIP TIME DELAY 1 1 L4Y HR 0212.09
L3FGST1 GT_1A-L3FGST1 SL DI STARTUP PERMISSIVE SIGNAL FIRE AND GAS SYSTEM 1 1 L3FGST1 HR 0212.10
L3FPST1 GT_1A-L3FPST1 SL DI PERMISSIVE TO START SIGNAL FIRE PROTECTION 1 1 L3FPST1 HR 0212.11
L3FPST2 GT_1A-L3FPST2 SL DI PERMISSIVE TO START SIGNAL FIRE DAMPER 1 1 L3FPST2 HR 0212.12
L45HL GT_1A-L45HL SL DI GAS DETECTION LEVEL 1.STAGE (20%) 1 1 L45HL HR 0212.13
L33CPX1 GT_1A-L33CPX1 SL DI CO2 OPERATED FIRE DAMPER ACCESSORY COMPARTMEN 1 1 L33CPX1 HR 0212.14
L33CPX23 GT_1A-L33CPX23 SL DI CO2 OPERATED FIRE DAMPER TURBINE COMPARTMENT 1 1 L33CPX2/3 HR 0212.15
L33CPX78 GT_1A-L33CPX78 SL DI CO2 OPERATED FIRE DAMPER AIR INLET GENERATOR COM 1 1 L33CPX7/8 HR 0213.00
L33CPX9 GT_1A-L33CPX9 SL DI CO2 OPERATED FIRE DAMPER AIR INLET EXCITER COMPAR 1 1 L33CPX9 HR 0213.01
L4FP GT_1A-L4FP SL DI PRE FIRE - ALARM 1 1 L4FP HR 0213.02
L4FT GT_1A-L4FT SL DI FIRE - GT TRIP 1 1 L4FT HR 0213.03
L45CP GT_1A-L45CP SL DI CO2 PRESSURE SWITCH INITIAL/EXTENDED DISCHARGE LIN 1 1 L45CP HR 0213.04
L45CC GT_1A-L45CC SL DI CO2 BOTTLE WEIGHT SWITCH 1 1 L45CC HR 0213.05
L33CC GT_1A-L33CC SL DI CO2 RELEASE BLOCKING DEVICE LIMIT SWITCH 1 1 L33CC HR 0213.06
L3FF GT_1A-L3FF SL DI FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM TROUBLE 1 1 L3FF HR 0213.07
L3STCKAU GT_1A-L3STCKAU SL DI STARTUP PERMISSIVE SIGNAL AUX SIGNAL 1 1 L3STCKAUX HR 0213.08
L3BAST1 GT_1A-L3BAST1 SL DI START PERMISSIVE FROM BATTERY CHARGER 1 1 L3BAST1 HR 0213.09
L3DCST1 GT_1A-L3DCST1 SL DI START PERMISSIVE FROM DC SUPPLY 1 1 L3DCST1 HR 0213.10
L30DE GT_1A-L30DE SL DI DIESEL STARTER (88DE) TROUBLE 1 1 L30DE HR 0213.11
L30HR GT_1A-L30HR SL DI HYDRAULIC RATCHET PUMP MOTOR TROUBLE (88HR-1) 1 1 L30HR HR 0213.12
L52WX GT_1A-L52WX SL DI SPARK PLUGS SUPPLY TROUBLE 1 1 L52WX HR 0213.13
L3ACST1 GT_1A-L3ACST1 SL DI START PERMISSIVE FROM AC SUPPLY 1 1 L3ACST1 HR 0213.14
L30WC1 GT_1A-L30WC1 SL DI COOLING WATER PUMP MOTOR #1 (88WC-1) TROUBLE 1 1 L30WC1 HR 0213.15
L30WC2 GT_1A-L30WC2 SL DI COOLING WATER PUMP MOTOR #2 (88WC-2) TROUBLE 1 1 L30WC2 HR 0214.00
L30BT1 GT_1A-L30BT1 SL DI TURBINE COMPARTMENT FAN #1 (88BT-1) TROUBLE 1 1 L30BT1 HR 0214.01
L30BT2 GT_1A-L30BT2 SL DI TURBINE COMPARTMENT FAN #2 (88BT-2) TROUBLE 1 1 L30BT2 HR 0214.02
 SINCOR GT_A 4/4
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT

Tagname Tag Name I/O Description HDSR State Unit Tag Adresse
P8 Centralog Type AGT AGT
L30VL1 GT_1A-L30VL1 SL DI GAS VALVE COMPARTMENT FAN #1 (88VL-1) TROUBLE 1 1 L30VL1 HR 0214.03
L30VL2 GT_1A-L30VL2 SL DI GAS VALVE COMPARTMENT FAN #2 (88VL-2) TROUBLE 1 1 L30VL2 HR 0214.04
L30QA GT_1A-L30QA SL DI AUX.LUBE OIL PUMP (88QA) TROUBLE 1 1 L30QA HR 0214.05
L30TF GT_1A-L30TF SL DI TURBINE AIR INLET TROUBLE 1 1 L30TF HR 0214.06
L30QV GT_1A-L30QV SL DI TURBINE LUBE OIL MIST SEPARATOR TROUBLE (88QV-1) 1 1 L30QV HR 0214.07
L27MC1N GT_1A-L27MC1N SL DI MOTOR CONTROL CENTER BUS 1 VOLTAGE NORMAL 1 1 L27MC1N HR 0214.08
L4T GT_1A-L4T SL DI MASTER PROTECTIVE\TURBINE TRIP 1 1 L4T HR 0214.09
L83DT_CM GT_1A-L83DT_CM SL DI DIESEL TEST ENABLE STATE 1 1 L83DT_CMD HR 0214.10
L39VD3 GT_1A-L39VD3 SL DI VIBRATION START INHIBIT 1 1 L39VD3 HR 0214.11
L3NAPZ GT_1A-L3NAPZ SL DI GT START INHIBIT ON NAPHTA 1 1 L3NAPZ HR 0214.12
SL DI SPARE HR 0214.13
SL DI SPARE HR 0214.14
SL DI SPARE HR 0214.15

L86AACK GT_1A-L86AACK SL DO COMMAND PB ALARM ACKNOLEDGE 1 1 L86AACK_CPB HC001

L86ARST GT_1A-L86ARST SL DO COMMAND PB ALARM RESET 1 1 L86ARST_CPB HC002
L86ASIL GT_1A-L86ASIL SL DO COMMAND PB ALARM SILENCE 1 1 L86ASIL_CPB HC003
SINCOR D_4103
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT

Tagname Tag Name I/O Description HDSR Scale Unit Tag Adresse
P8 Centralog Type Low High LIC Eurotherm
LI203 D_4103-LI203 SL AI LIC203 LEVEL 1 0 100 % PV 1
LIC_SPT D_4103-LIC203_SPT SL AI LIC203 SETPOINT FBK 1 0 100 % SL 2
LIC_OUT D_4103-LIC203_OUT SL AI LIC203 OUTPUT FBK 1 0 100 % OP 3
LIC_P D_4103-LIC203_P SL AI LIC203 OUTPUT FBK 1 0 1999,9 XP 20
LIC_I D_4103-LIC203_I SL AI LIC203 OUTPUT FBK 1 0 199,9 TI 21
LIC_D D_4103-LIC203_D SL AI LIC203 OUTPUT FBK 1 0 199,9 TD 22
ZLA203 D_4103-ZLA203 SL DI LIC203 LIC MODE FBK (0=man) 1 MS 8

YL_SPT D_4103-YL203_SPT SL AO LIC203 SETPOINT 1 0 100 % SL 1

YL_OUT D_4103-YL203_OUT SL AO LIC203 Ctrl OUTPUT 1 0 100 % OP 2
YL_A D_4103-YL203_A SL AO LIC203 Ctrl AUTO MODE 1 0 2 MS 8
YL_M D_4103-YL203_M SL AO LIC203 Ctrl AUTO MODE 1 0 2 MS 8
YL_P D_4103-YL203_P SL AO LIC203 PROP BAND 1 0 1999,9 XP 20
YL_I D_4103-YL203_I SL AO LIC203 INTEGRAL TIME 1 0 199,9 TI 21
YL_D D_4103-YL203_D SL AO LIC203 DERIVATIVE TIME 1 0 199,9 TD 22

Note : the variables YL203_P, YL203_I , YL203_D are driven by prisca (P06)
 X1 VAL ISSUED AS COMMISSIONED 17 /07/01 C.E.C C.E.C. A.E.

X0 VAL ISSUED AS COMMISSIONED 03/01/01 C.E.C C.E.C. A.E.

AS COMMISSIONED X1
 REVISION DESIGNATION REVISION DESIGNATION
SHEET SHEET
A0 B0 0 X0 X1 A0 B0 0 X0 X1
50 X X X X X OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 / CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04
01 X X X X X FRONT PAGE 51
02 X X X X X INDEX LIST 52 X X X X X PERMISSIVE TO CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04
03 53
04 54
05 55 X X X X X VOLTAGE INDICATOR 1B-01 / FREQUENCY INDICATOR 1B-01
06 56
07 57
08 58
09 59
10 X X X X X AVAILABILITY OF F & V MEASUREMENT / OPEN POSITION CB 1A-04 60
11 X X X X X CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 / AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 61
12 X X X X X GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 / GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 62
13 X X X X X CRIT. CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 / REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 63
14 X X X X X CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-01 / AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-01 64
15 X X X X X CRIT. CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-01 / REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-01 65
16 X X X X X BUSBAR FAULT - K471 - 1A-01 / BUSBAR FAULT B - K471 - 1B-01 66
17 X X X X X GEN. ALARM TRANSF 32-TR-1A (AT 1A-04) / GEN. ALARM TRIP TRANSF 32-TR-1A (AT1A-04) 67
18 68
19 69
20 X X X X X OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 / CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 70
21 X X X X X PERMISSIVE TO CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 / OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-01 71
22 X X X X X CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-01 / PERMISSIVE TO CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-01 72
23 73
24 74
25 X X X X X VOLTAGE INDICATOR 1A-06 / FREQUENCY INDICATOR 1A-06 75
26 76
27 77
28 78
29 79
30 X X X X X OPEN POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 / CLOSE POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 80
31 X X X X X AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 / GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 81
32 X X X X X GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 / CRIT. CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 82
33 X X X X X REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 / OPEN POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-02 83
34 X X X X X CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-02 / AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-02 84
35 X X X X X GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-02 / GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1NB-02 85
36 X X X X X CRIT. CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-02 / REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-02 86
37 X X X X X GEN. ALARM TRANSF 32-TR-1A (AT 1A-02) / GEN. ALARM TRIP TRANSF 32-TR-1C (AT1A-02) 87
38 X X X X X GEN. ALARM TRANSF 32-TR-1C (AT 1B-02) / GEN. ALARM TRIP TRANSF 32-TR-1C (AT1B-02) 88
39 89
40 X X X X X OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 / CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 90
41 X X X X X PERMISSIVE TO CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 / OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-02 91
42 X X X X X CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-02 / PERMISSIVE TO CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-02 92
43 93
44 X X X X X AVAILABILITY OF F & V MEASUREMENT (1B-01) / OPEN POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 94
45 X X X X X CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 / AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 95
46 X X X X X GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 / GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 96
47 X X X X X CRIT. CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 / REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 97
48 X X X X X GEN. ALARM TRANSF 32-TR-1B (AT 1B-04) / GEN. ALARM TRIP TRANSF 32-TR-1B (AT1B-04) 98
49 99
Prepared 03/01/2001 C.CELIS File Name
TROUBLE SHOOTING LOOP DIAGRAMS (TSLD) PLC (CONTROLLER 32-CS-411) by: Date Name TSLD411BO.XLS
Internal By: Sheet Rev
INDEX LIST
PLC411 002 X1
34.5 KV CELLS 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1A-06 MARSHALLING CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

A A

A7 A8 INTERFACE MODULE A1 A2
A 16E0+
-X531 XDI1 FU1 FU2 C/D01 FU3 FU4

1/c#18 AWG 1/
A9 B/D04
#588 1/ 1/ 1/
SERIES
539 2 J1 XA1A06
NC 2/ C
F114+ 542 2/ 1 1/ 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
F301
A5
1/c#18 AWG 1/ 3
C1 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
A1

Rack: 3
+ - + Slot: 4
120 V 24 V Point: 1
2 x #14 AWG
CC-365

D04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 10 TO SHEET 10 Module DI: IC69MDL655

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
1A-04 MARSHALLING CAB. 411 120V From 16EO+
Sheet 10 C/D01
A + - 24 V FROM SHEET 10

-X401 XA -125 Vdc XDI1

FROM
B/D04
LS3A

#578 PLC-411 1/c#18 AWG

Q51
4 A10
NC A2 A1 ZSH1A04
404 1/ 2/ 3 J1
14
C
405 2/ 1/ 7
B1/RED
11 1/c#18 AWG 16
B1
3 C2 16/RED
-125 Vdc Rack: 3
FROM Slot: 4
PLC-411 + - 24 V TO SHEET 11 Point: 2

D04-AB/MDL655
To Sheet 11 Module DI: IC69MDL655
4 x #14 AWG
CC-361

120 V

20 x .25
AVAILABILITY OF F & V MEASUREMENT Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
OPEN POSITION CB - 1A-04 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 10 X1
34.5 KV CELLS 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1A-04 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 10 C/D01
A + 24 Vdc

-X401 XDI1 FROM SHEET 10

1/ B/D04
#579 A11
3/ 3/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG ZSL1A04
Q51
401 6 J1
NO 4/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
5
A2/WHITE/GREY
4/ 1/ 4
A2
403 C3 4/WHITE/GREY
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
Point: 3
24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-361

D04-AB/MDL655
120V TO SHEET 11
TO SHEET 11

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 11 C/D01
A + - + 24 Vdc

X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 11

1/ B/D04
#580 A12
SERIES 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG XA1A04
NC
551 8 J1
K1AS+ 2/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
7
K496+ B2/BLACK
F102 2/ 1/ 17
B2
636 C4 17/BLACK
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 4

D04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

To Sheet 12 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-362

120V TO SHEET 12

20 x .25
CLOSED POSITION CB - 1A-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
AVAILABILITY OF CB - 1A-04 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 11 X1
34.5 KV CELLS 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1A-04 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 11 C/D01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 11

1/ B/D04
#583 A13
SERIES 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG XAH1A04
NC
633 10 J1
F101+ 4/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
9
K472+ A3/GREY/BROWN
K471+ 4/ 1/ 5
A3
F313
564 C5 5/GREY/BROWN
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
Point: 5
24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG
CC-362

D04-AB/MDL655
120V TO SHEET 12

TO SHEET 12

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 12 C/D01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 11

1/ B/D04
#584 A14
SERIES 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG XHH1A04
K862+K861
599 12 J1
NC 6/ 6/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
618 11
B3/WHITE/PINK
1/ 18
B3
C6 18/WHITE/PINK
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 6

D04-CD/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-362

120V TO SHEET 13

20 x .25
TO SHEET 13

GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 12 X1
34.5 KV CELLS 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1A-04 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 12 C/D01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 12

1/ B/D04
#585 A15
SERIES 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG EAH1A04
NC
560 14 J1
K495+ 8/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
13
F316+ A4/GREY
F301+ 8/ 1/ 6
A4
F313
638 C7 6/GREY
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
Point: 7
10 x # 14 AWG

24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-362

D04-AB/MDL655
120Vdc TO SHEET 13
TO SHEET 13

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 13 C/D01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 13

1/ B/D04
#582 A16
N.O. 10/ 10/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG ZLR1A04
S21
532 16 J1
9/ 9/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
531 15
B4/PURPLE
1/ 19
B4
C8 19/PURPLE
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 8

D04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

To Sheet 14 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-362

120 V TO SHEET 14

20 x .25
CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-04 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 13 X1
34.5 KV CELLS 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1A-01 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 13 C/D02
A + 24 Vdc

-X401 XDI1 FROM SHEET 13

1/ B/D04
#542 A10
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG ZSL1A01
Q51
401 36 J1
2/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
35
B1/BLACK
2/ 1/ 16
B1
403 C2 16/RED
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
Point: 18
24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655
2 x # 14 AWG
CC-350

D04-CD/MDL655
120Vdc TO SHEET 14
TO SHEET 14

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 14 C/D02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 14

1/ B/D04
#543 A11
SERIES 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG XA1A01
NC
557 38 J1
K1AS+ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
555 37
SUM A2/WHITE/GREY
K496+ 1/ 4
A2
F102 C3 4/WHITE/GREY
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 19

D04-CD/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

To Sheet 15 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-351

120 V TO SHEET 15

20 x .25
CLOSED POSITION CB - 1A-01 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
AVAILABILITY OF CB - 1A-01 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 14 X1
34.5 KV CELLS 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1A-01 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 14 C/D02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 14

1/ B/D04
#546 A12
SERIES 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG EAH1A01
NC
566 40 J1
NC 4/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
39
K495+ B2/BLACK
F316+ 4/ 1/ 17
B2
F113
588 C4 17/BLACK
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 20
10 x # 14 AWG

To Sheet 15 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-351

D04-CD/MDL655
120 V TO SHEET 15

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 15 C/D02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 15

1/ B/D04
#545 A13
N.O. 6/ 6/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG ZRL1A01
S21
532 42 J1
5/ 5/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
531 41
A3/GREY/BROWN
1/ 5
A3
C5 5/GREY/BROWN
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 21

D04-CD/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

To Sheet 16 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-351

120 V TO SHEET 16

20 x .25
CRITICAL CONTROIL FAULT - CB 1A-01 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
REMOTE MODE - CB 1A-01 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 15 X1
 34.5 kV M.V. SWITCHGEAR 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1A-01 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 15 C/D02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 15

1/ B/D04
#547 A14
NC 8/ 8/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG 1H1A01A
K471
551 44 J1
7/ 7/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
550 43
B3/WHITE/PINK
1/ 18
B3
C6 18/WHITE/PINK
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 22
10 x # 14 AWG

To Sheet 16 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-351

D04-CD/MDL655
120 V TO SHEET 16

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
1B-01 MARSH. CAB. 411 120V From 16EO+
Sheet 16 C/D02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 16

1/
B/D04
A15
#627 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG 1H1B01
NC
630 46 J1
K471 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
631 45
A4/GREY
1/ 6
A4
C7 6/GREY
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 23

D04-CD/MDL655
CC-351-B

To Sheet 17 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

2 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 17

20 x .25
BUSBAR A FAULT - K471 -1A-01 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
BUSBAR B FAULT - K471 -1B-01 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 16 X1
 34.5 kV M.V. SWITCHGEAR 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1A-05 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 16 C/D02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 16

1/ B/D04
#586 A16
SERIES 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG XAH500A
NC
574 48 J1
K481+ 1/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
47
K482+ B4/PURPLE
K483+ 1/ 1/ 19
B4
K484
561 C8 19/PURPLE
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 24
To Sheet 17 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-398

D04-CD/MDL655
120 V TO SHEET 17

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 17 C/D02
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI1 FROM SHEET 17

1/ B/D04
#587 B9
SERIES 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG XHH500A
NC
558 50 J1
K475+ 3/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG C
49
K476+ B12/YELLOW/BROWN
K477+ 3/ 1/ 7
B12
K478+
539 C9 7/YELLOW/BROWN
K478+ Rack: 3
K479+ + Slot: 4
K480 + - Point: 25

D04-CD/MDL655
To Sheet 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-398

120 V

20 x .25
GENERAL ALARM TRANSFO 32-TR-1A (THROUGH 1A-04) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL TRIP TRANSFO 32-TR-1A (THROUGH 1A-04) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 17 X1
 34.5 kV M.V. SWITCHGEAR 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1A-04 MARSH CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
24 Vdc Power Supply

A1 A11
B/D05
FU17 FU18 J1 YZH1A04
500 ma 500 ma
23 23/BLACK A5/BLACK A5

20 20/RED A6/RED A6

28 28/GREY/BROWN A1/GREY/BROWN A1

C +

D05-AB/MDL753
24 Vdc Rack: 3
TO SHEET 20 Slot: 5
-X114 XDO1 Point: 1
1/ Module DO1C693MDL753
C1
#576 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG

20x,5
125 1
N.O.
TRIP 2/ 1c#18 AWG D FU1
2
1/ 1A
2/
128
1/
D1

INTERFACE MODULE
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-363

16SR MDL753
C/D03

FROM SHEET 20
J1
24 Vdc
B/D05
+
10 YZL1A04
C +
-X114 XDO1 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 21 10/WHITE/PINK B1/WHITE/PINK B1
1/
C2
#577 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG Rack: 3
120 3
N.O. Slot: 5

D05-AB/MDL753
CLOSE 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG D FU2 Point: 2
121 4
1A Module DO1C693MDL753
1/
D2
CC-363
4 x #14 AWG

INTERFACE MODULE

20x,5
16SR MDL753
C/D03

OPEN ORDER - CB - 1A-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER - CB - 1A-04 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 20 X1
34.5 KV CELLS 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1A-04 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
FROM SHEET 20 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D03
YR1A04
C + 30
-X531 XDO1 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 21 30/YELLOW/BROWN A3/YELLOW/BROWN
1/
A3
C5
#581 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG Rack: 3
639 9
N.O. Slot: 5
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG D Point: 5

D05-AB/MDL753
640 10
Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D5

20X,25
CC-364
2 x # 14 AWG

1A-01 MARSH. CAB. 411

FROM SHEET 21 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D03
YZH1A01
C + 12
-X114 XDO1 24 Vdc
12/GREY/PINK B3/GREY/PINK
1/
B3
C6
#540 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG Rack: 3
103 11
N.O. Slot: 5
TRIP 2/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG D FU 6 Point: 6

D05-AB/MDL753
12
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
2/ 1/
122 D6

20X,25
CC-352
4 x # 14 AWG

PERMISSIVE TO CLOSE - CB - 1A-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
OPEN ORDER - CB - 1A-01 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 21 X1
34.5 KV CELLS 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1A-01 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
FROM SHEET 21 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D03
YZL1A01
C + 31
-X114 XDO1 24 Vdc
31/YELLOW A4/YELLOW
1/
A4
C7
#541 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG Rack: 3
110 13
N.O. Slot: 5
CLOSE 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG D FU 7 Point: 7

D05-AB/MDL753
111 14
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D7

20X,25
CC-352
4 x # 14 AWG

1A-01 MARSH. CAB. 411

INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D03
YR1A01
C + 13
-X531 XDO1 24 Vdc
13/RED/BLUE B4/RED/BLUE
1/
B4
C8
#544 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG Rack: 3
628 15
N.O. Slot: 5
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c#18 AWG D FU 8 Point: 8

D05-AB/MDL753
629 16
1A Module DO IC693MDL753
1/
D8

20X,25
CC-353
4 x # 14 AWG

CLOSE ORDER -CB - 1A-01 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
PERMISSIVE TO CLOSE - CB - 1A-01 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 22 X1
34.5 KV SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION G/S-01
1A-06 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

24 Vdc Power Supply

C B/D06
-X531 XAI1
J1 EI1A06
3A/
#589 + 1/ 1/ 3A/ C10
531 5
-FTU 20 20/GREY 5/GREY 5
2/ 2/ 3B/
532 6
- Sh 3/ 3B/
C11
Sh Sh
Sh 3/ +24 Vdc Rack: 3
C12

D06-P1/ALG223
TO SHEET 25 Slot: 6
Point: 3
Module AI: IC693ALG223

16 Pr x #18 AWG +Sh

12x,22
SC-150

SC-257
2x#16 AWG +Sh

INTERFACE MODULE
8EA
C/D05

FROM SHEET 25
24 Vdc
-X531 XAI1 B/D06
C
FI1A06
#590 2/ 2/ 4A/ 4A/
+
538 7 C14 J1
-FTF
1/ 1/ 4B/ 21 21/BROWN 6/BROWN 6
537 8
- Sh 4/ 4B/
C15
Sh Sh
# Rack: 3
Sh 4/ Slot: 6
C16

D06-P1/ALG223
+24 Vdc Point: 4
16 Pr x#18 AWG +Sh

Module AI: IC693ALG223

SC-257

INTERFACE MODULE
SC-151

12x,22
8EA
C/D05
2x#16 AWG

VOLTAGE INDICATOR 1A-06 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
FREQUENCY INDICATOR 1A-06 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 25 X1
34.5 Kv CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-02 MARSH. CAB 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

A A
-125 Vdc
FROM 7 8 INTERFACE MODULE 1 2
PLC 411 A 16E0+
-X401 -XC XDI2 FU1 FU2 C/E01 FU3 FU4

LS3C
1c#18 AWG
#565
2 A9 B/E04
404 1/ 2/
Q51 A2 A1
NC
3
14 J1 ZSH1A02
C
405 2/ 1/ 7 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
11 A5
1c#18 AWG 3 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
-125 Vdc
1 C1 A1
FROM
PLC 411 Rack: 4
+ - + Slot: 4
24 V Point: 1

E04-AB/MDL655
4 x #14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 30 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-357

TO SHEET 30

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
1A-02 MARSH. CAB. 411 Sheet 20 C/E01
A + - 24 V

-X401 XDI2 FROM SHEET 20

1c#18 AWG B/E04

#566 A10
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ ZSL1A02
Q51
401 4 J1
4/ C
3
1/ 16/RED B1/RED
4/ 1c#18 AWG 16
B1
403 C2
Rack: 4
Slot: 4
+ - Point: 2

E04-AB/MDL655
24 V Module DI: IC693MDL655
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-357

120 V TO SHEET 31

20 x .25
TO SHEET 31

OPEN POSITION - CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION - CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 30 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-02 MARSH CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 30 C/E01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 30

1/ B/E04
#567 A11
SERIES 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XA1A02
NC
551 6 J1
K1AS+ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
5
K496+ 4/WHITE/GREY A2/WHITE/GREY
F102 1/ 4
A2
C3
2/ Rack: 4
636
+ Slot: 4
24 Vdc Point: 3
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc TO SHEET 31 Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-358

E04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 31

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 31 C/E01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 31

1/ B/E04
#570 A12
SERIES 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XAH1A02
NC
633 8 J1
F101+ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
7
K471+ 17/BLACK B2/BLACK
K472+ 1/ 17
B2
F313 C4
3/ Rack: 4
564
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 4

E04-AB/MDL655
120 V
10 x # 14 AWG

TO SHEET 32 Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-358

To Sheet 32

20 x .25
AVAILABILITY OF CB - 1A-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL ALARM - CB - 1A-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 31 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-02 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 31 C/E01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 31

1/ B/E04
#571 A13
SERIES 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XHH1A02
K862+K861
599 10 J1
NC 6/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
9
5/GREY/BROWN A3/GREY/BROWN
1/ 5
A3
C5
6/ Rack: 4
618
+ Slot: 4
24 Vdc Point: 5
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc TO SHEET 32 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-358

E04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 32

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 32 C/E01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 32

1/ B/E04
#572 A14
SERIES 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG EAH1A02
NC
560 12 J1
K495+ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
11
F316+ 18/WHITE/PINK B3/WHITE/PINK
F301+ 1/ 18
B3
F113 C6
8/ Rack: 4
638
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 6

E04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 33 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-358

To Sheet 33

20 x .25
GENERAL TRIP - CB - 1A-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT - CB - 1A-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 32 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-02 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 32 C/E01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 32

1/ B/E04
A15
#569 9/ 10/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG ZRL1A02
S21
532 14 J1
N.O. 10/ 9/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG C
531 13
6/GREY A4/GREY
1/ 6
A4
C7
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
24 Vdc Point: 7
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc TO SHEET 33 Module DI: IC693MDL655

E04-AB/MDL655
CC-358

TO SHEET 33

20 x .25
1B-02 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 33 C/E01
-125 Vdc A + - + 24 Vdc

-X401 -XC FROM XDI2 FROM SHEET 33

PLC-411
B/E04
LS4C

1c # 18 AWG
16 A16
#641 1/ 1/ A2 A1 ZSH1B02
Q51
404 8
14 # J1
NC 2/ 2/ C
405 4
19/PURPLE B4/PURPLE
11 # 19
B4
C8
-125 Vdc
15 1c # 18 AWG Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 8

E04-AB/MDL655
4 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 34 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-376

To Sheet 34

20 x .25
REMOTE MODE - CB - 1A-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
OPEN POSITION - CB - 1B-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 33 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-02 MARSH CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 33 C/E01
B + 24 Vdc

X401 XDI2 FROM SHEET 33

1/ B/E04
B9
#642 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZSL1B02
Q51
401 18 J1
NO 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
17
7/YELLOW/BROWN B12/YELLOW/BROWN
4/ 1/ 7
B12
403 C9
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
24 Vdc Point: 9
4 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc TO SHEET 34 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-376

E04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 34

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 34 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 34

1/ B/E04
#643 B10
SERIES 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XA1B02
NC
551 20 J1
K1AS+ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
19
K496+ 20/GREY/PINK A12/GREY/PINK
F113 1/ 20
A12
F102 C10
2/ Rack: 4
636
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 10

E04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 35 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-377

To Sheet 35

20 x .25
CLOSED POSITION CB - 1B-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
AVAILABILITY OF CB - 1B-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 34 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-02 MARSH CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 34 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 34

1/ B/E04
#646 B11
SERIES 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XAH1B02
NC
633 22 J1
F101+ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
21
K472+ 8/RED/BGLUE B11/RED/BLUE
K471+ 1/ 8
B11
F313 C11
3/ Rack: 4
565
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 11
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 35 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-377

E04-AB/MDL655
To Sheet 35

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 35 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 35

1/ B/E04
#647 B12
SERIES 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XHH1B02
K861+K862
599 24 J1
NC 6/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
23
21/YELLOW A11/YELLOW
1/ 21
A11
C12
6/ Rack: 4
618
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 12

E04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 36 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-377

To Sheet 36

20 x .25
GENERAL ALARM - CB - 1B-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL TRIP - CB - 1B-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 35 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-02 MARSH CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 35 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 35

1/ B/E04
#648 B13
SERIES 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG EAH1B02
NC
560 26 J1
K495+ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
25
F316+ 9/GREEN B10/GREEN
F301+ 1/ 9
B10
F113 C13
8/ Rack: 4
638
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 13
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 36 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-377

E04-AB/MDL655
To Sheet 36

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 36 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 36

1/ B/E04
B14
#645 10/ 10/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZLR1B02
S21
532 28 J1
N.O. 9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
531 27
22/BROWN/GREEN A10/BROWN/GREEN
1/ 22
A10
C14
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 14

E04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 37 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-377

To Sheet 37

20 x .25
CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT - CB - 1B-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
REMOTE MODE - CB - 1B-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 36 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-03 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 36 C/E02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 36

1/ B/E04
#573 A16
SERIES 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XAH500C
NC
574 48 J1
K481+ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
47
K482+ 19/PURPLE B4/PURPLE
K483+ 1/ 19
B4
K484 C8
1/ Rack: 4
561
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 24
4 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 37 Module DI: IC69M3DL655

CC-397

E04-CD/MDL655
To Sheet 37

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 37 C/E02
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 37

1/ B/E04
#574 B9
SERIES 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XHH500C
NC
558 50 J1
K475+ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
49
K476+ 7/YELLOW/BROWN B12/YELLOW/BROWN
K477+ 1/ 7
B12
K478+ C9
K479+ 3/ Rack: 4
539
K480 + Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 25

E04-CD/MDL655
4 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 38 Module DI: IC69M3DL655

CC-397

To Sheet 38

20 x .25
GENERAL ALARM TRANSFO 32-TR-1C (THROUGH 1A-02) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL TRIP TRANSFO 32-TR-1C (THROUGH 1A-02) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 37 X1
 34.5 kV M.V. SWITCHGEAR 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
1B-03 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 37 C/E02
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 37

1/ B/E04
#649 B10
SERIES 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XAH501C
NC
574 52 J1
K481+ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
51
K482+ 20/GREY/PINK A12/GREY/PINK
K483+ 1/ 20
A12
K484 C10
1/ Rack: 4
561
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 26
4 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 38 Module DI: IC69M3DL655

CC-399

E04-CD/MDL655
To Sheet 38

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 38 C/E02
B + - + 24 Vdc

- X531 XDI2 FROM SHEET 38

1/ B/E04
#650 B11
SERIES 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XHH501C
NC
558 54 J1
K475+ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
53
K476+ 8/RED/BLUE B11/RED/BLUE
K477+ 1/ 8
B11
K478+ C11
K479+ 3/ Rack: 4
539
K480 + Slot: 4
+ - Point: 27

E04-CD/MDL655
4 x # 14 AWG

To Sheet 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69M3DL655

CC-399

20 x .25
GENERAL ALARM TRANSFO 32-TR-1C (THROUGH 1B-02) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL TRIP TRANSFO 32-TR-1C (THROUGH 1B-02) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 38 X1
 34.5 Kv CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-02 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS-PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
24 Vdc Power Supply

A1 A11
B/E05
FU17 FU18 J1 YZH1A02
500 ma 500 ma
23 23/BLACK A5/BLACK A5

20 20/RED A6/RED A6

28 28/GREY/BROWN A1/GREY/BROWN A1

C +

E05-AB/MDL753
24 Vdc Rack: 4
TO SHEET 40 Slot: 5
-X114 XDO2 Point: 1
1/ Module DO1C693MDL753
C1
#563 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG

20x,5
125 1
N.O.
TRIP 2/ 1c x # 18 AWG D FU1
2
1/ 1A

1/
D1
2/
128

INTERFACE MODULE
4 x # 14 AWG

16SR MDL753
CC-359

B/E03

FROM SHEET 40
J1
24 Vdc
B/E05
+
10 YZL1A02
C +
-X114 XDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 41 10/WHITE/PINK B1/WHITE/PINK B1
1/
C2
#564 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG Rack: 4
120 3
N.O. Slot: 5

E05-AB/MDL753
CLOSE 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG
D FU2 Point: 2
121 4
1A Module DO1C693MDL753

1/ D2
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-359

INTERFACE MODULE

20x,5
16SR MDL753
B/E03

OPEN ORDER - CB - 1A-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER - CB - 1A-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 40 X1
 34.5 KV SUBSTATION G/S-01
1A-02 MARSHALLING CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
FROM SHEET 40 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E03
YR1A02
C + 30
-X531 XDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 41 30/YELLOW/BROWN A3/YELLOW/BROWN
1/
A3
C5
#568 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x # 18AWG Rack: 4
639 9
N.O. Slot: 5
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x # 18AWG D FU 5 Point: 5
640 10

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
2/
D5

20X,25
2 x # 14 AWG
CC-360

1B-02 MARSHALLING CAB. 411

FROM SHEET 41 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E03
YZH1B02
C + 12
-X114 XDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 42 12/GREY/PINK B3/GREY/PINK
1/
B3
C6
#639 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x # 18AWG Rack: 4
125 11
N.O. Slot: 5
TRIP 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x # 18AWG D FU 6 Point: 6
128 12

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D6

20X,25
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-378

PERMISSIVE TO CLOSE - CB - 1A-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
OPEN ORDER - CB - 1B-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 41 X1
 34.5 KV SUBSTATION G/S-01
1B-02 MARSHALLING CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
FROM SHEET 41 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E03
YZL1B02
C + 31
-X114 XDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 42 31/YELLOW A4/YELLOW
1/
A4
C7
#640 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x # 18AWG Rack: 4
120 13
N.O. Slot: 5
CLOSE 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x # 18AWG D FU 7 Point: 7
121 14

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D7

20X,25
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-378

FROM SHEET 42 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E03
YR1B02
C + 13
-X531 XDO2 24 Vdc
13/RED/BLUE B4/RED/BLUE
1/
B4
C8
#644 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x # 18AWG Rack: 4
639 15
N.O. Slot: 5
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x # 18AWG D FU 8 Point: 8
640 16

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D8

20X,25
2 x # 14 AWG
CC-379

CLOSE ORDER -CB - 1B-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
PERMISSIVE TO CLOSE - CB - 1B-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 42 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-01 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

A A

A7 A8 INTERFACE MODULE A1 A2
A 16E0+
-X531 XDI3 FU1 FU2 C/F01 FU3 FU4

1/
A9 B/F04
#624 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG
SERIES
628 2 J1 XA1B01
NC 1/ C
F301+ 1 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
F114
A5
2/ 3 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
C1 A1
1/
540
Rack: 5
+ - + Slot: 4
2 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Point: 1

CC-375

F04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 44 TO SHEET 44 Module DI: IC693MDL655

20 x .25
1B-04 MARSH. CAB. 411 INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 44 C/F01
A + - 24 VdC

-X401 -XB -125 Vdc XDI3 FROM SHEET 44

FROM
B/F04
LS3B

PLC-411 1c#18
#653
4 A10
ZSH1B04
404 1/ 2/
Q51 A2 A1
NC
3
14 J1
C
405 2/ 1/ 7
16/RED B1/RED
11 1c#18 16
B1
3 C2
-125 Vdc Rack: 5
FROM Slot: 4
PLC-411 + - 24 Vdc Point: 2

F04-AB/MDL655
120 V To Sheet 45 Module DI: IC693MDL655
CC-380

4 x #14 AWG

To Sheet 45

20 x .25
AVAILABILITY OF F & V MEASUREMENT (1B-01) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
OPEN POSITION CB - 1B-04 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 44 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-04 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 44 C/F01
A + 24 Vdc

-X401 XDI3 FROM SHEET 44

1/ B/F04
A11
#654 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG ZSL1B04
Q51
401 6 J1
NO 4/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG C
5
4/WHITE/GREY A2/WHITE/GREY
4/ 1/ 4
A2
403 C3
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
24 Vdc Point: 3
4 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc TO SHEET 45 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-380

F04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 45

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 45 C/F01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI3 FROM SHEET 45

1/ B/F04
A12
#655 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG XA1B04
SERIES
551 8 J1
NC 2/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG C
7
K1AS+ 17/BLACK B2/BLACK
K496+ 1/ 17
B2
F102 C4
2/ Rack: 5
636
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 4

F04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 46 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-381

To Sheet 46

20 x .25
CLOSED POSITION CB - 1B-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
AVAILABILITY OF CB - 1B-04 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 45 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-04 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 45 C/F01
A + 24 Vdc

- X531 XDI3 FROM SHEET 45

1/ B/F04
A13
#658 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG XAH1B04
SERIES
633 10 J1
NC 3/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG C
9
F101+ 5/GREY/BROWN A3/GREY/BROWN
K472+ 1/ 5
A3
K471+ C5
F313 3/ Rack: 5
564
+ Slot: 4
24 Vdc Point: 5
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc TO SHEET 46 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-381

F04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 46

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 46 C/F01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI3 FROM SHEET 46

1/ B/F04
A14
#659 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG XHH1B04
SERIES
599 12 J1
NC 6/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG C
11
K861+ 18/WHITE/PINK B3/WHITE/PINK
K862 1/ 18
B3
C6
6/ Rack: 5
618
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 6

F04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 47 Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-381

To Sheet 47

20 x .25
GENERAL ALARM - CB - 1B-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL TRIP - CB - 1B-04 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 46 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-04 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 46 C/F01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI3 FROM SHEET 46

1/ B/F04
A15
#660 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG EAH1B04
SERIES
560 14 J1
NC 8/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG C
13
K495+ 6/GREY A4/GREY
F113+ 1/ 6
A4
F301+ C7
F316 8/ Rack: 5
638
+ Slot: 4
24 Vdc Point: 7
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc TO SHEET 47 Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-381

F04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 47

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 47 C/F01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI3 FROM SHEET 47

1/ B/F04
A16
#657 10/ 10/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG ZLR1B04
S21
532 16 J1
N.O. 9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG C
531 15
19/PURPLE B4/PURPLE
1/ 19
B4
C8
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 8

F04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 48 Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-381

To Sheet 48

20 x .25
CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 47 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-05 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 47 C/F02
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI3 FROM SHEET 47

1/ B/F04
A10
#661 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG XAH500B
SERIES
574 36 J1
NC 1/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG C
35
K481+ 16/RED B1/RED
K482+ 1/ 16
B1
K483+ C2
K484 1/ Rack: 5
561
+ Slot: 4
24 Vdc Point: 18
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-399B

120Vdc TO SHEET 48 Module DI: IC693MDL655

F04-CD/MDL655
TO SHEET 48

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 48 C/F02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 XDI3 FROM SHEET 48

1/ B/F04
#662 A11
SERIES 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG XHH500B
K475+
558 38 J1
K426+ 3/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG C
37
K422+ 4/WHITE/GREY A2/WHITE/GREY
K478+ 1/ 4
A2
K479+ C3
K480 3/ Rack: 5
539
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 19

F04-CD/MDL655
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-399B

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

20 x .25
GENERAL ALARM TRANSFO 32-TR-1B (TRHOUGH 1B-04) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL TRIP TRANSFO. 32-TR-1B (THROUGH 1B-04) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 48 X1
 34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-04 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
24 Vdc Power Supply

1 11
B/F05
FU17 FU18 J1 YZH1B04
500 ma 500 ma
23 23/BLACK A5/BLACK A5

20 20/RED A6/RED A6

28 28/GREY/BROWN A1/GREY/BROWN A1

C +

F05-AB/MDL753
24 Vdc Rack: 5
TO SHEET 50 Slot: 5
-X114 XDO3 Point: 1
1/ Module DO1C693MDL753
C1
#6651 1/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG

20x,5
125 1
N.O.
TRIP 1c x # 18 AWG D FU1
2
1/ 1A

1/
D1
2/
128

INTERFACE MODULE
4 x # 14 AWG

16SR MDL753
CC-382

B/F03

FROM SHEET 50
J1
24 Vdc
B/F05
+
10 YZL1B04
C +
-X114 XDO3 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 51 10/WHITE/PINK B1/WHITE/PINK B1
1/
C2
#652 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG Rack: 5
120 3
N.O. Slot: 5

F05-AB/MDL753
CLOSE 4/ 4/ 1c x # 18 AWG D FU2 Point: 2
121 4
1/ 1A Module DO1C693MDL753
1/
D2
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-382

INTERFACE MODULE

20x,5
16SR MDL753
B/F03

OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 50 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-04 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
FROM SHEET 50 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/F05
+ C/F03
YR1B04
C + 30
-X531 XDO3 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 51 30/YELLOW/BROWN A3/YELLOW/BROWN
1/
A3
C5
#656 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG Rack: 5
639 9
N.O. Slot: 5
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x # 18 AWG D FU 5 Point: 5
640 10

F05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D5

20X,25
2 x # 14 AWG
CC-383

PERMISSIVE TO CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:

CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 52 X1
34.5 KV SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION G/S-01
1B-01 MARSH. CAB. 411 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
24 Vdc Power Supply

+24 Vdc

C FU1
500 ma
-X531 XAI3
B/F06
3A/ J1
#625 1/ 1/ 3A/ C10 EI1B01
+ 531 5
20 20/GREY 5/GREY
-FTV 2/ 2/ 3B/
- 532 6
Sh 3/ 3B/ 5
C11
Sh Sh PE1-3
SHIELD 3/ +24 Vdc Rack: 5
C12

F06-P1/ALG223
TO SHEET 55 Slot: 6
Point: 3
Module AI: IC693ALG223

16Pr.#18 AWG +Shld

2 x.#16 AWG +Shld

12x,22
SC-158

SC-259
INTERFACE MODULE
8EA
C/F05

FROM SHEET 55

-X531 XAI3 + 24 Vdc

B/F06
C
FI1B01
#626 1/ 2/ 4A/ 4A/
+ 538 7 C14 J1
-FTF 2/ 1/ 4B/ 21 21/BROWN 6/BROWN 6
- 537 8
Sh 4/ 4B/
C15
Sh PE1-4
# Rack: 5
SHIELD 4/ Slot: 6
C16

F06-P1/ALG223
+24 Vdc Point: 4
16Pr #18 AWG +Shld

HOJA Module AI: IC693ALG223

2 x.#16 AWG +Shld
SC-159

SC-259

INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F05

VOLTAGE INDICATOR 1B-01 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
FREQUENCY INDICATOR 1B-01 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-748 55 X1
 X1 VAL ISSUED AS COMMISSIONED 17 /07/01 C.E.C C.E.C. A.E.

X0 VAL ISSUED AS COMMISSIONED 03/01/01 C.E.C C.E.C. A.E.

AS COMMISSIONED
X1
 REVISION DESIGNATION REVISION DESIGNATION
SHEET SHEET
A0 B0 0 X0 X1 A0 B0 0 X0 X1
50 X X X X X GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 / CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06
01 X X X X X FRONT PAGE 51 X X X X X REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07 / CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07
02 X X X X X INDEX LIST 52 X X X X X AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07 / GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07
03 X X X X X INDEX LIST 53 X X X X X GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07 / CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07
04 54 X X X X X RECLOSER OPERATING CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07 / FAILURE BATTERY CHARGER # 1 (32-EE-371)
05 55 X X X X X FAILURE BATTERY CHARGER # 2 (32-EE-371) / BATTERY CHARGER EARTH FAULT (32-EE-371)
06 56 X X X X X RECTIFIER FAULT (32-EE-371) / DC LOW VOLTAGE ALARM (32-EE-371)
07 57 X X X X X GEN ALARM TRANSF TR-2 (32-SG-02)(AT 2A-02) / GEN FAULT TRANSFTR-2 (32-SG-2) (AT 2A-02)
08 58 X X X X GT_A TRIPPED / GT_B TRIPPED
09 59 X X X X GT_C TRIPPED
10 X X X X X REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 / CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 60 X X X X X REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08 / CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08
11 X X X X X AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 / GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 61 X X X X X AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08 / GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08
12 X X X X X GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 / CRIT. CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 62 X X X X X GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08 / CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08
13 X X X X X RECLOSER OPERATING CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 / REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 63 X X X X X REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09 / CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09
14 X X X X X CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 / AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 64 X X X X X AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09 / GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09
15 X X X X X GENERAL ALARM OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 / GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 65 X X X X X GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09 / CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09
16 X X X X X CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 / RECLOSER OPERATING 1A-08 66 X X X X X RECLOSER OPERATING CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07 / MOTOR No. 5 STATUS
17 X X X X X RECTIFIER FAULT 32-EE-361 / DC LOW VOLTAGE 32-EE-361 67 X X X X X MOTOR No. 6 STATUS / MOTOR No. 7 STATUS
18 X X X X X EARTH FAULT 32-EE-361 / UPS FAILURE 32-EE-361 68 X X X X X MOTOR No. 8 STATUS / EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-3B CLOSED POSITION (1B-01)
19 X X X X GT_A TRIPPED / GT_B TRIPPED 69 X X X X X EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-3D CLOSED POS (1B-01)/EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-3B CLOSED POS (1B-01)
20 X X X X GT_C TRIPPED 70
21 71
22 72
23 73
24 74 X X X X X OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 / CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06
25 X X X X X REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 / CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 75 X X X X X OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07 / CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07
26 X X X X X AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 / GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 76 X X X X X OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08 / CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08
27 X X X X X GEN. TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 / CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 77 X X X X X OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09 / CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09
28 X X X X X MOTOR No. 1 STATUS / MOTOR No. 2 STATUS 78 X X X X X MOTOR No. 5 TRIP ORDER / MOTOR No. 6 TRIP ORDER
29 X X X X X MOTOR No. 3 STATUS / MOTOR No. 4 STATUS 79 X X X X X MOTOR No. 7 TRIP ORDER / MOTOR No. 8 TRIP ORDER
30 X X X X X NEUTRAL RESISTANCE FAULT - 1st STAGE FAULT / NEUTRAL RES. FAULT - 2nd STAGE FAULT 80
31 X X X X X EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-3A-CLOSED POS(1B-01)/EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-3C-CLOSED POS(1B-01) 81
32 X X X X X EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-4A-CLOSED POS(1B-01)/EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-4C-CLOSED POS(1B-01) 82
33 83
34 84
35 85 X X X X X CLOSED POSITION 1A-02 / AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A-02
36 86 X X X X X UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM - 2A-02 / CLOSED POSITION - 2A-01
37 87 X X X X X AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A-01 / CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 2B-07
38 X X X X X OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 / CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 88 X X X X X AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 2B-07 / UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM 2B-07
39 X X X X X OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 / CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 89 X X X X X CLOSED POSITION 2A-04 / CLOSED POSITION 2A-06
40 X X X X X OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 / CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 90 X X X X X COMMON FAULT LV BREAKERS BUSBAR A / CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 2B-01
41 X X X X X MOTOR No. 1 TRIP ORDER / MOTOR No. 2 TRIP ORDER 91 X X X X X CLOSED POSITION 2B-02 / CLOSED POSITION 2B-03
42 X X X X X MOTOR No. 3 TRIP ORDER / MOTOR No. 4 TRIP ORDER 92 X X X X X CLOSED POSITION 2B-04 / CLOSED POSITION 2B-05
43 93 X X X X X CLOSED POSITION 2B-06
44 94
45 95
46 96
47 97
48 X X X X X REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 / CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 98
49 X X X X X AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 / GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 99
Prepared 03/01/2001 C.CELIS File Name
TROUBLE SHOOTING LOOP DIAGRAMS (TSLD) PLC (CONTROLLER 32-CS-412) by: Date Name TSLD412RVO.XLS
Internal By: Sheet Rev
INDEX LIST
PLC412 002 X1
 REVISION DESIGNATION REVISION DESIGNATION
SHEET SHEET
A0 B0 0 X0 X1 A0 B0
100 X X X X X COMMON FAULT 32-BP-331 / COMMON FAULT 32-BP-332 150
101 X X X X X COMMON FAULT 32-DP-351 / COMMON FAULT HVAC 32-AP-321 151
102 X X X X X COMMON FAULT HVAC 32-AP-322 / FIRE DETECTION PANEL FAULT 32-EE-373 152
103 X X X X X SPARE / FIRE DETECTION ALARM 153
104 X X X X X GAS DETECTION PRE ALARM / GAS DETECTION ALARM 154
105 X X X X X SHUT DOWN VALVE OPEN POS-DIESEL TANK/SHUT DOWN VALVE CLOSED POS-DIESEL TANK 155
106 X X X X FIRE DETECTION ALARM - DIESEL TANK / LEVEL HIGH HIGH - DIESEL TANK 156
107 X X X X SHUTDOWN VALVE REMOTE MODE - DIESEL TANK / SHUTDOWN VALVE ALARM-DIESEL TANK 157
108 158
109 159
110 X X X X X OPEN ORDER-INCOMING 32-TR-2 (2A-02) / CLOSE ORDER INCOMING 32-TR-2 (2A-02) 160
111 X X X X X OPEN ORDER BUS COUPLING -2A-01 / CLOSE ORDER BUS COUPLING - 2A-01 161
112 X X X X X OPEN ORDER EMERG. PWR SUPPLY - 2B-07 / CLOSE ORDER EMERG. PWR SUPPLY - 2B-07 162
113 X X X X OPEN ORDER SHUTDOWN VALVE-DIESEL TNK/CLOSE ORDER SHUTDOWN VALVE-DIESEL TNK 163
114 164
115 165
116 X X X X X VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT 2B-07 / CURRENT MEASUREMENT 2B-07 166
117 X X X X X POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1B-06 / CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1B-06 167
118 X X X X X POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1B-07 / CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1B-07 1687
119 X X X X X POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1B-08 / CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1B-08 169
120 X X X X X POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1B-09 / CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1B-09 170
121 171
122 172
123 173
124 174
125 X X X X X VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT 2A-02 / CURRENT MEASUREMENT 2A-02 175
126 X X X X X POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1A-07 / CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1A-07 176
127 X X X X X POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1A-08 / CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1A-08 177
128 X X X X X POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1A-09 / CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1A-09 178
129 X X X X X DIESEL TANK LEVEL 179
130 180
131 181
132 182
133 183
134 184
135 |85
136 186
137 187
138 188
139 189
140 190
141 191
142 192
143 193
144 194
145 195
146 196
147 197
148 198
149 199
Prepared 03/01/2001 C.CELIS File Name
TROUBLE SHOOTING LOOP DIAGRAMS (TSLD) PLC (CONTROLLER 32-CS-412) by: Date Name TSLD412BO.XLS
Internal By: Sheet Rev
INDEX LIST
PLC412 003 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICVAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-09 MARSH.CAB.412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

A A

A7 A8 INTERFACE MODULE A1 A2
A 16E0+
-X531 YDI1 FU1 FU2 C/D01 FU3 FU4

1/
A9 B/D03
#615 2/ 2/ 1/ 1cx#18AWG
S21
532 2 J1 ZLR1A09
N.O. C
531 1/ 1/ 1 1/ 1cx#18AWG 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
A5
1/ 3
C1 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
A1

Rack: 3
+ - + Slot: 3
12 x # 14 AWG

120 v 24 Vdc Point: 1

CC-373

D03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 10 TO SHEET 10 Module DI: IC69MDL655

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 10 C/D01
A + - 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI1 FROM SHEET 10

1/ B/D03
A10
#616 1/ 1/ 1/ 1cx#18AWG ZSL1A09
Q51
401 4 J1
NO 2/ 2/ 1cx#18AWG C
3
B1/RED
2/ 2/ 16
B1
403 C2 16/RED
Rack: 3
Slot: 3
+ - Point: 2

D03-AB/MDL655
2 x # 14 AWG

120 v 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-372

TO SHEET 11 TO SHEET 11

20 x .25
REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 10 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-09 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 10 C/D01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI1 FROM SHEET 10

1/ B/D03
A11
#617 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XA1A09
SERIES
557 6 J1
NC 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
5
K1AS+ A2/WHITE/GREY
K496+ 1/ 4
A2
F102 C3 4/WHITE/GREY
4/ Rack: 3
592
+ Slot: 3
24 Vdc Point: 3
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc TO SHEET 11 Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-373

D03-AB/MDL655
SHEET 11

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 11 C/D01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI1 FROM SHEET 11

1/ B/D03
A12
#618 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XAH1A09
SERIES
587 8 J1
NC 6/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
7
F317+ B2/BLACK
F301+ 1/ 17
B2
F101 C4 17/BLACK
6/ Rack: 3
590
+ Slot: 3
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 4

D03-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 12 Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-373

To Sheet 12

20 x .25
AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL ALARM - CIRCUIT BREAKER - 1A-09 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 11 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-09 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 11 C/D01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI1 FROM SHEET 11

1/ B/D03
A13
#619 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XHH1A09
K861
569 10 J1
NC 8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
570 9
A3/GREY/BROWN
1/ 5
A3
C5 5/GREY/BROWN
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 3
24 Vdc Point: 5
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc TO SHEET 12 Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-373

D03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 11

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 11 C/D01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI1 FROM SHEET 11

1/ B/D03
A14
#620 9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG EAH1A09
SERIES
566 12 J1
NC 10/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
11
K495+ B3/WHITE/PINK
F113 1/ 18
B3
C6 18/WHITE/PINK
10/ Rack: 3
594
+ Slot: 3
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 6

D03-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 13 Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-373

To Sheet 13

20 x .25
GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 12 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-09 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 12 C/D01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 TDI1 FROM SHEET 12

1/ B/D03
A15
#621 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XR1A09
F317
585 14 J1
N.O. 8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
586 13
A4/GREY
1/ 6
A4
C7 6/GREY
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 3
Point: 7
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-373

D03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 13 TO SHEET 12

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
1A-08 MARSH. CAB. 412 120V From 16EO+
Sheet 13 C/D01
A + - 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI1 FROM SHEET 13

1/ B/D03
A16
#604 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZLR1A08
S21
532 16 J1
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
531 15
B4/PURPLE
1/ 19
B4
C8 19/PURPLE
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 8

D03-AB/MDL655
2 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-370

To Sheet 14 TO SHEET 14

20 x .25
RECLOSER OPERATING - 1A-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
REMOTE MODE - CB - 1A-08 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 13 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-08 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 13 C/D01
B + 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI1 FROM SHEET 13

1/ B/D03
B9
#605 1/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZSL1A08
Q51
401 18 J1
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
17
B12/YELLOW/BROWN
2/ 1/ 7
B12
403 C9 7/YELLOW/BROWN
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 3
Point: 9
2 x # 14 AWG

24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-369

D03-AB/MDL655
120V TO SHEET 14
TO SHEET 14

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 14 C/D01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI1 TO SHEET 14

1/ B/D03
B10
#606 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XA1A08
SERIES
557 20 J1
NC 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
19
K1AS+ A12/GREY/PINK
K496 1/ 20
A12
F102 C10 20/GREY/PINK
4/ Rack: 3
592
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 10

D03-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-370

To Sheet 15 TO SHEET 15

20 x .25
CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 14 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-08 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
FROM SHEET 14 C/D01
B + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI1 FROM SHEET 14

1/ B/D03
B11
#607 6/ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XAH1A08
SERIES
587 22 J1
NC 5/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
21
F317+ B11/RED/BLUE
F301+ 1/ 8
B11
F101 C11 8/RED/BLUE
5/ Rack: 3
590
+ Slot: 3
Point: 11
12 x # 14 AWG

24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-370

D03-AB/MDL655
120Vdc TO SHEET 15
TO SHEET 15

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 15 C/D01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI1 FROM SHEET 15

1/ B/D03
B12
#608 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XHH1A08
K861
569 24 J1
NC 8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
570 23
A11/YELLOW
1/ 21
A11
C12 21/YELLOW
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 12

D03-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-370

To Sheet 16 TO SHEET 16

20 x .25
GENERAL ALARM OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER - 1A-08 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 15 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-08 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
FROM SHEET 15 C/D01
B + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI1 FROM SHEET 15

1/ B/D03
B13
#609 9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG EAH1A08
SERIES
566 26 J1
NC 10/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
25
K495+ B10/GREEN
F113 1/ 9
B10
C13 9/GREEN
10/ Rack: 3
594
+ Slot: 3
Point: 13
12 x # 14 AWG

24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-370

D03-AB/MDL655
120Vdc TO SHEET 16
TO SHEET 16

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 16 C/D01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 -X531 FROM SHEET 16

1/ B/D03
B14
#610 11/ 11/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XR1A08
F317
585 28 J1
N.O. 12/ 12/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
586 27
A10/BROWN/GREEN
1/ 22
A10
C14 22/BROWN/GREEN
1 Rack: 3
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 14

D03-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-370

To Sheet 17 TO SHEET 17

20 x .25
CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT - CB - 1A-08 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
RECLOSER OPERATING 1A-08 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 16 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
32-EE-361 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 16 C/D01
B + 24 Vdc

-X41 YDI1 FROM SHEET 16

1/ B/D03
B15
#739 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XA361A
UPS
1 30 J1
NC 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
29
B9/WHITE/YELLOW
2/ 1/ 10
B9
3 C15 10/WHITE/YELLOW
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 3
Point: 15
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-417

D03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 17 TO SHEET 17

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 17 C/D01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X42 YDI1 FROM SHEET 17

1/ B/D03
B16
#740 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XA361B
RECT.
4 32 J1
NC 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
5 31
A9/WHITE/GREEN
1/ 23
A9
C16 23/WHITE/GREEN
Rack: 3
Slot: 3
Point: 16

D03-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-417

20 x .25
RECTIFIER FAULT 32-EE-361 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
DC LOW VOLTAGE 32-EE-361 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 17 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
32-EE-361 MARSH.CAB.412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

A A

A7 A8 INTERFACE MODULE A1 A2
A 16E0+
-X41 YDI1 FU1 FU2 C/D02 FU3 FU4

1/
A9 B/D03
#741 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x#18AWG
RECT.
7 34 J1 XA361C
NC C
8 6/ 6/ 33 1/ 1c x#18AWG 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
A5
1/ 3
C1 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
A1

Rack: 3
+ - + Slot: 3
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Point: 17

CC-417

D03-CD/MDL655
TO SHEET 18 TO SHEET 18 Module DI: IC69MDL655

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 18 C/D02
A + -
-X42 YDI1 24 Vdc
FROM SHEET 18
1/ B/D03
A10
#742 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x#18AWG XA361D
RECT.
19 36 J1
NC 8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x#18AWG C
20 35
B1/RED
1/ 16
B1
C2 16/RED
Rack: 3
Slot: 3
+ - Point: 18

D03-CD/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-417

TO SHEET 19

20 x .25
EARTH FAULT 32-EE-361 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
UPS FAILURE 32-EE-361 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 18 X1
 ELECTRICAL ROOM 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
MARSH.CAB. 411 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 18 C/D02
A + 24 Vdc

XA YDI1 FROM SHEET 10

1/ B/D03
A11
MERGED 1/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA605A
N.O.
9 38 J1
LS1A+ 2/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
10 37
LS2A+ A2/WHITE/GREY
LS3A 1/ 4
A2
C3 4/WHITE/GREY
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 3
24 Vdc Point: 19
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc TO SHEET 11 Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-244

D03-CD/MDL655
SHEET 19

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 19 C/D02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-XB YDI1 FROM SHEET 11

1/ B/D03
A12
9/ 10/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA605B
MERGED
9 40 J1
N.O. 10/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
10 39
LS1B+ B2/BLACK
LS2B+ 1/ 17
B2
LS3B C4 17/BLACK
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 3
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 20

D03-CD/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V TO SHEET 12 Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-244

To Sheet 20

20 x .25
GT_A TRIPPED Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GT_B TRIPPED CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 19 X1
 ELECTRICAL ROOM 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
MARSH.CAB. 411 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 19 C/D02
A + 24 Vdc

-XC YDI1 FROM SHEET 11

1/ B/D03
A13
MERGED 5/ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA605C
N.O.
9 42 J1
LS1C+ 6/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
10 41
LS2C+ A3/GREY/BROWN
LS (*) 1/ 5
A3
C5 5/GREY/BROWN
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 3
24 Vdc Point: 21
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc TO SHEET 12 Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-244

D03-CD/MDL655
TO SHEET 20

20 x .25
LS (*) REPRESENTS A SERIES

CONTACT COMPOSED OF TWO

N.O. CONTACTS (LS3C AND LS4C)

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 11 C/D01
A + - + 24 Vdc

FROM SHEET 11

A14
J1
C
B3/WHITE/PINK
18
B3
C6 18/WHITE/PINK
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 3
+ - 24 Vdc Point: 22

D03-CD/MDL655
120 V TO SHEET 13 Module DI: IC69MDL655
To Sheet 13

20 x .25
GT_C TRIPPED Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:

CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 20 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-07 MARS. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

A A

A7 A8 INTERFACE MODULE A1 A2
A 16E0+
-X531 YDI2 FU1 FU2 C/D03 FU3 FU4

1/
A9 B/D04
#593 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG
S21
532 2 J1 ZLR1A07
N.O. C
531 1/ 1/ 1 1/ 1c x #18 AWG 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
A5
1/ 3
C1 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
A1

Rack: 3
+ - + Slot: 4
10 x #14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Point: 1

CC-367

D04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 25 TO SHEET 25 Module DI: IC69MDL655

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 25 C/D03
A + - 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI2 FROM SHEET 25

1/ B/D04
A10
#594 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZSL1A07
Q51
401 4 J1
N.O. 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
3
2/ B1/RED
2/ 1/ 16
B1
403 C2 16/RED
Rack: 3
Slot: 4
+ - Point: 2

D04-AB/MDL655
2 x #14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-366

To Sheet 26 To Sheet 26

20 x .25
REMOTE MODE - CB - 1A-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION CB - 1A-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 25 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-07 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 25 C/D03
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI2 FROM SHEET 25

1/ B/D04
A11
#595 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA1A07
SERIES
557 6 J1
NC 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
5
K1AS+ A2/WHITE/GREY
K496+ 1/ 4
A2
F102 C3 4/WHITE/GREY
3/ Rack: 3
592
+ Slot: 4
Point: 3
10 x #14 AWG

24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-367

D04-AB/MDL655
120V TO SHEET 26
TO SHEET 26

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 26 C/D03
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI2 FROM SHEET 26

1/ B/D04
A12
#596 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XAH1A07
SERIES
587 8 J1
NC 6/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
7
F317+ B2/BLACK
F3101+ 1/ 17
B2
F101 C4 17/BLACK
6/ Rack: 3
590
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 4

D04-AB/MDL655
10 x #14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-367

To Sheet 27 TO SHEET 27

20 x .25
AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL ALARM CIRUIT BREAKER 1A-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 26 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-07 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 26 C/D03
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI2 FROM SHEET 26

1/ B/D04
A13
#597 8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XHH1A07
K861
569 10 J1
NC 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
570 9
A3/GREY/BROWN
1/ 5
A3
C5 5/GREY/BROWN
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
Point: 5
10 x #14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-367

D04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 27 TO SHEET 27

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 27 C/D03
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI2 FROM SHEET 27

1/ B/D04
A14
#598 9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG EAH1A07
SERIES
566 12 J1
NC 10/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
11
K495+ B3/WHITE/PINK
F113 1/ 18
B3
C6 18/WHITE/PINK
10/ Rack: 3
594
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 6

D04-AB/MDL655
10 x #14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-367

To Sheet 28 TOP SHEET 28

20 x .25
GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 27 X1
 ELECTRICAL ROOM G/S 01
CJB-702 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 27 C/D03
A + 24 Vdc

-X702 YDI2 FROM SHEET 27

1/ B/D04
A15
#771 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSA0001
N.O.
31 14 J1
SIGNALS 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
32 13
FROM A4/GREY
SINCOR 1/ 6
A4
C7 6/GREY
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
Point: 7
10 x #14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

D04-AB/MDL655
CC451

TO SHEET 28 TO SHEET 28

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
CJB-702 MARSH.CAB. 412 120V From 16EO+
Sheet 28 C/D03
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X702 YDI2 FROM SHEET 28

1/ B/D04
A16
#773 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSA0002
N.O.
33 16 J1
SIGNALS 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
34 15
FROM B4/PURPLE
SINCOR 1/ 19
B4
C8 19/PURPLE
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 8

D04-AB/MDL655
10 x #14 AWG

120 Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC451

TO SHEET 29 TO SHEET 29

20 x .25
MOTOR No. 1 STATUS Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
MOTOR No. 2 STATUS CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 28 X1
 ELECTRICAL ROOM G/S 01
CJB-702 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 28 C/D03
B + 24 Vdc

-X702 YDI2 FROM SHEET 28

1/ B/D04
B9
#775 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSA0003
N.O.
35 18 J1
SIGNALS 6/ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
36 17
FROM B12/YELLOW/BROWN
SINCOR 1/ 7
B12
C9 7/YELLOW/BROWN
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
Point: 9
10 x #14 AWG

120 Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-451

D04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 29 TO SHEET 29

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 29 C/D03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X702 YDI2 FROM SHEET 29

1/ B/D04
B10
#777 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSA0004
N.O.
37 20 J1
SIGNALS 8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
38 19
FROM A12/GREY/PINK
SINCOR 1/ 20
A12
C10 20/GREY/PINK
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 10

D04-AB/MDL655
10 x #14 AWG

120 Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-451

TO SHEET 30 TO SHEET 30

20 x .25
MOTOR No. 3 STATUS Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
MOTOR No. 4 STATUS CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 29 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-01 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 29 C/D03
B + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI2 FROM SHEET 29

#549
MERGED 1/ B/D04
K481+K482 B11
N.O. 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XHH0001
634 22 J1
1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
B-01 (SEE TSLD PDR640 SHT 31)

633 21
B11/RED/BLUE
1/ 1/ 8
B11
C11
INCOMING CC-354 FROM

632
8/RED/BLUE
Rack: 3
631
+ Slot: 4
Point: 11
4 x #14 AWG

120 Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-354

D04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 30 TO SHEET 30

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 30 C/D03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI2 FROM SHEET 30

#550
MERGED 1/ B/D04
K482 + K483 B12
N.O. 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XHH0002
638 24 J1
C
B-01 (SEE TSLD PDR640 SHT 31

3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG
637 23
A11/YELLOW
INCOMING CC-354 FROM

3/ 1/ 21
A11
636 C12 21/YELLOW
Rack: 3
635
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 12

D04-AB/MDL655
4 x #14 AWG

120 Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-354

TO SHEET 31 TO SHEET 31

20 x .25
NEUTRAL RESISTANCE FAULT - 1st STAGE FAULT Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
NEUTRAL RESISTANCE FAULT - 2nd STAGE FAULT CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 30 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-01 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 30 C/D03
B + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI2 FROM SHEET 30

1/ B/D04
#559 B13
K310 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZSLEE3A
NC
541 26 J1
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
542 25
B10/GREEN
1/ 9
B10
C13 9/GREEN
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
Point: 13
10 x #14 AWG

120 Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-355

D04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 31 TO SHEET 31

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 31 C/D03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI2 FROM SHEET 31

1/ B/D04
B14
#560 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZSLEE3C
K330
545 28 J1
NO 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
546 27
A10/BROWN/GREEN
1/ 22
A10
C14 22/BROWN/GREEN
1 Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 14

D04-AB/MDL655
10 x #14 AWG

120 Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-355

TO SHEET 32 TO SHEET 32

20 x .25
EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-3A - CLOSED POSITION (1B-01) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-3C - CLOSED POSITION (1B-01) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 31 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-01 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 31 C/D03
B + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI2 FROM SHEET 31

1/ B/D04
#561 B15
K410 6/ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZSLEE4A
NO
556 30 J1
5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
555 29
B9/WHITE/YELLOW
1/ 10
B9
C15 10/WHITE/YELLOW
Rack: 3
+ Slot: 4
Point: 15
10 x #14 AWG

120 Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-355

D04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 32 TO SHEET 32

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 32 C/D03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI2 FROM SHEET 32

1/ B/D04
#562 B16
K430 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZSLEE4C
NO
561 32 J1
8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
562 31
A9/WHITE/GREEN
1/ 23
A9
C16 23/WHITE/GREEN
Rack: 3
Slot: 4
Point: 16

D04-AB/MDL655
10 x #14 AWG

Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-355

20 x .25
EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-4A - CLOSED POSITION (1B-01) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-4C - CLOSED POSITION (1B-01) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 32 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-09 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
24 Vdc Power Supply

A1 A11
B/D05
FU17 FU18 J1 YZH1A09
500 ma 500 ma
23 23/BLACK A5/BLACK A5

20 20/RED A6/RED A6

28 28/GREY/BROWN A1/GREY/BROWN A1

C +

D05-AB/MDL753
24 Vdc Rack: 3
TO SHEET 38 Slot: 5
-X114 YDO1 Point: 1
1/ Module DO1C693MDL753
#613 C1
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG

20x,5
103 1
TRIP
2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU1
2
1/ 1A

D1
2/
118

INTERFACE MODULE
4x# 14 AWG
CC-374

16SR MDL753
C/D05

FROM SHEET 38
J1
24 Vdc
B/D05
+
10 YZL1A09
C +
-X114 YDO1 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 39 10/WHITE/PINK B1/WHITE/PINK B1
1/
#614 C2
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 3
111 3
CLOSE Slot: 5

D05-AB/MDL753
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU2 Point: 2
112 4
1A Module DO1C693MDL753
1/
D2
CC-374
4x# 14 AWG

INTERFACE MODULE

20x,5
16SR MDL753
C/D05

OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-09 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 38 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-08 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
FROM SHEET 38 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D05
YZH1A08
C + 29
-X114 YDO1 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 39 29/GREY A2/GREY
1/
A2
#602 C3
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 3
103 5
TRIP Slot: 5
2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 3 Point: 3

D05-AB/MDL753
6
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D3
2/
118

20X,25
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-371

FROM SHEET 39 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D05
YZL1A08
C + 11
-X114 YDO1 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 40 11/PURPLE B2/PURPLE
1/
B2
C4
#603 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 3
111 7
N.O. Slot: 5
CLOSE 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 4 Point: 4

D05-AB/MDL753
112 8
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D4

20X,25
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-371

OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-08 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 39 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-07 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
FROM SHEET 39 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D05
YZH1A07
C + 30
-X114 YDO1 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 40 30/YELLOW/BROWN A3/YELLOW/BROWN
1/
A3
#591 C5
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 3
103 9
TRIP Slot: 5
2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 5 Point: 5

D05-AB/MDL753
10
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D5
2/
118

20X,25
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-368

FROM SHEET 40 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D05
YZL1A07
C + 12
-X114 YDO1 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 41 12/GREY/PINK B3/GREY/PINK
1/
B3
#592 C6
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 3
111 11
CLOSE Slot: 5
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 6 Point: 6

D05-AB/MDL753
112 12
1A Module DO IC693MDL753
1/
D6

20X,25
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-368

OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 40 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
CJB-702 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
FROM SHEET 40 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D05
YZS0001
C + 31
-X702 YDO1 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 41 31/YELLOW A4/YELLOW
1/
A4
# 772 C7
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 3
1 13
TRIP ORDER Slot: 5
FROM 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 7 Point: 7

D05-AB/MDL753
2 14
SINCOR 1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D7

20X,25
24 x # 14 AWG
CC-452

FROM SHEET 41 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D05
YZS0002
C + 13
-X702 YDO1 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 42 13/RED/BLUE B4/RED/BLUE
1/
B4
# 774 C8
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 3
3 15
TRIP ORDER Slot: 5
FROM 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 8 Point: 8

D05-AB/MDL753
4 16
SINCOR 1A Module DO IC693MDL753
1/
D8

20X,25
24 x # 14 AWG
CC-452

MOTOR No. 1 TRIP ORDER Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
MOTOR No. 2 TRIP ORDER CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 41 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
CJB-702 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
FROM SHEET 41 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D05
YZS0003
C + 32
X702 YDO1 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 42 32/GREEN B12/GREEN
1/
B12
# 776 C9
N.O. 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 3
5 17
TRIP ORDER Slot: 5
FROM 6/ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 9 Point: 9

D05-AB/MDL753
6 18
SINCOR 1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D9

20X,25
24 x # 14 AWG
CC-452

FROM SHEET 42 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/D05
+ C/D05
YZS0004
C + 14
X702 YDO1 24 Vdc
14/BROWN/GREENREDA12/BROWN/GREEN
1/
A12
# 778 C10
N.O. 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 3
7 19
TRIP ORDER Slot: 5
FROM 8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 10 Point: 10

D05-AB/MDL753
8 20
SINCOR 1A Module DO IC693MDL753
1/
D10

20X,25
24 x # 14 AWG
CC-452

MOTOR No. 3 TRIP ORDER Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
MOTOR No. 4 TRIP ORDER CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 42 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICVAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-06 MARSH. CAB.412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

A A

7 8 INTERFACE MODULE 1 2
A 16E0+
-X531 YDI3 FU1 FU2 C/E01 FU3 FU4

2/
#665 A9 B/E03
S21 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG
N.O.
532 2 J1 ZLR1B06
C
531 1/ 1/ 1 1/ 1c x #18AWG 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
A5
1/ 3
C1 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
A1

Rack: 4
+ - + Slot: 3
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Point: 1

CC-386

E03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 48 TO SHEET 48 Module DI: IC693MDL655

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 48 C/E01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI3 TO SHEET 48

1/ B/E03
#666 A10
Q51 1/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL1B06
N.O.
401 4 J1
1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
3
B1/RED
2/ 1/ 16
B1
403 C2 16/RED
Rack: 4
Slot: 3
+ - Point: 2

E03-AB/MDL655
2 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-385

TO SHEET 49 TO SHEET 49

20 x .25
REMOTE MODE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 48 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-06 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 48 C/E01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 48

1/ B/E03
#667 A11
SERIES 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA1B06
NC
557 6 J1
K1AS+ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
5
K496+ A2/WHITE/GREY
F102 1/ 4
A2
C3 4/WHITE/GREY
4/ Rack: 4
592
+ Slot: 3
Point: 3
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-386

E03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 49 TO SHEET 49

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 49 C/E01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 49

1/ B/E03
#668 A12
SERIES 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XAH1B06
N.C.
587 8 J1
F317+ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
7
F301+ B2/BLACK
F101 1/ 17
B2
C4 17/BLACK
6/ Rack: 4
590
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 4

E03-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-386

TO SHEET 50 TO SHEET 50

20 x .25
AVAILABILITY OF CB - 1B-06 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL ALARM - CB - 1B-06 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 49 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-06 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 49 C/E01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 49

1/ B/E03
#669 A13
K861 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XHH1B06
NC
569 10 J1
8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
570 9
A3/GREY/BROWN
1/ 5
A3
C5 5/GREY/BROWN
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
Point: 5
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-386

E03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 50 TO SHEET 50

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 50 C/E01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 50

1/ B/E03
#670 A14
SERIES 9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG EAH1B06
NC
566 12 J1
K495+ 10/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
11
F113 B3/WHITE/PINK
1/ 18
B3
C6 18/WHITE/PINK
10/ Rack: 4
594
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 6

E03-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-386

TO SHEET 51 TO SHEET 51

20 x .25
GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 50 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-07 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 50 C/E01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 50

1/ B/E03
#676 A15
S21 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZLR1B07
N.O.
532 14 J1
1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
531 13
A4/GREY
1/ 6
A4
C7 6/GREY
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
Point: 7
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-389

E03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 51 TO SHEET 51

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 51 C/E01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI3 FROM SHEET 51

1/ B/E03
#677 A16
Q51 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL1B07
N.O.
401 16 J1
2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
15
B4/PURPLE
2/ 1/ 19
B4
403 C8 19/PURPLE
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 8

E03-AB/MDL655
2 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-388

TO SHEET 52 TO SHEET 52

20 x .25
REMOTE MODE - CB - 1B-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION - CB - 1B-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 51 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-07 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 51 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 51

1/ B/E03
#678 B9
SERIES 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA1B07
NC
557 18 J1
K1AS+ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
17
K496+ B12/YELLOW/BROWN
F102 1/ 7
B12
C9 7/YELLOW/BROWN
4/ Rack: 4
592
+ Slot: 3
Point: 9
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-389

E03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 52 TO SHEET 52

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 52 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 52

1/ B/E03
#679 B10
SERIES 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XAH1B07
NC
587 20 J1
F317+ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
19
F301+ A12/GREY/PINK
F101 1/ 20
A12
C10 20/GREY/PINK
6/ Rack: 4
590
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 10

E03-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-389

TO SHEET 53 TO SHEET 53

20 x .25
AVAILABILITY OF CB - 1B-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL ALARM - CB - 1B-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 52 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-07 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 52 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 52

1/ B/E03
#680 B11
K861 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XHH1B07
NC
569 22 J1
8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
570 21
B11/RED/BLUE
1/ 8
B11
C11 8/RED/BLUE
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 11
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-389

E03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 53 TO SHEET 53

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 53 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 53

1/ B/E03
#681 B12
SERIES 9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG EAH1B07
NC
566 24 J1
K495+ 10/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
23
F113 A11/YELLOW
1/ 21
A11
C12 21/YELLOW
10/ Rack: 4
594
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 12

E03-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-389

TO SHEET 54 TO SHEET 54

20 x .25
GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 53 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-07 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 53 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 53

1/ B/E03
#682 B13
F317 11/ 11/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XR1B07
N.O.
585 26 J1
12/ 12/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
586 25
B10/GREEN
1/ 9
B10
C13 9/GREEN
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 13
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-389

E03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 54 TO SHEET 54

20 x .25
ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
INTERFACE MODULE
32-EE-371 MARSH. CAB 412 120V From 16EO+
Sheet 54 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

TBRA YDI3 FROM SHEET 54

1/ B/E03
#744 B14
CHR A 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA371A
NC
3 28 J1
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
4 27
A10/BROWN/GREEN
1/ 22
A10
C14 22/BROWN/GREEN
1 Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 14

E03-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-418

TO SHEET 55 TO SHEET 55

20 x .25
RECLOSER OPERATING - CB - 1B-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
FAILURE BATTERY CHARGER # 1 (32-EE-371) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 54 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
32-EE-371 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 54 C/E01
B + - + 24 Vdc

TBRB YDI3 FROM SHEET 54

1/ B/E03
#745 B15
CHRGB 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA371B
NC
3 30 J1
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
4 29
B9/WHITE/YELLOW
1/ 10
B9
C15 10/WHITE/YELLOW
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 15
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-418

E03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 55 TO SHEET 55

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 55 C/E01
TBRA B + - + 24 Vdc

TBRB YDI3 FROM SHEET 55

#746
CHGR#A CHR B 1/ B/E03
NC NC B16
5/ XA371C
10 J1
6/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
10 9 32
A9/WHITE/GREEN
6/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG 1/ 23
A9
9 31 C16 23/WHITE/GREEN
Rack: 4
Slot: 3
Point: 16

E03-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-418

20 x .25
FAILURE BATTERY CHARGER # 2 (32-EE-371) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
BATTERY CHARGER EARTH FAULT (32-EE-371) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 55 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
32-EE-371 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

A A

7 8 INTERFACE MODULE 1 2
TBRA A 16E0+
TBRB YDI3 FU1 FU2 C/E02 FU3 FU4
#747
CHGRA CHGRB 1/
NC NC A9 B/E03
7/
15 J1 XA371D
7/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
15 14 34
13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG
A5
14 33
1/ 3
C1 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
A1

Rack: 4
+ - + Slot: 3
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Point: 17

CC-418

E03-CD/MDL655
TO SHEET 56 TO SHEET 56 Module DI: IC693MDL655

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 56 C/E02
TBRA A + - + 24 Vdc

TBRB YDI3 FROM SHEET 56

#748
CHGRA CHGRB 1/ B/E03
NC NC A10
9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA371E
2 36 J1
10/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
2 1 35
B1/RED
10/ 1/ 16
B1
1 C2 16/RED
Rack: 4
Slot: 3
+ - Point: 18

E03-CD/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-418

TO SHEET 57 TO SHEET 57

20 x .25
RECTIFIER FAULT (32-EE-371) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
DC LOW VOLTAGE ALARM (32-EE-371) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 56 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
2A-02 MARSH. CAB 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
FROM SHEET 56 C/E02
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 56

1/ B/E03
#720 A11
MERGED 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XAH500
N.O.
561 38 J1
K471+ 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
562 37
K472+ A2/WHITE/GREY
K473 1/ 4
A2
C3 4/WHITE/GREY
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
Point: 19
4 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-403

E03-CD/MDL655
TO SHEET 56 TO SHEET 56

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 56 C/E02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI3 FROM SHEET 56

1/ B/E03
#721 A12
MERGED 3/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XAHH500
N.O.
559 39 J1
K471+ 4/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
560 40
K472+ B2/BLACK
K473+ 1/ 17
B2
K474 C4 17/BLACK
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 20

E03-CD/MDL655
4 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-403

TO SHEET 58 TO SHEET 58

20 x .25
GENERAL ALARM TRANSFO TR-2 (32-SG-02) (THROUGH 2A-02) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL FAULT TRANSFO TR-2 (32-SG-2) (THROUGH 2A-02) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 57 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
MARSH. CAB. 411 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 57 C/E02
A + 24 Vdc

XA YDI3 FROM SHEET 57

MERGED 1/ B/E03
N.O. A13
LS1A+ 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA605A
LS2A+
12 42 J1
LS3A 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
11 41
A3/GREY/BROWN
1/ 5
A3
C5 5/GREY/BROWN
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
Point: 21
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-244

E03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 58 TO SHEET 58

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 58 C/E02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-XB YDI3 FROM SHEET 58

MERGED 1/ B/E03
N.O. A14
LS1B+ 12/ 12/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA605B
LS2B+
12 44 J1
LS3B 11/ 11/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
11 43
B3/WHITE/PINK
1/ 18
B3
C6 18/WHITE/PINK
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 22

E03-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-244

TO SHEET 59 TO SHEET 59

20 x .25
GT_A TRIPPED Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GT_B TRIPPED CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 58 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
MARSH. CAB. 411 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 58 C/E02
A + - + 24 Vdc

-XC YDI3 FROM SHEET 58

1/ B/E03
MERGED A15
N.O. 8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA605C
LS1C+
12 46 J1
LS2C+ 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
11 45
LS * A4/GREY
1/ 6
A4
C7 6/GREY
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
Point: 23
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-244

E03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 59 TO SHEET 59

20 x .25
LS * REPESENTS A SERIES
NO CONTACT OF
LS3C+LS4C INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 59 C/E01
A + - + 24 Vdc

FROM SHEET 59

A16
J1
C
B4/PURPLE
19
B4
C8 19/PURPLE
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 24

E03-AB/MDL655
120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

TO SHEET 60 TO SHEET 60

20 x .25
GT_C TRIPPED Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:

CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 59 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-08 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

A A

7 8 INTERFACE MODULE 1 2
A 16E0+
-X531 YDI4 FU1 FU2 C/E03 FU3 FU4

1/
#687 A9 B/E04
S21 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG
N.O.
531 2 J1 ZLR1B08
C
532 2/ 2/ 1 1/ 1c x #18AWG 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
A5
1/ 3
C1 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
A1

Rack: 4
+ - + Slot: 4
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Point: 1

CC-392

E04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 60 TO SHEET 60 Module DI: IC693MDL655

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 60 C/E03
A + - 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI4 TO SHEET 60

1/ B/E03
#688 A10
Q51 1/ 1/ 4/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL1B08
N.O.
401 4 J1
2/ 3/ 1c x #18AWG C
3
B1/RED
2/ 1/ 16
B1
403 C2 16/RED
Rack: 4
Slot: 4
+ - Point: 2

E04-AB/MDL655
2 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-391

TO SHEET 61 TO SHEET 61

20 x .25
REMOTE MODE - CB - 1B-08 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 60 X1
34.5 Kv CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-08 MARSH. CAB 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 60 C/E03
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 60

1/ B/E04
#689 A11
SERIES 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG X1AB08
NC
557 6 J1
K1AS+ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
5
K496+ A2/WHITE/GREY
F102 1/ 4
A2
C3 4/WHITE/GREY
4/ Rack: 4
592
+ Slot: 4
Point: 3
10 x # 14 AWG

24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-392

E04-AB/MDL655
120Vdc TO SHEET 61
TO SHEET 61

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 61 C/E03
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 61

1/ B/E04
#690 A12
SERIES 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XAH1B08
NC
587 8 J1
F317+ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
7
F301+ B2/BLACK
F101 1/ 17
B2
C4 17/BLACK
6/ Rack: 4
590
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 4

E04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-392

TO SHEET 62 TO SHEET 62

20 x .25
AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL ALARM - CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 61 X1
34.5 Kv CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-08 MARSH. CAB 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 61 C/E03
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 61

1/ B/E04
#691 A13
K861 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XHH1B08
NC
569 10 J1
8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
570 9
A3/GREY/BROWN
1/ 5
A3
C5 5/GREY/BROWN
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
Point: 5
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-392

E04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 62 TO SHEET 62

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 62 C/E03
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 62

1/ B/E04
#692 A14
SERIES 9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG EAH1B08
NC
566 12 J1
K495+ 10/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
11
F113 B3/WHITE/PINK
1/ 18
B3
C6 18/WHITE/PINK
10/ Rack: 4
594
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 6

E04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-392

TO SHEET 63 TO SHEET 63

20 x .25
GENERAL TRIP - CIRCUIT BREAKER - 1B-08 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT - CIRCUIT BREAKER - 1B-08 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 62 X1
34.5 Kv CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-09 MARSH. CAB 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 62 C/E03
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 62

1/ B/E04
#699 A15
S21 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZLR1B09
N.O.
532 14 J1
1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
531 13
A4/GREY
1/ 6
A4
C7 6/GREY
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
Point: 7
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-395

E04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 63 TO SHEET 63

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 63 C/E03
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI4 FROM SHEET 63

1/ B/E04
#700 A16
Q51 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZSL1B09
N.O.
401 16 J1
2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
15
B4/PURPLE
2/ 1/ 19
B4
403 C8 19/PURPLE
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 8

E04-AB/MDL655
2 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-394

TO SHEET 64 TO SHEET 64

20 x .25
REMOTE MODE - CIRCUIT BREAKER - 1B-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 63 X1
34.5 Kv CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-09 MARSH. CAB 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 63 C/E03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 63

1/ B/E04
#701 B9
SERIES 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XA1B09
NC
557 18 J1
K1AS+ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
17
K496+ B12/YELLOW/BROWN
F102 1/ 7
B12
C9 7/YELLOW/BROWN
4/ Rack: 4
592
+ Slot: 4
Point: 9
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-395

E04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 64 TO SHEET 64

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 64 C/E03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 64

1/ B/E04
#702 B10
SERIES 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XAH1B09
F317+
587 20 J1
F301+ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
19
F101 A12/GREY/PINK
1/ 20
A12
C10 20/GREY/PINK
6/ Rack: 4
590
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 10

E04-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-395

TO SHEET 65 TO SHEET 65

20 x .25
AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GENERAL ALARM CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 64 X1
34.5 Kv CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-09 MARSH. CAB 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 64 C/E03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 64

1/ B/E04
#703 B11
K861 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XHH1B09
NC
569 22 J1
8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
570 21
B11/RED/BLUE
1/ 8
B11
C11 8/RED/BLUE
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 11
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-395

E04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 65 TO SHEET 65

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 65 C/E03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 65

1/ B/E04
#704 B12
SERIES 9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG EAH1B09
NC
566 24 J1
K495+ 10/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
23
F113 A11/YELLOW
1/ 21
A11
C12 21/YELLOW
10/ Rack: 4
594
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 12

E04-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-395

TO SHEET 66 TO SHEET 66

20 x .25
GENERAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CRITICAL CONTROL FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 65 X1
 34.5 Kv CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-09 MARSH. CAB 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 65 C/E03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 65

1/ B/E04
#705 B13
F317 11/ 11/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XR1B09
N.O.
585 26 J1
12/ 12/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
586 25
B10/GREEN
1/ 9
B10
C13 9/GREEN
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 13
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-395

E04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 66 TO SHEET 66

20 x .25
ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01

CJB-702 MARSH. CAB. 412 INTERFACE MODULE

120V From 16EO+
Sheet 66 C/E03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X702 YDI4 FROM SHEET 66

#779 1/ B/E04
NC B14
SIGNALS 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZSA0005
PROVIDED
41 28 J1
BY SINCOR 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
42 27
A10/BROWN/GREEN
1/ 22
A10
C14 22/BROWN/GREEN
1 Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 14

E04-AB/MDL655
24 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-384

TO SHEET 67 TO SHEET 67

20 x .25
RECLOSER OPERATING CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
MOTOR No. 5 STATUS CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 66 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
CJB-702 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 66 C/E03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X702 YDI4 FROM SHEET 66

1/ B/E04
#781 B15
NC 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZSA0006
SIGNALS
43 30 J1
PROVIDED 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
44 29
BY SINCOR B9/WHITE/YELLOW
B9
1/ 10
C15 10/WHITE/YELLOW
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 15
24 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-384

E04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 67 TO SHEET 67

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 67 C/E03
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X702 YDI4 FROM SHEET 67

1/ B/E04
#783 B16
NC 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG ZSA0007
SIGNALS
45 32 J1
PROVIDED 6/ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
46 31
BY SINCOR A9/WHITE/GREEN
A9
1/ 23
C16 23/WHITE/GREEN
Rack: 4
Slot: 4
Point: 16

E04-AB/MDL655
24 x # 14 AWG

Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-384

20 x .25
MOTOR No. 6 STATUS Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
MOTOR No. 7 STATUS CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 67 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
CJB-702 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

A A

7 8 INTERFACE MODULE 1 2
A 16E0+
-X702 YDI4 FU1 FU2 C/E04 FU3 FU4

1/
#785 A9 B/E04
NC 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG
SIGNALS
47 34 J1 ZSA0008
PROVIDED C
BY SINCOR 48 8/ 8/ 33 1/ 1c x #18AWG 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
A5
1/ 3
C1 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
A1

Rack: 4
24 x # 14 AWG

+ - + Slot: 4
CC-384

120 V 24 Vdc Point: 17

E04-CD/MDL655
TO SHEET 68 TO SHEET 68 Module DI: IC693MDL655

20 x .25
34.5 KV SWITCHGEAR

1B-01 MARSH. CAB. 412 INTERFACE MODULE

120V From 16EO+
Sheet 68 C/E04
A + - 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 68

1/ B/E04
#636 A10
K320 1/ 1/ 1/ ZSLEE3B
NC 543 36 J1
2/ 2/ C
544 35 2/ B1/RED
2/ 16
B1
C2 16/RED
Rack: 4
Slot: 4
+ - Point: 18

E04-CD/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-511

TO SHEET 69 TO SHEET 69

20 x .25
MOTOR No. 8 STATUS Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:

EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-3B CLOSED POSITION (1B-01) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 68 X1

34.5 KV CELLS 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-01 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
FROM SHEET 68 C/E04
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 68

1/ B/E04
#637 A11
K340 3/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSLEE3D
NC
551 38 J1
4/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
552 37
A2/WHITE/GREY
1/ 4
A2
C3 4/WHITE/GREY
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
Point: 19
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-511

E04-CD/MDL655
TO SHEET 69 TO SHEET 69

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet C/E04
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI4 FROM SHEET 69

1/ B/E04
#638 A12
K420 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSLEE4B
NC
559 40 J1
6/ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
560 39
B2/BLACK
1/ 17
B2
C4 17/BLACK
Rack: 4
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 20

E04-CD/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

To Sheet 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-511

20 x .25
EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-3D CLOSED POSITION (1B-01) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
EARTH SWITCH 32-EE-4B CLOSED POSITION (1B-01) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 69 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL CUILDING G/S-01
1B-06 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
24 Vdc Power Supply

A1 A11
B/E05
FU17 FU18 J1 YZH1B06
500 ma 500 ma
23 23/BLACK A5/BLACK A5

20 20/RED A6/RED A6

28 28/GREY/BROWN A1/GREY/BROWN A1

C +

E05-AB/MDL753
24 Vdc Rack: 4
TO SHEET 74 Slot: 5
-X114 YDO2 Point: 1
1/ Module DO1C693MDL753
#663 C1
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG

20x,5
103 1
TRIP
2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU1
2
1/ 1A

D1
2/
118

INTERFACE MODULE
4x# 14 AWG
CC-387

16SR MDL753
C/E05

FROM SHEET 74
J1
24 Vdc
B/E05
+
10 YZL1B06
C +
-X114 YDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 75 10/WHITE/PINK B1/WHITE/PINK B1
1/
#664 C2
N.O 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 4
111 3
CLOSE Slot: 5

E05-AB/MDL753
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU2 Point: 2
112 4
1A Module DO1C693MDL753
1/
D2
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-387

INTERFACE MODULE

20x,5
16SR MDL753
C/E05

OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-06 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 74 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-07 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
FROM SHEET 74 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZH1B07
C + 29
-X114 YDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 75 29/GREY A2/GREY
1/
A2
#674 C3
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 4
104 5
TRIP Slot: 5
2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU 3 Point: 3
6

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D3
2/
118

20X,25
4x # 14 AWG
CC-390

FROM SHEET 75 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZL1B07
C + 11
-X114 YDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 76 11/PURPLE B2/PURPLE
1/
B2
#675 C4
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 4
111 7
CLOSE Slot: 5
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU 4 Point: 4
112 8

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D4

20X,25
4x # 14 AWG
CC-390

OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 75 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-08 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
FROM SHEET 75 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZH1B08
C + 30
-X114 YDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 76 30/YELLOW/BROWN A3/YELLOW/BROWN
1/
A3
#685 C5
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 4
104 9
TRIP Slot: 5
2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU 5 Point: 5
10

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D5
2/
118

20X,25
4x # 14 AWG
CC-393

FROM SHEET 76 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZL1B08
C + 12
-X114 YDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 77 12/GREY/PINK B3/GREY/PINK
1/
B3
#686 C6
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 4
111 11
CLOSE Slot: 5
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU 6 Point: 6
112 12

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D6

20X,25
4x # 14 AWG
CC-393

OPEN ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER CIRCUIT BREAKER 1B-08 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 76 X1
34.5 kV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-09 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
FROM SHEET 76 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZH1B09
C + 31
-X114 YDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 77 31/YELLOW A4/YELLOW
1/
A4
#697 C7
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 4
104 13
TRIP Slot: 5
2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU 7 Point: 7
14

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D7
2/
118

20X,25
4x # 14 AWG
CC-396

FROM SHEET 77 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZL1B09
C + 13
-X114 YDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 78 13/RED/BLUE B4/RED/BLUE
1/
B4
#698 C8
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 4
111 15
CLOSE Slot: 5
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU 8 Point: 8
112 16

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D8

20X,25
4x # 14 AWG
CC-396

OPEN ORDER -CB - 1B-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER - CB - 1B-09 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 77 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
CJB-702 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
FROM SHEET 77 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZS0005
C + 32
-X702 YDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 78 32/GREEN B12/GREEN
#780 1/
B12
N.O. C9
11/ 11/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 4
11 17
Slot: 5
TRIP 12/ 12/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU 9 Point: 9
12 18

E05-AB/MDL753
ORDER 1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
FROM 1/
SINCOR D9

20X,25
24 x # 14 AWG
CC-452

FROM SHEET 78 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZS0006
C + 14
-X702 YDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 79 14/BROWN/GREEN A12/BROWN/GREEN
1/
A12
#782 C10
N.O. 13/ 13/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 4
13 19
TRIP Slot: 5
ORDER 14/ 14/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU 10 Point: 10
14 20

E05-AB/MDL753
FROM 1A Module DO IC693MDL753
SINCOR 1/
D10

20X,25
24 x # 14 AWG
CC-452

MOTOR No. 5 TRIP ORDER Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
MOTOR No. 6 TRIP ORDER CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 78 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
CJB-702 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
FROM SHEET 78 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZS0007
C + 33
-X702 YDO2 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 79 33/WHITE/YELLOW B11/WHITE/YELLOW
#784 1/
B11
N.O. C11
15/ 15/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 4
15 21
TRIP Slot: 5
ORDER 16/ 16/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU 11 Point: 11
16 22

E05-AB/MDL753
FROM 1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
SINCOR 1/
D11

20X,25
24 x # 14 AWG
CC-452

FROM SHEET 79 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZS0008
C + 15
-X702 YDO2 24 Vdc
15/WHITE/GREEN A12/WHITE/GREEN
1/
A11
#786 C12
N.O. 17/ 17/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 4
17 23
Slot: 5
TRIP 18/ 18/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU 12 Point: 12
18 24

E05-AB/MDL753
ORDER 1A Module DO IC693MDL753
FROM 1/
SINCOR D12

20X,25
24 x # 14 AWG
CC-452

MOTOR No. 7 TRIP ORDER Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
MOTOR No. 8 TRIP ORDER CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 79 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
2A-02 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

A A

A7 A8 INTERFACE MODULE A1 A2
A 16E0+
-X531 YDI5 FU1 FU2 C/F01 FU3 FU4

1/
#713 A9 B/F03
F301 1/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG
N.O.
535 2 J1 ZSL2A02
C
536 2/ 1/ 1 1/ 1c x #18 AWG 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
A5
1/ 3
C1 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
A1

Rack: 5
+ - + Slot: 3
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Point: 1

CC-402

F03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 85 TO SHEET 85 Module DI: IC693MDL655

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 85 C/F01
A + - 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI5 TO SHEET 85

1/ B/F03
#714 A10
SERIES 4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG XA2A02
NC
563 4 J1
SPRING+ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG C
3
CBTRUCK B1/RED
1/ 16
B1
C2 16/RED
3/ Rack: 5
539
Slot: 3
+ - Point: 2

F03-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-402

TO SHEET 86 TO SHEET 86

20 x .25
CLOSED POSITION 2A-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 85 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
2A-02 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
FROM SHEET 85 C/F01
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI5 FROM SHEET 85

1/ B/F03
#715 A11
F27.B 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG EAL2A02
N.C.
550 6 J1
6/ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
551 5
A2/WHITE/GREY
1/ 4
A2
C3 4/WHITE/GREY
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 3
Point: 3
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-402

F03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 86 T0 SHEET 86

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
2A-01 MARSH.CAB.412 120V From 16EO+
Sheet 86 C/F01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI5 FROM SHEET 86

1/ B/F03
#709 A12
Q51 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL2A01
N.O.
535 8 J1
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
536 7
B2/BLACK
1/ 17
B2
C4 17/BLACK
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 4

F03-AB/MDL655
4 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-400

TO SHEET 87 T0 SHEET 87

20 x .25
UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM - 2A-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION - 2A-01 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 86 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
2A-01 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 86 C/F01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI5 FROM SHEET 86

1/ B/F03
#710 A13
SERIES 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA2A01
SPRING +
539 10 J1
CBTRCK 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
9
A3/GREY/BROWN
1/ 5
A3
C5 5/GREY/BROWN
4/ Rack: 5
545
+ Slot: 3
Point: 5
4 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-400

F03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 87 T0 SHEET 87

20 x .25
2B-07 INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 87 C/F01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI5 FROM SHEET 87

1/ B/F03
#731 A14
Q51 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL2B07
N.O.
535 12 J1
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
536 11
B3/WHITE/PINK
1/ 18
B3
C6 18/WHITE/PINK
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 6

F03-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-412

TO SHEET 88 T0 SHEET 88

20 x .25
AVAILBILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A-01 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 2B-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 87 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
2B-07 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 87 C/F01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI5 FROM SHEET 87

#732 1/ B/F03
SERIES A15
NC 4/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA2B07
CBTRUCK
563 14 J1
CB TRUCK 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
13
A4/GREY
1/ 6
A4
C7 6/GREY
3/ Rack: 5
539
+ Slot: 3
Point: 7
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-412

F03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 88 T0 SHEET 88

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 88 C/F01
A + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI5 FROM SHEET 88

1/ B/F03
#733 A16
F27.B1 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG EAL2B07
NC
553 16 J1
6/ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
554 15
B4/PURPLE
1/ 19
B4
C8 19/PURPLE
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 8

F03-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-412

TO SHEET 89 T0 SHEET 89

20 x .25
AVAILABILITY OF CIRCUIT BREAKER 2B-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM 2B-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 88 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
CUB 1.1 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 88 C/F01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI5 FROM SHEET 88

1/ B/F03
#722 B9
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL2A04
1 18 J1
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
2 17
B12/YELLOW/BROWN
1/ 7
B12
C9 7/YELLOW/BROWN
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 3
Point: 9
4 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-405

F03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 89 T0 SHEET 89

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 89 C/F01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI5 FROM SHEET 89

1/ B/F03
#723 B10
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL2A06
11 20 J1
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
12 19
A12/GREY/PINK
1/ 20
A12
C10 20/GREY/PINK
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 10

F03-AB/MDL655
4 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-405

TO SHEET 90 T0 SHEET 90

20 x .25
CLOSED POSITION 2A-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION 2A-06 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 89 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
CUB 1.1 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 89 C/F01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI5 FROM SHEET 89

1/ B/F03
#724 B11
SERIES 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA2A00
NC
1 22 J1
CBA01 2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
2 21
to B11/RED/BLUE
CBA08 1/ 8
B11
C11 8/RED/BLUE
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 11
2 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-413

F03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 90 T0 SHEET 90

20 x .25
CUB 4.1 INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 90 C/F01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI5 FROM SHEET 90

1/ B/F03
#725 B12
CB 11/ 11/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL2B01
N.O.
11 24 J1
12/ 12/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
12 23
A11/YELLOW
1/ 21
A11
C12 21/YELLOW
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 12

F03-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-406

TO SHEET 91 T0 SHEET 91

20 x .25
COMMON FAULT - LV BREAKERS - BUSBAR A Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION CIRCUIT BREAKER 2B-01 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 90 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
CUB 4.1 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 90 C/F01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI5 FROM SHEET 90

1/ B/F03
#726 B13
CB 9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL2B02
N.O.
9 26 J1
10/ 10/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
10 25
B10/GREEN
1/ 9
B10
C13 9/GREEN
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 13
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-406

F03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 91 T0 SHEET 91

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 91 C/F01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI5 FROM SHEET 91

1/ B/F03
#727 B14
CB 7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL2B03
N.O.
7 28 J1
8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
8 27
A10/BROWN/GREEN
1/ 22
A10
C14 22/BROWN/GREEN
1 Rack: 5
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 14

F03-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-406

TO SHEET 92 T0 SHEET 92

20 x .25
CLOSED POSITION 2B-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION 2B-03 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 91 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
CUB 4.1 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 91 C/F01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI5 FROM SHEET 91

1/ B/F03
#728 B15
CB 5/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL2B04
N.O.
5 30 J1
6/ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
6 29
B9/WHITE/YELLOW
1/ 10
B9
C15 10/WHITE/YELLOW
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 3
+ - Point: 15
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-406

F03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 92 T0 SHEET 92

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 92 C/F01
B + - + 24 Vdc

-X401 YDI5 FROM SHEET 92

1/ B/F03
#729 B16
CB 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL2B05
N.O.
3 32 J1
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
4 31
A9/WHITE/GREEN
1/ 23
A9
C16 23/WHITE/GREEN
Rack: 5
Slot: 3
Point: 16

F03-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-406

20 x .25
CLOSED POSITION 2B-04 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSED POSITION 2B-05 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 92 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
CUB. 4.1 MARSH. CAB 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

A A

7 8 INTERFACE MODULE 1 2
A 16E0+
-X401 YDI5 FU1 FU2 C/F02 FU3 FU4

1/
#730 A9 B/F03
CB 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG
N.O.
1 34 J1 ZSL2B06
C
2 2/ 2/ 33 1/ 1c x #18AWG 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
A5
1/ 3
C1 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
A1

Rack: 5
+ - + Slot: 3
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Point: 17

CC-406

F03-CD/MDL655
TO SHEET 93 TO SHEET 93 Module DI: IC693MDL655

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 93 C/F02
A + - 24 Vdc

YDI5 FROM SHEET 93

A10
36 J1
C
35
16
B1
C2
Rack: 5
Slot: 3
+ - Point: 18

E03-AB/MDL655
To Sheet Module DI: IC693MDL655

20 x .25
CLOSED POSITION - 2B-06 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:

CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 93 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
32-BP-331 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

A A

A7 A8 INTERFACE MODULE A1 A2
A 16E0+
-X531 YDI6 FU1 FU2 C/F03 FU3 FU4

1/
#750 A9 B/F04
SERIES 2/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG
NC
1 2 J1 XA331
C
2 1/ 2/ 1 1/ 1c x #18AWG 13 13/BROWN A5/BROWN
A5
1/ 3
C1 3/BLUE A1/BLUE
A1

Rack: 5
+ - + Slot: 4
2 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Point: 1

CC-419

F04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 100 TO SHEET 100 Module DI: IC693MDL655

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
32-BP-332 120V From 16EO+
Sheet 100 C/F03
A + - 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI6 FROM SHEET 100

1/ B/F04
#752 A10
SERIES 2/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA332
N.O.
1 3 J1
1/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
2 4
B1/RED
1/ 16
B1
C2 16/RED
Rack: 5
Slot: 4
+ - Point: 2

F04-AB/MDL655
2 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-420

TO SHEET 101 TO SHEET 101

20 x .25
COMMON FAULT 32-BP-331 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
COMMON FAULT 32-BP-332 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 100 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
32-DP-351 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
SHEET 100 C/F03
A + 24 Vdc

-X531 YDI6 FROM SHEET 100

1/ B/F04
#754 A11
SUM 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA351
NC
1 6 J1
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
2 5
A2/WHITE/GREY
1/ 4
A2
C3 4/WHITE/GREY
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
Point: 3
2 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-421

F04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 101 TO SHEET 101

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
32-AP-321 / CJB-701 120V From 16EO+
Sheet 101 C/F03
A + - + 24 Vdc

X401 YDI6 FROM SHEET 101

1/ B/F04
#756 A12
HVAC 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA321
NC
3 8 J1
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
4 7
B2/BLACK
1/ 17
B2
C4 17/BLACK
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 4

F04-AB/MDL655
10 x # 14 AWG

CABLED BY AVZ 120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-416

FROM HVAC TO SHEET 102 TO SHEET 102

32-AP-321

20 x .25
COMMON FAULT 32-DP-351 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
COMMON FAULT HVAC 32-AP-321 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 101 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
32-AP-322/CJB-701 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 101 C/F03
A + - + 24 Vdc

X401 YDI6 FROM SHEET 101

1/ B/F04
#758 A13
HVAC 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA322
N.C.
5 10 J1
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
6 9
A3/GREY/BROWN
1/ 5
A3
C5 5/GREY/BROWN
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
Point: 5
10 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-416

F04-AB/MDL655
CABLED BY AVZ TO SHEET 102 TO SHEET 102
FROM HVAC
32-AP-322

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
32-EE-373/CJB-701 MARSH.CAB. 412 120V From 16EO+
Sheet 102 C/F03
A + - + 24 Vdc

TBJ YDI6 FROM SHEET 102

1/ B/F04
#760 A14
PANEL 1/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XAH373A
NC
1 12 J1
2/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
2 11
B3/WHITE/PINK
1/ 18
B3
C6 18/WHITE/PINK
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 6

F04-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

CABLED BY AVZ 120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-415

FROM FIRE PANEL TO SHEET 103 TO SHEET 103

32-EE-373

20 x .25
COMMON FAULT HVAC 32-AP-322 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
FIRE DETECTION PANEL FAULT - 32-EE-373 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 102 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01 34.5 kV SUBSTATION G/S 01
EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 102 C/F03
A + - + 24 Vdc

FROM SHEET 102

B/F04
A15
J1
C
A4/GREY
6
A4
C7 6/GREY
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
Point: 7
120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

F04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 103 TO SHEET 103

20 x .25
32-EE-373/CJB-701 MARSH.CAB. 412 INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 103 C/F03
A + - + 24 Vdc

TBJ YDI6 FROM SHEET 103

1/ B/F04
#761 A16
SMK2 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XAH373C
NC
3 16 J1
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
4 15
B4/PURPLE
1/ 19
B4
C8 19/PURPLE
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 8

F04-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

CABLED BY AVZ 120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC69MDL655

CC-415

FROM FIRE PANEL TO SHEET 104 TO SHEET 104

32-EE-373

20 x .25
Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
FIRE DETECTION ALARM CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 103 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
32-EE-373/CJB-701 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 103 C/F03
B + - + 24 Vdc

TBJ YDI6 FROM SHEET 103

1/ B/F04
#762 B9
GAS 5/ 6/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XAH373D
NC
28 18 J1
6/ 5/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
27 17
B12/YELLOW/BROWN
1/ 7
B12
C9 7/YELLOW/BROWN
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
Point: 9
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-415

F04-AB/MDL655
CABLED BY AVZ TO SHEET 104 TO SHEET 104
FROM GAS PANEL
32-EE-374

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 104 C/F03
B + - + 24 Vdc

TBJ YDI6 FROM SHEET 104

1/ B/F04
#763 B10
GAS 7/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XAH373E
NC
29 20 J1
8/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
30 19
A12/GREY/PINK
1/ 20
A12
C10 20/GREY/PINK
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 10

F04-AB/MDL655
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

CC-415

FROM GAS PANEL TO SHEET 105 TO SHEET 105

32-EE-374

20 x .25
GAS DETECTION PRE ALARM Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
GAS DETECTION ALARM CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 104 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
41-LC-201 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 104 C/F03
B + - + 24 Vdc

TB-2D YDI6 FROM SHEET 104

1/ B/F04
#793 B11
NC 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSL001
19 22 J1
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
20 21
B11/RED/BLUE
1/ 8
B11
C11 8/RED/BLUE
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 11
41-CC-854
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

F04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 105 TO SHEET 105

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 105 C/F03
B + - + 24 Vdc

TB-2D YDI6 FROM SHEET 105

1/ B/F04
#794 B12
NC 3/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZSH001
17 24 J1
4/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
18 23
A11/YELLOW
1/ 21
A11
C12 21/YELLOW
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 12

F04-AB/MDL655
41-CC-854
12 x # 14 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

TO SHEET 106 TO SHEET 106

20 x .25
SHUT DOWN VALVE OPEN POSITION - DIESEL TANK Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
SHUT DOWN VALVE CLOSED POSITION - DIESEL TANK CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 105 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
41-FDCP-900 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 105 C/F03
B + - + 24 Vdc

TB-1 YDI6 FROM SHEET 105

1/ B/F04
#795 B13
NC N/ B/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XAH001
8 26 J1
B/ N/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
9 25
B10/GREEN
1/ 9
B10
C13 9/GREEN
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 13
41-CC-854-1
16 x # 18 AWG

120Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

F04-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 106 TO SHEET 106

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 106 C/F03
B + - + 24 Vdc

TB-2D YDI6 FROM SHEET 106

1/ B/F04
B14
7/ 7/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG LAHH201
23 28 J1
8/ 8/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
24 27
A10/BROWN/GREEN
1/ 22
A10
C14 22/BROWN/GREEN
1 Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 14

F04-AB/MDL655
41-CC-854
12 x # 14 AWG

120 Vdc 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

TO SHEET 107 TO SHEET 107

20 x .25
FIRE DETECTION ALARM - DIESEL TANK Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
LEVEL HIGH HIGH - DIESEL TANK CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 106 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
41-LC-201 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 106 C/F01
B + - + 24 Vdc

TB-2D YDI6 FROM SHEET 106

1/ B/F03
B15
9/ 9/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG ZLR210
21 30 J1
10/ 10/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
22 29
B9/WHITE/YELLOW
1/ 10
B9
C15 10/WHITE/YELLOW
Rack: 5
+ Slot: 4
+ - Point: 15
41-CC-854
12 x # 14 AWG

120 V 24 Vdc Module DI: IC693MDL655

F03-AB/MDL655
TO SHEET 106 T0 SHEET 106

20 x .25
INTERFACE MODULE
120V From 16EO+
Sheet 106 C/F01
B + - + 24 Vdc

TB-2D YDI6 FROM SHEET 106

1/ B/F03
B16
12/ 12/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG XA201
25 32 J1
11/ 11/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG C
26 31
A9/WHITE/GREEN
1/ 23
A9
C16 23/WHITE/GREEN
Rack: 5
Slot: 4
Point: 16

F03-AB/MDL655
41-CC-854
12 x # 14 AWG

Module DI: IC693MDL655

20 x .25
SHUTDOWN VALVE REMOTE MODE - DIESEL TANK Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
SHTDOWN VALVE ALARM - DIESEL TANK CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 107 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
2A-02 2A-02 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
24 Vdc Power Supply

1 11
B/F05
FU17 FU18 J1 YZH2A02
500 ma 500 ma
23 23/BLACK A5/BLACK A5

20 20/RED A6/RED A6

28 28/GREY/BROWN A1/GREY/BROWN A1

C +

F05-AB/MDL753
24 Vdc Rack: 5
TO SHEET 110 Slot: 5
-X114 YDO3 Point: 1
1/ Module DO1C693MDL753
#716 C1
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG

20x,5
119 1
TRIP
2/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU1
2
1/ 1A

D1
2/
129

INTERFACE MODULE
4x# 14 AWG
CC-404

16SR MDL753
C/F05

FROM SHEET 110

J1
24 Vdc
B/F05
+
10 YZL2A02
C +
-X114 YDO3 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 111 10/WHITE/PINK B1/WHITE/PINK B1
3/
#717 C2
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG Rack: 5
116 3
CLOSE Slot: 5

F05-AB/MDL753
4/ 1/ 1c x #18AWG D FU2 Point: 2
4
1/ 1A Module DO1C693MDL753

D2
CC-404
4x# 14 AWG

4/
124
INTERFACE MODULE

20x,5
16SR MDL753
C/F05

OPEN ORDER - INCOMING 32-TR-2 (2A-02) Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER - INCOMING 32-TR-2 (2A-02) CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 110 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
2A-01 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
FROM SHEET 110 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/F05
+ C/F05
YZH2A01
C + 29
-X114 YDO3 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 110 29/GREY A2/GREY
1/
A2
#711 C3
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 5
119 5
TRIP Slot: 5
2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D Point: 3
6

F05-AB/MDL753
Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D3
2/
125

20X,25
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-401

FROM SHEET 110 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/F05
+ C/F05
YZL2A01
C + 11
-X114 YDO3 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 112 11/PURPLE B2/PURPLE
1/
B2
#712 C4
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 5
116 7
CLOSE Slot: 5
4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 4 Point: 4
8

F05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D4
4/
120

20X,25
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-401

OPEN ORDER -- BUS COUPLING - 2A-01 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER - BUS COUPLING - 2A-01 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 111 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
2B-07 MARSH.CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
FROM SHEET 111 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/F05
+ C/F05
YZH2B07
C + 30
-X114 YDO3 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 112 30/YELLOW/BROWN A3/YELLOW/BROWN
1/
A3
#734 C5
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 5
119 9
TRIP Slot: 5
2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 5 Point: 5
10

F05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D5
2/
129

20X,25
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-414

FROM SHEET 112 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/F05
+ C/F05
YZL2B07
C + 12
-X114 YDO3 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 113 12/GREY/PINK B3/GREY/PINK
B3
1/
#735 C6
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 5
116 11
CLOSE Slot: 5
4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 5 Point: 6
12

F05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D6
4/
124

20X,25
4 x # 14 AWG
CC-414

OPEN ORDER - INCOMING EMERG. PWR SUPPLY - 2B-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER - INCOMING EMERG. PWR SUPPLY -2B-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 112 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
41-LC-201 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-411
FROM SHEET 112 INTERFACE MODULE
24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZH201
C + 31
TB-2D YDO3 24 Vdc
TO SHEET 113 31/YELLOW A4/YELLOW
1/
A4
C7
N.O. 1/ 1/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 5
29 13
TRIP Slot: 5
2/ 2/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 7 Point: 7
30 14

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D7
41-CC-854A

20X,25
4x # 14 AWG

FROM SHEET 113 INTERFACE MODULE

24 Vdc 16SR
B/E05
+ C/E05
YZL201
C + 13
-X114 YDO3 24 Vdc
13/RED/BLUE B4/RED/BLUE
1/
B4
C8
N.O. 3/ 3/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG Rack: 5
27 15
CLOSE Slot: 5
4/ 4/ 1/ 1c x #18 AWG D FU 8 Point: 8
28 16

E05-AB/MDL753
1A Module DO: IC693MDL753
1/
D8
41-CC-854A

20X,25
4x # 14 AWG

OPEN ORDER SHUT DOWN VALVE - DIESEL TANK Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.
Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CLOSE ORDER SHUT DOWN VALVE - DIESEL TANK CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 113 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR 34.5 KV SUBSTATION G/S-01
2B-07 MARSH CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
24 Vdc Power Supply

A1 A2
B/F06
C FU1 FU 2 J1 EI2A01B
500 ma 500 ma
-X531 YAI1 15 15/ORANGE 1/ORANGE 19

1A/ 1 1/PURPLE 19/PURPLE 1

2/ 1/ 1A/ C2
545 1
#736 3/YELLOW 11
TRANSD. 1/ 2/ 1B/
546 2
VOLT 1B/ 18 18/YELLOW
C3

F06-P1/ALG223
Sh Rack: 5
PE1-1 Sh 1 Slot: 6
Sh 1 +24 Vdc Point: 1
C4 TO SHEET 116 Module AI: IC693ALG223

12x,22
1pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

16prx#18 AWG + Shield

SC-202

SC-262
INTERFACE MODULE
8EA
C/F07

FROM SHEET 116

-X531 YAI1 + 24 Vdc

B/F06
C
#737
II2B07
TRANSD. 1/ 2/ 2A/ 2A/
AMP
548 3 C6 J1
2/ 1/ 2B/ 19 19/BLUE 4/BLUE 4
547 4
2B/
Sh C7
PE1-2
Sh 2 10 Rack: 5
Sh 2 Slot: 6
C8 +24 Vdc Point: 2
1pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

F06-P1/ALG223
TO SHEET 117 Module AI:
16prx#18 AWG + Shield

IC693ALG223
SC-203

SC-262

INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F07

VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT 2B-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CURRENT MEASUREMENT 2B-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 116 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-06 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
24 Vdc Power Supply

FROM SHEET 116

+24 Vdc

C
-X531 YAI1
B/F06
3A/ J1
#672 2/ 1/ 3A/ C10 XI1B06
603 5
TFP 1/ 2/ 3B/
604 6
P.F. 3B/ 20 20/GREY 5/GREY 5
C11
PE1-3 Sh 3
Sh 3 +24 Vdc Rack: 5
C12 TO SHEET 117 Slot: 6
Point: 3

F06-P1/ALG223
Module AI:

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield
IC693ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield
SC-160

SC-262 INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F07

FROM SHEET 117

-X531 YAI1 + 24 Vdc

B/F06
C
#671
II1B06
TFA 2/ 1/ 4A/ 4A/
AMP.
606 7 C14 J1
1/ 2/ 4B/ 21 21/BROWN 6/BROWN 6
605 8
4B/
C15
PE1-4
Sh 4 10 Rack: 5
Sh 4 Slot: 6
C16

F06-P1/ALG223
+24 Vdc Point: 4
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

TO SHEET 118 Module AI: IC693ALG223

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield
SC-262
SC-161

INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F07

POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1B-06 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1B-06 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 117 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-07 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

FROM SHEET 117

+24 Vdc

-X531 YAI1 D

B/F06
#684 1/ 1/ 5A/ 5A/ J1
603 9 D2 XI1B07
TFP 604 2/ 2/ 10 5B/
P.F.
5B/ 22 22/GREEN 7/GREEN 7
PE1-5 Sh 5
D3
Sh 5 +24 Vdc Rack: 5
D4 TO SHEET 118 Slot: 6
Point: 5

F06-P1/ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

Module AI:

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield
IC693ALG223
SC-162

SC-262

12x,22
INTERFACE MODULE
8EA
C/F07

FROM SHEET 118

-X531 YAI1 + 24 Vdc

B/F06
D
#683
II1B07
TFA 2/ 1/ 6A/ 6A/
AMP.
606 11 D6 J1
1/ 2/ 6B/ 23 23/WHITE 8/WHITE 8
605 12
6B/
D7
PE1-6
Sh 6 10 Rack: 5
Sh 6 Slot: 6
D8

F06-P1/ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

+24 Vdc Point: 6

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield

TO SHEET 119 Module AI: IC693ALG223

SC-262
SC-163

INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F07

POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1B-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1B-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 118 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-08 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

FROM SHEET 118

+24 Vdc

D
-X531 YAI1
B/F06
#694 7A/ J1
2/ 1/ 7A/ D10 XI1B08
603 13
TFP
P.F. 1/ 2/ 7B/
604 14
7B/ 24 24/BLACK 9/BLACK 9
D11
PE1-7 Sh 7
Sh 7 +24 Vdc Rack: 5
D12 TO SHEET 119 Slot: 6
Point: 7

F06-P1/ALG223
Module AI:

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield
IC693ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield
SC-164

SC-262 INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F07

FROM SHEET 119

-X531 YAI1 + 24 Vdc

B/F06
#693 D
II1B08
TRANSD. 2/ 1/ 8A/ 8A/
CORR.
606 15 D14 J1
1/ 2/ 8B/ 25 25/RED 10/RED 10
605 16
8B/
D15
PE1-8
Sh 8 10 Rack: 5
Sh 8 Slot: 6
D16

F06-P1/ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

+24 Vdc Point: 8

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield

Module AI: IC693ALG223

SC-165

SC-262

INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F07

POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1B-08 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1B-08 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 119 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1B-09 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
24 Vdc Power Supply

B1 B2
B/F06
C FU1 FU 2 J1 XI1B09
500 ma 500 ma
-X531 YAI1 15 15/ORANGE 1/ORANGE 19

#707 9A/ 1 1/PURPLE 19/PURPLE 1

1/ 1/ 9A/ C2
604 17
TFP 11/YELLOW 11
P.F. 2/ 2/ 9B/
603 18
9B/ 18 18/YELLOW
C3

F06-P2/ALG223
Rack: 5
PE1-9 Sh 9 Slot: 6
Sh 9 +24 Vdc Point: 9
C4 TO SHEET 120 Module AI: IC693ALG223

12x,22
16 pr x# 18 AWG + Shield
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield
SC-166

SC-262 INTERFACE MODULE

8EA
C/F08

FROM SHEET 120

-X531 YAI1 + 24 Vdc

B/F06
C
#706
II1B09
2/ 1/ 10A/ 10A
TFA
606 19 C6 J1
AMP- 1/ 2/ 10B/ 19 12
605 20
10B/
C7
PE1-10
Sh 10/ 10 Rack: 5
Sh 10/ Slot: 6
C8

F06-P2/ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

+24 Vdc Point: 10

Module AI:
16 pr x# 18 AWG + Shield
SC-167

SC-262

INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F08

POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1B-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CURRENT MEASUREMENT - 1B-09 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 120 X1
L.V. SWITCHGEAR ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
2A-02 MARSH CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
24 Vdc Power Supply

A1 A2
B/F07
C FU1 FU 2 J1 EI2A01A
500 ma 500 ma
-X531 YAI2 15 15/ORANGE 1/ORANGE 19

1A/ 1 1/PURPLE 19/PURPLE 1

#718 2/ 1/ 1A/ C2
546 1
TRANSD. 11/YELLOW 11
VOLT 1/ 2/ 1B/
545 2
1B/ 18 18/YELLOW
C3

F07-P1/ALG223
Sh Rack: 5
PE2-1 Sh 1 Slot: 7
Sh 1 +24 Vdc Point: 1
C4 TO SHEET 125 Module AI: IC693ALG223
1pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

12x,22
16pr x# 18 AWG + Shield
SC-200

SC-263 INTERFACE MODULE

8EA
C/F09

FROM SHEET 125

-X531 YAI2 + 24 Vdc

B/F07
C
#719
II2A02
TRANSD. 2/ 2/ 2A/ 2A/
CORR.
548 3 C6 J1
1/ 1/ 2B/ 19 19/BLUE 4/BLUE 4
547 4
2B/
Sh C7
PE2-2
Sh 2 10 Rack: 5
Sh 2 Slot: 7
1pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

C8

F07-P1/ALG223
+24 Vdc Point: 2
TO SHEET 126 Module AI: IC693ALG223
16pr x# 18 AWG + Shield
SC-201

SC-263

INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F09

VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT 2A-02 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CURRENT MEASUREMENT 2A-02 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 125 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-07 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

FROM SHEET 125

+ 24 Vdc

C FU1
500 ma
-X531 YAI2
B/F07
#600 3A/ J1
2/ 1/ 3A/ C10 XI1A07
603 5
FTP
P.F. 1/ 2/ 3B/
604 6
3B/ 20 20/GREY 5/GREY 5
C11
PE2-3 Sh 3
Sh 3 +24 Vdc Rack: 5
C12 TO SHEET 126 Slot: 7
Point: 3

F07-P1/ALG223
Module AI:

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield
IC693ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield
SC-152

SC-263 INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F09

FROM SHEET 126

-X531 YAI2 + 24 Vdc

B/F07
C
#599
II1A07
FTA 2/ 1/ 4A/ 4A/
AMP.
606 7 C14 J1
1/ 2/ 4B/ 21 21/BROWN 6/BROWN 6
605 8
4B/
C15
PE2-4
Sh 4 10 Rack: 5
Sh 4 Slot: 7
C16

F07-P1/ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

+24 Vdc Point: 4

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield

TO SHEET 127 Module AI: IC693ALG223

SC-263
SC-153

INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F09

POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1A-07 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1A-07 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 126 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-08 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

FROM SHEET 126

+24 Vdc

D
-X531 YAI2
B/F07
J1
#612 2/ 1/ 5A/ 5A/ D2 XI1A08
603 9
FTP 1/ 2/ 5B/
604 10
P.F. 5B/ 22 22/GREEN 7/GREEN 7
D3
PE2-5 Sh 5
+24 Vdc Rack: 5
Sh 5 D4 TO SHEET 127 Slot: 7
Point: 5

F07-P1/ALG223
Module AI: IC693ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield
SC-154

INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
SC-263
8EA
C/F09

FROM SHEET 127

-X531 YAI2 + 24 Vdc

B/F07
D
#611
II1A08
2/ 1/ 6A/ 6A/
FTA
606 11 D6 J1
AMP. 1/ 2/ 6B/ 23 23/WHITE 8/WHITE 8
605 12
6B/
D7
PE2-6
Sh 6 10 Rack: 5
Sh 6 Slot: 7
D8

F07-P1/ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

+24 Vdc Point: 6

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield

TO SHEET 128 Module AI: IC693ALG223

SC-263
SC-155

INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F09

POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1A-08 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1A-08 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 127 X1
34.5 KV CELLS ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
1A-09 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412

FROM SHEET 127

+24 Vdc

D
-X531 YAI2
B/F07
#623 7A/ J1
1/ 1/ 7A/ D10 XI1A09
604 13
FTP
P.F. 2/ 2/ 7B/
603 14
7B/ 24 24/BLACK 9/BLACK 9
D11
PE2-7 Sh 7
Sh 7 +24 Vdc Rack: 5
D12 HOJA Slot: 7
TO SHEET 128 Point: 7

F07-P1/ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

Module AI:

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield
IC693ALG223
SC-156

SC-263 INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F09

FROM SHEET 128

-X531 YAI2 + 24 Vdc

B/F07
D
#622
II1A09
1/ 2/ 8A/ 8A/
FTA
606 15 D14 J1
AMP. 2/ 1/ 8B/ 25 25/RED 10/RED 10
605 16
8B/
D15
PE2-8
Sh 8 10 Rack: 5
Sh 8/ Slot: 7
D16

F07-P1/ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

+24 Vdc Point: 8

16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield

Module AI: IC693ALG223

SC-263
SC-157

INTERFACE MODULE

12x,22
8EA
C/F09

POWER FACTOR MEASUREMENT 1A-09 Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:
CURRENT MEASUREMENT 1A-09 CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 128 X1
 ELECTRICAL BUILDING G/S-01
41-LC-201 MARSH. CAB. 412 EMCS - PLC CABINET 32-CS-412
24 Vdc Power Supply

B1 B2
B/F07
C FU1 FU 2 J1 LI001
500 ma 500 ma
TB-1A YAI2 15 15/ORANGE 1/ORANGE 19

9A/ 1 1/PURPLE 19/PURPLE 1

1/ 1/ 9A/ C2
1 17
11/YELLOW 11
2/ 2/ 9B/
2 18
9B/ 18 18/YELLOW
C3

F07-P2/ALG223
Rack: 5
Sh PE2-9 Sh 9 Slot: 7
Sh9/ +24 Vdc Point: 9
C4 TO SHEET 129 Module AI: IC693ALG223
1 pr x# 16 AWG + Shield

12x,22
16 pr x # 18 AWG + Shield
41-SC-904

SC-263 INTERFACE MODULE

8EA
C/F10

FROM SHEET 129

+ 24 Vdc
B/F07
C
1/ 1/
C6 J1
19 12
2/ 2/
C7
Sh 10 Rack: 5
Slot: 7
C8

F07-P1/ALG223
+24 Vdc Point: 10
Module AI:
2x.1.31+Shld

INTERFACE MODULE
8EA

12x,22
C/F10

DIESEL TANK LEVEL Prepared by: 03.01.01 C.E.C.

Date: Name:
INTERNAL No. Sh: Rev:

CA-12-05-32-P-DR-639 129 X1
 SINCOR INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS & SERVICES

Project Title: SINCOR, C. A. SINCOR Document N°: CA12-05-32-P-DR-407

UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT SINCOR Interface code : 0
SINCOR Document Class: 00
ALSTOM N° A565645 - AD107
Page/File : 1/CA120532PDR407
Rev./Date: X0/17/01/2001

SINCOR, C.A.
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
ALSTOM ENGINEERING
EMCS - CENTRALOG DATABASE

REVISION INDEX

This document consists of the following number of pages:

REV. DATE: PAGES: REASON FOR ISSUE:

B0 16/03/2000 1 - 032 Issue for approval
0 13/07/2000 1 - 032
X0 17/01/2001 As built

ALSTOM APPROVAL SINCOR APPROVAL

PREPARED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: PREPARED CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:

16/01/2001 16/01/2001 17/01/2001 / /19 / /19 / /19

 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
GT-1A Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 2/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 22/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:

1 XA1A06 SG_1A-XA1A06 %I1 %I33 TS1 DI SG-1A SG-1 Availability of (F & V) 1A06 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 4 B0
2 ZSH1A04 SG_1A-ZSH1A04 %I2 %I34 TS2 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Open position Circuit Breaker 1A-04 0 Not open/Open 1 1 34 1 B0
3 ZSL1A04 SG_1A-ZSL1A04 %I3 %I35 TS3 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Closed position Circuit Breaker1A-04 0 Not closed/closed 1 0 34 1 B0
4 XA1A04 SG_1A-XA1A04 %I4 %I36 TS4 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 1 B0
5 XAH1A04 SG_1A-XAH1A04 %I5 %I37 TS5 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 1 B0
6 XHH1A04 SG_1A-XAHH1A04 %I6 %I38 TS6 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 General Trip Circuit Breaker 1A-04 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 1 B0
7 EAH1A04 SG_1A-EAH1A04 %I7 %I39 TS7 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit breaker 1A-04 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 1 B0
8 ZLR1A04 SG_1A-ZLR1A04 %I8 %I40 TS8 DI SG-1A GT-ABC Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-04 0 No remote/Remote 1 1 34 1 B0
9 ZSH400A GT_1A-ZSH400A %I9 %I41 TS9 DI GT-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW Open position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 0 Not open/Open 1 1 34 3 B0
10 ZSL400A GT_1A-ZSL400A %I10 %I42 TS10 DI GT-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW Closed position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 0 Not closed/closed 1 1 34 3 B0
11 ZSA601A GT_1A-ZSA601A %I11 %I43 TS11 DI GT-1A CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1A 0 No/Yes 1 1 34 7 B0
12 ZSA602A GT_1A-ZSA602A %I12 %I44 TS12 DI GT-1A CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1A 0 No/Yes 1 1 34 7 B0
13 ZSA603A GT_1A-ZSA603A %I13 %I45 TS13 DI GT-1A CTRL-ABC Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1A 0 No/Yes 1 1 34 7 B0
14 ZSA604A GT_1A-ZSA604A %I14 %I46 TS14 DI GT-1A CTRL-ABC Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1A 0 No/Yes 1 1 34 7 B0
15 ZSA605A GT_1A-ZSA605A %I15 %I47 TS15 DI GT-1A GT-1A tripped 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 34 7 B0
16 ZSA606A GT_1A-ZSA606A %I16 %I48 TS16 DI GT-1A GT-1A controlled by EMCS 1 No/Yes 1 1 34 7 B0
17 ZSA607A GT_1A-ZSA607A %I17 %I49 TS17 DI GT-1A Permissive to close CB 34.5kV 0 No/Yes 1 1 34 7 B0
18 ZSL1A01 SG_1A-ZSL1A01 %I18 %I50 TS18 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Closed position Circuit Breaker 1A-01 0 Not closed/closed 1 1 34 2 B0
19 XA1A01 SG_1A-XA1A01 %I19 %I51 TS19 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-01 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 2 B0
20 EAH1A01 SG_1A-EAH1A01 %I20 %I52 TS20 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit breaker 1A-01 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 2 B0
21 ZLR1A01 SG_1A-ZLR1A01 %I21 %I53 TS21 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-01 0 Local/Remote 1 1 34 2 B0
22 IAH1A01 SG_1A-IAH1A01 %I22 %I54 TS22 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Max Current Fault bus A Circuit Breaker 1A-01 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 2 B0
23 IAH1B01 SG_1B-IAH1B01 %I23 %I55 TS23 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Max Current Fault bus B Circuit Breaker 1B-01 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 2 B0
24 XAH500A TR_1A-XAH500A %I24 %I56 TS24 DI TR-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW General Alarm Transfo TR-1A (1A-04) 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 34 5 B0
25 XHH500A TR_1A-XAHH500A %I25 %I57 TS25 DI TR-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW General Trip Transfo TR-1A (1A-04) 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 34 5 B0
26 ZSA615A GT_1A-ZSA615A %I26 %I58 TS26 DI GT_1A CB 13.8 kV tripping too long 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 1
27 %I27 %I59 TS27 DI Spare 34 B0
28 %I28 %I60 TS28 DI Spare 34 B0
29 %I29 %I61 TS29 DI Spare 34 B0
30 %I30 %I62 TS30 DI Spare 34 B0
31 %I31 %I63 TS31 DI Spare 34 B0
32 XA0134 PLC-XA0134 %I32 %I64 TS32 DI PLC SYS PLC Card fault cabinet 01 - rack 3 - slot 4 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
GT-1A Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 3/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 22/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:
1 YZH1A04 %Q801 %Q1 DO SG-1A Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-04 35 1 B0
2 YZL1A04 %Q802 %Q2 DO SG-1A Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-04 35 1 B0
3 ZAH1A04 %Q803 DO GT-1A GT-ABC Open position Circuit Breaker 1A-04 35 1 B0
4 ZAL1A04 %Q804 DO GT-1A GT-ABC Close position Circuit Breaker 1A-04 35 1 B0
5 YR1A04 %Q805 %Q5 DO SG-1A GT-ABC Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1A-04 35 2 B0
6 YZH1A01 %Q806 %Q6 DO SG-1A GT-ABC Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-01 35 2 B0
7 YZL1A01 %Q807 %Q7 DO SG-1A GT-ABC Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-01 35 7 B0
8 YR1A01 %Q808 %Q8 DO SG-1A GT-ABC Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1A-01 35 7 B0
9 YZS601A %Q809 %Q9 DO GT-1A CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1A 35 7 B0
10 YZS602A %Q810 %Q10 DO GT-1A CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1A 35 7 B0
11 YZS603A %Q811 %Q11 DO GT-1A CTRL-ABC Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1A 35 7 B0
12 YZS604A %Q812 %Q12 DO GT-1A CTRL-ABC Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1A 35 7 B0
13 YZS608A %Q813 %Q13 DO GT-1A Permissive to switch GT-1A MCC to EDG supply 35 7 B0
14 YZS609A %Q814 %Q14 DO GT-1A CTRL-ABC GT-1A normal start 35 7 B0
15 YZS610A %Q815 %Q15 DO GT-1A CTRL-ABC GT-1A black start 35 7 B0
16 YZS611A %Q816 %Q16 DO GT-1A CTRL-ABC Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1A 35 7 B0
17 YZS612A %Q817 %Q17 DO D-4103 D4103 Fuel gas selection 35 0
18 YZS613A %Q818 %Q18 DO D-4103 D4103 Diesel fuel selection 35 0
19 YZS614A %Q819 %Q19 DO D-4103 D4103 Naphta fuel selection 35 0
17 YZS615A %Q820 %Q20 DO GT-1A Run or transitory status GT_1A 35 0
21 YZH400A %Q821 %Q21 DO GT_1A GT_ABC Open order Q400A 35 B0
22 %Q822 %Q22 DO Spare 35 B0
23 %Q823 %Q23 DO Spare 35 B0
24 %Q824 %Q24 DO Spare 35 B0
25 %Q825 %Q25 DO Spare 35 B0
26 %Q826 %Q26 DO Spare 35 B0
27 %Q827 %Q27 DO Spare 35 B0
28 %Q828 %Q28 DO Spare 35 B0
29 %Q829 %Q29 DO Spare 35 B0
30 %Q830 %Q30 DO Spare 35 B0
31 %Q831 %Q31 DO Spare 35 B0
32 YA902A %Q832 %Q32 DO PLC SYS Watchdog - Fault system cab 01 - rack 03 35 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
GT-1A Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 4/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 22/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:
Y1A04_O SG_1A-Y1A04_O %M129 TC1 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Operator Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-04 N-Req/Req 1 1 B0
Y1A04_C SG_1A-Y1A04_C %M130 TC2 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Operator Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-04 N-Req/Req 1 1 B0
Y1A04_A SG_1A-Y1A04_A %M131 TC3 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1A-04 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1A04_M SG_1A-Y1A04_M %M132 TC4 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1A-04 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1A01_O SG_1A -Y1A01_O %M133 TC5 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Operator Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-01 N-Req/Req 1 2 B0
Y1A01_C SG_1A -Y1A01_C %M134 TC6 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Operator Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-01 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1A01_A SG_1A-Y1A01_A %M135 TC7 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1A-01 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1A01_M SG_1A-Y1A01_M %M136 TC8 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1A-01 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y609A PR_1A-Y609A %M137 TC9 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Op. GT-1A normal start No/Yes 1 B0
P610A PR_1A-P610A %M138 TC10 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Op. GT-1A black start No/Yes 1 B0
Y611A PR_1A-Y611A %M139 TC11 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Op. Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1A No/Yes 1 B0
P609A PR_1A-P609A %M140 TC12 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Prog. GT-1A normal start No/Yes 1 B0
P611A PR_1A-P611A %M141 TC13 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Prog. Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1A No/Yes 1 B0
JOINT_A PR_1A-JOINT_A %M142 TC14 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Joint order to PLC No/Yes 1 B0
INDIV_A PR_1A-INDIV_A %M143 TC15 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Indiv order to PLC No/Yes 1 B0
RST_SEQ PR_1-RST_SEQ %M144 TC16 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Reset all sequences No/Yes 1 B0
Y612A PR_1A-Y612A %M145 TC17 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Fuel gas selection N-Req/Req 1 0
Y613A PR_1A-Y613A %M146 TC18 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Diesel fuel selection N-Req/Req 1 0
Y614A PR_1A-Y614A %M147 TC19 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Naphta fuel selection N-Req/Req 1 0
R_SEQ_A PR_1A-R_SEQ_A %M148 TC20 INT GT-1A CTRL-ABC Escape all GT_1A sequences in progress N-Req/Req 1 1
ACK_GTA PR_1A-ACK_GTA %M149 TC21 INT GT-1A GENERAL Acknoledge GT panel N-Req/Req 1 0

P1A04_O %M1169 INT SG-1A Prog. Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-04 N-Req/Req 1 B0
P1A04_C %M1170 INT SG-1A Prog. Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-04 N-Req/Req 1 B0
P1A01_O %M1171 INT SG-1A Prog. Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-01 N-Req/Req 2 B0
P1A01_C %M1172 INT SG-1A Prog. Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-01 N-Req/Req 2 B0
PY609A %M1173 INT GT-1A Prog. or Op. GT-1A normal start No/Yes 7 B0
PY610A %M1174 INT GT-1A Op. GT-1A black start No/Yes 7 B0
PY611A %M1175 INT GT-1A Prog. or Op. Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1A No/Yes 7 B0

SG_1A-VR-1A04 VR GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1A-04 B0

SG_1A-CB-1A04 CB GT-ABC Internal command variable 1A-04 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
GT-1A Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 5/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 22/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:
MM1A04 SG_1A-MM1A04 %M1025 TS305 TSI GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit breaker 1A-04 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0
YR1A04 SG_1A-YR1A04 %M1026 TS306 TSI GT-ABC Permissive to close 1A-04 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
ZLA1A04 SG_1A-ZLA1A04 %M1027 TS307 GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1A-04 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
SG_1A-VR-1A01 VR GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1A-01 B0
SG_1A-CB-1A01 CB GT-ABC Internal command variable 1A-01 B0
MM1A01 SG_1A-MM1A01 %M1028 TS308 TSI GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 1A-01 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0
YR1A01 SG_1A-YR1A01 %M1029 TS309 TSI GT-ABC Permissive to close 1A-01 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
ZLA1A01 SG_1A-ZLA1A01 %M1030 TS310 TSI GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1A-01 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
GT_1A-VR-400A VR GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable Generator CB GT-1A B0
MM400A GT_1A-MM400A %M1031 TS311 TSE GT-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 400A 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0
SUID_A GT_1A-SUID %M1032 TS312 TSE GT-1A CTRL-ABC Droop mode 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
SUVR_A GT_1A-SUVR %M1033 TS313 TSE GT-1A CTRL-ABC Reactive mode 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
LAST_GT PR_1-LAST_GT %M1034 TS314 TSE GT-1A Last GT running 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
JNT_A PR_1A-JNT_A %M1035 GT-1A Internal to PLCS B0
SEQ_A GT_1A-SEQ_ON %M1036 TS316 TSE GT-1A Sequence A in progress in the PLC 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
STSQRA GT_1A-STSQR %M1037 TS317 TSE GT_1A Start or Black Start in progress 0 No/Yes 1 1 X1
ISOLATA PR_1A-ISOLATA %M1038 TS318 TSE GT_1A Not used anymore 0
MM601A GT_1A-MM601A %M1040 TS320 TSE GT-1A Mismatch droop mode 1 Normal/Alarm 1 0 0
MM603A GT_1A-MM603A %M1041 TS321 TSE GT-1A Mismatch voltage mode 1 Normal/Alarm 1 0 0
AUTO-AVA GT_1A-AUTO-AVA %M1042 TS322 TSE GT_1A GT_1A auto mode available 0 No/Yes 1 1 0
FDOK_A GT_1A-FDOK_A %M1043 TS323 TSE GT_1A CTRL-ABC DIESEL FUEL MODE PERMISSIVE 0 No/Yes 1 1 0
FGOK_A GT_1A-FGOK_A %M1044 TS324 TSE GT_1A CTRL-ABC GAS FUEL MODE PERMISSIVE 0 No/Yes 1 1 0
MODB_A1 GT_1A-MODB_A1 %M1045 TS325 TSE GT_1A Modbus port 1 alarm 1 Fault/Normal 1 0 1
MODB_A2 GT_1A-MODB_A2 %M1046 TS326 TSE GT_1A Modbus port 2 alarm 1 Fault/Normal 1 0 1
MFCAL_A GT_1A_MFCAL_A %M1047 TS327 TSE GT_1A FUEL CHANGE OVER ALARM 1 NO/YES 1 1 X0
MGFRS_A GT_1A_MGFRS_A %M1048 TS328 TSE GT_1A GAS FUEL REQUEST SEQUENCE No/Yes 1 1 X0
MDFRS_A GT_1A_MDFRS_A %M1049 TS329 TSE GT_1A DIESEL FUEL REQUEST SEQUENCE No/Yes 1 1 X0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
GT-1A Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 6/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 22/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:
1 JI618A GT_1A-JI618A %AI1 %AQ273 TM1 AI GT-1A CTRL-ABC Generator Active Power GT-1A 1 1 0 30 MW 36 7 B0
2 JI619A GT_1A-JI619A %AI2 %AQ274 TM2 AI GT-1A CTRL-ABC Generator Reactive Power GT-1A 0 1 -12 18 MVAR 36 7 B0
3 EI1A06 SG_1A-EI1A06 %AI3 %AQ275 TM3 AI SG-1A GT-ABC SG-1 Voltage Indicator 1A06 0 1 0 60 kV 36 4 1
4 FI1A06 SG_1A-FI1A06 %AI4 %AQ276 TM4 AI SG-1A GT-ABC SG-1 Frequency Indicator 1A06 0 1 58 62 Hz 36 4 1
5 %AI5 %AQ277 TM5 AI Spare 36 B0
6 %AI6 %AQ278 TM6 AI Spare 36 B0
7 %AI7 %AQ279 TM7 AI Spare 36 B0
8 %AI8 %AQ280 TM8 AI Spare 36 B0
9 %AI9 %AQ281 TM9 AI Spare 36 B0
10 %AI10 %AQ282 TM10 AI Spare 36 B0
11 %AI11 %AQ283 TM11 AI Spare 36 B0
12 %AI12 %AQ284 TM12 AI Spare 36 B0
13 %AI13 %AQ285 TM13 AI Spare 36 B0
14 %AI14 %AQ286 TM14 AI Spare 36 B0
15 %AI15 %AQ287 TM15 AI Spare 36 B0
16 %AI16 %AQ288 TM16 AI Spare 36 B0
1 YJ618A GT_1A-YJ618A %AQ1 %R8677 TVC1 AO GT-1A CTRL-ABC Generator Active Power Set Point GT-1A 0 1 0 30 MW 37 7 B0
2 YJ619A GT_1A-YJ619A %AQ2 %R8678 TVC2 AO GT-1A CTRL-ABC Generator Reactive Power Set Point GT-1A 0 1 -12 18 MVAR 37 7 B0
3 YE620A GT_1A-YE620A %AQ3 %R8679 TVC3 AO GT-1A CTRL-ABC Voltage 34,5 KV Set Point GT-1A 0 1 31 38 kV 37 7 B0
4 %AQ4 %R8680 TVC4 AO Spare 37 B0
5 %AQ5 %R8681 TVC5 AO Spare 37 B0
6 %AQ6 %R8682 TVC6 AO Spare 37 B0
7 %AQ7 %R8683 TVC7 AO Spare 37 B0
8 %AQ8 %R8684 TVC8 AO Spare 37 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR GT-1B
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 1/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:

1 XA1B01 SG_1B-XA1B01 %I1 %I993 TS673 DI SG-1B SG-1 Availability of (F & V) 1B-01 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 4 B0
2 ZSH1B04 SG_1B-ZSH1B04 %I2 %I994 TS674 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Open position Circuit Breaker 1B-04 0 Not open/open 1 1 54 1 B0
3 ZSL1B04 SG_1B-ZSL1B04 %I3 %I995 TS675 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Closed position Circuit Breaker 1B-04 0 Not closed/closed 1 1 54 1 B0
4 XA1B04 SG_1B-XA1B04 %I4 %I996 TS676 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 1 B0
5 XAH1B04 SG_1B-XAH1B04 %I5 %I997 TS677 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 1 B0
6 XHH1B04 SG_1B-XAHH1B04 %I6 %I998 TS678 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 1 B0
7 EAH1B04 SG_1B-EAH1B04 %I7 %I999 TS679 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit breaker 1B-04 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 1 B0
8 ZLR1B04 SG_1B-ZLR1B04 %I8 %I1000 TS680 DI SG-1B GT-ABC Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-04 0 No remote/Remote 0 1 54 1 B0
9 ZSH400B GT_1B-ZSH400B %I9 %I1001 TS681 DI GT-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW Open position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 0 Not open/open 1 1 54 3 B0
10 ZSL400B GT_1B-ZSL400B %I10 %I1002 TS682 DI GT-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW Closed position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 0 Not closed/closed 1 1 54 3 B0
11 ZSA601B GT_1B-ZSA601B %I11 %I1003 TS683 DI GT-1B CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1B 0 No/Yes 1 1 54 7 B0
12 ZSA602B GT_1B-ZSA602B %I12 %I1004 TS684 DI GT-1B CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1B 0 No/Yes 1 1 54 7 B0
13 ZSA603B GT_1B-ZSA603B %I13 %I1005 TS685 DI GT-1B CTRL-ABC Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1B 0 No/Yes 1 1 54 7 B0
14 ZSA604B GT_1B-ZSA604B %I14 %I1006 TS686 DI GT-1B CTRL-ABC Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1B 0 No/Yes 1 1 54 7 B0
15 ZSA605B GT_1B-ZSA605B %I15 %I1007 TS687 DI GT-1B GT-1B tripped 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 54 7 B0
16 ZSA606B GT_1B-ZSA606B %I16 %I1008 TS688 DI GT-1B GT-1B controlled by EMCS 0 No/Yes 1 1 54 7 B0
17 ZSA607B GT_1B-ZSA607B %I17 %I1009 TS689 DI GT-1B Permissive to close CB 34.5kV 0 No/Yes 1 1 54 7 B0
18 XAH500B TR_1B-XAH500B %I18 %I1010 TS690 DI TR-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW General Alarm Transfo TR-1B (1B-04) 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 54 5 B0
19 XHH500B TR_1B-XAHH500B %I19 %I1011 TS691 DI TR-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW General Trip Transfo TR-1B (1B-04) 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 54 5 B0
20 ZSA615B GT_1B-ZSA615B %I20 %I1012 TS692 DI GT_1B CB 13.8 kV tripping too long 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 1
21 %I21 %I1013 TS693 DI Spare 54 B0
22 %I22 %I1014 TS694 DI Spare 54 B0
23 %I23 %I1015 TS695 DI Spare 54 B0
24 %I24 %I1016 TS696 DI Spare 54 B0
25 %I25 %I1017 TS697 DI Spare 54 B0
26 %I26 %I1018 TS698 DI Spare 54 B0
27 %I27 %I1019 TS699 DI Spare 54 B0
28 %I28 %I1020 TS700 DI Spare 54 B0
29 %I29 %I1021 TS701 DI Spare 54 B0
30 %I30 %I1022 TS702 DI Spare 54 B0
31 %I31 %I1023 TS703 DI Spare 54 B0
32 XA0154 PLC-XA0154 %I32 %I1024 TS704 DI PLC SYS PLC Card fault cabinet 01 - rack 5 - slot 4 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR GT-1B
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 2/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:

1 YZH1B04 %Q801 %Q353 DO SG-1B GT-ABC Open order Circuit Breaker 1B-04 55 1 B0
2 YZL1B04 %Q802 %Q354 DO SG-1B GT-ABC Close order Circuit Breaker 1B-04 55 1 B0
3 ZAH1B04 %Q803 DO GT-1B Open position Circuit Breaker 1B-04 55 1 B0
4 ZAL1B04 %Q804 DO GT-1B Close position Circuit Breaker 1B-04 55 1 B0
5 YR1B04 %Q805 %Q357 DO SG-1B GT-ABC Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1B-04 55 1 B0
6 YZS601B %Q806 %Q358 DO GT-1B CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1B 55 7 B0
7 YZS602B %Q807 %Q359 DO GT-1B CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1B 55 7 B0
8 YZS603B %Q808 %Q360 DO GT-1B CTRL-ABC Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1B 55 7 B0
9 YZS604B %Q809 %Q361 DO GT-1B CTRL-ABC Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1B 55 7 B0
10 YZS608B %Q810 %Q362 DO GT-1B Permissive to switch GT-1B MCC to EDG supply 55 7 B0
11 YZS609B %Q811 %Q363 DO GT-1B CTRL-ABC GT-1B normal start 55 7 B0
12 YZS610B %Q812 %Q364 DO GT-1B CTRL-ABC GT-1B black start 55 7 B0
13 YZS611B %Q813 %Q365 DO GT-1B CTRL-ABC Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1B 55 7 B0
14 YZS612B %Q814 %Q366 DO D-4103 D4103 Fuel gas selection 55 0
15 YZS613B %Q815 %Q367 DO D-4103 D4103 Diesel fuel selection 55 0
16 YZS614B %Q816 %Q368 DO D-4103 D4103 Naphta fuel selection 55 0
17 YZS615B %Q817 %Q369 DO GT-1B Run or transitory status GT_1B 55 0
18 YZH400B %Q818 %Q370 DO GT_1B GT_ABC Open order Q400B 55 1
19 %Q819 %Q371 DO Spare 55 B0
20 %Q820 %Q372 DO Spare 55 B0
21 %Q821 %Q373 DO Spare 55 B0
22 %Q822 %Q374 DO Spare 55 B0
23 %Q823 %Q375 DO Spare 55 B0
24 %Q824 %Q376 DO Spare 55 B0
25 %Q825 %Q377 DO Spare 55 B0
26 %Q826 %Q378 DO Spare 55 B0
27 %Q827 %Q379 DO Spare 55 B0
28 %Q828 %Q380 DO Spare 55 B0
29 %Q829 %Q381 DO Spare 55 B0
30 %Q830 %Q382 DO Spare 55 B0
31 %Q831 %Q383 DO Spare 55 B0
32 YA902B %Q832 %Q384 DO PLC SYS Watchdog - Fault system cab 01 - rack 05 55 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR GT-1B
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 3/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:

Y1B04_O SG_1B-Y1B04_O %M289 TC161 INT SG-1B GT-ABC Open order Circuit Breaker 1B-04 N-Req/Req 1 1 B0
Y1B04_C SG_1B-Y1B04_C %M290 TC162 INT SG-1B GT-ABC Close order Circuit Breaker 1B-04 N-Req/Req 1 1 B0
Y1B04_A SG_1B-Y1B04_A %M291 TC163 INT SG-1B GT-ABC Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1B-04 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1B04_M SG_1B-Y1B04_M %M292 TC164 INT SG-1B GT-ABC Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1B-04 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y609B PR_1B-Y609B %M293 TC165 INT GT-1B CTRL-ABC Op. GT-1B normal start No/Yes 1 B0
P610B PR_1B-P610B %M294 TC166 INT GT-1B CTRL-ABC Op. GT-1B black start No/Yes 1 B0
Y611B PR_1B-Y611B %M295 TC167 INT GT-1B CTRL-ABC Op. Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1B No/Yes 1 B0
P609B PR_1B-P609B %M296 TC168 INT GT-1B Prog. GT-1B normal start No/Yes 1 B0
P611B PR_1B-P611B %M297 TC169 INT GT-1B Prog. Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1B No/Yes 1 B0
JOINT_B PR_1B-JOINT_B %M298 TC170 INT GT-1B Joint order to PLC No/Yes 1 B0
INDIV_B PR_1B-INDIV_B %M299 TC171 INT GT-1B Indiv order to PLC No/Yes 1 B0
Y612B PR_1A-Y612B %M300 TC172 INT GT-1B CTRL-ABC Fuel gas selection N-Req/Req 1 0
Y613B PR_1A-Y613B %M301 TC173 INT GT-1B CTRL-ABC Diesel fuel selection N-Req/Req 1 0
Y614B PR_1A-Y614B %M302 TC174 INT GT-1B CTRL-ABC Naphta fuel selection N-Req/Req 1 0
R_SEQ_B PR_1A-R_SEQ_B %M303 TC175 INT GT-1B CTRL-ABC Escape all GT_1B sequences in progress N-Req/Req 1 1
ACK_GTB PR_1A-ACK_GTB %M304 TC176 INT GT-1B GENERAL Acknoledge GT panel N-Req/Req 1 0

P1B04_O %M3217 INT GT-1B Open order Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 B0

P1B04_C %M3218 INT GT-1B Close order Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 B0
PY609B %M3219 INT GT-1B Prog. or Op. GT-1B normal start 7 B0
PY610B %M3220 INT GT-1B Op. GT-1B black start 7 B0
PY611B %M3221 INT GT-1B Prog. or Op. Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1B 7 B0

SG_1B-VR-1B04 INT SG_1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1B-04 B0
SG_1B-CB-1B04 INT SG_1B GT-ABC Internal command variable 1B-04 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR GT-1B
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 4/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:

MM1B04 SG_1B-MM1B04 %M3073 TS977 INT SG_1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 1B-04 1 Alarm/Normal 1 B0
YR1B04 SG_1B-YR1B04 %M3074 TS978 INT SG_1B GT-ABC Permissive to close 1B04 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
ZLA1B04 SG_1B-ZLA1B04 %M3075 TS979 INT SG_1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1B-04 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
GT_1B-VR-400B INT GT-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable Generator CB GT-1B B0
MM400B GT_1B-MM400B %M3076 TS980 INT GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 400B 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0
SUID_B GT_1B-SUID %M3077 TS981 TSE CTRL-ABC Droop mode 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
SUVR_B GT_1B-SUVR %M3078 TS982 TSE CTRL-ABC Reactive mode 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
JNT_B PR_1B-JNT_B %M3079 NA Internal to PLCS B0
SEQ_B GT_1B-SEQ_ON %M3080 TS984 TSE Sequence B in progress in the PLC 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
STSQRB GT_1B-STSQR %M3081 TS985 TSE Start or Black Start in progress 0 No/Yes 1 1 X1
ISOLATB %M3082 TS986 TSE Not used anymore 1
MM601B GT_1A-MM601B %M3084 TS988 TSE Mismatch droop mode 1 Normal/Alarm 1 0 0
MM603B GT_1A-MM603B %M3085 TS989 TSE Mismatch voltage mode 1 Normal/Alarm 1 0 0
AUTO-AVB GT_1B-AUTO-AVB %M3086 TS990 TSE GT_1A auto mode available 0 No/Yes 1 1 0
FDOK_B GT_1B-FDOK_B %M3087 TS991 TSE CTRL-ABC DIESEL FUEL MODE PERMISSIVE 0 No/Yes 1 1 0
FGOK_B GT_1B-FGOK_B %M3088 TS992 TSE CTRL-ABC GAS FUEL MODE PERMISSIVE 0 No/Yes 1 1 0
MODB_B1 GT_1B-MODB_B1 %M3089 TS993 TSE Modbus port 1 alarm 1 Fault/Normal 1 0 1
MODB_B2 GT_1B-MODB_B2 %M3090 TS994 TSE Modbus port 2 alarm 1 Fault/Normal 1 0 1
MFCAL_B GT_1B_MFCAL_B %M3091 TS995 TSE GT_1B FUEL CHANGE OVER ALARM 1 NO/YES 1 1 X0
MGFRS_B GT_1B_MGFRS_B %M3092 TS996 TSE GT_1B GAS FUEL REQUEST SEQUENCE No/Yes 1 1 X0
MDFRS_B GT_1B_MDFRS_B %M3093 TS997 TSE GT_1B DIESEL FUEL REQUEST SEQUENCE No/Yes 1 1 X0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR GT-1B
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 5/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:

1 JI618B GT_1B-JI618B %AI1 %AQ369 TM121 AI GT-1B CTRL-ABC Generator Active Power GT-1B 1 1 0 30 MW 56 7 B0
2 JI619B GT_1B-JI619B %AI2 %AQ370 TM122 AI GT-1B CTRL-ABC Generator Reactive Power GT-1B 0 1 -12 18 MVAR 56 7 B0
3 EI1B01 SG_1B-EI1B01 %AI3 %AQ371 TM123 AI SG-1B GT-ABC SG-1 Voltage Indicator 1B01 0 1 0 60 kV 56 4 1
4 FI1B01 SG_1B-FI1B01 %AI4 %AQ372 TM124 AI SG-1B GT-ABC SG-1 Frequency Indicator 1B01 0 1 58 62 Hz 56 4 1
5 %AI5 %AQ373 TM125 AI Spare 56 B0
6 %AI6 %AQ374 TM126 AI Spare 56 B0
7 %AI7 %AQ375 TM127 AI Spare 56 B0
8 %AI8 %AQ376 TM128 AI Spare 56 B0
9 %AI9 %AQ377 TM129 AI Spare 56 B0
10 %AI10 %AQ378 TM130 AI Spare 56 B0
11 %AI11 %AQ379 TM131 AI Spare 56 B0
12 %AI12 %AQ380 TM132 AI Spare 56 B0
13 %AI13 %AQ381 TM133 AI Spare 56 B0
14 %AI14 %AQ382 TM134 AI Spare 56 B0
15 %AI15 %AQ383 TM135 AI Spare 56 B0
16 %AI16 %AQ384 TM136 AI Spare 56 B0
1 YJ618B GT_1B-YJ618B %AQ21 %R8697 TVC21 AO GT-1B GT-ABC SG-1 Generator Active Power Set Point GT-1B 0 1 0 30 MW 57 7 B0
2 YJ619B GT_1B-YJ619B %AQ22 %R8698 TVC22 AO GT-1B GT-ABC SG-1 Generator Reactive Power Set Point GT-1B 0 1 -12 18 MVAR 57 7 B0
3 YE620B GT_1B-YE620B %AQ23 %R8699 TVC23 AO GT-1B GT-ABC SG-1 Generator Power Factor Set Point GT-1B 0 1 31 38 kV 57 7 B0
4 %AQ24 %R8700 TVC24 AO Spare 57 B0
5 %AQ25 %R8701 TVC25 AO Spare 57 B0
6 %AQ26 %R8702 TVC26 AO Spare 57 B0
7 %AQ27 %R8703 TVC27 AO Spare 57 B0
8 %AQ28 %R8704 TVC28 AO Spare 57 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
GT-1C Class : 00
N° : A565645-AD107
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
Page/File : 1/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:

1 ZSH1A02 SG_1A-ZSH1A02 %I1 %I513 TS337 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Open position Circuit Breaker 1A-02 0 Not open/Open 1 1 44 1 B0
2 ZSL1A02 SG_1A-ZSL1A02 %I2 %I514 TS338 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Closed position Circuit Breaker 1A-02 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 44 1 B0
3 XA1A02 SG_1A-XA1A02 %I3 %I515 TS339 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 1 B0
4 XAH1A02 SG_1A-XAH1A02 %I4 %I516 TS340 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 1 B0
5 XHH1A02 SG_1A-XAHH1A02 %I5 %I517 TS341 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 General Trip Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 1 B0
6 EAH1A02 SG_1A-EAH1A02 %I6 %I518 TS342 DI SG-1A GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit breaker 1A-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 1 B0
7 ZLR1A02 SG_1A-ZLR1A02 %I7 %I519 TS343 DI SG-1A GT-ABC Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-02 0 No remote/Remote 1 1 44 1 B0
8 ZSH1B02 SG_1B-ZSH1B02 %I8 %I520 TS344 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Open position Circuit Breaker 1B-02 0 Not open/Open 1 1 44 1 B0
9 ZSL1B02 SG_1B-ZSL1B02 %I9 %I521 TS345 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Closed position Circuit Breaker 1B-02 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 44 1 B0
10 XA1B02 SG_1B-XA1B02 %I10 %I522 TS346 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 1 B0
11 XAH1B02 SG_1B-XAH1B02 %I11 %I523 TS347 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 1 B0
12 XHH1B02 SG_1B-XAHH1B02 %I12 %I524 TS348 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 1 B0
13 EAH1B02 SG_1B-EAH1B02 %I13 %I525 TS349 DI SG-1B GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit breaker 1B-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 1 B0
14 ZLR1B02 SG_1B-ZLR1B02 %I14 %I526 TS350 DI SG-1B GT-ABC Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-02 0 Local/Remote 1 1 44 1 B0
15 ZSH400C GT_1C-ZSH400C %I15 %I527 TS351 DI GT-1C GT-ABC MV-OVW Open position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 0 Not open/Open 1 1 44 3 B0
16 ZSL400C GT_1C-ZSL400C %I16 %I528 TS352 DI GT-1C GT-ABC MV-OVW Closed position Circuit Breaker 13,8kV 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 44 3 B0
17 ZSA601C GT_1C-ZSA601C %I17 %I529 TS353 DI GT-1C CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1C 0 No/Yes 1 1 44 7 B0
18 ZSA602C GT_1C-ZSA602C %I18 %I530 TS354 DI GT-1C CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1C 0 No/Yes 1 1 44 7 B0
19 ZSA603C GT_1C-ZSA603C %I19 %I531 TS355 DI GT-1C CTRL-ABC Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1C 0 No/Yes 1 1 44 7 B0
20 ZSA604C GT_1C-ZSA604C %I20 %I532 TS356 DI GT-1C CTRL-ABC Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1C 0 No/Yes 1 1 44 7 B0
21 ZSA605C GT_1C-ZSA605C %I21 %I533 TS357 DI GT-1C GT-1C tripped 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 7 B0
22 ZSA606C GT_1C-ZSA606C %I22 %I534 TS358 DI GT-1C GT-1C controlled by EMCS 0 No/Yes 1 1 44 7 B0
23 ZSA607C GT_1C-ZSA607C %I23 %I535 TS359 DI GT-1C Permissive to close CB 34.5kV 0 No/Yes 1 1 44 7 B0
24 XAH500C TR_1C-XAH500C %I24 %I536 TS360 DI TR-1C GT-ABC MV-OVW General Alarm Transfo TR-1C (1A-02) 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 5 B0
25 XHH500C TR_1C-XAHH500C %I25 %I537 TS361 DI TR-1C GT-ABC MV-OVW General Trip Transfo TR-1C (1A-02) 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 5 B0
26 XAH501C TR_1C-XAH501C %I26 %I538 TS362 DI TR-1C GT-ABC MV-OVW General Alarm Transfo TR-1C (1B-02) 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 44 5 B0
27 XHH501C TR_1C-XAHH501C %I27 %I539 TS363 DI TR-1C GT-ABC MV-OVW General Trip Transfo TR-1C (1B-02) 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 44 5 B0
28 ZSA615C GT_1C-ZSA615C %I28 %I540 TS364 DI GT_1C CB 13.8 kV tripping too long 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 1
29 %I29 %I541 TS365 DI Spare 44 B0
30 %I30 %I542 TS366 DI Spare 44 B0
31 %I31 %I543 TS367 DI Spare 44 B0
32 XA0144 PLC-XA0144 %I32 %I544 TS368 DI PLC SYS PLC Card fault cabinet 01 - rack 4 - slot 4 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
GT-1C Class : 00
N° : A565645-AD107
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
Page/File : 2/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:
1 YZH1A02 %Q801 %Q177 DO SG-1A GT-ABC Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-02 45 1 B0
2 YZL1A02 %Q802 %Q178 DO SG-1A GT-ABC Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-02 45 1 B0
3 ZAH1A02 %Q803 DO GT-1C Open position Circuit Breaker 1A-02 AND 1B-02 45 1 B0
4 ZAL1A02 %Q804 DO GT-1C Close position Circuit Breaker 1A-02 OR 1B-02 45 1 B0
5 YR1A02 %Q805 %Q181 DO SG-1A GT-ABC Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1A-02 45 1 B0
6 YZH1B02 %Q806 %Q182 DO SG-1B GT-ABC Open order Circuit Breaker 1B-02 45 1 B0
7 YZL1B02 %Q807 %Q183 DO SG-1B GT-ABC Close order Circuit Breaker 1B-02 45 1 B0
8 YR1B02 %Q808 %Q184 DO SG-1B GT-ABC Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1B-02 45 1 B0
9 YZS601C %Q809 %Q185 DO GT-1C CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Isochronous Mode GT-1C 45 7 B0
10 YZS602C %Q810 %Q186 DO GT-1C CTRL-ABC Gas Turbine in Droop Mode GT-1C 45 7 B0
11 YZS603C %Q811 %Q187 DO GT-1C CTRL-ABC Generator in Voltage Mode GT-1C 45 7 B0
12 YZS604C %Q812 %Q188 DO GT-1C CTRL-ABC Generator in Reactive Mode GT-1C 45 7 B0
13 YZS608C %Q813 %Q189 DO GT-1C Permissive to switch GT-1C MCC to EDG supply 45 7 B0
14 YZS609C %Q814 %Q190 DO GT-1C CTRL-ABC GT-1C normal start 45 7 B0
15 YZS610C %Q815 %Q191 DO GT-1C CTRL-ABC GT-1C black start 45 7 B0
16 YZS611C %Q816 %Q192 DO GT-1C CTRL-ABC Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1C 45 7 B0
17 YZS612C %Q817 %Q193 DO D-4103 D4103 Fuel gas selection 45 0
18 YZS613C %Q818 %Q194 DO D-4103 D4103 Diesel fuel selection 45 0
19 YZS614C %Q819 %Q195 DO D-4103 D4103 Naphta fuel selection 45 0
20 YZS615C %Q820 %Q196 DO GT-1C Run or transitory status GT_1C 45 0
21 YZH400C %Q821 %Q197 DO GT_1C GT_ABC Open order Q400C 45 1
22 %Q822 %Q198 DO Spare 45 B0
23 %Q823 %Q199 DO Spare 45 B0
24 %Q824 %Q200 DO Spare 45 B0
25 %Q825 %Q201 DO Spare 45 B0
26 %Q826 %Q202 DO Spare 45 B0
27 %Q827 %Q203 DO Spare 45 B0
28 %Q828 %Q204 DO Spare 45 B0
29 %Q829 %Q205 DO Spare 45 B0
30 %Q830 %Q206 DO Spare 45 B0
31 %Q831 %Q207 DO Spare 45 B0
32 YA902C %Q832 %Q208 DO PLC SYS Watchdog - Fault system cab 01 - rack 04 45 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
GT-1C Class : 00
N° : A565645-AD107
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
Page/File : 3/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:
Y1A02_O SG_1A-Y1A02_O %M209 TC81 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-02 N-Req/Req 1 1 B0
Y1A02_C SG_1A-Y1A02_C %M210 TC82 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-02 N-Req/Req 1 1 B0
Y1A02_A SG_1A-Y1A02_A %M211 TC83 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1A-02 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1A02_M SG_1A-Y1A02_M %M212 TC84 INT SG-1A GT-ABC Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1A-02 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1B02_O SG_1B-Y1B02_O %M213 TC85 INT SG-1B GT-ABC Open order Circuit Breaker 1B-02 N-Req/Req 1 2 B0
Y1B02_C SG_1B-Y1B02_C %M214 TC86 INT SG-1B GT-ABC Close order Circuit Breaker 1B-02 N-Req/Req 1 2 B0
Y1B02_A SG_1B-Y1B02_A %M215 TC87 INT SG-1B GT-ABC Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1B-02 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1B02_M SG_1B-Y1B02_M %M216 TC88 INT SG-1B GT-ABC Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1B-02 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y609C PR_1C-Y609C %M217 TC89 INT GT-1C CTRL-ABC Op. GT-1C normal start No/Yes 1 B0
P610C PR_1C-P610C %M218 TC90 INT GT-1C CTRL-ABC Op. GT-1C black start No/Yes 1 B0
Y611C PR_1C-Y611C %M219 TC91 INT GT-1C CTRL-ABC Op. Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1C No/Yes 1 B0
P609C PR_1C-P609C %M220 TC92 INT GT-1C Prog. GT-1C normal start No/Yes 1 B0
P611C PR_1C-P611C %M221 TC93 INT GT-1C Prog. Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1C No/Yes 1 B0
JOINT_C PR_1C-JOINT_C %M222 TC94 INT GT-1C Joint order to PLC No/Yes 1 B0
INDIV_C PR_1C-INDIV_C %M223 TC95 INT GT-1C Indiv order to PLC No/Yes 1 B0
Y612C PR_1C-Y612C %M224 TC96 INT GT-1C CTRL-ABC Fuel gas selection N-Req/Req 1 0
Y613C PR_1C-Y613C %M225 TC97 INT GT-1C CTRL-ABC Diesel fuel selection N-Req/Req 1 0
Y614C PR_1C-Y614C %M226 TC98 INT GT-1C CTRL-ABC Naphta fuel selection N-Req/Req 1 0
R_SEQ_C PR_1C-R_SEQ_C %M227 TC99 INT GT-1C CTRL-ABC Escape all GT_1C sequences in progress N-Req/Req 1 1
ACK_GTC PR_1C-ACK_GTC %M228 TC100 INT GT-1C GENERAL Acknoledge GT panel N-Req/Req 1 0

P1A02_O %M2193 INT SG-1A Open order Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 B0

P1A02_C %M2194 INT SG-1A Close order Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 B0
P1B02_O %M2195 INT SG-1B Open order Circuit Breaker 1B-02 2 B0
P1B02_C %M2196 INT SG-1B Close order Circuit Breaker 1B-02 2 B0
PY609C %M2197 INT GT-1C Prog. or Op. GT-1C normal start 7 B0
PY610C %M2198 INT GT-1C Op. GT-1C black start 7 B0
PY611C %M2199 INT GT-1C Prog. or Op. Stop order Gas Turbine GT-1C 7 B0

SG_1A-VR-1A02 INT GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1A-02 B0

SG_1A-CB-1A02 INT GT-ABC Internal command variable 1A-02 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
GT-1C Class : 00
N° : A565645-AD107
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
Page/File : 4/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:
MM1A02 SG_1A-MM1A02 %M2041 TS641 INT GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 1A-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0
YR1A02 SG_1A-YR1A02 %M2042 TS642 INT GT-ABC Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1A-02 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
ZLA1A02 SG_1A-ZLA1A02 %M2043 TS643 GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1A-02 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
SG1_B-VR-1B02 INT GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1B-02 B0
SG1_B-CB-1B02 INT GT-ABC Internal command variable 1B-02 B0
MM1B02 SG1_B-MM1B02 %M2044 TS644 INT GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 1B-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0
YR1B02 SG1_B-YR1B02 %M2045 TS645 INT GT-ABC Permissive to close Circuit Breaker 1B-02 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
ZLA1B02 SG_1A-ZLA1B02 %M2046 TS646 GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1B-02 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
GT_C-VR-400C INT GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable Generator CB GT-1C B0
MM400C GT_1C-MM400C %M2047 TS647 INT GT-ABC MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 400C 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0
SUID_C GT_1C-SUID %M2048 TS648 TSE CTRL-ABC Droop mode 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
SUVR_C GT_1C-SUVR %M2049 TS649 TSE CTRL-ABC Reactive mode 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
JNT_C PR_1C-JNT_C %M2050 NA Internal to PLCS B0
SEQ_C GT_1C-SEQ_ON %M2051 TS651 TSE Sequence C in progress in the PLC 0 No/Yes 1 1 B0
STSQRC GT_1C-STSQR %M2052 TS652 TSE Start or Black Start in progress 0 No/Yes 1 1 X1
ISOLATC PR_1C-ISOLATC %M2053 TS653 TSE Not used anymore 0
MM601C GT_1C-MM601C %M2055 TS655 TSE Mismatch droop mode 1 Normal/Alarm 1 0 0
MM603C GT_1C-MM603C %M2056 TS656 TSE Mismatch voltage mode 1 Normal/Alarm 1 0 0
AUTO-AVC GT_1C-AUTO-AVC %M2057 TS657 TSE GT_1A auto mode available 0 No/Yes 1 1 0
FDOK_C GT_1C-FDOK_C %M2058 TS658 TSE CTRL-ABC DIESEL FUEL MODE PERMISSIVE 0 No/Yes 1 1 0
FGOK_C GT_1C-FGOK_C %M2059 TS659 TSE CTRL-ABC GAS FUEL MODE PERMISSIVE 0 No/Yes 1 1 0
MODB_C1 GT_1C-MODB_C1 %M2060 TS660 TSE Modbus port 1 alarm 1 Fault/Normal 1 0 1
MODB_C2 GT_1C-MODB_C2 %M2061 TS661 TSE Modbus port 2 alarm 1 Fault/Normal 1 0 1
MFCAL_C GT_1C_MFCAL_C %M2062 TS662 TSE GT_1C FUEL CHANGE OVER ALARM 1 NO/YES 1 1 X0
MGFRS_C GT_1C_MGFRS_C %M2063 TS663 TSE GT_1C GAS FUEL REQUEST SEQUENCE No/Yes 1 1 X0
MDFRS_C GT_1C_MDFRS_C %M2064 TS664 TSE GT_1C DIESEL FUEL REQUEST SEQUENCE No/Yes 1 1 X0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A.
GT-1C Class : 00
N° : A565645-AD107
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT
Page/File : 5/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 MIMIC 3 Description Alarme msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev
P8 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref:
1 JI618C GT_C-JI618C %AI1 %AQ321 TM61 AI GT-1C CTRL-ABC Generator Active Power GT-1C 1 1 0 30 MW 46 7 B0
2 JI619C GT_C-JI619C %AI2 %AQ322 TM62 AI GT-1C CTRL-ABC Generator Reactive Power GT-1C 0 1 -12 18 MVAR 46 7 B0
3 %AI3 %AQ323 TM63 AI Spare 46 7 B0
4 %AI4 %AQ324 TM64 AI Spare 46 B0
5 %AI5 %AQ325 TM65 AI Spare 46 B0
6 %AI6 %AQ326 TM66 AI Spare 46 B0
7 %AI7 %AQ327 TM67 AI Spare 46 B0
8 %AI8 %AQ328 TM68 AI Spare 46 B0
9 %AI9 %AQ329 TM69 AI Spare 46 B0
10 %AI10 %AQ330 TM70 AI Spare 46 B0
11 %AI11 %AQ331 TM71 AI Spare 46 B0
12 %AI12 %AQ332 TM72 AI Spare 46 B0
13 %AI13 %AQ333 TM73 AI Spare 46 B0
14 %AI14 %AQ334 TM74 AI Spare 46 B0
15 %AI15 %AQ335 TM75 AI Spare 46 B0
16 %AI16 %AQ336 TM76 AI Spare 46 B0

1 YJ618C GT_C-YJ618C %AQ11 %R8687 TVC11 AO GT-1C CTRL-ABC Generator Active Power Set Point GT-1C 1 0 30 MW 47 7 B0
2 YJ619C GT_C-YJ619C %AQ12 %R8688 TVC12 AO GT-1C CTRL-ABC Generator Reactive Power Set Point GT-1C 1 -12 18 MVAR 47 7 B0
3 YE620C GT_C-YE620C %AQ13 %R8689 TVC13 AO GT-1C CTRL-ABC Voltage 34,5 KV Set Point GT-1C 1 31 38 kV 47 7 B0
4 %AQ14 %R8690 TVC14 AO Spare 47 B0
5 %AQ15 %R8691 TVC15 AO Spare 47 B0
6 %AQ16 %R8692 TVC16 AO Spare 47 B0
7 %AQ17 %R8693 TVC17 AO Spare 47 B0
8 %AQ18 %R8694 TVC18 AO Spare 47 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 1/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411

1 ZLR1A09 SG_1A-ZLR1A09 %I1 %I33 TS1 DI SG-1A SG-1 Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-09 0 Local/Remote 1 1 33 6 B0 ZLR1A09 %M747
2 ZSL1A09 SG_1A-ZSL1A09 %I2 %I34 TS2 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1A-09 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 33 6 B0 ZSL1A09 %M748
4 XA1A09 SG_1A-XA1A09 %I4 %I35 TS4 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-09 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 6 B0 XA1A09 %M749
4 XAH1A09 SG_1A-XAH1A09 %I4 %I36 TS4 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1A-09 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 6 B0 XAH1A09 %M740
5 XHH1A09 SG_1A-XAHH1A09 %I5 %I37 TS5 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 General Trip Circuit Breaker 1A-09 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 6 B0 XHH1A09 %M741
6 EAH1A09 SG_1A-EAH1A09 %I6 %I38 TS6 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1A-09 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 6 B0 EAH1A09 %M742
7 XR1A09 SG_1A-XR1A09 %I7 %I39 TS7 DI SG-1A SG-1 Recloser operating 1A-09 4 Alarm/Normal 1 1 33 6 B0 XR1A09 %M744
8 ZLR1A08 SG_1A-ZLR1A08 %I8 %I40 TS8 DI SG-1A SG-1 Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-08 0 No remote/Remote 1 1 33 6 B0 ZLR1A08 %M744
9 ZSL1A08 SG_1A-ZSL1A08 %I9 %I41 TS9 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1A-08 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 33 6 B0 ZSL1A08 %M745
10 XA1A08 SG_1A-XA1A08 %I10 %I42 TS10 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-08 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 6 B0 XA1A08 %M746
11 XAH1A08 SG_1A-XAH1A08 %I11 %I43 TS11 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1A-08 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 6 B0 XAH1A08 %M747
12 XHH1A08 SG_1A-XAHH1A08 %I12 %I44 TS12 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 General Trip Circuit Breaker 1A-08 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 6 B0 XHH1A08 %M748
14 EAH1A08 SG_1A-EAH1A08 %I13 %I45 TS14 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1A-08 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 6 B0 EAH1A08 %M749
14 XR1A08 SG_1A-XR1A08 %I14 %I46 TS14 DI SG-1A SG-1 Recloser operating 1A-08 4 Alarm/Normal 1 1 33 6 B0 XR1A08 %M750
15 XA361A EE_361-XA361A %I15 %I47 TS15 DI EE-361 LV-OVW Rectifier fault EE-361 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 8 B0 XA361A %M751
16 XA361B EE_361-XA361B %I16 %I48 TS16 DI EE-361 LV-OVW DC low voltage EE-361 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 8 B0 XA361B %M752
17 XA361C EE_361-XA361C %I17 %I49 TS17 DI EE-361 LV-OVW DC low voltage EE-361 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 8 B0 XA361C %M754
18 XA361D EE_361-XA361D %I18 %I50 TS18 DI EE-361 LV-OVW Earth Fault EE-361 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 8 B0 XA361D %M754
19 XA605A LS_1-XA605A %I19 %I51 TS19 DI LS_1 GT_A tripped for load shedding 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 1
20 XA605B LS_1-XA605B %I20 %I52 TS20 DI LS_1 GT_B tripped for load shedding 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 1
21 XA605C LS_1-XA605C %I21 %I53 TS21 DI LS_1 GT_C tripped for load shedding 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 1
22 %I22 %I54 TS22 DI Spare 33 B0
23 %I23 %I55 TS23 DI Spare 33 B0
24 %I24 %I56 TS24 DI Spare 33 B0
25 %I25 %I57 TS25 DI Spare 33 B0
26 %I26 %I58 TS26 DI Spare 33 B0
27 %I27 %I59 TS27 DI Spare 33 B0
28 %I28 %I60 TS28 DI Spare 33 B0
29 %I29 %I61 TS29 DI Spare 33 B0
30 %I30 %I62 TS30 DI Spare 33 B0
31 %I31 %I63 TS31 DI Spare 33 B0
32 XA0233 PLC-XA0233 %I32 %I64 TS32 DI PLC SYS PLC Card fault cabinet 02 - rack 3 - slot 3 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 33 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 2/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411
1 ZLR1A07 SG_1A-ZLR1A07 %I33 %I65 TS33 DI SG-1A SG-1 Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1A-07 0 No remote/Remote 1 1 34 6 B0 ZLR1A07 %M769
2 ZSL1A07 SG_1A-ZSL1A07 %I34 %I66 TS34 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1A-07 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 34 6 B0 ZSL1A07 %M770
4 XA1A07 SG_1A-XA1A07 %I35 %I67 TS35 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1A-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 6 B0 XA1A07 %M771
4 XAH1A07 SG_1A-XAH1A07 %I36 %I68 TS36 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1A-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 6 B0 XAH1A07 %M772
5 XHH1A07 SG_1A-XAHH1A07 %I37 %I69 TS37 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 General Trip Circuit Breaker 1A-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 6 B0 XHH1A07 %M773
6 EAH1A07 SG_1A-EAH1A07 %I38 %I70 TS38 DI SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1A-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 6 B0 EAH1A07 %M774
7 ZSA0001 MOTOR-ZSA0001 %I39 %I71 TS39 DI MOTOR Motor N°1 status 4 Stopped/Running 1 1 34 B0
8 ZSA0002 MOTOR-ZSA0002 %I40 %I72 TS40 DI MOTOR Motor N°2 status 4 Stopped/Running 1 1 34 B0
9 ZSA0003 MOTOR-ZSA0003 %I41 %I73 TS41 DI MOTOR Motor N°3 status 4 Stopped/Running 1 1 34 B0
10 ZSA0004 MOTOR-ZSA0004 %I42 %I74 TS42 DI MOTOR Motor N°4 status 4 Stopped/Running 1 1 34 B0
11 XHH0001 MOTOR-XHH0001 %I43 %I75 TS43 DI EARTH GT-ABC MV-OVW Neutral resistance current 32 EE 2A 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 34 0
12 XHH0002 MOTOR-XHH0002 %I44 %I76 TS44 DI EARTH GT-ABC MV-OVW Neutral resistance current 32 EE 2B 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 34 0
13 ZSLEE3A EARTH-ZSLEE3A %I45 %I77 TS45 DI EARTH GT-ABC MV-OVW Earth switch 32 EE 4A close position 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 34 B0
14 ZSLEE3C EARTH-ZSLEE3C %I46 %I78 TS46 DI EARTH GT-ABC MV-OVW Earth switch 32 EE 4C close position 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 34 B0
15 ZSLEE4A EARTH-ZSLEE4A %I47 %I79 TS47 DI EARTH GT-ABC MV-OVW Earth switch 32 EE 4A close position 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 34 B0
16 ZSLEE4C EARTH-ZSLEE4C %I48 %I80 TS48 DI EARTH GT-ABC MV-OVW Earth switch 32 EE 4C close position 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 34 B0
17 ZSA0009 MOTOR-ZSA0009 %I49 %I81 TS49 DI MOTOR Motor N°9 status 4 Stopped/Running 1 1 34 X1
18 %I50 %I82 TS50 DI Spare 34 B0
19 %I51 %I83 TS51 DI Spare 34 B0
20 %I52 %I84 TS52 DI Spare 34 B0
21 %I53 %I85 TS53 DI Spare 34 B0
22 %I54 %I86 TS54 DI Spare 34 B0
24 %I55 %I87 TS55 DI Spare 34 B0
24 %I56 %I88 TS56 DI Spare 34 B0
25 %I57 %I89 TS57 DI Spare 34 B0
26 %I58 %I90 TS58 DI Spare 34 B0
27 %I59 %I91 TS59 DI Spare 34 B0
28 %I60 %I92 TS60 DI Spare 34 B0
29 %I61 %I93 TS61 DI Spare 34 B0
30 %I62 %I94 TS62 DI Spare 34 B0
31 %I63 %I95 TS63 DI Spare 34 B0
32 XA0234 PLC-XA0234 %I64 %I96 TS64 DI PLC SYS PLC Card fault cabinet 02 - rack 3 - slot 4 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 34 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 3/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411
1 YZH1A09 %Q801 %Q1 DO SG-1A SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-09 /Opening 35 6 B0 P1A09_O %M689
2 YZL1A09 %Q802 %Q2 DO SG-1A SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-09 /Closing 35 6 B0 P1A09_C %M690
4 YZH1A08 %Q803 %Q3 DO SG-1A SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-08 /Opening 35 6 B0 P1A08_O %M691
4 YZL1A08 %Q804 %Q4 DO SG-1A SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-08 /Closing 35 6 B0 P1A08_C %M692
5 YZH1A07 %Q805 %Q5 DO SG-1A SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-07 /Opening 35 6 B0 P1A07_O %M693
6 YZL1A07 %Q806 %Q6 DO SG-1A SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-07 /Closing 35 6 B0 P1A07_C %M694
7 YZS0001 %Q807 %Q7 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°1 /Tripping 35 B0
8 YZS0002 %Q808 %Q8 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°2 /Tripping 35 B0
9 YZS0003 %Q809 %Q9 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°3 /Tripping 35 B0
10 YZS0004 %Q810 %Q10 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°4 /Tripping 35 B0
11 YZS0009 %Q811 %Q11 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°9 /Tripping 35 X1
12 %Q812 %Q12 DO Spare 35 B0
14 %Q813 %Q13 DO Spare 35 B0
14 %Q814 %Q14 DO Spare 35 B0
15 %Q815 %Q15 DO Spare 35 B0
16 %Q816 %Q16 DO Spare 35 B0
17 %Q817 %Q17 DO Spare 35 B0
18 %Q818 %Q18 DO Spare 35 B0
19 %Q819 %Q19 DO Spare 35 B0
20 %Q820 %Q20 DO Spare 35 B0
21 %Q821 %Q21 DO Spare 35 B0
22 %Q822 %Q22 DO Spare 35 B0
24 %Q823 %Q23 DO Spare 35 B0
24 %Q824 %Q24 DO Spare 35 B0
25 %Q825 %Q25 DO Spare 35 B0
26 %Q826 %Q26 DO Spare 35 B0
27 %Q827 %Q27 DO Spare 35 B0
28 %Q828 %Q28 DO Spare 35 B0
29 %Q829 %Q29 DO Spare 35 B0
30 %Q830 %Q30 DO Spare 35 B0
31 %Q831 %Q31 DO Spare 35 B0
32 YA903 %Q832 %Q32 DO PLC SYS Watchdog - Fault system cab 02 - rack 03 35 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 4/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411

Y1A09_O SG_1A-Y1A09_O %M129 TC1 INT SG-1A SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-09 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1A09_C SG_1A-Y1A09_C %M130 TC2 INT SG-1A SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-09 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1A09_A SG_1A-Y1A09_A %M131 TC3 INT SG-1A SG-1 Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1A-09 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1A09_M SG_1A-Y1A09_M %M132 TC4 INT SG-1A SG-1 Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1A-09 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1A08_O SG_1A-Y1A08_O %M133 TC5 INT SG-1A SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-08 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1A08_C SG_1A-Y1A08_C %M134 TC6 INT SG-1A SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-08 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1A08_A SG_1A-Y1A08_A %M135 TC7 INT SG-1A SG-1 Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1A-08 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1A08_M SG_1A-Y1A08_M %M136 TC8 INT SG-1A SG-1 Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1A-08 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1A07_O SG_1A-Y1A07_O %M137 TC9 INT SG-1A SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-07 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1A07_C SG_1A-Y1A07_C %M138 TC10 INT SG-1A SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-07 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1A07_A SG_1A-Y1A07_A %M139 TC11 INT SG-1A SG-1 Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1A-07 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1A07_M SG_1A-Y1A07_M %M140 TC12 INT SG-1A SG-1 Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1A-07 N-Req/Req 1 B0

P1A09_O %M1169 INT SG-1A Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-09 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
P1A09_C Zone prog sub1 %M1170 INT SG-1A Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-09 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
P1A08_O %M1147-2048 %M1171 INT SG-1A Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-08 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
P1A08_C %R449-1088 %M1172 INT SG-1A Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-08 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
P1A07_O %M1173 INT SG-1A Open Order Circuit Breaker 1A-07 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
P1A07_C %M1174 INT SG-1A Close Order Circuit Breaker 1A-07 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
LOSHEDD %M1175 Load Shedding Authorised
SG_1A-VR-1A09 INT SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1A-09 B0
SG_1A-CB-1A09 INT SG-1A SG-1 Internal command variable 1A-09 B0
MM1A09 SG_1A-MM1A09 %M1025 TS305 TS SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 1A-09 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0

ZLA1A09 SG_1A-ZLA1A09 %M1027 TS307 TS SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1A-09 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
SG_1A-VR-1A08 INT SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1A-08 B0
SG_1A-CB-1A08 INT SG-1A SG-1 Internal command variable 1A-08 B0
MM1A08 SG_1A-MM1A08 %M1028 TS308 TS SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 1A-08 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0

ZLA1A08 SG_1A-ZLA1A08 %M1030 TS310 TS SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1A-08 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
SG_1A-VR-1A07 INT SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1A-07 B0
SG_1A-CB-1A07 INT SG-1A SG-1 Internal command variable 1A-07 B0
MM1A07 SG_1A-MM1A07 %M1031 TS311 TS SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 1A-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0

ZLA1A07 SG_1A-ZLA1A07 %M1033 TS313 TS SG-1A MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1A-07 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
XA001 LS_1-XA001 %M1034 TS314 TS LS_1 Load shedding alarm 4 Alarm/Normal 1 1 0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 5/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411
1 ZLR1B06 SG_1B-ZLR1B06 %I1 %I513 TS337 DI SG-1B SG-1 Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-06 0 No remote/Remote 1 1 43 6 B0 ZLR1B06 %M801
2 ZSL1B06 SG_1B-ZSL1B06 %I2 %I514 TS338 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1B-06 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 43 6 B0 ZSL1B06 %M802
4 XA1B06 SG_1B-XA1B06 %I3 %I515 TS339 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-06 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 6 B0 XA1B06 %M804
4 XAH1B06 SG_1B-XAH1B06 %I4 %I516 TS340 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-06 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 6 B0 XAH1B06 %M804
5 XHH1B06 SG_1B-XAHH1B06 %I5 %I517 TS341 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-06 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 6 B0 XHH1B06 %M805
6 EAH1B06 SG_1B-EAH1B06 %I6 %I518 TS342 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1B-06 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 6 B0 EAH1B06 %M806
7 ZLR1B07 SG_1B-ZLR1B07 %I7 %I519 TS343 DI SG-1B SG-1 Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-07 0 No remote/Remote 1 1 43 6 B0 ZLR1B07 %M807
8 ZSL1B07 SG_1B-ZSL1B07 %I8 %I520 TS344 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1B-07 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 43 6 B0 ZSL1B07 %M808
9 XA1B07 SG_1B-XA1B07 %I9 %I521 TS345 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 6 B0 XA1B07 %M809
10 XAH1B07 SG_1B-XAH1B07 %I10 %I522 TS346 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 6 B0 XAH1B07 %M810
11 XHH1B07 SG_1B-XAHH1B07 %I11 %I523 TS347 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 6 B0 XHH1B07 %M811
12 EAH1B07 SG_1B-EAH1B07 %I12 %I524 TS348 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1B-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 6 B0 EAH1B07 %M812
14 XR1B07 SG_1B-XR1B07 %I13 %I525 TS349 DI SG-1B SG-1 Recloser operating 1B-07 4 Alarm/Normal 1 1 43 6 B0 XR1B07 %M813
14 XA371A EE_371-XA371A %I14 %I526 TS350 DI EE-371 LV-OVW Failure Battery Charger#1 EE-371 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 9 B0 XA371A %M814
15 XA371B EE_371-XA371B %I15 %I527 TS351 DI EE-371 LV-OVW Failure Battery Charger#2 EE-371 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 9 B0 XA371B %M815
16 XA371C EE_371-XA371C %I16 %I528 TS352 DI EE-371 LV-OVW Battery Charger Earth Fault EE-371 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 9 B0 XA371C %M816
17 XA371D EE_371-XA371D %I17 %I529 TS353 DI EE-371 LV-OVW Rectifier Failure EE-371 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 9 B0 XA371D %M817
18 XA371E EE_371-XA371E %I18 %I530 TS354 DI EE-371 LV-OVW DC low voltage Alarm EE-371 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 9 B0 XA371E %M818
19 XAH500 TR_2-XAH500 %I19 %I531 TS355 DI TR-2 LV-OVW General Alarm Transfo TR-2 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 43 5 0 XAH500 %M819
20 XAHH500 TR_2-XAHH500 %I20 %I532 TS356 DI TR-2 LV-OVW General Trip Transfo TR-2 1 Alarm/Normal 1 1 43 5 0 XAHH500 %M820
21 XA605A LS_1-XA605A %I21 %I533 TS357 DI LS_1 GT_A tripped for load shedding 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 1
22 XA605B LS_1-XA605B %I22 %I534 TS358 DI LS_1 GT_B tripped for load shedding 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 1
23 XA605C LS_1-XA605C %I23 %I535 TS359 DI LS_1 GT_C tripped for load shedding 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 1
24 %I24 %I536 TS360 DI Spare 43 B0
25 %I25 %I537 TS361 DI Spare 43 B0
26 %I26 %I538 TS362 DI Spare 43 B0
27 %I27 %I539 TS363 DI Spare 43 B0
28 %I28 %I540 TS364 DI Spare 43 B0
29 %I29 %I541 TS365 DI Spare 43 B0
30 %I30 %I542 TS366 DI Spare 43 B0
31 %I31 %I543 TS367 DI Spare 43 B0
32 XA0243 PLC-XA0243 %I32 %I544 TS368 DI PLC SYS PLC Card fault cabinet 02 - rack 4 - slot 3 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 43 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 6/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411
1 ZLR1B08 SG_1B-ZLR1B08 %I33 %I545 TS369 DI SG-1B SG-1 Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-08 0 No remote/Remote 1 1 44 6 B0 ZLR1B08 %M843
2 ZSL1B08 SG_1B-ZSL1B08 %I34 %I546 TS370 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1B-08 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 44 6 B0 ZSL1B08 %M844
3 XA1B08 SG_1B-XA1B08 %I35 %I547 TS371 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-08 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 6 B0 XA1B08 %M845
4 XAH1B08 SG_1B-XAH1B08 %I36 %I548 TS372 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-08 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 6 B0 XAH1B08 %M846
5 XHH1B08 SG_1B-XAHH1B08 %I37 %I549 TS373 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-08 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 6 B0 XHH1B08 %M847
6 EAH1B08 SG_1B-EAH1B08 %I38 %I550 TS374 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1B-08 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 6 B0 EAH1B08 %M848
7 ZLR1B09 SG_1B-ZLR1B09 %I39 %I551 TS375 DI SG-1B SG-1 Remote Mode Circuit Breaker 1B-09 0 No remote/Remote 1 1 44 6 B0 ZLR1B09 %M849
8 ZSL1B09 SG_1B-ZSL1B09 %I40 %I552 TS376 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Closed Position Circuit Breaker 1B-09 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 44 6 B0 ZSL1B09 %M840
9 XA1B09 SG_1B-XA1B09 %I41 %I553 TS377 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Availability of Circuit Breaker 1B-09 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 6 B0 XA1B09 %M841
10 XAH1B09 SG_1B-XAH1B09 %I42 %I554 TS378 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 General Alarm Circuit Breaker 1B-09 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 6 B0 XAH1B09 %M842
11 XHH1B09 SG_1B-XAHH1B09 %I43 %I555 TS379 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 General Trip Circuit Breaker 1B-09 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 6 B0 XHH1B09 %M843
12 EAH1B09 SG_1B-EAH1B09 %I44 %I556 TS380 DI SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Critical Control Fault Circuit Breaker 1B-09 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 6 B0 EAH1B09 %M844
13 XR1B09 SG_1B-XR1B09 %I45 %I557 TS381 DI SG-1B SG-1 Recloser operating 1B-09 4 Alarm/Normal 1 1 44 6 B0 XR1B09 %M845
14 ZSA0005 MOTOR-ZSA0005 %I46 %I558 TS382 DI MOTOR Motor N°5 status 4 Stopped/Running 1 0 44 B0
15 ZSA0006 MOTOR-ZSA0006 %I47 %I559 TS383 DI MOTOR Motor N°6 status 4 Stopped/Running 1 0 44 B0
16 ZSA0007 MOTOR-ZSA0007 %I48 %I560 TS384 DI MOTOR Motor N°7 status 4 Stopped/Running 1 0 44 B0
17 ZSA0008 MOTOR-ZSA0008 %I49 %I561 TS385 DI MOTOR Motor N°8 status 4 Stopped/Running 1 0 44 B0
18 ZSLEE 3B EARTH-ZSLEE 3B %I50 %I562 TS386 DI EARTH GT-ABC MV-OVW Earth switch 32 EE 3B Closed position 0 Not closed/Closed 1 0 44 B0
19 ZSLEE 3D EARTH-ZSLEE 3D %I51 %I563 TS387 DI EARTH GT-ABC MV-OVW Earth switch 33 EE 3D Closed position 0 Not closed/Closed 1 0 44 B0
20 ZSLEE 4B EARTH-ZSLEE 4B %I52 %I564 TS388 DI EARTH GT-ABC MV-OVW Earth switch 34 EE 4B Closed position 0 Not closed/Closed 1 0 44 B0
21 ZSA0010 MOTOR-ZSA0010 %I53 %I565 TS389 DI MOTOR Motor N°10 status 4 Stopped/Running 1 0 44 X1
22 ZSA0011 MOTOR-ZSA0011 %I54 %I566 TS390 DI MOTOR Motor N°11 status 4 Stopped/Running 1 0 44 X1
23 %I55 %I567 TS391 DI Spare 44 B0
24 %I56 %I568 TS392 DI Spare 44 B0
25 %I57 %I569 TS393 DI Spare 44 B0
26 %I58 %I570 TS394 DI Spare 44 B0
27 %I59 %I571 TS395 DI Spare 44 B0
28 %I60 %I572 TS396 DI Spare 44 B0
29 %I61 %I573 TS397 DI Spare 44 B0
30 %I62 %I574 TS398 DI Spare 44 B0
31 %I63 %I575 TS399 DI Spare 44 B0
32 XA0244 PLC-XA0244 %I64 %I576 TS400 DI PLC SYS PLC Card fault cabinet 02 - rack 4 - slot 4 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 44 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 7/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411
1 YZH1B06 %Q801 %Q177 DO SG-1B SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-06 N-Req/Req 1 45 6 B0 P1B06_O %M705
2 YZL1B06 %Q802 %Q178 DO SG-1B SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-06 N-Req/Req 1 45 6 B0 P1B06_C %M706
3 YZH1B07 %Q803 %Q179 DO SG-1B SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-07 N-Req/Req 1 45 6 B0 P1B07_O %M707
4 YZL1B07 %Q804 %Q180 DO SG-1B SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-07 N-Req/Req 1 45 6 B0 P1B07_C %M708
5 YZH1B08 %Q805 %Q181 DO SG-1B SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-08 N-Req/Req 1 45 6 B0 P1B08_O %M709
6 YZL1B08 %Q806 %Q182 DO SG-1B SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-08 N-Req/Req 1 45 6 B0 P1B08_C %M710
7 YZH1B09 %Q807 %Q183 DO SG-1B SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-09 N-Req/Req 1 45 6 B0 P1B09_O %M711
8 YZL1B09 %Q808 %Q184 DO SG-1B SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-09 N-Req/Req 1 45 6 B0 P1B09_C %M712
9 YZS0005 %Q809 %Q185 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°5 N-Req/Req 1 45 B0
10 YZS0006 %Q810 %Q186 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°6 N-Req/Req 1 45 B0
11 YZS0007 %Q811 %Q187 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°7 N-Req/Req 1 45 B0
12 YZS0008 %Q812 %Q188 DO MOTOR Trip order- motor N°8 N-Req/Req 1 45 B0
13 YZS0010 %Q813 %Q189 DO MOTOR Trip order-motor N°10 N-Req/Req 1 45 X1
14 YZS0011 %Q814 %Q190 DO MOTOR Trip order-motor N°11 N-Req/Req 1 45 X1
15 %Q815 %Q191 DO Spare 45 B0
16 %Q816 %Q192 DO Spare 45 B0
17 %Q817 %Q193 DO Spare 45 B0
18 %Q818 %Q194 DO Spare 45 B0
19 %Q819 %Q195 DO Spare 45 B0
20 %Q820 %Q196 DO Spare 45 B0
21 %Q821 %Q197 DO Spare 45 B0
22 %Q822 %Q198 DO Spare 45 B0
23 %Q823 %Q199 DO Spare 45 B0
24 %Q824 %Q200 DO Spare 45 B0
25 %Q825 %Q201 DO Spare 45 B0
26 %Q826 %Q202 DO Spare 45 B0
27 %Q827 %Q203 DO Spare 45 B0
28 %Q828 %Q204 DO Spare 45 B0
29 %Q829 %Q205 DO Spare 45 B0
30 %Q830 %Q206 DO Spare 45 B0
31 %Q831 %Q207 DO Spare 45 B0
32 YA904 %Q832 %Q208 DO PLC SYS Watchdog - Fault system cab 02 - rack 04 45 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 8/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411
Y1B06_O SG_1B-Y1B06_O %M209 TC81 INT SG-1B SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-06 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1B06_C SG_1B-Y1B06_C %M210 TC82 INT SG-1B SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-06 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1B06_A SG_1B-Y1B06_A %M211 TC84 INT SG-1B SG-1 Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1B-06 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1B06_M SG_1B-Y1B06_M %M212 TC84 INT SG-1B SG-1 Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1B-06 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1B07_O SG_1B-Y1B07_O %M214 TC85 INT SG-1B SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-07 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1B07_C SG_1B-Y1B07_C %M214 TC86 INT SG-1B SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-07 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1B07_A SG_1B-Y1B07_A %M215 TC87 INT SG-1B SG-1 Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1B-07 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1B07_M SG_1B-Y1B07_M %M216 TC88 INT SG-1B SG-1 Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1B-07 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1B08_O SG_1B-Y1B08_O %M217 TC89 INT SG-1B SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-08 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1B08_C SG_1B-Y1B08_C %M218 TC90 INT SG-1B SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-08 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1B08_A SG_1B-Y1B08_A %M219 TC91 INT SG-1B SG-1 Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1B-08 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1B08_M SG_1B-Y1B08_M %M220 TC92 INT SG-1B SG-1 Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1B-08 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1B09_O SG_1B-Y1B09_O %M221 TC94 INT SG-1B SG-1 Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-09 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1B09_C SG_1B-Y1B09_C %M222 TC94 INT SG-1B SG-1 Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-09 N-Req/Req 1 6 B0
Y1B09_A SG_1B-Y1B09_A %M224 TC95 INT SG-1B SG-1 Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 1B-09 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y1B09_M SG_1B-Y1B09_M %M224 TC96 INT SG-1B SG-1 Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 1B-09 N-Req/Req 1 B0

P1B06_O %M2194 INT SG-1B Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-06 6 B0

P1B06_C %M2194 INT SG-1B Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-06 6 B0
P1B07_O Zone prog sub2 %M2195 INT SG-1B Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-07 6 B0
P1B07_C %M2161-4072 %M2196 INT SG-1B Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-07 6 B0
P1B08_O %R1089-1728 %M2197 INT SG-1B Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-08 6 B0
P1B08_C %M2198 INT SG-1B Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-08 6 B0
P1B09_O %M2199 INT SG-1B Open Order Circuit Breaker 1B-09 6 B0
P1B09_C %M2200 INT SG-1B Close Order Circuit Breaker 1B-09 6 B0

SG_1B-VR-1B06 INT MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1B-06 B0

SG_1B-CB-1B06 INT SG-1 Internal command variable 1B-06 B0
MM1B06 SG_1B-MM1B06 %M2041 TS641 INT MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 1B-06 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0

ZLA1B06 SG_1B-ZLA1B06 %M2044 TS644 SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1B-06 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
SG_1B-VR-1B07 INT MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1B-07 B0
SG_1B-CB-1B07 INT SG-1 Internal command variable 1B-07 B0
MM1B07 SG_1B-MM1B07 %M2044 TS644 INT MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 1B-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0

ZLA1B07 SG_1B-ZLA1B07 %M2046 TS646 SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1B-07 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
SG_1B-VR-1B08 INT MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1B-08 B0
SG_1B-CB-1B08 INT SG-1 Internal command variable 1B-08 B0
MM1B08 SG_1B-MM1B08 %M2047 TS647 INT MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 1B-08 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0

ZLA1B08 SG_1B-ZLA1B08 %M2049 TS649 SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1B-08 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
SG_1B-VR-1B09 INT MV-OVW SG-1 Internal mimic variable 1B-09 B0
SG_1B-CB-1B09 INT SG-1 Internal command variable 1B-09 B0
MM1B09 SG_1B-MM1B09 %M2050 TS650 INT MV-OVW SG-1 Mismatch Circuit Breaker 1B-09 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0

ZLA1B09 SG_1B-ZLA1B09 %M2052 TS651 SG-1B MV-OVW SG-1 Auto mode 1B-09 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0

YZS005 MOTOR-YZS005 %M227 TC99 INT MOTOR Motor 5 N-Req/Req 1 0

YZS006 MOTOR-YZS006 %M228 TC100 INT MOTOR Motor 6 N-Req/Req 1 0
YZS007 MOTOR-YZS007 %M229 TC101 INT MOTOR Motor 7 N-Req/Req 1 0
YZS008 MOTOR-YZS008 %M240 TC102 INT MOTOR Motor 8 N-Req/Req 1 0
YZS010 MOTOR-YZS010 %M241 TC103 INT MOTOR Motor 10 N-Req/Req 1 X1
YZS011 MOTOR-YZS011 %M242 TC104 INT MOTOR Motor 11 N-Req/Req 1 X1

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 9/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411
1 ZSL2A02 SG_2A-ZSL2A02 %I1 %I993 TS673 DI SG-2A LV-OVW Closed Position 2A-02 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 53 10 B0 ZSL2A02 %M865
2 XA2A02 SG_2A-XA2A02 %I2 %I994 TS674 DI SG-2A LV-OVW Availability of Circuit Breaker 2A-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 53 10 B0 XA2A02 %M866
3 EAL2A02 SG_2A-EAL2A02 %I3 %I995 TS675 DI SG-2A LV-OVW Under voltage 2A-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 53 10 B0 EAL2A02 %M867
4 ZSL2A01 SG_2A-ZSL2A01 %I4 %I996 TS676 DI SG-2A LV-OVW Closed Position 2A-01 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 53 11 B0 ZSL2A01 %M868
5 XA2A01 SG_2A-XA2A01 %I5 %I997 TS677 DI SG-2A LV-OVW Availability of Circuit Breaker 2A-01 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 53 11 B0 XA2A01 %M869
6 ZSL2B07 SG_2B-ZSL2B07 %I6 %I998 TS678 DI SG-2B LV-OVW Closed Position 2B-07 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 53 10 B0 ZSL2B07 %M870
7 XA2B07 SG_2B-XA2B07 %I7 %I999 TS679 DI SG-2B LV-OVW Availability of Circuit Breaker 2B-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 53 10 B0 XA2B07 %M871
8 EAL2B07 SG_2B-EAL2B07 %I8 %I1000 TS680 DI SG-2B LV-OVW Under voltage Alarm 2B-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 53 10 B0 EAL2B07 %M872
9 ZSL2A04 SG_2A-ZSL2A04 %I9 %I1001 TS681 DI SG-2A LV-OVW Closed Position 2A04 0 Not closed/Closed 1 0 53 12 B0 ZSL2A04 %M873
10 ZSL2A06 SG_2A-ZSL2A06 %I10 %I1002 TS682 DI SG-2A LV-OVW Closed Position 2A06 0 Not closed/Closed 1 0 53 12 B0 ZSL2A06 %M874
11 XA2A00 SG_2A-XA2A00 %I11 %I1003 TS683 DI SG-2A LV-OVW Common Fault breakers- BUS A 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 53 14 B0 XA2A00 %M875
12 ZSL2B01 SG_2B-ZSL2B01 %I12 %I1004 TS684 DI SG-2B LV-OVW Closed Position 2B01 0 Not closed/Closed 1 0 53 12 B0 ZSL2B01 %M876
13 ZSL2B02 SG_2B-ZSL2B02 %I13 %I1005 TS685 DI SG-2B LV-OVW Closed Position 2B02 0 Not closed/Closed 1 0 53 12 B0 ZSL2B02 %M877
14 ZSL2B04 SG_2B-ZSL2B04 %I14 %I1006 TS686 DI SG-2B LV-OVW Closed Position 2B04 0 Not closed/Closed 1 0 53 12 B0 ZSL2B04 %M878
15 ZSL2B04 SG_2B-ZSL2B04 %I15 %I1007 TS687 DI SG-2B LV-OVW Closed Position 2B04 0 Not closed/Closed 1 0 53 12 B0 ZSL2B04 %M879
16 ZSL2B05 SG_2B-ZSL2B05 %I16 %I1008 TS688 DI SG-2B LV-OVW Closed Position 2B05 0 Not closed/Closed 1 0 53 12 B0 ZSL2B05 %M880
17 ZSL2B06 SG_2B-ZSL2B06 %I17 %I1009 TS689 DI SG-2B LV-OVW Closed Position 2B06 0 Not closed/Closed 1 0 53 12 B0 ZSL2B06 %M881
18 %I18 %I1010 TS690 DI Spare 53 B0
19 %I19 %I1011 TS691 DI Spare 53 B0
20 %I20 %I1012 TS692 DI Spare 53 B0
21 %I21 %I1013 TS693 DI Spare 53 B0
22 %I22 %I1014 TS694 DI Spare 53 B0
23 %I23 %I1015 TS695 DI Spare 53 B0
24 %I24 %I1016 TS696 DI Spare 53 B0
25 %I25 %I1017 TS697 DI Spare 53 B0
26 %I26 %I1018 TS698 DI Spare 53 B0
27 %I27 %I1019 TS699 DI Spare 53 B0
28 %I28 %I1020 TS700 DI Spare 53 B0
29 %I29 %I1021 TS701 DI Spare 53 B0
30 %I30 %I1022 TS702 DI Spare 53 B0
31 %I31 %I1023 TS703 DI Spare 53 B0
32 XA0253 PLC-XA0253 %I32 %I1024 TS704 DI PLC SYS PLC Card fault cabinet 02 - rack 5 - slot 3 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 53 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 10/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411
1 XA331 BP_331-XA331 %I33 %I1025 TS705 DI BP-331 LV-OVW Common Fault BP-331 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 14 B0 XA331 %M897
2 XA332 BP_332-XA332 %I34 %I1026 TS706 DI BP-332 LV-OVW Common Fault BP-332 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 14 B0 XA332 %M898
3 XA351 DP_351-XA351 %I35 %I1027 TS707 DI DP-351 LV-OVW Common Fault DP-351 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 14 B0 XA351 %M899
4 XA321 AP_321-XA321 %I36 %I1028 TS708 DI AP-321 LV-OVW Fault HVAC AP-321 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 14 B0 XA321 %M900
5 XA322 AP_322-XA322 %I37 %I1029 TS709 DI AP-322 LV-OVW Fault HVAC AP-322 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 14 B0 XA322 %M901
6 XAH373A EE_373-XAH373A %I38 %I1030 TS710 DI EE-373 LV-OVW Fire detection panel fault 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 14 B0 XAH373A %M902
7 XAH373B EE_373-XAH373B %I39 %I1031 TS711 DI EE-373 Prealarm smoke detection area #1 deleted 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 14 B0 XAH373B %M903
8 XAH373C EE_373-XAH373C %I40 %I1032 TS712 DI EE-373 LV-OVW Fire detection alarm 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 14 B0 XAH373C %M904
9 XAH373D EE_373-XAH373D %I41 %I1033 TS713 DI EE-373 LV-OVW Gas detection prealarm 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 14 B0 XAH373D %M905
10 XAH373E EE_373-XAH373E %I42 %I1034 TS714 DI EE-373 LV-OVW Gas detection alarm 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 14 B0 XAH373E %M906
11 ZSL201 D_4103-ZSL201 %I43 %I1035 TS715 DI D-4103 D4103 SDV201 closed position - diesel Tank 0 Not closed/Closed 1 1 54 0
12 ZSH201 D_4103-ZSH201 %I44 %I1036 TS716 DI D-4103 D4103 SDV201 Open position - diesel Tank 0 Not open/open 1 1 54 0
13 XAH001 D_4103-XAH001 %I45 %I1037 TS717 DI D-4103 D4103 Fire detection alarm - diesel Tank 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 0
14 LAHH201 D_4103-LAHH201 %I46 %I1038 TS718 DI D-4103 D4103 Level high high - diesel Tank 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 1
15 ZLR201 D_4103-ZLR201 %I47 %I1039 TS719 DI D-4103 D4103 SDV201 remote mode - diesel Tank 0 Local/remote 1 1 54 1
16 XA201 D_4103-XA201 %I48 %I1040 TS720 DI D-4103 D4103 SDV201 alarm - diesel Tank 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 1
17 %I49 %I1041 TS721 DI Spare 54 B0
18 %I50 %I1042 TS722 DI Spare 54 B0
19 %I51 %I1043 TS723 DI Spare 54 B0
20 %I52 %I1044 TS724 DI Spare 54 B0
21 %I53 %I1045 TS725 DI Spare 54 B0
22 %I54 %I1046 TS726 DI Spare 54 B0
23 %I55 %I1047 TS727 DI Spare 54 B0
24 %I56 %I1048 TS728 DI Spare 54 B0
25 %I57 %I1049 TS729 DI Spare 54 B0
26 %I58 %I1050 TS730 DI Spare 54 B0
27 %I59 %I1051 TS731 DI Spare 54 B0
28 %I60 %I1052 TS732 DI Spare 54 B0
29 %I61 %I1053 TS733 DI Spare 54 B0
30 %I62 %I1054 TS734 DI Spare 54 B0
31 %I63 %I1055 TS735 DI Spare 54 B0
32 XA0254 PLC-XA0254 %I64 %I1056 TS736 DI PLC SYS PLC Card fault cabinet 02 - rack 5 - slot 4 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 54 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 11/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411
1 YZH2A02 %Q801 %Q353 DO SG-2A LV-OVW Open Order Incoming 2A-02 0 /Opening 1 55 10 B0 P2A02_O %M721
2 YZL2A02 %Q802 %Q354 DO SG-2A LV-OVW Close Order Incoming 2A-02 0 /Closing 1 55 10 B0 P2A02_C %M722
3 YZH2A01 %Q803 %Q355 DO SG-2A LV-OVW Open Order Bus Coupling 2A-01 0 /Opening 1 55 11 B0 P2A01_O %M724
4 YZL2A01 %Q804 %Q356 DO SG-2A LV-OVW Close Order Bus Coupling 2A-01 0 /Closing 1 55 11 B0 P2A01_C %M724
5 YZH2B07 %Q805 %Q357 DO SG-2B LV-OVW Open Order Incoming diesel 2B-07 0 /Opening 1 55 10 B0 P2B07_O %M725
6 YZL2B07 %Q806 %Q358 DO SG-2B LV-OVW Close Order Incoming diesel 2B-07 0 /Closing 1 55 10 B0 P2B07_C %M726
7 YZH201 %Q807 %Q359 DO D-4103 D4103 Open Order SDV - Diesel tank 0 /Opening 1 55 1
8 YZL201 %Q808 %Q360 DO D-4103 D4103 Close Order SDV - Diesel tank 0 /Closing 1 55 1
9 YMCBLOW %Q809 %Q361 DO LOW-V CB SEQUANCE IN MANUAL 55 B0
10 YLVDIES %Q810 %Q362 DO SWITCH LOW-V TO DIESEL 55 B0
11 %Q811 %Q363 DO Spare 55 B0
12 %Q812 %Q364 DO Spare 55 B0
13 %Q813 %Q365 DO Spare 55 B0
14 %Q814 %Q366 DO Spare 55 B0
15 %Q815 %Q367 DO Spare 55 B0
16 %Q816 %Q368 DO Spare 55 B0
17 %Q817 %Q369 DO Spare 55 B0
18 %Q818 %Q370 DO Spare 55 B0
19 %Q819 %Q371 DO Spare 55 B0
20 %Q820 %Q372 DO Spare 55 B0
21 %Q821 %Q373 DO Spare 55 B0
22 %Q822 %Q374 DO Spare 55 B0
23 %Q823 %Q375 DO Spare 55 B0
24 %Q824 %Q376 DO Spare 55 B0
25 %Q825 %Q377 DO Spare 55 B0
26 %Q826 %Q378 DO Spare 55 B0
27 %Q827 %Q379 DO Spare 55 B0
28 %Q828 %Q380 DO Spare 55 B0
29 %Q829 %Q381 DO Spare 55 B0
30 %Q830 %Q382 DO Spare 55 B0
31 %Q831 %Q383 DO Spare 55 B0
32 YA905 %Q832 %Q384 DO PLC SYS Watchdog - Fault system cab 02 - rack 05 55 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 12/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411
Y2A02_O SG_2A-Y2A02_O %M289 TC161 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Open Order Incoming 2A-02 N-Req/Req 1 10 B0
Y2A02_C SG_2A-Y2A02_C %M290 TC162 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Close Order Incoming 2A-02 N-Req/Req 1 10 B0
Y2A02_A SG_2A-Y2A02_A %M291 TC163 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 2A-02 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y2A02_M SG_2A-Y2A02_M %M292 TC164 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 2A-02 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y2A01_O SG_2-Y2A01_O %M293 TC165 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Open Order Bus Coupling 2A-01 N-Req/Req 1 11 B0
Y2A01_C SG_2-Y2A01_C %M294 TC166 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Close Order Bus Coupling 2A-01 N-Req/Req 1 11 B0
Y2A01_A SG_2A-Y2A01_A %M295 TC167 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 2A-01 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y2A01_M SG_2A-Y2A01_M %M296 TC168 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 2A-01 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y2B07_O SG_2B-Y2B07_O %M297 TC169 INT SG-2B LV-OVW Open Order Incoming diesel 2B-07 N-Req/Req 1 10 B0
Y2B07_C SG_2B-Y2B07_C %M298 TC170 INT SG-2B LV-OVW Close Order Incoming diesel 2B-07 N-Req/Req 1 10 B0
Y2B07_A SG_2A-Y2B07_A %M299 TC171 INT SG-2B LV-OVW Operator Auto mode Circuit Breaker 2B-07 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y2B07_M SG_2A-Y2B07_M %M300 TC172 INT SG-2B LV-OVW Operator Manu mode Circuit Breaker 2B-07 N-Req/Req 1 B0
Y201_O D_4103-Y201_O %M301 TC173 INT D-4103 D4103 Open Order SDV - Diesel tank N-Req/Req 1 1
Y201_C D_4103-Y201_C %M302 TC174 INT D-4103 D4103 Close Order SDV - Diesel tank N-Req/Req 1 1
YL_A D_4103-YL203_A %M303 TC175 INT D-4103 D4103 Auto mode LIC203 - Diesel tank N-Req/Req 1 1
YL_M D_4103-YL203_M %M304 TC176 INT D-4103 D4103 Manual mode LIC203 - Diesel tank N-Req/Req 1 1

P2A02_O %M3217 INT SG-2A Open Order Incoming 2A-02 N-Req/Req 1 10 B0

P2A02_C %M3218 INT SG-2A Close Order Incoming 2A-02 N-Req/Req 1 10 B0
P2A01_O %M3219 INT SG-2A Open Order Bus Coupling 2A-01 N-Req/Req 1 11 B0
P2A01_C %M3220 INT SG-2A Close Order Bus Coupling 2A-01 N-Req/Req 1 11 B0
P2B07_O %M3221 INT SG-2B Open Order Incoming diesel 2B-07 N-Req/Req 1 10 B0
P2B07_C %M3222 INT SG-2B Close Order Incoming diesel 2B-07 N-Req/Req 1 10 B0

SG_2A-VR-2A02 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Internal mimic variable 2A-02 B0

SG_2A-CB-2A02 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Internal command variable 2A-02 B0
MM2A02 SG_2A-MM2A02 %M3073 TS977 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Mismatch Circuit Breaker 2A-02 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0

ZLA2A02 SG_2A-ZLA2A02 %M3075 TS979 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Auto mode 2A-02 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
SG_2A-VR-2A01 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Internal mimic variable 2A-01 B0
SG_2A-CB-2A01 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Internal command variable 2A-01 B0
MM2A01 SG_2A-MM2A01 %M3076 TS980 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Mismatch Circuit Breaker 2A-01 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0

ZLA2A01 SG_2A-ZLA2A01 %M3078 TS982 INT SG-2A LV-OVW Auto mode 2A-01 B0
SG_2B-VR-2B07 INT SG-2B LV-OVW Internal mimic variable 2B-07 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0
SG_2B-CB-2B07 INT SG-2B LV-OVW Internal command variable 2B-07 B0
MM2B07 SG_2B-MM2B07 %M3079 TS984 INT SG-2B LV-OVW Mismatch Circuit Breaker 2B-07 1 Alarm/Normal 1 0 B0

ZLA2B07 SG_2B-ZLA2B07 %M3081 TS985 INT SG-2B LV-OVW Auto mode 2B-07 0 Hand/Auto 1 1 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 SINCOR AUXILIARY
N° : CA12 05 32 P DR 407
Project title: SINCOR, C.A. Class : 00
UPSTREAM SURFACE FACILITIES PROJECT N° : A565645-AD107
Page/File : 13/32
Rev/Date: X0 / 29/09/2002

Pt Tagname Tag Name @ sub @main Rang I/O Main MIMIC1 MIMIC 2 Description Alarm msg HDSR State Scale Unit Rack Typical Rev Tagname @main
PLC 412 Centralog Type Equipment (1-4) pair Low High slot Ref: PLC 411 PLC 411
1 EI2A01B SG_2B-EI2B01B %AI1 %AQ369 TM121 AI SG-2B LV-OVW Voltage measurement 2A-01 0 1 0 508 V 56 15 1
2 II2B07 SG_2B-II2B07 %AI2 %AQ370 TM122 AI SG-2B LV-OVW Current measurement 2B-07 0 1 0 800 A 56 15 1
3 XI1B06 SG_1B-XI1B06 %AI3 %AQ371 TM123 AI SG-1B SG-1 Power factor measurement 1B-06 0 1 -1.5 1.5 Rad 56 6 1
4 II1B06 SG_1B-II1B06 %AI4 %AQ372 TM124 AI SG-1B SG-1 Current measurement 1B-06 0 1 0 400 A 56 6 1
5 XI1B07 SG_1B-XI1B07 %AI5 %AQ373 TM125 AI SG-1B SG-1 Power factor measurement 1B-07 0 1 -1.5 1.5 Rad 56 6 1
6 II1B07 SG_1B-II1B07 %AI6 %AQ374 TM126 AI SG-1B SG-1 Current measurement 1B-07 0 1 0 550 A 56 6 1
7 XI1B08 SG_1B-XI1B08 %AI7 %AQ375 TM127 AI SG-1B SG-1 Power factor measurement 1B-08 0 1 -1.5 1.5 Rad 56 6 1
8 II1B08 SG_1B-II1B08 %AI8 %AQ376 TM128 AI SG-1B SG-1 Current measurement 1B-08 0 1 0 75 A 56 6 1
9 XI1B09 SG_1B-XI1B09 %AI9 %AQ377 TM129 AI SG-1B SG-1 Power factor measurement 1B-09 0 1 -1.5 1.5 Rad 56 6 1
10 II1B09 SG_1B-II1B09 %AI10 %AQ378 TM130 AI SG-1B SG-1 Current measurement 1B-09 0 1 0 450 A 56 6 1
11 %AI11 %AQ379 TM131 AI Spare 56 B0
12 %AI12 %AQ380 TM132 AI Spare 56 B0
13 %AI13 %AQ381 TM133 AI Spare 56 B0
14 %AI14 %AQ382 TM134 AI Spare 56 B0
15 %AI15 %AQ383 TM135 AI Spare 56 B0
16 %AI16 %AQ384 TM136 AI Spare 56 B0

1 EI2A01A SG_2A-EI2A01A %AI17 %AQ385 TM137 AI SG-2A LV-OVW Voltage measurement 2A-01 0 1 0 508 V 57 15 1
2 II2A02 SG_2A-II2A02 %AI18 %AQ386 TM138 AI SG-2A LV-OVW Current measurement 2A-02 0 1 0 800 A 57 15 1
3 XI1A07 SG_1A-XI1A07 %AI19 %AQ387 TM139 AI SG-1A SG-1 Power factor measurement 1A-07 0 1 -1.5 1.5 57 6 1
4 II1A07 SG_1A-II1A07 %AI20 %AQ388 TM140 AI SG-1A SG-1 Current measurement 1A-07 0 1 0 400 A 57 6 1
5 XI1A08 SG_1A-XI1A08 %AI21 %AQ389 TM141 AI SG-1A SG-1 Power factor measurement 1A-08 0 1 -1.5 1.5 57 6 1
6 II1A08 SG_1A-II1A08 %AI22 %AQ390 TM142 AI SG-1A SG-1 Current measurement 1A-08 0 1 0 450 A 57 6 1
7 XI1A09 SG_1A-XI1A09 %AI23 %AQ391 TM143 AI SG-1A SG-1 Power factor measurement 1A-09 0 1 -1.5 1.5 57 6 1
8 II1A09 SG_1A-II1A09 %AI24 %AQ392 TM144 AI SG-1A SG-1 Current measurement 1A-09 0 1 0 550 A 57 6 B0
9 %AI25 %AQ393 TM145 AI Spare 57 0
10 %AI26 %AQ394 TM146 AI Spare 57 B0
11 %AI27 %AQ395 TM147 AI Spare 57 B0
12 %AI28 %AQ396 TM148 AI Spare 57 B0
13 %AI29 %AQ397 TM149 AI Spare 57 B0
14 %AI30 %AQ398 TM150 AI Spare 57 B0
15 %AI31 %AQ399 TM151 AI Spare 57 B0
16 %AI32 %AQ400 TM152 AI Spare 57 B0

CA12-05-32-P-DR-407_[P01-32] X0.xls
 DTS
Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42040-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 11 13
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10/12/98 Translation of the French document rev. B GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. PURPOSE OF THE VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2. USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3. REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

4. ACCESSING APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.1. ACCESS FROM THE BACKGROUND SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.2. ACCESS FROM AN APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.3. ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.4. ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

5. CONVENTIONS AND DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

6. READER'S GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

7. THE CENTRALOG RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

7.1. PRODUCTS CONCERNED BY THIS DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
7.2. PRODUCT SPECIFICITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

8. QUESTIONS AND SUGGESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 1-ii
 Attention : the CENTRALOG implementation functions, in particular in database configuration function, are
used to select the functions assigned to each project. Consequently, some functions listed in this document
may not be accessible. In this case, the associated description should be ignored.

1. Purpose of the Volume

This volume contains the description of CENTRALOG functions. The DTS (Detailed
Technical Specification) completes the General Technical Specification by providing
details on certain themes.

The document thus plays a role of specification for the management of the CENTRALOG
product and can also be used as a reference during the validation phase.

The document is particularly relevant to the normal supervision phases. The

configuration and implementation phases are specified in the relevant operational
manuals.

HDSR

Event log and

Archival

EXP CCC (*)

Normal
operation
Configura-
tion
CVS

(*) on CVS/CCC station

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 2
 This volume contains:
— a description of the database,
— dialogue principles,
— supervision and alarm functions,
— process control functions,
— printer functions,
— system functions.

2. Users

This volume is intended for customers, project leaders and product users: personal
responsible for operations or involved in configuration.

The volume is also intended for CEGELEC staff concerned with product management or
with the development of specific applications.

3. Reference Documentation

D General Technical Specification

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 3
4. Accessing Applications

This chapter describes how to access various applications. The existence of these
applications is dependent on the installed configuration:

D EXP Real–time man–machine operating interface

D HDSR Event log and data storage for deferred operation

D CCC Centralog configuration and observation function

D Win Access to a Windows environment or to a Windows application

(spreadsheet, word processing etc.)

D CLOGSQL Access to Oracle database (variable selection and display)

D Photo Color printout of current application screen

D Format Magneto–optical disk formatting

4.1. ACCESS FROM THE BACKGROUND SCREEN

From the background screen (i.e. when no application is visible in full page mode (after
exiting or iconifying current applications), click the right hand mouse button to display the
following menu:

Root menu
Application "

Refresh
Exit "

Main menu common to all screens

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 4
 1 – Application – select Application to start an application and to define the dialogue
language:

Root menu
Application " Application
Refresh EXP " EXP
Exit " CCC Language 1
HDSR " Language 2
WIN
CLOGSQL
PHOTO
FORMAT

Example of menu (dependent on software installed on the station)

The CCC application can be installed on a screen of a single station in the system
(defined during initial configuration). On this station, the operator can choose on
which screen he wishes to run CCC.

Languages:
— EXP application: the languages available for the EXP application are
dependent on the system configuration. The language selected on starting
an application is implemented on only one screen, thus enabling the use of
two languages simultaneously on separate monitors. The language selected
determines the language of the dialogues and the database information
displayed on screen or printed out.
— HDSR application: the languages available for the HDSR application are
also dependent on the system configuration. The language selected on
starting an application determines the language of the dialogues. The
language of stored database information can be determined on–line from the
languages already configured for the EXP application.
— Dialogue language for the other applications is English.

2 – Photo – Select Photo to obtain a printout of the current screen with selection of
printer and of normal/inverse color mode.

SDC printer
Â
ING printer Select
normal/inve
rse
p X

3 – Format – Select Format to format the magneto–optical disk of the CCC station.
The station must be stopped before. Use the CCC ”Centralog Admin” / ” Station
Admin” menu then select ”Stop Station”.

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 5
 4 – Exit – Choose exit and confirm to quit the system.

Root menu
Application "

Refresh
Exit " Exit

4.2. ACCESS FROM AN APPLICATION

When an application (EXP in the example) is running, click the right hand mouse button
on the outer frame of the screen to open the following menu:

EXP
Close
Back
Front
Refresh
Application "

1 – Close – reduces the current application to an icon. This operation can also be
performed using the Open function key.

2 – Back / Front – shifts the current application to background (or foreground). The
Front function key can also be used to shift the application to the background.

3 – Application – displays the menu described in the previous paragraph.

4.3. ICONS

An application which is temporarily closed is represented by an icon. Icons can be moved

about by locating the cursor on them, pressing the left hand mouse button and dragging.
The application can be reopened by:

D clicking on it twice,

D by clicking on it and pressing the Open key.

4.4. ERROR MESSAGES

In the event of error, a message window is displayed. The message window is closed by
clicking on an acknowledgement button.

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 6
5. Conventions and Definitions

The following abbreviations and conventions are used in this volume :

RTDB : Real Time DataBase

CCC : CENTRALOG Configuration Center

CIS : CENTRALOG Interface Station

CVS : CENTRALOG Video Station

HDSR : Event log and HDSR (Historical Data Storage and Retrieval) function

OU : Operative Unit

SOE : Sequence Of Events.

TC : TeleCommand

TCE : External TeleCommand (remote external command)

TCI : Internal TeleCommand (remote internal command)

TM : TeleMeasurement (remote measured value)

TME : External TeleMeasurement

TMI : Internal TeleMeasurement

TMO : Operator TeleMeasurement

TMP : Application Program TeleMeasurement

TS : TeleSignal (remote indication)

TSE : External TeleSignal

TSI : Internal TeleSignal

TSP : Application Program TeleSignal

TSS : System TeleSignal

TVC : Setpoint Instruction

TVCE : External Setpoint Instruction

TVCI : Internal Setpoint Instruction

VRE : External Multi–State Variable

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 7
 VRI : Internal Multi–State Variable

VRP : Application Program Multi–State Variable

Attribute Static or dynamic characteristic associated to a variable, such as the

variable’s ID code, label, value etc.

Variable state Attribute defining the condition of the Value of a TM in relation to its
thresholds (optional) and to its limits (mandatory).

Variable status Attribute associated to a variable indicating whether the variable is on

monitoring, off monitoring, inhibited or replaced. The status determines how the
variable is processed.

6. Reader’s Guide

The volume consists of the following documents :

Document 1: Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions :

The present document

Document 2: Data Description and Management:

Chapter 1 gives a general description of the database. Chapter 2 contains
the details of how the data is processed.

Document 3: Presentation of the EXP MMI:

Contains the principles governing the EXP (Exploitation) application
dialogues, data display rules and utility functions.

Document 4 : Supervision Functions:

Description of the different supervision functions (curves, mimics, operator
groups etc.)

Document 5 : Alarms with operator help:

Processing performed to inform the operator as to operational faults.

Document 6 : Operator Management of Variables:

Functions allowing the operator to act on the status of variables.

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 8
 Document 7 : Sequence Monitoring:
Description of the user interface that enables the sequences executed by
the automation cells to be monitored.

Document 8 : Process Control:

Description of the dialogues used to transmit instructions and commands
to the process.

Document 9 : Data Logging Functions:

Description of the different logs and lists.

Document 10 : Computation Functions:

Description of computations and combinations of variables which can be
performed using internal variables.

Document 11 : Functional Operation:

Functional effect of the different start-up modes. System data.

Document 12 : Event log and HDSR Function:

Description of the event log and HDSR function.

Document 13 : Operational Schedule Function

Description of the function used to produce operational set points.

Document 14 : CSS-Gateway Function

Description of the function used to exchange data with external
applications.

Document 15 : Multi-entity Function

Description of the function used to divide operations into functional units.

Document 16 : PRISCA Function

Description of the function used to integrate a programmable application
software.

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 9
7. The Centralog Range

7.1. PRODUCTS CONCERNED BY THIS DOCUMENT

Centralog 10 V4, Centralog 30 V4, Centralog 50 V4

7.2. PRODUCT SPECIFICITIES

See document ”Functional Operation”

8. Questions and Suggestions

If you have any questions or suggestions regarding the documentation contained in this
volume, please contact:
ABB ALSTOM POWER CS T3
9 rue Ampère 91345
MASSY Cedex
France
Fax : +33 (0)1 60 13 23 74

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 10
 Reference Documents

The document reference numbers listed below do not include the revision number.

The revision numbers applicable for a CENTRALOG version are specified in each version
sheet.

Document Title Reference N°

General Technical Specification PTP09-A44004-V4

List of documents in this volume :

DTS - Introduction to Centralog Functions PTP09-A42040-V4
DTS - Data Description and Management PTP09-A42041-V4
DTS - Presentation of the EXP MMI PTP09-A42042-V4
DTS - Supervision Functions PTP09-A42043-V4
DTS - Alarms PTP09-A42062-V4
DTS - Operator Management of Variables PTP09-A42045-V4
DTS - Sequence Monitoring PTP09-A42046-V4
DTS - Process Control PTP09-A42047-V4
DTS - Data Logging Functions PTP09-A42048-V4
DTS - Computation Functions PTP09-A42049-V4
DTS - Functional Operation PTP09-A42050-V4
DTS - Event Log and HDSR Function PTP09-A42052-V4
DTS - Operation Schedule Function PTP09-A42053-V4
DTS - CSS-Gateway Function PTP09-A42054-V4
DTS - Multi Entities Function PTP09-A42055-V4
DTS - PRISCA Function PTP09-A42063-V4

.
P–TP09–A42040–V4 E B REV B
DTS Introduction to CENTRALOG Functions Sheet 11
 ALSPA P320 System

GENERAL TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION

CENTRALOG

Edition : 21–01–00
 .
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 2
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2. SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

3. DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2. SCREEN-BASED MAN-MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2.2. Mimics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2.3. Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.4. y=f(t) Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.5. y=f(x) Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2.6. Bargraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2.7. Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2.8. Operator Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2.9. Consulting Operative Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2.10. Consulting Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2.11. Miscellaneous Operating Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.2.12. System Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.3. STANDARD LOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.4. COMPUTATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

4. DATA PROCESSED BY CENTRALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

4.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2. OPERATIVE UNITS (OU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.3. VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.3.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.3.2. Logical or Telesignaling Variables (TS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.3.3. Analog or Telemeasurement Variables (TM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.3.4. Telecommand or TC Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.3.5. Setpoint Instructions or TVC Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.3.6. Multi-state Variables (VRI or VRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.3.7. Analysis Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 2-i
 4.4. CONTROL BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

5. SYSTEM CUSTOMIZATION, START-UP

AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.1. CCC-D DATABASE CUSTOMIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.2. CCC-M MIMIC CUSTOMIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.3. CCC-S SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.4. STOPPING & STARTING CENTRALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.5. CENTRALOG AVAILABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
APPENDIX A GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
A.1. List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
A.2. Definitions of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 2-ii
 1. Introduction

ABB ALSTOM POWER experience

Over many years ABB ALSTOM POWER has accumulated worldwide experience in
the fields of electrical engineering and control/supervision systems by working in close
collaboration with both the designers and operators.

It is this experience that has enabled ABB ALSTOM POWER to design an integrated
control and supervision system featuring specially designed control and supervision
functions, and combining in particular the vital qualities of availability, performance and
ease of operation.

The control and supervision system

Control and supervision functions are integrated into a hierarchical model. The control
and supervision system corresponds to levels 1 and 2 of this structure as explained
below:

• level 0 corresponds to the ”instrumentation” level. This level includes all the
supervision resources (sensors and actuators) of the process to which the
control and supervision system is applied,

• level 1 is the ”logic controller” level, the purpose of which is to ensure process
control and regulation functions, as well as the exchange of data with level 2.
Level 1 is occupied by the CONTROBLOCs which lie at the heart of the ABB
ALSTOM POWER control and supervision structure,

• level 2 corresponds to the computerized control and supervision system.

Level 2 is occupied by the CENTRALOG, the other vital element of the ABB
ALSTOM POWER control and supervision structure,

• level 3 represents specific computer systems designed for technical

management.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 3
 The CENTRALOG system, the essential element in the control room

Centralog incorporates screen–based plant control and supervision functions with an

operator help facility for close analysis of the process.

The Centralog system responds to the constraints of the control and supervision of
power production processes thanks to its ergonomic man/machine interface, to the
quality of its software, to the wealth and reliability of its operational functions, and to the
choice of standard hardware used. The system offers a library of standard calculation,
process simulation and production management functions. It also provides the
interface with site office software and with external sites.

The ALSPA P320 range comprises a series of supervisors Centralog 10, Centralog
30 and Centralog 50 characterized by their processing capacity and dynamic
performance, the number of operator stations, the number of unit networks and the
number of automation cells controlled by one supervisor.

• The CENTRALOG 10, constitutes the local control station of the Centralog
range. It possesses all the control and supervision resources necessary for a
local station or a small system.

• The CENTRALOG 30, designed for medium–sized applications, provides a

coherent set of standard functions.

• The CENTRALOG 50, designed for larger applications or for applications with
special requirements, can largely be configured in terms of the specific needs
of the project.

The compatibility CENTRALOG 10, 30 and 50 systems and the possibilities of

combining several CENTRALOG 10, 30 and 50 systems within a single system
architecture, allow varied architectures providing responses to all types of technical or
budgetary requirements.

The CENTRALOG 10 can also be utilized as a system to facilitate the introduction of

automatic control functions or to meet the need to spread investment over time.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 4
 CENTRALOG development strategy and design choices

The philosophy adopted by ABB ALSTOM POWER, with the aim of responding to the
requirements of different applications, is as follows:

• to propose a CENTRALOG solution which, in terms of configuration and

functionality, is appropriate to different projects,

• to construct a CENTRALOG system for each project on the basis of standard

hardware and software components.

To achieve these goals ABB ALSTOM POWER has implemented the following
choices :

• develop a standard CENTRALOG system offering a full set of functions. The

experience of ABB ALSTOM POWER enables us to propose standard
solutions to respond to the vast majority of customer requirements.

• offer possibilities of adapting the standard CENTRALOG system to specific

needs or particularities arising from the context of the project.

CENTRALOG’s development strategy and design choices meet the following criteria:

• performance: CENTRALOG is designed to respond rapidly to process

requirements and to operator requests thanks, in particular, to the use of a Real
Time DataBase, high capacity communication channels and powerful
processors.

• maintainability/service life: the system’s maintainability and extended

service life are guaranteed by a judicious choice of hardware elements, by the
quality of the software development process (standard software developed in
accordance with MODAL methodology) and by CENTRAMAC CASE tools.

For CENTRALOG, ABB ALSTOM POWER has selected components based

on well–established international standards in worldwide use.

Presentation of this document

The aim of this document is to provide a complete overview of the characteristics of the
CENTRALOG system, presenting the system architecture, the range of available
functions, the principle operating modes and the implementation and maintenance
tools.

Further optional modules are described in separate volumes.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 5
 2. System Architecture

Presentation

The hardware architecture of the Centralog 10 is comprised by an operator station

known as a CVS connected directly to the S8000 unit network.

The hardware architecture of the CENTRALOG 30/50 comprises a series of CVS

operator workstations and an interface unit known as the CIS (CENTRALOG Interface
Station). The CIS and the different CVS stations are linked by the CONTRONET
supervision network, based on the Ethernet standard.

• CVS operator station

The operator station ensures the functions of the man–machine interface and
can also host configuration, maintenance and archival functions. Each CVS is
equipped with a keyboard, a mouse and up to three color monitors (maximum
two screens for the Centralog 10).

An X terminal equipped with keyboard, a mouse and a color monitor may be

connected to a workstation. The terminal provides the same operational
functions as a CVS.

• CIS station

The CIS is composed of a server and provides the interface with the S8000 unit
network of the ALSPA P320 system. The CIS updates the system’s Real Time
DataBase (RTDB) and offers a set of printer and calculation functions.
Depending on the degree of availability required, two CIS stations can be
combined to provide a redundant CIS.

With the CENTRALOG 10, the CIS function is integrated to the CVS operator
station.

• Printer

Printers ensuring the Centralog printout functions are connected to an

operator station or to the site network.

• Optional peripherals

— supplementary printer,
— soft copy color printer,
— printer to print out configuration and maintenance data.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 6
 CENTRALOG peripheral hardware such as CVS screens, keyboards, the CIS
interface and printers may either be simply positioned on a work surface, or integrated
into units and/or consoles in the control room, depending on the requirements and
choices of the project.

Several CIS stations may be connected to a dual medium S8000 network. This
possibility can be used to operate distinct sub–systems within a single overall control
and supervision system. Two dual medium S8000 networks can also be connected to
one CIS in order to have two separate automation networks run by one CENTRALOG.

More than one Centralog 10 can be connected to a single S8000 network. This
capability can also be used to run distinct sub–sets in the same control and supervision
system.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 7
 ALSPA P320 System - Flexible Architecture

Multi-CENTRALOG 10 Architecture

CENTRALOG
 Â
Ethernet site network

C10 C10

1 mn pulse

ÎÎÎ
S8000 unit network

CSS-F

5 s pulse

Partner
Partner products
products Modbus
F8000 fieldbus
F8000 fieldbus

5 s pulse 5 s pulse

CONTROBLOC

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 8
 ALSPA P320 System - Flexible Architecture

CENTRALOG 30 / 50 Architecture

CENTRALOG ÂÂÂÂ
Ethernet site network

C30 / C50

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ 1 mn pulse

S8000 unit network

CSS-F

5 s pulse

Partner
Partner products
products
Modbus
F8000 fieldbus
F8000 fieldbus

5 s pulse 5 s pulse

CONTROBLOC

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 9
 The workstations

The workstations offer the following features:

— high quality graphics,
— UNIX, POSIX, XWINDOW (X11), MOTIF standards giving access to a
vast number of software products (database managers, DATAVIEWS
graphic interface generator etc.).
— RISC technology giving an excellent performance,
— fully integrated hardware elements.
The server (CENTRALOG 30 and 50)

The architecture based on a server adds the following features:

— UNIX, POSIX, X/OPEN xpg4 standards,
— RISC technology 64 bits architecture delivering supercomputing power.
The CONTRONET network (CENTRALOG 30 and 50)

Ethernet is constructed on the basis of the following standards:

• the International Standards Organization OSI model,

• the ISO 8802.2 and ISO 8802.3 standards (Ethernet),

• the Internet standard with TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), UDP (User
Datagram Protocol) and IP (Internet Protocol). These protocols are now
recognized as de facto standards and are in extensive use throughout the
world.

OSI layers

Application
VCA UNIX & application proto-
Presentation
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ cols

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
(TELNET,FTP,NFS...)
Session
Transport UDP/PCP TCP

Network IP
Link ISO 8802.2 or IEEE 802.2

Physical ISO 8802.3 or IEEE 802.3

The basic physical medium is the Ethernet coaxial cable. When conditions specific to
the project so require, a fiber optic medium may be used.

The CONTRONET network may be dual, depending on the degree of availability

required.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 10
 3. Description of Functions

3.1. INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the CENTRALOG functions directly linked to the supervision
and control of the process:

• Screen–based man–machine interface.

• Logs.

• Calculations.

3.2. SCREEN-BASED MAN-MACHINE INTERFACE

3.2.1. Presentation

Since the choice of operating philosophy is specific to each project, the CENTRALOG
man–machine interface needs to be easily adaptable to different concepts. To meet
the requirement for flexibility, the following design choices were selected:

• The number of operator stations and the number of screens on each station
are not fixed, and may be adjusted according to the needs of the project.

• All the operator stations are basically identical and offer the same functions.
However, access to one or more dialogues may be suppressed on any given
operator station in order to establish a hierarchy among the different stations.

• A part of the man–machine interface is customized specifically in accordance

with the nature of the process to which the control and supervision system is
applied. This is true in particular of mimic views which are specially created and
which are adapted to the specific characteristics of the process.

The ergonomic characteristics of the operator station result not only from the
experience of ABB ALSTOM POWER in the production of control and supervision
systems, but also especially from our close relationship with power plant operators.
The following main ergonomic principles have been applied:

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 11
 • Hierarchical organization of information displayed

The hierarchical organization of data enables the flow of information presented

to the operator, in particular during an operational incident, to be controlled,
while ensuring the operator is supplied with the tools required to understand
and analyze the situation as rapidly as possible.

• Rapid access to information

The keystrokes necessary to access information must be as straightforward

and as few in number as possible. The operator station features use of the
mouse, multi–windowing and pull–down menus. Additionally, various function
keys can be configured as direct view access keys.

• Standardization of displays

In order to simplify the use of the different functions provided by the operator
station as far as possible, a harmonized standard display mode is employed for
both views and dialogues.

• Operator help

Various help functions are available depending on the operational context.

General principles

The operator station CRT display is divided into three zones:

• system zone (name of site or station, date and time),

• the body (view),

• the dialogue zone comprising a series of icons giving access to various

principal functions.

The body may itself be sub–divided into several zones depending on the view and on
customization. A view may be single–page or multi–page (with the possibility of
moving from page to page) and contains both static and dynamic elements. A
multi–page view contains a scroll bar on the right–hand side of the display which is
used to change pages.

On operator stations with several screens, the cursor associated to a screen at any
given moment appears on the neighboring screen when the operator moves the cursor
beyond the limits of the first screen. Each screen thus has access to the set of dialogue
functions.

The various views and dialogues can be accessed as follows:

• by pinpointing an icon displayed in the dialogue zone,

• by pinpointing an icon, a scroll bar or a push button displayed in the main view
body.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 12
 With certain direct functions, designation of an icon or a button on the screen (cursor
positioned and mouse button pressed then released), results directly in an action such
as the display of a new view. For other functions, designation of an icon or a button
opens a menu which may be a cascade menu. The operator then uses the mouse to
pinpoint one of the selections proposed or, in certain cases, enters parameters in a
window.

The operator can pinpoint within the system zone to:

— re–display the higher level view in the hierarchy, in general the directory
view,
— move to the previous view or the next view in the relevant directory.
Finally, views previously displayed can be re–accessed by simply pinpointing an icon
in the dialogue zone.

3.2.2. Mimics

Mimic views enable the values and states of the various process parameters and
actuators to be displayed, monitored and controlled by means of dynamic
representations.

Values may be displayed as digits or in the form of bargraphs or curves etc.

States may be represented by the use of different colors (outline color, frame etc.) and
shapes.

Associated symbols and animations are collected in a library. This facility enables
representations to be standardized.

The different mimic views are classed in groups. The mimic directory window is divided
of two zones; the upper zone lists the various groups that have been defined, while the
lower zone lists the mimic views associated to the group selected. Additionally a
customized functional hierarchy can be defined. Finally, associated views (curves,
bargraphs or alarm views etc.) can be accessed from each mimic view by simple
designation. Windows can be defined within a mimic view to display detailed or
complementary information. The operator accesses these windows by designation.

Commands and instructions

Commands and instructions intended for the process are produced by pinpointing the
entity to be controlled on the mimic view. On designation, a window is displayed on the
mimic. This window contains dynamic data associated to the entity, together with the
different command modes available. Depending on the authorization rights defined
during customization, transmission of the command is accepted or refused. The
representation of the entity is animated so that the operator is kept informed as to the
execution or non–execution of the command and, finally, as to the resulting state of the
process. In addition to this a variable known as an execution check variable can be
associated to any command.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 13
 The operator can also lock, test or unlock control blocks. A locked block cannot be
commanded.

Control loop views

Certain mimics are designed to facilitate the supervision of control loops, in particular
during the implementation phase. These views all have a standard format comprising
up to eight windows, each of which is associated to a control element. The content of
the window as well as the commands available depend on the type of the associated
actuator.

Associated alarms view

Alarms can be associated to each mimic view. The list of associated alarms of each
mimic view can be displayed by simple designation.

3.2.3. Alarms

Alarms are events which are indicative of functional anomalies in the process. An
alarm can be:

• either a logical variable which has been acquired, calculated or produced by

the system,

• or a threshold or limit violation by an analog variable which is acquired,

calculated or produced by the system. Up to four thresholds may be defined for
each analog variable.

A description of the processing operations and functions associated with alarms is

provided in the document ”ALSPA P320 System – CENTRALOG Alarms with Operator
Help”, ref. PTP09–A44044.

3.2.4. y=f(t) Curves

The y=f(t) CURVES function enables the operator to visualize the historical and
current development and state of analog variables. Each curves view can be used to
display up to six variables.

Each new value is displayed in accordance with a sampling rate associated to a

particular curves view and defined during customization of the application. Permissible
sampling rates are 1s, 5s, 10s, 30s, 1mn, 2mn, 5mn, 10mn, 30mn and 1 hour over a
period ranging from 2 hours to 300 days. Each curve enables a maximum of 720
values to be displayed. 7200 points are displayed for each variable. The vertical curves
axis may be magnified, and the time axis may also be modified by the operator. The
length of the period displayed varies according to the sampling rate from 12mn to 2
hours (1s sampling) and from 30 to 300 days (1h sampling). Curves can be shifted
backwards or forwards in time by simple designation.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 14
 The operator can assign or disassign variables to or from a curves view on line.
However, the variable is only memorized from the moment it is assigned to a group.
Designation of a point on the curve tracing zone causes a window to be displayed. This
window contains the time of the point designated and the value of each variable
represented at that time.

3.2.5. y=f(x) Curves

The y=f(x) CURVES function enables the operator to visualize the development of
three pairs of analog variables in relation to each other. Each new value is displayed in
accordance with a sampling rate associated to a particular curves view and defined
during customization of the application. Permissible sampling rates are 5s, 30s and
2mn. Both the vertical and horizontal axes can be modified by the operator.
Additionally, different operational zones can be defined for each view by means of
reference charts.

3.2.6. Bargraphs

The BARGRAPHS function is used to monitor changes in analog variables displayed

in the form of vertical bars. Each bargraph view enables up to 20 variables to be
displayed. The scale of display can be modified by the operator. The operator can also
assign variables to or delete variables from a view on–line.

3.2.7. Trend

The TREND function enables the development of a set of variables to be displayed in

the form of a table. Each monitoring view can display up to 10 variables. Each new
value is displayed in accordance with a sampling rate associated to the view. This
period can be modified by the operator. Permissible sampling rates are 5s, 10s, 15s,
20s, 50s, 5mn, 10mn and 1h. The operator can also assign variables to or delete
variables from a monitoring view on–line.

3.2.8. Operator Groups

The OPERATOR GROUPS function is used to visualize real–time information (values,

states etc.) concerning logical and analog variables that have been grouped together
by the operator. Each group may comprise up to 50 variables. The operator can assign
variables to or delete variables from an operator group view on line.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 15
 Examples of CENTRALOG views

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 16
 3.2.9. Consulting Operative Units

CENTRALOG system variables are divided into functional sub–groups which are
coherent from the process point of view. Each of these sub–groups represents an
OPERATIVE UNIT (OU).

The Operative Unit consultation function enables data relative to the variables that
constitute such a sub–group to be visualized in real time. The operator can inhibit an
OU or set an OU on–monitoring. This causes all the variables belonging to the OU to
be inhibited or set on–monitoring. When an OU is inhibited, the operator can
nevertheless reset variables on–monitoring one by one.

Associated alarms view

The view of alarms associated to an OU is accessed by selecting the relevant option in

the OU menu. This view lists the OU alarms present.

3.2.10. Consulting Lists

The CONSULT LISTS function is used to display and/or print out the dynamic variable
lists.

A user–friendly interface enables the operator to sort the principal CENTRALOG data
in accordance with one or more of the following criteria:

• Variable type
— external logic variables
— internal logic variables
— external analog variables
— internal analog variables
— external multi–state variables
— internal multi–state variables

• Static characteristics
— Variable ID code
— Operative entity of variable
— Operative unit of variable
— Cell controller of variable

• Dynamic characteristics
— Inhibited variables
— Replaced variables
— Out–of–limits variables
— Invalid variables

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 17
 — Variables off–monitoring
— Chattering variables
— Forced variables

• Other lists are also available

— Analysis variables
— Modified threshold variables
— Inhibited Operative Units
— List of control blocks under test / locked
Lists are updated in real time on each operator station.

3.2.11. Miscellaneous Operating Functions

Modification of a variable’s status or thresholds

The operator can perform modifications as follows:

• to the status of variables :

— inhibit or replace a variable,
— set a variable on or off monitoring,

• to the values of analog variable thresholds,

The different variable statuses are described in Chapter 4.

Variable directory view

The variable directory view is divided into two zones:

— the upper zone is used to display the list of OUs,
— the lower zone contains the list of the variables which belong to the OU
selected in the upper zone.
System maintenance assistance

Certain mimic views are designed specifically for system maintenance purposes and
thus permit the operator to monitor the different elements in the system.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 18
 3.2.12. System Function

The SYSTEM function is used to modify:

— system date and time,
— operator station access rights,
Any dialogue can be associated during customization to different access
levels, from 0 to 5. When a particular dialogue is called, the access level is
checked relative to the access protection level assigned to the operator
station. If the level of the operator station is too low, the request for access
to the dialogue or view concerned is refused.
— passwords associated to the various access protection levels.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 19
 3.3. STANDARD LOGS

The log function enables the operator to obtain a full set of documents providing a
written record of changes in the process. These documents are used in deferred
operations and take different forms:

• event logs, balance logs and lists used in plant operation and maintenance,

• disturbance logs and SOE logs used in incident analysis.

The various logs can be accessed from any operational operator station. The operator
can print out the log displayed by clicking on the relevant icon.

The CENTRALOG system automatically saves all the logs produced onto hard disk. At
any time the operator can display and print a stored log from any operator station. The
length of time a log is conserved depends on the number of logs produced and the
capacity of the hard disk.

The operator can also save logs to an external magneto–optical drive and request
retrieval of such logs from the operator station hosting the drive.

The standard system is supplied with a printer. One or more optional additional printers
can also be provided. Printers are associated to operator stations during system
configuration. One printer can be assigned to more than one operator station.

Documents have a common structure, including a title zone containing the name of the
document, and a main data zone. Document pages are numbered and are printed out
over 132 columns.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 20
 Event log

The event log provides a detailed historical and chronological record of events. The
events logged are as follows:

• state changes in logical variables, threshold or limit overshoots, or returns to

normal in analog variables, variations in analog and multi–state variables. The
variables concerned are selected during customization.

• events relative to sequence monitoring,

• transmission of telecommands or setpoint instructions (variables are selected

during customization),

• operator actions to lock/unlock/test control blocks.

The event log is automatically stored on hard disk. The operator can also display and
print the log from any operational operator station.

A user–friendly interface enables the operator to sort the principal CENTRALOG data
according to various criteria, and to export the event log data to a standard office
software application (spreadsheet).

Sequence of Events (SOE) log

The purpose of the SOE (Sequence Of Events) log is to provide a timetagged historical
record of state changes in logical variables during the period which follows the
appearance of an incident, thus enabling off–line analysis of the incident. When
associated with the CONTROBLOC P320, state changes in logical variables are dated
at source.

The data in an SOE log comprises a group of up to 100 logical variables. A state
change in one of the variables in the group triggers the generation of an SOE log. All
the state changes in variables in the group are then recorded. The log is considered as
complete and is automatically stored on disk if the recording period defined during
customization of the system is exceeded or when 50 state changes have been
recorded. Permissible recording periods are 1mn, 2mn, 5mn and 10 minutes. These
periods are fixed during configuration of the system. The operator, from any operator
station, can inhibit, authorize, simulate the triggering of a log or request the display of
the log and its print–out.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 21
 Disturbance logs

The purpose of a disturbance log is to provide a historical record of logical and analog
variables during the periods which precede and follow the appearance of an incident,
thus enabling off–line analysis of the incident.

The data in a disturbance log comprises a group of up to 16 logical variables used as

triggering criteria (representing the appearance of the incident) and 20 sampled
variables (up to 10 logic and 10 analog variables). A state change in one of the
variables in the group triggers the generation of the log. For each variable 60 values
are sampled during the pre–trip phase and 60 during the post–trip phase. The log is
automatically stored on disk at the end of the post–trip phase. For each log, the
permissible pre–trip and post–trip sampling periods are 2s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 30s, 60s and
120 seconds. These periods are fixed during configuration of the system. The
operator, from any operator station, can inhibit, authorize, simulate the triggering of the
log or request the display of the log and its print–out.

Trend logs

Trend logs show the historical development of a group of up to 10 variables. The

operator can modify the composition of the log on–line. The values of the variables are
saved at regular intervals. Permissible sampling rates are 5s, 30s, 1mn, 2mn, 5mn,
10mn, or 1 hour over a period ranging from 8mn to 100 hours. The maximum number of
samples saved per variable is 100. The operator can modify the composition of a trend
log on–line.
Log generation is initialized either manually by the operator or automatically by a state
change in a logic variable assigned to the log. The log is automatically stored on the
Centralog hard disk at the end of the storage period. The operator, from any operator
station, can disable or enable the log, or request the display of the log and its print–out.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 22
 Shift logs

The shift log shows the changes occurring during the shift in a set of analog variables
divided into groups of up to 10 variables. These groups are defined during
customization.

The most recent principal events to occur during the period of the shift are printed out.
The values of the analog variables are stored every hour. The shift log is stored on the
Centralog hard disk automatically at the end of each shift (3 to 6 shifts defined in hours)
or on certain system modifications (change of date, time or current shift period). The
log can also be displayed and printed out on operator request.

Daily logs

The daily log shows the changes occurring over a 24 hour period in a set of analog
variables divided into groups of up to 10 variables. The values of variables are stored
every hour. These groups of variables are defined during customization.

At the end of each 24 hour period either the peak, off peak and overall sums of values,
or the peak, off peak and overall averages of values, or the overall sum or average of
these values, are calculated for each variable. These options are defined for each
variable during customization. The daily log is stored automatically on the Centralog
hard disk each day or on certain system modifications (change of date or time). The log
can also be displayed and printed out on operator request.

Weekly logs

The weekly log shows the changes occurring over a period of one week in a set of
analog variables divided into groups of up to 10 variables. The values of variables are
stored every day. These groups of variables are defined during customization.

At the end of each week, the sum or average of values is calculated for each variable.
These options are defined for each variable during customization. The weekly log is
stored automatically on the Centralog hard disk each week or on certain system
modifications (change of date or time). The log can also be displayed and printed out
on operator request.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 23
 Monthly logs

The monthly log shows the changes occurring over a period of one month in a set of
analog variables divided into groups of up to 10 variables. The values of variables are
stored every day. These groups of variables are defined during customization.

At the end of each month the sum or average of values is calculated for each variable.
These options are defined for each variable during customization. The monthly log is
stored automatically on the Centralog hard disk each month or on certain system
modifications (change of date or time). The log can also be displayed and printed out
on operator request.

Monthly maintenance logs

The purpose of this log is to provide data to support maintenance operations. Data in
the log is classed under three headings:
— running times,
— duration of threshold overshoots,
— the number of actuator start/stop cycles (number of logical variable
transitions).
Data relative to maintenance operations (running time since last maintenance, date of
last maintenance) is logged under each of these three headings. In all three cases the
variables printed out are analog variables. The headings are defined during
customization. The monthly maintenance log is stored automatically on the Centralog
hard disk each month or on certain system modifications (change of date or time). The
log can also be displayed and printed out on operator request.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 24
 3.4. COMPUTATION FUNCTIONS

The CENTRALOG system is provided with a standard library of calculation modules

used to perform complex operations in accordance with a proven method.

The computation functions available are either arithmetic, logical, or algebraic

functions, or functions requiring sampling over time, such as the calculation of
derivatives, averages and integrals, or are thermodynamic functions. Calculations are
performed by combining these basic functions. Calculation formulae are integrated to
the database description. Calculations associated to the application are defined
during customization and users may insert or delete calculations by modifying the
database. Calculations may be formulated easily, based on the principle of Polish
notation.

Analog computation functions

These calculations are performed on logical or analog variables. The variables

resulting from these calculations are analog variables. These general computation
functions are activated cyclically in accordance with the periodicity specified in the
database.

The following basic types of calculation are defined:

• Calculation of derivative over time,

• Algebraic calculations (addition, subtraction, multiplication...),

• Trigonometric calculations (sine, cosine etc.),

• Statistical calculations (lowest, greatest value among n),

• Reference charts (interpolation y = f(x, p) or x = f(y, p)),

• Thermodynamic calculations (saturation temperature, enthalpies, entropies,

titers ...),

• Average over time,

• Pulse counting,

• Calculation of running time,

• Calculation of average of several valid analog variables,

• Calculation of typical deviation for an average.

The permissible periods associated to each variable for each type of calculation are 1,
2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 5, 10, 30 minutes, 1 hour, shift periods, 1 day and 1
month.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 25
 Logical computation functions

These calculations are performed on logical variables or on threshold violations by

analog variables. The variables resulting from these calculations are logical variables.
These computation functions are activated cyclically at one second intervals.

Multi–state variable computation functions

These calculations are performed on logical variables or on threshold overshoots by

analog variables. The variables resulting from these calculations are multi–state
variables. Multi–state variables are described in detail in Chapter 4. These
computation functions are activated cyclically at one second intervals.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 26
 4. Data Processed by CENTRALOG

4.1. INTRODUCTION

The data processed in real time by the CENTRALOG system can be divided into the
following categories:

• operative units (OUs),

• variables,

• control blocks.

4.2. OPERATIVE UNITS (OU)

All of the variables which represent the customization of the system are grouped into
functional entities which are coherent for the process. Each of these entities is known
as an Operative Unit. This organization facilitates the process of defining
customization and the implementation of the system. Each OU is associated to an ID
code of up to 8 characters in length and a label of up to 32 characters in length.

4.3. VARIABLES

4.3.1. Introduction

A variable corresponds to a basic entity which is either input to or output by the system
for the purposes of the process supervision and/or control. Each variable belongs to
only one OU. Variables can be divided into two categories, supervision variables and
control variables. Supervision variables represent values emanating from the process
or calculated by the supervision and control system. Control variables correspond to
instructions or commands issued by CENTRALOG .

Each variable is associated to an ID code of up to 20 characters in length (this ID code

must be unique in the data base), a label of up to 32 characters in length and a value.
The characteristics of this value depend on the type of variable in question.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 27
 The principal types of variable are listed below:

• TS : logic state signal originating directly from a field device

or from an internal Centralog calculation; the TS is timetagged at
source (process input or internal logic variable production cycle)

• TM : analog value originating cyclically from a field device

or from an internal Centralog calculation; the TM is timetagged at
source (analog variable production cycle).

• TC : logic command issued by Centralog.

• TVC : analog setpoint value transmitted by Centralog.

• VR : multi–state variable corresponding to a ”control function object”

originating cyclically from a field device or from an internal
Centralog calculation; the VR is timetagged at source
(multi–state variable production cycle).

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 28
 4.3.2. Logical or Telesignaling Variables (TS)

TS variables have the following principal characteristics:

• State/Alarm:

Any TS can be be declared individually during customization of the system as

being a ”State” or ”Alarm” type variable. State–type TS variables are generally
used to represent the functional state of a process element showing no
anomaly. Alarm–type TS variables represent a functional state which as far as
the operator is concerned is considered as abnormal for a process element. To
deal with such anomalies the CENTRALOG system provides functions
dedicated to alarm management.

• Value:

The value of a TS is equal to either 0 or1. In the case of alarm–type TS

variables, the transition (0>1 or 1>0) which triggers the shift to alarm is defined
for each TS during customization of the system.

• State labels:

During customization a label of up to 8 characters is associated to each of the

two possible values (0 or 1) of the TS.

(eg. Open/Closed, Auto/Manu, On/Off etc.)

• Invalidity:

The notion of invalidity is associated to the value. The value of the TS is

declared ”Invalid” when either the data acquisition process or the variable
computation process is unable to supply a significant value. This characteristic
of the variable is managed automatically by the CENTRALOG system.

• Status of the variable:

The status of the variable as fixed by the operator may be one of the following:
— ”On–monitoring”:
In this state, the variable is processed normally, taking account of the
acquired or calculated value and of the associated validity parameter.
On–monitoring is the default status of all of the variables on start–up of the
CENTRALOG system.
— ”Off–monitoring”:
In this state, CENTRALOG continues to update the acquired or calculated
value (with the validity parameter), but no longer performs processing
associated to the modification of the value or its validity. For example in
the case of an ”off–monitoring” alarm–type TS, the value of the variable
continues to be updated on the operator station monitors, but alarm
processing is no longer performed.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 29
 — ”Inhibited”:
When a variable is inhibited, CENTRALOG neither updates the value of
the variable nor performs any associated processing. This possibility
allows variables to be completely ”masked”.
— ”Replaced” :
In this state, the value of the variable, which normally is either acquired
from the logic controllers or calculated by CENTRALOG, is replaced by a
value introduced by the operator.

4.3.3. Analog or Telemeasurement Variables (TM)

TM variables have the following principal characteristics:

• Value:

The value of a TM variable corresponds to the physical magnitude of the

variable as measured or calculated.

• Unit:

The unit of measurement of the TM is expressed in a maximum of 6 characters.

• Measurement state:

This is defined in relation to the limits and thresholds of the measurement as

described below:
— Limits:
These define the maximum authorized range of the value of the
measurement. This range is defined for each TM by an upper limit and a
lower limit. The values of the limits are assigned during customization in
accordance with criteria specific to the project (sensor range, maximum
process range etc.). Comparison of the value of the TM with its limits
results (where a limit is exceeded) in processing similar to that performed
on changes in the value of TS variables (in particular alarm processing).
Detection of limit violations takes account of a hysteresis coefficient (one
value for all variables) in order to filter out repeated violations where a TM
oscillates around a limit.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 30
 — State relative to thresholds:
Up to 4 thresholds may be associated to each TM, 2 upper thresholds and
2 lower thresholds. These thresholds (number and value) are defined for
each TM during customization of the CENTRALOG system. The type of a
threshold may be fixed, variable or logic.
Fixed threshold: the value can be modified on–line by the operator.
Variable threshold: a variable threshold can be defined by the value of an
associated TM. When this TM is invalid or inhibited, the threshold taken
into account is the fixed threshold, or as modified by the operator.
Logic threshold: the state of a TM relative to its thresholds can be provided
directly by the value of a logic TS produced by a controller or by the
CENTRALOG computing functions. When this TS is invalid or inhibited,
the threshold used is the fixed threshold, or as modified by the operator.
The comparison of the value of the TM with its thresholds may result
(where a threshold is exceeded) in processing similar to that performed on
changes in the value of TS variables (in particular alarm processing). The
detection of violations of fixed or variable thresholds is conditioned by a
hysteresis coefficient (per variable) in order to filter out repeated violations
where a TM oscillates around a threshold.

• Invalidity:

As with TS variables, the notion of TM invalidity is associated to the value. The

definition is identical to that for TS variables.

• Variable status:

The status of a TM has the same role and a similar description to that of a TS
variable. The variable status has consequences for the value of the TM
variable, as well as for the processing associated to the TM’s limits and
thresholds.

• Gradient:

It is possible to associate a gradient calculation to a TM variable (current value

– previous value). The gradient calculation is associated to a threshold. When
this threshold is exceeded, a logical variable is set to 1. This variable is reset to
0 when the gradient falls back below the threshold.

• Logging on significant variation in value :

It is possible to associate a threshold of variation in value to each TM. This

threshold is expressed as a percentage of the full range. When this threshold is
exceeded a message is printed out on the event log. The variation of the value
in comparison with the threshold is calculated in the following manner: current
value – value of the TM on previous threshold overshoot.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 31
 4.3.4. Telecommand or TC Variables

TC variables represent logical commands transmitted to the controllers to modify the

state of one or more process actuators. TC variables present the following
characteristics:

• State label: a state label of up to eight characters is associated (during

customization) to each of the possible instructions of the TC.

(eg. Open/Closed, Auto/Manu, On/Off etc.)

• TC types:

The type of TC is relative to the nature of the signal generated by transmission

of the command. There are 2 types of TC:
— single TC: this type of TC transmits only one instruction (eg. open) in the
form of a pulse.
— dual TC: this type of TC transmits two instructions (eg. open/close) in the
form of pulses.

• Associated TS variable:

The TC can be associated to a TS variable whose value reflects the actual

setting of the process equipment being manipulated. This TS is used to check
that the instruction has been executed.

• Authorization TS variable:

The TC can be associated to a TS variable which, depending on its value,

either authorizes or prohibits transmission of the instruction by the operator.

• Execution delay:

This delay in execution corresponds to the maximum time needed for the
element being manipulated to take up the position required.

• Executing TS variable:

The TC can be associated to a TS indicating that the TC is being executed.

This TS is reset when the associated TS returns to the expected state or when
the execution check variable indicates a failure.

• Execution check TS variable:

It is possible to check that the instruction has been executed and to alert the
operator in case of failure. A TS associated to the TC is set to 1 if an error
occurs in the execution of the command. This TS is reset to 0 by operator
dialogue.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 32
 4.3.5. Setpoint Instructions or TVC Variables

TVCs are variables which represent analog commands transmitted to the controllers
to modify the setpoint of a regulator or a process regulating element. TVCs present the
following characteristics:

• Value:

The value of a TVC corresponds to the value of the associated setpoint.

• Unit:

The unit of measurement of a TVC is expressed in a maximum of 6 characters.

• Associated TM:

The TVC can be associated to a TM whose value indicates whether the

process equipment being manipulated has taken account of the modification
of the setpoint. This TM is utilized to check that the modification of the setpoint
is executed correctly.

• Authorization TS:

The TVC can be associated to a TS variable which, depending on its value,

either authorizes or prohibits modification of the setpoint.

• Execution delay:

This delay in execution corresponds to the maximum time by which the

setpoint instruction must be executed.

• Executing TS variable:

The TVC can be associated to a TS indicating that the TVC is being executed.
This TS is reset when the associated TM returns to the expected state or when
the execution check variable indicates a failure.

• Execution check TS variable:

It is possible to check that the setpoint instruction transmitted has been

executed and to alert the operator in case of error. The instruction has been
correctly executed when the value of the associated TM is identical with that of
the TVC (with a maximum tolerance defined during customization). A TS
associated to the TVC is set to 1 if an error occurs in the execution of the
command. This TS is reset to 0 by operator dialogue.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 33
 4.3.6. Multi-state Variables (VRI or VRE)

A multi–state variable is a logical variable calculated either by the cell controller (VRE)
or by the CENTRALOG (VRI) and used to animate graphic control objects on the mimic
displays.

VRE variables calculated by the cell controller are used to provide synthetic control
block states.

VRI variables calculated by CENTRALOG are used to supply the synthetic value of a
group of up to 7 items of information, such information being either the value of a TS
variable or the state of a TM variable relative to a threshold. An eighth item of
information, established from the validity and status of the seven other items,
represents the overall ”quality” of the VRI inputs. The result, which is in fact the value of
the VRI, is an integer which can be used to express up to 16 different states. The value
of the VRI is calculated from a truth table configured by the user during customization
of the system.

• Value:

The value of a multi–state variable corresponds to the value calculated by the

automation cell or by the Centralog system.

• State labels:

An eight character state label is associated during customization to each of the

first 16 values of the VR.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 34
 4.3.7. Analysis Variables

An analysis variable is an analog variable which represents a parameter which can be

modified by the operator in an analog calculation. Analysis variables present the
following characteristics:

• Value:

The value of an analysis variable is defined during customization and can be

modified by dialogue from the operator stations.

• Unit:

The unit of measurement of an analysis variable is expressed in a maximum of

6 characters.

• Limits :

These define the maximum authorized range of the value of the variable (as a
control during modification of the value by the operator). This range is defined
for each analysis variable by an upper limit and a lower limit. The values of
these limits are assigned during customization of the CENTRALOG system.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 35
 4.4. CONTROL BLOCKS

Control blocks correspond to a group of elementary control variables (telecommands

and setpoint instructions) which are used to control a motor, pump or valve actuator, or
groups of actuators, from the operator station.

Control blocks present the following characteristics:

• Composition:

A control block is composed of TC, TVC, TS, VR and TM type variables.

• Model:

the notion of the control block model arises from the fact that there are different
command modes, depending on the type of actuator (or group of actuators)
being controlled. These different command modes may be for example: On/Off
Logical Control, Configuration Selector, Auto/Manu Control Block, Setpoint
Station etc.

The control block model defines:

— the composition of the block, ie. the type and number of variables which
compose the block,
— the block command scenario: the scenario describes the different block
command possibilities both from a static and a dynamic viewpoint.
— the graphic image of the control window associated to the block.
All of the standard CENTRALOG control block types are contained in a library.

• Block state

The state of a block is determined by the operator and may be one of the
following:
— normal: the block can be commanded
— under test: the block can be commanded
— locked: the block cannot be commanded

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 36
 5. System Customization, Start-up
and Maintenance

CENTRALOG provides all the functions necessary for the commissioning and
maintenance of the system. These functions are accessed from an operator station
hosting the CCC function and connected to a magnetic medium drive unit. Three
separate functions are available:

• the CCC–D function for the customization of the database,

• the CCC–M function for the customization of mimic displays,

• the CCC–S function for system maintenance

CCC-D

CCC-M

EXP

Normal CCC-S
operation

Operator station with CCC functions

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 37
 5.1. CCC-D DATABASE CUSTOMIZATION

The customization of the CENTRALOG database is a process which takes place

throughout the system design and commissioning phases. The data produced during
these phases is not fixed. It must be able to evolve throughout the life cycle of the
system in order to adjust to process modifications. The CENTRALOG database
customization chain is designed to meet this requirement. The tool used to customize
the database is the CCC–D station.

Characteristics of the CCC–D

The CCC–D tool presents the following characteristics:

• the tool uses FOXPRO
software,

• it offers an operator–friendly man/machine interface based on a set of data

entry masks specially adapted to the needs of users,

• it organizes data into functional groups known as Operative Units (OUs) in

order to enhance flexibility during the customization phase. This functional
organization enables the user to enter and use data progressively (eg. for
tests) as the design work proceeds.

• it associates version numbers to the data in order to ensure proper control of

the modification of the OUs over time.

• it provides the possibility of data import/export between a client DBMS and the
CENTRALOG DBMS.

Creation and modification of the Database

The creation of the database or the introduction of modifications is carried out in two
distinct phases:
— Data entry
Data is entered (initial entry or modification) independently of the real time
operation of the system. The tool assists the operator by performing a
series of checks on the data entered, as follows:
 verification of the uniqueness of the variable ID codes,

 verification of the uniqueness of the variable acquisition address,

 verification that the value entered belongs to the right field,

 verification that obligatory parameters have been entered,

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 38
 — Loading the stations
Once the data has been entered, a generation phase creates the files
which are then downloaded into the different stations in the system.
Mechanisms based on version numbers are used to ensure the
consistency of the data loaded into the stations from the database.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 39
 5.2. CCC-M MIMIC CUSTOMIZATION

The customization of the CENTRALOG mimic displays, like the customization of the
database, takes place essentially during the project system design and construction
phase. The mimics produced during these phases are not fixed. They must be able to
evolve throughout the life cycle of the system in order to adjust to process
modifications. The tool used both for the creation and subsequent modification of the
mimics is the CCC–M station.

Characteristics of the CCC–M

The CCC–M function is performed by a stand–alone tool that enables users to define
the mimic views independently of the rest of the system.

The CCC–M tool offers the following characteristics:

• It uses Dataviews

• It offers a graphic man–machine interface specially designed for the creation

and modification of mimic views,

• It ensures that the mimics remain consistent with the database.

Creation and modification of mimics

The creation of mimics or the introduction of modifications is carried out in two distinct
phases:
— Creating mimic views
The CCC–M tool is used for the following tasks:

– to compose the fixed frame of the view. The tool allows the operator
to draw lines and basic shapes (lines, rectangles, circles) without
difficulty and to create libraries of more complex symbols.

– to compose the dynamic elements of the view. The dynamic

elements of a view are composed from symbols with pre–defined or
project–specific aspects or elements (shapes and colors). Dynamic
elements are customized by associating a variable from the RTDB to
the symbol(s) representing the element.

– to compose the sensitive zones of the view from pre–defined

symbols. A sensitive zone is customized by matching the variables
from the RTDB to the type of action associated to the zone
(accessing another view, commanding a process element, opening a
window etc.).

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 40
 — Loading the stations
Once the mimics have been created, the CCC–M produces code which
can be directly loaded and interpreted by the operator stations. A CCC
function ensures that views are loaded directly into the different operator
stations in the CENTRALOG system via the network. New versions of
mimic views are loaded and installed on line on each operator station.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 41
 5.3. CCC-S SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

System operation and maintenance are ensured by the CCC–S function. The
utilization of system functions is reserved to trained staff, and is regulated by access
restrictions based on a hierarchical password system.

These functions enable the staff to operate the system as follows:

• starting and stopping the system in different modes. In the case of a start–up,
the sequence automatically executes the initialization of hardware and
software elements, as well as all downloading operations.

• reception of ”system” messages signaling, in particular, system faults. These

messages contain information intended for ABB ALSTOM POWER
maintenance personnel, or for qualified members of the operator’s staff. The
CCC–S saves the last messages to appear in memory on disk. A list of these
messages can be consulted on screen, with or without sort criteria, by operator
dialogue.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 42
 5.4. STOPPING & STARTING CENTRALOG

Starting the system

CENTRALOG is started by dialogue on the operator station hosting the CCC

functions. The different start–up modes are as follows:

• System start–up with full initialization

The start–up procedure includes the following:

— downloading the software into the stations,
— downloading the entire RTDB,
— complete initialization of all data.

• System start–up with partial initialization

The start–up procedure is similar to that described above. The difference lies in
the fact that certain data produced, processed and stored on disk during the
previous period of operation is conserved. In this type of start–up, the RTDB is
not fully reloaded, and certain data is not re–initialized. The data which is
conserved on disk is essentially as follows:
— historical data relative to changes in variables (curves, logs),
— variable statuses or thresholds which have been modified by operators,
— the value assigned to the analysis variables by the operator.
Restart after power fail

The reaction of CENTRALOG depends on the duration of the power–fail. A micro–fail

is absorbed by the system. When power is restored after a power–fail which has
caused the equipment to shut down, the system restarts automatically in the
pre–defined initialization mode (full or partial).

Shut–down

The operator can initiate the following types of shut–down:

• Shut–down of the CIS,

• Shut–down of an individual operator station.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 43
 5.5. CENTRALOG AVAILABILITY

CENTRALOG design choices have consistently been guided by the requirement for a
high degree of availability.

This optimum availability is based on the following factors:

• The intrinsic quality of the hardware components

All of CENTRALOG hardware elements are designed to provide a level of

reliability that matches the criticality of their role in the system.

• Monitoring and fault detection mechanisms

These mechanisms (hardware checks of station processor units, software

process controls, ECC memory Error Checking and Correction etc.) are
implemented at every level of CENTRALOG architecture in order to detect
defects in the stations, in the CONTRONET network communication or in
peripheral device.

These mechanisms make it possible to forestall latent failures, thereby

enabling defects to be corrected as soon as they are detected.

• Maintenance–friendly environment

From the design phase of the CENTRALOG system, ABB ALSTOM POWER
has been concerned to facilitate maintenance in order to reduce costs and
downtime following equipment failures:
— the CENTRALOG system is composed of a limited number of different
hardware components.
— the system is provided with mechanisms and tools enabling maintenance
teams to provide effective service.

• possibility of redundancy of all vital CENTRALOG sub–systems :

The following elements of the CENTRALOG system can be backed–up to

provide redundancy of equipment or functions:
— the CONTRONET network and the CIS for Centralog 30 and 50 systems,
— the controller links,
— the operator stations,
— the printers.
Redundant hardware components are selected during the design phase of the
CENTRALOG configuration according to the degree of availability required.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 44
 • Database modification without stopping operations

Centralog 10: the utilization of several Centralog 10 configurations running the

same initial database and connected to the same supervision network enables
the database to be changed and tested on one of the Centralog 10s while the
other devices remain operational using the old database. When the new real
time database has been debugged, the old database can be updated on the
other C10 units without interrupting operation.

Centralog 30/50: on a Centralog 30/50 system, the redundant CIS enables

one of the interface stations can be disconnected for purposes of changing
and testing the database while the other CIS remains operational running the
old database. Once the real time database has been debugged, it is possible
to switch from one database to the other and to re–establish CIS redundancy
without interrupting operation.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 45
Appendix A Glossary

A.1. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

RTDB: Real Time DataBase

CCC–D : CENTRALOG Configuration Center–Data

CCC–M : CENTRALOG Configuration Center–Mimic

CCC–S : CENTRALOG Configuration Center–System

CIS : CENTRALOG Interface Station

CVS : CENTRALOG Video Server

EXP : CENTRALOG functions for normal operating (EXPloitation)

TC : TeleCommand

TM : TeleMeasurement

TS : TeleSignal

TVC : Setpoint instruction (Fr. TéléValeur de Consigne)

VRE : External multi–state variable (Fr. Variable de Regroupement Externe)

VRI : Internal multi–state variable (Fr. Variable de Regroupement Interne)

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 46
A.2. DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

ALARM TS variable, or threshold or limit of a TM variable representing an abnormal functional

state for a process element of which the operator must be made aware.
APPLICATION DATA Set of data dependent on the process to which the command and control system is
connected, and therefore customized for each project.
ATTRIBUTE Static or dynamic characteristic associated to a variable, such as the ID code, label, value,
etc.
BARGRAPH Graphic mode of representing analog process variables in the form of dynamic horizontal
or vertical bars.
CCC-D Name given to a function dedicated to the customization of application data.
(CENTRALOG Configuration
Centre-Data)

CCC-M Name given to a computer station dedicated to the customization of mimic views.
(CENTRALOG Configuration
Centre-Mimic)

CCC.S Name given to a computer station dedicated to implementation and maintenance of the
(CENTRALOG Configuration
Centre-System)
CENTRALOG system.
CENTRALOG The set of control and supervision functions provided by the CENTRALOG system.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

CIS CENTRALOG station designed to provide the interface with the supervision network and
(CENTRALOG Interface
Station)
to maintain the database.
CONTROL BLOCK Group of elementary control variables used for on-screen command.
CONTRONET Name given to the CENTRALOG Ethernet network.
CSS Station designed to host special functions (HDSR, communications with external
(CENTRALOG Specialized
Station)
systems,...).

CUSTOMIZATION Operations which define and implement into CENTRALOG all of the data specific to the
application for which the system is designed (data for both the RTDB and for the mimics).
CVS Station designed to host MMI functions.
(CENTRALOG Video Station)

DESIGNATION Action of selecting an element in a view by using the trackball to position the cursor on
the element to be selected, then pressing a selection key.
DIRECTORY Window showing elements of one single type, usually view-names, in the form of a list.
The directory enables the operator to access the views listed.
DISTURBANCE Applied to a log dedicated to the recording of data relevant to an incident which has
disturbed the process in order that this data may be subsequently analyzed.
GRADIENT Attribute representing the speed of variation of an analog variable.
HYSTERESIS A specified band in the range of an analog variable which enables the threshold and limit
overshoot detection mechanism to filter out values oscillating back and forth across the
threshold.
ICON Graphic element which gives access to a view or a function when designated.
INHIBITED One possible status for a variable. An inhibited variable is not processed.
INHIBITION Action taken on a variable from the CENTRALOG man/machine interface which is
designed to mask changes in the value of a variable from the operator.
INVALIDITY Attribute associated to the value of a variable indicating whether or not the value is
significant.
LABEL Attribute associated to a variable which corresponds to a character string designed to
define the role of the variable.
LIMIT Minimum and maximum physical values which define the permissible range of a TM.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 47
 LIST List of variables selected according to one or more sort criteria. A list may either be
displayed on screen or printed out at the request of the operator (eg. the list of inhibited
variables).
LOG Specific set of data relevant to the process, printed out periodically or on event.
MIMIC Type of view entirely customized for the application representing, normally in the form
of a schema, all or a part of the operational areas of the power plant.
OFF-MONITORING One possible status for a variable. A variable which is off monitoring will not be fully
processed.
OPERATIVE UNIT (OU) Unit or division of the CENTRALOG application data used to represent a group of
variables which is coherent for the process.
REPLACED One possible status for a variable. The value of a replaced variable is a value defined by
the operator in place of the real value.
RTDB Database containing all the variables managed by the CENTRALOG system within the
(Real Time DataBase)
context of its control and supervision task.
SEQUENCE Series of successive actions taken relative to process equipment.
TC (TELECOMMAND) Variable representing a logical command transmitted to the process (ie. from
CENTRALOG to the controllers) or to an application program internal to CENTRALOG.
THRESHOLD Attribute associated to the value of a TM, corresponding to a marker located within the
permitted range of the variable causing the operator to be alerted if the specified
threshold is crossed.
TM (TELEMEASURE) Analog supervision variable.
TMI Type of TM calculated by the CENTRALOG computation function.
(INTERNAL TELEMEASURE)

TS (TELESIGNAL) Logical supervision variable.

SETPOINT COMMAND (TVC) Variable representing an analog command transmitted to the process (ie. from
CENTRALOG to the controllers) or to an application program internal to CENTRALOG.
VARIABLE Basic input/output entity of the command and control system used for process
supervision and/or control.
VIEW On-screen presentation of information (principally variables) relative to the process
used by the operator to supervise and/or control the process.
ZOOM VIEW View dedicated to the presentation of the different characteristics of an entity in the
database (variables, control blocks). Each entity has its own zoom view.

.
P-TP09-A44004-V4 E D REV D
ALSPA P320 System - CENTRALOG General Technical Specification Sheet 48
 DTS
Data Description and Management

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42041-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 48 52
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10.12.98 Updating GFE

PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. DESCRIPTION OF THE DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1.1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2. OPERATIVE ENTITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3. OPERATIVE UNITS (OU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.1. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.2. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4. PRESENTATION OF VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.4.1. Variable Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.4.2. General Characteristics of Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.5. LOGICAL TS VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5.1. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5.2. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.6. ANALOG TM VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.6.1. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.6.2. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.7. MULTI-STATE VRI VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.7.1. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.7.2. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.8. TC TELECOMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.8.1. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.8.2. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.9. TVC SETPOINT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.9.1. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.9.2. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.10. CONTROL BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.10.1. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.10.2. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2. VARIABLE PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2. SUPERVISION VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.1. Logical Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2.2. Analog Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2.3. Multi-state Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 1-ii
 2.3. CONTROL VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.1. TC Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.2. TVC Setpoint Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3. EXCHANGES ON THE F900 SUPERVISORY NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . 48

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 1-iii
 List of figures

Fig. 1 : Variable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Fig. 2 : VRI multi-state variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Fig. 3 : Motor VRI truth table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fig. 4 : The different types of TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fig. 5 : Relation between processing of supervision variables & other
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fig. 6 : Example of linear conversion (degree 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fig. 7 : TM thresholds and limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fig. 8 : Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fig. 9 : Example of gradient monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 10 : Example of logging on significant variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 11 : Relation between the processing of control variables & other
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 12 : Checking commands (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 13 : Checking setpoint instructions (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 1-iv
1. Description of the Database

1.1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION

This chapter defines the data processed by CENTRALOG and describes the principal
structures of the database.

The data processed by the CENTRALOG system can be classed in the following way :

Operative Entities

Operative Units (OUs)

Variables

Control blocks

These different types of data possess characteristics known as attributes :

Database TSI
TSE TSE Attributes
Variables
address
value
...

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 2
 Such attributes correspond to :

static information used by the system and which cannot be modified by the
process or by the operator (eg. variable range limits, data acquisition periodicities,
etc.). This information is defined during the customization of the database of the
relevant application,

dynamic information modified by the process (eg. current value), by the

operator (eg. inhibition) or by the system (eg. internal or system variables, etc.).

The different elements in the database are identified by an ID code. Each of these codes
is unique in the database.

1.2. OPERATIVE ENTITIES

An operative entity represents a part of the installation and groups data contained in one
or more operative units (see paragraph below).

This level of data division is optional. For further information refer to document ”Detailed
Technical Specification: Multi–Entity Function”.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 3
1.3. OPERATIVE UNITS (OU)

1.3.1. Definition

Database variables are grouped into ”Operative Units” (OU), functional units which are
coherent from the viewpoint of the process.

This division into Operative Units (OUs) is provided to facilitate customization and
commissioning of his system.

Operative units also are used to classify information contained in the lists presented to the
operator.

1.3.2. Characteristics

1.3.2.1. Static Attributes

An OU is defined by :

an ID code (used to call the OU) : maximum 8 characters,

a label : maximum 32 characters, used to define the role of the OU in plain

language,

a list of variables.

Important : Each variable in the database belongs to one (and only one) Operative Unit.

1.3.2.2. Dynamic Attributes

the status of the Operative Unit. This will be one of the following :
— on monitoring (monitored) : monitored OU variables are processed in normal
mode,
— inhibited : no alarm processing and no HDSR logging of variables comprising
the OU.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 4
1.4. PRESENTATION OF VARIABLES

1.4.1. Variable Types

The table below shows the different variable types classed according to origin and nature
:

Utilization Origin Nature Type

logical external logical variable TSE

external analog external analog variable TME

input
numeric multi–state variable VRE

logical internal logical variable TSI

logical program logical variable TSP

analog internal analog variable TMI

Supervision internal
input
analog analysis variable TMO

analog program analog variable TMP

numeric multi-state internal variable VRI

numeric multi-state program variable VRP

system logical system logical variable TSS

input

logical external telecommand TCE

external
ouput
analog external setpoint control TVCE
Conduite

logical internal telecommand TCI

internal
output
analog internal setpoint control TVCI

Fig. 1 : Variable types

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 5
 In the rest of this chapter variables are presented according by type, as shown below :

TSE TSI TME TMI

TSP TSS TMO TMP

TS telesignal variables TM telemeasurement variables

VRE VRI VRP

Multi-state variables

TCE TCI TVCE TVCI

TC telecommand variables TVC setpoint controls

1.4.2. General Characteristics of Variables

All the variables share the following general characteristics:

ID code (also referred to as the ”external key”): an ASCII code up to 20 characters

in length, with a structure defined by the user. No two variables may have the
same ID code.

label: maximum 32 ASCII characters, used to define the role of the variable in
plain language.

value: the way this attribute is used depends on, and is specified for, the type of
variable in question.

the Operative Unit (OU) to which the variable belongs.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 6
1.5. LOGICAL TS VARIABLES

1.5.1. Definition

TS variables represent quantities having binary values.

The system uses the following types of TS :

 TSE (External TeleSignal) variables are logical variables input from the
process and acquired by CENTRALOG via the controllers,
eg. in service/stopped for a pump
open/closed for a valve,

 TSI (Internal TeleSignal) variables are logical variables computed from

other variables by CENTRALOG’s standard computation functions.

For example : TSE 1

AND TSI 1
function
TSE 2

 TSP (TeleSignal by Program) variables are logical variables calculated by

CENTRALOG application programs (eg. process programs) or by special
processing functions (eg. association to a telecommand).

 TSS (TeleSignal by System) variables represent the state of elements

which compose the process control system (operator stations, printers, etc.).

1.5.2. Characteristics

1.5.2.1. Static Attributes

The following attributes are defined during customization of the database :

ID code

Label

The Operative Unit (OU) to which the variable belongs.

Location of acquisition (external TSE variable) : name of controller and address.

Description of calculation and order of execution (internal TSI variable).

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 7

Paired state messages. These messages can be up to 8 characters in length and
are selected from a library. This library can be customized to meet the
requirements of the application.

For example :
value 0 value 1
Message pair n.3 ”OPEN” ”CLOSED”

Nature : State or alarm.

Changes in the state of an alarm–type variable generate alarm processing
events (alarm displays, operator acknowledgements).
Changes in the state of a state–type variable do not generate alarm processing
events.

The following parameters are applicable to alarm–type variables :

— the normal value, configurable as either 0 or 1, determines the ”alarm
present” level,
— degree of urgency : selected from 4 levels,
— deletion (or not) of information displayed on the alarm screen after
acknowledgement of the alarm by the operator,
— inhibition (or not) of event log and shift log processing on start–up of system,
— horn : activation (or not) of an audible warning on alarm occurrence.
— associated mimic view.

Logging/storage:
— logging (or not) by HDSR function on change from 0 to 1,
— logging (or not) by HDSR function on change from 1 to 0,
— record of principal event in the shift log (TSE, TSI),
— disturbance log trip criterion (TSE, TSI),
— sequence of events (SOE) variable (TSE, TSI).
— periodic recording (or not) of value and status by the HDSR function.

1.5.2.2. Dynamic Attributes

The following attributes are modified by the process or by the operator.

Value: 0/1,

Invalidity: valid/invalid,

Forcing: value forced at controller level (CE 2000),

Variable status:
— on monitoring (monitored) : processing in normal mode,

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 8
 — off monitoring (not monitored) : no alarm processing, no logging, no
disturbance processing or SOE processing tripped,
— inhibited : value ignored,
— replaced: value forced at controller level or preset by the operator at
Centralog level,

Replacement value,

Quality: sure/doubtful.

This information is examined in detail in paragraph 2.2.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 9
1.6. ANALOG TM VARIABLES

1.6.1. Definition

The system uses the following types of TM variables :

 TMEs (External TeleMeasurements) are analog process variables,

acquired by CENTRALOG via the controllers,

 TMIs (Internal TeleMeasurements) are analog variables calculated by the

standard CENTRALOG calculation functions,

 TMPs (TeleMeasurements by Program) are analog variables calculated

by specific CENTRALOG application programs or by special internal
CENTRALOG processing,

 TMOs (Analysis Variables) are variables which can only be modified by

the operator and which can be used to parameter calculations.

1.6.2. Characteristics

1.6.2.1. Static Attributes

The following attributes are defined during customization of the database :

ID code

Label

The Operative Unit (OU) to which the variable belongs.

Location of acquisition (external variable) : name of the controller and address

(TME)

Description and order of execution of calculation (TMI).

Periodicity of acquisition or calculation : analog variables are processed cyclically

at specific intervals. Periodicity lists are provided in paragraphs 2.2.2.1. and
2.2.2.2.

Physical range limits : maximum and minimum limits. Any value acquired outside
of this range will be interpreted as a sensor error.

Remark : hysteresis processing of limits is performed on all analog variables

(TME, TMI, TMP). The relevant coefficient is defined globally for CENTRALOG
during system customization.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 10

Thresholds : very low, low, high , very high.

a) Fixed or variable thresholds (TME, TMI).

A threshold can be fixed or variable. The following attributes are defined for
each threshold:
— value,
— nature : state or alarm. When an alarm threshold is crossed, an alarm is
generated (alarm screen display, acknowledgement by the operator) and the
event is logged.
No alarm processing is generated when a state type threshold is crossed,
although the event may be logged if this option is selected at customization.
— the degree of urgency (alarm threshold) is selected from 4 possible levels
and determines the color of the message displayed on the screen.
— ID code of another variable (TME or TMI) whose value can be used to define
a variable threshold. A fixed threshold is always associated to a variable
threshold, and is used as a default value.
b) Logic thresholds (TME). When thresholds are monitored at the lower level
or by the CENTRALOG internal Computation function, the following must be
defined for each threshold:
— value,
— ID code of the TS variable indicating the threshold violation,
— the degree of urgency, identical to that defined for the TS.

Hysteresis coefficients : applied to oscillating movements across thresholds.

Filter coefficient (TME) : expressed as a percentage of the full range, is used to

eliminate spurious fluctuations in the value acquired.

Unit of measure : up to 6 text characters, selected for each variable from a library.
This library can be customized to meet the requirements of the application.

Type of conversion and coefficients (TME) : definition of the conversion of the raw
value (expressed as points) into a physical value (expressed in degrees, cubic
meters, etc.). These parameters are selected from a list of 128 sets of coefficients
and from 8 types of conversion defined at customization. See Section 2.2.2.1.

Horn : activation or not of an audible warning on alarm occurrence.

Associated mimic : reference of the relevant mimic to be displayed on operator

demand in case of an alarm.

Gradient : threshold of maximum permissible speed of variation and reference of

the associated default TS.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 11

Logging/storage :
— logging (or not) by HDSR function on violation of a measurement’s limits or
alarm thresholds,
— References of the daily–event log sections in which the variable appears,
— Measurement variation : measurement variation threshold at which logging
is triggered,
— Record of principal event in the shift log.

Archiving: periodic recording (or not) of value and status by the HDSR function.

1.6.2.2. Dynamic Attributes

The following attributes can be modified by the process or by the operator.

Value : expressed in units of measure (degrees Celsius, cubic meters, etc.).

Invalidity : valid/invalid.

Forcing: value forced at controller level (CE 2000),

Variable status :
— on monitoring (monitored): processing in normal mode,
— off monitoring (not monitored): alarms not processed, threshold violations
not logged,
— inhibited: value ignored,
— replaced: value forced at controller level or preset by the operator at
Centralog level,

Replacement value

Measurement state :
— normal,
— lower limit,
— very low threshold ,
— low threshold,
— high threshold,
— very high threshold,
— upper limit.

Quality : sure/doubtful.

Trend : memorization of the last 32 values of the measurement. A coefficient (1 to

10) determines the sample rate as a multiple of the acquisition period.

These attributes are examined in detail in Section 2.2.2.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 12
1.7. MULTI–STATE VRI VARIABLES

1.7.1. Definition

VR multi–state variables correspond to magnitudes defined by numerical values .

The system manages the following types of multi–state variable:

 VREs (External multi–state variables) are numerical variables produced by

the automation cell and representing the different states of a control function
object. They are utilized principally to animate mimics.

 VRIs (Internal multi–state variables) are numerical variables calculated by

the Centralog system and utilized principally to animate mimics. They are
produced from the values of TS logic variables and the states of TM analog
variables relative to their thresholds .

 VRPs (Application multi–state variables) are numerical variables

calculated by standard CENTRALOG application programs (e.g. process
programs) or produced by specific internal or external CENTRALOG processing
operations.

VRI multi–state variables:

A VRI multi–state variable is used to supply the synthetic value for a group of up to 7 items
of logic data as follows:
— either the TS value,
— or the TM state in relation to the relevant thresholds.
An eighth item of information, representing the ”logical OR” of the quality of each value for
the seven input variables, also is involved in the calculation.

The result, which is in fact the value of the VRI, is an integer which can be used to express
up to 16 different states (15 customizable states and one state reserved to express the
inhibited status of one of the data components in the VRI).

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Data 1
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Data 2 VRI
... VRI truth table
Data 7 ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
value

Quality
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Fig. 2 : VRI multi–state variable

These variables are accessible to the operator for mimic animation only. An example of
animation for a motor actuator is shown in Fig. 3.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 13
 VRI 04 : MOTOR
DOUBTFUL
ON
DISCREPANCY
FEEDBACK FAULT

INPUTS OUTPUTS

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 N LABELS

/ / / / / / / / 0 INHIBITED

0 0 0 0 1 OFF

0 0 1 0 2 ON

0 1 0 0 3 OFF DISCREPAN-
CY
0 1 1 0 4 ON DISCREPANCY

0 0 0 1 5 OFF DOUBTFUL

0 0 1 1 6 ON DOUBTFUL

0 1 0 1 7 OFF DISCR. DBT

0 1 1 1 8 ON DISCR. DBT

1 0 / / 9 DOUBLE FEEDBACK

10

11

12

13

14

15

Fig. 3 : Motor VRI truth table

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 14
 VRE external multi–state variables:

VRE variables are utilized to represent the different states of a control function object. A
VRE may be, for example, equivalent to a multi–state TS associated to a circuit breaker. A
VRE can be operative in a synthetic alarm group and generate an alarm when the object
concerned is in a particular state.

Example : circuit breaker

ts1
Circuit breaker
contact open

ts1 ts2 Signification

Circuit breaker
contact closed 0 0 Error
ts2 0 1 Open
1 0 Closed
1 1 Moving

The database can be configured to generate alarms in the following cases:

(ts1,ts2) at state 0 0 (sensor error)

(ts1,ts2) at state 1 1 for too long (e.g. more than 300ms)

functional alarm if circuit breaker is open or closed.

State changes in the pair (ts1, ts2) can be recorded in the HDSR event log.

1.7.2. Characteristics

The attributes associated to a VR variable are as follows:

1.7.2.1. Static Attributes

ID code

Label

Operative Unit to which the variable belongs

Calculation truth table (VRE): chosen from a library of 256 tables; this library can
be customized according to the application.

Geographical acquisition position (VRE): name and address of the controller

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 15

State messages (VRE, VRP): the first 16 values which may be taken by a VRE are
associated to a state message; these messages are a maximum 8 characters in
length and are selected from a library. The library can be customized according to
the application.

Logging (VRE, VRP), or not, of state changes by the HDSR function.

1.7.2.2. Dynamic Attributes

Value (VRE, VRP): the value of a VRE or a VRP corresponds to a whole number
between 0 and 63 inclusive.

Value (VRI): the value of a VRI corresponds to a whole number between 0 and 15
inclusive, the value 0 being reserved to indicate that one or more inputs are
inhibited. The value of the VRI is calculated from a truth table configured by the
user during customization of the system.

Replacement value

Validity: valid / invalid

Quality: sure / doubtful (VRE/VRP)

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 16
1.8. TC TELECOMMANDS

1.8.1. Definition

TCs are variables which represent logical commands transmitted to controllers to modify
the state of one or more process actuators. TCs may also be transmitted to an internal
CENTRALOG program.

There are two categories of TC :

TCEs (External TeleCommands) are transmitted to the controllers,

TCIs (Internal TeleCommands) to which are associated TSPs (Application

Program TeleSignals). These TSPs can be consumed as inputs by specific
application programs.

1.8.2. Characteristics

The characteristics of TCs are as follows :

1.8.2.1. Static Attributes

ID code

Label

The Operative Unit (OU) to which the variable belongs.

Geographic location of physical output : name of the controller and address of the
controller output variable, or both controller output variables in the case of dual
pulse TCs.

Paired state messages. These messages can be up to 8 characters in length and

are selected from a library of 99 paired messages also used for TSs. This library
can be customized to meet the requirements of the application.

TC type : the type of the TC is related to the nature of the signal generated during
transmission of the command. There are 3 types of TC :
— hold TC (TCIs) : each of the two possible values of the TC (0 or 1)
corresponds to an instruction (ie. 0 = open, 1 = close). The TC retains its
value until transmission of the opposite instruction.
— single pulse TC (TCEs and TCIs) : this type of TC transmits only one
instruction (ie. open).
— dual pulse TC (TCEs) : this type of TC transmits two instructions.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 17
 1st Instruction (1) 2nd Instruction (0)
Instructions sent to the controller Operator Instructions

Hold TC adr 1
or to an application program

Single pulse TC adr 1

adr 1

Dual pulse TC
adr 2

Fig. 4 : The different types of TC

Associated TS variables (TCEs only) : any TC can be associated to a TS with a

value which represents the setting of the process equipment being controlled.
This TS is used to determine the value of the command to be transmitted or to
check that the command has been executed.

Authorization TS (TCEs and TCIs) : any TC can be associated to a TS variable

and to a level (0/1) to either authorize or forbid transmission of the order by the
operator. This TS may be a TSE, TSI or TSP.

Executing command TS (TCEs) : a TSP can be associated to any TC indicating

that a command is being executed. This TSP is reset to zero when the expected
state of the associated TS is received or on reception of an execution error.

Execution error TS (TCEs only) : it is possible to check that the order transmitted
has been executed and to alert the operator in case of error. To this end, a TSP
variable associated to the logical order is set to 1 if the command has not been
carried out by the end of a specified period (time out).
This TSP variable is reset to zero by operator dialogue.

Execution delay (TCEs) : the delay in execution corresponds to the maximum time
needed for the element being commanded to take up the position required.

Logging (or not) by HDSR function of any effective TC transmission.

1.8.2.2. Dynamic Attribute

Value (TCEs and TCIs) : the value of a TC is either 0 or 1.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 18
1.9. TVC SETPOINT CONTROLS

1.9.1. Definition

TVCs or setpoint controls are variables which represent analog commands transmitted to
controllers to modify the value of a regulator setpoint or the position of a process control
element. TVCs can also be transmitted to an internal CENTRALOG program.

There are two categories of TVC :

TVCEs (External Setpoint Controls) are transmitted to the process via the
controllers,

TVCIs (Internal Setpoint Controls) to which are associated TMPs (Application

Program TeleMeasurements). These TMPs can be consumed as inputs by
specific application programs.

1.9.2. Characteristics

The attributes of TVCs are as follows :

1.9.2.1. Static Attributes

ID code

Label

The operative unit (OU) to which the variable belongs.

Geographic location of physical output (external variable) : name of the controller

and address of the physical output connection.

Type of conversion and coefficients (TVCE) : definition of the conversion of the

physical value (expressed in cubic meters per second etc.) into a raw value
(expressed as points). These parameters are selected from a list of 128 sets of
coefficients and from 8 types of conversion defined during customization.

Minimum value, maximum value (TVCE et TVCI) : maximum and minimum

values are associated to each TVC (during customization of the CENTRALOG
system), in order to be able to check the value of any setpoint entered by the
operator or calculated by the application program. These values can also be given
by the value of an associated TM declared during customization. Whenever at
least one of the associated TMs is invalid or inhibited or has a minimum value
greater than the maximum permitted value, the values defined during
configuration are applied.

Unit of measure : 1 to 6 text characters, selected for each variable from a library.
This library, which can be customized to meet the requirements of the application,
is also used for analog inputs (TMs).

Type of TVC :

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 19
 — target TVC (with or without sign) : the operator enters the physical value of
the setpoint to be attained,
— target TVC (sign illegal) or variation TVC (sign mandatory, even when
positive) : the operator enters the percentage of the full range to be attained
(unsigned % targets are always positive), or the variation to be attained
relative to the current value as a percentage of the full range,(with + or –
sign).

Associated TM (TVCE) : a TM may be associated to each TVCE. The value of this
TM indicates whether or not the process equipment being controlled has taken
account of the modification of the setpoint.

This TM is used to reset the value of the TVC and/or check that the setpoint
modification has been performed correctly.

Authorization TS (TVCE and TVCI) : any TVC can be associated to a TS variable

and to a specified level (0/1) to either authorize or forbid modification of the
setpoint. This TS may be a TSE, TSI or TSP (eg. automatic/manual settings).

Executing setpoint TS (TVCE) : any TVC can be associated to a TSP indicating

that the setpoint instruction is being executed. This TSP is reset to zero when the
expected TM value is returned, or on reception of an execution error.

Execution error TS (TVCE) : it is possible to check that the order transmitted has
been executed and to alert the operator in case of error. The command is
considered to have been executed correctly when the value of the associated TM
is the same as the value of the TVCE, to within a maximum permissible tolerance
(defined during customization).

A TSP associated to the TVC is set to 1 if the setpoint instruction is not executed.
This TSP is reset to 0 by operator dialogue.

Execution delay (TVCE) : this delay corresponds to the maximum time needed for
the execution of the setpoint instruction.

Logging (or not) by the HDSR function of any effective transmission of a setpoint
control.

1.9.2.2. Dynamic Attribute

value (TVCE and TVCI) : the value of a TVC corresponds to the value of the
relevant setpoint. The value is a physical value.

1.10. CONTROL BLOCKS

1.10.1. Definition

Control blocks are groups of elementary control variables (TCs and TVCs).

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 20
 These entities are utilized by the ”Process Control” function (see corresponding volume).

A control block is composed of a maximum of :

— 4 TC variables,
— 2 TVC variables,
— 6 TS variables,
— 6 TM variables,
— 4 VR variables.
A graphic display is associated to each control block. The descriptions of the graphic
displays of all the control blocks managed by CENTRALOG are contained in a standard
library.

Model : the processing carried out on a control block is described by a ”block model”
based on the different command modes permitted by the type of actuator (or group of
actuators) in question.

The control block model defines :

— the composition of the block, ie. the type and number of control variables
(TCs and TVCs) included in the block,
— the command scenario for the block : the scenario describes the block’s
different command possibilities both from a static and dynamic viewpoint.

1.10.2. Characteristics

The attributes of control blocks are as follows :

1.10.2.1. Static Attributes

ID code

Label

Model number : provides the reference for the processing to be performed on the
block

Graphic description number : provides the reference for the graphic display to be
used :

TC1 to TC4 : references of telecommand 1 to 4.

TVC 1 : reference of setpoint control 1 or TMO 1.

TVC 2 : reference of setpoint control 2 or TMO 2.

TS1 to TS6 : references of telesignals 1 to 6.

TM1 to TM6 : references of telemeasurements 1 to 6.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 21

VR1 to VR4 : references of VRs 1 to 4.

An example of a standard control block is described in the Volume ”Process Control”.

1.10.2.2. Dynamic Attributes

Normal/Locked/Test: normal state, block command disabled or block under test.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 22
2. Variable Processing

2.1. INTRODUCTION

This chapter explains how the system processes database variables. In particular it
examines the route followed by inputs from the moment they arrive in CENTRALOG, or by
outputs up to their transmission by CENTRALOG.

Functions associated to the man/machine interface are not described in detail. For
complete information on these functions please refer to the relevant volumes listed below
:

 MMI EXP principles  Monitoring Functions

 Operator Management of Variables  Alarms

 Process Control  Data logging functions

2.2. SUPERVISION VARIABLES

The ways in which supervision variables are processed by CENTRALOG are listed below
:

1 – Acquisition

2 – Validity evaluation

3 – Quality evaluation

4 – Filtering

5 – Conversion

6 – Range control

7 – Threshold violation and hysteresis

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 23
 8 – Alarm

9 – Logging and archival

10 – Trends

11 – Recording for y=f(t) and y=f(x) functions

12 – Disturbance logs

13 – SOE logs

14 – Gradient control

15 – Logging on measurement variation

These functions are distributed to the CENTRALOG physical blocks in the following
manner :

TSE and TME external variables are transmitted to the CDP (CENTRALOG Data
Presentation) function by the controllers. CDP processes and conditions the
variables before sending them to the CDS function (CENTRALOG Data
Services).

VRE multi–state variables are to the CDP function by the controllers.

TSI logical variables, TMI analog variables and VRI multi–state variables are
calculated and time–tagged by the CENTRALOG computation function..

TSP logical variables and TMP analog variables are calculated and time–tagged
in CENTRALOG by specific application programs.

TSS system variables are managed by the physical blocks concerned.

TMO analysis variables are not processed other than by being modified by the
operator.

The CDS function also updates the Real Time DataBase (RTDB) and triggers processing
operations including alarm, disturbance and printout processing.

The table overleaf shows how each type of variable is processed. The character ”–” is
used to indicate those cases where the processing operation in question is not applicable.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 24
 Processing TSE TSI TSP TSS TME TMI TMO TMP VRE VRI VRP

Acquisition evnt cycl cycl/ cycl/ cycl cycl operĆ cycl/ evnt cycl cycl/
evnt evnt ator evnt evnt
Validity yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes
Quality yes yes yes no yes yes no yes yes yes yes
Filtering - - - - yes yes no no - - -
Conversion - - - - yes no no no - - -
Range control - - - - yes yes yes yes - - -

Thresholds / hystereĆ - - - - yes yes no yes - - -
sis
Alarm yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes no yes
 
Event logging & arĆ yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes no yes
chival
Trend yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no no no
Disturbance logging yes yes yes no yes yes no yes no no no
SOE logging yes yes yes no no no no no no no no
Gradient - - - - yes yes no yes - - -
Measurement variaĆ - - - - yes yes no yes - - -
tion

Processing for different types of variable

Notes :  performed when operator inputs value

 using the synthetic alarms

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 25
 Operator Man- Monitoring Alarms Loggings
agement of Functions
variables

Modification Dynamic Appearance or State change TS, VR

of status attributes of disappearance
variables of alarms
TM threshold and
limit violations

TMI
Computation
functions
TSI, VRI
TM
TS
Variable Reference charts
processing

TMP, TSP Application

VRP programs
TM,
TS, VR
TSS Reference charts
Event–
related

TSE TME VRE

Event–related Cyclic by in- Event
or cyclic terval or delta related
mode

Fig. 5 : Relation between processing of supervision variables & other functions

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 26
2.2.1. Logical Variables

2.2.1.1. Acquisition of External Variables

The P320 performs the following processing operations:

Acquisition of TSEs:

Transmission of TSE values by the P320 is event–related, ie. when the value
changes. TSE values changes are time–tagged at reception.

The P320 automation cell also transmits the validity of the TSE. This validity is
determined according to the quality of the acquisition process.

Transmission of TSE state change messages to the CDS function.

2.2.1.2. Production of Internal Variables

a) – TSI internal variables are calculated cyclically at one second intervals in the order
specified by the database (attribute : order of execution) if one of the components of the
calculation has changed since the last cycle of the calculation.

If an internal variable has another lower ranking TSI as a component, the value used is
that supplied in the current cycle, or its replacement value.

If an internal variable has another higher ranking TSI as a component, the value used is
that supplied in the previous cycle, or its replacement value.

The calculations themselves are described in the volume ”COMPUTATION

FUNCTIONS”.

b) – TSP variables are produced by the specific application programs.

c) – Depending on the case, TSS system variables are evaluated :

— either cyclically,
— or during utilization of the device in question.

2.2.1.3. Invalidity Processing

a) – A TSE external logical input is invalid

when acquisition is not possible :

— the F900 network is faulty,
— the automation cell itself is defective,

when the input is chattering

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 27
 b) – A TSI internal logical input is invalid when at least one of the variables used in its
calculation is :
— invalid,
— inhibited ,
— or out of limits (for analog variables).
c) –The rules which define the validity of a TSP are defined by the specific application
programs.

d) – A TSS system variable is invalid when its state cannot be identified.

2.2.1.4. Quality Processing

The quality of a variable is either sure or doubtful, ie:

a) – A TSE external logical variable is considered as doubtful if it is :

— replaced,
— or invalid.
a) – A TSI internal logical variable is considered as doubtful if it is :
— replaced,
— or invalid,
— or if one of its components is replaced or invalid.
c) – The rules which define the quality of a TSP are created at process level.

d) – A TSS system variable is always sure.

2.2.1.5. Variable Status

The status of a TS variable will be one of the following : on monitoring, off monitoring,
inhibited or replaced. This status is defined by the operator from the control room
stations.

At any single given moment, a variable can be qualified by no more than one status.

A variable which is forced by the controller is displayed with ”replaced” status. Its value
can be replaced again by the CENTRALOG operator and the variable can be inhibited.
When reset on monitoring the variable takes its forced value and has ”replaced” status.

The table overleaf shows the different types of processing performed on TS variables
according to their status.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 28
 TS Variable Status Processing
- utilization of the real acquired value (TSE),
or real calculated value (TSI, TSP, TSS)
On-monitoring - the validity of the variable is monitored
- alarm processing
- logged
- utilization of the real acquired value (TSE),
or real calculated value (TSI, TSP, TSS)
Off-monitoring - the validity of the variable is monitored
- no alarm processing
- not logged
- the real value is ignored
- processing is performed using the
Replaced replacement value
- no alarm processing, not logged when
replaced at controller level (forced)
- no alarm processing
Inhibited - not logged
- an inhibition symbol is displayed and printed in place of
the value

When the system is started in ”full initialization” mode, all the variables are monitored, and
the status of all the variables is thus ”on monitoring”.

When the system is re–started in ”partial initialization” mode, the status of each of the
variables is that present before the system was shut down.

2.2.1.6. Triggering Alarms

This processing concerns alarm type variables, as opposed the event type variables.

a) – Appearance of alarm :

The shift to alarm state for a variable, as determined by the state of the sensor and by the
alarm–direction defined in the database, triggers appearance–of–alarm processing
when the variable is on–monitoring and valid (see Volume ”Alarms”).

b) – Disappearance of alarm :

In the same way, the return to normal state triggers disappearance–of–alarm processing.

c) – Shift to invalid state or inhibition, replacement, set off–monitoring.

d) – Return to valid state :

Return to valid state of a variable on alarm triggers the same processing as that above for
an appearance of alarm.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 29
2.2.1.7. Triggering Log Functions

A change in the value of a valid monitored variable is transmitted to the logging and HDSR
functions:

to be logged by the HDSR function in accordance with the sense of the change (to
level 1 or level 0), as defined for the variable in the database,

to trip the disturbance log when the variable in question is a criterion and when the
direction of the state change so requires,

for SOE processing if the variable has been defined as a SOE variable.

to be recorded in the shift log if the variable has been defined as a principal event.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 30
2.2.2. Analog Variables

2.2.2.1. Acquisition of External Variables

The processing performed on TMs by the P320 automation are as follows :

The value and validity of the TME is transmitted to the CDP function by the P320
automation cell every second,

TME transmission to the CDS function at intervals. The TME transmission rate is
defined at customization from the following permissible periods : 1s, 2s, 5s,
10s,15s, 20s, 30s, 60s.

2.2.2.1.1. Filtering (TMEs, TMIs)

All external variables are filtered in accordance with the following formula :

FV = RV x (1 – FILTER) + PV x FILTER

FV = current Filtered Value

RV = current Raw Value

PV = Previous filtered Value

FILTER = filter coefficient defined for each variable in the database.

Variable values are filtered if :

— the previous value is valid, and
— the TM is not inhibited, and
— the FILTER coefficient in the database for this variable is not null.
In all other cases the value of the TM calculated is equal to the raw value.

2.2.2.1.2. Conversion (TMEs)

The physical value stored in the real time database and used for displays and print–outs,
etc. is obtained by applying the standard function relevant to the characteristics of the
sensor in question to the raw value x acquired from the controller.

electrical sensor value

0 4 16 20mA

raw value
0 20480 25600 points

90°C
physical value
0 120 °C

A0 = -30 A1 = .00586 Lower limit Upper limit

Physical value = 20480 (.00586) – 30 = 90¨C
Fig. 6 : Example of linear conversion (degree 1)

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 31
 The types of standard conversion are as follows :

1 – 1st degree polynomial (A1 x + A0)

2 – 2nd degree polynomial (A2 x2 + A1 x + A0)

3 – 3rd degree polynomial (A3 x3 + A2 x2 + A1 x + A0)

4 – 4th degree polynomial (A4 x4 + A3 x3 + A2 x2 + A1 x + A0)

5 – 5th degree polynomial (A5 x5 + A4 x4 + A3 x3 + A2 x2 + A1 x + A0)

6 – Square root
A2 x2 + A1 x +A0

7 – Exponential exp(A1 x + A0)

8 – Logarithmic A0  Log(A2 x + A1)

The type of conversion and the associated coefficients A0, A1, A2, etc. must be defined for
each variable.

2.2.2.2. Production of TMI, TMO and TMP Variables

a) – TMI variables are assessed cyclically at intervals defined for each variable.

 1 second

 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 seconds

 1, 2, 5, 10, 30 minutes

 1 hour

 1 shift

 1 day

 1 month

TMIs with the same assessment rate are assessed at the end of the equivalent TME
cycle.

TMI variables with an assessment rate equal or less than one minute are assessed at the
end of the cycle of acquisition of TMEs with an equivalent periodicity. Variables with a rate
superior to one minute are assessed at the end of the one minute cycle.

TMI variables can be filtered (see paragraph 2.2.2.1.1.).

b) – TMO analysis variables are not processed by the system. They can be modified only
by the operator.

c) – TMP variables are evaluated by process programmes on occurrence of an event or

cyclically after the TME calculation cycle and the TMI cycle. TMPs have no specific
evaluation rate, and their cyclic evaluation is synchronized with the TMI assessment.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 32
2.2.2.3. Invalidity Processing

A variable is either valid or invalid.

A TME is invalid when acquisition is not possible : the F900 network, or the
automation cell, is defective, a high or low electric threshold is attained or a line
fault has appeared.

A V02–type TMI (calculation in Polish notation) is invalid when at least one of the
variables used in its calculation is :
— invalid,
— inhibited ,
— out of limits.
Specific validity rules are also applied to other types of TMI. These rules are
detailed in the Volume ”Computation Functions”.

A TMO is never invalid.

TMPs are invalidated by specific application programs in accordance with rules

determined by these programs.

2.2.2.4. Quality Processing

The quality of a variable is either sure or doubtful.

A TME variable is considered as doubtful if it is:

— replaced,
— or invalid.

A V02–type TMI (calculation in Polish notation) is considered as doubtful if it is:
— replaced,
— or invalid,
— or if one of its components is replaced or invalid.
Specific validity rules are also applied to other types of TMI. These rules are
detailed in the Volume ”Computation Functions”.

A TMO is never doubtful.

The quality of a TMP is defined by the specific application programs.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 33
2.2.2.5. Threshold and Limit Violation Processing

a) - Measurement state
The measurement state is defined in relation to the limits and thresholds of the
measurement, as described below.

Upper limit

Very high threshold

High threshold

value of the TM
Low threshold

Very low threshold

Lower limit

Fig. 7 : TM thresholds and limits

Limits : these define the maximum permissible range for the value of the
measurement. This range is defined for each individual TM by an upper and lower
limit. These values themselves are inside the valid range.

The detection of limit violations incorporates a hysteresis coefficient designed to

filter repeated violations caused by a TM oscillating back and forth around a limit.
This unique coefficient is determined for all TMs during customization and is
expressed in 1/10000ths of the full range. A positive coefficient value corresponds to
a hysteresis band inside the limit. A negative coefficient delays violation of the limit
while maintaining the measurement at the limit value. The hysteresis coefficient is
not applied when a sudden variation (corresponding to one acquisition) pushes a
measurement from a within limits value to an out of limits value.

Measurement state in relation to thresholds : up to 4 thresholds may be

associated to each TM, 2 upper thresholds and 2 lower thresholds. The
comparison of the value of the TM with its thresholds can, in the case of a
threshold violation (and depending on customization), trigger processing similar
to that performed on the occurrence of changes in TS values (in particular, alarm
processing).

The variable is processed as an alarm when its value has strictly exceeded the
threshold value.

The variable state in relation to these thresholds can be used in the calculation of
TSI, TMI or VRI internal variables.

Detection of threshold violations may also take a hysteresis coefficient into

consideration (see below).

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 34
 The value of thresholds is fixed for each individual TM and predefined for each TM
during customization. There are three types of threshold; the two first types may
be used in combination for a given variable.
— Modifiable threshold : the value of the threshold is originally defined in the
database, and may be modified by the operator.
— Variable threshold : the value of the threshold varies, and is provided by the
value of a TM known as the associated TM. This TM is declared during
customization. The operator may at any time define a substitute value. For a
TM which includes at least one variable threshold, the different substitute
values are used whenever at least one of the associated TMs is invalid,
inhibited or whenever the different threshold values are inconsistent (eg. low
threshold>high threshold). Associated TM values are re–applied as soon the
conditions described above are no longer true.
— Logic threshold : the state of a TM relative its thresholds can be provided
directly by the value of the TS logic variables produced by a controller or by
the CENTRALOG Internal Computation functions.
On system start–up, this type of threshold is initialized on the CENTRALOG
screen at its substitute value (fixed threshold or as modified). Subsequently,
on the occurrence of a threshold violation corresponding to a shift in the value
of the TS from 0 to 1, the value of the threshold is replaced by the value of the
TM. For a TM comprising at least one logic threshold, the various substitute
values are used whenever at least one of the associated TS variables is
invalid or inhibited. Any new threshold violations signaled by the associated
TSs are again taken into consideration as soon as the previous conditions
are no longer fulfilled.
b) - Hysteresis (modifiable or variable threshold)
The hysteresis coefficient is used to avoid unnecessary repetition of alarms (if the TM is
on monitoring) when the value of the TM is oscillating back and forth across a threshold.
The hysteresis coefficient is expressed in the database as a % of the full range (full range
= upper limit – lower limit) and its value is between 0 and 31 % inclusive. The same
hysteresis coefficient is applied to all the thresholds of the same variable.

The hysteresis coefficient is also taken into account in the detection of the end of a
threshold violation event, as shown below.

high threshold
hysteresis

hysteresis
low threshold threshold
overshoot

Fig. 8 : Hysteresis

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 35
2.2.2.6. Variable Status Processing

The status of a TM variable is one of the following : on monitoring, off monitoring,

inhibited or replaced. This variable status is defined by the operator from the stations in
the control room.

A variable which is forced by the controller is displayed with ”replaced” status. Its value
can be replaced again by the CENTRALOG operator and the variable can be inhibited.
When reset on monitoring the variable takes its forced value and has ”replaced” status.

When the state of a TM relative to its thresholds is produced by logic thresholds, the alarm
is signaled only by the corresponding TSs. Alarm processing therefore complies with TS
rules.

The table below shows the types of processing performed on TM variables depending on
their status.

TM status Processing
- processing is performed with the real acquired value
(TME) or real calculated value (TMI, TMP)
On monitoring - the validity of the variable is monitored
- alarm processing
- limit and threshold violations are detected and signalled
- logged
- processing is performed with the real acquired value
(TME) or real calculated value (TMI, TMP)
- the validity of the variable is monitored
Off monitoring - no alarm processing
- limit violations are detected and signalled
- thresholds are ignored
- threshold violations not logged
- real value is ignored
- processing is performed with the replacement value
Replaced - alarms processed and logged if replaced by controller
(forcing)
- an inhibition symbol is displayed and printed in place of the
value
Inhibited - no alarm processing
- out-of-limits events are ignored
- thresholds are ignored
- not logged

At any single given moment, a variable can be qualified by only one status.

All variables are ”on monitoring” on initialization of the system.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 36
2.2.2.7. Alarms

Alarm processing concerns variables for which alarm–type thresholds have been defined
(as opposed to state–type variables).

a) – Appearance of alarm :

A variable going to alarm state, reflecting the violation of an alarm–type threshold, triggers
appearance–of–alarm processing when the variable is on–monitoring and valid. The
same is true for limit violations when the variable is on or off–monitoring and valid.

b) – Disappearance of alarm :

In the same way, the return to normal state triggers disappearance–of–alarm processing.

c) – Shift to invalid state or inhibition, replacement, set off–monitoring.

d) – Return to valid state :

Return to valid state of a variable on alarm triggers the same processing as that above for
an appearance of alarm.

2.2.2.8. Logging

Limit violations by a valid variable which is On or OFF monitoring, and alarm–type

threshold violations by a valid variable which is ON monitoring are transmitted to the
logging and HDSR functions:

to be logged by the HDSR function in accordance with the variable’s degree of

urgency,

to be recorded in the shift log if the variable has been defined as a principal event.

The violation of state–type thresholds by a valid variable which is ON monitoring may also
be transmitted to the logging and HDSR functions.
This option may be selected globally during system customization.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 37
2.2.2.9. Gradient

This processing is used to trigger an alarm when the speed of variation of a TM exceeds a
certain threshold. The gradient is calculated for the TMEs or TMIs for which this
processing has been defined during customization.

The threshold and the gradient calculation mode are identical whether the value has
increased or decreased in magnitude.

The variation corresponds to the difference between the filtered value of the
measurement given by the current acquisition cycle and the filtered value of the
measurement given by the previous cycle.

TM

Sampling

1
TSP
0

Fig. 9 : Example of gradient monitoring

When the gradient exceeds the predefined threshold, the associated TSP logical variable
(gradient threshold attained) is set to level 1 and processed like other TSs.

The TSP variable is reset to zero when the variation falls back below the gradient
threshold.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 38
2.2.2.10. Logging on Significant Variation in Value

A message is recorded in the HDSR event log when the variation in the value of a TM
exceeds a predefined value. Significant variations in value are logged for the TMEs or
TMIs for which this processing has been defined during customization.

message printed out

125

120

115

110

105

Fig. 10 : Example of logging on significant variation

A percentage of the measurement range is defined as representing significant variation

for each such variable (see Fig. 10 : range 0–200, threshold 2,5% = 5).

On initialization of the system, the first value acquired is taken as the reference value
which is then used to define the monitoring range (105 to115 in the example in Fig. 10) .

When the value moves out of the monitoring range, a message is printed out and the
newly acquired value replaces the old value as the reference. The new reference is then
used to define a new monitoring range.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 39
2.2.3. Multi–state Variables

2.2.3.1. Acquisition and Evaluation

The transmission of C370 VRE values by the automation cell is event–related, i.e. on a
change of value or validity with a discrimination of 4 cycles of the controller logic task.
CE2000 VRE values are transmitted and dated by the CE2000 I/O controller at each
controller cycle, i.e. 10 ms. In the case of the CE80–35, the value is transmitted cyclically.
C80–35 VRE values are transmitted and dated cyclically.

VRI multi–state variables are evaluated cyclically after the TSIs.

VRP variables are evaluated by event–related programs or cyclically.

2.2.3.2. Invalidity

A VRE multi–state variable is declared invalid by CENTRALOG when acquisition is

impossible:
— F900 network malfunction
— automation cell or CE2000 I/O controller malfunction.

2.2.3.3. Processing

A VRI variable is deemed invalid (value 0) if one of the components in its calculation is
inhibited.

The validity of a VRI is determined by the ”logical OR” relative to the quality of the inputs.

2.2.3.4. Logging

A change in the value of a valid and on–monitoring VRE ou VRP variable is transmitted for
recording by the HDSR function in accordance with the option defined for the variable in
question in the database.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 40
2.3. CONTROL VARIABLES

The following processing operations are performed on control variables by the

CENTRALOG system :

1 – Execution checks

2 – Conversion (setpoint control)

3 – Transmission

4 – Logging

2.3.1. TC Commands

2.3.1.1. Execution Checks

Authorization check: when the authorization TS exists, the TC is transmitted if :

— the TS is valid and non inhibited,
— the value of the TS corresponds to the change authorized.

Execution error check (TCE): when the execution error TSP exists, the TC is
transmitted if :
— the TSP is not set, ie. there are no previous undeleted execution errors.
An execution check is activated for a period T (defined for each variable).

Associated TS check (TCE): when the associated TS exists, the TC is transmitted

if :
— the TS is valid and non inhibited.

If the check results are satisfactory:

— the telecommand is transmitted
— an ”executing” TSP indicating that the command is being acted upon is set.

Reception of the TS associated to the expected value before expiry of period T

cancels the execution check. If the TS is not received an execution error TSP is
set. In both cases the executing TSP is reset to zero.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 41
2.3.1.2. Transmission

Depending on the type of TC, one or two controller output variables may be activated
corresponding to one or other of the two addresses defined in the database.

For each type of TC, the following information is transmitted by the CENTRALOG :

continuous
— TC at 1 : first output =1
— TC at 0 : first output = 0

single pulse
— TC at 1 : first output = 1

dual pulse
— TC at 1 : first output =1
— TC at 0 : second output = 1
Information is transmitted as soon as it is produced (event–related transmission).

2.3.1.3. Logging

The information that the TC has been sent is transmitted (or not) to the HDSR functions in
accordance with the option defined for the variable in question in the database.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 42
 Operator Monitoring Alarms Logging
management functions & HDSR
of variables functions

Modification
of status TS, Dynamic Appearance or State change TS
TM, OU TMO attributes of disappear- Threshold & limit
Send TC, variables ance violations TM
TVC TS, TM , VR of alarms Send instruction TC/
TS, TM TVC

TMI Computation
TSI, VRI functions
TM
TS
Variable
processing

TC/TVC/DGR
Application
TSP,TMP, VRP programs
DGR, TM,TS
ABQ
TSS
event–
related

VRE TC
event- event–
TSE related TME related TVC
event–related cyclic per event–
or cyclic interval or related
delta mode

Fig. 11 : Relation between the processing of control variables & other functions

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 43
 Operator selects
command

CENTRALOG
Check :

Authorization TS (valid, non inhibited, correct expected state)

Associated TS (valid, non inhibited)
Execution error TS (no current error)

Error
Incorrect Correct
message
CENTRALOG

Set executing command TS

Start execution time out
Send controller command
AUTOMATE

Check application
Send process command

Command not Command

executed executed

No change in Change in process state

associated TS Associated TS to expected

At time out :
Stop time out
Set execution error TS
Reset executing TS
Reset executing TS

Fig. 12 : Checking commands (example)

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 44
2.3.2. TVC Setpoint Controls

2.3.2.1. Execution Check

Authorization check : when the authorization TS exists, the TVC is transmitted if :

— the TS is valid and non inhibited,
— the value of the TS corresponds to the change authorized.

Execution error check (TVCE) : when the execution error TSP exists, the TVC is
transmitted if :
— the TSP is not set, ie. there are no previous undeleted execution errors.
An execution check is activated for a period T (defined for each variable).

Associated TM check (TVCE) : when the associated TM exists, the TVC is

transmitted if :
— the TM is valid and non inhibited.

Value check :
— the value must be less than the min–max range.

If the check results are satisfactory:

— the setpoint instruction is transmitted,
— an ”executing” TSP indicating that the command is being acted upon is set.

Reception of the TM associated to the expected value before expiry of period T

cancels the execution check. If the TM is not received an execution error TSP is
set. In both cases the executing TSP is reset to zero.

2.3.2.2. Conversion

The physical value of the setpoint is converted into a value which can be transmitted to
the controller by applying the standard functions which are appropriate to the
characteristics of the process element being commanded.

The list of standard functions is identical to those used to convert TM variables. It should
be noted that the function specified in the database is that which is used to obtain the
physical value from the raw value :

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 45
 — 1st to 5th degree polynomials,
— square root,
— exponential,
— logarithm.

2.3.2.3. Transmission

The information is transmitted as soon as it is produced (event–related transmission).

2.3.2.4. Logging

The information that the TVC has been sent is transmitted (or not) to the HDSR function in
accordance with the option selected for the variable in question in the database.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 46
 Operator selects
setpoint

Check :
CENTRALOG
Authorization TS (valid, non inhibited, correct expected state)
Associated TS (valid, non inhibited)
Execution error TS (no current error)
Min/max limits not violated
Error
Incorrect Correct
mes-
sage
CENTRALOG

Set executing command TS

Start execution time out
Send controller command
AUTOMATE

Check application
Send process command

Setpoint not Setpoint

attained attained

Change in process state

No change in associated TM associated TM = setpoint
%margin

At time out :
Stop time out
Set execution error TS
Reset executing TS
Reset executing TS

Fig. 13 : Checking setpoint instructions (example)

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 47
3. Exchanges on the F900 Supervisory Network

This chapter summarizes the principles governing data exchanges on the F900 network.

The variables exchanged between the P320 system Controbloc and CENTRALOG levels
travel over the F900 supervisory network.

Transmission of logic variables (TS variables) is event–related, i.e. TS variables are

transmitted on occurrence of a state change in the issuing unit (CE 2000 or C370).

Transmission of VRE multi–state variables is event–related, i.e. on occurrence of a state

change in the issuing unit (CE 2000 or C370) .

Every 2 seconds the issuing units produce a cyclical summary providing a snapshot of the
logic variables exchanged . This summary is transmitted to the Centralog systems
connected to the F900 network in the event of a fault in the link and is used to reassess the
actual state of the process (general check).

Analog variables (TM variables) are transmitted cyclically to the Centralog system.

Grouped system faults are transmitted in the same way as TS variables, with the
exception of link failures detected by the Centralog and controller/Centralog application
software version consistency checks processed directly by Centralog as system TSs.

Instructions from Centralog are transmitted to the controllers on command. The controller
in return transmits an execution check TS indicating to the operator (or to the Centralog
process control application program) that the instruction has been taken into
consideration by the control function application.

.
P–TP09–A42041–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Description and Management Sheet 48
 DTS
Presentation of the EXP MMI

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42042-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 41 45
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10.12.98 Translation of the French document rev. B GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2. THE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1. TYPICAL DISPLAY LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2. SYSTEM ZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.3. MAIN DISPLAY ZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4. THE DIALOGUE ZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3. DIALOGUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2. DIALOGUE TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.3. ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.4. USING WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.5. DATA INPUT ZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.6. OPERATING VIEWS IMPORT/EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.7. ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.7.1. Icon Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.7.2. Upper Level Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.7.3. Accessing Directory Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.7.4. Data Logging Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.7.5. Accessing Current Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.7.6. Accessing Stored Logs on Optical Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.7.7. System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

4. VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.1. DIRECTORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.1.1. Single Level Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.1.2. Mimic Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.1.3. Directories of Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.2. OPERATIONAL VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.2.1. Single-Page Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.2.2. Multi-Page Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.2.3. Accessing Associated Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2.4. Accessing the Help Window Corresponding to the Function . . 25
4.2.5. Help Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 1-ii
 4.3. CHARACTER SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.4. VARIABLE DISPLAY FORMATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.4.1. Timetagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.4.2. Color Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.4.3. Structure of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.5. NUMERICAL VALUE ENTRY FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

5. UTILITY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.1. RECALLING PREVIOUS VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.1.1. Recalling the Last View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.1.2. Recalling the Latest Views Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.2. RAPID ACCESS TO OPERATOR VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.2.1. Direct Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.2.2. Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.2.3. Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.3. SYSTEM FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.3.1. Changing System Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.3.2. Protection of Dialogues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.3.3. Stop before Display Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.3.4. Stopping the Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.3.5. Managing the Klaxon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.3.6. Oprations on an Archive Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.3.7. System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.4. STORING LOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.4.1. Select and Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.4.2. Global Storage on Magneto-optical Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.4.3. Individual Storage on Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 1-iii
 List of figures

Fig. 1 : Typical screen layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Fig. 2 : Example of a system zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Fig. 3 : Icon layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Fig. 4 : Directory view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fig. 5 : Mimic directory view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fig. 6 : Directory of variables view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Fig. 7 : Single-page view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fig. 8 : Multi-page view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 1-iv
1. Introduction

The aim of this document is to describe the general utilization principles of the EXP
function designed for normal operation of the Centralog system.

An operator station, which is constituted by a workstation, comprises:

one to three color graphic screens,

a workstation keyboard and a mouse,

As an option, a screen copy device is available as a complement to the various operator

stations of the configuration.

The number of operator stations utilized, and the operational functions available on the
stations, can be customized to meet the requirements of a given project.

The operator station offers the following ergonomic characteristics:

— the operational displays are organized into a functional hierarchy,

— rapid access to dialogues,
— the different data display modes are standardized.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 2
2. The Screen

2.1. TYPICAL DISPLAY LAYOUT

The CRT display (1280 x 1024 pixels) is divided into three zones:

a system zone,

a main display zone,

a dialogue zone.

SYSTEM

MAIN DISPLAY

DIALOGUE

Fig. 1 : Typical screen layout

This chapter details the fields, messages and symbols used in each of these zones.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 3
2.2. SYSTEM ZONE

The system zone is used to display general information concerning the operator station
and contains the following data:
— The CENTRALOG number,
— The identification number of the operator station or of the site. This number
is defined for each station during customization of the database. On
disconnection, the color of the number displayed is red;
— The error message zone,
— The date (DD/MM/YY),
— The time (HH:MM:SS).

3 Main station CEGELEC 15/01/9910:30:26

Fig. 2 : Example of a system zone

2.3. MAIN DISPLAY ZONE

The main display zone is reserved for the different CENTRALOG views. The layout of
each view is specific to the display function in question (mimics, curves etc.). The layout of
the main display zone is therefore described for each of the different functions.

2.4. THE DIALOGUE ZONE

The dialogue zone is used to access to the different CENTRALOG views and to manage
the commands available to the operator. The dialogue is composed of a set of icons.

These icons are classified functionally in order to facilitate the choice and selection of
operator actions.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 4
3. Dialogues

3.1. INTRODUCTION

The dialogues available on each CENTRALOG operator station can be accessed as

follows:

by pinpointing the icons displayed in the dialogue zone. These dialogues are
independent of the type of view displayed in the main display zone.

by pinpointing the icons displayed in the main display zone itself. These dialogues
are directly associated to the view containing the designated icon.

Pinpointing is done with the left button of the mouse.

3.2. DIALOGUE TYPES

Different access modes are available depending on the type of icon designated:

Direct access:

The icon gives access to a single command which is executed immediately. The
operator is not required to confirm the command.

After designation, the icon is shown in depressed position. When the command is
executed, the icon is shown as released.

Access by pull–down menu

Each command is indicated in the form of an option in the menu.

Sub–menus can be associated with certain options in the main menu, depending
on the complexity of the command.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 5
 The action of clicking the mouse button in an option causes the command in
question to be executed. The menu and any sub–menus are closed.

Access by pull–down menu and by entering parameters:

This mode is identical to that above. However, when the option is selected (by
clicking the mouse button), the menu closes and a data input window is displayed
near the designated icon.

This window enables the operator to enter parameters relevant to the command
selected in the menu.

Access by window

The window in question contains the icons of the associated views. The window
closes when one of the icons or the close button is designated.

3.3. ERROR MESSAGES

Error messages following an operator action within a dialogue window appear in the lower
part of the window.

With other types of dialogue, an error condition is signaled to the operator in the system
zone or by the opening of a window containing a message. The operator clicks on the
button to close the window.

window closure
button

Error message

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 6
3.4. USING WINDOWS

Depending on their complexity, the data input windows presented in the operator station
dialogues may contain a combination of the following graphic objects:

window closure function icon

button

selection
zone
data entry
zone

validation
cancel
button
button
error message
Error messages
display zone
General layout of an input window

These graphic objects function as follows:

Selection zone

A selection zone contains buttons, which, when selected, are shown on screen as
depressed.

Data input zone

See next paragraph.

Validation button

When this button is designated, any operator actions which have been performed
in the window are executed.

Cancel button

When this button is designated, any operator actions in the window are cancelled.
No command is executed .

Error message display zone

Error messages are displayed whenever a command is refused. This zone is

deleted by a new operator action.

Important: When a data input window is activated, all operator actions outside the win-
dow are disabled. Only the ”STOP HORN” key remains activated.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 7
3.5. DATA INPUT ZONE

A data input zone is activated by the following maneuvers:

— positioning the cursor in the zone,
— pressing the left–hand mouse button.
The active input zone is shown as depressed and a cursor is displayed.

The ”Backspace” and ”Delete”keys are used to correct errors in data input via the
keyboard. ”Backspace” erases one character and ”Delete” erases all the characters.

Numerical data can be entered either in decimal or scientific formats. Data input is
terminated by pressing the ”Enter”key.

The middle mouse button is used to abort the data entry operation (before pressing
”Enter”).

Copy – paste

The ID Code of a TS or TM variable can be entered by means of the copy/paste option.

The ID code is copied by designating the code in a directory, a data line in a view
(operator group, operative unit, etc.) or in a list. The code is designated using the middle
mouse button.

The code may be pasted on the same screen as the copy or on a different screen on the
same operator station. Locate the cursor in the data input zone, then press the right hand
button of the mouse to paste the code.

3.6. OPERATING VIEWS IMPORT/EXPORT

When an operator station is equipped with more than one monitor, the import/export
function is used to display views on a screen other than that originally selected.

Position the cursor on the relevant view access button

Click the left hand mouse button to display the view directly on the current screen

Use the middle mouse button to export the view to another screen on the same
operator station

Drag the cursor to the destination screen and click the right hand mouse button to
display the imported view.

Exportable views are full page views occupying all the main view area. With multi–page
views, the export function displays the first page.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 8
3.7. ICONS

3.7.1. Icon Layout

The functional icons are displayed in two rows at the bottom of the screen (dialogue
zone).

The top row contains upper level icons:

Icons which when designated cause the immediate execution of the function (eg.
Stop Horn).

Group icons which when designated cause additional icons associated to the
relevant function to be displayed in the bottom row (eg. printouts/checks, printout
stop ...).

Upper level icons are static and are displayed permanently.

The icon display in the bottom row is dynamic and depends on the group icon pinpointed
in the top row.

Access to directories

DB SYS

OU VAR OPG

Log operations

DB SYS

! !

Access to system functions

DB SYS

EXP STOP ?

Fig. 3 : Icon layout

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 9
3.7.2. Upper Level Icons

The table below shows the actions available via the icons in the top row.

Icons Functions Resulting action Subsequent operator

action
Return to view Displays the previously
previously displayed displayed view

Return to views Displays window Selection

previously displayed listing the latest views

Rapid access to views Displays menu: Selection:

Direct band Direct band
Directory Directory
Keys Keys
Access to directories Displays lower level icons Select icon
see paragraph 3.7.3.

Logs Displays lower level icons Select icon

see paragraph 3.7.4.

Search variables in the Displays pull-down menu: Select an option 

DB
database inhibited variables to display the
off monitoring variables corresponding list.
replaced variables Selection of the last
forced variables option (query) enables the
out-of-limits variables operator to define or
chattering variables modify a filter
invalid variables
analysis variables
modified threshold variables
inhibited operative units
locked/test control blocks
query
System Displays lower level icons Select icon
SYS

Main alarms view Displays view

Top row icons

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 10
 Icons Functions Resulting action Subsequent operator
action
Complementary alarm Opens pull down menu: Select one of the options
views Degree of urgency 1 Display list or short alarm
Degree of urgency 2 list or last 3 alarms
Degree of urgency 3
Degree of urgency 4
Filter
Short alarm list
Last 3 alarms
Stop horn Stops horn

Top row icons (cont’d)

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 11
3.7.3. Accessing Directory Views

Clicking on the icon in the top row displays the following icons:

Icons Functions Resultant action Subsequent operator

action
Mimic Displays directory Select from directory

Control block views Displays directory Select from directory

y = f(t) curve Displays directory Select from directory

y = f(x) function Displays directory Select from directory

Bargraph Displays directory Select from directory

Trend variables Displays directory Select from directory

Operative unit Displays directory Select from the directory

OU that opens a menu

Variable zoom views Displays directory Select from the directory

VAR that opens a menu

Operator group Displays directory Select from directory

OPG

Operating schedule Displays directory Select from directory

Sequence monitoring Displays group lists Select from list

Synthetic alarms Displays directory Select from directory

Directory access icons

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 12
3.7.4. Data Logging Functions

Clicking on the icon in the top row displays the following icons:

Icons Functions Resultant action Subsequent operator

action
Logs Displays list of log types: Selection 
Disturbance to display available logs of
SOE type selected.
etc. Select to display log
Stored logs on optical Displays list of log types: Selection 
disk Disturbance to display available logs of
(CCC station) SOE type selected.
etc. Select to display log
Write log on request Displays menu: Select log type to save a
shift logs temporary log on disk.
daily logs
weekly logs
monthly logs
monthly maintenance logs

Disturbance logs Displays directory Select from directory

!
Sequence of events Displays directory Select from directory
! (SOE) logs

Trend logs Displays directory Select from directory

Shift time Displays data entry window Enter shift times

Number of actions Displays a view of variables Selecting a variable opens

of this type a parameter entry window

Running time Displays a view of variables Selecting a variable opens

of this type a parameter entry window

Threshold attainments Displays a view of variables

of this type

Log function icons

These functions are described in detail in the document ”Data Logging Functions”.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 13
3.7.5. Accessing Current Logs

Click on to display the different types of log. Select a type of log to access a list of

all the available logs of the type selected. Select the desired log to display or print the
contents of the log.

The event log is accessed via the HDSR function.

Logs Overall
Disturbance 60% list
SOE 50%
Shift 9%
Daily 80%
Weekly
Monthly balance 40%
Monthly Maintenance
Trend on printer
Alarms
Variable lists
Alarm Logs

List per 15/04/97 10:54:27 LIS07 DEGREE 1 ALARMS

15/04/97 10:54:55 LIS08 DEGREE 2 ALARMS
type of
log
Display
Degree 1 Alarms Â
log
Degree 1 alarms
log

SDC printer
ING printer
ÂÂ
Request
printout p X

Logs can be stored on external media. See paragraph 5.4.

3.7.6. Accessing Stored Logs on Optical Disk

Click on to display the different types of log stored on optical disk.

The stored log can then be accessed in the same way as described above for a current log
.

This function is reserved to the CCC station.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 14
3.7.7. System Functions

Click on the SYS icon in the top row to display the following icons :

Icons Functions Resultant action Subsequent operator

action
Date and time change Displays data entry window Enter the new date and
time

Assigning current access Displays data entry window Enter the parameters
level

Reset access level to Displays confirmation

zero window.
Only level 0 dialogues and
views are authorized

Change password Displays data entry window Enter password

Temporary stop for Displays a confirmation Restart after modification

EXP
changing display window of display(s)
Freezes CRT screen and all
dialogues except the
"Restart" function

Stop operator station Displays confirmation

STOP
(depending on window
configuration) Return to UNIX environment
(or to CCC)
Klaxon control Displays menu: Select option
Klaxon 0%
Klaxon 40%
Klaxon 80%
Klaxon 100%

Operations on an archive Displays a selection window Select, free an optical disk

disk or a floppy disk,
format a floppy disk
System information Displays a data window
? showing the Centralog
system software version

System function icons

These functions are described in chapter 5 of this document.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 15
4. Views

Views are generally organized as shown below:

GROUP DIRECTORY

GROUP VIEW

VARIABLE ZOOM VIEW

4.1. DIRECTORIES

The directories act as an entry point for each function by listing all the views or variables in
a group.

Group directory views are multi–page views. Each page contains a maximum 20 lines.
The directory layout and size are fixed.

Directories are generally organized on a single level. Mimic and variable directories are
organized on two levels.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 16
4.1.1. Single Level Directories


1 
2 
3

TITLE

9

CODE LABEL 
6

4
CODE LABEL
” ”

5 ” ”

8
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
CODE LABEL 
7

Fig. 4 : Directory view

The title zone includes a closure button 

1 , the symbol of the icon which has been

pinpointed to display the directory 

2 and the title name of the directory 
3 .

The data entry zone 9 enables the operator to enter the ID code of the view or variable
to be displayed.

Each line in the list shows the ID code 

4 and the label 
5 . A button next to the label is

pinpointed to give access to the corresponding operational or zoom view.

Pinpoint the scrollbar pointers 6 or  7 to move respectively to the previous or next

page in the list. Clicking in the scrollbar zone 8 , moves the scrollbar towards the

designated point and displays the corresponding page in the list.

These directories give access to the following functions :

— control block views
— y = f(t) views
— y = f(x) views
— bar graphs
— operative units
— operator groups
— trends
— trend logs
— operational schedules

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 17
 — disturbance logs
— SOE sequence of events logs
— synthesis alarm groups

Special cases

In the directory of operative units, clicking on the button opens a menu that gives the
choice of displaying all the variables of the unit, TS type variables or TM type variables.
Whenever an identification code is typed into the entry zone, a complete unit is displayed.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 18
4.1.2. Mimic Directories

The mimic directories are organized on two levels. The first level lists the mimic groups
while the second level lists the mimics belonging to a particular group. The structure of
each directory level conforms to the structure of a previously described directory.

Mimic group
directory Group
entry
CODE LABEL zone
CODE LABEL
Mimic group
” ”
directory
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
CODE label
Mimic directory
Mimic
entry
CODE LABEL zone
CODE LABEL
” ”
Mimic
” ”
directory
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
CODE LABEL

Fig. 5 : Mimic directory view

The first display shows the first level directory. Click on the button next to the label in the
first level directory to display the corresponding list in the lower part and to update the the
mimic group title.

Click on an element in the second level list in order to display the corresponding mimic.

These views can also be accessed by entering the appropriate ID code in the directory
entry zone.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 19
4.1.3. Directories of Variables

The directories of variables are organized on two levels. The first level gives the list
operative units and the second level gives the total list or list by type of variable that belong
to a unit. The structure of each directory level conforms to the structure of a previously
described directory.

VAR Directory of operative

units
Unit entry
zone
CODE LABEL
CODE LABEL
Directory of operative
” ”
units
” ”
” ” OU
” ” TS
” ” TM
” ” TC
CODE LABEL TVC
CONTROL BLOCKS
VAR Directory of variables VR
Variable entry
CODE LABEL zone
CODE LABEL
” ”
Directory of
” ”
variables
” ”
” ”
” ”
” ”
CODE LABEL

Fig. 6 : Directory of variables view

The first display shows the first level directory. Clicking on a button next to a label opens a
menu to select a type of variables. The corresponding list , complete or of the chosen type,
is then displayed in the lower part.

Click on an element of the lower list in order to display the corresponding zoom view.

It is also possible to select an entire unit by entering the identification code in the upper
level entry zone. A variable identification code may also be entered in the lower level
entry zone. This variable does not necessarily belong to the unit currently displayed.

Use the middle–hand mouse button to click on a variable in order to copy the
corresponding identification code so that it can be pasted into an entry zone, for example,
to add it to an existing group.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 20
4.2. OPERATIONAL VIEWS

Depending on their function, operational views may contain one or more pages.

4.2.1. Single–Page Functions

The functions concerned are as follows:

— mimics
— y = f(t) curves
— y = f(x) curves
— bar graphs
— trends
— operational schedules
— disturbance logs
— trend logs

1 2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
? CODE LABEL

Fig. 7 : Single–page view

The title zone contains the following information:


1 the symbol of the icon which was pinpointed to display the current
directory view


2 The button giving access to the corresponding help window


3 
4 the ID code and label of the view,


5 button to display the mimic alarm view (mimic only).


6 button to display the previous view in the group

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 21
 
7 button to access the current group directory


8 button to display the next view in the current group


9 button to open menu or window, giving access to views associated
to the current view.

4.2.2. Multi–Page Functions

The functions concerned are as follows:

— operative units
— operator groups
— historical record of sequence monitoring
— sequences of events (SOE) logs.

1 2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
? CODE LABEL N/M

12


11


13

Fig. 8 : Multi–page view

The title zone contains the following information:


1 the symbol of the icon which was pinpointed to display the current
directory view


2 The button giving access to the corresponding help window


3 
4 the ID code and label of the view,


5 the page number of the view displayed and the total number of pages
in the view.


6 button to display the mimic alarm view (operative unit only).


7 button to display the previous view in the current view group


8 button to access the current view group directory

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 22
 
9 button to display the next view in the current view group


10 button to open menu or window, giving access to views associated
to the current view.

Scrollbar 
11 , 
12 , 
13 : to move to the previous or next page in the list click on 
12 or


13 respectively. Clicking on the scrollbar itself 
11 moves the scrollbar towards the
designated point and displays the corresponding page in the list.

4.2.3. Accessing Associated Views

Views associated to the current view are accessed by clicking on the button.
Depending on the type of the current view, this action:
– opens a pull–down menu,
– opens a window .
The pull–down menu appears on the following views:
— zoom view; the menu shows four options :

mimic view,

view of the alarms associated to an operative unit,

view of the alarms associated to a mimic,

view of an operative unit.

— alarms view ; the menu shows four options, ie. view of the alarms by the four
degrees of urgency.
Clicking on an option displays the associated view.

The window appears on the following views :

— control block view
— mimic
— y = f (t) curve
— y = f (x) curve
— bar graphs
— trends
— operative unit
— operator group

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 23
 — operational schedules
— sequence monitoring (historical data)
— trend logs
— disturbance logs
— SOE sequence of events logs
The window contains, in the left hand column, a series of pictograms. Click on these
pictograms in order to display the associated views (maximum 12) . The types of views
possible correspond to the above list.

? TITLE Access

Close
ASSOCIATED VIEWS
button

SUP01

CEX41

INF01

CVG01

CVG08
Display on the current
screen
(left hand button) or Indicates the mimic views
Export to a neighboring hierarchy level
screen (middle button)
Fig. 9 : Display of the window that gives access to the associated views

The hierarchic level of the mimics represents :

an upper level view

a view on the same level

a lower level view

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 24
4.2.4. Accessing the Help Window Corresponding to the Function

The help window associated to the current function is displayed by clicking on the ?
button.

4.2.5. Help Windows

The help window is a view which disappears on designation of the closure button ,
displayed in the title of the window .

The help windows available are as follows:

Alarm

Mimic

y = f(t) curve

y = f(x) curve

Bargraph

Operational schedule

Sequence monitoring

Variables (colors, shapes etc.)

Control block view

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 25
4.3. CHARACTER SET

The characters used in the database by text attributes are as shown below :
— capitals [A – Z]
— digits [0 – 9]
— /.,:&*$%()<>=’+_–#
For the ”external key” ID code, the characters utilized are as follows:
— capitals [A – Z]
— digits [0 – 9]
— .,:&*$%()<>=’+_–#

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 26
4.4. VARIABLE DISPLAY FORMATS

4.4.1. Timetagging

Messages are timetagged according to one of the two formats shown below:

HH:MM:SS,

or HH:MM:SS mmm (mmm in milliseconds).

When the CENTRALOG system is started, the time is considered as invalid. The time
becomes valid:

on reception of the first synchronization pulse from the external clock,

or after three minutes if the system fails to receive a synchronization pulse,

or when the operator sets the time.

When the time is invalidated, the separators ”:” are replaced by the character ”?” (eg.
19?02?92 or 14?34?20).

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 27
4.4.2. Color Palette

Certain colors in the palette are dedicated to the representation of the variable state.
These colors are defined as standard but can be re–configured for each project. In the
subsequent pages of this document, variable state colors will be referred to not by their
values (red, green etc.) but by their utilization:

color of sequence state : UNTRIGGERED,

color of sequence state : IN PROGRESS,

color of sequence state : GIVEN UP,

color of unacknowledged alarm (multi-entity),

color of acknowledged alarm (multi-entity),

color of sequence state : FAULT,

color of sequence state : HELD,

color of sequence state : spare,

color of sequence state : unknown.

color of control window (7 colors),

color of normal state,

color of degree of urgency 1 (highest priority).

color of degree of urgency 2,

color of degree of urgency 3,

color of degree of urgency 4 (lowest priority).

color of doubtful state,

color of inhibited state,

color of off–monitoring state,

color of connection failure,

color of variable 1 (curves),

color of variable 2 (curves),

color of variable 3 (curves),

color of variable 4 (curves),

color of variable 5 (curves),

color of variable 6 (curves),

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 28
4.4.3. Structure of Messages

For the following functions:

y = f(t) curves,

y = f(x) curves

operator groups,

operative units.

Variables are represented in accordance with a general format and with the display
conventions described below. Formats which are exceptions to these general rules are
indicated in the description of the functions concerned.

4.4.3.1. Logical Variables

State label
associated
ID code Label Status Invalidity Quality
to the value

01LPJ03020 AUX TRANSFO CONTACT OPEN MONI INVA D

Static elements :

ID code of the variable (this field can be used for copy/paste purpose).

Label of the variable.

Static elements are displayed in ”normal state” color.

Dynamic elements :

Status of the variable : MONI (on–monitoring), NMON (off–monitoring), INHI

(inhibited), REPL (replaced).

State label associated to the value (0 or 1) of the variable.

This label is replaced par : ”******” when the variable is inhibited.

Invalidity : indication ”INVA” when the variable is invalid .

Quality of the value (”D” if doubtful) shown at end of line.

The colors used to display the dynamic elements depend on the situation of the variable
and are shown in the table overleaf.

In the event of loss of the link between the operator station and the CIS, this color goes to
”connection failure”.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 29
 Situation of the variable Information displayed

Status Level Validity Value Status Invalidity Quality Color

alarm yes state MONI color of degree

On message of urgency
monitoring
normal yes state MONI normal state
message

- no state MONI INVA D doubtful state

message

alarm yes state NMON off monitoring

Off message
monitoring
normal yes state NMON off monitoring
message

- no state NMON INVA D doubtful state

message

Inhibited - - ****** INHI inhibition

Replaced - - state REPL D doubtful state

message

Presentation of logical variables

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 30
4.4.3.2. Analog Variables

Value of
Lower limit/
ID code Label Value Unit Status threshold
upper limit State
violated

01GEVJT001 GENERAT. ACTIVE POWER 391.92 MW MONI 0.00/450.00 HIGH 390

Static elements:

ID code of the variable (this field can be used for copy/paste purpose).

label of the variable.

Unit of measurement

Lower and upper limits

Static elements are displayed in ”normal state” color.

Dynamic elements:

Status of the variable : MONI (on monitoring), NMON (off monitoring), INHI
(inhibited), REPL (replaced).

Value of the variable according to one of the two formats below:

+12345.78 (F9.2 fixed format) or 1.500E+07 (scientific format)

The value is replaced by:

”>>>>” if upper limit is violated,

”<<<<” if lower limit is violated,
”******” if variable is inhibited,
”######” if display field is exceeded.

Measurement state: state of the measurement relative to its limits and

thresholds. This state is replaced by ”INVA” if the variable is invalid.

Value of threshold or limit violated by the measurement.

Quality of the value (”D” if doubtful) at end of line.

The colors used to display the dynamic elements depend on the situation of the variable
and are shown in the table overleaf.

In the event of loss of the link between the operator station and the CIS, this color goes to
”connection failure”.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 31
 Situation of the variable Information displayed

Status Level Validity Value Status State Quality Value threshold Color
low yes <<<< MONI LIML low limit value color of degree of
limit urgency
lolo yes value MONI LOLO low low threshold color of degree of
threshĆ value urgency
old
On low yes value MONI LOW low threshold value color of degree of
urgency
monitoring normal yes value MONI - - normal state

high yes value MONI HIGH high threshold color of degree of

value urgency
hihi yes value MONI HIHI high high threshold color of degree of
threshĆ value urgency
old
high yes >>>> MONI LIMH high limit value color of degree of
limit urgency
normal no value MONI INVA D - doubtful state
low yes <<<< NMON LIML low limit value color of degree of
limit urgency
lolo yes value NMON - - off monitoring
threshĆ
old

Off low yes value NMON - - off monitoring

monitoring normal yes value NMON - - off monitoring

high yes value NMON - - off monitoring

hihi yes value NMON - - off monitoring
threshĆ
old
high yes >>>> NMON LIMH high limit value color of degree of
limit urgency
normal no value NMON INVA D - doubtful state
- yes ****** INHI - - inhibition
Inhibited - no ****** INHI - - inhibition
- yes replaced REPL - D - doubtful state
value
Replaced - no replaced REPL - D - doubtful state
value

Presentation of analog variables

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 32
4.5. NUMERICAL VALUE ENTRY FORMAT

Numerical values are entered in the following cases:

Variable replacement,

Entry of a setpoint instruction (TVC),

Entry of a TMO value,

Entry of variable thresholds,

Entry of scales on curve views and bar graph views,

Entry of maintenance counters.

These values are entered in accordance with either ”F9.2”fixed or ”E9.2” scientific
formats

Examples : +12345.12 (F9.2 fixed format)

123456.12 (F9.2 fixed format)
–1.12E+07 (E9.2 scientific format )
1.123E+07 (E9.2 scientific format)

In other dialogues, numerical values are entered as integers.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 33
5. Utility Functions

5.1. RECALLING PREVIOUS VIEWS

5.1.1. Recalling the Last View

Clicking on the icon recalls the previous view. Clicking on it once again brings back

the initial view.

5.1.2. Recalling the Latest Views Displayed

Clicking on the icon triggers the display of a window listing the last 10 views displayed.

Selecting a view from the list displays this view on the current screen.

Each view is associated its own list of the last 10 views displayed. Each line includes the
ID code, the label and a button corresponding to the type of view.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 34
5.2. RAPID ACCESS TO OPERATOR VIEWS

Special access may be had for certain views either by direct selection on a band on the
lower row of icons, or by using the keyboard function keys.

Clicking on the upper part of the icon triggers the display of a menu:

Direct band
Directory
Keys

The diagram below sums up the selection process from this menu.

Directory of direct bands Function keys

shift
F1 ID Code F1 ID Code

F12 F12

14 ID Code FFT02 ID Code

Error message Error message

Direct band
Directory
Keys

DB SYS
XYZ00 XYW00 XYW0 RST0 FTT0 FTT0
9 3 10 4 11 05 1201 13 01 14 02 15 16

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 35
5.2.1. Direct Band

Select ”direct band” on the menu in order to display in the lower row a band of 8 icons that
have the view symbol (mimic...), the identification code of the view and the icon number.
Selecting the icon triggers direct display of the corresponding view. The arrows on the left
hand side of the band are used to scroll new bands. These ten bands can manage up to
80 views.

The assignment of the views to the direct bands can be modified using the option
”Directory” in the menu described above.

5.2.2. Directory

Selecting ”Directory” on the menu displays the list of views that appear in the direct bands.
This list includes, for each view, the icon of the function, the identification code and the
label. Additionally, the assignment of an icon can be modified by selecting the button
bearing the icon number, and by entering the new assignment in the lower part.

5.2.3. Function Keys

Selecting ”Keys” on the menu opens a window that lists the 24 views assigned to the
keyboard function keys. To modify the assignment of a function key, click on the relevant
button (F1 to F12 or shift F1 to shift F12) to select the required key in the list.

The corresponding keyboard key is used either by pressing the function key directly, or by
depressing shift while pressing the function key.

shift
Select F1 ID code F1 ID code
to
modify

F12 F12
Number Entry of a
of the key ID Code view ID
to be con- code
figured
Error message

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 36
5.3. SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

5.3.1. Changing System Date and Time

Selecting the icon displays the window below. Once the hour, minute and date

(year, month, day) have been entered, followed by a validation , the system is updated at
the top of the next minute.

Hour
Minute
Year
Month
Day

Error messages

5.3.2. Protection of Dialogues

5.3.2.1. Principles

Dialogues can be secured by means of a protection level. The protection level is defined
in the database during customization of the system. A protection level can be assigned:
— to a type of dialogue, eg. alarm acknowledgement, inhibition of variables etc.
— to a group (operator group, operative unit etc.) or to a mimic.
A level assigned to a dialogue or to a group in the database may have a value from 0 to 5.
Level 0 corresponds to a non–protected dialogue or view. Level 5 is the most restrictive
level, affording maximum protection. Only the operators possessing the password
associated to level 5 can gain access to level 5 views and dialogues.

Each protection level from 1 to 5 corresponds to a specific password defined in the

database.

The usual authorization level is defined at station level by an assign normal level
command which requires the password associated to this level. When this command is
executed, access to dialogues and views on this level and on lower levels is authorized.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 37
 Another command is used to revert to level 0. This command requires no password.
When this command has been executed, access to level 0 dialogues and views only is
authorized.

Level modification and revert to 0 dialogues are themselves assigned to level 0. The
default level during customization of the database is level 0.

At startup, the normal level assigned to an operator station is 0.

level 5 maximum level of protection

level 4

level 3

level 2 normal level : the operator has access to

level 2, 1 and 0 dialogues and views
level 1

level 0 non-protected level

5.3.2.2. Assign Normal Level (login)

The assign normal level function is accessed by clicking on the icon. This opens

the window shown below. The operator then selects the desired level, enters the
appropriate password (screen echo is off) and clicks on the validation button.

This command authorizes access to the dialogues and views assigned to the level
selected and to all lower levels.

level hierarchy
 1  2  3

 4  5
Password :

Error messages

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 38
5.3.2.3. Revert to Level 0 (logout)

The normal level is reverted to level 0 by clicking on the icon. This opens a confirm

window. After confirmation of the command, only level 0 dialogues and views can be
accessed.

Error messages

5.3.2.4. Changing the Password

The password modification function is accessed by clicking on the icon. This

opens the window shown below. The operator then selects the desired level, enters the
current password (screen echo is off) , the new password (screen echo is off) and clicks
on the validation button.

level hierarchy
 1  2  3

 4  5

Current password :

New password :

Error messages

Passwords are common to all the operator stations.

The characters which may be used in passwords are as follows:

— capitals [A – Z]
— digits [0 – 9]

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 39
5.3.3. Stop before Display Change

1. Clicking on the EXP icon must be done before changing to a new display version from

the CCC. It causes a confirmation window to be displayed. Validation freezes the

screens of the station and dialogues. A message to this effect is displayed on screen.

2. The operator must wait for the end of the CCC procedure (see CCC user’s manual).

3. Clicking on the EXP icon restarts the system in normal operating mode with the new

display version. The first view to appear on screen is the ”startup view”(as specified during
configuration) which is displayed on startup of the operator station.

5.3.4. Stopping the Operator Station

Clicking on the STOP icon causes a confirm window to open. Validation stops all the

applications on the operator station. The CCC screen is displayed on the station CRT
assigned the CCC function; the applications assigned to the other station screens revert
to UNIX.

This function is only available on some configurations. In other cases, stopping can be
done from the CCC.

5.3.5. Managing the Klaxon

Clicking on the icon displays a menu showing four options setting the audio level of

the klaxon: Klaxon 0%

Klaxon 40%
Klaxon 80%
Klaxon 100%

5.3.6. Oprations on an Archive Disk

See section 5.4.1.

5.3.7. System Information

Clicking on the ? icon opens a window containing the version number of the

CENTRALOG system software.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 40
5.4. STORING LOGS

The rate of occupancy of certain types of log on disk can be monitored by configuring the
database. The occupancy rate of these logs is shown in the access list by means of a
bargraph and a percentage. A TSS tells the operator when the occupancy rate threshold
is exceeded .

From the CCC station, current logs can be saved on external media. This storage can be
global on a magneto–optical disk or individual on a floppy disk.

5.4.1. Select and Format

Clicking on the icon in the system row to select, free (or eject) an optical or floppy

disk and format a floppy disk:

OPTICAL DISK FLOPPY

SELECT
FREE
FORMAT

The SELECT command reserves the disk for the current application. The FREE
command ejects the optical or floppy disk if the drive concerned is not currently used by
another application.

Remark: the magneto–optical disk can be formatted directly from the application access
menu:
Root menu
Application  Application
Refresh EXP 

Exit  CCC
HDSR 

WIN
CLOGSQL
PHOTO
FORMAT

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 41
5.4.2. Global Storage on Magneto–optical Disk

Click on button in the upper section of the directory to open the menu below:

Total storage
Incremental storage
Erase all logs

The first option transfers all the logs present in the system. The second option is used to
transfer logs which have not been saved (on neither the current medium nor any other).
The operator can clear the optical disk before the transfer.

5.4.3. Individual Storage on Floppy Disk

The individual store request on a floppy disk (DOS format) is accessed from the
sub–directory view of the logs in question:
Alarm logs
15/04/98 10:54:27 LIS07 DEGREE 1 ALARMS
15/04/98 10:54:55 LIS08 DEGREE 2 ALARMS

Individual storage on floppy disk enables the HTML format logs to be read by an
INTERNET browser (Netscape, Explorer etc.) on a PC compatible device.

.
P–TP09–A42042–V4 E B REV B
DTS Presentation of the EXP MMI Sheet 42
 DTS
Supervision Functions

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
This document is the exclusive property of ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42043-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 46 51
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10.12.98 Translation of the French document rev. B GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2. MIMICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2. HIERARCHICAL ORGANIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3. STANDARDIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4. DESCRIPTION OF MIMIC VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3. Y = F(T) CURVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2. DESCRIPTION OF Y=F(T) CURVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2.1. Static Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.2.2. Dynamic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.2.3. Sensitive Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2.4. Modes of Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.3. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.3.1. Assigning a Variable to a Curves Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.3.2. Deleting a Variable from a Curves Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.3.3. Accessing a Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.3.4. Mask/Unmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.3.5. Modifying the Left-Hand Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.3.6. Selecting the Right-Hand Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.3.7. Modifying the Data Display Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.3.8. Horizontal Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.3.9. Additional Information on Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.3.10. Cross Hairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.3.11. View Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

4. Y = F(X) CURVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.2.1. Static elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.2.2. Dynamic elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2.3. Sensitive zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 1-ii
 4.2.4. Mode of representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.3. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3.1. Modifying the Axis Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3.2. Deleting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3.3. Number of Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.4. Selecting the Physical Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.5. Masking/unmasking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.6. Calling the Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.7. Cross Hairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.8. View chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

5. BARGRAPHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.2.1. Static elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.2.2. Dynamic elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.2.3. Sensitive zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.2.4. Modes of representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.3. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.3.1. Assignment of a variable to a bargraph group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.3.2. Deletion of a variable within a bargraph group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.3.3. Call for zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.3.4. Modification of the scale on the bargraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.3.5. Additional information concerning the bargraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.3.6. View chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

6. TRENDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.2.1. Static elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.2.2. Dynamic elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.2.3. Sensitive zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.3. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.3.1. Assigning a variable to a trend group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.3.2. Deletion of a variable from a trend group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.3.3. Modifying the sampling period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.3.4. Calling a zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.3.5. View chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

7. OPERATOR GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
7.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
7.2. DESCRIPTION OF VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
7.2.1. Static Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
7.2.2. Dynamic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 1-iii
 7.2.3. Sensitive Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
7.3. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.3.1. Assigning a Variable to an Operator Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.3.2. Deleting a Variable from an Operator Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.3.3. Accessing a Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.3.4. View Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

8. OPERATIVE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8.2. DESCRIPTION OF VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
8.2.1. Operative Unit View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
8.3. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8.3.1. Inhibiting an Operative Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8.3.2. Setting an operative Unit On-Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8.3.3. Accessing the Associated Alarms View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8.3.4. Accessing the Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8.3.5. Changing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8.3.6. View Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

9. VARIABLE QUERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
9.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
9.2. DESCRIPTION OF VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
9.2.1. Filtered Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
9.2.2. Other Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
9.2.3. Sensitive zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.3. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.3.1. Accessing the Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.3.2. Accessing the OU View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.3.3. Recording the List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9.3.4. Filtered List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 1-iv
 List of figures

Fig. 1 : Hierarchical organization of mimics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Fig. 2 : Layout of a mimic view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fig. 3 : Animation variable window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Fig. 4 : Mini-curve window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Fig. 5 : Mimic view chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fig. 6 : y = f(t) curves view layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fig. 7 : Scale modification window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fig. 8 : Additional information relative to curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Fig. 9 : Curves view chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fig. 10 : Layout of a y = f(x) curve view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fig. 11 : Window for modifying the scale of the axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fig. 12 : Layout of a bargraph view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fig. 13 : Scale modification window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 14 : Example of additional information on a bargraph . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fig. 15 : Layout of a Trend View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fig. 16 : Layout of an operator group view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fig. 17 : Structure of an operative unit view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 18 : Operative unit view chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 19 : Layout of a list on screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 1-v
1. Introduction

This document details the plant supervision and monitoring functions available on the
operator station, as listed below:

mimics,

y = f(t) curves,

y = f(x) curves,

bargraphs,

trends,

operator groups,

operative units,

variable queries.

The volume is organized as follows:

Each chapter is devoted to one specific function. Each function is presented in the
following manner :
— an introduction to the principal characteristics of the function,
— a detailed description of the various views associated to the function,
— a presentation of the different ways of using the function, together with the
principal messages which may be displayed.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 2
2. Mimics

2.1. INTRODUCTION

The MIMICS function enables the operator to display and monitor the state of actuators
and various other process parameters on dynamic diagrams of fluid and electrical
systems.

2.2. HIERARCHICAL ORGANIZATION

A hierarchical mimic organization is defined by the user during customization. This

structure permits a high degree of flexibility, providing, in particular, views of the plant
process ranging from the general level down to the most detailed level.

N1
GENERAL
LEVEL

DETAILED
N2 N3 N4 LEVEL

Fig. 1 : Hierarchical organization of mimics

The general level gives an overview of the plant and of the principal elements which
compose it, keeping the operator informed of the state of the unit and of the values of its
main parameters.

Further views provide displays of coherent sets of basic functions representing functional
groups.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 3
 The operator can move easily from view to view in accordance with the mimic hierarchy
defined during customization. Zones representing associated views give the operator
rapid access to all of the data relative to a mimic view.

2.3. STANDARDIZATION

The system of representation has been standardized to simplify the reading of views,
in particular as regards colors and shapes.

For example, different colors are used to represent different fluids (air, water,
combustible, chemical products, etc.), while symbols representing actuators (valves,
ventilators, pumps, etc.) have a standardized shape and color depending on their state (in
service, inhibited, etc.).

Displays also are animated to help the operator distinguish these different states (flashing
light, symbol outline color, frame, etc.).

The symbols used in the mimics are collected in a library.

The units of measurement used are International System units.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 4
2.4. DESCRIPTION OF MIMIC VIEWS

Mimic views are defined during customization and adapted to the specific characteristics
of the process. Mimics can be modified on–line by the operator.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
? TITLE

Fig. 2 : Layout of a mimic view

Mimic views are single page views.

Mimic views contain both static (fixed frame) elements and dynamic elements.

Static elements

The static elements comprise a set of inanimate elements which provide a background for
the dynamic elements.

Dynamic elements

Dynamic elements which complete the fixed frame. The shapes, colors or contents of
dynamic elements change in accordance with the changes occurring to internal or
external variables, as follows:

logical variable state changes (eg. section switch open/closed),

the results of internal multi–state variable calculations (eg. for a valve

open/closed/intermediate etc.),

analog variable value changes (bargraphs).

Sensitive Zones

Sensitive zones are graphic elements incorporated into the views and which the operator
can pin–point to execute an action. They may be:

sensitive zones on the mimic itself giving access to other mimics on the same
circuit or control loop views.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 5

buttons used to transmit commands either directly to the process or via control
windows (see STD, Process Control),

zones giving access to variables animating dynamic elements.

Zones accessing animation variables

These zones can be used to provide the operator with information on the variables which
act on an animation. With the cursor positioned on an animated element, depress the
CONTROL key and press the left–hand mouse button to open a window listing the
variables in question.

ID code
ID code

ID code

Fig. 3 : Animation variable window

The ID code of the TS, TM and VR variables can be used with the copy/paste function.

Click on the variable zoom view button (for TS, TM, TC, TVC and VR variables) to
display the zoom view on the current screen (left–hand mouse button) or to copy the view
to an adjacent screen (middle mouse button).

The button associated with TM analog variables gives access to a window

containing a historical mini–curve view. This window can be moved.

ID code
300

MW 0
Fig. 4 : Mini–curve window

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 6
2.5. UTILIZATION

Mimic view chaining

By chaining views on a mimic, all the views that are functionally associated to the mimic
can be accessed.

Chained views are accessed by pinpointing the dedicated sensitive zones on the mimic.

The diagram below describes the different chains permitted.

Mimic directory


1 
2


3
Previous or next 
5
Current mimic Associated views
mimic view


4

6 
7

Access to other mimic

Mimic alarms view views or to control loop
views by clicking in the
current view

Fig. 5 : Mimic view chaining


1 : pinpoint mimic reference in the mimic group directory


2 : pinpoint pictogram in the mimic title; the designated group associated to the
mimic is displayed in the directory.


3 : pinpoint pictogram in the mimic title


4 : pinpoint pictogram in the mimic title


5 : pinpoint pictogram in the mimic title to display the associated views window,
then pinpoint the relevant sensitive zone within the window.


6 : pinpoint pictogram in the mimic title to display the mimic alarms view.


7 : pinpoint sensitive zones in the current mimic

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 7
3. y = f(t) Curves

3.1. INTRODUCTION

The y=f(t) CURVES function is used to provide a graphic illustration of changes occurring
over time in the value and state of analog process variables.

Analog variables to be represented in the form of curves are organized into functional
groups comprising a maximum of 6 variables, constituted during customization of the
application and modifiable on line by the operator.

The list of these groups is accessible from the ”y=f(t) Curves” directory view.

The directory view is accessed by a dialogue associated to the icon.

Each curves view represents a group. A curves view is accessed directly by designation
of a group in the directory view or by designation of a pictogram of another functionally
linked view.

New values are displayed in accordance with the updating rate specific to the curves
group. This period is configured during customization of the application, and cannot be
modified by the operator.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 8
3.2. DESCRIPTION OF Y=F(T) CURVES

Curves views are single–page views divided into a curve trace area and an area
containing lines of static and dynamic data concerning the variables represented.

This dual presentation provides the operator with an initial overview of the general
situation in the graphic area, then enables detailed information to be identified in the data
lines.

Each view represents a maximum of 6 variables over an identical time period.

Permissible time periods and their corresponding updating rates are shown in the table
below.

Each complete curve contains 7200 values.

The part of each curve that is displayed at any one time contains 720 values.

UPDATING RATE PERIODS REPRESENTED

1s 12 mn 24 mn 1H 2H

5s 1H 2H 5H 10 H

10 s 2H 4H 10 H 20 H

30 s 6H 12 H 30 H 60 H

1 mn 12 H 24 H 60 H 5D

2 mn 1D 2D 5D 10 D

5 mn 2,5 D 5D 12,5 D 25 D

10 mn 5D 10 D 25 D 50 D

30 mn 15 D 30 D 75 D 150 D

1H 30 D 60 D 150 D 300 D

Thus on the original display, a group with a 5 second updating rate will be shown with the
values of the last 60 minutes. The operator can subsequently modify this period to 2, 5 or
10 hours.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 9
 ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
? TITLE
Physical
value scale
Percentage
scale
Relative scale
modification
Display period
button
button

Rate Assign zone

Menu button
Physical scale
selection Mask/unmask
button button

Color tag
Fig. 6 : y = f(t) curves view layout

Details of the elements displayed in the variable data lines are provided in the volume
”Presentation of the EXP MMI”.

3.2.1. Static Elements

Frame delineating the curve trace area.

Symbol indicating the updating rate.

Static data lines relative to each of the variables.

3.2.2. Dynamic Elements

Right hand vertical axis:

Represents the permitted physical range of one of the six variables (eg. 20–80¨C).

The variable concerned is selected by pinpointing a button to the left of the

description of the variable. The vertical axis is displayed in the same color as this
button

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 10

Left hand vertical axis:

This is graded in percentages and can be modified by the operator to obtain an

enlargement for all six variables (eg. 60%–80%).

Horizontal axis:

Graded in absolute days, hours and minutes over the historical period under
consideration. The gradation of the horizontal axis is updated on each leftward
shift of the curves.

The length of the period displayed can be multiplied by 2, 5 or 10 on operator

request. The time period itself can be shifted by means of the cursor within a total
range equal to 7200 times the sampling rate.

Curve traces :

The line traced by a curve depends on the value and the state of the associated
variable and is drawn from left to right. Curves are shifted to the left every 80
values to allow new points to be displayed.

Dynamic data: lines of information relative to each of the variables. This

information is updated on screen.

Dynamic data is displayed in different colors depending on the state of the

variable, and on the degree of urgency of the associated alarm (where a threshold
has been violated).

3.2.3. Sensitive Zones

Assign zone: assigns variables to a group.

Curve trace area: displays values at any given moment in a dynamic window.

Relative scale modification button (by percentage), .

Actual scale selection button .

Mask/unmask button .

Display period modification button .

Scroll bar to shift curves display in time. The width of the rectangle within the bar
represents the proportion of data displayed in relation to the data available.

Menu button .

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 11
3.2.4. Modes of Representation

Curves are represented in different ways depending on the characteristics of the

variables associated to them.

Both the trace itself and the presentation of the dynamic data vary according to the
variable status, validity and measurement state in relation to thresholds and limits.

The different types of trace are detailed in the table below.

Curves are represented in the color which corresponds to the order in which they were
assigned to the current group (according to the status of the variable).

Colors are selected from a customizable palette described in the volume ”Presentation of
the EXP MMI”. Colors are referred to here as color ”variable 1” thru ”variable 6”.

Variable status Type of trace Color

On/off monitoring Normal Color of variable i
Inhibition Normal Color = inhibition
Replacement Triple width shows Color of variable i
replacement value
Invalid Triple width shows last Color of variable i
value acquired
Out of upper limit Horizontal line at 100 % Color of variable i
Out of lower limit Horizontal line at 0 % Color of variable i

3.3. UTILIZATION

3.3.1. Assigning a Variable to a Curves Group

A new variable can be assigned to the group currently displayed by using the assign zone
.

When a variable is assigned to a group, the historic values of the variable are not
displayed.

The screen is updated and the curve starts from the time the variable is assigned.

A variable can be assigned to several different curve groups, but may not be assigned
more than once to any single group.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 12
 Error messages

CAUSE MESSAGE

Variable ID code error  The variable name XXXX is unknown

Variable type error  Variable XXXX is not a TM
Variable entered already belongs to group  XXXX is already assigned to the group
Assignment of a variable to a full group  The group is full

XXXX = ID code of the variable

3.3.2. Deleting a Variable from a Curves Group

A variable can be deleted from a group by selecting the disassign option in the pull–down
menu associated to the variable in question.
Zoom
Disassign

When a variable is deleted from a group, the screen is refreshed and the curve disappears
at the moment of deletion. If the variable deleted is not the last in the group, the remaining
data lines move up to replace it.

3.3.3. Accessing a Zoom View

A zoom view of a particular variable associated to a curve can be accessed from the
curves view to which it belongs by selecting the zoom option in the pull–down menu
associated to the variable in question. Zoom
Disassign

3.3.4. Mask/Unmask

A curve trace can be masked temporarily by pinpointing the mask/unmask button

associated to the curve in question. This can be particularly useful where curves overlap.
Once pressed, the button changes to : .

This operation can be performed on several curves simultaneously.

The curve is unmasked by pinpointing the button again.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 13
3.3.5. Modifying the Left–Hand Axis

The minimum and maximum values of the left–hand axis can be modified by pinpointing
the button. This opens the window shown below containing a minimum value entry
field, a maximum value entry field, a validation button and a cancel button.

Minimum %
Maximum %

Error messages

Fig. 7 : Scale modification window

The curves in the group view are re–displayed in accordance with the new values. Both
vertical axes are updated.

Error messages

CAUSE MESSAGE

Minimum value input error  The minimum value must be between 0 and 100
Maximum value input error  The maximum value must be between 0 and 100
Min/max value input error  The minimum value is greater than the maximum valĆ
ue

3.3.6. Selecting the Right–Hand Axis

By pinpointing the button associated to one of the variables the operator can display a
scale showing the physical magnitude and units of value of the variable. This right hand
scale is displayed in the color used for the variable selected.

3.3.7. Modifying the Data Display Period

By clicking on the button the operator opens a menu offering a choice of 4 values
corresponding to the proportion of data to be displayed relative to the total available data.
Scale 1/10
Scale 1/5
Scale 1/2
Scale 1/1

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 14
3.3.8. Horizontal Shift

The data display on the CRT screen can be shifted forward or backward in time by clicking
within the scrollbar located above the curve trace area.

The new time period displayed corresponds to the position of the point designated
relative to the total length of the scrollbar.

Clicking on or causes a time shift respectively forward or backward equal to the

period currently displayed.

On initial access by default the data display period is equal to one tenth of the total
available data.

3.3.9. Additional Information on Curves

Clicking on any point in the curve tracing area opens a window which indicates the time
corresponding to the designated point and which shows the ID code and value of each
variable represented at that time.

This window is superimposed over the variable ID codes in the data lines.

17/01/97 09 : 33 : 30

 01KITTMI050 1.09

 01KITTMI060 –0,47

 01KITTMI019 –1,00

 01FITTYM908 61,08

 01KITTYN901 16,00

 01KITTMI021 10570,00

Fig. 8 : Additional information relative to curves

3.3.10. Cross Hairs

Clicking on any point in the curve tracing area with the middle mouse button displays a
cross formed of a vertical line and a horizontal line which intersect at the designated point.
To move the cross hairs on the screen the operator keeps the button depressed while
sliding the mouse.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 15
3.3.11. View Chaining

The diagram below shows the different chained view accessible from a curves view.

Group directory


1 
2


3 
5

Previous or next
view in directory View Associated views


4


6

Zoom view

Fig. 9 : Curves view chaining


1 : Click on the view reference in the group directory


2 : Click on the pictogram in the title of the view


3 : Click on the pictogram in the title of the view


4 : Click on the pictogram in the title of the view


5 : Click on the pictogram in the title of the view to display the associated views
window, then click on the relevant sensitive zone in the window.


6 : Click on the variable reference menu in the current view

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 16
4. y = f(x) Curves

4.1. INTRODUCTION

y=f(x) curves are used to visualize graphically the changes over time of an analog
process variable as a function of another analog variable.

Each y = f(x) view displays a functional group created during Project customization. This
group contains up to three pairs of variables and cannot be modified by the operator.

The list of these groups is accessible from the ”y=f(x)” directory view. Click on the
icon to gain access to the directory view.

Curve views are accessed directly by selecting a group from the directory view or by
selecting the pictogram of another functionally linked view.

Each new pair (x,y) is displayed according to a sampling period linked to the y = f(x) group
and configured during application customization; this period cannot be modified by the
operator. The possible sampling period of variable pairs are 5s, 30s, 2 mn.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 17
4.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE VIEWS

The y = f(x) curve views fit on a single page. They comprise a zone of plotted points, static
curves that define the operating zones and a zone containing lines of static and dynamic
data concerning the variables represented. The scale of the X and Y axis can be modified
by the operator.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Sampling period ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ TITLE

Number Samples
of points 
 
 
Erase button

Button for changing the

y scale
Button for changing the
x scale Buttons for
calling the
zoom view

Physical scale
selection button Mask/unmask
button

Shape symbol

Fig. 10 : Layout of a y = f(x) curve view

The representation of information lines concerning variables is given in the document

”Presentation of the EXP MMI”.

4.2.1. Static elements

Frame representing the limits of the curve path.

Static reference chart defined during configuration and made up of between 1 and
10 curves. Their color is selected among the values ’variable 1” to ”variable 6” and
white. Each curve is made up of straight line segments defined by 20 x/y pairs.

Static data of the information lines concerning each variable.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 18
4.2.2. Dynamic elements

High horizontal axis and right vertical axis: representing the range of change in
variable X (ex. 20–80

Left vertical axis and low horizontal axis : graduated in percentages.

Point paths : the display of a point varies according to the value and the status of
the associated variables. The first display shows up to 50 stored points. The
three pairs can be distinguished by the use of different symbols for the points:
 

Dynamic data of the information lines concerning each variable. These data are
the updated information, with the view displayed.

They are indicated in a given color depending on the state of the variable and the
degree of urgency of the associated alarm if a threshold is overshot.

4.2.3. Sensitive zones

Button for changing the X scale .

Button for changing the Y scale .

Button for erasing the path points .

Samples

Data input zone for number of samples displayed .

Physical scale selection button .

Point path mask/unmask button *** .

Zoom view button .

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 19
4.2.4. Mode of representation

The representation of the points varies in accordance with the status of variables x and y;
the colors of the path points are summed up in the following table:

Status of
Y On/Off Inhibited Replaced/
Status monitoring Invalid
of X

On/Off Normal Inhibition Doubtful sta-

monitoring status color color tus color

Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition

Inhibited
color color color

Replaced/ Doubtful sta- Inhibition Doubtful sta-

Invalid tus color color tus color

The current operating point is distinguished by the ”variable 1”, ”variable 2”, ”variable 3”
color according to the pair 1, 2 or 3.
Points corresponding to out–of–limit values are not plotted.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 20
4.3. UTILIZATION

4.3.1. Modifying the Axis Scale

Minimum %
Maximum %

Error messages

Fig. 11 : Window for modifying the scale of the axes

The extreme values of the axis scales, expressed as percentages, may be modified, so as
to obtain a zoom on a part of the point zone (x–y). The new values must be chosen from
among the limit values of 0 and 100%.

This modification is carried out by selecting the or button, in order to change the
scale. Selecting the button triggers the opening of a window that contains an entry zone
for the minimal value, an entry zone for the maximum value, a button for taking into
account and a cancellation button.

Error messages

CAUSE
Minimum value input error
Maximum value input error
Min/max value input error
MESSAGE
 The minimum value must be between 0 and 100
 The maximum value must be between 0 and 100
 The minimum value is greater than the maximum valĆ
ue

4.3.2. Deleting Points

Clicking on the button deletes the points displayed on screen together with the fifty
points saved in memory.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 21
4.3.3. Number of Samples

The number of samples displayed per pair can be modified by entering a new value in the
”Samples” zone. This number, common to all three pairs, may not exceed 50,
corresponding to the number of samples saved in memory.

4.3.4. Selecting the Physical Scale

Clicking on the button associated to one of the pairs causes the right hand vertical
axis and horizontal top axis to be displayed, together with the physical magnitude and unit
of the variables in question. These axes are displayed in the color of the relevant variable.

4.3.5. Masking/unmasking

Clicking on the *** button associated to one of the pairs causes the point path of one of

the corresponding x, y pair to disappear. The button in question becomes : .

This operation can be performed on more than one of the pairs in the current view.
Clicking on the button again will cause the path to reappear.

4.3.6. Calling the Zoom View

Access to the zoom view of each of the variables of the group is done by clicking on the
view call button linked to the variable.

4.3.7. Cross Hairs

Clicking on any point in the tracing area with the middle mouse button displays a cross
formed of a vertical line and a horizontal line which intersect at the designated point. To
move the cross hairs on the screen the operator keeps the button depressed while sliding
the mouse.

4.3.8. View chaining

The principle of the various sequences possible from y = f(x) curve views is the same as
that for y = f(t) curve views. See the corresponding paragraph.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 22
5. Bargraphs

5.1. INTRODUCTION

The BARGRAPH function is used to display, in the form of dynamic vertical bars, the
changes in the value of process analog variables.

The analog variables represented in the form of bargraphs are organized into functional
groups created during application customization; they can be modified on line by the
operator.

The list of these groups is accessible from the ”bargraphs” directory view

The directory view access is granted by selecting the icon.

Each bargraph view represents a group. Access to a bargraph view is granted directly by
selecting a line in the directory or by selecting a pictogram of another view that is
functionally linked.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 23
5.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE VIEWS

The bargraph views are made up of a zone that represents the level bars as well as static
and dynamic data lines on the variables that are represented.

Bargraph views contain up to 20 bargraphs. They are single–page views.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ TITLE
100

Scale
button
change
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ 80

Additional
information
window 60

40

20

0
20

Assignment Scale
zone Identifier
number

5 01GEVST001 49.99 HZ 45.00 / 55.00

Identifier Identification Variable Physical Low. Upper Button to

number code measure- unit imit limit open menu
ment value
Fig. 12 : Layout of a bargraph view

5.2.1. Static elements

Bar identifier number: each bar is numbered so that the corresponding

information in the data lines located under the bars can be identified.

Identification code of each variable on each line of data.

Vertical scale of percentages that represent the range of change.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 24

Physical unit on each line of data.

Lower and upper limits of the value associated with the bargraph on each line of
data.

Label of each variable in the additional information window.

5.2.2. Dynamic elements

Bar: its length is proportional to the value of the variable within the range defined
by the lower and upper display limits. Its aspect varies according to the value,
status and degree of urgency of the thresholds attained.

Value: on each line of data.

Threshold indicators: the 4 thresholds of the variable are represented by triangles

of various colors according to their degree of urgency, located to the right of the
bar.

Label corresponding to the status of the variable: in the additional information

window.

Value of the overshot threshold if necessary, in the additional information window.

Invalidity message (”INVA”) if necessary, in the additional information window.

5.2.3. Sensitive zones

Zone for assigning variables to a group.

Scale change button.

Button associated with the bargraph numbers that give access to the additional
information window.

Buttons for opening the menu.

5.2.4. Modes of representation

The bargraphs are represented in various manners depending on the characteristics of

the associated variables.

The bars, the threshold indicators and the dynamic data differ according to the status of
the variables, the validity and the position of the value in relation to the thresholds and
limits. The bargraphs are not equally distributed throughout the screen.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 25
5.2.4.1. Bargraph Displays

The various bargraph displays are listed in the following table:

STATUS OF THE VARIABLES REPRESENTATION OF THE BARGRAPHS

On monitoring Bar on the last acquired value

(normal state color)

Off monitoring Bar on the last acquired value

(off monitoring color)

Inhibition Bar on the last acquired value

(inhibition color)

Replacement Bar on the replacement value

(doubtful state color)

Invalidity Bar on the last acquired value

(doubtful state color)

Out of upper limit Bar with upper limit overshoot

arrow (degree of urgency color)

Out of lower limit Bar with lower limit overshoot

arrow (degree of urgency color)

5.2.4.2. Representation of the threshold indicators

The threshold indicators are represented by small right angle triangles, the color of which
corresponds to the associated degree of urgency alarm. The normal state color is used if
no degree of urgency has been associated to the threshold.

When the threshold is passed, the triangle is framed. The thresholds change dynamically
according to the value of each threshold.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 26
5.3. UTILIZATION

5.3.1. Assignment of a variable to a bargraph group

A new variable is assigned into the displayed group by the assignment entry zone:

When a variable is assigned to a group, the screen is refreshed and the corresponding
bargraph is added in the last position.

The same variable may be assigned to several different bargraph groups, but it may not
be assigned several times to the same group.

Error messages in the system zone

CAUSE OF APPEARANCE MESSAGE

Variable ID code error  The variable name XXXX is unknown

Variable type error  Variable XXXX is not a TM
Variable entered already belongs to group  XXXX is already assigned to the group
Assignment of a variable to a group full  The group is full

XXXX = ID code of the variable

5.3.2. Deletion of a variable within a bargraph group

A variable can be deleted from the displayed group by selecting the ”Disassign” option on
the pull down menu linked to the variable that is to be disassigned.
Zoom
Disassign

When a variable is deleted from a group, the screen is refreshed and the bargraph
disappears.

5.3.3. Call for zoom view

Access to the zoom view of a particular variable, linked to a bargraph is obtained by

selecting the ”Zoom” option of the pull down menu linked to this variable.
Zoom
Disassign

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 27
5.3.4. Modification of the scale on the bargraphs

The limiting values of the percentage scale on the bargraphs may be modified so as to
enlarge the bargraphs.

The new values may be chosen between the limiting values of 0 and 100%.

This modification may be done by selecting the scale change button.

Selecting this button opens a window that contains an entry zone for the minimum value,
an entry zone for the maximum value, a taking into account button and a cancellation
button.

Minimum %
Maximum %

Error messages

Fig. 13 : Scale modification window

Window error messages

CAUSE OF APPEARANCE MESSAGE

Minimum value input error  The minimum value must be between 0 and 100
Maximum value input error  The maximum value must be between 0 and 100
Error in entering the minimum and maximum  The minimum value is greater than the maximum valĆ
values ue

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 28
5.3.5. Additional information concerning the bargraphs

Selecting the button associated with the bar identification number triggers the display of a
window that contains for the bar in question:

the identification code of the variable ,

the label of the variable,

the status of the variable with its corresponding color,

an INVA indication if the variable is invalid,

the limit or threshold overshot indication, when applicable.

02AXY112 UNIT 1 POWER GEN ACTIVE MONI INVA

Closure Identification Label Status Invalidity

button code (or threshold
Fig. 14 : Example of additional information on a bargraph overshot)

5.3.6. View chaining

The principle of the various sequences possible from bargraph views is the same as that
for y = f(t) curve views. See the corresponding paragraph.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 29
6. Trends

6.1. INTRODUCTION

The TREND function is used to display, at any moment, in the form of a table, the
changes over time in a group of variables .

The variables represented on the Trend views are organized into groups created during
application customization; they can be modified on line by the operator.

The Trend groups are made up of logic or analog variables. Each group contains up to
10 variables. Variables found within the same group may represent, for example, the
major parameters of a mechanical assembly (example: a pump).

The list of the trend groups is accessible from the ”Trends” directory. The icon is
selected in order to access the directory view.

Each Trend view represents a group. Access to a Trend view is obtained directly by
selecting a group from the directory view.

Each new value is displayed according to a period linked to the trend group. This
period is configured during application customization; it can be modified on line by the
operator.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 30
6.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE VIEWS

The Trend views present, in column form, the changes over time of the analog variable
measurements and the value of logic variables. The left hand column displays the
sampling time in hours, minutes and seconds.

The values are updated line by line. They are displayed in keeping with the color of the
alarm degree associated with each variable.

Once the screen is full, subsequent values gradually replace the older values starting
from the first line, in another background color.

There is one Trend view per page.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Sampling period ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
TITLE
Assignment
zone
Identification Headers of
Period modifi- code the value
cation button
columns

5 s 01GHAST001 01GEVJT001
RPH MW
14:00:20 2981.37 357.08
14:00:25 2982.04 357.23
14:00:30 2982.08 358.02

Button for
Time col- Physical opening the
umn unit Values
menu
Fig. 15 : Layout of a Trend View

6.2.1. Static elements

Headers of the value columns: each header is made up of:

— the identification code of the variable,
— the physical unit for analog variables
Example : 01CEXPT001
BAR

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 31
6.2.2. Dynamic elements

Analog variable values column .

Columns of the labels associated with the states for the logical variables
(e.g. OPEN). Display colors are defined in the document ”Presentation of the EXP
MMI”.

Background color.

Sampling period.

6.2.3. Sensitive zones

Button for modifying the period of group sampling

Zone for assigning variables.

Buttons for opening the zoom and disassign menu

6.3. UTILIZATION

6.3.1. Assigning a variable to a trend group

Assigning a new variable to the displayed group is done in the assignment entry zone.

When a variable is assigned to a group, the screen is refreshed immediately and the
corresponding bargraph is added in the last position.

The same variable may be assigned to several different bargraph groups, but it may not
be assigned several times to the same group.

Error messages in the system zone

CAUSE OF APPEARANCE MESSAGE

Variable ID code error  The variable name XXXX is unknown
Variable entered already belongs to group  XXXX is already assigned to the group
Assignment of a variable to a group full  The group is full

XXXX = ID code of the variable

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 32
6.3.2. Deletion of a variable from a trend group

A variable is deleted from a displayed group by selecting the option ”Disassign” from the
pull down menu linked to the variable to be de–assigned
Zoom
Disassign

Whenever a variable is deleted from a group, the screen is immediately refreshed, the
column disappears and the remaining columns are realigned on the left of the screen as
soon as the deletion takes place.

6.3.3. Modifying the sampling period

The operator has the possibility of varying the sampling period of the values within a trend
group. The default period is 60 seconds.

This modification is performed by selecting the button for modifying the period.

Selection leads to a pull down menu : 5 seconds

10 seconds
15 seconds
20 seconds
30 seconds
1 minute
5 minutes
10 minutes
1 hour

The selection of one of these options modifies the sampling period to the value indicated
in the option selected. After a modification, the first sample appears immediately.

6.3.4. Calling a zoom view

Access to a zoom view of a particular variable that belongs to a trend group is obtained by
selecting the ”Zoom” option of the pull down menu linked to this variable .
Zoom
Disassign

6.3.5. View chaining

The principle of the various sequences possible made up from trend views is the same as
that for y = f(t) curve views. See the corresponding paragraph.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 33
7. Operator Groups

7.1. INTRODUCTION

The OPERATOR GROUPS function is used to display real time information relative to
logical and analog variables formed into groups by the operator.

Operator groups are constituted during customization of the application and are
modifiable on line by the operator. Variables brought together to form a group may
concern, for example, the basic characteristics of the plant or characteristics normally
observed during a test period.

An operator group may contain up to 50 variables.

The list of operator groups is accessible from the ”Operator Groups Directory View”. The
directory view is accessed either by dialogue associated to the OPG icon.

Each view represents a separate operator group. An operator group view is accessed
directly by clicking on a group in the directory view.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 34
7.2. DESCRIPTION OF VIEWS

An operator group view presents information relative to the variables in the group. Each
line corresponds to a variable. The information displayed is both static and dynamic.

Operator group views may be multi–page views. Each page may contain up to 20
variables.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ TITLE 3/4
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
OPG

Assign
zone
Menu
button

Page
change
scrollbar

Fig. 16 : Layout of an operator group view

Details of the elements displayed in the variable data lines are provided in the volume
”Presentation of the EXP MMI”.

7.2.1. Static Elements

Static data in the lines containing information relative to the variables.

7.2.2. Dynamic Elements

Dynamic data in the lines relative to the variables. This data is updated on the
current view.

Display colors are defined in the volume ”Presentation of the EXP MMI”.

7.2.3. Sensitive Zones

Assign zone to assign variables to a group

Menu button accessing zoom/disassign menu.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 35
7.3. UTILIZATION

7.3.1. Assigning a Variable to an Operator Group

A new variable is assigned to a group by means of the assign zone.

When a variable is assigned to a group, the screen is updated and the corresponding line
is added below the other lines in the group.

The same variable may be assigned to several different operator groups, but cannot be
assigned several times to the same group.

Error messages

CAUSE OF APPEARANCE MESSAGE

Variable ID code error  The variable name XXXX is unknown

Variable type error  Variable XXXX is neither a TS nor a TM
Variable entered already belongs to group  XXXX is already assigned to the group
Assignment of a variable to a group full  The group is full

XXXX = ID code of the variable

7.3.2. Deleting a Variable from an Operator Group

A variable can be deleted from a group by selecting the disassign option in the pull–down
menu associated to the variable in question.
Zoom
Disassign

When a variable is deleted from a group, the screen is refreshed, the relevant line
disappears and the remaining lines move up to replace it.

7.3.3. Accessing a Zoom View

A zoom view of a particular variable in an operator group can be accessed by selecting the
zoom option in the pull–down menu associated to the variable in question.
Zoom
Disassign

7.3.4. View Chaining

The principle used for view chaining from operator groups is identical to that for y = f(t)
curves views (see relevant paragraph).

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 36
8. Operative Units

8.1. INTRODUCTION

The OPERATIVE UNITS function is used to consult information relative to the TS and
TM variables of a single operative unit.

The composition of the operative units is determined during customization and cannot be
modified by the operator.

Operative units are composed of logical and analog variables representing, for example,
a feedwater circuit.

Each variable in the database only belongs to one operative unit.

The list of operative units is accessible from the ”Operative units directory view”.

The directory view is accessed by selecting the OU icon.

Access to an operative unit view is obtained by selecting a group from the directory view
then selecting in a menu the display of the TS and TM, TS or TM variables.
TS/TM
TS
TM

The Operative Unit view provides direct access to the view of the alarms associated to the
Operative Unit.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 37
8.2. DESCRIPTION OF VIEWS

8.2.1. Operative Unit View

The view of an operative unit presents all information concerning the variables that make
it up. Each line corresponds to a variable.

The view contains either all the variables TS/TM of the operative unit, or the TS variables,
or the TM variables. The symbol in the title zone corresponds to the type of the view
requested by the operator : OU OU OU
TS/TM TS TM

Information displayed may be static or dynamic.

Operative unit views may be multi–page views depending on the number of variables
attributed to the operative unit.
Associated Status of the
operative unit

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
alarms

OU
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
OU TITLE 3/4 TSTM OU Menu button

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
TS/TM TS/TM

OU MONI
TS

OU Zoom view but-

TM ton

Page change
scrollbar

Fig. 17 : Structure of an operative unit view

The representation of the variable information lines is given in the document entitled
”Presentation of the EXP MMI”.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 38
8.2.1.1. Static Elements

Static data in the lines containing information relative to the variables.

8.2.1.2. Dynamic Elements

Status of the Operative Unit: on–monitoring (MONI), inhibited (INHI),

Dynamic data in the lines relative to the variables. This data is updated on the
current view.

Display colors are defined in the volume ”Presentation of EXP MMI”.

8.2.1.3. Sensitive zones

Buttons for accessing associated views and changing type (title zone)

Buttons for accessing menu inhibition

on–monitoring

Buttons accessing associated zoom views.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 39
8.3. UTILIZATION

8.3.1. Inhibiting an Operative Unit

An Operative Unit is inhibited by selecting the option ”Inhibition” in the pull–down menu
associated to the Unit in question.

8.3.2. Setting an operative Unit On–Monitoring

An Operative Unit is set on–monitoring by selecting the option ”Set on–monitoring” in the
pull–down menu associated to the Unit in question. Only inhibited variables are reset
on–monitoring.

8.3.3. Accessing the Associated Alarms View

The view of alarms associated to a complete Operative Unit is accessed by clicking on the
OU
button in the title zone.

8.3.4. Accessing the Zoom View

The zoom view of a particular variable in an Operative Unit is accessed by clicking on the
button associated to the variable in question.

8.3.5. Changing type

TS
The type of view (complete unit, by TS or by TM) is changed by selecting the TM button
in the title zone and then selecting in a menu
TS/TM
TS
TM

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 40
8.3.6. View Chaining

The diagram below shows the different chained view accessible from an Operative Unit
view.

Movement towards a previous or subsequent operative unit is carried out while

maintaining the type of view: complete, by TS or by TM.

Operative unit directory


1 
2
Change of type


3 
13

Previous or next opera-

tive unit view (of the Operative unit view
same type)

4


5 
6

Alarm view associated 

7

12 
11
Alarm view asso-
with the previous or
ciated with the com-
next operative unit
plete operative unit

8


9 
10

Zoom view

Fig. 18 : Operative unit view chaining


1 : click on Operative Unit reference in the Operative Unit directory


2 : click on pictogram in the title of the Operative Unit view


3 : click on pictogram in the title of the Operative Unit view

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 41
 
4 : click on pictogram in the title of the Operative Unit view


5 : click on the pictogram giving access to the associated alarms view in the
Operative Unit view


6 : click on pictogram in the title of the associated alarms view (return to the
complete unit)


7 : click on pictogram in the title of the associated alarms view


8 : click on pictogram in the title of the associated alarms view


9 : click in the menu linked to a variable in alarm condition


10 : access the pull–down menu in the zoom view and select associated alarm view
option


11 : access the pull–down menu in the title of the zoom view and select the Operative
Unit view (return to the complete unit)


12 : click on the button linked to a variable in the operative unit view


13 : click on the TS
TM pictogram and select within a menu.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 42
9. Variable Queries

9.1. INTRODUCTION

The VARIABLE QUERY function is used to display and record the different dynamic
variable lists:

lists filtered on the basis of criteria determined by the operator,

list of analysis variables,

list of inhibited operative units,

list of modified threshold variables,

list of locked/under test blocks.

Lists are accessed through dialogue initiated from the icon DB .

A filtered list can be recorded from each operator station on the basis of criteria
determined by the operator.

A recorded list can subsequently be accessed on screen and printed out.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 43
9.2. DESCRIPTION OF VIEWS

The list views cited above show the variables (or operative units) which compose them in
real time.

These views are dynamic and are updated in real–time on screen. Variables are inserted
at the end of the list.

When a variable is deleted from a group, the screen is refreshed and the remaining
variables in the column move up. List views may be multi–page views.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Definition
of filter
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
DB TITLE 5/5
Record
button
criteria
View access
button

Fig. 19 : Layout of list on screen

9.2.1. Filtered Lists

These lists are displayed in the full standard format indicated in the volume ”Presentation
of the EXP MMI”.

9.2.2. Other Lists

These lists are displayed in two columns, with each variable represented by the following
elements:

ID code of the variable,

label of the variable,

ID code of the Operative Unit to which the variable belongs,

the status in the case of a control block (test, locked).

In the list of inhibited operative units, each element is represented by the ID code of the
operative unit.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 44
9.2.3. Sensitive zones

A button is attributed to each variable or operative Unit ID giving access to the associated
zoom view and/or the associated Operative Unit view.

A record button shown on the view is used to save the current state of the complete
list.

The filter definition button displayed in a filtered list gives access to a list of filter
criteria.

9.3. UTILIZATION

9.3.1. Accessing the Zoom View

The zoom view of a particular variable belonging to list on screen is accessed by clicking
on the button associated to the variable in question.

9.3.2. Accessing the OU View

The view of a complete unit in a list of inhibited Operative Units is accessed by clicking on
the button associated to the unit in question.

9.3.3. Recording the List

The list currently displayed can be recorded by clicking on the button located at the
top of the view.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 45
9.3.4. Filtered List

Selecting ”Query” in the list access menu displays the list filtered according to the current
criteria. Click on the button to open a window enabling the filter to be modified.

Variables
INHIBITED OFFMONI.
REPLACED OUT OF LIMITS
FORCED INVALID
CHATTERING OTHER

TME TMI TSE TSI VRE VRI

ID CODE
MT MT
ENTITY
UNIT1
OU
01CEX 01CEX
CONTROLLER
0PKD07

The buttons are used to combine different filter criteria.

The operator selects one or more buttons in the upper area (INHIBITED etc.) and one or
more variable types (TSE etc.).

The ”OTHER” button is used to select variables which have a normal status (on
monitoring), are valid and are not out of limits. Selecting all the buttons in the upper area
excludes the variable state query criteria.

The ID code input zone may contain an additional character string filter. The list obtained
will show the variables with ID codes that contain the character string in question.

Example : List of analog variables (TME or TMI), with an ID code containing ”MT” and
belonging to Operative Unit 01CEX.

.
P–TP09–A42043–V4 E B REV B
DTS Supervision Functions Sheet 46
 DTS
Alarms with Operator Help

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42062-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 27 30
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10.12.98 Translation of the French document rev. B GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1. GENERAL PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2. ACKNOWLEDGING ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3. MANAGING THE AUDIBLE WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4. TYPES OF ALARM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2. DESCRIPTION OF VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1. MESSAGE FORMATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2. URGENCY COLOR CODING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3. ALARM VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3.2. Sensitive Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3.3. Information Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3.4. Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.4. SHORT ALARM WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.4.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.4.2. Sensitive Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.4.3. Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.5. LAST THREE ALARMS WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.5.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.5.2. Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

3. SYNTHETIC ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.1. PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2. CALCULATING THE SYNTHETIC ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3. SYNTHESIS GROUP VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.3.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.3.2. Sensitive Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3.3. Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3.4. Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 1-ii
 4. DYNAMIC PRINCIPLES OF ALARMS LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.1. PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2. APPEARANCE OF A NEW MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2.1. Display colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.2.2. Timetagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.3. DELETED MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.4. AUTOMATIC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.5. EXAMPLE OF AN ALARM SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.6. EXAMPLE OF A SYNTHETIC ALARM SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 1-iii
1. Introduction

1.1. GENERAL PRESENTATION

The ALARMS function enables the operator to be informed immediately of any

operational process faults so that ongoing process developments can be monitored
and rapid action taken where necessary. The following types of event generate alarms:

D State changes in a logic variable acquired, calculated or produced by the system

(TSE, TSI or TSP).

D Violation of a threshold (high, very high, low, very low) or limit (high, low)
associated to an analog variable acquired, calculated or produced by the system
(TME, TMI or TMP). A hysteresis coefficient can be applied to the thresholds of
each individual TM variable. A hysteresis coefficient can be applied to the limits of
all TM variables. Each threshold or limit may also generate an alarm message or
alarm point displayed on a separate line.

D System faults (TSS).

In order that operators’ attention should be focussed on the most important data,
synthetic alarms can be produced. This facility enables the number of relatively
unimportant alarms to be reduced.

Each alarm is timetagged. Alarms generated by state changes in acquired logic variables
are timetagged at source. Alarms generated by analog variables are timetagged to the
second.

A degree of urgency configured in the database is associated to each alarm. Four

degrees of urgency are provided (1 to 4 in decreasing order of urgency) and each
degree of urgency is associated to a different alarm display color code.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 2
 A mimic can also be associated to each alarm, enabling the alarm to be located quickly
and efficiently. Alarms or alarm points can be associated to a help window containing text
or graphic information specific to the alarm point in question: this is known as the alarm
file.

1.2. ACKNOWLEDGING ALARMS

Alarm views can be consulted from any operator station, but acknowledgement functions
may only be attributed (by dialogue) to a single operator station at any one time. Alarms
are acknowledged globally by the page or individually alarm by alarm.

The type of acknowledgement is configured in the database by degree of urgency:

D acknowledgement only on appearance of the alarm, or on both appearance and

disappearance of the alarm,

D acknowledgement logged or not.

1.3. MANAGING THE AUDIBLE WARNING

To attract the attention of the operator an alarm may be associated to an audible warning
(horn) produced by the sound generator internal to the station.

Management of the audible warning can be configured in the database:

D for all variables:

— activation on appearance,
— activation on disappearance,
— activation on appearance and disappearance,
— no activation.
D by degree of urgency: tone number. Up to four different tones can be used for
alarm appearances and four other tones for alarm disappearances.

D by variable: tone number. Up to three different tones can be used for alarm
appearances and three other tones for alarm disappearances.

In each configuration, pressing the stop horn key or clicking on the button causes

all tones of all stations to stop.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 3
1.4. TYPES OF ALARM VIEW

The following views are available in the Alarms function:

D general alarm view, showing all the alarms,

D view of alarms associated to a particular mimic,

D view of alarms associated to an operative unit,

D view of alarms by degree of urgency,

D view of alarms filtered by criteria determined by the operator,

D short alarm window,

D last three alarms window

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 4
2. Description of Views

2.1. MESSAGE FORMATS

Except for messages in the last three alarms window, which have no acknowledgement
button, each alarm message contains:

D for logical variables:

— an individual acknowledgement button, visible when acknowledgement is
required,
— the date (d,m,y) and the time (h, mn, s, ms) of the appearance or
disappearance of the alarm,
— the ID code of the variable in question,
— the label of the variable in question,
— a state label associated to the value (0 or 1) of the variable,
— the current status of the associated variable when ”off monitoring”,
”inhibited” or ”replaced”,
— validity if the variable is invalid,
— quality if the variable is doubtful,
— a button giving access to associated views.
Example:

Acknowledgement
button Current Associated
Date Label status view button

28/01/99 18:45:34 230 01CRFTSH102 CWP 1 MOTOR SECTION 1 STOPPED NMON INVA D

Quality
ID code State label Validity
Time
associated to value
(HH:MN:SS MS)

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 5
 D for analog variables:
— an individual acknowledgement button, visible when acknowledgement is
required,
— the date (d,m,y) and the time (h, mn, s) of the appearance or disappearance
of the alarm,
— the ID code of the variable in question,
— the label of the variable in question,
— the state of the measurement relative to the variable limits and
thresholds(in the case of an alarm appearance message),
— the value of the threshold or the limit violated by the measurement (in the
case of an alarm appearance message),
— the physical unit (in the case of an alarm appearance message),
— the current status of the associated variable when ”off monitoring”,
”inhibited” or ”replaced”,
— validity if the associated variable is invalid,
— quality if the variable is doubtful,
— a button giving access to associated views.
Example:

Acknowledgement but- Measurement Associated view

ton state Current status button
Date Label Unit

18/01/99 16:59:07 01FMATE62D AIR TEMPERATURE LOW 500 DEG NMON INVA D

Time Quality
(HH:MN:SS) ID code
Value of threshold or li- Validity
mit violated

2.2. URGENCY COLOR CODING

Each alarm is displayed in the color which corresponds to its degree of urgency as
configured in the database (colors ”urgency 1”, ”urgency 2”, ”urgency 3”, ”urgency 4”).
Urgency 1 is the most important degree.

An alarm which reverts to inactive (return to normal) is displayed in a color which

corresponds to the ”normal state”.

These degree of urgency/normal state color codes are standard, but may be modified
during customization of the system (see Volume ”Presentation of the EXP MMI”).

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 6
2.3. ALARM VIEWS

2.3.1. Presentation

The general alarm view, the filtered view, the view of alarms by degree of urgency, the
mimic and Operative Unit alarm views all have the same overall layout as shown in the
figure below.

Navigation buttons

?
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Pictogram TITLE 1/20

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Band
Y

20 line
alarm list

Fig. 1 : Layout of the alarm view

2.3.2. Sensitive Zones

2.3.2.1. Title zone

D Alarm view Help button ? ,

D Button giving access to general alarm view from the filtered alarm view,

D Buttons giving access to neighboring or higher level views from degree

of urgency, mimic and Operative Unit views:

Original view Button View displayed Button View displayed

Alarms by degree General alarm view , Lower, higher degree
of urgency of urgency
Mimic alarms Mimic , Alarms in previous, next
mimic in directory
Operative Unit alarms Operative Unit , Alarms in previous, next
Operative Unit

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 7
2.3.2.2. Information Zone

D Acknowledgement function button if the operator station is not already

assigned the alarm acknowledgement function

D Full page acknowledgement button . if the operator station is assigned

the acknowledgement function

D Save alarms list button .

D Chronological sort button if the operator station is assigned the

acknowledgement function

D Button accessing a filter selection window in the filtered alarms view.

2.3.2.3. Alarm Message Lines

D Individual alarm acknowledgement button

D Buttons accessing associated views

The operator can use the slidebar to consult the different pages of the list.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 8
2.3.3. Information Band

The information band displays the following details:

D the total number of alarm points in the list

D the total number of unacknowledged alarm points,

D assignment or not of the acknowledgement function,

D whether an automatic acknowledgement has been executed,

If the alarm acknowledgement function is not assigned to the station, the band displays
an acknowledgement function button.

Total number Total number of Automatic acknowlĆ

of alarms unacknowledged edgement indicator
alarms

Total number = 400 Unacknowledged alarms = 54 Automatic acknowledgement

Acknowledgement Save alarms list button

function button

On an operator station assigned the acknowledgement function, the information band

contains a full page acknowledgement button and a chronological sort button .

Total number = 400 Unacknowledged alarms = 54 Automatic acknowledgement

.

Page acknowledgement Chronological sort

button button

In addition, the filtered alarms view information band contains a button giving access to a
filter selection window .

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 9
2.3.4. Utilization

The general alarm view is displayed by clicking on the icon .

The alarms by degree of urgency and the filtered alarm views are displayed by selection
from the menu Degree of urgency 1 accessed by clicking on .
Degree of urgency 2
Degree of urgency 3
Degree of urgency 4
Filtered alarm view
Short alarm view
Last 3 alarms

Other alarm views are accessed from previous views or from associated views.

2.3.4.1. Assigning the Acknowledgement Function

The alarm acknowledgement function is assigned of by clicking on the button:

.

2.3.4.2. Individual Acknowledgement

Alarms are acknowledged individually by clicking on the button.

2.3.4.3. Full Page Acknowledgement

Full page acknowledgement of alarms, ie. acknowledgement of all the alarms on the
current page, is performed by clicking on the button :
. .

2.3.4.4. Chronological Sort

The alarm list can be resorted in chronological order by clicking on the button located
in the information band on the station assigned the acknowledgement function.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 10
2.3.4.5. Accessing Alarm Views from a Variable

The button located at the end of each alarm line is used to access associated views.
Clicking on this button opens a window which enables the chosen view to be displayed on
the selected VDU screen (alarm files are always displayed on the current screen):

Zoom view VAR

OU
Operative Unit Alarms

Alarms by degree of urgency

Mimic

Mimic alarms
Alarm file ?

The window is adapted to each type of alarm view.

Original view Access possible to:

General alarm view Zoom views or alarm synthesis group views, alarm files, mimĆ
ics, mimic alarms, Operative Unit alarms, alarms by degree
of urgency
Alarms by degree of Zoom views or alarm synthesis group views, alarm files,
urgency mimics, mimic alarms, Operative Unit alarms,
Mimic alarm view Zoom view or alarm synthesis group views, alarm files,
Operative Unit alarms, alarms by degree of urgency
Operative Unit alarm Zoom view or alarm synthesis group view, alarm files, mimĆ
view ics, mimic alarms, alarms by degree of urgency

Access to a mimic view , or a mimic alarm view is available for all variables

which have these options defined in the database.

The alarm file ? is available if this option has been defined in the mimic base. The

alarm file is displayed next to the access button. It can be moved by clicking on its title and
is closed by clicking on the close button .

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 11
2.3.4.6. Filtered Alarm View

When an operator station is assigned the acknowledgement function, the button

located in the upper part of the view gives access to a filter selection window. This window
enables a combination of criteria to be defined using diamond shaped buttons and
data input fields. The ID code field enables the operator to define a set of characters which
can then be used to search for alarms with ID codes containing these characters.

ALARMS
STATE ACKNOWLEDGED UNACKNOWLEDGED
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
START DATE
07/05/99 22:34:20
END DATE
07/05/99 22:40:00
VARIABLES
TYPE TME TMI TSE TSI
DEGREE 1 2 3 4

ID. CODE :
KITT ABC
M
OU
01KIT
CONTROLLER
0PKD07
MIMIC
04CEX43
OP. GROUP

D the selection buttons enable the following criteria to be combined:

— acknowledged alarms,
— unacknowledged alarms,
— variable types,
— degrees of urgency.
The operator must select at least one button in each row.

D the display fields XXXXXX show previously defined criteria,

D the outlined fields are used to define new criteria,

D is used to confirm the data input,

D is used to clear the data input fields.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 12
 Example of a combined filter: list of acknowledged or unacknowledged alarms of all types
(TSE, TSI, TME, TMI), with degrees of urgency 1 or 2, and with ID codes containing ABC.

2.3.4.7. Linking Alarm Views

The figure below shows the principal links available from the general alarm view.

Operative Unit
Zoom view

ÂÂ
alarm view
VAR

VAR
OU Alarms by degree
of urgency Mimic view
General alarm view
Â
ÂÂ
Mimic

Â
alarm view
Alarm file
?

Synthesis

VAR Â
group view

Alarms window
Alarms by degree of urgency
and
Filtered alarm views

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 13
2.4. SHORT ALARM WINDOW

2.4.1. Presentation

The short alarm window provides access to 10 pages each containing 3 acknowledged or
unacknowledged alarms, corresponding to the first 30 alarms in the general alarm view.

The window is displayed by clicking on the icon then selecting the option ”Short

Alarm View”.

The window appears just above the dialogue zone, superimposed on the other views.
The window can be moved around the screen by clicking on the title and is closed by
clicking on the close button

The structure of an alarm message and the colors utilized are described in paragraph 2.1.

Acknowledgement function button

? TITLE 3/8
Y

Fig. 2 : Short alarm window without acknowledgement function

2.4.2. Sensitive Zones

2.4.2.1. Title Zone

D If the operator station is not already assigned the alarm acknowledgement

function the title zone displays the acknowledgement function button

2.4.2.2. Alarm Message Lines

D Individual acknowledgement button

D Buttons accessing associated views

The operator can use the slidebar to consult the different pages of the list.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 14
2.4.3. Utilization

The short alarm window is accessed by clicking on the icon then selecting the

”Short Alarm View” option in the menu.

2.4.3.1. Assigning the Acknowledgement Function

The alarm acknowledgement function is assigned by clicking on the button.

2.4.3.2. Acknowledging Alarms

Alarms are acknowledged individually by clicking on the button.

2.4.3.3. Accessing Views Associated to Variables

The associated views button opens an associated views window identical to that
accessible from the general alarm view.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 15
2.5. LAST THREE ALARMS WINDOW

2.5.1. Presentation

The last three alarms window displays the three most recent alarms in chronological
order.

If the list is full, the oldest alarm is deleted by any new alarm.

This view cannot be used for alarm acknowledgement.

The window is accessed by clicking on the icon then selecting the option ’Last

Three Alarms”.

The window appears just above the dialogue zone, superimposed on the other views.
The window can be moved around the screen by clicking on the title and and is closed by
clicking on the close button

This window can be displayed simultaneously with the short alarm window.

The structure of an alarm message and the colors utilized are described in paragraph 2.1.

? TITLE

Fig. 3 : Last three alarms window

2.5.2. Utilization

The Last Three Alarms view is accessed by clicking on the icon then selecting the

”Last Three Alarms” option from the menu.

2.5.2.1. Accessing Views Associated to Variables

The associated views button opens a window identical to that of the general alarm
window.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 16
3. Synthetic Alarms

3.1. PRESENTATION

”Synthetic alarm” groups are groups of variables which cannot produce alarms
individually but which generate a single alarm point when at least one variable in the
group changes state or violates a threshold or a limit.

An alarm synthesis group can be configured in the database to define the following:

D up to 40 components, which may be:

— TSE, TSI, TSP logic variables
— or TME or TMI threshold or limit violations
— VRE, VRP numeric variables
D the notifiable sense of each TSE, TSI or TSP logic component in the synthesis,; a
trip value associated to a VRE or VRP component.

D the synthetic variable itself (TSP). The synthetic alarm is timetagged with the most
recent event to have occurred in the group.

The button gives access to the synthesis group directory view. The corresponding

synthesis group views show the individual group components and their states.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 17
3.2. CALCULATING THE SYNTHETIC ALARM

A synthetic alarm is invalid when all its component variables are invalid or inhibited.

A synthetic alarm is doubtful:

D when at least one of its component variables is invalid, inhibited or replaced,

D when the synthetic alarm itself is invalid or replaced.

The value of the synthesis is the result of a logical OR between the component variables
taking account of the trip sense of the logic variables configured in the database. The VR
components trigger an alarm when they equal their configured value (0 to 15). A single VR
with different associated trigger values can intervene more than once in the group .

The value of each component variable is used in the calculation when the variable is valid
and:

D on monitoring,

D or replaced,

D or off monitoring and associated to a limit violation.

The value of component variables is ignored in all other cases.

If a new component goes on alarm (or a VR is equal to its associated value) while the
synthesis is already on alarm, this will generate a new request for acknowledgement and
will update the timetag. The new synthesis subsequent to the change is not logged. Any
component can be individually configured for logging.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 18
3.3. SYNTHESIS GROUP VIEW

3.3.1. Introduction

The synthesis group view displays the principal data which constitutes the group:

D data relative to the group components,

D the type of logical operator for each component of the group,

D the value associated to a VR,

D data relative to the synthetic alarm.

The synthesis group directory view is accessed by clicking on the icon.

Individual groups are accessed by clicking on:

D a group listed in the directory view,

D a synthetic alarm in an alarm view.

The synthesis group view may occupy several pages depending on the number of
components. One page contains up to 20 components.

Navigation buttons

? TITLE 1/2

Synthetic alarm SYNTHESIS : 00TSP-ALA001 MAIN PUMP GROUPALARM ON NMON INVA D

DATE TIME CODE LABEL TRIGGER CURRENT STATE
Y

Synthesis group
components
(20 lines)

Fig. 4 : Different zones in the synthetic group view

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 19
3.3.2. Sensitive Zones

D In the title
— Help button ?

— Directory view access button

— Buttons accessing previous or next group

D In the view
— Zoom view access button

The operator can use the scroll bar to access other pages in the group view.

3.3.3. Formats

3.3.3.1. Synthetic Alarm

The synthetic alarm display comprises the following elements:

D the ID code of the variable,

D the label of the variable,

D a state label associated to the value (0 or 1) of the variable.

D the current status of the associated variable when this is off–monitoring,

inhibited or replaced,

D validity when the variable is invalid,

D quality when the variable is doubtful,

D access button to zoom view of the variable.

Example

Zoom view
Label Current status button

SYNTHESIS : 00TSP-ALA001 MAIN PUMP ALARM GROUP ON NMON INVA D

ID code State label Validity Quality

associated to
value

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 20
3.3.3.2. Synthesis Group Components

Each representation of a component comprises the following elements :

— the date (d., m., y.) and time (h, mn, s, ms) when the component has been
triggered,
— the ID code of the component,
— the label of the component,
— the current status of the component when this is ”off–monitoring, ”inhibited”
or ”replaced”,
— validity when the component is invalid,
— quality when the component is doubtful,
— access button to zoom view of the component.
In addition, the following elements will be indicated depending on the type of component :

D for a logic component:

— a state label corresponding to the configured trigger value of the
component and deduced from the logical operator.
— a state label associated to the current value (0 or 1) of the component.

Date Label Configured Current Zoom view

trigger status button

28/01/99 18:45:34 230 01CRFTSH102 CWP 1 MOTOR SECTION 1 OFF OFF NMON INVA D "

Time (HH:MN:SS MS) ID code State label associated to Validity Quality

current value

D For components defining threshold or limit violations:

— a text corresponding to the configured trigger value of the component:
LIML, LOLO, LO, HI, HIHI, LIMH .
— the current state of the component relative to limits and thresholds,

Current Zoom view

Date Label Trigger status button

28/01/99 18:45:34 01FMATE62D AIR TEMPERATURE HIGH LOW NMON INVA D "

Time (HH:MN:SS) ID code Current Validity

state
Quality

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 21
 D for a VR component:
— the state label of the component associated to the trigger value (0 to 15).
— the state label of the component associated to the current value (0 to 15),
or ... if the current value of the VR is greater than 15.

Date Label State label Current Zoom view

associated to status button
trigger value

28/01/99 18:45:34 230 01VRES_001 ETAT DU SECTIONNEUR DEFAUT DEFAUT REPL D

Time ID code State label Current Quali-

(HH:MN:SS MS) associated to validity ty
current value

For each component:

D the date and time are shown when the component has been triggered,

D the date and time disappear when the component is no longer triggered and when
the appearance of the synthetic alarm has been acknowledged.

3.3.4. Utilization

The synthesis group directory view is accessed by clicking on the icon.

Group views are accessed:

D by clicking on a group in the directory view,

D from an alarm view by clicking on the VAR button in the window of a synthetic
alarm indicated by the symbol at the end of the line.

Zoom views are accessed from the alarm synthesis group view by clicking on .

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 22
4. Dynamic Principles of Alarms Lists

4.1. PRESENTATION

Alarm views contain lists classed in chronological order. Certain events such as returns
to normal state cause the timetag to be updated with no corresponding line change. Such
lists can be resorted into chronological order at any time on operator request.

The acknowledged or unacknowledged state of each alarm is shown by the presence or

absence of the acknowledgement button at the start of the alarm line.

The call button of the general alarm view , in the icon band is displayed:

— in a first color: presence of unacknowledged alarms,

— in a second color: presence of alarms, all acknowledged,
— in gray: absence of alarms
The first and second colors can be defined at configuration.

4.2. APPEARANCE OF A NEW MESSAGE

When a valid variable which is either on or off–monitoring (in the case of a limit violation),
or replaced at controller level (forced), goes into an alarm state, an alarm appears.

If the alarm point is already present in the list (same threshold or limit for an analog
variable), the line is updated (timetag, acknowledgement button, color). If not, a new line
is added to the list.

4.2.1. Display colors

On appearance of an alarm, the color of the alarm message line is that of the
corresponding degree of urgency. The line reverts to ”normal state color” when the
variable quits the alarm state.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 23
 The acknowledgement button at the start of the line is displayed:
— in the color of the degree of urgency when acknowledgement of the
appearance of an alarm is required,
— in the ”normal state color” when acknowledgement of the disappearance of
an alarm is required.

4.2.2. Timetagging

A new message is timetagged at the time the alarm appears. This tag can be updated:
— on the disappearance of an alarm, on condition that the appearance of the
alarm has been acknowledged,
— on the reappearance of the alarm.

4.3. DELETED MESSAGES

Messages are deleted under the following circumstances:

1 – after operator acknowledgement of the appearance and acknowledgement of the

disappearance of an alarm point which has reverted to normal state, in the case of
a configuration where acknowledgement is required on both the appearance
and disappearance of the alarm

2 – after operator acknowledgement of the appearance of an alarm point which has

reverted to normal state, in the case of a configuration where acknowledgement
is required only on appearance of the alarm

3 – after acknowledgement of an alarm variable which switches to:

D inhibited,

D or off monitoring (where there is no limit violation),

D or replaced at CENTRALOG level,

D and/or invalid.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 24
4.4. AUTOMATIC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

If the maximum number of alarm points permitted in an alarms list is attained, an

automatic acknowledgement is executed in two phases:

D If the number of alarm points is greater than a first threshold, return to normal
messages are acknowledged and deleted.

D If this operation fails to reduce the number of alarm points to below a second
threshold (lower than the first), the alarm points at the top of the list are then
deleted until the number falls below the second threshold.

Both thresholds are defined at configuration.

Automatic acknowledgement is indicated in the information band. This information

disappears after the first manual acknowledgement.

A message is written in the event log every 10 automatic acknowledgements

(uninterrupted by a manual acknowledgement). In the case of a manual
acknowledgement, the 10 automatic acknowledgement counter is reset to zero.

The automatic acknowledgement thresholds are configured in the database and are
unique for all alarm lists.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 25
4.5. EXAMPLE OF AN ALARM SEQUENCE

GENERAL ALARM VIEW Line color

TM
1 (example)
LIMH
HIHI 10:23 TME1 ––––– HIGH orange
HIGH

Normal

10 h 23 t

2
10:23 TME1 ––––– HIGH orange
10 h 24
Acknowledgement
of HIGH alarm

TM
3
LIMH
HIHI 10:23 TME1 ––––– HIGH orange
HIGH 10:30 TME1 ––––– HIHI red

Normal

10 h 30 t
TM
4
LIMH
HIHI 10:23 TME1 ––––– HIGH orange
HIGH 10:30 TME1 ––––– HIHI cyan (normal)

Normal

10 h 45 t

5
10 h 47
10:23 TME1 ––––– HIGH orange
Acknowledgement
of HIHI alarm

In this example, the database configuration selected is such that operator

acknowledgement is required only on the appearance of the alarm.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 26
4.6. EXAMPLE OF A SYNTHETIC ALARM SEQUENCE

1 GENERAL ALARM SYNTHESIS

10 h 40
VIEW GROUP

SYNTH TSE1 OFF

TSE1 0 0 TSE2 OFF
TSE2 0 TSE3 OFF
TSE3 0

10 h 42 2
First component on alarm
10:42 SYNTH ON TSE1 OFF
0
1 10:42 TSE2 ON
1 TSE3 OFF
0

10 h 43 3
Acknowledgement of the
synthesis 10:42 SYNTH ON TSE1 OFF
10:42 TSE2 ON
0 TSE3 OFF
1
1
0
10 h 46 4

New component on 10:46 SYNTH ON TSE1 OFF

alarm 10:42 TSE2 ON
0 10:46 TSE3 ON
1
1
1
New request for
acknowledgement
10 h 47 5

TSE2 = 0 & acknowl- 10:46 SYNTH ON TSE1 OFF

edgement TSE2 OFF
0 10:46 TSE3 ON
1
0
1

The appearance of a new component while the synthesis is on alarm causes an update of
the synthesis and a new request for acknowledgement.

Acknowledging the synthesis causes the appearance time of components that have
reverted to normal to be deleted from the synthesis group view.

.
P–TP09–A42062–V4 E B REV B
DTS Alarms with Operator Help Sheet 27
 DTS
Operator Management of Variables

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42045-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 31 35
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10.12.98 Translation of the French document rev. B GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2. MODIFYING VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2. MODIFYING THE VARIABLE STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3. ASSIGNING VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4. LOCKING A CONTROL BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.5. ACTING ON VARIABLE THRESHOLDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

3. ACCESSING VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1. ACCESSING THE OPERATIVE UNIT VARIABLES DIRECTORY . . 7
3.2. ACCESSING THE NEXT OR PREVIOUS ZOOM VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.3. ACCESSING THE ASSOCIATED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.4. ACCESSING OTHER ZOOM VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

4. ZOOM VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.2. ZOOM VIEW DATA FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.3. TSE, TSP OR TSS ZOOM VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.3.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.4. TSI ZOOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.4.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.5. TME OR TMP ZOOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.5.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.5.2. Sensitive Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.5.3. Graphic Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.6. TMI ZOOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.6.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.6.2. Sensitive Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.6.3. Graphic Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.7. TMO ZOOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.7.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.7.2. Sensitive Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.7.3. Graphic Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 1-ii
 4.8. VRE OR VRP ZOOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.8.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.8.2. Sensitive Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.9. VRI ZOOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.9.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.9.2. Sensitive Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.10. ZOOM VIEW OF A CONTROL BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.10.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.10.2. Sensitive zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.11. TCE ZOOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.11.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.12. TCI ZOOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.12.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.13. TVCE ZOOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.13.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.13.2. Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.13.3. Sensitive Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.14. TVCI ZOOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.14.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.14.2. Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.14.3. Sensitive Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 1-iii
 List of figures

Fig. 1 : Layout of a TSE, TSP or TSS zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Fig. 2 : Layout of a TSI zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fig. 3 : Layout of a TME or TMP zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fig. 4 : Layout of a TMI zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Fig. 5 : Layout of a TMO zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fig. 6 : Layout of a VRE zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fig. 7 : Layout of a VRI zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Fig. 8 : Layout of a control block view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fig. 9 : Layout of a control block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fig. 10 : Layout of a TCE zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 11 : Layout of a TCI zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fig. 12 : Layout of a TVCE zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fig. 13 : Layout of a TVCI zoom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 1-iv
1. Introduction

The ”Variable Management” functions enable the operator to display the static and
dynamic attributes of the entities in the database.

These functions are also used to modify the status of TS, TM variables and control
blocks (see volume ”Data Description and Processing”) as detailed below:
— inhibit a variable,
— replace a variable,
— set a variable on monitoring,
— set a variable off monitoring,
— modify an analog variable threshold ,
— assign a value to an analysis variable,
— lock or set under test a control block.

These operations are performed from the zoom views of the variables in question.

A zoom view is associated to each variable or each control block.

The operator can also inhibit variables by inhibiting their operative unit. This special case
is dealt with in the volume ”Monitoring Functions”.

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 2
2. Modifying Variables

2.1. INTRODUCTION

The actions that the operator can perform by means of the pointer device in the zoom view
of a variable include modifying the status of the variable in question, assigning a value to
the variable and acting on the thresholds of the variable.

2.2. MODIFYING THE VARIABLE STATUS

The status of the following variable types can be modified:

program (TMP) and external (TME) analog variables,,

internal (TMI) analog variables,

external (TSE), program (TSP) or system (TSS) logical variables,

internal (TSI) logical variables.

VR multi–states variables (VRE, VRI and VRP).

The status of a variable can be modified in the following ways:

set on monitoring,

set off monitoring,

replacement,

inhibition.

The VR variables can only be set on monitoring or replaced.

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 3
 These modifications are performed in the zoom views by means of a pull–down menu
accessed by clicking on the Menu Button located in the ”VARIABLE STATUS” area in the
view. The options available on this menu correspond to previous modifications and are
respectively:

Analog variable:

On monitoring
Off monitoring
Inhibition

An analog value is replaced by clicking on the ”Replacement” data entry field, by

entering the replacement value, then clicking on Enter .

Logical variable:

On monitoring
Off monitoring
Replacement by 0
Replacement by 1
Inhibition
Reset

The ”Reset” option is added to this menu in the special case of a TSP variable.
Selecting this option resets the variable to zero.

The VR variables are replaced by entry in the ”Replacement” data entry field and set on
monitoring by clicking on the ”On Monitoring” button.

2.3. ASSIGNING VALUE

Values can only be assigned to analysis variables (TMO).

A value is assigned to a variable by clicking on the data entry field located in the
”VARIABLE STATUS” area in the view.

2.4. LOCKING A CONTROL BLOCK

Locking a control block renders command of the block inoperative. The states ”normal”
and ”test” render command of the block operative.

The state of a control block can be changed by clicking on the button located in the
”VARIABLE STATUS” area in the view, and selecting one of the options in the following
menu: Normal
Lock
Test

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 4
2.5. ACTING ON VARIABLE THRESHOLDS

Defining variable thresholds : thresholds are defined for each TM during

customization. There are three types of threshold; the two first types may be used
in combination for a given variable.
— Modifiable threshold : the value of the threshold is originally defined in the
database, and may be modified by the operator.
— Variable threshold : the value of the threshold varies, and is provided by the
value of a TM known as the associated TM. This TM is declared during
customization. The operator may at any time define a substitute value. For a
TM which includes at least one variable threshold, the different substitute
values are used whenever at least one of the associated TMs is invalid,
inhibited or whenever the different threshold values are inconsistent (eg. low
threshold>high threshold). Associated TM values are re–applied as soon the
conditions described above are no longer true.
— Logic threshold : the state of a TM relative its thresholds can be provided
directly by the value of the TS logic variables produced by a controller or by
the CENTRALOG Internal Computation functions.
On system start–up, this type of threshold is initialized on the CENTRALOG
screen at its substitute value (fixed threshold or as modified). Subsequently,
on the occurrence of a threshold violation corresponding to a shift in the value
of the TS from 0 to 1, the value of the threshold is replaced by the value of the
TM. For a TM comprising at least one logic threshold, the various substitute
values whenever at least one of the associated TS variables is invalid or
inhibited. Any new threshold violations signaled by the associated TSs are
again taken into consideration as soon as the previous conditions are no
longer fulfilled.
The thresholds of the following variable types can be affected:

program (TMP) and external (TME) analog variables,,

internal (TMI) analog variables,

The following actions can be performed on variable thresholds:

modification of threshold values,

cancellation of modifications (return to the initial configuration).

These actions are performed within a window which is accessed by clicking on the button
located in the ”Threshold” area of the view.

This window contains the following information relative to each of the variable’s
thresholds:

CURRENT value corresponding to the value actually in use,

DEFAULT substitute value corresponding to an operator modified value; its

computation is done when a valid and not inhibited TM is acquired.

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 5
 — In the case of modifiable thresholds this value is identical to the current
value.
— In the case of variable thresholds (TM), this value is identical to the current
value, if at least one of the TMs associated to this threshold is invalid or
inhibited, or if there is any inconsistency between the different value
thresholds.
— In the case of logic thresholds (TS), this value is identical to the current
value, if at least one of the TSs associated to this threshold is invalid or
inhibited.

the value ”INIT” corresponds to the value defined during customization of the
system,

the ”NEW VALUE” entry field is used to modify either:

— the ”CURRENT” value and the ”DEFAULT” substitute value (modifiable
threshold),
— or the ”DEFAULT” substitute value (variable or logic threshold).

the ID code of any TS/TM associated to the thresholds (variable or logic
threshold),

a button giving access to the zoom views of the threshold TMs or TSs (variable or
logic threshold).

The window also contains an INIT button used to reset values to those originally
configured during customization of the system and reloaded in the event of restart with
full initialization.

VAR THRESHOLDS

CURRENT DEFAULT INIT NEW VALUE TS/TM THRESHOLD

VERY HIGH 88.245 95.0 90.0 01GGRTE71

HIGH 74.32 80.0 80.5 01GGRTE72

LOW 20.2 20.2 20.2

VERY LOW 12.8 12.8 10.0

INIT

Error message

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 6
3. Accessing Views

3.1. ACCESSING THE OPERATIVE UNIT VARIABLES DIRECTORY

The directory view is accessed by clicking on the pictogram in the title of the zoom
view.

3.2. ACCESSING THE NEXT OR PREVIOUS ZOOM VIEWS

These views are accessed by clicking on the or pictograms in the title of the
zoom view. The previous and next zoom views correspond to neighboring variables in the
operative unit that are of the same type (TS for example).

3.3. ACCESSING THE ASSOCIATED VIEWS

These views are accessed by designating in the title of the zoom view. This selection
opens a window that makes it possible to display the desired view:

Mimic

Mimic alarm

Operative unit OU
OU
Operative unit alarm

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 7
 These options are available for the following variables:

TME, TMP, TMI,

TSE, TSP, TSI, TSS.

The options are not available if the variable is not associated to a mimic.

3.4. ACCESSING OTHER ZOOM VIEWS

A zoom view may contain new variables. The operator can access the zoom view of such
a variable by clicking on its associated zoom view access button.

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 8
4. Zoom Views

4.1. INTRODUCTION

A zoom view is associated to, and describes the attributes of, each variable and control
block in the database.

The zoom views are mainly designed to facilitate the implementation and maintenance
phases of the process and the system. Most of the information that they contain concerns
this principal function. They may also be used at any time during normal operations. The
different zoom views are grouped together according to variable type:

TSE, TSP, TSS (external, process, system logical variables)

TSI (internal logical variables)

TME, TMP (external, process analog variables)

TMI (internal analog variables)

TMO (analysis variables)

VRE, VRP (external and process multi–state variables)

VRI (internal multi–state variables)

ORG (control & control loop blocks)

TCE (external telecommands)

TCI (internal telecommands)

TVCE (external setpoint instructions)

TVCI (internal setpoint instructions)

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 9
4.2. ZOOM VIEW DATA FIELDS

Zoom views are composed of the data fields listed below. The type of the variable
concerned is shown in brackets. Each field comprises the following information:
— title of the element,
— significance,
— label ”stat” or ”dyn” (indicating whether the element is static or dynamic).

1. VARIABLE STATE (TS, TM, TC, TVC, VR)

VALUE : current value and unit (TM, TVC, VR) dyn

STATE : state message (TS, TC, VRE, VRP ) or threshold
violated (TM) dyn
TYPE : type of database entity stat
U. O. : ID code of the associated operative unit stat

2. VARIABLE STATUS (TSE, TSI, TME, TMI, VR)

VALID : validity dyn

STATUS : variable status MONI (on monitoring), dyn
NMON (off monitoring), INHI (inhibited), REPL (replaced)

This field also contains also a status modification button and with a TME/TMI, a
replacement value entry field.

3. ACQUISITION (TSE, TSI, TME, TMI, VRE, VRI)

VALUE : acquired or calculated value dyn

VALID : validity of the acquired or calculated value (YES) or dyn
cause of invalidity :
- TSE : CHATTERING or UNKNOWN
- TME : H ELEC LIMIT, L ELEC LIMIT, LINE FAULT, or UNKNOWN
FORCING : forcing state at controller level (TSE, TME) dyn

4. CONTROLLER (TSE, TME, TCE,TVCI, VRE, VRP)

TYPE : type of controller stat

NAME : name of controller stat
EQUIPMENT : equipment stat
BOARD : board number stat
NUMBER : channel number stat

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 10
 Meaning of the displayed fields:

Variable type Equipment Board Number

TSE (CE2000 / CE8035) equip. n. board n. channel n.
TSE (IHR) 0 / internal n.
TSE (SMCA) equip. n. board n. module n./channel n.
TSE (equation result) 0 / internal n. - 256
TSE (local control) equip. n. / internal n.
TSE (cell fault) / / internal n.
TSP / / /
TSS / / internal n.
TME (CE2000 / CE8035) equip. n. board n. channel n.
TME (SMCA) equip. n. board n. module n./channel n.
TME (equation result) 0 / internal n. - 1023
TMP / / internal n.
VRE 0 or equip. n. / internal n.

5. ALARM (TSE, TSI)

SENSE : alarm value stat

URGENCY : degree of urgency stat

6. THRESHOLDS/LIMITS (TME, TMI, TMO)

MAX : value and degree of urgency of upper limit stat

V-HIGH : value and degree of urgency of very high threshold stat
HIGH : value and degree of urgency of high threshold stat
LOW : value and degree of urgency of low threshold stat
V-LOW : value and degree of urgency of very low threshold stat
MIN : value and degree of urgency of low limit stat

This field also contains a threshold modification button

7. PROCESSING (TME, TMI, TMO)

SCANNING : variable acquisition or calculation scanning stat

HYSTERESIS : threshold hysteresis coefficient stat
FILTER : filter coefficient stat

8. CALCULATION (TSI, TMI)

TYPE : type of calculation used stat

RANK : variable execution rank stat

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 11
 9. LOGGING (TSE, TSI)

APPEARING : printout shift from 1 to 0 stat

DISAPPEARING : printout shift from 0 to 1 stat
STATE 0 : message associated to state 0 stat
STATE 1 : message associated to state 1 stat
ARCHIVING : periodic storage for archives stat

10. LOGGING (TME, TMI, TMO)

ARCHIVING : periodic storage for archives stat

11. LOGGING (VRE, VRP)

VARIATION : periodic storage for archives stat

12. VARIABLE STATE (ORG)

TYPE : type of database entity stat

OU : ID code of associated operative unit stat
PROCESS NUMBER : algorithm number stat
CONTROL WINDOW : control window name stat

13. VARIABLE STATUS (ORG)

STATUS : block condition NORMAL, LOCKED or TESTING dyn

The last field also contains a button for status modification

14. AUTHORIZATION VARIABLE (ORG)

NAME : ID code of the variable stat

TYPE : type of the associated variable (TSE, TSI) stat
AUTHORIZATION : block action authorized or not dyn
VALUE : authorization state dyn

15. AUTHORIZATION COMMAND (ORG)

NAME : ID code of the command or instruction stat

TYPE : type of the associated command
(TCE, TCI, TVCE, TVCI, TMO) stat
AUTHORIZATION : command authorization state dyn
VALUE : value of the command dyn

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 12
 16. ASSOCIATED VARIABLE (ORG)

NAME : ID code of the variable stat

TYPE : type of the associated variable (TSE, TSI, TME, TMI) stat
VALUE : value of the variable dyn

17. CONTROLLER INFORMATION (TCE, TVCE)

TYPE : type of command stat

CYCLE : type of control loop cycle (slow, fast or logical) stat
LR : Low Regulation
FR : Fast Regulation
LO : Logical

18. LIMITS (TVCE, TVCI)

MAX : current value of high limit dyn

MIN : current value of low limit dyn

This field also contains a button opening a window that shows associated limits. A
maximum and minimum value are associated to each TVC (during customization of the
CENTRALOG system) in order to be able to control the setpoint value entered by the
operator or calculated by the application program. These values may also be provided by
the value of an associated TM declared at customization. As soon as at least one of the
associated TMs is invalid, inhibited or has a minimum value greater than the maximum
value, the values defined during configuration are applied.
VAR LIMITS

CURRENT INIT THRESHOLD TM

MAXIMUM 88.245 90.0 01GGRTE71

MINIMUM 74.32 80.5 01GGRTE72

19. ASSOCIATED VARIABLE (TCE, TCI, TVCE, TVCI)

CONTROL : ID code of the associated TS or TM stat

VALUE : value of the associated TS or TM dyn
AUTHORIZATION : ID code of the authorization TS stat
VALUE : value of the authorization TS dyn
SENSE : authorization sense stat
EXECUTION : ID code of the execution check TS stat
VALUE : value of the execution check TS dyn

20. LOGGING (TCE, TCI, TVCE, TVCI)

PRINTOUT : variable printed out stat

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 13
4.3. TSE, TSP OR TSS ZOOM VIEWS

4.3.1. Presentation

The zoom view of a TSE, TSP or TSS is a CRT display showing the following information:

state and status of the variable,

controller configuration data,

alarm criteria data,

logging criteria data,

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
00LJP0330JA1 TRANSFO PRINC LINE C-B PRES
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
VARIABLE STATUS VARIABLE STATE

VALUE : 1 VALID : YES

STATE : OPEN STATUS
TYPE : TSE : MONI
OU : 00LJP
ACQUISITION CONTROLLER

VALUE : 1 TYPE : P320

VALID : YES NAME :
FORCING : NO EQUIPMENT
U44A : 2
BOARD
: 2
ALARM NUMBER : 3
LOGGING

SENSE : APPEARING : YES

0 DISAPPEARING :
URGENCY : 1 NO
STATE 0 :
CLOSED
STATE 1 : OPEN
ARCHIVING : YES

Fig. 1 : Layout of a TSE, TSP or TSS zoom view

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 14
4.4. TSI ZOOM VIEW

4.4.1. Presentation

A TSI zoom view contains two pages.

The first page contains information similar to that associated with a TSE, excluding
information pertaining to the controller. Internal variables are calculated, not acquired.

The second page contains a reminder of the variable status and value, the calculation
table associated with the component variables (value, state label, quality and status of
each variable and the equations in Polish calculation. This page is accessible by clicking
on the button. The symmetric button, , is used to go back to the first page.

Each line of the variables comprising the calculation contains a button that gives
access to the zoom view of this variable.

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 15
 FIRST PAGE

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01KITTSI001

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC 1/2

VARIABLE STATUS
VARIABLE STATE

VALUE : 1 VALID : YES

STATE : OFF STATUS : MONI
TYPE : TSI
OU :01KIT
ACQUISITION CALCULATION

VALUE : 1 TYPE : POLISH

VALID : YES RANK : 200
ALARM LOGGING

SENSE : 0 APPEARING : YES

URGENCY : 1 DISAPPEARING: NO
STATE 0 : ON
STATE 1 : OFF
ARCHIVING : NO

SECOND PAGE

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01KITTSI001 MANUAL/AUTOMATIC
2/2

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
VALUE : 1 VALID : YES STATUS : MONI CALCULATION : POLISH

01KITTMI022/FR/LL 0 MONI
01KITTMI022/FR/LO 0 MONI

01KITTMI022/FR/HI 1 INVA MONI
01KITTMI022/FR/HH 1 MONI

+
END

Fig. 2 : Layout of a TSI zoom view

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 16
4.5. TME OR TMP ZOOM VIEW

4.5.1. Presentation

The TME or TMP zoom view of is a CRT display showing the static and dynamic
characteristics of the variable, together with the value of the variable represented in 3
different ways:

current value in digits,

current value in the form of a horizontal bargraph,

a curve showing the historical value of the variable as a percentage of the full
scale (max. 32 values).

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01GGRTE071 HP FRONT TEMP

VARIABLE STATE VARIABLE STATUS

VALUE : 18.17 DEG VALID : YES
STATE : STATUS : MONI
TYPE : TME
OU :01GGR REPLACEMENT:

ACQUISITION CONTROLLER
VALUE : 18.17 TYPE : P320
VALID : YES NAME : U28
FORCING : NO EQUIPMENT : 2
LOGGING BOARD : 4
ARCHIVING : NO CHANNEL : 2
x
FORMAT : INTEGER
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
t = x x scanning x filter display

THRESHOLDS PROCESSING
MAX : 150.00 3 SCANNING : 1s
V–HIGH: 132.00 1 HYSTERESIS : 0%
HIGH : ////// 0 FILTER : 0.00
LOW : ////// 0 FILTER DISPLAY. :2
V–LOW: 12.00 1
MIN : 0.00 3
Fig. 3 : Layout of a TME or TMP zoom view

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 17
4.5.2. Sensitive Zones

variable status menu button ,

threshold modification window button ,

Replacement value entry zone.

4.5.3. Graphic Representations

Bargraph showing the real time development of the variable including threshold
markers,

Curve showing historic values as a percentage of the full scale (Maximum 32

values). Values are traced from left to right from the updates performed at each
acquisition cycle. The time period shown is proportional to the variable’s
acquisition scanning. A filter coefficient allows only one point of n to be displayed.
— If a variable is replaced or invalid, the curve is displayed as a bold trace
(respectively from the input replacement value and from the last value
acquired),
— If a variable is inhibited, the curve is displayed in the ”Inhibition” color and as
a horizontal line from the last value acquired,
— When the variable is both on or off monitoring, the curve is displayed in the
”Normal state” color.

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 18
4.6. TMI ZOOM VIEW

4.6.1. Presentation

A TMI zoom view contains one or two pages (two pages for VO2 or VO8 calculations).

The first page contains information similar to that associated with a TME, except for
information concerning the controller, given that this an internal variable (no controller
reference nor addressing).

The second page contains details concerning the calculation table associated with the
TMI. A header recalls the value and the status of the variable. The button is used to
access this page. The symmetrical button is used to go back to the first page.

The calculation table includes the lines that describe the variables used in the calculation,
the lines that describe the operators and the lines that describe the coefficients.

Each line of a calculation component variable contains a button which gives access to
the zoom view of this variable.

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 19
 FIRST PAGE

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01KITTMI001 MEAN TEMPERATURE

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
VARIABLE STATE
1/2

VARIABLE STATUS
VALUE : 20.00 DEG VALID : YES
STATE : LOLO STATUS : MONI
TYPE : TMI
OU :01KIT REPLACEMENT:

ACQUISITION
VALUE : 20.00 CALCULATION
VALID : YES
TYPE : POLISH
LOGGING RANK : 302
ARCHIVING : NO
THRESHOLDS x

0 5 10 15 20 25 30
MAX : 250.00 3 t = x x scanning x filter disp
PROCESSING
V–HIGH: 190.00 1 SCANNING : 1s
HIGH : 160.00 0 HYSTERESIS : 0%
LOW : 80.00 0 FILTER : 0.00
V–LOW: 50.00 1 FILTER DISP. : 2
MIN : 0.00 3

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
SECOND PAGE

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01KITTMI001 MEAN TEMPERATURE 2/2

VALUE : 20.00 DEG VALID : YES STATUS : MONI CALCULATION : POLISH

01ABPTE009/FR/M 0.00 MONI
2.000

20.000
+
END

Fig. 4 : Layout of a TMI zoom view

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 20
 Calculation Code Tyoe of calculation : description of associated fields
V01 TYPE : DERIVED
TIME UNIT : minute
ASSOCIATED VARIABLE : 01GEVJT011/FR/M
V02 TYPE : POLISH
V03 TYPE : STORAGE
ASSOCIATED VARIABLE : 01KITTMI105/FR/M
V04 TYPE : AVERAGE
PERIOD M.Y.D. : 2mn
ASSOCIATED VARIABLE : 01CRFTE001/FR/M
V05 TYPE : AVERAGE WITH STORAGE
ASSOCIATED VARIABLE : 01KITTMI022/FR/M
V06 TYPE : COUNTER
PULSE WEIGHT: 1.00
TYPE OF TRANSITION : 1 –> 0
ASSOCIATED VARIABLE : 01CRFTE001/FR/LO
V07 TYPE : RUNNING TIME
SAMPLING COEFFICIENT : 1.00
ASSOCIATED VARIABLE : 01KITTMI001/FR/H
V08 TYPE : AVERAGE OF A GROUP OF VARIABLES
V09 TYPE : TYPICAL DEVIATION
ASSOCIATED VARIABLE : 01GRHYN001/FR/M

4.6.2. Sensitive Zones

Variable status menu button ,

Threshold modification window button ,

Replacement value entry zone.

Button to access zoom views of the calculation component variables (only for the
second page that defines calculations VO2 and VO8) .
For the various types of calculation, an identical button is located in the zone that
gives the type of calculation in question.

4.6.3. Graphic Representations

Bargraph showing the real time development of the variable including threshold
markers,

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 21

Curve showing historic values as a percentage of the full scale (Maximum 32
values). Values are traced from left to right from the updates performed at each
acquisition cycle. The time period shown is proportional to the variable’s
acquisition scanning. A filter coefficient allows only one point of n to be displayed.
— If a variable is replaced or invalid, the curve is displayed as a bold trace
(respectively from the input replacement value and from the last value
acquired),
— If a variable is inhibited, the curve is displayed in the ”Inhibition” color and as
a horizontal line from the last value acquired,
— When the variable is both on or off monitoring, the curve is displayed in the
”Normal state” color.

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 22
4.7. TMO ZOOM VIEW

4.7.1. Presentation

The TMO zoom view is a CRT display showing the static and dynamic characteristics of
the variable, together with the value of the variable represented in 2 different ways:

current value in digits,

current value in the form of a horizontal bargraph,

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
02KITYN041 NOMINAL TURBINE YIELD
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
VARIABLE STATE
VALUE : 70.00 %
NEW VALUE : –––
STATE : //////
TYPE : TMO
OU :02KIT 0 20 40 60 80 100 %

ACQUISITION
VALUE : 70.00
VALID : //////
LOGGING
ARCHIVING : NO

THRESHOLDS
MAX : 100.00 3 PROCESSING
V–HIGH: ////// 0 SCANNING : /////
HIGH : ////// 0 HYSTERESIS : 0%
LOW : ////// 0 FILTER : 0.00
V–LOW: ////// 0
MIN : 0.00 3

Fig. 5 : Layout of a TMO zoom view

4.7.2. Sensitive Zone

Data entry field for value assigned to the TMO.

4.7.3. Graphic Representation

Bargraph showing the current value of the variable.

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 23
4.8. VRE OR VRP ZOOM VIEW

4.8.1. Presentation

The zoom view of a VRE or a VRP contains a page showing the characteristics of the
variable.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
02GSTXU020
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
GEN STATOR WTR PP1

VARIABLE STATE LIST OF STATES VARIABLE STATUS

VALUE : 7 0: State 0 VALID : YES
STATE : State 7 1: State 1 STATUS : MONI
TYPE : VRE 2: State 2 REPLACEMENT :
O. U.. :02GST 3: State 3 ON MONITORING :
4: ...
ACQUISITION 5: State 5 CONTROLLER
VALUE : 5 6: State 6 TYPE : P320
VALID : YES 7: State 7 NAME : U44A
8: ... EQUIPMENT : 0
9: State 9 BOARD : /
10: State 10 NUMBER : 12
11: State 11 LOGGING
12: State 12 VARIATION : YES
13: ...
14: ...
15: ...

Fig. 6 : Layout of a VRE zoom view

4.8.2. Sensitive Zones

Button for setting the variable on monitoring ,

Replacement value entry zone.

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 24
4.9. VRI ZOOM VIEW

4.9.1. Presentation

The zoom view of a VRI contains a page which gives a breakdown of calculation
components.

The first part describes the input tables of the VRI that includes the logical variables and
the threshold overshoots of component analog variables along with their state and their
status and the sensitive zones used by the operator to modify their status. The second
part contains the truth table that gives as output the value of the VRI among the 16
possible values.

Each line of input component variables contains a button that fives access to the zoom

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
view of this variable.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
02GSTXU020 GEN STATOR WTR PP1

VARIABLE STATE VARIABLE STATUS

VALUE : 6 VALID : YES
OU. :02GST STATUS : MONI
TRUTH TABLE : TVRI01 REPLACEMENT:

ACQUISITION ON MONITORING:
VALUE : 0 OUTPUT
VALID : YES 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
INPUTS inhibition 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
1 INV 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2
2 02GST011JA1/FR/M 1 MONI 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 3
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 4
3 02GSTUS607/FR/M 0 MONI 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 5
4 02GSTUS609/FR/M 1 MONI 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 6 
5 END 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 7
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 8
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 9
7 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 10
8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 11
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 12
13
14
15

Fig. 7 : Layout of a VRI zoom view

4.9.2. Sensitive Zones

Button for accessing zoom views of variables that make up the input table,

Button for setting the variable on monitoring ,

Replacement value entry zone.

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 25
4.10. ZOOM VIEW OF A CONTROL BLOCK

4.10.1. Presentation

A zoom view of a control block contains two pages on which the main remote control
commands are represented (up to 4 TC), associated remote setpoint values (up to 2 TVC)
as well as identifications and values of associated TM (up to 6 TM), TS (up to 6 TS) and
VRI (up to 4 VRE or VRI).

This view gives access to the zoom views of associated TC, TVC, TS, TM and VRI.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ FIRST PAGE

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01CEXLCV001 CTRL CONDENSER LEVEL 1/2

VARIABLE STATE VARIABLE STATUS

TYPE : ORG WINDOW MED03 LOCKED
O.U. : 01CEX CMD–AUTO
MODEL : COND05 ALGORITHM ALG04
CMD 1 TVC
AUTHORIZATION TS
01CEXINT001 01CEXINT003 01CEXINT005
TYPE : TSI TYPE : TSI
AUTHORIZATION: YES AUTHORIZATION : YES TYPE : TSI
VALUE :1 VALUE :1 AUTHORIZATION : YES
01CEXINT004 VALUE :1
01CEXINT002
TYPE : TSI TYPE : TSI
AUTHORIZATION YES AUTHORIZATION: YES
VALUE :1 VALUE :1
COMMANDS SETPOINTS
01CEXPHICS001 //////////// 01CEXPHICS003
TYPE : TCE TYPE : TYPE : TVC
AUTHORIZATION: YES AUTHORIZATION : AUTHORIZATION :
VALUE :0 VALUE : NO
VALUE :0
01CEXHICN001
//////////// ////////////
TYPE : TCI
TYPE : TYPE :
AUTHORIZATION: YES
AUTHORIZATION : AUTHORIZATION :
VALUE :
VALUE : VALUE :

Fig. 8 : Layout of a control block view

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 26
 SECOND PAGE

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01CEXLCV001 CTRL CONDENSER LEVEL 2/2

ASSOCIATED TS
01CEXSE001 01CEXSI002 01CEXSE003
TYPE : TSE TYPE : TSI TYPE : TSE
VALUE :1 VALUE :0 VALUE :0
//////////// //////////// ////////////
TYPE : TYPE : TYPE :
VALUE : VALUE : VALUE :

ASSOCIATED TM
01CEXME001 //////////// 01CEXME002
TYPE : TME TYPE : TYPE : TME
VALUE : 34.12 VALUE : VALUE : 30.8

01CEXMI003 TYPE //////////// ////////////

: TMI TYPE : TYPE :
VALUE : 20.5 VALUE : VALUE :
ASSOCIATED VRI
01CEXVRI001 ////////////
TYPE : VRI TYPE :
VALUE : VALUE :

//////////// ////////////
TYPE : TYPE :
VALUE : VALUE :

Fig. 9 : Layout of a control block

4.10.2. Sensitive zones

Button for accessing the control block locking menu

Button for accessing the zoom views of the associated variables

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 27
4.11. TCE ZOOM VIEW

4.11.1. Presentation

The TCE zoom view is a one page CRT display showing the main characteristics of the
telecommand in question.

The operator can perform no action from a TCE zoom view apart from accessing the zoom
views of associated variables.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01CEXHSUA001 CONTROL CONDENSER LEVEL

VARIABLE STATE
VALUE :0
STATE : STOP
TYPE : TCE
O.U. : 01CEX
ASSOCIATED VARIABLE CONTROLLER
CONTROL : 01CEXYS600
VALUE :1 TYPE : P320
AUTHORIZATION : 01CEXLSLL001 NAME : U28
ADDRESS 1 : 1
VALUE :0
ADDRESS 2 : 2
SENSE :1
DEF EXECUTION : 01KCZTSP001
VALUE :0
LOGGING INFORMATION
PRINTOUT : NO
TYPE : IMPULS (D)
STATE 0 : STOP
CYCLE : FR
STATE 1 : RUN

Fig. 10 : Layout of a TCE zoom view

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 28
4.12. TCI ZOOM VIEW

4.12.1. Presentation

The TCI zoom view is a one page CRT display containing information similar to that
associated to a TCE with the exception of the data regarding the P320 controller (internal
variable).

The operator can perform no action from a TCI zoom view apart from accessing the zoom
views of associated variables.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01CEXXS00 CNDR LVL CTRL VV POSI DISPL DMD

VARIABLE STATE
VALUE :0
STATE : STOP
TYPE : TCI
O.U. : 01CEX

ASSOCIATED VARIABLE
CONTROL : 01CEXTMP005
VALUE :1
AUTHORIZATION : 01CEXLSLL001
VALUE :0
SENSE :1

LOGGING INFORMATION
PRINTOUT : NO TYPE : HOLD
STATE 0 : STOP
STATE 1 : START

Fig. 11 : Layout of a TCI zoom view

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 29
4.13. TVCE ZOOM VIEW

4.13.1. Presentation

The TVCE zoom view is a one CRT view showing the main characteristics of the setpoint
instruction in question.

The operator can perform no action from a TCI zoom view apart from accessing the zoom
views of associated variables.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01CEXHICN001 CONDENSER LVL CTRL VV COMD DMD
0 20 40 60 80 100 %

VARIABLE STATE LIMITS

VALUE : 15 % MAX : 100
STATE : ////// MIN : 0
TYPE : TVCE
O.U. : 01CEX
ASSOCIATED VARIABLE CONTROLLER
CONTROL : 01CEXYS600
VALUE : 20.42 TYPE : P320
NAME : U28
AUTHORIZATION : 01CEXLSLL001
VALUE :0 ADDRESS : 20
FORMAT : INTEGER
SENSE :1
EXECUTION CH : 01KCZTSP001
VALUE :0 CONTROLLER DATA
LOGGING TYPE : //////
PRINTOUT : NO CYCLE : FR

Fig. 12 : Layout of a TVCE zoom view

4.13.2. Graphic Display

Bargraph showing the value of the TVCE.

4.13.3. Sensitive Zones

Button opening the limit definition window (whenever there is an associated

variable that defines the limits)

Button to access zoom views of associated variables

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 30
4.14. TVCI ZOOM VIEW

4.14.1. Presentation

The TCI zoom view is a one page CRT display containing information similar to that
associated to a TCE with the exception of the data regarding the P320 controller (internal
variable).

The operator can perform no action from a TCI zoom view apart from accessing the zoom
views of associated variables.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01CEXHICN001 CONDENSER LVL CTRL VV COMD DMD
0 20 40 60 80 100 %

VARIABLE STATE LIMITS

VALUE : 15 % MAX : 100
STATE : ////// MIN : 0
TYPE : TVCI
O.U. : 01CEX
ASSOCIATED VARIABLE
CONTROL : 01CEXYS600
VALUE : 20.42
AUTHORIZATION : 01CEXLSLL001
VALUE :0
SENSE :1

LOGGING
PRINTOUT : NO

Fig. 13 : Layout of a TVCI zoom view

4.14.2. Graphic Display

Bargraph showing the value of the TVCI.

4.14.3. Sensitive Zones

Button opening the limit definition window (whenever there is an associated

variable that defines the limits)

Button to access zoom views of associated variables

.
P–TP09–A42045–V4 E B REV B
DTS Operator Management of Variables Sheet 31
 DTS
Sequence Monitoring

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
This document is the exclusive property of ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42046-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 17 19
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10/12/98 Translation of the French document rev. B GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1. DESCRIPTION OF P320 AUTOMATION CELL SEQUENCES . . . . . 2
1.2. SEQUENCE STATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3. CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.4. DESCRIPTION OF THE SEQUENCE MONITORING FUNCTION . . 7

2. DESCRIPTION OF VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1. DIRECTORY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2. SEQUENCE MONITORING VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3. CRITERIA VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.1. DIRECTORY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.2. HISTORICAL SEQUENCE VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.3. SEQUENCE CRITERIA VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 1-ii
1. Introduction

The Sequence Monitoring function runs the man–machine interface used to monitor
sequences directed by the P320 automation cells.

1.1. DESCRIPTION OF P320 AUTOMATION CELL SEQUENCES

A sequence is a series of successive actions, known as steps, carried out on the process
equipment. These steps are executed in a given order depending on the presence of
different criteria (logical variables).

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 2
1.2. SEQUENCE STATES

A sequence is characterized by the sequence step which is being executed, and by the
sequence state, at any given moment. The sequence state is data which is used to
indicate whether the sequence is running correctly, whether any missing results have
been detected subsequent to one or more step actions, whether the criteria that
determine the operation of the sequence are absent, or whether the sequence is held or
stopped as a result of an operator (or automatic) command.

For monitoring purposes, sequence states enable the historical record of a transient
process command phase to be established.

A sequence may be characterized by any one of the following six states:

— UNTRIGGERED: the sequence is not operational. The sequence cannot be
started without a startup command and the presence of a certain number of
initial criteria (startup criteria). When the final step in a sequence has been
executed normally, the sequence automatically reverts to UNTRIGGERED
state.
— IN PROGRESS: the sequence progresses as the necessary criteria, or
reports, associated to each step are obtained. Transition from one step to the
next is further conditioned by progress criteria or conditions.
— FAULT: the step reports have not been received within the allotted time. The
sequence is stopped at the step which has caused the state change.
If all the startup criteria are present, the sequence reverts to IN PROGRESS
on operator (or automatic) command. If a startup criterion is missing, the
sequence remains FAULT. A hold command has no effect in this state.
— HELD: When the conditions necessary for the sequence to proceed are
missing from the report associated to a step, the sequence is HELD.
A sequence can also be HELD by the appearance of a manual or automatic
hold command. The progress of the sequence is suspended until the
operator gives a restart command. Restart is conditional on the presence of
the startup criteria. If a startup criterion is missing when the command is
issued, the sequence will switch to FAULT.
— GIVEN UP: the sequence is GIVEN UP from any state (except
UNTRIGGERED) if any criterion necessary throughout the execution of the
sequence (permanent criterion) disappears or if a manual or automatic stop
command is issued. Current action is interrupted immediately.
The GIVEN UP state is transient, providing the origin of the interruption for
sequence monitoring purposes. Immediately afterwards, the sequence
becomes UNTRIGGERED.

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 3
 — UNKNOWN: the automation cell is detected as defective by the CDP
function, or the CDP function is detected as defective by the CDS function.
In both cases the sequences associated to the automation cells concerned
switch to the UNKNOWN state. A general sequence check is performed on
recovery of the automation cell or of the CDP function, in order to update the
CENTRALOG system as to actual sequence states.
In all the sequence states mentioned above (except UNKNOWN) a startup or restart
command is only effective if no other hold command has been given and if no permanent
criteria are missing. If a stop command has been issued, the state remains unchanged if
the sequence is UNTRIGGERED or switches to GIVEN UP otherwise (higher priority
relative to startup command).

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 4
1.3. CRITERIA

Logical criteria are classed as follows according to their functional role in the sequence:
— sequencing criteria,
— step criteria.
Sequencing criteria are data used to condition the execution of a sequence and its
application. These criteria include:
— commands: startup, hold and stop commands (manual or automatic).
— permanent criteria: criteria which must be present at all times during the
sequence for the sequence to be executed.
— startup criteria: criteria checked each time the sequence is started or
restarted, to ensure that execution is feasible.
Step criteria reflect the actions undertaken relative to the process and the results
obtained:
— reports: results that prove the actions associated with each step have been
correctly carried out on the process.
— progress conditions: criteria associated to a step, used to judge whether the
following step(s) can be executed without difficulty.
The sequencing criteria and the step criteria (for each step) together form the sequence
criteria. These are transmitted in turn by the P320 automation cells to the CENTRALOG
system in the form of logical criteria named as sequence monitoring criteria.

In order to know precisely the cause of the missing criteria, an external variable (TS or TC
type) may be associated to each criterion.

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 5
 UNTRIG-
GERED



IN
PROGRESS




⁄ 

HELD FAULT GIVEN UP

Transitions between the different sequence states

: startup command (manual or automatic), plus

correct initial criteria, plus
correct permanent criteria, plus
no stop or hold command

 : final sequence step

 : stop command (manual or automatic), or permanent criterion absent

 : start command (manual or automatic), plus

incorrect initial criteria , or hold command

 : incorrect execution reports at expiry of timeout (TTLE: time too long for
execution)

 : return to UNTRIGGERED state

: progress condition absent after reception of reports, or appearance of a

hold command (manual or automatic)

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 6
1.4. DESCRIPTION OF THE SEQUENCE MONITORING FUNCTION

The Sequence Monitoring function is used to visualize the step–by–step real time
progress of the sequences.

Sequences are organized into groups when simultaneous sequencing, or automatic

sequence linkage, is required to obtain a multi–sequence historical record. Each
sequence may belong to up to 6 groups. A group may be composed of only one
sequence.

These groups are defined during customization of the database and cannot be modified
on–line by the operator.

A sequence is monitored from the corresponding group view.

Important:

All sequences, whether activated automatically or by the operator, are fully directed by the
automation cell. The automation cell communicates the necessary data to the
CENTRALOG system.

The Sequence Monitoring function only allows the observation of the progress of the
sequence. In the event of abnormal running, the operator has other CENTRALOG
functions at his disposal to solve the problems displayed on the monitoring views and to
restart the sequence (eg. by using a command on a control view).

When an automation cell is lost or when the link with the cell is lost, the corresponding
sequences are considered to be in an unknown state as regards CENTRALOG.

Logging:

Sequence Monitoring data which can be logged (depending on the option selected during
customization of the system) is as follows :

D steps accomplished,

D the different state changes and criteria.

The logging choice can be defined during customization for each type of sequence state.

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 7
2. Description of Views

There are three types of view associated to the sequence monitoring function:

— the directory view,

— sequence monitoring group views,
— criteria views (one view for each sequence).

2.1. DIRECTORY VIEW

The ”Sequence Monitoring” directory view lists the existing sequences in all of the
groups. When a sequence belongs to a number of groups, it is shown in the same number
of lines (see Fig. 4).

The directory view gives access to the historical view of the group (or groups) to which
each sequence belongs and to the criteria view for each sequence.

The sequence monitoring directory view is of full–screen, multi–page type and contains
various static or dynamic data as detailed below:

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 8
 Icon Help

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
? TITLE

Access to
historic view

FMA01 LUBRICATING OIL CIRCUITS UNTRIGGERED SMG02 U44A H C

Sequence ID code Sequence label Sequence Sequence Controller Access to

state group name criteria view
label ID
Fig. 1 : Layout of the directory view

Static Elements
— Sequence ID code (maximum 14 characters),
— Sequence label( maximum 32 characters),
— ID code of group to which sequence belongs (maximum 14 characters),
— Name of controller running the sequence (maximum 14 characters).

Dynamic Elements
— Sequence state label (UNTRIGGERED, IN PROGRESS, FAULT, HELD,
GIVEN UP).

Sensitive Zones
— Sequence monitoring view access button H

— Criteria view access button C

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 9
 Display Modes
— Each line is displayed in a color that represents the state of the sequence in
question:

sequence state color

untriggered : sequence untriggered color
in progress : sequence in progress color
given up : sequence given up color
held : sequence held color
fault : sequence fault color
unknown : sequence doubtful color

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 10
2.2. SEQUENCE MONITORING VIEW

A sequence monitoring view is used to display the progression of sequences in a group.

This view may be accessed by the operator during the normal running of the sequence or
on the occurrence of a hold associated to a fault in the progress of the sequence.

Icon Help

? TITLE 1/3
Erase button SEQUENCE MONITORING

Progression of
sequences
Incorrect
criterion

Sequence Sequence Criteria view

label Step label access button
state label

27/02/97 15:23:30 450 FMA01 LUBRICATING OIL CIRCUITS FAULT STEP 5–OIL HP START
MAIN TRANSFO WINDING TEMP NST-2 01GEVUS001

Sequence ID code Criterion state Zoom view

label access button
Criterion label Associated variable
ID code
Fig. 2 : Historical sequence group view

This view occupies several pages and contains up to 200 events in chronological order.
An event may be:
— a sequence state change,
— a sequence step change,
— a hold criterion.

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 11
 If a sequence goes to HELD, FAULT or GIVEN UP on the historical view, this state change
is logged, together with the list of criteria at the time the sequence was held, faulty or given
up.

Criteria present when the sequence is held, faulty or given up remain displayed on the
view.

The view is updated by new data lines being added at the bottom of the list. The oldest
(topmost) event is deleted and the whole set moves up to make room for any new event.
Depending on the option selected during system configuration, the historic view can be
cleared when all the sequences in the group have reverted to UNTRIGGERED state after
execution and when one of them restarts (IN PROGRESS). It can also be cleared on
operator request.

The title of the view shows the ID code and label of the group. This line is followed by the
sub–title ”SEQUENCE MONITORING”.

Each page may contain up to 20 events.

Dynamic Elements
— Line describing a step, or a sequence state change:
D date and time

D sequence ID code and label,

D sequence state label (UNTRIGGERED, IN PROGRESS, FAULT, HELD,

GIVEN UP, UNKNOWN),

D label describing the step (maximum 32 characters) when the state is IN

PROGRESS, FAULT.
— Line describing the incorrect criterion:
D label of the criterion variable,

D criterion state label,

D ID code of the associated variable (when there is one).

Sensitive Zones
— Criteria view access button ,
— Button accessing the zoom view of the variable associated to an incorrect
criteria ,
— Historic erase button .

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 12
 Display Modes
— Each line is displayed in a color that represents the state of the sequence in
question:

sequence state color

untriggered : sequence untriggered color
in progress : sequence in progress color
given up : sequence given up color
held : sequence held color
fault : sequence fault color
unknown : sequence doubtful color

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 13
2.3. CRITERIA VIEW

The view of the criteria associated to each sequence presents the same criterion data as
the sequence monitoring group view.

However, where the sequence monitoring group view is a historical record of sequence
progression, the criteria view is updated in real time whatever the state.
Consequently only those criteria which are still missing are shown on this view.

When a sequence is UNTRIGGERED, the view is blank (message : ”EMPTY LIST”) if all
the criteria required to start the sequence are present. For a sequence in progress, the
view is also blank if all the criteria required to pass from one step to the next are present.

The title comprises the ID code and label of the sequence. Below the title the following
information is displayed:
— a sub–title: ”LIST OF STARTUP CRITERIA” if the sequence is
UNTRIGGERED, ”LIST OF INCORRECT CRITERIA” if the sequence is
HELD, FAULT or GIVEN UP, or ”SEQUENCE IN PROGRESS” if the
sequence is IN PROGRESS.
— the indication ”SEQUENCE STATE :” followed by the sequence state
(UNTRIGGERED, IN PROGRESS etc.), followed by the label of the current
step.

Icon Help

? TITLE
Group(s)
LIST OF INCORRECT CRITERIA associated to the
sequence
Current step SEQUENCE STATE :
label Group view
access button

Zoom view
Label access button

State label
Associated
variable ID
code

Fig. 3 : Criteria view

Static Elements
— Name(s) of the group(s) associated to the sequence.

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 14
 Dynamic Elements
— Label of current step (sub–title), when the state is IN PROGRESS, FAULT,
— Criterion label,
— Criterion state label,
— Associated variable ID code.

Sensitive Zones
— Button accessing associated sequence group view,
— Criteria zoom view button.

Display Modes
— The state of the sequence and the step label in the sub–title area are
displayed in the color that corresponds to the state of the sequence.

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 15
3. Utilization

3.1. DIRECTORY VIEW

The following views can be accessed from the Sequence Monitoring Directory View:

D sequence criteria view,

D historical sequence monitoring view.

These two views are accessed by selecting the ”Criteria” and ”Historical” options
respectively in the menu associated to the sequence in question.

3.2. HISTORICAL SEQUENCE VIEW

The following views and windows can be accessed from the sequence monitoring group
view :

D directory view,

D sequence criteria view,

D criteria zoom view,

D associated views.

3.3. SEQUENCE CRITERIA VIEW

The following views can be accessed from the sequence criteria view:

D directory view,

D group monitoring view,

D associated variable zoom view.

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 16
 The different ways of accessing the sequence monitoring views are shown in Fig. 4 .

Directory view

Select historical

SM1 ------------ Group i H C

Select
SM1 ------------ Group j H C criterion
Select historical

Criterion view
Sequence 1

Group i
Group j
Criterion A -----------
Criterion B -----------
Criterion C -----------
Zoom
view
Group j historical view
Group j

SM1 -------------------
SM8 -------------------

Group i historical view

Group i

SM3 -------------------
SM1 -------------------
SM5 -------------------

Fig. 4 : Linkage of sequence monitoring views

.
P–TP09–A42046–V4 E B REV B
DTS Sequence Monitoring Sheet 17
 DTS
Process Control

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42047-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 19 22
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10.12.98 GFE

PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2. PROCESS CONTROL FROM MIMICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2.1. TYPES OF CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1.1. Direct Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1.2. Designation by Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3. CONTROL WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1. LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.1. Control Block Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.2. Dynamic Elements Concerning Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.3. Command Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.4. Message Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2.1. Designating a Control Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2.2. Entering an Analog Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

4. CONTROL BLOCK VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4.1. CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2. DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.3.1. Modifying Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.3.2. Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.3.3. View Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
APPENDIX A LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
A.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
A.2. Control models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
A.3. Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
A.4. Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
A.5. Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
A.6. List of Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
A.7. Control Windows and Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 1-ii
 List of figures

Fig. 1 : Displaying a control block window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Fig. 2 : Generic command buttons for a control valve block . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Fig. 3 : Generic command buttons for a control block with bias . . . . . . . . 6
Fig. 4 : List of execution condition variables of a TC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Fig. 5 : Control window Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fig. 6 : Control block view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 1-iii
1. Introduction

The purpose of process control functions is to enable the operator to transmit commands
to the process which can be used to fix or to modify a state or an operational mode.

The variables which correspond to these commands are of two kinds:

D logical control variables known as TCs (TeleCommands) used to transmit

stop/start commands for an actuator or a group of actuators, or to modify an
operational mode,

D analog setpoint control variables known as TVCs used to modify setpoints in

control loops or to modify the position of a process control block.

The characteristics of these variables are described in detail in the Volume ”Data
Description and Management”.

The value of these control variables can be modified in different ways:

— manually, by operator action on a control mimic or control loop view,
— on operational schedules entered by the operator in order to program
changes in the setpoint value over time.
Control dialogues enable the operator to issue process commands mainly via control
windows containing dynamic data and sensitive zones relative to the control blocks in
question. They are managed by processing algorithms.

The standard CENTRALOG system includes a library of processing algorithms and

command transmission button pictograms.

A list of algorithms and pictograms is provided in the Appendix to this document.

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 2
2. Process Control from Mimics

2.1. TYPES OF CONTROL

Control actions are performed by clicking on sensitive zones in the mimic views. An action
may be one of two types: direct designation of a TC, a TVC or a TMO, or designation of
a control block by window.

2.1.1. Direct Designation

This type of control is designed to enable rapid activation of a TC or modification of a TVC

or TMO. By clicking on the mimic zone representing the variable, the operator transmits
the telecommand directly. The operation needs no confirmation and is done after
checking.

2.1.2. Designation by Window

This type of function is used to activate TCs and/or TVCs belonging to a control block
after the relevant control window has been opened. The operation is performed after a
check, with or without confirmation.

Each block is associated to a button containing, for instance, its ID code. When the button
is designated, the control window associated to the block opens in its place (by default).

The operator can move the window around the screen by clicking on the title area of the
window.

The window is closed and cleared from the screen as follows:

D by clicking on the close button ,

D by displaying a new full screen view on the current CRT.

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 3
 Control windows mask a part of the mimic view. When the window is closed, the masked
area reappears with updated dynamic data.

The operator can open, up to three control windows simultaneously on any one CRT
screen. Control operations can thus be performed on up to three blocks at any time on
each of the operator station CRTs.

When one or more control windows are displayed, dialogues remain available in the
dialogue zone on the current screen, and in the views displayed on the other screens,.

Locking / Testing:

A control block may be ”locked”, for maintenance purposes for example. In this case,
command via the control window is impossible. A control block may be also set ”under
test”, then commands stay allowed. Control blocks are locked and set under test via the
control block zoom view.

CONTROL MIMIC

Control block
Button
associated to
the block

CONTROL MIMIC

Displays
window
associated to
the block
.

Click on button

Fig. 1 : Displaying a control block window

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 4
3. Control Windows

3.1. LAYOUT

Control block windows contain the following:

D data relative to the control block concerned,

D dynamic elements linked to analog or logical variables,

D command buttons, a confirm button and a cancel button,

D execution condition buttons,

D a message display zone.

3.1.1. Control Block Data

The control block data includes the ID code displayed in the title zone.

3.1.2. Dynamic Elements Concerning Variables

Dynamic elements in the form of digital counters, bargraphs or trends show the current
values of analog or logical process variables such as measurements, setpoints,
commands, biases.

3.1.3. Command Elements

There are two types of command element: logical command buttons and analog controls.

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 5
3.1.3.1. Logical Command Buttons

Up to four buttons can be assigned to the logical command of the process function
associated to the designated control block.

Commands are executed by clicking on these buttons.

The function of each button is indicated by a pictogram displayed in the button.

For certain types of control block, the operator is required to confirm the request by
means of the confirm button. The operator may also cancel the command by means of
the cancel button.

CLOSE HOLD OPEN

Fig. 2 : Generic command buttons for a control valve block

AUTO/MANU BIAS DISPLAY

SETPOINT/VALUE
Fig. 3 : Generic command buttons for a control block with bias

For certain types of control block, an execution condition button may appear, located
under the command button. The pictogram of this button indicates either a normal
condition (a command can be sent), or an incorrect condition. Designating the button
opens a window showed below, giving a list of variables which determine, through an OR
operation, the execution condition of this TC. Each variable appears with its ID code, label
and current state. An indicator is displayed on the left of the ID code of variable(s) whose
current state prevents the command to be sent.

The variable giving the execution condition and its component variables are defined in a
synthetic alarm group.

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 6
3.1.3.2. Analog Control Elements

Analog controls consist of a slidebar and a data input field.

Slidebar:

The control can be adjusted by moving the cursor along the slidebar or by clicking on the
increment/decrement buttons.

+0,2%

–0,2%

Data Input Field:

The data input field enables the operator to input values directly via the alphanumeric
keyboard. Data is input after designation of the numerical input zone.

3.1.4. Message Zone

A zone reserved for messages guides the operator in the use of the various buttons and
signals any errors detected by the command check function.

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 7
 Fig. 5 : Control window Example

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 8
3.2. UTILIZATION

3.2.1. Designating a Control Block

Clicking on the button located beside the control block causes a control window to be
displayed. The window can be moved about the screen by clicking on its top edge.

The block remains selected until the operator closes the window or selects another option
such as displaying a new view on the current CRT screen.

In the event that the block is locked, a message to this effect is displayed. In this case the
only action permitted is to close the window.

When an execution condition button is displayed under the command button, its
designation opens a window giving the list of the variables which determine the execution
condition. Variables which prevent the command to be sent are displayed in this window
with a ! indicator. The component zoom views and the synthesis group view can be
accessed by clicking on the button.

3.2.2. Entering an Analog Value

The data input field becomes active after the following actions:
— position the cursor within the zone,
— click the mouse button.
The data input field appears as depressed.

The ”BACKSPACE” and ”DELETE” keys can be use to correct data entered via the
keyboard. Numerical data can be entered either in decimal or scientific format.

In all cases, data input must be completed by designating the button

After confirming the input by , the instruction is transmitted.

If the increment button is designated before confirmation, the numerical value entered is
replaced by the increased value.

If the cancel button is designated before confirmation, the numerical value entered
is ignored and deleted. The window remains open.

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 9
4. Control Block Views

4.1. CHARACTERISTICS

A control block view enables up to eight control windows to be displayed simultaneously.

These views are intended to facilitate the transmission of commands and setpoints by
grouping together all the requisite data.

The references of the control blocks managed by the windows are defined for each view
during customization of the database.

These control blocks can also be re–assigned on–line by the operator.

A list of control block views is provided by the Control Block View Directory. The Directory
View is accessed by clicking on the icon.

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 10
4.2. DESCRIPTION

A control block view is composed of eight fixed zones. Accessing the view causes the
windows assigned to the view to be directly displayed. Zones which have not been
assigned contain a data input field enabling new control block references to be entered.

Fig. 6 : Control block view

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 11
4.3. UTILIZATION

4.3.1. Modifying Assignments

Window assignments can be modified as follows:

D close the window (if it has already been defined) by designating the close button

D enter a new reference in the data input field .

The new window is displayed by designation of the button located under the entry area.
This assignment modification has no effect on the other screens on which the view is
displayed until a new display is requested.

A control block can be deleted from a window by clicking on the button.

4.3.2. Zoom View

The control block zoom view can be accessed by clicking on the button and by
selecting the zoom option in the menu.

4.3.3. View Linkage

The principle used in the linkage of views to control block views is the same as that used
for y = f(t) curve views.

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 12
APPENDIX A Library

A.1. Introduction

The processing that follows designation of a control button on a mimic is determined by

the name attributed to the button by the editor DVdraw using the following syntax:
PI: <processing n.> <parameter> (<A/I> [<n.OS>])

The last, optional parameter is used to define the operator station(s) which are
able (A) or ineligible (I) to transmit the command in question.

1 – Direct logic command with no verification

Syntax: PI: 16 <TC ID code> (<A/I> [<OS n.>])

2 – Direct logic command with verification

Syntax: PI: 18 <TC ID code> <proc.> (<A/I> [<OS n.>])

The processing defined by the parameter following the ID code is used for
verification by authorization TS, associated TS and execution check.

3 – Direct analog commmand with verification

Syntax: PI: 19 <TVC or TMO ID code> (<A/I> [<OS n.>])

TMOs are controlled with verification of their limits. TVCs are controlled with
verification of their fixed limits, of their authorization TM, of their associated TM
and with an execution check.

4 – Command by control window

Syntax: PI: 13 <block ID code> (<A/I> [<OS n.>])

Processing is determined by the algorithm chosen for the block in question in the
database.

This appendix lists the contents of the standard CENTRALOG library used for control
block windows.

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 13
 A control block is composed of variables: TCs, TVCs, TSs etc. The block is processed
according to a control model, which itself consists of:

D a control window type (graphic representation of the elements constituting the

block),

D an algorithm type defining the required checks and confirmations.

A.2. Control models

1 – Confirmed single pulse logical command

2 – Unconfirmed single pulse logical command

3 – Unconfirmed dual pulse logical command

4 – Manual control command

5 – Auto/manu control command

6 – Auto/manu bias control command

7 – Auto/manu control command with fixed setpoint and measurement

8 – Auto/manu bias control command with fixed setpoint and measurement

9 – Manual setpoint with measurement

10 – Auto/manual setpoint with measurement

11 – Auto/manu setpoint and auto/manu command with measurement

12 – Incremental setpoint

13 – Measurement

14 – Incremental setpoint and bias

15 – Single logical setpoint confirmed with choice

16 – Single logical setpoint unconfirmed with choice

Hydraulic type control models:

1 – Confirmed single pulse logical command

2 – Unconfirmed single pulse logical command

3 – Logic command with availability of commands

4 – Manual setpoint with measurement

5 – Manual setpoint with command

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 14
A.3. Algorithms

1 – Confirmed single pulse 4 TC logical command

2 – Unconfirmed single pulse 4 TC logical command

3 – Unconfirmed dual pulse 4 TC logical command

4 – 1 TVC control command

5 – 2 TVC control command

6 – 1 TVC setpoint

7– 2 TVC setpoint

8 – Logical command 3 TC single confirmed 1 TC dual unconfirmed

9 – Logical command 3 TC single unconfirmed 1 TC dual unconfirmed

Hydraulic type algorithms:

1 – Confirmed single pulse 4 TC logical command

2 – Unconfirmed single pulse 4 TC logical command

3 – 1 TVC setpoint with command

A.4. Windows

1 – Confirmed logical command

2 – Unconfirmed logical command

3 – Manual control command

4 – Auto/manu control command

5 – Auto/manu bias control command

6 – Auto/manu control command with fixed setpoint and measurement

7 – Auto/manu bias control command with fixed setpoint and measurement

8 – Manual setpoint with measurement

9 – Auto/manu setpoint with measurement

10 – Auto/manu setpoint and auto/manu command with measurement

11 – Target incremental setpoint

12 – Measurement

13 – Delta incremental setpoint

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 15
 Hydraulic type windows :

1 – Confirmed logical command

2 – Unconfirmed logical command

3 – Logic command with availability of commands

4 – Manual setpoint with measurement

5 – Manual setpoint with command

A.5. Checks

For the algorithms and windows detailed above, the following standard checks are
performed:

D Check on control block access level

D Check on control block locked/unlocked state

D Check on TC access level

D Check on TVC access level

D Check on the TS associated to a TC

D Check on TC sense

D Check on the TM associated to a TVC

D Check on the TC authorization TS

D Check on the TVC authorization TS

D Check on the control block authorization TS

D Check on the fixed limits of a TVC value

D Check on the minimum value of a TVC

D Check on the maximum value of a TVC

D Check on the limits of a TVC value

D Check on the fixed limits of a TMO value

D Check on the TC execution check TSP

D Check on the TVC execution check TSP

D Check on the entity/CVS control enablement TS

D Check on the list of enabled operator stations

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 16
A.6. List of Error Messages

D ”Control block locked”

D ”Associated variable inhibited <ID>”

D ”Associated variable invalid <ID> ”

D ”Authorization not valid <ID> ”

D ”Maximum value attained <ID> ”

D ”Minimum value attained<ID> ”

D ”Maximum calculated value attained <ID> ”

D ”Minimum calculated value attained <ID> ”

D ”Current execution fault <ID>”

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 17
A.7. Control Windows and Algorithms

Associations between control windows and algorithms are shown below.

Algorithm ALG00 ALG01 ALG02 ALG03 ALG04 ALG05 ALG06 ALG07 ALG08 ALG09
empty single single dual unĆ CMD 1 CMD 2 CONS 1 CONS 2 3 single 3 single
confirmed unconĆ confirmed TVC TVC TVC TVC TCs TCs
TC firmed TC TC 1 dual TC 1 dual TC
WIndows
MED01 COND01 COND15
LOG-VAL

MED02 COND02 COND03 COND16

LOG-N-
VAL

MED03 COND04
CMD-
MANU

MED04 COND05
CMD-
AUTO

MED05 COND06
CMD-AUĆ
TOBIAIS

MED06 COND07
CMD-AUĆ
TOCON

MED07 COND08
CMD-
AUTO-
BIAIS-CON

MED08 COND09
CONS-
MANU

MED09 COND10
CONS-
AUTO

MED10 COND11
CONS-
CMD

MED11 COND12
CONS-INĆ
CRE
OBJECTIF

MED12 COND13
MESURE

MED13 COND14
CONS-INĆ
CRE
ECART

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 18
 Hydraulic type controls:

Algorithm ALG00 ALGH01 ALGH02 ALGH03

empty 4 single 4 single un- 4 TCs + 1 TVC
confirmed TCs confirmed TCs

MEDH01 CONDH01
LOG-VAL

MEDH02 CONDH02
LOG-N-VAL

MEDH03 CONDH03

MEDH04 CONDH04

MEDH05 CONDH05

.
P–TP09–A42047–V4 E B REV B
DTS Process Control Sheet 19
 DTS
Data Logging Functions

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42048-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 47 51
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10.12.98 Translation of the French document rev. B GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1. PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2. LOG DIALOGUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.1. Accessing Current Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.2. Accessing Stored Logs on Optical Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.3. Data Logging Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3. LOG WRITING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.4. STANDARD DOCUMENT FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.4.1. Header Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.4.2. Time-Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.4.3. Variable Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2. DISTURBANCE LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1. PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2. DISTURBANCE GROUP VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3. FORMAT OF LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.4. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

3. SOE LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.1. PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.2. SOE GROUP VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.3. FORMAT OF SOE LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.4. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

4. TREND LOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.1. PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.2. FORMAT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3. TREND LOG VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.4. LOG DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.5. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.5.1. Trip and End Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.5.2. Group On/off Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.5.3. Temporary Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.5.4. Period Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.5.5. Modifying the Number of Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.5.6. Modifying the Trip Criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.5.7. Assigning a Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.5.8. Deleting a Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 1-ii
 4.5.9. Calling a Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.5.10. Conditions of Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.5.11. View chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

5. PERIODIC LOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.1. SHIFT LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.1.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.1.2. Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.2. DAILY LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.2.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.2.2. Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.3. WEEKLY LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.3.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.3.2. Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.4. MONTHLY BALANCE LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.4.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.4.2. Description of the Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.5. MONTHLY MAINTENANCE LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.5.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.5.2. Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.5.3. Maintenance Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.6. UTILIZATION OF PERIODIC LOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.6.1. Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.6.2. Temporary Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.6.3. Changing Shift Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

6. ALARMS LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.1. PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.2. DESCRIPTION OF LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

7. LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
7.1. PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
7.2. FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 1-iii
 List of figures

Fig. 1 : Disturbance group criteria view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Fig. 2 : Structure of a disturbance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fig. 3 : SOE group view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fig. 4 : Structure of an SOE log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Fig. 5 : Layout of the trend log view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fig. 6 : Trend log structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fig. 7 : Chaining of trend log views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fig. 8 : Structure of a shift log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fig. 9 : Structure of a daily log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fig. 10 : Structure of a weekly log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fig. 11 : Structure of a monthly log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fig. 12 : Layout of alarms log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 13 : Layout of a printed list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 1-iv
1. General Characteristics

1.1. PRESENTATION

CENTRALOG data logging functions provide the operator with a full set of documents
recording changes in process parameters. These documents, or logs, can be displayed
on the screen of the operator station. The operator can then print out the log displayed.

The following table shows the different kinds of documents which can be recorded:

Document type Logging Information

circumstances logged
Disturbance logs Event-related Variables defined in
(operational incident) database
Sequence of event logs (SOE) Event-related Variables defined in
(operational incident) database
Trend logs On operator request or Variables defined in data
event-related base and modifiable by
operator
Periodic logs Periodic or Variables defined
Shift log, daily log, on operator request in database depending
weekly log, monthly log, on events
monthly maintenance log
Variable lists On operator request Dependent on variable
Inhibited variables, states
Replaced variables etc.

Please refer also to the document ”Event Log and HDSR Function” which describes the
Event Log function.

Logs are recorded onto disk either automatically, or on operator request. The document is
printed out following an operator request. Logs are grouped by type in a circular space.
When the maximum capacity of the space is reached, new logs replace old logs .

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 2
 From the CCC station, documents can also be stored on an external medium, optical or
floppy disk. These logs can be restored for off–line consultation.

1.2. LOG DIALOGUES

1.2.1. Accessing Current Logs

Click on to display the different types of log. Select a type of log to access a list of

all the available logs of the type selected. Select the desired log to display and, if required,
print the contents of the log.

Logs Overall
list
Disturbance 60%
SOE 50%
Shift 9%
Daily 80%
Weekly
Monthly balance 40%
Monthly Maintenance
Trend
Alarms
Variable lists
Alarm Logs

List per 15/04/97 10:54:27 LIS07 DEGREE 1 ALARMS

15/04/97 10:54:55 LIS08 DEGREE 2 ALARMS
type of log

Display
Degree 1 Alarms Â
log
Degree 1 alarms log

SDC printer
ING printer
ÂÂ
Request
printout p X

Overall list

The bargraph and the percentage indicate the occupancy rate of the space reserved for
the type of log in question. This indication is not applicable to the logs issued on operator
request.

The button is used to display the list of available logs of the type selected.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 3
 List by type of log

Each log in the list is represented by the following elements:

Date and time Date and time Reason for recording Reason incomplete
of start of log of end of log

01/01/99 10:15:23 01/01/98 12:15:30 ANTICIPATED/TIME CHG

"
01KCX07 TRIGGER GROUP 1

Group ID code and label Display log

Alarm logs and variable lists are represented as follows:

02/01/99 13:10:25 LIS07 ALARMS DEGREE1 "

Date and time of Log/list ID code and Display log/

creation of log/list label list

Click on to return to overall list.

Display and printout

ÂÂ
Logs displayed on screen include a header area described in paragraph 1.4. Following
pages can be displayed by using the scrollbar. Click on the printout button to
display a window listing the available printers. The last printer used for the type of data in
question will be selected by default. Click on p to confirm and start the printout.

1.2.2. Accessing Stored Logs on Optical Disk

Click on to display the different types of log stored on optical disk.

The stored log can then be accessed in the same way as described above for a current log
.

This function is reserved to the CCC station.

1.2.3. Data Logging Functions

Clicking on the icon in the top row displays the following icons:

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 4
 Icons Functions Resultant action Subsequent operator
action
Logs Displays list of log types: Selection '
Disturbance to display available logs of
SOE type selected.
etc. Select to display log
Stored logs on optical Displays list of log types: Selection '
disk Disturbance to display available logs of
(CCC station) SOE type selected.
etc. Select to display log
Write log on request Displays menu: Select log type to save a
shift logs temporary log on disk.
daily logs
weekly logs
monthly logs
monthly maintenance logs

Disturbance logs Displays directory Select from directory

!
Sequence of events Displays directory Select from directory
! (SOE) logs

Trend logs Displays directory Select from directory

Shift time Displays data entry window Enter shift times

Number of actions Displays a view of variables Selecting a variable opens

of this type a parameter entry window

Running time Displays a view of variables Selecting a variable opens

of this type a parameter entry window

Threshold attainments Displays a view of variables

of this type

Data Logging icons

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 5
1.3. LOG WRITING MODES

The information below concerns the different modes, causes and reasons for writing a log
to disk:

D Log writing modes:

— NORMAL : Log is recorded at normal time.
— ANTICIPATED : Log is recorded before normal time.
The following recording, at the normal time, is
incomplete.
— TEMPORARY : Log is recorded before normal time.
The following recording, at normal time, is
complete.
D Causes:
— NORMAL : Normal recording time
— DATE CHG : Date change
— TIME CHG : Time change
— OPERATOR : Operator request
— STOP : Startup with partial initialization
D Reasons log is incomplete:
— DATE CHG : Date change
— TIME CHG : Time change
— STARTUP/STOP : System startup
(full or partial initialization)

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 6
1.4. STANDARD DOCUMENT FORMAT

Log documents have a standard page layout comprising a header area and a contents
area. The page format is 132 columns by 66 lines.

1.4.1. Header Area

a ) – The header area always includes:

D the project name,

D the database version number and OU generation number,

D the name of the document:

— SHIFT n LOG, DAILY LOG,
— WEEKLY LOG, MAINTENANCE LOG, MONTHLY LOG
— DISTURBANCE LOG, SOE LOG, TREND LOG
— ANALYSIS VAR, INHIBITED OU,
— MOD THRESH VAR, LOCKED/TEST BLOCKS.
— FILTERED LIST, ALARMS, ALARMS DEGREE n,
— ALARMS/SYN, ALARMS/OU
b ) – Certain additional data may be written to the disk depending on the recording
context:

D Additional labels indicating the reasons for the recording:

Reasons for writing log Log recording labels

NORMAL -
DATE CHG ANTICIPATED : DATE CHG
TIME CHG ANTICIPATED : TIME CHG
OPERATOR REQUEST TEMPORARY : OPERATOR i
STOP ANTICIPATED : STOP

D Additional labels indicating the reasons the recording is incomplete

Reasons log is incomplete Labels

DATE CHG INCOMPLETE : DATE CHG
TIME CHG INCOMPLETE : TIME CHG
STARTUP/STOP INCOMPLETE : STARTUP

Each reason for writing a log to disk can be associated to an additional label indicating the
reason that the recording is incomplete.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 7
 Example 1:
An incomplete recording at the normal time caused by a system startup with full
initialization, will bear the label:
INCOMPLETE : STARTUP

Example 2:
An incomplete recording subsequent to a date change resulting from a system
startup with full initialization will bear the label:
ANTICIPATED: DATE CHG / INCOMPLETE: STARTUP

The following recording at the normal time will bear the label:
INCOMPLETE : DATE CHG

D Date representing the period covered by the log (disturbance and periodic logs) or
write date (lists):
— FROM XX/XX/XX HH:MM:SS TO XX/XX/XX HH:MM:SS
D Recording caused by an operator time–tag modification:
— (XX/XX/XX HH:MM:SS) => XX/XX/XX HH:MM:SS where the date or time
has been modified,
— (XX–XX–XX) => XX–XX–XX where the shift time has been modified.
D Operator station from which the write request was issued (lists only).

Example:

CEGELEC ERE P
PROJECT NAME DATA BASE VERSION NUMBER : 2.331
TEMPORARY OPERATOR 2
FROM 25/12/98 15:00:00 TO 25/12/98 18:54:00

SHIFT LOG

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 8
1.4.2. Time–Tagging

The general format for the time is as follows:

D Short format : HH:MM:SS,

D Long format : HH:MM:SS mmm (mmm in milliseconds).

1.4.3. Variable Formats

Variables are recorded according to the different formats shown below.

1.4.3.1. Values

The values of logical and analog variables may be shown in the following manner:

ABCDEFGH normal value of a logical value (eg. OPEN),

123456.78 normal value of a analog variable (fixed format),

1.500E+07 normal value of a analog variable (scientific format)

********* inhibited variable,

????????? invalid or replaced variable

>>>>>>>>> analog value greater than the maximum limit,

<<<<<<<<< analog value less than the minimum limit,

......... value not available.

Note: A replaced variable is recorded as ????????? in the following cases: daily log,
weekly log, periodic shift log measurements, values recorded in disturbance logs and
trend logs. The replacement value itself is recorded in other cases: principal events of a
shift log, monthly maintenance log counters, disturbance & SOE logs and lists.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 9
1.4.3.2. Status

MONI on monitoring (monitored),

NMON off monitoring (not monitored),

INHI inhibited,

REPL replaced.

1.4.3.3. State

LIMH value greater than the maximum limit,

HIHI very high threshold,

HIGH high threshold,

NORM normal value,

LOW low threshold,

LOLO very low threshold,

LIML value less than minimum limit.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 10
2. Disturbance Log

2.1. PRESENTATION

Disturbance logs provide a historical record of analog and logical variables during
the period immediately before and after the appearance of an incident. Disturbance
logs permit off–line analysis of the incident in question.

The data recorded in a disturbance log is composed of a group containing:

D maximum 30 logical variables used as trip criteria (representative of the

appearance of an incident),

D maximum 10 analog variables and 10 logical variables, for which the values are
recorded.

Each criterion is assigned a trip ”sense” (0 ' 1 or 1 ' 0). When at least one of the criteria is
tripped a disturbance log is generated.

For each of the 20 variables in the group:

D the last 60 samples recorded before the disturbance (pre–trip) are retrieved,

D recording continues after the disturbance (post–trip) until a maximum of 60

samples have been acquired.

Disturbance data is defined in the database during customization.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 11
 Pre–trip and post–trip acquisition periods are defined for each group. Pre–trip and
post–trip periods may have the following values:
— 2 seconds,
— 5 seconds,
— 10 seconds,
— 15 seconds,
— 30 seconds,
— 60 seconds,
— 120 seconds.
Directory view and commands:

Disturbance group views can be accessed from a directory view displayed by clicking on
the ! icon.

A group directory view enables the operator:

— to enable or disable triggering the recording of a group (the group is then said
to be off monitoring),
— to simulate triggering the recording of a group ,
— to request a temporary record of the current log for display or printout.
Remarks:

A request for simulation is refused if the group is off monitoring or in a post–trip phase.

A set off–monitoring request is refused if the group is in a post–trip phase.

A temporary record request is refused if the group is not in a post–trip phase.

When a group is off monitoring, values are no longer recorded.

Tagging the samples:

Samples are synchronized relative to system time.

Example of tagging for samples of a group with a 30s pre–trip sampling rate and a 15s
post–trip sampling rate, with a trip timed at 15h41m19s:
pre–trip period : 15h10m30s, ... , 15h40m30s, 15h41m00s,
post–trip period: 15h41m30s, 15h41m45s, ... , 15h56m15s.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 12
2.2. DISTURBANCE GROUP VIEW

The disturbance group view is accessed from the directory view which is displayed by
clicking on the ”Disturbance group” icon ! .

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
State of
group
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
!
MONI TRIPPED
TITLE
Menu button

POST TRIP RATE : 15s

PRE–TRIP RATE: 30s
Post–trip LAST TRIP EVENT: 25/03/98 13:44:27 01LGA004JA1
phase Zoom view buttons
01LGA001JA1 UNIT MV INCOMING POSITION
01LGA002JA1 TEST CRITERION 1
01LGA003JA1 TEST CRITERION 2

Fig. 1 : Disturbance group criteria view

This view contains the following information:

D the state of the group, on or off–monitoring (MONI or NMON),

D the post–incident phase state (TRIGGERED or UNTRIGGERED) of the group,

D the pre–trip and post–trip sampling rates,

D the last trip (date and triggering event),

D the list of group criteria & the ID code and label of each of these.

The time–tag of the last trip is that of the last automatic trip. Trip simulations by the
operator do not affect the tag.

On the initial start–up of the system (or after a start–up with full initialization), this field
remains empty until the first disturbance.

Sensitive Zones

D Zoom view access button.

D Menu access button containing four options: On–monitoring

Off–monitoring
Trip
Write

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 13
2.3. FORMAT OF LOG

A disturbance log comprises 8 to 12 pages each of which contains a header zone

providing general information about the log and the recording context (see paragraph
1.4.1.), the time–tag of the trip criterion, a nomenclature area identifying the variables to
be processed and a data area showing the values recorded.

LOGIC
VARIABLES

ANALOG
VARIABLES

HEADER ZONE DISTURBANCE LOG

TRIP CRITERION

NOMENCLATURE
AREA

DATA ZONE

Fig. 2 : Structure of a disturbance log

The first three pages give the pre–trip values of the analog variables in the group. The
following three pages give their post–trip values. If a temporary record is requested, the
section concerning post–trip data may contain only one or two pages.

The final pages provide similar information for the logical variables in the group.

If the data relevant to the pre–trip phase is incomplete, it will be replaced by dots.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 14
 Trip criterion

This line contains the following information:

— time–tag (hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds),
— criterion ID code and label,
— previous and current value of criterion.
If the trip is a simulation, the time–tag, the group ID code and label, the number of the
operator station from which the request originates and the message ”OPERATOR
SIMULATION” replace the criterion.

Nomenclature area

The nomenclature area contains:

— the ID code and the label of the group,
— the ID code and the label of the variables in the group.

Data zone

The results are shown in columns. The ID code of the variable and the unit of measure (for
analog variables) are shown at the top of each column.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 15
2.4. UTILIZATION

The operator can execute the following operations from the disturbance group view:

D access the disturbance group directory view,

D access the next or previous group view in the directory,

D consult a criterion zoom view,

D set a group on–monitoring,

D set a group off–monitoring,

D simulate a group trip,

D request a temporary record of a group.

The last four operations are performed by selecting respectively the options
”On–monitoring”, ”Off–monitoring”, ”Trip” and ”Write” from the pull–down menu
associated to the group in question.

Disturbance processing

In the absence of any disturbance, variable values are logged continuously within a
circular 60 element field, at the sampling rate defined for the group. The duration of the
pre–trip period varies from 2 minutes to 2 hours depending on the sampling rate.

The group is tripped whenever one of the trip criteria is met. The group trip may also be
simulated by the operator.

A total of 60 variables continue to be logged until the end of the post–trip period defined
for the group.

The duration of the post–trip period varies from 2 minutes to 2 hours depending on the
group sampling rate. The post–trip period can be reduced by the operator (request for
temporary record).

A criterion which passes to a trip state in a group in the post–trip phase is ignored.

If the group is tripped again a short time after the end of the post–trip period , certain of the
new pre–trip values may correspond to the post–trip sampling period.

Recording: a disturbance log is automatically written to disk as soon as the group’s

post–trip values have been acquired.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 16
 A temporary record request issued before all of the 60 values have been logged does not
cause the logging of these values to be suspended. A new log is written to disk is
executed automatically on termination of the post–trip phase..

If the same criterion governs a number of different disturbance groups, the corresponding
logs are recorded in order of definition.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 17
3. SOE Log

3.1. PRESENTATION

The SOE (Sequence Of Events) Log provides a historical record of state changes in
logical variables during the period subsequent to the occurrence of an incident in
order to facilitate off–line analysis.

SOE data is defined in the database during customization.

Each group contains a maximum of 100 logical variables, some of which are used as a
trip criterion (representing the occurrence of an incident). All state changes occurring in
these variables are recorded.

Each criterion is assigned a trip ”sense” (0 ' 1 or 1 ' 0). When at least one of the criteria is
tripped an SOE log is generated.
When a criterion is tripped, all the state changes in the logical variables in the group are
logged.

An SOE log is written to disk automatically as soon as one of the following conditions is
fulfilled:
— 50 state changes logged,
— the recording period has expired.
The recording periods are defined for each group. Permissible recording period values
are as follows:
— 1 minute,
— 2 minutes,
— 5 minutes,
— 10 minutes,

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 18
3.2. SOE GROUP VIEW

The SOE group view is accessed from the directory view by clicking on the ”SOE” icon
! .

The SOE group view enables the operator to perform the following operations:
— disable tripping a group log (the group is then off–monitoring),
— request a temporary record of the current log

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
State of
group
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
!
MONI TRIGGERED
TITLE 1/3
1/2

Menu
Trip phase PERIOD : 5 mn
button
LAST TRIP EVENT: 25/03/98 13:44:27 01LGA004JA1

01LGA001JA1 UNIT MV INCOMING POSITION

01LGA002JA1 CRITERION 1 1
Zoom view
01LGA003JA1 CRITERION 2 0
access
button

Fig. 3 : SOE group view

This view contains the following information:

D state of the group, on or off–monitoring (MONI or NMON),

D indication of the group trip condition (TRIGGERED or UNTRIGGERED),

D the recording period,

D the last trip (date and triggering event),

D the list of variables in the group: for each variable, the ID code, the label and the
value of the trip direction if the variable is a criterion (”0” indicates a trip during the
shift from 1 to 0, ”1” indicates a trip during the shift from 0 to 1).

When the system is first started (or after startup with full initialization), the field
corresponding to the date the group was last tripped is blank and remains blank until an
incident occurs.

Sensitive Zones

D Zoom view access button

D Button accessing menu showing three options: On–monitoring

Off–monitoring
Write

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 19
3.3. FORMAT OF SOE LOG

An SOE log comprises one or two pages each of which contains a header zone providing
general information about the log and the recording context (see paragraph 1.4.1.), the
time–tag of the trip criterion, and a zone showing the group variable state changes
recorded.

HEADER ZONE SEQUENCES OF EVENTS LOG

TRIP
CRITERION

DATA ZONE

Fig. 4 : Structure of an SOE log

Trip criterion

The line contains:

D time–tag (hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds),

D criterion ID code and label,

D previous and current value of criterion.

State change data zone

State changes in logical variables are shown in chronological order.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 20
3.4. UTILIZATION

The operator can execute the following operations from the SOE group view:

D access the SOE group directory view,

D access the next or previous group view in the directory,

D consult a variable zoom view,

D set a group on–monitoring,

D set a group off–monitoring,

D request temporary record of a group log.

The last three operations are performed by selecting respectively the options
”On–monitoring”, ”Off–monitoring” and ”Write” from the pull–down menu associated to
the group in question.

A set off–monitoring command is refused if the group is already tripped.

A request for a temporary record is refused if the group is not tripped.

SOE log processing

When a trip criterion is met, the operator is informed that the group has been tripped by the
appearance of a message corresponding to the criterion on the alarm screen.

The SOE log is written to disk automatically as soon as the following conditions are met:

either 50 state changes logged,

or recording period expires.

A temporary record can be executed before the above conditions are attained. A
temporary record does not cause logging to be suspended. A new record is executed
automatically when the logging period is terminated.

If the same criterion governs a number of different SOE groups, the relevant logs are
recorded in order of their definition.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 21
4. Trend Logs

4.1. PRESENTATION

The TREND LOGS function is used to generate logs that retrace the changes in a group
of variables upon operator request or upon a state change in a trip variable.

Trend groups are made up of logical or analog variables. Each group contains a
maximum of 10 variables and optionally, a tripping logical variable (and its associated
tripping direction). A sampling period is associated with each group, as well as a number
of samples to be acquired before writing the log to disk.

The trend groups are pre–defined in the data base and can be modified on line by the
operator.

4.2. FORMAT DESCRIPTION

Each page of the trend log contains a header zone that recalls the general information
concerning the log and the recording context (see paragraph 1.3.1.).

It also contains a nomenclature zone located below the header zone that lists the
variables monitored.

In the data zone, each column of measurements corresponds to a variable. The left hand
column displays the sampling time in hours, minutes and seconds. The identification
code of each variable and its unit (if it is an analog variable) appear at the top of each
column.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 22
4.3. TREND LOG VIEW

Access to the ”trend log” directory view is obtained by clicking on the icon. A ”trend
log” view is obtained directly by clicking into the directory view. The view enables the
operator to:
— prevent tripping of the group (in such a case, the group is said to be
off–monitoring) and inversely, to place it back into on monitoring,
— request trip/end logging,
— request a temporary record of the current log.
The time–tag of the last trip is that of the last automatic trip. Records requested by the
operator do not affect this information.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Trip phase

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
TITLE
Group Group state
state MONI TRIGGERED menu button
LAST TRIP : 0709/94 11:33:20 SENSE 0
Period 60 s 100 SAMPLES Trip criteria
01CXYAB03

Number of samĆ Assignment

ples zone
01CAPLT002 CONDENSER LVL MONI 1.77 M
01CVILT002 CONDENSER PRESSURE MONI 260 MBAR Menu button

Fig. 5 : Layout of the trend log view

Sensitive zones

D Clicking on the menu button gives five options: On monitoring

Off monitoring
Trip
End
Write

D Button for modifying the sampling period

D Button for modifying the number of samples

D Button for modifying trip criteria

D Zone for assigning variables to the group

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 23
 D Buttons for opening the menu linked to the group variables and having two
options: Zoom
Disassign

4.4. LOG DESCRIPTION

Each page of the log contains a header area that recalls general information concerning
the log and the recording context (see paragraph 1.3.1.).

The values of the variables are shown in columns. Each line contains the corresponding
time.

HEADER AREA
TREND LOG

TREND LOG

TREND LOG

DATA AREA

Fig. 6 : Trend log structure

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 24
4.5. UTILIZATION

4.5.1. Trip and End Logging

Logging is started (or stopped) by selecting the ”Trip” (or ”End”) option in the pull–down
menu linked to the group state button. Ending the logging process causes the record to be
automatically written to disk.

4.5.2. Group On/off Monitoring

A group is switched on or off monitoring by selecting the ”on monitoring” or ”off monitoring”
option on the pull–down menu linked to the group state button. When the group is off
monitoring, both the trip criteria and the operator trip request function are inhibited.

4.5.3. Temporary Record

When a group is tripped, a temporary data record can be obtained before all the samples
involved have been logged. This is done by selecting the ”Write” option on the pull–down
menu linked to the group state button. This record does not interrupt any on–going
logging process.

4.5.4. Period Modification

The sampling period of a group is pre–defined, but it can be modified on–line by the
operator.

This modification is done by clicking on the period modification button, then selecting in a
pull down menu: 5 seconds
10 seconds
15 seconds
20 seconds
30 seconds
1 minute
5 minutes
10 minutes
1 hour

Selecting one of these options modifies the sampling period according to the value of the
option chosen.

4.5.5. Modifying the Number of Samples

The number of samples logged before being recorded to disk can be modified by clicking
on the button which opens the data entry window. The number of samples is limited
to 100.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 25
4.5.6. Modifying the Trip Criterion

The variable used as the tripping criterion may be modified or created by clicking on the
button which opens an identification code entry window. The window can also be
used to select the trip direction or to delete the criterion.

4.5.7. Assigning a Variable

A new variable is assigned to the displayed group by clicking on the assignment entry
zone then entering the identification code of the new variable.

4.5.8. Deleting a Variable

A variable may be deleted from the group by selecting the option ”Desassign” on the pull
down menu linked to the variable to be de–assigned.

4.5.9. Calling a Zoom View

Access to the zoom view of a particular variable that belongs to a trend log group is
obtained by selecting the ”Zoom” option of the pull down menu linked to this variable.

4.5.10. Conditions of Utilization

The following table indicates the possibility (Y) or the impossibility (N) of executing a
command based on the state of the group.

State of the group On-monitoring On-monitoring Off-monitoring

Commands tripped untripped
Trip N Y N
End logging Y N N
Temporary record Y N N
Shift to on-monitoring N N Y
Shift to off-monitoring N Y N
Period modification N Y Y
Sample number modification N Y Y
Criterion modification N Y Y
Assigning a variable N Y Y
Deleting a variable N Y Y
Zoom Y Y Y

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 26
4.5.11. View chaining

The following view shows the different relationships between trend views.

Group Directory

f
1 f
2

f
3 f
5

Previous or next
view in the direc- View Associated views
tory
f
4

f
6

Zoom

Fig. 7 : Chaining of trend log views

f
1 : selection of the view in the view directory

f
2 : selection of the pictogram in the view title

f
3 : selection of the pictogram in the view title

f
4 : selection of the pictogram in the view title

f
5 : selection of the pictogram in the view title that enables display of the window
of associated views, then clicking in the sensitive zones of the associated view window.

f
6 : selection in the menu linked to a variable of the view.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 27
5. Periodic Logs

5.1. SHIFT LOG

5.1.1. Presentation

The shift log provides the following two types of information:

— the ”principal events” occurring during the shift and corresponding to
changes of state inherent to the operation of the plant.
— the hour–by–hour changes occurring during a shift period in various
groups of variables,
Principal events can be:

D changes in the state or status of logical variables,

D threshold violations or changes in the status of analog variables.

Variables associated to principal events are defined during customization of the

application.

The most recent principal events to have occurred during the shift are recorded.

Analog variables are processed by groups. These groups contain a maximum of 10

variables and are defined during customization of the application.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 28
5.1.2. Format

Each page of the shift log comprises a header area containing general information about
the log and the recording context (see paragraph 1.4.1.).

Principal Events:

The principal events are shown on the first pages. These pages include a ”PRINCIPAL
EVENTS” sub–heading and the indication of the page number within the section.

SHIFT LOG
HEADER AREA

PRINCIPAL EVENTS SHIFT LOG

NOMENCLATURE AREA

CHANGES IN A VARIABLE
GROUP

Fig. 8 : Structure of a shift log

Principal events are shown in chronological order, in the same format as the HDSR event
log.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 29
 Periodic measurements:

The other pages show changes occurring in variable groups. Each page concerns a
different group and contains:

D a ”PERIODIC MEASUREMENTS” sub–heading, the ID code and the label of the

group,

D a nomenclature area showing the ID codes and labels of the variables which
compose the group,

D the time–tag, the ID code and the unit of measurement of the variables at the top
of the column,

D the time and current value of the variables at hourly intervals during the shift,

D the sum or average of the values produced at the end of the shift, recorded for
each variable at the bottom of the column. This option is specified during
customization for each variable and may be one of the following:
— recording of sum,
— recording of average,
— no recording of either sum or average.
The values of invalid, inhibited, out of limits or doubtful variables are not taken into
account in the calculation of the sum or average.

When a column contains no values, the sum is replaced by zero and the average is
replaced by ......... .

The table below shows the different possibilities of recording format:

Sums & averages Value recorded

Type of calculation Sum Average
Sum value
Average value
None ......... .........
No value assessed 0 .........

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 30
5.2. DAILY LOG

5.2.1. Presentation

The daily log records the changes occurring during each 24 hour period in a set of
analog variables which are divided into groups.

The data processed consists of groups of up to ten analog variables. The values of these
variables are recorded at hourly intervals. Variable groups are defined during
customization.

5.2.2. Format

The log is composed of as many pages as there are groups.

Each page of the daily log contains:

D a header area providing general information about the log and the recording
context (see paragraph 1.4.1.).

D a ”PERIODIC MEASUREMENTS” sub–heading, the ID code and the label of the

group,

D a nomenclature area which shows the ID codes and the labels of variables
composing the group,

D the date of the log, with the variable ID code and unit of measurement at the head
of each column,

D the time at hourly intervals (in the leftmost column below the date, followed by + or
– indicating respectively peak and off–peak times) and the associated value of the
variables,

D for each variable, the sum and/or the average of off–peak values for the day,

D for each variable, the sum and/or the average of peak hour values for the day,

D for each variable, the overall sum and/or average of values for the day.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 31
 HEADER AREA

DAILY LOG

DAILY LOG

DAILY LOG

NOMENCLATURE AREA

DATA AREA

SUMS AND/OR AVERAGES

Fig. 9 : Structure of a daily log

Sums and averages:

The presence or absence of the last three items on each page is pre–defined for each
variable during customization, from among the following options:
— recording of the sum,
— recording of the average,
— recording of the off–peak sum, of the peak hour sum and of the overall sum,
— recording of the off–peak average, of the peak hour average and of the
overall average,
— no recording either of sum or average.
The values of invalid, inhibited, out of limits or doubtful variables are not taken into
account in the calculation of sums and averages.

When no values can be assessed for these calculations, the sums and overall average
are replaced by a zero and the partial average by ......... .

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 32
 The table below shows the various formats for recording sums and averages:

Sums & averages Value recorded

Peak or off- Peak or off- Total sum Overall averĆ
Type of calculation peak sum peak average age
Peak/off-peak sum value value
Peak/off-peak average value value
Sum value
Average value
None ......... ......... ......... .........
No value assessed 0 ......... 0 0

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 33
5.3. WEEKLY LOG

5.3.1. Presentation

The weekly log records the changes occurring over a 7–day period in a set of analog
variables divided into groups.

The data processed consists of groups of up to ten analog variables. The values of these
variables are recorded every day at 0 hours. Variable groups are defined during
customization.

5.3.2. Format

The log is composed of as many pages as there are groups.

Each page of the weekly log contains:

D a header area providing general information about the log and the recording
context (see paragraph 1.4.1.).

D a ”PERIODIC MEASUREMENTS” sub–heading, the ID code and the label of the

group,

D a nomenclature area which shows the ID codes and the labels of variables
composing the group,

D the variable ID code and unit of measurement at the head of each column,

D at daily intervals, the date (DD/MM/YY) and the associated value of the variables,

D for each variable at the bottom of its column, the sum of the daily values for the
week,

D for each variable at the bottom of its column, the average of the daily values for the
week,

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 34
 HEADER AREA

WEEKLY LOG

WEEKLY LOG

WEEKLY LOG

NOMENCLATURE AREA

DATA AREA

SUMS AND/OR AVERAGES

Fig. 10 : Structure of a weekly log

Sums and averages:

The presence or absence of the last two items on each page is pre–defined for each
variable during customization, from among the following options:
— recording of the sum,
— recording of the average,
— no recording of either sum or average.
The values of invalid, inhibited, out of limits or doubtful variables are not taken into
account in the calculation of sums and averages.

When no values can be assessed for these calculations, the sum is replaced by a zero
and the average by ......... .

The table below shows the various formats for recording sums and averages:

Sums & averages Value recorded

Type of calculation Sum Average
Sum value
Average value
None ......... .........
No value assessed 0 .........

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 35
5.4. MONTHLY BALANCE LOG

5.4.1. Presentation

The monthly log shows the changes over one month in a set of analog variables divided
into sub–groups.

The data processed consists of analog variables divided into groups of a maximum of 10
variables. The values of these variables are stored every day at midnight (00:00 h). The
variable groups are defined during customization.

5.4.2. Description of the Format

The log comprises as many pages as there are groups.

The format of the log is identical to that of the weekly log described above.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 36
5.5. MONTHLY MAINTENANCE LOG

5.5.1. Presentation

The purpose of the monthly log is to supply information to assist in the maintenance of
equipment such as pumps, motors, generators, etc.

This information is classed under three headings:

D running time,

D duration of threshold violations,

D the number of actuator ”Start/Stop” cycles.

The log also contains information relative to maintenance operations (eg. the running
time of a device since its last maintenance, date of its last maintenance).

In all three cases, the variables recorded are internal analog variables (TMIs) resulting
from internal computation functions (see Volume ”Computation Functions”). These
functions use external logical or analog variables relevant to the equipment being
monitored as inputs.

This information can also be accessed from the maintenance views enabling the main
parameters to be modified.

5.5.2. Format

Each page of the monthly log includes a header area containing general information
about the log and the recording context (see paragraph 1.4.1.).

Below this area is a subtitle identifying the section.

HEADER AREA
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

RUNNING TIME CALCULATIONS [1]

DATA AREA

Fig. 11 : Structure of a monthly log

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 37
 The data area contains the following information:

Running time:

D ID code and label of the internal variable (V07 TMI),

— defined at system customization,
— calculated according to the rate defined at customization (less than 1 hour) ,
— reloaded with the value defined at customization on restart with full
initialization (normally 0).
— reloaded with the value defined at customization or at replacement value
before system shut–down on restart with partial initialization (normally 0),
D total running time,
— defined at system customization,
— modifiable by operator,
— calculated every hour,
— given by the sum of a”running time” V07 TMI since start–up of the associated
hardware,
— reloaded with the value defined at customization on restart with full
initialization.
— reloaded with last value before system shutdown on restart with partial
initialization,
D running time since last maintenance operation,
— defined at system customization,
— modifiable by operator,
— calculated every hour,
— given by the sum of a”running time” V07 TMI since the last maintenance
operation on the associated hardware,
— reloaded with the value defined at customization on restart with full
initialization .
— reloaded with last value before system shutdown on restart with partial
initialization,
D date of last maintenance operation.
— defined at system customization,
— modifiable by the operator, value not calculated.
D scheduled time between two maintenance operations,
— defined at system customization,
— not modifiable by the operator, value not calculated.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 38
 Number of start/stop cycles:

D ID code and label of the internal variable (V06 TMI),

— defined at system customization,
— calculated according to the rate defined at customization (less than 1 hour) ,
— reloaded with the value defined at customization on restart with full
initialization (normally 0).
— reloaded with the value defined at customization or with the replacement
value before system shutdown on restart with partial initialization (normally
0),
D total number of state changes,
— defined at system customization,
— modifiable by the operator,
— calculated every hour,
— given by the sum of a ”pulse counter” V06 TMI since start–up of the
associated hardware,
— reloaded with last value before system shutdown on restart with partial
initialization,
— reloaded with the value defined at customization on restart with full
initialization.
D number of state changes since last maintenance operation,
— defined at system customization,
— modifiable by the operator,
— calculated every hour,
— given by the sum of a ”pulse counter” V06 TMI since the last maintenance
operation on the associated hardware,
— reloaded with last value before system shutdown on restart with partial
initialization,
— reloaded with the value defined at customization on restart with full
initialization.
D date of last maintenance operation.
— defined at customization of the system,
— modifiable by the operator, value not calculated.
D maximum number of state changes recommended before maintenance,
— defined at system customization,
— non modifiable by the operator, value not calculated.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 39
 Threshold violations:

D ID code and label of the internal variable (V07 TMI),

— defined at system customization,
— calculated according to the rate defined at customization (less than 1 hour) ,
— reloaded with the value defined at customization on restart with full
initialization (normally 0).
— reloaded with the value defined at customization or with the replacement
value before system shutdown on restart with partial initialization (normally
0),
D unit measurement of the external variable monitored,
— defined at system customization,
D type of threshold monitored (low, very low, high, very high); a V07 TMI variable is
assigned to monitoring the duration of threshold violation by the TM variable in
question,
— defined at system customization,
— not modifiable by the operator,
— value not calculated.
D value of threshold of TM being monitored,
— defined at system customization,
— modifiable by the operator,
— value not calculated.
D accumulated duration of threshold violation by TM variable in question.
— defined at system customization,
— not modifiable by the operator,
— calculated every hour,
— given by the sum of a ”threshold violation counter” V07 TMI since startup of
the associated hardware,
— reloaded with the value defined at customization on restart with full
initialization.
— reloaded with last value before system shutdown on restart with partial
initialization.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 40
5.5.3. Maintenance Views

Clicking on the button in the top row displays a band of icons specific to logging

functions. Selection of or or displays a view of variables of the

corresponding type. These views contain the ID code and label of each variable, followed
by the information below:

D operating time: total operating time, maintenance periods, time since last
maintenance, date of last maintenance

D number of stop/start cycles: total number, number scheduled between

maintenance operations, number since last maintenance, date of last
maintenance

D threshold violations: accumulated duration of threshold violations

The values of the”operating time” and ”start/stop cycle” counters can be updated. Clicking
on the button associated to a variable in the corresponding view opens a window
enabling these parameters to be entered.

5.5.3.1. Running Time

02XYW0001
Variable ID code of the internal variable

Total time Total running time in hours

Maintenance date
Year

Month Date of last maintenance operation

Day

Running time since Running time since last maintenance

maintenance operation in hours

Error messages

Counters are limited to a total of 1,000,000 cycles. All the fields must be completed with
the exception of the ”Total counter” field. When this field is not completed, the new partial
counter total is added to the total counter.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 41
5.5.3.2. Number of Stop/Start Cycles

02XYW0002
Variable ID code of the internal variable

Total counter
Total counter value
Maintenance date
Year

Month Date of last maintenance operation

Day

Counter since Value of counter since last mainte-

maintenance
nance
operation
Error messages

Counters are limited to a total of 32,767 cycles. All the fields must be completed with the
exception of the ”Total counter” field. When this field is not completed, the new partial
counter total is added to the total counter.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 42
5.6. UTILIZATION OF PERIODIC LOGS

In principle periodic logs are written to disk automatically. They can however also be
recorded on operator request.

5.6.1. Automatic Recording

Periodic logs are recorded automatically as follows:

at the end of each shift (two to six shifts per day,

shift log
length defined in hours)

daily log at 00.00 hours

weekly log on Monday at 00.00 hours (configurable)

on the first day of each month at 00.00 hours

monthly balance log
(configurable)

on the first day of each month at 00.00 hours

monthly maintenance log
(configurable)

The shift log, the daily log and the monthly maintenance log are also written to disk after a
change of date or time, and on start–up of the system (in partial initialization mode). The
weekly log and the monthly balance log are also recorded after a change of date, and on
start–up of the system (in partial initialization mode). The shift log is also recorded after a
change of shift times.

5.6.2. Temporary Record

Temporary or interim records can be recorded on request by the operator. The result
obtained is a snapshot to date of the log currently being edited. The complete log
recorded subsequently at the regular time will be complete.

5.6.3. Changing Shift Times

The window shown below is opened by clicking on the ”Modify shift times” option in the log
functions menu. New shift times are entered in hours. The times at which the shift logs will
be written to disk are updated after validation. The number of shifts (maximum 6) are
defined during customization.

Shift 1 07

Shift 2 15
Shift 3 23

Error messages

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 43
6. Alarms Log

6.1. PRESENTATION

The list of alarm with operator help functions can be recorded on operator request. The
corresponding log will contain the same information as that displayed on the alarm screen
(if necessary over several pages) at the time of the request. The different logs that can be
obtained are as follows:

D general alarms log,

D degree 1 to 4 alarms log,

D mimic alarms log,

D OU alarms log,

D filtered alarms log

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 44
6.2. DESCRIPTION OF LOG

Each page of the log includes a header area containing general information about the log
and the recording context (see paragraph 1.4.1.).

HEADER ZONE

DEGREE 3 ALARMS

DATA ZONE

Fig. 12 : Layout of alarms log

Format of the data zone:

D Logic variable:

date, long format time–tag, ID code, label, state, status, validity,

acknowledgement quality and state (APP ACK, APP NACK or DISAP NACK)

28/01/99 18:45:34 320 01CRFTSH102 LOCK POSITION OPEN MONI INVA APP ACK

D Analog variable :

date, short format time–tag, ID code, label, state, value of threshold or limit s, unit,
status, validity, acknowledgement quality and state (APP ACK, APP NACK or
DISAP NACK)

28/01/99 18:59:07 01FMATE62D AIR TEMPERATURE LOW 500 DEG MONI APP ACK

Depending on the database configuration, messages from the data zone may be
preceded by a number corresponding to the degree of urgency of the variable. When the
configuration includes a color printer these messages are printed out in the color
corresponding to the degree of urgency.

On filtered lists, the filter criterion or criteria requested by the operator is recorded just
below the header zone.

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 45
7. Lists

7.1. PRESENTATION

The LISTS function is used to print out the following lists:

— list of analysis variables,
— list of inhibited operative units,
— list of modified threshold variables
— list of locked blocks,
— filtered list.

7.2. FORMAT

Each list comprises a header area containing general information about the log and the
recording context.

FILTERED LIST
HEADER ZONE

FILTER REQUESTED
BY OPERATOR

DATA ZONE

Fig. 13 : Layout of a printed list

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 46
 List titles:

ANALYSIS VAR list of analysis variables

INHIBITED OU list of inhibited operative units

MOD THRESH VAR. list of modified threshold variables

LOCKED/TEST BLOCKS list of locked/under test blocks

FILTERED LIST list of filtered variables

An indication of the filter(s) requested by the operator is shown below the header zone in
lists of filtered variables .

Filter criteria are defined in the volume ”Supervision Functions”, Chapter ”Lists”.

Format of the data zone:

D for a logic variable, the ID code, label and value,

D for an analog variable, the ID code, label, state (with the threshold or limit in the
case of a violation), the value and the unit,

D for a VR multi–state variable, the ID code, label and value,

D for a control block, the ID code, label and status (normal, locked or test),

D for an operative unit, the ID code, label and label.

Examples :

01KITXX001 AUX TRANSFO SWITCH –> ON

01KITYY008 WATER LEVEL –> LOW[ 20.00] 19.5 CM

01LJP 220KV SWITCH

.
P–TP09–A42048–V4 E B REV B
DTS Data Logging Functions Sheet 47
 DTS
Computation Functions

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42049-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 22 24
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10.12.98 Translation of the French document rev. B GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2. IMPLEMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2. TMI ANALOG CALCULATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.1. Calculation Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.2. Long-life Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2. V01 : DERIVED VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3. V02 : CALCULATION IN POLISH NOTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.4. V03 : STORE TMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.5. V04 : PERIODIC AVERAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.6. V05 : CURRENT AVERAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.7. V06 : PULSE COUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.8. V07 : RUNNING TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.9. V08 : GROUP AVERAGE WITH STANDARD DEVIATION . . . . . . . . . 18
2.10. V09 : STORE STANDARD DEVIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

3. TSI LOGICAL CALCULATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

4. VRI MULTI-STATE VARIABLE CALCULATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . 21

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 1-ii
1. Presentation

1.1. INTRODUCTION

Centralog COMPUTATION FUNCTIONS are used in the calculation of TMI, TSI and VRI
internal variables.

These calculations may concern statistical values (simple or weighted averages),

extreme values at any given moment, or running times or production of variables which
cannot be measured directly.

These functions may be divided into 3 categories as follows:

analog calculation functions(TMIs),

— V01 : Derived variables
— V02 : Calculations in Polish notation
— V03 : Store TMI
— V04 : Periodic average
— V05 : Current average
— V06 : Pulse count
— V07 : Running time
— V08 : Group average with standard deviation
— V09 : Store standard deviation

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 2

logical calculation functions (TSIs),

multi–state variable calculation functions (VRIs).

1.2. IMPLEMENTATION

Calculation formulae are defined in the database description. Calculations used by the
application are defined during customization and users can insert, modify and delete
formulae as required by modifying the database.

The number of terms in a formula is limited to 48. When the calculation is relatively long, or
when at least two of the different types of calculation are to be used, the calculation
formula must be subdivided into as many sub–formulae as necessary. The calculation is
thus performed in several steps, each step being translated into a specific internal
variable.

The following table shows which types of variable can be used as input data for each type
of calculation (squares containing a cross).

The self–reference column indicates those cases where the variable giving the result can
itself be incorporated into the formula.

Counter variables:

Only one V05, V06 or V07 type counting variable can be associated to a database
variable.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 3
 TMI

TME

AUTO–
threshold
TMI

threshold

TSI
TME

TSE
TVC
TVCI

attainments
attainments

P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B
REFERENCE

DTS Computation Functions

DERIVED (V01)

POLISH CALCULATION (V02)

STORE (V03)

AVERAGE (V04)

CURRENT
AVERAGE (V05)

COUNTER (V06)

RUNNING
TIME (V07)

GROUP AVERAGE
(V08)

STANDARD DEVIATION (V09)

V08

LOGICAL CALCULATION
(VTC)

MULTI-STATE VARIABLE

Sheet 4
REV B
2. TMI Analog Calculation Functions

2.1. INTRODUCTION

These calculations are performed on external analog and logical variables, or on the
results of internal calculations.

Variables resulting from these calculations are TMI internal analog variables.

2.1.1. Calculation Cycles

These general calculation functions are activated cyclically in accordance with the
periodicity specified in the database.

The permissible intervals associated with each variable for each type of calculation are as
follows:
— 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 seconds,
— 1, 2, 5, 10, 30 minutes,
— 1 hour, shift times,
— 1 day, 1 month.

TMI variables are calculated in ascending order of periodicity. Variables with the same
periodicity are calculated in the following order: V02, V01, V03, V04, V05, V06, V07, V08,
V09.

Example : Let there be a type V02 variable A with a 10s calculation interval, a type V03
variable B with a 30s interval and a type V04 variable C with a 10s interval. In the
calculation cycle performed every 30 seconds, the order of calculation will be A then C
then B.

2.1.2. Long–life Variables

Certain TMI variables can be defined during customization as being ”long–life variables”.
These variables are stored on disk at hourly intervals (data stored : value, validity and
status).

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 5
2.2. V01 : DERIVED VARIABLES

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— ID code of the variable to be derived (V), type TME, TMI, TVC or TVCI,
— sampling period u (corresponding to IV calculation period).

Important:

u is logically equal to the calculation period of V, or to a multiple of this period.

Processing :

Calculations are performed on data acquired over 3 successive cycles:

t0 t1 = t0+u t2 = t1+u

time
V0 V1 V2
IV0 IV1 IV2

IV2 = A* IV0 + B*IV1 + C*(V2 - V1) where A + B + C = 1

u

A, B and C are constants which are configured at project level and which thus have the
same value for all TMI variables.

If the variable to be derived is invalid, inhibited or out–of–limits for the current cycle, the
result variable is declared invalid for both the current cycle and the following cycle.

The result variable is also doubtful during the following cycle or can be declared invalid if
the variable to be derived is invalid, inhibited or out–of–limits.

A non–filtered derivation can be obtained with the following coefficients :

A = B = 0 and C = 1

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 6
2.3. V02 : CALCULATION IN POLISH NOTATION

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— period u corresponding to IV calculation period,
— calculation formula : list of terms,
— calculation rank: R.
The rank determines the order in which TMI V02 Polish calculation variables are
calculated.

Description of the calculation formula :

The calculation formula forming a Polish stack is composed of up to 48 terms. The final
term is ”END” (included in the 48 terms).

The terms describing the calculation are composed of operands and operators :

Operands Variables ID code of external logical or analog variables

and internal variables
Constants value
Operators Functions mathematical or physical functions
"END" operator

Example:

The calculation of IV = (V1 + V2) * V3 is described by the terms V1, V2, +, V3, *, END.

Available functions:

algebraic :
— + addition
— – subtraction
— * multiplication
— / division
— ** raise to the power of
— ABS absolute value
— LOG natural logarithm
— EXP exponential
— SOMn sum of n variables (n inferior to 46)
This function is similar to the addition function but uses only half as many
terms.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 7
 — PY3 3rd degree polynomial (a + bx + cx2 + dx3)
This term is composed of: a, b, c, d, x, PY3.

trigonometric:
— SIN sine
— COS cosine
— TG tangent
— FY0 step function
F(x) = 0 if x < =0
F(x) = 1 if x > 0

statistical :
— MINn lowest value among a group of n variables.
— MAXn highest value among a group of n variables.
In both cases: n < 46.
The variables in the group may be either logical or analog variables.

reference charts:
— ABD direct interpolation y = f(x, p).
— ABI indirect interpolation x = f(y, p).
A chart may show from 1 to 10 curves, each curve being composed of from 2 to 20
points. The number of curves and points can be parametered for each chart.

All the curves on a single chart must have the same type of function (either
ascending or descending).

All the curves on a single chart must have the same number of points.

The database defined during customization contains :

— the table of all the values in the chart
— the description of the TMI V02 variable comprising the definition of both the
parameters (a variable ID code or value of a constant) and the reference
code of the chart.

thermodynamic :
— TP Saturation temperature F(pressure)
— STPV Entropy F(pressure, temperature, titer)
— HTPV Enthalpy F(pressure, temperature, titer)
— SPE Saturation entropy in water range F(pressure)

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 8
 — SPV Saturation entropy in steam range F(pressure)
— HPE Saturation enthalpy in water range F(pressure)
— HPV Saturation enthalpy in steam range F(pressure)
— HPS Enthalpy F(pressure, entropy)
— TPH Temperature F(pressure, enthalpy)
— VPS Titer F(pressure, entropy)
— VPH Titer F(pressure, enthalpy)

The parameters used in these functions are defined as follows:

— Temperature in ¨C between 0 and 800 ¨C
— Pressure in bars between 0,01 and 230 bars
— Entropy in KJoules/KgC between 0 and 10,62
— Enthalpy in KJoules/Kg between 0 and 4109,67
— Titer (ratio of steam to total mass) between 0 and 1

diverse : these functions are used to program a series of calculations

depending on certain conditions.
— IFPn go to term n if the value in the calculation stack
is superior to 0.
— IFNn go to term n if the value in the calculation stack
is inferior to 0.
— IFZn go to term n if the value in the calculation stack
is equal to 0.
— GOTn go to term n unconditionally.
— RAZ delete last term in the calculation stack.
— END end of equation.
Remark : The jump instructions IFPn, IFNn, IFZn and GOTn do not pull the stack.

Processing:

The calculation result is invalid if one of the components of the calculation is invalid,
inhibited or out–of–limits. The result may also be invalid if an illegal operation has been
performed during the calculation (eg. division by zero) or if capacity has been exceeded.

The calculation result is doubtful if one of the components of the calculation is replaced or
doubtful, or if the result itself is invalid, or, in the case of a reference chart calculation, if the
input parameters are off the chart definition area.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 9
2.4. V03 : STORE TMI

This function is used to store TMI type variables.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result,
— ID code of the variable to be stored,
— sampling period (storage).

Processing :

TMI variables are stored by copying their value, validity and quality into another TMI. This
process is performed at a specified periodicity.

After being stored, the variable in question is reset to zero. The variable also is initialized
as being valid and sure.

The V05 type variable calculation cycle number n is also reset to zero.

A type V03 TMI variable is invalid if the TMI stored is invalid, inhibited or out–of–limits.

The variable is doubtful if the TMI stored is replaced or doubtful.

A (TME) 100

1100
1000
900
800
700
B (V02) 600
500
400
B=B+A 300
200
100 100

C (V03) 1100

0 5 10 time

Fig. 1 : Example of TMI storage

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 10
2.5. V04 : PERIODIC AVERAGE

This function calculates a periodic average by recurrence without accessing intermediate

values.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— ID code of the input variable (V),
— sampling period (for V) u,
— number of calculation cycles n,
— update period (for IV) w.
The period u is a multiple of the period of acquisition or calculation of variable V, or equal
to that period.

The final average update period w (IV) is a multiple of the sampling period u.

Let M be the average value calculated from the start of the current cycle (period w), where
IV is the result of the calculation performed in the last complete cycle. This intermediate
value has no ID code and therefore cannot be accessed.

Processing :

t1 t1+u t1+2u t2=t1+w

time
V1 V11 V12 V1n (w=n*u)
IV1 IV2

at t1+u M=M1=V11
M1+V12
at t1+2u M=M2=
2
2M2+V13 V11+V12+V13
at t1+3u M=M3= =
3 3

(i–1)Mi–1+V1i V11+V12+...+V 1i
at t1+i*u M=Mi = =
i i

(n–1)Mn–1+V1n
at t2 IV=Mn=
n

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 11
 The result variable is declared invalid when the input variable has been inhibited, invalid
or out–of–limits for the full duration of the calculation cycle preceding the update.

The result variable is doubtful when the input variable has been invalid, inhibited,
out–of–limits, doubtful or replaced on at least one occasion during the calculation cycle
preceding the update.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 12
2.6. V05 : CURRENT AVERAGE

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— ID code of the input variable (V),
— sampling period (for V) u.
The period u is a multiple of the period of acquisition or calculation of variable V, or equal
to that period.

Processing :

t1 t2 = t1+u

time
Vn-1 Vn
IV1 IV2

(n * 1)M n*1 ) Vn
IV + M n + n

The value n represents the number of calculation cycles since the start of the current
average Mn, ie. the number of measurements included in the calculation of that average.

The average is calculated cyclically, and the variable is updated in the database on each
calculation. The average can be accessed either by operator dialogue or on request by
the application programs.

To fix the value of a given average, the value of the variable concerned must be saved in a
V03 type variable. Calculation of the average is resumed at zero after storage,
ie. Mn = n = 0.

The invalid values of the input variable are not taken into account in the calculation of the
average.

The average is invalid if the input variable is invalid, inhibited or out–of–limits for the full
duration of the cycle preceding the update.

The average is doubtful if the input variable has been invalid, inhibited, out–of–limits,
doubtful or replaced on at least one occasion during the cycle preceding the update.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 13
 3

TME 2

V05 1

V04 1

0 5 10 15 20 time

Fig. 2 : Example of averages

The example above shows:

— an external TME analog variable with a five second sampling period,
— a V05 current average variable with a calculation period equal to that of the
external variable,
— a V04 type periodic average variable with a calculation period 4 times as long
as that of the external variable.

Variables in the monthly log :

A V05 type TMI variable can be used in calculations in a monthly log. In this case, the log
value is updated at hourly intervals. The V05 variable is reset to zero after each update.
As a consequence, a V03 variable cannot be associated to this type of variable.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 14
2.7. V06 : PULSE COUNT

This function counts the number of TSE or TSI variable state changes, and of TME or TMI
variable state changes (threshold attainments).

Any type of transition can be counted. Transition types are defined for each counter as
below:

transition 0 to 1,

transition 1 to 0,

transitions 0 to 1 and 1 to 0.

A constant representing the importance (weighting) of the pulse concerned is associated

to each counter. At the end of the counting period (defined for each counter), the
accumulated value is calculated and stored in the counter.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— ID code of the variable counted (V),
— pulse weighting (P),
— calculation period (u).

Processing :

t0 t0+x t0+y t1 = t0+u

1
input V 0
time
C=0 C=C+1 C=C+1 C
result IV1 IV2

IV refreshment:

IVn = C* P

The IV analog variable is updated with the total number of pulses generated during the
last cycle and transformed into a physical value by means of the weighting P at the end of
period u.

The result obtained can be stored in a V03 type TMI. The count value is reset to zero on
storage. The period of the V03 variable must be a multiple of u.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 15
 The TMI variable is invalid if the input variable has remained invalid, inhibited or
out–of–limits since the start of the cycle.

The TMI variable is doubtful if the input variable has been invalid, doubtful, inhibited or
out–of–limits at least once since the start of the cycle.

Invalid values are not included in the count.

Variables in the monthly log :

A V06 type TMI variable can be used in calculations in a monthly log. In this case, the log
value is updated at hourly intervals. The V06 variable is reset to zero after each update.
As a consequence, a V03 variable cannot be associated to this type of variable.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 16
2.8. V07 : RUNNING TIME

This function calculates the time that TSE, or TSI variables, or threshold attainments by
TME or TMI variables remain in state 1.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— variable used for the calculation of the time (V),
— calculation period expressed in seconds (u),
— counter increment value (n).

Processing :

t0 t1=t0+u t2=t1+u t3=t2+u t4=t3+u

input 1
V 0
time
result IV IV+n IV+2n IV+2n IV+3n

Running times inferior to the calculation period may not be taken into account.

The result obtained can be stored in a V03 type TMI. The value of the running time is reset
to zero on storage.

The TMI variable is invalid if the input variable has remained invalid, inhibited or
out–of–limits since the start of the cycle.

The TMI variable is doubtful if the input variable has been invalid, inhibited, out–of–limits,
doubtful or replaced at least once since the start of the cycle,.

Invalid, inhibited or out–of–limits values are not taken into account in the assessment of
running time.

Variables in the monthly log :

A V07 type TMI variable can be used in calculations in a monthly log. In this case, the log
value is updated at hourly intervals. The V07 variable is reset to zero after each update.
As a consequence, a V03 variable cannot be associated to this type of variable.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 17
2.9. V08 : GROUP AVERAGE WITH STANDARD DEVIATION

This function calculates the current average of several TME, TMI, TVC or TVCI type
measurements and the standard deviation.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV) of the average,
— list of variables for which the average is required.

Processing :

N
ȍ TIi
i+1
IV +
N

TIi = input values

N = number of values.

Only valid, non–inhibited, non–replaced and non–doubtful variables are taken into
account.

If the number of values used in the calculation is inferior to 50 % of the total number, the
TMI is declared doubtful.

If the number of values which can be used in the calculation is nil, the TMI is invalid.

The value of the standard deviation can only be accessed if it has been stored by a V09
type function in an associated TMI.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 18
2.10. V09 : STORE STANDARD DEVIATION

This function copies the value of the standard deviation of a V08 type TMI into a storage
TMI.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— ID code of the associated V08 variable V08,
— calculation period.

Processing :

IV + Ǹ i+N
ȍ (TIi *NTM)
i+1
2

The result is invalid if the input TMI is invalid, and doubtful if the input TMI is doubtful.

The period of the V09 type TMI must be identical to that of the associated V08 TMI.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 19
3. TSI Logical Calculation Functions

Introduction :

These calculations are performed on internal or external logical variables, or on threshold

attainments by internal or external analog variables.

The variables resulting from these calculations are internal logical TSI variables.

These calculation functions are activated cyclically at one second intervals.

However an equation will be evaluated only if at least one of its components has changed.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— calculation rank
— a calculation equation in Polish notation.

The following operators are used:

— . : logical AND,
— + : logical OR,
— * : exclusive OR,
— / : logical inversion,
— END : end of equation.

Processing :

The result of the calculation is invalid if one of the components is invalid, inhibited or
out–of–limits.

The result is doubtful if one of the components is replaced or doubtful.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 20
4. VRI Multi–State Variable Calculation Functions

Introduction :

These calculations are performed on internal or external logical variables, or on threshold

attainments by internal or external analog variables.

The variables resulting from these calculations are multi–state variables (VRIs).

These calculation functions are activated cyclically at one second intervals. However a
VRI will be evaluated only if at least one of its components has changed.

Processing :

When a component item in a VRI is used to represent doubtfulness, this item is set to1
whenever one (or more) of the other items is doubtful or out of limits.

An intermediate value (iv) is constituted by the sum of the binary values of the VRI’s 8
component items.

This intermediate value is then used to index the truth table which provides the final value
(fv) of the VRI (from 0 to15).

VRI components Truth table

DOUBTFUL
0 1 Off
ON
DISCREPANCY 1 5 Off Doubtful
FEEDBACK FAULT 2 2 On
3 6 On Doubtful
iv = 6 4 3 Off Discrepancy
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
5 7 Off Discr Dbt
6 4 On Discrepancy
7 8 On Discr Dbt

Final value of the VRI: fv = 4

Fig. 3 : Example of VRI calculation

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 21
 The example shown above involving 3 external TS variables (ON, DISCREPANCY and
FEEDBACK FAULT) corresponds to a motor with the start/stop TS set to On, with
Discrepancy but no Feedback Fault. Acquisition of this information is considered as sure
(Doubtful = 0). The intermediate VRI has a binary value of 00000110, ie. 6. This value
corresponds to a final value of 4 in the truth table.

If the corresponding value in the truth table is nil, the VRI is frozen. It conserves the value
calculated during the previous cycle.

When one or more entries are inhibited, the final value of the VRI variable is set at 0.

.
P–TP09–A42049–V4 E B REV B
DTS Computation Functions Sheet 22
 DTS
Functional Operation

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42050-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 26 28
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10.12.98 Translation of the French document rev. B GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2. MANAGING REDUNDANCY OF CENTRALOG 30/50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2.1. FAULT TOLERANCE STRATEGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2. REDUNDANT ARCHITECTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3. STARTING AND STOPPING THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

3.1. STARTING AND STOPPING THE CIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.1. CIS Start-up Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1.2. CIS start-up with Total Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.3. CIS start-up with Partial Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.4. Passive CIS Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.1.5. Other Features of Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.1.6. Stopping the CIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2. STARTING AND STOPPING THE OPERATOR STATIONS . . . . . . . 10
3.3. POWER FAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4. INSTALLING A NEW VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

5. SYSTEM INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.1. GENERAL PRINCIPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.2. SYSTEM VIEWS AND VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.3. SYSTEM MESSAGES AND THE CCC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

6. TIME MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.1. INTERNAL SYNCHRONIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.2. EXTERNAL SYNCHRONIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.3. OPERATOR COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
APPENDIX A SYSTEM TELESIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 1-ii
1. Introduction

This volume describes the following aspects of the CENTRALOG system:

D implementation of redundant CENTRALOG 30 or 50 components

D the different modes of starting and stopping the CENTRALOG system,

D the facility of changing versions of CENTRALOG 30 or 50 while the system is in

operation

D the presentation of system information to the operator,

D time management within the system.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 2
2. Managing Redundancy of Centralog 30/50

2.1. FAULT TOLERANCE STRATEGY

CENTRALOG fault tolerance strategy is based on the redundancy of hardware

components. The mechanisms implemented are as follows:

D fault detection mechanisms. These are implemented at all levels of the

architecture (regular hardware and software monitoring of all components and
elements),

D mechanisms for processing the fault detected. These consist in putting the
defective component out of service and automatically re–configuring the system,

D signaling mechanisms. These are used to inform the operating personnel of the
occurrence of faults.

All of the following CENTRALOG components may be supplied in redundant form:

D CIS station,

D operator stations ,

D Contronet network,

D S8000–F network,

D printers.

Components selected to be redundant are defined during the configuration phase.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 3
2.2. REDUNDANT ARCHITECTURES

The generic architecture of the CENTRALOG system is as follows. The components

shown in solid lines are those which are requisite for operation of the system. The
components shown in broken lines are optional components allowing redundancy :

Contronet

CIS 1 CIS 2

CVS 1 CVS 2 CVS n

S8000–F

A redundant CIS is composed of two identical ”dual” stations”. In a configuration where

the Contronet network is redundant, each CIS station can be connected to both networks.

Starting a dual CIS

The CIS which starts first is known as the ”active” station.

The active station, while running all the operational functions, transfers all its data to the
second station as soon as the latter starts. The second station is then known as the
”passive” station. Dual stations operate in parallel.

Operation of the passive CIS

The purpose of the passive station is to monitor the operation of the active station and to
take over if the active station goes down.

Switchover to the passive CIS

If a fault occurs on the active station, its role is automatically taken over by the passive
station. The passive station thus becomes the active station and the defective station is
put out of service.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 4
3. Starting and Stopping the System

Normally, system start–up is global, ie. all of the stations on the system (CIS and operator
stations) are started. However it is also possible to start a station individually, for example
after a maintenance operation.

3.1. STARTING AND STOPPING THE CIS

The CIS is started and stopped by means of dialogue from the CCC function.

Starting the CIS alone (without restarting the operator stations) causes the views that
were visible on the operator station CRTs before the CIS was stopped to be re–displayed.

As a Centralog 10 configuration includes only one station (CIS/operator station), the

operational mode is the same as the one described below for the CIS.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 5
3.1.1. CIS Start–up Modes

Depending on the choice of the operator, the CIS is started with either total or partial
re–initialization of data. This choice is selected from the CCC ”Stations Admin” menu:

MSNV

Stations Admin

Stop
Exploitation CCC

Centralog
Miscella Facilities
Admin.

In the event of start–up with total initialization, any modifications made by the operator are
canceled and historical records (curves etc.) are erased.

In the event of start–up with partial initialization, this data is conserved.

process
Example of start–up in each mode
with y=f(t) curve data :
duration of
stoppage

process t

start–up with
partial initialization

t
process

CIS stopped

start–up with
total initialization

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 6
3.1.2. CIS start–up with Total Initialization

This type of start–up is used when the CENTRALOG system is put into service for the first
time or after changing the real–time database (RTDB) version.

The start–up procedure involves:

D downloading the software,

D downloading the entire RTDB,

D the full initialization of all data.

The database is thus loaded from the CCC disk onto the CIS exactly as it has been
generated.

D The status of all the variables and Operative Units is re–initialized as

’’on–monitoring”,

D Assignment of the direct call keys is also re–initialized.

D etc.

Only files containing logs archived before the shut–down are conserved.

3.1.3. CIS start–up with Partial Initialization

The start–up procedure is similar to that described above. However certain data
produced before the CIS was stopped is conserved.

This type of start–up can only be used if the RTDB version has not been changed since
the CIS was stopped.

In this type of start–up, the RTDB cannot be wholly reloaded, and certain data may not be
re–initialized.

The following data stored on disk is recovered after a partial initialization:

D operator modifications regarding the status of variables (setting on/off

monitoring, replacement of value, inhibition) or their thresholds,

D operator modifications regarding the status of Operative Units,

D operator modifications regarding the status of disturbance groups (setting on/off

monitoring),

D operator modifications regarding the status of SOE groups (setting on/off

monitoring),

D the value attributed by the operator to analysis variables (TMO),

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 7
 D operator actions on the composition of variable groups (curve groups, operator
groups).

D historical curve groups records,

D historical records of the shift, daily and monthly logs (in particular the monthly log
counters) at hourly intervals,

D hourly values of long term TMIs, (these variables are saved every hour),

D files containing archived logs,

D assignment of the direct call keys.

D table of values of schedules and associated curves

The shift, daily, weekly and monthly maintenance logs corresponding to the period prior to
shut–down are closed and archived when the system restarts (if they have been declared
as archivable during configuration). They can therefore be printed out on request by the
operator. The subsequent printout of the shift, daily and weekly logs will contain data
recorded from the time the system was restarted.

3.1.4. Passive CIS Start–up

In the case of a dual CIS, the second station to start automatically becomes the ”passive”
station .

The passive station starts without stopping the active station.

The RTDB is loaded by the active station by means of the special inter–station link.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 8
3.1.5. Other Features of Start–up

System start–up, with partial or total initialization, also presents the following specific
characteristics:

Acquisition

Overall acquisition of external logical variables provides a snapshot of the value and
validity of these variables.

Acquisition of external analog variables (value and validity) starts in accordance with the
acquisition rate defined for each variable.

The sequence monitoring state of the automation cells is also acquired.

Alarm Processing

Processing of the first alarm logging can be disabled on system start–up depending on
the variable–by–variable customization.

Time Tagging

Event time–tags at system start–up are marked with a specific invalidity character (?).
Time–tagging becomes valid:

D when the first synchro pulse is received from the external clock,

D or after three minutes if the system fails to receive a synchro pulse,

D or when the time is set by the operator.

3.1.6. Stopping the CIS

The CIS is stopped from the CCC ”Stations Admin” menu:

MSNV

Stations Admin

Stop
Exploitation CCC

Centralog
Miscella Facilities
Admin.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 9
3.2. STARTING AND STOPPING THE OPERATOR STATIONS

Each operator station is started from the outer frame of the screen or from the background
screen when no application is visible in full page mode.

Root menu
Application " Application
Refresh EXP " EXP
Exit " CCC Language 1
HDSR " Language 2
Win
CLOGSQL "

Photo
Example of menu (depending on the software installed on the station)

Initial Display
When the system is configured, it is possible to define the first screen to be displayed on
each of the CRTs when the operator station is started.

3.3. POWER FAIL

The reaction of the CENTRALOG system to a power fail situation depends on the
duration of the failure:

D a short power failure is ”absorbed” by the system, and operations are not affected.

D a longer power failure causes a hardware shut–down.

When power is re–established, the hardware units restart automatically.

In the event of an automatic restart of the complete CENTRALOG system or of the CIS
alone, the initialization mode (total or partial) is that previously defined by dialogue on the
CCC.

The date and time of restart are recorded in the signaling message file to indicate the
power failure to the operator.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 10
4. Installing a New Version

CENTRALOG 30 or 50 with a dual CIS configuration offers the possibility of changing the
software or the database version without stopping the operation.

With one CENTRALOG version in normal operation, the procedure for installing the new
version (MSNV) is performed in three steps (the procedure is entirely controlled from the
CCC) :

STEP 1 : SWITCH TO SHARED MODE

During the system configuration phase, the stations are divided into two groups forming
two separate architectures capable of functioning independently of each other. Such a
separation obviously requires a redundant architecture.

When the new software or database version is available on the CCC, one of the two
groups is stopped. The new version is loaded onto the group which is stopped and the
group is then restarted.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 11
 STEP 2 : OPERATION IN SHARED MODE

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ CVS 1
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
CVS 2 CVS 3

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
Dual CONTRONET

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
CIS CIS

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ S8000

P320 P320
CONTROBLOC CONTROBLOC

Stations operating with current version

Stations operating with test version

Process operations proceed without interruption using the current version on the group
which has not been stopped.

Simultaneously, the new version is tested and validated on the other group.

STEP 3 : RETURN TO NORMAL MODE

The operator can return to normal mode in one of two ways, depending on whether the
new version is satisfactory or not:

D either the new version is extended to the whole CENTRALOG system, in order to
continue operation with the new version (the CIS and operator stations on the
group running the old version are stopped and restarted),

D the group running the new version return to the old version (the CIS and operator
stations on the group running the new version are stopped and restarted).

Return to normal mode is performed without interrupting operation of the system.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 12
5. System Information

5.1. GENERAL PRINCIPLES

Information relative to the state of the system is transmitted on two levels ;

D to the operator stations in the control room, enabling the operators to call in
maintenance teams.

D to the CCC function, in order to assist the maintenance staff in diagnosing the
origin of the fault.

5.2. SYSTEM VIEWS AND VARIABLES

The CENTRALOG system functions which monitor hardware and software components
automatically produce state changes in the logical variables associated to faults.

These TSS logical variables (System Telesignals described in the Volume ”Data
Description and Management”) are processed like the other logical variables and can
therefore, depending on customization, trigger alarms and/or be recorded in the various
logs.

These variables are also used to animate a mimic view representing the different
components of the system and their respective states. This view can be consulted on the
operator stations in the same way as the process supervision mimics (refer to the Volume
”Supervision Functions”).

A full list of TSS system telesignals is provided in the Appendix to this volume.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 13
5.3. SYSTEM MESSAGES AND THE CCC FUNCTION

Signaling messages are transmitted to the CCC function from the CIS and the operator
stations.

These signaling messages are of two types:

D information messages intended for the operators; these messages correspond to

system messages and are defined in the Volume ”Operator Station”

D manufacturer ’s messages reserved exclusively for CEGELEC service personnel.

CIS

CCC Messages
displayed
Circular on arrival
storage
file
(1024 messages) Off-line
consultation &
print-out of
Transmission messages
of message

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 14
 Signaling messages are stored in order of arrival at the station dedicated to the CCC
function in a circular file, containing up to 1024 messages). Messages are displayed
one–by–one on arrival in one of the windows of the CCC.

Printer output and consultation functions (order of arrival display of each message),
enable messages received by the circular file to be sorted chronologically or by criteria
(filters).

These functions are implemented by interactive dialogue on the CCC station:

From: 5hs station: 1 Date 26/10/98 10:13:44:070

Centralog Messages
Card: 5hsb Process: Phti_tri Sender: rphts_acquisit
Printer Log Lib: 01KITUS002 Printer 2 E: NORMA

Order–of–arrival message
display window
Blocking message
indicator

Mode Consultation Sorting Disabled

Filters
Source Block : z Station : Card Name :
Time slice From : Until :
Date [DD/MM/YYYY] : 03/9/1998 Date [DD/MM/YYYY] : 03/9/1998
Hour [hh:mm] : Hour [hh:mm] :

Sender : Name : Process : Name :

Message Display
From : 5hs Station : 1 card : 5 hsb process : phti_tu
Date : 03/09/1998 13 : 37 : 28 : 930 Sender : rphts_acquisit
01KITUS064 WORKSTATION 1 BD2 ACCESS CONNECT E : IN_SV

Stack Analysis

Done Prev Next Message : 581 Min Max Quit

Message consultation/print–out
window

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 15
6. Time Management

6.1. INTERNAL SYNCHRONIZATION

The CENTRALOG system provides a time management function which is essentially

used to ensure that processing operations are synchronized and that events are time–
tagged.

6.2. EXTERNAL SYNCHRONIZATION

CENTRALOG internal time can be synchronized with an external source. A serial input
on the CIS physical block is designed to accept a synchronization pulse signal transmitted
at one minute intervals.

6.3. OPERATOR COMMANDS

The system date and time as well as shift times can be modified by dialogue on the
operator stations.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 16
APPENDIX A SYSTEM TELESIGNALS

The table below lists the TSS system telesignals used to inform the operator of the state of
the different elements in the CENTRALOG system.

CIS STATE TELESIGNALS

Label : INTERFACE STATION 1

State message 0: SLAVE Circumstance : CIS station 1 is slave to station 2
State message 1: MASTER Circumstance : CIS station 1 is CENTRALOG master station .
Label : INTERFACE STATION 2
State message 0: SLAVE Circumstance : CIS station 2 is slave to station 1
State message 1: MASTER Circumstance : CIS station 2 is CENTRALOG master station.
Label : INTERFACE STATION 1 START UP
State message 0: IN-PR Circumstance : CIS station 1 is starting.
State message 1: END Circumstance : CIS station 1 is started.
Label : INTERFACE STATION 2 START UP
State message 0: IN-PR Circumstance : CIS station 2 is starting.
State message 1: END Circumstance : CIS station 2 is started.
Label : NEW MSNV VERSION
State message 0: NO Circumstance : CENTRALOG is in normal or shared mode; the data base
version of this CIS is unchanged.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : CENTRALOG is in MSNV shared mode; a new data base
version has been loaded on this CIS station.
Action: when the new data version is validated, stop and restart the CIS
whose data base is obsolete.
Label : DUAL-LINK STATION INTERFACE
State message 0: IN-SERV Circumstance : the Ethernet link between the 2 CIS stations is
operational.
State message 1: OUT-S Circumstance : the Ethernet link between the 2 stations is defective.
Action: check connections and transceivers.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 17
 Label : DUAL-LINK STATION INTERFACE MONI
State message 0: IN-SERV Circumstance : the serial link between the 2 CIS stations is operational.
State message 1: OUT-S Circumstance : the serial link between the 2 stations is defective.
Action: Check connections.
Label : EXTERNAL CLOCK
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal reception of external clock.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : the CIS is not receiving information from the external
clock.
Action: Check the clock and its connections.

CIS NETWORK TELESIGNALS

Label : CIS ETHERNET NETWORK NETWORK

State message 0: IN-SERV Circumstance : normal communication between the CIS and one or
more stations.
State message 1: OUT-S Circumstance : the CIS cannot communicate with any of the stations.
Action: Start a station; check connections to the Contronet network.
Label : CIS 1 ETHERNET COUPLER 1
State message 0: IN-SERV Circumstance : CIS station 1 can communicate via Contronet bus 1.
State message 1: OUT-S Circumstance : CIS station 1 cannot communicate via Contronet bus 1.
Action: Check the relevant Contronet board and its connection to the netĆ
work.
Label : CIS 2 ETHERNET COUPLER 1
State message 0: IN-SERV Circumstance : CIS station 2 can communicate via Contronet bus 1.
State message 1: OUT-S Circumstance : CIS station 2 cannot communicate via Contronet bus 1.
Action: Check the relevant Contronet board and its connection to the netĆ
work.
Label : CIS 1 ETHERNET COUPLER 2
State message 0: IN-SERV Circumstance : CIS station 1 can communicate via Contronet bus 2.
State message 1: OUT-S Circumstance : CIS station 1 cannot communicate via Contronet bus 2.
Action: Check the relevant Contronet board and its connection to the netĆ
work.
Label : CIS 2 ETHERNET COUPLER 2
State message 0: IN-SERV Circumstance : CIS station 2 can communicate via Contronet bus 2.
State message 1: OUT-S Circumstance : CIS station 2 cannot communicate via Contronet bus 2.
Action: Check the relevant Contronet board and its connection to the netĆ
work.
Label : CCC FUNCTION
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal communication between the CIS and the CCC.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : the CIS cannot communicate with the CCC.
Action: Start the CCC; check the connection from the CCC to Contronet
network.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 18
 Label : S8000 SYNCHRONIZATION
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : synchronization through the S8000 network assuming
several Centralog connected to this network to have the same date/time
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : inter-Centralog synchronization fault
Action : check the S8000 network. Enter a new date/time from one of the
operator stations.

LOG AND HDSR TELESIGNALS

Label : LOSS OF HDSR LINK

State message 0: NO Circumstance : function in normal state.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : the CIS cannot communicate with the station running
HDSR.
Action: Check the connection from the station to the Contronet network.
Label : HDSR STORAGE TO BE DONE
State message 0: NO Circumstance : HDSR station file is less than 80 % full.
This message appears at the end of a storage operation.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : HDSR station file is 80 % full.
Action: Perform storage operation.
Label : LOGS STORAGE TO BE DONE
State message 0: NO Circumstance : monitored disk spaces for logs are less than 80 % full.

State message 1: YES Circumstance : one of the monitored disk spaces for logs is 80 % full.
Action: Perform storage operation.
Label : DISTURBANCE LOG
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS LOG
SHIFT LOG
DAILY LOG
WEEKLY LOG
MONTHLY BALANCE LOG
MAINTENANCE LOG
ALARM LOG
VARIABLE LIST
TREND LOG
State message 0: Circumstance :
State message 1: APPEAR Circumstance : a new log of this type is available
Action: it can be displayed or printed out.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 19
 OPERATOR STATION TELESIGNALS

Label : CONTRONET DIAL. OPERATOR STN n

State message 0: IN-SERV Circumstance : normal communication between the CIS and the relevant
operator station.
State message 1: OUT-S Circumstance : the CIS cannot communicate with the operator station.
Action: Start the operator station. Check the connection from the operaĆ
tor station to the Contronet network.
Label : CONTRONET 1 OPERATOR STATION n
State message 0: IN-SERV Circumstance : the operator station can communicate via Contronet link
1
State message 1: OUT-S Circumstance : the operator station cannot communicate via Contronet
link 1
Action: Check the relevant Contronet board and its connection to the netĆ
work.
Label : CONTRONET 2 OPERATOR STATION n
State message 0: IN-SERV Circumstance : the operator station can communicate via Contronet link
2
State message 1: OUT-S Circumstance : the operator station cannot communicate via Contronet
link 2
Action: Check the relevant Contronet board and its connection to the netĆ
work.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 20
 CONTROBLOC TELESIGNALS

C370 CONTROLLER (ES)

Label : CENTRALOG/CELL n VERSION
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : Indicates inconsistency between the MICROETE and P4
database version numbers.
Label : CELL n SYSTEM FAULT
State message 0: ABSCE Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: PRNCE Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one malfunction in a cell,
or in in one of the applications or in an exchange unit.
Action: Detailed diagnostics of the malfunction are performed using the
P4 terminal.
Label : CELL n SYSTEM FAULT
State message 0: Circumstance :
State message 1: APPEAR Circumstance : indicates the appearance of a new malfunction in a cell
PU.
Label : CELLn PROCESS FAULT
State message 0: ABSCE Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: PRNCE Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one process malfunction
Label : CELLn PROCESS FAULT
State message 0: Circumstance :
State message 1: APPEAR Circumstance : indicates the appearance of a new process malfunction.
Label : C370 n HARDWARE FAULT
State message 0: ABSCE Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: PRNCE Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one hardware malfunction:
redundancy, secondary or temperature error.
Label : C370 n INTERVENTION
State message 0: NO Circumstance : no maintenance operation in progress on the controller.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates a maintenance operation in progress on the
controller : - key on operation,
- application watchdog disabled,
- forcing in service,
- stop at break point ,
- remote connection in progress with password.
Labels : AUDITION CELL n LINK 1
AUDITION CELL n LINK 2
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state of master cell links
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates a reception malfunction on S8000 net detected
by master cell n, on channel 1 (normal) or channel 2 (backup).

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 21
 CE2000 EQUIPMENT (ES)
Label : EQUIPMENT m n LINK
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal link between the CIS and the hardware.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : the CIS cannot communicate with the automation cell
hardware.
Action: Check connections.
Label : EQPT m n HARDWARE FAULT
indicates with respect to each of the 4 I/O racks of the cell:
State message 0: ABSCE Circumstance : in normal operation.
State message 1: PRNCE Circumstance : indicates existence at least one hardware malfunction:
equipment, PU redundancy, power supply redundancy, secondary or
module n*i hardware malfunction
Label : EQPT m n PROCESS FAULT
indicates with respect to each of the 4 I/O racks:
State message 0: ABSCE Circumstance : in normal operation.
State message 1: PRNCE Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one process malfunction
external to the I/O modules
Label : FORC/PARAM MODIF. EQ m n
State message 0: NO Circumstance : no modification or forcing in a cell n CE2000 rack m
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates existence of forcing or modification of parameĆ
ter in a cell n CE2000 rack m
Label : LOCAL CONTROL EQPT m n
State message 0: ON Circumstance : local command in operation.
State message 1: OFF Circumstance : no local command in operation.
Label : CONF/MAINT I/O MOD EQ m n
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : in normal operation.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one configuration error or
an on maintenance position
Action: check the type of the modules in the rack or set the module off
maintenance from the P4 console
CE80-35 EQUIPMENT (ES)
Label : EQUIPMENT m n LINK
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal link between the CIS and the hardware.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : the CIS cannot communicate with the hardware.
Action: Check connections.
Label : EQ m n HARDWARE FAULT
State message 0: ABSCE Circumstance : in normal operation.
State message 1: PRNCE Circumstance : indicates existence at least one hardware malfunction:
blocking fault, secondary fault or module hardware malfunction
Label : EQ m n PROCESS FAULT
State message 0: ABSCE Circumstance : in normal operation.
State message 1: PRNCE Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one process malfunction
external to the I/O modules.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 22
 Label : CONF/MAINT I/O MOD EQ m n
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : in normal operation.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one configuration error or
an on maintenance position
Action: check the type of the modules in the rack or set the module off
maintenance from the P4 console.
C80-35 CONTROLLER (ES)
Label : EQUIPMENT m n LINK
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal link between the CIS and the hardware.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : the CIS cannot communicate with the hardware.
Action: Check connections.
Label : EQ m n HARDWARE FAULT
State message 0: ABSCE Circumstance : in normal operation.
State message 1: PRNCE Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one blocking fault.
Label : CTRL APPLICATION EQPT m n
State message 0: ON Circumstance : controller application state.
State message 1: OFF Circumstance : controller application state.
C80-35 ON N80 NETWORK (EL-A)
Label : N-BLOCK FAULT CELL n CTRL m
State message 0: NO Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one non-blocking fault in
controller m in cell n.
Label : FORCED VAR CELL n CTRL m
State message 0: NO Circumstance : no forcing in controller m in cell n
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates forcing in controller m in cell n
Label : I/O MODULE CELL n CTRL m
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one module fault.
Label : BLOCKING FAULT CELL n CTRL m
State message 0: NO Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one blocking fault in conĆ
troller m in cell n.
C80-35 ON F8000 NETWORK (EL-B)
C80-35 CELL CONTROLLER
Label : CENTRALOG/CELL n VERSION
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates inconsistency between the version number of
the MICROETE database and that of the controller terminal.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 23
 Label : CENTRALOG COMM SLAVE CELL n
State message 0: ABSCE Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: PRNCE Circumstance : the CIS cannot communicate with the slave unit of the
cell controller.
Action: Check connections.
Label : N-BLOCK FAULT MASTER CELL m
State message 0: NO Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one non-blocking fault in
master controller m.
Label : FORCED VAR MASTER CELL m
State message 0: NO Circumstance : no forcing in controller m.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates forcing in controller m.
Label : I/O MODULE MASTER CELL m
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one module fault.
Action: check modules; the fault message disappears when acknowlĆ
edged from the P8 console.
Label : N-BLOCK FAULT SLAVE CELL m
State message 0: NO Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one non-blocking fault in
slave controller m.
Label : FORCED VAR SLAVE CELL m
State message 0: NO Circumstance : no forcing in controller m.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates forcing in controller m.
Label : I/O MODULE SLAVE CELL m
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one module fault.
Label : BLOCKING FAULT SLAVE CELL m
State message 0: NO Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one blocking fault in slave
controller m. The slave unit is no longer operative.
Label : MASTER CELL m F8000 REDUNDANCY
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of a single network fault; the network
is still operative.
Label : F8000 COMM MASTER CELL m
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates a network global fault.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 24
 Label : MASTER CELL m S8000 REDUNDANCY
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of a single network fault; the network
is still operative.
Label : SLAVE CELL m F8000 REDUNDANCY
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of a single network fault; the network
is still operative.
Label : F8000 COMM SLAVE CELL m
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of a network fault detected by the
slave unit.
Label : SLAVE CELL m S8000 REDUNDANCY
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of a single network fault detected by
the slave unit; the network is still operative.
Label : S8000 COMM SLAVE CELL m
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of a network fault detected by the
slave unit;
C80-35 ON F8000 NETWORK (EL-B)
CE80-35 HARDWARE
Label : CELL n PU SECONDARY FLT EQ m
State message 0: ABSCE Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: PRNCE Circumstance : indicates existence at least one secondary fault of the
processing unit.
Label : CELL n EQUIPMENT m FAULT
State message 0: ABSCE Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: PRNCE Circumstance : indicates existence at least one fault in the equipment m
of cell n.
C80-35 SUB-CONTROLLERS AND IHR CONTROLLERS ON F8000 NETWORK (EL-B)
Label : CELL m CTRL n F8000 REDUNDANCY
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of a single network fault; the network
is still operative.
Label : N-BLOCK FAULT CELL n CTRL m
State message 0: NO Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one non-blocking fault in
controller m in cell n.
Label : FORCED VAR CELL n CTRL m
State message 0: NO Circumstance : no forcing in controller m in cell n
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates forcing in controller m in cell n

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 25
 Label : I/O MODULE CELL n CTRL m
State message 0: NORMAL Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: FAULT Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one module fault.
Label : BLOCKING FAULT CELL n CTRL m
State message 0: NO Circumstance : normal state.
State message 1: YES Circumstance : indicates existence of at least one blocking fault in conĆ
troller m in cell n.

.
P–TP09–A42050–V4 E B REV B
DTS Functional Operation Sheet 26
 DTS
Event Log and HDSR Function

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

10-12-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42052-V4 E B B GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 13 15
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE

B T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 10.12.98 Translation of the French document rev. B GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1. PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2. DATABASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4. ACCESSING FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2. RETRIEVING SAMPLED VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2.1. STATIC ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2. DYNAMIC ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3. SENSITIVE ZONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.4. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.4.1. Selecting the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.4.2. Selecting a Sub-base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4.3. Selecting Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4.4. Displaying the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4.5. Selecting the Zoom Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4.6. Left/Right Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4.7. Curve masking/Unmasking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4.8. Displaying Variable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

3. RETRIEVING EVENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1. FORMAT OF RECORDED MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.1. Automatic Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.2. Operator Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2. SENSITIVE ZONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3.1. Selecting the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3.2. Selecting a Sub-base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3.3. Displaying Previous/Next Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3.4. Filtering the List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3.5. Printing Selected Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.3.6. Displaying Last Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

4. EXPORTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

5. ACCESS VIA INTERNET BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

6. STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 1-ii
1. Introduction

1.1. PRESENTATION

The Historical Data Storage and Retrieval (HDSR) function is used to archive process
data for purposes of off–line analysis. Data is saved onto a hard disk affording rapid
access. Data can be transferred onto magneto–optical disk at the request of the
supervising engineer.

The HDSR function manages two types of historical data:

D the state values of logical and analog variables sampled at 5 second intervals.
The variables to be archived are declared during customization of the system,

D event sets. These events are state changes in logical variables and sequences,
threshold and limit violations by analog variables, operator modifications and
acknowledgments or the transmission of TC and TVC variables. Events are
tagged and logged in chronological order.

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 2
1.2. DATABASES

A database includes sampled data and events recorded over a period of 24 hours.

Seven databases are accessible on–line.

Current database
(current day)

Several databases
in reserve
(last four days in standard)
Storage on
external
medium
2 restored databases
(any 2 previous days)

1.3. CONFIGURATION

The HDSR archive function enables data to be consulted from all the operator stations.
Databases can be transferred to or from external devices from the station on which the
CCC configuration functions are installed.

1.4. ACCESSING FUNCTIONS

The upper part of the HDSR view contains a strip which shows:

D buttons used to access the consultation function, current screen print out function
(depending on configuration) and quit HDSR function,

D an indicator showing the percentage of resources occupied by the current base.

This function is only accessible from the CCC station.

D a button giving access to the database transfer function (archival). This function is
only accessible from the CCC station.

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 3
2. Retrieving Sampled Variables

Each consultation enables up to 6 TS or TM variables to be displayed in the form of curves

over a 24 hour period.

2.1. STATIC ELEMENTS

”Variable characteristics” window:

D ID code of the variable,

D Label of the variable,

D Unit (TM only),

D High/low limits (TM only).

”Variable data”window:

D ID code of the variable,

D Label of the variable,

D Unit (TM only),

D Operative unit,

D Degree of urgency (TM only),

D Statistics (TM).

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 4
2.2. DYNAMIC ELEMENTS

The operator clicks the pointer button in the curve trace area to display the corresponding
value and status of each of the variables at the designated point.

”Variable characteristics” window:

D Value of the variable,

D Status of the variable,

D Threshold violated.

”Variable data” window:

D Value of the variable,

D Status of the variable,

D Threshold violated.

2.3. SENSITIVE ZONES

D Grid display button,

D Zoom factor button,

D Left/right scrolling buttons,

D Curve mask/unmask button,

D Variable data display button,

D Data export button.

2.4. UTILIZATION

2.4.1. Selecting the Base

The base is selected by the operator from the first menu displayed on accessing the main
window on the operator interface in consult mode. The operator may choose among the
following bases:

D current base,

D bases waiting to be archived (1, 2, 3, 4),

D restored bases (1 and 2).

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 5
2.4.2. Selecting a Sub–base

Each base is composed of one or more sub–bases. A sub–base is a coherent set of

historical data (i.e. with no time/date changes or database version changes). The
operator selects the sub–base that he wishes to consult (a sub–base is defined by a start
time and a finish time).

2.4.3. Selecting Variables

The operator chooses the variables that he wishes to display. The names of the variables
are displayed in a table and by the OU of which they are a part.

The operator validates his choice in order to display the curves window.

2.4.4. Displaying the Grid

This function enables a blue grid to be laid over the curve trace area in order to facilitate
readings relative to the axes (time scale and value scale in %).

2.4.5. Selecting the Zoom Factor

This function is used to reduce the period displayed from 24h (initial period) to 12h, 6h,
2h, 1h, 30mn, 12mn or 6mn thus enhancing resolution of the curves display.

2.4.6. Left/Right Scrolling

This function is used to shift the curves to the left or to the right when the zoom factor is
less than 24h.

2.4.7. Curve masking/Unmasking

If the operator clicks on the square of the same color as a curve, this curve disappears
from the screen to allow a clearer reading of the curves views when several curves
overlap. The curve can be re–displayed by again clicking on the square concerned.

2.4.8. Displaying Variable Data

A variable data window can be opened by clicking on the ID code or label of the variable in
question.

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 6
3. Retrieving Events

3.1. FORMAT OF RECORDED MESSAGES

The following events are recorded in the HDSR event log:

D automatic messages caused by state changes inherent to the operation of the

process or by CENTRALOG,

D messages resulting from operator actions.

The variables concerned are configured in the database (see ”Data Description and
Processing”.

The sections below list the different fields edited and provide an example for each type of
message.

Message display colors:

Alarm appearance and acknowledgement messages are displayed in the color of the
relevant degree of urgency. Disappearances are represented in ”normal state” color.
Sequence monitoring messages (except criteria) are displayed in the color which
corresponds to the state of the sequence. Operator action messages and sequence
monitoring criteria are displayed in white.

3.1.1. Automatic Messages

1 – State changes in logic variables (TSE, TSI, TSP, TSS):

timetagging, ID code, label, old and new values.

18/01/99 17:48:56 380 01KITXX001 AUX TRANSFO SWITCH OFF -> ON

2 – State changes in multi–state variables (VRE, VRP):

timetagging, ID code, label, old and new values (message and numeric value).

18/01/99 17:48:56 300 01VRES001 CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN [9] -> IN PROGRESS [10]

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 7
 3 – Threshold and limit violations with return to normal by analog variables (TME,
TMI, TMP):

timetagging, ID code, label, status, old and new measurement states (and threshold or
limit where a threshold or limit has been crossed), current value and unit of measurement.

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 01KITYY008 WATER LEVEL NORM -> LOW [20.00] 19.5CM

4 – Variation in the value of an analog variable (TME, TMI, TMP):

timetagging, ID code, label, current value, date and time of previous variation message,
previous value and unit of measurement.

18/01/99 19:04:15 000 01KITYY008 WATER LEVEL UPDATE 16.0 PREV VAL: 28/12/96 17:48:57 19.5 CM

5 – Sequence monitoring events:

timetagging, ID code, label, sequence number, sequence state (UNTRIGGERED, IN

PROGRESS, FAULT, GIVEN UP, HELD, UNKNOWN) and current step label (when IN
PROGRESS and FAULT).

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 FMA01 MOTOR START-UP SEQUENCE SEQ[ 6 ] -> FAULT
STEP3-LP FWP SUB-G START SELEC

Criterion: ID of OU, criterion label, value and ID code of any associated variable.

02KXY SWITCH 2 OFF

3.1.2. Operator Actions

1 – Modifications to the status of a logical variable:

timetagging, ID code, label, old status and old value, number of the operator station
issuing the modification, new status and new value.

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 01KITXX001 AUX TRANSFO SWITCH MONI OFF =2=> REPL ON

2 – Modifications to the status of a multi–state variable (VRE, VRP):

timetagging, ID code, label, old status and old value (message and numerical value),
operator station number issuing the modification, new status and new value.

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 01VRES001 CIRCUIT BREAKER STATE MONI OPEN [9] - 2-> REPL INPROG [10]

3 – Modifications to the status of an analog variable or the value of an analysis

variable:

timetagging, ID code, label, old status, old state (and threshold or limit in the event of
threshold or limit violation), old value and unit, station number issuing the modification,
new status and new value.

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 01KITYY008 WATER LEVEL REPL LOW [20.00]19.5CM =2=> REPL 33.00

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 8
 4 – Forcing a logic or analog variable:

timetagging, ID code, label, start of forcing (START FORC) or end of forcing (END FORC)
and new value (for start of forcing).

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 01KITXX001 AUX TRANSFO SWITCH START FORC OFF

5 – Modifications to threshold of an analog variable:

timetagging, ID code, label, type of threshold, old value of threshold, station number
issuing the modification, new value of threshold and unit.

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 01KITYY008 WATER LEVEL LOW 20.00 =2=> 25.00 CM

6 – Modifications of status of an operative unit:

timetagging, ID code, label, station number issuing the modification, new status.

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 01APA FEEDWATER PUMP =2=> INHI

7 – Telecommands:

timetagging, ID code, label, value.

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 01CEXYS001 EWP 1 ON OFF

8 – Setpoint instructions:

timetagging, ID code, label, value, unit.

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 01ADGHN001 FW SETPOINT FW TANK PRESSURE 4.00 BAR

9 – Locking or testing a control block:

timetagging, ID code, label, station number ordering the action, state of block (normal,
locked, test).

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 01ADGHN002 FEEDWATER PUMP =2=> LOCKED

10 – Modifications of the date and time or shift times:

timetagging, label, old date or time, new date or time.

18/01/99 13:00:00 000 TIME MODIFICATION (12:00:00) =3=> 13:00:00

11 – Alarm acknowledgement:

timetagging, ID code, label, logic variable state message or violation of analog variable
threshold, station number ordering action, acknowledgement of appearance (ACK APP)
or disappearance (ACK DIS) or acknowledgement of error (ACK ERR).
Acknowledgement messages may or may not be printed out depending on the
customization of each degree of urgency in the database.

18/01/99 17:48:56 000 01KITXX001 CONDENSER LEVEL HIGH =2=> ACK APP

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 9
3.2. SENSITIVE ZONES

D Print displayed events button,

D Display previous/next page buttons,

D Display last events button,

D Data export button.

3.3. UTILIZATION

3.3.1. Selecting the Base

The base is selected by the operator from the first menu displayed on accessing the main
window on the operator interface in consult mode. The operator may choose one of four
bases:

D current base,

D bases waiting to be archived (1 to n depending on configuration),

D restored bases (1 and 2).

3.3.2. Selecting a Sub–base

Each base is composed of one or more sub–bases. A sub–base is a coherent set of

historical data (i.e. with no time/date changes or database version changes). The
operator selects the sub–base that he wishes to consult (a sub–base is defined by a start
time and a finish time).

After operator validation, the event list contained in the sub–base is displayed.

3.3.3. Displaying Previous/Next Pages

When the events list occupies more than one page, this function is used to move from the
previous page to the next page.

3.3.4. Filtering the List

The list of events can be filtered in accordance with the following criteria as defined by the
operator:

D Date,

D Entity,

D Type of event (operator, TS, TM, TC, TVC, SEQ, VR),

D Degree of urgency 1, 2, 3, 4, none (”none” includes return to normal state

messages),

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 10
 D Character strings.

These criteria may be combined. ”Entity” is selected by clicking in an directory.

3.3.5. Printing Selected Events

This function is used to print out the full list of events selected by the operator on a black &
white printer. This printer is identified by the initial configuration in accordance with the
hardware architecture and may be the CCC printer dedicated to the HDSR function or a
local printer.

3.3.6. Displaying Last Events

When the current database is selected, this function can be used to display the most
recent events to have occurred.

4. Exporting Data

The archive module also enables data to be exported to office management software
applications running in a Windows environment.

The export files are generated on the station running the CCC function. Files can be run
on a PC which is separate or connected to the network (optional hardware and function).

File generation is executed after selection of the restituted data (events or samples) by
clicking on the ”export” button.

The file is writen to the direcory:

./transfert/hdsr_export

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 11
5. Access via INTERNET Browser

The HDSR module can deliver historical data to a user running on a remote PC (optional
equipment) linked to the Centralog site by a direct private or public telephone line, or via
an INTRANET connection.

The PC must be operating in a Windows NT (4 or later) environment and be equipped with

a modem (28 800 bauds min.). The connection is a PPP link protected by password.

Data is accessed by an INTERNET browser such as MS Explorer or Netscape.

After establishing communication between the Centralog and the remote site, the remote
operator can access the data required without the assistance of a local operator. He can
select one of the available databases on the CCC station, choose event or sampling
data and determine a time period.

For the purpose of consulting samples, a list of available variables can be displayed to
facilitate selection. The operator can also define a sampling rate. These parameters can
be recorded and reutilized or modified for later consultations.

The browser displays data in the form of an alphanumeric list. In addition the standard
functions of the browser can be used to find a chain of characters such as a variable ID
code.

The resulting file is produced to HTML (events and samples) or ASCII (events) format.
The ASCII file can be saved locally and directly reutilized by a text editor or a spreadsheet
application in order for example, to trace graphs.

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 12
6. Storage and Retrieval Function

Historical data storage and retrieval is performed on a magneto–optical medium.

The operator has the possibility of archiving the following bases:

D current base,

D bases waiting to be archived (1 to n depending on configuration),

D restored bases (1 and 2).

The bases waiting to be archived are managed in a circular fashion. The current base is
automatically closed at O hours (or when it is full), and becomes the most recent base
waiting to be archived. A new base is then opened.

The operator can retrieve a maximum of 2 stored bases for consultation purposes.

.
P–TP09–A42052–V4 E B REV B
DTS Event Log and HDSR Function Sheet 13
 STD
Operational Schedule Function

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

08-09-97 NAME
ALSPA 8000 P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42053-V4 E A A GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 12 14
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2. CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3. DESCRIPTION OF VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.1. FIXED FRAME AND STATIC ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2. DYNAMIC ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.3. SENSITIVE ZONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.4. MODES OF REPRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

4. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1. MODIFYING A SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1.1. Stepped Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1.2. Variable Slope Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2. INITIALIZING SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3. DISPLAYING ANOTHER DAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.4. SELECTING THE RIGHT HAND VERTICAL AXIS AND LIMITS . . . 11
4.5. ACCESSING A ZOOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.6. MASKING/UNMASKING CURVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.7. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.8. MANAGEMENT OF SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 1-ii
1. Introduction

The Operational Schedule function enables the operator to generate projected setpoint
schedules for the operation of the process over a maximum period of 48 hours.

The function also affords the possibility of running a site automatically without the physical
presence of an operator.

The operational schedule function comprises:

D a module integrated into the man/machine interface which is used to:

— display the operational schedules as well as store and update data in the
database;
— perform the basic operations that enable the operator to enter and modify,
validate, cancel or reset a schedule
D a module of specific application programs used to:
— manage the various schedules,
— take account of modifications made by the operator,
— transmit to the process the different setpoints and commands that
correspond to the control schedule expressed in the form of a diagram.
Within the framework of the application, other dialogues can then be developed
together with the specific programs associated with operations on the schedules.

A list of schedule groups can be obtained by clicking on the icon.

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 2
2. Characteristics

Operational schedules are organized into schedule groups composed of a maximum of 6

schedules and 6 curves or a combination of both schedules and curves. These groups
are defined during customization and cannot be modified by the operator. Operations on
the schedules are conditioned by authorization TS variables (one authorization TS per
schedule group plus one for each schedule per day).

A schedule is divided into two parts, with each part displayed on a separate page:

D the part corresponding to day D,

D the part corresponding to day D+ 1.

Three different types of schedule are listed and declared in the database:

D plan schedules entered and modifiable by the operator,

D executable schedules, which cannot be modified by the operator,

D plan + executable schedules, combining both these types, which can be modified
by the operator.

The plan schedule is checked by the specific application program but is not used to
control the process. The plan schedule must be transferred to an executable schedule in
order to become operational.

The executable schedule is processed by a specific application program in order to

perform commands and setpoint instructions in accordance with the availability of
process elements.

The combined plan/executable schedule brings together both functions. This type of
schedule is utilized whenever operator modifications do not affect the execution of the
specific application program.

The analog variable associated with each curve may represent the result of setpoint
instructions issued from forecast schedules, or by the operator reacting rapidly to a
request for energy generation for example.

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 3
3. Description of Views

The list of schedule groups can be accessed from the ”Schedule groups” directory view.
Access to the directory view is obtained through the dialogue associated with the
”Schedule” icon.

Each Schedule view represents a group. Access to a Schedule view is done directly by
selecting a group from the directory view; or by selecting another view that is functionally
linked.

A complete schedule is displayed on two different pages (one page representing day D,
the other page representing day D+1).

The schedule views comprise:

D a curve alignment zone and 24 hour schedules,

D a part that contains lines of static and dynamic data describing the elements of the
group represented.

Upon operator request, a window is opened thereby granting access to the views
associated with the displayed schedule.

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 4
 ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ TITLE
FIRST DAY
1/2
Day
change
button

Schedule
modification or
zoom view but-
ton

Schedule
management &
Physical scale / control button
min–max selec-
tion button Mask / unmask
button

Color

Fig. 1 : Layout of a schedule view

3.1. FIXED FRAME AND STATIC ELEMENTS

D Frame representing the limits of the trace area for schedules and curves (288
values).

D Vertical left hand axis graded from 0 to 100% representing the range of curves and
schedules.

D Horizontal axis graded from 0 to 24 hours.

D Static data concerning schedules:

— ID code.
— Label.
— Unit of measurement.
— Minimum & maximum values associated to the schedule.
— Step.
D Static data concerning the curves (see the volume entitled ”Operator station”)

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 5
3.2. DYNAMIC ELEMENTS

D Vertical right hand axis graded according to the characteristics of the

corresponding curve or schedule.

D Curves and schedules: projected operational schedules are entered by the

operator or computed by an application program; curves are traced from left to
right in accordance with the value and the state of the associated variables.

D Dynamic data concerning schedules:

— Validity (schedule validated by operator or not).
— Horizontal lines (broken) showing any minimum or maximum limits
associated to the schedule (see paragraph 3.4).
D Dynamic data concerning curves: (see the volume entitled ”Operator station”).

3.3. SENSITIVE ZONES

D Scale & min/max limit selection button

D Mask/unmask button

D Zone for curve plotting and schedules.

D Zoom view button for variables associated to the curves

D Schedule management and control button

D Schedule modification button

This button accesses the menu Modification

Initialization

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 6
3.4. MODES OF REPRESENTATION

There are two types of schedule representation: stepped graphs or variable slope
schedules. Both types of schedule can either be input by the operator or calculated by a
specific application program.

Variable slope schedules can for example be used to display the result of a program input
by the operator.

Operator schedule
eg. Flow
Level
Calculated schedule
eg. Level

Flow

Fig. 2 : The two types of operational schedule

Each schedule on a view is associated to a measurement interval (step) defined during

customization. The permissible values for these steps are 5, 10, 30 min, 1 hour. Different
steps may be associated to each schedule.

Minimum and maximum values can also be associated to each individual schedule during
customization. They are represented on the view by dynamic horizontal broken lines

Fig. 3 : Display of variable limits

Only one pair of limits is represented at any one time. These limits correspond to the
schedule selected by the button.

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 7
 When first input, the level created is represented incompletely by a triple width line.

The schedule is completed and represented as a normal width line after validation by the
operator.

Initial
entry Validation

Modification Validation

Fig. 4 : Display during entry or modification

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 8
4. Utilization

4.1. MODIFYING A SCHEDULE

A schedule in the group, and on the day, displayed can be modified in an open input
window by selecting the option ”Modification” from the pull down menu linked to the
schedule.

4.1.1. Stepped Schedule

The input window of a stepped schedule contains the ID code of the schedule, two input
fields for the start time pair and finish time pair (hour/minute) defining the period by
movement of the cursor, an input field for the setpoint value corresponding to the period
defined and three buttons functioning as follows:

D the D D D button is used to store the data entered by the operator. The data
appear on the curve in triple width thickness. After storage, the operator can enter
new triplets [Start–End–Value],

D the button validates all stored data,

D the button cancels all the data stored and not validated; it enables the
operator to abandon the modifications entered since the last validation (selecting
the button).

Note: the hour/minute pair for the start of the period defined may be either the left–hand or
right hand pair. It will always be the earlier of the two pairs.

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 9
 Schedule ID code STEP : 5MN

0 A 12 " 23 HOURS 0 A 20 " 23

0 A 40 " 59 MINUTES 0 A 40 " 59

VALUE
UNIT 137

D D D

Error message

4.1.2. Variable Slope Schedule

The schedule input window for a variable slope schedule is similar to that described
above contains two setpoint input fields instead of one. These values correspond to the
initial and final values of the setpoint for the relevant slope.

Schedule ID code STEP : 5MN

0 A 12 " 23 HOURS 0 A 12 " 23

0 A 40 " 59 MINUTES 0 A 50 " 59

VALUE
137 UNIT 155

D D D

Error message

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 10
4.2. INITIALIZING SCHEDULES

A schedule in the group, and on the day, displayed can be reset to zero in an open input
window by selecting the option ”Initialization” from the pull down menu linked to the
schedule. This selection opens a confirm window.

ID code

Initialize schedule

4.3. DISPLAYING ANOTHER DAY

The view of the following or previous day’s schedule can be displayed by clicking on the
day change button .

4.4. SELECTING THE RIGHT HAND VERTICAL AXIS AND LIMITS

Click on the associated to a schedule or a curve to display:

D on the right hand vertical axis, the scale of the schedule or the variable and its
physical unit,

D in the trace zone, the minimum/maximum limits applicable to the variable.

The axis and the limits are displayed in the color of the schedule or the variable.

4.5. ACCESSING A ZOOM VIEW

The zoom view associated to a particular variable associated to a curve is accessed by

clicking on the button.

4.6. MASKING/UNMASKING CURVES

Curve traces can be temporarily masked by clicking on the relevant button. This can
be especially useful when curves overlap. The button associated to a masked curve is
shown as : . This operation can be performed on several curves in the same view
simultaneously.

Click on the button once again to unmask the curve.

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 11
4.7. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Clicking on any point in the schedule or curve tracing zone opens a window showing the
time which corresponds to the point designated, and the ID code and value at that time of
each variable or schedule represented.

The window is superimposed on the ID codes in the variable data lines.

11 : 20 : 00

V DGR–1 0.00
V DGR–2 1000.00
V DGR–3 200.00
V 2BCHA01 20.00
V 2BCJP1 1203.02
V 2BCJP2 300.00

Fig. 5 : Additional information on schedules and curves

4.8. MANAGEMENT OF SCHEDULES

Each schedule can be associated to up to three types of management or control action,

depending on the application:

Example :

D Transfer of a working schedule to an operational schedule,

D immediate action ,

D end of immediate action.

The button at the end of the diagram line opens a selection window containing the
labels of the possible actions.

Schedule ID code

Action 1

Action 2

Action 3

The buttons open a window enabling the action to be executed.

.
P–TP09–A42053–V4 E A REV A
STD Operational Schedule Function Sheet 12
 STD
CSS-Gateway

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

08-09-97 NAME
ALSPA 8000 P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42054-V4 E A A GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 11 13
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. CSS-GATEWAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2. DESCRIPTION OF DATA EXCHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2.1. TS VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2. TM VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.3. VR VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.4. TC VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.5. GATEWAY TVC VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3. FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION OF GATEWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

3.1. CONFIGURATION OF GATEWAY DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2. CSS-GATEWAY FUNCTION INTERFACE WITH EXTERNAL
APPLICATIONS RUNNING ON THE CVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

4. OPERATIONAL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.1. START/STOP FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2. STEADY STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.3. DISCONNECTION/RE-CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.4. TIME MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.5. SIGNALING MALFUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 1-ii
1. CSS–Gateway Function

The CSS–Gateway function enables data (real time variables) to be exchanged

between the CENTRALOG system and external applications installed on the
Centralog workstations.

Each external application accesses CENTRALOG data through the Gateway services
library.

Gateway services process the following types of CENTRALOG data:

D TSs: logic variables (TeleSignals)

D TMs: analog measurements (TeleMeasurements)

D VRs: Multi–state variable

D TCs: logic commands (TeleCommands)

D TVCs: setpoint commands

These variables can be transmitted from Centralog to the external applications or from the
external applications to the Centralog.

The CENTRALOG data made available via the Gateway is configured in the
CENTRALOG database by the CCC–D data configuration tools.

Basic notions regarding to the CENTRALOG system are described in the document
Centralog General Technical Specification.

It is recommended that the Detailed Technical Specification Data Description and

Processing should be read previously.

The figures below show an example of Centralog hardware and software architecture
incorporating an external application managing communications with a remote
dispatching station.

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 1
 DISPATCHING

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
CENTRALOG

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Contronet

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
CVS CVS CIS CVS

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
(Operator station) (Operator station) (CSS-G external application)

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Dual F-900

CONTROBLOC
P320

Fig. 1 : Example of Centralog hardware architecture

REMOTE SYSTEM

UNIX communication
application

Centralog
GATEWAY UNIX
Gateway
API (C) library
database

Workstation CENTRALOG
Client Services

Contronet
Centralog
variables
CIS Centralog
CENTRALOG server
Server Services database

Fig. 2 : Example of software architecture with

a CVS running a CSS–G function

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 2
2. Description of Data Exchanged

2.1. TS VARIABLES

TS variables are logic state indicators. The CSS–G function enables external
applications:

D to receive TS variables issued by Centralog (TSEs, TSIs, TSPs).

The CSS–G supplies the external application with state change Gateway TSs in
the order in which they occur in Centralog. The TS timetag corresponds to the
state change (timetagging at source on acquisition or generation).
The CSS–G can provide a full rundown of all the Gateway TS states consumed by
the external application. This rundown corresponds to a general check, and is
timetagged to on generation.

D to transmit TS variables produced by the applications to Centralog (TSPs).

The CSS–G transmits each state change Gateway TS to the Centralog. The TS
is timetagged by the external application

TSs provide the following information for the external application:

D The date and the time of the state change or general check.

D The logic value, one of two states 0 or 1.

D The Centralog status, validity and quality

D The specific quality managed by the application if required (run CDS

processing)

Each TS transmitted by an external application contains the following information:

D the date and time of the state change

D the logic value, one of two states, 0 or 1

D the Centralog validity

A state change TS indicates either a change in value or a change in quality.

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 3
2.2. TM VARIABLES

TM variables are analog values. The CSS–G function enables external applications:

D to receive TM variables issued by Centralog (TMEs, TMIs, TMPs, TMOs).

The Gateway supplies the external application with Gateway TMs at different
rates. The rate is defined during configuration of the Gateway and is known as the
reception rate. TMs are timetagged in accordance with this rate.

D to transmit TM variables produced by the applications to Centralog (TSPs).

The CSS–G transmits each Gateway TM to the Centralog. The TM is timetagged
by the external application. Associated TMs are stored in the Centralog database
each time they are received by the CIS.

Each TM contains the following information for the external application:

D the date and time in accordance with the relevant rate

D the analog value

D the Centralog status, validity, quality and state

D the specific quality managed by the application if required (run CDS processing)

Each TM transmitted by an external application contains the following information:

D the date and time associated to the value

D the analog value

D the Centralog validity

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 4
2.3. VR VARIABLES

VRs are numeric multi–state variables. The CSS–G function enables external
applications:

D to receive VR variables issued by Centralog (VREs, VRIs, VRPs).

The CSS–G supplies the external application with value change Gateway VRs in
the order in which they occur in the Centralog. The VR timetag corresponds to the
value change (timetagging at source on acquisition or generation).
The CSS–G can provide a full rundown of all the Gateway VRs consumed by the
external application. This rundown corresponds to a general check and is
timetagged on generation.

D to transmit VR variables produced by the applications to Centralog (VRPs).

The CSS–G transmits each value change Gateway VR to the Centralog. The VR
is timetagged by the external application.

VRs provide the following information for the external application:

D The date and the time of the value change or general check.

D The numeric value.

D The Centralog status, validity and quality

D The specific quality managed by the application if required (run CDS

processing)

Each VR transmitted by an external application contains the following information:

D the date and time of the value change

D the numeric value,

D the Centralog validity

A value change VR indicates either a change in value or a change in quality.

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 5
2.4. TC VARIABLES

TCs are logic commands issued to automation cells or to Centralog application

programs. The CSS–G function enables external applications:

D to receive TC variables issued by Centralog.

The CSS–G supplies Gateway TCs in the order in which they occur in the
Centralog. The TC timetag corresponds to the value change (timetagging at
source on generation).

D to transmit TC variables produced by the applications to Centralog.

The CSS–G transmits each Gateway TC to the Centralog. The TC is timetagged
on transmission.

TCs provide the following information for the external application:

D The date and the time of generation.

D The logic value, one of two states 0 or 1.

D The transmitter

D The Centralog checks associated to the execution of the TC:

all Centralog checks are enabled
all Centralog checks are disabled
Centralog checks of associated TSs are disabled

Each TC transmitted by an external application contains the following information:

D the logic value, one of two states, 0 or 1

D the Centralog checks associated to the execution of the TC:

Transmission from the CSS–G to Centralog is effective if and only if:

D the associated TS is validated and enabled

D the Gateway authorization TSs permit transmission

Gateway authorization TSs are defined for each Gateway TC during
configuration of the Gateway.

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 6
2.5. GATEWAY TVC VARIABLES

TVCs setpoint instructions are analog commands issued to automation cells or to

Centralog application programs. The CSS–G function enables external applications:

D to receive TVC variables issued by Centralog.

The CSS–G supplies Gateway TVCs in the order in which they occur in the
Centralog. The TVC timetag corresponds to the value change (timetagging at
source on generation).

D to transmit TVC variables produced by the applications to Centralog.

The CSS–G transmits each Gateway TVC to the Centralog. The TVC is
timetagged on transmission.

TVCs provide the following information for the external application:

D The date and the time of generation.

D The analog value.

D The transmitter

D The Centralog checks associated to the execution of the TVC, i.e.

all Centralog checks are enabled
all Centralog checks are disabled
Centralog checks of associated TSs are disabled

Each TVC transmitted by an external application contains the following information:

D the analogic value.

D The Centralog checks associated to the execution of the TVC:

Transmission from the CSS–G to Centralog is effective if and only if:

D limits fixed for the analog value are respected

D the associated TM is validated and enabled

D the Gateway authorization TSs permit transmission

Gateway authorization TSs are defined for each Gateway TVC during
configuration of the Gateway.

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 7
3. Functional Specification of Gateway

3.1. CONFIGURATION OF GATEWAY DATA

The Gateway configuration enables the external applications to:

D indicate which Centralog data they wish to exchange via the CSS–G

D define the Gateway characteristics of this data, such as the exchange sense
(transmission and/or reception), rates, Gateway authorization TSs etc.

Gateway data is configured during customization of the Centralog (database input

phase) and/or during execution of the external application.

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 8
3.2. CSS–GATEWAY FUNCTION INTERFACE WITH EXTERNAL
APPLICATIONS RUNNING ON THE CVS

The CSS–Gateway library provides a set a of services for the development of external
application software. The services available to the applications are as follows:

D CONNECT : Request for CENTRALOG connection. Remains valid

until disconnect request is received.

D REC_TS : Reception of Gateway state change and/or General

Check TS

D REC_TM : Reception of periodic Gateway TM.

D REC_VR : Reception of Gateway state change and/or General

Check VR

D REC_TC ; Reception of Gateway TC

D REC_TVC ; Reception of Gateway TVC

D EM_TS : Transmission of Gateway TS to Centralog

D EM_TM : Transmission of Gateway TM to Centralog

D EM_VR : Transmission of Gateway VR to Centralog

D EM_TC : Transmission of Gateway TC to Centralog

D EM_TVC : Transmission of Gateway TVC to Centralog

D EM_RCG : General check of Gateway TSs and VRs

D EM_CGTS : Initial setting of Gateway TS state

D EM_CGVR : Initial measurement of Gateway VR

D ADD_CNF : Add variables to the Gateway configuration (e.g. add

Centralog TS to set of Gateway TSs)

D SUP_CNF : Delete variable from the Gateway configuration

D TIME : Request for CENTRALOG time

D ALARM : Transmission of system alarm from application to

Centralog

D SIGNAL : Transmission of software maintenance message to

Centralog

D DECONNECT : Request for disconnection from CENTRALOG

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 9
4. Operational Specification

4.1. START/STOP FUNCTIONS

Starting/stopping

The external applications present on the station are started, monitored and stopped by
the Centralog software on the CVS station station hosting the CSS–G function.
The Centralog software restarts the station automatically when power is restored.

The operator can stop and restart the CSS–G station at any time by dialogue.

Monitoring the external application

Any failure of the external application on the CVS is detected by the Centralog software
which causes the station to shut down.

4.2. STEADY STATE

Steady state operation is the normal operating mode of the CSS–G function when all the
applications have been initialized and are up and running on the CVS. From this state the
applications can request access to CENTRALOG data.

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 10
4.3. DISCONNECTION/RE–CONNECTION

Communications can be interrupted between an external application and the CDS

function (cf. Fig. 2). In steady state, the application is notified of any break in
communication and this information is returned in the reports in the Gateway services
library.
The CSS–G function automatically re–establishes the dialogue; the application is notified
of re–connection via the CSS–G library.

4.4. TIME MANAGEMENT

Stations hosting the CSS–Gateway function are synchronized to CENTRALOG time.

External applications can consult the CENTRALOG time provided on their station.

4.5. SIGNALING MALFUNCTIONS

The following system information (represented in the Centralog by TSS System

Telesignals) can generate alarms and can be displayed on the CENTRALOG EXP
system mimic:

D Communications failure between an external application and the CDS function

D Specific external application failure

Software maintenance messages are displayed by the Centralog CCC maintenance

function.

.
P–TP09–A42054–V4 E A REV A
STD CSS–Gateway Sheet 11
 STD
Multi-Entity Function

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

08-09-97 NAME
ALSPA 8000 P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42055-V4 E A A GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 11 13
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIVE ENTITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2.1. CONSTITUTION OF AN ENTITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1.2. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1.3. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2. OPERATIVE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.3. GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4. CONTROL BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5. ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5.1. Global Entity States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5.2. Accessing Entity Alarm Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.5.3. Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.5.4. Audible Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.6. ASSIGNING ENTITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.7. RECAPITULATION LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.8. NAVIGATION WITHIN THE VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.8.1. Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.8.2. Operational Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.8.3. Utility Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

3. CONSULTATION AND CONTROL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 1-ii
1. Introduction

The Multi–Entity function is used to supervise and control an installation by means of

functional sub–groups known as Operative Entities. It is particularly useful in enabling
operators to supervise and control a site composed of more than one production unit. The
CVS operator station gives access to all the processes relative to any functional group or
groups assigned by configuration or by dialogue to that station. The operator can also
oversee the general state of the other functional groups.

This facility enables a CENTRALOG system to be configured in accordance with the

installation and with the operational mode required. An Operative Entity may represent
either a part of the installation (water treatment station, waste treatment station, pumping
station, high voltage substation etc.), or a production unit (a hydro–electric generator set,
a thermal plant unit etc.).

On a site composed of two units, one Operative Entity may be defined for each of the
units and a third Operative Entity for the auxiliaries and the commons of both units.

Contronet

ÂÂÂ
Unit 1 Commons Unit 2
Dual F900
Unit
Unit 1 commons Unit 2
Controbloc Controbloc Controbloc

This document completes the other DTS documents with a description of the
characteristics specific to the use of the Multi–Entity function.

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 2
2. Description of Operative Entities

2.1. CONSTITUTION OF AN ENTITY

2.1.1. Presentation

An Operative Entity represents a part of the installation, and contains data from one or
more functional sub–groups (Operative Units).

An Operative Unit is a coherent group of variables from the process point of view. Each
variable may belong to only one Operative Unit. Operative Entities and Units are defined
during system configuration.

An Operative Entity is defined by:

D an ID code: maximum 8 characters,

D a label: expressed in 32 characters, used to define the role of the Operative Entity
in plain language.

2.1.2. Configuration

Operative Entities are defined during system configuration.

One or several Operative Entities are assigned to each operator station during system
configuration. They are used during startup with full database initialization.

The configuration can be modified dynamically by the user on each operator station. A
single entity can be assigned to several operator stations or to none. On system startup
with partial database initialization, the entities assigned to operator stations before
shut–down are conserved.

Views associated to function keys (F1 to F12) and initialization views (displayed when the
operator station is powered up) correspond necessarily to the entities assigned to an
operator station by configuration.

Configuration dialogues may be protected by password.

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 3
2.1.3. Composition

An Operative Entity is composed of:

D Operative Units

D View groups (mimic groups, control view groups, curve groups etc.)

D Control blocks

D Alarm views (main alarms, alarms by degree of urgency etc.).

2.2. OPERATIVE UNITS

Each of the Operative Units is associated to an Operative Entity during system

configuration .

2.3. GROUPS

Each group of operational views is associated to an Operative Entity during system

configuration.

Normally, a group may contain variables which do not belong to the entity associated to
the group. This is true of the following groups:

D mimic groups

D y = f(t) curve groups

D y = f(x) curve groups

D bargraph groups

D operator groups

D trend groups

D sequence monitoring groups

D disturbance log groups

D SOE groups

D trend log groups

D synthetic alarm groups

Mimics are linked to an entity by virtue of their inclusion in a mimic group .

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 4
 However, variables included in either of the two groups below necessarily correspond to
the entity associated to the group:

D control groups

D schedule groups

2.4. CONTROL BLOCKS

The control function is conditioned by the division of the plant into entities. Thus, access to
a control window, and action on a particular control block, is only possible if the block in
question belongs to an entity assigned to the operator station in use. The TCs and TVCs
of a control block necessarily belong to the same entity as the control block.

2.5. ALARMS

Alarm views relative to an Operative Entity are as follows:

D main alarm view

D short alarm view

D view of last three alarms

D alarms by degree of urgency views

D alarm by Operative Unit views

D synthetic alarm views

Mimic alarm views include the variables relevant to the mimic. These variables may
belong to different entities.

2.5.1. Global Entity States

The icon represented in the upper band on all screens is used to indicate the
global state of the Operative Entities. The icon consists of a group of small squares
representing the alarm condition of each entity. The color of the square is used to indicate:

D presence of at least one unacknowledged alarm in the entity (”alarm

unacknowledged” color, red for instance),

D presence of at least one alarm in the entity (”alarm acknowledged” color, green for
instance),

D absence of alarms in the entity (gray).

The two first colors can be modified by configuration.

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 5
2.5.2. Accessing Entity Alarm Views

Click on the icon to display general information concerning the state of the entities
in the second row of dialogue icons.

Entity assigned to opera- Entity assigned to Entity assigned to Entity assigned to no

tor station another operator another operator operator station
station station

Entity 1 Entity 2 Entity 3 Entity 4

Access to the main Symbol indicating an entity

alarm view of assigned to another operator sta-
entity 1 tion
Access to the secondary alarm The absence of symbol indicates Access to the entity
views of entity 1 a non–assigned entity assign dialogue
from menu

The and buttons are displayed when the corresponding entity is assigned

to the operator station.

The icon is used to access the general general alarm view of this entity.

The icon is used to access the secondary alarm views associated to this entity via

the menu. degree of urgency 1

degree of urgency 2
degree of urgency 3
degree of urgency 4
filtered alarm view
short alarm view
last 3 alarms view

The presence of alarms in each of the existing entities is indicated by the color of the

symbol in the same way as on the global entity state icon :

D presence of at least one unacknowledged alarm in the entity (”alarm

unacknowledged” color),

D presence of at least one alarm in the entity (”alarm acknowledged” color),

D absence of alarms in the entity (gray).

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 6
2.5.3. Acknowledgement

The operator station is provided with an attribution function enabling the operator to
acknowledge alarms in the Operative Entities assigned to the station in question. This
function guarantees that the responsibility for acknowledging Operative Entity alarms is
attributed to a single operator.

2.5.4. Audible Warning

The audible warning (activation and deactivation) is managed relative to the entities
assigned to the operator station.

When an alarm appears the audible warning is activated on the operator station(s)
concerned by the entity to which the alarm is assigned.

A request to stop the audible warning on one operator station concerns all the entities
assigned to that station. The audible warning may be also stopped on another station if all
the alarms which caused the activation of the audible warning on that station are assigned
to entities managed by the first station.

2.6. ASSIGNING ENTITIES

The icon is used to assign or desassign one or more entities to the operator

station.

Entity1 main unit z

Entity2 auxiliaries Z
Entity3 Z
Entity4 Z
Z

Error messages

Depending on the configuration, the system may refuse to desassign an entity if

de–assignment means the variable will no longer be assigned to any operator station.

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 7
2.7. RECAPITULATION LISTS

In addition to the alarm lists, the system provides a set of lists common to all the Operative
Entities. These lists can be consulted on screen and printed out on a printer:

D filtered lists: inhibited variables,variables off monitoring, replaced variables, etc.

D list of analysis variables

D list of modified threshold variables

D list inhibited Operative Units

D list of locked/test control blocks

With respect to the filtered lists, a further filter can be applied to obtain the variables
relative to a particular Operative Entity.

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 8
2.8. NAVIGATION WITHIN THE VIEWS

2.8.1. Directories

The directories giving access to the groups contain the elements corresponding to the
entities assigned to the operator station.

2.8.2. Operational Views

2.8.2.1. Next and Previous Views

Only the views belonging to assigned entities are displayed when moving between the
group views by means of the previous view or next view buttons.

2.8.2.2. Associated Views

A request for access to any view corresponding to an entity which is not assigned to the
operator station is refused and an error message is displayed.

Window close button

Inaccessible entity

This will occur on requests for the following views:

D Associated view accessed from the button in the title zone of an operational
view

D Any view from another screen (import mode)

D Zoom view

D Mimic or control loop view accessed from a sensitive zone forming part of the
mimic display area.

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 9
2.8.3. Utility Functions

A request for access to any utility view corresponding to an entity which is not assigned to
the operator station is refused and an error message is displayed.

This will occur on requests for the following views:

D Last view displayed

D Last views displayed

D View accessed from the Direct Band

D View accessed via the function keys (F1 to F12)

Any view assigned to a function key or to an icon in the direct band must correspond to to
the entities assigned to the operator station.

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 10
3. Consultation and Control Modes

A special configuration of the Multi–entity function provides two different entity access
modes, a Consultation mode and a Control mode, in which the following functions are
available:

D Consultation mode:
— visualization of data
D Control mode:
— visualization of data,
— transmission of TC or TVC setpoint value,
— acknowledgement of alarms (after attribution of the alarm function),
— activation/deactivation of audible warning,
— assignment of variables to a group (f(t) curve, bargraph, operator,
monitoring, trend log, control loops).

For any given operator station, the mode of utilization of an entity (consultation or control)
is determined by the state of a TSP variable. These TSP variables are managed in the
framework of an application which is specific to each project and which therefore forms no
part of the standard product.

.
P–TP09–A42055–V4 E A REV A
STD Multi–Entity Function Sheet 11
 STD
PRISCA Function

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

08-09-97 NAME
ALSPA 8000 P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED

APPROUVE D.CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42063-V4 E A A GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 19 21
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 08.09.97 Translation of the French document rev. A GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2. DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1. DEVELOPMENT AND HOST STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2. PROCESS- DATA EXCHANGE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

3. UTILIZING THE DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

3.1. SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT WORKSHOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2. COMPUTATION APPLICATION CONFIGURATION WORKSHOP . 11

4. UTILIZING THE CONFIGURATION OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

4.1. CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2. ELSA MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

5. DESCRIPTION OF THE DATA INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

5.1. DATA DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.2. INGRID MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

6. DESCRIPTION OF UNIT TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

6.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.2. TEST SET LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.3. DESCRIPTION OF A RESULTS FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
APPENDIX A ORGANIZATION OF THE DEVELOPMENT
ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
A.1. amxp Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
A.2. amxg branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
A.3. amxa branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 1-ii
1. Introduction

The PRISCA module is used to incorporate software specific to the application into the
Centralog system.
This application software may be charged with automatic process control and/or
dedicated to specific operational calculations.

The module provides a structure which enables control engineers to create application
programs which are adapted to their needs, while at the same time freeing them from
real–time constraints.

If required, the module can integrate all or part of a library of standard application software
sets developed on the basis of CEGELEC’s experience in the field of the hydro–electric
plant control.
This library is known as HYDROSET.

The results produced by the application software are presented to the operator by means
of the standard CENTRALOG Man/Machine Interface (alarms, mimics, curves, trends,
logs etc.) and can be utilized to run the process automatically by means of commands and
setpoints, without need for the user to intervene.

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 2
2. Description

The PRISCA module is used to develop specific application programs in C.

Experience of C is the sole requirement, with no special knowledge of the system being
needed.

The module is composed of two sections:

D PRISCA which provides the user with both a workstation–based development

environment and a host structure for application software executed as part of the
CENTRALOG system.

D INTPRO which provides the interface between the application software

integrated to the PRISCA host structure and the real time CENTRALOG
application.

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 3
 The example of system architecture below shows a CENTRALOG 30 with a configuration
center (CCC) hosting the PRISCA development environment.
The application software runs on the CIS station of the CENTRALOG 30.
The system also comprises a local control station based on a CENTRALOG 10, which is
activated as a backup for the CENTRALOG 30.
This local station can thus integrate all or part of the application software normally
executed on the CENTRALOG 30.

Control and supervision system

PRISCA development station

CENTRALOG 30 (or 50)

CONTRONET
CCC CV
CIS S

CENTRALOG 10
ÂÂÂÂ
Local control sta- Operator station
tion
Dual F900

ÂÂ Automation
cells

Fig. 1 : Example of Alspa P320 system architecture

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 4
2.1. DEVELOPMENT AND HOST STRUCTURE

PRISCA is used to develop application software in the form of a series of Computation

Blocks. Each of these Blocks is responsible for an elementary function of the application,
such as fluid level regulation, power distribution, daily balances etc.
Software is developed in an environment which provides the tools required for running
unit tests and validating each of the Blocks.

In addition, PRISCA provides the possibility of configuring the application software (or
Computation Application), by defining:

D the rhythm and the order of Computation Blocks which make up the software

D the links between the variables of the Computation Blocks and the CENTRALOG
real time database.

D the configuration options (cf. Chapter 4)

PRISCA also provides a host structure within the real time system.

This host structure sequences the application programs and supplies these programs
with a set of specific variables such as the system time, the mode of calculation
(initialization or permanent processing) etc.
The host structure also provides the user with variable debugging and monitoring tools.
PRISCA frees the user from real time constraints.

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 5
2.2. PROCESS– DATA EXCHANGE INTERFACE

The INTPRO API library (Application Program Interface) written in C handles data
exchanges between the specific application programs and the CENTRALOG software
managing the real time process database.

INTPRO provides the application programs with a subset of the real time database which
is stabilized during the application software processing cycle thus giving the Computation
Blocks access to consistent process data.

CENTRALOG INTPRO PRISCA

TSE and TSI

Telesignals
VRE APPLICATION
Multi–state vars PROGRAM
TME and TMI COMPUT
Telemeasurements Input variables BLOCK
TCI COMPUT
Telecommands BLOCK
REAL TIME TVCI APPLICATION
PROCESS PROGRAM I/O variables
Setpoint
DATABASE instructions DATABASE
APPLICATION
Output variables PROGRAM
TSP COMPUT
Telesignals BLOCK
VRP
Multi–state vars COMPUT
Parameters BLOCK
TMP
Telemeasurements
TCE APPLICATION
Schedules
Telecommands PROGRAM
TVCE COMPUT
Setpoint BLOCK
instructions
COMPUT
Schedules BLOCK

Fig. 2 : Computation Application integrated to the Centralog system

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 6
 The variables from the real time database exchanged with the application software may
represent either logic states or analog measurements:

D originating outside the CENTRALOG system, acquired or calculated by the

automation cell; these variables will be:
— TSEs: external telesignals, for logic data
— TMEs: external telemeasurements, for analog data
— VREs: external multi–state variables, for numeric data
TSE, TME and VRE variables are application software inputs

D calculated by the CENTRALOG system, these variables will be:

— TSIs and TMIs: internal telesignals and telemeasurements, for data
calculated using standard internal CENTRALOG computation functions.
TSI and TMI variables are application software inputs
— TSP, TMP, VRP variables: telesignals, telemeasurements and program
multi–state variables, for data calculated by a specific application program
TSP, TMP and VRP variables are application software outputs

These variables may also be commands or setpoints :

— TCE and TVCE variables: external telecommands and setpoint instructions,
for logic and analog data respectively, intended for an automation cell
TCE and TVCE variables are application software outputs
— TCI and TVCI variables: telecommands and and setpoint instructions, for
logic and analog data respectively, intended for a specific application
program integrated to the supervisor
TCI and TVCI variables are software application inputs

In the final instance, these variables may be schedules (DGR). A schedule enables the
user to define future setpoints (active power, flow etc.) for a maximum period of 48 hours.
A schedule can also be produced by an application program executing forecast
calculations.
Schedules may be application software inputs and/or outputs.

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 7
3. Utilizing the Development Environment

The development environment is composed of two software workshops which are used
as follows:

D the first workshop is used to develop, test and validate the Computation Blocks

D the second is used to configure the Computation Application for integration to

CENTRALOG

Each of these workshops is associated to a set of menus, enabling the user to carry out
the different development and configuration tasks in a user friendly environment.

Appendix A shows how the development environment is organized and describes the
content of the different branches of the structure.

The development environment provides the user with a language to describe

configuration options.
This allows the user to develop Generic Computation Blocks which can be used in
different Computation Applications by inserting configuration directives into the
Computation Block source files.
One example of utilization might be the creation of Generic Computation Blocks common
to several plants in a single hydro installation, with the special requirements of each plant
being met by the configuration options of the Computation Application specific to that
plant .

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 8
3.1. SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT WORKSHOP

This workshop enables the user to carry out the following operations for each
Computation Block:

1 – Write Generic Source Files:

(source files incorporating configuration directives where necessary)
— computation programs
(in C)
— data descriptions
(using data description language)
— internal libraries
(the environment is used to provide a particular space for the development of
sub–programs common to several Computation Blocks)

2 – Create the emulation environment

This stage consists in creating an executable to emulate the Computation Block in

order to run unit tests.
This executable is produced from the Generic Sources of the Computation Block
written previously and from the binary files supplied by the environment to
implement the unit tests.

Two mechanisms are utilized to produce the executable; the first (ELSA) is used
to produce the Application Sources from the Generic Sources, the second
(INGRID) is used to interpret and generate the data interface.
These mechanisms are described below.

3 – Test and validation of the Computation Block

These operations are executed using the tools supplied by the EVE mechanism
as follows:
— emulation dialogue
the user accesses a dialogue which enables him to set and display the
Computation Block variables, then to execute the Block in either initialization
or permanent processing mode
— test set files
the user describes the test scenarios in a file using special directives
enabling him to set the variables, execute the Computation Block and put
certain variables on observation

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 9
 DEVELOPMENT OF A COMPUTATION BLOCK

-C
– Data description language
Write Generic Source
Files
- Configuration directives

Create - ELSA mechanism

emulation environment
- INGRID mechanism

Tests and validation - EVE mechanism

Fig. 3 : Diagram showing the different Computation Block development tasks

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 10
3.2. COMPUTATION APPLICATION CONFIGURATION WORKSHOP

This workshop enables the user to:

1 – configure the Computation Application, i.e.

— define the Computation Blocks composing the Computation Application
— define the rhythm and the order of the Computation Blocks
— define, where applicable, the configuration options
— establish the links between the Computation Block variables and
CENTRALOG database mnemonics (this may be executed upstream using
the software development workshop )

2 – produce the application sources and generate the data interface using the ELSA
and INGRID mechanisms

3 – deliver the application sources (C files), in order to produce the CIS station
executable

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 11
4. Utilizing the Configuration Options

The configuration options enable the user to develop Computation Blocks which can be
used by more than one Computation Application. These options are defined by the
configuration workshop.

The configuration options are described by means of configuration instructions in the

Generic Source Files.

4.1. CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS

The configuration instructions can be inserted into the computation program files (written
in C), and in data files (written using the data description language).

The configuration instructions are used to determine how a series of lines of a Generic
Source File will be implemented.
An instruction is composed of a directive associated to a condition.

Directives:
There are two types of directive. The first type is used to submit a series of lines of the
source file to the application condition, while second is used for a single line.

Conditions :
The condition is the result of a logic equation composed of the logic operators OR, AND
and / (inverse) and using the configuration options as operands .
The configuration options are defined by variables set to TRUE or FALSE in the
configuration options definition file.

4.2. ELSA MECHANISM

The ELSA mechanism browses the Generic Source Files and constructs the Application
Source Files
When a configuration directive is read, ELSA evaluates the associated condition in
accordance with the options available in the configuration option definition file.
If the condition is met, ELSA copies the lines governed by the directive.
Lines not submitted to directives are also copied
Errors detected by the ELSA mechanism are tracked on screen and copied to a file which
can be accessed by the user.

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 12
5. Description of the Data Interface

The data interface is used to define and produce correspondences between the
Computation Application variables and the CENTRALOG database.
It is also used to monitor these variables, when the Application is running on the target
station.
Finally, the data interface simplifies the user interface during Computation Block unit
tests.

The data interface is described for each of the Computation Blocks, by means of a
dedicated Generic Source File containing instructions relative to the data description
language.

5.1. DATA DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE

1 – The data description file is composed of sections each of which groups data
having the following common characteristics:

D Nature, the value of which may be :

— VAR in the case of variables
— PAR in the case of parameters
— ABA in the case of reference charts
— DIA in the case of schedules
D Type, the value of which may be :
— LOG in the case of logic variables
— REE in the case of real variables
— ENT in the case of integer variables
— CAR in the case of character strings
D Sense, the value of which may be :
— ECR in the case of write–only variables
— LEC in the case of read–only variables
— L–E in the case of read/write variables
A section defined as follows:
*VAR LOG LEC qualifies a series of read–only logic variables

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 13
 2 – Each component variable in a section is identified as follows:
LABEL : D=d C=c N=n Reference(s), or :

D LABEL represents the name of the variable in the Application Programs

D D=d specifies:
— the value of a step in minutes for a schedule
— the number of curves for a reference chart
— the dimension of the variable if this is not implicit
D C=c specifies the number of paired points per curve for a reference chart

D N=n specifies whether the variable is external to the Computation Application

(linked to the CENTRALOG database) or internal, thus n equals E or I

D Reference(s) defines the correspondence of the variable in the database,

or the list of correspondences for a data array

5.2. INGRID MECHANISM

The INGRID mechanism constructs the data interface (set of files in C) from the data
description Application Source Files.
Errors detected by the INGRID mechanism are tracked on screen and copied to a file
which can be accessed by the user.

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 14
6. Description of Unit Tests

6.1. INTRODUCTION

Unit tests are run for each Computation Block using the EVE mechanism integrated to the
executable emulating the Computation Block.

The unit tests are conducted via the test dialogue (with or without the debugger), or by
using the test set files.

In dialogue mode, the user sets and displays the variables and executes the Computation
Block via a series of menus.

The test files files are used to produce and link test scenarios. The results obtained are
transcribed in dedicated files.
It is thus possible to check that the processing performed by a Computation Block has not
regressed after modification of the code by rerunning the test set.
The directives utilized in the test files are similar to those used in dialogue mode.

6.2. TEST SET LANGUAGE

This language provides the user with the following directives:

D CONFIGURATION
used to initialize the time transmitted to the Computation Block, together with the
length of time the Computation Block is activated

D VALUES
used to select the variables which will be the subject of a report in the test results
file, and where appropriate to attribute a value to these variables before
calculation

D EXECUTION
used to specify whether the Computation Block is to be executed in initialization or
permanent processing mode (in the latter case the number of executions before
the results are displayed)

D RESULTS
used to define the results expected after running the test.
The EVE mechanism compares these values with the results obtained and
signals any divergence in the results file

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 15
6.3. DESCRIPTION OF A RESULTS FILE

Each test set file is associated to a results file, which specifies the following data for each
test run:

D the relevant test number

D 4 columns of results presenting:

— the values modified for this test (variables indicated by the directive VALUE)
— the results expected (specified by the directive RESULTS)
— the results obtained
— an indicator showing that the expected result has been obtained (OK or
NOK), or an error report (e.g. non–existent variable)

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 16
 Appendix

Appendix A Organization of the Development

Environment

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 17
 amx

amxa amxg amxp

amxa1 amxa2 amxg1 amxg2 elsa ingrid eve outils

conf fc01 bib bc1 bck mechanisms and tools

.opt .g
sg sa gen jeu tmp

.cfg .ing

.g .inc .g .j .O

.ing .dat .ing

eve executĆ
.r
able of bc1

.dat .c .dat .inc

.h .dat

.lis

.opt

.c

.h

Fig. 4 : Organization of the development environment

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 18
A.1. AMXP BRANCH

Branch housing the following PRISCA mechanisms and tools:

D sub–branch ELSA: mechanisms associated to the production of Application

Sources

D sub–branch INGRID: mechanisms associated to the data interface

D sub–branch EVE: mechanisms utilized in unit tests

D sub–branch tools: tools necessary for the execution of the software development
workshop and for the Computation Application configuration workshop

A.2. AMXG BRANCH

Branch used by the software development workshop containing:

D common sub–programs (libraries), developed by the user in directory bib

D source files for each Computation Block, in directories bc1 to bck, sub–directory
gen. (Computation Blocks can be grouped together in sub–sets such as amxg1,
amxg2)
The following files are developed in gen: source files written using the data
description language (.dat), files written in C (.g) and include files (.ing), all files
containing configuration instructions.
Sub–directory jeu contains the test set files (.j) and the test result files (.r).
Finally, sub–directory tmp is used to produce the executable providing the
emulation of the Computation Block.

A.3. AMXA BRANCH

Branch used by the configuration workshop for the configuration of Computation

Applications(amxa1, amxa2).
Files (.opt) and (.cfg) define respectively the configuration options and the rhythm and
order of the Computation Blocks.
Sub–directories sg and sa contain respectively the Generic Source Files (copied from the
branches of the Computation Blocks selected in the Application), and the Application
Source Files produced from the generic sources after the configuration options have
been processed.

.
P–TP09–A42063–V4 E A REV A
STD PRISCA Function Sheet 19
 HDSR REMOTE ACCESS
User's Manual

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.
This document is the exclusive property of

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

17-11-97 NAME
GENERIQUE
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE V. KOUN
CHECKED

APPROUVE D. CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42010 E A A GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 27 29
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt V. Koun D. Cantero 17.11.97 Translation of the French document rev A GFE
PA 401 A

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1. REMOTE HDSR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2. HDSR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3. ORGANIZATION AND STORAGE OF HDSR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4. ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2. GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.1. OPERATING PRINCIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2. FILENAME ENCODING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3. PURGING FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3. SELECTING A DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.1. ENTERING THE OPERATOR NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2. CHOOSING A DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

4. EVENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.1. EVENT DATABASE CONSULTATION PARAMETER DEFINITION MENU 11
4.2. DISPLAYING EVENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.2.1. Displaying Events in HTML Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.2.2. Displaying Events in ASCII Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2.3. Summary of the Event Consultation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

5. SAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.1. SAMPLE DATABASE CONSULTATION PARAMETER DEFINITION MENU 16
5.2. CONSULTATION CORRESPONDING TO A PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION 19
5.2.1. Selecting the Previous Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.2. Activating the Consultation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.3. CONSULTING THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.4. DISPLAYING SAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.4.1. Samples Displayed in ASCII Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.4.2. Samples Displayed in HTML Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.4.3. Summary of the Sample Consultation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.5. SAMPLING RATIO TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 1-ii
1. Introduction

1.1. REMOTE HDSR FUNCTION

The CLOGWEB remote data storage and retrieval function allows a geographically
remote operator to access the Centralog HDSR data retrieval facilities via an Internet
browser (Netscape, Explorer).

The remote operator can consult and download historical data for local processing or
storage purposes.

The data can be accessed over an Intranet type local network or by means of an http type
point–to–point Internet connection.

CONTRONET

CVS
CCC
Site
CENTRA- Supplier
LOG design
office
Operator station Operator station
F900

1.2. HDSR FUNCTION

The Centralog HDSR (Historical Data Storage and Retrieval) function handles the
storage and management of HDSR data on disk and magnetic tape in view of subsequent
retrieval for consultation by an operator. Historical data may be:

D Samples: logic and analog variables recorded at a defined sampling rate.

D Events.

While all events output by the Centralog system are logged by the HDSR function, the
sampled variables which are monitored by the HDSR function must be declared during
configuration of the Centralog database.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 2
 In the Centralog 30 and 50 systems, HDSR data is acquired from real time data on the CIS
(Centralog Interface Station). This data is then transferred over the Contronet network to
the CCC/HDSR station for storage disk. In a Centralog 10 system where the CIS function
is integrated into the CCC/HDSR station, HDSR data is transferred locally (ie. within the
station).

The disk storage space must be capable of storing at least 4 days of data under normal
operating conditions. The actual number of days, which corresponds to the number of
databases awaiting storage, is parameterizable during installation of the HDSR function
and can be increased if the number of sample variables is reduced. HDSR data can then
be transferred onto a high capacity storage medium such as DAT (Digital Audio Tape).
Data stored on DAT can be retrieved on the CCC/HDSR station for subsequent
consultation.

1.3. ORGANIZATION AND STORAGE OF HDSR DATA

The organization of HDSR data on the CCC station or on DAT is based on the hierarchical
structure of the different types of data forming the databases.

CCC station
Screen

Consultation

Data from Current

Centralog database
Databases awaiting storage Retrieved databases

DAT

The data received from Centralog is stored in the current database. Once a day at 0h or
when the current database is full (the database dimensions are pre–defined), the current
database is copied into the space reserved for databases awaiting storage. The user is
informed that storage onto DAT must be executed when this space is full and when the
oldest of the databases awaiting storage has not yet been stored. Databases awaiting
storage are marked to indicate whether they have already been stored on DAT. These
databases are preserved on disk when they are stored on DAT in order to provide the
operator with a permanent historical record of n days relative to day d. Databases which
are still present on the disk do not have to be retrieved from DAT. The user can also
request storage of the current database if one of the databases awaiting storage is empty
or if the oldest database awaiting storage has already been stored: the current database
is then closed and moved to the space reserved for databases awaiting storage in order to
be transferred onto DAT. A new current database is then created to continue logging of
data from the Centralog system.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 3
 The user can consult the current database, the databases awaiting storage or one of the
two retrieved databases. A retrieved database is an old database which has been stored
on tape then retrieved onto the disk of the SUN station for consultation.

Centralog 30 and 50 HDSR

Remote HDSR

DAT CCC, EXP, HDSR

WEB Internet
Storage & server
Retrieval
Local storage
disk
Data consultation, storage
retrieval and export station
Local
Ethernet network

EXP, HDSR CIS

Consultation station
only Remote HDSR

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 4
1.4. ABBREVIATIONS

The following abbreviations and terms are utilized in this manual:

CIS : Centralog Interface Station.

DAT : Digital Audio Tape, medium used for the storage of HDSR data.

HDSR : Historical Data Storage and Retrieval.

TM : Telemeasurement (analog variable).

TS : Telesignal (logic variable).

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 5
2. General Information

2.1. OPERATING PRINCIPLE

A request/response mechanism is implemented for the retrieval of HDSR data. The client
station transmits one or more retrieve requests;in return the station receives the HDSR
data files specified. The files received are either ASCII files which can be utilized in a
spreadsheet, or HTML files accessible by the browser.

There are 4 types of request:

D Request for the state of the databases available on the site HDSR station

D Request for the list of the variables sampled in a given database

D Request for sample data for a given database

D Request for event data for a given database

A response is associated with each type of request. The response consists of 2 files: a
report file showing any errors and a data file which provides the data requested.

The man–machine interface formulates the request files automatically and processes the
report and data files.

Data files are transferred on the switched network at 28 800 bits/s. Maximum transfer time
is 15 min. This means that the size of HDSR data files is limited to a maximum 1MB
(number of events limited to 6,000 or see sampling ratio table for samples).

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 6
2.2. FILENAME ENCODING

Filenames are encoded in 8 characters plus a 2 or 3 character extension.

The 8 character filename comprises:

D the name of the operator in 6 characters

These 6 characters are made up of:

— a 3 letter user ID code
— a 2 letter site ID code
— a digit representing the unit
D a 2 digit number generated automatically by CLOGWEB.

D the 2 or 3 character extension is defined as follows:

— DEB to request the available databases
— DEV to request the list of variables
— DEA to request events
— DEE to request samples
— CR for the report response
— DO for the data response

Eg. RAG SU 2 75 . DO

User ID Site ID Unit File Data file

(SUAL) number number response

2.3. PURGING FILES

Old files are erased each day at 0 H 15 mn.

Only the last 30 files, corresponding to the most recent requests from each user, are
preserved.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 7
3. Selecting a Database

3.1. ENTERING THE OPERATOR NAME

The first stage in the retrieval procedure consists of entering the name of the operator and
a request to access the list of databases.

Operating principles

The name of the operator must comprise 6 characters.

Important: For a given site and unit an operator must always enter the same
name.

The name must be encoded as follows:

D the first 3 letters represent the user

D the next 2 letters represent the site

D the final letter represents the unit number.

The operator name is used to encode filenames.

To activate input, click on the box to the left of the [start] button, then enter the 6 characters
of the name.

Commands available:

D [Start]: validates the name of the user and displays the list of available databases.
The username can also be validated by pressing [Enter] after completing the
entry.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 8
 Important: If the name is incorrect, an error message is displayed:
Error: name empty or
Error in user name

Utilize the browser [Back] button to return to the name input screen.

3.2. CHOOSING A DATABASE

Operating principles:

The list comprises:

D the type of database

— BC: current database
— BA: database awaiting storage
— BR: retrieved database
D a selection button

D the type of database

— SAMPLES: TS/TM samples
— EVENTS: events
D the start time

D the end time

The first database in the list is selected by default.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 9
 Commands available:

D : used to select a SAMPLES or EVENTS database. The user chooses by

clicking on the button related to the database.

Important: Only one database can be chosen. Selection determines the

type of consultation applicable (SAMPLES or EVENTS).

D [OK]: validates a selection in the list

Important: When the [OK] button is clicked, a consultation parameter

definition menu is displayed. This menu corresponds to the
type of database chosen.

D To return to the previous screen use the browser [Back] button.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 10
4. Events

4.1. EVENT DATABASE CONSULTATION PARAMETER DEFINITION MENU

Database start/end time

Start time selected by the

user

End time selected by the

user

Output format

Start and end times are

reset to initial values

Confirm selection

The menu is used to select the start and end times which define the time span of the data
to be retrieved. The menu also defines the output format of the data.

ID field (not modifiable):

D Identification of the database: this indication corresponds to the database

selected in the ”Choose database” menu ”.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 11
 Commands available:

D [Beginning date]: input the start time selected

D [Ending date]: input the end time selected

D [Output format]: input the output format selected

D [OK]: validates the selection and displays the events requested.

D [Reset]: resets the start and end times to their initial values

Error message

D If the start time or the the end time is incompatible with the start times of the
database, the following message is displayed:

Use the browser [Back] button to return to modify the start or end times.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 12
4.2. DISPLAYING EVENTS

Events are displayed chronologically. The user can browse the list of events by using the
horizontal and vertical scroll bars.

CLOGWEB can display up to 6,000 events on each consultation. If the time span
requested contains more than 6,000 events, the user shifts the start time of consultation
to obtain the events situated towards the end of the time span. A warning message is
displayed at the top of the page when the system detects more than 6,000 events for the
span requested.

Warning message:

Depending on the output format requested by the user, events are presented in one of the
following forms:

D list of events in HTML format

D list of events in ASCII format

Commands available:

At this level, only the commands provided by the browser can be used.

Use the [Back] button to return in order to execute another consultation or to modify the
parameters.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 13
4.2.1. Displaying Events in HTML Format

Events are displayed in chronological order and in the color associated to their degree of
urgency.

Degree of urgency:

D red: 1 (most urgent)

D indigo: 2

D blue: 3

D green: 4

D black: 0 (normal)

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 14
4.2.2. Displaying Events in ASCII Format

In ASCII format, the color associated to the degree of urgency is not displayed. The
number of events is limited to 6000 events as in the HTML format.

ASCII format enables historical data to be processed by a spreadsheet. The page can be
saved in a user file by means of the browser commands [File][Save As ...] before being
transferred to a spreadsheet application.

List of events
(1 = the most urgent)

4.2.3. Summary of the Event Consultation Procedure

Summary of the event consultation procedure:

Select an event database from the database list

 Choose start and end times corresponding to the time span of the database
selected

 Select an output format

 Click on [OK]

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 15
5. Samples

5.1. SAMPLE DATABASE CONSULTATION PARAMETER DEFINITION MENU

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 16
 Sampling rate
defined by the user

Start time selected by the

user

End time selected by the

user

Format format
Output of sortie

Reset all selections to

their initial value

Activate selection

Local date and time

Variable selection

This menu is used to request a previous configuration and to execute it, to execute the
current configuration, or to output a list of the variables in the current configuration.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 17
 Data field (non modifiable)

D Local date and time (dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm)

Commands available:

D [Choice of the sampling period]: click on the sampling rate required.

Important: Sampling rates are presented and expressed in seconds

and are multiples of (or the same as) those of the HDSR
function. For example, choosing a sampling rate of 10S
means that one value in two will be sampled from the HDSR
database selected.

D [Beginning date]: input the start time selected

D [Ending date]: input the end time selected

D [Output format]: choose the output format

D [Last config]: access a previous configuration. This button and the 2 following
buttons are not displayed during an initial consultation.

Important: A previous configuration is a set of variables selected during a

previous consultation

D [Execute an old config]: activates the consultation corresponding to a previous

configuration

D [Edit]: activates the edit previous configuration command

D [Execute the current config]: validates the current selections and displays
samples.

D [Reset]: click on this button to reset all selections to their initial values.

D Click on the button next to the external key to select the relevant variable. A
second click cancels the selection .

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 18
5.2. CONSULTATION CORRESPONDING TO A PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION.

5.2.1. Selecting the Previous Configuration.

Last config
RAGSU202.DEE
RAGSU203.DEE
RAGSU222.DEE
RAGSU230.DEE
RAGSU231.DEE
RAGSU232.DEE
RAGSU234.DEE
RAGSU235.DEE List of previous variable
RAGSU236DEE configurations selected
RAGSU240.DEE

The list of previous configurations is obtained by clicking on the button contained in the
[Last Config] box.

A previous configuration is displayed by clicking on the name of the file which contains the
configuration.

This selection gives access to the previously selected database with the variables
defined in the configuration.

Important: If the browser [Back] and [Forward] buttons are utilized,

the list displayed may not be updated.
Use the browser [Reload] button or return to ”Select a
database” to update the list of previous configurations.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 19
5.2.2. Activating the Consultation

After selecting a previous configuration, this menu is used to re–execute the configuration
selected, to modify the parameters or to output the list of variables.

Commands available:

D [Execute an old config]: activates consultation of the database according to the

parameters, and displays the list of variables corresponding to the configuration
selected.

D [Edit]: displays a list of variables showing those previously selected in the

configuration.
This list of variables can be modified.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 20
5.3. CONSULTING THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION

After selecting a previous configuration or after displaying and, where necessary, editing
the list of variables in the database selected, [Execute the current config] applies to the
variables selected in the variable selection table.

Commands available:

D [Execute the current config]: used to validate the current selection and display the
samples,

D [Reset]: click on this button to reset all selections to their initial values.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 21
5.4. DISPLAYING SAMPLES

This page comprises 3 sections:

— a header indicating the parameters of the consultation
— a list of the variables selected and their characteristics
— a list of samples as shown below:

Value of first variable Value of first variable

Sample time Validity of first variable Validity of first variable

ECH–VAR

Validity

TS: U = 0 –> valid: on/off monitoring, valid and sure

U = 1 –> replaced: replaced or doubtful, valid and non–inhibited
U = 2 –> invalid: invalid or inhibited

TM: U = 0 –> valid: on/off monitoring, valid, sure and within limits
U = 1 –> replaced: replaced or doubtful, valid, non–inhibited and within limits
U = 2 –> invalid: invalid or inhibited or out of limits

The function is used to display a number of samples as determined by the sampling ratio
table. If the request exceeds the display capacity, the following message is displayed:

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 22
 The user must reduce the number of variables and/or the time span and/or the sampling
rate.

Depending on the format parameter defined by the user, the samples are presented in the
one of the following forms:

D list of samples in HTML format

D list of samples in ASCII format

Commands available:

At this level, only the commands provided by the browser are available. Use the [Back]
button to return to the previous screen in order to execute another consultation or to
modify the parameters.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 23
5.4.1. Samples Displayed in ASCII Format

References of request and

response files

Local date

Header

List of
variables
with their
characterĆ
istics

Values of the variables

sampled with
their validities

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 24
5.4.2. Samples Displayed in HTML Format

Local date

Header

List of
variables
selected

Samples

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 25
5.4.3. Summary of the Sample Consultation Procedure

Select a sample database from the database list

 Select a sampling rate

 Choose start and end times corresponding to the time span of the database
selected

 Select an output format

 Choose the current configuration or a previous configuration

 Edit the list of the variables as necessary to establish a list of the variables which
the user wishes to sample.

Execute the configuration

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 26
5.5. SAMPLING RATIO TABLE

The table below indicates the ratios between sampling rates, timespan and the total
number of variables which must be complied with in order to ensure that the file being
retrieved does not exceed dimensioning requirements.

Sampling rates in 5 10 15 20 30 60
seconds
Nb samples/24h 17280 8640 5760 4320 2280 1140
Nb of variables 4 8 12 16 24 48
possible
Nb samples/12h 8640 4320 2880 2160 1440 720
Nb of variables 8 16 24 32 48 96
possible
Nb samples/6h 4320 2160 1440 1080 720 360
Nb of variables 16 32 48 64 96 192
possible
Nb samples/2h 1440 720 480 360 240 120
Nb of variables 48 96 144 192 288 576
possible
Nb samples/1h 720 360 240 180 120 60
Nb of variables 96 192 288 384 576 1152
possible
Nb samples/30mn 360 180 120 140 60 30
Nb of variables 192 384 576 768 1152 2304
possible

The table shows that a request for 400 variables/24h at intervals of 5s cannot be executed
directly. The request can be met by adopting the following type of approach:

– request 24h / 48 var / 60s

then
– request focussed on 1h / 96 var / 5s

It should be remembered that the data remains present in the existing databases bases
and that it can therefore be consulted as often as necessary for operational purposes.

.
P–TP09–a42010 E A REV A
HDSR Remote Access User’s Manual Sheet 27
 CENTRALOG INSTALLATION AND
IMPLEMENTATION MANUAL

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
This document is the exclusive property of ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

16-12-98 NAME
ALSPA P320
ETABLI T.PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE J.ANDRES
CHECKED

APPROUVE D. CANTERO
APPROVED Centrales Energétiques SA

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
PTP09-A42400-V4 E C C GFE
PA 400 B

1/ 155 164
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
B J.RAYMOND B. GUERIN D. CANTERO 20/04/98 First version GFE
Translation of the French document rev B
Include corrections of RA 69 and 70

C T. PRATT J.ANDRES D. CANTERO 16/12/98 Translation of the French document rev C GFE
PA 401 A

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1. PURPOSE OF THE DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2. EXAMPLE OF CENTRALOG ARCHITECTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.1. CENTRALOG 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.2. CENTRALOG 30 or 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.3. Operator Station: CVS - CENTRALOG VIDEO STATION . . . . . 5
1.2.4. CENTRALOG Configuration Center: CCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2.5. Interface Station : CIS - CENTRALOG INTERFACE STATION 6
1.2.6. Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.7. Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.8. S8000-x Unit Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3. REQUISITE SKILLS AND PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.4. TYPOGRAPHIC CONVENTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2. INSTALLATION AND IMPLEMENTATION PHASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2.1. CENTRALOG 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2. CENTRALOG 30 OR 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3. PACKING, TRANSPORT AND STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3.1. GENERAL RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1.1. Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1.2. On-site Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1.3. On-site Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1.4. Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1.5. Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2. STORAGE IN TRANSPORT PACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.3. STORAGE IN WAREHOUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.4. STORAGE IN THE INSTALLATION PREMISES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.1. OVERALL ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2. RELIABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 1-ii
 5. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.1. PREMISES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.1.1. Distribution of the Materials in the Premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.1.2. Disposition of the Premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.2. POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.2.1. Voltage and Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

6. HARDWARE INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

6.1. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6.1.1. Installation recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6.1.2. Installing Furniture (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6.1.3. Installing the CIS (Centralog 30 or 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.1.4. Installing the CVS Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.1.5. Installation of Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2. CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.1. General principle of cableways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.2. General principles of connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.2.3. Connection of Power Supply cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.2.4. Connection of Data Link cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.2.5. Connection of CONTRONET Network cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.2.6. Connection of logic Input/Output cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.2.7. Connecting the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.2.8. Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

7. INSTALLATION OF THE CONTRONET NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

7.1. PURPOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
7.2. AREA OF APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
7.3. PRESENTATION OF CONTRONET NETWORK COMPONENTS . . 34
7.3.1. 10BaseT Twisted Pair Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
7.3.2. Coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
7.3.3. AUI (Attachment Unit Interface) Link Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.3.4. Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.3.5. Repeater (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7.4. INSTALLING A 10BASE5 CONTRONET NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.4.1. Network Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.4.2. Installing the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7.4.3. Laying the CONTRONET Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.4.4. Installing Connectors on the 10 Base 5 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7.4.5. 10 base 5 network Grounding Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.5. INSTALLING CONTRONET 10BASE2 OR 10BASET NETWORKS 53
7.5.1. Laying 10Base2 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.5.2. Laying 10BaseT Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 1-iii
 7.6. INSTALLING HUBS OR REPEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.7. PRE-STARTUP TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.7.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.7.2. Visual Examination of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.7.3. 10 base 5 network insulation and Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.7.4. 10 base 5 network Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.8. TESTS REGARDING OTHER NETWORK TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

8. POWERING THE HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

8.1. PURPOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.2. TESTS PRIOR TO POWER-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.2.1. Environment Conditions and Physical Examination of the Hardware 57
8.2.2. Availability of Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.3. POWERING THE C30 OR C50 CENTRALOG CABINETS . . . . . . . . 58
8.3.1. Presentation of Cabinet Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.3.2. Power Supply of Auxiliaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.3.3. CIS station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.3.4. SOFY M.90 EXPORT 320 Master Clock (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.4. POWER UP OF THE CVS OPERATOR STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.4.1. Mains Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.4.2. Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.4.3. Views of the Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.4.4. Opening of the Station Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
8.4.5. Using the Ground Bracelet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
8.4.6. Installing the Internal Hard Disk Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
8.4.7. Installing the internal floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
8.4.8. Installing the Internal CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
8.4.9. Installing the SBus Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
8.4.10. Closing the Station Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
8.4.11. Installing the External DAT Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8.4.12. Connecting the Mouse and Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.4.13. Installing the Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.4.14. Connecting to the Ethernet network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
8.4.15. Connecting Serial Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
8.5. INSTALLING THE PRINTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.5.1. Printer Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.5.2. Connecting the Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.5.3. EPSON STYLUS 1520 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.5.4. Installing the HP1600 C or HP1600 CM Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.5.5. Installing the HP4000N Black & White Laser Printers . . . . . . . . 99
8.5.6. Installing the HP4500N Color Laser Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 1-iv
 9. INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9.1. OPERATING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9.1.1. Media Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
9.2. USING THE CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9.2.1. Inserting the Disk into the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9.2.2. Ejecting the Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9.2.3. Precautions for Using Compact Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9.3. USING DAT CARTRIDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
9.3.1. Write Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
9.3.2. Inserting the Cartridge into the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
9.4. INSTALLING THE CCC OPERATOR STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9.4.1. Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9.4.2. Installation of SYSCLOG DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9.5. CCC PASSWORD MODIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
9.5.1. Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
9.5.2. Modifying Access Rights or Creating a New User . . . . . . . . . . . 116
9.5.3. Consulting the Access Record File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
9.5.4. Ejecting the CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
9.5.5. Reinitializing the System after Changing the Hardware Configuration of a
Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
9.6. INSTALLING STATIONS OTHER THAN THE CCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
9.6.1. System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
9.6.2. Installing the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
9.7. ADJUSTING THE SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

10. INSTALLATION OF SCREEN COPY SOFTWARE (SEIKO) . . . . . . . . . 128

10.1. INSTALLING THE SEIKO NETWORK PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10.2. INSTALLING A SEIKO PRINTER ON THE PARALLEL PORT . . . . . 132
10.2.1. Installation on the Server station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10.2.2. Installation ON a Client station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

11. INSTALLATION OF COMPILER LICENCES (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

12. BACKING UP AND RESTORING THE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

12.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
12.2. OPERATIVE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
12.3. DESCRIPTION OF THE BACKUPCLOG TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
12.4. BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
12.5. RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 1-v
 13. STARTING THE CENTRALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.2. STARTING THE PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.3. STARTING THE CCC OPERATOR STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.4. STARTING THE CIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
13.5. STARTING THE CVS OPERATOR STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

14. STOPPING THE CENTRALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

14.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
14.2. STOPPING THE CVS OPERATOR STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
14.3. STOPPING THE CCC OPERATOR STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
14.4. STOPPING THE CIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
14.5. STOPPING THE PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

15. MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

15.1. REPLACING A CCC SUN STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
15.2. REPLACING A CVS SUN STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

16. PROCESSING ANOMALIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 1-vi
 List of figures

Fig. 1 : Example of Centralog 10 architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Fig. 2 : Example of a Centralog 30 or 50 architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fig. 3 : Centralog 10 installation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fig. 4 : Centralog 30 or 50 installation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fig. 5 : Fixing the cabinet to the floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fig. 6 : Interior rear view of a cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fig. 7 : Example of Centralog 30 Ethernet network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fig. 8 : SQE test of a 1114 transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 9 : TRANS-10B2 transceiver SQE Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 10 : AT-MX10S transceiver SQE test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fig. 11 : Male crimping plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 12 : Female/female extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 13 : Coaxial load terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 14 : Coaxial load terminator with grounding plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 15 : Procedure for assembling a crimp connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fig. 16 : Procedure for assembling a screw connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fig. 17 : Tap kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fig. 18 : Tap kit assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fig. 19 : Assembly of the transceiver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Fig. 20 : Insulation of connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fig. 21 : Insulation of terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fig. 22 : Insulation of terminators (cont'd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 23 : Power supply of the SUN ULTRA 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fig. 24 : Front of the SUN ULTRA 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fig. 25 : SUN ULTRA 2 rear view and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fig. 26 : Rear panel of the SUN ULTRA 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fig. 27 : Opening the SUN ULTRA 2 central unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fig. 28 : Internal view of the SUN ULTRA 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fig. 29 : Hard disk unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fig. 30 : SBus board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 1-vii
 Fig. 31 : Closing of the SUN ULTRA 2 central unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 32 : Rear panel of the SUN ULTRA 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 33 : SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station power supply cable connection 68
Fig. 34 : SUN ULTRA 1 station power supply cable connection . . . . . . . 68
Fig. 35 : Front view of the SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 36 : Rear view of the SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 37 : Front view of the SUN ULTRA 1 station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fig. 38 : Rear view and connectors of the SUN ULTRA 1 station . . . . . . 72
Fig. 39 : Rear panel of SUN SPARC station 5 central unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 40 : Opening the SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station central unit . . . . . . 74
Fig. 41 : SUN SPARC station 5 - Internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 42 : Rear view and connectors of the SUN ULTRA 1 station . . . . . . 75
Fig. 43 : Opening of the SUN ULTRA1 station central unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 44 : Internal view of the SUN ULTRA 1 station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 45 : Hard disk unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 46 : Hard disk unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fig. 47 : Floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fig. 48 : Floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 49 : CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fig. 50 : CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fig. 51 : SBus module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fig. 52 : SBus board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fig. 53 : Closing the SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station central unit . . . . . . . 84
Fig. 54 : Rear panel of the SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station central unit . . 84
Fig. 55 : Closing the SUN ULTRA 1 station central unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fig. 56 : Rear view and connectors of the SUN ULTRA 1 station . . . . . . 85
Fig. 57 : Connection of external drive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fig. 58 : DAT unit - front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 59 : DAT unit - rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 60 : SUN SPARC station 5 - rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 61 : Rear view and connectors of the SUN ULTRA 1 station . . . . . . 88
Fig. 62 : SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station - rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 63 : SUN ULTRA 1 - rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 64 : CVS monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fig. 65 : Connection of SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station monitors . . . . . . 90
Fig. 66 : Connection of SUN ULTRA 1 station screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fig. 67 : Connecting the SUN SPARC station 5 to the Ethernet network 91

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 1-viii
 Fig. 68 : Location of Quad Ethernet SBus module in the SUN SPARC
station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fig. 69 : Connections to the Ethernet network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 70 : CNX-2: connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 71 : Serial links connections of the SUN SPARC station 5 . . . . . . . . 95
Fig. 72 : Serial link connections of the SUN ULTRA 1 station . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 73 : DAT cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Fig. 74 : DAT drive unit - front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fig. 75 : Screen adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 1-ix
 Notice
Modifications and corrections made to this document are denoted by a vertical bar in the
left hand margin.

The regular or special–purpose tools mentioned in this document do not form part of the
basic CENTRALOG supply. They can however be provided as options.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 2
1. PRESENTATION

1.1. PURPOSE OF THE DOCUMENT

The purpose of this document is to enumerate and explain the operations required to
install, connect and configure the various hardware elements of a CENTRALOG system
during on–site implementation of the equipment or during hardware replacement,
together with the operations required to install, update and maintain the different software
elements in an operational on–site environment.

This document covers:

hardware installation steps.

hardware configuration steps.

software installation on the different units including disk installation and software
utilization.

software update procedures following delivery of a new version.

database and mimic view modification procedures.

system maintenance, ie., backups, hardware replacements etc.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 3
1.2. EXAMPLE OF CENTRALOG ARCHITECTURES

1.2.1. CENTRALOG 10

A Centralog 10 is composed of the following elements:

one CVS operator station,

printers,

an Ethernet network,

a WorldFip 8000–F or Ethernet S8000–E unit network.

OPERATOR STATION Control and supervisory

system
CVS

ÂÂ
Printer

ETHERNET
Dual S8000-x network

Automation
cells

Fig. 1 : Example of Centralog 10 architecture

1.2.2. CENTRALOG 30 or 50

A Centralog 30 or 50 system is composed of the following elements:

A station interfacing with the single or redundant Worldfip S8000–F or Ethernet

S8000–E unit network.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 4

one or more CVS operator stations,

A CCC configuration station (running on an operator station),

printers,

an Ethernet network,

a WorldFip S8000–F or Ethernet S8000–E unit network.

OPERATOR STATIONS Control and supervisory

system
CVS CVS
Printer

ÂÂ
ETHERNET
CIS CIS
Dual S8000-x unit network

Automation
cells

Fig. 2 : Example of a Centralog 30 or 50 architecture

1.2.3. Operator Station: CVS – CENTRALOG VIDEO STATION

The CVS operator station handles the screen–based man–machine interface functions
of the CENTRALOG system. The CVS is composed of workstations which comprise a
standard keyboard, a mouse and up to three high definition color monitors.

1.2.4. CENTRALOG Configuration Center: CCC

The CCC runs on a workstation which may also host the the functions of an operator
station.
The CCC contains the CENTRALOG software, databases and mimic data. It downloads
and monitors the CVS and CIS stations, and the networks. The CCC also manages the
system, communications and HDSR functions.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 5
1.2.5. Interface Station : CIS – CENTRALOG INTERFACE STATION

The interface station enables the system to be connected to the SYCOWAY F900
network and thus to the CONTROBLOC P320 automation cells by means of the CDP
function (CENTRALOG Data Presentation). The CIS also handles the Real–Time
Database management, printout, and storage functions by means of the CDS function
(CENTRALOG Data Services). In the case of a double Centralog, two CIS stations are
connected by a Ethernet network called Dual link.

1.2.6. Printers

The printers are used to provide the user with a full set of documents giving a printed
record of all changes occurring in evolutions of process parameters.
An other color printer can be used for the softcopy of operator stations screens.

1.2.7. Ethernet Network

The Ethernet network ensures rapid and reliable communications between the different
CENTRALOG stations.

1.2.8. S8000–x Unit Network

These networks are of two types:

One or two WORLDFIP type single or dual medium S8000–F unit networks.

An Ethernet network using one or more optical rings (DORE : Dual Optical Ring
Ethernet).

These networks handle communications between the controllers and the interface with
the CENTRALOG system.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 6
1.3. REQUISITE SKILLS AND PREPARATION

The personnel responsible for hardware implementation must have had training in
electrical and electronic systems.

The minimum level of competence required to install CENTRALOG software is as follows:

basic knowledge of UNIX, familiarity with the VI editor;

basic knowledge of MS–DOS;

general understanding of the CENTRALOG 10, 30 or 50 system.

Before starting operations, the following steps are recommended:

read all of this document;

ensure you have all the necessary documents;

ensure you have all the component parts of the delivery, CD–ROM, magnetic
media etc.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 7
1.4. TYPOGRAPHIC CONVENTIONS

The following conventions are used in this manual:

<italics> : used to represent all system outputs such as prompts, error

messages etc.

<command> : bold type is used to represent all operator inputs.

(cr) : carriage return character validating operator inputs:

<return> or <enter> depending on keyboard.

<v.r> : represents the project library version (see Project version

sheet).

<EI> : represents the name of the integration step (see Project

version sheet).

<v.rEI> : represents the integration step version (see Project version

sheet).

<NOM CCC–S> : represents the name of the CCC–S.

$ : represents the prompt of the account the user is logged into.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 8
2. INSTALLATION AND IMPLEMENTATION PHASES

The installation and implementation of a CENTRALOG 30 system is organized

chronologically as shown overleaf:

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 9
2.1. CENTRALOG 10

HARDWARE SOFTWARE
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Installation of operator
Unpacking & inventory station incorporating the
of hardware elements CCC

Recommendations
for installation of
END
hardware elements

Recommendations for
connections

Installation of the CVS

operator station

Installation of the
Ethernet network

Printers power up

Fig. 3 : Centralog 10 installation phases

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 10
2.2. CENTRALOG 30 OR 50

HARDWARE INSTAL- SOFTWARE

LATION INSTALLATION

Unpacking & inventory Installation of operator

of hardware elements station incorporating the
CCC
Installation of the
hardware
CIS
Installation and verifica- Loading programs and
tion of the CIS cabinets starting
Customization check

Installation of the Installation of the other

workstations operator stations
Installation of the
peripherals

Cables connection END

Power supplies
Networks
Serial links

Progressive
power up
CIS cabinets
Work stations
Peripherals

Fig. 4 : Centralog 30 or 50 installation phases

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 11
3. PACKING, TRANSPORT AND STORAGE

3.1. GENERAL RULES

3.1.1. Packing

The equipment must be kept in their transport packings during all phases of acceptance,
handling and storage before on–site installation.

Packings, in particular the airtight protective covering bags, are not to be removed until
the moment of installation at the final location and position.

3.1.2. On–site Acceptance

The following dispositions are taken on–site :

Before the arrival of the equipment on–site, check the required environmental
conditions and premises.

At arrival of the equipment on–site, perform a quantitative and qualitative

inspection of delivery conformity with systematic establishment of a report in the
case of non–conformance or damage.

3.1.3. On–site Handling

The equipment and materials must be handled with normal precautions relative to lifting
apparatus and loads to be maneuvered.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 12
3.1.4. Storage

If on–site storage is necessary, it must be carried out in conformity to professional rules for
this. It is notably necessary to periodically make an inspection of the stored equipment
(indicators, stacking, materials with limited life spans, etc.).

The following are the different types of storing which could be necessary on–site :

1 Storage in
transport packing

2 Storage in
Acceptance
warehouse

3
Storage in the
installation premises

3.1.5. Damage

In the case of damage or supposed damage during transport, handling or storage, the
equipment is to be :

unpacked for estimation of the damage and establishment of a written report,

repacked as a function of the type of storage considered.

Note :

Expendable items and information support mediums must only be stored either in
transport packing or in warehouse.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 13
3.2. STORAGE IN TRANSPORT PACKING

Definition of storage

This type of storage corresponds to a waiting period before the equipment is

placed in warehouse or installation.

Packing

The equipment must remain in the packing used by the supplier (CEGELEC) for
their transport.

Climatic Conditions

Refer to the conditions described in the table of chapter 4. Sheet 16.

Storage Site

In covered room.

Storage Time

Maximum 12 months to be counted from the acceptance date.

3.3. STORAGE IN WAREHOUSE

Definition of Storage

All equipment which is no longer protected by its transport packing and is not
installed, or temporarily stored with power switched off before installation, must be
stored in a warehouse.

Packing

The equipment stored in warehouse must be kept in their individual packing.

Moreover, the electronic modules delivered separately must be kept in their
anti–static bags.

Storage will be made on an adapted support to avoid shocks and stacking.

PROMS and REPROMS memories must be kept in the anti–static packing bars.

Program and magnetic supports (diskettes, magnetic peripherals and tapes [hard
disks, diskette readers, etc.]) remain in their individual packing and are placed far
away from high intensity magnetic fields (transformers, self).

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 14

Environmental Conditions

Refer to the conditions described in the table of chapter 4. Sheet 16.

Storage Site

Closed, covered, dust–free, temperate premises.

Storage Time

Long term storage for other than materials with a limited life span (example :
batteries, etc.).

3.4. STORAGE IN THE INSTALLATION PREMISES

Definition of Storage

Conditions to be respected for a temporary storage of equipment other than

expendable items and information support mediums when they are unpacked,
placed in the final premises and power switched off.

Packing

The materials are unpacked and must:

— remain in their individual packing,
— be stored so as to avoid shocks and stacking.
Program and magnetic supports (floppy disks, magnetic peripherals and tapes
[hard disks, floppy drives, etc.]), must :
— be placed far away from high intensity magnetic fields (transformers, self),
— be stored in a location protected from dust and humidity.

Environmental Conditions

Refer to the conditions described in the table of chapter 4. Sheet 16.

Storage Site

In final location and position (electrical rooms, computer room).

The premises must be completely finished, including, if necessary, the air

conditioning system in service.

Storage Time

Less than 4 weeks.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 15
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

4.1. OVERALL ENVIRONMENT

The CENTRALOG uses hardware coming from different constructors who guarantee
their operation in certain environmental conditions (power supply characteristics,
temperature and hygrometry variations, etc.).
The CENTRALOG environmental conditions are indicated in the table below.

Materials Expendables and

(other than exĆ information
pendables and inĆ support
formation supĆ mediums
ports)
Temperature Utilization +10 ,+35 °C +10 ,+35 °C

Storage -10 ,+60 °C +5 ,+40 °C

Relative humidity Utilization 25 , 80 % 20 , 65 %
(without
condensation) Storage 10 , 85 % 20 , 75 %
Temperature Utilization < 10°C /h < 10°C /h
variation
Storage < 15°C /h < 15°C /h

Relative humidity Utilization < 30 % /h < 30 % /h

variation
Storage < 30 % /h < 30 % /h

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 16
4.2. RELIABILITY

In so far as possible, it is recommended to keep the temperature in the premises at values

insuring an optimum ageing of the electronic modules.
For information purposes, the reliability index of the electronic modules evolves as a
function of the temperature following the table below :

Ambient temperature 10°C 15°C 25°C 35°C 40°C

Reliability index 1.22 1.17 1 0.87 0.80

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 17
5. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS

5.1. PREMISES

The CENTRALOG is a system with distributed architecture designed to be installed in

different rooms of an electric power plant.
The different equipment are designed to operate in the environmental conditions which
are to be respected at their installation.

The premises must be completely finished before the equipment are placed in
position, including, if need be, the air conditioning system.

5.1.1. Distribution of the Materials in the Premises

The equipment are installed as follows :

in the control room for the operator stations and the peripheral type equipment
(screens, printer, etc.) .

in the computer rooms the CIS cabinets.

5.1.2. Disposition of the Premises

The premises must be laid out taking into account the following parameters :

accessibility

space requirements

quality of the architecture.

5.1.2.1. Accessibility

The means of access (doors, corridors, freight elevators, etc.) must be sized to allow
passage of the largest cabinets.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 18
 Accessibility to the materials must take into account the constraints linked to apparatus
for lighting, electric power supplies, fluid circuits and air conditioning.
It is advisable to follow the installation instructions established for the material. Cabinet
dimensions are the following :

width = 800 mm

depth= 900 mm

height = 2300 mm

weight = 400 kg

5.1.2.2. Space Requirement

The retained surfaces must be determined as a function of :

the ground space requirement of the equipment with doors open,

the possible extensions,

the open space needed for maintenance operations in front of and behind the
equipment.

5.1.2.3. Ground Surface

The ground surface must be able to support all the weight of the installed materials and
accept lumped loads of 500 kg at 60 cm distances, as well as excess loads of 800 kg per
m2 .

The floor covering must be :

wear resistant,

easily cleaned,

anti–static,

insulating.

It is advised to install a technical flooring in the control room. Floor coverings which
include carpeting are prohibited.

5.1.2.4. Ceiling

The free height under the ceiling must be a minimum of 2.60 m. In the control room, it must
be composed of a sound–muffling material.

5.1.2.5. Premises Cleanness

The installation of the material must take place in clean premises whose access and
openings (doors, windows, etc.) are correctly protected from exterior pollution.
If the above described conditions are not respected, particular precautions must be taken

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 19
 during the installation phase (for example : positioning of temporary protective covering
bags).
Use of a filtering system is recommended if the installation is planned for in a dusty or
corrosive area.

5.1.2.6. Furniture

Furniture such as tables and mobile supports receiving the materials in the control room
(screens, printers, etc.) are to be put in position before any installation, even temporary,
so as to better protect these materials from shocks and dust due to handling and
personnel circulation.

5.1.2.7. Lighting

Lighting must take into account the different tasks to be accomplished in the control room :

Use of video screens (information display and controls)

Reading of paper documents.

It is also a function of the window surfaces and natural lighting. Direct exposition of the
screens to daylight is prohibited. If this disposition is impossible, an anti–reflection system
is necessary (not included in the CENTRALOG system).
For user comfort, light intensity must be approximately 300 lux at a level of 0.80 m from the
ground.

Backup lighting in the case of electric network loss of the normal lighting system must
insure minimum vital functions.

5.1.2.8. Fire Safety

An effective fire detection and fire fighting system are installed in the sensitive rooms
(control room, relay room, machine room, etc.).
The arrangement of these rooms will take into account the use of non–inflammable
materials or materials that at least do not propagate flames. Combustible materials must
not give off toxic gases when burning.
Partitioning can possibly be installed to establish fire check barriers.
”Wall and floor openings” for cable passage will be obstructed with fire resistant materials.

5.1.2.9. Hardware Safety

The hardware are tested in the factory to verify their conformity to safety standards :

cabling and internal connections

power supplies

dielectric strength .

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 20
5.1.2.10. Diverse

It is desirable that the telephone network be accessible from the control room where the
CENTRALOG maintenance and configuration station is found (remote maintenance).

5.2. POWER SUPPLIES

5.2.1. Voltage and Frequency

The CENTRALOG 30 requires a single phase 220/240 V AC – 50 Hz power source.

Voltage Nominal 110 VAC , 220 VAC

Range 100 - 120 VAC , 200 - 240 VAC
Frequency Range 49.5 - 51 Hz , 59 -60.5 Hz

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 21
6. HARDWARE INSTALLATION
AND CONNECTIONS

6.1. INSTALLATION

6.1.1. Installation recommendations

Hardware is installed in such a manner as to afford ease of access to elements during the
connection, start–up and maintenance phases.

Hardware is only installed if the environmental conditions are fully met.

Hardware elements must never be switched on during the installation phase.

Power sources must however be available so that the hardware can be put into service
immediately after installation.

Power cords must not be connected. Even so ensure that all switches are set to”off” .

Premises must be finished, clean, and dust–proof. No construction work of any kind may
be carried out after installation of the hardware.

Operations such as drilling through concrete or tiling, milling, arc–welding, painting etc.
produce dust, splashing or electrical disturbances which may result in the destruction or
the reduced reliability of electronic equipment.

6.1.2. Installing Furniture (option)

As a general rule, furniture is delivered unassembled.

Assembly is performed in conformity with the instructions of the documentation included

with the hardware.

All required measures such as machining, assembly surface and protection from shocks
or scratching, are to be taken before proceeding with the mounting operation.

Ensure that you have the necessary tools, adequate assembly space, and that the units
are protected against bumps or scratching before starting the assembly operation.

Equally, check that the premises will remain accessible and that any apparatus necessary
for handling the assembled units can be properly manipulated.

Operatives should be protected against injury caused by metal filings or chips.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 22
 Furniture units should be installed in their final locations as defined in the installation
drawing. Ensure that there is no risk that the units may fall (holes, uneven flooring, etc.).
Check that all work surfaces are perfectly horizontal. This is an absolute requirement for
the correct operation of magnetic drive units.

As a further precaution, vacuum clean the electronic elements before assembly.

Work surfaces must also be quite clean. Remove any traces that may have been left by
the different operations.

6.1.3. Installing the CIS (Centralog 30 or 50)

6.1.3.1. Installation on tabletop

CIS stations composed of Sun workstations (without screens) can be installed on

desktops or in consoles. In these cases, the conditions of installation are identical to those
for the operator stations (see below) .

6.1.3.2. Installation in cabinet

Before installing the cabinets in the premises, it is necessary to;

– check that the guide rails are straight before laying the final floor surface
(installation according to Civil Engineering drawings and optical surface flatness test0),

– brush and clean the guide rails as necessary (the tracks may also be coated with
lubricant in order to facilitate shifting and docking of the hardware elements).

Tracks are fastened to the floor by means of assembly screws and braces which are
designed to leave some play on installation. Four anchorage points are mandatory.
Equipment may be fastened either to the track or to the floor as follows:

to the track, with hook bolts in 4.6 quality steel,

to the floor, using SPIT FIX plugs or equivalent,

for elements fitted with jackscrews, levels are adjusted in relation to the evenness
of the floor. Correct positioning will facilitate coupling between cabinets.

Fixing to floor

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 23
 2 "MALT' ( M12 )

150 150
180

Tubes, dia. 88 mm
120

Cable entries

850 ( P-50 )
900

Fixing to floor
600 ( L-200 )
4 holes, dia. 15mm
AV

Fig. 5 : Fixing the cabinet to the floor

When installation is complete remove all protective coverings which may have been used
as packing or required for certain handling operations, and remove all anchoring brackets
and rings.

The top cover screws must be re–tightened after removal of the angle brackets.

Once the installation is finished, the hardware and the environment must be cleaned.

Cabinets are coupled side–to–side. All the anchoring points provided for this purpose
must be used.

Before docking two cabinets, do not forget to remove their movable side panels.

The two cabinets are then positioned side–by–side.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 24
 Check that both cabinets are stable, and that the four attachment holes on each of the
cabinets are aligned. If necessary, adjust the jackscrews.

All the 4.6 quality steel screws are inserted into the holes from the same side.

Screws are cross–tightened by means of a torque wrench. For example: the screw at the
top of the left–hand vertical member is tightened first, followed by the screw at the bottom
of the right hand vertical member. This technique distributes the forces.

The torque value is determined in accordance with the materials in question.

The torque wrench must be utilized at over 20% of its maximum capacity.

During all of these operations take care not to damage the cabling fixed to the side plates.

Damaged cabling (wires nipped or crushed), the presence of iron filings or of small pieces
of metal may cause the hardware to malfunction or even to be destroyed.

Vacuum cleaning is strongly recommended.

6.1.4. Installing the CVS Operator Stations

CVS operator stations are normally installed in the control room.

CVS operator stations comprise several different types of equipment:

workstation

auxiliary peripherals (disk drives, CD–ROM drive, DAT drive, magneto–optical

units etc.)

monitors

The monitors are usually placed on consoles.

The installation manager must have a detailed plan of the console in order to carry out the
installation.

Check that the provision of cableways is adequate (rear panel connections).

It is important to ensure an adequate air space around the equipment. Leave a space of
approximately ten centimeters around each unit.

Check that none of the elements is blowing warm air into the ventilation slots of the system
unit.

Check that workstations are installed on level horizontal positions in order to avoid
damage or reduced reliability in elements such as floppy drives, streamers, hard disks
etc.

Prepare the assembly operation carefully to avoid any risk of damaging the equipment.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 25
6.1.5. Installation of Peripherals

Peripherals are positioned on the furniture units designed to support them or are installed
in purpose–built units.

Check that the unit (or support) is:

correctly assembled,

steady (rigidity, movement),

accessible for consultation and maintenance.

Elements should be positioned with regard to the ergonomic welfare and safety of the
user.

Location of the elements should also take account of their operational ventilation
requirements. At least 8cm should be allowed between the rear of the peripheral and any
surface.

When elements are positioned one above the other, air must be allowed to circulate
between them.

In certain cases, the element or its support will need to be fitted with anti–slip pads.

6.2. CONNECTIONS

CENTRALOG system cables transport different voltage levels. The different connections
can be classified as follows:

power supply,

data links,

network,

logic input/outputs.

These connections must be made with care and certain precautions must be respected

6.2.1. General principle of cableways

Cables pass via cableways which are strictly reserved for their respective class.

Right–angle crossover points for cables in different categories are tolerated. The
distance between parallel cableways for cables of different categories must be greater
than 0.5 meters.

Cables are protected to avoid contact with sharp points or with moving parts which may
cut them. Holes drilled for cableways in metal plates should be filed smooth or fitted with
lead–in ducts.

Connectors and contacts wired to factory–made cables are fitted with protective devices
when the cable is laid.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 26
 It is advisable to comply with the stretch and radius limitations admissible for each cable.

Cables connected to the upper part of a hardware element should be connected first.

Cables are inserted via the aperture in the backplate of the element.

They are then routed via the internal side wallplates between the different elements
bearing the terminals to which the cables are to be connected.

Lead the cables in one after the other, using fasteners (Rilsan, or other) to hold them in
place.

Each cable should be cut to allow around 100mm for connection to terminals.

6.2.2. General principles of connection

The cable head is finished with an insulating sleeve.

The shield is connected to the nearest ground block by means of a crimped eyelet
terminal.

Choose suitable materials, wire, terminals and crimping tools.

Quality rules require that the crimping tables (as defined by the manufacturers of the
terminal and the crimping tool) must be complied with.

The various connectors will be cabled in accordance with normal practice.

The blocking screws mounted on the connectors must be tightened.

Cables generally are identified by a label affixed around the insulator.

It must be possible to read such labels without pulling on the connection.

The grounding continuity of all the connections, shields and grounding braid is measured.

The principle of these measurements is described in this document.

6.2.3. Connection of Power Supply cables

Power voltages are specific to the contract.

When the installation uses several different voltage levels special care should be taken to
avoid any incompatibility between the power source and the hardware.

Conductor sections must be dimensioned for the voltages consumed when the hardware
is operating at maximum load.

Any power cord shielding is connected to the equipment ground.

Power cords are measured for insulation.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 27
6.2.4. Connection of Data Link cables

The data links concern all the information transferred in blocks via the the different
hardware elements in the system (CENTRALOG racks and peripherals, or logic
controllers, control loop equipment etc.).

The cable used corresponds to category ”C1” as per test N N.F.C. 32070.

Data link cables are shielded up to the connection point. At either end, the shield is
connected to the nearest mechanical ground.

However, if the length of the cable is greater than100 meters, or if the link passes between
two separate buildings the shield is only connected on the CENTRALOG side.

6.2.5. Connection of CONTRONET Network cables

The medium of the Contronet network may be10baseT type (twisted pair), 10base2 type
(thin cable) or10base5 type (normal yellow cable) depending on the project architecture.

The CONTRONET network installation procedure described in this manual defines

recommendations, principles of installation, and the connection of vampire plugs
(Ethernet 10base5 medium). The CONTRONET network is connected to the
CENTRALOG stations as follows:

by an AUI type cable and a microhub adapter (10Base5 to 10BaseT)

by microhub (10Base2 to 10BaseT)

directly by TP cable and RJ45 connections (10BaseT)

The AUI cable is connected to the transceiver by the commissioning engineer.

6.2.6. Connection of logic Input/Output cables

Logic input/outputs such as alarms, horns, and auxiliaries constituting information which
is said to be ”all or nothing” data, are generally powered by 48V CC.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 28
6.2.7. Connecting the Cabinets

Cables are inserted via the aperture in the backplate of the element.

Cables connected to the upper part of a hardware element should be connected first.

They are then routed via the internal side plates between the different elements fitted with
terminals to which the cables are to be connected.

Cables are connected according to the documents: ” System Architecture Detailed

Plan” and ”General wiring diagram”.

Electrical power cords are connected to the 001BN terminal box at the bottom of each
cabinet.

Data link cables are connected to terminals located on the inner panels of the cabinet.

Cabinets are grounded to the grounding bar. The electronic ground is not utilized.

NB. The illustration of the inside of a cabinet shown below is an example only. Actual
equipment differs depending on the CENTRALOG system.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 29
 CIS stations

001BN terminal block

Connection terminal boards

Wallplates for fixing external cables

Fig. 6 : Interior rear view of a cabinet

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 30
6.2.8. Grounding

Hardware and cableways are connected to the main grounding network of the installation
by the shortest link possible.

Each hardware element must be grounded by a protective conductor comprising neither

switches not fuses.

Disconnection of one ground conductor must not interrupt the continuity of the ground vis
a vis other elements.

The element and the ground network are linked by the conductive mechanical structure.
The ends are identified by means of a ”green/yellow” sticker.

NB. For maximum efficiency, the hardware is connected to the ground link by braid whose
length must not be more than 10 times its width.

For metal housings (cabinets, boxes, consoles etc.), where the note above cannot be
applied, the minimum section for a round conductor is 35 mm2.

The conducting parts in contact with the ground connections must not be subject to
corrosion caused by electrochemical reaction in any environmental conditions.

The contact surface must be de–scaled if necessary by means of an abrasive tool (eg.
metal brush) in order to eliminate any non–conductive surface oxide or other films.

The cleaned surface may be covered with a neutral lubricant in damp or corrosive
atmospheres. Excess lubricant expelled after tightening will form a protective dust–proof
seal.

Sockets used for connection are made of copper covered with a protective conductive
coating.

Screw and bolt connections are always effected with ring terminals or thimble sockets.

Screws used for connections are composed of metallic elements.

Connections are tightened by means of a torque wrench. The torque to be exerted is

dependent on the diameter of the screw and the nature of the parts to be tightened.

The torque wrench is utilized at over 20 % of its maximum capacity.

For prescribed pressures, the screw must engage at least two complete threads in the nut
or the metal insert.

The electrical resistance of the connection between the ground terminal and the main
circuit must be less than 1 ohm.

This value must be checked for all the connections defined in this chapter.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 31
6.2.8.1. Measurement of Grounding Continuity

Grounding continuity is measured with a continuous current generator and a serially

adjustable resistance.

The intensity of the current is 2 A.

The test is satisfactory if the value calculated for the resistance is inferior or equal to 1
ohm, that is, if the application voltage between the ground circuit and the grounding point
of the element is inferior to 2 Volts.

i = 2A

Grounding
V G
conductor

Main ground circuit

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 32
6.2.8.2. Measurement of Insulation Resistance

The insulation resistance of the power cords is measured at a continuous voltage of 500 V
applied for a one minute period between each conductor and the main ground circuit.

The value measured on the megohmmeter must be greater than 100 Mohms.

N1

PH2

Main ground circuit

Next apply the test between the two conductors on the cable. The value measured must
be greater than 100 Mohms.

N
PH G

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 33
7. INSTALLATION OF THE CONTRONET
NETWORK

7.1. PURPOSE

The aim of this chapter is to define the rules for the installation and verification of a
CONTRONET network in order to obtain the required quality for correct operations in
accordance with IEEE 802.3 recommendations.

7.2. AREA OF APPLICATION

This chapter describes the installation and verification of the physical CONTRONET
network.

It concerns the installation of the transmission medium:

— 10BaseT (10BT) twisted pair
— standard 10Base5 (10B5) coaxial or thin 10Base2 (10B2) coaxial,
and the associated components:
— terminator (T),
— segment extension (P),
— subscriber link cable (AUI),
— transceiver,
— repeater,
— hubs

7.3. PRESENTATION OF CONTRONET NETWORK COMPONENTS

7.3.1. 10BaseT Twisted Pair Cabling

Twisted pair cabling uses RJ45 connectors and facilitates the construction of star shaped
network configurations by incorporating repeaters (hubs). Hubs also offer the possibility

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 34
 of mixing different types of network by switching from10baseT to 10base5 or 10base2.
This type of medium can therefore be used in part to adapt 10Base2 or 10Base5 networks
to connections on stations fitted with Ethernet RJ45 ports.

The following configurations may be used:

wholly 10BaseT CONTRONET with multiport hubs, in cascade formation if

necessary

10Base2 or10Base5 CONTRONET: a single RJ45/AUI or BNC port microhub

provides adaptation to the network.

The characteristics of these cables are as follows:

SFTP 4 pair 0,14 mm2 cable, straight cabling, RJ45 connections

Flame retardant PVC isolating sheath

Impedance 100 Ohms

Standard 3m and 10m lengths

7.3.2. Coaxial cable

The coaxial cable can be used to build many different geometric configurations, and is
particularly adapted to bus type configurations.

The basic coaxial cable has a double shield made of braided copper.

7.3.2.1. 10 Base 2 (10B2)

The characteristic impedance of the cable is 50 ohms; diameter is 4.65 mm + 0.13.

Each end of the cable is terminated by a 50 ohm adaptation load.

This Ethernet network may be divided into a maximum of 5 segments.

Transceivers providing connections to stations may be placed on a maximum of only 3 of

the 5 segments.

The maximum length of each segment is 185 meters. However the use of a fiber optic
medium enables the segment to be extended to up to 7 kilometers in certain cases.
Repeaters are used to connect two segments together.

Installation of these repeaters is not described in this manual.

The different sections of cable are delivered with Centralog 30 hardware, thus allowing
the various stations to be connected to form the Ethernet network. These sections of
cable are ready fitted with coaxial connectors at each end.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 35
 OPERATOR STATIONS
CVS CVS

ÂÂ
Printer

ÂÂ
CIS ETHERNET
Section 1
Section 3
Section 2

Fig. 7 : Example of Centralog 30 Ethernet network

In principle, these cables are laid in a single building and can pass through
non–aggressive electrical environments.

The stations are not always fitted with internal transceivers. Micro–hubs providing
10Base2 to 10BaseT network adapters are used to connect them together. Various
peripherals such as printers are connected directly using BNC T–connectors. Network
terminators may be external on BNC connectors or internal to the microhubs, activated by
switches.

7.3.2.2. 10 Base 5 (10B5)

The characteristic impedance of the cable is 50 ohms; diameter is 10.30 mm + 0.17.

Each end of the cable is terminated by a 50 ohm adaptation load.

Each segment of cable may be up to 500 m in length.

The cable is marked with rings at 2.5 m intervals. These ringmarks represent transceiver
connection points and indicate the minimum distance required between two transceivers
to avoid generating reflections.

Transceiver is connected to the cable without cutting, with a vampire plug.

The cable is marked metrically so that the exact position of each transceiver can be
measured.

Each segment can be constituted of sections. It is preferable that these sections should
come from the same reel and that they should correspond to standard lengths: 23.4 m;
70.2 m; 117.0 m.

Sections are joined together by type N connectors.

The cable must be laid in a single building and in non–aggressive electrical environments.

7.3.3. AUI (Attachment Unit Interface) Link Cable

The AUI link cable is used for the10 base 5 Ethernet network. Where a 10 base 2 network
is used, the transceiver is generally connected directly to the subscriber’s Ethernet port.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 36
 The AUI link cable is used to link the transceiver and a station or repeater.

The AUI link cable is a low loss transmitter/receiver cable (attenuation 3db/50m) fitted
with an SUBD 15 point male/female slide–fastening connector; three pairs for data
transmission and another for power supply.

Each pair is individually shielded, with an additional shield braid, separated electrically
from the other shielded pairs.

Transmission is in differential mode (RS485) with a common electronic ground. Maximum

common mode voltage must not exceed 5.5 V.

Signals transmitted:

data transmission,

data reception,

collision detection,

abnormal connection time,

reset,

power.

7.3.4. Transceiver

There are two types of transceiver:

Transceivers designed for the 10 base 5 network. These are connected to the
network by means of a vampire plug. An AUI link cable must be utilized.

Transceivers designed for the 10 base 2 network. These are fitted with a BNC
plug and are connected to the network by means of a BNC T–connector.
Utilization of an AUI link cable is optional.

The transceiver handles interfacing and de–coupling between a station and its access to
the network.

The transceiver fulfills a certain number of functions :

Primary functions:

data transmission,

data reception,

collision detection,

Secondary functions:

jabber protection,

SQE test,

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 37

insulation.

Data is transmitted to the cable in the form of Manchester code. This technique enables a
clock to be affixed to the data signal.

When a collision is present on the transmission medium, the “Collision Detection” function
transmits the information to the station via the AUI link cable.

The SQE generates a Collision Detection circuit test on the station. This test is performed
after each data packet. The AUI link is thus tested at the same time.

In the Centralog context, the SQE function is always out of service, in ”OFF” position or
strap 4–5 present, according to the type of transceiver.

10Base5 connector
(vampire plug)

SQE strap – present=function inactive

– absent=function active

Fig. 8 : SQE test of a 1114 transceiver

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 38
 15 pin AUI connec-
tor

10Base2 TRANSCEIVER
A M P NETCONNECT
ON
SQE

SQE test validation

switch JAB Frame too long
OFF

COL Collision detected

OFF = function inactive RX Recep-
ON = function active TX tion
Transmission

PWR Transceiver
power supply

10Base2 connector
(BNC)

Fig. 9 : TRANS–10B2 transceiver SQE Test

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 39
 15 pin AUI connec-
tor

IEEE 802.3

10 BASE 2 (MAU)
MICROTRANSCEIVER
CentreCOM MX10S
Allied Telesis
ON
SQE

SQE test validation

switch
OFF

OFF = function inactive

ON = function active

10Base2 connector
(BNC)

Fig. 10 : AT–MX10S transceiver SQE test

The JABBER function protects the network against a permanently transmitting defective
station.

The transceiver is powered at12 VDC by the station via the AUI link cable.

The insulation between the segment and the AUI link is 1500 VAC.

7.3.4.1. Connection to the Coaxial Cable

The transceiver is connected to the 10 Base 5 (10B5) cable by means of a tap kit. This
technique enables a connection without cable cutoff and possibly without stopping the
network.

NB : Disassembly of the tap kit for re–utilization is strictly prohibited. Only the transceiver
may where necessary by disassembled and re–used.

The transceiver is connected to the 10 Base 2 (10B2) cable by means of a BNC

T–connector.

7.3.5. Repeater (Option)

the repeater is used to extend one segment to another,

it regenerates the amplitude and frequency of data signals,

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 40

a partition function enables a malfunctioning segment to be isolated:

a segment is isolated subsequent to 32 successive collisions or on detection of a

collision with a duration of between 0.1 ms and 3 ms.

the segment is re–connected automatically after a period of 52 microseconds

without collision.

most repeaters are equipped with the following LEDs on the front face:

Power : presence of voltage – continuous current available,

Packet : flashes when a data packet passes through the repeater,

Part N1 or N2 : lights when the partition function is activated on link 1 or 2.

up to 4 repeaters can be used between 2 stations (limit imposed by data

propagation time),

the network can be extended up to 3km by using repeater chains.

Insulation vis a vis the coaxial cable is 1500 VAC 50HZ.

Connection to the Network

The repeater is connected to the network by two transceivers, one on each
section.

7.4. INSTALLING A 10BASE5 CONTRONET NETWORK

To ensure that the installation will guarantee correct operation of the local network, as
regards both immunity to industrial interference and economy of maintenance, it is vital to
comply with the rules and restrictions of the installation.

The installation of a network has three phases:

Study of network routing on site in accordance with subscribers to be connected,

Installation of transmission medium together with associated components,

Validity tests before going into service.

7.4.1. Network Routing

Before installation, a detailed plan of the cable is established.

This plan is produced in accordance with:

the constraints imposed by the architecture of the building,

the requirement for simplicity of installation,

the quantity and location of hardware elements,

cable laying and safety requirements,

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 41
7.4.2. Installing the Network

The rules governing the laying of the cable described below constitute recommendations
which must be followed by the installation manager.

Any non–compliance with these rules must be noted and reported to CEGELEC as a
anomaly.

7.4.2.1. Preliminary Check before Laying Cable

Before installing the network, ensure that:

you have the floor plan of the installation,

the premises are properly prepared: repeaters and other network components
can only be positioned in clean premises or areas,

the routing of the cableways conforms to the plan :

— cableways should be indicated in such a way as to preclude the utilization of
the space reserved for any other purpose (eg. for other cables),
— cableways should be compartmentalized so as to increase the level of
immunity to electromagnetic interference,
— access to the cable must be possible approximately every 2,5 m: allow a
clear area (approximately 30 x 30 cm) around each access point in order to
be able to work on the cable (positioning or maintenance of transceivers),
— sources of electromagnetic interference must be kept at a distance, allow for:

approximately 3 m for:
– lighting tubes,
– transmitters/receivers (pagers, walkie–talkies),

allow approximately 10 m:
– from HV and LV transformer units,
– generator units,
– powerful electric motors (elevator machinery, electric pumps,
mechanical workshops etc.),
— any changes of cable direction requires a curve radius of at least 25 cm,
— there must be no burrs or sharp edges which might cause injury to personnel
or damage to the cables.

7.4.3. Laying the CONTRONET Cable

7.4.3.1. Rules and Recommendations

ensure that the PVC sheath of the CONTRONET cable is not damaged or cut and
that the metal shield is not exposed,

the cable must not be squeezed, squashed, bent or stretched,

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 42

the cable must be laid flat within the cable way in order to leave extra width to
facilitate the connection of components,

the cable must be fixed at approximately 25 cm on each side of each connection

(connectors, transceivers), generally at 3 to 4 m intervals and at each change of
direction or level in order to avoid strain on either connectors and cable,

changes of cable direction are defined around a curve with a radius of at least 10
cm (10 base 2 network) or 25 cm (10 base 5 network),

connectors, terminators, transceivers, link cables must all be easily locatable;

identifiers should be positioned during the installation.

as far as possible, the network should be at least 3 meters from the floor.
Connections and transceivers must be accessible from a ladder.

allow sufficient length of cable at the terminator to be able to bring the cable down
to floor level during tests or maintenance operations (echometry). Excess cable
must be coiled (minimum radius 25 cm).

7.4.3.2. Procedure for Laying CONTRONET Cable

1 – Position the reel. Use a paying–out device appropriate to the dimensions of the
reel,

2 – Check to see that the cable has not been damaged during transport,

3 – Play out the cable:

Place staff along the route so that the cable is carried and not pulled along the
floor in order to minimize mechanical stress and the risk of damaging the cable. An
agent is placed at each point where the cable changes direction or level.

4 – Position the cable:

Position the cable in the cableway taking care to comply with the rules and
recommendations. The cable should be pre–fastened at changes of direction
and level.

5 – Proceed to connect the different components.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 43
7.4.4. Installing Connectors on the 10 Base 5 Cable

7.4.4.1. Connecting N type plugs

For reasons of reliability, the connectors used are coaxial connectors crimped to the cable
and fastened by nuts.

The cable sections must be equipped with male connectors at each end.

Two sections are connected by means of a female/female extender.

The coaxial cable must be connected at each end to 50 ohm coaxial adaptor loads = 2%
1W. One of the two charges is fitted with a device enabling it to be connected to the ground
in accordance with the installation plan.

Connectors, terminators, and ground braid must be insulated by means of heat shrunk
sleeves in order to afford only one ground connection point.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 44
7.4.4.1.1. Presentation of Connectors
End of segment: male plug to be crimped.

CONTRONET cable plug 12.5

9.5

Ø 11 mm

17.5

36 mm Stripping of cable

Fig. 11 : Male crimping plug

Connection of 2 segments: Female/female extension

CONTRONET cable extension piece

Ø 17 mm

È
ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈ
È ÈÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈÈ
44.7 mm

Fig. 12 : Female/female extension

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 45
 50 ohm coaxial load terminator
Ø 15.7 mm

ÈÈÈÈ
È
11/ 12 hex

ÈÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈÈ
È
38.5 mm

Fig. 13 : Coaxial load terminator

50 ohm coaxial load terminator

10 mm
11/ 12 hex Ø 15.7 mm

ÈÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈÈ
È
È
ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈ
È ÈÈÈÈ
È
ÈÈÈÈ
È
46.5 mm

Fig. 14 : Coaxial load terminator with grounding plug

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 46
7.4.4.1.2. Assembling connectors
1 – Connect cable ends following the procedure shown below:

a) Crimped connector

Body
Tube
Central contact

17.5
Tube 9.5 5

 Slip the tube onto the cable

Strip the cable

Crimping zone

 Crimp the central contact

Spread the braid

Crimping zone

 Pass the body under

the braid
Crimp the tube

Fig. 15 : Procedure for assembling a crimp connector

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 47
 b) Screw connector

Screw connectors for CONTRONET cable

Rear
Lip seal Washer Rear insulator (3.2 mm) Body
plug
Contact

ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
Washer Front insulator (2.1 mm)
Braid grip
8.5

 Strip the cable

1.5 5

ÈÈ  Place the rear plug, washer

ÈÈ seal and braid grip.

ÈÈ
ÈÈ
Fold back and cut the braid
Strip the dielectric
Washer

ÈÈ
Solder
 Assemble the washer and
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
the rear insulator

ÈÈ
Solder the contact

 Assemble the front insulator to

Rear insulator the contact
Assemble the unit into the body
Recommended grip for rear
plug 800 N cm

ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
Fig. 16 : Procedure for assembling a screw connector

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 48
 2 – Utilize a straight female/female connector in cases where two segments are to be
connected.

3 – Connect a 0–1GHZ female coaxial load to one end of the CONTRONET, and a
female coaxial load with grounding terminal to the other.

4 – Insulate the connectors with a heat shrunk sleeve.

7.4.4.2. Presentation of the Transceiver Tap Kit

Description of the tap kit (vampire connector):

Tap body
Cable chan-
Button head Braid terminator nel
socket screw
tightened with
Allen wrench

Opening for
transceiver
Pressure block Slot for board bolt
Clamp assembly Probe

Probe assembly Threaded

plug tight-
ened with
Fig. 17 : Tap kit socket
wrench

Composition:
— clamp assembly,
— tap body,
— two braid terminators,
— probe unit,
The clamp assembly comprises:
— a frame which slides onto the tap body,
— a pressure block to position the cable,
— a socket screw with button head (tightened with an Allen wrench).

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 49
 The tap body comprises a channel to secure the cable and a slot for the insertion of the
transceiver printed circuit board.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 50
 The two braid terminators are designed to pierce the sheath of the cable and ensure
effective contact between the sheath and the transceiver ground.

The needle unit is fitted with a needle to establish a connection between the central
conductor of the cable and a threaded plug which is screwed inside the plug–block.

7.4.4.2.1. Rule for Connecting the tap kit

The plug must be connected at one of the ring markings of the coaxial cable.

7.4.4.2.2. Assembling Tap Kits

Allen wrench

Ring
marking
2.5 meters

Cable secured in channel

Coring tool with safety stop

Fig. 18 : Tap kit assembly

NB: a tap kit that has been disassembled must never be re–used.

1– Using the installation plan, locate the transceiver connection zone,

2– Remove the cover of the cableway,

3– Determine the position of the connector on the cable (eg. ring marking),

4– Place the braid terminator in the tap body,

5– Position the cable in the retaining channel in the tap body,

6– Slide the clamp assembly onto the tap body,

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 51
 7– Screw the socket screw into the frame with the Allen wrench until the
pressure block presses on the guides and grips the cable.

8– Using the coring tool, pierce the cable as far as the central conductor. NB: the
piercing tool is fitted with a safety stop enabling the depth of the holes to be
defined.

9– Check the hole to be sure that there are no particles from the shield or other
substances in it. Then using a socket wrench, screw the probe assembly fully
into the tap body.

Fig. 19 : Assembly of the transceiver board

10– Align the needle holder unit and the braid terminals with the contacts on the
board. Then position the plug on the transmitter.

11– Fix the plug–holder block to the transmitter with the screws and nuts.

12– Fix the coaxial to the cable way on either side of the transceiver.

13– Test the connection,

14– Affix an ID label to the transceiver housing.

15– Replace the cableway cover taking care to leave a clear area of approximately
30x30 cm for access.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 52
7.4.5. 10 base 5 network Grounding Rules

The shield of a segment of cable is connected to a single grounding point by ground braid
with a section at least 4 mm2 connected to a terminator.

7.4.5.1. Insulation of Connectors

– Junction between two segments :

N plug + straight connection + N plug

Insulation heat shrunk sleeve.

Heat shrunk sleeve, length = 160 mm to 180 mm

110 mm

Heat shrunk sleeve

N plug Connector N plug

Fig. 20 : Insulation of connectors

– Terminator without ground connection:

The end which is not connected to the ground is insulated by a heat shrunk sleeve.

Heat shrunk sleeve, length = 89 mm

89 mm

Heat shrunk sleeve

N plug Load 50 Ohms

Fig. 21 : Insulation of terminators

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 53
 – Terminator with ground connection

89 mm

Heat shrunk sleeve

N plug 50ohm load

ground
braid

Fig. 22 : Insulation of terminators (cont’d)

The end of the CONTRONET cable (N plug + 50 ohm load with ground connection to the
earth) is insulated by means of a heat shrunk sleeve (ground braid also is insulated over
entire length).

7.5. INSTALLING CONTRONET 10BASE2 OR 10BASET NETWORKS

7.5.1. Laying 10Base2 Cables

Check that the PVC cable sheath is not damaged or cut and that the metal shield
is not visible ;

the cable must not be squeezed, crushed, bent or stretched,

the cable must be laid within cableways or gutters.

the cable must be fixed approximately 25 cm on both sides of each connection

(extensions, transceivers); as a general ruleteh cable is fixed at one meter
intervals and on each change of direction or level in order to avoid traction on the
connectors or the cable,

changes in the direction of the cable are implemented in the form of an arc with a
radius of at least 10 cm ,

connections, terminators, transceivers, drops must be easy to locate; identity

labels should be affixed during installation,

as far as possible, the network must be installed at least 3 meters from ground
level. Connections and transceivers must be accessible from a ladder,

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 54
7.5.2. Laying 10BaseT Cables

Cables should be laid in cableways or gutters even in the case of underfloor

installation.

Ensure that the connectors and locking tabs are not damaged during installation
of the cables.

Excess lengths of cable are coiled and attached in the vicinity of hardware
elements, leaving sufficient space for maintenance access.

7.6. INSTALLING HUBS OR REPEATERS

Hubs or repeaters are installed as follows:

in cabinets (CIS stations). In this case the connections are pre–cabled.

on a tabletop, or in a console, in the case of workstations

In this latter configuration check the path of the network cables and ensure that minimum
radius requirement is complied with. The cables must be fixed and protected where they
pass through perforations in metal sheeting or cavities etc.

Check the position of switches to configure:

activation of the network terminators

activation of the AUI or BNC ports where necessary

type of TP connection (straight or crossed)

For further information regarding switches, please refer to the hardware configuration
documentation.

Hubs (AT–MR12x, AT–MR820 etc.) do not comprise an on/off switch: they are activated
instantaneously.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 55
7.7. PRE–STARTUP TESTS

7.7.1. Purpose

To define the checks, tests and preliminary trials prior to initial start–up.

The following tests are carried out by the installation team:

visual examination of the installation,

examination of construction characteristics,

a functional check of the network.

7.7.2. Visual Examination of the installation

ensure that the CONTRONET installation conforms to the installation plan,

check that the rules and recommendations have been complied with,

check that the ground connection conforms to the procedure,

check that the cable has been laid in accordance with the procedure,

check that the cable and the associated components are correctly identified,

for the 10 base 5 network, check the N plug connections, the presence of
inter–segment connectors and 50 ohm terminators .

7.7.3. 10 base 5 network insulation and Continuity

Object: these tests concern the segment of cable located before the transceivers.

Precaution: access to both ends of the cable segment is necessary to test insulation and
continuity. The end of the cable under test must bear a high tension test indicator (staff
safety) during the tests.

7.7.4. 10 base 5 network Verification Test

Object:

This test is used to check the physical layer of the network, and to test the aptitude of each
of the elements on the network to transmit and receive data of the required quality.

The test comprises three steps:

verification of components before connection to the network,

verification of the topology of the network,

verification of the network with the associated components.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 56
7.7.4.1. Elementary tests

During network installation, some verifications must be done, before power–up.

After each vampire plug mounting, to check the good connection measuring the
resistance between the core and the shield by means of an Ohmmeter. With the two 50
Ohms terminators mounted, the value must be around 25 Ohms

Other tests can be carried out by means of an Ethernet testing tool, if it is available on site.

For example, the following tests may be run:

Transceiver function test

Off network: before installation,

On network: during maintenance.

Run a cable test

Physical medium tests (10Base5, 10Base2, 10BaseT)

— Background noise
— Characteristic impedance
— Network termination
— Segment length and anomalies

Communication tests
— Traffic test
— Jabber detection
These tests are performed by means of a network tester which measures the physical
quality of the medium as well as testing the quality of communications (BLACK BOX
SCAN LAN 180 tester, or equivalent by Hewlett Packard or Fluke etc.).

These testers offer a choice of tests which can be parametered in accordance with the
type of cable.
For further information concerning operating modes and instructions for use, please refer
to the device manufacturers’ documentation.

The communication tests also enable different elements of the network(s) such as hubs
and transceivers to be checked.

7.8. TESTS REGARDING OTHER NETWORK TYPES

The test tools recommended above can also be used to check other networks, in
particular the interconnections between hubs on a 10BaseT network.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 57
8. POWERING THE HARDWARE

8.1. PURPOSE

This chapter describes all the operations and checks which need to be carried out in order
to switch on and start up a CENTRALOG system.

A CENTRALOG system is composed of cabinets with VME racks, Sun workstations and
peripherals. All these hardware elements are defined in the document: ”System
Architecture – Detailed Plan”

Once hardware elements have been switched on they are ready to receive the functions
designed for them.

8.2. TESTS PRIOR TO POWER–UP

8.2.1. Environment Conditions and Physical Examination of the Hardware

Before switching the hardware on, check the environmental conditions in the different
rooms. The installation manager ensures that environmental conditions are adequate
and checks that the cable has been laid correctly.

A general examination of the cabling is performed :

Check there are no metal particles, clips, eyelets, rust etc. between the
connection points.

Check that the cabling conforms to specification.

Check that each connection has been correctly executed and is mechanically
serviceable.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 58
8.2.2. Availability of Power Sources

Mains power boxes are available to supply the cabinets, workstations and peripherals.
Power cables are connected to the terminal blocks. Circuit breakers and hardware
protection devices are open or tripped.

Switch power on and check the voltage at the terminal box or at the hardware power plug.

8.3. POWERING THE C30 OR C50 CENTRALOG CABINETS

8.3.1. Presentation of Cabinet Equipment

Each cabinet is equipped with power supply and auxiliary terminal strips (001BN).
Circuit breakers on the front panel at the bottom of the cabinet protect the auxiliary
devices (plug, fans and light) and switches control the power supply to the stations.

The internal composition of each cabinet is defined in the document ”Customizing

Structures”.

8.3.2. Power Supply of Auxiliaries

The circuit breakers behind the front panel of the cubicle are off.

Switch on the ” VENT–N, VENT–S, ECL and PC” Circuit breakers and check that:

The light on the back plane goes on,

The extractor fans on the top of the cabinet start up,

Use a voltmeter to measure the voltage at the plugs on the front panel,

Slowly close the rear door until the internal light in the cabinet goes off.

8.3.3. CIS station

8.3.3.1. Connection to Mains Power Supply

Caution: Check that the switch is set at Off (O) before connecting the mains power supply
cable of the SUN ULTRA 2 station.

Connect the female connector of the power supply cable to the socket located on the rear
panel of the station.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 59
 Power supply

3 2
4 1

On/Off switch

Fig. 23 : Power supply of the SUN ULTRA 2

Remark: When the station is switched off, the green LED on the front panel is off and the
fans inside the unit are not running.

The power supply cable must remain permanently connected to a grounding terminal.
This connection ensures the ground connection which is indispensable for safely
removing and installing printed circuit boards and other components.

8.3.3.2. Configuration

The master board of the SUN ULTRA 2 is delivered already configured.

In standard form, it is delivered with:

128 Mbyte memory by installation of four 32 Mb DSIMM modules,

one SCSI internal disk unit of 4.2 Gbytes,

one internal CD ROM drive,

diverse SBus modules which may be (according to the option):

— one or two ASF1300 boards (if FS option) for connection to the S8000F
network,
— one Quad fast Ethernet board (if ETH option).
This chapter describes the installation and maintenance operations of the SUN ULTRA 2
sub–assemblies which can be installed or exchanged on site, i.e.:

the internal disk unit,

the internal CD ROM drive,

the diverse SBus (ASFI300, Quad Fast Ethernet, etc.) modules.

The other elements of the SUN ULTRA 2 are not repaired separately.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 60
8.3.3.2.1. Views of the SUN ULTRA 2

CD ROM drive

Fig. 24 : Front of the SUN ULTRA 2

Power supply Serial port Serial

B port A 4 SBus module
connectors

3 2
4 1

Audio Port
SCSI port

On/Off switch Ethernet (AUI) port Keyboard PortParallel Port

1 UPA module connector (TBTS)
Ethernet (RJ45) port

Fig. 25 : SUN ULTRA 2 rear view and connectors

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 61
8.3.3.2.2. Opening the SUN ULTRA 2 housing

3 2
4 1

On/Off switch Power supply

Fig. 26 : Rear panel of the SUN ULTRA 2

Proceed in the following manner to open the station:

— Before opening the housing, make certain that the station power supply
system set at ’OFF” (O). When the station is turned off, the green LED located
on the front panel is not lit and the fans found inside the unit are not running.
— Do not disconnect the power supply cable from the station socket when
opening the station.
— The power supply cable must remain plugged into a ground socket. This
ground connection is indispensable for completely safe removal and
installation of the printed circuit boards and other components.
— Use a Phillips screwdriver to completely free the locking system ()
attaching the cover to the rear panel.
— Lift up the attachment tabs () near the rear panel.
— Grasp the sides of the cover and remove it from the rear panel in lifting it
upward. When the rear panel has been freed, push the cover towards the
front of the station in order to free it from the rack.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 62
 Fig. 27 : Opening the SUN ULTRA 2 central unit

Attention: It is dangerous to operate the station without the cover in place.

Rear side

Parallel port K/B TPE MII SCSI Fan

Audio ports

SBus slot 0 SBus slot 2

Fan
Power supply
SBus slot 1 SBus slot 3 UPA
slot
J2105
CPU–0
J2104
Fan

CPU–1

J0501
J0401 Disk 0
J0701
J0601
J0502
J0402
J0702
Fan

J0602
J0503
J0603 Disk 1
J0504
J0604
Speaker

Front side
RAM memory 4.2 Gb hard disks CD Rom
location (2 lower locations) (upper location)

Fig. 28 : Internal view of the SUN ULTRA 2

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 63
8.3.3.2.3. Using the ground bracelet
The ground bracelet is a tool which allows directing the static electricity of the user’s body
to the station rack.

Before handling the internal elements of the station, attach the ground bracelet to your
wrist and to the metal housing of the station.

A ground bracelet is supplied with the equipment.

Caution: if you do not wear a ground bracelet, the boards and the modules of the station
can be damaged by static electrical discharges.

Use of the bracelet:

— Wind the bracelet two times around your wrist, making certain that the
adhesive side is in contact with the skin.
— Attach the end of the bracelet which has a piece of adhesive copper to the
metal housing on the top of the station power supply.
8.3.3.2.4. Installation of the internal hard disk unit
Caution: Before installing the internal disk unit, make certain that station power supply
switch is set at ”OFF” (O).

SCSI connector

Locking
handle

Fig. 29 : Hard disk unit

— Use a screwdriver to remove the openworked plate located on the side of the
station.
— Pull the handle of the disk unit and completely slide the unit into the rack.
Push the unit in order to connect it to the system.
— Re–close the unit handle. If the unit is not correctly installed, the handle will ot
be able to be closed.
— Re–position the openworked plate.
Your disk is now ready.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 64
8.3.3.2.5. Installation of the SBus boards

Screw

Front side
SBus board locking
system

Fig. 30 : SBus board

To install an SBus board:

— Power off the station.
— Disconnect all of the cables except for the power supply cable which serves
as safety circuit in the case of static electrical discharges.
— Identify the connector that you want to use (SBus 1 to SBus 4) according to
the customization of the project.
— Use a screwdriver to remove the screws and washers which fix the caches of
the SBus boards on the external part at the rear of the station.
Do not lose them !
— Take the board out of its antistatic bag, being careful to hold it by its corners.
The boards are pre–configured by the manufacturer.
— Push the board locking systems in the station towards the rear.
— Remove the extraction system from the SBus board. This is done by pressing
on one of the rods, and then pulling upward, so as to free the hook from the
hole provided for this purpose on the board.
Conserve the locking system, it could be useful later on during extraction of
the SBus board.
— Slide the board sidewise into the rear panel of the station until the mounting
hooks are well inserted.
Check that the mounting plate is engaged in the slots of the rear panel.
— Position the pins so that they correspond with the connector.
Then lightly press on the corners of the board to push the pins into the
connector.
— Remove the locking systems on the edge of the SBus board.
— Fix the board to the rear panel by means of the screws and washers put aside
at the dismounting of the caches.
Your board is ready.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 65
8.3.3.2.6. Closing the SUN ULTRA 2 housing
Caution: Before replacing the cover of the station, ensure that the hard disk unit and the
floppy disk unit have been correctly installed. If this is not the case, these units could be
damaged by the closing of the cover.

Fig. 31 : Closing of the SUN ULTRA 2 central unit

3 2
4 1

Power supply
On/Off switch

Fig. 32 : Rear panel of the SUN ULTRA 2

To replace the cover:

— Remove the ground bracelet,
— Place the cover in front of the system unit. Gently guide the cover tracks into
the slots provided for this purpose.
— Gently lower the cover of the system unit.
Press on the cover in order to insert it in the rack.
— Using a Phillips screwdriver, re–install the locking system  on the rear
panel of the cover.
— Connect all the cables again at the rear of the station.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 66
8.3.3.3. Power up

The micro–circuit breakers of the front panel at the bottom of the cabinet are triggered.

Close the micro–circuit breaker for station protection on the front panel at the bottom of
the cabinet, then switch over the On/Off switch at the rear of the station to ”ON”.

Verify:

That the LED lights up when there is supply voltage.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 67
8.3.4. SOFY M.90 EXPORT 320 Master Clock (option)

In an optional configuration, a master clock can be integrated into the CIS cabinet. This
clock is used to deliver the synchronization signals:

Minute pulse to the CENTRALOG(S)

5 second pulse to the P320 CONTROBLOC Controllers.

These signals are available on a terminal block provided in accordance with project
specifications (See ”Hardware configuration”)

Before starting, check the availability of power supply and linking cables.

To start the clock, close the concerned micro–circuit breaker on the front panel of the
cabinet.
The display status is the following:

HOURS MINUTES SECONDS

TIME
DAY
YEARS MONTHS DAYS
WEEK

CALENDAR

If the display is different, press simultaneously the ”CHECK” and ”RESET” buttons to
reinitialize the clock.
Then enter the time (hours, minutes, seconds) and date (year, month, day and day of the
week, with Monday = 1).
The ”E” key allows erasing the last character entered.
The ”F” key allows validating the characters and starting the clock.

The signals are operational once the time has been initiated.

For other information, refer to the SOFY M.90 EXPORT 320 (ACEB) manufacturer’s
documentation.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 68
8.4. POWER UP OF THE CVS OPERATOR STATIONS

8.4.1. Mains Power Supply Connection

Caution: Before connecting the power supply cable of the SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc or the
SUN ULTRA 1, ensure that the power switch is set to OFF (O).

Insert the female connector on the power supply cable into the input socket located on the
rear panel of the station.

Connect the station power supply cable to the socket provided for this purpose on the
console. Refer to the system installation drawings.

Mains power input

Monitor power supply
output

On/Off switch

Fig. 33 : SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station power supply cable connection

1
0

On/Off switch

Mains power input

Fig. 34 : SUN ULTRA 1 station power supply cable connection

Remark: When the station is off, the green LED located on the front panel is not lit and the
internal fans are stopped.

The power cable must remain connected at all times to a ground socket. This connection
ensures the ground link which is necessary to enable printed circuit boards and other
components to be removed and installed in complete safety.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 69
8.4.2. Configurations

The work stations are described in the project document: ”Hardware Configuration”.
Also refer to the manufacturer’s documentation for each different element.

There are several different possible configurations according to the type of Centralog
(C10, C30 or C50).

8.4.2.1. C10

The CVS operator station is composed of a SUN SS5 Turbo SPARC station or of a SUN
ULTRA 1 station.

In standard version, the station is delivered with:

128 Mbyte memory per installation of:

— 4 SIMM modules of 32 Mbyte memory for the SS5 Turbo SPARC station,
— 2 SIMM modules of 64 Mbyte memory for the ULTRA 1 station.

one 2.1 GByte SCSI internal hard disk unit,

one 20” color monitor and one SBus graphic board,

one keyboard and one mouse with mouse pad,

one internal CD ROM drive,

one internal 3.5” floppy disk drive,

one ASFI300 type SBus board for connection to the S8000–F network,

one external DAT drive,

one supplementary SBus graphic board, if the option of a second screen has
been chosen.

8.4.2.2. C30 or C50

Each CVS operator station is composed of a SUN SS5 Turbo SPARC station or of a SUN
ULTRA 1 station.

In its standard version, the station is delivered with:

128 MByte memory per installation of:

— 4 SIMM modules of 32 MByte memory for the SS5 Turbo SPARC station,
— 2 SIMM modules of 64 MByte memory for the ULTRA 1 station.

one 2.1 GByte SCSI internal hard disk unit,

one keyboard and one mouse with mouse pad,

one or several Sbus graphic boards with associated 20” color monitors,

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 70

one Sbus Quad Fast Ethernet board for supplementary connections to the
Ethernet network (optional).

In addition, if the operator station hosts the CCC function, the station is also equipped with
the following;

on external DAT drive,

a second 2.1 GByte internal SCSI hard disk,

one internal CD ROM drive,

one internal 3.5” floppy disk drive,

one SUNPC Sbus board for DOS emulation (optional).

This chapter describes the operation and maintenance operations of the sub–assemblies
of the SUN SS5 Turbo SPARC or ULTRA 1 stations which can be installed or exchanged
on a site, i.e.:

the internal disk units,

the internal CD ROM drive,

the internal floppy disk drive,

the diverse SBus modules (SUN PC. TGX, Quad Ethernet, etc.)

The other elements of these stations can not be repaired separately.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 71
8.4.3. Views of the Station

8.4.3.1. SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc Station

CD ROM drive

Floppy disk drive

Power–on LED
Fig. 35 : Front view of the SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station

Mains power supply 3 SBus

Monitor power output
module connectors
13W3 (TGX) video
connector

On/Off switch 0 1 2

SCSI port Audio port

Parallel port Keyboard
Ethernet (AUI) port port (TBTS)
Serial port A
Ethernet (RJ45) port Serial port B

Fig. 36 : Rear view of the SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 72
8.4.3.2. SUN ULTRA 1 Station

ULTRA 1
CREATOR

Fig. 37 : Front view of the SUN ULTRA 1 station

1 UPA module connector

2 SBus
Monitor power supply Serial port B module connectors
output Serial port A

On/Off switch Audio port

SCSI port
Parallel port
Mains power supply Keyboard
port (TBTS)Ethernet port Ethernet port (RJ45)
(AUI)
Fig. 38 : Rear view and connectors of the SUN ULTRA 1 station

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 73
8.4.4. Opening of the Station Housing

8.4.4.1. SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc Station

Mains power 
Monitor power
supply
supply output

On/off switch

Fig. 39 : Rear panel of SUN SPARC station 5 central unit

The cover of the housing is fixed to the front of the rack by molded plastic clips, and to the
rear by a safety screw () and a locking screw ().

When the cover is raised to form an an angle of 60 degrees in relation to the chassis, the
front clips automatically come free.

To open the station, proceed as follows:

— Before opening the housing, check that the on/off switch is set to OFF (O).
When the station is off, the green LED located on the front panel is not lit and
the internal fans are stopped.
— Do NOT unplug the mains power cable when opening the housing.
— The power cable must remain connected at all times to a ground socket. This
connection ensures the ground link which is necessary to enable printed
circuit boards and other components to be removed and installed in total
safety.
— Use a screwdriver to undo the locking screw () which fixes the top to the
rear panel. When loosened, the screw remains attached to the rear panel.
— Use the screwdriver again to undo the safety screw () while raising the top
from the rear panel with the other hand.
— Raise the top to a 60 degree angle in relation to the rack. Push the top forward
until the clips disengage from the chassis.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 74
 Fig. 40 : Opening the SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station central unit

Caution: it is dangerous to operate the station while the top cover is removed.

Rear Front
panel Power supply panel

Floppy and CD ROM drives

2 locations

RAM memory locations

2 x 2.1 Gb
hard disk locations

SBus modules
3 locations

Fig. 41 : SUN SPARC station 5 – Internal view

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 75
8.4.4.2. SUN ULTRA 1 Station




1
0

On/Off switch

Mains power supply

Fig. 42 : Rear view and connectors of the SUN ULTRA 1 station

To open the station proceed as follows:

— Before opening the housing, check that the on/off switch is set to OFF (O).
When the station is turned off, the green LED located on the front panel is not
lit and the internal fans are stopped.
— Do not unplug the mains power cable when opening the housing.
— The power cable must remain connected at all times to a ground socket. This
connection ensures the ground link which is necessary to enable printed
circuit boards and other components to be removed and installed in total
safety.
— Use a Phillips screwdriver to completely undo the locking system () which
attaches the cover to the rear panel.
— Use a Phillips screwdriver to undo the screws () which are found in the
upper right angle and in the upper left angle of the rear panel.
— Grasp the sides of the cover and remove it from the rear panel by lifting it.
When the panel has been freed, push the cover toward the front of the station
in order to free it from the chassis.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 76
 Fig. 43 : Opening of the SUN ULTRA1 station central unit

Caution: It is dangerous to operate the station while the cover is removed.

Rear

SCSI TPE MII K/B Parallel port

Audio ports
J2105
J2104
Fan

SBus slot 0
SBus slot 1 UPA slot Power supply
U0701
U0601
U0702
Fan

U0602
U0703
U0603
U0704
U0604

Fan Speaker

Front CD ROM
2 locations for 2.1
(upper location)
Gb hard disk RAM memory locations Floppy disk drive
(lower location)
Fig. 44 : Internal view of the SUN ULTRA 1 station

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 77
8.4.5. Using the Ground Bracelet

The ground bracelet is a tool which is used to direct static electricity from your body
towards the station chassis.

Before handling the station’s internal elements, attach the ground bracelet to your wrist
and to the metal housing of the unit.

A ground bracelet is supplied with the equipment.

Caution: if you fail to wear the ground bracelet, the station boards and modules may be
damaged by static electrical discharges.

Using the bracelet :

— Roll the bracelet twice around your wrist ensuring that the adhesive side is
touching the skin.
— Attach the end of the bracelet comprising a piece of adhesive copper to the
metal housing located in the upper part of the power supply of the unit.

8.4.6. Installing the Internal Hard Disk Unit

Caution: Before installing the internal hard disk, ensure that the station power supply
switch is set to OFF (O).

8.4.6.1. SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc Station

Power supply
socket

Fixing lug

SCSI socket

Fig. 45 : Hard disk unit

Position the disk unit above its final location with the connector sockets facing towards
those of the station and the disk’s electronic board to the bottom.

Plug in the power supply connector then the SCSI bus connector.

Connect the disk by using the locking handle.

Your disk is ready.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 78
8.4.6.2. SUN ULTRA 1 Station

SCSI connector

Locking
handle

Fig. 46 : Hard disk unit

— Use a screwdriver to remove the openwork plate located on the side of the
station.
— Pull the locking handle of the disk unit and completely slide the unit into the
rack. Push the unit in order to connect it to the system.
— Re–close the unit locking handle. If the unit is not correctly installed, it will be
impossible to close the locking handle.
— Re–position the openwork plate.
Your disk is now ready.

8.4.7. Installing the internal floppy disk drive

Caution: Before installing the internal hard disk, ensure that the station power supply
switch is set to OFF (O).

8.4.7.1. SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc Station

Bus connector
Front of the floppy disk
drive

Power supply
Fixing lug socket

Fig. 47 : Floppy disk drive

Check that the configuration of the floppy disk drive conforms to the work stations
customization document.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 79
 Hold the drive unit above its location with the connector sockets facing towards the inside
of the station and the metal cover to the top.

Plug in the power supply connector then the SCSI bus connector.

Place the lugs of the drive unit in the notches provided and push the unit home towards
the interior of the station.

Caution : If your station includes a CD ROM drive, it’s necessary to install the floppy disk
drive before the CD–ROM drive.

8.4.7.2. SUN ULTRA 1 Station

Front of the floppy disk drive

Power supply
socket

Bus connector

Fig. 48 : Floppy disk drive

Check that the configuration of the floppy disk drive conforms to the work stations
customization document.

Remove the CD filler panel.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two screws near the opening and unclip the power
supply cable from the side of the drive bracket.

Slide the drive bracket in, and lift it out of the system.

Remove the floppy disk filler panel.

Use a screwdriver to screw the floppy disk drive on the drive bracket using the four screws
supplied for this purpose.

Remove the floppy disk data cable from the kit and plug one end into the back panel of the
drive marked FLOPPY. Connect the other end to the floppy disk drive.

Attach the connector labeled P2 to the drive.

Lower the drive bracket into the rack. Slide the drive bracket toward the opening.

Reinstall the two screws near the opening, and clip the power supply cable to the side of
the drive bracket.

Reinstall the CD filler panel.

Caution : If your station includes a CD ROM drive, it’s necessary to install the floppy disk
drive before the CD–ROM drive.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 80
8.4.8. Installing the Internal CD–ROM Drive

Caution: Before installing the internal hard disk, ensure that the station power supply
switch is set to OFF (O).

8.4.8.1. SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc Station

Front of the CD ROM drive Bus connector

Power supply
Fixing lug socket

Fig. 49 : CD–ROM drive

Check that the configuration of the CD ROM drive conforms to the work stations
customization document.

Hold the drive unit above its location with the connector sockets facing towards the inside
of the station and the metal cover to the top.

Plug in the power supply connector then the SCSI bus connector.

Place the lugs of the drive unit in the notches provided and push the unit home towards
the interior of the station.

Caution : If your station includes a floppy disk drive, it’s necessary to install the floppy disk
drive before installing the CD–ROM drive.

8.4.8.2. SUN ULTRA 1 Station

Front of the CD ROM drive Bus connector

Power supply
socket

Fig. 50 : CD–ROM drive

Remove the CD filler panel.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two screws near the opening and unclip the
power supply cable from the side of the drive bracket.

Slide the drive bracket in, and lift it out of the system.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 81
 Use a screwdriver to screw the CD ROM drive on the drive bracket using the four screws
supplied for this purpose. Attach the CD connector and the P3 connector to the CD ROM
drive.

Lower the drive bracket into the rack. Slide the drive bracket toward the opening.

Reinstall the two screws near the opening, and clip the power supply cable to the side of
the drive bracket.

Caution : If your station includes a floppy disk drive, it’s necessary to install the floppy disk
drive before installing the CD–ROM drive.

8.4.9. Installing the SBus Boards

Caution: Before installing the boards, ensure that the station power supply switch is set to
OFF (O).

Caution: After the board is installed, the unit must be closed before it is powered up in
order to avoid damaging the station.

8.4.9.1. SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc Station

Screws

Front panel
SBus board locking
system

Fig. 51 : SBus module

To install an MBus or SBus board:

— Power off the station.
— Disconnect all the cables with the exception of the power supply cable which
serves as a ground circuit in the event of static electricity discharges.
— Identify the connector to be used (SBus 1 to SBus 3 for SUN SPARC station 5
or MBus 0 to 1 and SBus 0 to SBus 3 for SUN SPARC station 20) depending
on the customization of the project.
— Use a screwdriver to remove the screws and washers used to fix the outer
MBus or SBus board caches to the rear of the station.
Don’t lose them!

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 82
 — Remove the board from its antistatic bag, taking care to hold it only by the
corners. The boards are pre–configured by the manufacturer.
— Push the board locking system to the rear.
— Remove the board locking system from the MBus or SBus board. Press one
of the rods, then pull upwards in order to disengage the hook from its hole in
the board.
Keep the locking system. It could be useful later during the removal of MBus
or SBus boards.
— Slide the board sideways in the rear panel of the station until the assembly
hooks are fully engaged.
Check that the assembly plate clicks home in the rear panel slots.
— Match up the connector pins with the socket.
Then press lightly on the corners of the board to insert the pins into the
socket.
— Lower the locking devices on the corners of the MBus or SBus boards.
— Fasten the board to the rear panel by means of the screws and washers
placed on one side during disassembly of the caches.
Your board is installed.

8.4.9.2. SUN ULTRA 1 Station

Screws

Front panel
SBus board locking
system

Fig. 52 : SBus board

To install an SBus board:

— Power off the station.
— Disconnect all the cables with the exception of the power supply cable which
serves as a ground circuit in the event of discharges of static electricity.
— Identify the connector to be used (SBus 0 to SBus 1) depending on the
customization of the project.
— Use a screwdriver to remove the screws and washers used to fix the outer
SBus board caches to the rear of the station.
Don’t lose them!

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 83
 — Remove the board from its antistatic bag, taking care to hold it only by the
corners. The boards are pre–configured by the manufacturer.
— Push the board locking system to the rear.
— Remove the board locking system from the SBus board. Press one of the
rods, then pull upwards in order to disengage the hook from its hole in the
board.
Keep the locking system. It could be useful later during the removal of the
SBus boards.
— Slide the board sideways in the rear panel of the station until the assembly
hooks are fully engaged.
Check that the assembly plate clicks home in the rear panel slots.
— Match up the connector pins with the socket.
Then press lightly on the corners of the board to insert the pins into the
socket.
— Lift up the locking devices on the corners of the SBus boards.
— Fasten the board to the rear panel by means of the screws and washers
placed on one side during disassembly of the caches.
The board is installed.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 84
8.4.10. Closing the Station Housing

Caution: Before replacing the top cover of the station, ensure that the hard disk unit and
the floppy disk drive are correctly installed. If not, they may be damaged when the cover is
closed.

8.4.10.1. SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc Station

Fig. 53 : Closing the SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station central unit

Mains power supply

Monitor power supply 
output


On/Off switch

Fig. 54 : Rear panel of the SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station central unit

Replace the top cover as follows:

— Remove the ground bracelet,
— Hold the top cover at an angle of 60 degrees in relation to the station, then
carefully guide the hooks on the top into the slots located at the front of the
station,
— Gently lower the cover onto the station,
— Use a screwdriver to tighten the safety screw () and the locking screw ()
located on the rear panel of the cover,
— re–connect all the cables to the rear of the station.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 85
8.4.10.2. SUN ULTRA 1 Station

Fig. 55 : Closing the SUN ULTRA 1 station central unit




1
0

On/Off switch

Mains power supply

Fig. 56 : Rear view and connectors of the SUN ULTRA 1 station

Replace the cover as follows:

— Remove the ground bracelet,
— Place the cover in front of the system unit. Gently guide the cover rail into the
slots provided for this purpose,
— Gently lower the cover onto the station. Guide guide the blocking hooks
located at the rear of the cover into the corresponding grooves at the rear of
the system unit.
Press on the cover in order to insert it in the rack.
— Fix the cover on the rack. Tighten the screws () located in the upper right
and upper left angles of the rear panel.
— Re–place the locking system () on the rear panel.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 86
8.4.11. Installing the External DAT Drive Unit

An external DAT drive unit is connected to the SUN SPARC station 5 or 20 by the SCSI
bus in daisy chain mode with the SCSI bus loads.

DAT

SUN SPARC station 20

Fig. 57 : Connection of external drive unit

Caution: Before installing the DAT unit, ensure that the on/off switch of the station and
the external drive unit are set to OFF (O).

The unit is connected to the station by the SCSI bus. The bus adaptation is automatic.

The SCSI address of the DAT drive unit is configured by means of a code wheel located at
the rear of the unit. It’s not necessary to open the housing.

Check that the configuration of this address conforms to the workstations customization
document.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 87
 FRONT PANEL DAT 4 mm

Green LED Amber LED Cartridge door Eject button

Fig. 58 : DAT unit – front view

REAR PANEL DAT 4mm

I 0

IN OUT 0
4 0

On/off switch Mains power input Fan

Unit number SCSI ports LEDs terminator

Fig. 59 : DAT unit – rear view

8.4.11.1. SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc Station

Connect the SCSI cable between the free SCSI port on the unit and the SCSI port on the
SUN SPARC station 5 or 20 as shown below:

Mains power
Monitor power supply
input
output

On/off switch

SCSI port

Fig. 60 : SUN SPARC station 5 – rear panel

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 88
8.4.11.2. SUN ULTRA 1 Station

Connect the SCSI cable between the free SCSI port on the unit and the SCSI port on the
SUN ULTRA 1 as shown below:

1
0

On/Off switch
SCSI port

Mains power supply

Fig. 61 : Rear view and connectors of the SUN ULTRA 1 station

8.4.12. Connecting the Mouse and Keyboard

Remove the protective cap from the mouse connector.

Locate the mouse connector sockets under the keyboard: choose the socket which
corresponds to where you wish to place the mouse on the table.
Insert the connector into the left–hand socket if you are left–handed, or the right–hand
socket if you are right–handed.

The connector is shaped to ensure correct insertion. Align the flat side of the connector
with the flat side of the socket, then press the connector home.

If the mouse is connected to the right–hand keyboard socket use the left hand socket for
the keyboard cable, and vice versa.

The keyboard cable connector is shaped to ensure correct insertion. Align the flat side of
the connector with the flat side of the socket, then press the connector home.

Locate the keyboard port on the rear panel of the station.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 89
 Mains power supply
Monitor power supply
outlet

On/Off switch

Keyboard port (TBTS)

Fig. 62 : SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station – rear view

1
0

On/Off switch

Mains power supply Keyboard

port (TBTS)

Fig. 63 : SUN ULTRA 1 – rear view

The connector of the keyboard cable, station side, is shaped to ensure correct insertion.
Align the flat side of the connector with the flat side of the socket, then press the connector
home.

Position the keyboard along with the mouse and mouse pad on the space provided on the
table.

8.4.13. Installing the Monitors

Caution: Before installing the monitors, ensure that the on/off switch of the station and
the monitors are set to OFF (O).

Install the monitors in the locations provided on the table.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 90
 Fig. 64 : CVS monitor

The video cables are permanently attached to the monitors.

Remove the protective caps from the connectors at the end of the video cables.

Connect the cables to the video ports on the station as shown below:

Video port 13W3 left screen

Video port 13W3 center screen

Video port 13W3 right screen

Fig. 65 : Connection of SUN SS5 Turbo Sparc station monitors

Video port 13W3 right screen

Video port 13W3 left screen

TGX 1
CREATOR 0

Fig. 66 : Connection of SUN ULTRA 1 station screens

Manually tighten the two screws located on each side of each monitor.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 91
 Connect the monitor power supply cables to the sockets provided in the console. Refer to
the system installation drawings.

8.4.14. Connecting to the Ethernet network

8.4.14.1. Only one connection (without ETH option)

Caution: Before connecting the station to the Ethernet network, ensure that the on/off
switch is set to OFF (O).

The SUN SPARC SS5 or ULTRA1 station is connected to the Ethernet network by:

 a TP cable, with RJ45 connections,

 a microhub, with a BNC connector for Ethernet 10Base2 network or an AUI

transceiver with a vampire plug for Ethernet 10 base 5 network (CNX–2 or CNX–5
options).

or  a multi–channel hub for the entire Ethernet network (HUB option)

Mains power supply

Monitor power outlet

On/off switch

Ethernet network

Fig. 67 : Connecting the SUN SPARC station 5 to the Ethernet network

8.4.14.2. Multiple Connections (with ETH option)

Caution: Before connecting the station to the Ethernet network, ensure that the mains
power switch is set to OFF (O).

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 92
 When several connections to the Ethernet network are necessary (ETH option), a Quad
Ethernet Sbus module is added to the station configuration. This module implements four
additional Ethernet ports.

Mains power supply

Monitor power outlet

Quad Ethernet module port

0 1 2

On/off switch

Fig. 68 : Location of Quad Ethernet SBus module in the SUN SPARC station 5

8.4.14.2.1. 10Base5 network

Each port of the SUN SPARC station 5 is connected to the Ethernet network by:

 a 10 base T RJ45 – RJ45 cord,

 an AT–MR121T type AUI – RJ45 micro repeater + power cord,

 an AUI cable and a transceiver on a vampire plug (10Base5).

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 93
 Rear view of the station Quad Ethernet module
first Ethernet link second Ethernet link
1 2 3 4

LEDS
PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4

 

 
PORT 2 PORT 1 AliĆ PORT 2 PORT 1 AliĆ
mentaĆ mentaĆ
10BASE-T AUI 10BASE-T AUI
tion / tion /
Power Power
supply To supply
To
Contronet Contronet
1  2

transceivĆ
transceivĆ
er er
Fig. 69 : Connections to the Ethernet network

First link

Connect the 10baseT Ethernet ports of the station to the Ethernet port of the
micro–repeater using the RJ45 cable.
Connect the AUI cable to the AUI port of the micro–repeater and to the network (refer to
the system installation drawings).
Switch on the micro–repeater.

Second link

Connect the 10baseT Ethernet ports of the Quad Ethernet module to the Ethernet port of
the micro–repeater using the RJ45 cable.
Connect the AUI cable to the AUI port of the micro–repeater and to the network (refer to
the system installation drawings).
Switch on the micro–repeater.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 94
8.4.14.2.2. 10Base2 network
Each port of the SUN SPARC station is connected to the Ethernet network by:

 a 10baseT RJ45 – RJ45 cord,

 an AT–MR122T type AUI – RJ45 micro repeater + power cord,

 a T and a coaxial cable (BNC)

SUN STATION MOTHER BOARD OU SBUS QUAD ETHERNET MODULE

0 1 2 3

LEDS
PORT 0 PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3

 

 
PORT 2 PORT 1
PORT 2 PORT 1
AliĆ AliĆ
10BASE-T BNC mentaĆ 10BASE-T BNC mentaĆ
tion tion

ÂÂ
ÂÂ
 ÂÂ Â
ÂÂ Â ÂÂ
 Â 

Fig. 70 : CNX–2: connections

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 95
8.4.15. Connecting Serial Links

Caution: Before connecting the station to the serial links, ensure that the on/off switch is
set to OFF (O).

Two serial links may be connected to the SUN SPARC station 5 and SUN ULTRA 1

Refer to the system installation drawings for further information on how to use these links.

Serial links are normally used to connect :

a console port of a MVME167 – 34A of the CIS rack on CCC port A,

a remote maintenance modem on CCC port B,

a printer on CVS port A.

Mains power
Monitor power
input
supply output

On/off switch

Serial port A

Serial port B

Fig. 71 : Serial links connections of the SUN SPARC station 5

Serial port A
Monitor power supply
outlet Serial port B

On/Off switch

Mains power supply Keyboard

port (TBTS)

Fig. 72 : Serial link connections of the SUN ULTRA 1 station

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 96
 Connect the male connector of the serial link cable to serial port A (refer to the system
installation drawings).

Connect the male connector of the serial link cable to serial port B (refer to the system
installation drawings).

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 97
8.5. INSTALLING THE PRINTERS

8.5.1. Printer Types

SPR–JC, SPR–JC–ETH ink–jet printers
— Epson Stylus 1520 (parallel)
— Epson Stylus 1520 + C82357 board (Ethernet network)

SPR–PC ink–jet printers (screen copy)
— HP1600CM (parallel or Ethernet network)

SPR–LA black & white laser printer
— HP 4000N (parallel or Ethernet network)

SPR–LA4 color laser printer (screen copy)
— HP 4500N (parallel or Ethernet network)

8.5.2. Connecting the Printers

All the printers can be connected:

on a local parallel link:

— via a specific SUN cable for SS5 stations
— via a standard CENTRONICS cable for other SUN stations or PCs

on an Ethernet network:
— 10Base2
— 10Base5 or 10BaseT, by means of individual microhubs, or multiport hubs.

8.5.3. EPSON STYLUS 1520 Printers

8.5.3.1. Unpacking

To provide protection during transport, the printers are blocked by protective plastic
wedges. Remove these wedges before using the printer.

Keep the wedges in case the printer needs to be moved at a later date.

8.5.3.2. Configuration of the EPSON STYLUS 1520

This printer does not require hardware configuration.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 98
8.5.3.3. Installing the Ink Cartridge

Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation.

Important: Do not remove cartridges which are already installed and which are in
working order:
They will be rendered unusable.

8.5.3.4. Power Up

Before switching the printer on, make sure that all the protective materials have been re-
moved and check that the power supply is compatible.

8.5.3.5. Self Test

Be sure that the printer is powered off.

Power on the printer while keeping the ”LF/FF” button pressed down. Release the button
once the printer test is underway.

The printer beeps several times and the POWER and PAPER OUT LEDs light up.

The self test continues until the ”PAUSE” button is pressed. To resume the test press the
”PAUSE” button once again.

To stop the test completely, turn the printer off.

Pres the button on the optional network board once to print out the printer characteristics,
including the Ethernet address of the board.

8.5.4. Installing the HP1600 C or HP1600 CM Printers

8.5.4.1. Unpacking

To provide protection during transport, the printers are blocked by means of protective
plastic wedges. Remove these wedges before using the printer.

Keep these wedges in case the printer needs to be moved at a later date.

8.5.4.2. Configuration

The printer does not require hardware configuration.

8.5.4.3. Installing the Ink Cartridge

Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

The printer heads are integral to the ink cartridges. They can be cleaned by following the
procedure described in the manufacturer’s documentation.

8.5.4.4. Power Up

Before switching the printer on check that the power supply is compatible.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 99
 Connect the printer to the mains power source by the printer power cord.

8.5.4.5. Self–test

Press the blue button located at the front of the printer to run a print test in the form of a
page of printer characteristics including the Ethernet address of the network board.

8.5.5. Installing the HP4000N Black & White Laser Printers

8.5.5.1. Unpacking

To provide protection during transport, the printers are blocked by means of protective
plastic wedges and movable parts are attached by adhesive tape. Remove these
protections before using the printer.

Keep the wedges in case the printer needs to be moved at a later date.

8.5.5.2. Configuration

The printer does not require hardware configuration.

An interactive menu enables configuration parameters to be entered via the control
panel.

8.5.5.3. Installing the Toner Cartridge

Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

8.5.5.4. Power Up

Before switching the printer on check that the power supply is compatible.

Connect the printer to the mains power source by the printer power cord.

8.5.5.5. Self–test

The menu contains a self–test option which is used to run a print test in the form of a page
of printer characteristics including the Ethernet address of the network board.

8.5.6. Installing the HP4500N Color Laser Printers

8.5.6.1. Unpacking

To provide protection during transport, the printers are blocked by means of protective
plastic wedges and movable parts are attached by adhesive tape. Remove these
protections before using the printer.

Keep the wedges in case the printer needs to be moved at a later date.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 100
8.5.6.2. Configuration

The printer does not require hardware configuration.

An interactive menu enables configuration parameters to be entered via the control
panel.

8.5.6.3. Installing the Toner Cartridge

Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Important: The toner consists of 4 cartridges which must be loaded into the printer ink
pans. The inks are highly volatile and when the pans are filled, the printer should always
be handled with caution.

8.5.6.4. Power Up

Before switching the printer on check that the power supply is compatible.

Connect the printer to the mains power source by the printer power cord.

8.5.6.5. Self–test

The menu contains a self–test option which is used to run a print test in the form of a page
of printer characteristics including the Ethernet address of the network board.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 101
9. INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE

9.1. OPERATING MODE

The CENTRALOG software is installed by performing the following operations in the

order shown:

Installation of software on the operator station running the CCC:

— installation of system:

SOLARIS operating system

X11R5, Motif, Dataviews, SunPC

SparcWorks
— installation of CENTRALOG software:

CCC–S, EXP, PRMGR etc.

Installation of software on other operator stations:

— installation of system:

SOLARIS operating system

X11R5, Motif
— installation of CENTRALOG software:

EXP, PRMGR etc.

Installation of CIS software (for CENTRALOG C30 or C50):

— installation of SOLARIS operating system
— installation of Centralog software

CISSUN, CISGEN etc.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 102
 Important:

This symbol is used in this chapter before paragraphs to indicate that the length of time
required to complete an operation is unusually long.

The dialogues shown in the paragraphs below may not be complete because actual user
dialogues are determined by the hardware configuration of the system.

9.1.1. Media Required

The magnetic media required for installation of the system are as follows:

1 CD–ROM disk containing the SUN SOLARIS operating system V2.x

1 DAT SYSCLOG cartridge

1 DAT BACKUPCLOG cartridge

Addresses:

Ethernet and Internet addresses of the workstations

Ethernet and Internet addresses of the CIS stations

Ethernet and Internet addresses of the X–terminals (for CENTRALOG C30 or

C50)

Ethernet and Internet addresses of the network printers

Internet address and hostname of the remote Microété (where this exists)

Internet addresses and hostnames of the Controcad station and network P4

(where these exist)

Internet addresses and hostnames of PC Wincenters (where these exist)

Internet address and hostname of the remote maintenance station (where this
exists)

Important:
– The station Ethernet address can be identified from the messages generated on
station startup.
– The Ethernet address of the network printer is indicated on the printer self–test sheet.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 103
9.2. USING THE CD–ROM

The operating system used by the workstations is delivered on a CD–ROM disk.

The compact disk must be placed in the drive tray of the CD–ROM drive.

9.2.1. Inserting the Disk into the Drive

Open the drive tray by pressing the eject button.

Remove the compact disk from its storage box and place it in the drive tray, with the label
upwards.

Close the drive tray by pushing it. The green LED turns orange while the disk is being
loaded then returns to green when the drive is ready.

9.2.2. Ejecting the Disk

Open the drive tray by pressing the eject button.

It’s also possible to eject the disk by the command eject cd or eject cdrom in a shell
window.

Care must be taken to avoid disturbing any programs currently running on the machine.

9.2.3. Precautions for Using Compact Disks

Compact disks must be stored and handled with care.

The following precautions should be taken in particular:

never touch the surface of the disk with your fingers;

always handle the disk by the edges;

never write on the disks;

avoid using disks in damp or polluted environments;

disks should be stored in dry locations, away from sunlight, and protected from
excess heat or cold;

store disks in clean locations;

the disk should be at the ambient temperature before use.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 104
9.3. USING DAT CARTRIDGES

DAT (Digital Audio Tape) cartridges are used to back up the software.

Insert this way

Top view

Write protect

Front view

Fig. 73 : DAT cartridge

9.3.1. Write Protect

The write protect slot must be open to protect the contents of the cartridge from being
overwritten.

To write data to the cartridge, ensure that the write protect slot is closed. Check that the
white marker is visible .

The cartridge cannot be read protected.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 105
9.3.2. Inserting the Cartridge into the Drive

Insert the cartridge into the drive with the arrow on the top pointing towards the machine.

State & error LEDs Cartridge port Eject cartridge

Fig. 74 : DAT drive unit – front view

The unit state LED flickers when the cartridge is in use (read/write).

Normally the software ejects the cartridge automatically after use. The cartridge can also
be ejected manually by pressing the eject button.

In the latter case, care must be taken to avoid disturbing any programs currently running
on the machine.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 106
9.4. INSTALLING THE CCC OPERATOR STATION

9.4.1. Power Up

Ensure that the CCC station is switched off.

Switch on the monitor. Check that the power–on LED on the front of the monitor shows
green.

Switch on the DAT drive. The two LEDs on the front panel flicker then show steady then go
out.

Switch on the workstation.

Check that the LED on the front panel is showing green.

When the following line is displayed on screen 1:

Initializing Memory

press the ”STOP” and ”A” keys simultaneously.

The monitor prompt may appears in two forms:

1– The prompt of the new mode monitor: ok

2– The prompt of the old mode monitor: >

If the old mode monitor prompt appears start the new mode monitor by entering:

>n (cr)
ok

Insert the CD–ROM of the SUN SOLARIS 2.x operating system into the drive.

The SOLARIS CD ROM must remain in the drive until system installation is completed.

Replace the default parameters of nvramc:

ok set–defaults (cr)

Start the station by booting the CD–ROM:

ok boot cdrom –rs (cr)

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 107
 The screen goes blank for some seconds.

Startup takes less than 10 mn. The following messages are displayed:

Resetting...
(Display of the hardware release)
(Display of the software release)
WARNING: clock gain x days... CHECK AND RESET THE DATE:

The above message is not significant and should be ignored.

Configuring the /devices directory

Configuring the /dev directory
INIT: SINGLE USER MODE

#
9.4.2. Installation of SYSCLOG DAT

Insert the SYSCLOG DAT in the drive.

Install the sysclog tool then the complete system using the DAT (less than 1 hour) as
follows :

# cd /tmp (cr)

# tar xf /dev/rmt/0 (cr)

# ./sysclog (cr)

=========================================================
C E G E L E C EREP T3 @(#) sysclog 41.1 29/09/98
=========================================================
Formating /dev/dsk/c0t0d0 (system disk)
Formating /dev/dsk/c0t1d0 (user disk1)
... (depend of number of disk on station)
Creating file system on /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s0
... (depend of number of disk on station)
Reading DAT
Restoration of /etc/installclog
Restoration of /opt/SUNWspro
Restoration of /opt/SUNWste
Restoration of /opt/pkgsunpc
Restoration of /opt/pkgvoyager
Restoration of /opt/SUNWmfwm
Restoration of /opt/pkgqfe
Restoration of /opt/Dataview
Restoration of /opt/apache
Restoration of /opt/theta

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 108
 Restoration of /opt/pkghpnp
Restoration of /opt/pkgmagma
Restoration of /var/Patches
Installing packages
Installation of SUNWxxx... (installation of all SUN packages)
Installation of SunPC
Installation of Quad FastEthernet Driver Software
Building /local
Configuring the /devices directory
Configuring the /dev directory
End of first part. Rebooting...

You can consult log file /var/sadm/system/logs/install_log after reboot

The station restarts and the following messages appear:

synching file system...done

rebooting ...
Resetting ...
.
Configuring network interface: le0
Hostname: wsxxxx
Configuring the /devices directory
Configuring the /dev
Configuring the /devices directory (compatibility devices)
INIT; SINGLE USER MODE

Type Ctrl–d to proceed with normal startup,

(or give root password for system maintenance): (cr)
Entering system Maintenance Mode

First installation procedure...

Patch Clusters installation
2.5.1_Recommended Cluster installation
... (messages of patches installation)
Installation of 2.5.1_Recommended complete
2.5.1_y2000 Cluster installation
... (messages of patches installation)
Installation of 2.5.1_y2000 complete
Patch installation
SunPC Installation
HPNP Installation (HPNP D.05.15)
Installing FX class
X11 fonts installation

Do you want to define your Centralog configuration (y/n) ? y

At this step a dialogue allows the operator to define the CENTRALOG system
configuration.
The exact responses input will depend on the project. Ethernet addresses are displayed
on screen during station startup and indicated on labels at the rear of the hardware unit.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 109
 NOTE: The inputs shown below are given as an example. Refer to the
document ”CENTRALOG Installation Parameters” for the project
screen displays.

Important: When the system is installed any modification of the system configuration
can be implemented by inputting the command:
reboot ” –s”
in the root account with the SOLARIS 2.x CD–ROM inserted in the CCC
drive.

Definition of Centralog configuration

Centralog series (4) :

Centralog range : 1–>C10 , 2–>C30/C50 () : 2
Do you have an Upper Level network () : y
For a C10, this question is not display; nor are the questions below relative to the
”Upper Level” network
Number of Contronet networks () : 2
For a C10 system, the Contronet network number is forced to 1 and the following message is
displayed:
Default C10 : Number of Contronet networks is set to 1
Number of CVS stations in the system () : 2
For a C10 system, the CVS station number is forced to 1 and the following message is
displayed:
Default C10: Number of CVS station is set to 1
CVS1/CCC hostname () : ws0907
CVS1/CCC Upper Level Internet address () : 128.10.1.7
CVS1/CCC Contronet 1 Internet address (192.9.209.7) :
CVS1/CCC Contronet 2 Internet address (193.9.209.7) :
CVS1/CCC E900 Internet address (195.9.209.[49–56] or n) : 195.9.209.49
For a C10, this question is not display
If the station is not connect to E900 network enter n
CVS1/CCC Ethernet address () : 8:0:20:19:7a:3d
CVS1/CCC architecture type is Sparc
Does CVS1/CCC station support an Oracle Data Base (n) : y
Oracle Data Base type : 1–>Server , 2–>Client () : 1
CVS2 hostname () : ws0910
CVS2 Upper Level Internet address () : 128.10.1.10
If CVS station is not connect to Upper Level network, enter n
in stead of Internet address
CVS2 Contronet 1 Internet address (192.9.209.10) :
CVS2 Contronet 2 Internet address (193.9.209.10) :
CVS2 Ethernet address () : 8:0:20:19:c9:55
CVS2 architecture : 1–>Sparc 5 , 2–>Ultra () : 1
Does CVS2 station support an Oracle Data Base (n) : n
Number of CIS stations in the system (): 2
In a C10 system, there are no CIS stations: this question and the questions below
relative to CIS stations are not displayed.
CIS1 hostname () : ws0911

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 110
 CIS1 Contronet 1 Internet address (192.9.209.11) :
CIS1 Contronet 2 Internet address (193.9.209.11) :
CIS1 E900 Internet address (195.9.209.[49–56] or n) : 195.9.209.50
If CIS station is not connect to E900 network, enter n
CIS1 Ethernet address () : 8:0:20:19:c9:56
CIS1 architecture : 1–>Sparc 5 , 2–>Ultra () : 2
Does CIS1 station support an Oracle Data Base (n) : n
CIS2 hostname () : ws0912
CIS2 Contronet 1 Internet address (192.9.209.12) :
CIS2 Contronet 2 Internet address (193.9.209.12) :
CIS2 E900 Internet address (195.9.209.[49–56] or n) : 195.9.209.51
If CIS station is not connect to E900 network, enter n
CIS2 Ethernet address () : 8:0:20:19:c9:57
CIS2 architecture : 1–>Sparc 5 , 2–>Ultra () : 2
Does CIS2 station support an Oracle Data Base (n) : n
Do you have X terminals () : y
In a C10 system, there are no X–terminals: this question and the questions below relative to
X–terminals are not displayed.
Number of X terminals in the system (): 1
TX1 hostname () : tx0921
TX1 first Internet address () : 128.10.1.21
TX1 Ethernet address () : 0:0:a7:1:30:54
Number of screen on CVS1 <ws0907> () : 2
Number of X terminals on CVS1 <ws0907> () : 1
CVS1 <ws0907> X terminal 1 hostname () : tx0921
Number of screen on CVS2 <ws0910> () : 1
Number of X terminals on CVS2 <ws0910> () : 1
CVS2 <ws0910> X terminal 1 hostname () : tx0921
Is your CCC_D local () : n
CCC_D hostname () : cccd9_1h
CCC_D Internet address () : 192.9.209.16
CCC_D OS : 1–>SunOS 5.5.1 , 2–>Windows_NT 4 , 3–>Windows 3.11 () : 3
Do you use Controcad () : y
CONTROCAD hostname () : ta37
CONTROCAD Internet address () : 128.10.1.11
CONTROCAD OS : 1–>SunOS 5.5.1 , 2–>Windows_NT 4 ,
3–>Windows 3.11 () : 2
If Controcad station is same as CCC_D station, questions about internet address and OS
are not displayed :
Network configuration P4 hostname () : pc01x
Network configuration P4 Internet address () : 128.10.1.12
Network configuration P4 OS : 1–>SunOS 5.5.1 , 2–>Windows_NT 4 ,
3–>Windows 3.11 () : 3
If P4 network station P4 is same as CCC_D station or CONTROCAD station, questions
about internet address and OS are not displayed :
Do you have Wincenter stations () : y
Number of Wincenter stations () : 1
WINSTATION1 hostname () : pc0020

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 111
 WINSTATION1 Internet address () : 192.9.200.20
Do you have a FIP board () : n
This question are not displayed if E900 network is not used
Do you use PRISCA () : y
Project letter () : i
PRISCA directory number (1) :
Do you use Centralog remote maintenance () : y
Local maintenance station hostname is ws0907
Local maintenance station PPP address (145.9.209.7) :
Remote maintenance station hostname () : ws0902
Remote maintenance station PPP address (145.9.209.2) :
Modem port : 1–>port a , 2–>port b () : 2
Time zone (MET) :
Depend on geographical region
Do you use a NFS server () : y
NFS server hostname () : ws0901
NFS server Internet address (192.9.209.1) :
Other stations communicating with the Centralog (n) : y
1st station : 1–>Oracle Server , 2–>Oracle Client , 3–>Other ,
4–>Exit () : 1
Station Name () : ws0701
Internet Address () : 128.10.1.1
2nd station : 1–>Oracle Server , 2–>Oracle Client , 3–>Other ,
4–>Exit () : 3
Station Name () : ws0702
Internet Address () : 128.10.1.2
Comment () : Autre
3rd station : 1–>Oracle Server , 2–>Oracle Client , 3–>Other ,
4–>Exit () : 4

Define printers configuration

SCYA4HL SEIKO620 SoftCopy 1
SCYA3HL SEIKO630 SoftCopy 2
SCYA4 HP1600C SoftCopy 3
SPR–P HP1600CM black and white text 4
SPR–PC HP1600CM color 5
SPR–J STYLUS1520 black and white text 6
SPR–JC STYLUS1520 color text 7
SPR–L HPLaserJet black and white 8
SPR–LC HPLaserJet color 9
Return to continue

Enter the type of the new printer : 5

Configuration printer 1 SPR–PC HP1600CM color
Printer usage : 1–>Softcopy 2–>Text () :2
Enter the label (SPR–PC HP1600CM color) :
Label for HP1600 CM
0–>parallel port 1–>distant () : 1
Internet address of the printer (193.9.200.XX) : 192.9.206.89

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 112
 Name of the printer server (ps0689) :
Printer Ethernet address () : 8:0:9:f8:e8:8e
SCYA4HL SEIKO620 SoftCopy 1
SCYA3HL SEIKO630 SoftCopy 2
SCYA4 HP1600C SoftCopy 3
SPR–P HP1600CM black and white text 4
SPR–PC HP1600CM color 5
SPR–J STYLUS1520 black and white text 6
SPR–JC STYLUS1520 color text 7
SPR–L HPLaserJet black and white 8
SPR–LC HPLaserJet color 9
Return to continue

Enter the type of the new printer :

Important: Ensure that two printers or a printer and the modem are not declared
at the same port.

Precautions to be taken for the installation of network printers.

The system printers are installed at the first reboot after configuration by SYSCLOG (the
presence of file /etc/installclog/.install_imp tells the system to reconfigure the
printers).

If the network printers are configured, they must be powered up before rebooting the
stations. HP printers should not powered up more than 5 mn before rebooting the CCC.

If the system does not succeed in communicating with a network printer, the following
message is displayed:
”Please reset the printer psxxxx:(<label>)
by switching OFF/ON and press return...”

In this case check that printer psxxxx is powered up and that the physical Ethernet link is
correctly connected.

If the spooler fails, (printer not present, server station not present etc...) ensure that the
hardware is connected and reboot the stations.

Displaying the configuration for confirmation

Centralog series = 4
Centralog range=C50
Number of Contronet networks = 2
Upper Level network = y
Number of CVS stations in the system = 2
CVS1/CCC hostname = ws0907
CVS1/CCC Upper Level Internet address = 193.9.209.7
CVS1/CCC Contronet 1 Internet address = 192.9.209.7
CVS1/CCC Contronet 2 Internet address = 194.9.209.7
CVS1/CCC Ethernet address = 8:0:20:19:7a:3d
CVS1/CCC architecture = Sparc 5

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 113
 CVS1/CCC supports an Oracle Database Server
CVS2 hostname = ws0910
CVS2 Upper Level Internet address = 193.9.209.10
CVS2 Contronet 1 Internet address = 192.9.209.10
CVS2 Contronet 2 Internet address = 194.9.209.10
CVS2 Ethernet address = 8:0:20:19:c9:55
CVS2 architecture = Sparc 5
No Oracle Data Base on CVS2
CIS1 hostname = ws0911
CIS1 Contronet 1 Internet address = 192.9.209.11
CIS1 Contronet 2 Internet address = 194.9.209.11
CIS1 Ethernet address = 8:0:20:19:c9:56
CIS1 architecture = Ultra
CIS2 hostname = ws0912
CIS2 Contronet 1 Internet address = 192.9.209.12
CIS2 Contronet 2 Internet address = 194.9.209.12
CIS2 Ethernet address = 8:0:20:19:c9:57
CIS2 architecture = Ultra
Number of X terminals in the system = 1
TX1 hostname = tx0921
TX1 first Internet address = 128.10.1.21
TX1 Ethernet address = 0:0:a7:1:30:54
Number of screen on CVS1 <ws0907> = 2
Number of X terminals on CVS1 <ws0907> = 1
CVS1 <ws0907> X terminal 1 hostname = tx0921
Number of screen on CVS2 <ws0910> = 1
Number of X terminals on CVS2 <ws0910> = 1
CVS2 <ws0910> X terminal 1 hostname = tx0921
CCC_D hostname = cccd9_1h
CCC_D Internet address = 192.9.209.16
Controcad hostname = ta37
Controcad Internet address = 128.10.1.11
Network configuration P4 hostname = pc01x
Network configuration P4 Internet address = 128.10.1.12
Number of Wincenter stations = 1
WINSTATION1 hostname = pc0020
WINSTATION1 Internet address = 192.9.200.20
Shared memory size = 30000000
No FIP Board
PRISCA Project letter = i
PRISCA directory number = 1
Local maintenance station hostname = ws0907
Local maintenance station PPP address = 145.9.209.7
Remote maintenance station hostname = ws0902
Remote maintenance station PPP address = 145.9.209.2
Modem on port port b
Time zone = MET

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 114
 NFS server hostname = ws0901
NFS server Internet address = 192.9.209.1
Printers Configuration :
Server Label Type
–––––––– ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ––––––––
ps0689 Label for HP1600 CM Soft&text

Confirm (y/n) ? y (cr)

Do you want to use an installation DAT (y/n) ? y (cr)

Insert your DAT and press return ...

Insert the BACKUPCLOG DAT to restore a complete backup of your system and press
<return>.

”Do you want to restore directory /local ( Y/N)” ? y (cr)

...

”Do you want to restore directory /local/af/ccc ( Y/N)” ? y (cr)

After retrieving the DAT, the station will reboot automatically.

...
...
...
...
...
INIT: New run level: 3
The system is coming up. Please wait.
...
...
...
wsxxxx console login:

NOTE:
This operation creates an installation trace file
/var/sadm/system/logs/install_log. Refer to this file in the event of any problem.
Three accounts are created in the CCC: exe,clg et root.
These accounts must have passwords.

Log into account root:

wsxxxx console login: root (cr)

Choose a new password: <passwd> (cr)
Re–enter new password: <passwd> (cr)
#

Log into account exe:

# SU exe (cr)

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 115
 Choose a new password: <passwd> (cr)
Re–enter new password: <passwd> (cr)
exe $

Log into account clg:

exe $ SU clg (cr)

Choose a new password: <passwd> (cr)
Re–enter new password: <passwd> (cr)
clg $

Log out by pressing exit (cr) several times to display the prompt:
wsxxxx console login:

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 116
9.5. CCC PASSWORD MODIFICATION

9.5.1. Principle

Access to the CCC functions is managed by a routine that checks access levels:

an access level is attributed to each user

a minimum access level is associated to each function

A user can only log into a CCC function if he has an access level equal or superior to the
access level attributed to that function.

The four different levels (1 thru 4, 1 being the lowest level) which condition access to the
functions (function access levels) are defined by CEGELEC. The CCC administrator is
responsible for assigning access levels to the personnel.

All accesses or attempted accesses are recorded in a file which the administrator alone
may consult.

9.5.2. Modifying Access Rights or Creating a New User

This modification must be performed before starting the CCC station, i.e. before logging
into clg.

wsxxxx login: exe (cr)

password: <passwd> (cr)
exe $ cd $VPM/$VP/sc (cr)
exe $ vi *_AC*.m4 (cr)

The access rights configuration file is displayed as shown in the following example:

marcel:1:centralog
albert:3:psw3
raymond:2:passwd2
francois:2:massy
leon:4:psw4

Modify the file taking care to comply with the required access declaration syntax:
access level between 1 and 4
<user>:<access level>:<password>

Save the modifications by entering:

:wq (cr)
or quit without saving by entering:
:q! (cr)

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 117
9.5.3. Consulting the Access Record File

This file can only be consulted before starting the CCC, i.e. before logging into clg.

wsxxxx login: exe (cr)

password: <passwd> (cr)
exe $ cd $VPM/$VP/sc (cr)
exe $ vi *_LO*.m4 (cr)

The access record file is displayed:

[CCC] Startup at Wed Jan 6 17:18:24 1996

...
...

Quit the consultation by entering:

:q! (cr)

9.5.4. Ejecting the CD–ROM

To eject the CD–ROM:

$ SU root
# unshareall
# /etc/init.d/volmgt stop
# eject cdrom
# /etc/init.d/volmgt start

To ensure that the system has taken the CD–ROM into account, reboot the station using
the command:

# reboot ” –rs”

9.5.5. Reinitializing the System after Changing the Hardware Configuration of a

Station

This operation must be performed after modifying the hardware configuration of a station
(e.g. addition or subtraction of a monitor).

login : root
# cd /etc
# rm path_to_inst
# init 0
In prom Monitor, input the command:
ok boot –ar
Press return in response to all questions except the following:
The /etc/path_to_inst on your system does not exist or is empty.
Do you want to rebuild this file [n] ? y
Respond y before return.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 118
9.6. INSTALLING STATIONS OTHER THAN THE CCC

The following operations must be performed for each remote CIS and CVS installed.

Operations with regard to the CIS are performed using a VT100 type terminal.

9.6.1. System Installation

This paragraph only concerns the CENTRALOG C30 or C50.

Check that the Solaris 2.x CD–ROM is inserted in the CCC drive and ensure that the
station was last rebooted with the CD–ROM was inserted.

Power up the CVS or CIS station.

If the monitor prompt does not appear, press the ”STOP” and ”A” keys simultaneously
for a CVS station or ”break” on a VT100.

The monitor prompt may appear in one of two forms:

1– The ”new mode” monitor prompt: ok

2– The ”old mode” monitor prompt: >

If the ”old mode” monitor prompt appears switch to the ”new mode” prompt by entering:

>n (cr)
ok

Replace the default parameters of the nvramc:

ok set–defaults (cr)

Start the station by booting the CCC CD–ROM:

ok boot net –rs (cr)

Startup takes less than 10 mn. The following messages are displayed:

Resetting...
(Display of the hardware release)
(Display of the software release)
Configuring the /devices directory
Configuring the /dev directory
INIT: SINGLE USER MODE
#

Install the sysclog tool then the system from the CCC (about 25 mn) as follows:

# cd /tmp (cr)

# rcp xxx.x.xxx.xx:/etc/installclog/sysclog . (cr) # xxx.x.xxx.xx is the CCC

Internet address number.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 119
 # ./sysclog (cr)

=========================================================
C E G E L E C EREP T3 @(#) sysclog 41.1 29/09/98
=========================================================
Formating /dev/dsk/c0t0d0 (system disk)
Formating /dev/dsk/c0t1d0 (user disk1)
... (depend of number of disk on station)
Creating file system on /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s0
... (depend of number of disk on station)
Copy from CCC
Restoration of /etc/installclog
Restoration of /opt/SUNWspro
Restoration of /opt/SUNWste
Restoration of /opt/pkgsunpc
Restoration of /opt/pkgvoyager
Restoration of /opt/SUNWmfwm
Restoration of /opt/pkgqfe
Restoration of /opt/Dataview
Restoration of /opt/apache
Restoration of /opt/theta
Restoration of /opt/pkghpnp
Restoration of /opt/pkgmagma
Restoration of /var/Patches
Installing packages
Installation of SUNWxxx... (installation of all SUN packages)
Installation of SunPC
Installation of Quad FastEthernet Driver Software
Building /local
Configuring the /devices directory
Configuring the /dev directory
End of first part. Rebooting...

You can consult log file /var/sadm/system/logs/install_log after reboot

The system configuration files have been copied from the CCC.
The station restarts and the following messages appear:

NOTE:
This operation creates an installation trace file
/var/sadm/system/logs/install_log. Refer to this file in the event of any problem.

syncing file systeme...done

rebooting ...
Resetting ...
...
Configuring network interface : le0
Hostname: wsxxxx
Configuring the /devices directory

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 120
 Configuring the /dev
Configuring the /devices directory (compatibility devices)

INIT: SINGLE USER MODE

Type Ctrl–d to proceed with normal startup,

(or give root password for system maintenance):

Entering System Maintenance Mode

First installation procedure...

Patch Clusters installation
2.5.1_Recommended Cluster installation
... (messages of patches installation)
Installation of 2.5.1_Recommended complete
2.5.1_y2000 Cluster installation
... (messages of patches installation)
Installation of 2.5.1_y2000 complete
Patch installation
Installing FX class
HPNP Installation (HPNP D.05.15)
X11 fonts installation

Do you want to restart in normal mode (y/n) y

System has to reboot now
...
The system is ready.

wsxxxx console login:

Three accounts are created in the station: exe,clg et root.

These accounts must have passwords.

Log into account root:

wsxxxx console login: root (cr)

Choose a new password: <passwd> (cr)
Re–enter new password: <passwd> (cr)
# exit (cr)

Log into account exe:

wsxxxx console login: exe (cr)

Choose a new password: <passwd> (cr)
Re–enter new password: <passwd> (cr)
exe $ exit (cr)

Log into account clg:

wsxxxx console login: clg (cr)

Choose a new password: <passwd> (cr)

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 121
 Re–enter new password: <passwd> (cr)
clg $

Logout by entering exit (cr) several times to display of the prompt:

wsxxxx console login:

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 122
9.6.2. Installing the Application

The adm tool, run on the CCC, is an interactive menu–based tool.

Operations performed using adm are recorded in the trace file adm_tr_xxx (where xxx is
the day of the year number) which is located in the directory /local/af/exe/dc.

9.6.2.1. Delivery and Installation of Application Software

Application software is delivered and installed on the CVS stations for each ” function”.
For detailed information regarding the functions on each CVS refer to the document
”CENTRALOG Installation Parameters”.

Start theadm tool from account exe on the CCC:

wsxxxx console login: exe (cr)

password: <passwd> (cr)

exe $ adm (cr)

The main menu is displayed. Select choice 3 (Deliver Cxx software).

Administration main menu
Define system parameters 1
Define system configuration 2
Deliver Cxx’s software 3
Install Cxx’s software 4
Make Cxx’s software 5
Administrator 6
<CR> to exit
Your choice ? 3 (cr)

Choice 3 displays a sub–menu. Select choice 5 (Update all stations).

Deliver Cxx software
Deliver from DAT 1
Deliver from software directory 2
Deliver from software reference 3
Define DEFNET 4
Update all stations 5
<CR> to return to previous menu
Your choice ? 5 (cr)

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 123
 Important: Delivery from a software directory via the network or from a software
reference is only possible on an open Centralog (these 2 options are not
available in the menu if the Centralog has been configured as closed).

Choice 5 is used to deliver the customization files and install the CENTRALOG functions
on the CVS stations. Another sub–menu is displayed. Select choice 1 (Update
configuration files).
Update remote stations
Update configuration files 1
Update software functions 2
Update all software functions 3
<CR> to return to previous menu
Your choice ? 1 (cr)

Choice 1 is used to update the configuration files on the remote CVS stations.

The adm tool proposes the stations to be updated.

Configuration update on wsxxxx (Y/N):
Respond y (cr) or n (cr) depending on whether the station proposed is to be updated or
not.

This question is asked for each CVS station installed on the project.

For each question the name of the station to be updated is proposed: wsxxxx

Return to the previous menu is automatic after the last station is processed. Select choice
3 (Update all software functions).
Update remote stations
Update configuration files 1
Update software functions 2
Update all softwares functions 3
Your choice ? 3 (cr)

Choice 3 is used to deliver and install all the CENTRALOG functions on the local
CCC/CVS station and on the remote CIS and CVS stations.

The adm tool proposes the stations to be updated.

Update all software on wsxxxx (Y/N) ?
Answer y (cr) or n (cr) depending on whether the station proposed is to be updated or not.

This question is asked for each CIS and CVS station installed on the project.

For each question the name of the station to update is proposed: wsxxxx

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 124
 Each function is delivered and installed individually on the selected CVS station by means
of a dialogue
An example of the update of EXP and HDSR functions on a CVS is provided below. For
further information regarding the screen dialogues concerning standard and specific
functions refer to the document ”CENTRALOG Installation Parameters” .

EXP function:

Update of EXP software function on wsxxx

Deliver component p . . .
...
Update configuration on wsxxxx
Install component pblz
Install component pnsu
Execute oc/phza_EXP.sh installation file

Machine wsxxx:
Enter EXP station number []: 2 (cr)
(enter the operator station number type in microete)
EXP installation on wsxxxx OK

HDSR function:

Update HDSR software function on wsxxx

Deliver component p . . .
...
Update configuration on wsxxx
Execute oc/phbp_HDSR.sh installation file

Installation of HDSR . . .

Installation of HDSR complete.

HDSR installation on wsxxxx OK

After the update of the selected station, the next station (if there is one) is proposed.
Answer n (cr) for all the other stations.
Update all software on wsxxxx (Y/N) ? n (cr)
After the last station is processed, the following messages and questions are displayed.
Answer n (cr) for each desappli file proposed, as this action concerns the CCC and has
already been executed by restoring the BACKUPCLOG DAT.
Run of lhnc_SY05_CCC–S.sh installation shell script

Which desappli file do you want to install ?

[ lhnc_desappli.CXX.do] (y/n): n (cr)

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 125
 The previous menu is displayed automatically after the last update answer. Enter (cr) to
return to the previous menu.
Update remote stations
Update configuration files 1
Update software functions 2
Update all software functions 3
<CR> to return to previous menu
Your choice ? (cr)

The previous menu is displayed. Enter (cr) to return to the previous menu.
Deliver Cxx software
Deliver from DAT 1
Deliver from Software directory 2
Deliver from software reference 3
Define DEFNET 4
Update all stations 5
<CR> to return to previous menu
Your choice ? (cr)

The previous menu is displayed. Enter (cr) to quit the adm tool.
Administration main menu
Define system parameters 1
Define configuration 2
Deliver Cxx software 3
Install Cxx software 4
Make Cxx software 5
Administrator 6
< CR > to exit
Your choice ? (cr)

exe $

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 126
9.6.2.2. Updating the Mimics on Remote CVS Stations

To update the mimics on the remote CVS stations proceed as follows:

Start the CCC–S function on the station hosting the CCC:

Quit the exe login by using: <Ctrl> d then enter the following commands:

wsxxxx console login:clg (cr)

password: <passwd> (cr)

Wait until CCC startup procedure is completed. This procedure also starts the
CVS local to the station.

Position the cursor on screen #1 (left–hand screen) of the CCC. Press the
<Front> key to display the CCC window icons.

Click on ”Mimics Admin” in the configuration row of CCC.”

In the displayed menu, click on ”Update a EXP”

Click in the ”UPDATE A EXP” window on the ”Px” button associated to the CVS to
update then ”valid” in the window in the upper part of the screen (between 5 and
10 mn).

Px = number of CVS operator station from 1 to 8

Important; It is not necessary to update the ”P1” station hosting the CCC and EXP
functions. The update has been executed by restoring the BACKUPCLOG
DAT.

Acknowledge the message which appears in the window situated in the upper
part of the screen after the update is complete.

Start the remote CVS station:

wsxxxx console login: clg (cr) (for login under the clg account).

password: <passwd> (cr) (for starting the CVS station).

Wait until the CVS startup procedure is completed.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 127
9.7. ADJUSTING THE SCREENS

After a minimum of 20 minutes operation, switch off the monitors. Wait a few seconds
before switching them back on.

This operation demagnetizes the CRTs.

The screens can be adjusted by means of buttons located at the base of the screens.

Control LED

Adjust buttons On/off switch

Fig. 75 : Screen adjustment

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 128
10. INSTALLATION OF SCREEN COPY SOFTWARE
(SEIKO)

The screen copy printer is declared during installation of the system by sysclog (cf
9.4.2.).

The Chcopy software must be installed to implement the Seiko printer. As this software
admits a wide variety of configurations it is strongly recommended that you follow the
simplified installation procedure described in this chapter.

The printer may be connected as follows:

to a parallel port on a station. In this case the ChCopy software is configured only
on this station. The other stations access this printer by means of a network
spooler.

to the Centralog Ethernet network. In this case the ChCopy software is configured
on all the Centralog stations. The stations access this printer by means of a local
spooler installed by ChCopy.

The paragraph below deals with the installation of the SEIKO 7140 printer on an Ethernet
network.

HP printers do not require the following installation procedure.

10.1. INSTALLING THE SEIKO NETWORK PRINTER

Installing a SEIKO 7140 printer.

Important: The installation must be performed on all the stations hosting the screen copy
function. For the remote CVS stations use the command rlogin from a shell window on
the CCC.

Log into root account.

#cd /opt/theta/bin (cr)

#./thetainstall (cr)

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 129
 OemCopy_410 Solaris 95/06/20 12:35 Copyright THETA–scan 1991–1995
UNPROTECTED
***** OEM Licence accorded to:
***** [User]
***** [Company] CEGELEC

InstallCh_427 Thu Jun 22 13:01:01 GMT 1995

##################################
# PRINTER CONFIGURATION UTILITY #
##################################

1) Show known printers

2) Add a printer
3) Modify an existing printer
4) Delete a printer
5) Test a printer
q) Quit configuration procedure

Enter desired function –> 4 (cr) (if the menu displays this choice, otherwise the next menu
is displayed)

1 printer(s) installed

1) Seiko is a ch7104 PSF

Connection with server prn_srvr on printer 2501

Select a printer number (q to quit) –> 1 (cr)

###################################
# PRINTER CONFIGURATION UTILITY #
###################################

1) Add a printer
q) Quit configuration procedure

Enter desired function –> 1(cr)

#####################
# PRINTER SETUP #
#####################

Name of the spool printer ? (default = Seiko)

–> (cr)

Select installed printer:

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 130
 1) ch4104
2) ch5301
3) ch5303
4) ch5312
5) ch5504
6) ch5514
7) ch6104
8) ch7104
9) ch7114
10) ch7204
11) ch7214

–> 8 (cr)

Select installed board:

1) PSF: CH7104 Printer PSF Board PostScript Level 2

2) RSF: CH7104 Printer RSF Board Chgl LowCost SCSI

–> 1 (cr)

###########################
# CONNECTION SETUP #
###########################

Choose the printer connection ?

Network connection:

1) Printer server or remote host (Default)

Local port:

2) /dev/bpp0
3) /dev/tss5(scsi)
4) other parallel port
5) other scsi port

–> 1 (cr)

########################
# CONNECTION SETUP #
########################

Type of printers server ?

1) Seiko server: ns2034 (default)

2) Microplex server: m200
3) Emulex server: NETQue
4) Station server type BSD (Sun, Digital)

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 131
 5) Station server type SYS5 (Hp,Ibm,Solaris,Sgi)
6) Printer with ethernet board

–> 6 (cr)

#########################
# CONNECTION SETUP #
#########################

SERVER_TYPE: printer

Name of the printers server ? (default = ns2034)

–> <PES hostname> (cr) (e.g. ps0689)

###################
# SOFT SETUP #
###################

Current directory: /opt/theta/bin

Where do you want to install the working directory ?
This directory is used by ChCopy for temporaries files
(default: /usr/spool)
–>(cr)

####################
# SOFT SETUP #
####################

Memory available for chcopy in KBytes ? (default = 100 KBytes)

–> (cr)

All the parameters are displayed for confirmation and a print test is started.

### PRINTER SETUP ###

Spool name: seps0689 Printer model: ch7104
Board type : PSF

### CONNECTION SETUP ###

Device name: /dev/null Server type: printer
Server name: ps0689 Remote print: PSF

### SOFT SETUP ###

Available memory: 100 KBytes
Working directory: /usr/spool
Theta home directory: /opt/theta

Is this configuration correct ? (y, n or q)

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 132
 –> y (cr)
destination ”seps0689” now accepting requests
printer ”seps0689” now enabled
Do you want to test the printer (default n) [y,n] ? y (cr)
Running test for OemCopy software

paper_format

1) A4
2) A4L (default)
3) A
4) Legal
5) Super–A4

Your choice (q to quit) ? 1 (cr)

ink_sheet

1) 1
2) 3 (default)
3) 4

Your choice (q to quit) ? 2 (cr)

request id is seps0689–xxx (standard input)

####################################
# PRINTER CONFIGURATION UTILITY #
####################################

1) Show known printers

2) Add a printer
3) Modify an existing printer
4) Delete a printer
5) Test a printer
q) Quit configuration procedure

Enter desired function –> q (cr)

Quit root account by entering <CTRL> d.

10.2. INSTALLING A SEIKO PRINTER ON THE PARALLEL PORT

The SEIKO 7104 printer is installed on a parallel port as follows:

on the server station (where it is connected) by following procedure

AUCUN LIEN

on client stations by following procedure AUCUN LIEN

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 133
 The spooler name takes the form sewsxxxx, wsxxxx corresponding to the name of the
host station. In the example below the printer is connected to station ws0907 and is
accessed from station ws0908.

10.2.1. INSTALLATION ON THE SERVER STATION

Log into account root on station ws0907

# cd /opt/theta/bin
# ./thetainstall
OemCopy_410 Solaris 95/07/21 11:36 Copyright THETA–scan 1991–1995
UNPROTECTED
***** OEM Licence accorded to:
***** [User]
***** [Company] CEGELEC

InstallCh_431 Fri Jul 21 11:38:15 MET DST 1995

########################################
# PRINTER CONFIGURATION UTILITY #
########################################

1) Add a printer
q) Quit configuration procedure

Enter desired function –> 1

###########################
# PRINTER SETUP #
###########################

Name of the spool printer ? (default = Seiko)

–> sews0907

Select installed printer:

1) ch4104
2) ch5301
3) ch5303
4) ch5312
5) ch5504
6) ch5514
7) ch6104
8) ch7104
9) ch7114
10) ch7204
11) ch7214
–> 8

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 134
 Select installed board:

1) PSF: CH7104 Printer PSF Board PostScript Level 2

2) RSF: CH7104 Printer RSF Board Chgl LowCost SCSI

–> 1
###########################
# CONNECTION SETUP #
###########################

Choose the printer connection ?

Network connection:

1) Printer server or remote host (Default)

Local port:

2) /dev/bpp0
3) /dev/tss5(scsi)
4) other parallel port
5) other scsi port

–> 2

###########################
# SOFT SETUP #
###########################

Current directory: /opt/theta/bin

Where do you want to install the working directory ?
This directory is used by ChCopy for temporaries files
(default: /usr/spool)

–>
###########################
# SOFT SETUP #
###########################

Memory available for chcopy in KBytes ? (default = 100 KBytes)

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 135
 –>

### PRINTER SETUP ###

Spool name: sews0907 Printer model: ch7104
Board type : PSF

### CONNECTION SETUP ###

Device name: /dev/bpp0 Server type: parallel
Server name: ws0907 Remote print:

### SOFT SETUP ###

Available memory: 100 KBytes
Working directory: /usr/spool
Theta home directory: /opt/theta

Is this configuration correct ? (y, n or q)

–> y
destination ”sews0907” now accepting requests
printer ”sews0907” now enabled
Do you want to test the printer (default n) [y,n] ?

########################################
# PRINTER CONFIGURATION UTILITY #
########################################

1) Show known printers

2) Add a printer
3) Modify an existing printer
4) Delete a printer
5) Test a printer
q) Quit configuration procedure

Enter desired function –> q

#

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 136
10.2.2. INSTALLATION ON A CLIENT STATION

Log into account root on station ws0908

# cd /opt/theta/bin
# ./thetainstall
OemCopy_410 Solaris 95/07/21 11:36 Copyright THETA–scan 1991–1995
UNPROTECTED
***** OEM Licence accorded to:
***** [User]
***** [Company] CEGELEC

InstallCh_431 Fri Jul 21 11:38:15 MET DST 1995

########################################
# PRINTER CONFIGURATION UTILITY #
########################################

1) Add a printer
q) Quit configuration procedure

Enter desired function –> 1

###########################
# PRINTER SETUP #
###########################

Name of the spool printer ? (default = Seiko)

–> sews0907

Select installed printer:

1) ch4104
2) ch5301
3) ch5303
4) ch5312
5) ch5504
6) ch5514
7) ch6104
8) ch7104
9) ch7114
10) ch7204
11) ch7214

–> 8

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 137
 Select installed board:

1) PSF: CH7104 Printer PSF Board PostScript Level 2

2) RSF: CH7104 Printer RSF Board Chgl LowCost SCSI

–> 1
###########################
# CONNECTION SETUP #
###########################

Choose the printer connection ?

Network connection:

1) Printer server or remote host (Default)

Local port:

2) /dev/bpp0
3) /dev/tss5(scsi)
4) other parallel port
5) other scsi port

–> 1

###########################
# CONNECTION SETUP #
###########################

Type of printers server ?

1) Seiko server: ns2034 (default)

2) Microplex server: m200
3) Emulex server: NETQue
4) Station server type BSD (Sun, Digital)
5) Station server type SYS5 (Hp,Ibm,Solaris,Sgi)
6) Printer with ethernet board

–> 5
###########################
# CONNECTION SETUP #
###########################

SERVER_TYPE: sys5

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 138
 Name of the printers server ? (default = sys5)

–> ws0907
###########################
# CONNECTION SETUP #
###########################

SERVER_TYPE: sys5

SERVER_NAME: ws0907

Name of the remote spool ?

(Default:sews0907)
–>
###########################
# SOFT SETUP #
###########################

Do you want to install the filter locally ? (default = y)

–>
###########################
# SOFT SETUP #
###########################

Current directory: /opt/theta/bin

Where do you want to install the working directory ?
This directory is used by ChCopy for temporaries files
(default: /usr/spool)

–>
###########################
# SOFT SETUP #
###########################

Memory available for chcopy in KBytes ? (default = 100 KBytes)

–>

### PRINTER SETUP ###

Spool name: sews0907 Printer model: ch7104
Board type : PSF

### CONNECTION SETUP ###

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 139
 Device name: /dev/null Server type: sys5
Server name: ws0907 Remote print: sews0907

### SOFT SETUP ###

Available memory: 100 KBytes Local filter: y
Working directory: /usr/spool
Theta home directory: /opt/theta

Is this configuration correct ? (y, n or q)

–> y
destination ”sews0907” now accepting requests
printer ”sews0907” now enabled
Do you want to test the printer (default n) [y,n] ?

########################################
# PRINTER CONFIGURATION UTILITY #
########################################

1) Show known printers

2) Add a printer
3) Modify an existing printer
4) Delete a printer
5) Test a printer
q) Quit configuration procedure

Enter desired function –> q

#

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 140
11. INSTALLATION OF COMPILER LICENCES
(OPTION)

These licenses must be installed before starting the CCC station, i.e. before logging into
clg.

To install the Solaris licence proceed as follows:

wsxxxx login: root (cr)

password: <passwd> (cr)
# uname –a (cr)
SunOS wsxxxx 5.5.1 Generic_103640–02 sun4m sparc SUNW,
SPARCstation–5
#

Note the hostname of the station (wsxxxx).

# /etc/sysdef –h (cr)
*
* Hostid
*
72783228
#

Note the hostid of the station (72783228).

Installation of the Solaris license:

# cd /usr/local/Solaris (cr)
# rm license.dat (cr)
# vi license.dat (cr)

Input the following lines:

SERVER <hostname> <hostid>

<the lines which are specified in the document ”CENTRALOG installation
parameters”>

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 141
 Save modifications by the command:

:wq (cr)
#

# cd /etc/rc2.d (cr)
# vi S85lmgrd (cr)

Input the following lines:

echo ”Starting SparcWorks license Server”

/opt/SUNWste/bin/lmgrd.ste –c
/usr/local/Solaris/license.dat > /dev/null 2>&1 &

Save modifications by the command:

:wq (cr)
#

# chmod u+x S85lmgrd (cr)

# /etc/rc2.d/S85lmgrd (cr)
#

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 142
12. BACKING UP AND RESTORING THE SOFTWARE

12.1. INTRODUCTION

After any modification to the database or to mimics, the software must be backed up onto
a magnetic medium.

This backup will subsequently be used in place of the original software to reload the
system if necessary.

Software is backed up onto DAT (Digital Audio Tape) cartridges.

Two copies of the backup should be made. These copies should be stored in different
places for obvious security reasons.

12.2. OPERATIVE MODE

The backup is performed on the station running the CCC function.

All the man/machine interfaces on this station must be stopped before the backup can be
performed.

Quit MOTIF by depressing the right mouse button in the gray background area and by
selecting ”EXIT” then ”EXIT”.

12.3. DESCRIPTION OF THE BACKUPCLOG TOOL

The backup tool is used to backup and restore the directory tree of a CCC (except the
system part) using a DAT identified as BACKUPCLOG.

In the event of a CCC disk crash, the BACKUPCLOG DAT and the SYSCLOG DAT can
be used to restore the system to the state it was in at the time the backup was executed. It
is not necessary to reinstall the software, and the configurations remain present. The
database does not therefore need to be regenerated.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 143
12.4. BACKUP

The backupclog tool must be start under the CCC account ”root”.
IMPORTANT: All the interfaces must be stopped (EXP and CCC).

wsxxxx console login: root (cr)

password: <passwd> (cr)

# backupclog (cr)

Answer the questions as follows:

Do you want to backup your disks to DAT (y/n) ? y (cr)

Please insert your DAT and press return ...

Insert a DAT and when the LED shows steady green press (cr) to start the backup.

All the disk partitions are backed up except the system partitions which are on the
SYSCLOG cartridge.

12.5. RESTORE

The BACKUPCLOG may be restored from DAT in the following cases:

restore a CCC after a disk crash.

In this case, it is necessary to execute a complete installation of the system using

the SOLARIS CD–ROM and the SYSCLOG DAT. When the installation is
completed answer the following questions:
Do you want to use an installation DAT (y/n) ? y (cr)
Insert a BACKUPCLOG DAT when the following message appears:
Please insert your DAT and press return ...
When the LED shows steady green press (cr) to start the restore.
”Do you want to restore directory /local ( Y/N)” ? y (cr)
...
”Do you want to restore directory /local/af ( Y/N)”? y (cr)

restoring a CCC without a disk crash.

In this case, reboot the station with the following command under the root
account reboot ” –s” and then answer the following questions:

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 144
 Type Ctrl–d to proceed with normal startup,
(or give root password for system maintenance): (cr)
Entering system Maintenance Mode
Do you want to define your Centralog configuration (y/n) ? n (cr)
Do you want to use an installation DAT (y/n) ? y (cr)
Insert the BACKUPCLOG DAT when the following message appears:
Please insert your DAT and press return ...
Press (cr) to start the restore.
”Do you want to restore directory /local ( Y/N)” ? y (cr)
...
”Do you want to restore directory /local/af ( Y/N)”? y (cr)
After the restore on the CCC station, it is necessary to update the other CENTRALOG
stations. Refer to the chapter AUCUN LIEN of this document.

IMPORTANT: The BACKUPCLOG DAT must have been produced on a CCC identical to
the CCC on which it is to be restored. In particular, the disk configurations and the
SYSCLOG versions must be identical.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 145
13. STARTING THE CENTRALOG

13.1. INTRODUCTION

A warm system startup implies that the software is already correctly installed.
To warm start the CENTRALOG system proceed as follows:

start the peripherals

For a CENTRALOG C30 or C50

— Start the CCC operator station
— Start the CIS
— Start the CVS operator stations

For a CENTRALOG C10
— Start the CCC function
— Start the EXP function

13.2. STARTING THE PERIPHERALS

Power up the peripherals (printers etc ...).

13.3. STARTING THE CCC OPERATOR STATION

Switch on the monitors and the station, then the various associated hardware devices
(DAT drive unit, etc.).

The UNIX system start commands are displayed on screen. Enter the following command
when the login prompt appears on the monitor 1:

wsxxxx console login: clg (cr) (log on the clg account).

password: <passwd> (cr)

The other monitors on the station will light up and the station will start automatically.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 146
 The first station monitor displays:

CEGELEC

Cxx

MIMIC – CCC

SEQUENCE STARTUP

Please wait

The station then displays the CCC interface.

The EXP function will start automatically. Wait until the EXP man/machine interface is
displayed.

Check that the cursor can be moved from one monitor to the other by using the mouse or
the track–ball.

13.4. STARTING THE CIS

This paragraph only concerns CENTRALOG C30 or C50.

Power up the CIS and the VT100 by means of the power switch.

On the VT100 terminal , the station scrolls through all the UNIX system commands. Enter
the following command line at the prompt:

wsxxxx login: clg (cr) (log in to account clg).

password: <passwd> (cr)

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 147
13.5. STARTING THE CVS OPERATOR STATIONS

Switch on the monitors and the station.

The UNIX system start commands are displayed on screen. Enter the following command
when the login prompt appears on the monitor 1:

wsxxxx login: clg (cr) (log on the clg account).

password: <passwd> (cr)

The other monitors on the station will light up and the station will start automatically.

The station monitors display:

CEGELEC

CENTRALOG
ALSPA P320

EXP

Loading in progress

Please wait

Wait until the EXP man/machine interface is displayed.

Check that the cursor can be moved from one monitor to the other by using the mouse or
the track–ball.

If the CIS is running, the EXP ”OPERATOR STATION” windows changes color from red to
salmon pink.
The operator station is ready to use.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 148
14. STOPPING THE CENTRALOG

14.1. INTRODUCTION

To shut down the CENTRALOG system proceed as follows:

— Start the CCC operator station
— Start the CIS
— Start the CVS operator stations

For a CENTRALOG C30 or C50
— Stop the CVS operator stations
— Stop the CCC operator station
— Stop the CIS

For a CENTRALOG C10
— Stop the EXP and HDSR functions
— Stop the CCC function

stop the peripherals

14.2. STOPPING THE CVS OPERATOR STATIONS

From the EXP interface of each screen, click on the ”SYS” button with the left–hand
button on the mouse or trackball.

Then click on the ”STOP” button.

The different station interfaces (EXP, etc...) will stop.

Quit MOTIF by depressing the right mouse button on the gray background area of the
screen and by selecting ”EXIT” then ”EXIT”.

clg kxob $ exit (cr) (return to the station prompt).

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 149
 wsxxxx console login: root (cr) (log into the root account).

password: <passwd> (cr)

# init 0 (cr) (stop the operating system).

...
...
Program terminated
...
ok

The operating system is then stopped.

Switch off the station.

Switch off the monitors.

14.3. STOPPING THE CCC OPERATOR STATION

From the EXP interface of each screen, click on the ”SYS” button with the left mouse
button or trackball.

Click on the ”STOP” button.

The CCC man/machine interface is displayed.

From the CCC interface, select ”CENTRALOG admin” then ”Stop CCC”. Confirm by
clicking on ”Valid”.

The CCC interface on the station stops.

Place the cursor in the gray background area of the screen and depress the right mouse
button. Select ”EXIT” then ”EXIT” before releasing the button.

When the prompt is displayed on the monitor 1, enter the following commands:

clg kxob $ exit (cr) (return to the station prompt).

wsxxxx console login: root (cr) (log in to the root account).

password: <passwd> (cr)

# init 0 (cr) (stop the operating system).

...
...
Program terminated
...
ok

The operating system is then stopped.

Switch off the station and the monitors, followed by the other hardware devices (DAT
drive, etc.).

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 150
14.4. STOPPING THE CIS

This paragraph only concerns CENTRALOG C30 or C50.

On the VT100 terminal connected to the CIS, input:

qt (cr) (to return to the station prompt).

wsxxx console login: root (cr) (log into account root).

password: <passwd> (cr)

# init 0 (cr) (to stop the operating system).

...
...
Program terminated
...
ok

The operating system is stopped.

Power off the CIS and the VT100 terminal.

14.5. STOPPING THE PERIPHERALS

Switch off all the peripheral hardware devices.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 151
15. MAINTENANCE

15.1. REPLACING A CCC SUN STATION

Two cases may occur:

replacement of the SUN station only (by replacing both disks in the new station
with the disks of the failed station):
This replacement does not require a new installation. The system will restart
normally.

replacing the SUN station and at least 1 disk:

In this case it is necessary to perform a complete new installation. See 9.4.
Sheet 107.

15.2. REPLACING A CVS SUN STATION

This paragraph only concerns CENTRALOG C30 or C50.

Proceed as follows:

Insert the SOLARIS 2.x CD–ROM into the drive on the CCC station.

Replace the faulty CVS station and then power up the new station. When the
memory initialization message is displayed press the ”Stop” and ”A” keys
simultaneously.
The monitor prompt appears: ok

On the CCC: stop the station and modify its configuration as follows:

Quit the EXP function if it is running, and quit the CCC function.

Quit MOTIF by depressing the right mouse button in the gray background area of
the screen and by selecting ”EXIT” then ”EXIT”.

Log into account root by entering the following commands:

wsxxxx console login: root (cr)
password: <passwd> (cr)
#

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 152
 Reboot the station in single user mode by entering the following command:
# reboot ” –rs” (cr)
Enter (cr) to switch to maintenance mode after the following message:
Type Ctrl–d to proceed with normal startup,
(or give root password for system maintenance): (cr)
Answer ”y” to the question:
Do you want to define your Centralog configuration (y/n) ? y (cr)
A dialogue enables the existing configuration to be modified. Enter the Ethernet
address of the new station that can be identified on screen during the reboot in
place of the Ethernet address of the previous station.
Ex: 8:0:20:19:39:bc

After confirming the new configuration, answer ”n” to the question:

Do you want to use an installation DAT (y/n) ? n (cr)
The CCC station will reboot and display the prompt ”wsxxxx console login: ”.

Start the operating system on the new CVS station.

— If the disk s new on the station install the operating system on the new CVS
station as follows:
Boot from the CD–ROM via the network by entering the following commands:
# set–defaults (cr)
# boot net –rs (cr)
Wait approximately 10 mn until the root prompt displays and install the
operating system by entering the following commands:
# cd /tmp (cr)
# rcp xxx.x.xxx.xx:/etc/installclog/sysclog . (cr) # xxx.x.xxx.xx
# is the CCC
# Internet address
# ./sysclog (cr)
Then wait about 25 mn until the installation is completed and enter (cr) to
switch to maintenance mode after the following message:
Type Ctrl–d to proceed with normal startup,
(or give root password for system maintenance): (cr)
Answer ”y” to the question:
Do you want to restart in normal mode (y/n) ? y (cr)
The station will reboot and display the prompt ”wsxxxx console login:”.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 153
 Enter the password of accounts root, exe et clg.
Log into account root by entering the following commands:
wsxxxx console login: root (cr)
Choose a new password: <passwd> (cr)
Re–enter new password: <passwd> (cr)
#
Log into account exe by entering the following commands:
# SU exe (cr)
Choose a new password: <passwd> (cr)
Re–enter new password: <passwd> (cr)
exe $
Log into account clg by entering the following commands:
exe $ SU clg (cr)
Choose a new password: <passwd> (cr)
Re–enter new password: <passwd> (cr)
clg $
Logout by entering exit (cr) several times to display the prompt:
”wsxxxx console login:”.
— If the disk comes from the old station boot the station from this disk by
entering the following command:
# boot (cr)
The station will reboot and display the prompt ”wsxxxx console login:”.

From the CCC station, update of the new CVS station as follows:

Log into the exe account by entering the following commands:

wsxxxx console login: exe (cr)
password: <passwd> (cr)
$
Then enter the command:
$ adm (cr)
The main menu of the adm tool is displayed, select the choice 3:
Deliver Cxx software
A sub–menu is displayed, select the choice 4:
Update remote station
A level 2 sub–menu is displayed, select the choice 1:
Update configuration files
Configuration update on wxxxx (Y/N):
Perform the update only on the station in question (the new CVS station).

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 154
 Then in the level 2 sub–menu, select the choice 3:
Update all software functions
Update all software on wxxxx (Y/N):
Install the functions only on the station in question (the new CVS station). Refer to
the document ”CENTRALOG Installation Parameters” for further information
regarding dialogues.

After the last station is processed, the following messages and questions are
displayed. Answer n (cr) for each desappli file proposed, as this action concerns
the CCC.
Run of phks_SY05_CCC–S.sh installation shell script
Which desappli file do you want to install ?
[. . . desappli . . . .do] (y/n): n (cr)
Quit the adm tool by pressing (cr) repeatedly.

Quit the exe account by <Ctrl> D: the prompt ”wsxxxx console login:” is
displayed.

Restart the CCC by entering the following commands:

wsxxxx console login: clg (cr)
password: <passwd> (cr)

If the disk is new on the station update the mimics of the new CVS station as
follows:
Position the cursor on screen #1 (left–hand screen) of the CCC–S. Press the
<Front> key to display the CCC window icons.
Click on ”Mimics Admin” in the configuration row of CCC.”
In the displayed menu, click on ”Update a EXP”
Click in the ”UPDATE A EXP” window on the ”Px” button associated to the
CVS to update, then validate in the window in the upper part of the screen
(between 5 and10 mn).
Px = number of CVS operator station include between 1 and 8
Acknowledge the message which appears in the window situated at the
upper part of the screen when the update is ended.

On the new CVS station proceed to its restart as follows:
wsxxxx console login: clg (cr) (for login under the clg account).
password: <passwd> (cr) (for starting the CVS station).
Wait until the CVS startup is completed.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 155
16. PROCESSING ANOMALIES

Any anomaly in delivery, software, hardware or documentation regarding the

CENTRALOG system must be the subject of an Anomaly Report.

Anomalies are processed as detailed in the document: ”CENTRALOG Anomaly

Processing Procedure”.

.
PTP09–A42400–V4 E C REV C
CENTRALOG Installation and Implementation Manual Sheet 156

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 1 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

SYSTEM ALSPA P-320

CENTRALOG OPERATION MANUAL

 SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
Contracting POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
Industrial System & Services SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Oil and Gas Department Page 2 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

GENERAL INDEX

1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................ 5

1.1 Introduction. ................................................................................................................................................ 5

1.2 Manual Organization ............................................................................................................................... 5

1.3 Reference Documentation ....................................................................................................................... 5

2 CENTRALOG WORK STATION .............................................................................. 7

2.1 Definition ....................................................................................................................................................... 7

2.2 Components .................................................................................................................................................. 7

2.3 Hardware....................................................................................................................................................... 7

3 STARTING THE CENTRALOG ............................................................................... 8

3.1 Light on the Centralog CCC/CVS1 .................................................................................................... 8

3.2 Start up of the CIS1 Centralog ............................................................................................................. 8

3.3 Start up of the Centralog CIS2 ............................................................................................................. 8

3.4 Start up of the Centralog CVS2 ........................................................................................................... 9

4 TURNING OFF THE CENTRALOG ....................................................................... 10

4.1 Stop of the CVS2 Centralog ................................................................................................................. 10

4.2 Stop of the CCC/CVS1 Centralog ..................................................................................................... 10

4.3 Stop of the CIS1 Centralog .................................................................................................................. 11

4.4 Stop of the CIS2 Centralog .................................................................................................................. 11

5 MA - MACHINE INTERFACE ................................................................................ 12

5.1 Entrance ....................................................................................................................................................... 12

5.2 Access Levels .............................................................................................................................................. 12

 SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
Contracting POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
Industrial System & Services SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Oil and Gas Department Page 3 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

6 CENTRALOG DEPLOYMENT ............................................................................... 15

6.1 Presentation ................................................................................................................................................ 15

6.2 General screen ........................................................................................................................................... 15

6.3 MV-OVW Screen ..................................................................................................................................... 15

6.4 GT-ABC Screen ........................................................................................................................................ 16

6.5 SG-1 Screen ................................................................................................................................................ 16

6.6 LV-OVW Screen ...................................................................................................................................... 17

6.7 P320 Screen ................................................................................................................................................ 17

6.8 CTRL-ABC Screen .................................................................................................................................. 17

6.9 D 4103 Screen ............................................................................................................................................ 18

7 FUNCTIONS OF OPERATION ............................................................................... 18

8 ALARMS OF THE CENTRALOG........................................................................... 19

8.1 View of the Alarms & Events .............................................................................................................. 19

8.2 Recognition ................................................................................................................................................. 19

9 EDITIONS ............................................................................................................... 20

10 MAN MACHINE EXP INTERFACE / ANIMATION SYMBOLS AND PROTOCOLS

21
10.1 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................... 21

10.2 STANDARD SYMBOLS AND ANIMATION PROTOCOLS .................................................................. 22

10.3 CONTROL WINDOWS................................................................................................................................ 24

10.4 GLOSSARY.................................................................................................................................................... 25

APPENDIXES ............................................................................................................... 30
A.1. STANDARD SYMBOLS ............................................................................................................................... 30

A.2. STANDARD ANIMATION PROTOCOLS ................................................................................................ 31

 SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
Contracting POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
Industrial System & Services SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Oil and Gas Department Page 4 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

A.3. CONTROL WINDOWS ............................................................................................................................ 36


Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 5 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL

1.1 Introduction.
The purpose of the present document is to present the CENTRALOG Operations Manual that is
the work station of the Alspa P-320 system, provided by the Contractor (ALSTOM ISS) in the
frame of the following project:
Project: Upstream Surface Facilities Project Power Generation
Client: SINCOR C.A.
Contract: N° C-TO-12-2/3/4
The document is addressed to the personnel of Operations, and it seeks to give to the operators
the necessary basic knowledge for the handling of the Centralog C-30.

1.2 Manual Organization

The present manual is conformed in the following way:

Chapter 1: About this Manual Introduction and organization of the Operation

Manual.
Chapter 2: Centralog Working Station Centralog definition, hardware and basic
function.
Chapter 3: Starting the Centralog Description of how to start the Centralog.
Chapter 4: Turning off the Centralog Description of how to turn off the Centralog.
Chapter 5: Man - Machine Interface How to enter the Centralog for operation.
Chapter 6: Deploy (Mimic) It contains a brief description of the unfoldings
that conform the system.
Chapter 7: Operation Functions Description of the basic operation functions.
Chapter 8: Alarms Description and basic characteristics of the
alarms.
Chapter 9: Editions Description and basic characteristics of the
reports.
Chapter 10 Operation Manual Description of all items in the mimics

1.3 Reference Documentation

OPERATION OF THE CENTRALOG SYSTEM (INTRODUCTION)
RE: PTP09-A42065–V4

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 6 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

CENTRALOG MAN – MACHINE INTERFACE USER’s MANUAL

RE: PTP09-A42066–V4
ARCHIVE FUNCTION USER’s MANUAL
RE: PTP09-A42058–V4

GENERAL ARCHITECTURE DRAWING (EMCS)

CA 12-05-32-PDR-418

FDS CENTRALOG DISPLAYS

CA 12-05-32-PDR-408

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 7 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

2 CENTRALOG WORK STATION

2.1 Definition
The Centralog workstation represents the Man/Machine Interface system. It provides to the
operator a complete range of screens for the control and surveillance of plants, with the easiness
of offering a deep analysis of the process. Among the available views there are alarms and
process screens, graphs of curves, bars and tendencies, groups and operative units.
It allows the modification of the architecture in the time, adding new operation stations, new
peripherals or new entrances to other systems, to permit a continuous development of the
installation without perturbing the initial system.
2.2 Components

In accordance with the general architecture of the system shown in the figure 1, the supervision
of the Power Generation Plant is composed by two independent workstations. Both receive the
process information through the redundant S8000 net and they are connected to each other by
means of an Ethernet net.
Centralog: CCC-S/CVS1 Configuration (Centralog Configuration Center)
It is located in the G/S-01 Substation, executed from a workstation that also carries out the
functions of the CVS2. It contains the standard software to configure, to modify and to store
the database and the unfoldings. This station will be used in the configuration, maintenance
and exploitation phases.
Operator: CVS2 Centralog (Video Centralog Station)
It is the standard operation station and it is located in the Control Room. It consists on a
workstation that executes the Man- Machine Interface function and it is the station where one
will usually work. It uses the same information gathered by the CVS1 station, to allow the
station to show the values in the screen.

2.3 Hardware
The Centralog workstations to be used are of the C30 type. They are designed for medium
applications that give a standard integrated group of functions.
The given equipment consist on a SUN SPARK station with:
ULTRA SUN 5 Central, model unit.
Monitor of 21” inches,
Standard keyboard and an indicative device (Mouse).
For detailed information about equipment see documentation: Centralog & Controcad Hardware,
Indexes: PTP09-A42214, Volume 5.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 8 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

3 STARTING THE CENTRALOG

Before starting the Centralog it should be verified that the peripherals (printer, HUB's, repeaters)
are lit. It should also be verified that the monitor for the servers CIS is activated.

3.1 Light on the Centralog CCC/CVS1

Light the monitor and the DAT associated to the central unit.
If the message OK is displayed on the screen switch off the SUN workstation by the switch on
the backside.
Switch on the SUN workstation CVS1 using the switch on the backside.
If the registration sign appears in the screen, enter the following:

ws0410 console login: clg (press the key enter d )

password: clg_c1 (press the key enter d )

You will be able to read the following in the screen:

POWER GENERATION
MIMIC –CCC
SEQUENCE STARTUP
Please wait
Then the terminal shows the CCC interface start the CIS1 server (see 3.2)
The EXP function will begin automatically. To use CVS1 wait until the Man- Machine EXP
Interface appears.

Verify that the cursor in the screen can be moved using the Mouse.

3.2 Start up of the CIS1 Centralog

Turn the Switch (located above the monitor) in “A” position and press the key <enter>.
If the message OK is displayed on the screen switch off the SUN workstation by the switch on
the backside.
Switch on the SUN workstation CIS1 by the switch on the backside.
In the terminal, the station details all the orders coming from the UNIX system. If the registration
sign appears in the screen, enter the following order:

ws0489 login: clg (press the key “enter” d )

password: clg_c1 (press the key “enter” d )

3.3 Start up of the Centralog CIS2

Turn the Switch (located above the monitor) in “B” position and press the key <enter>.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 9 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

If the message OK is dislayed on the screen switch off the SUN workstation by the switch on the
backside.
Switch on the SUN workstation CIS2 by the switch on the backside the workstation.
In the terminal the station details all the orders coming from the UNIX system. When the
registration sign appears in the screen enter the following order:

ws0490 login: clg (press the key enter d )

password: clg_c1 (press the key enter d )

3.4 Start up of the Centralog CVS2

Light the monitor.
If the message OK is dislayed on the screen switch off the SUN workstation by the switch on the
backside.
Switch on the SUN workstation CVS2 by the switch on the backside the workstation.
Orders of ignition of the UNIX system appear in the monitor. When the registration sign appears
in the screen enter the following order:

ws0413 console login: clg (press the key enter d)

password: clg_c1 (press the key enter d)

You will be able to read in the screen the following:

CENTRALOG
ALSPA P320
EXP
Loading in progress
Please wait

Wait until the Man-–Machine EXP interface is seen.

Verify that the cursor can be moved using the Mouse.

If the CIS works, the window EXP “OPERATOR STATION” changes of color, from red to pink.
The workstation is ready to be used.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 10 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

4 TURNING OFF THE CENTRALOG

4.1 Stop of the CVS2 Centralog

From the EXP interface of the screen, press the button “SYS” using the left button of the Mouse.

Press the “STOP” icon using the left button of the Mouse.
The interface of the EXP terminal will go out.
Leave the area of gray color pressing the right button of the mouse on the screen, select “EXIT”
then “EXIT” and confirm pressing the “OK.” Key.
In the terminal the station details all the orders of the UNIX system. When in the screen the
registration sign appears, enter the following order:
ws0413 console login: root (press the key “enter” d)

password: root_c1 (press the key “enter” d)

#init 0 (press the key enter d)

…
Program Terminated
…
ok
The operating system closes. Then turn off the terminal and the monitor.

4.2 Stop of the CCC/CVS1 Centralog

From the EXP interface of the screen, press the “SYS” icon using the left button of the Mouse.

Press the “STOP” icon using the left button of the Mouse.

The Man-Machine CCC Interface appears.

If necessary login to the CCC interface as:

User: alstom

Password: root_c1

From the CCC interface, select “CENTRALOG ADMIN” then “Stop CCC.” To confirm select
“Valid.”

The CCC interface of the terminal closes.

Leave the area of gray color pressing the right button of the mouse on the screen, select “EXIT”
then “EXIT.” Confirm pressing the “OK.” key

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 11 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

In the terminal, the station details all the orders coming from the UNIX system. When the
registration sign appears in the screen enter the following order:
ws0410 console login: root (press the key enter d)

password: root_c1 (press the key enter d)

#init 0 (press the key enter d)

…
Program Terminated
…
ok

The operating system closes. Then turn off the terminal, the monitor and the associatet DAT unit.

4.3 Stop of the CIS1 Centralog

With the Switch (located above the monitor) in “A” position, enter:
qt (press the key enter d)

ws0489 console login: root (press the key enter d )

password: root_c1 (press the key enter d )

#init 0 (press the key enter d )

…
Program Terminated
…
ok
The operating system closes. Then turn off the terminal.

4.4 Stop of the CIS2 Centralog

With the Switch (located above the monitor) in “B” position, enter:
qt (press the key enter d )

ws0490 console login: root (press the key enter d )

password: root_c1 (press the key enter d )

#init 0 (press the key enter d
…
Program Terminated
…
ok

The operating system closes. Then turn off the terminal and finally the FALCO monitor.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 12 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

5 MA - MACHINE INTERFACE

5.1 Entrance
After starting the CVS, in the computer the EXP interface automatically appears. The selection of
the Access Level is necessary. The selection of the Access Level is important since it allows the
user to carry out operations, depending on his access level.

5.2 Access Levels

The application developed for this project contains an algorithm designed to allow the access to
the workstation by many users, for each one of them different actions exist. According to the
access level certain functions are enabled or disabled.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 13 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

When nobody has introduced his Access Level the access level is 0 and only some basick
functions are available. Recognition actions and modification of parameters cannot be carried out
unless the access level selection is executed.

The following access levels to the Centralog have been defined, from the lowest to the highest
level:

Three Levels of “Operator”

Two Levels of “System Engineer”

Here below a reference chart is presented to indicate the possible activities that users can carry
out, depending on their access level.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
LEVEL DESCRIPTION
1 Operator
2 Operator
3 Operator
4 and 5 System Engineer
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 14 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL
ACTIVITIES
To visualize the unfoldings
Recognition and impression of alarms.
Operator 1 Level, plus:
Carry out “Black Start”, “Start/Stop”, “Fuel Change Over”
operations.
Level Operator 2, plus:
pull up the system Centralog (Section N° 3).
turn off the system Centralog (Section N°4).
modify values of Sep-point.
place the switches in Manual way.
modify parameters of specific functions: “you Laud
Sharing” and “you Laud Shedding.”
Generation of Reports.
Level Operator 3, plus:
Stop or modify the operation of the storage of historical
data.
Consent to the DV-DRAW application to modify the
Mimic.
Access to the UNIX operating system.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 15 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

6 CENTRALOG DEPLOYMENT

6.1 Presentation
The Centralog contains unfoldings linked to each other that give the operator the necessary
information for taking preventive actions in the Power Generation Plant. Each unfolding
possesses a series of sensitive points, buttons or function keys that allow the operator the
connection with other unfoldings Among the main screens we list the following ones:

SCREEN FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTION

GENERAL F1 POWER GENERATION GENERAL VIEW
MV-OVW F2 34.5 KV OVERVIEW
GT-ABC F3 34.5 KV INCOMING
SG-1 F4 34.5 KV OUTGOING
LV-OVW F5 AUXILIARIES
P320 F6 ALSPA P320 SYSTEM
CTRL-ABC F7 CONTROL VIEW FOR GAS TURBINE
D-4103 F12 D-4103 FUEL TANK

6.2 General screen

It is the unfolding with which the Centralog application begins.
The reserve and total active power of the generation system are shown.
You can see the state (RUNNING/READY TO START, NOT READY TO START,
Manual/Automatic), acknowledgement of alarms, the reserve and total active power of
each turbine.
Operator has access to the listing of parameters of each turbine.
No operation action on the turbines.
Operator doesn't have access to the other screens.

6.3 MV-OVW Screen

From here they can observe the state (Manual/Auto, Open/Close, Normal/Alarm) of
Entrance and Joining Switches (1A-01, 1A-02, 1A-04, 1B-02, 1B-04) and Exit (1A-07,
1A-08, 1A-09, 1B-06, 1B-07, 1B-08, 1B-09) of the board 32-SG-1 of the Substation G/S-
01.
Voltage mensuration, active and reactive power of each turbine.
See what turbine(s) is operating (RUNNING).
The position (open/closed) of the Neutral point insulating Switches (EE-3A, EE-3B, EE-
3C, EE-3D, EE-4A, EE-4B, EE-4C) and switches (Q400A, Q400B, Q400C) of each
turbine.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 16 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

Visualize if the transformers (32-TR-1A, 32-TR-1B, 32-TR-1C) present any trip (TRIP)
or alarms (ALARM).
No operation on the turbines and on the switches.
Access to the GT-ABC, SG-1, LV-OVW.

6.4 GT-ABC Screen

From here they can observe the state (Local/Remote, Manual/Auto, Open/Close,
Normal/Alarm) of the Switches of Entrance and Connection of the 32-SG-1 board of the
Substation G/S-01.
Change Manual/Auto control mode of the switches of Entrance and Connection of the
board 32-SG-1 of the Substation G/S-01.
In Automatic mode, switches act according to the sequency logic defined for the
Centralog.
In Manual mode, only Operator can open or close each switch.
See what turbine(s) are running (RUNNING).
The position (open/close) of the Neutral point insulating Switches (EE-3A, EE-3B, EE-
3C, EE-3D, EE-4A, EE-4B, EE-4C).
The position (open/close) of the turbine switches (Q400A, Q400B, Q400C).
See the Voltage and Frequency of the bars A & B of the 32-SG-1 board, as well as the
“AVAIBILITY” indication when measurement is not correct.
No operation on the turbines nor exit switches of the 32-SG-1 board.
See if the transformers (32-TR-1A, 32-TR-1B, 32-TR-1C) present any trip (TRIP) or
alarm (ALARM).
Access to the screens MV-OVW, LV-OVW and CTRL-ABC.

6.5 SG-1 Screen

From here they can observe the state (Local/Remoto, Manual/Auto, Open/Close) of the
exit switches of the 32-SG-1 board.
See the state (Open/Close, Manual/Auto) of the Entrance and Connection switches.
Change of the exit switches from Manual or Automatic control.
In Auto mode, the switches act according to the logic of defined sequence for the
Centralog.
In Manual, only operator can open or close each exit switch.
See if the exit switches to the Clusters (1A-08, 1A-09, 1B-07, 1B-09) have the
“RECLOSER.” function
Read Voltage and Frequency of the bars A & B of the 32-SG-1 board, as well as the
indication “AVAIBILITY” when mensuration is not correct.
In the low part of the screen Power Factor canbe read, Current, Active & Reactive Power
of the exit switches of the 32-SG-1 board.
No operation action on the entrance switches and connection.
Access to the MV-OVW and LV-OVW screens.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 17 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

6.6 LV-OVW Screen

From here they can observe the state (Manual/Auto, Open/Close) of the entrance
switches and low-tension connection (2A-01, 2A-02 and 2B-07) of the board 32-SG-2.
Change the state of Manual control or Auto of the switches 2A-01, 2A-02 and 2B-07.
In Auto mode, exit switches act according to the logic of defined sequence for the
Centralog.
In Manual mode, only operator can open or close each switch individually.
See the state (Open/Close) of the switches: 2A-04, 2A-06, 2B-01, 2B-02, 2B-03, 2B-04,
2B-05, 2B-06.
Verify Voltage and Current that come from the 32-TR-2 auxiliary transformer and
emergency generator (SINCOR).
1 (32-DR-2)
Verify general alarm in the Panel 32-DP-351 (125 VDC), Panel 32-BP-331 (208/120
VAC) and Panel 32-BP-332 (120 VAC UPS).
Verify the state (Open/Close) of the switches Q501A/B/C and Q502A/B/C that feed the
Center of Control of Motors of the turbines (MCC-TO-508A/B/C).
Access to the MV-OVW, GT-ABC and SG-1 screens.

6.7 P320 Screen

From here operator can verify the state of the communication nets F8000, S8000,
Contronet and Ethernet involved in the system.
Verify the REDUNDANCY state of communication of the nets F8000 and S8000.
Verify if there is any general entry or exit general failure in the controllers CTRL 2,
CTRL 4 and CTRL 6 located in the cabinets 32-CS-411 and 412.
Access to the MV-OVW screen.

6.8 CTRL-ABC Screen

From here they can carry out the start (Start) and stop (Stop) of the turbines according to
the logic sequence.
Verify the control level (Local/Remote, Isochronous/Droop, Power/Voltage Reactivate)
of each turbine.
Choose the Manual/Automatic control mode of each turbine.
Place the Set-point of active and reactive power required by each turbine according to the
consumption necessities (Manual mode), or only to visualize it (Automatic way).
Place the Set-point of the desired voltage on the 32-SG-1 board.
Select the type of fuel to be used.
Verify the measures of Active and Reactive power for each turbine, the voltage of the 32-
SG-1 board, the global power produced by the plant and the reserve of global power of
the plant.
Access to the D4103 GT-ABC screen.
Select the turbine PRIORITY order.
Observe the values of the Set-points for the turbines in the PLCs.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 18 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

6.9 D 4103 Screen

From here they can observe the Fuel Tank parameters,
Verify the tank level,
Verify the status of the 3 pumps (P4103 A/B/C),
Verify the type of fuel used,
Control & command the SDV-201 valve.
Access to the LIC 203- TUNING ORG.

7 FUNCTIONS OF OPERATION
They are the automatic sequences that are executed internally in the Centralog. The definition of
each function and the used operation approaches are described in the document CA12-05-32-P-
RP-419. These automatic operations come along with the logic of established sequence in the
document CA12-05-32-P-RP-419. The operation functions are the following ones:

OPERATION DESCRIPTION DESPLIEGUE

Black Start Start up in reduced power when all turbines are stopped. CTRL-ABC

Start / Stop Manual Start up / Stop of turbines. CTRL-ABC

Fuel Change Over Manual operation for Fuel Change Over to use in each CTRL-ABC
turbine.

Load Sharing Levels of power for automatic start/stop of the turbines 2 OPG–you Load
and 3. Sharing

Load Shedding Order of priority of automatic stop of the 10 motors of OPG–you Load
the Main Station and the 4 Clusters. Shedding

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 19 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

8 ALARMS OF THE CENTRALOG

8.1 View of the Alarms & Events
To attract the attention of the operator each alarm can be associated to an audible warning,
produced by the generator of internal sound of the computer. The following screens of alarms are
available for the Discreet and Analogical signs:
General Alarm, where all systems alarms are shown.
5 Different entities
- ENT-SYST COMMON ENTITY
- ENT-CMD COMMANDS ENTITY
- ENT-GT1A GT-1A TURBINE ENTITY
- ENT- GT1B GT-1B TURBINE ENTITY
- ENT- GT1C GT-1C TURBINE ENTITY
– IN EACH :ENTITY
Alarms by Degree of Urgency, for this application the configured degrees of urgency
available are three, being the degree 1 the most important. Each degree of urgency is
associated with a color code. The degrees of urgency are:
ALARMS =>DEGREE OF URGENCY 1: RED
EVENTS => DEGREE OF URGENCY 3: YELLOW
When the alarm returns to its normal condition it turns to Blue color.
Alarms by Operative Unit (OU), they show only the alarms belonging to a previously
defined group of variables.
Alarms by Approach, which allows the operator to observe the alarms corresponding to
the Turbines GT_1A, GT_1B, GT_1C and the System of Detection of Fire and Gas.
Window of Alarm, where the last three turned on alarms are shown.

8.2 Recognition
The recognition of the alarms can be carried out:
Individually by means of the button located at the beginning of each alarm line.
By group, by means of the button placed in the upper band of command.
It is the responsibility of the operator to verify and recognize the existence of alarms in the work
station along his guard.
NOTE: For detailed information about the screens of alarms, format and functions of the
associated buttons, refer to the Manuals:
MAN–MACHINE EXP INTERFACE MANUAL OF EXPLOITATION PTP09-A42066-V4.
DTS ALARMS WITH OPERATOR HELP PTP09-A42062-V4.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 20 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

9 EDITIONS

The editions are the available documents in the Centralog that grant the operator reports on the
evolution of discreet and analogical variables of the process. This documents can be printed once
read. For information about the types of documents, please refer to the Exploitation Manual
PTP09-A42066-V4.
Daily report
It understands the average of a group of analogical variables (per hour) at the end of the
working day.
Monthly Report
It embraces the average of a group of analogical variables (per day) at the end of the
month.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 21 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

10 MAN MACHINE EXP INTERFACE / ANIMATION SYMBOLS AND PROTOCOLS

10.1 INTRODUCTION

The aim of this document is to present the basic principles governing the Mimic function
of the Centralog operator station, together with the basic rules used in the animation of
screen-based mimic views.

The document describes:

• The ergonomics of the Mimic function and the windows associated with the function,

• The standard methods of devices representation using symbols which are or are not
animated,

• The standard control windows. These are used to transmit telecommands or setpoints
to the process.

A Glossary describing the particular expressions employed in the present document is

also provided, section 4.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 22 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

10.2 STANDARD SYMBOLS AND ANIMATION PROTOCOLS

10.2.1. SYMBOLS

Standard symbols are used on the mimic diagrams to provide graphic

representation of the plant equipments (see Appendix A1) and when needed,
their actual physical state. See Appendix A2.

10.2.2. SYMBOLS DESIGN RULES

Screen-based symbols representing devices which are not animated are

displayed in colors coded to show the power level for electrical views.

Symbols representing devices which are animated are displayed in colors coded
to show the power level, and there status.

10.2.3. SIGNALING EQUIPMENT STATES

The physical state of plant equipment is indicated in accordance with standard

animation protocols.

These protocols, which have been defined with the aim of detemining the state
of plant devices and equipment, combine the use of specific symbols with color
coding.

10.2.3.1. State Color Codes for Electrical Devices Signaling (circuit-breakers)

- Green inidcates normal OPEN STATE

- Red indicates normal CLOSED STATE
- Yellow indicates FAULT STATE
- White indicated MISMATCH STATE
- Grey indicates INVALID STATE

Note: English is used as the basic operational language of the Centralog Video – mimics.

For the project involving the use of a local language (else than English) as second
language, only the static of video –mimics are translated. The dynamic signaling
text remains in English.

10.2.3.2. State Color Codes for centralog Network Link Signaling


Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 23 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

- Light Brown indicates NORMAL STATE

- Red indicates FAULT state
See Appendix A2.

10.2.3.3. State Color Codes Common to all Equipment Signalling

- Grey indicates INVALID STATE

- White ground outlined with the power level or fluid color code indicates
INHIBITED STATE (or MISMATCH)

10.2.4. ANALOG NUMERICAL DISPLAY

10.2.4.1. Display Format

- in a general way, the numerical display formats for the different

measurement types is determined as follows:

00.MW

Two decimal for electrical measurement

Eg. 00.00 MW

10.2.4.2. Representation

- Measures : values are displayed in white on black ground, within a white

rectangular frame, followed by the measurement unit in white.
- Setpoints : values are displayed in orange on black ground, within an
orange frame, followed by the measurement unit in orange.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 24 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

10.3 CONTROL WINDOWS

10.3.1. DEFINITION
Control windows are the main dialogue means for the transmission of
telecommands and setpoints instructions to the process.

10.3.2. CONTROL WINDOW ACCES BUTTONS

The buttons giving acess to control windows are positioned in the mimic diagram
area, in close proximity to the symbols representing the equipment to be
controlled . (See appendix A1 last ligne).

10.3.3. MIMICS WINDOW ACCES BUTTONS

The F1 to F12 buttons are giving acess to the mimic windows .

F1 GENERAL POWER GENERATION GENERAL VIEW

F2 MV-OVW 34.5Kv OVERVIEW
F3 GT-OVW 34.5Kv INCOMING
F4 SG-1 34.5Kv OUTGOING
F5 LV-OVW AUXILIARIES
F6 P320 ALSPA P320 SYSTEM
F7 CTRL-ABC CONTROL VIEW FOR GAS TURBINE
F12 D4103 D4103 FUEL TANK

The F8 to F11 buttons are giving acess to the OPG windows .

F8 SEQ_GT-1A MARK 5 SEQUENCE GT-1A

F9 SEQ_GT-1B MARK 5 SEQUENCE GT-1B
F10 SEQ_GT-1C MARK 5 SEQUENCE GT-1C
F11 F&G FIRE & GAS ALARMS

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 25 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

10.4 GLOSSARY

ACCESS BUTTON Graphic object with the appearance of a push-button, onto which the
operator designates by clicking with the mouse to execute an action
such as displaying a mimic view or opening a window.
ALARM Variable TS, threshold or limit of a variable TM that represents an
abnormal functional state of an element of the process, where the
operator should be forewarned.
ANIMATION Dynamism used to represent the ongoing physical state of a device by
means of changing graphic representations.
APPLICATION DATES Group of data that depending to the process to whom the control
system and command are connected, and personalized for each
project.
ASSOCIATED VIEW View having direct link with the view currently on screen.
ATTRIBUTE Static or dynamic characteristic associated to a variable, as the code
ID, the label, value, etc.
BARGRAPH Graphic way of representing analogical variables of process in form of
vertical or horizontal dynamic bars.
CENTRALOG Name attributed to the computerized control and supervisory system
of the plant control & command structure.
The CENTRALOG system is integrated into the centralized control
room level.
CENTRALOG Configuration Name given to a function used for the personalisatión of application
Center-data (CCC-D) information.
CENTRALOG Configuration Name given to the computer dedicated to the personalización of
Center-Mimic (CCC-M) mimic or deployment.
CENTRALOG Name given to the computer dedicated to the application and
CONFIGURATION CENTER- maintenance of the CENTRALOG system.
SYSTEM (CCC.S)
CENTRALOG Group of control functions and supervision provided by the
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS CENTRALOG system.
CENTRALOG Interface The CENTRALOG station designed to provide the interface with the
Station (CIS) supervision net and to maintain the database.
CENTRALOG SPECIALIZED Designed station that contains the special functions (HDRS,
STATION (CSS) communications with external systems, etc.)

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 26 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

CENTRALOG Video Station Station designed to contain the functions of the Man–Machine
(CVS) Interface.
CONTROL BLOCK Group of elementary control variables used for the orders on-screen.
CONTROL WINDOW Window appearing on the operator screen, giving access to means of
transmitting logic and analog instructions to the process.
CONTRONET Name given to the CENTRALOG Ethernet net.
CUSTOMIZATION Operations that are define and carried out in the CENTRALOG, all
the information specific to the applications for which the system is
designed (data for the RTDB and mimics).
DIALOGUE (OPERATOR) Exchange made up of an action of the operator (for example the
appointment in screen or entrance data by means of the keyboard) and
error or help messages generated by the system.
DESIGNATION Action of positioning the cursor on a target on the screen (eg. Access
button) then pressing and releasing (clicking) the left hand mouse
button).
DIRECTORY Window that shows the elements of a single type, usually the names of
views, in list form. The directory allows the operator the access to the
enumerated views.
DISTURBANCE Applied to a register dedicated to the recording of data connected to a
certain incident that has perturbed the process, in such a way that these
data can be analyzed later on.
GRADIENT Attribute that represents the speed of variation of an analogical
variable.
HYSTERISIS A band specified in the range of an analogical variable that makes
possible a detection mechanism of it overflows of the threshold and
limit, to filter the values that oscillate from a side to another of the
suitable value.
ICON Graphic symbol representing a Centralog function. The different icons
may be static, symply indicating a function, or dynamic when
associated to a button, so as to execute a Centralog function when
being designated.
INHIBITED A possible state for a variable. An inhibited variable is not processed.

INHIBITION Action carried out by the Interfaz Man Machine of the CENTRALOG,
designed to mask the changes in the value of a variable of the
operator.
INVALIDITY Attribute associated to the value of a variable indicating if this value is
or not important.
LABEL Attribute associated to a variable that corresponds to a chain of
characters designed to define the role of the variable.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 27 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

LIMIT Minima and maxima physical values that define the permissible range
of TM.
LIST List of variables selected according to one or more types of
approaches. A list can appear in screen or printer to the demand of the
operator (example the list of inhibited variables).
LOG Group of pertinent data specific to the process, printed periodically or
according to an event.
MIMIC Screen-based diagram representing all or part of a plant, used for the
monitoring of the power plant different devices and equipment state
change, and when available, to modify their current state.
MIMIC GROUP Set of mimic diagrams having common characteristics : eg. Common
plant control group, units control group,…
OFF MONITORING A possible state for a variable. A variable that is not working will not
be processed.
OPERATIVE UNIT (OU) Unit or division of the Centralog application database that brings
together a group of variables, and is coherent for the process.
REPLACED A possible state for a variable. The value of a replaced variable is a
value defined by the operator instead of the real value.
Real Time Database (DTDB) Database that contain all the variables managed by the CENTRALOG
inside the control context and supervision.
SEQUENCE Series of successive actions taken in a relative way to the process
team.
SYMBOL Static or animated graph, representing a device or its physical state.
TELECOMMAND (TC) Logic command transmitted via the Centralog process to the
controllers or to an application program.
THRESHOLD Attribute associated to the value of a TM that corresponds to a marker
located inside an allowed range of the variable, that calls the
operator’s attention if this threshold is surpassed.
TELEMESURE (TM) The variable of analogical supervision
INTERNAL TELEMESURE Type of TM calculated by the CENTRALOG calculation function.
(TMI)
TELESIGNAL (TS) Variable of logical supervision.
SETPOINT COMMAND Variable that represents an analogical command transmitted to the
(TVC) process (for example, from the CENTRALOG to the controllers) or to
a CENTRALOG internal application program.
VARIABLE Entity of basic input / output of the control system used for the
supervision and/or control.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 28 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

VIEW The presentation in screen of information (mainly variables) relative

to the process used by the operator to watch over and/or to control the
process.
WINDOW Graphic area of the screen that opens up with the function of the
CENTRALOG.
ZOOM VIEW View dedicated to the presentation of the different characteristics of
an entity in the database (the variables, control blocks). Each entity
possesses its own zoom view.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 29 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

SDB Source database

RTDB Real Time Database
TC Telecommand
TCE External Telecommand
TCI Internal Telecommand
TM Telemeasure
TMC Counting Telemeasure
TME External Telemeasure
TMI Internal Telemeasure
TMO Operator Telemeasure
TMP Application software Telemeasure
TS TeleSignalisation
TSE External TeleSignalisation
TSI Internal TeleSignalisation
TSP Application software TeleSignalisation
TSS System TeleSignalisation
TVC Setpoint Value
TVCE External Setpoint Value
TVCI Internal Setpoint Value
TVRI Table for Internal Grouping Variable
VRI Internal Grouping Variable

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 30 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

APPENDIXES

A.1. STANDARD SYMBOLS

These are static elements whose line and colour are fixed when the colour print was
designed.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 31 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

A.2. STANDARD ANIMATION PROTOCOLS

These are dynamic elements


Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 32 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL
 SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
Contracting POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
Industrial System & Services SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Oil and Gas Department Page 33 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

A.2.1. Circuit Breaker

The annimation of circuit breaker.

EXEMPLES : 1A02, 1A04, 1A01, 1B02, 1B04,

1A06, 1A07, 1A08, 1B07, 1B08, 1B09

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 34 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

A.2.2. Gas Turbine

The annimation of the Turbine Generartor.

EXEMPLES : GT-1A, GT-1B, GT-1C

The yellow color was added for the state when INVALID=0, RUNNING=0, NOT READY TO
RUN=0, READY TO START=0.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
A.2.3. Valve
The annimation of the Valve.
EXEMPLE : SDV
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 35 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 36 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

A.3. CONTROL WINDOWS

A.3.1. Description of Logical Control Windows (without validation)

PR_1-WUPRI_TVCI (In CTRL-ABC Priority )

the first number is for turbine A.

the second number is for turbine C.
the third number is for turbine B.

Select black start turbine priority order :

123
312
231
321
132
213
then press enter and close the window.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 37 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

A.3.2. Description of Logical Control Windows (with commands validation)

GT_1A-START_STOP (In CTRL-ABC )

GT_1B-START_STOP (In CTRL-ABC )

GT_1C-START_STOP (In CTRL-ABC )

Control window closing button

Identification code of the control block
Control block zom view button
Start permissive (yellow not permissive)
Stop permissive (yellow not permissive)
Control botton 1 :Start order
Control botton 2 :Stop order
Validation
Cancel
Operator messages area

GT_1-BLACKSTART (In CTRL-ABC )

Start order
Validation
Cancel

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 38 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

GT_1A-ACK (in GENERAL)

GT_1C-ACK (in GENERAL)

GT_1B-ACK (in GENERAL)

Acknowledgment permissive (black permissive)

Acknowledgment order
Validation
Cancel

GT_1A-AUTO_MAN (In CTRL-ABC )

GT_1C-AUTO_MAN (In CTRL-ABC )


Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 39 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

GT_1B-AUTO_MAN (In CTRL-ABC )

Automatic mode order

Manual mode order
Validation
Cancel

SG_1A-CB-1A02 / 1A04 / 1A01 / 1B02 / 1B04 (In GT-ABC )

1B06 / 1B07 / 1B08 / 1B09 / 1A07 / 1A08 / 1A09(In SG-1 )

2A02 / 2A01 / 2B07 (In LV-OVW )

Close permissive (yellow not permissive)

Automatic mode order
Manual mode order
Open order
Close order
Validation
Cancel

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 40 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

GT_1A-FUEL_SELECTION (In CTRL-ABC )

GT_1A-FUEL_SELECTION (In CTRL-ABC )

GT_1A-FUEL_SELECTION (In CTRL-ABC )

Diesel permissive (black permissive)

Gas permissive (yellow not permissive)
Diesel order
Gas order
Validation
Cancel

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 41 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

A.3.3. Description of Analog Control Window

GT_1A-ACTIVE_POWER (In CTRL-ABC )

GT_1C-ACTIVE_POWER (In CTRL-ABC )

GT_1B-ACTIVE_POWER (In CTRL-ABC )

GT_1A-REACTIVE_POWER (In CTRL-ABC )

GT_1C-REACTIVE_POWER (In CTRL-ABC )

GT_1B-REACTIVE_POWER (In CTRL-ABC )

GT_1-VOLTAGE (In CTRL-ABC )

Light blue process value

Orange setpoint
Validation
Cancel

Select orange rectangle

Enter value
then press enter
then press validation
Close the window.

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 42 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 43 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

A.3.3. Description of Analog Control Window

• 1. CONTROL WINDOW CLOSING BUTTON

• 2. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CONTROL BLOCK
• 3. CONTROL BLOCK ZOOM VIEW BUTTON
• 4. DURATION OF THE MEASURE TREND
• 5.. MAXIMUM VAUE OF THE SETPOINT
• 6.. SETPOINT AND MEASUREMENT SCALE
• 7. ACTUAL MEASURE TREND DISPLAY
• 8. ACTUAL MEASURE BARGRAPH DISPLAY
• 9. SETPOINT BARGRAPH DISPLAY
• 10. MINIMUM VALUE OF THE SETPOINT
• 11. MEASUREMENT UNIT
• 12. ACTUAL MEASURE NUMERICAL DISPLAY
• 13. SETPOINT NUMERICAL DISPLAY
• 14. HELP MESSAGE AREA
• 15. SETPOINT FAST – DECREASING BUTTON
• 16. SETPOINT LOW – DECREASING BUTTON
• 17. KEYBOARD SETPOINT INPUT
• 18. SETPOINT SLOW – INCREASING BUTTON
• 19. SETPOINT FAST – INCREASING BUTTON
• 20. SETPOINT CANCELLING BUTTON
• 21. SETPOINT VALIDATION BUTTON
• 22. OPERATOR MESSAGES AREA

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 44 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

• A.4. ACCESS BUTTONS

A.4.1. Access to Views Display

A.4.2. Access to Logicalcontrol Windows (circuit breaker)

Status dynamic display

Local/remote state

Control window access button

Auto/manu state

Contracting
Industrial System & Services
Oil and Gas Department
SINCOR UPSTREAM PROJECT CA12-05-32-P-MN-311
CONTRACT N° C-A-12-2/3/4 Rev: X0
POWER GENERATION PACKAGE Date: 02/10/2002
SISTEMA ALSPA P320
Page 45 / 45
OPERATIVE MANUAL

A.4.3. Control Window

Control label

ACTIVE POWER

Control window
access button
 CENTRALOG CONFIGURATION CENTER
User's Manual

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
This document is the exclusive property of ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

25-05-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T. PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE B.DURAND
CHECKED
Power
Electrical and Control Systems
APPROUVE D. CANTERO
APPROVED

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A A
PA 400 C

1/ 110 113
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt B.Durand D.Cantero 25.05.98 First version GFE
PA 401 A

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1. Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.2. Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3. ANOMALY REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.4. ABBREVIATIONS & NOTATION CONVENTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5. MANUAL USER'S GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.6. QUESTIONS AND SUGGESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.7. CENTRALOG RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.7.1. Products Covered by this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.7.2. Special Product Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2. GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1. UTILIZATION CONTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.1. Hardware Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.2. Standard Graphic Software Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2. COMMON ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.1. Utilization of the Multi-Window Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.2. Description of the Main Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3. STARTING & STOPPING THE CCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

3.1. STARTING THE APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1.1. Normal Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1.2. Starting the CCC after a complete stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1.3. Accessing the CCC with only the CCC function stopped . . . . . 15
3.1.4. Restarting after Powerfail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2. QUITTING THE APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.2.1. Stopping the CENTRALOG Configuration Center Function . . . 16
3.2.2. Accidental Shutdown of the CENTRALOG Configuration Center 16

4. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.1. ACCESSING THE CENTRALOG CONFIGURATION CENTER . . . . 19
4.1.1. Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.1.2. Logging into the CCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 1-ii
 4.1.3. Logging out of the CCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.2.1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.2.2. Database Configuration Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.2.3. Database Administration Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.2.4. Mimic Configuration Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.2.5. Mimic Administration Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.2.6. Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.2.7. Dealing with Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.3. MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.3.1. Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.3.2. Edit/Consult Message Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.3.3. Displaying Blocking Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.4. EXPLOITATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.4.1. Miscellaneous functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.4.2. Centralog Admin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.4.3. Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
APPENDIX A CCC/CVS DIRECTORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
APPENDIX B CONSISTENCY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
B.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
B.2. Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
B.3. Data source names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
B.4. Data source variable names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
B.5. Data sources linked to sub-drawing dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
B.6. Objects having one or more dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
B.7. Object name syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
B.8. Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
APPENDIX C FUNCTION ACCESS LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

DOCUMENT REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 1-iii
 Attention : the CENTRALOG implementation functions, in particular in database configu-
ration function, are used to select the functions assigned to each project. Consequently,
some functions listed in this document may not be accessible. In this case, the asso-
ciated description should be ignored.

1. Introduction

1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.1.1. Object

The CENTRALOG Configuration Center (CCC) is used for :

— Configuration of the CENTRALOG system
— Maintenance of the CENTRALOG system
— Operation of the CENTRALOG system

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 2
 CVS CV CONTRONET
S
CIS
 Â
Dual S8000

Automation cells

Fig. 1 : Standard configuration of an Alspa 8000–P320 system Centralog

Controcad P4_Network Microété

Engineering network

CVS CV CV CONTRONET
S S
CIS

Fig. 2 : Alspa 8000–P320 system Centralog and Controcad engineering station

The CENTRALOG Configuration Center handles different sets of functions that vary
according to the context or phase :

During the configuration phase :

The CCC gives access to the CENTRALOG database and mimic configuration
tools. These tools are used :

to configure the database

to configure the mimic views

to change the database or mimic version

to configure the PRISCA process application

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 3

During the maintenance phase :
The CCC gives access to system signaling messages.

During the operational phase :

The CCC is used for administration of the CIS (start/stop, database loading)
and the CVS (startup/stop, database and mimic loading, synchronization with
the CIS).

1.1.2. Users

Profile
The user of the CCC is responsible for the administration of the CENTRALOG. In this
role, he/she must be thoroughly familiar with the data managed by the system and with
the system’s operational modes.

Tasks

Starting CENTRALOG,

Configuring the database and mimic views,

Administering CENTRALOG :

Storage and retrieval of database and mimic configuration data,

Customization of the CCC environment (attribution of access levels,

management of passwords etc.),

Delivering first line maintenance diagnostics and interfacing with the

CEGELEC maintenance crews.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 4
1.2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

CENTRALOG Data Configuration - User's Manual

CENTRALOG Mimic Configuration - User's Manual

1.3. ANOMALY REPORTS

In the event of any anomaly, please refer to the document ”CENTRALOG Anomaly
Management Procedure”.

1.4. ABBREVIATIONS & NOTATION CONVENTIONS

The following conventions and abbreviations are employed in this manual:

DB : Database

BVA : Application variable database

BVI : Mimic variable database

CCC : CENTRALOG Configuration Center

CIS : CENTRALOG Interface Station

CONTROCAD: Engineering tool used to write project controller

programs and data

CVS : CENTRALOG Video Station

DAT : Digital Audio Tape

DataViews  : Set of tools developed to generate complex

man/machine interface applications.

Datasource : Source of DataViews data

or ds

DV–Draw : Mimic configuration tool

EXP : Operator station function in normal operation

(EXPloitation)

HDSR : Historical Data Storage and Retrieval

MMI : Man–machine interface

MICROETE : Database configuration tool

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 5

MSNV : (Mise en Service d’une Nouvelle Version de Logiciel)
Installation of a new data base or software version without

stopping the system

OU : Operative Unit : Unit of application data formed by a

coherent set of variables from the standpoint of the
process.

OSF/MOTIF 
or MOTIF : Window and library manager

S8000 : Unit network (F900 profile) linking the controllers with the
Centralog

1.5. MANUAL USER’S GUIDE

This manual is divided into four chapters and one appendix :

Chapter 1 : Introduction
describes the purpose of the manual and gives the profile of
the user for whom it is intended.

Chapter 2 : General Information

presents the hardware and software context of the
CENTRALOG Configuration Center and the application’s
operator interface.

Chapter 3 : Starting & Stopping the Software

details the procedures for running and quitting the
CENTRALOG Configuration Center application.

Chapter 4 : Utilization
describes the functions of the CCC during each of the
configuration, exploitation and maintenance phases

Appendix : Reference Documents

1.6. QUESTIONS AND SUGGESTIONS

If you have any questions or suggestions with regard to this document,

please contact :

CEGELEC EREP
9, Rue Ampere
91345 MASSY cedex
Fax: +33 (0)1 60.13.23.74

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 6
1.7. CENTRALOG RANGE

1.7.1. Products Covered by this Document

CENTRALOG 10 V4

CENTRALOG 30 V4

CENTRALOG 50 V4

1.7.2. Special Product Features

CENTRALOG 10

Mono-station Configuration
CENTRALOG 30 or CENTRALOG 50

Multi-station Configuration

MSNV function (dual configuration)

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 7
2. General Information

2.1. UTILIZATION CONTEXT

2.1.1. Hardware Environment

The CENTRALOG Configuration Center is installed on one of the operator stations.

This operator station is composed of a workstation equipped with a keyboard, a mouse
and one or two VDU screens. Depending on requirements, an operator station may be
dedicated to the configuration function.

CCC MMI EXP1

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
MMI

Fig. 3 : Operator station

In addition to a hard disk the station is equipped with CD–ROM and magnetic tape
drives used to install, update and save the CENTRALOG system. The station can also
be supplied with an optional magneto–optical disk for the storage of logs and HDSR or
CLOGSQL data.

In certain configurations, the MICROETE database input function is installed on a

remote PC connected to the network. This network is the Contronet network if the
Centralog is not connected to Controcad; otherwise the PC is connected to the
engineering network.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 8
2.1.2. Standard Graphic Software Environment

The software environment and architecture are as follows :

Man/machine interface (CCC,

EXP and HDSR, etc)
Application level
MMI window and library
MOTIF / DATAVIEWS manager
X11
X11 standard graphic
UNIX environment
Operating system

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 9
2.2. COMMON ELEMENTS

2.2.1. Utilization of the Multi–Window Environment

The following devices are supplied to the user :

a graphic screen,

a keyboard

a 3–button mouse.

2.2.1.1. CCC function and sub–functions

The CCC function includes several sub–functions displayed in a window. Some

windows (and the CCC main function itself), can be closed individually and shown by
icons: DV–Draw, Microete, configuration functions and data base administration, ... .
They can be moved (except the full page views), or switched to the background or
foreground. See also the document ”Centralog Supervision and Control Functions
Introduction”

Examples :

DV
CCC Microete DV-Draw Data Base

2.2.1.2. Objets Managed by the CCC

The CCC operator interface uses a certain number of the graphic objects supplied by
the MOTIF and DATAVIEWS libraries. These objects are used to represent choices
and menus.

A full list of the objects used by the CCC is given below.

BUTTON

The button is the basic graphic object used by the CCC.

Mimic
admin.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 10
 Activating a button can open a menu. In this case the button remains depressed until
an option on the menu is selected. All the other buttons on the CCC MMI are inactive.

View OU data

Get OU data

Generate DB

Select DB to be loaded

Configuration

Database Database Mimic Mimic

Config. Admin. Config. Admin.

Clicking the mouse button outside of the menu causes the menu to disappear. The
button then returns to its normal inactivated state.

If the button does not open a menu, the button appears as depressed for an instant in
order to indicate that the click has been acknowledged.

Opens login
Login Login Login and password
window
Click on button Button Button
depressed released

Revolving Choice Selectors

A revolving choice button gives access to one option among several associated to a
single label. The different options are accessible by clicking repeatedly on the option
field.

Option selected

Choice name Revolving choice selectors

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 11
 INPUT GRILLS

An input grill is a preformatted data input window. The window contains buttons,
revolving choice selectors and alphanumeric fields to be completed by the operator.

Station Administration
Global Information

Block Station: 1
name: 1ps DB Downloading Type: All
Functional name: S1 Start mode: Operational

Start-up conditions

Status: Start enable

Start order: 1 Start up delay: 0

Save Station Start Station Stop Station Quit

TEXT FIELD

A text field is composed of a label followed by a field to be completed. The text field is
selected by placing the cursor within the input box. The field to be completed is a
horizontal band of n characters. If the user enters more than n characters, the data
shifts horizontally to accommodate them.

SCROLLBARS

Scrollbars enable a large amount of information to be displayed while enabling

windows to be kept to a manageable size.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 12
 SLIDERS

Sliders are used to display and modify numerical values. They function in the same
way as scrollbars.

Sliders can only be only accessed and modified by clicking on the bar itself. Click the
mouse button at the point where the indicator is to be re–positioned.

WINDOWS

The window enables a process to be ”seen”. Depending on which environment

(MOTIF or DATAVIEW) has been used to create the process, the window will have
certain specific properties :

— MOTIF windows can be moved, resized and closed via a menu

accessed by clicking on the band.
Microete, error files, database applications and the shell are all processes
created in the MOTIF environment.

— The position, size and organization of DATAVIEWS windows cannot be

modified.
These windows are used for all mimic, message and system
administration applications.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 13
2.2.2. Description of the Main Operator Interface

The operator interface of the CENTRALOG Configuration Center is composed of a

main view from which the different functions can be activated.

Edit/consult
signaling messages

Site reference Signaling message

display zone
System type
Blocking message Control room
indicator view

From: 5hs station: 1 Date 26/10/98 10:13:44:070

Centralog Messages

! Card: 5hsb Process: Phti_tri Sender: rphts_acquisit

Lib: 01KITUS002 Printer 2 E: NORMA

CEGELEC POWER PLANT

CENTRALOG

CONFIGURATION CENTER

CONFIGURATION ACCESS CONTROL EXPLOITATION

Access to opera-
tional functions

Access to CCC

Access to configuration functions

Fig. 4 : Description of the operator interface

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 14
3. Starting & Stopping the CCC

3.1. STARTING THE APPLICATION

3.1.1. Normal Run Procedure

When the operator station is powered up, the CCC function is automatically booted.
After the autoboot is completed, the CCC main view may be masked by the
initialization view of the CVS function.

3.1.2. Starting the CCC after a complete stop

When the station is completely stopped (no outer green or grey frame on the
background screen), execute the following procedure to restart the station:
wsxxxx login : clg <return>
Password: (see the system installation manager)

3.1.3. Accessing the CCC with only the CCC function stopped

With the CCC function stopped, position the cursor on the outer frame of the screen
and press the right mouse button to select CCC in the application sub–menu:
Application  Application
Refresh EXP 

Exit  CCC
HDSR 

Photo

3.1.4. Restarting after Powerfail

The CCC restarts automatically after a power fail. The CENTRALOG Configuration
Center is re–initialized in non–connected mode (login not done). Operations which
were in progress on the CCC (DB Generation, Get OU data etc.) must be restarted and
inputs (data or mimic configuration operations) should be checked.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 15
3.2. QUITTING THE APPLICATION

3.2.1. Stopping the CENTRALOG Configuration Center Function

Stopping the Configuration Center results in the shutdown and disappearance of the
Configuration Center man/machine interfaces. The other functions of the operator
station are not concerned by this operation.

Click on the ”Centralog Admin.” button to display the type of menu shown below :

Station Admin

Stop CCC

Exploitation
MSNV

Centralog
Miscell Admin. Facilities

The operator then clicks on the Stop CCC option and confirms to shut down the
Configuration Center.

! Applications run by the CCC in the MOTIF environment (database

administration windows, data input, consultation of error files, shell) are not affected
by stopping the CCC. It is vital to quit these applications before you shut down the
station:
Application 
Refresh
Exit 

3.2.2. Accidental Shutdown of the CENTRALOG Configuration Center

If the CCC shutdown is not the result of an operator command, the operator station
should be re–initialized in order to re–establish a correct software environment.

 Press the Stop and A buttons on the station keyboard simultaneously,

 Enter Boot then <Return>

This sequence of keystrokes causes the station to reboot. The reboot results in the
automatic restart of the CCC and of any associated EXP MMI.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 16
4. Utilization

Presentation

This chapter describes the different functions accessible from the CENTRALOG
Configuration Center view.

CCC

HDSR

Signalization

Data Base MMI HDSR

Mimics
ÇÇÇÇ CV
S

Maintenance
Exploitation

Configuration

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 17
 The different functions of the CENTRALOG Configuration Center are presented
according to their layout on the CCC view.

Paragraph 1 Access to the CENTRALOG Configuration Center describes

restrictions on access to the configuration center and the management of the different
access levels,

Paragraph 2 Configuration presents the CENTRALOG configuration functions

relevant to mimic and database configuration (creation/animation of a mimic,
declaration of a log or trend curve etc.),

Paragraph 3 Maintenance concerns the management of signaling messages

transmitted by the CIS , workstations and the CCC: nature, display, filtering, printout
etc.

Paragraph 4 Exploitation explains how to stop and start the the CIS and the operator
station applications, and how to access several optional functions.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 18
4.1. ACCESSING THE CENTRALOG CONFIGURATION CENTER

4.1.1. Principle

Access to the CCC functions is handled by a routine that checks access levels :

An access level is attributed to each user

A minimum access level is associated to each function.

A user can only log into a CCC function if he/she has an access level equal or superior
to the access level attributed to that function.

Four different access levels (from 1 to 4, 1 being the lowest level) condition access to
the functions. These function access levels are determined by CEGELEC. The CCC
administrator is responsible for assigning access levels to the personnel.

All accesses or attempted accesses are recorded in a file which the administrator
alone may consult.

Modifying access rights or creating a new user

This modification must be done before the starting of the CCC station:
ws0629 login : exe <return>
Password: (see the system installation manager)

 Enter
cd $VPM/$VP/sc <return>
vi *_AC*.m4 <return>
 The access rights configuration file is displayed:

marcel:1:centralog
albert:3:psw3
ray-
mond:2:passwd2
francois:2:massy
leon:4:psw4

Fig. 5 : Example of configuration file

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 19
 Modify this file taking care to comply with the required access declaration
syntax (access level between 1 and 4):
<user>:<access level>:<password>
If there is one, delete the line ” * : 5 : BYPASS ”.

 Save the modifications by entering: wq <return> or quit without saving

by entering: q! <return>.

 Enter: Ctrl D

Consulting the access record file

This file can only be consulted before the CCC applications have started.

 From the same directory as the one of the previous page in  ,

enter
vi *_LO*.m4 <return>

 The access record file is displayed:

[CCC] Start up at Wed Jan 6 17:18:24 1998

[LOGIN]
User Raymond LOGIN at Thu Apr 13 10:13:41 1998
[LOGOUT]
User Raymond LOGGED OUT at Thu Apr 13 14:16:12 1998
[LOGIN]
User Marcel LOGIN at Wed Apr 14 09:20:54 1998
[LOGOUT]
User Marcel LOGGED OUT at Wed Apr 14 11:10:40 1998

Fig. 6 : Example of an access record file

 Quit consultation by entering :q! <return>

 Enter: Ctrl D

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 20
4.1.2. Logging into the CCC

When no user is logged into the CCC or immediately after starting the station the view
below is displayed :

Centralog Mes- From: 5hs station: 1 Date 26/10/98

sages
10:13:44:070

CEGELEC POWER PLANT

Card: 5hsb Process: Phti_tri Sender:

CENTRALOG rphts_acquisit

Lib: 01KITUS002 Printer 2

CONFIGURATION CENTER
E: NORMA

CONFIGURATION ACCESS CONTROL EXPLOITATION

Only the Login and Logout are sensitive to the mouse clicks.

Logging in

 Click on the Login button.

 Enter the user name and password.

Please enter login

Username: Raymond

Password: ******

The characters entered for the password do not appear on screen and are
displayed as a series of *.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 21
  If the Username + Password is correct, the CCC displays a message
confirming the login with a request for acknowledgement :

Raymond is logged in

Acknowledge

Confirm by clicking on the ”Acknowledge” button.

 The CCC displays the buttons that correspond to the functions accessible
at the user’s access level :

Centralog Mes- From: 5hs station: 1 Date 26/10/98

sages
10:13:44:070

Card: 5hsb Process: Phti_tri Sender:

rphts_acquisit
CEGELEC POWER PLANT
Lib: 01KITUS002 Printer 2

E: NORMA
CENTRALOG 30

CONFIGURATION CENTER

CONFIGURATION ACCESS CONTROL EXPLOITATION

! If the Username + Password are incorrect, the CCC displays the message
User authorization failure with a request for confirmation.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 22
4.1.3. Logging out of the CCC

Logging out

 Click on the Logout button.

 The buttons are no more sensitive to the mouse clicks and the CCC
displays a message confirming the log out associated with a request for
acknowledgement :

User Raymond LOGGED OUT at Mon Nov 8 10:11:49 1998

Acknowledge

Confirm by clicking on the button.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 23
4.2. CONFIGURATION

4.2.1. Presentation

The subject of this chapter is database and mimic configuration. The chapter
describes the actions to be performed and the sequencing required to preserve
consistency between the CENTRALOG database and mimics.

The CENTRALOG database

The CENTRALOG real time database is created in two phases :
— Database configuration consisting in the creation of files describing the
database (OU files) and in managing the archives of these files and those
of the data input tool,

— Database administration enabling the real time database to be

managed from these OU descriptor files.

CENTRALOG mimics
The mimic views are closely linked to the database by virtue of the mimic animation
requirement. The mimic database (BVI) is constructed from the database descriptor
files, known as the application variable database (BVA), in two phases :
— Mimic configuration grouping the operations necessary for the creation
of a version of the mimics which are being developed,

— Mimic administration consisting in the management of mimic view

versions and the loading of these views on the operator stations.

Each of these four phases is associated to a button in the Configuration zone on the
VDU screen.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 24
 Database
Database
Config.
Admin.

MICRO-
ETE
Microete
View BD
Centralog
OU OU
OU n+1
DISK n
Get n-1
OU Generate
Backup DB DB Select DB to
Restore DB be loaded

Back-
up
status

Mimic
Status of version
Admin.
Previous
Select
version
version
MMI EXP

ÇÇÇÇÇ
Error Current
files version Update
a EXP
Verify co-
herency

OU Next New
version version
BVI
Gener-
ate BVI Remove
Views

Mimic DV–Draw ----------- Restore Mimic

Config.
Backup Mimic

Menu option

Each of the actions above is accessible via a menu from the relevant button

Fig. 7 : Database and mimic management

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 25
4.2.2. Database Configuration Function

4.2.2.1. Activation

The different database configuration functions are accessed by clicking on the

Database Config. The following menu is displayed :

Exchange
Controcad–Microété

MICROETE

Backup DB

Restore DB

Backup status
Configuration

Database Database Mimic Mimic

Config. Admin. Config. Admin.

The Exchange Controcad Microété choice enables all the exchanges involving
Controcad and Microété to be controlled from the CCC, with either Microété local on
the CCC or on a remote PC:
— Import of variables, sequences, controller variables grouping
— Back–notation of variables
— Export of S8000 network configuration and import in Microété
This menu is only available when the Centralog is connected to Controcad.

Select MICROETE to execute CENTRALOG database input and modification

operations. Backup DB, Restore DB, Backup status are used to manage
CENTRALOG database version changes.

The Microété menu is available only when Microété is local to the CCC. The Backup
DB, restore DB, Backup status menus are available when:

1 – Microété is local on the CCC

2 – Microété is on a remote PC and the Centralog is not connected to

CONTROCAD

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 26
4.2.2.2. MICROETE

This button gives access to the MICROETE

tool. This tool generates Operative Units MICRO-
(OU). Each Operative Unit is an ASCII file ETE
Micro-
which corresponds to a set of application ete
data which is coherent from the standpoint
OU
of the process. A new version of the CEN-
TRALOG database can then be generated DISK
from the OUs.

Database input includes for instance:

— the declaration of logical and analog variables : limits, thresholds, alarm or
not, urgency of the alarm, state at initialization etc.
— division of variables into Operative Units
— declaration of variables represented in the form of curves
— the list of the variables printed out in the various logs
— declaration of the Operative Units and of the variables that compose them
etc.
For further information, please refer to the document CENTRALOG Data
Configuration – User‘s Manual”.

! The MICROETE window may be hidden by usage of the Front key.

4.2.2.3. Database Backup

Database backup is an operation which consists in

transferring the current version of the MICROETE tool
DISK
and data onto a magnetic medium. This operation en-
ables the MICROETE database to be backed up. Backup DB

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 27
 Select this option to open the window below :

Backup MICROETE database

Insert a tape.

Valid Cancel

Valid
Backup starts as soon as the operator clicks on the button. The following
signaling message is displayed :

”[DB] backup started”

In the event of problems of access to the magnetic medium (bad insertion, write protect
on etc.), the CCC displays an error message with a request for acknowledgement.

When the backup operation is terminated, the magnetic medium is ejected and the
following message is displayed in the signaling message window :

”[DB] backup O.K. ”

The date of the last backup is updated in the database backup status file.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 28
4.2.2.4. Restore Database

As the reciprocal operation to database backup, database

restitution restores the MICROETE tool and data from a
magnetic medium. The MICROETE tool and any data DISK
which may be present on the CENTRALOG are overwrit-
ten. Restore DB
This operation is used for the delivery of the MICROETE
database in a data configuration phase by stages, or for
the restoration of backed up data.

Click on the ”Restore DB” button to open the window below :

Restore MICROETE database

Insert a tape.

Valid Cancel

Valid
Restitution starts as soon as the operator clicks on the button. The following
signaling message is displayed :

”[DB] Restore started”

In the event of problems of access to the magnetic medium (bad insertion, write protect
on etc.), the CCC displays an error message with a request for acknowledgement.

When the restore operation is terminated, the magnetic medium is ejected and the
following message is displayed in the signaling message window :

”[DB] Restore O.K. ”

The date of the last restitution is updated in the database backup status file.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 29
4.2.2.5. Database Backup Status

This operation enables the user to obtain the date of the

last backup and last restitution performed on the MICRO- Back-
ETE database. up
status

This information is presented in the following form :

Backup status

Date of the last backup :

29/11/98 12:13

Date of the last restitution: 30/11/98 12:12

Qui
t

4.2.2.6. Exchange Controcad–Microété

This operation opens a window in which the operator can make the following
selections:

1 – Import in MICROETE of variables, sequences and controller grouping

(referenced by its name) from CONTROCAD–C

2 – Export from MICROETE of the back–notation of the variables of a controller

(referenced by its name) to CONTROCAD–C

3 – Generation of the S8000 network configuration on the P4–NETWORK PC

followed by the import of this configuration in MICROETE

4 – Exit of the CONTROCAD<=>MICROETE exchange window.

Each choice is validated by the ”Enter” key.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 30
 The window below is the first view of the CONTROCAD<=>MICROETE exchanges:

The window stays open until the ”quit” menu is selected.

The window below is displayed when choice ”1” has been selected.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 31
4.2.3. Database Administration Functions

4.2.3.1. Object

The database administration functions are used to generate an operational real time
database from the OU files produced by the MICROETE tool.

These functions are accessed by clicking on the Database Admin. button. The
following menu is displayed :

View OU data

Get OU data

Generate DB

Select DB to be loaded

Configuration

Database Database Mimic Mimic

Config. Admin. Config. Admin.

The different database administration functions constitute the real time database
generation process. The process is divided into four stages :
— Acquisition of OU files generated by MICROETE. This operation is
effected by selecting Get OU data.
— Visualization of the status of the database and the OU files by selecting
View OU data.
— Generation of the real time database by selecting Generate DB.
— Selection of the current version of the database by clicking on Select DB
to be loaded.

Depending on the Centralog configuration, the menus may be:

Microété is local on the CCC: the Get OU Data button is not available. The
Generate DB selection produces an automatic generation chain:
— Microété control (OU generation)
— OU acquisition and checking
— data base generation (total or partial)

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 32

Microété is a remote PC and the Centralog is connected to Controcad: (same
consequences as Microété local on the CCC).

All these functions correspond to independent utilities, each of which possesses its
own alphanumeric operator interface. The functions ate activated in a 24–line,
80–column MOTIF window.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 33
4.2.3.2. Get OU Data

This operation consists in transferring the OU files generated

by MICROETE into the database generation environment.
OU

The operation takes place in two phases: Get

OU

The first phase corresponds to the transfer of the files, which are then checked during
the second phase.

Transmission of OUs:
Click on the Get OU data menu to access the following screen :

MODE : Off line

Previous version : 0
Current version : 1
Next version : INVALID

TRANSMISSION

1 : TOTAL transmission

Q : QUIT

Your choice ->

Confirm (1) to start transmission.

Special Cases :

In the event that OUs have already been transferred without a subsequent database
generation, the user must confirm the suppression of this previous acquisition before
being able to perform a new one.

Checking the OU Files :

The OU files are automatically checked when transmission is completed. The
following are checked :
— conformity of the OU files generated by MICROETE with the database
model,

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 34
 — the syntax and grammar of each OU file.
Before running the check, the user can request the creation of a trace file for the
analysis of each OU. This possibility allows any errors to be analyzed off–line.

If any error is detected, the error report file is automatically displayed (vi editor) on
completion of the analysis of each OU. The verification of the other OU files is resumed
as soon as the user closes the error file (command :q).

When all the OU files have been checked, the user may delete the newly acquired
OUs. In this case, the OUs corresponding to the previous database are conserved.

In the event of an error please refer to paragraph 4.2.7.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 35
4.2.3.3. View OU data

This choice enables the user to display information on

the database and the OU files .

View
OU
OU

Click on View OU data to access the screen below :

VIEW STATUS INFORMATIONS

1 : Status of DB on CCC–S

2 : Operating units file status

Q : QUIT

Your choice –> 1

Option1: ”Status of DB on CCC–S”. the following screen is displayed :

OPERATION MODE : Off line*

STATUS DB
DB RELEASE ON CCC-S :Previous : 0 Current : 1 Next : INVALID
DB RELEASE ON CCC-D : 9
STATUS DB INVOLVED : Current - Generated

STATUS OF TRANSMISSION
REQUESTED TRANSMISSION : Total
EXECUTED TRANSMISSION : Total Date : 17/10/98 16:03 COUNT : 16
CHECKING OF OU : Check ok
STATUS OF GENERATION
GENERATION : Whole Date : 17/10/98 16:39
BACKWARDS : No Date : 17/10/98 16:39
Press 'Q' to escape

* Centralog 50 only

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 36
 Significance of the different fields :

Status DB
— DB release on CCC–S :
The CCC database administration software simultaneously manages up
to 3 database versions. Previous represents the previous version,
Current, the current version, which is also the version actually in
operational use, Next, the following version. Invalid indicates that the
version is non–existent.

— DB release on CCC–D :
Indicates the OU file release number. Only the release number obtained
at the last transmission is displayed here.

— Status DB involved :
Gives the database status. which may be one of the following :
– Current–Initialized
– Current–Generated
– Next–Transmitted
– Next–Generated

Status of transmission
— Requested transmission :
Indicates the type of OU file transmission which has been requested by
the operator. The status will be one of the following :
– Partial
– Total

— Executed transmission :
Indicates the type OU file transmission which has actually been performed
by the CCC database administration software. The status will be one of
the following :
– Partial
– Total
The date and time of transmission, together with the number of OUs, are
also indicated.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 37
 — Check of OU :
Indicates the quality level relative to the check on transmitted OU files.
The status will be one of the following :
– Check ok
– Error(s) in OU
– Check unknown

Status of generation
— Generation :
Indicates the type of generation which has been requested by the
operator. The status will be one of the following :
– Partial
– Whole
The time of (successful) completion of generation is also indicated.

— Backwards :
Indicates whether the CCC has reverted to the previous version. (Yes if
so, No otherwise)

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 38
 Option 2: ”Operating units file status”. The following screen is displayed :

OU files of current DB version OU files Mod,Cre for next DB version

Count 016 Name Version Date Count 000 Name Version Date
0001 : OP1GP1_1 003 01/08/98
0002 : OP1GT2_1 004 01/08/98
0003 : OP1GT2_2 005 01/08/98
0004 : OP1GP2_3 006 01/08/98
0005 : OP1GT3_1 008 01/08/98
0006 : OP1GT4_1 007 01/08/98
0007 : OP1GT5_1 009 01/08/98
0008 : OP2GP1_1 008 01/08/98
0009 : OP2GT1_1 002 01/08/98
0010 : OP2GT4_1 007 01/08/98
0011 : OP2GT5_1 002 01/08/98
0012 : OP3GT5_1 009 01/08/98
0013 : OP4GT5_1 009 01/08/98
Scroll current (1), next (2), QUIT (Q), Your choice : 1

Fig. 8 : Status of OU files

The names of the OU files, their version and their MICROETE extraction date are
displayed for current and next databases (if they exist).

Information relative to up to thirteen files can be displayed. Further files can be

accessed by pressing 1 for the current database and 2for the next database. The
number of OU files per version is displayed at ”Count”.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 39
4.2.3.4. Generate DB

Database generation consists in using the OU files to create

a real time database which can be exploited by the CEN-
TRALOG system.
Generate
DB

Click on the Generate DB option to access the view below :

MODE : Off line*

Previous version : 3
Current version : 4
Next version : 5

GENERATION

1 : Whole generation of next DB version

2 : Generation of next DB version by differences
Q : QUIT

Your choice ->

* Centralog 50 only

The database to be generated is the next version of the database. The database is
generated from transmitted and valid OU files.

In the case of a total transmission, the user may choose between whole generation
and partial generation (see figure above). Only partial generation is proposed in the
case of partial transmission.

Total generation (Whole generation) :

The entire database is generated.

Partial generation (Generation by differences) :

This is possible after a total transmission, but is mandatory after a partial
transmission. Partial generation enables a real time database to obtained by
checking the differences between versions.

After selecting the desired type of generation, the user confirms the choice to start
generation.

! The time necessary for a partial generation is much shorter than that for whole
generation. It is therefore preferable to select partial generation if only a limited number
of modifications are involved.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 40
 Special cases :

The first generation is necessarily total. The choice of whole/partial generation

is not proposed.

Successive partial generations partition the database and access times are
thus lengthened. A total or whole generation of the database must be
performed after five successive partial generations in order to re–stack files.

Refusal of generation :
The software can refuse to generate the database in the following circumstances :

The next database has already been generated (the next database OUs
correspond to the next generated DB),

OU transmission is canceled or aborted.

Automatic DB Generation:

The main menu is identical to the standard generation menu. When the operator has
selected a generation type, a window indicates the generation progress.

Where the MICROETE tool is not incorporated to the CCC, a Microété session shown
by an icon is started. When the session is complete (local or remote), the first window is
covered by a new window managing the OU acquisition and checking, then by the DB
generation window itself. At the end of the DB generation, a summary indicates all the
operations which have been performed, along with their success or failure.

The window below shows the first view displayed:

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 41
 The window below shows a state of the summary of the data base generation
sequences.

In case of error please refer to paragraph 4.2.7.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 42
4.2.3.5. Select DB to be loaded

The CCC manages three versions of the real time data-

base. Select the current version of the database to desig- n+1
n
nate which of the three versions is to be exploited by the n-1
Centralog.
Select DB to
be loaded

Before selecting the current database version :

 Stop the CIS.

 Stop the CVS(s) connected to this CIS.

See procedure § 4.4.2.

Click on the Select DB to be loaded option to display the following screen :

MODE : Off line*

Previous version : n
Current version : n+1
Next version : n+2

SELECT DB TO BE LOADED
WARNING : CENTRALOG WILL HAVE TO BE STOPPED
1 : Next version
2 : Former version
3 : QUIT

Your choice –>

* Centralog 50 only

The Centralog always downloads the current version of the database. The operator
has the choice of two options :

Make the next version the current version (option 1). This enables the new
version of database to be loaded.

The versions of the BD shift backwards: the initial current version becomes the
previous version and the next version becomes invalid (unavailable).

Make the previous version the current version (option 2). This option is used to
revert to the previous database version when a new database version is
unsatisfactory.
In this case the previous and next versions are invalidated.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 43
 The choice of version must be confirmed for the database to be loaded. The system file
must be accessed to authorize system startup (Startup Condition option, see
paragraph 4.4.2.) and to ensure that startup mode is full (Global Information option).

When these operations are done, the CIS and the CVS1 can be restarted as described
§ 4.4.2.

When the CIS and CVS units are initialized, the ”new” current version of the database
is downloaded.

Special cases:

Only those operations which are possible are proposed: an invalid version cannot be
selected.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 44
4.2.4. Mimic Configuration Functions

The configuration functions cover all operations involved in modifying the mimic views.

These functions are accessed by clicking on the ”Mimic Config.” button :

DV-Draw

Backup Mimic

Restore Mimic

New Version

Configuration
Remove Views

Database Database Mimic Mimic

Config. Admin. Config. Admin.

The functions are run from the ”DV–Draw” editor which is used to create and/or modify
the mimic views. The ”New Version” and ”Remove Views” functions apply to the
editor workspace while the ”Restore Mimic” and ”Backup Mimic” functions are used
to manage mimic view storage.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 45
4.2.4.1. Restore Mimic

This operation enables all the mimic views stored on DAT to Next
be restored to the environment of the next version of the da- version
tabase.

Any mimic views which may already be present in that envi-

ronment are overwritten. Restore Mimic

This operation enables mimic views to be delivered in stages

during a configuration phase step and saved data to be re-
stored.

Select the ”Restore Mimic” option to access the following window :

Restitution of a mimic version

Insert a tape

Vali Can-
d cel

Val-
Restitution starts as soon as the operator clicks on the id button. The following
signal message is displayed :

”[Mimic] Restore started”

In the event of difficulty accessing the magnetic medium (tape not inserted, write
protect on etc.), the CCC displays an error message with a request for
acknowledgement.

When the restitution is done, the magnetic medium is ejected and the following
message is displayed in the signaling message window :

”[Mimic] Restore O.K. ”

The ”Date of last mimic restitution” data in the version status is updated.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 46
4.2.4.2. New Version

The ”New version” option is used to configure the next ver- Current
sion space from the current version space by copying all version
the mimic views. The current version and next version are
then identical.

After validation : Next New

Any mimic views which may be present in the next version version ver-
space are overwritten. sion

This option can be used to clean up the work environment, which can be particularly
useful after fruitless modifications or bad restitutions. When the operation is done, the
following message is displayed in the signaling message window :

”[Mimic] New workspace creation OK ”

All information relative to the current version is assigned to the next version with the
exception of the consistency check status which is set to invalid.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 47
4.2.4.3. DV–Draw

DV–Draw is the graphics editor used to

Next
configure mimic views. It enables views version
from the next version to be created and BVI
modified.

-----------

Views are animated on the basis of the DV–

Draw
variables contained the Mimic Variable
Database (BVI)

DV–Draw is used for the following operations :

Input of the graphic elements

Animation of certain of these elements

Introduction of complex or integrated graphics

Introduction of interactive elements reactive to operator events

Selection of the color palette

Simulation of mimic animation

Selection of the character font

The DV–Draw graphics editor appears as shown below:

----------- Position HORIZ Size Style Roman

EDGE Dir : CCW POLYGON NO NAME

Run > Cmds >

Data > Zoom >
view> Group >

Delete
Copy
Line
Cp Delta
Rect
Reorder
Polygon
Scale >
Arc
Mirror >
Circle
Edit >
Ellipse
Rules >
Text
Vectext
Drawing
Icon
Image
Refresh
Graph
Input

Fig. 9 : Layout of DV–DRAW graphics editor

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 48
 For further information on the utilization of DV–Draw please refer to ” CENTRALOG
Mimic Configuration – User’s Manual”. When DV–DRAW is started the following
message is displayed :

”[Mimic] DV–DRAW started”

When DV–DRAW is exited, the following message is displayed in the signal message
window :

”[Mimic] end of DV–DRAW ”

! The MICROETE window may be hidden by usage of the Front key.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 49
4.2.4.4. Remove Views

As DV-Draw cannot be used to delete mimics, this Next

function is used to remove unwanted mimics version
(temporary views, outdated versions etc.).
Re-
A view can only be deleted in the next version move
workspace. views

The view to be deleted is specified by :

Its name,

The related path in the ccc_m/vs directory (see Appendix A).

Select the ”Remove views” option to access the following view :

Mimic Removal

Insert the name of the view to be re-

moved :

Done Quit

The name of the view is entered as follows :

sub_dir1/sub_dir2/.../sub_dirn/view_name

Directory ccc_m/vs
Eg. to delete the ”reac-
tor_view.v” view in the tree bib_ref rep_syn
shown here, the following
must be specified :
reactor_view.v
rep_syn/reactor_view.v

A confirmation window is then displayed. If the name of the view to be deleted does not
correspond to any existing (or accessible) view, the following error message is
displayed : ”[Mimic] view not removed
cannot access file”

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 50
4.2.4.5. Backup Mimic

This function is used to save all the mimic views Next

from the next version onto DAT. version

Backup Mimic

Select this option to open the following window :

Backup of a mimic version

Insert a tape.

Cancel Valid

Valid
Backup starts as soon as the operator clicks on the button. The following
signaling message is displayed :

”[Mimic] Backup started”.

In the event of difficulty accessing the magnetic medium (tape not inserted, write
protect on etc.), the CCC displays an error message with a request for
acknowledgement.

When the backup is done, the magnetic medium is ejected and the following following
message is displayed in the signaling message window :

”[Mimic] Backup O.K. ”

The ”Date of last mimic backup” data in the version status is updated.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 51
4.2.5. Mimic Administration Functions

The mimic administration functions cover operations relative to the validation and
acceptance of the different versions.

These functions are accessed by clicking on the”Mimic Admin.” button .

Status of versions

Generate BVI

Verify coherency

Select version

Configuration
Update a CVS

Database Database Mimic Mimic

Config. Admin. Config. Admin.

Mimic administration is organized into five functions. Each function corresponds to an

option in the ”Mimic Admin.” menu :

The ”Status of versions” option provides information relative to the three

versions of the mimic views : previous version, current version and next version
and general information.

The ”Generate BVI” option is used to constitute the mimic variable base (BVI)
which contains all of the variables that can be exploited to animate the mimics.

The ”Verify coherency” option is used to check consistency between the

variables used to animate the mimics and the variables in the mimic variable
base.

The ”Select version” option is used to select the current version of the mimic
views or to transfer in the current version one or several modified views.

The ”Update EXP” option is used to transfer the current version of the mimic
views onto an operator station (all the screens of the station on which the EXP
function is installed, including the X terminals linked to this station).

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 52
4.2.5.1. Status of Versions

This option is used to access the status of the mimic

Status of versions
view versions .

The user is provided with information on the last Previous

operations performed : version

Status of the BVI

Date of BVI generation Current
version

OU number

BVI number

Date of last backup Next
version

Date of last restitution
The last 5 items are only shown if the BVI is valid.

Information on the three versions is also shown :

Status of the version : valid/invalid

BVI extraction number

MICROETE OU extraction number

Consistency check status: invalid/ok/nok

Date of last consistency check
The last 4 items are only present if the version is valid.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 53
 This information is presented in the following form :

Status of mimic version

General Next version

Status of BVI : Valid
Status of version : Valid
Date of last BVI generation: 29/11/98 15:15
BVI extraction number : 10
BVI number : 15
OU extraction number : 15
OU number : 10
Status of coherency verification : OK
Date of last mimic backup : 29/11/98 14:14
Date of coherency verification : 29/11/98 17:45
Date of last mimic restitution : 29/11/98 13:13

Current version Previous version

Status of version : Valid Status of version : Invalid
BVI extraction number : 9 BVI extraction number :
OU extraction number : 13 OU extraction number :
Status of coherency verification : OK Status of coherency verification :
Date of coherency verification : 25/11/98 16:12 Date of coherency verification :

Quit

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 54
4.2.5.2. Generate BVI

The”Generate BVI” function creates a set of mim-

ic view files containing the ”Datasource” relative
to the OU. This set of files constitutes the Mimic OU
Variable Base or BVI.
BVI
Generate
BVI

The files are created in two phases :

1 – Import from the MICROETE database of information which may be required in

mimic animation .

2 – Modification of the format of this information to render it compatible with the

DV–Draw graphics editor.

Several cases are to be considered :

1 – Microété is local on the CCC

2 – Microété is on a remote PC and the CCC is connected to Controcad

3 – Microété is on a remote PC and the CCC is not connected to Controcad

Cases 1 and 2 obligatorily start an automatic Microété session generating the

variables used to animate the mimics. Consequently, these variables are certain to be
coherent to the Centralog database.

In case 3, the PC should be first put on stand–by using the CCC_LINK function as
follows:
Go to root (C: ) and enter ”CCC_LINK” .

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 55
 When generation starts the following message is displayed:

”[Mimic] Generate BVI started”.

When the BVI generation is done, the following following message is displayed in the
signaling message window:

”[Mimic] BVI Generation O.K. ”

If the MICROETE variables used for mimic animation have not been extracted by the
MICROETE tool, the following message is displayed (case 3 only):

Export variables for mimics first

Acknowl-
edge

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 56
 The operator must re–access the MICROETE tool and select the following menus to
declare and extract the variables used for animation of the mimics.

MAIN MENU

CONFIGURATION, NAMES & MESSAGES>

DEFINE ARCHITECTURE >

DECLARE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS>

VARIABLE ACQUISITION >

COMMANDS >

CALCULATIONS & RESULTS >

GENERATE VARIABLES >

DEFINE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS>

REPRODUCTION OF VARIABLES >

ADMINISTRATION
ADMINISTRATION >
CHECK DATABASE INTEGRITY

CLOSE DATABASE NUMBER

CHECK FOR LATEST BLOCK VERSION

CHECK & GENERATE LATEST BLOCK VERSION

INTERNAL DOCUMENTS >

EXTERNAL DOCUMENTS >

P4 EXPORT/IMPORT

CCC–M EXPORT >

UTILITIES >

CCC-M EXPORT

DECLARE TS FOR EXPORT TO CCC–M

DECLARE TM FOR EXPORT TO CCC–M

EXPORT APP. VARIABLES TO CCC–M

Fig. 10 : Microete menu tree

In the event of error during the generation of the BVI files, the list of OUs is displayed
with the result of the generation OK/NOK for each OU:

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 57
 BVI generation errors

OU_TST : OK

OU_KRT : OK

OU_SPD : NOK

OU_RAD : NOK

OU_RGL : OK

OU_DRPI : OK

OU_RRD : OK

OU_RMS : NOK

OU_NIV3 : OK

OU_VAR : OK

OU_TMP : OK

OU_CORE : NOK

OU_CURV : NOK

Fig. 11 : Example of error file

The <space> key can be used to display the OUs on the following page(s). The
command q <return> closes the window.

The modifications carried out in the bad OU must then be reconsidered.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 58
4.2.5.3. Verify Coherency

Verify coherency means checking

consistency between the data figuring in
a mimic view version and the data in the
BVI. The check can therefore be used to Error Current
ensure the compatibility of the mimic files version
views with the CENTRALOG. Verify
coheren-
! The compatibility of the BVI with
cy
Next
the relevant database must be checked version
by this verification. BVI
The consistency check applies to the
current mimic version, or to the next
mimic version.

Select the ”Verify coherency” option to access the following screen :

Verify Coherency

Next Version

Current Version

Error file of the Next Version

Error file of the Current Version

One view in the Next Version

Quit

4.2.5.3.1. Next version

This option is used to check the consistency of the next mimic version with the BVI :

This check should be carried out after the following operations :

A BVI generation

Restitution of backed up mimic view version

Modifications to the next mimic view version

Starting the check causes the following message to be displayed :

”[Mimic] Coherency verification vs started”.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 59
 When the consistency check is done and no error has been detected, the following
message is displayed in the signaling message window :

”[Mimic] Coherency of next version : O.K. ”

! If consistency errors are detected, the next mimic version cannot be made
into the current version (see paragraph 4.2.7 ”What to do in case of errors”).

Any consistency errors are stored in a file which can be consulted by selecting option
”Error file of the next version”.

4.2.5.3.2. Current version

This option is used to check the consistency of the current mimic version with the BVI :

This check is necessary in the following cases :

After restitution of a MICROETE version with its data

After modification of the database

After restitution of the previous version of the mimic views

The status of the versions and the following information are all updated :
— Date of last consistency check
— Status of consistency check
— OU extraction number
— BVI extraction number
When the consistency check is done and no errors have been detected, the following
message is displayed in the signaling message window :

”[Mimic] Coherency of current version : O.K. ”

Any consistency errors are stored in a file which can be consulted by selecting option
”Error file of the current version”.

! If consistency errors are detected, the mimics cannot be transferred onto

the CVS (see paragraph 4.2.7 ”What to do in case of errors”).

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 60
4.2.5.3.3. Error Files of Current and Next Versions
These options offer the possibility of consulting the error files corresponding to the
current and next version consistency checks. The consult mechanisms are the same
for both versions.

Select option: ”Error file of the next version” to access the list of views containing
consistency errors.

Then click on a view name to access the list of errors associated to that view:

Error file

ABP41
Pressurizer
Subcriticality

Q
uit

SUBCRITICALITY.err

Variable CUSTPOSIT not found

Variable RAD001TRT not found
Variable SPB003KRT not found
Variable U3SINKPT not found

4 errors detected.

The <space> key is used to display the next page of the error list (if there is one). The
command q <return> closes the error consult view and returns to the list of views
containing errors.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 61
4.2.5.3.4. One View in the Next Version (Mimic Verification)
This option displays the directory of mimics associated with the next version. Mimics
contained in the directory can be selected by entering a character string in the Filter
zone (after clicking on the Fil- button). A selected mimic can then be verified
ter
individually by clicking on the button associated to its name on screen.

Coherency Control

ABP41
ABP42
Pressurizer
Subcriticality

Filter
Q
uit

! Depending on the state of the view after verification, the state of the next
version (VS) is modified as follows:

state of
view OK NOK
state VS

invalid invalid invalid

OK OK NOK

OK if no other
NOK view error NOK

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 62
4.2.5.4. Select version

As with the management of database ver- Pre- Select

sions, the CCC manages three mimic view vious ver-
versions. version sion

The Select Version function is used to desig-

nate the version which is to be downloaded. Current
version

Next
ver-
sion

Click on the ”Select version” option to access the following screen :

Select version
Next Version to Current Version

Previous Version to Current Version

Single view from Next to Current Version

Show views transferred in Current Version

Quit

The Centralog always downloads the current version of the mimic views.

Next version to current version integrates a new version of the mimic views.
The next version must be valid and must have been subject to a coherency
check.

The versions of the views are shifted: the initial current version becomes the
previous version and the next version is copied into the current version. The
current version and the next version are therefore identical. The list of views
transferred to the current version is emptied.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 63

Previous version to current version reverts to the previous version when
the current version is not satisfactory.

The previous version becomes invalid.

If the date of the consistency check of previous version precedes the date of
the of the last BVI generation, the consistency check must be rerun. The user
is advised of this by a message.

Select ”Single view from Next to Current Version” to check a mimic and
copy it into the current version.

This option displays the directory of views from the next version. Selection of a
particular view causes a consistency check to be run on the variables
associated to that view, and the transfer of the view to the current version if the
result of the check is OK. If the result is not OK, the operator is warned by a
message.

! When a subdrawing has been modified, this option must not be used.
Select instead ” Next Version to Current Version”

Select ”Show views transferred in Current Version” to display the list of

mimic views transferred into the current version since the last global transfer.
These views may be transferred onto different CVS stations by the the ”update
a CVS” function in partial mode.

The data relative to the different versions is updated by full version changes. Such data
is not modified when individual views are transferred.

! If an invalid version is selected, a message warns the user that his request
cannot not be accepted.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 64
4.2.5.5. Update EXP: load a station

The ”Update EXP” operation transfers MMI EXP

all the mimic views of the current ver-
sion onto one of the Centralog sta-
Current
ÇÇÇÇ
tions.
version
Updat
e EXP

Before updating the CVS:

 Check that the mimic views of the current version are

consistent with the current version of the real time database,

 Stop all the screens of the station (X terminals included) by clicking in

the EXP application on the SYS then on the EXP button on one of the

screens.

After confirmation, the current view disappears and a wait message is

displayed.

Select the ”Update EXP” option to access the following screen :

Update EXP

P1 ws0004 tx0007 P2 ws0005

Partial mode
Qui
t
Fig. 12 : Example of update screen

Selecting an operator station starts the update of the views and the causes a signal
message to be displayed. The ”Partial Mode” button allows a transfer of the views
previously selected (their list is given by the last views display function).

For the P2 station, the message is as follows :

”[Mimic] update P2 : ws0005 started”

At the end of the operation, a message is displayed in the signaling message window.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 65
 For the P2 station, the message is as follows :
”[Mimic] update P2: O.K. ”

If the update fails (CVS unavailable, connection faults etc.) the CCC displays an error
message with a request for acknowledgement.

! When a subdrawing has been modified, ”Partial Mode” must not be used.

At the end of the loading operation:

Restart the EXP screens of the corresponding station by selecting the EXP
button of the wait window.

EXP

1. Stop of EXP screens

E
X
P

CCC

2. CCC Update EXP

Update EXP

EXP

3. Restart of EXP screens

E E
X X
P P

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 66
4.2.6. Procedures

As the mimic views are animated from database variables, the database and mimic are
closely linked.

Any modification of the database may have an effect on the mimic views. Conversely,
any modifications to the mimic views must be consistent with the database.

The different actions that modify the database or the mimic views are subject to a
procedure used to check consistency between the database and mimics.

These actions are as follows :

modification of the MICROETE database

modification of the mimic views

restitution of a MICROETE version with its data

restitution of a mimic view version

restitution of a MICROETE version and a mimic view version

return to the previous mimic view version

return the previous database

The first two actions (modification of the database and modification of the mimics) are
the most frequently performed.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 67
4.2.6.1. Action Following Database Modification

Reminder: Execute data generation (please refer to the CENTRALOG Data

Configuration User’s Manual)

 Click on "Get OU" (if the choice is offered, otherwise go directly to ), to
transfer the MICROETE database into the database generation
workspace.

 Click on "Generate DB" to generate the corresponding real time

database.

 Generate a new BVI by selecting the "Generate BVI" option.

 Select the "Verify coherency" option to check that the current mimic
version is consistent with the database.

When database generation is done, click on "Select DB to be loaded" to

integrate and download the new version of the CENTRALOG database (if
no error has occurred during the verify coherency phase).

When the modifications are done and validated, back up the MICROETE
database by selecting the "Backup DB" option.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 68
 1) When Get OU is available

Certain operations can be processed in parallel :

Get OU

Generate BVI

Generate DB Verify
coherency

Select DB

2) When Get OU is not available

Certain operations can be processed in parallel :

Generate DB

Checking and automatic Microété

DVT Generation

Automatic Get OU Files

Generate BVI
Automatic OU checking
Verify coherency
Automatic DB Generation

Select DB

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 69
 Database Database

Config. Admin.

MICRO-
ETE
Micro-
ete View CentraĆ
OU OU log DB
OU n+1
DISK n
Get n-1
OU Generate
Select DB to
Backup DB 1
DB 2
be loaded
6
5

Status of versions
Mimic
admin.
Previous version

Current
Error version
files
Verify
4 coherency

OU
Next version
BVI
3 Generate
BVI

Mimic
config.

Fig. 13 : Sequence of actions following modification

of the database

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 70
4.2.6.2. Action Following Modification of Mimic Views ?

For previous operations, please refer to the CENTRALOG Mimic Configuration User’s
Manual)

 Determine the consistency of the BVI and the MICROETE database by selecting the
”View OU” and ”Status of versions” options. It is recommended to regenerate
systematically the BVI by selecting the ”Generate BVI” option.

 Select the ”Verify coherency” option to check that the next version of the mimics is
consistent with the database.

 Integrate the new version of the mimic views by selecting the ”Select version” option.

 Proceed to transfer the views to the CVS by selecting the ”Update EXP” option.

When the modifications are done and validated, back up the mimics by selecting the
”Backup Mimic” option.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 71
 Status of
Mimic versions
admin.
Previous
version 3 Select version

ÇÇÇÇ
MMI EXP

Current 4
ÇÇÇÇ
Error version
files Update EXP
2
Verify co-
herency

OU Next
version New
BVI version

Generate
1
BVI

Restore Mimic
Mimic
config. 5 Backup Mimic

Fig. 14 : Sequence of actions following modification of mimic views

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 72
4.2.6.3. Action Following Restitution of a MICROETE Version with its Data

 Click on ”Get OU” if the choice is offered, otherwise go directly to  to transfer the
MICROETE database into the database generation workspace.

 Click on ”Generate DB” to generate the corresponding real time database.

 Generate a new BVI by selecting the ”Generate BVI” option.

 Select the ”Verify coherency” option to check that the current mimic version is
consistent with the database.

When generation of the database is done, click on ”Select DB to be loaded” to

integrate and download the new version of the CENTRALOG database (if no error has
occurred during the verify coherency phase).

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 73
 Database Database
Config. Admin.

View Centralog
OU DB

OU n+1
DISK n
Get n-1
OU Generate
1 DB 2 Select DB to be
Restore DB loaded
5
Back-
up
status

Status of versions
Mimic
Admin.
Previous version

Current
Error version
files
4 Verify co-
herency

OU Next version
BVI
Generate
3 BVI

Mimic
Config.

Fig. 15 : Sequence of actions following the restitution of a Microete version

with its data

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 74
4.2.6.4. Action Following Restitution of a Mimic View Version

 Determine the consistency of the BVI and the MICROETE database by selecting the
”View OU” and ”Status of versions” options. It is recommended to regenerate
systematically the BVI by selecting the ”Generate BVI” option.

 Select the ”Verify coherency” option to check that the next version of the mimics is
consistent with the database.

 Integrate the new version of the mimic views by selecting the ”Select version” option.

 Proceed to transfer the views to the CVS by selecting the ”Update EXP” option (total
mode).

Status
Mimic of ver-
Admin. sions
Previous Select
version 3 version
MMI EXP

Current 4
ÇÇÇÇ
Error version
files Up-
date
2 Verify coherency EXP

OU Next
version
BVI
Generate
1
BVI

Mimic Restore Mimic

Config.

Fig. 16 : Sequence of actions following the restitution of a mimic view version

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 75
4.2.6.5. Action Following Restitution of a MICROETE Version and a Mimic View Ver-
sion

 Click on ”Get OU” if the choice is offered, otherwise go directly to  to transfer the
MICROETE database into the database generation workspace.

 Click on ”Generate DB” to generate the corresponding real time database.

 Generate a new BVI by selecting the ”Generate BVI” option.

 Select the ”Verify coherency” option to check that the next version of the mimics is
consistent with the database

When generation of the database is done, click on ”Select DB to be loaded” to

integrate and download the new version of the CENTRALOG database (if no error has
occurred during the verify coherency phase).

Integrate the new version of the mimic views by selecting the ”Select version” option

Proceed to transfer the views to the CVS by selecting the ”Update EXP” option (total
mode).

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 76
 Database Database
Config. Admin.

View
Centralog DB
OU
OU n+1
DISK n
Get n-1
OU Generate
DB 2 Select DB to be
Restore DB 1
loaded
5
Back-
up
status

Status of versions
Mimic
admin.
Previous
version Select version
6
MMI EXP

Current
7
ÇÇÇÇ
Error version
files Update
EXP
Verify
4 coherency

OU Next
version
BVI
Generate
3
BVI

Mimic Restore Mimic

config.

Fig. 17 : Sequence of actions following the restitution of a Microete version

with its mimic views

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 77
4.2.6.6. Action Following the Restitution of the Previous Mimic View Version

 Determine the consistency of the BVI and the MICROETE database by selecting the
”View OU” and ”Status of versions” options. It is recommended to regenerate
systematically the BVI by selecting the ”Generate BVI” option.

 Select the ”Verify coherency” option to check that the current version of the mimics is
consistent with the database

 Proceed to transfer the views to the CVS by selecting the ”Update EXP” option (total
mode).

Status of versions
Mimic
admin.
Previous
version Select version
MMI EXP

Current 3
ÇÇÇÇ
Error version
files Update EXP
2 Verify co-
herency

OU Next
version
BVI

1 Generate
BVI

Mimic
config.

Fig. 18 : Sequence of actions following the restitution of the previous

mimic view version

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 78
4.2.6.7. Action Following Restitution of the Previous Database Version

 Restore the OUs corresponding to the previous version of the database by selecting
the ”Restore DB” option.

 Generate the BVI base which corresponds to these OUs by selecting the ”Generate
BVI” option.

 Select the ”Verify coherency” option to check that the current mimic version is
consistent with the database.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 79
 Database Database
Config. Admin.

Centralog
DB
n+1
DISK n
n-1

1 Select DB to be
loaded
Restore DB

Back-
up
status

Status of versions
Mimic
Admin.
Previous
version

Current
Error version
files
3
Verify co-
herency

OU Next
version
BVI
2 Generate
BVI

Mimic
Config.

Fig. 19 : Sequence of actions following the restitution of the previous

database version

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 80
4.2.7. Dealing with Errors

This paragraph presents the error conditions that may occur during the modification of
the database and/or of the mimic views. It details the actions to be undertaken in order
to reestablish consistency between the database and the mimics.

The different error conditions dealt with are as follows :

Microété or P4–Network control failure

Errors detected during verification of the OUs

Database generation failure

Failure of the BVI– current mimic version consistency check

Failure of the BVI– next mimic version consistency check

Red frames appearing in the mimics during normal operation phase

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 81
 Microété or P4–Network control errors

Errors may be ”configuration” or ”hardware” type. If Microété is local on the CCC, the
only possible hardware failure concerns the SunPC board, if it is installed. Check the
messages appearing in the console window (open the ”Console” window with the
”open” key).

Where Microété is installed on a remote PC, like the P4–Network, the hardware errors
may follow a ethernet link break between the CCC and its peripherals. See the ftp error
messages displayed either in the automatic DB generation window or in the console
window which indicate the type of problem.

Configuration errors may be due to a wrong entry of the Centralog configuration

parameters.
— the 3 letter project code does not correspond to the Microété code,
— the supervisory DB number (old section number) is unknown from
Microété,
— when a Centralog is used as Controtest the 3 letter project code must be
”zyx”,
— the Microété or P4–Network is wrong,
— these stations are not installed on the correct network.

OU verification errors

 Check the errors detected against the modifications performed. Quit the ”Get OU”
option by deleting the OUs

 This kind of error is a result of a lack of coherency between the data base model and
the current Microete version. If it does an Anomaly report must be issued.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 82
 Database generation errors

The database generation software distinguishes between two types of error :

Blocking system errors, such as :

— Memory allocation failure
— File cannot be opened/closed

Non–blocking functional errors, such as :
— Cannot create object (maximum number of objects attained)
— Addition to non–existent object etc.
These errors generally occurred when the sizing of a Centralog product has
been overpassed.

If system errors are detected, the software offers to display the trace file and the error
file. The trace file provides a list of the operations carried out during database
generation while the error file supplies a list of functional errors encountered before the
blocking error.

Similarly, when functional errors are encountered, the user may consult the trace and
error files.

The analysis of the trace and error files should enable the database object which is at
the origin of the error to be identified. Knowledge of the modifications carried out will
then enable the error to be located.

The procedure applied is as follows :

 Return to the ”MICROETE”tool to correct the errors and generate new OUs.
 Rerun the transmission procedure by re–selecting ”Get OU” if this choice is available,
otherwise go directly to the next step.
 Generate the database again by selecting ”Generate DB”.

Database Database
Config. Admin.

MICRO- 1
ETE
Microete

OU
OU
DISK 3
2 Get
OU Generate DB
Fig. 20 : Operations to be performed in the event of database generation error

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 83
 Inconsistency between the BVI and the current mimic version

 Analyze the inconsistency by consulting the error file

 Select ”New version” to copy the current version into the next version

 Correct the views by means of the ”DV–Draw” graphics editor

 Select ”Verify coherency” to check the correction (global or not, depending on the
number of views concerned)

Select ”Select version” to integrate the new mimic version (global or not)

Finally transfer the mimic views onto the CVS by selecting the ”Update EXP” option

Mimic Status of versions

admin.
Previous
version Select version
5
MMI EXP

6
ÇÇÇÇ
Current
1 Error version
files Update EXP
Verify coherency

Next
version New
4 2
BVI ver-
sion

DV– -----------
Mimic Draw
config. 3

Fig. 21 : Operations to be performed in the event of inconsistency between the

BVI and the current mimic version

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 84
 Inconsistency between the BVI and the next mimic version

 Analyze the inconsistency by consulting the error file

 Correct the views by means of the ”DV–Draw” graphics editor

 Select ”Verify coherency” to check the correction (global or not, depending on the
number of views concerned)

 Select ”Select version” to integrate the new mimic version (global or not)

Finally transfer the mimic views onto the CVS by selecting the ”Update EXP” option

Status of versions
Mimic
admin. Previous
version Select version
4
MMI EXP

Current 5
ÇÇÇÇÇ
1 Error version
files Update EXP
Verify co-
herency
3
Next
version
BVI

DV–Draw -----------
Mimic
config. 2

Fig. 22 : Operations to be performed in the event of inconsistency between

the BVI and the next mimic version

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 85
 If red outlines appear in the mimic:

 Check consistency between the database used for the operation ”Generate BVI” and
the database selected in ”Select DB to be loaded”

 Check the views concerned using the ”DV–Draw” editor: check data with respect to
the link with the database concerning the objects outlined in red. Also check document
”Centralog Mimic Views Configuration User’s Manual” , Appendix ”Data Sources”.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 86
4.3. MAINTENANCE

4.3.1. Principles

The tasks executed by the CIS and the CENTRALOG Configuration Center processes
transmit signaling messages. These messages are displayed in order of arrival in one
of the windows on the CCC.

The CCC stores these messages on hard disk and provides a set of functions which
can be used to filter them according to specific criteria (date and time of transmission,
transmitter) and print them out.

Maximum storage capacity is 1024 messages. Beyond this, the oldest messages in
storage are overwritten.

Centralog Messages From: 5hs station: 1 Date 26/10/93 10:13:44:070

Card: 5hsb Process: Phti_tri Sender: rphts_acquisit

! Lib: 01KITUS002 Printer 2 E: NORMA

Window displaying
messages in order of arrival
Blocking
message indicator

Mode Consultation Sorting Disabled

Filters
Source Block : Station : Card Name :
Time slice From : Until :
Date [DD/MM/YYYY] : 3/9/1992 Date [DD/MM/YYYY] : 3/9/1992
Hour [hh:mm] : Hour [hh:mm] :

Sender : Name : Process : Name :

Message Display
From : 5hs Station : 1 card : 5 hsb process : phti_tu
Date : 17/01/1998 13 : 37 : 28 : 930 Sender : rphts_acquisit 192/192
01KITUS064 WORKSTATION 1 BD2 ACCESS CONNECT E : IN_SV

Stack Analysis

Done Prev Next Message : 192 Min Max Quit

Stack analysis window

Fig. 23 : Consult error message window

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 87
 Order of arrival display

Messages are displayed in order of arrival on three lines in a dedicated window at the
top right hand corner of the CCC view:

From: 5hs station: 1 Date 26/10/98 10:13:44:070

Card: 5hsb Process: Phti_tri Sender: rphts_acquisit

Lib: 01KITUS002 Printer 2 E: NORMA

Fig. 24 : Example of message

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 88
4.3.2. Edit/Consult Message Function

The Edit/Consult message function is used for off–line consultation of signaling

messages without affecting order–of–arrival message display.

Running Edit/Consult

Edit/consult
 Click on the button. The window shown below appears on
the CENTRALOG Configuration Center view :

Select Edit/Consult mode

Sort mode

Filters
Mode Consultation Sorting Disabled
Filters
Source Block Station : Card Name
Time slice From : Until :
Date [DD/MM/YYYY] : 03/09/1998 Date [DD/MM/YYYY] : 03/09/1998
Message display
Hour [hh:mm] : Hour [hh:mm] : area
Sender name : Process Name :

Message Display

Stack analysis
area
Stack Analysis

Done Prev Next Message : 581 Min Max Quit

Confirm selection Quit Edit/Consult mode

Edit/Consult mode input window

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 89
  Select one or more filters as required in the Filters window :

Filters
Source Block: Station: Card name:
Time slice From: Until:
Date [dd/mm/yyyy]: Date [dd/mm/yyyy]:
Hour [hh:mm] : Hour [hh:mm] :

Sender name: Process name:

Filter parameters
Filter window

The filters enable messages to be released according to six different criteria :

[Source Block] : Centralog 50 only,

[Station] : Centralog 50 only,

[Card name] : name of the card transmitting the message, (CCC if the
message originates from the CCC).

[Time span] : messages sent during a given time span (minimum span : 1
minute),

[Sender name] : name of the request transmitting the message (NB. the sort
may be carried out on a part of the request name, eg. rpxij),

[Process name] : name of the process transmitting the message.

All the non–blank criteria of the filter taken into account in releasing the messages.

 Select the message sort mode as required: [Chrono.], [Reverse chrono.], or

[Disabled] (default mode).

 Select the message display mode: printout [Edition] or screen display

[Consultation] (default mode).

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 90
 Click on [Done] to release the messages :

If none of the messages corresponds to the specified selection criteria, the CCC
displays :

Click on [Acknowledge], then return to  to modify the selection criteria.

! The CCC releases the messages presents on the hard disk when the Done
button is designated. Messages subsequent to the click are therefore not displayed.
Click on the Done button again to update the messages.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 91
4.3.2.1. Consult Mode

The Consult mode enables released messages to be displayed one by one.

After the operator clicks on [Done], the CCC proceeds to release the messages in
accordance with the criteria supplied. If the release is successful, the CCC displays the
last message received (or the first if the chronological sort mode has been selected) in
the Message Display area.

Mode Consultation Sorting Disabled

Filters
Source Block Station : Card Name
Time slice From : Until :
Date [DD/MM/YYYY] : 03/09/1998 Date [DD/MM/YYYY] : 03/09/1998
Hour [hh:mm] : Hour [hh:mm] :

Sender name : Process Name :

Message Display
From : 5hs Station : 1 card : 5 hsb process : phti_tu
Date : 03/09/1998 13 : 37 : 28 : 940 Sender : rphts_acquisit 192/192
01KITUS064 WORKSTATION 1 BD2 ACCESS CONNECT E : IN_SV

Stack Analysis

Done Prev Next Message : 192 Min Max Quit

Read next message Message location slidebar

Read previous message Current message number

Fig. 25 : Message display in consult mode

The user can scroll the messages by clicking on [Prev] or [Next]. He can move about
more quickly within the messages by clicking directly on the message location slider
(see slider operation in Chapter 2).

At any time, the user can run a new release by modifying the criteria in the Filters area
and clicking on [Done].

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 92
4.3.2.2. Edit Mode

The Edit mode Edition is used to send the released messages to the printer.

Implementation

 Click on [Edit/Consult] to access the signaling message grill.

 Select the filters and set mode to Mode Edit.

 Click on [Done]. The CCC indicates the number of messages to be printed. If

there are too many messages to be printed, click on [Cancel] to cancel the
request,and reset the filters to give a manageable number of messages. Click
on [Valid].

Valid

Validation opens a printer selection window. Check that the printer you require
is connected and on-line, select it and click on .

Important: without a filter, all of the 1024 messages are printed, which will take
approximately one hour. It is preferable to limit the number of messages to be
printed by checking the filters in Consult Mode. Once the filters have been set
correctly (ie. to release only useful messages), switch to Edit mode with Mode
Edit and print the messages out by clicking on [Done].

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 93
4.3.3. Displaying Blocking Messages

Blocking messages are messages which appear when the conditions necessary for
correct operation of the CIS or of a CVS are not fulfilled. They cause the CIS or the CVS
to stop.

A blocking message may show up in one of three ways :

The CCC displays a message in the signaling message window,

The blocking message indicator is displayed in the CCC band,

!

The last ten ’manufacturer” signaling messages and eventually the stack
analysis are displayed (this operation may take several minutes). A screen
softcopy can also be made.

It is important that this information should be recorded as it will be used in

subsequent off–line analysis of the operating incident. It is therefore vital that
these records should be made available to CEGELEC maintenance crews in
the form of Anomaly Reports (see 1.3 Anomaly Reports).

The command q <return> closes the signaling messages printout window.

This command also causes the blocking message indicator to disappear and
frees the CCC man–machine interface.

When the information has been recorded, the CIS or the CVS needs to be restarted.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 94
4.4. EXPLOITATION

This chapter describes access to the different man–machine interfaces (HDSR, CVS,
etc.), the CENTRALOG administration functions together with the screen softcopy
utilities.

4.4.1. Miscellaneous functions

Depending on the configuration, a specific UNIX application is accessed by clicking on

the Miscell button. The corresponding function name appears in the menu (e.g. FTP
Transmission).

View DB Transmission

FTP Transmission
Exploitation

Centralog
Miscell Facilities
Admin.

4.4.1.1. Data Transfer between two CCC stations

When a configuration includes two or more CCC stations, it may be necessary to

transfer data between them, after an update for example. To facilitate the process, a
special tool enables all the data concerning the database and the mimic bank to be
transmitted over the Ethernet network.

CCC source CCC to be

updated
CV1 CC1 CV2 CV3 CC2
S C S S C

Ethernet

CIS 1 CIS 2
S8000

Example of configuration comprising two CCC stations

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 95
 The data transferred includes:
— the next (VS), previous (VP) and current (VC) versions of the database
and the mimic bank
— the state of the different versions and the state of consistency of the mimic
views,
— the BVI mimic variable bank.
The transfer request is initiated from the CCC to be updated.

1 Select View DB Transmission .

2 In the window, indicate the name of the source CCC station:

ex. : ws0004

3 Confirm

The transfer time depends essentially on the volume of data to be transferred. A

message is displayed to indicate the time the operation starts and finishes.

What happens after the transfer?

If the operation has transferred a new current version (VC) of the database, the CIS
and the CVS operator stations associated with the CIS must be stopped and restarted
using the Centralog Admin. menu.

If the operation has transferred a new current version (VC) of the mimic views, the
operator stations concerned can then be updated by using the Update EXP function in
the Mimic Admin. menu.

4.4.1.2. PC Data Exchange – FTP Transmission

In certain configurations, the MICROETE database input function may be located on a

remote PC connected to the network. The ”FTP transmission” function enables:

databases to be transferred from the CCC to the PC

databases to be transferred from the PC to the CCC

the PC/CCC link to be suspended

This function may be installed only when the Centralog is not connected to Controcad.

Data transferred to or from the PC is that contained in the directory ”C:\MICROETE”.

Transfer from PC to CCC

1 From the PC, initialize the PC/CCC link by entering

cd C:\CCC_D
tr_v_ccc.bat

2 From the CCC, select the option FTP Transmission from the MISC menu

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 96
 3 In the open window, enter the number of the function required
1

4 Confirm

Transfer from CCC to PC

1 From the PC, initialize the PC/CCC link by entering

cd C:\CCC_D
tr_d_ccc.bat

2 Confirm deletion of the "MICROETE" directory

3 From the CCC, select the option FTP Transmission MISC menu

4 In the open window, enter the number of the function required

2

5 Confirm

Suspending the PC/CCC link

1 From the CCC, select the option FTP Transmission from the MISC menu

2 In the open window, enter the number of the function required

3

3 Confirm.

This command is executed automatically at the end of each transfer. It must be

requested by the operator when an operation has been aborted.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 97
4.4.2. Centralog Admin.

The Centralog Admin button which is used to activate the different Centralog
administration functions, gives access to the following menu:

Station Admin

Stop CCC

Restart MTX Kernel

MSNV

Exploitation

Centralog
Miscell Admin. Facilities

4.4.2.1. Station Administration (Centralog 30 or 50)

The Station Admin option opens a window which can be used to start and stop
stations or access a file containing system information which can be modified by the
user (operating mode, start enable, files to be downloaded etc.) The symbol
represents a selection button.

Station Administration
Block Global Information Start-up conditions
Block name: 1ps Station: 1 Status: Start enable
Functional name: S1 DB Downloading Type: All Start order: 1
Start mode: Operationnal Start up delay: 0

Exec files Operating mode: normal

Card: Normal file:

Card: Normal file:
Card: Normal file:
Card: Normal file:
Card: Normal file:
Card: Normal file:
Card: Normal file:
Card: Normal file:
Stop Station
Save Station Start Station Quit

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 98
 1 – Block
The arrows et are used to select the CIS or the CVS operator station to be
modified, stopped or started.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 99
 2 – Global information

Station (1/2) :
The value 2 refers to the second station of a dual block. This value is
1 in all other cases.

DB Downloading type (Partial/All) :

(”All” means that the entire database is re–initialized. ”Partial” means
that historical data contained in the database such as curves, logs
etc. will be conserved).

Start Mode (Operational / Stand alone) :

”Operational” in normal operating mode

3 – Start–up conditions

Status (Start enable / disable) :

Enables/disables CIS startup (or CVS startup – C50 only).

Start order :
Order in which the stations are started in automatic mode.

Start–up delay :
Timeout (in seconds) between station starts in automatic mode.

4 – Exec files

Operating mode (Normal / Test) :

Depending on the mode selected, the normal operating executables
or the test executables are downloaded (see Card Normal file / Test
file field).

Card : Normal file / Test file :

An executable file name is associated to each physical block. A test
mode file name may also be added if required.

5 – Control

Save Station :
Saves modifications to system file data concerning the current
station.

Start Station and Stop Station buttons:

These buttons are used to start/stop the station selected.

QUIT :
Exit without saving modifications.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 100
4.4.2.2. Station Administration (Centralog 10)

In a Centralog 10 configuration, the Station Admin option opens a window which can
be used to start and stop stations or to access to a file containing system information
which can be modified by the user. This file is similar to that described above for the
Centralog 50, and permits the operator, in particular, to choose the type of database
download (partial or total) required and to enable/disable station start–ups.

Station Administration
Global Information

Block Station: 1
name: 1ps DB Downloading Type: All
Functional name: S1 Start mode: Operationnal

Start-up conditions

Status: Start enable

Start order: 1 Start up delay: 0

Save Station Start Station Stop Station Quit

4.4.2.3. Stop CCC

This button is used to stop the CENTRALOG Configuration Center and the CVS1
man–machine interface (see paragraph 3.2.1 Shutting Down the CCC).

Why?

Stopping the CCC is useful in the following case:

Installation and update of a new version

The restart procedure is described in paragraph 3.1.2. .

4.4.2.4. Restart MTX Kernel

This button is used to reinitialize the MTX Kernel software and the EXP application.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 101
4.4.2.5. MSNV (dual Centralog)

The MSNV procedure and software (New Version Installation) are used in a Centralog
configuration comprising a dual CIS. MSNV enables a new database or software
version to be installed on a group of stations without disturbing the rest of the system. It
is subsequently possible to extend the new version to the complete system or to revert
to the previous version.

For a full description of MSNV, please refer to the document ”New Version Installation
– User Manual”.

4.4.3. Facilities

The Facilities functions are reserved for maintenance purposes.

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 102
 Appendices

APPENDIX A CCC/CVS DIRECTORIES

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 103
 CCC/CVS directories
/local

af

ccc clg exe vue_be

Host space
bd Operational views
dc ic oc sc dc ic oc sc vpm *

dc ic oc sc

ccc_m base dos hdsr

ETAT.CCC microete fic_vers etat_base BA BC BR1 BR2 trace

mod.attente mod.courant
Host space
Data generated
c10 c30 c50 dico_base xxxx.A yyyy.B zzzz.A xxxx.B zzzz.B

e MF b MF
ctx (1 to 9) ete
Données
dico Données

dvt Host space

Microete * depending on the installation
Data

vp vc vs rep_bvi rep_bva

fic_vers DVconfig rep_syn bib_ref cvs_ref

Host space
Design office views

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 104
APPENDIX B CONSISTENCY CHECK

B.1. Introduction

The consistency check (”Verify coherency”) function verifies one or more mimics and
compares the variables used in the animation of mimic displays with the variables in
the mimic variable database (provided from the Microete database). The results of this
check are given in an error file accessed from the same ”Verify coherency” menu. This
appendix lists the checks carried out and gives the corresponding message type.

Errors are grouped according to the check phase being performed. Each phase is
identified by a label. Errors found in the course of a phase are indicated immediately
below the phase label, as follows:

Phase
description of first error
description of second error
.............................

B.2. Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in error description messages:

<ds name> represents the name of the ds found in the mimic

<dsv name> represents the name of the dsv found in the mimic

<BVI type> represents the BVI variable type

<dsv type> represents the type of the dsv found in the mimic

<BVI structure> represents the BVI variable structure type

<dsv structure> represents the type of structure of the dsv found in the mimic

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 105

<BVI size> represents the size of the BVI variable, Vector structure or Text type

<dsv size> represents the size of the dsv in the mimic, Vector structure or Text
type

<object name> represents the complete name of the object

B.3. Data source names

Phase label: ”Data Source:”

Error 1: ds non–existent in mimic variable bank

<ds name>: Not found in BVI

Error 2: type of ds invalid

<ds name>: Invalid type - MEMORY type required

B.4. Data source variable names

Phase label: ”Variables:”

Error 1: dsv non–existent in mimic variable bank or not reserved word

<ds name> <dsv name>: Not found in BVI

Error 2: type of dsv inconsistent

<name ds> <dsv name>: Invalid type

Error 3: type of structure inconsistent

<name ds> <dsv name>: Invalid structure

Error 4: size of structure inconsistent

<name ds> <dsv name>: Invalid size

Error 5: incorrect visibility

<name ds> <dsv name>: Must be GLOBAL

B.5. Data sources linked to sub–drawing dynamics

Phase label: ”Sub–drawing Data Source:”

Error 1: ds not in list of reserved words

<ds name>: Invalid name

Error 2: type of ds invalid

<ds name>: Invalid type - MEMORY type required

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 106
 Warning 3: type of reference DV–Draw
<file name>: The file must be REFERENCED

Warning 4: mapping of variable

<dsv name>: The variable must be mapped

Error 5: type of dynamic

<file name>: Dynamic must be ENABLED

B.6. Objects having one or more dynamic

Phase label: ”Object dynamics”

Error 1: unauthorized graph object type

<ds name> <dsv name>: Forbidden graph type

Error 2: incorrect dsv type linked to a graph

<ds name> <dsv name>: Invalid variable type

Error 3: incorrect dsv structure type linked to a graph

<ds name> <dsv name>: Invalid variable structure

Error 4: Input object type

<ds name> <dsv name>: Forbidden object type - INPUT

B.7. Object name syntax

Label: ”Naming of objects:”

Error 1: incorrect name

<object name>: Invalid type

Error 2: process number of ”PI:” object name incorrect

<object name>: Invalid process number

Error 3: key not found in name

<object name>: Key not found into process name

Error 4: key not found in mimic variable base

<object name>: Key not found into BVI

Error 5: object named ”PI:” does not include sub–drawing phzj_BTN_corps.v

<object name>: must be a 3D button

Error 6: number of object named ”POS:” incorrect

<object name>: Invalid number, only 1, 2 or 3 are permitted

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 107
 Error 7: number of object named ”POS:” not unique
<object name>: This number already exists

B.8. Comment

Label: ”Comment:”

Error 1: unauthorized word

<first word of comment>: Forbidden

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 108
APPENDIX C FUNCTION ACCESS LEVELS

The table below shows the CCC functions and their access levels. Certain optional
functions are dependent on the configuration.

Access
Function Access button
level

Database Configuration (option) Database Config

Database Input and Modification (deĆ Database Config
3
pending on configuration) MICROETE
Database Config
Database storage (on DAT) 3
Backup DB
Database Config
Database retrieval (from DAT) 3
Restore DB
Database Config
Database storage status 3
Backup Status

Database Administration Database Admin

Database Admin
Display OU file status 3
View OU data
Database Admin
Acquire OU files 3
Get OU data
Database Admin
Generate RTDB 3
Generate DB
Database Admin
Select current database version 3
Select DB to be loaded

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 109
 Access
Function Access button
level

Mimic Configuration (option) Mimic Config

Mimic Config
Mimic editor (option) 3
DV-Draw
Mimic Config
Mimic storage (on DAT) 3
Backup Mimic
Mimic Config
Mimic retrieval (on DAT) 3
Restore Mimic
Mimic Config
New version (delete next version) 3
New Version
Mimic Config
Delete mimic 3
Remove Views

Mimic Administration Mimic Admin

Mimic Admin
Data on the three mimic versions 3
Status of versions
Mimic Admin
Generate mimic variable database (BVI) 3
Generate BVI
Check consistency between variables Mimic Admin
3
used in the mimics and BVI variables Verify coherency
Mimic Admin
Select current mimic version 3
Select version
Transfer current mimic version to an opĆ Mimic Admin
3
erator station Update EXP

Signal Messages Edit/Consult

Consult signal messages Edit/Consult 2
Print signal messages Edit/Consult 2

Miscellaneous functions (option) Miscella

Miscella
Transmission between 2 CCCs (option) 4
View DB Transmission
Transmission between CCC and remote Miscella FTP TransmisĆ
4
PC (depending on configuration) sion

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 110
 Access
Function Access button
level

Centralog administration Centralog Admin.

Centralog Admin.
Station administration 4
Station Admin
Centralog Admin.
Stop CCC 4
Stop CCC
Reinitialize MTX Kernel and EXP Centralog Admin.
4
application Restart MTX Kernel
Implement new database version Centralog Admin.
4
(dual configurations) MSNV

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 111
 Document References

Revisions or amendments made hereafter to any documents with reference numbers

that include revision numbers or dates shall apply to the present document only if such
revisions or amendments have been incorporated under a modification of the revision
number. For document references that do not include a revision number, the most
recent version of the document shall apply.

Document title Ref. num. Lang Rev

CENTRALOG Data Configuration

User's Manual PTP09-A42005 E

CENTRALOG Mimic Configuration

User's Manual PTP09-A42002 E

CENTRALOG Anomaly
Management Procedure PTP09-A42601 E

CENTRALOG New Version

Installation Manual PTP09-A42403 E

.
P-TP09-A42000-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Configuration Center User's Manual Sheet 112
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Distribución Electrica Alta Tensión

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

CLUSTER CLUSTER CLUSTER CLUSTER

LINE #4 LINE #3 LINE #2 LINE #1
TRMV3A TRMV3B
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Modos de Control - Local / Remoto

Turbina A L/R Turbina C L/R Turbina B L/R

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B
L/R
L/R L/R L/R
1A-02 1B-02 1B-04
1A-04
32-SG-1
L/R
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09
L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R

32-TR-2

1
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Modos de Control - Manual / Automático

Turbina A M/A Turbina C M/A Turbina B M/A

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B
M/A
M/A M/A M/A
1A-02 1B-02 1B-04
1A-04
32-SG-1
M/A
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09
M/A M/A M/A M/A M/A M/A M/A

32-TR-2

1
34,5kV INCOMING CB INTERFACES

1A01, 1A02, 1A04, 1B02, 1B04

DIGITAL INPUTS:
1. Open position (except 1A01)
2. Closed position
3. Availability
4. General alarm
5. General trip
6. Critical Control Fault
7. Remote mode

DIGITAL OUTPUTS:
1. Open order
2. Close order
3. Permissive to close

34,5kV OUTGOING CB INTERFACES

1A09, 1A08, 1A07, 1B06, 1B07, 1B08, 1B09

DIGITAL INPUTS:
1. Remote mode
2. Closed position
3. Availability
4. General Alarm
5. General Trip
6. Critical Control Fault
7. Recloser operating (only for 1A09, 1A08, 1B07, 1B09)

DIGITAL OUTPUTS:
1. Open order
2. Close order
 Permissive to Close
1A04
Start

XAHH500A
Gen. Trip Y
TRMV-1A

N
ZSL400A ZSH1A02 ZSH400C
Q400A Y 1A-02 N Q400C N
Closed Open Open

N Y Y

ZSH1A01
N 1A01
Closed

Y
ZSH1B02 ZSH400C
1B02 N Q400C N
Open Open

Y Y

ZSH1B04 ZSH400B
1B04 N Q400B N
Open Open

Y Y

XA1A04
1A-04 N
Available

Y
XAHH1A04
1A-04 Y
Trip

N
EAH1A04
1A-04 Y
Critical Ctrl Fault

N
Close Order YR1A04
Permissive

End
 Close Command
1A04
Start

YR1A04
Close N
Permissive

Y
ZLR1A04
Local / Remote Local
Selection

Remote
ZLA1A04 Y1A04_C
Auto / Manu Manu Operator N
Selection Close Request

Auto Y

N Seq. P1A04_C
Close Request

Close Order YZL1A04

End
 Open Command
1A04
Start

XA1A04
1A-04 N
Available

Y
ZLR1A04
Local / Remote Local
Selection

Remote
ZLA1A04 Y1A04_O
Auto / Manu Manu Operator N
Selection Open Request

Auto Y
P1A04_O
N Seq.
Open Request

Open Order YZH1A04

End
 Discrepancy

Start
1A04

1A04 N 1A04 N 1A04 N

Open Order Close Order Opened

YZL1A04 Y YZH1A04 Y ZSL1A04 Y

1A04 Y 1A04 Y 1A04 N 1A04 Y

Opened Closed Closed Closed

ZSL1A04 N ZSH1A04 N ZSH1A04 Y ZSH1A04 N

TEMPO

N END
TEMPO

MM1A04 Y
MISMATCH
ALARM

End
1.3.2 Circuit Breaker – 1A01.

Permissive to Close 1A01

Start

N Q400B N
Q400A 1A-04 N 1B-04 N
Open Open Open Open

Y Y Y Y

Q400C N 1A-02 N N
Q400C 1B-02 N
Open Open Open Open

Y Y Y Y

N
1A-01
Available

Y
Y
1A-01
Critical Ctrl Fault

N
Close Order
Permissive

End
 Close Command 1A01

Start

YR1A0
Clos N
Permissiv

Y
ZLR1A0
Local / Loca
Selectio

Remot
ZLA1A0 Y1A01-
Auto / Man Operator N
Selectio Close

Auto Y
P1A01-C
N Seq.
Close

Close YZL1A0

End
 Open Command 1A01

Start

XA1A0
CBA0 N
Availabl

Y
ZLR1A0
Local / Loca
Selectio

Remot
ZLA1A0 Y1A01-
Auto / Man Operato N
Selectio Open

Auto Y
P1A01-
N Seq.
Open

Open YZH1A0

End
 Discrepancy
1A01

Start

1A01 N 1A01 N
Open Order Close Order

YZL1A01 Y YZH1A01 Y

N 1A01 1A01 Y
Closed Closed

ZSL1A01 Y ZSL1A01 N

TEMPO

N END
TEMPO

MM1A01 Y
MISMATCH
ALARM

End
 Open Command
1B08
Start

XA1B08
1B08 N
Available

Y
ZLR1B08
Local / Remote Local
Selection

Remote
ZLA1B08
1B08 Manu
AUTO/MANU

Auto
P1B08_O Y1B08_O
N Seq. Operator N
Open Request Open Request

Y Y

Open Order YZH1B08

End
 Close Command
1B07
Start

XA1B07
1B-07 N
Available

Y
XAHH1B07
1B-07 Y
Trip

N
EAH1B07
1B-07 Y
Critical Ctrl Fault

N
ZLR1B07
Local / Remote Local
Selection

Remote
ZLA1B07
1B-07 Manu
AUTO/MANU

Auto
P1B07_C Y1B07_C
N Seq. Operator N
Close Request Close Request

Y Y

Close Order YZL1B07

End
 Discrepancy
1A08, 1A09, 1B07, 1B09

Start

RECLOSER Y
1B-07

N
YZL1B07 YZH1B07
1B-07 N 1B-07 N
Open Order Close Order

Y Y

N 1B-07 1B-07 Y
Closed Closed

ZSH1B07 Y ZSH1B07 N

TEMPO

END N
TEMPO

Y
MISMATCH

MM1B07

End
 Discrepancy
1A07, 1B06, 1B08

Start

YZL1B-08 YZH1B-08
1B-08 N 1B-08 N
Open Order Close Order

Y Y

N 1B-08 1B-08 Y
Closed Closed

ZSH1B-08 Y ZSH1B-08 N

TEMPO

END N
TEMPO

Y
MISMATCH

MM1B-08

End
34,5kV ANALOG MEASURMENTS

Voltages from cells 1A06 and 1B01

Frequencies from cells 1A06 and 1B01

FOR OUTGOING CELLS

(1A09, 1A08, 1A07, 1B06, 1B07, 1B08, 1B09)

Current

COS φ

The P320 calculates the active power and the reactive power.
Answer or modification description:
1. The alarms were calculated by the PRISCA module using the following algorithm:

IF ( ABS(Voltage_set-point_of_turbine_X – Voltage_on_SG1) >= PR_1-DELTA_U ) THEN

PR_1X-EAD620X = 1 (alarm)
ELSE PR_1X-EAD620X = 0 (OK)

where: X = A, B, C
Voltage_set-point_of_turbine are the same for all 3 turbine and equal to the operators voltage set-point
(default is 34.5kV )
PR_1-DELTA_U – delta (value between 0.1 and 1.0 kV- default was 0.35kV )
Voltage_on_SG1 – measured voltage on SG1

In this way we have 3 alarms at the same time that is not very useful.

2. The following improvement has been realised.

The previous 3 alarms are replaced by the 3 new alarms:

34.5KV VOLTAGE ALARM LEVEL-1 – when absolute difference between measured voltage on SG1 and the
voltage reference variable PR_1-KPUREF is higher or equal to the
authorised delta represented by the variable PR_1-DELTA_U.
34.5KV VOLTAGE ALARM LEVEL-2 – when absolute difference between measured voltage on SG1 and the
voltage reference variable PR_1-KPUREF is higher or equal to 2 times
the authorised delta represented by the variable PR_1-DELTA_U.
34.5KV VOLTAGE ALARM LEVEL-3 – when absolute difference between measured voltage on SG1 and the
voltage reference variable PR_1-KPUREF is higher or equal to 3 times
the authorised delta represented by the variable PR_1-DELTA_U.

To carry out this improvement the following modifications has been done.

The variables PR_1A-EAD620A, PR_1B-EAD620B and PR_1C_EAD620C are replaced by the 3 new variables:
PR_1-EAD620_1 - 34.5KV VOLTAGE ALARM LEVEL-1
PR_1-EAD620_2 - 34.5KV VOLTAGE ALARM LEVEL-2
PR_1-EAD620_3 - 34.5KV VOLTAGE ALARM LEVEL-3

The old algorithm in the PRISCA module is replaced be the new one as follow:

IF ( ABS(PR_1-KPUREF – Voltage_on_SG1) >= N*PR_1-DELTA_U ) THEN

PR_1-EAD620_N = 1 (alarm)
ELSE PR_1-EAD620_N = 0 (OK)

where: N = 1, 2, 3
PR_1-KPUREF – Voltage reference variable – default 34.5 kV
PR_1-DELTA_U – delta (value between 0.1 and 1.0 kV- default is 0.5kV )
Voltage_on_SG1 – measured voltage on SG1
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Distribución Electrica Baja Tensión G

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q502A

A508-A
Turbina A
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Modos de Control - Manual / Automático G

1 M/A
M/A
M/A 2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q502A

A508-A
Turbina A
480 V CB I/O INTERFACES

Digital Inputs
Closed position 2A02
Availability of 2A02
Under voltage 2A02 (F27.1 – incoming voltage)

Closed position 2A01

Availability of 2A01

Closed position 2B07

Availability of 2B07
Under voltage 2B07 (F27.2 - incoming voltage)

Closed position 2A04

Closed position 2A06
Common fault breakers-BUS A

Closed position 2B01

Closed position 2B02
Closed position 2B03
Closed position 2B04
Closed position 2B05
Closed position 2B06

Digital Outputs
Open order 2A02
Close order 2A02

Open order 2A01

Close order 2A01

Open order 2B07

Close order 2B07
 Close Command
2A02
Start

XA2A02
2A-02 N
Available

Y
ZLA2A02 Y2A02_C
Auto / Manu Manu Operator N
Selection Close Request

Auto Y

N Seq. P2A02_C
Close Request

Close Order YZL2A02

End
 Open Command
2A02
Start

XA2A0
2A- N
Availabl

Y
ZLA2A0 Y2A02_
Auto / Man Operato N
Selectio Open

Auto Y
P2A02_
N Seq.
Open

Open YZH2A0

End
 Discrepancy
2A02

Start

YZL2A02 YZH2A02
2A-02 N 2A-02 N
Open Order Close Order

Y Y

N 2A-02 2A-02 Y
Closed Closed

ZSH2A02 Y ZSH2A02 N

TEMPO

TMR
END N
TEMPO

Y
MISMATCH

MM2A02

End
 Close Command
2A01
Start

ZSH2B07
2B-07 Y
Closed

N
XA2A01
2A-01 N
Available

Y
ZLA2A01 Y2A01_C
Auto / Manu Manu Operator N
Selection Close Request

Auto Y

N Seq. P2A01_C
Close Request

Close Order YZL2A01

End
 Open Command
2A01
Start

XA2A0
2A- N
Availabl

Y
ZLA2A0 Y2A01_
Auto / Man Operato N
Selectio Open

Auto Y
P2A01_
N Seq.
Open

Open YZH2A0

End
 Discrepancy
2A01
Start

YZL2A01 YZH2A01
2A-01 N 2A-01 N
Open Order Close Order

Y Y

N 2A-01 2A-01 Y
Closed Closed

ZSH2A01 Y ZSH2A01 N

TEMPO

TMR
END N
TEMPO

Y
MISMATCH

MM2A01

End
 Close Command
2B07
Start

ZSL2A01
2A-01 Y
Closed

N
XA2B07
2B-07 N
Available

Y
ZLA2B07 Y2B07_C
Auto / Manu Manu Operator N
Selection Close Request

Auto Y

N Seq. P2B07_C
Close Request

Close Order

YZL2B07

End
 Open Command
2B07
Start

XA2B0
2B- N
Availabl

Y
ZLA2B0 Y2B07_
Auto / Man Operato N
Selectio Open

Auto Y
P2B07_
N Seq.
Open

Open

YZH2B0

End
 Discrepancy
2B07

Start

YZL2B07 YZH2B07
2B-07 N 2B-07 N
Open Order Close Order

Y Y

N 2B-07 2B-07 Y
Closed Closed

ZSH2B07 Y ZSH2B07 N

TEMPO

TMR
END N
TEMPO

Y
MISMATCH

MM2B07

End
480V ANALOG MEASURMENTS

Voltage 2A01A (Bus 2A01)

Current 2A02

Voltage 2A01B (Incoming 2B07)

Current 2B07
 CB_LOWV Logic for LOW-V CB’s automatic control
in PLC AUX 3 (cycle 50ms)

IF NON VOLTAGE
ON 2A02 DURING
TIME > 4 sec
UMIN_2A02 = YES

IF VOLTAGE OK
ON 2A02 DURING
TIME > 4 sec
UMIN_2A02 = NON

TIME
FROM NO
PLC START
> 10 sec
?

YES

ALL
CB ’s
2A01,2B02,2B07 NO
ARE AVAILABLE
?

YES

ALL
LOW_V CB ’s in
YES TO DIESEL AUTOMATIC NO
REQUEST MODE (Status from
( FROM NO CELL01)
CELL01) ?
?

YES

CANCEL ORDERS:
CLOSE 2A01 CANCEL ORDERS:
YES CLOSE 2A01
CLOSE 2A02
OPEN 2B07 UMIN_2A02 CLOSE 2A02
? CLOSE 2B07
OPEN 2A01
OPEN 2A02
NO OPEN 2B07

CANCEL ORDERS:
2A01 NO OPEN 2A01
IS OPEN 2A02
CLOSED CLOSE 2B07
?

YES

2A02 2B07
NO YES
IS IS
OPEN ORDER 2A01 CLOSED CLOSED
? ?

YES NO

OPEN ORDER 2A02 OPEN ORDER 2B07

2A02
YES
IS
CLOSED
?

NO

2B07 2A01 YES

IS YES CLOSE ORDER 2A02 IS
CLOSED CLOSED
? ?

NO NO

CLOSE ORDER 2B07 CLOSE ORDER 2A01

END
GAS TRUBINE INTERFACES

DIGITAL INPUTS:
1. Open positions CB Q400 (13,8kV)
2. Closed position CB Q400 (13,8kV)
3. Gas turbine in Isochronous Mode
4. Gas turbine in Droop Mode
5. Generator in Voltage Mode
6. Generator in Reactive Power Mode
7. Gas turbine tripped
8. Gas turbine controlled by EMCS
9. CB Q400 (13,8kV) tripping too long

DIGITAL OUTPUTS:
1. Gas turbine in Isochronous Mode
2. Gas turbine in Droop Mode
3. Generator in Voltage Mode
4. Generator in Reactive Power Mode
5. Permissive to switch MCC to EDG supply
6. Gas turbine Normal Start Order
7. Gas turbine Black Start Order
8. Gas turbine Stop Order
9. Fuel gas selection
10. Diesel fuel selection
11. Open order CB Q400 (13,8kV)

ANALOGIC INPUTS:
1. Generator Active Power
2. Generator Reactive Power

ANALOGIC OUTPUTS:
1. Generator Active Power Set Point (to MARK-V)
2. Generator Reactive Power Set Point (to AVR)
3. Generator Voltage Set Point (to AVR)

MODBUS LINK
Serial communication line type RS233 or RS485 using master/slave protocol named
MODBUS.
The list of signals exchanged between the P320 and the MARK-V is presented in the
paragraph P320 General Architecture (before).
 Discrepancy
Q400A
Start

ZSL400A
Q400A N
Opened

Y
ZSH400A ZSH400A
N Q400A Q400A Y
Closed Closed

Y N

TEMPO

END N
TEMPO

Y
MISMATCH

MM400A

End
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Modos de Regulación de la Turbina

Parámetros de Operación:
Velocidad Ω
G Potencia Activa P
Tensión U
Potencia Reactiva Q
Factor de Potencia
Q400

Turbina: El P320 sólo usa las parejas

- Isochronous (Ω) de modos de regulación
- Droop (P) siguientes (en automático):

Generador: Isochronous / Tensión

- Tensión
- Potencia Reactiva Droop / Potencia Reactiva
- Factor de Potencia
 (a) Isochronous Mode

Ω2=constant

P1

Ω2=constant (60 Hz)

(b) Droop Mode

GT1 (Follower)
ω01
Ω1

P1
 TWO (2) GTGs RUNNING
one (1) in Isochronous mode, one (1) in Droop mode

GT2= Lead GT =>Turbine: Isochronous mode

Generator: Voltage Regulation mode
GT1= Follower GT =>Turbine: Droop mode
Generator: Reactive Power Regulation

GT1 (Follower) GT2 (Lead)

ω 01
Ω1 Ω 2 = constant

P1 P2

TWO (2) GTGs RUNNING

both in Droop mode/ Reactive Power Regulation

GT1 GT2

ω 01 ω 02

Ω1 Ω2

P1 P2
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Modos de Regulación de la Turbina
No puede haber más de una Turbina en modo Isochronous / Tensión

Turbina A I Turbina C D Turbina B D

G U G Q G Q

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
TURBINE/GENERATOR MODES

LOCAL MODE
Turbine and generator are fully controlled by MARK-V

REMOTE MODE
ISOCHRONOUS/VOLTAGE MODE
Turbine follows the Ω (speed) setting from the MARK-V
Generator follows the U (voltage) setting from the P320

DROOP/REACTIVE POWER MODE

Turbine follows the P (active power) setting from the P320
Generator follows the Q (reactive power) setting from the P320

P320 SETTING POINTS

VOLTAGE (for generator)

All time is equal to the operator setting point for the 32-SG-1

ACTIVE POWER (for turbine)

LOCAL MODE
Follows the active power measurement for the turbine

REMOTE/MANUAL MODE
Is equal to the operator setting point for the turbine

REMOTE/AUTOMATIC MODE
Is equal to the setting point calculated by Load Sharing

REACTIVE POWER (for generator)

LOCAL MODE
Follows the reactive power measurement for the turbine

REMOTE/MANUAL MODE
Is equal to the operator setting point for the turbine

REMOTE/AUTOMATIC MODE
Is equal to the setting point calculated by Load Sharing
 MANUAL / AUTO SELECTION

Start

PR_1A-UUMODO
FORCED IN Y
MANUAL

N
GT_1A-ZSA606A
REMOTE N
POSITION

Y
ISOLE (C)
ISOLATED Y
32GT01A

N
GT_1A-L30DRS GT_1A-L30DR
READY TO N RUN N
START A

Y Y

AUTO MODE MANUAL MODE

PR_1A-UUMOD

End
 TURBINE ISOLATED
Start

SG_1A-ZSL1A01
1A01 Y
CLOSED

GT_1B-L30DR GT_1C-L30DR
GT_1B N GT_1C N
RUNNING RUNNING

Y Y

SG_1A-ZSL1A02
1A02 N
OPENED

Y
GT-A
ISOLATED
ISOLE (C)

End
 READY TO RUN
Start

ISOLE (C)
GT-A Y
Isolated

GT_1A-L30DRS
GT-A N
Ready To Start

Y
GT_1A-XA400A
Q400A N
Available

Y
GT_1A-ZSA606A
GT-A N
Remote Mode

Y
TR_1A-XAHH500A
TR-1 Y
TRIP

N
SG_1A-XA1A04
1A-04 N
Available

Y
SG_1A-ZLA1A04
1A-04 N
Auto & Remote
SG_1A-ZLR1A04
Y

Ready to Run
PR_1A-RD2RUN

End
 PRIORITY TO START
Start

PR_1A-UUMOD
GT-A N
AUTO mode

Y
PR_1A-RD2RUN
GT-A N
Ready to Run

Y
GT_1A-L30DRUN
GT-A Y
Run

First N
Priority

Y
Selection GT-A
To Run
GT2RUN (C)

End
 PRIORITY TO STOP
Start

PR_1A-UUMOD
GT-A N
Auto mode

Y
GT_1A-L30DRUN
GT-A N
Run
Y
GT-A N
SUCPL (C) Coupled

Y
STOP Y
STOPR (C)
Running

N
First N
Priority

Selection GT-A
GT2STOP (C)
To Stop

End
 BLACK START CONDITION

Start

SG_1A-ZSL1A01
Bus Tie N
closed

Y
GT2RUN (C)
Selection N
GT-A to Run

Y
GT_1A-ZSL400A
GT_1B-ZSL400B All Q400 N
GT_1C-ZSL400C Open

Y
GT_1A-SEQ_ON
Sequence Y
In Progress

N
Black Start
Condition
PR_1-BSCOND

End
 BLACK START REQUEST

Start

PR_1-BSCOND
Black Start N
Condition

Request Op. N
Black Start

Y
Black start
Request
PR_1A-P610A

End
0 BLACK START SEQUENCE
BLACK_START_ORDER_GTA & TENSION_ON_SG1A & TENSION_ON_SG1B TURBINE A

OPEN ORDERS:
1 Q400A,Q400B,Q400C, 1A04,1A02,1B02,1B04
CLOSE ORDERS:
1A01
START TIMER
500ms
1A01_CLOSED & Q400A_OPEN & Q400B_OPEN & Q400C_OPEN & TIMER_500ms

2 See logic CB_LOWV for automatic switching of low voltage circuit breakers

2B07_CLOSED & TENSION_ON_2B07_OK

3 BLACK START ORDER TO GT_A

GTA_TRIPPED

PERMISSIVE_TO_CLOSE_CB_34.5KV & Q400A_CLOSED & GTA_TRIPPED

CLOSE ORDERS: START TIMER

4 1A04, 1A02, 1B02, 1B04 500ms

1A04_CLOSED & TIMER_500ms

CLOSE ORDERS:
5 1B08 1A04_OPEN

1A04_CLOSED & 1B08_CLOSED

6 See logic CB_LOWV for automatic switching of low voltage circuit breakers
1A04_OPEN

1A04_CLOSED & 2A02_CLOSED & TENSION_ON_SG2A_OK

7 See logic CB_LOWV for automatic switching of low voltage circuit breakers
1A04_OPEN

1A04_CLOSED & 2B07_OPEN

8 See logic CB_LOWV for automatic switching of low voltage circuit breakers
1A04_OPEN

1A04_CLOSED & 2A02_CLOSED & 2A01_CLOSED

START TIMER
9 5s 1A04_OPEN

1A04_CLOSED & TIMER_5s

START TIMER CLOSE ORDERS:

10 5s 1A07 1A04_OPEN

1A04_CLOSED & TIMER_5s

START TIMER CLOSE ORDERS:

11 5s 1A08 1A04_OPEN

1A04_CLOSED & TIMER_5s

START TIMER CLOSE ORDERS:

12 5s 1A09
1A04_OPEN

1A04_CLOSED & TIMER_5s

START TIMER CLOSE ORDERS:

13 5s 1B06 1A04_OPEN

1A04_CLOSED & TIMER_5s

START TIMER CLOSE ORDERS:

14 5s 1B07 1A04_OPEN

1A04_CLOSED & TIMER_5s

START TIMER CLOSE ORDERS: START TIMER

15 500ms 1B09 16 500ms

TIMER_500ms TIMER_500ms
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A) G

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q5021A

A508-A
Turbina A
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B
ABRIR
1A-02 1B-02 1B-04
1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09
CERRAR
32-TR-2

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

BLACK
A START C B
ORDER
1A-02 1B-02 1B-04
1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G CERRAR G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A) G

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
ABRIR Q502B
luego
Q501B
CERRAR
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A
A508-A
Turbina A
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B
CERRAR
1A-02 1B-02 1B-04
1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

CERRAR
1A-02 1B-02 1B-04
1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A) G

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = ABRIR C
Q502C
luego
= Q501C
∼ CERRAR
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A
A508-A
Turbina A
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1 CERRAR

1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A) G

ABRIR
1

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A

A508-A
Turbina A
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A) G

CERRAR
1

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A
A508-A
Turbina A
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A) G

CERRAR
1

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A

A508-A
Turbina A
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2
CERRAR

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2
CERRAR

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2
CERRAR

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2
CERRAR

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1 CERRAR

1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática BLACK START (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1 CERRAR
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
When the first Turbine is already in operation , the second turbine shall be start
automatically or manually.

P1 > P2 > P3 > P4 are power thresholds entered by engineer

Load Test N°1:

Pi > P2 , during T2

Load Test N°2:

Pi + Pi i > P4 , during T4

AUTO NORMAL START REQUEST

Start

GT2RUN (C)
N Selection GT-A
To Run

Y
NBJNTC (C)
Other GT - Coupling =2
Number

=1

N Load Test Load Test

N:1 N:2

Y Y
Tempo T2 Tempo T4

N End Tempo T2 End Tempo T4 N

Y Y

Auto
Normal start Request
PR_1A-P609A

End
 START ORDER SEQUENCE

Start

PR_1A-UUMOD
Auto
MAN / AUTO AUTO N
Normal Start Request
Mode

MAN Y
PR_1A-RD2RUN
N GT-A
Ready to run

Y
ISOLE (C)
N GT-A
Isolated

N
PR_1A-BSCOND
N Black start
Condition

N
Permissive
to start
PR_1A-Y609-OK

N Normal Start
Operator

Y
Normal Start Auto
Operator Order Normal Start Order
PR_1A-Y609A PR_1A-P609A

End
 NORMAL START SEQUENCE
TURBINE A

0
PROG_OR_OPERATOR_START_RQ_GTA & Q400A_OPEN

CLOSE ORDERS:
1 1A04

1A04_CLOSED

NORMAL START ORDER

2 TO GT_A

GT_A_RUN | GT_A_NOT_READY_TO_START (signals from MODBUS)

 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática ARRANQUE 2a TURBINA (Turbina B)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

START
ORDER
A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática ARRANQUE 2a TURBINA (Turbina B)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G ¨¨
Q400A Q400C Q400B
Syncronizar
MARK-V
A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática ARRANQUE 2a TURBINA (Turbina B)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

CERRAR
A C B MARK-V

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
G
Sequencia Automática ARRANQUE 2a TURBINA (Turbina B)

Ninguna Acción en Baja Tensión

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A

A508-A
Turbina A
The turbines shall be stop automatically or manually .

Load Test N °3:

Pi + Pii + Pi i i < P3 , during T3

Load Test N °4:

Pi + Pii < P1 , during T1

AUTO NORMAL STOP REQUEST

Start

GT2STP (C)
N Selection GT-A
To Stop

Y
NBJNTC (C)
Other GT - Coupling =3
Number

=2

N Load Test Load Test

N:4 N:3

Y Y
Tempo T1 Tempo T3

N End Tempo T1 End Tempo T3 N

Y Y

Auto
Normal stop Request
PR_1A-P611A

End
To authorize stop of a turbine by the operator, test N5 is used. The example of this test for the
authorization to stop the turbine B when the turbines A and B work is show bellow:

N5: Pa + Pb < Pamax – Pldshres

Pa – active power of the turbine A
Pb – active power of the turbine B
Pamax – maximum active power of the turbine A
Pldshres – reserve of the active power to be available after load shedding (LS_1-PWR_RES).

STOP ORDER SEQUENCE

Start

GT_1A-ZSA606A
Remote N
Mode

N Automatic
mode

Y
PR_1A-LAST_GT
Y Last
Automatic
Turbine Normal Stop Request N

N
Y
Load Test N
N:5

N Request Op.
Normal Stop

Stop Order Stop Order

Operator Automatic
PR_1A-Y611A PR_1A-P611A

End
 STOP SEQUENCE
TURBINE A

PROG_OR_OPERATOR_STOP_RQ_GTA & LAST_GT PROG_OR_OPERATOR_STOP_RQ_GTA & LAST_GT

START TIMER STOP ORDER

1
SET REQUEST
LOW_V TO DIESEL
10 500ms GT_A

2B07_CLOSED TIMER_500ms

START TIMER
START TIMER
4 5s
KEEP REQUEST
LOW_V TO DIESEL
OPEN ORDER
Q400A
11 500ms

TIMER_500ms
TIMER_5s & Q400A_OPEN

START TIMER KEEP REQUEST STOP ORDER

5 500ms LOW_V TO DIESEL GT_A

TIMER_500ms

START TIMER KEEP REQUEST OPEN ORDERS:

6 500ms LOW_V TO DIESEL 1A07, 1A08, 1A09, 1B06, 1B07, 1B08, 1B09

TIMER_500ms

Remark
The request LOW_V TO DIESEL is managed by the logic CB_LOWV
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática PARO 3a TURBINA (Turbina C)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

STOP
ORDER
A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática PARO 3a TURBINA (Turbina C)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

ABRIR
A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
G
Sequencia Automática PARO 3a TURBINA (Turbina C)

Ninguna Acción en Baja Tensión

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A

A508-A
Turbina A
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática PARO 2a TURBINA (Turbina B)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

STOP
C
ORDER B
A

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática PARO 2a TURBINA (Turbina B)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

ABRIR
A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
G
Sequencia Automática PARO 2a TURBINA (Turbina B)

Ninguna Acción en Baja Tensión

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A

A508-A
Turbina A
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática STOP LAST TURBINE (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática STOP LAST TURBINE (Turbina A) G

ABRIR
1

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A

A508-A
Turbina A
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática STOP LAST TURBINE (Turbina A) G

1 CERRAR
2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A

A508-A
Turbina A
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática STOP LAST TURBINE (Turbina A) G

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

ABRIR ∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
B Turbina C
Q502B

Q501B
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A

A508-A
Turbina A
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática STOP LAST TURBINE (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

ABRIR
A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática STOP LAST TURBINE (Turbina A) G

2B-07
2A-02 2A-01

∼ ∼ ∼
32-SG-2
=
= = C
Q502C

= Q501C
∼
A508-C
ABRIR B Turbina C
Q502B
luego
Q501B
CERRAR
A508-B
A Turbina B
Q502A

Q501A
A508-A
Turbina A
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática STOP LAST TURBINE (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

STOP
A ORDER C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

32-TR-2

1
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Sequencia Automática STOP LAST TURBINE (Turbina A)

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

A C B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

ABRIR
32-TR-2

1
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Regulación de Tensión - Modo Automático
Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B
AVR AVR AVR

UM2 (1) UM2 (2) UM2 (3)

4/20 mA 4/20 mA 4/20 mA

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

1B-04
1A-04 32-SG-1 1A-02 1B-02

1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1A-02 1B-06 1B-07 1B-08 1B-09

OPERADOR (Consigna 32-SG-1)

4/20 mA 4/20 mA
P320

UM1 US1

(1) (2) (3)

SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Regulación de Tensión - Modo Automático
Turbina A

AVR
US2 = f(US1)

P320

⊗
- +
Modo « Regulación U »
& Modo
UM2 REGULACION
Remoto (1) (US1)

4/20 mA
G EXITACION

Q400A

IT RT US2 = US1 x 13,8 x TAP + √3(RT IT cosφ + XT IT sinφ)

XT
36
1A-04 TAP:
1 → 1,05
2 → 1,025
3→1
4 → 0,975
5 → 0,95
FUEL CHANGE OVER

The fuel change over is operating only when the turbine is in REMOTE MODE.

When the turbine is switched from the MARK-V consol from LOCAL to REMOT (EMCS)
mode and its status is READY TO RUN, the P320 will select automatically the DIESEL
FUEL. The same will happen, when the status of the turbine becomes READY TO RUN and
the turbine is in REMOTE mode. This will be independent of the number of turbines already
running.

The P320 operator can select the GAS FULE from the P320 consol, after checking that all
conditions to start this turbine on gas fuel are satisfied. If the start of the turbine doesn’t take
place within 50 minutes, the P320 will select back the DIESEL FUEL.

After receiving a fuel changeover request from the CENTRALOG, the PLC verifies if the
request differs from the fuel selection actually used. It also checks if the gas turbine is
controlled by the P320’s “remote” mode.
If these two conditions are satisfied the PLC sends the request impulse to the MARK-V
controller and starts the timer function. This timer will be cancelled when the selected fuel
matches the fuel requested or when the time-out expires. As long as the timer is active the
type of fuel requested is displayed on the graphic CTRL-ABC.
On the expiration of the time an appropriated alarm is generated.
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función Load Sharing

Objetivos:
- equilibrar la producción de potencia eléctrica entre todas las Turbinas en
servicio (y que operan en modo « automático »),
- arrancar automáticamente una turbina cuando el consumo lo requiera,
- parar automáticamente una turbina cuando el consumo lo requiera

Turbina A R Turbina C R Turbina B R

G A G A G A
PA PC PB

Q400A Q400C Q400B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función Load Sharing - Arranque / Paro Automático

Se definen 4 niveles de potencia. El P320 arranca / para turbinas cuando el

consumo alcanza esos niveles
P1: Nivel de potencia para parar la segunda turbina
P2: Nivel de potencia para arrancar la segunda turbina
P3: Nivel de potencia para parar la tercera turbina
P4: Nivel de potencia para arrancar la tercera turbina

Turbina A R Turbina C R Turbina B R

G A G A G A
PA PC PB

Q400A Q400C Q400B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función Load Sharing - Arranque / Paro Automático
Número de Turbinas en Servicio

1
Potencia
Eléctrica
0 Consumida
P1 P2 P3 P4 (PA + PB + PC)

Turbina A R Turbina C R Turbina B R

G A G A G A
PA PC PB

Q400A Q400C Q400B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función Load Sharing - Arranque / Paro Automático - Reserva de Potencia

Reserva P2 P4
de Potencia Como determinar la reserva
PMAXC de Potencia, según el número
de Turbinas funcionando y
PMAXB
el Consumo Electrico global

PMAXA

Consumo Electrico
Global
Turbina A R Turbina C R Turbina B R
G A G A G A
PA PC PB

Q400A Q400C Q400B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función Load Sharing - Arranque / Paro Automático - Reserva de Potencia

Reserva P2 P4
de Potencia
PMAXC

PMAXB
3 Turbinas funcionando

2 Turbinas funcionando

PMAXA 1 Turbina funcionando

Consumo Electrico
Global
Turbina A R Turbina C R Turbina B R
G A G A G A
PA PC PB

Q400A Q400C Q400B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función Load Sharing - Repartición de la Potencia entre las Turbinas

Cuando una sola turbina funciona: no hay necesidad de repartir la

potencia.

PA = Potencia electrica consumida

Consigna USA
Modo Isochronous / Tensión Modo Droop / Potencia Reactiva Modo Droop / Potencia Reactiva

Turbina A R Turbina C R Turbina B R

G A G A G A
PA PC = 0 PB = 0

Q400A Q400C Q400B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función Load Sharing - Repartición de la Potencia entre las Turbinas

Cuando 2 o 3 Turbinas funcionan, el P320 elabora las consignas

PSB,C = (PA+PB+PC) QSB,C = (QA+QB+QC) (N = 2 o 3)
N N
…la última turbina no recibe consigna, y proporciona la diferencia:
PA = (PA+PB+PC) – (N-1) x PSC
QA = (QA+QB+QC) – (N-1) x QSC
Consigna USA Consigna PSC, QSC Consigna PSB, QSB
Modo Isochronous / Tensión Modo Droop / Potencia Reactiva Modo Droop / Potencia Reactiva

Turbina A R Turbina C R Turbina B R

G A G A G A
PA PC PB

Q400A Q400C Q400B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función “Load Shedding”
El operador define el orden de prioridad entre los 4 clusters y 10 motores de la Main Station

Turbina A Turbina C Turbina B

G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-09

CL#4 CL#3 CL#2 CL#1

T/S-01

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10
M M M M M M M M M M
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función “Load Shedding”
Se calcula la reserva de potencia de cada turbina en automático
Turbina A Turbina C ∆PB=PMAXB-PB Turbina B
G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

∆PC=PMAXC-PC
∆PA=PMAXA-PA

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-09

CL#4 CL#3 CL#2 CL#1

T/S-01

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10
M M M M M M M M M M
1. The new parameter LS_1-PWR_RES was introduced to
manage the reserve of the active power after a Load Shedding.
2. This parameter represents the reserve of the active power to be
available after load shedding.
3. On the next slides this parameter is represented as PR
4. The LS_1-PWR_RES is initialised in the CENTRALOG DB
at 4MW, but the operator can modified it.
 SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función “Load Shedding”
Si una turbina disparara: ¿podrían las demás turbinas recuperar la carga ?
Turbina A Turbina C ∆PB=PMAXB-PB Turbina B
G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

∆PC=PMAXC-PC
∆PA=PMAXA-PA

(∆PA + ∆PC - PR) > PB ?

1A-02 1B-02 1B-04

1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-09

CL#4 CL#3 CL#2 CL#1

T/S-01

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10
M M M M M M M M M M
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función “Load Shedding”
En caso que no: el P320 calcula la carga que habría que aliviar...
Turbina A Turbina C ∆PB=PMAXB-PB Turbina B
G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

∆PC=PMAXC-PC
∆PA=PMAXA-PA

(∆PA + ∆PC - PR ) > PB ? NO

Hay que aliviar
PLS = PB - (∆PA + ∆PC - PR )
1A-02 1B-02 1B-04
1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-09

CL#4 CL#3 CL#2 CL#1

T/S-01

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10
M M M M M M M M M M
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función “Load Shedding”
...y va marcando los consumidores según el orden definido...
Turbina A Turbina C ∆PB=PMAXB-PB Turbina B
G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

∆PC=PMAXC-PC
∆PA=PMAXA-PA

(∆PA + ∆PC - PR ) > PB ? NO

Hay que aliviar
PLS = PB - (∆PA + ∆PC - PR )
1A-02 1B-02 1B-04
1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-09

CL#4 CL#3 CL#2 CL#1

T/S-01

⊗
M1
⊗
M2
⊗
M3
⊗
M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10
M M M M M M M M M M
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función “Load Shedding”
…hasta que su potencia total supere la potencia que hay que aliviar.
Turbina A Turbina C ∆PB=PMAXB-PB Turbina B
G G G

Q400A Q400C Q400B

∆PC=PMAXC-PC
∆PA=PMAXA-PA

(∆PA + ∆PC - PR ) > PB ? NO

Hay que aliviar
PLS = PB - (∆PA + ∆PC - PR )
1A-02 1B-02 1B-04
1A-04
32-SG-1
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-09

PM1 + PM2 + PM3 + PM4

CL#4 CL#3 CL#2 CL#1
> PLS : OK

T/S-01

⊗
M1
⊗
M2
⊗
M3
⊗
M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10
M M M M M M M M M M
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función “Load Shedding”
En caso que la Turbina realmente dispare...
Turbina A
G
Turbina C
G
∆PB=PMAXB-PB Turbina B
G 
Q400A
∆PA=PMAXA-PA
Q400C
∆PC=PMAXC-PC

(∆PA + ∆PC - PR ) > PB ? NO
Hay que aliviar

1A-04
PLS = PB - (∆PA + ∆PC - PR )

32-SG-1
1A-02 1B-02 
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-09

PM1 + PM2 + PM3 + PM4

CL#4 CL#3 CL#2 CL#1
> PLS : OK

T/S-01

⊗
M1
⊗
M2
⊗
M3
⊗
M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10
M M M M M M M M M M
SINCOR - POWER GENERATION PACKAGE
Función “Load Shedding”
… el P320 hace instantaneamente disparar los consumidores marcados.
Turbina A
G
Turbina C
G
∆PB=PMAXB-PB Turbina B
G 
Q400A
∆PA=PMAXA-PA
Q400C
∆PC=PMAXC-PC

(∆PA + ∆PC - PR ) > PB ? NO
Hay que aliviar

1A-04
PLS = PB - (∆PA + ∆PC - PR )

32-SG-1
1A-02 1B-02 
1A-01
1A-09 1A-08 1A-07 1B-06 1B-07 1B-09

PM1 + PM2 + PM3 + PM4

CL#4 CL#3 CL#2 CL#1
> PLS : OK

T/S-01

⊗
M1
⊗
M2
⊗
M3
⊗
M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10
M  M M M M M M M M M
LOAD SHEDDING BITS MAPPING

Bit 0 Motor 1 D-3004A

Bit 1 Motor 2 D-3004B

Bit 2 Motor 3 D-3004C

Bit 3 Motor 4 D-3004D

Bit 4 Motor 5 K-3201A

Bit 5 Motor 6 K-3201B

Bit 6 Motor 7 K-3201S

Bit 7 Motor 8 K-3202

Bit 8 Motor 9 TR-MV-5A

Bit 9 Motor 10 TR-MV-5D

Bit 10 Motor 11 Spare

Bit 11 CB 1A09 Cluster Line #4

Bit 12 CB 1A08 Cluster Line #3

Bit 13 CB 1B07 Cluster Line #2

Bit 14 CB 1B09 Cluster Line #1

Bit 15 Flip-flop

These bits are in words:

LS_1-FLAGA for GT-A
LS_1-FLAGB for GT-B
LS_1-FLAGC for GT-C
IMPROVEMENT OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY CTRL-ABC.

The original format of the graphic display CTRL-ABC is as shown below.

The following improvements have been added to graphic display CTRL-ABC:

− Display of the actual set-point values sent to the gas turbines,
− Display of the fuel changeover request sequence in operation.
Display of the actual set points sent to the gas turbine control system.

In the original configuration it was not possible for the plant operator to know the real value of set points sent by
the P320 control system to the gas turbine control systems.
As a function of the gas turbine operating mode, these set point values could be equal to the value of the
measured variable, be equal to the operator's set point value, or to the value calculated by the PRISCA module in
the P320.
To improve the safety of the control of the turbine using P320 it would be very useful for the operator to know
the actual values of the real set points sent to the MARK-V controller.

The display of the set-point values read in the P320 PLC has been added to the CTRL-ABC display. This
ensures that they are the real values sent to MARK-V.

See the new format of the graphic display CTRL-ABC presented below (new row SETPOINT P320 -> GT).
Display of the fuel change over request in operation.

Originally, once a fuel changeover has been requested the operator was no longer informed that this operation is
running. The management of this function has now been improved in the P320 system.
After receiving a fuel changeover request from the CENTRALOG, the PLC verifies if the request differs from
the fuel selection actually used. It also checks if the gas turbine is controlled by the P320’s “remote” mode.
If these two conditions are satisfied the PLC sends the request impulse to the MARK-V controller and starts the
timer function. This timer will be cancelled when the selected fuel matches the fuel requested or when the time-
out expires. As long as the timer is active the type of fuel requested is displayed on the graphic CTRL-ABC.
On the expiration of the time an appropriated alarm is generated.

Refer to the example on the graphic display CTRL-ABC showing the message "Requested GAS" for the Turbine
B in the FUEL SELECTION window.
Copy the screen of CVS1 to the file on the P8 console

1. Display the graphic to be copied on the CVS1 screen.

2. Double-click on the icon TELNET on the P8 console (32-CS-423).
3. From Connect select WS0410.
4. Login: clg
5. Password: clg_c1
6. Command: cd /local/tiff
7. Command: tiff (this command copies the CVS1 screen to the file on CVS1)
8. Command: exit
9. Validate OK.
10. Close TELNET window.
11. Open Explorer on the P8 console.
12. Go to the directory D:\Tiff
13. Double-click on ftpgettiff.bat (Get the screen copy file as a.tif file)
14. Rename the a.tif file as you wont.
 CENTRALOG DATA CONFIGURATION
User's Manual

DIFFUSION : CONFIDENTIELLE RESTREINTE CONTROLEE LIBRE

ACCESSIBILITY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED CONTROLLED FREE
This document is the exclusive property of ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third party without their prior authorization.
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation.

DATE NOM SIGNATURE

18-09-98 NAME
ALSPA 8000-P320 SYSTEM
ETABLI T. PRATT
ESTABLISHED

VERIFIE H. SABOT
CHECKED
Power
Electrical and Control Systems
APPROUVE D. CANTERO
APPROVED

REV STAT. F°/F° FIN Nb F°

SH/SH END N of SH
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A A
PA 400 C

1/ 377 381
 TABLE DES MODIFICATIONS / MODIFICATIONS TABLE

REV ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
A T.Pratt H. Sabot D.Cantero 18.09.98 Translation of the French document rev A GFE
PA 401 A

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 1-i
 Table of contents

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1. Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.2. Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3. ABBREVIATIONS & NOTATION CONVENTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4. MANUAL USER'S GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2. GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1. UTILIZATION CONTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.1. Hardware Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.2. Software Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2. ORGANIZATION OF DATABASE CONFIGURATION OPERATIONS 9
2.3. DATA CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3.1. Access via Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3.2. Data Configuration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3. STARTING & STOPPING THE CONFIGURATION FUNCTION . . . . . . 14

3.1. START PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2. STOP PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.3. RESPONSE TO POWERFAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

4. UTILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.1. GUIDE TO MENUS AND SUB-MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.2. DEFINITION OF THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2.1. Location of Microete in the CCC Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2.2. Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.2.3. Definition of Fields Common to More than One Configuration Screen 22

5. DESCRIPTION OF CONFIGURATION SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

5.1. Configuration of System Names and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.1.2. Declaration of Entities and Associated Alarms List Names . . . . 44
5.1.3. Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.1.4. Protection Level / Processing Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.1.5. Internal List Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 1-ii
 5.1.6. Conversion, Units and State Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.2. DEFINITION OF SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.2.2. Configuration of CVS Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.2.3. Declare Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.2.4. Declare CNS Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.2.5. S8000 Network Access Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5.2.6. Declare P320 or 8035 Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.2.7. Configuration of Automation Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.2.8. Configuration of Input/output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.2.9. Declaration of Network Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.3. OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.3.1. Declaration of Operative Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.3.2. Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.3.3. Mimics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.3.4. Declaration of Schedule Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.3.5. Declaration of Sequence Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.3.6. Operator Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.3.7. Bargraph Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.3.8. Trend on Screen Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
5.3.9. Trend on Printer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5.3.10. Reference Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.3.11. Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5.4. ES VARIABLE ACQUISITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5.4.1. P320 Automation Cell Acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5.4.2. Declaration of TSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.4.3. Declaration of TMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.4.4. TSS Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
5.5. VARIABLE ACQUISITION (EL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5.5.1. 8035 Automation Cell Acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5.6. COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5.6.1. Declaration of TMOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
5.6.2. Declaration of TeleCommands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.6.3. Declaration of Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5.6.4. Command and Control Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5.7. CALCULATIONS AND RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.7.1. Generation of TSIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.7.2. Declaration of Internal Analog Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.7.3. Multi-state Variables (VRI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
5.7.4. Declaration of TSP Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
5.7.5. Generation of TMPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
5.7.6. Generation of VRPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
5.7.7. List of Optiplant TM Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.7.8. List of Optiplant Filter TM Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
5.7.9. Optiplant Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 1-iii
 5.8. DESCRIPTION OF LOGIC VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
5.8.1. Description of TS Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
5.8.2. Description of TM Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
5.8.3. Description of TM Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
5.9. DEFINITION OF GATEWAY VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
5.9.1. Definition of Gateway TS Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
5.9.2. Definition of Gateway TM Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
5.9.3. Definition of Gateway TC Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
5.9.4. Definition of Gateway TVC Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
5.9.5. Definition of VR Gateway Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
5.10. DEFINITION OF OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
5.11. COMMAND COPY GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
5.11.1. Declaration of Command Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
5.11.2. TS Copy to TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
5.11.3. TM Copy to TVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
5.12. ADMINISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
5.12.1. Checking Database Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
5.12.2. Close Database Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
5.12.3. Checking and Generating the DVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
5.12.4. Check and Generate DVT CONTROTEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
5.12.5. Internal Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
5.12.6. External Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
5.12.7. CONTROCAD-C Export/Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
5.12.8. Exporting to CCC-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
5.12.9. Local Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
5.12.10. Miscellaneous Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 1-iv
1. Introduction

1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This document is the Centralog Data Configuration Tool User’s Manual.

It is applicable to the Centralog Series 4 in ES and EL configurations. The menus

described in this document vary according to the configurations implemented.

1.1.1. Object

The data configuration tool is used in two different contexts:

during the configuration phase, to people the database

during the maintenance phase, to integrate modifications to the process or the

associated instrumentation.

The CENTRALOG data configuration tool produces database descriptor files known
as Operative Units (OUs) which are collected together to form the DVT (latest block
description). Each OU is a coherent set of variables from the standpoint of the process.

The CENTRALOG data configuration tool is accessed from screen #1 on the CCC
station VDU.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 2
1.1.2. Users

Profile

Users of the CENTRALOG data configuration tool should have a thorough knowledge
of the process and of the data managed by the CENTRALOG system.

No special prior knowledge of the tool itself is required.

Task

To enable the CENTRALOG database to be updated to match changes made in the

process.

1.2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

CENTRALOG Configuration Center User's Manual.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 3
1.3. ABBREVIATIONS & NOTATION CONVENTIONS

The following terms and abbreviations are used in this manual :

CIS : CENTRALOG Interface Station

Station managing exchanges with P320 automation cells

CVS : CENTRALOG Video Station

CNS : CENTRALOG Network Station : station handling

exchanges with the P320 automation cells

DB : Database

DVT : Latest Block Version : name given to the collected set of

Operative Units

HDSR : Historical Data Storage and Retrieval

P4 : P320 automation cell configuration terminal

SEQ : Sequence(s)

SOE : Sequence Of Events : log providing a historical record of

state changes in logical variables during the period
following the occurrence of an incident, used for off–line
analysis

TC : TeleCommand : variable representing a logical command

transmitted to the process

TCE : External TeleCommand

TCI : Internal TeleCommand

TME : External TeleMeasurement : analog process variable

TMC : Counter TeleMeasurement : analog variable acquired
by a counter device

TMI : Internal TeleMeasurement : TeleMeasurement
(TM) calculated by the CENTRALOG system.

TMO : Operator TeleMeasurement : TM with value attributed
by the operator

TS : TeleSignal : logical variable

TSE : External TeleSignal : logical process input

TSI : Internal TeleSignal : TS calculated by the CENTRALOG
system

TSP : Process TeleSignal : TS calculated by specific
application programs or produced by special internal
CENTRALOG processing

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 4

TSS : System TeleSignal : TS representing the state of the
system elements

TVC : Setpoint Instruction : variable representing an analog
command transmitted to the process

TVCE : External Setpoint Instruction : Type of TVC corresponding
to an analog command transmitted to the process

TVCI : Internal Setpoint Instruction : Type of TVC corresponding
to an analog command transmitted to an internal
CENTRALOG program

OU : Operative Unit : unit of application data representing a
coherent set of variables from the standpoint of the
process.

VRE : External multi–state variable used to supply a synthetic
value for a process actuator

VRI : Multi–state variable used to supply a synthetic value for a
group of TSs and/or TM threshold violations

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 5
1.4. MANUAL USER’S GUIDE

This manual is divided into five chapters:

Chapter 1 : Introduction
describes the purpose of the application and the profile of the
user for whom the manual is intended.

Chapter 2 : General Information

presents the hardware and software environment of the
CENTRALOG data configuration tool and the application’s
operator interface.

Chapter 3 : Stopping and Starting the Application

details the procedures for running and quitting the
application.

Chapter 4 : Utilization
provides a general description of views

Chapter 5; Data Configuration Screens

provides a description of all the database entities. The
chapter groups entities thematically, detailing the relevant
menu selections and the data that must be configured for
each of them.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 6
2. General Information

2.1. UTILIZATION CONTEXT

2.1.1. Hardware Environment

The CENTRALOG data configuration tool is accessed on VDU screen #1 on the CCC
operator station. This operator station is composed of a workstation equipped with a
keyboard, a mouse pointer device and one or two VDU screens.

MICRO-ETE C30 P320 CE2000 TSE ACQUISITION CTR: CTR1 CENT: 1

VAR REF FLG IND RACK MOD WAY CENT P4 REF

LABEL SUP INFO

T 1 2 12 11 E LJP0330JA1'E
00LJP0330JA1
UNIT 1 MAIN TRANSFO C-B _ETC22 (362)

T 1 1 9 1 E 01APAUS601'E
01APAUS601
FBWP 1 SELECTION _ETC21 (256)

F 1 1 9 2 E 01APAUS602'E
01APAUS602
FBWP 2 SELECTION _ETC21 (257)

F 1 1 9 3 E 01APAUS603'E
01APAUS603
FBWP 3 SELECTION _ETC21 (257)

<F1> ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST

<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL-D> DVT FOLLOW UP
<CTRL-HOME> HELP <CTRL-END> OTHER COMMANDS

CCC MMI CVS MMI

 ÇÇÇ

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 7
2.1.2. Software Environment

Configuration software Database management

FOXPRO
DOS DOS emulator
SUNPC
MOTIF / DATAVIEWS MMI window and library
manager
X11
UNIX Standard X11 graphics
environment

Operating system

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 8
2.2. ORGANIZATION OF DATABASE CONFIGURATION OPERATIONS

MICROETE
software CEGELEC
configuration

Declaration of configuration Declaration of hardware

names and messages 1 architecture 2

Declaration
of Operative Units
3

CONTROCAD
import / export Declaration of variables Declaration
(process variables & (acquisition parameters) of operational functions,
network variables) 4 (curves, mimics etc.) 3

Declaration
of commands
(TMO, TC, TVC, block)
5

Declaration of Description of
Declaration of
Description animation operating Command
internal calcs
of variables variables functions copy
(TM, TSI)
7 6 (VRI) 6 8 9

Error correction Database

administration
10

OU extraction for Application variable

CCC-D extraction for CCC-M
10 10

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 9
2.3. DATA CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE

2.3.1. Access via Menus

CENTRALOG data configuration screens are accessed via a menu tree:

MENU PRINCIPAL
CONFIGURATION, NAMES & MESSAGES >
DEFINE ARCHITECTURE ............... >
DECLARE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS >
VARIABLE ACQUISITION >
COMMANDS >
CALCULATIONS & RESULTS > Sub-menu
GENERATE VARIABLES > indicator
DEFINE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS >
REPRODUCTION OF VARIABLES VARIABLE >ACQUISITION
SPECIFIC VARIABLES
ADMINISTRATION
P320 AUTOMATION CELL > ACQUISITIONS
>
>
DIGI 200 BOARD ACQUISITIONS >
DECLARE TMC
DECLARE TSS
TSS RANGES
P320 AUTOMATION CELL ACQUISITIONS

P320 CE2000 TSE ACQUISITION

P320 CE2000 TME ACQUISITION
P320 DI1010 TSE ACQUISITION
P320 DI1010 TME ACQUISITION
ACQUISITION RESULTS P320 TS EQUATION
ACQUISITION RESULTS P320 TM EQUATION
TSE ACQUISITION VIA SMCA MODULE
TME ACQUISITION VIA SM CA MODULE
ACQUISITION P320 SYSTEM DEFINITION TS

MICRO-ETE C30 P320 CE2000 TSE ACQUISITION CTR: CTR1 CENT: 1

VAR REF FLG IND RACK MOD WAY CENT P4 REF

LABEL SUP INFO

T 1 2 12 11 E LJP0330JA1'E
00LJP0330JA1
UNIT 1 MAIN TRANSFO C-B _ETC22 (362)

T 1 1 9 1 E 01APAUS601'E
01APAUS601
FBWP 1 SELECTION _ETC21 (256)

F 1 1 9 2 E 01APAUS602'E
01APAUS602
FBWP 2 SELECTION _ETC21 (257)

F 1 1 9 3 E 01APAUS603'E
01APAUS603
FBWP 3 SELECTION _ETC21 (257)

<F1> ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST

<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL-D> DVT FOLLOW UP
<CTRL-HOME> HELP <CTRL-END> OTHER COMMANDS

Example of accessing a data configuration screen

There may be up to four menu levels. Each menu option gives access either to a
configuration screen or process, or to a further sub–menu. If a sub–menu is present
this is shown by a > sign at the end of the line.

When a configuration exercise or operation is terminated, the menu from which the
function was accessed is re–displayed. Use the <ESCAPE> key to return to the level
immediately above the current level.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 10
2.3.2. Data Configuration Screens

The data configuration screens enable the operator to enter all the information
required for the database. Each of the configuration screens is different, but the
organization of the views and the data configuration routines are the same.

Each screen is divided into four zones:

Title zone

The name of the data input field

Data input field

Dialogue zone

Zone 1 MICRO-ETE C30 P320 CE2000 TSE ACQUISITION CTR: CTR1 CENT: 1

Zone 2 VAR REF

LABEL
FLG IND RACK MOD WAY
SUP INFO
CENT P4 REF

T 1 2 12 11 E LJP0330JA1'E
00LJP0330JA1
UNIT 1 MAIN TRANSFO C-B _ETC22 (362)

T 1 1 9 1 E 01APAUS601'E
01APAUS601
FBWP 1 SELECTION
Zone 3
_ETC21 (256)

F 1 1 9 2 E 01APAUS602'E
01APAUS602
FBWP 2 SELECTION _ETC21 (257)

F 1 1 9 3 E 01APAUS603'E
01APAUS603
FBWP 3 SELECTION _ETC21 (257)

<F1> ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST

Zone 4 <ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL-D> DVT FOLLOW UP
<CTRL-HOME> HELP <CTRL-END> OTHER COMMANDS

Example of data configuration screen

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 11
 Dialogue zone:
Commands are displayed dynamically in order to correspond to current
screens: menus, configuration screens etc.
<F1> ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST
<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL-D> DVT FOLLOW UP
<CTRL-HOME> HELP <CTRL-END> OTHER COMMANDS

Depending on the view displayed or on the operation currently in progress, different types of
information will be displayed in this window:

1– Acknowledgement of a command
eg. ”COMMAND TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT”

2– A request for additional information following a command

eg. ”PRESENTATION ? (Y/N)”

3– A list of operational commands. This list is updated dynamically

in accordance with the view currently displayed: menus, configuration
screens, processing etc.

List of principal commands:

<ESCAPE> : quit current configuration exercise

<PGUP> : displays previous page

<PGDN> : displays next page

<ARROWS> : move between fields

<F1> ACQUISIT : used to modify existing data

<F2> SEARCH : used to search one or more fields

<F3>FIRST PAGE : displays first page of current data

<F4> PRESENTATION : used to display information from the

configuration screen in the numeric or
alphabetical order of a specified field

<F5>LAST PAGE : displays the final page of current data

<F6>CREATION : used to create a new entry

<F7>AID : displays help in the dialogue zone relative to the

field selected

<F8>DELETION : delete current entry

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 12

<F9>STATE OUTPUT : displays or prints all the information relative to a
screen

<F10> MEMORIES : used to program function keys F2 to F9

<?> : lists the entries permitted for a given field

eg. list of acquisition rates

<CTRL–B>BELL : enables or disables the end–of field warning

beep

<CTRL–D>DVT FOLLOW UP : displays the last DVT check file

<CTRL–Q>CANCEL : quit configuration tool without returning to main

menu

<CTRL–END> : used to access other available commands

<CTRL–HOME>HELP : displays help relative to current configuration

screen

<A> CTR : used to select variables by type or by controller in

a TS or TM configuration screen

<U>OU : used to select variables by OU relative to a TS or

TM configuration screen

Important:

The characters which may be used in configuring application data by MICROETE are
shown below (characters accepted by CENTRALOG):
— capitals [A – Z]
— digits [0 – 9]
— space/ . , : & * $ % # ( ) < > = ’ + _ –
NB:

Space characters may not be used in variable ID codes (variable references).

Characters . * ? may not be used in OU ID codes (OU references).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 13
3. Starting & Stopping the Configuration Function

3.1. START PROCEDURE

The CENTRALOG data configuration tool is accessed via the CCC (CENTRALOG
Configuration Center) man–machine interface.

Different levels of access to the tool are managed by the CENTRALOG Configuration
Center. The CENTRALOG data configuration tool can only be started if the user has
the appropriate access level.

If you have the requisite access level, click on the Database Configuration button on
the Configuration to access the following menu:

MICROETE

Backup
DB
Restore
DB
Configuration
Backup
status

Database Database Mimic Mimic

Configuration Administration configuration administration

The CENTRALOG data configuration tool can then be started by selecting the
MICROETE option.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 14
 The screen shown below is displayed, and the user is invited to choose the language in
which he wishes to use the tool:

TEXTE EN LANGUE FRANCAISE

ENGLISH TEXT

MOVE: <ARROWS> SELECTION: <RETURN> ABORT: <ESCAPE>

When a Centralog is used on a Controtest platform, the Centralog (C10, C30 or C50 in
red) must be selected.

NB. In a CENTRALOG 50 system, the choice of unit must be validated.

On confirmation of the language selection, the main menu is displayed.

MICROETE C30.X.Y CEGELEC DD/MM/YY

C30 PROJECT CENT: 5

CONFIGURATION, NAMES & MESSAGES >

DEFINE ARCHITECTURE >
DECLARE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS >
VARIABLE ACQUISITION >
COMMANDS >
CALCULATIONS & RESULTS >
DESCRIBE VARIABLES >
DEFINE GATEWAY VARIABLES >
DEFINE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS >
REPRODUCTION OF VARIABLES >
ADMINISTRATION >

MOVE: <ARROWS> SELECTION: <RETURN> ABORT: <ESCAPE>

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 15
3.2. STOP PROCEDURE

The CENTRALOG data configuration tool can be exited in one of two ways:

Via the main menu

Press the<ESCAPE> key once to access the language selection menu; press
the <ESCAPE> key again to quit the CENTRALOG data configuration tool and
return to the CCC MMI.

Return to the CCC

Man-Machine Interface
<ESC>

TEXTE EN LANGUE FRANCAISE

ENGLISH TEXT

<ESC>

MAIN MENU
CONFIGURATION, NAMES & MESSAGES >
DEFINE ARCHITECTURE >
DECLARE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS >
VARIABLE ACQUISITION >
COMMANDS >
CALCULATIONS & RESULTS >
DESCRIBE VARIABLES >
DEFINE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS >
REPRODUCTION OF VARIABLES >
ADMINISTRATION >

Crash exit

The user can quit the CENTRALOG data configuration tool at any level without
returning to the main menu by pressing the CTRL and Q keys simultaneously.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 16
3.3. RESPONSE TO POWERFAIL

The system responds in three different ways depending on the operation currently in
progress at the moment of the powerfail:

Configuration in progress

Data which has been entered or modified on a configuration screen since the
<F1> key was last pressed is not saved. Such data therefore needs to be
re–entered.

Processing in progress ( DVT check/extraction )

No data is lost, but the operation which has been interrupted must be restarted.

No processing and no configuration in progress at time of powerfail

In this case no data is lost and no specific action needs to be executed.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 17
4. Utilization

4.1. GUIDE TO MENUS AND SUB–MENUS

The menus presented in this chapter are not necessarily listed in the same order as
that of the menu structure of the data configuration tool. Similarly, the titles of the
paragraphs are not necessarily the same as those used as titles for the views.

The description of the options provided by the tool is structured as follows :

Definition of the system

Customization of the system

— The CVS and CNS stations
— The P320 controllers
— The SYCOWAY network
— Variables
— Logs
— Groups
— Lists
— Sequence monitoring
— Control blocks

Printouts

Database administration

Data import and export

Utilities

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 18
 4.2. DEFINITION OF THE SYSTEM
4.2.1. Location of Microete in the CCC Tree /local

ad af

tools bin ccc

clg exe vme vue_be
Host space:
dc ic oc sc tmp Operational
bd views
dc ic oc sc dc ic oc sc dc ic oc sc

ccc_m base dos hdsr

mod.attente ETAT.CCC mod.courant microete etat_base BA BC BR1 BR2 trace

Vi

xxx dico_base xxxx.A yyyy.B zzzz.A xxxx.B yyyy.B

VP VC VS rep_bvi rep_bva
e mf b mf
ct(x) ete p4 lg
Data
fic_vers DVconfig rep_syn bib_ref cvs_ref outils doc dico Data

dvt ars ecr vrr vag

Host
macro- control buttons help system fixed frame Space:
symbols blocks blocks Micro-ETE Data storage point
Data

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 19

4.2.2. Main Menu
MICROETE MENU
1: Configuration, names & messages
2: Define architecture
3 Declare operational functions
4: Variable acquisition
5: Commands
6: Calculations and results
7: Describe variables
8: Gateway variables definition
9: Define operational functions
10:Reproduction of variables
10.1 Declare order copy groups
10.2 TS copy to TC
10.3 TM copy to TVC
11 Administration
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual
1.1: Declare CENTRALOG system 1.1.1: Configure CENTRALOG System in italics: not used
1.2: Declare entities 1.1.2: Declare options in boldface: configured by the system or by import
1.3: Password 1.1.3: CENTRALOG system dimensions underscored: configured by CEGELEC (do not modify)
1.1.4: CENTRALOG system parameters 1.5.1: Internal list names
1.4: Protection level / processing number
1.5: Internal lists and alarm list names 1.5.2: Alarm list names
1.6: Conversion, units and state messages 1.6.1: State or alarm messages 1.5.3: Short alarm list names
1.7: Define usable font types 1.6.2: Measurement units 1.5.4: Filtered alarm list names
1.6.3: Measurement conversion
2.1: Declare CVS station 1.6.4. VRE state messages 2.2.1: CVS initialization entities
2.2: Configure CVS station 2.2.2: CVS entity access
2.3: Declare Gateways 2.8.1: Network variables 2.2.3: CVS initialization views
2.4: Declare CNS stations 2.5.1: Declare P320 automation cells 2.8.2: Network variables produced 2.2.4: Direct access keys (modifiable views)
2.5: S8000 network access point 2.5.2: Configure P320 automation cells 2.8.3: ST2 network variables produced 2.2.5: CVS key band menus
2.6: Declare P320 automation cells 2.5.3: Configure P320 I/O modules 2.8.4: Network variables consumed
2.8.5: ST2 network variables consumed
2.9: Declare network variables 2.8.6: Download network variables
3.1: Declare Operative Units 3.2.1: Declare Y = f (T) curve groups
3.2: Declare curve groups 3.2.2: Define Y = f (X) curve groups
3.4.1 Declare operational schedule groups
3.3: Declare mimic groups 3.4.2 Declare operational schedules
3.4: Declare operational schedule groups 3.4.3 Declare memory memorization variables
3.5.1: Declare sequence groups 3.4.4 Declare disk memorization variables
3.5.2: Describe P320 auto cell sequences
3.5: Declare P320 sequence groups 3.5.3: P320 auto cell sequence step criteria
3.6: Declare operator groups 3.5.4: Sequence state labels
3.7: Declare bargraph groups 3.5.5: Unfiltered SM states
3.8: Declare trend on screen groups 3.5.6: SM reinitialization state
3.9: Declare trend on printer groups
4.1.1.1: CE2000 TSA acquisition
3.10: Declare reference charts 3.11.1: Declare periodic logs
4.1.1.2: CE2000 TMA acquisition
3.11: Declare logs 3.11.2: Declare disturbance logs
4.1.1.3: SMCA TSE acquisition
3.11.3: Declare SOE logs
4.1.6.4: SMCA TME acquisition
4.1.2.1: CE8035 TSE acquisition
4.1.2.2: CE8035 TME acquisition
4.1.1: CE2000 acquisition
4.1.2: CE8035 acquisition
4.1.3: REFLEX acquisition 4.1.3.1 TSX acquisition
4.1.3.2 VRX acquisition
4.1: P320 automation cell acquisitions 4.1.4: C370 TSR acquisition
4.2: Declare TMC 4.1.5: DI103 acquisition
4.3: Declare TSS 4.1.6: C370 TMR acquisition
4.4: TSS range 4.1.7: Declare VRE
4.1.8: Declare sequence criteria
4.1.9: Acquisition P320 system fault TS
5.2.1: Declare TCI
5.1: Declare TMO 5.2.2: Declare TCE
5.4.1: Control blocks
5.2: Declare TC 5.3.1: Declare TVCI 5.4.2: Control loop blocks
5.3: Declare TVC 5.3.2: Declare TVCE 5.4.3: Declare models
5.4: Declare control blocks 5.4.4: Declare windows
5.4.5: Declare algorithms
5.4.6: Control loop groups
5.4.7: Command buttons
REV A Folio 20
 MICROETE MENU
1: Configuration, Names & Messages
2: Definition of the Architecture
3 Declare operational functions
4: Variable acquisition
5: Commands
6: Calculations and results
7: Describe variables
8: Gateway variables definition
9: Define operational functions
10:Variable restitution
10.1 Declare order copy
groups
10.2 TS copy to TC
10.3 TM copy to TVC
11 Administration
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual
en italics: not used
in boldface: configured by the system or by import
underscored: configured by CEGELEC (do not modify)
6.1: Generate TSI 6.2.1: Generate derived TMI (V01)
6.2: Generate TMI 6.2.2: Generate Polish TMI (V02)
6.3: Generate VRI 6.2.3: Generate restoration TMI (V03)
6.4: Generate TSP 6.3.1: Declare truth tables
6.3.2: Define truth tables 6.2.4: Generate average TMI (V04)
6.5: Generate TMP 6.2.5: Generate average with restore TMI (V05)
6.6: Generate VRP 6.3.3: Declare VRI
6.2.6: Generate counting TMI (V06)
6.7: List Optiplant TMs 6.2.7: Generate running time TMI (V07)
6.8: List Optiplant Filter TMs 6.2.8: Generate TM group average TMI (V08)
6.9: Optiplant 6.2.9: Generate V08 root mean square TMI (V09)
7.1: Define TS
7.2: Define TM
7.3: Description of thresholds ( TM )
7.4: Declare alarm groups
7.5: Define alarm groups
8.1: Define Gateway TSs
8.2: Define Gateway TMs
8.3: Define Gateway TCs
8.4: Define Gateway TVCs
8.5: Define Gateway VRs
9.2.1: Define mimic groups
9.2.2: Assign alarms to mimics
9.1: Define curve groups 9.1.1: Define Y = f (T) groups
9.2.3: Dynamic mimic captions
9.2: Define mimic groups
9.3: Define operator groups ( TS/TM ) 9.9.1.1: Declare shift and daily log groups
9.4: Define bargraph groups 9.9.1: Declare periodic logs groups 9.9.1.2: Declare weekly log groups
9.5: Define trend on screen groups 9.9.2: Define periodic logs 9.9.1.3: Declare groups
9.6: Define trend on printer groups 9.9.3: Define disturbance logs 9.9.1.4: Monthly balance log
9.7: Define associated views 9.9.4: Define SOE logs
9.8: Define reference charts 9.9.3.1: Disturbance trip TS
9.9.5: Maintenance log parameters 9.9.3.2: Group TS
9.9: Logs
9.9.3.3: Group TM
11.1: Check database integrity
11.2: Database index closure
11.3: Verification of D.V.T.
11.4: Verification and generation of D.V.T.
11.4: Verification and generation of CONTROTEST D.V.T. 11.6.1: Declare external documents
11.5: Internal documents 11.6.2: Management external documents
11.5.1: Print User Manual
11.6: External documents
11.7.1: Import of variables from CONTROCAD
11.7: CONTROCAD export / import
11.7.2: Export consistency to CONTROCAD
11.8: CCC_M export
11.8.1: List attributes to be extracted
11.9: Local language labels
11.8.2: Declare TS to be exported
11.10: Utilities
11.8.3: Declare TM to be exported
11.8.4: Application variable export
11.8.5: Assign variables to mimics
11.8.6: Check and edit ac-M mimic
11.9.1: IDEO language
11.9.2: Complete IDEO
11.9.3: Chinese backup
11.9.4: Chinese restore
11.10.1: Describe object 11.10.3.1: Deleted
11.10.2: Object attributes 11.10.3.2: Modified
11.10.3: ID tag records
11.10.4: Direct access to objects 11.10.4.1: with error or warning message
11.10.5: Complete default values 11.10.4.2:with Import/Export message
11.10.6: C10 generator 11.10.4.3: by scenario
11.10.7: Update 11.10.4.4: by P4 tag
REV A Folio 21
4.2.3. Definition of Fields Common to More than One Configuration Screen

A certain number of fields are found on more than one configuration screen.

The signification of these fields is shown below lists.

The description of these standard fields will therefore not be repeated for each mask.

Field VAR REF DB attribute REP_ID Type C20 (TS,TM,TC,TVC,

VR,ORG)
C14 (other variables)

Description :

Variable ID code or reference. The reference of each database variable must be

unique.

Field . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type C32

Description :

Variable label.

Field FLG DB attribute . . . Type T or F

Description :

If =T (True), indicates that one of the variable fields has been modified since closure of
last database version.
”F” = False.

Field IND DB attribute . . . Type C1

Description :

Index of modification of the version of the variable at last closure of the database.

Field . . . SIM DB attribute . . . Type C 1

Description :

Simulator object : ”S” if the object is utilized by the simulator, otherwise ’ ’

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 23
 Field LEVEL DB attribute . . . NIV_ASSO Type C 1

Description :

Associated protection level (0 to 5)

= 0 : no protection level,
= 1 : lowest level,
= 5 : highest level.

Field ENTITY DB attribute . . . REP_ENT Type C8

Description :

Reference of the associated entity.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 24
5. DESCRIPTION OF CONFIGURATION SCREENS

Descriptions of configuration screens are provided in paragraphs which are numbered

using the screen number preceded by the chapter number.

E.g. Screen 1.5.3 is described in chapter 5.1.5.3 (NB. some screen descriptions do
not follow this rule).

5.1. Configuration of System Names and Messages

This screen provides access to the general configuration of the CENTRALOG system.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : CONFIGURATION, NAMES AND MESSAGES >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : DECLARE CENTRALOG SYSTEM >: :
: : PASSWORDS : :
: : PROTECTION LEVEL / PROCESSING NUMBER : :
: : INTERNAL AND ALARM LIST NAMES >: :
: : CONVERSION, UNITS AND STATE MESSAGES >: :
: : USABLE FONT TYPES DEFINITION : :
: :..................................................Ù :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 1 : Screen 1

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 25
5.1.1. Configuration of the CENTRALOG

To configure a CENTRALOG system, access the menus below:

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : CONFIGURATION, NAMES AND MESSAGES >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DECLARE CENTRALOG SYSTEM >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : CONFIGURE CENTRALOG SYSTEM : :
: : DECLARE OPTIONS : :
: : CENTRALOG SYSTEM DIMENSIONS : :
: : CENTRALOG SYSTEM PARAMETERS : :
: :..................................................Ù :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 2 : Screen 1.1

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 26
5.1.1.1. Declaration of CENTRALOG

This screen is used to input general information concerning the CENTRALOG system
and provides special data relative to the Project.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE CENTRAlOG SYSTEM : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF KIT03 CENTRALOG NUM : 3 :
: LABEL CENTRALOG 3 :
: :
: CLOG QT 1 P320 STEP 3.0 BASE IND : AA :
: DATE : 20.08.96 :
: :
: PERIPHERALS CNCT MODE : L LAST TST : 38 :
: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TOTAL T :
: CNC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 :
: BVA OPERATION NUM : 94 :
: :
: REDUNDANT SERVER T ––––––––––––––– LANG PARAMETERS –––––––––––––– :
: REDUNDANT CONTRONET T : : :
: : 2ND LANG FONT 1 roman.vf : :
: : IDEO T FONT 2 : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUIS <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE :
: <CTRL–END> AID :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 3 : Screen 1.1.1

Field VAR REF DB attribute . . . REP_ID Type C 14

Description :

CENTRALOG reference (PROJECT Class)

Field CENTRALOG NUM DB attribute . . . CENT_NUM Type N 1

Description :

CENTRALOG number: the CENTRALOG number may be 0 to 9

Field LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type C 32

Description :

CENTRALOG label: this label appears in the project log headers.

Field . . . BASE IND DB attribute . . . Type C 2

Description :

Index of the current database (see menu structure10).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 27
 Field DATE DB attribute . . . . Type C 8

Description :

Date the database version was last closed (see menu structure 10)

Field LAST TST DB attribute . . . Type N 4

Description :

Version number of last DVT generation (description of unit version)

Field TOTAL DB attribute . . . Type N 4

Description :

=T if the last DVT extraction was a total extraction.

Field . . . REDUNDANT SERVER DB attribute . . . . Type L 1

Description :

CIS or CDS redundant if = T, else = F

Field BVA OPERATION NUM DB attribute . . . Type N 4

Description :

Number of BVA operation.

Field REDUNDANT CONTRONET DB attribute . . . . Type L 1

Description :

CONTRONET network redundant if = T, otherwise = F

Field CLOG QT DB attribute . . . NB_CLOG Type N 1

Description :

Number of CENTRALOG systems: 1 to 6

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 28
 Field P320 STEP DB attribute . . . Type C 3

Description :

P320 system step (e.g. 3.0)

Field . . . PERIPHERAL DB attribute . . . IMP_CNX Type C 1

.... CNCT MOD

Description :

Peripheral connection mode: local or network (L or R)

Field CNC DB attribute . . . CNF_CNX1i Type N 1

Description :

printer server output i :

0 empty,

1 printer,

2 counter link,

3 CCC/HDSR printer,

4 soft–copy

Configured automatically in C10 and C30 systems.

Field . . . 2ND LANG DB attribute . . . LANG2 Type C 2

Description :

Second language of CENTRALOG (FR,GB,SP)

Field . . . FONT 1 DB attribute . . . POLICE.1 Type C 16

Description :

First DataViews language font (default Roman).

Field IDEO DB attribute . . . IDEO Type L 1

Description :

Existence of ideograms if = T, otherwise = F (Screen 1.1.4)

Field FONT 2 DB attribute . . . POLICE.2 Type C 16

Description :

Second DataViews language font (default Roman).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 29
5.1.1.2. Declaration of Options

This screen is used to configure the options selected for the Project.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE OPTIONS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: OPT NUM : OPTION : INHIB. :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 1 : TRANSMIT COMMAND (TC, TVC, UNITS) : F :
: : : :
: 2 : EXECUTION CHECK : F :
: : : :
: 4 : VARIABLE THRESHOLDS : F :
: : : :
: 9 : SEQUENCE MONITORING : F :
: : : :
: 13 : SCREEN SOFT COPY : F :
: : : :
: 14 : SECOND LANGUAGE : F :
: : : :
: 15 : ALARMS BY MIMIC : F :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 4 : Screen 1.1.2

Field . . . OPT NUM DB attribute . . . Type N 3

Description :

Number of CENTRALOG option

Field OPTION DB attribute (see table below) Type C 32

Description :

Label of the option.

Field INHIB DB attribute . . . Type L 1

Description :

If the option is inhibited (= T), the CENTRALOG function will not be activated; any
associated objects will be generated but will not be accepted by the CENTRALOG.

The table below provides a list of options with additional explanations.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 30
 N° OPTION DATABASE ATTRIBUTES

1 Transmit command OPT_ORDR

2 Execution check CTREX

3 Command copy OPT_ROR

4 Variable thresholds S_V

5 Printout on TM variation ED_TM

6 TM gradient GRAD

7 Process present OPT_PROC

8 Hydro schedules OPT_DGR

9 Sequence monitoring OPT_SM

10 TMC acquisition OPT_TMC

11 Simulator present SIMU

12 Trend updating OPT_TEND

13 Screen soft copy SFT_CPY

14 Second language LANG

15 Mimic alarms A_SYN

16 Alarms by degree of urgency OPT_ALDU

18 Event log OPT_JDB

19 Shift log OPT_JS

20 Daily log OPT_JD

21 Weekly log OPT_JWK

22 Monthly maintenance log OPT_JM

23 Disturbance OPT_PER

24 SOE OPT_SOE

25 HDSR OPT_HDSR

26 y = f(x) curves OPT_YX

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 31
 N° OPTION DATABASE ATTRIBUTES

27 Trend on screen OPT_TRS

28 Trend on printer OPT_TRP

29 List of invalid variables OPT_EXIV

30 Bargraphs OPT_BRG

31 List of chattering variables OPT_BAT

32 Multi–entity management OPT_ENT

34 Multi–CENTRALOG management OPT_MCLG

35 CSS–G Gateway OPT_GTW

36 List of variables by criteria OPT_CRI

37 Type of alarms managed TYP_AL

39 Monthly balance log OPT_JMON

40 Force variable values in cell OPT_FORC

41 Optiplant

50 Pen recorder OPT_PRC

52 Authorization ENTITY not assigned OPT_LENT

to a CVS

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 32
 Details concerning options

Number Description

02 When the option True is chosen the previously chosen OPT_ORDR

option must also be set to true.

In such cases, a TS or a TM can be associated to each TC or TVC, to check

the correct execution of the command.

In the event of a malfunction a TSP is set.

07 This option is only significant with process software ( OPT_proc= true ).

If the option false is selected, on completion of the execution of a
process software ”calculation step”, only the variables (TSP, TMP) whose
value has changed (state, validity) are transmitted to the variable proces-
sing function (TRI). Where the option true is selected the
variables are transmitted cyclically.
When the user selects the option true, TMPs are transmitted on each pro-
cess software execution cycle in order to save historical records (zoom
view).

12 The processing is not selective. It concerns all the TMEs or TMIs. When the
option true is chosen, the zoom view shows the current measurement ten-
dency. This tendency can be displayed on a mimic.

When the option false is chosen, the zoom view does not show the mea-
surement tendency.

TM tendencies cannot be used in mimics.

37 =1 type 1 alarm management

=2 type 2 alarm management (mandatory in V3)

52 =true non–assigned entity authorized after confirmation

=false non–assigned entity prohibited

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 33
5.1.1.3. CENTRALOG Dimensions

This screen is used to configure the maximum number of objects for the classes
configured and to read the current system size.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : CENTRALOG SYSTEM DIMENSIONS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: OPT NUM : OPTION :INHIB.: NB :
: : : : CP :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: –1 : CNS STATIONS QUANTITY : F : 1 :
: : : : 1 :
: : : : :
: –1 : CONTROLLERS QUANTITY : F : 17 :
: : : : 17 :
: : : : :
: –1 : CVS STATIONS QUANTITY : F : 3 :
: : : : 2 :
: : : : :
: –1 : OPERATING UNITS : F : 200 :
: : : : 81 :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 5 : Screen 1.1.3

Field OPT NUM DB attribute . . . Type N 3

Description :

Number of the option.

Field LABEL DB attribute . . . Type C 32

Description :

Dimension label.

Field INHIB DB attribute . . . Type L 1

Description :

If the option is inhibited (=T), the function is masked. Any associated object will be
generated but will not be accepted by the CENTRALOG.
This option is configured during the installation of MICROETE.

Field NB DB attribute . . . Type N 5

Description :

Maximum number of objects.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 34
 Field CP DB attribute . . . Type N5

Description :

Number of existing objects.

The number of objects is checked at each DVT test.

If the number of objects is greater than the maximum a fatal error is triggered during
such tests.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 35
5.1.1.4. CENTRALOG Parameters

This screen is used to customize the different Project parameters.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : CENTRALOG SYSTEM PARAMETERS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: OPT NUM : PARAMETER : VALUE :
: INHIB. : DESCRIPTION : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: 0 : TEMP_MIN : 0.000000 :
: F : MIN. TEMP. FOR CALCULATIONS (øC) : :
: : : :
: 0 : TEMP_MAX : 800.0000 :
: F : MAX. TEMP. FOR CALCULATIONS (øC) : :
: : : :
: 0 : PRES_MIN : 0.010000 :
: F : MIN. PRESS. FOR CALC. (BARS) : :
: : : :
: 0 : PRES_MAX : 230.0000 :
: F : MAX. PRESS. FOR CALC. (BARS) : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 6 : Screen 1.1.4

Field OPT NUM DB attribute . . . Type N 5

Description :

Number of the option

Field PARAMETER DB attribute (see table below) Type C 10

Description :

Parameter name

Field VALUE DB attribute . . . Type C 8

Description :

Value of parameter.

Field INHIB DB attribute . . . Type L 1

Description :

If the option is inhibited (= T), the parameter is not utilized by the CENTRALOG
system.

Field DESCRIPTION DB attribute . . . Type C 32

Description :

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 36
 Label of parameter.

Configuration of parameters

DATABASE DEFAULT
N° PARAMETER
ATTRIBUTE VALUE

1 Min temperature (in TEMP_MIN 0

2 Max temperature ( TEMP_MAX 800
3 Min pressure ( in bar ) PRES_MIN 0.01
4 Max pressure max ( in bar ) PRES_MAX 230
5 Min entropy ( in Kj / kg ENTR_MIN 0
6 Max entropy ( in Kj / kg ENTR_MAX 10.62
7 Min enthalpy ( in Kj / kg ENTH_MIN 0
8 Max enthalpy ( in Kj / kg ENTH_MAX 4109.670
9 Number shift time NB_SH_C 3
10 1st shift time SHIFT1_C 1
11 2nd shift time SHIFT2_C 8
12 3rd shift time SHIFT3_C 16
13 4th shift time SHIFT4_C
14 5th shift time SHIFT5_C
15 6th shift time SHIFT6_C
16 Day of weekly log printout JOUR_WK 1 (Monday)
17 Time of weekly log printout HEUR_WK 0
18 Print/store daily JEV_EDVI 0
event log empty sections
19 Print/store daily event log on time/date JEV_EDCH 1
change
20 Print/store full daily event log section JEV_EDPL 1
21 Print degrees of urgency of alarms in DEG_JX
logs
22 Print urgency 0 TM threshold SETA 0
violations
23 Clear SM group record when all EFRSM 0
sequences are inactive and when one
is reactivated.
24 Priority event log JDB 1
= 0 no event log
=1 event log has lower priority than
other logs
= 2 event log has higher priority than
other logs

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 37
 DATABASE DEFAULT
N° PARAMETER
ATTRIBUTE VALUE

25 Printout changes in a SM in the EDISM 1

event or daily event log
26 Presence of ideograms IDEO 0
27 Transmission of TMP cyclically CADTMP 0
or on variation
28 Hysteresis coefficient on TM HYST 50
limits
29 TMC reset interval PRAZTMC 24
30 TMC measurement variation coefficient COEF_TMC 0
31 TMP measurement variation coefficient COEF_TMP 0
32 TMI measurement variation coefficient COEF_TMI 0
33 TME measurement variation coefficient COEF_TME 0
34 Coefficient of TMI V01 rank n -2 DERIVE_A 0,1
filtering
35 TMI V01 rank n -1 filter coefficient DERIVE_B 0,2
36 TMI V01 rank n filter coefficient DERIVE_C 0,7
37 Precision of display PREC_AFF 0,0001
38 List of acknowledged alarms in ALCHR 0
chronological order
39 Printer connection mode MOD_CNX L
(local / network)
40 Number of printers present NB_IMP 2
41 Automatic threshold (type 1 alarms ) ACQ_ALNA 200
42 First alarm acknowledgment SEUIL1 800
threshold (type 2 alarms)
43 Second alarm acknowledgment SEUIL2 800
threshold (type 2 alarms)
44 Degree 1 alarm acknowledgment type ACQ_DEG1 1
(type 2 alarms)
- Appearance & disappearance (1)
- Appearance (2)
45 Degree 2 alarm acknowledgment type ACQ_DEG2 1
(type 2 alarms)
46 Degree 3 alarm acknowledgment type ACQ_DEG3 1
(type 2 alarms)
47 Degree 3 alarm acknowledgment type ACQ_DEG4 1
(type 2 alarms)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 38
 DATABASE DEFAULT
N° PARAMETER
ATTRIBUTE VALUE

48 Tone generation mode MODE_TON 0

(type 2 alarms)
- (0) Determined by attribute AL_KLX
--> buzzer active on the CVS
- (1) Determined by degree of urgency,
attribute AL_DEG
--> buzzer active on the CVS
- (2) Determined by attribute AL_KLX
--> output activated on the CIS
DIGI board
- (3) cases (0) and (2)
47 Sense of trip for klaxon SENSKLA 0
relative to alarms (type 2 alarms)
- Appearance (0)
- Disappearance (1)
- Appearance and disappearance (2)
- No trip (3)
48 Slow setpoint increment value VAL_INCX 2
(as %o of full TVC scale)
49 Fast setpoint increment value VAL_INCR 10
as %o of full TVC scale)
50 Permissible setpoint variation DEP_HYST 0
(as %oo of full TVC scale)
51 Number of counters NB_CPT 0
52 Printout of message on acknowledgment MES_ACQ1 0
degree 1 alarms
(type 2 alarms)
- Message not printed out (0)
- Message printed out (1)
53 Edition of a message on acknowledgement MES_ACQ2 0
degree 1 alarms 2
(type 2 alarms)
- Message not printed out (0)
- Message printed out (1)
54 Edition of a message on acknowledgement MES_ACQ3 0
degree 1 alarms 3
(type 2 alarms)
- Message not printed out (0)
- Message printed out (1)
55 Edition of a message on acknowledgement MES_ACQ4 0
degree 1 alarms 4
(type 2 alarms)
- Message not printed out (0)
- Message printed out (1)

55 Declaration off-peak/peak hour TAB_HEU 0

= 0 off-peak / = 1 peak (1 a 24)

56 Log nomenclature format NOMENC1 1

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 39
 Details concerning parameters

Number Description

01 All these parameters concern thermodynamic calculations from the internal

to calculation function (V02 type calculation ).
08
Beyond these values calculations are invalid.

09
10 These values can be modified on-line by the operator.
11

12 These parameters are only significant if a weekly log exists

Rule for day_week :

1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
5 Saturday
7 Sunday

13 Time 0 to 23

14 Parameters jev_edvi , jev_edch , jev_edpl are only configured if the event log
15 option exists (option OPT_JE = true)
16

18 When the degree of urgency is other than 0, a message is printed out on the event or
daily event logs whatever option is selected.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 40
 Number Description

23 This parameter may be:

- null (no hysteresis processing)
- negative (offset alarm trip on limit violation)
- positive (normal hysteresis processing in order to avoid repeated alarms
when the measurement oscillates around a limit).

This integer type parameter is expressed in ten thousandths of the full scale,
representing the difference between the high and low limits of a TM.

Important: this parameter is common to all TMs (TME or TMI) in a project.

The utilization of a negative parameter is above all used to fully open or fully
close an actuator (e.g. valve). The setpoints applied are often forced to values
beyond the limits, which leads to violations of the limits of associated TMs.

24 Variables are reset to zero at times which are multiples of these parameters :
e.g. OPT_Praztmc = 6
Resets take place at 0h, 6 h, 12h, 18h
If OPT_Praztmc = Praztmc_inc the TMC is not reset.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 41
 Number Description

25 These different parameters fix the value of the TME change threshold below which the
26 measurement value of the TM is considered not to have changed.
The parameter is of integer type and is expressed in ten thousandths of the full scale,
27
representing the difference between the high and low limits of a TM.
28 These parameters are utilized in the CDS in order to optimize the processing of a TM in
the event of a slight variation in value.
Only the measurement tendency is updated (if the option OPT_tend is True).

Attention :

The values of these parameters are must be calculated with great care as they may cause
serious problems in the following cases :
- when certain TMs have a wide range of variation (radiation measurements in nuclear).
In such cases the recommended value is 0.

- there must be a certain correlation between these parameters and the different
hysteresis values associated to threshold and limit violation.
Too great a parameter value of may cancel hysteresis processing.

- in the case of a parameter which is too large, certain malfunctions may appear on the
operator stations

E.g. a group which is stopped can supply power or debit intensity.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 42
 Number Description

29 TM derivatives (see screen 6.2.1) are calculated with filtering according to the formula:
30
VD(t) = A*VD(t-2u)+B*VD (t-u)+C*((VB (t)-VB (t-u))/u)
31
where
.t = time of calculation
.u = interval between two consecutive calculations of the derivative
translated as a unit of restitution time
(= calculation rate).

E.g. if calculation rate = 5s

unit of time = 1 minute -> u = 5/60
The result of the derivative calculation is expressed relative to
the minute

. VD(t) = variable result at t

. VB(t) = variable to be derived at t
. A, B, C are unique constants for all TMIs, and are configurable per Project, as in:
A+B+C=1
If A=B=0 and C=1, special case of a derivative without filtering
equivalences :
A = derivative _A
B = derivative _B
C = derivative _C

32 Value below which the value displayed on the CVS is 0

33 if = true (or 1)
the list of acknowledged alarms is displayed in chronological order (oldest alarm is disĆ
played on the first line of page 1)

if = false (or 0)
the list of acknowledged alarms is displayed in inverse chronological order (newest alarm
is displayed on the first line of page 1)l

34 =L --> local
=R --> network

35 Number of printers connected to CIS

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 43
 Number Description

36 Not used for type 2 alarm management

37–38 - If the number of alarm points is greater than THRESHOLD 2,

return to normal state messages are acknowledged and deleted.

- If the first operation fails to reduce the number of alarm points

below THRESHOLD1, then the oldest alarm points are deleted until
a number of alarm points lower than THRESHOLD 1 is
reached.

Automatic acknowledgement is signaled in the data band.

The information disappears after the last manual acknowledgement.
1 000> THRESHOLD 2 > THRESHOLD 1 must be true

THRESHOLD 2

2nd case
1st case

THRESHOLD 1

47 Value expressed in 0/000 of the full scale.

Authorized overshoot of minimum and maximum setpoint values.
Used to force full opening and closing of control actuator.
The value must be positive.

= 1 Format 12 characters
54
= 2 Format 12 characters split 7 +5
= 3 Format 20 characters
= 4 Format 20 characters split10 +10

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 44
5.1.2. Declaration of Entities and Associated Alarms List Names

This screen is used to declare system entities.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 15/03/95

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :DECLARE ENTITIES. : : : cent 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: ENTITY REF FLG IND : N–ACK ALARMS REF : ALARMS DEG 1 REF :
: LABEL : ALARMS ACK REF : ALARMS DEG 2 REF :
: : ALARMS RED REF : ALARMS DEG 3 REF :
: : ALARMS FILT REF : ALARMS DEG 4 REF :
: : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: ENT_SYST T : : :
: SYSTEM ENTITY : ENT_SYST_AL_NA : ENT_SYST_AL_U1 :
: : ENT_SYST_AL_AQ : ENT_SYST_AL_U2 :
: : ENT_SYST_AL_RED : ENT_SYST_AL_U3 :
: : ENT_SYST_AL_FILT : ENT_SYST_AL_U4 :
: : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUIS <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 7 : Screen 1.2

Field . . . ENTITY REF DB attribute . . . ENTITY Type C 8

Description :

Reference of the entity in the CENTRALOG system.

Field N–ACK ALARMS REF DB attribute . . . . REP_ALNA Ty

pe . C 20

Description :

Reference of the list of unacknowledged alarms associated to the entity (type 1 alarms
are not used in V3)

Field ALARMS DEG 1 REF DB attribute . . . REP_DEG1 Type C

20

Description :

Reference of the list of degree1 alarms associated to the entity.

Field LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type C 32

Description :

Variable label which is displayed in the different CENTRALOG displays and printouts

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 45
 Field ALARMS ACK REF DB attribute . . . REP_ALAQ Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the list of acknowledged alarms associated to the entity (type 1 alarms
are not used in V3)

Reference of the list of alarms associated to the entity (alarms type 2)

Field ALARMS DEG 2 REF DB attribute . . . REP_DEG2 Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the list of degree 2 alarms associated to the entity

Field ALARMS RED REF DB attribute . . . REP_ARED Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the short alarms list associated to the entity

Field ALARMS DEG 3 REF DB attribute . . . REP_DEG3 Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the list of degree 3 alarms associated to the entity

Field ALARMS FILT REF DB attribute . . . REP_FILT Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the list of filtered alarms associated to the entity

Field ALARMS DEG 4 REF DB attribute . . . REP_DEG4 Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the list of degree 4 alarms associated to the entity

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 46
5.1.3. Passwords

This screen is used to enter or modify the passwords associated to the five access
protection levels.

The protection level is designed:

to prevent modification of variable groups if the CVS does not have the
required access level,

to prevent the transmission of commands if the CVS does not have the
required access level,

to prevent certain operator dialogues if the CVS does not have the required
access level.
M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 15/03/95
................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : PASSWORD : DISK : : :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: :
: :
: ...................................................... :
: : PROTECTION LEVEL : :
: : : :
: : ( ) 1 ( ) 2 ( ) 3 ( ) 4 ( ) 5 : :
: : : :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : CURRENT PASSWORD: : :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : NEW PASSWORD : : :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : : :
: :....................................................: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: <ENTER> SELECTION <ARROW DOWN> NEXT FIELD :
: :
: :
................................................................................

Fig. 8 : Screen 1.3

Select the access level ( ) x,

Enter current password if applicable,

Enter new password (attribute BD PSWD_C)

The level 1 is the lowest.

The level 5 is the highest level.

These protection levels are used especially in the declaration of the different curve
groups, operative groups, trend groups, operator dialogues etc. and in the
configuration of commands (LEVEL field)

Any operator who wishes to modify the configuration of a group or transmit commands
must log in to the CVS station at a level equal to or higher than that required for the
operation.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 47
5.1.4. Protection Level / Processing Number

This screen is used to associate hierarchic protection levels to certain processing

operations listed below.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :PROTECTION LEVEL/PROC. NUM. : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: NUM LEVEL : :
:–––––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 140 3 : CHANGE TIME :
: : :
: 141 3 : CHANGE DATE :
: : :
: 146 4 : CHANGE MIMICS :
: : :
: 148 5 : STOP CVS :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> DATA ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 9 : Screen 1.4

Field . . . NUM DB attribute . . . Type N 3

Description :

Processing number to be associated to a protection level (see table below)

Field . . . LEVEL DB attribute . . . NIV_ASSO Type C 1

Description :

Associated protection level.

Each function is identified by a processing number and is associated to a protection

level (0 : no protection, 1 :lowest protection level thru 5 : highest protection level).

List of permissible processing numbers.

The following table specifies the processing numbers which can be configured in the
Protection level / Processing Number mask.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 48
 Processing number Signification

100 Stop klaxon

103 Modify function key (F1 to F12)
104 Screen copy
120 Inhibition/validation log printout
121 Temporary or anticipated log printout
122 Stop printout
123 (5) Modify shift times
140 (3) Change time
141 (3) Change date
144 Change password
145 Return to CCC
146 (4) Change mimics
148 (5) Stop CVS
155 Inhibition of klaxon
209 Change assigned entity
244 OU on-monitoring/inhibited
247 Host alarm function
248 Single or global acknowledgement type 1 alarm
249 Change variable status (TS, TM)
258 Replace TM
259 Modify TM thresholds
262 Modify number of maneuvers and running time
271 Lock blocks
288 VRE/VRI on-monitoring
289 VRE/VRI inhibition
501 Single or global acknowledgement type 2 alarm

When a processing number is followed by a protection level between , the value pair
is generated by default by MICROETE.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 49
5.1.5. Internal List Names

This screen is used by the operator to modify standard internal names proposed by the
system.

5.1.5.1. Internal Lists

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : INTERNAL LIST NAMES : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF : LABEL : CLASS :FLG: IND :
: : : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : :
: LIS02 : INHIBITED OPERATIVE UNITS LIST : LIS_GIN : F : AA :
: : : : : :
: LIS09 : PROJECT CONFIGURATION : CONF : F : AA :
: : : : : :
: LIS10 : ANALYSIS VARIABLES LIST : LIS_TMO : F : AA :
: : : : : :
: C–GLO : OPTION VARIABLES CONFIGURATION : C_GLO : F : AA :
: : : : : :
: LIS11 : MODIFIED THRESHOLDS LIST : LIS_MOD : F : AA :
: : : : : :
: LIS14 : LIST OF CONSIGNED BLOCKS : LIS_CONS : F : AA :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 10 : Screen 1.5.1

Field . . . CLASS DB attribute . . . Type C 8

Description :

Name of the class in the CENTRALOG database.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 50
 The names of the lists to be configured are as follows :

Default name

LIS_GIN : List of inhibited Operative Units LIS02

CONF : Project configuration LIS09

C_HDSR : HDSR variables LIS17

LIS_TMO : List of TMOs LIS10

C_SMCRIT : Sequence monitoring criteria LIS16

C_GLO : Configuration of option variables C_GLO

LIS_CONS : List of locked blocks LIS14

LIS_MOD : List of modified thresholds LIS11

Names shown in bold type may not be modified.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 51
5.1.5.2. Acknowledged Alarms List Names

This screen is used by the operator of define the overall list and the lists by degree of
urgency per entity.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : ALARMS LISTS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : TYPE : ENTITY : :
: LABEL : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: ENT_SYST_AL_0 F AA : 0 : ENT_SYST : :
: ENT_SYST_AL_0 : : : :
: : : : :
: ENT_SYST_AL_U1 F AA : 1 : ENT_SYST : :
: ENT_SYST ALARMS URGENCY 1 LIST1 : : : :
: : : : :
: ENT_SYST_AL_U2 F AA : 2 : ENT_SYST : :
: ENT_SYST ALARMS URGENCY 2 LIST2 : : : :
: : : : :
: ENT_SYST_AL_U3 F AA : 3 : ENT_SYST : :
: ENT_SYST ALARMS URGENCY 3 LIST3 : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 11 : Screen 1.5.2

Field TYPE DB attribute . . . TYPE_ALAType C 1

Description :

Type of alarms list :

=0 general list
=1 degree of urgency 1 list
=2 degree of urgency 2 list
=3 degree of urgency 3 list
=4 degree of urgency 4 list

Field ENTITY DB attribute . . . REP_ENT Type C 8

Description :

Reference of the associated entity.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 52
5.1.5.3. Short Alarm LIst Names

This screen is used by the operator to modify the standard names of short alarm lists
per entity proposed by the system.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : SMALL ALARMS LISTS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : : ENTITY : :
: LABEL : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: ENT_SYST_AL_R F AA : : ENT_SYST : :
: ENT_SYST_AL_R : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 12 : Screen 1.5.3

Field . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . REP_ID Type C 14

Description :

Reference of the list.

Field . . . ENTITY DB attribute . . . REP_ENT Type C 8

Description :

Reference of the associated entity.

Field LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type C 32

Description :

Label of the list.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 53
5.1.5.4. Filtered Alarm List Names

This screen is used by the operator to modify the standard names of filtered alarm lists
per entity proposed by the system.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : FILTERED ALARMS LISTS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : : ENTITY : :
: LABEL : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: ENT_SYST_FILA F AA : : ENT_SYST : :
: ENT_SYST_FILA : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 13 : Screen 1.5.4

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 54
5.1.6. Conversion, Units and State Messages

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : CONFIGURATION, NAMES AND MESSAGES >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : CONVERSION, UNITS AND STATE MESSAGES >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : STATE OR ALARM MESSAGES : :
: : MEASUREMENT UNITS : :
: : MEASUREMENT CONVERSION : :
: : VRE STATE MESSAGES : :
: :..................................................Ù :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 14 : Screen 1.6

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 55
5.1.6.1. State or Alarm Message

This screen is used by the operator to configure pairs of logic variable state messages
of and to associate a code number to them.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : STATE OR ALARM MESSAGES : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: CODE STE 0 STE 1 : CODE STE 0 STE 1 : CODE STE 0 STE 1 :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 1 SLAVE MASTER : 8 ABSENCE PRESENCE : 15 LOST AVAILB :
: : : :
: 2 IN–PROGR END : 9 APPEAR : 16 REACHED N–REACHD :
: : : :
: 3 IN–SERV OUT–SERV : 10 BEGIN : 17 YES NO :
: : : :
: 4 NORMAL FAULT : 11 END IN–PROGR : 18 PRESENCE ABSENCE :
: : : :
: 5 AVAILB LOST : 12 MASTER SLAVE : 19 APPEAR :
: : : :
: 6 N–REACHD REACHED : 13 OUT–SERV IN–SERV : 20 BEGIN :
: : : :
: 7 NO YES : 14 FAULT NORMAL : 21 NORMAL ABNORMAL :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 15 : Screen 1.6.1

Field CODE DB attribute . . . Type N3

Description :

Code number associated to state messages (1 to 999).

Field STE 0 DB attribute . . . MSG_0 Type C 8

Description :

Message printout on TS variation to 0

Field STE 1 DB attribute . . . MSG_1 Type C 8

Description :

Message printout on TS variation to 1

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 56
5.1.6.2. Units of Measurement

This screen is used by the operator to configure the names of analog variable
measurement units and to associate a unit number to them.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : MEASUREMENT UNITS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: : : :
: UNIT LABEL ACQ RAT : UNIT LABEL ACQ RAT : UNIT LABEL ACQ RAT :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: 1 A 1 : 7 CTE 5 : 13 G 5 :
: : : :
: 2 MPA 5 : 8 DB 5 : 14 GVARH 5 :
: : : :
: 3 MPA/MN 5 : 9 DEG–C 20 : 15 GWH 5 :
: : : :
: 4 BAUD 5 : 10 DEG–F 20 : 16 H 5 :
: : : :
: 5 CAL/G 5 : 11 DEG/MN 5 : 17 HM3 5 :
: : : :
: 6 CM 5 : 12 DGA 5 : 18 HZ 5 :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 16 : Screen 1.6.2

Field UNIT DB attribute . . . Type N 2

Description :

Code number associated a TM unit of measurement (1 to 99).

Field LABEL DB attribute . . . UNIT_LIB Type C 6

Description :

Label of the unit of measurement. (upper case only)

Field ACQ RAT DB attribute . . . Type N 2

Description :

Default acquisition rate depending on unit.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 57
5.1.6.3. Measurement Conversion

This screen is used by the operator to configure the type of measurement conversion
together with the values of associated coefficients and to associate a code number to
them.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : MEASUREMENT CONVERSION : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
:TYP CODE :CONV CODE: CONSTANT : COEFF 1 : COEFF 2 : :
: : : COEFF 3 : COEFF 4 : COEFF 5 : :
:–––––––––+–––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––+–––––––:
: : : : : : :
: 1 : P1 : –273.0000000 : 0.0312500000 : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: 2 : P1 : 0.0000000000 : 0.0039062500 : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: 3 : P1 : 0.0000000000 : 163.84000000 : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: 4 : P1 : 0.0000000000 : 0.0000390625 : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> ACQUIS <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 17 : Screen 1.6.3

The scale of the TM is determined according to the conversion type and the associated
conversion coefficients.

The standard conversion types (field: CONV CODE) are as follows:

P1 – 1st degree polynomial (A1 x + A0)

P2 – 2nd degree polynomial (A2 x2 + A1 x + A0)

P3 – 3rd degree polynomial (A3 x3 + A2 x2 + A1 x + A0)

P4 – 4th degree polynomial (A4 x4 + A3 x3 + A2 x2 + A1 x + A0)

P5 – 5th degree polynomial (A5 x5 + A4 x4 + A3 x3 + A2 x2 + A1 x + A0)

SQ – Square root
A2 x2 + A1 x +A0

EX – Exponential exp(A1 x + A0)

LN – Logarithm A0  Log(A2 x + A1)

Ao = CONSTANT
Ai = COEFF. i

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 58
 The conversion type is defined for each variable.

There is no declaration of coefficients per variable.

The coefficients are declared in this mask and are grouped by coefficient group
number (field: TYP CODE). There are a maximum of 255 coefficient groups.

Most sensors use a linear conversion law for values between MIN and MAX. The
coefficients are therefore determined in the following manner (except for AB120 and
AB 121 boards where an acquisition point equals 1/32 of

Coeff 1 = MAX - MIN) / 25 600

Constant = MIN

As the same tables are used for TVC conversion laws, the rule applied to determine the
linear conversion coefficients is as follows:

Coeff 1 = 25 600 / (MAX - MIN)

Constant = -25 600 X MIN /(MAX - MIN)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 59
 Field TYP CODE DB attribute . . . RTK_TM Type N 3

Description :

Code number of measurement variable sensor type (1 to 255).

Field CONV CODE DB attribute . . . T_CONV Type C 2

Description :

Type of conversion assigned to a measurement variable to calculate actual value.

See description above (1: 1st degree polynomial etc.).

Field CONSTANT DB attribute . . . TKTM Type C 12

Description :

Constant used in the conversion of the variable (floating point or scientific).

Field COEFF 1 a 5 DB attribute . . . TKTM Type C 12

Description :

Variable degree coefficient (floating point or scientific).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 60
 The following table shows the ranges of different types of sensor.
SENSOR TYPE RANGES

Normal range Values

Electrical corresponding to Theoretical
Board 0 % - 100 %
ranges
Peak value range Comments
(TYP_CAPT) normal range

AH115 0 / 20 mA -0,2 mA/ 22 mA 1/1 280 m 0/ 25 600 -256 /+28 160 16 bit signed integer value
4 / 20 mA 1 mA/ 22 mA 1/1 600 mA " -4 800 /+28 800 "
0 / 10 V -0,05 V/10,1 V 1/2,560 V " - 256/+25 856 "
0/5V -0,05 V/+5,5 V 1/5,120 V " - 256 / +28 800 "
1/5V 0,25 V/5,5 V 1/6,400 V " -4 800 / +28 800 "

AB120 -10mV / 100 mV -15mV/102mV 1/256 mV -2 560 /+25 600 -3 800 /+26 112 16 bit signed integer value
J 20° to 700 °C 1,019mV /39,130mV in 1/32 °K 9 376 / 31 136 9 376 / 31 136
K 0° to1 100 °C 0mV /45,108mV " 8 736 / 43 936 8 736 / 43 936
R 0° to1 600 °C 0mV /18,842mV " 8 736 / 59 936 8 736 / 59 936
S 0° to1 550 °C 0mV /16,176mV " 8 736 / 58 336 8 736 / 58 336
T-185° to 300 °C -5,35mV /14,860mV " 2 816 / 18 336 2 816 / 18 336
B 100° to1 600 °C 0,033mV /11,257mV " 11 936 / 59 996 11 936 / 59 996 16 bit unsigned integer value
E 0° to 800 °C 0mV /61,022mV " 8 736 / 34 336 8 736 / 34 336 with S.F at 0°C
SF-10° to 70 °C 8 413 / 10 976 6 816 / 28 096

AB121 -50 to + 600°C -60°C / +605°C in1/32 °K 7,136 / 27 936 6 813 / 28 096 16 bit unsigned integer value
PT100
TMR V_MIN V_MAX 0 / 25600 -32768 /+32 767 16 bit signed integer value

TVC V_MIN V_MAX 0 / 25600 -32768 /+32767 16 bits unsigned integer value
-12800 /+12800 -32768 /+32767 For BIAS type TVCs

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 61

5.1.6.4. VRE State Messages

.............................................................................
: CENTRALOG : VRE STATE MESSAGES : : :
:...........................................................................:
: : : :
:CODE LABEL : CODE LABEL : CODE LABEL :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
; : : :
: 1 ..... : 7 : 13 :
: : : :
: 2 STATE_0 : 8 : 14 :
: : : :
: 3 STATE_1 : 9 : 15 :
: : : :
: 4 : 10 : 16 :
: : : :
: 5 : 11 : 999 :
: : : :
: 6 : 12 : 17 :
: : : :
:...........................................................................:
:<F1> ACQUIS <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
.............................................................................

Field . . . . CODE DB attribute . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Code number associated with the VRE state message.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

VRE state label

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 62
5.2. DEFINITION OF SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

5.2.1. Declaration of CVS Stations

This screen enables the operator to declare the CVS stations and the number of
screens associated.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE CVS STATION : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : FB NAME : SCREENS NB : Redundant :
: LABEL : POP NUM : : X–terminal :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: POP1 F : POP1 : 2 : T :
: OPERATOR STATION 1 : 1 : : :
: : : : :
: POP2 F : POP2 : 2 : F :
: OPERATOR STATION 2 : 2 : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 18 : Screen 2.1

Field . . . . FB NAME DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Name of functional block

Indicate P0P1 for Operator Station N
Indicate P0P2 for Operator Station N
Indicate P0Pi for Operator Station N

Field . . . . screenS DB attribute . . NB_ECR Type . . N 1

Description :

Number of screens per Operator Station.

Field . . . . POP NUM DB attribute . . NUM_PO Type . . C 2

Description :

Operator Station number.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 63
5.2.2. Configuration of CVS Stations

This menu enables the operator to access screens used to configure the CVS.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DEFINE ARCHITECTURE >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : CONFIGURE CVS STATION >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : CVS INITIALIZATION VIEWS : :
: : DIRECT ACCESS KEYS (MODIFIABLE VIEWS) : :
: : CVS KEY BAND MENUS : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 19 : Screen 2.2

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 64
5.2.2.1. CVS Initialization Entity

This screen enables the operator to configure the initial entities assigned to each CVS.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 15/03/95

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : CVS INITIALIZATION ENTITY : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF POP1 FB NAME POP1 :
: LABEL OPERATOR STATION 1 :
: :
:+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+:
:: NUM : ENTITY : ::
:+–––––––––+––––––– ––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––+–––––––––––––––––––––::
:: 1 : ENT_SYST ::
:: : ::
:: 2 . ::
:: : ::
:: 3 : ::
:: : ::
:: 4 : ::
:: : ::
:: 5 : ::
:: : ::
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 20 : Screen 2.2.1

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . REF_ID Type . . C 14

Description :

CVS ID.

Field . . . . FB NAME DB attribute . . NOM_BF Type . . C 8

Description :

Name of functional block.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . LIB Type . . C32

Description :

Label of CVS.

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . N1

Description :

Number of initialization entity.

Field . . . . ENTITY DB attribute . . REF_ENT Type . . C8

Description :

Reference of associated entity.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 65
5.2.2.2. Accessing Entities via CVS Stations

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 15/03/95

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :ENTITY ACCESS VIA CVS : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: ENTITY ENT_SYST :
: LABEL SYSTEM ENTITY :
: :
:+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+:
: NUM : ASSOC VAR : LABEL : :
:+–––––––––+––––––– ––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : ::
: : : : ::
: : : : ::
: : : : ::
: : : : ::
: : : : ::
: : : : ::
: : : : ::
: : : : ::
: : : : ::
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 21 : Screen 2.2.2

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of Operator Station.

Field . . . . ASSOC VAR DB attribute . . CND_CVS Type . . C 20

Description :

Name of the TS authorizing CVS (NUM) control of the entity

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 66
5.2.2.3. CVS Initialization Views

This screen enables the operator to assign the view or views (maximum two) which will
be displayed on each screen on startup of the CVS.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : CVS INITIALIZATION VIEWS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF POP1 FB NAM POP1 :
: :
: :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: SCREEN : VIEW : VIEW REFERENCE : TRT NUM : :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––::
: 1 : 1 : CEGELEC : 1 : :
: : : : : :
: 1 : 2 : : 0 : :
: : : : : :
: 1 : 3 : : 0 : :
: : : : : :
: 1 : 4 : : 0 : :
: : : : : :
: 1 : 5 : : 0 : :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 22 : Screen 2.2.3

Field . . . . FB NAM DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Name of functional block.

This attribute is utilized to assign the object to the FBDB concerned.

Field . . . . SCREEN DB attribute . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Operator Station screen number.

Field . . . . VIEW DB attribute . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Operator Station view number:

D 2 views maximum for a CENTRALOG 30 screen

D 5 views maximum for a CENTRALOG 50 screen

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 67
 Field . . . . VIEW REF DB attribute . . CLE_VIEWi Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference number of views displayed on initialization .

Field . . . . TRT NUM DB attribute . . NO_TRTi Type . . N 3

Description :

Processing number corresponding to type of view:

Processing number View

1 mimic
2 y = f(t)
3 y = f(x)
4 bargraph
5 trend on printer
6 trend on screen
7 operator group
8 schedule
9 sequence monitoring (historical)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 68
5.2.2.4. Direct Access Keys

This screen enables the operator to configure the 24 function keys (F1 to F12,
Shift F1 to Shift F12).

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DIRECT ACCESS TO MODIF. VIEWS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF POP1 NOM BF POP1 :
: NUM BF 1 :
: :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : VIEW REFERENCE : KEY : TRT NUM : CODE KEY :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––::
: 1 : : 0XFFBE : 0 : F1 :
: : : : : :
: 2 : : 0XFFBF : 0 : F2 :
: : : : : :
: 3 : : 0XFFC0 : 0 : F3 :
: : : : : :
: 4 : : 0XFFC1 : 0 : F4 :
: : : : : :
: 5 : : 0XFFC2 : 0 : F5 :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 23 : Screen 2.2.4

Field . . . . FB NAME DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Name of functional block.

Field . . . . FB NUM DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of functional block.

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Number of key.

Field . . . . VIEW REF DB attribute . . CLE_VIEWC Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the view associated a direct key on initialization.

Field . . . . KEY DB attribute . . DES_TOU Type . . C 6

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 69
 Description :

Code of the key transmitted to the CVS (automatic generation)

Field . . . . TRT NUM DB attribute . . NO_TRTV Type . . N 3

Description :

Processing number corresponding to type of view :

Processing number View

1 mimic
2 y = f(t)
3 y = f(x)
4 bargraph
5 trend on printer
6 trend on screen
7 operator group
8 schedule
9 sequence monitoring (historical)
10 operative unit
11 disturbance
12 SOE
15 control loop
100 stop audible warning (not modifiable)

Field . . . . KEY CODE DB attribute . . CODE_TOU Type . . C12

Description :

Name of the key.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 70
5.2.3. Declare Gateways

This item is used to define the Gateways:

................................................................................
: : Declare Gateways : : : :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF POP1 FLG IND : : : NB MALF :TS BUF RTE:
: LABEL : NUM : NOM BF : TSS :VR BUF RTE:
:.................................:...........:...........:.........:..........:
: GTW1 T : 1 : GTW1 : 0 : 1 :
: GATEWAY1 : : : : 2 :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
:.................................:...........:...........:.........:..........:
:<F1> END OF ACQUIS <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE S <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................
Fig. 24 : Screen 2.2.5

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Variable ID code.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the variable displayed in various Centralog outputs.

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Gateway number.

Field . . . . NOM BF DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Name of functional block

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 71
 Field . . . . NB MALF TSS DB attribute . . Type . . N2

Description :

Gateway malfunction TSS code

Field . . . . TS BUF RTE DB attribute . . Type . . N2

Description :

TS bufferization rate: 1,2

Field . . . . VR BUF RTE DB attribute . . Type . . N2

Description :

VR bufferization rate: 1,2

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 72
5.2.3.1. CVS Key Band Menus

This screen is used to define the bands displayed on the Operator Stations.

Each key band is composed of eight views (mimics, curves etc.). Any of these eight
views can be accessed directly from the band.

The bands enable up to 80 views to be managed (10 bands of 8 views).

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : KEY BAND MENUS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF POP1 BF NAM POP1 :
: BF NUM 1 :
: :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : VIEW REFERENCE : TRT NUM:: NUM : VIEW REFERENCE : TRT NUM :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––::–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––::
: 1 : : 0 :: 6 : : 0 :
: : : :: : : :
: 2 : : 0 :: 7 : : 0 :
: : : :: : : :
: 3 : : 0 :: 8 : : 0 :
: : : :: : : :
: 4 : : 0 :: 9 : : 0 :
: : : :: : : :
: 5 : : 0 :: 10 : : 0 :
: : : :: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 25 : Screen 2.2.5

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . REF_ID Type . . C 14

Description :

CVS ID.

Field . . . . FB NAM DB attribute . . NOM_BF Type . . C 8

Description :

Name of functional block.

Field . . . . FB NUM DB attribute . . NUM_POP Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of Operator Station.

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 73
 Number of the view.

Field . . . . VIEW REFERENCE DB attribute CLE_VIEWC Type C

20

Description :

ID of the view associated to number.

Field . . . . TRT NUM DB attribute . . NO_TRTC Type . . N 3

Description :

Processing ID of the view associated to the number.

Type of views displayed:

Processing number View

1 mimic
2 y = f(t)
3 y = f(x)
4 bargraph
5 trend on printer
6 trend on screen
7 operator group
8 schedule
9 sequence monitoring
10 operative unit
11 disturbance
12 SOE
15 control loop

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 74
5.2.4. Declare CNS Stations

This screen enables the operator to declare CNS stations.

The CNS stations must be declared even when the CNS function is integrated to a
CIS.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE CNS STATION : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: CA1 FB NAME CA1 FLG F IND :
: :
: NUM 1 PB NAM S1 :
: –––––––––––––––––––––:
: LABEL UNIT 3 CIS 1 DATA SERVER : SYC QT 2 2 :
: : :
: : CTR QT 17 17 :
: REDUND T : :
: : TSE QT 6000 1525 :
: : TME QT 1000 171 :
: : TCE QT 1000 103 :
: : TVC QT 200 32 :
: : SEQ QT 150 9 :
: : CRI QT 3000 219 :
: : VRE QT 1000 101 :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 26 : Screen 2.3

Field . . . . FB NAME DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Name of functional block CAn.

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of CNS (= 1 if CIS)

Field . . . . PB NAM DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Functional name of physical block (S1 if CIS).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 75
 Field . . . . REDUND DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if CNS redundant.

Field . . . . SYC_QT DB attribute . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Maximum number of SYCOWAY networks.

Field . . . . CP_SYC DB attribute . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Number of SYCOWAY networks.

Field AUT_QT DB attribute . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Maximum number of cells.

Field . . . . CP_AUT DB attribute . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Number of cells created for the concentrator.

Field . . . . TSE_QT DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Maximum number of external TSs

Field . . . . CP_TSE DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of external TSs created for the concentrator.

Field . . . . TME_QT DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Maximum number of external TMs

Field . . . . CP_TME DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of external TMs created for the concentrator.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 76
 Field . . . . TCE_QT DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Maximum number of Telecommands.

Field . . . . CP_TCE DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of Telecommands created for the concentrator.

Field . . . . TVC_QT DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Maximum number of setpoints

Field . . . . CP_TVC DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of external setpoints created for the concentrator.

Field . . . . SEQ QT DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Maximum number of sequences monitored.

Field . . . . CP_SEQ DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of sequences monitored created for the concentrator.

Field . . . . CRI QT DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Maximum number of criteria.

Field . . . . CP_ CRI DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of criteria created.

Field . . . . VRE QT DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Maximum number of VREs.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 77
 Field . . . . CP_ VRE DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of VREs created.

Field . . . . SYC_AUT DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of SYCOWAY coupling points.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 78
5.2.5. S8000 Network Access Point

This screen enables the operator to declare S8000 network system connection points.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : S8000 ACCESS POINT : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: VAR REF F900_TR3 FLG F :
: LABEL UNIT 3 DUAL S8000 IND :
: :
: REF P4 F900_TR3 CLUSTER REF CA1 :
: CPLR NUM :
: NET NUM 1 CLOG NUM 3 SUP 1 NUM 0 REF P4 STN 1 CN3110 :
: REDUND T SUP 2 NUM 1 REF P4 STN 2 CN3121 :
: :
: :
: SUB NUM 63 :
: GROUP NUM 5 :
: FAULT TSS REF 03KITCP111CN3110 STN 2 SUB NUM 62 :
: STN 2 GROUP NUM 5 :
: STN 2 FAULT TSS REF 03KITCP121CN3121 :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 27 : Screen 2.4

Terms employed

' CENTRALOG number:

Definition : Means of identifying a CENTRALOG system (single or redundant)

from 0 thru 9. This number is different for each CENTRALOG connected to the S8000
network(s).

Location : RAM
Microete, CCC installation, P4 network configuration

Utilization : By the CIS especially for the synchronization system.

' Supervisor number:

Definition : Means of identifying a CNS or CIS station (0 –> B) for an automation

cell connected to a S8000 network

Location : Microete, P4 network configuration

Utilization : Used by the automation cells to differentiate stations connected to

the same S8000

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 79
 ' Subscriber number:

Definition : A subscriber is a CNS or CIS station (or an automation cell).

Up to 64 subscribers can be defined for each S8000 network (0 –> 63).
Each subscriber belongs to at least one subscriber group, with a number local to the
S8000 network.

Location : Microete, P4 network configuration

Utilization : For transportation on the S8000 network

' Subscriber group or distribution group number:

Definition : A subscriber group is set of network subscribers.

Up to 6 groups can be defined (0 –> 5)
Group membership is local to the S8000.

Location : Microete, P4 network configuration

Utilization : For transportation on the S8000 network

' S8000 Network :

Definition : Network used to connect the automation cells among themselves

and also to link one or more CNS or CIS stations.
The connection is realized by means of a coupler enabling a single or dual connection
to a single or redundant network.
The fact that the network is single or redundant has no effect on the configuration of the
system.

' Automation Cell (controller)

Definition :Single or redundant cell linked by a single or dual connection to the

S8000 network.
The fact that connection to the S8000 network is single or dual has no effect on the
configuration of the system.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 80
 In the database:

D define as many S8000 network access points as there are S8000 networks
and CENTRALOG systems connected to these networks (number of networks
* number of access points on each CENTRALOG).

D for each of these access points :

— identify
D the associated CENTRALOG system by a CENTRALOG number
and a supervisor number (used to differentiate the stations on a
S8000)

D the associated S8000 network.

— create as many subscribers as there are stations in the CENTRALOG
system: 1 if single Clog , 2 if dual Clog
— for each of these subscribers define
D a number of individual subscribers (for the S8000 network)

D a number of subscriber groups.

Concrete examples are provided below:

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 81
 Microete configuration mask (example)

: .........................................................................................
:
: PROJECT : GENERIC CEGELEC –ETE :
: CENTRA- : 5 DATE : 23/06/95 :
: LOG : PAGE : 1/ 1 :
: CONTROL- S8000 ACCESS :
: ........................................................................................
LER POINT :
: ........................................................................................
:
: :
: VAR S8000 FLG T :
: REF S8000 ACCESS POINT IND 1 :
: LABEL :
: REF P4 SYC01 CLUSTER REF CA1 :
: :
: CPLR 1 NUM CLOG 5 SUP 1 NUM REF P4 STN 1 CN5110 :
: NUM SUP 2 NUM REF P4 STN 2 :
: NET F :
: NUMNUM :
: SUB 08 :
RE-
GROUP NUM 45
: DUND SUB NUM STN 2 :
: FAULT TSS 01KITCP111CN51 :
REF 10 GROUP NUM STN 2
: FAULT TSS REF STN 2 :
: :
: ........................................................................................
:
: :
: VAR S8000_2 FLG T :
: REF S8000 ACCESS POINT 2 IND :
: LABEL :
: REF P4 SYC01 CLUSTER REF CA 1 :
: :
: CPLR 1 CLOG NUM 1 SUP 1 NUM t REF P4 STN 1 CNxyzt :
: NUM SUP 2 NUM REF P4 STN 2 :
: NET NUM F :
: REDUND
SUB NUM 07 :
: GROUP NUM 45 :
: FAULT TSS 01KITCP111CN21 SUB NUM STN 2 :
: REF 14 GROUP NUM STN 2 :
: FAULT TSS REF STN 2 :
:
: ........................................................................................
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :

NB : The field: REDUND must be set to T when the CNS is dual.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 82
 rCDPC: r n
t n

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 83
 Examples of applications of the rules detailed above:

CENTRALOG

AS
FI

300

S8000

Automation
cell

Number access points : 1

Number of subscribers : 1

CENTRALOG 1 CENTRALOG 2

AS AS
FI FI

300 300

S8000

Automation
cell

Number access points: 2 with different CENTRALOG numbers

Number of subscribers: 1 on each access point

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 84
 CENTRALOG

AS AS
FI FI

300 300

S8000 1
S8000 2

Automation
cells

Number access points: 2 with the same CENTRALOG

number

Number of subscribers: 1 on each access point

The number of the supervisory system must be identical at both

access points

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 85
 CENTRALOG 1 CENTRALOG 2

AS AS
FI FI

300 300
Dual Dual
link link

AS AS
FI FI

300 300

S8000

Automation
cells

Number of access points: 2 with different CENTRALOG numbers

Number of subscribers: 2 at each access point

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 86
 CENTRALOG 1 CENTRALOG 2

AS AS AS AS
FI FI FI FI

300 300 300 300

Dual Dual
link link

AS AS AS AS
FI FI FI FI

300 300 300 300

S8000 1

S8000 2

Automation
cell

Number of access points : 4 2 access points with one CENTRALOG

number
2 other access points with a different
CENTRALOG number

Number of subscribers : 2 at each access point

The number of the supervisory system must be the same at both access points
on a single Centralog

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 87
 Field . . . . CPLR NUM DB attribute . . Type . . N 1

Description :

S8000 coupler number (1 to 3)

Field . . . . REF P4 DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Reference number of F900 network in the P4.

Field . . . . CLUSTER REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 6

Description :

Reference number of cluster.

Field . . . . NET NUM DB attribute . . N_SYC Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of the F900 network (1 to 9)

Field . . . . SUB NUM DB attribute . N_AB01 Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of the station subscriber.

Field . . . . GROUP NUM DB attribute . . N_GROUP1 Type . . C 6

Description :

Group station number.

Field . . . . FAULT TSS REF DB attribute . . REF_CPL1 Type . C 20

Description :

ID of the TSS indicating a coupler malfunction.

Field . . . . CLOG NUM DB attribute . . NUM_CLOG Type

C1

Description :

Number of CENTRALOG: 0 to 9

Field . . . . NUM SUP1 DB attribute . . N_SUP1 Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of CNS station 1 supervisor (0 to B) for a S8000 network

Field . . . . NUM SUP2 DB attribute . . N_SUP2 Type . . C 1

Description :

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 88
 Number of CNS station 2 supervisor (0 to B) for a S8000 network

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 89
 Field . . . . REF P4 STN1 DB attribute . . Type . C 6

Description :

Reference of station 1 in the P4.

This reference is created automatically as follows (CNxyzt) :

D x:n

D y:n

D z:n

D t: n

Field . . . . REF P4 STN2 DB attribute . . Type . C 6

Description :

Reference of station 2 in the P4.

This reference is created automatically as follows (CNxyzt) :

D x:n

D y:n

D z:n

D t: n . (field SUP 2 NUM)

Field . . . . REF P4 STN2 DB attribute . . Type . . C 6

Description :

Reference of station 2 in the P4.

Field . . . . SUB NUM STN2 DB attribute . N_AB01 Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of station STN2 subscriber

Field . . . . STN2 GROUP NUM DB attribute . . N_GROUP1 Type . . C 6

Description :

STN2 station group number.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 90
 Field . . . . FAULT TSS REF STN2 DB attribute . . REF_CPL1 Type . C 20

Description :

Reference of the TSS indicating a coupler malfunction on station STN2.

Field . . . . REDUND DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if CNS is redundant.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 91
5.2.6. Declare P320 or 8035 Cells

This screen enables the operator to declare the automation cells in the project and to
identify the number of variables per type declared for each cell.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE P320 AUTOMATION CELLS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: REF U014 CTR NUM 014 HEAD C370 FLG F SIM :
: P4 REF U014 CNS CA1 IND :
: ––––––––––––––––––––:
: F900 REF F900_TR3 SUB NUM 01 :EXISTENCE : QT :
: TSS OU : OKCO GROUP NUM 12 :––––––––––––––––––::
: NET NUM : TSE : 170 :
: LABEL SB01–03KCZ002AR–BOILER PROT A : TME : 4 :
: VERSION.REVISION 1. 0 (16#0100)( 256) CSS_F 0 : TR REFLEX T: :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:RES EQU TS T: :
:NATURE L : :TM EQU RES T: :
:EQT QT 3 :TSS P1 LINK OS 03KCZ013L1AU : VRE : 1 :
:DOUBLE T : : SEQ TRND T: 0 :
:–––––––––––––––––––:TSS P2 LINK OS 03KCZ013L2AU : CRI : 19 :
: CUBICLE REF : : TC RECEPT T: 2 :
: 4KC0014L1AR : OPE DIAL TSS 03KCZ013DAUT : RECEPT SV F: 0 :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 28 : Screen 2.5

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE P320 AUTOMATION CELLS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: REF U014 CTR NUM 014 FLG F SIM :
: P4 REF U014 CLUSTER REF CA1 IND :
: ––––––––––––––––––––:
: F900 REF F900_TR3 SUB NUM 01 :EXISTENCE : QT :
: TSS OU : OKCO GROUP NUM 12 :––––––––––––––––––::
: : TSE : 200::
: LABEL SB01–03KCZ002AR–BOILER PROT A : TME : 201::
: CSS_F : : ::
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: : ::
:NATURE C8035 : : : ::
: :TSS P1 LINK OS 03KCZ013L1AU : VRE : 0::
: : : : ::
:–––––––––––––––––––:TSS P2 LINK OS 03KCZ013L2AU : : ::
: CUBICLE REF : : TC RECEPT T: 3::
: 4KC0014L1AR : OPE DIAL TSS 03KCZ013DAUT : RECEPT SV F: 2::
:.............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 29 : Screen 2.5

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 92
 Field . . . . CTR REF DB attribute . . REF_ID Type . . C 6

Description :

Reference of the automation cell.

Field . . . . CTR NUM DB attribute . . AUT_NUM Type . . C 3

Description :

Number of the automation cell (000 to 255).

Field . . . . CNS REF DB attribute . . AUT_NUM Type . . C 6

Description :

Reference of the CNS.

Field . . . . REF P4 DB attribute . . Type . . C 6

Description :

Reference of the automation cell in the P4.

Field . . . . CLUSTER REF DB attribute . . CONC Type . . C 6

Description :

Reference of cluster or CNS.

Champ . . TSS OU DB attribute . . Type . . C 5

Description :

Reference of controller malfunction TS OU.

Field . . . . F900 REF DB attribute . . REF_SYC Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of S8000 F900 network access point.

Field . . . . SUB NUM DB attribute . . N_ABO Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of subscriber to the automation cell.

Field . . . . GROUP NUM DB attribute . . N_GROUP Type . . C 6

Description :

Automation cell group number.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 93
 Field . . . . VERSION.REVISION DB attribute . . . VER_AUT Type . . N 5

Description :

Automation cell application program version number.

This information transmitted by the automation cell on startup is configured as follows :

(VERSION X 256) + REVISION

Field . . . . TSE DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of logic variables created for the automation cell.

Field . . . . TME DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of measurement variables created for the automation cell.

Field . . . . NATURE DB attribute . . Type . . C 6

Description :

Nature of the P320 automation cell (free description concerning the automation cell) :
L, M, L/M, R/M, CSS–F or C8035

Field . . . . TSS P1 LINK OS DB attribute . . . REF_HS1 Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of TSS signaling link 1 failure

Field . . . . TSS P2 LINK OS DB attribute . . . REF_HS2 Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of TSS signaling link 2 failure

Field . . . . TS EQU RES DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

= T if the results of automation cell TS equations can be transmitted to the

CENTRALOG.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 94
 Field . . . . EQT QT DB attribute . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Number of racks (1 to 4).

Field . . . . TM EQU RES DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

= T if the results of automation cell TS equations can be transmitted to the

CENTRALOG.

Field . . . . REDUND DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

= T if the automation cell is redundant.

Field . . . . SEQ TRND DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if sequence monitoring in the automation cell .

Field . . . . QT (SEQ) DB attribute . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Number of monitored sequences created for the automation cell.

Field . . . . TC RECEPT DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if reception of CENTRALOG telecommands by the automation cell.

Field . . . . QT (TC) DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of telecommands created for the automation cell.

Field . . . . OPE DIAL TSS DB attribute . . . REF_HST Type . . . . C 20

Description :

Reference of operational dialogue TSS.

Field . . . . SV RECEPT DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T for reception of CENTRALOG setpoint values by the automation cell.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 95
 Field . . . . QT (SV) DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of setpoint values created for the automation cell.

Field . . . . CUBICLE REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 16

Description :

Reference of the cubicle containing the automation cell .

Field . . . . QT (VRE) DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of VREs created in the automation cell .

Field . . . . QT (CRI) DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of criteria created in the automation cell .

Field . . . . CSS–F DB attribute . . Type . . N 4

Description :

Version number of the CSS–F configuration

Field HEAD DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Cell controller type.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 96
5.2.7. Configuration of Automation Cells

This screen enables the operator to configure each automation cell in the project.

It must reflect the configuration on the P4 terminal.

M–ET2 C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 15/03/95

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : CONFIGURE P320 or 8035 CELLS: :AUT:AUT1 : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................::
:+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+:
:: :NUM EQT/POS: RACK TYPE : REDUND*: LABEL :
:+–––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––+–––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––::
:: ; 2 : CE2000D : F : CE2000 DUAL ::
:: : : : : ::
:: : 4 : CE2000S : F : CE2000 SINGLE ::
:: : : : : ::
:: : 6 : CE2000S : F : CE2000 SINGLE ::
:: : : : : ::
:: : 8 ; CE2000SD : F : CE2000 SINGLE REMOTE ::
:: : : : : ::
:: : : : : ::
;; : 10 : : F : ::
:: : : : : ::
:: : 11 : : F : ::
:: : : : : ::
:: : 12 : : F : ::
:: : : : : ::
:: : 13 : : F : ::
:: : : : : ::
:: : 14 : : F : ::
:: : : : : ::
:: : 15 : : F : ::
:: : : : : ::
:: : 16 : : F : ::
:: : : : : ::
:: : 17 : : F : ::
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> ACQUISITION <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................
Fig. 30 : Screen 2.6

Field . . . . EQT NUM DB attribute . . . TYP_EQ Type . . .

Description :

Number of equipment in the cubicle: 2, 4, 6 and 10 to 17

Field . . . . POS DB attribute . . . TYP_EQ Type . . . N1

Description :

Position of equipment in the cubicle.

Field . . . . REDUND DB attribute . . . TYP_EQ Type . . . N1

Description :

T if redundant.
(*) the REDUND and POS fields are not used in the 8035 configuration

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 97
 Field . . . . RACK TYPE DB attribute . . . TYP_EQ Type . .

Description :

Type of P320 rack (ALSPA 8035, CE2000, CE80–35)

CE2000 16 input rack (CE2000S [ D ] )
CE2000 16 input rack (CE2000D [ D ] )
CE8035 rack CE8035S (single)
CE8035 rack CE8035D (dual)
[ D ] : Remote

a) Composition of CE2000 racks #2, 4, 6 and 8

Type of board Dual rack

LE108A1 48 V DC, 16 logic inputs (2 wires per input)

LE108A2 125 V DC, 16 logic inputs (2 wires per input)

LE108A3 24 V DC, 16 logic inputs (2 wires per input)

LE109 32 logic inputs (1 wire per input. 1 common per 8 inputs) X

LC105 16 logic output module (Relay. 2 wires per output)

LC106–1 16 polarity free logic outputs (24/48 V DC)

LC106–2 16 polarity free logic outputs (125V DC)

LD106 16 logic outputs (Static. 2 wires per output)

LS108–1 Logic actuator control module (24 V DC) X

LS108–2 Logic actuator control module (125 V DC) X

AB120 8 analog inputs (0–100 mV and thermocouples)

AB121 8 analog inputs (100 Ohms)

AH115 8 high level analog inputs (mA or V DC)

AH116–1 8 isolated analog inputs

AH116–2 8 isolated analog inputs

AS111–1 8 analog outputs (48 V DC)

AS111–2 8 analog outputs (24 V DC)

AS112 Analog control loop actuator (+ control and/or setpoint station) command
module

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 98
 IR139–1 4–way Modbus module

LE111–1 48 V DC, 24 logic inputs

LE111–2 125 V DC, 24 logic inputs

b) Composition of CE80–35 PLC racks #2, 4, 6 and 8

Module type Dual rack

AI4 4 analog input generic module

AI6 6 analog input generic module

MDL646 16 logic input module 24 V DC, fast positive/negative

MDL100 16 logic input module 48 V DC fast

MDL654 32 logic input module 5/12 V DC

MDL655 32 logic input module 24 V DC fast positive/negative X

MDL734 6 logic output module 125 V DC – 1 A

MDL740 16 logic output module 12/24 V DC – 0,5 A

positive (2 groups of 8)

MDL741 16 logic output module 12/24 V DC – 0,5 A

negative (2 groups of 8)

ALG220 4 analog input module +/– 10 V DC

ALG221 4 analog input module 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA

ALG222 16 analog input module 0–10 V DC or +/– 10 V DC

ALG222D 8 analog input module 0–10 V DC or +/– 10 V DC X

ALG223 16 analog input module 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA X

ALG390 2 analog output module +/– 10 V DC X

ALG391 2 analog output module 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA X

ALG392 8 analog input module 0–4 / 20 mA, +/– 10 V DC X

MDL632 8 logic input module 125 V DC X

MDL634 8 logic input module 24 V DC X

MDL645 16 logic input module 24 V DC X

MDL646 16 logic input module 24 V DC X

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 99
 MDL730 8 logic output module 12 – 24 V DC 2 A X

MDL731 8 logic output module 12 – 24 V DC 2 A X

MDL732 8 logic output module 12 – 24 V DC 0.5 A X

MDL733 8 logic output module 12 – 24 V DC 0.5 A X

MDL930 8 relay output module 4 A X

MDL931 8 relay output module 8 A X

MDL940 16 logic output module 125 V DC 2 A X

MDL752 32 logic output module 5/24 V DC X

MDL753 32 logic output module 5/24 V DC X

c) Composition of CE80–35 PLC racks #10 to 17

Indicate C80–35 only.

Variables output by this controller are processed as TSRs and TMRs by the controller
application.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 100
5.2.8. Configuration of Input/output Modules

This screen is used to define the configuration of each P320 automation cell.

The operator must define the type of rack (currently CE 2000) and the different types of
board utilized.

NB: The screen can only be accessed if the number of rack s has previously been
defined on the screen ”DECLARE P320 AUTOMATION CELL”.

Remark : It is possible to choose the automatic generation option (when completing

the field) for input points, which enables screen outputs to be generated and
completed in part from the ”ACQUIRE TSE BY CE2000 P320 AUTOM. CELL” masks.

The option must not be selected in the case of a data export from CONTROCAD–C.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

.....................................................................................
: GENERIC C50V3 : P320 I/O CONFIG : S.598 : CTR1: CENT 3 :
:...................................................................................:
: :F: LE109 : :F: LE108 : :F: : :F:AS112 :
: :E: : :E: LE108 : :E: : :E:AH115 :
: :D: : :D: LE108 : :D: AS111 : :D: :
: :C; : :C: LE108 : :C: : :C:AB121 :
: :B: : :B: LE108 : :B: AH115 : :B: :
: :A: : :A: LE108 : :A: AB121 : :A: :
: :9: : :9: LE108 : :9: AB120 : :9:AH115 :
: :8: : :8: LE108 : :8: : :8:AH115 :
: :7: AH115 : :7: LE108 : :7: : :7:AS112 :
: :6: : :6: LE108 : :6: LE108 : :6: :
: :5: : :5: LE108 : :5: LC105 : :5: :
: :4: : :4: LE108 : :4: : :4:AS112 :
: :3: : :3: LE108 : :3: LE108 : :3: :
: :2: : :2: LE108 : :2: LC106 : :2:AB120 :
: CE2000D :1: : CE2000S :1: LE108 : CE2000S :1: AS112 :CE2000SD :1: :
: 2 :0: LE109 : 4 :0: LE108 : 6 :0: AS112 : 8 :0: :
: : : : : : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : : : : : :
:...................................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQSTN :
:<ESC> ABORT :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:...................................................................................:

Fig. 31 : Screen 2.7

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 101
5.2.9. Declaration of Network Variables

This menu enables the operator to consult the different network variables concerning
the CNS function.

It can also be used to download network variables extracted from the P4 terminal.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DEFINE ARCHITECTURE >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DECLARE NETWORK VARIABLES >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : NETWORK VARIABLES : :
: : NETWORK VARIABLES PRODUCED : :
: : ST2 NETWORK VARIABLES PRODUCED : :
: : NETWORK VARIABLES CONSUMED : :
: : ST2 NETWORK VARIABLES CONSUMED : :
: : NETWORK VARIABLES LOADING : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 32 : Screen 2.8

The content of the three following screens is obtained by importing network variables
from the P4 into MICROETE using the 4th menu ”Network Variables Loading”.

These screens must not be modified under any circumstances. The screens are
provided for consultation purposes only.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 102
5.2.9.1. Network Variables

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : NETWORK VARIABLES : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VCOM NAME : RGT REP : DEST UB : LNG : TYPE : NOM BF : PROD SUB :
: : : : : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : : : :
: A013_SAC_G5 : 12 : 69 : 2 : 0 : CA1 : 1 :
: : : 12 : : : : 12 :
: : : : : : : :
: A013_EVTG_G5 : 0 : 69 : 248 : 0 : CA1 : 1 :
: : : 0 : : : : 0 :
: : : : : : : :
: A013_EVTM_G5 : 10 : 69 : 124 : 0 : CA1 : 1 :
: : : 10 : : : : 10 :
: : : : : : : :
: A013_EVTP_G5 : 11 : 69 : 62 : 0 : CA1 : 1 :
: : : 11 : : : : 11 :
: : : : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 33 : Screen 2.8.1

Field . . . . VCOM NAME DB attribute . . REF_ID Type . . C 14

Description :

Reference of the network variable.

Field . . . . RGT REF DB attribute . . N_REF Type . . C 5

Description :

Storage reference number of the network variable.

Number designating the storage address in memory of data received by a subscriber.

Field . . . . DEST SUB DB attribute . . N_ABO (D) Type . . C 3

Description :

Number of subscriber (0 to 63) or group (64 + number group) for whom the variable is
intended:

D When the exchange is a broadcast exchange to a group of n subscribers, the

number of the destination subscriber is 64 + n.

D When the exchange is point to point, this number is the number of the
destination subscriber.

This field is only completed if the CENTRALOG is the producer.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 103
 Field . . . . LNG DB attribute . . LONG_VAR Type . . C 3

Description :

Length in bytes of the variable transmitted. This field is only completed if the
CENTRALOG is the transmitter.

Field . . . . TYPE DB attribute . . TYP_VAR Type . . C 2

Description :

Type of network variable.

Digital code carrying information on the type of exchange. This field is only completed
if the CENTRALOG system is the transmitter.

Bit field:

2 1 0 Rank of bit
c b a

a = 1 if : stored with data warning in the C370 memory.

This means that the C370 application (DOMAINE) is
warned when the data is received by the exchange unit.

or if : Type R

b = 1 if : storage is synchronous with the automation cell cycle.

This means that the EU receptor enters the data in the
memory of the C370 only if the basic task is not currently
being executed.

or if : storage is accompanied by a warning.

c = 1 if : The message is a selector.

Field . . . . FB NAME DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Name of functional block CAn

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 104
 Field . . . . PROD SUB DB attribute . . N_ABO _P Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of the producer subscriber.

When CENTRALOG is the producer, this field is only completed if the subscriber is a
C370.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 105
5.2.9.2. Network Variables Produced (station 1)

Select F900 network

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : NETWORK VARIABLES PRODUCED : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: VAR REF F900_TR3 :
: LABEL UNIT 3 DUAL S8000 :
: :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: C0_CLK1_G1 : C0_CLQ_A033 : C0_CLQ_A063 : :
: : : : :
: C0_CLP_A013 : C0_CLP_A043 : C0_CLP_A073 : :
: : : : :
: C0_CLQ_A013 : C0_CLQ_A043 : C0_CLQ_A073 : :
: : : : :
: C0_CLP_A023 : C0_CLP_A053 : C0_CLP_A083 : :
: : : : :
: C0_CLQ_A023 : C0_CLQ_A053 : C0_CLQ_A083 : :
: : : : :
: C0_CLP_A033 : C0_CLP_A063 : C0_CLP_A093 : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 34 : Screen 2.8.2

This screen represents a sub–screen of the ”Network Variables” screen .

The screen lists the references of network variables produced via the S8000 access
point on station 1.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 106
5.2.9.3. Network Variables Produced (station 2)

Select F900 network

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :ST2 NETWORK VARIABLES PRODUCED : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: VAR REF F900_TR3 :
: LABEL UNIT 3 DUAL S8000 :
: :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: C1_CLK1_G1 : C1_CLQ_A033 : C1_CLQ_A063 : :
: : : : :
: C1_CLP_A013 : C1_CLP_A043 : C1_CLP_A073 : :
: : : : :
: C1_CLQ_A013 : C1_CLQ_A043 : C1_CLQ_A073 : :
: : : : :
: C1_CLP_A023 : C1_CLP_A053 : C1_CLP_A083 : :
: : : : :
: C1_CLQ_A023 : C1_CLQ_A053 : C1_CLQ_A083 : :
: : : : :
: C1_CLP_A033 : C1_CLP_A063 : C1_CLP_A093 : :
:..............................................................................:
: MOVE < ARROWS> <PGUP> <PGDN> <HOME> <END> :
: :
: SELECT <RETURN> ABORT/END SELECTION <ESC> :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 35 : Screen 2.8.3

This screen represents a sub–screen of the ”Network Variables” screen .

The screen lists the references of network variables produced via the S8000 access
point on station 2.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 107
5.2.9.4. Network Variables Consumed (station 1)

Select F900 network

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : NETWORK VARIABLES CONSUMED : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: VAR REF F900_TR3 :
: LABEL UNIT 3 DUAL S8000 :
: :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: A013_SAC_G5 : A023_EVTM_G5 : A023_TM4_G5 : :
: : : : :
: A013_EVTG_G5 : A023_EVTP_G5 : A033_SAC_G5 : :
: : : : :
: A013_EVTM_G5 : A023_TM0_G5 : A033_EVTG_G5 : :
: : : : :
: A013_EVTP_G5 : A023_TM1_G5 : A033_EVTM_G5 : :
: : : : :
: A023_SAC_G5 : A023_TM2_G5 : A033_EVTP_G5 : :
: : : : :
: A023_EVTG_G5 : A023_TM3_G5 : A033_TM0_G5 : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 36 : Screen 2.8.4

This screen represents a sub–screen of the ”Network Variables” screen .

The screen lists the references of network variables consumed via the S8000 access
point on station 1.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 108
5.2.9.5. Network Variables Consumed (station 2)

Select F900 network

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :ST2 NETWORK VARIABLES CONSUMED : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: VAR REF F900_TR3 :
: LABEL UNIT 3 DUAL S8000 :
: :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: A013_SAC_G5 : A023_EVTM_G5 : A023_TM4_G5 : :
: : : : :
: A013_EVTG_G5 : A023_EVTP_G5 : A033_SAC_G5 : :
: : : : :
: A013_EVTM_G5 : A023_TM0_G5 : A033_EVTG_G5 : :
: : : : :
: A013_EVTP_G5 : A023_TM1_G5 : A033_EVTM_G5 : :
: : : : :
: A023_SAC_G5 : A023_TM2_G5 : A033_EVTP_G5 : :
: : : : :
: A023_EVTG_G5 : A023_TM3_G5 : A033_TM0_G5 : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 37 : Screen 2.8.5

This screen represents a sub–screen of the ”Network Variables” screen .

The screen lists the references of network variables consumed via the S8000 access
point on station 2.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 109
5.2.9.6. Downloading Network Variables

At each modification of the network configuration on the P4 terminal, it is vital that the
CENTRALOG database be updated. The P4 terminal however remains the unique
input reference: it is MICROETE which is updated.

Operating Mode

1 – Export of the network configuration from P4.

— On the PC of the P4 terminal :
if directory IE_COM exists already, empty it
cd C:\P4\APPLI\TMP
del .\IE_COM\*.*
— Run the P4 terminal : P4 then ENTER.
— Select the menu:

NETWORKS IMPORT/EXPORT EXPORT CONFIGURATION

— Export first the architecture then the network variables by selecting

successively:

F2 : ARCHITECTURE F2 : GLOBAL SYSTEM

F4 : NETWORK EXCHANGES NAME OF NETWORK

(for each network)

The name of file proposed must not be modified.

Select format BASEPTA.
— When the export is done, quit the P4 terminal via menu F7 : EXIT.
— Copy the files onto disk

copy c:\P4\APPLI\TMP\IE_COM\*.* A:

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 110
 2 – Downloading the network configuration into CENTRALOG
— Run MICROETE.
— Access menus :
DEFINE ARCHITECTURE
then
DECLARE NETWORK VARIABLES
then
LOAD NETWORK VARIABLES
— Insert the floppy in the CCC station drive.
— Load the configuration from the floppy.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 111
5.3. OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS

This screen provides access to the different operating screens available to the
operator.

Declaration is necessary to be able to compose the different screens (assignment of

measurement variables to curves y=f(t), composition of bargraphs, mimics, reference
charts etc.).

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DECLARE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : DECLARE OPERATIVE UNITS : :
: : DECLARE CURVE GROUPS >: :
: : DECLARE MIMIC GROUPS : :
: : DECLARE SCHEDULE GROUPS >: :
: : DECLARE P320 SEQUENCE GROUPS >: :
: : DECLARE OPERATOR GROUPS : :
: : DECLARE BARGRAPH GROUPS : :
: : DECLARE TREND–ON–SCREEN GROUPS : :
: : DECLARE TREND–ON–PRINTER GROUPS : :
: : DECLARE REFERENCE CHARTS : :
: : DECLARE LOGS >: :
: :..................................................: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 38 : Screen 3

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 112
5.3.1. Declaration of Operative Units

All variables which are used in the customization of system are grouped together in
functional entities which are coherent from the point of view of the process.

Each of these entities is known as an ”Operative Unit”. This division facilitates the
customization and commissioning of the system.

An ID code (reference) and a label are associated to each Operative Unit.

This mask enables the operator to declare the Operative Units, to identify the version
and the date of last extraction of each Operative Unit.

It also enables the operator to assign the Operative Units to entities which have been
previously declared.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE OPERATIVE UNITS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: OU REF FLG IND:LABEL SIM : LEVEL :VAR VIS.:
: TYPE OU NUM :VERSION DATE BASE IND EMITTER : ENTITY : VAR QT :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: GEN TA :GENERAL VARIABLES : 0 : 0 :
: GEN : 103 10/01/1995 ANS :ENT_SYST: 0 :
: : : : :
: OU TA :OPERATIVE UNITS : 0 : 0 :
: OU : 103 10/01/1995 ANS :ENT_SYST: 0 :
: : : : :
: TIT TA :CONTROLLERS : : 0 :
: TIT : 103 10/01/1995 ANS :ENT_SYST: 0 :
: : : : :
: HYD TA :ABACUS : : 0 :
: HYD : 98 05/01/1995 HER :ENT_SYST: 0 :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 39 : Screen 3.1

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . . GRF_ID Type . . C 8

Description :

ID code of the Operative Unit.

Field . . . . TYPE DB attribute . . . Type . . C 3

Description :

Type of Operative Unit.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 113
 Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . . . C 32

Description :

Label of the Operative Unit.

Field . . . . OU NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . C 3

Description :

Number of the Operative Unit.

Field . . . . VERSION DB attribute . . . VERSION Type . . C 4

Description :

Index providing the last DVT extraction of the Operative Unit.

Field . . . . DATE DB attribute . . . DATE Type . . . . C 16

Description :

Date of transmission of the last DVT containing the Operative Unit.

Field . . . . BASE IND DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 2

Description :

Index of the database at last DVT transmission of the Operative Unit.

Field . . . . EMITTER DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 3

Description :

Three letter code of the transmitter of the last DVT containing the Operative Unit.

Field . . . . VAR QT DB attribute . . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of variables contained in the Operative Unit.

Field . . . . VAR VIS DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 5

Description :

Number of variables in the Operative Unit which can be visualized.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 114
5.3.2. Curves

5.3.2.1. Declaration of Y = F(t) Curve Groups

This screen enables the operator to declare Y = f(t) curve groups, the associated entity
and the update rate of each point of measurement.

The Y = f(t) curves function is used to display in graphic form the historical values of
analog variables as well as changes in those values and in the variable state occurring
over time.

Each curve view can display up to six variables.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE Y=F(T) CURVE GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : PER : NUM : LEVEL :
: LABEL : : : ENTITY :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: CVG01 F : 30S : 0 : 0 :
: EXTRACTION WATER : : : ENT_SYST :
: : : : :
: CVG02 F : 30S : 0 : 0 :
: FEEDWATER : : : ENT_SYST :
: : : : :
: CVG03 F : 30S : 0 : 0 :
: CONDENSER : : : ENT_SYST :
: : : : :
: CVG04 F : 30S : 0 : 0 :
: UNIT 2 START UP : : : ENT_SYST :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 40 : Screen 3.2.1

Field . . . . PER DB attribute . . . COUR_HIS Type . . . . . . . C

4

Description :

Update period :
1S timespan 2 hours for 2 groups only
5S timespan 10 hours
10S timespan 20 hours
30S timespan 60 hours ( 2,5 days )
1MN timespan 120 hours ( 5 days )
2MN timespan 240 hours ( 10 days )
5MN timespan 600 hours ( 25 days )
10MN timespan 1200 hours ( 50 days )

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 115
 30MN timespan 3600 hours ( 150 days )
60MN timespan 7200 hours ( 300 days )

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

List order number

Field . . . . LEVEL DB attribute . . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Associated protection level

Field . . . . ENTITY AB attribute . . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the associated entity

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 116
 COMPOSITION OF Y=F ( t ) CURVE GROUPS

This screen is used to configure the Y = f(t) curve groups declared previously.

A TM type variable may only appear once in a group.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DEFINE Y=F(T) CURVE GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF CVG01 DURAT 30S :
: LABEL EXTRACTION WATER :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : ASSCTED VAR : LABEL : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 1 : : : :
: : : : :
: 2 : : : :
: : : : :
: 3 : : : :
: : : : :
: 4 : : : :
: : : : :
: 5 : : : :
: : : : :
: 6 : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 41 : Screen 8.1.1

Field . . . . DURAT DB attribute . . . COUR_HIS Type . . . . . . . C

4

Description :

Update period:
1S timespan 2 hours for 2 groups only
5S timespan 10 hours
10S timespan 20 hours
30S timespan 60 hours ( 2,5 days )
1MN timespan 120 hours ( 5 days )
2MN timespan 240 hours ( 10 days )
5MN timespan 600 hours ( 25 days )
10MN timespan 1200 hours ( 50 days )
30MN timespan 3600 hours ( 150 days )
60MN timespan 7200 hours ( 300 days )

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute Type . . N 2

Description :

Order number in list.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 117
 Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the TM associated to the group.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the TM associated to the group.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 118
5.3.2.2. Declaration and Composition of Y=F ( x ) Curve Groups

This screen enables the operator to declare Y = f(t) curve groups, the associated entity,
the update period and the three pairs (maximum) of variables configured.

Unlike Y = f(t) curve groups, Y = f(x) curve groups have no definition screen.

The Y = f(x) curves function is used to display in graphic form the changes occurring
over time in one analog variable relative to another. Each new value is displayed in
accordance with a determined update period.

Reference charts can be used to define different operational zones beneath each
view.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE Y=F(X) CURVE GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF LABEL ENTITY FLG IND :
: CXY01 C XY 01 ENT_SYST F :
: :
: MEMO 2MN :
: ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––¿ :
: : : :
: : 1 X REF 03APAHICC52A Ã ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : 1 Y REF 03APAHICC52B : : ABACUS REF : :
: : Ã : : :
: :– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –: : : :
: : 2 X REF Ã : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 : :
: : 2 Y REF : : COLOR CODE : :
: : Ã : : :
: : 3 X REF : : INDEX : :
: : 3 Y REF Ã : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––ÂÙ :–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 42 : Screen 3.2.2

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute REF_ID Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of y = f(x) curve group

Field . . . . MEMO DB attribute COUR_HIS Type . . C 3

Description :

Update period: 5s, 30s, 2mn.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 119
 Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute LIB Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the variable which is displayed in the different CENTRALOG restitutions

Field . . . . X REF DB attribute REF_Xi Type . . C 20

Description :

Default functional Xi

Field . . . . Y REF DB attribute REF_Yi Type . . C 20

Description :

Default functional Yi

Field . . . . ABACUS REF DB attribute REF_ABQ Type . . C 2

Description :

Reference of associated reference chart.

Field . . . . COLOR CODE DB attribute IND_COUL i Type . . C

1

Description :

Color of curve i (0 to 6)
0 = white
1a6= colors corresponding to color coding assigned to variables in curve
groups. See Appendix 3

Field . . . . INDEX DB attribute IND_ABQi Type . . C

1

Description :

Used to identify the reference of minimum and maximum values in order to trace the
segment of the reference chart

The minimum and maximum values of pairs X1–Y1, X2–Y2 and X3–Y3 are not
necessarily identical.

Index of the variable associated to the reference chart.

= 1 reference chart associated to X1 , Y1

= 2 reference chart associated to X2 , Y2
= 3 reference chart associated to X3 , Y3

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 120
5.3.3. Mimics

DECLARATION OF MIMIC GROUPS

This screen enables the operator to declare the mimic groups and their associated
entities.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE MIMIC GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: MGR REF FLG IND : ENTITY : MIM QT : SIM :
: LABEL : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: MIM01 F : ENT_SYST : 3 : :
: SYSTEM : : : :
: : : : :
: MIM02 F : ENT_SYST : 6 : :
: OVERVIEW : : : :
: : : : :
: MIM03 F : ENT_SYST : 5 : :
: TURBO–GENERATOR : : : :
: : : : :
: MIM04 F : ENT_SYST : 6 : :
: LP FEED HEATING PLANT : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 43 : Screen 3.3

Field . . . . MGR REF DB attribute . . . REF_ID Type . . . . . . . C 5

Description :

ID of mimic group.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . . . . . . C32

Description :

Label of mimic group

Field . . . . MIM QT DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . . . N 3

Description :

Number of mimics in the group.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 121
 DEFINITION OF MIMIC GROUPS

This screen enables the operator to configure the mimic groups previously declared.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DEFINE MIMIC GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF : LABEL :MGR REF:SIM:FLG:IND :
: : : : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : : :
: KIT21 : COMMUNICATION NETWORK : MIM01 : : F : :
: : : : : : :
: KCZ21 : UNIT PROCESS CONTROLLERS : MIM01 : : F : :
: : : : : : :
: SUP01 : GENERAL OVERVIEW : MIM02 : : F : :
: : : : : : :
: SUP11 : STEAM WATER LOOP : MIM02 : : F : :
: : : : : : :
: SUP21 : LP FEED HEATING PLANT : MIM02 : : F : :
: : : : : : :
: SUP22 : HP FEED HEATING PLANT : MIM02 : : F : :
: : : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 44 : Screen 8.2.1

Field . . . . MGR REF DB attribute . . . REF_ID Type . . . . . . . C 5

Description :

ID of mimic group.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 122
 ASSIGNMENT OF ALARMS TO MIMICS

This screen enables the operator to assign different alarm variables to mimics.

A variable cannot be assigned to more than one mimic.

CEGELEC
................................................................................
: : ASSIGN ALARMS TO MIMICS : : : :
:..............................................................................:
: SYN_ALA :
: TYPE:VAR REF :LABEL :MIM REF: -:
: .....Ø....................Ø................................Ø........Ø....... :
: TS :0ZCJA012EQ1 :CELL CJA012 I/O RACK NUMBER 1 : : :
: TS :0ZCJA012EQ2 :CELL CJA012 I/O RACK NUMBER 2 : : :
: TS :0ZCJA021VER :DB DISCORDANCE – CELL CJA021 : : :
: TS :0ZCJA021EQ1 :CELL CJA021 I/O RACK NUMBER 1 : : :
: TS :0ZCJA021EQ2 :CELL CJA021 I/O RACK NUMBER 2 : : :
: TS :0ZCJA022VER :DB DISCORDANCE – CELL CJA022 : : :
: TS :0ZCJA022EQ1 :CELL CJA022 I/O RACK NUMBER 1 : : :
: TS :0ZCJA022EQ2 :CELL CJA022 I/O RACK NUMBER 2 : : :
: TS :0ABBC10GS010_WD :0ABBC10GS010 UNIT BRD INCOMING : : :
: TS :0ABUA10R30DBF :125VDC DISTRIBUTION BRD FEEDERS : : :
: TS :0ABUA10R30SWT :125V DB AND 48VDC CTRL VOLTAGE : : :
: TS :0ABUA10R27 :125VDC DISTRIBUTION BRD UNDER–V : : —:
:¢
:..............................................................................:
:<CTRL+W> QUIT <CTRL+O> ORDER BY <CTRL+T> FUNCTION KEY <?> CHOICE :
:F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 :
: :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 45 : Screen 8.2.2

To facilitate repetitive configuration operations, keys F2 to F9 can be configured from

the outset by assigning them a mimic name.

Field . . . . MIM REF DB attribute . . . REF ID Type . . . . . . . C 8

Description :

Reference of mimic.

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the alarm variable.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . . . C 32

Description :

Label of the alarm variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 123
 DYNAMIC MIMIC CAPTIONS

This screen enables the operator to configure dynamic captions for mimics.

These captions are in general designed to animate text type mimics used in bilingual
animation.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DYNAMIC MIMIC CAPTIONS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF : LABEL : FLG :IND :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: TXTABP001 : RCVY PP SUB–G : F : :
: : : : :
: TXTABP002 : RCVY PP SELECT : F : :
: : : : :
: TXTABP004 : BLEEDING 1 : F : :
: : : : :
: TXTABP005 : BLEEDING 2 : F : :
: : : : :
: TXTABP006 : BLEEDING 3 : F : :
: : : : :
: TXTABP007 : BLEEDING 4 : F : :
: : : : :
: TXTADG001 : FW TANK PRES SP : F : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 46 : Screen 8.2.3

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . REF_ID Type . . . . . . . C 14

Description :

Reference of the text variable.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . . . . . . C 32

Description :

Label of the text variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 124
 COMPOSITION OF ASSOCIATED VIEWS

This screen enables the operator to associate a view to 12 other views.

Select a mimic

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 15/03/95

................................................................................
: GENERIC C50V3 : DEFINE ASSOCIATED VIEWS: S.598 : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: :
: :
: REFERENCE : LABEL : LEVEL : :
: : : :
: :
: : : :
: : : :
: CUR01 : EXTRACTION WATER CUVE : 1 :
: : : :
: ABP51 : DRAIN RECOVERY PUMP MONITORING : 2 :
: : : :
: CHINA : : 3 :
: ; : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
: <ESC> ABORT <P1> END OF ACQUISIT :
: :
: :
................................................................................

Fig. 47 : Screen 8.7

There are four levels of association :

D 0 : no level

D 1 : lower level view

D 2 : same level view

D 3 : higher level view

Field . . . . REFERENCE DB attribute . . . CLE_VIEWType . . C 20

Description :

Reference of associated mimic.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of associated mimic.

Field . . . . LEVEL DB attribute . . . NIV_VIEW Type . . N 1

Description :

Level of association.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 125
 The views which can be used and their respective processing numbers are as follows:

Processing number View

1 mimic
2 y = f(t)
3 y = f(x)
4 bargraph
5 trend on printer
6 trend on screen
7 operator group
8 schedule
9 sequence monitoring
10 operative unit
11 disturbance
12 SOE
15 control loop

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 126
5.3.4. Declaration of Schedule Groups

5.3.4.1. Declare Operational Schedule Groups

This option is used to declare schedule groups which may be composed of schedules
or curve memorization objects.
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: : : : : :
: Centralog : DECLARE SCHEDULE GROUPS : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: VAR REF GDGR01 FLG T IND LEVEL :
: SCHEDULE GROUP LABEL 1 ENTITY :
: :
: REF1 DGR01 REF4 :
: REF2 MEM01 REF5 :
: REF3 REF6 :
: :
: :
: –––––––––– –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DIR : : CURVE COLoRS : :
: ––––––––––––––––––––––––: : : : :
: : AUTH REF 1 : – : : 1 2 3 4 5 6 : :
: : AUTH REF 2 : – : : : :
: : AUTH REF 3 : – : :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : AUTH REF 4 : – : :
: : AUTH REF 5 : – : :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: <F1> <PGUP> <PGDN> :
: :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:

Field . . . . REPI DB attribute . . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the schedule/curve memorization object in the group.

Field . . . . REP AUTOI DB attribute . . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the authorization variable.

Field . . . . DIR DB attribute . . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Authorization direction (0 or 1) (authorization if TS value = DIR)

Field . . . . CURVE COLORS DB attribute . . . Type N 2

Description :

Color of curve I (I = 1 thru 6) (color variables 1 to 6 of the palette)

Field . . . . LEVEL DB attribute . . . Type N 1

Description :

Associated protection level.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 127
 Field . . . . ENTITY DB attribute . . . Type C 8

Description :

Reference of the associated entity.

5.3.4.2. Declare Schedules

This item is used to define the schedules. There are three types of schedule:

D EX (executable schedule)

D TR (plan schedule)

D XT (plan/executable work schedule)

A schedule may extend over two days: day D(0) and day D+1 (1).

Three variables (a deactivated variable, an authorization variable and a memorization

variable) may be associated with each of the days.
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: : : : : :
: Centralog : DECLARE SCHEDULE GROUPS : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: VAR REF DGR01 REF BLOCKS :
: SCHEDULE LABEL 1 :
: :
: V_MINI –1000.00 TM MIN :
: V MAXI 1000.000 TM MAX TYP XT SORT PVER :
: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: REF OU PERFO_10 : JOUR 0 : JOUR 1 : :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––:––––––––––––––––––––:–––––––––––––––––––: :
: UNIT 2 : INVALID : 01 TSP_002 : 01 TSP_001 : :
: : : : : :
: IND : MODIF AUTH REF : : : :
: : : : : :
: EDIT 1 : DIR : : : :
: : : : : :
: FLG T : MEM REF : MEMO 2 : MEMO 3 : :
: :–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: <F1> <PGUP> :
: <ESC> <PGDN> :
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

Field . . . . TYPE DB attribute . . . Type C 2

Description :

Type of schedule: ”EX”, ”TR”, ”XT” ou”DP”

Executable, Plan, Plan/Executable or Dispatching.

Field . . . . SORT DB attribute . . . Type C 4

Description :

Sort of schedule: ”PVER” or ”PVAR”

Vertical slope, or variable slope.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 128
 Field . . . . VMINI DB attribute . . . Type N 8

Description :

Minimum process value of the variable.

Field . . . . VMAXI DB attribute . . . Type N 8

Description :

Maximum process value of the variable.

Field . . . . TMMIN DB attribute . . . Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable utilized as the minimum limit value.

Field . . . . TMMAX DB attribute . . . Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable utilized as the maximum limit value.

Field . . . . REF OU DB attribute . . . Type C 8

Description :

ID of the reference operative unit.

Field . . . . UNIT DB attribute . . . Type N 3

Description :

Code number of the TM measurement unit.

Field . . . . INVALID DB attribute . . . Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the logic variable indicating that the schedule for day 0 or day 1 is invalid.

Field . . . . MODIF AUTH REF DB attribute Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the day 0 or day 1 schedule modification authorization variable.

Field . . . . DIR DB attribute . . . Type N 1

Description :

Day 0 or day 1 modification authorization TS sense (0>1 or vice versa: authorization if

TS value = DIR)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 129
 Field . . . . REF MEM DB attribute . . . Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated memorization object (0 or 1: memory or disk)

Field . . . . EDIT DB attribute . . . Type N 1

Description :

Log printout: ”0” no printout, ”1” printout

Field . . . . REF BLOCKS

Description :

Reference of control block or control loop block.

5.3.4.3. Declare Memory Memorization Variables

This item is used to declare curve or schedule objects for memorization in memory.
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: : : : : :
: Centralog : DECLARE MEMORY MEMO VARIABLES : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: VAR REF : : : RATE :
: LABEL FLG IND : CVE/SCH : TM MEM : NB VAR :
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: C–MC–TENS01 F : C : 01GTA001IM : 5 MN :
: MEMORIZED VOLTAGE CURVE : : : 288 :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: <F1> <PGUP> :
: <ESC> <PGDN> :
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

Field . . . . CVE/SCH DB attribute . . . Type C 1

Description :

”C” : Curve memorization object

”D” : Schedule memorization object

Field . . . . TM MEM DB attribute . . . Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable to be memorized

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 130
 Field . . . . RATE DB attribute . . . Type C 4

Description :

Memorization rate for a TM or schedule introduction STEP.

Field . . . . NB VAR DB attribute . . . Type N 3

Description :

Number of variables memorizable.

5.3.4.4. Declare Disk Memorization Variables

This item is used to declare curve or schedule objects for memorization on disk.
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: : : : : :
: Centralog : DECLARE DISK MEMO VARIABLES : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: VAR REF : : : RATE :
: LABEL FLG IND : COU/DIA : TM MEM : NB VAR :
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: C–MC–TENS01 : : : :
: VOLTAGE CURVE MEMORIZED : C : 01GTA001IM : 5 MN :
: : : : 288 :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: <F1> <PGUP> :
: <ESC> <PGDN> :
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

Field . . . . CVE/SCH DB attribute . . . Type C 1

Description :

”C” : Curve memorization object

”D” : Schedule memorization object

Field . . . . TM MEM DB attribute . . . Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable to be memorized

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 131
 Field . . . . RATE DB attribute . . . Type C 4

Description :

Memorization rate for a TM or schedule introduction STEP.

Field . . . . NB VAR DB attribute . . . Type N 3

Description :

Number of variables memorizable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 132
5.3.5. Declaration of Sequence Groups

5.3.5.1. Declaration of Sequence Groups

A sequence monitoring group is composed of 1 to n sequences.

The number of sequences per group is displayed on screen.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE SEQUENCE GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: SGR REF : LABEL : ENTITY : SEQ QT :FLG:IND :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: SMG07 : AIR AND FLUE GAS : ENT_SYST : 0 : F : :
: : : : : : :
: SMG41 : BOILER SAFETIES : ENT_SYST : 0 : F : :
: : : : : : :
: SMG43 : TURBINE RUN–UP SEQUENCE : ENT_SYST : 0 : F : :
: : : : : : :
: SMG44 : TURBINE RUN–UP AND REVERSAL SEQ : ENT_SYST : 4 : F : :
: : : : : : :
: SMG99 : GRP SUIVI SEQ APPLICATION TESTS : ENT_SYST : 3 : F : :
: : : : : : :
: SMG46 : STEAM TURBINE SYSTEMS : ENT_SYST : 2 : F : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 48 : Screen 3.5.1

Field . . . . SGR REF DB attribute . . GRP_ID Type . C 5

Description :

ID of sequence group

Field . . . . SEQ QT DB attribute . . CP_SEQ Type . N 3

Description :

Number of monitored sequences created for the group

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 133
5.3.5.2. Description of P320 Automation Cell Sequences

This mask defines the different steps which compose a sequence group for a P320
automation cell.

NB: This screen can only be accessed if the sequence monitoring function
has been declared for the automation cell concerned in the mask
”DECLARE AUTOMATION CELLS”.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :DESCRI. P320 AUTO. CELL. SEQ. : :AUT:AUT133 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: SEQUENCE 12 FLG IND SEQUENCE GROUPS :
: VAR REF 4FDA02A T SGR REF 1 GRS02 REP GRS 4 :
: LABEL SEQ ARRET GR RECIRCULATION SGR REF 2 REP GRS 5 :
: REF OU AFDA SGR REF 3 REP GRS 6 :
: EDIT SM 3 :
: :
: :
: PAS NB CRI STEP NB CRI :
: 0 SEQUENCEUR AFDA02A 15 10 0 :
: 1 ARRET SUR LIGNE 1 OU PAS SELECT. 5 11 0 :
: 2 ARRET SUR LIGNE 2 OU PAS SELECT. 5 12 0 :
: 3 ARRET SUR LIGNE 3 OU PAS SELECT. 0 13 0 :
: 4 FIN DE SEQUENCE AFDA02A 0 14 0 :
: 5 0 15 0 :
: 6 0 :
: 7 0 :
: 8 0 :
: 9 0 :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW–UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 49 : Screen 3.5.2

Field . . . . SEQUENCE DB attribute . . SEQ_NUM Type . N 2

Description :

Number of the sequence in the automation cell. This number and the group number
are unique in each CENTRALOG system (0 to 63).

Champ . . EDIT SM DB attribute . . ED . . . . . . . . Type . .

Description :

0 : Filter historical record and printout

1 : Filter historical record
2 : Filter printout
4 : No filter
The states shown on screen 3.5.5., AUCUN LIEN AUCUN LIEN , are not filtered.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 134
 Field . . . . STEP DB attribute . . PAS Type . N 2

Description :

Label of step

Field . . . . NB CRI DB attribute . . CRINB Type . N 2

Description :

Number of criteria for the sequence monitoring step

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 135
5.3.5.3. Definition of P320 Automation Cell Sequence Step Criteria

This mask is used to define the sequence step criteria of a P320 automation cell.

A sequence step may comprise up to 64 criteria.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : P320 SEQUENCES STEPS CRITERIA : :AUT:T133 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: SEQUENCE 1 :
: VAR REF TEST01 CTR REF T133 :
: LABEL TEST GROUP SEQUENCE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: STP NUM:CRI NUM: CRI REF : LABEL :STAT :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 0 : 0 :CRIT_3735 : TEST GRP CMD : 0 :
: : : : : :
: 0 : 1 :CRIT0_T133 : COHERENCE CRITERION : : 0 :
: : : : : :
: 0 : 2 :CRIT_3736 : TEST AUTOM CUT–OUT : 0 :
: : : : : :
: 0 : 3 :CRIT0_T133 : COHERENCE CRITERION : : 0 :
: : : : : :
: 0 : 4 :CRIT_3737 : TEST GRP CMD : 0 :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 50 : Screen 3.5.3

Field . . . . SEQUENCE DB attribute . . SEQ_NUM Type . N 2

Description :

Number of the sequence in the automation cell. The sequence number and the group
number are unique in each CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . CTR REF DB attribute . . AUT_TRI Type . C 6

Description :

ID of the automation cell

Field . . . . STP NUM DB attribute . . NUM_PAS Type . N 2

Description :

Sequence step number

Field . . . . CRI NUM DB attribute . . NUM_CRI Type . N 2

Description :

Sequence step criterion number

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 136
 Field . . . . CRI REF DB attribute . . REF_CRI Type . C 20

Description :

Reference of criterion

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . LIB_CRI Type . C 32

Description :

Label of the criterion variable

Field . . . . STAT DB attribute . . ETA_CRI Type . C 1

Description :

Favorable state of criterion: 0 or 1 (if criterion value = STAT, the criterion is valid)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 137
5.3.5.4. Sequence State Labels

This item is used to define sequence state labels

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : SEQUENCES STATE LABELS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: STATE LABEL : STATE LABEL : :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : : :
: 0 UNTRIGGERED : 6 HELD : :
: : : :
: 1 IN PROGRESS : 7 SPARE 3 : :
: : : :
: 2 GIVEN UP : 8 UNKNOWN : :
: : : :
: 3 MANUAL MODE : : :
: : : :
: 4 SPARE 2 : : :
: : : :
: 5 FAULT : : :
: : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 51 : Screen 3.5.4

Field . . . . STATE DB attribute . . SM_ETA Type . C 1

Description :

Sequence state number

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . MSG_SM Type . C 14

Description :

Sequence state label

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 138
5.3.5.5. Unfiltered Sequence Monitoring Sates

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : UNFILTERED SM STATES : :AUTH:AUTH1: CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: : : :
: NUM : STATE : LABEL :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: 1 : :
: ; : :
: 2 : : :
: : : :
: 3 : : :
: : : :
: 4 : : :
: : : :
: 5 : : :
: : : :
: 6 : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 52 : Screen 3.5.5

Field . . . . NUM BD attribute . . Type . .

Description :

Rank number

Field . . . . STATE DB attribute . . Type . .

Description :

State numbers of sequences to be printed if filtered

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . MSG_SM Type . C14

Description :

Sequence state label

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 139
5.3.5.6. Sequence Reinitialization State

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : SEQUENCE REINIT STATE : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: : : :
: NUM : STATE : LABEL :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: 1 : :
: ; : :
: 2 : : :
: : : :
: 3 : : :
: : : :
: 4 : : :
: : : :
: 5 : : :
: : : :
: 6 : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 53 : Screen 3.5.6

Field . . . . NUM BD attribute . . Type . .

Description :

Rank number

Field . . . . STATE DB attribute . . Type . .

Description :

State numbers of sequences resulting in re–initialization of the historical data

regarding the sequence group.

This re–initialization takes place when all the sequences in the group which are at
”UNTRIGGERED” state got to ”STATE” state.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . MSG_SM Type . C14

Description :

Sequence state label

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 140
5.3.6. Operator Groups

This screen enables the operator to declare the operator groups, the entity and the
associated protection label.

The OPERATOR GROUPS function is used to display real time data (values, states,...)
concerning logic and analog variables grouped by the operator.

Each group may comprise up to 50 variables.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE OPERATOR GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : LEVEL : :
: LABEL : ENTITY : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: OPG01 F : 0 : :
: SPARE : ENT_SYST : :
: : : :
: OPG02 F : 0 : :
: SPARE : ENT_SYST : :
: : : :
: OPG03 F : 0 : :
: SPARE : ENT_SYST : :
: : : :
: OPG04 F : 0 : :
: SPARE : ENT_SYST : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 54 : Screen 3.6

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 141
 DEFINITION OF OPERATOR GROUPS

This screen is used to configure the operator groups declared previously.

A variable may not appear more than once in each group.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DEFINE OPERATOR GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF OPG01 :
: LABEL SPARE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : ASSCTED VAR : LABEL :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 1 : : :
: : : :
: 2 : : :
: : : :
: 3 : : :
: : : :
: 4 : : :
: : : :
: 5 : : :
: : : :
: 6 : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 55 : Screen 8.3

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . . . N 2

Description :

Order number in a list.

Field . . . . ASSOC VAR DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the operator group variable.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . . . C 32

Description :

Label of the operator group variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 142
5.3.7. Bargraph Groups

This screen enables the operator to declare the bargraph groups, the entity and the
associated protection level.

The BARGRAPHS function is used to follow changes in analog variables displayed in

the forms of bars.

Each bargraph view shows up to 20 variables.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE BARGRAPH GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF : LABEL : LEVEL :FLG: IND :
: : : ENTITY : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : :
: BRG01 : PLANT CONSUMPTION : 0 : F : :
: : : ENT_SYST : : 0 :
: : : : : :
: BRG02 : GEN STR SLOT 1–24 BOT BAR TEMP : 0 : F : :
: : : ENT_SYST : : 0 :
: : : : : :
: BRG03 : GEN STR SLOT 25–36 BOT BAR TEMP : 0 : F : :
: : : ENT_SYST : : 0 :
: : : : : :
: BRG04 : GEN STR SLOT 1–24 UPP BAR TEMP : 0 : F : :
: : : ENT_SYST : : 0 :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 56 : screen 3.7

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . REF_ID Type . . C14

Description :

Reference of bargraph group.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the variable in CENTRALOG displays and logs.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 143
 DEFINITION OF BARGRAPH GROUPS

This screen is used to configure the bargraph groups declared previously.

A TM type variable may appear only once in a group.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DEFINE BARGRAPH GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF BRG01 :
: LABEL PLANT CONSUMPTION :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : ASSOC VAR : LABEL : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 1 : : : :
: : : : :
: 2 : : : :
: : : : :
: 3 : : : :
: : : : :
: 4 : : : :
: : : : :
: 5 : : : :
: : : : :
: 6 : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 57 : screen 8.6

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . REF_ID Type . . C14

Description :

Reference of bargraph group.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the variable in CENTRALOG outputs.

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . ORD_VAR Type . . C2

Description :

Order number in a list.

Field . . . . ASSOC VAR DB attribute . . . REF_VAR Type . . C20

Description :

Reference of the TM.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB_VAR Type . . C32

Description :

Label of the TM.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 144
5.3.8. Trend on Screen Groups

This screen enables the operator to declare the trend on screen groups, the entity and
the associated protection level.

The TREND function is used to list the changes occurring over time in a group of
variables in the form of a table.

Each trend view of can be used to monitor up to 10 variables.

New values are displayed according to the update rate.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :DECLARE TREND–ON–SCREEN GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : PERIOD : LEVEL : NUM : :
: LABEL : : ENTITY : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : :
: TRS01 F : 10 : 0 : 1 : :
: SPARE : : ENT_SYST : : :
: : : : : :
: TRS02 F : 10 : 0 : 2 : :
: SPARE : : ENT_SYST : : :
: : : : : :
: TRS03 F : 10 : 0 : 3 : :
: SPARE : : ENT_SYST : : :
: : : : : :
: TRS04 F : 10 : 0 : 4 : :
: SPARE : : ENT_SYST : : :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 58 : screen 3.8

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . REF_ID Type . . C14

Description :

Reference of trend on screen group.

Field . . . . PERIOD DB attribute . . . PER_INI Type . . C4

Description :

Initial value of timespan.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the variable in CENTRALOG outputs.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 145
 DEFINITION OF TREND ON SCREEN GROUPS

This screen is used to configure the trend on screen groups declared previously.

A variable may appear only once in a group.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DEFINE TREND–ON–SCREEN GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF TRS01 :
: LABEL SPARE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : ASSCTED VAR : LABEL : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 1 : : : :
: : : : :
: 2 : : : :
: : : : :
: 3 : : : :
: : : : :
: 4 : : : :
: : : : :
: 5 : : : :
: : : : :
: 6 : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 59 : Screen 8.4

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . REF_ID Type . . C14

Description :

Reference of trend on screen group.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . C32

Description :

Label of the variable in CENTRALOG outputs.

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . ORD_VAR Type . . N2

Description :

Order number in a list.

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . REF_VAR Type . . C20

Description :

Reference of the associated variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 146
 Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB_VAR Type . . C32

Description :

Label of the associated variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 147
5.3.9. Trend on Printer Groups

DECLARE TREND ON SCREEN GROUPS

This screen enables the operator to declare trend on printer groups, the associated
entity and protection level.

The TREND ON PRINTER function provides a historical record of a group of up to 10

variables.

Variable values are stored periodically.

100 samples are stored per variable.

Log generation is initialized either manually by the operator, or automatically on a state

change in a variable assigned to the log.

The log is printed out automatically at the end of the storage period.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE TREND–ON–PRINTER GRPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : PERIOD : TRIG ON : LEVEL :
: LABEL :SAMPLE QT: DIR : ENTITY :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: TRP01 F : 10 : : 0 :
: SPARE : 10 : : ENT_SYST :
: : : : :
: TRP02 F : 10 : : 0 :
: SPARE : 10 : : ENT_SYST :
: : : : :
: TRP03 F : 10 : : 0 :
: SPARE : 10 : : ENT_SYST :
: : : : :
: TRP04 F : 10 : : 0 :
: SPARE : 10 : : ENT_SYST :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 60 : screen 3.9

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . REF_ID Type . . C14

Description :

Reference of trend on printer group.

Field . . . . PERIOD DB attribute . . . PER_INI Type . . C4

Description :

Initial value of the storage period.

5S, 10S, 30S, 1 MN, 2 MN, 5 MN, 10 MN, 1 H.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 148
 Field . . . . TRIG ON DB attribute REF_STS Type . . . . C20

Description :

Reference of the trip TS.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . C32

Description :

Label of the variable in CENTRALOG outputs.

Field . . . . SAMPLE QT DB attribute . . . NB_ECHC Type . . N3

Description :

Initial number of samples.

Field . . . . DIR DB attribute . . . SENS_STS Type . . . . . . . .C

1

Description :

Trip sense (0 or 1).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 149
 DEFINITION OF TREND ON PRINTER GROUPS

This screen is used to configure the trend on printer groups declared previously.

A variable may only appear once in a group.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :DEFINE TREND–ON–PRINTER GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF TRP01 :
: LABEL SPARE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : ASSCTED VAR : LABEL : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 1 : 03APAFN102 : BOOSTER PUMP 102PO OUTLET FLOW : :
: : : : :
: 2 : 03APAFN202 : BOOSTER PUMP 202PO OUTLET FLOW : :
: : : : :
: 3 : 03APAFN302 : BOOSTER PUMP 302PO OUTLET FLOW : :
: : : : :
: 4 : : : :
: : : : :
: 5 : : : :
: : : : :
: 6 : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 61 : Screen 8.6

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . REF_ID Type . . C14

Description :

Reference of trend on printer group.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . C32

Description :

Label of the variable in CENTRALOG outputs.

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . ORD_VAR Type . . N2

Description :

Order number in a list.

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . REF_VAR Type . . C20

Description :

Reference of the variable associated.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 150
 Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB_VAR Type . . C32

Description :

Label of the associated variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 151
5.3.10. Reference Charts

A reference chart may contain up to 10 curves, each curve being composed of 1 to 20

points. These numbers can be parametered for each reference chart.

All the curves on one reference chart are either incremental or decremental.

All the curves on one reference chart must contain the same number of points.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE REFERENCE CHARTS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF :CURVE NBER:POINTS NB:FLG:IND :
: LABEL : : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : :
: : 0 : 0 : F : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 62 : Screen 3.10

Field . . . . CURVE NBER DB attribute . . . NB_COUR Type . . . . N 2

Description :

Number of curves on the reference chart (1 to10 ).

Field . . . . POINTS NB DB attribute . . . NB_POINT Type . . . . N 2

Description :

Number of points in curves on the reference chart (1 to 20 ).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 152
 DEFINITION OF REFERENCE CHARTS

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : REFERENCE CHARTS COMPOSITION : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF CURVE NBER 0 FLG F :
: LABEL POINTS NB 0 IND :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: CURVE 0 : PARA VAL :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: (X1,Y1) :::::::: (X11,Y11) :
: (X2,Y2) :::::::: (X12,Y12) :
: (X3,Y3) :::::::: (X13,Y13) :
: (X4,Y4) :::::::: (X14,Y14) :
: (X5,Y5) :::::::: (X15,Y15) :
: (X6,Y6) :::::::: (X16,Y16) :
: (X7,Y7) :::::::: (X17,Y17) :
: (X8,Y8) :::::::: (X18,Y18) :
: (X9,Y9) :::::::: (X19,Y19) :
: (X10,Y10) :::::::: (X20,Y20) :
::–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––::
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 63 : screen 8.6

Field . . . . CURVE NBER DB attribute . . . NB_COUR Type . . . . . . . N 2

Description :

Number of curves on the reference chart (max 10).

Field . . . . POINTS NB DB attribute . . . NB_POINT Type . . . . . . . N 2

Description :

Number of points in curves on the reference chart (max 20).

Field . . . . CURVE i DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . . . N 2

Description :

Number of curve in the reference chart (1 to10).

Field . . . . PARA VAL DB attribute . . . PARA _VAL Type . . . . . . . C 8

Description :

Curve parameter value.

Field . . . . (Xi, Yi) DB attribute . . . X _VAL , Y_VAL Type . . . . . . C 8

Description :

Value of points Xi and Yi in the curve.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 153
5.3.11. Logs

To declare a log access the menu below:

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DECLARE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DECLARE LOGS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : DECLARE PERIODIC LOGS : :
: : DECLARE DISTURBANCE LOGS : :
: : DECLARE SOE LOGS : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:DECLARE PERIODIC LOGS :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 64 : Screen 3.11

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 154
5.3.11.1. Declaration of Periodic Logs

The different types of periodic logs to be declared are as follows:

D Shift logs

The shift logs supply the following types of information:

— the ”principal events” occurring during the shift.
Principal events may be state changes in logic variables or violations of
threshold defined for analog variables.
— the hourly changes during the shift in a set of analog variables divided into
groups of a maximum of 10 variables.
D Daily logs

The daily logs supply the changes over 24 hours in a set of analog variables
divided into groups of a maximum of 10 variables.

The values of variables are stored at hourly intervals.

At the end of each 24 hour period the following may be calculated for each
variable, either the sum and/or the average at off–peak hours, or the sum or
average at peak hours and the overall sum and average.

Daily logs are printed out automatically each day.

D Weekly logs

The weekly logs supply the changes over a week in a set of analog variables
divided into groups of a maximum of 10 variables.

The values of variables are stored each day.

At the end of the week, the overall sum and/or average are calculated for each
variable.

The weekly logs is printed out automatically each week.

D Monthly maintenance logs

The role of this log is to supply information for maintenance purposes.

This information is divided into three categories:

— running times,
— duration of TM threshold violations,
— The number of actuator Start/Stop cycles (number of logic variable
transitions).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 155
 D Monthly balance logs

The monthly logs supply the changes over a month in a set of analog variables
divided into groups of a maximum of 10 variables.

The values of variables are stored every day.

At the end of the month, the overall sum and/or average are calculated for each
variable.

Monthly logs are printed out automatically each month.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE PERIODIC LOGS : S 817 : : :
:..............................................................................:
: : : : : :
: TYPE : VAR REF : LABEL :FLG: IND :
:––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––+–––––:
: : : : : :
: 4 : JOU04 : EVENT LOG : F : A :
: : : : : :
: 1 : JOU01 : SHIFT LOG : F : A :
: : : : : :
: 2 : JOU02 : DAILY LOG : F : A :
: : : : : :
: 6 : JOU06 : WEEKLY LOG : F : A :
: : : : : :
: 3 : JOU03 : MONTHLY LOG : F : A :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> AIDE <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 65 : Screen 3.11.1

Field . . . . TYPE DB attribute . . . JOUR TYP Type . . . . . . . N 2

Description :

Code of the different types of log:

=1 shift log
=2 daily log
=3 monthly maintenance log
=4 daily event log
=5 monthly balance log
=6 weekly log

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 156
5.3.11.2. Declaration of Disturbance Logs

The purpose of the disturbance log is to supply a historical record of analog and logic
variables during the period immediately before and after the occurrence of an incident
in order to permit off–line analysis.

The data associated to a disturbance log is constituted by a group of up to 16 logic

variables used as trip criteria (representative of an incident) and of 20 sampled
variables, maximum 10 logic and 10 analogic.

A state change in the trip variables initializes the generation of logs. 60 values are
sampled for each variable in the pre–incident phase and 50 values in the post–incident
phase.

These logs are automatically printed out at the end of the post–incident phase.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE DISTURBANCE LOGS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : RATE BEF. DEC : LEVEL : :
: LABEL : RATE AFT. DEC : ENTITY : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: DTG01 F : 1MN : 0 : :
: SPARE : 5S : ENT_SYST : :
: : : : :
: DTG02 F : 1MN : 0 : :
: SPARE : 5S : ENT_SYST : :
: : : : :
: DTG03 F : 1MN : 0 : :
: SPARE : 5S : ENT_SYST : :
: : : : :
: DTG04 F : 1MN : 0 : :
: SPARE : 5S : ENT_SYST : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 66 : Screen 3.11.2

Field . . . . RATE BEF DEC DB attribute . . . PRE_VAL Type . . . . C 4

Description :

Data acquisition rate before disturbance trip.

2S 5S 10S 15S 30S 1MN 2MN

Field . . . . RATE AFT DEC DB attribute POST_VAL Type . . . C 4

Description :

Data acquisition rate after disturbance trip.

2S 5S 10S 15S 30S 1MN 2MN 5MN 10MN

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 157
 DISTURBANCE TRIP

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DISTURBANCE TRIP (TS) : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF DTG01 RATE BEF. DEC 1MN STOP :
: LABEL SPARE RATE AFT. DEC 5S :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : ASSCTED VAR : LABEL : DEC STE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 1 : : : :
: : : : :
: 2 : : : :
: : : : :
: 3 : : : :
: : : : :
: 4 : : : :
: : : : :
: 5 : : : :
: : : : :
: 6 : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 67 : Screen 8.9.3.1

Field . . . . RATE BEF DEC DB attribute . . . PRE_VAL Type . C 4

Description :

Data acquisition rate before disturbance trip.

2S 5S 10S 15S 30S 1MN 2MN

Field . . . . RATE AFT DEC DB attribute . . . POST_VAL Type

C4

Description :

Data acquisition rate after disturbance trip.

2S 5S 10S 15S 30S 1MN 2MN 5MN 10MN

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Order number in a list of trips.

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . REF_ID Type . . .

Description :

Reference of the trip variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 158
 Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . C 30

Description :

Label of the trip variable.

Field . . . . DEC STE DB attribute . . . DEC_SENS Type . . . . . . . C 1

Description :

Trip sense.
=0 trips disturbance processing if variable shifts from 1 to 0.
=1 trips disturbance processing if variable shifts from 0 to 1.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 159
 DISTURBANCE LOG ATTRIBUTION

TS

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :DISTURB. GROUP ATTRIBUTION (TS): : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF DTG01 RATE BEF. DEC 1MN STOP :
: LABEL SPARE RATE AFT. DEC 5S :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : ASSCTED VAR : LABEL : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 1 : : : :
: : : : :
: 2 : : : :
: : : : :
: 3 : : : :
: : : : :
: 4 : : : :
: : : : :
: 5 : : : :
: : : : :
: 6 : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 68 : Screen 8.9.3.2

Field . . . . RATE BEF DEC DB attribute . . . PRE_VAL Type . C 4

Description :

Data acquisition rate before disturbance trip.

2S 5S 10S 15S 30S 1MN 2MN

Field . . . . RATE AFT DEC DB attribute . . . POST_VAL Type

C4

Description :

Data acquisition rate after disturbance trip.

2S 5S 10S 15S 30S 1MN 2MN 5MN 10MN

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Order number of the TS in the list.

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the list TS.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the list TS.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 160
 TM

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :DISTURB. GROUP ATTRIBUTION (TM): : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF DTG01 RATE BEF. DEC 1MN STOP :
: LABEL SPARE RATE AFT. DEC 5S :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : ASSCTED VAR : LABEL : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 1 : : : :
: : : : :
: 2 : : : :
: : : : :
: 3 : : : :
: : : : :
: 4 : : : :
: : : : :
: 5 : : : :
: : : : :
: 6 : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 69 : Screen 8.9.3.3

Field RATE BEF DEC DB attribute . . . PRE_VAL Type C 4

Description :

Data acquisition rate before disturbance trip.

2S 5S 10S 15S 30S 1MN 2MN

Field RATE AFT DEC DB attribute . . . POST_VAL Type

C4

Description :

Data acquisition rate after disturbance trip.

2S 5S 10S 15S 30S 1MN 2MN 5MN 10MN

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Order number of the TM in the list.

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the TM in the list.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the TM in the list.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 161
5.3.11.3. Declaration of SOE Logs

The purpose of the SOE logs (Sequence Of Events), is to supply a historical record of
state changes in logic variables during the period which follows the occurrence of an
incident in order to permit off–line analysis.

The data associated to SOE logs is constituted by a group of a maximum of 100 logic
variables.

A state change in one of the variables in the group initializes the generation of an SOE
log.

After trip, all the state changes in variables in the group are saved. The log is
considered as complete and is automatically printed out on expiry of a pre–defined
recording period or after 50 state changes have been saved.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE SOE LOGS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : RATE AFT. DEC : LEVEL :
: LABEL : : ENTITY :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: F : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 70 : Screen 3.11.3

Field . . . . RATE AFT DEC DB attribute . . . POST_VAL Type . . . C 4

Description :

Post SOE trip data recording period.

1 MN, 2 MN, 5 MN, 10 MN.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 162
 DEFINITION OF SOE LOGS

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DEFINE SOE LOGS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF :
: LABEL RATE AFT. DEC :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : ASSCTED VAR : LABEL : DEC STE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 0 : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 71 : Screen 8.9.4

Field . . . . RATE AFT DEC DB attribute . . . POST_VAL Type

C4

Description :

Post SOE trip data recording period.

1 MN, 2 MN, 5 MN, 10 MN.

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Order number in the list.

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the variable of group SOE.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the variable of group.

Field . . . . DEC STE DB attribute . . . DEC_SENS Type . . . . . . . C 1

Description :

Trip sense.
= 0 trips SOE processing if variable shifts from 1 to 0.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 163
 =1 trips SOE processing if variable shifts from 0 to 1.
= 2 no trip

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 164
 CONFIGURATION OF LOGS

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DEFINE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : LOGS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : DECLARE LOG TYPES : :
: : DECLARE PERIODIC LOG GROUPS >: :
: : DEFINE PERIODIC LOGS : :
: : DEFINE DISTURBANCE LOGS >: :
: : DEFINE SOE LOGS : :
: : MAINTENANCE LOG PARAMETERS : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 72 : Screen 8.9

DECLARATION OF PERIODIC LOG GROUPS

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DEFINE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : LOGS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DECLARE PERIODIC LOG GROUPS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : DECLARE SHIFT AND DAILY LOG GROUPS : :
: : DAILY–EVENT LOG HEADINGS : :
: : DECLARE BALANCE MONTHLY LOG GROUPS : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 73 : Screen 8.9.1

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 165
 DECLARATION OF SHIFT, DAILY LOG GROUPS

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : SHIFT AND DAILY LOG GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: : : : : : :
: TYPE :GROUP : VAR REF :LABEL :FLG: IND :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : : :
: 0 : 0 : : : F : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 74 : Screen 8.9.1.1

Field . . . . TYPE DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Code of the different types of log:

=1 shift log
=2 daily log
=3
=5 monthly balance log

Field . . . . GROUP DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Number of group.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 166
 DECLARE LOG TYPES

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: : : : : :
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE LOG TYPES : : : CENT :3 :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: VAR REF : FLG : IND : CAL : :
: LABEL : : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: O5 HEBDO : : : : :
: WEEKLY : T : : 0 : :
: : : : : :
: 06 BILAN : : : : :
: MONTHLY BALANCES : T : : 0 : :
: : : : : :
: 07 MAINT : : : : :
: MONTHLY MAINTENANCE : T : : 0 : :
: : : : : :
: 08 ALARME : : : : :
: ALARMS : T : : N : :
: : : : : :
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: <F1> ACQUISIT <PGUP> :
: <ESC> ABORT <PGDN> :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:

Field . . . . CAL DB attribute . . . Type . . C 1

Description :

0 ––> Log included in setting “Storage needed” TSS

N ––> Not included.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 167
 DECLARATION OF WEEKLY LOG GROUPS

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE WEEKLY LOG GROUPS : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: : : : : : :
: TYPE :Group: VAR REF :LABEL :FLG: IND :
:––––––+––––––+–––––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––+–––––:
: : : : : : :
: 0 : 0 : : : F : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 75 : Screen 8.9.1.2

Field . . . . TYPE DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Weekly log code (= 6 mandatory)

Field . . . . Group DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Number of group.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 168
 DECLARATION OF MONTHLY BALANCE LOG GROUPS

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE MONTHLY BALANCE LOG GROUPS : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: : : : : : :
: TYPE :Group: VAR REF :LABEL :FLG: IND :
:––––––+––––––+–––––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––+–––––:
: : : : : : :
: 5 : 1 : GLOGMON1 : MONTHLY BALANCE GROUP 1 : F : :
: : : : F : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 76 : Screen 8.9.1.4

Field . . . . TYPE DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . N 2

Description :

Weekly log code (= 5 mandatory)

Field . . . . Group DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . N 2

Description :

Number of group.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 169
 DEFINITION OF PERIODIC LOG GROUPS

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DEFINE PERIODIC LOGS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: TYPE : GROUP : ORDER : VAR REF FLG IND : CALC TYP : :
: : : : LABEL : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : : :
: 0 : 0 : 0 : F : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 77 : Screen 8.9.2

Field . . . . TYPE DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Code of the different types of log:

=1 shift log
=2 daily log
=3 monthly maintenance log
=4 event log
=5 monthly balance log
=6 weekly log
Field . . . . Group DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Number of group with respect to the type of log.

Field . . . . ORDER DB attribute . . . Type . . N 4

Description :

Order number in group.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 170
 Field . . . . CALC TYP DB attribute . . . TCAL Type . . C 5

Description :

Type of calculation at log printout.

0: no calculation
S: sum of values
M: average of values
SHPC: sum of peak and off–peak values
MHPC: average of peak and off–peak values

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 171
 MAINTENANCE LOG PARAMETERS

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : MAINTENANCE LOG PARAMETERS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF :TYPE GROUP ORDER: : T/MAINT :QT/MAINT:
: LABEL : : : GROUP : GROUP :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––1–––––––––2––––:
: : : : : :
: : 0 0 0 : : : 0 :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 78 : Screen 8.9.5

Field . . . . TYPE DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Log type code =3 (mandatory)

Field . . . . Group DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Number of group:

D 1 = RUNNING TIME

D 2 = START AND STOP COUNTER

D 3 = TOTAL THRESHOLD VIOLATION TIME

Field . . . . ORDER DB attribute . . . Type . . N 4

Description :

Order number of the variable in the group.

Field . . . . T/MAINT DB attribute . . . PER_MAIN Type . . . . . . . C

8

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 172
 Description :

Period between two maintenance operations (in hours)

Field . . . . QT/MAINT DB attribute . . . NXM Type . . N 6

Description :

Maximum number of maneuvers between two maintenance operations.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 173
5.4. ES VARIABLE ACQUISITION
Use the menus below to access the configuration masks:

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : VARIABLE ACQUISITION >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : P320 AUTOMATION CELL. ACQUISITIONS >: :
: : DECLARE TMC : :
: : DECLARE TSS : :
: : TSS RANGES : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:
Fig. 79 : Screen 4

5.4.1. P320 Automation Cell Acquisitions

Select the type of data to be configured.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : VARIABLE ACQUISITION >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : P320 AUTOMATION CELL ACQUISITIONS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : P320 CE2000 ACQUISITIONS >: :
: : P320 CE8035 ACQUISITIONS >: :
: : P320 LOCAL ACQUISITIONS >: :
: : DI103 ACQUISITIONS : :
: : ACQUISITION RESULTS P320 TS EQUATIONS : :
: : ACQUISITION RESULTS P320 TM EQUATIONS : :
: : DECLARE VRE : :
: : DECLARE SEQUENCE CRITERIA : :
: : ACQUISITION P320 SYSTEM DEFAULT TS : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 80 : Screen 4.1

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 174
5.4.1.1. P320 CE2000 Acquisitions

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : VARIABLE ACQUISITION >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : P320 AUTOMATION CELL. ACQUISITIONS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : P320 CE2000 ACQUISITIONS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : P320 CE2000 TSE ACQUISITION : :
: : P320 CE2000 TME ACQUISITION : :
: : TSE ACQUISITION VIA SMCA MODULE : :
: : TME ACQUISITION VIA SMCA MODULE : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 81 : Screen 4.1.1

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 175
5.4.1.1.1. P320 TSE Acquisitions
Select the relevant automation cell.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : P320 (CE2000) TSE ACQ. : :AUT:U043 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : RACK MOD WAY :CENT : P4 REF :
: LABEL : SUP INFO : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: 03FIA101JA1 F : 2 7 05 : E : FIA101JA1’E :
: RECTIFIER TRANSFO 1 : _ETC21(229) : : :
: : : : :
: 03FIA201JA1 F : 2 7 07 : E : FIA201JA1’E :
: RECTIFIER TRANSFO 2 : _ETC21(231) : : :
: : : : :
: 03FIA301JA1 F : 2 7 09 : E : FIA301JA1’E :
: RECTIFIER TRANSFO 3 : _ETC21(233) : : :
: : : : :
: 03FIAUS111 F : 2 7 01 : E : FIAUS111’E :
: LS PRECIPITATORS RAPPING MOTOR : _ETC21(225) : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 82 : Screen 4.1.1.1

Field . . . . RACK DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of rack (1 to 4).

Field . . . . MOD DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of module (0 to F).

Field . . . . WAY DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of channel ( 0 to 1F).

The CENTRALOG attribute ADR_V is produced from the content of fields RACK,
MOD, WAY (see ATTRIBUTE / OBJECT menu )

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 176
 Field . . . . CENT DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

’E’ if the variable is transmitted to the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . P4 REF DB attribute . . . . . Type . . . . . C 12

Description :

Reference of the object utilized in the P4.

Field . . . . SUP INFO DB attribute . . Type . C 16

Description :

Information utilized for the P4.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 177
5.4.1.1.2. P320 CE2000 TME Acquisitions
Select the relevant automation cell.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : P320 (CE2000) TME ACQ. : :AUT:U083 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND:RACK MOD WAY :TEMP ACQ RAT: CENT :
: LABEL : SUP INFO : TYP CODE : P4 REF :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
:03SARPT001 F : 6 1 6 : 0 5 : E :
:CTRL AIR PRES : _EAC231R(20) : 81 : SARPT001’E :
: : : : :
:03SARTE101 F : 6 4 7 : 1 20 : E :
:CTRL AIR COMPR OUT TEMP : _EAC232R(7) : 2 : SARTE101’C :
: : : : :
:03SARTE201 F : 6 5 7 : 1 20 : E :
:CTRL AIR COMPR OUT TEMP : _EAC232R(21) : 2 : SARTE201’C :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 83 : Screen 4.1.1.2

Field . . . . RACK DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of rack (1 to 4).

Field . . . . MOD DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of module (0 to F).

Field . . . . WAY DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of channel ( 0 to 7).

Field . . . . TEMP DB attribute . . SIGNE Type . . C 1

Description :

= 0 : Measurement received in 16 signed bits. AH115 board.

= 1 : Temperature measurement received on 16 non–signed bits. AB120 or AB121
acquisition board .

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 178
 Field . . . . ACQ RAT DB attribute . . AM_VAL Type . . C 2

Description :

Value of the measurement acquisition rate of the automation cell.

Permissible values are as follows (in seconds)

1
2
5
10
15
20
30
60

Field . . . . CENT DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

’E’ if the variable is transmitted to the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . INFO SUP DB attribute . . . Type . . . C 16

Description :

Information utilized for the P4.

Field . . . . TYP CODE DB attribute . . T_CONV Type . . N 3

RTKTM

Description :

Measurement conversion type code number.

Field . . . . P4 REF DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 12

Description :

Reference of object in the P4.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 179
5.4.1.1.3. TSE Acquisition via SMCA Module
Select the relevant automation cell.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : TSE ACQ. VIA SMCA MODULE : :AUT:U113 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : RACK MOD SMCA INP : CENT : P4 REF :
: LABEL : SUP INFO : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: 03APAHICE52A F : 2 C 0 3 : E :APAHIC52A’E :
: FW PUMP 1 CMD VALUE : _SAC214(12);10 : : :
: : : : :
: 03APAHICF52A F : 2 C 0 2 : E :APAHIC52A’F :
: FW PUMP 1 A/H CMD STN : _SAC214(12);9 : : :
: : : : :
: 03APAHICP52A F : 2 C 0 1 : E :APAHIC52A’P :
: FW PUMP 1 A/H CMD STN : _SAC214(12);8 : : :
: : : : :
: 03APAHICE52B F : 4 C 0 3 : E :APAHIC52B’E :
: FW PUMP 2 CMD VALUE : _SAC224(12);10 : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 84 : Screen 4.1.1.3

Field . . . . RACK DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of rack (2 to 8).

Field . . . . MOD DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of module (0 to F).

Field . . . . SMCA DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of RCM / RPC module on the board (1 to 4).

Field . . . . INP DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

RCM / RPC input number (1 to 3).

Field . . . . CENT DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

= E if the variable is transmitted towards the CENTRALOG system.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 180
 Field . . . . P4 REF DB attribute . . . . . Type . . . . C 12

Description :

Reference of the object in the P4.

Field . . . . SUP INFO DB attribute . . Type . . C 16

Description :

Information utilized for the P4.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 181
5.4.1.1.4. TME Acquisition via SMCA Module
Select the relevant automation cell.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : TME ACQ. VIA SMCA MODULE : :AUT:U113 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND: RACK MOD SMCA INP : ACQ RAT:CENT :
: LABEL : SUP INFO :TYP CODE :P4 REF :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
:03APAHICC52A F : 2 C 0 1 : 2 :E :
:FW PUMP 1 CMD VALUE : _SAC214(0) : 1 :APAHIC52A’C :
: : : : :
:03APAHICD52A F : 2 C 0 2 : 2 :E :
:FW PUMP 1 BIAS VALUE : _SAC214(1) : 1 :APAHIC52A’D :
: : : : :
:03APAHICX52A F : 2 C 0 3 : 2 :E :
:FW PUMP 1 AUX VALUE : _SAC214(2) : 1 :APAHIC52A’X :
: : : : :
:03APAHICC52B F : 4 C 0 1 : 2 :E :
:FW PUMP 2 CMD VALUE : _SAC224(0) : 1 :APAHIC52B’C :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 85 : Screen 4.1.1.4

Field . . . . RACK DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of rack (2 to 8).

Field . . . . MOD DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of module (0 to 1F).

Field . . . . SMCA DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of RCM / RPC module on the board (0 to 3).

Field . . . . INP DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

RCM / RPC input number (1 to 3).

Field . . . . ACQ RAT DB attribute . . AM_VAL Type . . C 2

Description :

Value of the measurement acquisition rate of the automation cell (see menu 2).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 182
 Field . . . . CENT DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

= E if the variable is transmitted to the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . INFO SUP DB attribute . . Type . . C 16

Description :

Information utilized for the P4.

Field . . . . CODE TYP DB attribute . . T_CONV Type . . N 3

RTKTM

Description :

Measurement conversion type code number.

Field . . . . REF P4 DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 12

Description :

Reference of the object utilized in the P4.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 183
5.4.1.2. CE8035 Acquisition

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : ACQ. RESULTS P320 TS EQUATION : :AUT:U043 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : ROW : P4 REF :
: LABEL : SUP INFO : P4 VAL REF :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––––––––––:
: :
: ______________________________________________ :
: : : :
: : VARIABLE ACQUISITION >: :
: : :
: ________________________________________________ :
: : : :
: : P320 ACQUISITION >: :
: : : :
: __________________________________________________ :
: : : :
: : CE8035 AUTOMATION CELL ACQUISITION >: :
: : : :
: __________________________________________________________ :
: : : :
: : ACQUISITION TSE AUTOM. CELL P320 CE8035 : :
: : ACQUISITION TME AUTOM. CELL P320 CE8035 : :
: : : :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> AIDE <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 86 : Screen 4.1.2

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 184
5.4.1.2.1. Acquisition of P320 TSE Automation Cell

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : ACQ. TME P320 (CE8035) : :AUT:G010 CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND:RACK MOD WAY : : :
: LABEL : SUP INFO : CENT : P4 REF :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––+––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
:TSA 1100200 T A : 2 A 00 : E : TSA/100200’E :
:EUT1 : EAC223R(35) : : :
: : : : :
:TSA110040F T A : 2 5 0F : E : TSA110040F’E :
:EUT1 : EAC222R(16) : : :
: : : : :
:TSA1101200 T A : 2 4 00 : E : TSA1101200’E :
:AUT1 : EAC222R(4) : : :
: : : : :
:TSA110120F T A : 2 4 0F : E : TSA110120F’E :
:AUT1 : EAC222R(5) : : :
: : : : :
................................................................................
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 87 : Screen 4.1.1.2

Field . . . . RACK DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of rack (1 to 4).

Field . . . . MOD DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of module (0 to F).

Field . . . . WAY DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of channel ( 0 to 1F).

Field . . . . CENT DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

’E’ if the variable is transmitted to the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . SUP INFO DB attribute . . Type . C 16

Description :

Information utilized for the P4.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 185
 Field . . . . P4 REF DB attribute . . . . . Type . . . . . C 12

Description :

Reference of the object utilized in the P4.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 186
5.4.1.2.2. Acquisition of P320 TME Automation Cell (CE80350)
Select the required automation cell.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : ACQ. TME P320 (CE8035) : :AUT:G010 CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND:RACK MOD WAY :TEMP ACQ RATE: CENT :
: LABEL : INFO SUP : CODE TYP : P4 REF :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––+––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
:GEDBA6MN T A : 2 A 7 : 0 5 : E :
:NIV. BACHE DE RESERVE N 6 : EAC223R(35) : 22 : GEDBA6MN’E :
: : : : :
:GEDBA7MN T A : 2 5 2 : 0 5 : E :
:NIV. BACHE DE RESERVE N 7 : EAC222R(16) : 22 : GEDBA7MN’E :
: : : : :
:GCECE1MN T A : 2 4 4 : 0 5 : E :
:NIV. CHATEAU D’EAU 1 : EAC222R(4) : 39 : GCECE1MN’E :
: : : : :
:GCECE2MN T A : 2 4 5 : 0 5 : E :
:NIV. CHATEAU D’EAU 2 : EAC222R(5) : 39 : GCECE2MN’E :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> AIDE <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 88 : Screen 4.1.1.2

Field . . . . RACK DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of rack (1 to 4).

Field . . . . MOD DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of module (0 to F).

Field . . . . WAY DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

Number of channel ( 0 to 7).

Field . . . . TEMP DB attribute . . SIGNE Type . . C 1

Description :

= 0 : Measurement received on 16 signed bits. AH115 board.

= 1 : Temperature (measurement received on 16 non–signed bits).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 187
 Field . . . . ACQ RAT DB attribute . . AM_VAL Type . . C 2

Description :

Value of the measurement acquisition rate of the automation cell.

Permissible values are as follows (in seconds)

1
2
5
10
15
20
30
60

Field . . . . CENT DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

’E’ if the variable is transmitted to the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . INFO SUP DB attribute . . . Type . . . C 16

Description :

Information utilized for the P4.

Field . . . . TYP CODE DB attribute . . T_CONV Type . . N 3

RTKTM

Description :

Measurement conversion type code number.

Field . . . . P4 REF DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 12

Description :

Reference of object in the P4.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 188
5.4.1.3. Acquisition of P320 Local Processing

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :ACQ TSX P320: :AUT:U023 CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : ROW RACK : REP P4 :
: LABEL : INFO SUP : P4 VAL REF :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: 3SRMADRCMP F A : 0400 01 : 3SRMADRCMP :
: REL.CDE MAIN GENE.COMBUS. : CED_400 : 3SRMADRCMP V :
: : : :
: 3SRMADRCMF F A : 0401 : 3SRMADRCMF :
: REL.CDE MAIN GENE.COMBUS. /ETAT : CED_401 : 3SRMADRCMF V :
: : : :
: 3SRMADRCME F A : 0402 : 3SRMADRCME :
: REL.CDE MAIN GENE.COMBUS. /CDE : CED_402 : 3SRMADRCME V :
: : : :
: 3CHRGCRPCP F A : 0403 : 3CHRGCRPCP :
: CONS.REPARTITION COMBUSTI. : CED_403 : 3CHRGCRPCP V :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................
Fig. 89 : Screen 4.1.3

Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . Type . . C 4

Description :

Rank of the equation result transmissible to the CENTRALOG. (0 to 1023).

Field . . . . RACK DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Rack address

Field . . . . P4 REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 12

Description :

Reference of the object in P4.

Field . . . . SUP INFO DB attribute . . Type . . C 16

Description :

CED_E (n)

Field . . . . P4 VAL REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 12

Description :

Reference of the validator in P4.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 189
5.4.1.4. Acquisition of P320 VRX

This screen is used to define local VRE processing acquired by P320.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : ACQ. VRX P320 : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : OU REF : ROW EDIT P4_REF :
: LABEL : RACK : SUP INFO P4_V_REF :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: VREX502–00 T : TRX_255 : 000 1 :
: AUT5 EQ2 VREX RG 00 : 02 : :
: : : :
: STATE MESSAGES : : STATE MESSAGES :
: 0 : 1 : :
: 2 : 3 : :
: 4 : 5 : :
: 6 : 7 : :
: 8 : 9 : :
: 10 : 11 : :
: 12 : 13 : :
: 14 : 15 : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................
Fig. 90 : Screen 4.1.5

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . . REP_ID Type . . . . . C 8

Description :

ID tag of the Operative Unit in the CENTRALOG.

Field . . . . RACK DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . N 2

Description :

Rack address

Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . . VRE_NUM Type . . . . . C 3

Description :

Rank of the multi–state variable

Field . . . . SUP INFO DB attribute . . . INFOSUP Type . . . . . C 16

Description :

VRE (RANK)

Field . . . . EDIT DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 1

Description :

Printout in log: ’0’ not printed out, ’1’ printed out

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 190
 Field . . . . P4 V REF DB attribute REP_P4_VType . C 12

Description :

Mode of validator in P4

Field . . . . P4 REF DB attribute REP_P4_V Type . . . . C

12

Description :

Reference in P4

Field . . . . STATE MESSAGES (i) DB attribute Type . N 2

Description :

State message (i) (0 thru 15) associated to the VRE.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 191
5.4.1.5. Acquisition of P320 DI103 TSE Variables

This screen is used to define the variables associated to the DI103 digital electrical
protection connection box.

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: CENTRALOG : P320 (DI103) TSE ACQ : : CTR255 : CENT3 :
: : : : : :
:––––––––––––:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:–––––––––:––––––––:–––––––––––:
:VAR REF FLG IND :DI 103 PROT CE : : :
:LABEL : CT ADRESS : CENT : CT REF :
: : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:––––––––––––––––––:––––––––:–––––––––––:
: : : : :
:DI100MDD0E0 T : 100 01 000 : E : :
:TS DI103 EQ 100 MOD 0 INPUT 0 : : : :
: : : : :
:DI100MOD0E255 : : : :
:TS DI103 EQ 100 MOD 0 INPUT 255 : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
..................................................................................

Fig. 91 : Screen 4.1.5

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute Type . . . . . C 20

Description :

Variable reference.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . C 32

Description :

Variable label

Field . . . . DI103 DB attribute Type . . . . . N 3

Description :

Rack address

Field . . . . PROT DB attribute Type . . . . . N 2

Description :

Protection number

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 192
 Field . . . . CE DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 3

Description :

CE number

Field . . . . CENT DB attribute . . . ....... C 1

Description :

’E’ if the variable is transmitted to CENTRALOG

Field . . . . CT REF DB attribute . . . . . . . . . . C 12

Description :

Configuration tool reference

Field . . . . CT address DB attribute Type . . . . C 16

Description :

Configuration tool address

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 193
5.4.1.6. Acquisition of P320 TS Equation Results

Select the relevant automation cell.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : ACQ. RESULTS P320 TS EQUATION : :AUT:U043 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : ROW : P4 REF :
: LABEL : SUP INFO : P4 VAL REF :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: 3SRMADRCMP F A : 0400 : 3SRMADRCMP :
: REL.CDE MAIN GENE.COMBUS. : CED_400 : 3SRMADRCMP V :
: : : :
: 3SRMADRCMF F A : 0401 : 3SRMADRCMF :
: REL.CDE MAIN GENE.COMBUS. /ETAT : CED_401 : 3SRMADRCMF V :
: : : :
: 3SRMADRCME F A : 0402 : 3SRMADRCME :
: REL.CDE MAIN GENE.COMBUS. /CDE : CED_402 : 3SRMADRCME V :
: : : :
: 3CHRGCRPCP F A : 0403 : 3CHRGCRPCP :
: CONS.REPARTITION COMBUSTI. : CED_403 : 3CHRGCRPCP V :
: : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 92 : Screen 4.1.3

Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 4

Description :

Rank of the equation result transmissible to the CENTRALOG system (0 to 1 023).

Field . . . . REF P4 DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 12

Description :

Reference of the object in the P4.

Field . . . . SUP INFO DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 16

Description :

CED_E (n)

Field . . . . P4 VAL REF DB attribute . . . . . . Type . . C 12

Description :

Reference of P4 validator.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 194
5.4.1.7. Acquisition of P320 TM Equation Results

Select the relevant automation cell.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

......................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : ACQ P320 TM EQUATION RESULTS : :AUT:U023 CENT 5 :
:....................................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : ROW : ACQ RAT: P4 REF :
: LABEL :SUP INFO TYPE TEMP : CODE TYP : P4 VAL REF :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––+––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: 3SRMADRCMC F A : 400 S 1 : 5 : 3SRMADRCMC :
: REL.CDE MAIN GENE.COMBUS. /CDE :TMR(400) : 2 : 3SRMADRCMC V :
: : : : :
: 3SRMADRCMX F A : 401 S 0 : 5 : 3SRMADRCMX :
: REL.CDE MAIN GENE.COMBUS. /AUX :TMR(401) : 2 : 3SRMADRCMX V :
: : : : :
: 3CHRGCRPCU F A : 402 S 0 : 5 : 3CHRGCRPCU :
: CONS.REPARTITION COMBUSTI./C.UT :TMR(402) : 2 : 3CHRGCRPCU V :
: : : : :
: 3CHRGCRPCB F A : 403 S 0 : 5 : 3CHRGCRPCB :
: CONS.REPARTITION COMBUSTI./MES :TMR(403) : 2 : 3CHRGCRPCB V :
: : : : :
:....................................................................................:
: CREATION VAR REF MUST BE INPUT TO CREATE A RECORD :
: :
: <F1> END <CTRL–END> HELP <ESC> ABORT :
......................................................................................

Fig. 93 : Screen 4.1.4

Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . ADR_V Type . . C 4

Description :

Rank of the equation result transmissible to the CENTRALOG system (0 to 511).

Field . . . . ACQ RAT DB attribute . . AM_VAL Type . . C 2

Description :

Value of the measurement acquisition rate of the automation cell (see menu 2).

Field . . . . P4 REF DB attribute . . . . . . Type . . . C 12

Description :

Reference of the object in the P4.

Field . . . . SUP INFO DB attribute . . Type . . C 16

Description :

INFO_SUP= TMR(<n>) (where <n> = 0:511)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 195
 Field . . . . TYPE DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

”S” if the TM is a single integer, ”D” if a double integer, ”F” if real.

Field . . . . TEMP DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

”0” if measurement received on16 signed bits

”1” if measurement received on16 unsigned bits.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 196
 Field . . . . TYP CODE DB attribute . . T_CONV Type . . N 3
RTKTM

Description :

Measurement conversion type code number.

Field . . . . P4 VAL REF DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . C 12

Description :

Reference of P4 validator.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 197
5.4.1.8. Declaration of VREs

This screen is used to define the list of multi–state variables (VRE).

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE VRE : :AUT:U043 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : OU REF : ROW P4 REF :
: LABEL : : SUP INFO P4 REF V :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: 01VRE1_000 T : 01VRE : 000 :
: 01 CEX VRE 001 : 0 : VRE (0) :
: : : :
: 01VRE1_063 T : 01VRE : 063 :
: VRE NUMERO 63 AUT1 : 0 : VRE (63) :
: : : :
: 01VRE_64 T : 01VRE : 064 :
: VRE NUMERO 64 AUT 1 : 0 : VRE (64) :
: : : :
: 01VRE_65 T : 01VRE : 065 :
: VRE NUMERO 65 AUT 1 : 0 : VRE (65) :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 94 : Screen 4.1.5

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . . REF_ID Type . . . . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the Operative Unit in the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . . VRE_NUM Type . . . . . C 3

Description :

Rank of the multi–state variable.

Field . . . . SUP INFO DB attribute . . . INFOSUP Type . . . . . C 16

Description :

VRE (RANK)

Field . . . . MODE REP DB attribute . . . MODE_REF Type C 1

Description :

Mode of representation : 0 for decimal, 1 for hexadecimal (not utilized)

Field . . . . P4 VAL REF DB attribute . . . REF_P4_V Type . . . C 12

Description :

Reference of P4 validator

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 198
 Field . . . . REF P4 DB attribute . . . REF_P4 Type . . . . C 12

Description :

Reference in the P4

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 199
5.4.1.9. Declaration of Sequence Step Criteria

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARATION OF CRI REF : :AUT:U043 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
:VAR REF : LABEL :CODE : OU REF :FLG :
:ASSOC VAR : LABEL :ASSO : :IND :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : :
: 00LJP0330JA1_C : UNIT 1 MAIN TRANSFO C–B : 8 : 00LJP : T :
: 00LP0330JA1 : UNIT 1 MAIN TRANSFO C–B : 8 : : :
: : : : : :
: 00LJP03US001_C : MAIN TRANSFO LINE C–B SF6 PRESS : 63 : 00LJP : T :
: 00LJP03US001 : MAIN TRANSFO LINE C–B SF6 PRESS : 63 : : :
: : : : : :
: 00LJP03US002_C : MAIN TRANSFO LINE C–B OIL PRESS : 63 : 00LJP : T :
: 00LJP03US002 : MAIN TRANSFO LINE C–B OIL PRESS : 63 : : :
: : : : : :
: 00LJP03US003_C : MAIN TRANSFO TWO LINE DISTG SWCH: 7 : 00LJP : T :
: 00LJP03US003 : MAIN TRANSFO TWO LINE DISTG SWCH: 7 : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 95 : Screen 4.1.6

Field . . . . CODE DB attribute . . . MSG_NUMType . . . . . N 3

Description :

Code number of state messages to be associated to the criterion.

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . . GRF_ID Type . . . . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the Operative Unit in the CENTRALOG.

Field . . . . ASSOC VAR DB attribute . . . REF_VAR Type . . . . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated variable.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB_VAR Type . . . . . C 32

Description :

Label of the associated variable.

Field . . . . ASSO DB attribute . . . MSG_VAR Type . . . . . N 3

Description :

Associated variable message code.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 200
5.4.1.10. P320 System Fault TS Acquisition

Select the relevant automation cell.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : ACQ. P320 SYSTEM DEFAULT TS : :AUT:U013 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF : LABEL : REL NUM :FLG:IND :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 03KCZ013VER : CONSISTENCY CIS–DB CELL U013 : 0 : F : :
: : : : : :
: 03KCZ013RE : REDUNDANCY FAULT CELL U013 : 1 : F : :
: : : : : :
: 03KCZ013SEC : SECONDARY FAULT CELL U013 : 2 : F : :
: : : : : :
: 03KCZ013IE : OPERATION ON CELL U013 : 3 : F : :
: : : : : :
: 03KCZ013T : TEMPERATURE FAULT U013 : 4 : F : :
: : : : : :
: 03KCZ013VN : AUDITION CELL U013 NORMAL LINK : 5 : F : :
: : : : : :
: 03KCZ013VS : AUDITION CELL U013 BACKUP LINK : 6 : F : :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 96 : Screen 4.1.7

All these TSEs are created automatically by the system and are identified by a
reference in the form yyyyxxx <suffix>
(yyyy = prefix of OU containing grouped faults
xxx = automation cell system n

These faults are transmitted to the CENTRALOG system in TSE form.

P320 Fault TSE

The following table is used to identify the different automation cell fault TSEs.

The existence of these TSEs is never determined by the CENTRALOG configuration

but by the cell configuration.

A cross in the relevant column indicates that the TSE still exists.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 201
 All
Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG CENTRALOG

VER 0 COHERENCE BD CIS CELLULE XXXXXX NORMAL DEFAUT 1 X

CONSISTENCY CIS DB-DB CIS-CELL XXXXXX

RE 1 DEFAUT DE REDONDANCE CELLULE XXXXXX ABSNCE PRSNCE 1 CED

REDUNDANCY FAULT CELL XXXXXX ABSNCE PRSNCE

SEC 2 DEFAUT SECONDAIRE CELLULE XXXXXX ABSNCE PRSNCE 1 X

SECONDARY FAULT CELL XXXXXX ABSNCE PRSNCE

IE 3 INTERVENTION SUR CELLULE XXXXXX NON OUI 1 X

CELL INTERVENTION XXXXXX NO YES

T 4 TEMPERATURE CELLULE XXXXXX NORMAL TRP-HAUT 1 X

TEMPERATURE CELL XXXXXX NORMAL TOO-HIGH

VN 5 AUDITION CELLULE XXXXXX VOIE N NORMAL DEFAUT 1 X

AUDITION CELL XXXXXX NORMAL LINK NORMAL FAULT

VS 6 AUDITION CELLULE XXXXXX VOIE S NORMAL DEFAUT 1 X

AUDITION CELL XXXXXX BACKUP LINK NORMAL FAULT

EQ (0) 16 DEFAUT EQUIPEMENT YY CELLULE XXXXXX ABSNCE PRSNCE 1 EQYY

EQUIPEMENT YY FAULT XXXXXX ABSNCE PRSNCE

REQ (1) 17 DEFAUT REDONDANCE UT EQ YY CELLULE XXXXXX ABSNCE PRSNCE 1 EQ YY

PU REDUNDANCY FLT EQPT YY XXXXXX ABSNCE PRSNCE Redundant

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 202

 All
Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG CENTRALOG

SEQ (2) 18 DEFAUT SECONDAIRE UT EQ YY CELLULE XXXXXX ABSCE PRNCE 1 CE20 / CE80
PU SECONDARY FLT EQPT YY XXXXXX ABSCE PRNCE

FLT (3) 19 DEFAUT CELLULE AUTOMATISME EQ YY CELLULE XXXXXX ABSCE PRNCE 1 AU80
CONTROLLER FAULT EQPT YY XXXXXX ABSCE PRNCE

FOR (4) 20 PRESENCE FORCAGE E/S EQ YY CELLULE XXXXXX NON OUI 1 CE20
I/O FORCING EQPT YY XXXXXX NO YES

MEQ (5) 21 DEFAUT MODULE EQ YY CELLULE XXX ABSCE PRNCE 1 CE20 / CE80
MODULE FAULT EQPT YY XXXXXX ABSCE PRNCE

The formula for calculating the absolute number of TSEs with relative numbers 0 thru 5, as a function of device YY is as follows:
Absolute number = 4 112 + (YY -2)* 16 + relative number
Device numbers range from 2 to17. Valid numbers are:
2, 4, 6, 8 for CE2000 and CE8035 devices (CE20, CE80)
10 thru17 for 8035 automation cells (AU80)
XXXXXX represents the ID of the cell

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 203

 Champ . . REL NUM DB Attribute . . Type . . C 3

Description :

Relative number of the fault TS.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 204
 Origin of grouped faults

Nature ”A” designates an alarm in the controller.

Nature ”E” designates a state in the controller.

D VER : Inconsistency of CIS–P4/cell database versions

(see EDTS FB )

D RE : Cell redundancy malfunction

Identifier VAL_NS

D 1 : Presence of at least one of the malfunctions listed below

D 0 : Presence of none of the malfunctions listed below

Z BIT NATURE FUNCTION

Z 0091 A Different applications programs

Z0092 A R link fault
Z0093 E Controllers of different versions
Z00C5 A Watch-dog malfunction on other PU

D SEC : Secondary cell malfunction

Identifier Z0000

D IE : Intervention on controller

D 1 : Presence of at least one of the malfunctions listed below

D 0 : Presence of none of the malfunctions listed below

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 205
 Z BIT NATURE FUNCTION

Z0050 E Intervention key

Z0054 E Forcing in operation
Z0057 E Stop on break point
Z00D5 E Remote connection in progress with password

D T : Temperature fault, master on stand–by

D 1 : Bit Z0011 at 1

D 0 : Bit Z0011 at 0

D VN : Audition fault on normal channel

State of bit b–def–x (44)

where x is the number of the channel on which the SYCOWAY is
connected with the CNS.
Concerns the master controller.

D VS : Audition fault on back–up channel

State of bit b–def–x (46)

where x is the number of the channel on which the SYCOWAY is
connected with the CNS.
Concerns the master controller.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 206
 Faults grouped by hardware

D EQ : Hardware malfunction or operating mode malfunction

This alarm is set to1 by the C370 controller when the operating mode state of a
peripheral does not correspond to the state of the cell during permanent
running.

The ”fault” state is generated in the following manner:

D 1 : Presence of at least one of the malfunctions listed below

D 0 : Presence of none of the malfunctions listed below

Z BIT NATURE FUNCTION

STATE OF REMOTE EQUIPMENT

Z0 E02 A CE2000 no 2 operating mode fault

Z0E04 A CE2000 no 4 operating mode fault
Z0E06 A CE2000 no 6 operating mode fault
Z0e10 A CE2000 no 8 operating mode fault

D REQ (or G): PU hardware redundancy fault or

See Appendix 1 DOMAINE USER’S MANUAL.

D SEQ (or S ) : Secondary PU hardware fault or secondary NPU or

BPU fault

This fault is set to 1 if:

– Communication malfunction on NPU (Z0320) or BPU (Z0321) LOCAFIP
– Backup battery malfunction in NPU ( Z0332 ) or BPU ( Z0333 )
– 12V malfunction (Z0334)
– Power supply redundancy malfunction (Z0335)
D FOR (or F) : Presence I/O hardware forcing

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 207
 D MEQ (or M ) : Module malfunction

This fault is set to 1 if:

– Module hardware malfunction
– Configuration error:
. module absent
. type of module different from that supplied on the P4 terminal
. module placed in a non–configured location.
– User error
. process power supply error
. open line and/or short circuit on MCL
. sensor or actuator error, including chattering input
. redundant MCA or station link error
– Error in parameter supplied by the P4 terminal.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 208
5.4.2. Declaration of TSS

All standard TSS variables are created automatically.

It is possible to modify the associated label but never the REL NUM field.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE TSS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : TYPE : FB NAME :REL NUM:FAULT : :SIM:
: LABEL : : : ADR : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : : : :
: 03KITSSV1 T : 1 : SV : 0 : 0 : : :
: INTERFACE STATION 1 : : : 1 : : : :
: : : : : : : :
: 03KITSSV2 F : 1 : SV : 1 : 0 : : :
: INTERFACE STATION 2 : : : 2 : : : :
: : : : : : : :
: 03KITDSV1 F : 1 : SV : 2 : 0 : : :
: INTERFACE STATION 1 START UP : : : 3 : : : :
: : : : : : : :
: 03KITDSV2 F : 1 : SV : 3 : 0 : : :
: INTERFACE STATION 2 START UP : : : 4 : : : :
: : : : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 97 : Screen 4.2

The following table identifies the different TSS variables present for each type of
CENTRALOG.

A cross in the relevant column indicates that the TSS still exists.

Field . . . . TYPE DB Attribute Type . . . . . C 1

Description :

Type of TSS : ’1’ = Kernel , ’2’ = Application , ’3’ = Project

Field . . . . FB NAME DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Name of the functional block.

Field . . . . REL NUM DB attribute . . Type . . C 3

Description :

Relative number of the system logic variable (TSS).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 209
 Field . . . . FAULT DB attribute . . CL_DEF Type . . C 2

Description :

Type of fault associated to the system logic variable (TSS (0 to 99).

Field . . . . ADR DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Absolute address of the TSS.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 210
5.4.3. Declaration of TMC

This item defines the list of analog link metering variables (TMC).

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: : : : : :
: : DECLARE TMC : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: VAR REF FLG IND : COUNTER : PARA : AQRATE : TYP :
: LABEL : : : : CODE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 01GEVJQ1001 : : : : :
: F 1 : C001 : 1 : 60 : 127 :
: GENERATOR OU TPUT ACTIVE ENERGY : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: <F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

Field . . . . COUNTER DB attribute . . Type . . C 12

Description :

Name of the acquisition counter.

Field . . . . PARA DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Parameter number

Field . . . . AQRATE DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Value of the measurement acquisition rate of the controller.

Field . . . . TYP CODE DB attribute . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Measurement variable sensor type code number.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 211
5.4.4. TSS Ranges

This item is used to describe the ranges of TSS variables

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: : : : : :
: : TSS RANGES : : : CENT 3 :
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: FB NAME: NUM : TSS TYPE 1 FIRST : TSS TYPE 2 FIRST : TSS TYPE 3 FIRST:
: : : : : :
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: SV : 0 : 1 24 : 257 41 : 359 0 :
: CA1 : 1 : 25 12 : 298 58 : 359 0 :
: POP1 : 5 : 73 10 : 356 0 : 359 0 :
: POP2 : 6 : 83 10 : 356 0 : 359 0 :
: POP3 : 7 : 93 10 : 356 0 : 359 0 :
: GTW1 : 21 : 233 12 : 356 3 : 359 0 :
: : : : : :
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: <PGUP> PREVIUOS PAGE :
: <ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

Field . . . . FB NAME DB attribute . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Functional Block name

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Order number in the list.

Field . . . . TSS TYPE 1 DB attribute . . Type . . N 3

Description :

First Kernel TSS

Field . . . . FIRST DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

First TYPE 1 TSS

Field . . . . TSS TYPE 2 DB attribute . . Type . . N 3

Description :

First application TSS

Field . . . . FIRST DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

First TYPE 2 TSS

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 212
 Field . . . . TSS TYPE 3 DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

First project TSS

Field . . . . FIRST DB attribute . . Type . . N 5

Description :

First TYPE 3 TSS

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 213
 The following list shows the value of each of the key–words which appear in the
columns.

D CDD : redundant CDS

D CDC : 2 ETHERNET couplers on the CDS / CIS

D SEP : The CDS and CNS are not on the same physical block
(non–CIS)

D CND : redundant CNS

D CNC : 2 ETHERNET couplers on the CNS

D CV1 : 1 MMI application on single CVS

D CV2 : 2 MMI applications on single CVS

D CV3 : 3 MMI applications on single CVS

D CV4 : 4 MMI applications on single CVS

D CVD : MMI application(s) on single CVS

D CVC : 2 ETHERNET couplers on the CVS (C50 V3)

D GTW : Presence of a GATEWAY (DB: OPT_GTW)

D GTW I : Presence of an isolated GATEWAY

D CVG : 2 ETHERNET couplers on the GATEWAY station (C50 V3)

D NBI : Value of DB printer number attribute (DB: NB_IMP)

D JBD : Value of DB event log attribute (DB: OPT_JDB)

D AFF : Specific to project

D CPT : Values of DB counter link number attribute (DB: NB_CPT)

D HDSR : Presence of HDSR (DB: OPT_HDSR)

D ICNX : Value of DB printer connection mode attribute

(BD: MOD_CNX)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 214
Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

SSV1 0 STATION INTERFACE 1 ESCLAVE MAITRE 0 0 x x

INTERFACE STATION 1 SLAVE MASTER

SSV2 1 STATION INTERFACE 2 ESCLAVE MAITRE 0 0 CDD CDD

INTERFACE STATION 2 SLAVE MASTER

DSV1 2 DEMARRAGE STATION INTERFACE 1 EN-COURS FIN 0 0 x x

INTERFACE STATION 1 START UP IN-PR END

DSV2 3 DEMARRAGE STATION INTERFACE 2 EN-SERV HS-SERV 0 0 CDD CDD

NTERFACE STATION 2 START UP IN-SERV OUT-S

DEFT 4 RESEAU ETHERNET CDS EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 x x

ETHERNET NETWORK CDS N-SERV OUT-S

B1S1 5 ETHERNET 1 STATION CIS 1 EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 x x

ETHERNET 1 CIS STATION 1 N-SERV OUT-S

B1S2 6 ETHERNET 1 STATION CIS 2 EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 CDD CDD

ETHERNET 1 CIS STATION 2 N-SERV OUT-S

B2S1 7 ETHERNET 2 STATION CIS 1 EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 CDC

ETHERNET 2 CIS STATION 1 N-SERV OUT-S

B2S2 8 ETHERNET 2 STATION CIS 2 EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 CDD&CDC

ETHERNET 2 CIS STATION 2 N-SERV OUT-S

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 215

Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

DLSV 9 DUAL-LINK STATION INTERFACE EN-SERV HS-SERV 2 1 CDD CDD

DUAL-LINK INTERFACE STATION IN-SERV OUT-S

SDLS 10 SURV DUAL-LINK STATION INTERFACE EN-SERV HS-SERV 3 1 CDD CDD

DUAL-LINK MONI. INTERFACE STATION IN-SERV OUT-S

D1SV 11 DISQUE 1 STATION INTEFACE 1 EN-SERV HS-SERV 4 1 x x

DISK 1 INTERFACE STATION 1 IN-SERV OUT-S

D2SV 12 DISQUE 2 STATION INTEFACE 2 EN-SERV HS-SERV 4 1 CDD CDD

DISK 2 INTERFACE STATION 2 IN-SERV OUT-S

ECCC 13 FONCTION CCC NORMAL DEFAUT 5 1 x x

CCC FUNCTION NORMAL FAULT

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 216

Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

SCN1 0 CNS N STATION 1 ESCLAVE MAITRE 0 0 SEP

CNS N STATION 1 SLAVE MASTER

SCN2 1 CNS N STATION 2 ESCLAVE MAITRE 0 0 SEP & CND

CNS N STATION 2 SLAVE MASTER

DCN1 2 DEMARRAGE CNS N STATION 1 EN-COURS FIN 0 0 SEP

CNS N STATION 1 START UP IN-PR END

DCN2 3 DEMARRAGE CNS N STATION 2 EN-COURS FIN 0 0 SEP & CND

CNS N STATION 2 START UP IN-PR END

DGCN 4 DIALOGUE RESEAU ETHERNET CNS N EN-SERV HS-SERV 0 1 SEP

ETHERNET NETWORK DIALOG CNS N IN-SERV OUT-S

B1C1 5 ETHERNET 1 CNS N STATION 1 EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 SEP

ETHERNET 1 CNS N STATION 1 IN-SERV OUT-S

B1C2 6 ETHERNET 1 CNS N STATION 2 EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 SEP & CND

ETHERNET 1 CNS STATION 2 IN-SERV OUT-S

B2C1 7 ETHERNET 2 CNS N STATION 1 EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 SEP & CNC

ETHERNET 2 CNS N STATION 1 IN-SERV OUT-S

B2C2 8 ETHERNET 2 CNS N STATION 2 EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 SEP&CND&CNC

ETHERNET 2 CNS N STATION 2 IN-SERV OUT-S

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 217

Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

DLCN 9 DUAL-LINK CNS N EN-SERV HS-SERV 2 1 SEP & CND

DUAL-LINK CNS N IN-SERV OUT-S

SDLC 10 SURVEILLANCE DUAL-LINK CNS N EN-SERV HS-SERV 3 1 SEP & CND

DUAL-LINK CNS N MONITORING IN-SERV OUT-S

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 218

Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

EPOP 0 STATION OPERATEUR N EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 X X

OPERATOIR STATION N IN-SER OUT-S

CBD1 5 APPLICATION ECRAN 1 STATION N EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 CV1

APPLICATION SCREEN 1 STATION N IN-SER OUT-S

CBD2 6 APPLICATION ECRAN 2 STATION N EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 CV2

APPLICATION SCREEN 2 STATION N IN-SER OUT-S

CBD3 7 APPLICATION ECRAN 3 STATION N EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 CV3

APPLICATION SCREEN 3 STATION N IN-SER OUT-S

CBD4 8 APPLICATION ECRAN 4 STATION N EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 CV4

APPLICATION SCREEN 4 STATION N IN-SER OUT-S

DSPO 2 DEMARRAGE STATION OPERATEUR N EN-COURS FIN 0 0 X X

OPERATOR STATION N START UP IN-PR END

DGPO 4 DIAL RESEAU ETHERNET STN OPERATEUR N EN-SERV HS-SERV 0 1 X X

ETHERNET NETWORK DIAL OPERATOR STN N IN-SER OUT-S

B1PO 5 BUS 1 STATION OPERATEUR N EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 X X

BUS 1 OPERATOR STATION N IN-SER OUT-S

B2PO 7 BUS 2 STATION OPERATEUR N EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 CVC

BUS 2 OPERATOR STATION N IN-SER OUT-S

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 219

Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

GWST 0 STATION GATEWAY EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 GTWI GTWI

GATEWAY STATION IN-SERV OUT-S

B1GW 5 APPLICATION STATION GATEWAY EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 GTWI

GATEWAY APPLICATION STATION IN-SERV OUT-S

GTWD 2 DEMARRAGE STATION GATEWAY EN-COURS FIN 0 0 GTWI

GATEWAY STATION START UP IN-PR END

GWDR 4 DIAL RESEAU EHTERNET GATEWAY EN-SERV HS-SERV 0 1 GTWI

DIAL ETHERNET NETWORK GATEWAY IN-SERV OUT-S

B1GW 5 BUS 1 STATION GATEWAY EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 GTWI

BUS 1 GATEWAY STATION IN-SERV OUT-S

B2GW 7 BUS 2 STATION GATEWAY EN-SERV HS-SERV 1 1 GVG

BUS 2 GATEWAY STATION IN-SERV OUT-S

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 220

Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

PRN1 0 IMPRIMANTE 1 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 X X X

PRINTER 1 NORMAL FAULT

PRN2 1 IMPRIMANTE 2 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 NBI=2 NBI=2 NBI=2

PRINTER 2 NORMAL FAULT

PRN3 2 IMPRIMANTE 3 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 NBI=3

PRINTER 3 NORMAL FAULT

PRN4 3 IMPRIMANTE 4 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 NBI=4

PRINTER 4 NORMAL FAULT

PRN5 4 IMPRIMANTE 5 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 NBI=5

PRINTER 5 NORMAL FAULT

PRN6 5 IMPRIMANTE 6 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 NBI=6

PRINTER 6 NORMAL FAULT

PRN7 6 IMPRIMANTE 7 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 NBI=7

PRINTER 7 NORMAL FAULT

PRN8 7 IMPRIMANTE 8 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 NBI=8

PRINTER 8 NORMAL FAULT

JDBD 8 FONCTION JOURNAL DE BORD DISPO PERTE 11 0 JDB<>0 JDB<>0 JDB<>0

EVENT LOG FUNCTION AVAIL LOSS

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 221

Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

JPRN 9 FONCTION RAPPORTS DISPO PERTE 11 0 X

REPORTS FUNCTION AVAIL LOSS

JUTI 10 FONCTION JOURNAUX N°3 DISPO PERTE 11 0 AFF

LOG FUNCTION 3 AVAIL LOSS

JNL4 11 FONCTION JOURNAUX N°4 DISPO PERTE 11 0 AFF

LOG FUNCTION 4 AVAIL LOSS

JNL5 12 FONCTION JOURNAUX N°5 DISPO PERTE 11 0 AFF

LOG FUNCTION 5 AVAIL LOSS

JNL6 13 FONCTION JOURNAUX N°6 DISPO PERTE 11 0 AFF

LOG FUNCTION 6 AVAIL LOSS

JNL7 14 FONCTION JOURNAUX N°7 DISPO PERTE 11 0 AFF

LOG FUNCTION 7 AVAIL LOSS

JNL8 15 FONCTION JOURNAUX N°8 DISPO PERTE 11 0 AFF

LOG FUNCTION 8 AVAIL LOSS

FPRN 16 FONCTION GENERALE D'IMPRESSION DISPO PERTE 11 0 X X X

GENERAL PRINTOUT FUNCTION AVAIL LOSS

CPT1 22 LIAISON COMPTEURS 1 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 CPT=1 CPT=1

COUNTER LINK 1 NORMAL FAULT

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 222

Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

CPT2 23 LIAISON COMPTEURS 2 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 CPT=2

COUNTER LINK 2 NORMAL FAULT

CPT3 24 LIAISON COMPTEURS 3 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 CPT=3

COUNTER LINK 3 NORMAL FAULT

CPT4 25 LIAISON COMPTEURS 4 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 CPT=4

COUNTER LINK 4 NORMAL FAULT

CPT5 26 LIAISON COMPTEURS 5 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 CPT=6

COUNTER LINK 5 NORMAL FAULT

CPT6 27 LIAISON COMPTEURS 6 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 CPT=6

COUNTER LINK 6 NORMAL FAULT

CPT7 28 LIAISON COMPTEURS 7 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 CPT=7

COUNTER LINK 7 NORMAL FAULT

CPT8 29 LIAISON COMPTEURS 8 NORMAL DEFAUT 10 1 CPT=8

COUNTER LINK 8 NORMAL FAULT

SYEX 30 HORLOGE EXTERNE NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 X X X

EXTERNAL CLOCK NORMAL FAULT

RCKN 33 RACK DE COMMUTATION NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 X

SWITCHING RACK NORMAL FAULT

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 223

Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

LIEN 34 PERTE DE DE LIEN HDSR NON OUI 0 1 HDSR=1 HDSR=1 HDSR=1

LOSS OF HDSR LINK NO YES

ARCH 35 ARCHIVAGE HDSR A EFFECTUER NON OUI 0 1 HDSR=1 HDSR=1 HDSR=1

HDSR STORAGE TO BE DONE NO YES

ECHA 36 PERTE D'ECHANTILLON HDSR NON OUI 0 1 HDSR=1 HDSR=1 HDSR=1

LOSS OF HDSR SAMPLE NO YES

EVNM 37 PERTE EVT CONSIGNABLE HDSR NON OUI 0 1 HDSR=1 HDSR=1 HDSR=1
LOSS OF HDSR ARCHIVABLE EVT NO YES

MSNV 38 NOUVELLE VERSION MSNV NON OUI 0 0 CDD CDD

NEW VERSION MSNV NO YES

SYNC 39 SYNCHRONISATION F900 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 X X X

F900 SYNCHRONIZATION NORMAL FAULT

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 224

Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

CP11 10 COUPLEUR 1 F900 STATION 1 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 X X X

F900 COUPLER 1 STATION 1 NORMAL FAULT

CP12 11 COUPLEUR 1 F900 STATION 2 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 CND CND

F900 COUPLER 1 STATION 2 NORMAL FAULT

CP21 12 COUPLEUR 2 F900 STATION 1 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 CNF

F900 COUPLER 2 STATION 1 NORMAL FAULT

CP22 13 COUPLEUR 2 F900 STATION 2 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 CND&CNF

F900 COUPLER 2 STATION 2 NORMAL FAULT

DAUT 20 DIALOGUE CELLULE N NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 X X X

DIALOG CELL N NORMAL FAULT

L1AU 21 LIAISON 1 CELLULE N NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 X X X

LINK 1 CELL N NORMAL FAULT

L2AU 21 LIAISON 2 CELLULE N NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 CND CND

LINK 2 CELL N NORMAL FAULT

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 225

Suffix Num Label MSG 0 MSG 1 DEF DEG C10 C30 C50

GWD0 0 APPLICATION 1 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 GTW GTW GTW

APPLICATION 1 NORMAL FAULT

GWD1 1 APPLICATION 2 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 GTW GTW GTW

APPLICATION 2 NORMAL FAULT

GWD2 2 APPLICATION 3 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 GTW GTW GTW

APPLICATION 3 NORMAL FAULT

GW03 3 APPLICATION 4 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 GTW GTW GTW

APPLICATION 4 NORMAL FAULT

GW04 4 APPLICATION 5 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 GTW GTW GTW

APPLICATION 5 NORMAL FAULT

GW05 5 APPLICATION 6 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 GTW GTW GTW

APPLICATION 6 NORMAL FAULT

GW06 6 APPLICATION 7 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 GTW GTW GTW

APPLICATION 7 NORMAL FAULT

GW07 7 APPLICATION 8 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 GTW GTW GTW

APPLICATION 8 NORMAL FAULT

GW08 8 APPLICATION 9 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 GTW GTW GTW

APPLICATION 9 NORMAL FAULT

GW09 9 APPLICATION 10 NORMAL DEFAUT 0 1 GTW GTW GTW

APPLICATION 10 NORMAL FAULT

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 226

 Remarks concerning specific TSS variables

D DSE : Signals that one or both links with the ETHERNET network are
down for the station in question.

D DLKM : Monitoring between two dual stations is by serial link.

Data is transferred by ETHERNET.
This fault indicates a problem with the serial link.

D DCCC : The CIS / CDS can no longer communicate with the CCC

D NiLKM : See DLKM

D NiSE : See DSE

D GSE : See DSE

D IMST : HDSR storage needed

D IMLS : HDSR sample loss

D IMLE : HDSR event loss

D IF9S : F900 synchronization fault

D NiSF : Indicates to the master C370 that the link(s) with the CDP
function(s) of the CIS / CNS station(s) are down.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 227
 Fault Class Numbers (FAULT field)

The fault class number provides additional information used to characterize the type of
certain TSS system malfunction variables in error diagnostics.

The fault class number associated to each TSS thus provides an error diagnostics
code.

TSS variables for which the fault class number is not relevant are placed in class 0.

List of fault classes:

D Class 0 : NO fault class number,

D Class 1 : CONTRONET channel malfunction,

D Class 2 : DUAL LINK malfunction,

D Class 3 : Dual station WD link malfunction,

D Class 4 : Disk malfunction,

D Class 5 : CCC malfunction,

D Class 10 : Asynchronous serial link malfunction:

1 : time out exchange

2 : parity error
3 : overrun error
4 : framing error
5 : other error
6 : off line

D Class 11 : Printer loss:

1 : on malfunction
2 : on operator disassignment

D Class 12 : Pre–storage threshold attained

0 to 100 : value of threshold attained

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 228
 Example of TSS attribution to a system mimic

Configuration of Grouped Cell Faults and TSS Variables

SYEX CPS RCKM ÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ JDBD
PRNi
JPRN
CPTi
ECCC

ÂÂ
CCC LIEN FPRN

HDSR ARCH Li

ÂÂ
JN
CVS CVS ECHA GTW CVS 30
EPOP
EVNM
DSP0
Printer GWST
CBD1
server GTWD
CBD2
B1PO CBD3
DUAL ETHERNET GWDR
DGPO
CBD4 B1GW 1
B2PO B2GW 2
DEFT DGCN
B2S1 MNSV B1S2 B2C1 B1C2
B1S1 SYNC B2S2 B1C1 B2C2

DLSV OU DLC
S SV1 SDLS SSV2 N
CIS CDS SCN1
CNS1 SDL CNS2 SCN
DS V1 1 2
DSV2
DCN1 2
D1SV D2SV CP11 M C V DUAL SYCOWAY F900
CP12 DCN 1
NETWORK A 2 2
L2AU
CP21 CP22
DUAL SYCOWAY F900 1
C370
NETWORK B 2 Master C370 V
M
VN on L1AU
VER VS Master
C370
RE C370
M CE 2 000
SEC V DAUT
IE CE 2 000
T
CE 2 000 EQ CE 2 000
REQ
CE 2 000
SEQ
CE 2 000 FOR
MEQ TSS/RIC/009
CE 8035 FLT 04/12/1995

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 228

5.5. VARIABLE ACQUISITION (EL)

This screen provides access to the declaration of controller variables (acquired TS and
TM variables, result TS and TM variables, malfunction TS variables) and enables their
specific characteristics to be described.

....................................................................................
: : : : : :
: CENTRALOG : : : : :
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: VARIABLE ACQUISITION > :
: :
: 8035 AUTOMATION CELL ACQUISITIONS > :
: DECLARE TSS :
: TSS RANGES :
: :
: :
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: QUIT: <CTRL+Q> VERSION FILES: <CTRL + V> :
: MOVE: <ARROWS> SELECT: <RETURN> ABORT: <ESCAPE> :
: HELP: <CTRL+HOME> :
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

5.5.1. 8035 Automation Cell Acquisitions

This option gives access to a sub–menu handling the acquisition of external variables
and results by a P320 EL controller.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

....................................................................................
: : : : : :
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 5 :
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: ..................................................... :
: : VARIABLE ACQUISITION > : :
: ..................................................... :
: : 8035 AUTOMATION CELL ACQUISITIONS > : :
: ........................................................ :
: : : :
: ........................................................ :
: : 8035 TS ACQUISITIONS : :
: : 8035 TS DEFINITION : :
: : IHR 8035 TS ACQUISITIONS : :
: : IHR 8035 TS DEFINITION : :
: : 8035 TM ACQUISITION : :
: : 8035 TM DEFINITION : :
: : DECLARE 8035 VRE : :
: : 8035 SYSTEM FAULT TS ACQUISITION : :
: :......................................................: :
:................................. ................................................:
: QUIT: <CTRL+Q> VERSION FILES: <CTRL + V> :
: MOVE: <ARROWS> SELECT: <RETURN> ABORT: <ESCAPE> :
: HELP: <CTRL+HOME> :
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 229
5.5.1.1. 8035 TS Acquisition

This item defines the list of telesignals produced by the P320 EL controller in question.

....................................................................................
: : : : : :
: CENTRALOG : ACQ TS 8035 : : : :
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: VAR REF : LABEL : ROW : FLG IND :
:..................................................................................:
: 01TSR001 : TSR ROW 1 CONTROLLER1 : 0001 : T :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: 01TSR007 : TSR ROW 7 CONTROLLER1 : 0007 : T :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..................................................................................:
: <F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
: <ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..................................................................................:

Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 4

Description :

Rank of the equation. The result can be transmitted to the Centralog.

5.5.1.2. 8035 TS Description

This item provides a list of the telesignals produced by the P320 EL controller and
describes all the data concerning each TS.

....................................................................................
: : : : : :
: CENTRALOG : 8035 TS DESCRIPTION : : : :
:..................................................................................:
: REFERENCE OU ROW : T : A : H : ––TS– : :
: LABEL : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: 01TSR001 01TSR 0001 : 0 : E : 0 : 0 0 : :
: TSR ROW 1 CONTROLLER1 NORMAL/FAULT: : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
:..................................................................................:
: :
: :
: :
:..................................................................................:

Field . . . . REFERENCE DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 20

Description :

Variable reference.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 230
 Field LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 32

Description :

Variable label.
Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 4

Description :

Rank of the equation. The result can be transmitted to the Centralog.

Field . . . . OU DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 8

Description :

Id tag of the OU in the Centralog. Cannot be modified by the operator.

Field . . . . T DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 1

Description :

TS input standard number.

Field . . . . A DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 1

Description :

”E” if the variable must be transmitted to BVA (Dataview)

Field . . . . H DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 1

Description :

”0” Non HDSR ; ”1” HDSR

Field . . . . ––TS– DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 2

Description :

Trend group screen column number and position in group.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 231
5.5.1.3. IHR 8035 TS Acquisition

This item defines the list of telesignals produced by the IHR controller in question.

....................................................................................
: : : : : :
: CENTRALOG :IHR 8035 TS ACQ : : : :
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: VAR REF : LABEL : ROW : FLG IND :
:..................................................................................:
: 17IHR001 : IHR ROW 1 CONTROLLER 17 : 0001 : T :
: 17IHR224 : IHR ROW 224 CONTROLLER 17 : 0224 : T :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..................................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..................................................................................:

Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 4

Description :

Rank of the equation. The result can be transmitted to the Centralog.

5.5.1.4. IHR 8035 TS Description

This item provides a list of telesignals produced by the IHR controller and describes all
the data concerning each TS.

....................................................................................
: : : : : :
: CENTRALOG : DESCRIPTION IHR 8035 TS : : : :
:..................................................................................:
: REFERENCE OU ROW : T : A : H : ––TS– : :
: LABEL : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: 01IHR001 01IHR 0001 : 0 : E : – : 0 0 : :
: IHR ROW 1 CONTROLLER17 NORMAL/FAULT: : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
: : : : : : :
:..................................................................................:
: :
: :
: :
:..................................................................................:

Field . . . . REFERENCE DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 20

Description :

Variable reference.

Field LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 32

Description :

Variable label.
Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 4

Description :

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 232
 Rank of the equation. The result can be transmitted to the Centralog.
Field . . . . OU DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 8

Description :

ID tag of the OU in the Centralog. Cannot be modified by the operator.

Field . . . . T DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 1

Description :

TS input standard number.

Field . . . . A DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 1

Description :

”E” if the variable must be transmitted to BVA (Dataview)

Field . . . . H DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 1

Description :

”0” Non HDSR ; ”1” HDSR

Field . . . . ––TS– DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 2

Description :

Trend group screen column number and position in group.

5.5.1.5. 8035 TM Acquisition

This item defines a list of telemeasurements produced by the P320 EL controller in

question.

...................................................................................
: : : : : :
: CENTRALOG : ACQ TM 8035 : : : :
:..................................................................................
: VAR REF : : : : :
: ROW : ROW : ACQ RATE : TYP CODE : FLG IND:
:...................................:.........:.............:...........:.........:
: : : : : :
: 01 TMP001 : 0001 : 1 : 6 : T :
: TMR ROW 1 CONTROLLER 1 : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
:.................................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:.................................................................................:

Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 4

Description :

Rank of the equation. The result can be transmitted to the Centralog.

Field . . . . CODE TYP DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 3

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 233
 Description :

Code number of measurement variable sensor.

Field . . . . ACQ RATE DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 2

Description :

Value of controller measurement acquisition rate.

5.5.1.6. 8035 TM Description

This item provides the list of the telemeasurements produced by the P320 EL
controller and describes all the data concerning each TM.

...................................................................................
: : : : : :
: CENTRALOG : 8035 TM DESCRIPTION : : : :
:..................................................................................
: REFERENCE OU : RT : A : ––VMIN–– :V–LO–THR : ––TS– :HYST :
: LABEL : : H : :LOW––THR : ––DL– : :
: ROW CODE TYP UNIT: : : : :HIGH–THR : –BAR– : :
: : : : ––VMAX–– :V–HI–THR : ––CU– : :
: : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : :
: 01TMR004 01TMR : 1 : E : –10000.0 :–8000.00 : 0 0 : 0 :
: TMR ROW 4 CONTROLLER1 1: : 1 : :–4000.00 : 7 4 : :
: 0004 6 : : : :4000.000 : 0 0 : :
: : : : 10000.00 :8000.000 : 0 0 : :
: : : : : : : :
:.................................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:.................................................................................:

Field . . . . REFERENCE DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 20

Description :

Variable reference.

Field LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 32

Description :

Variable label.
Field . . . . OU DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 8

Description :

ID tag of the OU in the Centralog. Cannot be modified by the operator.

Field . . . . UNIT DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 3

Description :

Code number of the TM measurement unit.

Field . . . . RT DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 2

Description :

Value of controller measurement acquisition rate.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 234
 Field . . . . A DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 1

Description :

”E” if the variable must be transmitted to BVA (Dataview)

Field . . . . H DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 1

Description :

”0” Non HDSR ; ”1” HDSR

Field . . . . VMIN DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 8

Description :

Minimum process value of variable.

Field . . . . VMAX DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 8

Description :

Maximum process value of variable.

Field . . . . TS DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 2

Description :

Trend group screen column number and position in group.

Field . . . . DL DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 2

Description :

Number of daily log group and position in daily log group.

Field . . . . BAR DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 2

Description :

Number of bargraph group and position in bargraph group.

Field . . . . CU DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 2

Description :

Number of curve group and position in curve group.

Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 4

Description :

Rank of the equation. The result can be transmitted to the Centralog.

Field . . . . TYP CODE DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 3

Description :

Code number of measurement variable sensor.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 235
 Field . . . . V–LO–THR DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 8

Description :

Value of LL threshold (very low)

Field . . . . LOW–THR DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 8

Description :

Value of LO threshold (low)

Field . . . . HIGH–THR DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 8

Description :

Value of HI threshold (high)

Field . . . . V–HI–THR DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 8

Description :

Value of HH threshold (very high)

Field . . . . HYST DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 3

Description :

Value of hysteresis coefficient applicable to threshold processing: 0 to 100.

5.5.1.7. Declaration of 8035 VRE Variables

Declaration of 8035 external multi–state variables (VRE)

...................................................................................
: : : : : :
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE 8035 VRE : : : :
:..................................................................................
: VAR REF FLG IND : OU REF : ROW EDIT P4 REF :
: LABEL : : P4 V REF:
:.........................................:........:..............................:
: 01VRE001 : 01 TSR : :
: VRE ROW 1 CELL 1 1 : : 001 1 :
: : : :
: :
: STATE MESSAGES STATE MESSAGES :
: 0 0 1 0 :
: 2 0 3 0 :
: 4 0 5 0 :
: 6 0 7 0 :
: 8 0 9 0 :
:10 0 11 0 :
:12 0 13 0 :
:14 0 15 0 :
: :
:.................................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:.................................................................................:

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 8

Description :

ID tag of the OU in the Centralog. Cannot be modified by the operator.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 236
 Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 3

Description :

Rank of the multi–state variable.

Field . . . . EDIT DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 1

Description :

Log printout: ”0” no printout, ”1” printout.

Field . . . . P4 REF DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 12

Description :

Object reference utilized by P4.

Field . . . . P4 V REF DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 12

Description :

Reference of P4 validator.

Field . . . . STATE MESSAGES (i)DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 3

Description :

State message (i) associated to the VRE (i : 0 à 15)

5.5.1.8. 8035 System Fault TS Acquisition

This screen is used to define the list of system malfunction TS variables on the P320
EL controller.

...................................................................................
: : : : : :
: CENTRALOG : 8035 SYSTEM FAULT TS ACQ : : : :
:..................................................................................
: VAR REF : LABEL : REL NUM : FLG : IND :
: : : : : :
:...............:.....................................:.........:........:........:
:99KCZ001VER :CENTRALOG/CELL001 VERSION : 0 : T : :
: : : : : :
:99KCZ00150 :UNBLOCK FAULT CELL 001 CTRL 0 : 2 : T : :
: : : : : :
:99KCZ001F0 :FORCED VAR CELL 001 CTRL 0 : 3 : T : :
: : : : : :
:99KCZ001M0 :BLOCKING FAULT CELL 001 CTRL 0 : 4 : T : :
: : : : : :
:.................................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:.................................................................................:

Field . . . . REL NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . . . N 3

Description :

Relative number of the system logic variable (TSS)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 237
5.6. COMMANDS
To declare commands, access the menus below :

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : COMMANDS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : DECLARE TMO : :
: : DECLARE TC >: :
: : DECLARE TVC >: :
: : DECLARE BLOCKS >: :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 98 : Screen 5

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 238
5.6.1. Declaration of TMOs

A TMO is an analog type variable which can only be modified by the operator.

TMO variables are in general utilized in TMI calculations for on–line debugging
purposes.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE TMO : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND :INITIAL VAL : :
: LABEL : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: F : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 99 : Screen 5.1

Field . . . . INITIAL VAL DB attribute . . . VM_INIT Type . . . . C 8

Description :

Initialization value of the variable (floating point).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 239
5.6.2. Declaration of TeleCommands

TCs are variables which represent logic commands, transmitted to automation cells or
to the process software in order to modify the state of one or more process actuators.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : COMMANDS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DECLARE TC >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : DECLARE TCI : :
: : DECLARE P320 TCE : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 100 : Screen 5.2

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 240
5.6.2.1. Declaration of TCIs

A TCI (Internal TeleCommand) can only act on a TSP.

The TSP takes the value of the TCI.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE TCI : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF EDIT FLG IND :LEVEL : OU REF : TELESIGN :
: LABEL : CODE : OPUT : AUTH REF DIR :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: 03APAHICB52A 1 F : 0 :03APA : 03APAYSB52A :
: BFWP 1 SCOOP POSITION COMMAND : 7 : MA : :
: : : : :
: 03APAHICB52B 1 F : 0 :03APA : 03APAYSB52B :
: BFWP 2 SCOOP POSITION COMMAND : 7 : MA : :
: : : : :
: 03APAHICB52C 1 F : 0 :03APA : 03APAYSB52C :
: BFWP 3 SCOOP POSITION COMMAND : 7 : MA : :
: : : : :
: 03FEBHICB50A 1 F : 0 :03FEB : 03FEBYSB50A :
: PC BRN B110–130 FEEDR SPEED COMD : 7 : MA : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 101 : Screen 5.2.1

Field . . . . EDIT DB attribute . . ED Type . . C 1

Description :

Log print–out: ’0’ : no ’1’ : yes.

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . GRF_ID Type . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the Operative Unit in the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . TELESIGN DB attribute . . . REP_TS Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the telesignal variable (TSP) associated to telecommand.

Field . . . . CODE DB attribute . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Code number associated to state messages to be mapped to the TC (MSG_0, MSG_1)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 241
 Field . . . . OPUT DB attribute . . TYPE_OPUT Type . . C 2

Description :

’IS’ (Single pulse)

’MA’ (Maintained)

Field . . . . AUTH REF DB attribute . . REP_TSA Type . . C 2

Description :

Reference of the authorization variable.

Field . . . . DIR DB attribute . . DIR_TSA Type . . C 1

Description :

Sense (0 or 1) of the authorization variable

(authorization if TS value= sense).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 242
5.6.2.2. Declaration of TCEs

Select the relevant automation cell.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE P320 TCE : :CTR:U043 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: FLG IND LEVEL 0 :
: VAR REF 03FIAHSNE001 F OU REF 03FIA EDIT 1 :
: LABEL RCT TRANSFO HT1–HT2–HT3 IDV CMD :
: P4 REF FIAHSNE001 :
: P4 2 REF :
: INT MRY 0017 SUP INFO CODE 75 :
: TS=1 TC_L(17) OPUT IS :
: CYCLE LO :
: :
: AUTH REF :
: TELESIGN DIR :
: DIR :
: EXE DEF REF :
: CIP REF :
: DELAY 0 :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 102 : Screen 5.2.2

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . GRF_ID Type . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the Operative Unit in the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . EDIT DB attribute . . ED Type . C 1

Description :

Log print–out: ’0’ : no ’1’ : yes.

Field . . . . P4 REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 12

Description :

Reference of the object in the P4.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 243
 Field . . . . P4 2 REF DB attribute . . . Type . . C 12

Description :

Reference of the second TC in the P4 (dual pulse TC).

Field . . . . INT MRY DB attribute . . . ADR_V0 Type . . . . C 4

Description :

Number of the internal memory (address) in the automation cell assigned to the TC.
For a dual TC, the address concerns the value 0 of the TC.

Field . . . . CODE DB attribute . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Code number associated to the two TC states.

Field . . . . INT MRY (TS=1) DB attribute . . ADR_V1 Type . . C 4

Description :

Number of the internal memory (address) in the automation cell assigned to the TC.
For a dual TC, the address concerns the value 1 of the TC.

Field . . . . SUP INFO DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 16

Description :

Reference of the table concerning the order in the automation cell, composed as
follows :

INFO_SUP = TC_L ( <n> ) where <n> = 0:511

INFO_SUP = TC_R ( <n> ) where <n> = 0:127
INFO_SUP = TC_RL ( <n> ) where <n> = 0:127

Field . . . . OPUT DB attribute . . TYP_OPUT Type . . C 2

Description :

Type of TC : ’ID’ (dual pulse)

’IS’ (single pulse)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 244
 Field . . . . CYCLE : RR DB attribute . . CYCLE Type . . C 2

Description :

Cycle of the receptor automation cell: if,

TC––>’LO’ : logic cycle, ’RL’ slow control cycle, ’RR’ fast control cycle.

Field . . . . DIR (AUTH REF) DB attribute . DIR_TSA Type . . C 1

Description :

Sense (0 or 1) of the authorization TS. Authorization if TS value= sense

Field . . . . AUTH REF DB attribute . . REP_TSA Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the authorization variable.

Field . . . . TELESIGN DB attribute . . REP_TS Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the TS associated to the TCE.

Mandatory if the TCE is dual pulse.

Field . . . . DIR (TELESIGN) DB attribute . DIR_TS Type . . . . C 1

Description :

Sense of TC execution check relative to the associated TS (TELESIGN field) :

=0 associated TS =1 (single pulse TC),

=1 associated TS = 0 (single pulse TC),
=2 associated TS = Value of the TC / dual pulse or maintained TC
=3 associated TS = Inverse value of the TC

Field . . . . EXE DEF REF DB attribute . . REP_EXE Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the execution fault TSP set at expiry of TC execution check timeout
(DELAY field).

Field . . . . CIP REF DB attribute . . REP_OEC Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the ’Command In Progress’ logic variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 245
 Field . . . . DELAY DB attribute . . DEL_EXE Type . . N 4

Description :

Execution check timeout: 1 to 9999 (thousandths of 1 second).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 246
5.6.3. Declaration of Setpoints

TVC setpoint commands are variables representing analog commands transmitted to

automation cells or to process software, to modify a setpoint value for a control device
or the setting of a process control block.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : COMMANDS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DECLARE TVC >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : DECLARE TVCI : :
: : DECLARE P320 TVCE : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 103 : Screen 5.3

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 247
5.6.3.1. Declaration of TVCIs

A TVCI (internal setpoint command) can only act on a TMP.

The TMP takes the value of the TVCI.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE TVCI : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: FLG IND LEVEL :
: VAR REF F OU REF :
: LABEL EDIT :
: :
: :
: UNIT 0 V MIN :
: V MAX :
: :
: SETPT VAR :
: :
: MIN TM :
: AUTH REF MAX TM :
: DIR :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 104 : Screen 5.3.1

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . GRF_ID Type . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the Operative Unit in the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . EDIT DB attribute . . ED Type . . C 1

Description :

Log print–out: ’0’ : no ’1’ : yes.

Field . . . . UNIT DB attribute . . Determine UNIT_LIB Type . . N 2

Description :

Code associated to the unit of measurement.

Field . . . . V MIN DB attribute . . VM_MIN Type . . C 8

Description :

Value of minimum limit of the variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 248
 Field . . . . V MAX DB attribute . . VM_MAX Type . . C 8

Description :

Value of maximum limit of the variable.

Field . . . . SETPT VAR DB attribute . . REP_VM Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the TMP associated to the TVC.

Used to initialize the value of the TVC at start of dialogue.

Field . . . . MIN TM DB attribute . . VC_MIN Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable used as the minimum limit value of the TVC.

Field . . . . MAX TM DB attribute . . VC_MAX Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable used as the maximum limit value of the TVC.

Field . . . . AUTH REF DB attribute . . REP_TSA Type . . C 2

Description :

Reference of the authorization variable.

Field . . . . DIR DB attribute . . DIR_TSA Type . . C 1

Description :

Sense of authorization TS.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 249
5.6.3.2. Declaration of TVCEs

Select the relevant automation cell.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE P320 TVCE : :CTR:U113 CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: FLG IND LEVEL 0 :
: VAR REF 03APAHICL52A F OU REF 03APA EDIT 1 :
: LABEL FW PUMP 1 BIAS ORD P4 REF APAHICL52A :
: :
: ROW 011 UNIT 79 CYCLE RR :
: SUP INFO TVC_R(11) TYP CODE 36 :
: :
: V MIN –50.0000 MIN TM :
: V MAX 50.00000 MAX TM :
: :
: SETPT VAR 03APAHICD52A EXE DEF REF :
: TYP O CIP REF :
: TYPE S DELAY 0 :
: AUTH REF DIFF :
: DIR :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 105 : Screen 5.3.2

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . GRF_ID Type . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the Operative Unit in the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . EDIT DB attribute . . ED Type . . C 1

Description :

Event log print–out: ’0’ : no ’1’ : yes.

Field . . . . P4 REF DB attribute . . . Type . C 12

Description :

Reference of the object used by the P4.

Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . ADR_V Type . . C 3

Description :

Address of the TVCE.

Field . . . . UNIT DB attribute . . Determine UNIT_LIB Type . . N 2

Description :

Code number associated to the unit of the TVCE.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 250
 Field . . . . CYCLE DB attribute . . CYCLE Type . . C 2

Description :

Cycle receptor automation cell: si

TVC ––>’RL’ slow control cycle, ’RR’ fast control cycle.

Field . . . . SUP INFO DB attribute . . Type . . C 16

Description :

INFO_SUP = TVC_R ( <n> ) where <n> = 0:127

INFO_SUP = TVC_RL ( <n> ) where <n> = 0:127

Field . . . . TYP CODE DB attribute . . T_CONV Type . . N 3

RTKTM

Description :

Code of TVC sensor type.

Field . . . . V MIN DB attribute . . . VM_MIN Type . . C 8

Description :

Value of minimum limit of the TVCE.

Field . . . . V MAX DB attribute . . . VM_MAX Type . . C 8

Description :

Value of maximum limit of the TVCE.

Field . . . . MIN TM DB attribute . . VC_MIN Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the TME used as minimum limit value.

Field . . . . EXE DEF REF DB attribute . . REP_EXE Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the execution fault TSP set at expiry of TC execution check timeout
(DELAY field).

Field . . . . CIP REF DB attribute . . REP_OEC Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the ’Executing Command’ logic variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 251
 Field . . . . DELAY DB attribute . . DEL_EXE Type . . N 4

Description :

Execution check timeout: 1 to 9999 (thousandths of 1 second).

Field . . . . SETPT REF DB attribute . . REP_VM Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the TM associated to the TVC.

Used to initialize the value of the TVC at start of dialogue.

Field . . . . TYP DB attribute . . TYP_TVC Type . . N 4

Description :

O = Objective: positive or negative setpoint (sign optional)

E = Differential or Objective: no sign: objective (must be positive)
sign: + % (sign obligatory)
– % (sign obligatory)
C = Cyclical. full scale

Field . . . . TYPE DB attribute . . Type . . .

Description :

Type of format : ”S” if TVC is a single integer; ”F” if TVC is floating point.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 252
 Field . . . . AUTH REF DB attribute . . REP_TSA Type . . C 2

Description :

Reference of the authorization variable.

Field . . . . DIR DB attribute . . DIR_TSA Type . . C 1

Description :

Sense of authorization TS.

Field . . . . DIFF DB attribute . . ER_MIN Type . . C 1

Description :

Threshold of differential between measurement and setpoint below which the setpoint
is considered as attained (expressed in the unit of the TVCE).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 253
5.6.4. Command and Control Blocks
To declare the command and control blocks, access the menus below:

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : COMMANDS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DECLARE BLOCKS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : CONTROL BLOCKS : :
: : CONTROL LOOP BLOCKS : :
: : DECLARE MODELS : :
: : DECLARE WINDOWS : :
: : DECLARE ALGORITHMS : :
: : CONTROL LOOP GROUPS : :
: : CONTROL BUTTON CONFIGURATION : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 106 : Screen 5.4

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 254
 Command and control blocks are organized as follows:

Blocks
MED --> phzi_MED_XXXXX.v
COND
ALGO --> Number of algorithm
BOU

TC (4)
24 --> file phza_SYM_XX.v
TVC (2)

TS (6) 36

TM (6) 22

VRI (4) 0

5.6.4.1. Control Blocks

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: GENERIC C50V3 : CONTROL BLOCKS : S.598 : CTR1 : CENT 3 :
:............... ...............................................................:
: :
: VAR REF 01FSAFCV60A FLG T IND 1 LEVEL :
: LABEL LEFT PAP INLET VV COMMAND SIM :
: OU REF 01CEX :
: REP COND COND04 TEMPO 1 0 :
: CMD BOU 0 TEMPO 2 0 :
: :
: TC1 BLOCK REF TC1 :
: TC2 BLOCK REF TC2 :
: TC3 BLOCK REF TC3 :
: TC4 BLOCK REF TC4 :
: :
: AUTH TS REF. DIR :
: TVC1 TSA1 :
: TVC2 TSA2 :
: TVC3 TSA3 :
: TVC4 TSA4 :
: TVC5 TSA5 :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 107 : Screen 5.4.1 page 1

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 255
 M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81
................................................................................
: GENERIC C50V3 : CONTROL BLOCKS : S.598 : CTR1 : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
; : :
: : :
: : :
: REP TM 1 : REP TS 1 :
: REP TM 2 : REP TS 2 :
: REP TM 3 : REP TS 3 :
: REP TM 4 : REP TS 4 :
: REP TM 5 : REP TS 5 :
: REP TM 6 : REP TS 6 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: REP VR 1 :
: REP VR 2 :
: REP VR 3 :
: REP VR 4 :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 108 : Screen 5.4.1 page 2

Field . . . . LEVEL DB attribute . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Associated protection level.

Field . . . . COND REF DB attribute Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated control function.

Field . . . . BUT CMB DB attribute Type . . N 2

Description :

Number of the button combination in the button table.

Field . . . . TEMPO 1,2 DB attribute Type . . N 2

Description :

First or second associated timeout (1 to 10)

Field . . . . TC(I) DB attribute Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference TC button I (I : 1 à 4)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 256
 Field . . . . TVC(I) DB attribute Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference TVC I (I : 1 à 2)

Field . . . . BLOCK REF TC(I) DB attribute Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of alarm group blocking TC I (I : 1 to 4)

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute Type . . C 20

Description :

Operative Unit reference.

Field . . . . AUTH TS REF DB attribute Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the 1st authorization variable (I : 1 to 5)

Field . . . . DIR DB attribute Type . . N 1

Description :

Sense of authorization (0 or 1: authorization if TS value = DIR)

Field . . . . SIM DB attribute Type . . C 1

Description :

Simulator object: ”S” if the object is utilized by the simulator, otherwise ” ”.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 257
5.6.4.2. Control Loop Blocks

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: GENERIC C50V3 : CONTROL LOOP BLOCKS : S.598 : CTR1 : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: CTR REF AUTH1 1ST BLOCK ––– RACK2 MOD 0 SMCA 1 MODULE RCM :
: 2ND BLOCK ––– RACK: MOD SMCA MODULE :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :
: VAR REF 01FSAFCV60A FLG T IND 1 :
: LABEL LEFT PAP INLET VV COMMAND OU REF CIFSA :
: LEVEL 0 SIM :
: COND REF COND04 TEMPO 1 0 :
: BUT CMD 0 TEMPO 2 0 :
: :
: AUTH TS REF DIR :
: TSA1 :
: RCM P4 01FSAFCV60A TSA2 :
: RPC P4 TSA3 :
: TSA4 :
: TSA5 :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 109 : Screen 5.4.2 page 1

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: GENERIC C50V3 : CONTROL LOOP BLOCKS : S.598 : CTR1 : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: REF TC 1 BLOCK REF TC1 :
: REF TC 2 BLOCK REF TC2 :
: REF TC 3 BLOCK REF TC3 :
; REF TC 4 BLOCK REF TC4 :
: REF TVC1 01FSAHICN6DA REF TVC2 :
: :
: REF TM 1 AS112TMRCM16001 REF TS 1 :
: REF TM 2 REF TS 2 :
: REF TM 3 REF TS 3 AS112TSRCM16001 :
: REF TM 4 REF TS 4 :
: REF TM 5 REF TS 5 :
: REF TM 6 REF TS 6 :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: REF VR 1 REF VR 3 :
: REF VR 2 REF VR 4 :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 110 : Screen 5.4.2 page 2

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 258
 Field CTR REF DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 8

Description :

Controller reference

Field . . . . 1st MODULE–RACK DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 1

Description :

Rack number (2 to 8)

Field . . . . 1st MODULE–MOD DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 2

Description :

Module number (0 to 1F )

Field . . . . 1st MODULE–SMCA DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 1

Description :

SMCA number (0 to 3 )

Field . . . . 1st MODULE–MODULE DB attribute . . Type . . . . C 3

Description :

Type of module: RCM or RPC

The five fields described above are configured only in the case of
a ’true’ actuator.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 259
 Field . . . . 2ND MODULE RACK DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 1

Description :

Rack number (2 to 8)

Field . . . . 2ND MODULE MOD DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 2

Description :

Module number (0 to1F)

Field . . . . 2ND MODULE SMCA DB attribute . . . Type . . . . C 1

Description :

SMCA number (0 to 3)

Field . . . . 2ND MODULE MODULE DB attribute . Type . . . . C 3

Description :

Type of module: must be RPC

The four fields described above are configured only in the case
of a ’true’ dual actuator.

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . REP_ID Type . . . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the control block

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . . GRF_ID Type . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the Operative Unit associated to the block.

Field . . . . COND REF DB attribute . . . REP_COND Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated control function.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 260
 Field . . . . TEMPO 1 DB attribute . . . TEMPO1 Type . . N 2

Description :

Value of the timeout associated to the TVCI1.

When a setpoint is transmitted, in the event of a new incremental command on expiry

of this timeout the TVC is reset at the value of the TM associated to the TVC (see
Screen 5.3.2).

Field . . . . TEMPO 2 DB attribute . . . TEMPO2 Type . . N 2

Description :

Value of the timeout associated to the TVC2.

When a setpoint is transmitted, in the event of a new incremental command on expiry

of this timeout the TVC is reset at the value of the TM associated to the TVC (see
Screen 5.3.2).

Field . . . . BUT CMB DB attribute . . . CMB Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of the button combination in the button table.

Field . . . . AUTO TS REF. i DB attribute . . . REP_TSAi Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the authorization TS. Valid for commands transmitted from the CVS.

Field . . . . DIR DB attribute . . . DIR_TSAi Type . . C 1

Description :

Sense of authorization TSi (0 or 1) (authorization if TS value = sense). Valid for

commands transmitted from the CVS.

Field . . . . P4 RCM DB attribute . . . . Type . . C

10

Description :

Reference of P4 RCM

Field . . . . P4 RPC DB attribute . . . . Type . . C

10

Description :

Reference of P4 RPC

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 261
 Field . . . . TCi DB attribute . . . REP_TCi Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of TCi

Field . . . . TVCi DB attribute . . . REP_VCi Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of associated TVCi.

Field . . . . TMi DB attribute . . . REP_TMi Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of associated TMi.

Field . . . . TSi DB attribute . . . REP_TSi Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of associated TSi.

Field . . . . VRIi DB attribute . . . REP_TVIi Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of VRIi.

CONTROL MODELS, CONTROL WINDOWS AND ALGORITHMS

5.6.4.3. Declaration of Control Loops

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 262
 COMPOSITION OF STANDARD CONTROL MODELS (THERMAL)
Control block
attributes REP_TC REP_VC TAB_TS TAB_TM TAB_VRI
N° of
control model 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
1 TCE TCE TCE TCE
IS IS IS IS
2 TCE TCE TCE TCE
IS IS IS IS
3 TCE TCE TCE TCE
ID ID ID ID
4 VCE TSE TM
E
5 TCE VCE TSE TSE TSE TM TM VRI
E E
6 TCE TCI VCE VCE TSE TSE TSE TM TM TM VRI
E E E
7 TCE VCE TSE TSE TSE TM TM TM TM VRI
E E E E
8 TCE TCI VCE VCE TSE TSE TSE TM TM TM TM TM VRI
E E E E E
9 VCE TSE TM TM
E E
10 TCE VCE TSE TSE TSE TM TM TM VRI
E E E
11 TCE TCE VCE VCE TSE TSE TSE TSE TSE TSE TM TM TM TM TM VRI VRI
E E E E E
12 VCE TSE TM TM
E E
13 TM
E
14 VCE TM TM
E E
15 TCE TCE TCE TCE
ID IS IS IS
TCE TCE TCE TCE
16
ID IS IS IS
NB: The TCEs of attribute REP_TC are optional for all the control models

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 263

 COMPOSITION OF STANDARD CONTROL MODELS (HYDRO–ELECTRIC)

Control block
attributes REP_TC REP_VC TAB_TS TAB_TM TAB_VRI
N° of
control model 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
1 TCE TCE TCE TCE
IS IS IS IS
2 TCE TCE TCE TCE
IS IS IS IS
3 TCE TCE TCE TCE
IS IS IS IS
4 VCE TM
E
5 TCE TCE TCE TCE
VCE TM
IS IS IS IS
E
6 VCE TM
E
7 TCE TCE TCE TCE
VCE TM
IS IS IS IS
E

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 264

 M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96
................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE MODELS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : CTRL WIND REF : ALGO REF :
: LABEL : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: COND02 F : MED02 : ALG02 :
: CMD LOGIQUE SIMPLE NON VALIDEE : : :
: : : :
: COND03 F : MED02 : ALG03 :
: CMD LOGIQUE DOUBLE NON VALIDEE : : :
: : : :
: COND09 F : MED08 : ALG06 :
: CONSIGNE MANUELLE : : :
: : : :
: COND07 F : MED06 : ALG04 :
: CMD AUTO/MANU–CONSIGNE FIXE : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 111 : Screen 5.4.3

Field . . . . CTRL WIN REF DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . C 14

Description :

Reference of the associated control window .

Field . . . . ALGO REF DB attribute . . . Type . . . . . C 14

Description :

Reference of the associated algorithm.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 265
 LIST OF CONTROL MODELS (THERMAL)

REF LABEL N° N°
WIN ALGO

MODEL 1 CONFIRMED SINGLE PULSE LOGIC CMD 1 1

MODEL 2 NON-CONFIRMED SINGLE PULSE LOGIC CMD 2 2
MODEL 3 CONFIRMED DUAL PULSE LOGIC CMD 2 3
MODEL 4 MANUAL CMD 3 4
MODEL 5 AUTO / MANU CMD 4 4
MODEL 6 AUTO / MANU - BIAS CMD 5 5
MODEL 7 AUTO / MANU - FIXED SETPOINT CMD 6 4
MODEL 8 AUTO / MANU - BIAS FIXED SETPOINT CMD 7 5
MODEL 9 MANUAL SETPOINT 8 6
MODEL 10 AUTO / MANU SETPOINT 9 6
MODEL 11 AUTO / MANU SETPOINT - AUTO / MANU CMD 10 7
MODEL 12 INCREMENTAL SETPOINT 11 8
MODEL 13 MEASUREMENT 12 0
MODEL 14 DELTA INCREMENT SETPOINT 13 6
MODEL 15 CONFIRMED SINGLE LOGIC CMD WITH CHOICE 1 8
MODEL 16 CONFIRMED SINGLE LOGIC CMD WITH CHOICE 2 9

LIST OF CONTROL MODELS (HYDRO–ELECTRIC)

REF LABEL N° N°
WIN ALGO

MODEL 1 CONFIRMED SINGLE PULSE LOGIC CMD 1 1

MODEL 2 NON-CONFIRMED SINGLE PULSE LOGIC CMD 2 2
MODEL 3 LOGIC CMD WITH AVAILABILITY 3 1
MODEL 4 MANUAL SETPOINT WITH MEASUREMENT 4 3
MODEL 5 MANUAL SETPOINT WITH COMMANDS 5 3
MODEL 6 INTERNAL MANUAL SETPOINT WITH MEASUREMENT 6 4
MODEL 7 INTERNAL MANUAL SETPOINT WITH COMMANDS 7 4

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 266
5.6.4.4. Declaration of Control Windows

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE WINDOWS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : NUM WIND : DV–DRAW VIEW :
: LABEL : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: MED02 F : 2 : phzi_MED_cmd_no_val.v :
: CMD LOGIQUE NON VALIDEE : : :
: : : :
: MED08 F : 8 : phzi_MED_manu_mes.v :
: CONSIGNE MANUELLE : : :
: : : :
: MED06 F : 6 : phzi_MED_auto_cgn.v :
: CMD AUTO/MANU–CONSIGNE FIXE : : :
: : : :
: MED09 F : 9 : phzi_MED_auto_mes.v :
: CONSIGNE AUTO/MANU : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 112 : Screen 5.4.4

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . Type . C 8

Description :

Reference of the control window.

Field . . . . NUM WIND DB attribute . . . NUM_MED Type . C 2

Description :

Number of the control window.

Field . . . . DV-DRAW VIEW DB attribute . . . NOM_MED Type . C 32

Description :

Name of the DV–DRAW view of the control window.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . C 32

Description :

Label of the control window.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 267
 LIST OF STANDARD CONTROL WINDOWS (THERMAL)

N° NAME OF ASSOCIATED
REF LABEL
WIN DV-DRAW VIEW

1 MED01 CONFIRMED LOGIC CMD phzi_MED_cmd_val.v

2 MED02 NON-CONFIRMED LOGIC CMD phzi_MED_cmd_no_val.v
3 MED03 MANUAL CONTROL CMD phzi_MED_manu.v
4 MED04 AUTO/MANU CONTROL CMD phzi_MED_auto_manu.v
5 MED05 AUTO/MANU BIAS CMD phzi_MED_auto_bi.v
6 MED06 AUTO/MANU - FIXED SETPOINT CMD phzi_MED_auto_cgn.v
7 MED07 AUTO/MANU - BIAS - FIXED SETPOINT CMD phzi_MED_auto_cgn_bi.v
8 MED08 MANUAL SETPOINT phzi_MED_manu_mes.v
9 MED09 AUTO / MANU SETPOINT phzi_MED_auto_mes.v
10 MED10 AUTO / MANU SETPOINT - phzi_MED_cgn_cmd_mes.v
AUTO / MANU CMD
11 MED11 INCReMENTAL SETPOINT phzi_MED_increment.v
12 MED12 MEASUREMENT phzi_MED_mesure.v
13 MED13 DELTA INCREMENT SETPOINT phzi_MED_ecart.v

LIST OF CONTROL MODELS (HYDRO–ELECTRIC)

N° NAME OF THE ASSOCIATED

WIN REF LABEL DV-DRAW VIEW

1 MEDH01 CONFIRMED SINGLE

phzi_MED_MEDH01.v
PULSE LOGIC CMD
2 MEDH02 NON-CONFIRMEDphzi_MED_MEDH02.v
SINGLE PULSE LOGIC CMD
3 MEDH03 LOGIC CMD WITH
phzi_MED_MEDH03.v
AVAILABILITY
4 MEDH04 MANUAL SETPOINT
phzi_MED_MEDH04.v
WITH MEASUREMENT
5 MEDH05 MANUAL SETPOINT
phzi_MED_MEDH05.v
WITH COMMANDS
6 MEDH06 INTERNAL MANUAL
phzi_MED_MEDH06.v
SETPOINT WITH
MEASUREMENT
7 MEDH07 INTERNAL MANUAL
phzi_MED_MEDH07.v
SETPOINT WITH
COMMANDS

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 268
5.6.4.5. Declaration of Algorithms

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE ALGORITHMS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : ALGO NUM : :
: LABEL : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: ALG02 F : 2 : :
: N.VALID. SIMPLE LOGICAL CMD–4TC : : :
: : : :
: ALG03 F : 3 : :
: N.VALID. DOUBLE LOGICAL CMD–4TC : : :
: : : :
: ALG06 F : 6 : :
: CONSIGN–1 TVC : : :
: : : :
: ALG04 F : 4 : :
: REGULATING CMD–1 TVC : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 113 : Screen 5.4.5

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . REP_ID Type . . . . C 14

Description :

Reference of the algorithm.

Field . . . . NUM ALGO DB attribute . . . NUM_ALGO Type . . . . C 2

Description :

Number of associated algorithm.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . . . C 32

Description :

Label of the algorithm.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 269
 LIST OF ALGORITHMS (THERMAL)

N° REF LABEL
WIN
1 ALG01 CONFIRMED SINGLE LOGIC CMD - - 4 TC
2 ALG02 NON-CONFIRMED SINGLE LOGIC CMD - 4 TC
3 ALG03 NON-CONFIRMED DUAL LOGIC CMD - 4 TC
4 ALG04 CONTROL CMD - 1 TVC
5 ALG05 CONTROL CMD - 2 TVC
6 ALG06 SETPOINT - 1 TVC
7 ALG07 SETPOINT - 2 TVC
8 ALG08 SETPOINT
9 ALG09 NON-CONFIRMED SING LOG CMD + CHOICE 3TCS / TCD

LIST OF ALGORITHMS (HYDRO–ELECTRIC)

N° REF LABEL
WIN

1 ALGH01 CONFIRMED SINGLE LOGIC CMD

2 ALGH02 NON-CONFIRMED SINGLE LOGIC CMD
3 ALGH01 LOGIC CMD WITH AVAILABILITY
4 ALGH03 MANUAL SETPOINT WITH MEASUREMENT
5 ALGH03 MANUAL SETPOINT WITH COMMANDS
6 ALGH04 INTERNAL MANUAL SETPOINT WITH MEASUREMENT
7 ALGH04 INTERNAL MANUAL SETPOINT WITH COMMANDS

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 270
5.6.4.6. Control Loop Groups

Control loop groups are designed to facilitate surveillance of control loops.

These views have a standard format comprising up to eight control windows, each
control window being associated to a control block.

The content of the control window and the commands available are dependent on the
type of actuator in question.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : CONTROL LOOP GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG F LEVEL 0 :
: LABEL IND ENTITY ENT–SYST :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: REP ORG / LABEL : REP ORG / LABEL :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 114 : Screen 5.4.6

Field . . . . LEVEL DB attribute . . . NIV_ASSO Type . C 1

Description :

Associated protection level.

Field . . . . ENTITY DB attribute . . . Type . C 8

Description :

Reference of the associated entity

Field . . . . REP ORG i DB attribute . . . REP_ORGi Type . C 20

Description :

Reference of control block i in the control loop group.

Field . . . . LABEL i DB attribute . . . LIB_ORGi Type . C 32

Description :

Label of control block i in the control loop group on initialization.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 271
5.6.4.7. Command Buttons

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : CONTROL BUTTONS CONFIGURATION : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: CMB : KEYS : LABEL : FLG : IND :
: : 1 2 3 4 : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 0 : 00 00 00 00 : EMPTY : F : :
: : : : : :
: 1 : 00 04 06 00 : STOP/START : F : :
: : : : : :
: 2 : 00 04 06 11 : STOP/START/BLOCKING : F : :
: : : : : :
: 3 : 00 04 14 15 : STOP/START1/START2 : F : :
: : : : : :
: 4 : 00 04 00 00 : STOP : F : :
: : : : : :
: 5 : 00 00 06 00 : START : F : :
: : : : : :
: 6 : 00 00 30 00 : SELECTION 1 : F : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 115 : Screen 5.4.7

Field . . . . CMB DB attribute . . CMB Type . . C 2

Description :

Number of the button combination.

Field . . . . KEYS i DB attribute . . TAB_BOUi Type . . C 3

Description :

Identifier of the graphic representation of command button Fi

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . LIB Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the button combination.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 272
5.7. CALCULATIONS AND RESULTS

Internal calculations (TSI, TMI) are executed on the basis of expressions described in
Polish or postfixed notation.

Description of Polish notation

Infixed notation is normally used for arithmetical expressions in math, as follows:

([term] operator [term])

A term may itself be an infixed expression or a variable:

(a + b) , (a – b), ...

To avoid any ambiguity, with more complex expressions, parentheses or bracketing

must be used.

An expression is completely bracketed when all the terms on each side of the operator
are enclosed by brackets, except in the case of an elementary term (variable).

Examples :
(a + b)
((a+ b) *c)
(a + (b/c))
(a *(b + (c/d)))

To avoid having to use brackets, the Polish mathematician LUKASTEWICZ proposed

a notation known as Polish or postfixed notation.

In this notation, the operators immediately follow the operands on which they act.

The above expressions are thus written as shown below in Polish notation:

ab +
ab + c *
abc/ +
abcd/ + *

The rules of transformation are simple:

D Identifiers appear in the same order in both notations.

D In Polish notation, the operators appear in order of use. The expression is read
from left to right.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 273
 DESCRIPTION OF THE TRANSFORMATION :

The stack principle is used. A stack is a data structure in which the last element
entered is the first out (LIFO structure).

If infixed expressions are bracketed, we know that when a bracket is opened, we must
analyze the term that follows. The analysis of the term is terminated when we
encounter the closing bracket.

The order of the terms is respected by placing each new term encountered on top of
the Polish stack.

When we encounter an operator we put it aside into a second operator stack until the
term which follows has been analyzed.

When we encounter a closing bracket the last operator is fetched from the top of the
operator stack and put back into the Polish expression stack.

Example:

((a + b) *c) Polish stack operator stack

er
read 1 identifier a
read 1er operator +
read 2 eme identifier ab +
closing bracket ab +
read 2eme operator ab + *
read 3 eme identifier ab + c
closing bracket ab + c *

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 274
 M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96
................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : CALCULATIONS AND RESULTS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : GENERATE TSI : :
: : GENERATE TMI >: :
: : GENERATE VRI >: :
: : GENERATE TSP : :
: : GENERATE TMP : :
: : GENERATE VRP : :
: : LIST CONTROL TM DATA : :
: : LIST FILTER TM DATA : :
: : OPTIPLANT : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 116 : Screen 6

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 275
5.7.1. Generation of TSIs

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : GENERATE TSI : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF 03KITYS001 FLG F IND ROW 7 SIM :
: LABEL TURBINE :
: :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: REF VAR/OPE THRS TYPE : REF VAR/OPE THRS TYPE : REF VAR/OPE THRS TYPE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: 03KITYS001 : O:END : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 117 : Screen 6.1

The calculation is described by a calculation table whose elements are character

strings having the following structure :

<prefix><reference or operator><attribute code>

where :

D <prefix> =
— O : Operator
— : Variable (no prefix)
D <reference or operator> =
– If no <prefix> : functional ID of the variable (TME, TMI,
TSE, TSI)

– If <prefix> = O : Operator :
— . logical AND
— + logical OR
— * exclusive OR
— / logical inversion
— END end of calculation

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 276
 D <attribute code> =
— pseudo–attribute associated to thresholds (TM only) :
HH : very high threshold
HI : high threshold
LO : low threshold
LL : very low threshold
This calculation table can contain 14 calculation terms, including the operator END.

Attention:

Avoid creating TSIs containing their own functional ID in their calculation tables.
Self–referencing TSIs are forbidden as they can never be calculated.

Exemple : TSI1
TSI1 O:/ TSI1 will never be calculated
END

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 277
 Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . EQU_NUM Type . . N 4

Description :

Rank of execution of the equation.

Field . . . . REF VAR /OPE DB attribute . . . Type . . C 2

(prefix, operator or external key)

Description :

Reference of a variable or logical operator 0: +, * , . , / , end

Field . . . . THRS TYPE DB attribute . . . Type . . C 20

(attribute code)

Description :

Threshold of the measurement variable to be used in the equation: LL, LO, HI, HH

Equation in inverse Polish notation (contained in attribute TAB_CAL )

Maximum 14 terms

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 278
5.7.2. Declaration of Internal Analog Variables
To declare TMIs, access the menus below depending on the type :

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : CALCULATIONS AND RESULTS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : GENERATE TMI >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : GENERATE DERIVATIVE TMI (V01) : :
: : GENERATE POLISH TMI (V02) : :
: : GENERATE RESTORATION TMI (V03) : :
: : GENERATE AVERAGE TMI (V04) : :
: : GENERATE AVERAGE WITH RESTORE TMI (V05) : :
: : GENERATE COUNTING TMI (V06) : :
: : GENERATE RUNNING TIME TMI (V07) : :
: : GENERATE AVERAGE TM GROUP TMI (V08) : :
: : GENERATE STANDARD DEVIATION TMI (V09) : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 118 : Screen 6.2

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 279
5.7.2.1. Generation of Derivative TMIs (V01)

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : GENERATE DERIVATIVE TMI (V01) : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF SIM FLG IND : CAL. CAD.: ASSCTED VAR :INIT. VAL. :
: LABEL : X/TIME : : SAVE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: F : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 119 : Screen 6.2.1

Information required :
— identification code of the variable giving the result (IV)
(VAR REF field ),
— identification code of the variable to be derived (V), of TME, TMI, TVC or
TVCI type ( Field ASSCTED VAR ),
— IV calculation period u (CAD_CAL field)

Note:

u is logically equal to the acquisition rate of V, or a multiple of this rate.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 280
 Processing:

Calculations are performed on data acquired over 3 successive cycles:

t0 t1 = t0+u t2 = t1+u

time
V0 V1 V2
IV0 IV1 IV2

IV2 = A* IV0 + B*IV1 + C*(V2 – V1) with A + B + C = 1

u

A, B and C are constants which are configured at project level and which thus have the
same value for all TMI variables.

If the variable to be derived is invalid, inhibited or out–of–limits for the current cycle, the
result variable is declared invalid for both the current cycle and the following cycle.

The result variable is also doubtful during the following cycle or can be declared invalid
if the variable to be derived is invalid, inhibited or out–of–limits.

A non–filtered derivation can be obtained with the following coefficients :

A = B = 0 and C = 1

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 281
 Field . . . . CAL CAD DB attribute . . CAL_VAL Type . . C 4

Description :

CENTRALOG calculation rate.

D 1S 2S 5S 10S 15S 20S 30S

D 1MN 2MN 5MN 10MN 30MN

D 1H SH (shift hour)

D 1 D 1M

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . REP_VAR Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the TM/TVC used for the calculation of the derived variable.

Field . . . . INIT VAL DB attribute . . . VM_INIT Type . . . . C 8

Description :

Initialization value of the TMI (floating point).

Field . . . . X/TIME DB attribute . . DER_UNI Type . . C 3

Description :

Unit of calculation restitution time ”UPS’ = second, ”UPM” = minute or ’UPH = hour.

Field . . . . SAVE DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

= 1 TMI saved each hour on disk.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 282
5.7.2.2. Generation TMI Polish Type Calculation (V02)

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : GENERATE POLISH TMI (V02) : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: ROW 1 SIM CALC RATE 5S SAVE 0 FLG F IND :
: VAR REF 03KITYN001 :
: LABEL UNIT 3 GEN OUTPUT ACTIVE POWER INITIAL VAL 0.000000 :
: :
: REF VAR/OP/CONSTANT THRS TYPE :
: C:0.000000 / O:END / / :
: / / / :
: / / / :
: / / / :
: / / / :
: / / / :
: / / / :
: / / / :
: / / / :
: / / / :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 120 : Screen 6.2.2

Syntax:

Calculations can be programmed by using the standard operators described below,

together with the following variables:

TSE, TSI, TME, TMI, TVC, TVCI and reference charts

This function corresponds to a calculator using inverse Polish notation.

Example:

If the following Polish calculation is programmed in the database: ” V1,V2,+,V3,* ”, the

result is: (V1 + V2) * V3

The calculation is described as follows:

<prefix><external key or operator><attribute code>

where,

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 283
 D <prefix> =
— O : Operator
— : Variable (no prefix)
— C : Constant
D <external key or operator> =
–
— if no <prefix> = : external key of the variable (TME, TMI,
TSE,TSI,TVC,TVCI, reference chart)
— if <prefix> = C : value of the constant
— if <prefix> = O : operator :
This calculation table can contain up to 48 terms, including the operator END.

1 – Operators
— + addition
— – subtraction
— * multiplication
— / division
— ** raise to the power of
— ABS absolute value
— LOG natural logarithm
— PY3 3rd degree polynomial (a + bx + cx2 + dx3)
— SIN sine
— COS cosine
— TG tangent
— EXP exponential
— FY0 step function F(x) = 0 if x <= 0 and F(x) = 1 if x > 0
— MINn lowest value among a group of n variables (n < 46).
— MAXn highest value among a group of n variables (n < 46).
— SOMn sum of n variables (n < 46). This function gives the sum of n
variables using fewer operators than straight addition.
where n is a 2 digit constant < 46.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 284
 2 – Reference Chart Functions
— ABD direct interpolation y = f(x, p).
— ABI indirect interpolation x = f(y, p).

3 – Thermodynamic Functions

D TP Saturation temperature F(pressure)

D STPV Entropy F(pressure, temperature, titer)

D HTPV Enthalpy F(pressure, temperature, titer)

D SPE Saturation entropy in water range F(pressure)

D SPV Saturation entropy in steam range F(pressure)

D HPE Saturation enthalpy in water range F(pressure)

D HPV Saturation enthalpy in steam range F(pressure)

D HPS Enthalpy F(pressure, entropy)

D TPH Temperature F(pressure, enthalpy)

D VPS Titer F(pressure, entropy)

D VPH Titer F(pressure, enthalpy)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 285
 Remarks : H : Enthalpy

S : Entropy

T : Temperature

V : Titer

P : Pressure

4 – Miscellaneous Instructions:

These instructions can be used to program a series of conditional calculations:

IFPn go to term n if value in calculation stack > 0

IFNn go to term n if value in calculation stack < 0
IFZn go to term n if value in calculation stack = 0
GOTn go to term n unconditionally
RAZ delete last term in calculation stack
END mandatory operator at end of calculation

n represents the nth term in the calculation table,

n beginning at 1 ( 1 <= n <= 48 )

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 286
 Note:
— Return forbidden.
— At the end of the calculation, only one value must remain in the calculation
stack.
— GOTO instructions IFPn, IFNh, IFZh, GOTn, do not unstack the
calculations.
D pseudo–attribute associated to thresholds (TM) only :

HH : very high threshold =1 if MS = very high

threshold violated.

HI : high threshold =1 if MS = high threshold

violated
or
very high threshold
violated.

LO : low threshold =1 if MS = low threshold violated

or
very low threshold
violated.

LL : very low threshold =1 if MS = very low threshold

violated.

Examples of calculations:

D Subtraction :

As subtraction is syntax dependent, the order of the terms is vital:

A
B
O: –
O : END gives A – B

D Elevation to power:

A
B
O : **
O : END gives AB

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 287
 D 3rd degree polynomial:

A
B
C
D
X
O: py3
O: END gives A + B*X + C*X2 + D*X3

D Reset to zero:

The top of the calculation is unstacked without affecting calculation.

D Reference chart calculations :

— Direct interpolation:
X
P
A
O: ABD
O: END gives Y = f (X,P) for reference chart A.
— Indirect interpolation :
Y
P
A
O: ABI
O: END gives X = f (Y,P) for reference chart A.
D Thermodynamic calculations
— enthalpy = F (P, T, V)
– : Pressure
– : Temperature
– : Titer
– O : HPTV
– O : END

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 288
 — entropy = F (P, T, V)
– : Pressure
– : Temperature
– : Titer
– O : SPTV
– O : END
— saturation enthalpy in water range
– : Pressure
– : HPE
– O : END
— saturation enthalpy in steam range
– : Pressure
– O : HPV
– O : END
— enthalpy = F (Pressure, entropy)
– : Pressure
– : Entropy
– O : HPS
– O : END
— saturation entropy in water range
– : Pressure
– O : SPE
– O : END
— saturation entropy of steam range
– : Pressure
– O : SPV
– O : END
— saturation temperature
– : Pressure
– O : TP
– O : END

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 289
 — temperature = F (Pressure, enthalpy)
– : Pressure
– : Enthalpy
– O : TPH
– O : END
— titer = F (Pressure, entropy)
– : Pressure
– : Entropy
– O : VPS
– O : END
— titer = F (Pressure, enthalpy)
– : Pressure
– : Enthalpy
– O : VPH
– O : END
NB.

Do not omit to terminate the calculation with the instruction END at the
end of the calculation table

For thermodynamic functions, the units are:

D Temperature : in

D Pressure : in bars

D Titer : 0 <= titer <= 1

D Entropy : in KJ / Kg

D Enthalpy : in KJ /

The areas of validity of these calculations are defined in the parameter input masks.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 290
 Field . . . . ROW DB attribute . . . EQU_NUM Type . N 4

Description :

Rank of execution of the equation.

Field . . . . CALC RATE DB attribute . . . CAL_VAL Type . C 4

Description :

TMI calculation rate (see V01)

Field . . . . SAVE DB attribute . . . Type . C 1

Description :

= 1 TMI saved each hour on disk.

Field . . . . INITIAL VAL DB attribute . . . VM _NIT Type . C 8

Description :

Initialization value of the TMI (floating).

Field . . REF VAR/OPE/CONSTANT DB attribute Type . C 20

Description :

Term of equation (maximum 48 terms).

Field . . . . THRS TYPE DB attribute . . . Type . C 2

Description :

Type of TM measurement threshold to be taken into consideration in the equation :

LL,LO, HI, HH

Equation in inverse Polish notation (contained in the attribute TAB_CAL )

Maximum 48 terms

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 291
5.7.2.3. Generation of Restoration TMIs (V03)

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : GENERATE RESTORATION TMI (V03): : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF SIM FLG IND:CALC RATE : ASSCTED VAR :INIT.VAL. :
: LABEL : : : SAVE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: F : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 121 : Screen 6.2.3

This function is used to store TMI type variables.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result,
— ID code of the variable to be stored,
— sampling period (storage).

Processing :

TMI variables are stored by copying their value, validity and quality into another TMI.
This process is performed at a specified periodicity.

After being stored, the variable in question is reset to zero. The variable also is
initialized as being valid and sure.

The V05 type variable calculation cycle number n is also reset to zero.

A type V03 TMI variable is invalid if the TMI stored is invalid, inhibited or out–of–limits.

The variable is doubtful if the TMI stored is replaced or doubtful.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 292
 A (TME) 100

1100
1000
900
800
700
B (V02) 600
500
400
B=B+A 300
200
100 100

C (V03) 1100

0 5 10 time

Field . . . . CALC RATE DB attribute . . CAL_VAL Type . . C 4

Description :

TMI calculation rate (see V01).

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . RF_VAR Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the variable to be saved.

Field . . . . INIT VAL DB attribute . . . VM_INIT Type . . . . C 8

Description :

Initialization value of the TMI (floating point).

Field . . . . SAVE DB attribute . . SAV_TMI Type . . C 1

Description :

= 1 TMI saved each hour on disk.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 293
5.7.2.4. Generation of Periodic Average TMI (V04)

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : GENERATE AVERAGE TMI (V04) : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF SIM FLG IND : RATES : ASSCTED VAR :INI.VAL.:
: LABEL :CALCUL: UPD : : SAVE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : :
: F : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 122 : Screen 6.2.4

This function calculates a periodic average by recurrence without accessing

intermediate values.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— ID code of the input variable (V),
— sampling period (for V) u,
— number of calculation cycles n,
— update period (for IV) w.
The period u is a multiple of the period of acquisition or calculation of variable V, or
equal to that period.

The final average update period w (IV) is a multiple of the sampling period u.

Let M be the average value calculated from the start of the current cycle (period w),
where IV is the result of the calculation performed in the last complete cycle. This
intermediate value has no ID code and therefore cannot be accessed.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 294
 Processing:

t1 t1+u t1+2u t2=t1+w

time
V1 V11 V12 V1n (w=n*u)
IV1 IV2

a t1+u M=M1=V11

M1+V12
a t1+2u M=M2=
2
2M2+V13 V11+V12+V13
a t1+3u M=M3= =
3 3

(i–1)Mi–1+V1i V11+V12+...+V 1i
a t1+i*u M=Mi = =
i i

(n–1)Mn–1+V1n
a t2 IV=Mn=
n

The result variable is declared invalid when the input variable has been inhibited,
invalid or out–of–limits for the full duration of the calculation cycle preceding the
update.

The result variable is doubtful when the input variable has been invalid, inhibited,
out–of–limits, doubtful or replaced on at least one occasion during the calculation
cycle preceding the update.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 295
 Field . . . . CALCUL DB attribute . . CAL_VAL Type . . C 4

Description :

TMI calculation rate (see V01).

Field . . . . UPD DB attribute . . CAD_MAJ Type . . C 4

Description :

Average update rate.

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . RF_VAR Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated TM.

Field . . . . INI VAL DB attribute . . VM_INIT Type . . . . C 8

Description :

TM initialization value (floating point).

Field . . . . SAVE DB attribute . . SAV_TMI Type . . .

Description :

= 1 TMI saved each hour on disk.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 296
5.7.2.5. Generation of Average TMI with Current Value (V05)

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : AVERAGE WITH RESTORE TMI (V05): : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF SIM FLG IND :CALC RATE : ASSCTED VAR :INIT.VAL. :
: LABEL : REST RTE : REST VAR : SAVE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: F : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 123 : Screen 6.2.5

This function performs a periodic average calculation and returns current updated
average values.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— ID code of the input variable (V),
— sampling period (for V) u.
The period u is a multiple of the period of acquisition or calculation of variable V, or
equal to that period.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 297
 Processing:

t1 t2 = t1+u

time
Vn-1 Vn
IV1 IV2

(n * 1)M n*1 ) Vn
IV + M n + n

The value n represents the number of calculation cycles since the start of the current
average Mn, ie. the number of measurements included in the calculation of that
average.

The average is calculated cyclically, and the variable is updated in the database on
each calculation. The average can be accessed either by operator dialogue or on
request by the application programs.

To find the value of a given average, the value of the variable concerned must be saved
in a V03 type variable. Calculation of the average is resumed at zero after storage,
ie. Mn = n = 0.

Invalid values of the input variable are not taken into account in the calculation of the
average.

Variables in the monthly log :

A V05 type TMI variable can be used in calculations in a monthly log. In this case, the
log value is updated at hourly intervals. The V05 variable is reset to zero after each
update. As a consequence, a V03 variable cannot be associated to this type of
variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 298
 Field . . . . CALC RATE DB attribute . . . CAL_VAL Type . C 4

Description :

TMI calculation rate (see V01).

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . RF_VAR Type . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated variable.

Field . . . . INIT VAL DB attribute . . . VM_INIT Type . C 8

Description :

Initialization value of the TM (floating point).

Field . . . . REST RATE DB attribute . . . CAD_REST Type . C 4

Description :

Restoration rate if this already exists in restoration processing.

Field . . . . REST VAR DB attribute . . . VAR_REST Type . C 20

Description :

Reference of the variable to be restored if this already exists in restoration processing.

Field . . . . SAVE DB attribute . . . SAV_TM Type . .

Description :

= 1 TMI saved each hour on disk.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 299
5.7.2.6. Generation Pulse Count TMI (V06)

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : GENERATE COUNTING TMI (V06) : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF SIM FLG IND:CALC RATE :TYP SAVE : ASSCTED VAR THRS TYPE :
: LABEL :WGHT/PUL :INIT. VAL : REF TMP :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: F : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 124 : Screen 6.2.6

This function counts the number of state changes in TSE or TSI variables, and in TME
or TMI variables (threshold violations).

Any type of transition can be counted. Transition types are defined for each counter as
below:

D transition 0 to 1,

D transition 1 to 0,

D transitions 0 to 1 and 1 to 0.

A constant representing the importance (weighting) of the pulse concerned is

associated to each counter. At the end of the counting period (defined for each
counter), the accumulated value is calculated and stored in the counter.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV) (VAR REF field),
— ID code of the variable counted (V) (ASSCTED VAR field),
— pulse weighting (P) WGHT/PUL field),
— calculation period (u) ( CALC RATE field).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 300
 Processing :

t0 t0+x t0+y t1 = t0+u

1
input V 0
time
C=0 C=C+1 C=C+1 C
result IV1 IV2

IV refreshment:

IVn = C* P

The IV analog variable is updated with the total number of pulses generated during the
last cycle and transformed into a physical value by means of the weighting P at the end
of period u.

The result obtained can be stored in a V03 type TMI. The count value is reset to zero
on storage. The period of the V03 variable must be a multiple of u.

Variables in the monthly log :

A V06 type TMI variable can be used in calculations in a monthly log. In this case, the
log value is updated at hourly intervals. The V06 variable is reset to zero after each
update. As a consequence, a V03 variable cannot be associated to this type of
variable.

Field . . . . CALC RATE DB attribute . . . CAL_VAL Type . C 4

Description :

TMI calculation rate (see V01 ).

Field . . . . TYP DB attribute . . . TYP_CT Type . C 1

Description :

Type of count: A : (transitions 0 ––> 1

B : (transitions 1 ––> 0
C : (transitions 0 ––> 1 and 1 ––> 0)

Field . . . . INIT VAL DB attribute . . . VM_INIT Type . C 8

Description :

Initialization value of the TMI (floating).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 301
 Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . RFVAR Type . C 20

Description :

Reference of the TS to be counted.

Field . . . . WGHT/PUL DB attribute . . . COM _PULS Type . C 8

Description :

Pulse weighting.

Field . . . . SAVE DB attribute . . . SAV_TM Type . .

Description :

= 1 TMI saved each hour on disk.

Field . . . . THRS TYPE DB attribute . . . (in RE_VAR) Type . C 2

Description :

Type of TM threshold to be taken into consideration: LL, LO, HI, HH.

Field . . . . TMP REF DB attribute . . . Type

Description :

Reference of the associated TMP variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 302
5.7.2.7. Generation of Running Time TMI (V07)

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :GENERATE RUNNING TIME TMI (V07): : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF SIM FLG IND :SAVE :ASSCTED VAR THRS TYPE:INIT.VAL. :
: LABEL :SCALE CF :BKP TMP :CALC RATE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: F : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 125 : Screen 6.2.7

This function calculates the time that TSE, or TSI variables, or threshold violations by
TME or TMI variables, remain in state 1.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— variable used for the calculation of the time (V),
— calculation period expressed in seconds (u),
— counter increment value (n).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 303
 Processing :

t0 t1=t0+u t2=t1+u t3=t2+u t4=t3+u

input 1
V 0
time
result IV IV+n IV+2n IV+2n IV+3n

Running times shorter than the calculation period may not be taken into account.

The result obtained can be stored in a V03 type TMI. The value of the running time is
reset to zero on storage.

The TMI variable is invalid if the input variable has remained invalid, inhibited or
out–of–limits since the start of the cycle.

The TMI variable is doubtful if the input variable has been invalid, inhibited,
out–of–limits, doubtful or replaced at least once since the start of the cycle,.

Invalid, inhibited or out–of–limits values are not taken into account in the assessment
of running time.

Variables in the monthly log :

A V07 type TMI variable can be used in calculations in a monthly log. In this case, the
log value is updated at hourly intervals. The V07 variable is reset to zero after each
update. As a consequence, a V03 variable cannot be associated to this type of
variable.

Field . . . . CALC RATE DB attribute . . . CAL_VAL Type . C 4

Description :

TMI calculation rate (see V01 ).

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . RFVAR Type . C 20

Description :

Reference of the input variable.

Field . . . . INIT VAL DB attribute . . . VM_INIT Type . C 8

Description :

Initialization value of the TMI (floating).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 304
 Field . . . . SCALE CF DB attribute . . . COEF_ECH Type . C 8

Description :

TMI scale coefficient for the calculation of the running time (floating).
Depends on the calculation rate.

Field . . . . THRS TYPE DB attribute . . . Type . C 2

Description :

Measurement TM threshold to be taken into consideration: LL, LO,HI, HH.

Field . . . . SAVE DB attribute . . . SAV_TMI Type . .

Description :

= 1 TMI saved each hour on disk.

Field . . . . TMP REF DB attribute . . . Type

Description :

Reference of the associated TMP variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 305
5.7.2.8. Generation of TM Group Average TMI (V08)

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :GEN. AVERAGE TM GROUP TMI (V08): : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG F IND SIM :
: LABEL :
: :
: CALC RATE INITIAL VAL :
: SAVE :
: :
: GROUP VARIABLE REFERENCES :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 126 : Screen 6.2.8

This function calculates the current average of several TME, TMI, TVC or TVCI type
measurements and the standard deviation.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV) of the average,
— list of variables for which the average is required.

Processing :

N
ȍ TIi
i+1
IV +
N

TIi = input values

N = number of values.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 306
 Only valid, non–inhibited, non–replaced and non–doubtful variables are taken into
account.

If the number of values used in the calculation is inferior to 50 % of the total number, the
TMI is declared doubtful.

If the number of values which can be used in the calculation is nil, the TMI is invalid.

The value of the standard deviation can only be accessed if it has been stored by a V09
type function in an associated TMI.

Field . . . . CALC RATE DB attribute . . CAL_VAL Type . . C 4

Description :

TMI calculation rate (see V01 ).

Field . . . . INITIAL VAL DB attribute . . VM_INIT Type . . C 8

Description :

Initialization value of the TMI (floating).

Field . . . . SAVE DB attribute . . Type . . .

Description :

1 TMI saved each hour on disk.

Field . . . . GROUP VARIABLE DB attribute TAB_CAL Type . . C 20

REFERENCES

Description :

References of variables in the group.

Maximum 48 terms

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 307
5.7.2.9. Generation of V08 Standard Deviation TMI (V09)

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG :GENE. STAND. DEV. V08 TMI (V09): : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF SIM FLG IND :CAL. CAD: ASSCTED VAR :INIT. VAL. :
: LABEL : : : SAVE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
: F : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 127 : Screen 6.2.9

This function copies the value of the standard deviation of a V08 type TMI into a
storage TMI.

Information required :
— ID code of the variable giving the result (IV),
— ID code of the associated V08 variable V08,
— calculation period.

Processing :

IV + Ǹ i+N
ȍ (TIi *NTM)
i+1
2

The result is invalid if the input TMI is invalid, and doubtful if the input TMI is doubtful.

The period of the V09 type TMI must be identical to that of the associated V08 TMI.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 308
 Field . . . . CAL CAD DB attribute . . . CAL_VAL Type . C 4

Description :

TMI calculation rate (see V01 ).

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . RFVAR Type . C 20

Description :

Reference of the input variable.

Field . . . . INIT VAL DB attribute . . . VM _INIT Type . C 8

Description :

Initialization value of the TMI (floating).

Field . . . . SAVE DB attribute . . . SAV_TMI Type . .

Description :

= 1 TMI saved each hour on disk.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 309
5.7.3. Multi–state Variables (VRI)
To declare truth tables, access the menus below:

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : CALCULATIONS AND RESULTS >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : GENERATE VRI >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : DECLARE TRUTH TABLES : :
: : DEFINE TRUTH TABLES : :
: : DECLARE VRI : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 128 : Screen 6.3

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 310
5.7.3.1. Declaration of Truth Tables

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARATION TABLES DE VERITE : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: FLG IND OUTPUT LABELS :
: VAR REF TVRI01 T 1 :
: LABEL COMMANDE DE GROUPE 2 :
: 3 :
: NUM 1 TABLE OK T 4 :
: 5 :
: 6 :
: INPUT LABELS 7 :
: 1 8 :
: 2 9 :
: 3 10 :
: 4 11 :
: 5 12 :
: 6 13 :
: 7 14 :
: 15 :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 129 : Screen 6.3.1

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . NOM_TAB Type . . . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the truth table.

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Number of the truth table (1 to100).

Field . . . . INPUT LABELS DB attribute . . Type . . C32

Description :

Input variable labels (for SYN documentation)

Field . . . . INPUT LABELS DB attribute . . Type . . C32

Description :

Output variable labels (for SYN documentation)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 311
5.7.3.2. Definition of Truth Tables

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : TRUTH TABLES COMPOSITION : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: VAR REF TVRI13 LABEL AVAILABILITY SQUARE :
: TAB NUM 13 :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: VALUE : 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5 : 6 : 7 : 8 : 9 :10 :11 :12 :13 :14 :15 :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: INVALIDITY STAT : / : / : / : / : : : : : : : : : : : :
: VARIABLE 1 STAT : 1 : 0 : 1 : 1 : : : : : : : : : : : :
: VARIABLE 2 STAT : 1 : / : 0 : 1 : : : : : : : : : : : :
: VARIABLE 3 STAT : 0 : / : / : 1 : : : : : : : : : : : :
: VARIABLE 4 STAT : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
: VARIABLE 5 STAT : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
: VARIABLE 6 STAT : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
: VARIABLE 7 STAT : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
: :–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––::
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 130 : Screen 6.3.2

Field . . . . TAB NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Number of the truth table (1 to 100).

Field . . . . VALUE DB attribute . . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Value of the VRI (1 to 15).

Field . . . . INVALIDITY STATE DB attribute . . . Type . . . C 1

Description :

State of variable invalidity: ’0”, ’1’, ’ / ’, or ’ ’

Field . . . . VARIABLE i STATE DB attribute . . . Type . . . C 1

Description :

State of variable i at input: ’0”, ’1’, ’ / ’, or ’ ’

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 312
5.7.3.3. Declaration of VRIs

A multi–state variable (VRI) is a logic variable calculated by the CENTRALOG system.

VRIs are used to supply a synthetic value from a set of a maximum of seven variables.
These variables are either TS values or TM states relative to thresholds.

An eighth variable, evaluated on the basis of the validity and status of the other seven,
represents the overall ”quality’ of the VRI inputs.

The resulting synthetic state, which provides the value of the VRI, is an integer which
can be used to express up to16 different states.

The value of the VRI is calculated from a truth table.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE VRI : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: SIM FLG IND :
: VAR REF 03KCZXUD001D F OU REF 03KCZ :
: LABEL BOILER 48VDC SOL VALVES AVLBY NUM 13 :
: :
: –––––––––––––– :
: : THRS TYPE : :
: ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : INPUT 0 VAR REF –INVALIDITY– : : :
: : INPUT 1 VAR REF 03KCZ011JA1D : : :
: : INPUT 2 VAR REF 03KCZ111XUMD : : :
: : INPUT 3 VAR REF : : :
: : INPUT 4 VAR REF : : :
: : INPUT 5 VAR REF : : :
: : INPUT 6 VAR REF : : :
: : INPUT 7 VAR REF : : :
: :–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 131 : Screen 6.3.3

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . . GRF_ID Type . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the Operative Unit in the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Number of the truth table used (1 to 100).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 313
 Field . . . . INPUT i VAR REF DB attribute REP_VIIi Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of input variable i (TS or TM with threshold).

Field . . . . THRS TYPE DB attribute SE_VRIi Type . . . . C 2

Description :

TM threshold to be taken into consideration : LL,LO, HI, HH.

Maximum 8 components. The first represents the logical ”OR” of the ’doubtful’ attribute
of each component.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 314
5.7.4. Declaration of TSP Variables

Declaration of TSPs Generated by the Application Programs

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : GENERATION DES TSP : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : FB NAME : ::
: LABEL : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: 8TSTAL0001 T : : :
: TSP ASSOCIEE à GRP_AL001 : : :
: : : :
: POPCCC_ENTIDD_DP T : : :
: D/L COND TE IDD PAR PO ESSAI : : :
: : : :
: POPCCC_ENTIDD_VP T : : :
: D/L COND TE IDD PAR PO ESSAI : : :
: : : :
: POPIDD_ENTIDD_DP T : : :
: D/L COND TE IDD PAR PO TE IDD : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 132 : Ecran 6.4

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 315
5.7.5. Generation of TMPs

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : GENERATE TMP : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : ACQ RAT : INITIAL :
: LABEL : : VALUE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : :
: F : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 133 : Screen 6.5

Field . . . . ACQ RAT DB attribute . . . AM_VAL Type . . C 2

Description :

Value of the TM calculation rate (1S 2S 5S 10S 15S 20S 30S 60S ).

Field . . . . INIT VAL DB attribute . . . . . . . . VM_INIT Type . . . . C 8

Description :

Initialization value of the TMP (floating point).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 316
5.7.6. Generation of VRPs

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : GENERATION DES VRP : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : OU REF : FB NAME : EDIT :
: LABEL : : : :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––+–––––––––––+––––––––––––––––:
: PRO–VRP01 : : : :
: PROCESS VRP 1 T :PROCESS : : 1 :
: : : : :
: STATE MESSAGES STATE MESSAGES :
: 0 1 :
: 2 3 :
: 4 5 :
: 6 7 :
: 8 9 :
: 10 11 :
: 12 13 :
: 14 15 :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
................................................................................

Fig. 134 : Screen 6.6

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . . Type . . C 8

Description :

ID tag of Operative Unit in the CENTRALOG. Cannot be modified by the operator.

Field . . . . FB NAME DB attribute . . . Type . . C 8

Description :

Function Block name.

Field . . . . EDIT DB attribute . . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Log printout: ”0” no printout, ”1” printout.

Field . . . . STATE MESSAGES 0 to 15 DB attribute . . . . . . Type N1

Description :

State messages i associated with the VRE.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 317
5.7.7. List of Optiplant TM Variables

This item is used to define Optiplant TM variables.

............................................................................
: CENTRALOG : LIST SUPERVISION TM : : : :
:..........................................................................:
: NUM : TM MEM : LABEL : :
: : TM REF : LABEL : :
...........................................................................:
: 1 : PRO–TMP01 : TEST DES CADENCES : :
: : OPT–TMPCTR01 : TMP1 CONTROLE OPTIPLANT : :
: 2 : : : :
: : : : :
: 3 : : : :
: : : : :
: 4 : : : :
: : : : :
...........................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS:
...........................................................................:

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Order number in list.

Field . . . . TM MEM DB attribute . . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable to be memorized.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of this variable used in the different Centralog displays.

Field . . . . TMP REF DB attribute . . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated TMP variable

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the associated variable.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 318
5.7.8. List of Optiplant Filter TM Variables

This item is used to define Optiplant filter TM variables.

............................................................................
: CENTRALOG : LIST OPTIPLANT TM : : : :
:..........................................................................:
: NUM : MEM TM : LABEL :NB SAMP :
: : TM REF : LABEL :LIMIT :
...........................................................................:
: 1 : PRO–TMPESS01 : TEST DES DIVERS : :
: : OPT–TMPFLT01 : TMP1 OPTIPLANT FILTERING : :
: 2 : : : :
: : : : :
: 3 : : : :
: : : : :
: 4 : : : :
: : : : :
...........................................................................:
:<<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS:
...........................................................................:

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Order number in list.

Field . . . . MEM TM DB attribute . . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable to be memorized.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of this variable used in the different Centralog displays.

Field . . . . TMP REF DB attribute . . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated TMP variable

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the associated variable.

Field . . . . NB SAMP DB attribute . . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Number of samples for average.

Field . . . . LIMIT DB attribute . . . Type . . N 5

Description :

Limit of validity of the TMP.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 319
5.7.9. Optiplant Parameters

This item is used to define the parameters of the Optiplant option.

Description of data input:

D Activation rate of the ”Block state and performance calculation” function

D Rate of transmission of TMP produced by TM filtering.

.......................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : OPTIPLANT RATE : : : :
: : : : : :
:.....................................................................................:
: VAR REF : CTR RATE : FLT RATE : :
: LABEL : : : :
:...........................................:.............:............:..............:
: : : : :
: OPTI : 15 MN : 5 MN : :
: IMPLEMENTATION OF OPTIPLANT : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:...........................................:.............:............:..............:
:<<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS:
:.....................................................................................:

Field . . . . CTR RATE DB attribute . . . Type . . C 4

Description :

Calculation activation rate

Field . . . . FLT RATE DB attribute . . . Type . . C 4

Description :

TMP transmission rate.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 320
5.8. DESCRIPTION OF LOGIC VARIABLES
To describe TS variables, access the menus below:

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : DESCRIBE VARIABLES >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : DESCRIBE TS : :
: : DESCRIBE TM : :
: : DESCRIBE TM THRESHOLDS : :
: : DECLARE ALARM GROUPS : :
: : DEFINE ALARM GROUPS : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 135 : Screen 7

5.8.1. Description of TS Variables

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DESCRIBE TS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF GRA FLG IND:CTR REF : DIR :ED:A :OPER VAR MIM LOG :
: LABEL :OU REF :URG ACK: ED:D :DIST T TSI COPY E :
: CODE COMMENT SIM HDSR: :STD HRN:REINIT:TS TP TMI SOE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : : :
: 03KITSSV1 E T : TSS : : 1 : F F F F :
: INTERFACE STATION 1 :03KIT : 0 : 1 : F 0 F F 0 :
: 1 : : 1 : 1 : F F F 0 :
: : : : : :
: 03KITSSV2 E F : TSS : : 1 : F F F F :
: INTERFACE STATION 2 :03KIT : 0 : 1 : F 0 F F 0 :
: 1 : : 1 : 1 : F F F 0 :
: : : : : :
: 03KITDSV1 E F : TSS : : 1 : F F F F :
: INTERFACE STATION 1 START UP :03KIT : 0 : 1 : F 0 F F 0 :
: 2 : : 1 : 1 : F F F 0 :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 136 : Screen 7.1

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 321
 Field . . . . GRA DB attribute . . . Type . C 1

Description :

= E extraction of the variable to the CCC_M function .

Field . . . . CTR REF DB attribute . . . AUT_TRI Type . C 6

Description :

Reference of the automation cell (not modifiable).

Field . . . . DIR DB attribute . . . AL_DIR Type . C 1

Description :

= 1 : Appearance of alarm when1 state of the variable changes from 0 to 1,

= 0 : Appearance of alarm when 1 state of the variable changes from 1 to 0.

Field . . . . ED : A DB attribute . . . ET_APPA Type . C 1

Description :

= 1 for printout on appearance (variable changes from 0 to 1) else = 0.

Field . . . . OPER DB attribute . . . Type . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable belongs to one or more operator groups.

Field . . . . VAR DB attribute . . . Type . L 1

Description :

=T if the alarm type variable is utilized as a parameter (TC, TVC, VRI).

Field . . . . MIM DB attribute . . . Type . L 1

Description :

=T if the alarm type variable is associated to a mimic.

Field . . . . LOG DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable belongs to a log.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 322
 Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . GRF_ID Type . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the Operative Unit in the CENTRALOG.

Field . . . . URG DB attribute . . AL_DEG Type . . C 1

Description :

’0’ : Type state – ’1’ to ’4’ : degree of urgency of the alarm

’1’ : highest priority / ’4’ : lowest priority.

Field . . . . ACK DB attribute . . AL_ACQ Type . . C 1

Description :

= 1 to display the alarm in the list of acknowledged variables after acknowledgement of

the appearance of an alarm, else = 0

Field . . . . ED : D DB attribute . . ET_DISPA Type . . C 1

Description :

= 1 for for printout on disappearance (variable changes from 1 to 0), else= 0

Field . . . . DIST DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the logic variable belongs to one or more disturbance monitoring groups.

Field . . . . T DB attribute . . DECLEN Type . . N 1

Description :

= T if the variable trips one or more a disturbance logs.

Field . . . . TSI DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is used in one or more Boolean equations (TSI).

Field . . . . COPY DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the logic variable is copied to telecommands (copy command function ).

Field . . . . E DB attribute . . EV_PR Type . . N 1

Description :

= 1 if the variable belongs to the ’Principal Events’ section in the shift log.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 323
 Field . . . . CODE DB attribute . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Code number associated to state messages to be associated to the TS (1 to 999).

(see Screen 1.6.1)

Field . . . . COMMENT DB attribute . . Type . . C 12

Description :

User zone.

Field . . . . HDSR DB attribute . . V_HDSR Type . . C 1

Description :

= 0 : variable not stored by the HDSR function

= 1 : variable stored by the HDSR function

Field . . . . STD DB attribute . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Standard input number for TS

From the DESCRIBE TS screen, simultaneously press keys <CTRL–END> (Other

commands), then key <S> to access a screen which can be used to configure four
standard groups (STD), fixing a value for the following fields:

D URG

D DIR

D ACK

D KLX

D ED : A

D ED : D

D REINIT

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 324
 STD SCREEN

M–ETE CEGELEC / /
................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DESCRIBE TS : DISK : : :
:..............................................................................:
: .................................................... :
: : STD VL : :
: .................................................... :
:...................................................:......................... :
:: : : : : : : : : : :
::STD :STANDARD :URG :DIR : ACK :KLX :ED : A :ED : D :REINIT :
: : : : : : : : : : : :
: :: .. .................... ....................................................:
:: : : : ; : : : : : :
:: : : ; : : : : : : :
:: : : : ; : : : : : :
:: : : : ; : : : : : :
:: : : : ; : : : : : :
:: : : : ; : : : : :
:: : : : ; : : : : : :
:: : : : ; : : : : : :
::...................:.........................................................:
: :
:<ESCAPE> ABANDON <CTRL–W> VALIDATION :
: :
................................................................................

The groups are numbered 1 to 4 (STD group)

The STD field In the DESCRIBE TS screen is completed by the operator. It represents
the number of the STD group.

Field . . . . KLX DB attribute . . AL_KLX Type . . C 1

Description :

Assigns the alarm to a klaxon : 1, 2 or 3. (if URG > 0).

Field . . . . REINIT DB attribute . . TRAI_CG Type . . C 1

Description :

= 1 execution of all processing (alarm, printout, disturbance etc.) on initial general

check of the variable, else = 0.

Field . . . . TS DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is utilized in one or more screen trend columns.

Field . . . . TP DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is utilized in one or more printer trend columns.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 325
 Field . . . . TMI DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is utilized in an analog calculation (TMI).

Field . . . . SOE DB attribute . . DEC_SOE Type . . N 1

Description :

=1 if the variable trips an SOE log.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 326
5.8.2. Description of TM Variables

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DESCRIBE TM : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: FLG IND OU REF 03KIT :
: VAR REF 03KITYN001 F :
: LABEL UNIT 3 GEN OUTPUT ACTIVE POWER CTR REF V02 :
: :
: COMMENT UNIT 58 HDSR 0 GRA E SIM :
: THRES TEND MEMO 1 SENSIB 1 :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :ED:DIFF : V MIN 0.000000 : URG 3 : :
: :THRESHOLD GRAD : V MAX 500.0000 : URG 3 : :
: :GRA DEF REF : FILT 0.000000 : HRN 1 : :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : OPER F : TS F : TSI F : LOG F : :
: : DIST F : TP F : TMI F : E 0 : :
: : BAR F : PR F : VAR F : MIM F : :
: : CUR F : COUXY F : : COPY F : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 137 : Screen 7.2

Field . . . . OU REF DB attribute . . GRF_ID Type . . C 8

Description :

Reference of the Operative Unit in the CENTRALOG system.

Field . . . . CTR REF DB attribute . . AUT_TRI Type . . C 6

Description :

Reference of the automation cell for a TME variable,

”TMI” for a TMI variable, ”TMP” for a TMP variable (not modifiable)

Field . . . . COMMENT DB attribute . . Type . . C 12

Description :

User zone.

Field . . . . UNIT DB attribute . . UNITE_VM Type . . N 2

Description :

Code number associated to the TM unit of measurement.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 327
 Field . . . . HDSR DB attribute . . V_HDSR Type . . C 1

Description :

= 0 : variable not stored by the HDSR function

= 1 : variable stored by the HDSR function

Field . . . . GRA DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

= E extraction of the variable to the CCC_M function .

Field . . . . THRES DB attribute . . Type . . C 1

Description :

= ’S’ to assign the measurement variable to threshold processing, else = ’ ’

Field . . . . TEND MEMO DB attribute . . MEM_TEND Type . . C 2

Description :

Value used to sample acquisitions expressed in multiple of the acquisition rate (ACQ
RAT in TM acquisition screens).

Field . . . . ED : DIFF DB attribute . . ECA_EDI Type . . C 8

Description :

Difference between two acquisitions printed out in event log.

Expressed in percentage of the full scale: 0 = no printout.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 328
 Field . . . . V MIN DB attribute . . . VM_MIN Type . . . . C 8

Description :

Value of minimum limit of the variable.

Field . . . . URG (V_MIN) DB attribute . . DEG_MIN Type . . C 1

Description :

Degree of urgency of the alarm caused by violation of the minimum limit of the variable :
’0’ : type state
’1’ a ’4’ : degree of urgency of the alarm.

Field . . . . THRESHOLD GRAD DB attribute . . . VAL_GRA Type . . C 8

Description :

Threshold of detection gradient over two acquisition cycles (in this case enter the TSP
in the following field).

Field . . . . GRA DEF REF DB attribute . . . REP_GRA Type . . . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the gradient fault TSP.

Field . . . . V MAX DB attribute . . . VM_MAX Type . . . . C 8

Description :

Value of maximum limit of the variable.

Field . . . . URG (V_MAX) DB attribute . . DEG_MAX Type . . C 1

Description :

Degree of urgency of the alarm caused by violation of the maximum limit of the
variable:
’0’ : type state
’1’ to ’4’ : degree of urgency of the alarm.

Field . . . . FILT DB attribute . . VM_FILT Type . . C 8

Description :

Value of the filtering coefficient (KFI): 0 to 1 not applicable operator variables (TMO)
Measurement filtered = (1–KFI) *measurement acquired +KFI *previous
measurement.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 329
 Field . . . . KLX DB attribute . . AL_KLX Type . . C 1

Description :

Assignment of the alarm (limit or threshold violations) to a klaxon : 1, 2 or 3

(= 0 if pas of alarm).

Field . . . . OPER DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable belongs to one or more operator groups (Define OU screen).

Field . . . . TS DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is utilized in one or more trend on screen views.

Field . . . . TSI DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is utilized in a Boolean equation (TSI).

Field . . . . LOG DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable belongs to a log.

Field . . . . DIST DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the measurement variable belongs to one or more disturbance monitoring

groups.

Field . . . . TP DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is utilized in one or more printer trend columns.

Field . . . . TMI : DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is utilized in an analog (TMI).

Field . . . . E DB attribute . . EV_PR Type . . N 1

Description :

= 1 if the variable belongs to the ”Principal Events” section of the shift log.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 330
 Field . . . . BAR DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is utilized in one or more bargraphs.

Field . . . . VAR DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is utilized as a parameter (TC, TVC, VRI).

Field . . . . MIM DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the alarm type variable is utilized in a mimic.

Field . . . . CUR DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is utilized in one or more curves.

Field . . . . PR DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the variable is utilized in one or more Pen Recorder outputs.

Field . . . . COPY DB attribute . . Type . . L 1

Description :

=T if the measurement variable is copied to setpoint commands (command copy

function).

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 331
5.8.3. Description of TM Thresholds

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DESCRIBE THRESHOLD (TM) : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND:HYST:TYPE VALUE URG: VAR THRSH :
: LABEL : : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : :
:03FRSZT55A F : 0 : LL 2.000000 0 : :
:LEFT RH SPRAY VV POSITION : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:03FRSZT55B F : 0 : LL 2.000000 0 : :
:RIGHT RH SPRAY VV POSITION : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 138 : Screen 7.3

Field . . . . HYST DB attribute . . SL_HYST Type . . N 3

Description :

Value of the hysteresis coefficient to be applied to threshold processing : 0 to 100.

Expressed as a percentage of the full scale.

Field . . . . TYPE (LL) DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Type of threshold: LL

Field . . . . VALUE (LL) DB attribute . . . SL_V1 Type . . . . C 8

Description :

Value of the LL threshold.

Field . . . . URG (LL) DB attribute . . . . SL_P1 Type . . C 1

Description :

’0’ : state type – ’1’ to ’4’ : degree of urgency of the threshold

’1’ : highest priority / ’4’ : lowest priority.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 332
 Field . . . . VAR THRESH (LL) DB attribute . . . . SL_R1 Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable defining the LL threshold .

Field . . . . TYPE (LO) DB attribute . . . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Type of threshold: LO.

Field . . . . VALUE (LO) DB attribute . . . SL_V2 Type . . C 8

Description :

Value of the LO threshold.

Field . . . . URG (LO) DB attribute . . . . SL_P2 Type . . C 1

Description :

’0’ : state type – ’1’ to ’4’ : degree of urgency of the threshold

’1’ : highest priority / ’4’ : lowest priority.

Field . . . . VAR THRESH (LO) DB attribute . . . . SL_R2 Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable defining the LO threshold.

Field . . . . PRIORITY (LO) DB attribute . . PRI_SL Type . . N 1

Description :

Priority LO variable threshold:

0 : no variable threshold
1 to 4 : priority of the variable threshold.

Field . . . . TYPE (HI) DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Type of threshold: HI.

Field . . . . VALUE (HI) DB attribute . . . SL_V3 Type . . C 8

Description :

Value of the HI threshold.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 333
 Field . . . . URG (HI) DB attribute . . SL_P3 Type . . C 1

Description :

’0’ : state type – ’1’ to ’4’ : degree of urgency of the threshold

’1’ : highest priority / ’4’ : lowest priority.

Field . . . . VAR THRESH (HI) DB attribute SL_R3 Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable defining the LO threshold.

Field . . . . PRIORITY (HI) DB attribute . . PRI_SL Type . . N 1

Description :

Priority HI variable threshold:

0 : no variable threshold
1 to 4 : priority of the variable threshold.

Field . . . . TYPE (HH) DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Type of threshold: HH.

Field . . . . VALUE (HH) DB attribute . . . SL_V4 Type . . C 8

Description :

Value of the HH threshold.

Field . . . . URG (HH) DB attribute . . SL_P4 Type . . C 1

Description :

’0’ : state type – ’1’ to ’4’ : degree of urgency of the threshold

’1’ : highest priority / ’4’ : lowest priority.

Field . . . . VAR THRESH (HH) DB attribute SL_R4 Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the measurement variable defining the HH threshold.

Field . . . . PRIORITY (HH) DB attribute . . PRI_SL Type . . N 1

Description :

Priority HH variable threshold:

0 : no variable threshold
1 to 4 : priority of the variable threshold.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 334
5.8.3.1. Declaration of Alarm Groups

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE ALARM GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF FLG IND : TSP REF : ENTITY :
: LABEL : : :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : : :
: F : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 139 : Screen 1.5.5

Field TSP REF DB attribute . . . REP_TSP Type C 20

Description :

Reference of the alarm group TSP

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 335
5.8.3.2. Composition of Alarm Groups

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DEFINE ALARM GROUPS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF :
: LABEL :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: NUM : ALA REF : LABEL : TYPE :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
:–––––––:–––––––––––––––––:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:––––––––––––––:
: 1 : 01KITTSI001 : CENTRALOG INTERNAL TSI 1 : 01 :
: : : : :
: 2 : : : :
: : : : :
: 3 : 01ADGY5900 : STM PRES REDUCING VV TARGET : 99 :
: : : : :
: 4 : 01CEXTE101 : EWP 1 SUCTION TEMP : 02 :
: : : : :
: 5 : 01GGRTE006 : IP REAR BRG LUB OIL RETURN TEMP : :
: : : : :
: 6 : : : :
: : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 140 : Screen 1.5.6

Field NUM DB attribute . . . ORD_VAR Type N 2

Description :

Number of command in the list

Field . . . ALA REF DB attribute . . . REP_ALA Type C 20

Description :

ID of the alarm (TS or TM)

Field . . . TYPE DB attribute . . . OPE_ALA Type C 12

Description :

Type of the alarm :

=0 TS tripped at 0
=1 TS tripped at 1
=2 TM tripped at high limit
=3 TM tripped at very high threshold
=4 TM tripped at high threshold
=5 TM tripped at low threshold
=6 TM tripped at very low threshold
=7 TM tripped at very low limit

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 336
5.9. DEFINITION OF GATEWAY VARIABLES

To define Gateway variables access the menus shown below:

.........................................................................
: DEFINE GATEWAY VARIABLES > :
:.......................................................................:
.........................................................................
: :
: :
: DEFINE GATEWAY TS :
: :
: DEFINE GATEWAY TM :
: :
: DEFINE GATEWAY TC :
: :
: DEFINE GATEWAY TVC :
: :
: DEFINE GATEWAY VR :
: :
:.......................................................................:

5.9.1. Definition of Gateway TS Variables

This item is used to declare the list of TS variables transmitted or received by Gateway.
.........................................................................
: CENTRALOG : GATEWAY TS : : : :
:...........:..............:.........:...............:..................:
: NUM : ASSOC VAR : GATEWAY REF : GTW :
: : LABEL FLG IND : : 1 2 3 4 :
:........:...........................:...............:..................:
: : : : :
: 13 : 00LJP0330JA1 F : GTW–TS01 : R :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:.......................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS:
.........................................................................

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . N 4

Description :

Order number in list

Field . . . . ASSOC VAR DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated variable

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 337
 Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the associated variable.

Field . . . . GATEWAY REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Gateway reference of the variable. All Gateway variables comprise this ID.

Field . . . . GTW 1 2 3 4 DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Transmission, reception or transmission/reception by GTWi : ”E”, ”R”, or ”ER”

5.9.2. Definition of Gateway TM Variables

This item is used to declare the list of TM variables transmitted or received by

Gateway.
.........................................................................
: CENTRALOG : TM GATEWAY : : : :
:...........:..............:.........:...............:..................:
: RATE : ASSOC VAR : GATEWAY REF : GTW :
: NUM : LABEL FLG IND : CONV : 1 2 3 4 :
:........:...........................:...............:..................:
: : : : :
: 20 : 01KITTM10001 F : GTW–TM01 : R :
: 5 : TMI SEUIL TRES BAS : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:.......................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS:
.........................................................................

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Order number in list

Field . . . . RATE DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Gateway output rate.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 338
 Field . . . . ASSOC VAR DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated variable

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the associated variable.

Field . . . . GATEWAY REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Gateway reference of the variable. All Gateway variables comprise this ID.

Field . . . . GTW 1 2 3 4 DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Transmission, reception or transmission/reception by GTWi : ”E”, ”R”, or ”ER”

Field . . . . CONV DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Gateway TM conversion code number.

5.9.3. Definition of Gateway TC Variables

This item is used to declare the list of TC variables transmitted or received by Gateway.
...................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : TC GATEWAY : : : :
:................:......................................:.........:........:......:
: NUM : ASSOC VAR FLG IND : GATEWAY REF : DIR : GTW :
: : LABEL : AUTH REF : : 1 2 3 4:
:........:.........................................:.............:.......:........:
: 1 : 0101APAHICS52–A–KYS–T F : GTW–TC01 : : R :
: : BF WP 1 SPEED CTRL STATION : 1 : : :
: : : 2 : : :
: : : 3 : : :
: : : 4 : : :
: : : : : :
:.................................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS:
...................................................................................

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Order number in list

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 339
 Field . . . . ASSOC VAR DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated variable

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the associated variable.

Field . . . . GATEWAY REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Gateway reference of the variable. All Gateway variables comprise this ID.

Field . . . . GTW 1 2 3 4 DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Transmission, reception or transmission/reception by GTWi : ”E”, ”R”, or ”ER”

Field . . . . REP AUTO DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of Gateway authorization variable #n (n = 1 to 5)

Field . . . . DIR DB attribute . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Authorization sense (0 or 1) (authorization if TS value = DIR)

5.9.4. Definition of Gateway TVC Variables

This item is used to declare the list of TVC variables transmitted or received by
Gateway.
...................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : TC GATEWAY : : : :
:................:......................................:.........:........:......:
: NUM : ASSOC VAR FLG IND : GATEWAY REF : CONV : GTW :
: : LABEL : AUTH REF : DIR : 1 2 3 4:
:........:.........................................:.............:.......:........:
: 1 : 01HDGHIKN001 F : GTW–TVC01 : 2 : E :
: : FW TANK PRES SETPOINT DEMAND :1 01APAYS900 : : :
: : :2 01APAYS901 : : :
: : :3 01APAYS903 : : :
: : :4 01APAYS904 : : :
: : :5 01APAYS905 : : :
:.................................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS:
...................................................................................

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 340
 Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Order number in list

Field . . . . ASSOC VAR DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated variable

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the associated variable.

Field . . . . GATEWAY REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Gateway reference of the variable. All Gateway variables comprise this ID.

Field . . . . GTW 1 2 3 4 DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Transmission, reception or transmission/reception by GTWi : ”E”, ”R”, or ”ER”

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 341
 Field . . . . AUTH REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of Gateway authorization variable #n (n = 1 to 5)

Field . . . . DIR DB attribute . . Type . . N 1

Description :

Authorization sense (0 or 1) (authorization if TS value = DIR)

Field . . . . CONV DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Gateway TVC conversion code number.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 342
5.9.5. Definition of VR Gateway Variables

This item is used to declare the list of VR variables transmitted or received by Gateway.
.........................................................................
: CENTRALOG : VR GATEWAY : : : :
:...........:..............:.........:...............:..................:
: CAD : ASSOC VAR : GATEWAY REF : GTW :
: NUM : LABEL FLG IND : CONV : 1 2 3 4 :
:........:...........................:...............:..................:
: : : : :
: : F : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:.......................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS:
.........................................................................

Field . . . . NUM DB attribute . . Type . . N 2

Description :

Order number in list

Field . . . . ASSOC VAR DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the associated variable

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the associated variable.

Field . . . . GATEWAY REF DB attribute . . Type . . C 20

Description :

Gateway reference of the variable. All Gateway variables comprise this ID.

Field . . . . GTW 1 2 3 4 DB attribute . . Type . . C 2

Description :

Transmission, reception or transmission/reception by GTWi : ”E”, ”R”, or ”ER”

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 343
5.10. DEFINITION OF OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS

See Chapter 5.3

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 344
5.11. COMMAND COPY GROUPS

Command copy groups are used to:

D transmit up to 20 TCs on the basis of a TS state change,

D transmit up to 20 setpoint commands on the basis of one TM acquisition.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : REPRODUCTION OF VARIABLES >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : DECLARE COMMAND COPY GROUPS : :
: : TS COPY TO TC : :
: : TM COPY TO TVC : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 141 : Screen 9

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 345
5.11.1. Declaration of Command Copy

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : COPY GROUPS DECLARATION : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF : LABEL : :FLG:IND :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: : : : F : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 142 : Screen 9.1

Field . . . . VAR REF DB attribute . . . REP_ID Type . . . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the copy group.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . . . C 32

Description :

Label of the copy group.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 346
5.11.2. TS Copy to TC

REFERENCE OF TS TO BE COPIED/ REFERENCES OF TCs

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : TS COPY TO TC : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF :
: LABEL FLG F IND :
: ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : ORDER ASSCTED VAR LABEL : :
: : 0 : :
: À–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––ÂÙ :
: : REF 1 : :
: : REF 2 : :
: : REF 3 : :
: : REF 4 : :
: : REF 5 : :
: : REF 6 : :
: : REF 7 : :
: : REF 8 : :
: : REF 9 : :
: : REF 10 : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL+HOME> HELP <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 143 : Screen 9.2

Field . . . . ORDER DB attribute . . . Type . N 3

Description :

Order in the list of variables to be copied.

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . Type . C 20

Description :

Reference of the TS to be copied.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . Type . C 32

Description :

Label of the TS to be copied.

Field . . . . REF i : 3KCAPI3CMD DB attribute . . . REP_RECi Type . C 20

Description :

Reference of the variable i to be transmitted (maximum 20 TCs).

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB_RCi Type . . . . C 32

Description :

Label of the TCi to be transmitted.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 347
5.11.3. TM Copy to TVC

REFERENCE OF THE TM TO BE COPIED / TVC REFERENCES

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : TM COPY TO TVC : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: VAR REF :
: LABEL FLG F IND :
: ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : ORDER ASSCTED VAR LABEL : :
: : 0 : :
: :–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : REF 1 : :
: : REF 2 : :
: : REF 3 : :
: : REF 4 : :
: : REF 5 : :
: : REF 6 : :
: : REF 7 : :
: : REF 8 : :
: : REF 9 : :
: : REF 10 : :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 144 : Screen 9.3

Field . . . . ORDER DB attribute . . . Type . . N 3

Description :

Order in the list of variables to be copied.

Field . . . . ASSCTED VAR DB attribute . . . REP_ID Type . . . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the TM to be copied.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB Type . . . . . C 32

Description :

Label of the TM to be copied.

Field . . . . REF i DB attribute . . . REP_RECi Type . . C 20

Description :

Reference of the TVCi to be transmitted.

Field . . . . LABELi DB attribute . . . LIB_RCi Type . . C 32

Description :

Label of the TVCi to be transmitted.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 348
5.12. ADMINISTRATION

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : ADMINISTRATION >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : CHECK DATABASE INTEGRITY : :
: : CLOSE DATABASE NUMBER : :
: : CHECK AND GENERATE LATEST BLOCK VERSION : :
: :CHECK AND GENERATE CONTROTEST LATEST BLOCK VERSION: :
: : CHECK AND GENERATE LATEST BLOCK VERSION (C33.2) : :
: : CHECK AND GENERATE LATEST BLOCK VERS CONTROTEST : :
: : INTERNAL DOCUMENTS >: :
: : EXTERNAL DOCUMENTS >: :
: : CCC–M EXPORT >: :
: : COUNTRY LABELS >: :
: : UTILITIES >: :
: :..................................................: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 145 : Screen 10

5.12.1. Checking Database Integrity

This operation includes:

D deleting variables destroyed during interactive sessions from all files.

Variables are deleted interactively from the variable acquisition or definition

screens.

The operation will delete the variable from all the screens where it is used.

D updating variable references and labels.

Any modification of references and labels is implemented on all screens where

these terms are used.

Note : – This program should be run on a daily basis.

– After performing this operation, a consistency report can be
displayed and printed out.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 349
5.12.2. Close Database Number

Program closing and incrementing the database version number.

This operation affixes a new database number to all the records for which the
modification flag is set to true.

Indicate the new number and the date then confirm.

NB.

D The compositon of the database number is not checked or tested in any way.

D The number must comprise two characters.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 350
5.12.3. Checking and Generating the DVT

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : CHECK & GENERATE DVT : S.136 : : CENT 1 :
:..............................................................................:
: :
: EXTRACTION NUMBER : 112 C54.3.1 COMPLETE : F :
:––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF AQUISIT :
:<ESC> ABORT :
: :
................................................................................

Fig. 146 : Screen 10.4

The DVT must be checked and generated after any modification to the
database.

After selecting sub–menu ”Check and Generate DVT”, respond to the

questions which are proposed:

See paragraph ”Inputs common to both types of extraction”

(at the end of the § 5.12.4. ) for further information

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 351
5.12.4. Check and Generate DVT CONTROTEST

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : CHECK & GENERATE DVT CONTROTEST: S.76 : : CENT 1 :
:..............................................................................:
: OU REF : LABEL : :
:–––––––––––+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––:
: GEN : GENERAL VARIABLES : 62 :
: GRO : OPERATOR GROUPS : 20 :
: HYD : CHARTS AND SCHEDULES : 0 ;
: LOG : PERIODIC LOGS : 0 :
: TIT : HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE : 25 :
: TRP : TREND ON SCREEN : 0 :
: TRS : TREND ON PRINTER : 0 :
: TRT : PROCESSING : 327 :
: TVR : TRUTH TABLES : 11 :
: OU : : 69 :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
:..............................................................................:
: OU PROCESSING <ANPST> OU TYPE <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE :
: <ESC> ABORT <F6> ADD OU <F8> DEL OU <PGDN> NEXT PAGE :
: <R> REINIT <F7> ADD CTR <F9> DEL OU <CTRL–END> GENERATION DVT :
................................................................................

Fig. 147 : Screen 10.5

Select the types of Operative Units to be generated (<ANPST>):

— <P> Principal Operative Units
The screen displays the Operative Units of the Principal type.
These are Operative Units in the elementary system being tested.
Variables in Principal OUs are not printed out in the event log.
— <S> Secondary Operative Units
The screen displays the Secondary type Operative Units which the
operator has selected.
These are OUs associated to the Principal OUs selected.
Variables in Secondary OUs,
D are always printed out in the event log.

D do not give rise to alarms

— <N> Normal Operative Units
The screen displays the Norrnal type Operative Units which the operator
has selected.
The alarm management and event log printout functions are not modified
unlike Principal and Secondary OU attributes.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 352
 — <A> Additional Operative Unit
The screen displays Operative Units containing variables associated to
variables which do not belong to Principal, Secondary or Normal OUs.
Only the referenced variables of these Additional OUs are selected.
This screen can not be modified.
— <T> Processing Operative Units
The screen displays Processing type Operative Units which are
automatically configured by the system and which the operator cannot
modify.
When N , P or S type screens are selected the following operations are possible:
— Key <F6> adds an OU.
— Key <F7> adds all the OUs in a controller
— Key <F8> deletes an OU.
— Key <F9> switches an OU from one type to another (N, P, S)
The choice ”<R> REINIT” is used to deselect all N , P , S or A type Operative Units with
the exception of the OU containing the general project TSSs.

The choice ”<CTRL–END> GENERATION DVT” is used to execute a database check

and generation.

<F4> GENERATION

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 353
 Inputs common two both types of extraction

— Complete : ’F’ (False) for partial and ’T’ (true) for complete
Press F1 to terminate input
— Confirmation (Y/N): Y
— With confirmation after verification (Y/N) : N
— Enter the three character code of the transmitter of the generation and
modify the date if necessary.
Press F1 to terminate input
— Confirmation (Y/N) : Y
— Message on screen :” Checking..”
— At the end of the check, a new screen shows the number of errors
generated.
There are three categories of error:
D FATAL ERRORS : Any fatal error prevents generation.

D ERRORS : These are errors due to the failure to input

required data thus causing the invalidity of
variables.

D WARNINGS : These are caused by the failure to input

non essential data.
This type of error does not invalidate the
object.
By default the value of non entered data is

that defined in the modeling.

— Display file (Y/N) : Y to see errors and warnings and
make necessary corrections.
— Printout (Y/N) : : Y prints error file
N return to sub–menu
After the ’’CHECK AND GENERATE DVT” operation and if no fatal errors are generated, the
modified OUs can be transferred to the CCC–S.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 354
5.12.5. Internal Documents

Menu : PRINT USER MANUAL

Prints user manual after input of plan numbers and index.

The system generates a file in the following tree structure:

c30\ete\manuels\man_uti.doc (C30)

c10\ete\manuels\man_uti.doc (C10)
or
<aff>project code (C50)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 355
5.12.6. External Documents

5.12.6.1. Declaration of External Documents

This screen is used to declare the list of Customer documents for printout.

Remarks: – A standard document must be defined for all documents

declared.
This standard document is stored as part of the internal
documentation.

– To print out a declared document, the printout flag must

be set to ”T” (true).

A list and the composition of the Customer documents available can be obtained by
printing out the internal documentation.

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : DECLARE EXTERNAL DOCUMENTS : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: ARCHIVE NUM BASE : IND DATE :
: CONSORTIUM NUMBER PRINT FLAG F :
: ANALYTIC NUMBER DOCUMENT TYPE 0 CTR REF :
: TITLE :
: :
: :
: IND DATE LABEL :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:<F1> END OF ACQUISIT <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE <?> CHOICE LIST :
:<ESC> ABORT <PGDN> NEXT PAGE <CTRL–D> DVT FOLLOW UP :
: <CTRL–END> OTHER COMMANDS :
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 148 : Screen 10.6.1

Field . . . . ARCHIV NUM DB attribute . . . NUM_ARCH Type . C 11

Description :

CEGELEC plan archive number (P****A*****)

Field . . . . IND DB attribute . . . BASE_IND Type . C 2

Description :

Index number of the last database closure automatically updated on request for
transmission with index.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 356
 Field . . . . DATE DB attribute . . . BASE_DAT Type . C 8

Description :

Date of the last database closure automatically updated on request for transmission
with index.

Field . . CONSORTIUM NUMBER DB attribute NUM_CONS Type . C 20

Description :

Consortium number of the plan to be restored.

Field . . . . PRINT FLAG DB attribute . . . FLG_EDT Type . L 1

Description :

T if the document is selected for printout.

Field . . . . ANALYTIC NUMBER DB attribute . . . NUM_ANA Type . C 19

Description :

Analytic number of the plan.

Field . . . . DOCUMENT TYPE DB attribute . . . TYP_DOC Type . N 2

Description :

Type and format of the document defined on creation of the document.

Field . . . . CTR REF DB attribute . . . AUT_TRI Type . C 6

Description :

Reference of the automation cell for documents associated to an automation cell.

Field . . . . TITLE DB attribute . . . TITREi Type . C 34

Description :

Title i of the plan (gad)

Field . . . . IND DB attribute . . . V_IND_1 Type . C 2

Description :

Document transmission number.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 357
 Field . . . . DATE DB attribute . . . DATE_1 Type . C 8

Description :

Date of transmission.

Field . . . . LABEL DB attribute . . . LIB1_1 Type . C 64

Description :

Label of the index number.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 358
 DOCUMENT FILES

TYPE OF
DOCUMENT TITLE OF DOCUMENT

1 DECLARE CENTRALOG SYSTEM

DECLARE OPTIONS
CENTRALOG SYSTEM DIMENSIONS
CENTRALOG SYSTEM PARAMETERS

2 STATE OR ALARM MESSAGES

MEASUREMENT UNITS
MEASUREMENT CONVERSION
PROTECTION LEVEL/ PROCESSING NUMBER

3 DECLARE OPERATIVE UNITS

5 DECLARE CVS STATION

CVS STATION INITIALIZATION ENTITY
CVS STATION INITIALIZATION VIEW
FONT DEFINITION
DIRECT ACCESS TO MODIFIABLE VIEWS
CVS STATION KEY BAND MENUS

6 DEFINE ASSOCIATED VIEWS

10 DECLARE CNS STATION

SYCOWAY ACCESS POINT
DECLARE P320 AUTOMATION CELLS

11 CONFIGURE P320 AUTOMATION CELLS

P320 CE2000 TSE ACQUISITIONS
P320 CE2000 TME ACQUISITIONS
ACQUISITION OF RESULTS OF P320 TS EQUATIONS
ACQUISITION OF RESULTS OF P320 TM EQUATIONS
TSE ACQUISITION BY SMCA MODULE
TME ACQUISITION BY SMCA MODULE
DECLARE P320 TCE
DECLARE P320 TVCE
ACQUISITION OF P320 SYSTEM FAULT TS

Fig. 149 : Standard external document files

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 359
 TYPE OF
DOCUMENT TITLE OF DOCUMENT

15 DECLARE TSS

16 DECLARE TMO

18 DECLARE TSP
DECLARE TMP

18 GENERATE TSP
GENERATE TM
P
31 GENERATE TSI

32 GENERATE DERIVATIVE TMI (V01)

GENERATE POLISH TMI (V02)
GENERATE RESTORATION TMI (V03)
GENERATE AVERAGE TMI (V04)
GENERATE AVERAGE WITH RESTORE TMI (V05)
GENERATE COUNTING TMI (V06)
GENERATE RUNNING TIME TMI (V07)
GENERATE AVERAGE TM GROUP TMI (V08)
GENERATE STANDARD DEVIATION V08 TMI (V09)

33 DECLARE TCI
DECLARE TVCI

40 DEFINE TS

42 DEFINE TM
DESCRIPTION OF THRESHOLDS (TM)

45 DECLARE TREND ON SCREEN GROUPS

DEFINE TREND ON SCREEN GROUPS
DECLARE TREND ON PRINTER GROUPS
DEFINE TREND ON PRINTER GROUPS

Fig. 150 : Standard external document files (cont’d 1)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 360
 TYPE DE
DOCUMENT TITLE OF DOCUMENT

47 DECLARE PERIODIC LOGS

DECLARE SHIFT AND DAILY LOG GROUPS
DECLARE WEEKLY LOG GROUPS
DAILY EVENT LOG SECTIONS
DEFINE PERIODIC LOGS
MAINTENANCE LOG PARAMETERS
DECLARE SOE LOGS
DEFINE SOE LOGS
LOG STORAGE

48 DECLARE DISTURBANCE LOGS

DISTURBANCE TRIP (TS)
DISTURBANCE GROUP ATTRIBUTION (TM)

49 DECLARE OPERATOR GROUPS

DEFINE OPERATOR GROUPS

50 INTERNAL LIST NAMES

ACKNOWLEDGED ALARMS LISTS
UNACKNOWLEDGED ALARMS LISTS
ALARMS BY DEGREE OF URGENCY

51 DECLARE BARGRAPH GROUPS

DEFINE BARGRAPH GROUPS

52 DECLARE Y = F(t) CURVE GROUPS

DEFINE Y = F(t) CURVE GROUPS

54 DECLARE MIMIC GROUPS

DEFINE MIMIC GROUPS
ASSIGN ALARMS TO MIMICS

60 DECLARE VRI
DECLARE TRUTH TABLES
DEFINE TRUTH TABLES

61 DYNAMIC MIMIC CAPTIONS

Fig. 151 : Standard external document files (cont’d 2)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 361
 TYPE OF
DOCUMENT TITLE OF DOCUMENT

70 CONTROL BLOCKS
CONTROL LOOP BLOCKS
CONTROL LOOP GROUPS
DECLARE MODELS
DECLARE CONTROL WINDOWS
DECLARE ALGORITHMS
COMMAND BUTTONS
80 DECLARE REFERENCE CHARTS
DEFINE REFERENCE CHARTS
82 DECLARE COMMAND COPY GROUPS
COPY TS TO TC
COPY TM TO TVC
90 NETWORK VARIABLES
NETWORK VARIABLES PRODUCED
NETWORK VARIABLES CONSUMED
93 DECLARE Y = F(x) CURVES
99 DECLARE EXTERNAL DOCUMENTS

Fig. 152 : Standard external document files (cont’d 3)

5.12.6.2. Management of External Documents

Program used to create, display, delete and print external documents.

Selection the relevant function from the menu.

1 Create documents
2 Delete documents
3 Display document
4 Print documents
5 Transfer documents
6 Stop printout

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 362
5.12.7. CONTROCAD–C Export/Import

This menus used to download automation cell variables from CONTROCAD–C

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81
................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : S.136 : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: .................................................... :
: : ADMINISTRATION >: :
: .................................................... :
: : CONTROCAD EXPORT/IMPORT >: :
: .................................................... :
: : IMPORT VARIABLES FROM CONTROCAD : :
: : EXPORT CONSISTENCY TO CONTROCAD : :
: .................................................... :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
:IMPORT VARIABLES FROM A CONTROCAD EXPORT OF GLOBAL VARIABLES (BASEPTA) :
:QUIT :<CTRL+Q> VERSION SHEET : <CTRL+V> :
:MOVE:<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME> :
................................................................................

Fig. 153 : Screen 10.7

5.12.7.1. Importing Variables from CONTROCAD

D Select the automation cell

D Restore to floppy drive (A:) (Y/N)

— if Y : insert the import disk in the drive
— if N : the files must located in the tree:
microete/tri/lg/xxxxx.DG or DGS
tri: three letter project code
suffix DG for global variables
suffix DG or DGS for global variables and sequences
Select the file to be imported

Display file? (Y/N)

Print file? (Y/N) Respond Y

At end of file check file can be imported

Confirm import ? (Y/N)

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 363
5.12.7.2. Exporting Consistency to CONTROCAD
D Select the automation cell

D Export one OU at a time ? (Y/N)

D [Select OU if previous response = O]

D Display file ? (Y/N)

D Print file? (Y/N)

D Transfer to floppy drive (A:) (Y/N)

— if Y : insert the import disk in the drive
— if N : files are created in tree:
microete/tri/lg/xxxxx.DG or DGS
tri: project code
suffix DG for global variables
suffix DG or DGS for global variables and sequences

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 364
5.12.8. Exporting to CCC–M
To declare the TS and TM to be exported to CCC–M, access the menus below :

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : ADMINISTRATION >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : CCC–M EXPORT >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : STATION CONFIGURATION : :
: : CONFIGURATION VARIABLES FOR EXTRACT TO CCC–M : :
: : DECLARE TS FOR EXPORT TO CCC–M : :
: : DECLARE TM FOR EXPORT TO CCC–M : :
: : EXPORT APP. VARIABLES TO CCC–M : :
: : VARIABLES ASSIGNED TO MIMICS : :
: : CONTROL AND PRINT CCC–M MIMIC : :
: :..................................................: :
: :
: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 154 : Screen 10.8

5.12.8.1. Configuration of Variables to be Exported to the CCC–M

This item is used to configure the variable types utilized in the design and animation of
mimic views defined on graphic stations

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 365
 Class Class label /element Type Nature Limits/values Utilization Usable data
/attribute sources

C_TME External /FR/REP_ID text[20] constant - Functional reference of the variable, displayed in text form only standard
telemeasurements
C_TMI Internal /FR/LIB text[32] constant - Label of the variable, displayed in text form only. standard
telemeasurements If the graphic object is named "LANG", /FR/LIBC (2nd language
label) is taken automatically when the operator station is started
in the 2nd language.
/FR/M real variable between Value of the measurement. Utilizable on all types of dynamic standard
/FR/VM_MIN and /FR/ display. measurement
VM_MAX For use with complex analog displays and bargraphs with color
thresholds mes_coul
rempl_seuils
/FR/VM_MIN real constant - Minimum value of the measurement. standard
Utilizable on all types of dynamic display.
Text display recommended.
/FR/VM_MAX real constant - Maximum value of the measurement. standard
Utilizable on all types of dynamic display.
Text display recommended.
/FR/UNIT_LIB text[6] constant - Variable measurement unit, displayed in text form only standard
/FR/DI integer variable 0 : normal status Status of the variable. Utilizable on all types of dynamic display. standard
1 : inhibited status Display of "Fore Color" or "Back Color" type recommended.
2 : doubtful status
(replaced or invalid)
/FR/MDI - variable - Concatenation of M and DI attributes standard
M used to represent the value (use of the "standard" ds), DI is used status
for the status (use of the "status" ds).
/FR/TEND 32 variable - Historical record of last 32 MDIs of the variable. standard
values Used to trace curve with "Line Graph".

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 366

 Class Class label /element Type Nature Limits/values Utilization Usable data
/attribute sources

C_TSE External /FR/REP_ID text[20] constant - Functional reference of the variable, displayed in text form only. standard
telesignals
C_TSI Internal /FR/LIB text[32] constant - Label of the variable. displayed in text form only. standard
telesignals If the graphic object is named "LANG", /FR/LIBC (2nd language
label) is taken automatically when the operator station is started
in the 2nd language.
/FR/M integer variable 0 ou 1 Value of the measurement. Utilizable on all types of dynamic standard
display. measurement
For use with complex analog displays. color
mes_coul
/FR/EDI integer variable 0 : inhibited variable Composition of the M attributes and status of the variable. standard
1 : state0, normal Utilizable on all types of dynamic display.
status
2 : state1, normal
status
3 : state 0, doubtful
status4 : state1,
doubtful status
/FR/DI integer variable 0 : normal status Status of the variable. Utilizable on all types of dynamic display. standard
1 : inhibited status Display of "Fore Color" or "Back Color" type recommended.
2 : doubtful status
(replaced or invalid )
/FR/MDI - variable - Concatenation of M and DI attributes standard
M is used to represent the value (use of the "standard" ds), DI is status
used for the status (use of the "status" ds).
/FR/MSG_0 text[8] constant - Label associated to state 0 of the variable. standard
Displayed in text form only.
If the graphic object is named "LANG", /FR/LIB0_CH (2nd languaĆ
ge state label) is taken automatically when the operator station is
startedin the 2nd language.
/FR/MSG_1 text[8] constant - Label associated to state 1 of the variable. standard
Displayed in text form only.
If the graphic object is named "LANG", /FR/LIB1_CH (2nd languaĆ
ge state label) is taken automatically when the operator station is
started in the 2nd language.

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 367

 Class Class label /element Type Nature Limits/values Utilization Usable data
/attribute sources

C_TVC External setpoint /FR/REP_ID text [20] constant - Functional reference of the variable, displayed in text form only. standard
commands
C_TVCI Internal setpoint
commands
/FR/M real variable Between Value of the measurement. Utilizable on all types of dynamic disĆ standard
/FR/VM_MIN and play. color
/FR/VM_MAX
C_TCE External /FR/REP_ID text [20] constant - Functional reference of the variable, displayed in text form only. standard
telecommands
C_TCI Internal
telecommands
/FR/M integer variable 0 or 1 Value of the measurement. Utilizable on all types of dynamic disĆ standard
play.

C_UO_V Operative Units /FR/REP_ID text [20] constant - Functional reference of the variable, displayed in text form only. standard
/FR/INH integer variable 0 : OU commands not Inhibition of OU standard
inhibited
1 : OU commands
inhibited
C_VRI Multi-state /FR/REP_ID text[20] constant - Functional reference of the variable, displayed in text form only. standard
variables
/FR/M integer variable 0 to 15 Value of the measurement. Utilizable on all types of dynamic standard
display.
Utilization of threshold tables recommended (table varying from 0
to 15)
/FR/LIB integer constant Label of the variable. displayed in text form only. standard
[32] If the graphic object is named "LANG", /FR/LIBC (2nd language
label) is taken automatically when the operator station is started
in the 2nd language.
/FR/V integer variable 0 or 1 Value of validity. Utilizable on all types of dynamic display standard
[32]

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 368

 Class Class label /element Type Nature Limits/values Utilization Usable data
/attribute sources

C_REĆ Control blocks /FR/REP_ID text[20] constant - Functional reference of the variable, displayed in text form only. standard
GUL

/FR/LIB text[32] constant - Label of the variable. displayed in text form only. standard
If the graphic object is named "LANG", /FR/LIBC (2nd language
label) is taken automatically when the operator station is started
in the 2nd language.
/FR/CONSIGN integer variable 0 : not locked Locked block indicator. Utilizable on all types of dynamic display. standard
1 : locked
C_MIM Mimics /FR/REP_ID text[20] constant - Functional reference of the variable, displayed in text form only. standard

/FR/REP_IC C_TEST constant - Mimic text standard

VG_CUR Curve group
VG_BAR Bargraph group
C_SMG Sequence group
G_ALA Alarm group
/FR/I_AL integer variable 0 : no alarm Indicator of presence of alarms. Utilizable on all types of dynamic standard
1 :alarms present to be display.
acknowledged
2 :alarms present and
acknowledged
/FR/N_AL integer variable - Number of alarms present. standard
Utilizable on all types of dynamic display.
Display in text form recommended.
C_TEXT Texts used by /FR/LIB text[32] constant - Label of the variable. displayed in text form only. standard
mimics If the graphic object is named "LANG", /FR/LIBC (2nd language
label) is taken automatically when the operator station is started
in the 2nd language.
Variables of this class are created specifically to display database
texts in mimics.

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 369

 Class Class label /element Type Nature Limits/values Utilization Usable data
/attribute sources

C_TEXT Texts per mimic /FR/REP_ID text[20] constant - Variable function tag displayed exclusively in text form standard

VG_CUR Curve group /FR/REP_ID texte[20] constant - Variable function tag displayed exclusively in text form standard

VG_BAR Bargraph group /FR/REP_ID texte[20] constant - Variable function tag displayed exclusively in text form standard

C-SMG SMG group /FR/REP_ID texte[20] constant - Variable function tag displayed exclusively in text form standard

G-ALA Alarm group /FR/REP_ID texte[20] constant - Variable function tag displayed exclusively in text form standard

P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual REV A Folio 370

5.12.8.2. Declaration of TSs to be exported to CCC–M

Declaration of TS variables to be extracted for CCC–M

5.12.8.3. Declaration of TMs to be exported to CCC–M

Declaration of TM to be extracted for CCC–M

5.12.8.4. BVA Export to CCC–M

This programme is used to extract data destined for CCC–M on a floppy or hard disk.

5.12.8.5. Variable Assignment to Mimics

This item is applicable only in the context of projects implementing ETE (Microété +
Syn).
The option is used to assign animation variables to the mimic.

5.12.8.6. CCC–M Mimic Control and Printout

Option used to run three different checks on the SYN CR relative to Microété.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 371
5.12.9. Local Language

Not used

5.12.10. Miscellaneous Utilities

To select a utility, access the menus below:

M–ETE C53.3.2.3 CEGELEC 23/09/96

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : : : : CENT 3 :
:..............................................................................:
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : ADMINISTRATION >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: : UTILITIES >: :
: –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– :
: :––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––: :
: : OBJECT DESCRIPTION : :
: : ATTRIBUTES/OBJECTS : :
: : OU DUPLICATION : :
: : ID TAG RECORDS >: :
: : DIRECT ACCESS TO OBJECTS >: :
: : ACQUISITION OF DEFAULT VALUES : :
: : C10 GENERATION : :
: : ACCEPTANCE LOG : :
: : SPECIFIC UTILITIES >: :
: :..................................................: :
: :
:..............................................................................:
: :
:CANCEL :<CTRL+Q> VERSION FORM :<CTRL+V> :
:MOVE :<ARROWS> SELECTION:<RETURN> ABORT:<ESCAPE> HELP:<CTRL+HOME>:
:..............................................................................:

Fig. 155 : Screen 10.10

5.12.10.1. Description of an Object

This item is used to obtain the description of an object:

D in Microété

D in the source database

in order to compare data generated for the Centralog. The operator must:

Select the class of the object

Select the object
Display the object description file (Y/N) :
Print the object description file (Y/N) :

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 372
5.12.10.2. Attributes / objects

Select the class of the object

Select the sort criteria
Select the sort order
Select the attributes to be displayed
Display file (Y/N) :
Print file (Y/N) :
The file generated is located in the following tree: ete/att_obj.txt

E.g.

13 OBJECTS / ORDER : REP_ID

CRITERIA
AL_DEG =3

REP_ID LIB AL_DEG AL_ACQ AL_SENS AL_KLX

22KKL002XR POLARITY OUTPUT 48VDC2 +/- CO 3 1 1
22KKL003XR POLARITY CONTROL DECOUPLING
2 CA 3 1 1
22KKL004XR POLARITY WATCHDOG
2 CX 3 1 1
22KKL009XR POLARITY SIGNALLING
2 S1/2 3 1 1
22KKL010XR POLARITY ALARM2 A1/2 3 1 1
22KKL011XR POLARITY MEASURE
2 M1/2 3 1 1
22KKL012XR POLARITY SIGN CONTROL
2 SC1/2 3 1 1
22KKL013XR POLARITY SIGN GATE 2EXCH C1/2 3 1 1
22KKLCION POLARITY INPUT 48VDC2 +/- CI 3 1 1
22KKLHION POLARITY WATER LEVEL2MEASURE H1 3 1 1
IF010101 IF 01 01 01 0 3 0 0
IF010102 IF 01 01 02 0 3 0 0
IF010104 IF 01 01 04 0 3 0 0

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 373
5.12.10.3. Record of References

5.12.10.3.1. MENU : RECORD OF DELETED REFERENCES

Displays the list of deleted references.

5.12.10.3.2. MENU : RECORD OF MODIFIED REFERENCES

Displays the list of old references and new references.

5.12.10.4. Direct Access to Objects

To access particular database objects directly, use the menus below.

The following objects can be accessed directly:

D objects which have generated error warnings during the DVT check (1)

D objects which can be accessed by a predefined script (2)

D objects which have generated messages during the P4 import/export (3)

LEVEL 3 SUB-MENU
1 DIRECT ACCESS TO OBJECTS WITH ERRORS OU WARNINGS
2 DIRECT ACCESS TO OBJECTS BY SCRIPT
3 DIRECT ACCESS TO OBJECTS WITH IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
4 DIRECT ACCESS TO OBJECTS BY P4 TAG

5.12.10.4.1. Direct access to objects with errors or warnings

This menu option provides direct access to objects which have generated an error or a
”warning” during the last DVT check, via one or more of their configuration screens.

The operator can read the DVT message(s) relative to each object present by using
the command ”<CTRL+D> DVT MONITOR”.

This operation can be interrupted by pressing <ESC>to quit the configuration screen
and confirming.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 374
5.12.10.4.2. Direct access to objects with import/export message
This option provides direct access to objects which have generated a message during
the last variable import/export operation, via one or more of their configuration
screens.

The operator can read the message(s) relative to each object present in a window at
the bottom of the screen.

This operation can be interrupted by pressing <ESC>to quit the configuration screen
and confirming.

5.12.10.4.3. Direct access to objects by script

This option provides direct access to objects in list (script), via one or more of their
configuration screens.

NB: It is therefore not necessary to know ”the origin” of the object (screen to
which it belongs).

The replacement character ”?” can be utilized instead of any character when entering
a reference. All the objects with references corresponding to the mask will be
automatically inserted into the script.

E.g. 05FSRHIC?001
Inserts objects : 05FSRHICA001
05FSRHICC001
05FSRHICH001
etc.

List input commands: <F6> Add

<F8> Delete
<CTRL+W> Validate
<ESC> Quit

This operation can be interrupted by pressing <ESC>to quit the configuration screen
and confirming.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 375
5.12.10.4.4. Direct access to objects by P4 reference
This option provides direct access to objects in a list entered by the operator (script)
using the P4 reference, via their configuration screen(s).

NB: It is therefore not necessary to know ” the origin” of the object (screen to
which it belongs).

The replacement character ”?” can be utilized instead of any character when entering
a reference. All the objects with references corresponding to the mask will be
automatically inserted into the script.

E.g. FESUS???

Inserts the objects : FESUS001 ,

FESUS002 ,
FESUS003 ,
FESUS011 ,
FESUS012 ,
etc.

List input commands : <F6> Add

<F8> Delete
<CTRL+W> Validate
<ESC> Abort

This operation can be interrupted by pressing <ESC>to quit the configuration screen
and confirming.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 376
5.12.10.5. Acquisition of Default Values

Acquisition of non–input attributes using default values where these exist in the
modification (see Chapter 5.8.1. ).

5.12.10.6. C10 CONTROTEST Generation

The C10 generator enables a homogeneous and consistent C10 database to be

generated from a C30 or C50 database on the basis of the following requests:

D One of the following standard selection criteria:

— one or more Entities,
— one or more Controllers,
— one or more Operative Units .
D If the multi–entity option exists in the original MICROETE, generation may be
either:
— multi–entity,
— mono–entity (in this case, the variables will be grouped within the
SYSTEM entity)
D If the Entities selection criterion is not required, the operator is provided with a
list of all the mimics so that selection can be made.

D Only the objects selected according to standard criteria in the different classes
are saved.

D The number of objects is limited according to class (operator station etc.).

D Extraction of Operative Units not selected which contain objects utilized in the
Operative Units selected (”auxiliary” objects).

In this case, only the ”auxiliary” objects will be extracted.

D Variable groups (operators, curves, y = f(x) etc.) will not be extracted if they are
empty.

D Log variable groups will not be extracted if they are empty.

D Extraction of required TSS variables only.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 377
 The following menu is displayed. This menu is used to select the required Operative
Units, controllers and entities.

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : C10 CONTROTEST GENERATOR : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: OU REF : LABEL : :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: : : :
: 5KC0045 : TEST CONTROLLER CELL 045 : 0 :
: : : :
: 8KIC : TSS ASSIGNMENT OU ... : 0 :
: : : :
: 8TST : TEST OU : 0 :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: ; : :
:..............................................................................:
: PROCESSING OU <ANT> OU TYPE <F6> ADD OU <PGUP> PREVIOUS PAGE :
: <ESC> ABORT <F7> ADD CoUNTRY <PGDN> NEXT PAGE :
: <R> REINIT> <F9> SUP OU <F8> ADD ENTITY <CTRL–END> GENERATION :
................................................................................

Select <CTRL–END> to run generation, then <F4>.

After verification, select the mimics which are to be generated (mimics belong to no
OU).

The following screen is displayed:

M–ETE C3X.X.X.X CEGELEC 19/04/81

................................................................................
: CENTRALOG : C10 GENERATOR : : : CENT 5 :
:..............................................................................:
: OU REF : LABEL : GROUP :SELECTION : :
:–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
: : : : : :
: OKIC01 : SUPERVISION OF MIMICS : MIM01 : KEYSTROKE : :
: OKIC02 : SUPERVISION OF CONTROL VIEWS : MIM01 : KEYSTROKE : :
: OKC021 : SUPERVISION OF CONTROLLERS : MIM01 : KEYSTROKE : :
: OKC021 : SUPERVISION CONTROL SYSTEM : MIM01 : INIT : :
: OKC022 : SUPERVISION CONTROL SYSTEM : MIM01 : X : :
: OKC023 : IDD ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION : MIM01 : X : :
: OKC024 : SUPERVISION IDD COMMONS : MIM01 : X : :
: 4FDR31 : ROTATION 0001RE : MIM02 : : :
: 4FDR32 : CLEAN REHEATER 001RE : MIM02 : : :
: 4FDT41 : ADDITIONAL DRAFT VENTILATOR : MIM02 : X : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
: ; : : : :
:..............................................................................:
: <CTRL+W> EXIT :
: :
................................................................................

Select the mimics required by inputting the selection field (X).

Initialization views or views assigned to CVS keys are automatically extracted and
identified in the selection field by ”KEYSTROKE” or ”INIT”.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 378
 The final question displayed is: GENERATION COMPLETE ?

Enter ”Y” on first generation and ”N” subsequently.

During initial generation, MICROETE software and data will be duplicated in the C10
tree structure.

When the database is generated subsequently, only the data will be generated in the
C10 tree structure.

5.12.10.7. Specification Data

Used to extract objects from the MICROETE database complying with sort criteria in
order to generate an ASCII file which will contain all the variables and their associated
characteristics necessary for the execution of the project Specification.

A file named crs.txt in the MICROETE tree, contains the sort description.

The result is stored in a file named recette.txt in the MICROETE directory tree.

The DOS format sort file is in the form of columns.

Any line starting with /: is considered as a line of comment.

The line may be terminated by a comment starting with /: .

KEY WORDS

D /: Default or end of line comments

D /P New page in the result file

D NOM = Name of the Specification variable

D MT = Metaclass

D CL = Class

D XXX op YYY[
XXX Name of the attribute as it figures in the database model
op Operator
= equals
> greater than
< less than
# different
YYY Value of the attribute

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 379
 D XXX = ex

In this case, XXX is an optional attribute. The important factor is the

existence of the attribute

D XXX = ed

In this case, the field is not a sort criterion; the printout of the value of
the attribute is required.

SORT RESULT

The result of the sort is saved in a DOS file.

This file is composed in the same manner as the input file.

The value of the attributes completes each field.

When the search finds no object, the attribute REP_ID is set to NONEXISTENT.

When the attribute is a multiple domain attribute, it is represented in the form of a table.

Results are presented as one object per page and one attribute per line.

5.12.10.8. Update

This item is used to update the programs, structures and data in the Microété
database. The update requires one set of floppy disks supplied by T4.

.
P-TP09-A42005-V4 E A REV A
Centralog Data Configuration User's Manual Sheet 380
CENTRALOG DB – verification of integrity
After the modification of the CENTRALOG DB by the MICROETE software is necessary to verify
the DB integrity. To do this proceed as follows:

1. Click on the icon CONTROCADE-E Attente on the bottom line of the P8 console screen.
2. Click on the icon CONTROCAD-S/MIC in the window CONTROCADE-E Attente.
3. Select ENGLISH TEXT.
4. Select ADMINISTRATION.
5. Select CHECK AND GENERATE LATEST BLOCK VERSION.
6. In the field COMPLETE enter T, push <F1> and confirm by Y<ENTER>
7. WITH CONFIRM AFTER CHECKING (Y/N): answer Y<ENTER>
8. FILE DISPLAY ? (Y/N): answer Y<ENTER>
9. Find lines with ERROR QUANTITY and look if 0.
10. Exit from file display by <ESCAPE>
11. PRINTOUT ? (Y/N): answer N<ENTER>
12. Enter jour initials in the field EMITTER, end by <F1> and confirm by Y<ENTER>
13. FILE DISPLAY ? (Y/N): answer Y<ENTER>
14. Find lines with ERROR QUANTITY and look if 0.
15. Exit from file display by <ESCAPE>
16. PRINTOUT ? (Y/N): answer N<ENTER>
17. <ESCAPE>
18. <ESCAPE>
19. <ESCAPE>
20. Minimize the window CONTROCADE-E Attente.
CCC log in
1 From the Process (EXP) interface press the FRONT key to go to the CCC interface.
2 Click on the icon Login.
3 In the Login window enter Username: alstom and Password: root_c1.
4. Acknowledge the message.

CCC log out

1 Click on the icon Logout.
2 Acknowledge the message.
3 Go back to the Process interface by pressing the FRONT key.
4 To disappear the small windows click with the left button on the top of the screen.
 §3

§2
§4
§2

§1
CENTRALOG DB Generation and Installation
1 Login to CCC interface.
2 From Database Admin select Generate DB.
3 Select 1: Whole generation of next DB version.
4 Wait for the massage Centralog Data Base Generation done… and press q to quit.
5 From Database Admin select Select Mode and validate mode OFF LINE.
6 From Database Admin select Select DB to be loaded and choice the Next version.
7 From Database Admin select Select Mode and validate mode ON LINE.
8 Verify if the gas turbines work in the LOCAL mode.
9 From Centralog Admin select MSNV.
10 In the window MSNV START OPTION select Normal Mode START.
11 Read very carefully the instructions on the screen.
12 Continue following the instructions on the screen and the example on the slides.
§2
1

§3
 §4
q
§5.1
1

§5.2
 §5.3

q
§6.1
1

§6.2
1

§6.3
 §6.4
q
§7.1
1

§7.2
 §7.3
q
§12
<CR>
p<CR>
A<CR>
<CR>
y<CR>
 !!!

<CR>
WAIT UNTIL PROCESS MIMICS (EXP) START ON CVS1

Go back to the CCC interface by pressing the FRONT key.

<CR>
e<CR>
y<CR>
 !!!

<CR>
<CR>
q<CR>
Logout from the CCC interface and go to the process MIMICS
(EXP) by pressing the FRONT key.
 ALSPA C80-35: Interface cards
Link’s organisation from external cable to I/O controller module (example):
The characteristics shown in this document are provided for information only and can not be considered as Reference
representing a contractual engagement on the part of ABB ALSTOM POWER. Furthermore ABB ALSTOM Page 2/12 document n°:
POWER reserve the right to modify these characteristics without prior notice. SM29A30052C
 ALSPA C80-35: Interface cards

Specifications for 16 logic inputs interface card:

OPTO INPUT CIRCUIT (FROM PROCESS):

Voltage range 24V DC –20% +10%, 200mW

48V DC -20% +10%, 400mW
110V DC -20% +10%, 800mW
127V DC -20% +10%, 800mW
220V DC -20% +10%, 800mW
250V DC -20% +10%, 800mW

Polarity Positive
Response time <= 1ms

PROTECTION:

Protection of opto-input circuit (process) Fuses FUI, FU2 (3 AT)

Protection of opto-output circuit (PLC) Fuses FU3, FU4 (500 mAT)

CONTROL OF VOLTAGE PRESENCE

1 relay (process polarity) 1 NO switch (P max = 3W)

1 relay (PLC polarity) 1 NO switch (P max = 3W)
Signalling 1 red led (process input circuit)
1 green led (PLC output circuit)

STRAP CONFIGURATION:

With ST1 (process polarity strap) and ST2 (PLC polarity strap)

OPTO OUTPUT CIRCUIT (TO PLC):

Auxiliary voltage of opto 24V DC -20% +10%

PLC circuit current 5 to 30 mA
PLC circuit polarity Positive

CONNECTION:

Input (process link wiring) Screwed withdrawable terminal blocks

(2 terminals per input, 2xl6,2xl6 pins)
Capacity of tightening 2.5mm2
Output (PLC link wiring) 2 sub-D connections:
1 PLC link (25 pins)
1 infos transfer link (25 pins)

ENVIRONMENT:

Withstand to disturbances CEI 801-4

Isolation 2500V AC 5OHz l mn input/frame
2500V AC 5OHz 1mn output/frame
2500V AC 5OHz 1mn input/output

MOUNTING:

Stand Rails DIN, OMEGA or plate

The characteristics shown in this document are provided for information only and can not be considered as Reference
representing a contractual engagement on the part of ABB ALSTOM POWER. Furthermore ABB ALSTOM Page 3/12 document n°:
POWER reserve the right to modify these characteristics without prior notice. SM29A30052C
 ALSPA C80-35: Interface cards
The characteristics shown in this document are provided for information only and can not be considered as Reference
representing a contractual engagement on the part of ABB ALSTOM POWER. Furthermore ABB ALSTOM Page 4/12 document n°:
POWER reserve the right to modify these characteristics without prior notice. SM29A30052C
 ALSPA C80-35: Interface cards

Specifications for 16 logic outputs interface card:

COIL OF RELAY (PLC CONTROL):

Auxiliary voltage 24V DC -20% +10%

Polarity Positive
Maximum current of PLC output circuit 1 max = 70 mA

PROTECTION:

Protection of input circuit (PLC) Fuses FU17, FU18 (500 mAT)

Fuses FU1 to FU16 (1 AT)

CONTROL OF VOLTAGE PRESENCE:

1 relay (PLC polarity) 1 NO switch (P max = 3W)

Signalling 1 green led (PLC output circuit)

SWITCHES CI-IARACTERISTICS (TO PROCESS):

Thermal current ITH = 4 A

Breaking capacity 24V DC +/-20%, Imax 1 A (L/R=40ms)
48V DC +/-20%, Imax 1 A (L/R=40ms)
110V DC +/-20%, Imax 500mA (L/R=20ms)
127V DC +/-20%, Imax 500mA (L/R=20ms)
220V DC –20% +10%, Imax 500mA (L/R=20ms)
250V DC +/-20%, Imax 500rnA (L/R=20ms)
Switch protection Arc extinguishing filter

STRAP CONFIGURATION:

Straps of switches position No position

CONNECTION:

Input (PLC link wiring) 1 sub-D connectors (37 pins)

Output (process link wiring) Screwed withdrawal terminal blocks
(2 terminals per output, 2x12, 2x16 pins)
Capacity of tightening 2.5mm2

ENVIRONMENT:

Withstand to disturbances CEI 801-4

Isolation 2500V AC 50Hz lmn input/frame
2500V AC 50Hz 1mn output/frame
2500V AC 50Hz 1mn input/output

MOUNTING:

Stand Rails DIN, OMEGA or plate

The characteristics shown in this document are provided for information only and can not be considered as Reference
representing a contractual engagement on the part of ABB ALSTOM POWER. Furthermore ABB ALSTOM Page 5/12 document n°:
POWER reserve the right to modify these characteristics without prior notice. SM29A30052C
 ALSPA C80-35: Interface cards
The characteristics shown in this document are provided for information only and can not be considered as Reference
representing a contractual engagement on the part of ABB ALSTOM POWER. Furthermore ABB ALSTOM Page 6/12 document n°:
POWER reserve the right to modify these characteristics without prior notice. SM29A30052C
 ALSPA C80-35: Interface cards

Specifications for 8 analogue inputs interface card:

MEASURES CIRCUIT (FROM PROCESS TO PLC):

Current: 0 – 20mA,

AUXILIARY SUPPLY:

Circuit voltage: 24V DC –20% +10%,

Circuit protection: Fuses FU1, FU2 (500mAT).

CONTROL OF VOLTAGE PRESENCE:

Relay: 1 NO switch (P max = 3W),

Signalling: l green led (PLC and process circuits).

STRAP CONFIGURATION:

With straps SI to SS: Current card,

Without straps SI to SS: Voltage card.

CURRENT/VOLTAGE ADAPTATION RESISTOR:

Circuit 0-5mA / 0-10V: 2 kOhms 1/4W 0.1%,

Circuit 0-10mA / 0-10V: 1 kOhms 1/4W 0.1%.

CONNECTION:

Input (process link wiring) Screwed withdrawable terminal blocks,

(2 terminals per input, 2 x l2, 2 x l6 pins),
Capacity of tightening 2.5mm2.
Output (PLC link wiring) 1 sub-D connector (25 pins).

ENVIRONMENT:

Withstand to disturbances CEI 801-4

Isolation 2500V AC 50Hz 1mn input/frame

MOUNTING:

Stand Rails DIN, OMEGA or plate

The characteristics shown in this document are provided for information only and can not be considered as Reference
representing a contractual engagement on the part of ABB ALSTOM POWER. Furthermore ABB ALSTOM Page 9/12 document n°:
POWER reserve the right to modify these characteristics without prior notice. SM29A30052C
 ALSPA C80-35: Interface cards
The characteristics shown in this document are provided for information only and can not be considered as Reference
representing a contractual engagement on the part of ABB ALSTOM POWER. Furthermore ABB ALSTOM Page 10/12 document n°:
POWER reserve the right to modify these characteristics without prior notice. SM29A30052C
 ALSPA C80-35: Interface cards

Specifications for 8 analogue outputs interface card:

MEASURES CIRCUIT (FROM PLC TO PROCESS):

Current 0 - 20mA.

AUXILIARY SUPPLY:

Circuit voltage 24V DC –20% +10%,

Circuit protection Fuses FU1, FU2 (500mAT).

CONTROL OF VOLTAGE PRESENCE:

Relay 1 NO switch (P max = 3W),

Signalling 1 green led (PLC and process circuits).

STRAP CONFIGURATION:

Straps (internal polarity supply) S1 to S8 (polarity +),

S11 to S 18 (polarity -).

CURRENT / VOLTAGE ADAPTATION RESISTOR:

Circuit 0-10V / 0-5mA 2 kOhms 0.25W 0.1%,

Circuit 0-10V / 0-10mA 1 kOhms 0.25W 0.1%.

CONNECTION:

Input (PLC link wiring) 1 sub-D connector (25 pins),

Output (process link wiring) Screwed withdrawable terminal blocks,
(2 terminals per output, 2 x l2, 2 x l6 pins),
Capacity of tightening 2.5mm2.

ENVIRONMENT:

Withstand to disturbances CEI 801-4,

Isolation 2500V AC 50Hz 1mn output/frame.

MOUNTING:

• Stand Rails DIN, OMEGA or plate.

The characteristics shown in this document are provided for information only and can not be considered as Reference
representing a contractual engagement on the part of ABB ALSTOM POWER. Furthermore ABB ALSTOM Page 11/12 document n°:
POWER reserve the right to modify these characteristics without prior notice. SM29A30052C
 ALSPA C80-35: Interface cards
The characteristics shown in this document are provided for information only and can not be considered as Reference
representing a contractual engagement on the part of ABB ALSTOM POWER. Furthermore ABB ALSTOM Page 12/12 document n°:
POWER reserve the right to modify these characteristics without prior notice. SM29A30052C
(017-1)
 Sans titre
|
| (****************************************************************************)
| (* System faults for front cabinet light *)
| (****************************************************************************)
|
|
|S8000
|com
|default
|S800NOK YA902A
+--] [--+------------------------------------------------------------------(/)--
| |
|F8000 |
|com OK |
|F800_OK|
+--]/[--+
| |
|FBC30 |
|mode 30|
|pret |
|FBCFRDY|
+--]/[--+
| |
|CELL |
|SLAVE |
|OK |
|CELSVOK|
+--]/[--+
|

Page 1
 C E G E L E C

Alspa C80–35 PLC

Installation Manual
ALS 52117 d–en

First issue: 04–95

This Issue: 04–98

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1

Meaning of terms that may be used in this
document / Notice to readers

WARNING
Warning notices are used to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist or
may be associated with use of a particular equipment.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or
damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used.

Caution

Caution notices are used where there is a risk of damage to equipment for
example.

Note

Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to

understanding and operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information
contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software
systems. Cegelec assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

Cegelec makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy,
completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.

In this publication, no mention is made of rights with respect to trademarks or tradenames that may attach to certain words or signs. The absence
of such mention, however, in no way implies there is no protection. Copyright GE Fanuc. All rights, including trade secret rights, are reserved.
Unauthorized use of the information is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en

 Revisions

Index letter Date Nature of revision

a 04/95 Creation of this document.

b 07/96 This manual revision adds information concerning special grounding
procedures for the Model 351 CPU and revises information for wiring of I/O
Bus Expansion and Remote cables. Cegelec factory made cables are all
continuous or 100% shielded. Text and illustrations for these cables in
Chapter 3 and Appendix G has been changed.
This manual revision (ALS 52117b) has had references to standards deleted to
which Cegelec modules are tested. A new manual, ALS 52612 Installation
Requirements for Conformance to Standards is available, which describes
those standards in detail. This new manual will be updated frequently to reflect
standards changes as they may occur and to add information about new
standards.
For a list of standards, refer to data sheet ALS 53002 Agency approvals,
Standards and General Specifications for C80–35, C80–75, CE80–20,
CE80–35 and CE80–15 which lists all of the standards for Cegelec products.
Basic installation instructions in this manual cover installations that are not in
noisy or hazardous environments. The more stringent requirements (such as
CE Mark) are dealt with in ALS 52612 referenced in the previous paragraph.
c 12/96 Description of new high capacity power supply (CE693PWR330), the serial
port on the model 351 CPU, the FIP Remote I/O Scanner module
(IC693BEM330) and the FIP Bus Controller module (IC693BEM340).
d 04/98 Release 7:
S a new CPU352 which supports floating point calculations.
S a 6th terminal is added to the power supply terminal block for the
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 30W Power Supply (IC693PWR324).
S new appendix H for CPU data sheets.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3

 Revisions

Page 4 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en

 Preface

Note

This manual, which covers the installation of the Alspa C80–35 PLC only, was
created on separation of the ALS 52101 Alspa 80–35 PLC Installation Manual
into 2 documents, the other being the ALS 52118 Alspa C80–35 PLC I/O
Module Specifications. Both resulting manuals have been updated to
incorporate new modules.

This manual describes the Cegelec Alspa C80–35 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). It contains a description
of hardware components and provides basic hardware installation procedures. The Alspa C80–35 PLC is a member
of the Alspa 8000 family of Programmable Logic Controllers from Cegelec.

1. CONTENT OF THIS MANUAL

This manual contains three chapters and seven appendices.

Chapter 1. Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC: This chapter provides you with an introduction to the Alspa
C80–35 Programmable Logic Controller and an overview of its features, functions, hardware structure and
programming features.

Chapter 2. Product Description: This chapter provides you with descriptions of the hardware components that
are included with an Alspa C80–35 PLC and catalog numbers of those components. Emphasis is placed on the
features and functions of each component that you need to be familiar with in order to configure your control
system.

Chapter 3. Installation Procedures: This chapter leads you through the steps required for installation of an Alspa
C80–35 PLC. An emphasis is placed on the importance of following recommended system grounding procedures:
for proper system operation, safety of system equipment, and for safety of personnel operating and using the
system.

Appendix A. Glossary: This consists of a glossary of terms relevant to the Alspa C80–35 PLC and to
Programmable Logic Controllers in general.

Appendix B. Commonly used Acronyms and Abbreviations: This is a list of acronyms and abbreviations, and
their derivation, that are commonly used throughout this manual.

Appendix C. Serial Port and Cables: This appendix describes the serial port and cables used to connect Alspa
8000 PLCs to various systems.

Appendix D. RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter: This appendix contains detailed information about the
RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter (IC690ACC900) for use with Alspa 8000 PLCs. Several cable configurations using
the converters are shown in Appendix C.

Appendix E. Isolated Repeater/Converter: This appendix contains detailed information about the Isolated
Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) for use with Alspa 8000 PLCs.

Appendix F. Miniconverter Kit: This appendix contains detailed information about the Miniconverter Kit
(IC690ACC901) for use with Alspa 8000 PLCs.

Appendix G. Cable Data Sheets: This appendix describes the cables used with the Alspa C80–35 Programmable
Logic Controller in a convenient data sheet format.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 5

 Preface

Appendix H. CPU Data Sheets: This appendix describes each of the CPU models for the Alspa C80–35
Programmable Logic Controller in a convenient data sheet format.

2. RELATED PUBLICATIONS
For more information, refer to these publications:
D ALS 52102 Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs Reference Manual
D ALS 52109 MegaBasic Language for PCM Reference Manual and Programmer’s Guide
D ALS 52118 Alspa C80–35 PLC I/O Module Specifications
D ALS 52201 Alspa P8–25/35/05 Programming Software for Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs User’s
Manual

D ALS 52202 Hand–Held Programmer for Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs User’s Manual
D ALS 52203 PCM Development Software (PCOP) for Alspa 8000 PLCs User’s Manual
D ALS 52205 Axis Positioning Module (APM) for Alspa 8000 PLCs Programming Manual
D ALS 52307 Alspa CE80–20 – N80 Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual
D ALS 52308 Alspa CE80–20 I/O Modules User’s Manual
D ALS 52309 Alspa C80–35 I/O Processor Module User’s Manual
D ALS 52311 Alspa CE80–20 FIP Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual
D ALS 52313 Alspa CE80–35 Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual
D ALS 52401 High Speed Counter for Alspa C80–35 PLC User’s Manual
D ALS 52402 Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) and Support Software for Alspa 8000 PLCs User’s
Manual

D ALS 52403 Axis Positioning Module (APM) for Alspa C80–35 PLC Standard Mode User’s Manual
D ALS 52501 N80 Communications Module (NCM) for Alspa C80–35 PLC User’s Manual
D ALS 52502 N80 Enhanced Communications Module (NCM+) for Alspa C80–35 PLC User’s Manual
D ALS 52506 Serial communication modules for Alspa 8000 PLCs User’s Manual
D ALS 52511 Alspa C80–35 PLC Bus Controller for Alspa N80 Network (NBC) User’s Manual
D ALS 52512 Alspa C80–35 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications User’s Manual
D ALS 52519 FIP Bus Controller (FBC) for Alspa C80–35 PLC User’s Manual
D ALS 52604 Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual
D ALS 52605 Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual
D ALS 52607 Axis Positioning Module (APM) for Alspa C80–35 PLC – Follower Mode User’s Manual
D ALS 52612 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards

Page 6 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en

 Preface

3. MANUAL NUMBERS
In some cases, Alspa 8000 manuals may be issued with numbers that differ from the one given under ”Related
Publications” in the Preface of other manuals, or in Important Product Information or data sheets.

The contents are similar.

The table below shows the correspondence between ”ALS” and equivalent numbers for the manuals concerned:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ALS Number
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Other Number ALS Number Other Number

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ALS 52113
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ GFK–0600 ALS 52507 GFK–0074

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ALS 52302 GEK–90486–2 ALS 52508 GFK–0868

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ALS 52303 GFZ–0043 ALS 52514 GFK–0870
ALS 52404 GFK–0415 ALS 52515 GFK–1026

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ALS 52405
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ GFK–0819 ALS 52523 GFK–1063
ALS 52503
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ GFK–0585 ALS 52603 GFK–0450

4. WE WELCOME YOUR COMMENTS AND SUGGESTIONS

Cegelec strives to produce quality technical documentation. Please take the time to fill in and return the ”Reader’s
Comments” page if you have any remarks or suggestions.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 7

 Preface

Page 8 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en

 Reader’s comments

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual

Your main job is:

System designer Programmer
Distributor Maintenance
System integrator Operator
Installer Other (specify below)
If you would like a personal reply, please fill in your name and address below:

COMPANY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NAME: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ADDRESS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COUNTRY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Send this form directly to your CEGELEC sales representative or to this address:

Cegelec
Technical Documentation Department (TDD)
5 avenue Newton BP 215
92142 Clamart Cedex
France
Fax : +33 (0)1 46 29 12 44

All comments will be considered by qualified personnel.

REMARKS

Continue on back if necessary.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 9

 Reader’s comments

Page 10 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en

 Contents

CHAPTER 1 – INTRODUCTION TO THE ALSPA C80–35 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1. ALSPA C80–35 PLC HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

2. ALSPA C80–35 PLC FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OF THE ALSPA C80–35 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5

3.1. Alspa C80–35 CPU Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
3.2. Alspa C80–35 PLC with Model 311, Model 313 or Model 323 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
3.3. Alspa C80–35 PLC with Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 or Model 352 CPU . 1–8

4. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10

5. CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11

5.1. Default I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
5.2. System Configuration with HHP or Alspa P8 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
5.3. System Programming with Alspa P8 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
5.4. System Programming with the Hand–Held Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
5.5. Software Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
5.6. Fault Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
5.7. Programmer Requirements for Running Alspa P8 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
5.8. Communicating With the Hand–Held Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
5.9. User Memory for the Alspa C80–35 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
5.10. User References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
5.11. User Reference Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
5.12. User Register References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
5.13. User Discrete References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19

6. ALSPA C80–35 PLC I/O SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

6.1. Controlling Alspa C80–35 I/O With a Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
6.2. Alspa C80–35 I/O Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
6.3. Horner Electric Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
6.4. Universal Terminal Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
6.5. 32 Point Module Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
6.6. I/O Module Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24

7. OPTION MODULES FOR THE ALSPA C80–35 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25

7.1. NCM Communications Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
7.2. Enhanced Communications Module (NCM+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
7.3. High Speed Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
7.4. Axis Positioning Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
7.5. I/O Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
7.6. N80 Bus Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
7.7. Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
7.8. Programmable Coprocessor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
7.9. Communications Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 11

 Contents

7.10. Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28

7.11. FIP Remote I/O Scanner (Alspa CE80–35) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
7.12. FIP Bus Controller (FBC30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29

8. PERSONAL COMPUTER INTERFACE CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29

CHAPTER 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

1. BASEPLATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
1.1. Model 311, Model 313 and Model 323 Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
1.2. Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 CPU Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
1.3. Expansion Baseplates for Models 331, 341, 351 and 352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
1.4. Remote Baseplates for Models 331, 341, 351 and 352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
1.5. I/O Expansion Bus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
1.6. Power–Down Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
1.7. Alspa C80–35 PLC Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
1.8. Rack Number DIP Switch – Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
1.9. Local Expansion System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
1.10. Remote Expansion System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12

2. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13

2.1. Standard Power Supply, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.1.1. Output Voltage Connections to Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.1.2. Field Wiring Connections to Standard AC/DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2.2. High Capacity Power Supply, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.2.1. Output Voltage Connections to Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
2.2.2. Field Wiring Connections to High Capacity AC/DC Power Supply CE693PWR330 . . . . . . . 2–19
2.3. Power Supply, 24/48 VDC Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
2.3.1. Output Voltage Connections to Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
2.3.2. Field Wiring Connections to DC Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
2.3.3. Calculating Input Power Requirements for DC Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
2.3.4. Status Indicators on Power Supply (Both Supplies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24
2.3.5. Overcurrent Protection (All Supplies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24
2.3.6. Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
2.3.7. CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply (All Supplies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
2.3.8. CPU Serial Port Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
2.3.9. Backup Battery for RAM Memory (All Supplies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
2.3.10. Operation of Models 341/351/352 Without a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27
2.3.11. Battery Accessory Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27

3. CPU FOR ALSPA C80–35 PLCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28

3.1. CPU Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
3.2. User PROM Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–29
3.3. Model 351 and 352 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30
3.3.1. User Memory for CPU 351 and CPU 352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30
3.3.2. Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31
3.3.3. Firmware Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
3.3.4. User References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
3.3.5. CPU 351 and CPU 352 Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
3.3.6. CPU 351 and CPU 352 Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33

Page 12 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en

 Contents

3.3.7. Serial Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34

3.3.8. Serial Port Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
3.3.9. Pin Assignments for CPU 351 and CPU 352 Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–35
3.3.10. Communications Protocols for CPU 351 and CPU 352 Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
3.3.11. SNP and SNP-X Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
3.3.12. Configuring the CPU 351 and CPU 352 Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
3.3.13. Key Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38
3.3.14. Compatibility With Existing CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38
3.3.15. Compatibility With Hand-Held Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38

4. ALSPA C80–35 I/O MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–39

5. OPTION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40

5.1. N80 Communications Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
5.2. Enhanced N80 Communications Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
5.3. N80 Bus Controller (NBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–42
5.3.1. Number of N80 Bus Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43
5.3.2. Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–44
5.3.3. Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–44
5.3.4. Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45
5.3.5. Datagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45
5.3.6. Global Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45
5.4. Alspa CE80–20 I/O System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–47
5.4.1. N80 Bus Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
5.4.2. N80 Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
5.4.3. FIP Bus Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
5.4.4. FIP Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
5.4.5. I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–49
5.4.6. I/O Terminal Blocks and Auxiliary I/O Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–49
5.5. FIP Bus Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
5.5.1. Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
5.5.2. Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
5.5.3. FIP Bus Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
5.6. Alspa CE80–35 FIP Remote I/O Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52
5.6.1. Features of the CE80–35 Remote I/O Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52
5.6.2. FIP Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53
5.6.3. Module Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53
5.6.4. Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54
5.6.5. LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54
5.7. Axis Positioning Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54
5.8. High Speed Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–56
5.9. I/O Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–58
5.10. Ethernet Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–60
5.10.1. Board Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61
5.10.2. Restart Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61
5.10.3. Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61
5.10.4. AAUI (Transceiver) Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–62
5.10.5. Default MAC Address Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–62
5.10.6. Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–62
5.11. Programmable Coprocessor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–63
5.12. Communications Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–64
5.13. Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65

6. RS–422/RS–485 TO RS–232 CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–67

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 13

 Contents

7. MINICONVERTER KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68

8. PERSONAL COMPUTER INTERFACE CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–69

9. ALSPA 8000 HAND–HELD PROGRAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–71

9.1. HHP Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–72
9.2. HHP Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–72

CHAPTER 3 – INSTALLATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

1. HARDWARE PACKAGING – MODEL 331, 341, 351 AND 352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

2. HARDWARE PACKAGING – MODEL 311, MODEL 313 AND MODEL 323 . . . . . . . 3–2

3. PROGRAMMER FOR ALSPA P8–25/35 SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3

4. VISUAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3

5. PRE–INSTALLATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3

6. BASEPLATE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4

6.1. Load Ratings, Temperature and Mounting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
6.2. Model 311, 313 and 323 Baseplate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
6.3. Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 Baseplate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
6.4. Baseplate Adapter Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
6.5. Rack Number Selection – Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and Model 352 . . . . 3–8
6.6. CPU 351 and CPU 352 Grounding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
6.7. Hand–Held Programmer Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
6.8. Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
6.9. Replacing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
6.9.1. Battery Accessory Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
6.9.2. Battery Installation – PCM, ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
6.10. Module Location in Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
6.10.1. Number of Modules Per Alspa C80–35 PLC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
6.10.2. Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
6.11. AC Power Source Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
6.11.1. Field Wiring Connections to Standard and High Capacity AC/DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . 3–20
6.11.2. Overvoltage Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
6.12. Power Supply Line Filter for AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
6.13. DC Power Source Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22

7. SYSTEM GROUNDING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23

7.1. Ground Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
7.2. Alspa C80–35 PLC Equipment Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
7.2.1. Safety and Reference Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
7.2.2. Shield Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
7.2.3. Programming Device Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24

Page 14 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en

 Contents

8. POWER SUPPLY LOAD CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25

9. LOAD REQUIREMENTS FOR HARDWARE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25

10. CABLE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29

10.1. I/O Bus Expansion Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30
10.2. Remote and Expansion System Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33
10.2.1. Building Remote Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34
10.2.2. Expansion Port Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35
10.2.3. Shield Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35
10.2.4. Making a 100% Shielded Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–40
10.3. Hand–Held Programmer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41
10.4. PCM to Programmer Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41
10.5. PCM to Programmer Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–43

11. RS–422/RS–485 TO RS–232 CONVERTER WIRING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44

11.1. RS–232 Interface Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
11.2. RS–422/RS–485 Interface Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
11.3. Jumper Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45
11.4. Wiring Connections for the IC693CBL303 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46

12. ”Y” CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–48

13. I/O MODULE INSTALLATION AND WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–50

13.1. Installation and Removal of I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–50
13.2. Inserting a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–50
13.3. Removing a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
13.4. Wiring to I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–52
13.5. Connections to Detachable Terminal Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–52
13.6. Connections to Pin Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–52
13.7. Installing a Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53
13.8. Removing a Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–54
13.9. Terminal Board Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55
13.10.Field Wiring Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55

14. MECHANICAL SPARE PARTS KITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–57

APPENDIX A – GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1

APPENDIX B – COMMONLY USED ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . B–1

APPENDIX C – SERIAL PORT AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–1

1. WHAT THIS APPENDIX CONTAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–1

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 15

 Contents

2. RS–422 INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–1

3. CABLE AND CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–2

4. ALSPA 8000 PLC SERIAL PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–3

5. COMPATIBLE PC SERIAL PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–4

6. PC–AT/XT SERIAL PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–5

7. RS–232/RS–485 CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–6

8. SERIAL CABLE DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–6

8.1. RS–232 Point–to–Point Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–6
8.2. RS–422 Point–to–Point Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–8
8.3. Multidrop Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–8

APPENDIX D – RS–422/RS–485 TO RS–232 CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–1

1. FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–1

2. FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–1

3. LOCATION IN SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–2

4. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–2

5. CABLE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–4

5.1. RS–232 Interface Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–5
5.2. RS–422/RS–485 Interface Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–5

6. LOGIC DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–6

7. JUMPER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–7

8. EXAMPLE OF CABLE CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–9

APPENDIX E – ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–1

1. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–2

1.1. Logic Diagram of the Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–3
1.2. Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–5

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–7

Page 16 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en

 Contents

2.1. Simple Multidrop Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–8

2.2. Complex Multidrop Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–8
2.3. Rules for Using Repeater/Converters in Complex Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–9

3. CABLE DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–10

APPENDIX F – MINICONVERTER KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–1

1. DESCRIPTION OF MINICONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–1

1.1. Pin Assignments, RS–232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–1
1.2. Pin Assignments, RS–422 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–2

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–2

3. CABLE DIAGRAMS (POINT–TO–POINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–3

APPENDIX G – CABLE DATA SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–1

1. IC690CBL701: PCM, ADC, CMM TO PC-XT CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–3

1.1. Function of cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–3
1.2. Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–3
1.3. Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–3

2. IC690CBL702: PC-AT TO PCM, ADC, CMM CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–4

2.1. Function of cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–4
2.2. Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–4
2.3. Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–4

3. IC690CBL705: PS/2 TO PCM, ADC, CMM CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–5

3.1. Function of cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–5
3.2. Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–5
3.3. Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–5

4. IC693CBL300/301/302/312/313: I/O BUS EXPANSION CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–6

4.1. Function of cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–6
4.2. Cable Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–6
4.3. Cable Specifications (for Remote Expansion System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–7
4.4. Expansion Port Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–7
4.5. I/O Expansion Bus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–8
4.6. Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–8

5. IC693CBL303: HAND-HAND PROGRAMMER CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–12

5.1. Function of cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–12
5.2. Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–12

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 17

 Contents

5.2.1. Specifications for IC693CBL303 Prewired cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–12

5.2.2. Wire Types for Custom Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–12
5.3. Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–13

6. IC693CBL305: PORT EXPANSION (”Y”) CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–14

6.1. Function of cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–14
6.2. Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–14
6.3. Wiring Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–15

7. IC693CBL311/317/320: I/O INTERFACE CABLE FOR AXIS POSITIONING MODULES . .

G–16
7.1. Function of cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–16
7.2. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–16
7.3. Wiring Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–16

8. IC693CBL315: I/O INTERFACE CABLE (24-PIN) FOR 32 POINT MODULES . . . . . . G–20

8.1. Function of cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–20
8.2. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–20
8.3. Building Cables for 24-Pin Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–20

APPENDIX H – CPU DATA SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–1

1. CPU 311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–2

2. CPU 313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–4

3. CPU 323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–6

4. CPU 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–8

5. CPU 341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–10

6. CPU 351 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–12

7. CPU 352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H–14

Page 18 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en

 Figures

Figure 1.1 – Alspa C80-35 Model 311, Model 313 and Model 323 PLC (With Embedded CPU) . . . . . . 1–7
Figure 1.2 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 (5 and 10–Slot CPU Baseplates) . . . . . . . 1–8
Figure 1.3 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 (5 and 10–Slot Expansion Baseplates) . . . 1–9
Figure 1.4 – Alspa P8 Programmer Connection to Alspa C80–35 PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
Figure 1.5 – Hand–Held Programmer Connection to Alspa C80–35 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
Figure 1.6 – Example of C80–35 I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
Figure 2.1 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 311 5–slot Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
Figure 2.2 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 313 (5–slot) and Model 323 (10–slot) Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
Figure 2.3 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 CPU 5–Slot Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
Figure 2.4 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 CPU 10–Slot Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
Figure 2.5 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 5–Slot Expansion Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
Figure 2.6 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 10–Slot Expansion Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
Figure 2.7 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 5–Slot Remote Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
Figure 2.8 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 10–Slot Remote Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
Figure 2.9 – Example of Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 Local Expansion System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
Figure 2.10 – Example of Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 Remote Expansion System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
Figure 2.11 – Alspa C80–35 Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply – IC693PWR324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
Figure 2.12 – Interconnection of Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
Figure 2.13 – Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
Figure 2.14 – High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply - CE693PWR330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
Figure 2.15 – Interconnection of Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
Figure 2.16 – Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
Figure 2.17 – Alspa C80–35 DC Input Power Supply – IC693PWR325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
Figure 2.18 – Interconnection of Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
Figure 2.19 – Typical Efficiency Curve for 24/48 VDC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
Figure 2.20 – Timing Diagram for all Alspa C80–35 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
Figure 2.21 – Serial Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
Figure 2.22 – Backup Battery for RAM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27
Figure 2.23 – Model 341 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
Figure 2.24 – Model 351 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31
Figure 2.25 – CPU 351 and CPU 352 Hardware Features (CPU 351 shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
Figure 2.26 – Example of N80 Communications Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
Figure 2.27 – Enhanced N80 Communications Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41
Figure 2.28 – N80 Bus Controller Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43
Figure 2.29 – Alspa CE80–20 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–47
Figure 2.30 – Example of APM Servo System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–55
Figure 2.31 – Axis Positioning Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–56
Figure 2.32 – High Speed Counter (HSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–57
Figure 2.33 – I/O Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–58
Figure 2.34 – Ethernet Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61
Figure 2.35 – Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–63
Figure 2.36 – Communications Control Module (CMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–64
Figure 2.37 – Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65
Figure 2.38 – Example of RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter Connection
in an Alspa C80–35 PLC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–67

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 19

 Figures

Figure 2.39 – Alspa 8000 SNP Port to RS–232 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68

Figure 2.40 – Example of PCIF Interface to Alspa C80–35 I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–69
Figure 2.41 – Hand–Held Programmer for the Alspa C80–35 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–71
Figure 3.1 – Model 311 and 313 5–Slot Baseplate Mounting Dimensions and Spacing Requirements . . 3–5
Figure 3.2 – Model 323 10–Slot Baseplate Mounting Dimensions and Spacing Requirements . . . . . . . . 3–5
Figure 3.3 – Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and Model 352 5–Slot Baseplate Mounting Dimensions and
Spacing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Figure 3.4 – Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and Model 352 10–Slot Baseplate Mounting Dimensions and
Spacing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Figure 3.5 – Baseplate Adapter Bracket Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
Figure 3.6 – Baseplate Mounting Dimensions for 19” Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
Figure 3.7 – Rack Number Jumpers (Rack 2 Selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
Figure 3.8 – CPU 351 and CPU 352 - Attaching Green Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
Figure 3.9 – CPU 351 and CPU 352 - Mounting Grounding Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
Figure 3.10 – Outline Drawing and Dimensions for the Hand–Held Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
Figure 3.11 – Battery Location in Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
Figure 3.12 – Battery Accessory Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
Figure 3.13 – Valid Location of Modules in Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
Figure 3.14 – Power Supply Terminal Board and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
Figure 3.15 – Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
Figure 3.16 – Recommended System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
Figure 3.17 – Detail of I/O Expansion Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
Figure 3.18 – Example of connecting Baseplates in a Local Expansion System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32
Figure 3.19 – Example of Connecting Baseplates in a Remote Expansion System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33
Figure 3.20 – How to use Split-Ring Ferrules for Foil and Braided Cable Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36
Figure 3.21 – Point-To-Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Custom Length Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37
Figure 3.22 – Earlier Revisions of Remote baseplate (IC693CHS393/399) Custom “Y” Cable Wiring Diagram
3–38
Figure 3.23 – Current Remote baseplate (IC693CHS393/399) Custom “Y” Cable Wiring Diagram . . . . 3–39
Figure 3.24 – Point-To-Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise Immunity . 3–40
Figure 3.25 – Hand–Held Programmer Cable Connection to an Alspa C80–35 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41
Figure 3.26 – Wiring for PCM to PS/2 Cable (IC690CBL705) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–42
Figure 3.27 – Wiring for PCM to PC–XT Cable (IC690CBL701) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–42
Figure 3.28 – Wiring for PCM to PC–AT Cable (IC690CBL702) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–42
Figure 3.29 – PCM to PS/2 Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–43
Figure 3.30 – PCM to PC–XT Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–43
Figure 3.31 – PCM to PC–AT Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–43
Figure 3.32 – Location of Jumpers for User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45
Figure 3.33 – Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46
Figure 3.34 – ”Y” Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–48
Figure 3.35 – Detail of ”Y” Cable (IC693CBL304/305) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–49
Figure 3.36 – Inserting a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–50
Figure 3.37 – Removing a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
Figure 3.38 – Installing a Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–54
Figure C.1 – Alspa 8000 PLC, RS–422 Serial Port Connector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–3

Page 20 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en

 Figures

Figure C.2 – PC RS–232 Serial Port Connector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–4

Figure C.3 – PC–AT/XT Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–5
Figure C.4 – Compatible PC (25–pin) Serial Connection to Alspa 8000 PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–6
Figure C.5 – PC–AT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Alspa 8000 PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–7
Figure C.6 – PC–XT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Alspa 8000 PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–7
Figure C.7 – Typical RS–422, Host to PLC Connection, with Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–8
Figure C.8 – PC (25–pin)/Alspa 8000 PLC Multidrop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–9
Figure C.9 – PC (9–pin)/Alspa 8000 PLC Multidrop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–10
Figure C.10 – PC–AT/Alspa 8000 PLC Multidrop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–10
Figure C.11 – PC–XT/Alspa 8000 PLC Multidrop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–11
Figure D.1 – Front and Rear View of Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–2
Figure D.2 – Typical Configuration with Alspa C80–75 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–4
Figure D.3 – Typical Configuration with Alspa C80–35 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–4
Figure D.4 – RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–6
Figure D.5 – Location of Jumpers for User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–7
Figure E.1 – Isolated/Repeater Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–2
Figure E.2 – RS–422 Isolated Repeater/RS–232 Converter Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–4
Figure E.3 – Example RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–6
Figure E.4 – Simple System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–8
Figure E.5 – Complex System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–8
Figure E.6 – Cable A; RS232 CMM to Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–10
Figure E.7 – Cable B; RS422 CMM to Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–10
Figure E.8 – Cable C; RS422 Twisted Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–11
Figure E.9 – Cable D; RS422 Twisted Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–12
Figure E.10 – Cable E; RS-232 Converter to CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–13
Figure F.1 – Alspa 8000 SNP to RS–232 Miniconverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–1
Figure F.2 – Miniconverter to PC–AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–3
Figure F.3 – Miniconverter to PC–XT, PS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–3
Figure F.4 – Miniconverter to 9–Pin PC–XT or compatible computer
(Additional Adapter Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–3
Figure G.1 – PCM, ADC, or CMM to PC-XT Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–3
Figure G.2 – PCM, ADC, or CMM to PC-AT Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–4
Figure G.3 – PCM, ADC, or CMM to PS/2 Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–5
Figure G.4 – Point-to-Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Custom Length Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–8
Figure G.5 – Point–to–Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise Immunity . G–9
Figure G.6 – Earlier Versions of Remote Baseplate Custom “Y” Cable Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . G–10
Figure G.7 – Current Remote baseplate (IC693CHS393/399)
Custom “Y” Cable Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–11
Figure G.8 – Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–13
Figure G.9 – ”Y” Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–15
Figure G.10 – I/O Connector Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–16

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 21

 Tables

Table 1.1 – Alspa C80–35 CPU Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6

Table 1.2 – General Specifications for the Alspa C80–35 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
Table 1.3 – Default I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
Table 1.4 – Range and Size of User References for listed Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
Table 1.5 – Range and Size of User References for the Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 351 and
Model 352 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
Table 1.6 – Alspa C80–35 I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–22
Table 2.1 – I/O Expansion Cables (Prewired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
Table 2.2 – Scan Time Contributions for Module Types (in milliseconds) for listed CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
Table 2.3 – Scan Time Contributions for Module Types for CPU 351/352 (in milliseconds) . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
Table 2.4 – Rack (baseplate) Number Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
Table 2.5 – Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply Capacities for Alspa C80–35 Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
Table 2.6 – Specifications for Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
Table 2.7 – High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
Table 2.8 – Specifications for High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
Table 2.9 – DC Input Power Supply Capacities for Alspa C80–35 Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
Table 2.10 – Specifications for 24/48 VDC Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
Table 2.11 – EEPROM and EPROM Memory Catalog Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30
Table 2.12 – CPU 351 and CPU 352 User References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
Table 2.13 – Port 1 RS-232 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–35
Table 2.14 – Port 2 RS-485 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–35
Table 2.15 – Serial Port Setup COMM_REQ Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37
Table 2.16 – Description of Communications Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37
Table 2.17 – Specifications for Personal Computer Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70
Table 3.1 – Maximum Number of Modules Per System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
Table 3.2 – Load Requirements (mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
Table 3.3 – Connector/Cable Specifications for a Remote Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34
Table 3.4 – Expansion Port Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35
Table 3.5 – Specifications for IC690CBL701/702/705 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41
Table 3.6 – RS–232 Interface Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
Table 3.7 – RS–422/RS–485 Interface Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
Table 3.8 – Jumper Configuration for RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45
Table 3.9 – Specifications for Cable (RS–422/RS–485) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–47
Table 3.10 – Kits for 24–Pin Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–52
Table 3.11 – Mechanical Spare Parts Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–57
Table C.1 – Connector/Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–2
Table C.2 – Alspa 8000 PLC, RS–422 Serial Port Pin–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–3
Table C.3 – PC RS–232 Serial Port Pins–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–4
Table C.4 – PC–AT/XT Serial Port Pins–out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–5
Table D.1 – RS–232 Interface for Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–5
Table D.2 – RS–422/RS–485 Interface for Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–5
Table D.3 – Jumper Configuration for RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–8
Table D.4 – Specifications for IC690ACC900 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–9
Table E.1 – Isolated Repeater/Converter Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E–5

Page 22 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en

 Tables

Table F.1 – Miniconverter RS–232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–1

Table F.2 – Miniconverter RS–422 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–2
Table F.3 – Miniconverter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F–4
Table G.1 – Expansion Port Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–7
Table G.2 – Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–17
Table G.3 – I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–18
Table G.4 – I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL317 and IC693CBL320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–19
Table G.5 – Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–20
Table G.6 – Wire List for 24-Pin Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G–21

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 23

 Chapter Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

The Alspa C80–35 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) is a member of the Cegelec Alspa 8000 PLC family
of advanced Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). It is easy to install and configure, offers advanced
programming features and is designed for compatibility with other PLCs in the Alspa 8000 family of PLCs. Several
CPUs are available for the Alspa C80–35 PLC: Model 311 (5–slot), Model 313 (5–slot), Model 323 (10–slot),
Model 331, 351 and 352 (each 5 and 10–slot); the difference being speed, I/O capacity, user memory, data register
size and CPU specific features. Through the use of today’s advanced technology, the Alspa C80–35 PLC provides
a cost–effective platform for small to mid–size applications. The primary objectives of the Alspa C80–35 PLC are:

D To provide easier system integration,

D To be solution oriented,

D To provide small, easy–to–use PLCs,

D To provide for improved cost effectiveness while providing the latest technology and enhancing user friendly
PLC features,

D To provide ease of installation and configuration.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–1
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

1. ALSPA C80–35 PLC HARDWARE

Alspa C80–35 PLC system can include:

D Alspa C80–35 PLC with Model 311 CPU embedded in backplane:

D 5–slot baseplate with built–in CPU,
D Standard or High Capacity AC/DC power supply (120/240 VAC or 125 VDC and 24/48 VDC),
D Discrete Input (8, 16, 32 point) and Output (5, 8, 12, 16, 32 point) modules,
D Analog Input (4 and 16 channel), Analog Output (2 and 8 channel) and Analog Combo (4 channels in/2
channels out) modules,
D N80 Bus controller Module (NBC),
D N80 Communications Module (NCM),
D NCM+ (Enhanced N80 Communications Module),
D Axis Positioning Modules,
D High–Speed Counter module,
D Ethernet Interface module,
D Hand–Held Programmer,

D Alspa C80–35 PLC with Model 313 CPU embedded in backplane:

D Same as Model 311, with the exception that Model 313 has a faster scan rate (0.6 ms per 1K of logic
(boolean contacts)) and has more data registers (1024) available to the user,
D 5–slot (Model 313) and 10–slot (Model 323) baseplates,

D Alspa C80–35 PLC with Model 331 CPU:

D 5 and 10–slot CPU baseplates,
D 5 and 10–slot expansion baseplates,
D 5 and 10–slot remote baseplates,
D Standard AC/DC power supply (120/240 VAC or 125 VDC and 24/48 VDC),
D Single slot CPU,
D Discrete Input (8, 16, 32 point) and Output (5, 8, 12, 16, 32 point) modules,
D Analog Input (4 and 16 channel), Analog Output (2 and 8 channel) and Analog Combo (Input/Output)
modules,
D N80 Bus Controller Module (NBC),
D N80 Communications Module (NCM),
D NCM+ (Enhanced N80 Communications Module),
D Programmable Coprocessor module,
D Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module,
D Communications Control module,
D High–Speed Counter module,
D Axis Positioning modules,
D Hand–Held Programmer,

Page 1–2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

D I/O Processor Module,

D Ethernet Interface module,

D Alspa C80–35 PLC with Model 341, Model 351 or Model 352 CPU:
D Same as Model 331, with the exception that these models operate at a faster speed, have more data
registers and have more user program memory available. Additionally, the Model 352 supports floating
point calculations. See Table 1.1 for CPU capacities for each CPU model.

The FIP Bus Controller and the FIP Remote I/O Scanner module are also available. See Chapter 2 for a description
of these modules.

The CPU architecture is based on an 80188 (Model 311/323/331), 80C188XL (Model 341) or 80386EX
(Model 351/352) microprocessor as the main processing element. The Model 331 and above have a VLSI
coprocessor for performing boolean operations and the Model 352 has a 387 math coprocessor.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–3
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

2. ALSPA C80–35 PLC FEATURES

The Alspa C80–35 PLC combines the desired features of the traditional PLC, with many improvements and
product enhancements. The features traditionally found in most PLCs, include:

D An industrial computer that has been hardened to operate in the harsh environment commonly encountered
in the factory,

D Familiar relay ladder diagram programming,

D I/O control through user logic programming,

D Instruction set designed specifically for the industrial control and process environment,

D Communications with cell controllers, operator interface terminals, dumb terminals, personal computers and
similar devices.

The Alspa C80–35 PLC adds an array of features including:

D Family compatibility throughout the entire product line,

D Sophisticated Alspa P8 programming software,

D Extensive module diagnostics for ease of troubleshooting,

D A Configuration Software package which provides for easy system configuration,

D An alarm processor function,

D No jumpers to set on boards,

D Hand–Held Programmer for programming in Statement List language,

D Password protection to limit access to PLC contents,

D Built–in battery–backed calendar/clock (Model 331/341/351/352).

Page 1–4 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OF THE ALSPA C80–35 PLC

The Alspa C80–35 PLC offers many desirable features in addition to the above items, including small physical
size for ease of mounting and handling, built–in RS422 serial port for connection to a Hand–Held Programmer
or the Alspa P8–25/35 programmer, a fixed scan time option, a Lithium battery for backup of CMOS RAM memory
and password protection with multiple security levels. Additionally, the CPU 351 and CPU 352 have a Memory
Protect keyswitch which allows you to manually lock user program and system configuration data.

The Alspa C80–35 PLC with Model 311 CPU is available as a 5 slot baseplate. Each baseplate requires a power
supply module which is installed in the leftmost slot on the baseplate. This power supply has a power rating of 30
watts. All 5 or 10 slots are available for Alspa C80–35 I/O (discrete, analog, or option) modules.

The Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 313 CPU is a 5–slot and the Model 323 is a 10–slot baseplate. Both are the same
as the Model 311 with the exception that they have a faster scan rate (0.6 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean
contacts) compared to 18.0 milliseconds for Model 311). Additionally, the Model 313 and Model 323 have more
data registers available to the user (1024 compared to 512).

The Alspa C80–35 PLC with a Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 or Model 352 CPU can be configured with either
a 5 or 10 slot baseplate. A maximum configured Model 331 or 341, can have up to five baseplates (CPU baseplate
and four expansion baseplates) in an expansion system. A model 351 or 352 can have up to eight baseplates (CPU
baseplate and seven expansion baseplates). The expansion system can be either a local expansion system with the
last expansion baseplate no more than 15 meters (50 feet) from the CPU or it can be a remote expansion system
with the last remote baseplate located up to 213 meters (700 feet) from the CPU. A CPU module must reside in
the first (CPU) baseplate. The connection between baseplates requires only a cable, no additional modules are
required.

Specialized option modules, such as the Programmable Coprocessor Module, must reside in the Model 331, 341,
351 or 352 CPU baseplate. All other discrete I/O, analog I/O and option modules can reside in any slot in the
expansion or remote baseplates.

The maximum number of each type of I/O and option module that can be included in an Alspa C80–35 PLC system
is determined by various factors, such as the current consumption from the installed power supply, number of user
references available and the module’s function in the system. Total current consumption of all modules in a
baseplate cannot exceed the total current available from the installed power supply (see Power Supply Load
Capacity on Chapter 3, § 8. for more information). Also see Table 3.1 Maximum Number of Modules per System
for more detailed information on modules per system.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–5
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

3.1. Alspa C80–35 CPU Capacities

The following table describes the maximum capacities and operating features for the available Alspa C80–35 PLC
CPU models.

Table 1.1 – Alspa C80–35 CPU Capacities

CPU Speed, Input Output Register User Program Floating

Model (MHz) Processor Points Points Memory Memory Point
(Maximum) Math
CPU311 10 80188 160 1 160 1 1K (Bytes) 6K (Bytes) no
CPU313 10 80188 160 1 160 1 2K (Bytes) 12K (Bytes) no
CPU323 10 80188 320 2 320 2 2K (Bytes) 12K (Bytes) no
CPU331 10 80188 512 512 4K (Bytes) 16K (Bytes) no
CPU341 20 80C188XL 512 512 19.9K (Bytes) 80K (Bytes) no
CPU351 25 80386EX 2048 2048 19.9K (Bytes) 80K (Bytes) no
CPU352 25 80386EX 2048 2048 19.9K (Bytes) 80K (Bytes) yes
1 Maximum of 160 combined I + O points.
2 Maximum of 320 combined I + O points.

Page 1–6 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

3.2. Alspa C80–35 PLC with Model 311, Model 313 or Model 323 CPU
The following figure is an illustration of Model 311, 313 and 323 PLCs (with embedded CPU) with modules
installed. These models physically look the same. (Model 311 has 5 slots, Model 313 has 5 slots and Model 323
has 10 slots.)

a45614

PWR
OK A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678
F F F F F
ALSPA C80–35 RUN B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678
BATT

HIGH CAPACITY
POWER SUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLECONTROLLER
INPUT

~
100–240 VAC
50/60HZ 100VA

125 VDC, 50W

+
24 VDC
OUTPUT
0.8A MAX.

B
A
T
T
E
R
Y

a45615

PWR
OK A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678
F F F F F F F F F F
RUN B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678
ALSPA C80–35
BATT

HIGH CAPACITY
POWER SUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLECONTROLLER
INPUT
~
100–240 VAC
50/60HZ 100VA

125 VDC, 50W

+
24 VDC
OUTPUT
0.8A MAX.

B
A
T
T
E
R
Y

Figure 1.1 – Alspa C80-35 Model 311, Model 313 and Model 323 PLC (With Embedded CPU)

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–7
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

3.3. Alspa C80–35 PLC with Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 or
Model 352 CPU
The following figures show the 5 and 10 slot CPU baseplates and Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 or Model 352
with modules installed (CPU in slot 1). The connector mounted on the right side of the baseplate is for the cable
connection to an expansion baseplate.

a45616

PWR CPU
OK A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F F F F
ALSPA C80–35 RUN B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678
BATT

HIGH CAPACITY
POWER SUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLECONTROLLER
INPUT

~
100–240 VAC
50/60HZ 100VA
125 VDC, 50W

+
24 VDC
OUTPUT
0.8AMAX.

B
A
T
T
E
R
Y

a45617

PWR CPU
OK A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678
F F F F F F F F F
RUN B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678
ALSPA C80–35 BATT

HIGH CAPACITY
POWERSUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLECONTROLLER

INPUT
~
100–240 VAC
50/60HZ 100VA

125 VDC, 50W

+
24 VDC
OUTPUT
0.8A MAX.

B
A
T
T
E
R
Y

Figure 1.2 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 (5 and 10–Slot CPU Baseplates)

Page 1–8 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

Local and Remote Baseplates – Model 331, 341, 351 or 352

The following figures show 5 and 10–slot expansion baseplates with modules installed for the Alspa C80–35
Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 PLC.

Note

Both the local expansion baseplates and the remote expansion baseplates look physically the same,
the difference being in the backplane circuitry. The discussion of remote baseplates in Chapter 2 has
additional information about expansion baseplates.

a45618

PWR
OK A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F F F F F
ALSPA C80–35 RUN B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678
BATT

HIGH CAPACITY
POWERSUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLECONTROLLER
INPUT
~
100–240 VAC
50/60HZ 100VA

125 VDC, 50W

+
24 VDC
OUTPUT
0.8A MAX.

B
A
T
T
E
R
Y

a45619

PWR
OK A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678
F F F F F F F F F F
RUN B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678
ALSPA C80–35 BATT

HIGH CAPACITY
POWERSUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
INPUT
~
100–240 VAC
50/60HZ 100VA

125 VDC, 50W

+
24 VDC
OUTPUT
0.8A MAX.

B
A
T
T
E
R
Y

Figure 1.3 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 (5 and 10–Slot Expansion
Baseplates)

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–9
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

4. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
General specifications for the Alspa C80–35 PLC are listed in the following table.

Table 1.2 – General Specifications for the Alspa C80–35 PLC

Typical Scan Rate Model 352, 0.22 ms per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
Model 351, 0.22 ms per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
Model 341, 0.3 ms per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
Model 331, 0.4ms per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
Model 323, 0.6 ms per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
Model 313, 0.6 ms per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
Model 311, 18 ms per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
AC Power Source
Input Voltage range 85 to 264 VAC
Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

DC Power Source
24 or 48 VDC Nominal Input Start: 21 to 56 VDC: Run: 18 to 56 VDC
125 VDC Nominal Input 90 to 150 VDC
Input Power 90 VA maximum (full load) with VAC input (Standard power supply)
100 VA maximum (full load) with VAC input (High Capacity power supply)
50 watts maximum (full load) with VDC input

Output Power (maximum) 30 watts (total of all outputs combined)

5V 15 watts (30 watts for High Capacity power supply)
24V Relay 15 watts
24V Isolated 20 watts
Rack Dimensions Height Width Depth
10 Slot Baseplate (all models) 130mm (5.12”) 443mm (17.44”) 142mm (5.59”)
5 Slot Baseplate (all models) 130mm (5.12”) 245mm (10.43”) 142mm (5.59”)
Back–up Battery Type Lithium, long–life
Typical Battery Life, Loaded CPU 331/341/351/352: about 6 months (depending on temperature)
CPU 311/313/323: about 2 years (depending on temperature)
Battery Shelf Life, No Load 8 to 10 years at 25°C (77°F)
Maximum number of I/O Points
Model 351 and 352 4096 (2048 Inputs and 2048 Outputs)
Models 331 and 341 1024 (512 Inputs and 512 Outputs)
Models 311 and 313 160 (combined Inputs and Outputs)
Model 323 320 (combined Inputs and Outputs)
Internal Functions Model 311 Model 313/323 Model 331 Model 341 Model 351/352
Output Coils 512 512 512 512 2048
Internal Coils 1024 1024 1024 1024 2048
Timers/Counters 170 170 >500 >500 >500
Shift Registers yes yes yes yes yes
Data Registers 512 1024 2048 9999 9999
Analog Inputs (12 bits) 64 In 64 In 128 In 1024 In 2048
Analog Outputs (12 bits) 32 Out 32 Out 64 Out 256 Out 512

Types of Memory RAM RAM RAM RAM RAM

EPROM EPROM EPROM Flash EEPROM Flash EEPROM
EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM

Override no no yes yes yes

Page 1–10 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

5. CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING

Configuration and Programming of the Alspa C80–35 PLC can be done two different ways. Application programs
and system configuration can be done using Alspa P8–25/35/05 Programming software on a compatible PC (see
Programmer Requirements for running Alspa P8 § 5.7., page 1–15) or they can be done using a convenient
Hand–Held Programmer (HHP) attached to the PLC. Configuration and programming can be done with the
programmer off–line (Alspa P8) from the PLC.

Although configuration can be done after programming it is recommended that configuration be done before
programming so that the programming software can check memory constraints. Configuration and programming
with the HHP must be done with the HHP attached to and interfacing with the PLC.

Use of the programming and configuration software is described in the ALS 52201 Alspa P8–25/35/05
Programming Software for Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs User’s Manual and ALS 52102
Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs Reference Manual. Use of the Hand–Held Programmer is described in
the ALS 52202 Hand–Held Programmer for Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs User’s Manual.

5.1. Default I/O Configuration

When an Alspa C80–35 PLC is powered–up, a default I/O configuration is available with no intervention by the
user – it happens automatically. The following table shows how I/O references are assigned to each slot in the PLC,
for default I/O configuration. The 5–slot Model 311 and Model 313 PLCs will have I/O addresses assigned to every
slot.

The 10–slot Model 323 PLCs will have discrete I/O addresses assigned to each slot, but slots 9 and 10 will not be
assigned analog I/O addresses. The Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and Model 352 PLC will have analog and
discrete addresses assigned to 15 of its slots (Rack 0, Slot 2 to Rack 1, Slot 6 using 10–slot baseplates).

Note

The default I/O configuration does not apply to smart option modules. It is
valid only with discrete I/O modules and analog 4-channel Input and 2-channel
Output modules. All option modules, except ADC and CMM, require
configuration with the Hand-Held Programmer or the Alspa P8–25/35
Configurator function. Note that the 16-channel analog input, 8-channel
analog output and analog combo modules also require configuration with the
HHP or Alspa P8–25/35 Configurator function.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–11
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

Table 1.3 – Default I/O Configuration

Discrete Discrete Analog Analog
Rack Slot Input Output Input Output Notes
0 1 %I001–032 %Q001–032 %AI001–008 %AQ001–004 Slot not configured in Models 331/341/351/352
0 2 %I033–064 %Q033–064 %AI009–016 %AQ005–008
0 3 %I065–096 %Q065–096 %AI017–024 %AQ009–012
0 4 %I097–128 %Q097–128 %AI025–032 %AQ013–016
0 5 %I129–160 %Q129–160 %AI033–040 %AQ017–020 Last slot in 5–slot Model 311/313/331/341/351/352
0 6 %I161–192 %Q161–192 %AI041–048 %AQ021–024
0 7 %I193–224 %Q193–224 %AI049–056 %AQ025–028
0 8 %I225–256 %Q225–256 %AI057–064 %AQ029–032 Last slot in 10–slot Model 323 to receive analog
configuration
0 9 %I257–288 %Q257–288 %AI065–072 %AQ033–036
0 10 %I289–320 %Q289–320 %AI073–080 %AQ037–040 Last slot in 10–slot Model 323
1 1 %I321–352 %Q321–352 %AI081–088 %AQ041–044
1 2 %I353–384 %Q353–384 %AI089–096 %AQ045–048
1 3 %I385–416 %Q385–416 %AI097–104 %AQ049–052
1 4 %I417–448 %Q417–448 %AI105–112 %AQ053–056
1 5 %I449–480 %Q449–480 %AI113–120 %AQ057–060
1 6 %I481–512 %Q481–512 %AI121–128 %AQ061–064 This is last slot to receive configuration in Models
1 7 – – – – 331/341/351/352
1 8 – – – –
1 9 – – – –
1 10 – – – –

If you want to configure a system different from the default (additional I/O modules, different I/O references, etc.),
you can use either the Hand–Held Programmer or the Configuration function of the Alspa P8 Programming
Software.

5.2. System Configuration with HHP or Alspa P8 Software

System configuration with the Hand–Held Programmer or with the Configuration Software package, included as
a part of the total Alspa P8 Programming Software package, can do the following:

D Specify the rack and slot location of each module in the system,

D Specify any unique characteristics for each module in the system,

D Specify a name for the system,

D Validate that the PLC configuration follows certain system rules and guidelines,

D Archive or save the configuration in a file,

D Transfer configurations between the PLC and the programmer (Alspa P8 only),

D Configure certain CPU parameters.

Page 1–12 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

5.3. System Programming with Alspa P8 Software

The Programming Software portion of the Alspa P8 Software package can do the following:

D Develop ladder diagram programs off–line,

D Monitor and change reference values on–line,

D Edit a program on–line,

D Transfer programs and configurations between the PLC and programmer,

D Store programs automatically on disk,

D Annotate programs,

D Print programs with annotation and/or cross references,

D Display help information,

D Use symbolic references,

D Cut and paste program fragments,

D Print programs and configurations on various printers.

5.4. System Programming with the Hand–Held Programmer

The HHP programming capability is used to develop, debug and monitor ladder logic programs, and to monitor
data tables (User programs in the CPU 351 cannot be viewed or edited with the HHP). The HHP can do the
following:

D Statement List logic program development, including insert, edit and delete functions,

D On–line program changes,

D Search logic programs for instructions and/or specific references,

D Monitor reference data while viewing logic program,

D Monitor reference data in table form in binary, hexadecimal, or decimal formats,

D Monitor timer and counter values,

D View PLC scan time, firmware revision code and current logic memory use,

D Load, store and verify program logic and configuration between the Hand–Held Programmer and a removable
memory card allows programs to be moved between PLCs or loaded into multiple PLCs,

D Start or stop the PLC from any mode of operation.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–13
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

The Statement List programming instructions provide basic (boolean) instructions to execute logical operations
such as AND and OR and programming functions such as Arithmetic and Move, to execute advanced operations
including arithmetic operations, data conversion and data transfer.

5.5. Software Structure

Alspa C80–35 PLC software structure uses a common architecture that manages memory and execution priority
in the CPU’s microprocessor. This operation supports both program execution and basic housekeeping tasks such
as diagnostic routines, input/output scanners and alarm processing. The operating system also contains routines
to communicate with the programmer. These routines provide for the upload and download of application
programs, return of status information and control of the PLC.

The application (user logic) program which controls the end process to which the PLC is applied, is called a control
program and is controlled by a dedicated Instruction Sequencer Coprocessor (ISCP), which is comprised of
physical hardware in the Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 CPU based system and software in the Model 311, 313 and
323 based system. The CPU’s microprocessor and the ISCP can execute simultaneously allowing the
microprocessor to service communications while the ISCP is executing the bulk of the application program;
however, the microprocessor must execute the higher level instruction sequences.

5.6. Fault Handling

Faults are handled by a software alarm processor function which time–stamps (Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 only)
and logs I/O and system faults in two tables (PLC Fault Table and I/O Fault Table) which can be displayed on the
Alspa P8 programmer screen or uploaded to a host computer or other coprocessor.

Page 1–14 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

5.7. Programmer Requirements for Running Alspa P8 Software

In order to run the Alspa P8 software, you will need a programming computer which can be one of the following:
D A computer with a hard disk: a personal computer with an Intel 80386 or higher processor and a minimum
of 2 Megabytes of memory,
D At least 4 Megabytes of free disk space.
D The Alspa P8–25/35 Release 5 Standard Serial COM Port version requires a minimum of 556 KBytes (569 344
bytes) of available DOS application memory in order to run. It also requires either a minimum of 564 KB
(577,536 bytes) of available DOS application memory, or 520 KB (532,480 bytes) of available DOS
application memory and 42 KB of available High Memory Area, Upper Memory Block or Expanded Memory
for the COM port driver (see Chapter 6 of ALS 52201 Alspa P8–25/35/05 Programming Software for
Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs User’s Manual for details about the Standard Serial COM Port
version and memory management).
To run Alspa P8–25/35 software, MS-DOS Version 5.0 (or higher) must be installed on your computer. For more
detailed information on requirements for running Alspa P8 software, refer to the ALS 52201 Alspa P8–25/35/05
Programming Software for Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs User’s Manual.
Alspa P8–25/35 software provides international keyboard support, depending on the configuration of MS-DOS
residing on the host computer. Consult your MS-DOS User’s Manual for information on configuring for your
country.
Compatible PC computers, with their enhanced temperature specifications, and which are industrial-hardened,
are well-suited for installations where programs must be transferred, monitored, or edited in the harsh conditions
of the factory floor.

Alspa P8 Programming software communicates with the Alspa C80–35 PLC through a standard RS–232 serial
COM port in the programming computer using an RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 converter. A serial cable provides
the physical connection from the programmer (with Alspa P8–25/35 Programming software) to the PLC. The
connection to the Alspa C80–35 PLC is to a dedicated serial port connector located on the power supply module
in the CPU baseplate. This connector is accessed by opening a hinged door on the front of the power supply.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ a44605

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SERIAL
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Alspa C80–35
CABLE

ÎÎÎÎÎ
RS–485

ÎÎÎÎÎ CONVERTER

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RS–232

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ PC

Figure 1.4 – Alspa P8 Programmer Connection to Alspa C80–35 PLCs

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–15
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

5.8. Communicating With the Hand–Held Programmer

The Hand–Held Programmer communicates with an Alspa C80–35 PLC through a 2–meter (6–foot) long serial
cable (catalog number IC693CBL303). This cable has a 15–pin male connector on each end. One end attaches to
a connector on the bottom of the Hand–Held Programmer and the other end attaches to a connector located behind
the small hinged door on the PLC power supply. The cable connection supplies power to the Hand–Held
Programmer. It also provides an indication to the PLC that a Hand–Held Programmer is attached as the
programming device rather than a different programmer, since the Alspa P8 programmer attaches to the same
physical connector.

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
HAND–HELD a43107
PROGRAMMER

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Alspa C80–35

ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
C
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
P
CABLE U
(IC693CBL303)

Figure 1.5 – Hand–Held Programmer Connection to Alspa C80–35 PLC

5.9. User Memory for the Alspa C80–35 PLC

The type of user memory for the Alspa C80–35 PLC is CMOS RAM. CMOS RAM is an acronym commonly used
for Complementary Metal–Oxide Semiconductor, Random Access Memory. CMOS RAM is a fast, low power
memory that can easily be examined (read) and changed (written to). However, CMOS RAM memory is a volatile
type of memory, which means that it can lose its content if power is removed. To retain its content under no–power
conditions, a back–up battery is provided in the form of a long–life lithium battery. Because of the low power drain
of CMOS RAM memory devices, a lithium battery can maintain the contents of memory without application of
power for approximately 6 months for Model 331, 341, 351, 352 and 2 years for Models 311, 313, 323. The storage,
or shelf life, of a new lithium battery is typically 8 to 10 years.

5.10. User References

Data in the Alspa C80–35 PLC programs is referenced by its address in the system. A reference indicates the way
that data is stored in the PLC. A reference specifies both a memory type and a precise address within that memory
type. For example:

%I00001 specifies address 1 in input memory.

%R00256 specifies address 256 in register memory.

The % symbol is used to distinguish machine references from nicknames (for example reference %I00017 and
nickname SWITCH_1 can refer to the same input).

Page 1–16 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

5.11. User Reference Types

The prefix of a user reference indicates where data is stored in the PLC. References in the Alspa C80–35 PLC are
either discrete or register data types.

Table 1.4 – Range and Size of User References for listed Models
Model 311/313/323 Model 331/341
Reference Type Reference Range Size Reference Range Size
User program logic Not applicable 6K bytes Not applicable 16K bytes (331)
80K bytes (341)

Discrete inputs %I0001 – %I0320* 512 bits %I0001 – %I0512 512 bits
Discrete outputs %Q0001 – %Q0320* 512 bits %Q0001 – %Q0512 512 bits
Discrete globals %G0001 – %G1280 1280 bits %G0001 – %G1280 1280 bits
Internal coils %M0001 – %M1024 1024 bits %M0001 – %M1024 1024 bits
Temporary coils %T0001 – %T0256 256 bits %T0000 – %T0256 256 bits
System status references %S0001 – %S0032 32 bits %S0001 – %S0032 32 bits
%SA001 – %SA032 32 bits %SA001 – %SA032 32 bits
%SB001 – %SB032 32 bits %SB001 – %SB032 32 bits
%SC001 – %SC032 32 bits %SC001 – %SC032 32 bits
System register references %R0001 - %R0512 (311) 512 words %R0001 – %R2048 2 K words (331)
%R0001 - %R1024 (313) 1024 words %R0001 - %R9999 9999 words (341)
Analog inputs %AI0001 - %AI0512 64 words %AI0001 – %AI0128 128 words (331)
%AI0001 - %AI1024 1024 words (341)
Analog outputs %AQ001 - %AQ032 32 words %AQ001 – %AQ064 64 words (331)
%AQ001 – %AQ256 256 words (341)
System registers [ %SR001 – %SR016 16 words %SR001 – %SR016 16 words

* 160 physical I/O maximum with 16 point modules installed ; 320 maximum with 32 point modules installed
[ For reference table viewing only; may not be referenced in a user’s logic program.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–17
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

Table 1.5 – Range and Size of User References for the Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 351 and
Model 352 CPU
Model 351/352 CPU
Reference Type Reference Range Size
User program memory Not applicable 40K words
Discrete inputs %I0001 - %I2048 2048 bits
Discrete outputs %Q0001 - %Q2048 2048 bits
Discrete globals %G0001 - %G1280 1280 bits
Internal coils %M0001 - %M4096 4096 bits
Temporary coils %T0001 - %T0256 256 bits
System status references %S0001 - %S0032 32 bits
%SA001 - %SA032 32 bits
%SB001 - %SB032 32 bits
%SC001 - %SC032 32 bits
System register references %R0001 - %R9999 9999 words
Analog inputs %AI001 - %AI2048 2048 words
Analog outputs %AQ001 - %AQ0512 512 words
System registers [ %SR001 - %SR016 16 words

[ For reference table viewing only; may not be referenced in a user logic program.

5.12. User Register References

Register data types are referenced as 16–bit words. The following types of references are register references:

D %AI – References analog inputs. This prefix is followed by the actual address of the reference, for example:
%AI0016. The reference occupies 16 consecutive bits in %AI memory, beginning at the specified address.

D %AQ – References analog outputs. This prefix is followed by the actual address of the reference, for example:
%AQ0056. The reference occupies 16 consecutive bits in %AQ memory, beginning at the specified address.

D %R – This prefix is used to assign register references that will store word–oriented program data, such as the
results of calculations. Register memory can be configured up to 512 words in a Model 311, up to 1024 words
in a Model 313, up to 2048 words in a Model 331, and up to 9999 words in a Model 341, 351 and 352. These
references are retentive upon power loss.

Page 1–18 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

5.13. User Discrete References

D Discrete references are addressed as individual bits of data. The following types of references are discrete
references.

D %I – References discrete machine inputs. This prefix is followed by the reference’s address in the status input
table. For example: %I0012. The %I references are located in the input status table, which stores the states
of inputs received from the hardware during the last input scan.

D %Q – References discrete machine outputs. This prefix is followed by the reference’s address in the output
status table (i.e., %Q0012). %Q references are located in the output status table, which stores the states of
outputs as last set by the application program. The states of these references are retained through loss of power
unless used with a non–retentive coil (i.e., set –(S)– or reset –(R)–).

D %M – This prefix is used to reference internal coils. They are used in boolean logic when the result will be
used again in the program. The %M references are retained through loss of power unless used with a normal
coil, –( )–. Since they do not represent actual machine outputs, any available location in %M memory can be
assigned, for example: %M00064. Internal coils referenced as %SM (SET coil) and %RM (RESET coil) are
retentive.

D %T – The %T prefix is used to reference temporary internal coils which are not retained through loss of power.
Temporary coils function like the %M references, described above. However, they can be used as often as
needed as conditional contacts to control logic within the user program.

D %G – The %G prefix is used to represent Global Data that is shared between multiple devices using the N80
Communications Module to communicate over an Alspa N80 Network. %G references can be used on contacts
and retentive coils because %G memory is always retentive. %G memory cannot be used on non–retentive
coils.

D %S – The %S prefix references system memory. %S references are retentive. The %S memory for fault
references has four sections: %S, %SA, %SB and %SC. This memory is used by the PLC to store contact
references that have special meaning, such as:

Reference Nickname Description

%SA0002 ov_swp Exceeded constant sweep time
%SA0009 cfg_mm System configuration mismatch
%SB0011 bad_pwd Password Access Failure

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–19
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

6. ALSPA C80–35 PLC I/O SYSTEM

Note

The Alspa C80–35 I/O modules can be controlled two ways:

1. With an Alspa C80–35 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) using either
the embedded CPU or the single-slot CPU module (depending on model of
CPU) as the controller. This method is described in this manual.
2. With a Personal Computer (PC) that has a Personal Computer Interface
card (PCIF-35), catalog number CE693PIF301, (or similar interface)
installed in the PC. This allows software on a PC to control and monitor
Alspa C80–35 I/O. For more detailed information, refer to the ALS 52118
Alspa C80–35 PLC I/O Module Specifications.

The rack–type Alspa C80–35 PLC I/O system provides the interface between the Alspa C80–35 PLC and user
supplied input and output devices. The I/O system supports Alspa C80–35 PLC I/O. In addition to Alspa C80–35
I/O modules, the I/O system supports the N80 bus Controller, Global Alspa CE80–15 I/O and PCMs. N80
Communications Modules allow an Alspa C80–35 PLC to communicate on an Alspa N80 Network. I/O modules
are contained in baseplates. An Alspa C80–35 PLC system can consist of:

D A single baseplate with embedded CPU (Model 311, Model 313 or Model 323),

D A CPU baseplate and up to 4 expansion baseplates in a local I/O system with the last expansion baseplate
located up to 50 feet from the CPU baseplate (Model 331 or 341),

D A CPU baseplate and up to 4 expansion baseplates (up to 15 meters (50 feet) from CPU) and remote baseplates
(up to 213 meters, 700 feet from CPU) in a remote I/O system (Model 331 or 341). A Model 351 or Model 352
system can have a CPU baseplate and up to 7 expansion or remote baseplates.

The rack-type I/O system for the Alspa C80–35 PLC consists of Alspa C80–35 PLC I/O modules. These modules
plug directly into the Alspa C80–35 PLC baseplates. Alspa C80–35 I/O modules can be installed in any available
slot in the CPU baseplate (Model 311, 313, 323, 331, 341, 351, 352) or into any slot in any of the expansion or
remote baseplates (Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 only). The Alspa C80–35 PLC with a Model 331 or 341 CPU
supports up to 49 I/O modules. The Alspa C80–35 PLC with a Model 351 or 352 CPU supports up to 79 I/O
modules. The Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 311 and Model 313 5-slot baseplates support five I/O modules, and the
Model 323 10-slot baseplate supports ten I/O modules. Third party I/O modules are also available that can be
included in an Alspa C80–35 PLC system. For information on Third party I/O modules, consult your authorized
Cegelec PLC distributor or your local Cegelec sales office.

I/O modules are retained in their slots by molded latches that easily snap onto the upper and lower edges of the
baseplate when the module is fully inserted into its slot to prevent accidental loosening or disengagement of the
modules.

Page 1–20 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

6.1. Controlling Alspa C80–35 I/O With a Personal Computer

Alspa C80–35 I/O modules can also be controlled with a Personal Computer that has, as an interface to the Alspa
C80–35 I/O, a Personal Computer Interface card. The Personal Computer Interface card (PCIF-35) for Alspa
C80–35 I/O provides an alternative method of controlling Alspa C80–35 I/O. The PCIF-35 is an ISA compatible
card that can be installed in any PC/AT/ISA bus, 8-bit, half-size slot, connecting a personal computer with up to
four Alspa C80–35 Expansion or Remote I/O baseplates. Up to 1280 bytes of I/O can be monitored and controlled
by the personal computer using computer language (for example, C) or third party control software.

6.2. Alspa C80–35 I/O Module Types

Alspa C80–35 I/O modules are available as five types: discrete inputs, discrete outputs, analog inputs, analog
outputs and option modules which can be used with all models of PLCs. Additionally, there are specialized option
modules which can only be used with Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and Model 352 PLCs. Discrete Input
modules have either eight or sixteen points; discrete output modules have from five to sixteen points, depending
on type. Analog modules are available with various input and output configurations including a combination
input/output module (see Table 1.6, page 1–22).

Option modules include a High Speed Counter, an N80 Communications Module, Enhanced N80 Communications
Module (NCM+), Axis Positioning Modules (one and two axis), I/O Processor Module, an N80 or FIP Bus
Controller and an Ethernet Interface module. Specialized option modules are the Programmable Coprocessor
Modules, Communications Control module and the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module.

The circuit status of each I/O point on discrete modules is indicated by a green LED mounted at the top of the
module and viewable through a clear plastic lens. There are two horizontal rows of LEDs with eight LEDs in each
row. Each LED is identified by a letter and number identification which are illuminated when the applicable LED
turns on. These letters and numbers clearly identify each LED to assist in program monitoring and trouble shooting.
The top row is labeled A1 to 8 and the bottom row is labeled B1 to 8.

Additionally, a blown fuse indicator for fused output modules is provided by an LED labeled F on the LED cover
(the F is labeled on all discrete I/O modules, although it is only relevant to fused output modules).

Each module has an insert that goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door. The surface towards
the inside of the module (when the hinged door is closed) has circuit wiring information for that module type and
the outside surface has space to record circuit identification information. The outside left edge of the insert is color
coded so that you can quickly identify the module as a high voltage (red), low voltage (blue) or signal level (grey)
type.

Alspa C80–35 I/O and Option modules are listed in the following table. All of the listed modules may not be
available when this manual is printed. Specifications for discrete and analog I/O modules can be found in
ALS 52118 Alspa C80–35 PLC I/O Module Specifications. Information on option modules can be found in the
appropriate user’s manual.

For current information on availability of I/O modules, consult your Cegelec representative.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–21
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

Table 1.6 – Alspa C80–35 I/O Modules

Catalog Number Points Description Refer to
Discrete Modules – Input
CF693MDL100 16 48 VDC Positive/Negative Logic FAST ALS 52118
IC693MDL230 8 120 VAC Isolated ALS 52118
IC693MDL231 8 240 VAC Isolated ALS 52118
IC693MDL240 16 120 VAC ALS 52118
IC693MDL241 16 24 VAC ALS 52118
IC693MDL632 8 125 VDC Positive/Negative Logic ALS 52118
IC693MDL634 8 24 VDC Positive/Negative ALS 52118
IC693MDL645 16 24 VDC Positive/Negative Logic ALS 52118
IC693MDL646 16 24 VDC Positive/Negative Logic FAST ALS 52118
IC693MDL654 32 5/12 VDC (TTL) Positive/Negative Logic ALS 52118
IC693MDL655 32 24 VDC Positive/Negative Logic ALS 52118
IC693ACC300 16 Input Simulator ALS 52118
Discrete Modules – Output
IC693MDL310 12 120 VAC, 0.5A ALS 52118
IC693MDL330 8 120/240 VAC, 2A ALS 52118
IC693MDL340 16 120 VAC, 0.5A ALS 52118
IC693MDL390 5 120/240 VAC Isolated, 2A ALS 52118
IC693MDL730 8 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 2A ALS 52118
IC693MDL731 8 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 2A ALS 52118
IC693MDL732 8 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 0.5A ALS 52118
IC693MDL733 8 12/24 VDC Negative Logic ALS 52118
IC693MDL734 6 125 VDC Positive/Negative Logic, 1 A ALS 52118
IC693MDL740 16 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 0.5A ALS 52118
IC693MDL741 16 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 0.5A ALS 52118
IC693MDL742 16 12/24 VDC Pos. Logic, Electronic Short Circuit Protect ALS 52118
IC693MDL752 32 5/24 VDC (TTL) Negative Logic ALS 52118
IC693MDL753 32 12/24 VDC Positive/Negative Logic, 0.5A ALS 52118
IC693MDL930 8 Relay, 4A Isolated ALS 52118
IC693MDL931 8 Relay, Isolated, N.C and Form C, 8 A. ALS 52118
IC693MDL940 16 Relay, 2AA ALS 52118
Discrete Modules – Input/Output
IC693MDR390 8/8 24 VDC Input, Relay Output ALS 52118
IC693MAR590 8/8 120 VAC Input, Relay Output ALS 52118
Analog Modules
IC693ALG220 4 ch Analog Input, Voltage ALS 52118
IC693ALG221 4 ch Analog Input, Current ALS 52118
IC693ALG222 16 ch Analog Input, Voltage, High Density ALS 52118
IC693ALG223 16 ch Analog Input, Current, High Density ALS 52118
IC693ALG390 2 ch Analog Output, Voltage ALS 52118
IC693ALG391 2 ch Analog Output, Current ALS 52118
IC693ALG392 8 ch Analog Output, Current/Voltage, High Density ALS 52118
IC693ALG442 4 ch In/ Analog Current/Voltage Combination Input/Output ALS 52118
2 ch Out

Page 1–22 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

Table 1.6 – Alspa C80–35 I/O Modules (continued)

Catalog Number Points Description Refer to
Option Modules
IC693APU300 – High Speed Counter Module ALS 52401
IC693APU301/302 – Axis Positioning Module, 1 and 2–Axis, Standard Mode ALS 52403
IC693APU301/302 – Axis Positioning Module, 1 and 2–Axis, Standard Mode ALS 52607
IC693APU305 – I/O Processor Module ALS 52309
IC693CMM311 – Communications Control Module ALS 52506
IC693CMM321 – Ethernet Interface Module ALS 52512
IC693PCM301 – PCM, 192K Bytes (47K Bytes user MegaBasic program) ALS 52402
IC693PCM311 – PCM, 640K Bytes (190K Bytes user MegaBasic program) ALS 52402
IC693ADC311 – Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor ALS 52604
IC693BEM330 – FIP Remote I/O Scanner ALS 52313
IC693BEM340 – FIP Bus Controller ALS 52519
IC693CMM304 – NCM Communications Module for Alspa C80–35 ALS 52501
IC693CMM305 – Enhanced N80 Communications Module for Alspa C80–35 ALS 52502
IC693BEM334 – N80 Bus Controller ALS 52511
CE693PIF301 – Personal Computer Interface for Alspa C80–35 ALS 52117

6.3. Horner Electric Modules

Alspa C80–35 compatible modules are available from Horner Electric, Inc. which can be used in an Alspa C80–35
PLC system or in a Personal Computer I/O system with a PCIF-35 installed. Some of these modules are listed
below; there are many more.

Catalog Number Description

HE693ASCxxx ASCII BASIC Modules
HE693ADCxxx Isolated Analog Input Modules
HE693DACxxx Isolated Analog Output modules
HE693APGxxx IQ2 Remote I/O Interface Modules
HE693PIDxxx PID modules
HE693STPxxx Stepper Motor Modules
HE693ADCxxx Strain Gauge Modules
HE693RTDxxx RTD Modules
HE693THMxxx Thermocouple Modules
HE693PIDNETE PID Network Module
HE693DRVNETA AC Drive Control Module

6.4. Universal Terminal Boards

Alspa C80–35 I/O modules with up to 16 points have, as a standard feature, detachable terminal boards for field
wiring connections to and from user supplied input or output devices. This feature makes it easy to prewire field
wiring to user supplied input and output devices and to replace modules in the field without disturbing existing
field wiring. I/O connectors on these terminal boards have 20 terminals and will accept up to one 2.1mm2
(AWG 14) wire or two 1.12mm2 (AWG 16) wires using ring or lug type terminals. Two terminals on the connector
are provided for connection to a +24 volt DC supply for input modules requiring a 24 volt DC power source. Wires
to/from field devices are routed out of the bottom of the terminal board cavity.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–23
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

a43082

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ OUTPUT

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RELAY N.O. 2 AMP

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1
2 A1
A1

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
3 A2 V

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
4 A3
A3
5 A4

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
6

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
7 A5
8 A6 V

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
9 A7

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
10 A8
11

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
12 B1

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
13 B2 V
14 B3

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
15 B4

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
16
17 B5

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
18 B6 V

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
19 B7
20 B8

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ 44A726782–015

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FOR USE WITH
IC693MDL940

Figure 1.6 – Example of C80–35 I/O Module

6.5. 32 Point Module Connectors

Connections to 32 point modules are made from field input devices and output loads through a cable or cables to
connectors on the front of each module. Some of the 32 point modules have a single 50 pin connector, others have
two 24 pin connectors. Connection from field devices to the 50–pin connectors is made directly through prewired
or user constructed cables or through an intermediate connector interface which provides a convenient method of
terminating field wiring to the modules. Accessory kits are available from Cegelec that have the connector
components required for building the cables for connecting field devices to modules having two 24–pin
connectors. More detailed information on wiring to 32 point I/O modules can be found in ALS 52118 Alspa C80–35
PLC I/O Module Specifications.

6.6. I/O Module Addressing

Module addressing is determined by the position (slot number) in the rack in which it is installed (for the default
I/O configuration). There are no jumpers or DIP switch settings required to address modules. Actual reference
addresses (other than the default I/O configuration) for each module are assigned by the user with the Configuration
portion of the Alspa P8 Programming Software package or with the Hand–Held Programmer. The configurator
function of Alspa P8 allows you to assign reference addresses to the I/O modules on a slot–by–slot basis.

Page 1–24 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

7. OPTION MODULES FOR THE ALSPA C80–35 PLC

In addition to discrete and analog I/O modules, various option modules are available for use in an Alspa C80–35
PLC system. Option modules which can be used with the Models 311, 313, 331, 341, 351 and 352 include an N80
Communications Module (NCM), an Enhanced N80 Communications Module (NCM+), an N80 Bus Controller
Module, a High Speed Counter (HSC), two Axis Positioning Modules (1 and 2–axis), an I/O Processor module and
an Ethernet Interface module. Additionally, specialized option modules are available which can only be used in
a Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 system. These modules are the Programmable Coprocessor Modules (PCM),
Communications Control Module (CMM) and Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module (ADC). Two new
modules are also available which interface to a FIP bus, the FIP Bus Controller (FBC30) and the FIP Remote I/O
Scanner (Alspa CE80–35).

The option modules are described briefly below. A more detailed description of each of these modules can be found
in Chapter 2 of this manual and the applicable manual for each module.

7.1. NCM Communications Module

The NCM Communications Module for Alspa C80–35 (IC693CMM304) for the Alspa C80–35 PLC provides
Global Data Communications on an Alspa N80 Network between Alspa C80–35 PLCs and other Alspa 8000 PLCs.
Alspa C80–75 PLCs communicate on this network through their respective N80 Bus Controllers.

The Alspa N80 Network is a token passing peer–to–peer, noise immune network optimized to provide high speed
transfer of real time control data. Up to eight Alspa C80–35 PLCs or other Alspa 8000 PLCs in any combination
can communicate with each other over a single Alspa N80 high–speed serial bus using a standard twisted pair,
shielded cable. For more information, refer to ALS 52501 N80 Communications Module (NCM) for Alspa C80–35
PLC User’s Manual.

7.2. Enhanced Communications Module (NCM+)

The Enhanced Communications Module NCM+ (IC693CMM305) is an intelligent module that provides automatic
global data communications between an Alspa C80–35 PLC and up to 31 other devices on an Alspa N80 Network.
The NCM+ can be located in any Alspa C80–35 CPU baseplate or remote baseplate.

Up to two NCM+ modules can be installed in an Alspa C80–35 PLC system with each NCM+ having its own Alspa
N80 network, which can serve up to 31 additional devices on the bus. This allows an Alspa C80–35 PLC with two
NCM+ modules to exchange global data with as many as 62 other devices automatically. For more information,
refer to the ALS 52502 N80 Enhanced Communications Module (NCM+) for Alspa C80–35 PLC User’s Manual.

7.3. High Speed Counter

The High Speed Counter (IC693APU300) for the Alspa C80–35 PLC is a single–slot module used in applications
where pulse input rates exceed the input capability of the PLC or where too large a percentage of PLC processing
capability would be required. The High Speed Counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to
80 kHz. The High Speed Counter can be installed in any Alspa C80–35 baseplate.

With direct processing the High Speed Counter module is able to sense inputs, count and respond with outputs
without needing to communicate with a CPU. It can be configured to count either up or down, to count both up
and down or to count the difference between two changing values. The module can be configured to provide 1,
2 or 4 counters of differing complexity. For detailed information, refer to ALS 52401 High Speed Counter for
Alspa C80–35 PLC User’s Manual

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–25
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

7.4. Axis Positioning Module

The Axis Positioning Module (APM) is an intelligent, fully programmable motion control option module for the
Alspa C80–35 PLC wich can be installed in any Alspa C80–35 baseplate. The APM is available in two versions,
a 1–axis (IC693APU301) and a 2–axis (IC693APU302) module. The APM allows a PLC user to combine high
performance control with PLC logic solving functions in one integrated system. The APM can be configured to
operate in either standard positioning mode or follower mode. The mode is selected by configuring a setup
parameter using the Alspa P8 Configuration software.

The Alspa C80–35 and APM operate together as one integrated motion control package. The APM controls axis
motion and handles all direct communications to the drive and machine while the PLC automatically transfers data
between PLC tables and the APM. The PLC also provides a means for connecting Operator Interfaces such as
Alphanumeric Display System which can control and monitor system operation.

Motion programs are normally created using the Motion Programmer software package, however a single short
program can be created using the Program Zero Editor within the Alspa P8–25/35 software package. For more
information on the APM refer to the ALS 52403 Axis Positioning Module (APM) for Alspa C80–35 PLC Standard
Mode User’s Manual, ALS 52607 Axis Positioning Module (APM) for Alspa C80–35 PLC – Follower Mode User’s
Manual and ALS 52205 Axis Positioning Module (APM) for Alspa 8000 PLCs Programming Manual.

7.5. I/O Processor Module

The I/O Processor (IOP) module (IC693APU305) provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals for industrial
control applications such as:

D Fast response process control,

D Velocity measurement,

D Material handling, marking and packaging.

Direct processing means that the module is able to sense inputs, process the input information and control the
outputs without needing to communicate with a CPU.

During each CPU sweep, the I/O Processor communicates with the CPU through 32 discrete inputs (%I), 15 words
of analog inputs (%AI), 32 discrete outputs (%Q) and 6 words of analog outputs (%AQ). The %AQ outputs can
be used by the CPU program to set up timer values or send other controlling parameters to the I/O Processor.

The I/O Processor is configured using the Alspa Hand-Held Programmer or the Alspa P8 Programming Software
Configurator function. Many configuration parameters can be modified from the user’s application program as
well. Each configuration parameter is set to a factory default value which is suitable for many applications. There
are no jumpers or DIP switches to set on the module. Six green LEDs at the top of the module indicate the operating
status of the module, the status of configuration parameters and the state of hardware outputs 1-4. For detailed
information on the I/O Processor module, refer to the ALS 52309 Alspa C80–35 I/O Processor Module User’s
Manual.

Page 1–26 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

7.6. N80 Bus Controller

The Alspa C80–35 Bus Controller module (IC693BEM334) is used to interface an N80 I/O serial bus to an Alspa
C80–35 PLC. The N80 Bus Controller receives and transmits control data of up to 128 bytes for up to 31 devices
on an N80 Bus. An N80 bus can serve Alspa CE80–15 blocks (discrete, analog and special purpose), Remote Drops
(Alspa C80–75 I/O racks interfaced to the bus through remote I/O Scanners), the Alspa Hand-Held Monitor, and
multiple hosts (for communications using datagrams and Global data).

An N80 bus provides versatility in that it can be used with several schemes:

D A bus can feature I/O control enhanced by communications commands in the program,

D A bus can be used entirely for I/O control, with many devices and no additional communications,

D A bus can be dedicated to CPU communications, with multiple CPUs and no I/O devices,

D Additionally, more complex systems can be developed, with dual CPUs and one or more additional CPUs for
data monitoring.

For detailed information on the N80 Bus Controller, refer to ALS 52511 Alspa C80–35 PLC Bus Controller for
Alspa N80 Network (NBC) User’s Manual.

7.7. Ethernet Interface

The Ethernet Interface module (IC693CMM321) provides an interface that allows you to directly attach the Alspa
C80–35 PLC to an Ethernet LAN via a user-supplied transceiver and AUI cable and to communicate with hosts
and other control devices on the network.

The Ethernet Interface provides your PLC with a great deal of capability by allowing you to:

D Become operational quickly,

D Directly attach your PLC to an Ethernet network,

D Transfer data between PLCs,

D Access data using a Host computer (or other control device),

D Communicate simultaneously to multiple devices,

D Be compatible with other Cegelec devices, as well as with devices from other vendors,

D Diagnose and maintain your system using diagnostic and station management tools,

D Indirectly attach to other Local Area Networks and/or wide area networks via third party IP routers,

D Communicate with remote computers via Serial Line Protocol (SLIP) using modems and/or serial lines.

The Ethernet Interface does not support the Alspa 8000 Hand-Held Programmer.

For more information, refer to the ALS 52512 Alspa C80–35 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications User’s Manual

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–27
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

7.8. Programmable Coprocessor Module

The Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) is a specialized option module which enhances the overall
operation of the Alspa C80–35 PLC (Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 or Model 352 only) by providing a high
performance coprocessor to the CPU. The PCM is available in two different versions:

D IC693PCM300 – 160K bytes (35K Bytes user MegaBasic program),

D IC693PCM301 – 192K Bytes (47K Bytes user MegaBasic program),
D IC693PCM311 – 640K Bytes (190K Bytes user MegaBasic program).

The PCM supports the CCM communications protocol, has two serial ports, supports the MegaBasic programming
language and is programmed using a compatible PC. For detailed information on the PCM, refer to ALS 52402
Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) and Support Software for Alspa 8000 PLCs User’s Manual.

7.9. Communications Control Module

This specialized option module (IC693CMM311) is a dedicated communications module that supports the CCM
communications protocol, the RTU (Modbus) communications protocol and the SNP communications protocol.
The Communications Control Module (CMM) has two serial ports for communications and can be programmed
using a compatible PC or the Hand–Held Programmer. This module can be used only with a Model 331, Model
341, Model 351 or Model 352. CMM, RTU and SNP operations are described in the ALS 52506 Serial
communication modules for Alspa 8000 PLCs User’s Manual.

7.10. Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module

The Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module (IC693ADC311) is a coprocessor to the Alspa C80–35 PLC CPU
for use in an Alphanumeric Display System. It is programmed to perform Alphanumeric Display System display,
report and alarm functions through an Operator Interface Terminal (OIT), which can be a colour or monochrome
OIT or Mini OIT, a Touch Mini OIT, a VT100 compatible terminal or a compatible PC running TERMF. It
communicates with the Alspa C80–35 CPU over the system backplane. Operator Interface Systems are easily
created by filling in a sequence of pull–down menus.

Multiple Alphanumeric Display Coprocessors can be supported in a single Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331, Model
341, Model 351 or Model 352 system and must be located in the CPU baseplate. For detailed information on the
Alphanumeric Display System, refer to ALS 52604 Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual and ALS 52605
Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual.

7.11. FIP Remote I/O Scanner (Alspa CE80–35)

The FIP Remote I/O Scanner (catalog number IC693BEM330) is an intelligent module that interfaces 80–35 I/O
modules to a FIP bus. Up to 19 I/O modules can be accommodated by using two 10-slot baseplates connected by
an expansion cable. Together, the Remote I/O Scanner and the modules it serves are referred to as an I/O Nest.
The FIP Nest can include most 80–35 I/O modules.

The host CPU can be any type of CPU capable of communicating on a FIP bus. A module in the host (such as a
FIP Bus Controller) provides the necessary interface between the FIP bus and the host CPU. For detailed
information, see ALS 52313 Alspa CE80–35 Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual.

Page 1–28 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

7.12. FIP Bus Controller (FBC30)

The C80–35 PLC FIP Bus Controller (IC693BEM340) is used to interface a FIP I/O serial bus to a C80–35 PLC.

A FIP bus is used primarily for I/O control. It also is used to store configuration data to remote devices and to report
faults. Devices that can be on a FIP bus in a C80–35 PLC system include:

D C80–75 PLC, interfaced to a FIP bus by a Fip Bus Controller.

D CE80–20 Stations, CE80–20 I/O modules that are interfaced to the bus via a FIP Bus Interface Unit (BIU).

D Remote Drops, C80–35 I/O racks that are interfaced to the bus via FIP Remote I/O Scanner Modules. Each
remote drop can include one 5- or 10-slot main rack, one 5- or 10-slot expansion rack and any mix of discrete
and analog I/O modules.

D Generic Devices, such as general-purpose computers that are interfaced to the bus via a FIP Interface Module.

8. PERSONAL COMPUTER INTERFACE CARD

The Personal Computer Interface card (PCIF-35), catalog number CE693PIF301, for Alspa C80–35 I/O provides
an alternative method of controlling Alspa C80–35 I/O. The PCIF-35 is an ISA compatible card that can be
installed in any PC/AT/ISA bus, 8-bit, half-size slot, connecting a personal computer with up to four Alspa C80–35
Expansion or Remote I/O baseplates. Up to 1280 bytes of I/O can be monitored and controlled by the personal
computer using computer language (for example, C) or third party control software.

Remote racks can be located up to 213 meters (700 feet) from the personal computer (expansion racks up to 15
meters (50 feet)) connected through standard Cegelec expansion cables. The PCIF-35 card connects to the Alspa
C80–35 baseplates via a 25-pin connector on the front of the card. The PCIF-35 interfaces to all Alspa C80–35
discrete and analog I/O modules (except 16 channel analog modules which are not currently supported). A variety
of smart modules from Horner Electric, Inc. are also supported. A manual describing the PCIF-35 is available from
Horner Electric, Inc. An Important Product Information notice (GFK-0889), which is included with the card
provides basic information about the card, including software installation procedures.

The Personal Computer Interface card when ordered by catalog number CE693PIF301 includes the PCIF-35 card
and two software interfaces : one for a direct interface to I/O modules based on rack and slot address, and a second
one with a PLC type reference table interface with override capability. The Catalog number IC693PIF300 is the
interface card only, without software.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 1–29
Introduction to the Alspa C80–35 PLC

Page 1–30 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Chapter Product Description

This chapter describes the available hardware items that comprise the Alspa C80–35 PLC. Included are a brief
summary of the function of the item in the system and a physical description of that item. More detailed information
on cables can be found in Chapter 3 and Appendix H. The items described in this chapter are:

Catalog Number Description

IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter
IC690ACC900 RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter
IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit, RS–422 to RS–232
IC690CBL701 Cable, 3 meters (10 feet), PCM/ADC/Converter to PC–XT
IC690CBL702 Cable, 3 meters (10 feet), PCM/ADC/Converter to PC–AT
IC690CBL705 Cable, 3 meters (10 feet), PCM/ADC/Converter to PS/2
IC693ACC301 Replacement Battery, Lithium
IC693ACC307 I/O Bus Terminator Plug
IC693ACC315 Battery Accessory Kit
IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module
IC693APU300 High Speed Counter
IC693APU301/302 Axis Positioning Modules (one axis and two axis)
IC693APU305 I/O Processor Module
IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I/O Scanner
IC693BEM334 N80 Bus Controller Module
IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller
IC693CBL300 Expansion Cable, 1 meter (3 feet) (Model 331/341/351/352)
IC693CBL301 Expansion Cable, 2 meters (6 feet) (Model 331/341/351/352)
IC693CBL302 Expansion Cable, 15 meters (50 feet) (Model 331/341/351/352)
IC693CBL303 Cable for Hand–Held Programmer, 2 meters (6 feet)
IC693CBL305 ”Y” cable, 0.3 meter (1 foot), used with PCM301, PCM311,CMM311, ADC311
IC693CBL311 Cable, 3 meters (10 feet), APM to terminal block
IC693CBL312 Expansion Cable, 0.15 meters (0.5 feet), shielded (Model 331/341/351/352)
IC693CBL313 Expansion Cable, 7.5 meters (25 feet) (Model 331/341/351/352)
IC693CBL317 Cable, 3 meters (10 feet) with external shield pigtail, APM to terminal block
IC693CBL320 Cable, 1 meter (3 feet) with external shield pigtail, APM to terminal block
IC693CHS391 Baseplate, 10–slot, CPU (Model 331/341/351/352)
IC693CHS392 Baseplate, 10–slot, expansion (Model 331/341/351/352)
IC693CHS393 Baseplate, 10–slot, remote (Model 331/341/351/352)
IC693CHS397 Baseplate, 5–slot, CPU (Model 331/341/351/352)
IC693CHS398 Baseplate, 5–slot, expansion (Model 331/341/351/352)
IC693CHS399 Baseplate, 5–slot, remote (Model 331/341/351/352)
IC693CMM304 N80 Communications Module for Alspa C80–35
IC693CMM305 Enhanced N80 Communications Module (NCM+) for Alspa C80–35

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa 80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–1
Product Description

IC693CMM311 Communications Control Module

IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module
IC693CPU311 Baseplate, 5–slot with CPU built–in 10 MHz (Model 311)
IC693CPU313 Baseplate, 5–slot with CPU built–in 10 MHz (Model 313)
IC693CPU323 Baseplate, 10–slot with CPU built–in 10 MHz (Model 313)
IC693CPU331 CPU module, 10 MHz (Model 331)
IC693CPU341 CPU module, 20 MHz (Model 341)
IC693CPU351 CPU module, 25 MHz (Model 351)
IC693CPU352 CPU module, 25 MHz (Model 352)
IC693PCM301 PCM, 192K Bytes (47K Bytes user MegaBasic program)
IC693PCM311 PCM, 640K Bytes (190K Bytes user MegaBasic program)
CE693PIF301 Personal Computer Interface card
IC693PRG301 Hand–Held Programmer
IC693PWR324 Power Supply, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 30 watts
IC693PWR325 Power Supply, 24/48 VDC, 30 watts
CE693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 30 watts
A general description of Alspa C80–35 I/O modules is included in this chapter. For more detailed information on
I/O modules, refer to ALS 52118 Alspa C80–35 PLC I/O Module Specifications. For information on specific
intelligent modules, refer to the applicable user’s manual for that module. The Preface, Page 5 in this manual has
a list of Alspa C80–35 manuals.

1. BASEPLATES
Alspa C80–35 PLC hardware modules are housed in baseplates. Baseplates containing a power supply and
configured with modules are referred to as racks (terminology used in Alspa P8 configuration software). The
different types of available baseplates are described in the following paragraphs.

1.1. Model 311, Model 313 and Model 323 Baseplates

Alspa C80–35 Model 311, 313 baseplates are available as a 5-slot baseplate (IC693CPU311 for Model 311 and
IC693CPU313 for Model 313) and a 10-slot baseplate (IC693CPU323 for Model 323). Each baseplate contains
a CPU which is physically located on the same circuit board as is the backplane and is referred to as an embedded
CPU. The power supply for the PLC mounts on the left side of the baseplate. This allows all 5 or 10 slots to be
available for discrete I/O, analog I/O or option modules. There are no switches or jumpers on the Model 311, 313
or 323 baseplates requiring configuration. The Alspa C80–35 baseplates must be panel mounted.
a44563

ÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 5-SLOT ÎÎ
ÎÎ
1

ÎÎ
WITH CPU

CAUTION SYSTEM PROGRAM

PROM PROM
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
i HOUR

POWER 1 2 3 4 5
SUPPLY

Figure 2.1 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 311 5–slot Baseplate

Page 2–2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

The 5 and 10–slot baseplates for the Model 313 and 323 PLCs are shown in the following figures.

a45133

ÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE

ÎÎ 1

ÎÎ
CONTROLLER
BASE 5-SLOT

ÎÎ
WITH CPU

CAUTION SYSTEM PROGRAM

PROM PROM
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
i HOUR

1 2 3 4 5
POWER
SUPPLY

a45134

1
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

BASE 10–SLOT
WITH CPU

CAUTION SYSTEM PROGRAM

PROM PROM
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR.

POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPPLY

Figure 2.2 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 313 (5–slot) and Model 323 (10–slot) Baseplates

1.2. Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 CPU Baseplates

Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 CPU baseplates are available in two versions, a 5–slot
(IC693CHS397) and a 10–slot (IC693CHS391). This allows for either 5 slots or 10 slots for modules plus a slot
for the power supply. The power supply must be installed in the leftmost slot on the baseplate. The Model
331/341/351/352 CPU baseplate must always contain the CPU module, which is installed in the slot labeled CPU/1
adjacent to the power supply. The remaining four or nine slots in the CPU baseplate are available for analog I/O,
discrete I/O, option modules and specialized option modules. A 25–pin D–type female connector is located at the
far right of the baseplate for connection to an expansion baseplate, if required. If additional system capacity is
required beyond the CPU baseplate, up to four expansion baseplates in a Model 331 or 341 system or up to eight
expansion baseplates in a Model 351 or 352 system can be connected through available I/O expansion cables (or
your custom made cables) in a chain to form an expansion system.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–3
 Product Description

a44564

PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 5–SLOT

E
X
P
A
CAUTION N
USER PROGRAM S
AND REGISTER I
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER O
SUPPLY IS N
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR

CPU/1 2 3 4 5
POWER
SUPPLY

Figure 2.3 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 CPU 5–Slot Baseplate

a43049

PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 10–SLOT

E
X
P
A
CAUTION
N
USER PROGRAM S
AND REGISTER I
VALUES MAY BE O
LOST IF POWER N
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR.

POWER CPU/1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPPLY

Figure 2.4 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 CPU 10–Slot Baseplate

1.3. Expansion Baseplates for Models 331, 341, 351 and 352
Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 expansion baseplates are also available in two versions; a 5–slot
(IC693CHS398) and a 10–slot (IC693CHS392). Expansion baseplates have either 5 or 10 slots for modules and
a power supply slot. Physically, these baseplates are similar to the CPU baseplate, with the exception that they have
a rack number selection DIP switch (the CPU baseplate does not have this DIP switch), and the backplane is
different in that specialized option modules such as the PCM cannot reside in an expansion baseplate. Discrete
I/O, Analog I/O and option modules (NBC, NCM, NCM+, HSC, APM, I/O Processor, Ethernet Interface) can
reside in any slot in an expansion baseplate. The maximum distance from the CPU baseplate that the last expansion
baseplate can be located is 15 meters (50 feet).

There can be no more than a total of 15 m (50 feet) of cable connecting all expansion baseplates in a local expansion
system, and all expansion baseplates must be connected to a common ground. Each expansion baseplate has a
25–pin female D–type connector mounted at the far right of the baseplate for connection to either the CPU
baseplate or to another baseplate in an expansion system.

Page 2–4 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

a44565

DIP EXPANSION RACK #

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 X X X
PROGRAMMABLE 2 X X X
CONTROLLER 3 X X X
BASE 5–SLOT X CLOSED
EXPANSION
E
X
P
A
CAUTION N
USER PROGRAM S
AND REGISTER I
VALUES MAY BE O
LOST IF POWER N
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR

1 2 3 4 5
POWER
SUPPLY

Figure 2.5 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 5–Slot Expansion Baseplate
a43050

DIP EXPANSION RACK #

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 X X X
PROGRAMMABLE 2 X X X
CONTROLLER 3 X X X
BASE 10–SLOT X CLOSED
EXPANSION
E
X
P
A
CAUTION N
USER PROGRAM S
AND REGISTER I
VALUES MAY BE O
LOST IF POWER N
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR.

POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPPLY

Figure 2.6 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 10–Slot Expansion Baseplate

I/O Expansion Cables

Five prewired I/O expansion cables are available from Cegelec. Catalog numbers and lengths of these cables are
listed in the following table. You can build custom cables to suit the needs of your application if cable lengths other
than those listed in the table are required. Refer to Table 3.3 for detailed information on cable type and connectors.
Note that the same cables can be used in both local and remote expansion systems, however the cables used in a
remote expansion system must use the cable type described in Table 3.3.

Table 2.1 – I/O Expansion Cables (Prewired)

Catalog Length
Number
IC693CBL300 1 meter (3 feet), continuous shield
IC693CBL301 2 meters (6 feet), continuous shield
IC693CBL302 15 meters (50 feet), continuous shield
IC693CBL312 0.15 meter (0.5 feet), continuous shield
IC693CBL313 7.5 meters (25 feet), continuous shield

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–5
Product Description

Note

The 1 m (3 foot) cable (IC693CBL300) can be used as the ”Y” adapter between
cables and remote baseplates in a remote expansion system. Refer to the
following discussion of remote baseplates for more detailed information on
connecting cables.

1.4. Remote Baseplates for Models 331, 341, 351 and 352
Remote baseplates provide an extended expansion capability for the Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 Alspa C80–35
PLCs. Remote baseplates are available in two versions; a 5–slot (IC693CHS399) and a 10–slot (IC693CHS393).
Remote baseplates provide the same functionality as the expansion baseplates with the added feature that they can
be used at distances up to 213 meters (700 feet).

The remote baseplates are the same physical size, are rack addressable, use the same power supply, and support
the same I/O and option modules as the expansion baseplates. The remote baseplates are identified with the word
REMOTE on the plastic cover and the word REMOTE is also visible on the backplane board through the plastic
cover immediately above the connector for the power supply slot.

Remote capability is achieved by providing isolation between the +5 volt logic supply used by the I/O modules
residing in the baseplate and the supply for the interface circuit associated with the I/O Interface. Isolation helps
prevent problems associated with unbalanced ground conditions. These conditions usually occur when systems
are located long distances from each other and do not share the same ground system. However, distance is not
always the problem; systems in close proximity should be verified for proper grounding prior to installation.

The use of the remote capability also requires some special considerations; one of which is scan time. In order to
operate at long distances, the I/O clock speed must be lowered when communicating with remote racks which will
have an impact on performance. The impact will be relatively small for discrete I/O and slightly more for other
modules, such as the High Speed Counter or N80 Communications Module. The increase in time needed to
communicate with modules in a remote baseplate will usually be small with respect to the overall scan time (see
the following tables). For more detailed information on scan time calculations, refer to Chapter 2 of ALS 52102
Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs Reference Manual.

Note

The lower clock rate is only used when communicating with remote
baseplates; the CPU continues to communicate with local expansion
baseplates at the faster rate.

Page 2–6 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

Table 2.2 – Scan Time Contributions for Module Types (in milliseconds) for listed CPUs

CPU Model
331 341

Module Type 311/313/ Main Expansion Remote Main Expansion Remote

323 Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack
8-point discrete input 0.076 0.054 0.095 0.255 0.048 0.089 0.249
16-point discrete input 0.075 0.055 0.097 0.257 0.048 0.091 0.250
32-point discrete input 0.094 0.094 0.126 0.335 0.073 0.115 0.321
8-point discrete output 0.084 0.059 0.097 0.252 0.053 0.090 0.246
16-point discrete output 0.083 0.061 0.097 0.253 0.054 0.090 0.248
32-point discrete output 0.109 0.075 0.129 0.333 0.079 0.114 0.320
8-point combination input/output 0.165 0.141 0.218 0.529 0.098 0.176 0.489
4-channel analog input 0.151 0.132 0.183 0.490 0.117 0.160 0.462
2-channel analog output 0.161 0.138 0.182 0.428 0.099 0.148 0.392
16-channel analog input 1.370 1.450 1.937 4.186 1.092 1.570 3.796
(current or voltage)
High-Speed Counter 2.070 2.190 2.868 5.587 1.580 2.175 4.897
APM (1-axis) 2.330 2.460 3.175 6.647 1.750 2.506 5.899
no devices 0.041 0.054 0.063 0.128 0.038 0.048 0.085
NCM 8 devices 11.420 11.570 13.247 21.288 9.536 10.648 19.485
no devices 0.887 0.967 1.164 1.920 0.666 0.901 1.626
NCM
NCM+ 32 devices 4.120 6.250 8.529 21.352 5.043 7.146 20.052
not configured, or N/A 3.350 N/A N/A 1.684 N/A N/A
no application task
PCM 311 read 128 %R as fast N/A 4.900 N/A N/A 2.052 N/A N/A
as possible
ADC 311 N/A 3.340 N/A N/A 1.678 N/A N/A

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–7
Product Description

Table 2.3 – Scan Time Contributions for Module Types for CPU 351/352 (in milliseconds)

CPU 351/352

Module Type Main Expansion Remote

Rack Rack Rack
Base Sweep Time 0.823 N/A N/A
8-point discrete input 0.030 0.053 0.197
16-point discrete input 0.030 0.055 0.206
32-point discrete input 0.043 0.073 0.269
8-point discrete output 0.030 0.053 0.197
16-point discrete output 0.030 0.053 0.197
32-point discrete output 0.042 0.070 0.259
Combination discrete input/output 0.060 0.112 0.405
4-channel analog input 0.075 0.105 0.396
2-channel analog output 0.058 0.114 0.402
16-channel analog input (current or voltage) 0.978 1.446 3.999
8-channel analog output (current or voltage) 1.274 1.988 4.472
Combination analog input/output 1.220 1.999 4.338
High Speed Counter 1.381 2.106 5.221
APM (1-axis) 1.527 2.581 6.388
I/O Processor 1.574 2.402 6.388
Ethernet Interface (no connection) 0.038 0.041 0.053
no devices 0.911 1.637 5.020
NCM 8 devices 8.826 16.932 21.179
no devices 0.567 0.866 1.830
NCM+ 32 devices 1.714 2.514 5.783
N80 Bus Controller no devices 0.798 1.202 2.540
(32) 64 point devices 18.382 25.377 70.777
ADC (no task) 0.476 N/A N/A
no application task 0.476 N/A N/A
read 128 %R as fast 0.485 N/A N/A
PCM 311 as possible

Another important consideration is the cable type used for communicating at longer distances. Propagation of data
must be minimized to ensure proper system timing and margins. Any deviation in cable type may result in erratic
or improper system operation. Suggested cable types are specified in Table 3.3 and a typical remote expansion
system configuration is shown in Figure 2.10.

Expansion and remote baseplates can be configured in the same expansion system as long as certain requirements
are followed. These requirements are that the last expansion baseplate must not exceed the 15–meter (50–foot)
specification from the CPU to the last expansion baseplate, and the cable recommended for use with the remote
baseplate must be used throughout the system. The exception to the cabling is that the prewired 1–meter (3–foot)
cable, IC693CBL300, can be used as a ”Y” adapter to simplify the custom cable assembly associated with the daisy
chain connections between baseplates.

Page 2–8 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

Information on building cables for use with the remote baseplates can be found in Chapter 3. Basically, two types
of cables are required in a remote expansion system; point–to–point cables and ”Y” cables. The point to point
cables have a male connector on one end and a female connector on the other end. The ”Y” cables have a single
male connector on one end and a dual connector (one male, one female) on the other end. If a ”Y” cable longer
than the available prewired 1–meter (three foot) cable is required, you must build one of the required length.

An I/O Bus Termination Plug (IC693ACC307) must be plugged into the female side of the ”Y” cable on the last
baseplate (most distant from the CPU) in the remote expansion system. Note that a remote system could have only
one cable up to 213 meters (700 feet) in length. This cable would have to be a ”Y” cable, since an I/O Bus
Termination Plug must be installed on the last baseplate on the remote expansion link. The 5 and 10–slot remote
baseplates are shown in the following illustrations.

a44968

DIP EXPANSION RACK #

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 X X X
2 X X X
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER 3 X X X
X CLOSED
BASE 5-SLOT
REMOTE
E
X
P
A
CAUTION N
USER PROGRAM S
AND REGISTER I
VALUES MAY BE O
LOST IF POWER N
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR

1 2 3 4 5
POWER
SUPPLY

Figure 2.7 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 5–Slot Remote Baseplate
a44969

DIP EXPANSION RACK #

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 X X X
PROGRAMMABLE 2 X X X
CONTROLLER 3 X X X
BASE 10-SLOT X CLOSED
REMOTE
E
X
P
A
CAUTION N
USER PROGRAM S
AND REGISTER I
VALUES MAY BE O
LOST IF POWER N
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR.
POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPPLY

Figure 2.8 – Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331/341/351/352 10–Slot Remote Baseplate

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–9
Product Description

1.5. I/O Expansion Bus Termination

When two or more baseplates are cabled together in a Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 or Model 352 expansion
system, the I/O expansion bus must be properly terminated. The expansion bus is terminated by installing a
termination resistor pack (IC693ACC307) on the open connector on the last expansion baseplate (expansion
baseplate or remote baseplate) in the system. The resistor pack is physically mounted inside of a connector. This
termination resistor pack is shipped with each baseplate; however, only the last baseplate in the expansion chain
needs to have this termination connector installed. Unused termination packs can be discarded. The prewired
15–meter (50–foot) cable (IC693CBL302) has termination resistors wired inside of the connector on one end of
the cable. This cable can be used if only one expansion rack is included in the system and a 15–meter (50–foot)
cable link is required (the resistor pack is not needed in this case).

1.6. Power–Down Operation

Baseplates can be powered–down without affecting the operation of other baseplates; however, powering off a
baseplate generates a loss of module (LOSS_OF_MODULE) fault in the PLC Fault Table for each module in the
baseplate. When this fault condition occurs, and until the baseplate is powered back on and all modules recovered,
the lost I/O modules are not scanned. For more information on the power–up and power–down sequences. (See
ALS 52102 Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs Reference Manual).

1.7. Alspa C80–35 PLC Backplane

The Alspa C80–35 PLC backplane is a high speed backplane with a dedicated communications bus for I/O.
Additionally, the Model 331/341/351/352 backplane has a separate dedicated communications bus for specialized
intelligent (option) module communications. This bus is only located on the CPU baseplate, therefore, specialized
intelligent option modules, such as the PCM can only reside in the CPU baseplate. The signals on the remote
baseplate backplane are optically coupled and an isolated DC–DC power supply converter is provided to isolate
the signals from other backplanes.

1.8. Rack Number DIP Switch – Model 331, 341, 351 and 352
Each baseplate in a Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 system is identified with a unique number between 0 and 4 (0
and 7 for Model 351/352), which is called a Rack Number. These rack numbers are selected by configuration of
a three–position DIP switch located on each expansion baseplate directly above the connector for slot 1. Rack
number 0 must always be present and is assigned to the CPU rack (the CPU baseplate does not have this DIP
switch). The other racks do not need to be contiguously numbered, although for consistency and clarity, it is
recommended that rack numbers not be skipped (use 1, 2, 3 – not 1, 3). Rack numbers must not be duplicated in
an expansion system having multiple racks. The following table shows the DIP switch positions for rack number
selection.

Table 2.4 – Rack (baseplate) Number Configuration

Rack Number
Dip Switch 1 2 3 4 5* 6* 7*
1 open closed open closed open closed open
2 closed open open closed closed open open
3 closed closed closed open open open open
* DIP switch 5, 6, 7 only valid for Models 351 and 352.

Page 2–10 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

1.9. Local Expansion System Configuration

The following figure is an example of a typical maximum configured Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331, Model 341,
Model 351 or Model 352 (see NOTE below figure) local expansion system (15 meters (50 feet) maximum cable
length). A maximum expansion system has a CPU baseplate and CPU module, four expansion baseplates and
connecting cables, and the various I/O and local option modules required for the application.

PC
ÎÎ CPU BASEPLATE a43083

ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ C

ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
SERIAL
P

ÎÎÎÎ
U

Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î Î Î
NOTE
TOTAL MAXIMUM

ÎÎÎÎÎ DISTANCE FROM

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION * CPU BASEPLATE
TO LAST EXPANSION

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
EXPANSION BASEPLATE BASEPLATE IS

Î ÎÎÎ
15 METERS (50 FEET)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ I/O EXPANSION CABLES

DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION IC693CBL300 1 METER (3 FEET)
IC693CBL301 2 METERS (6 FEET)
EXPANSION BASEPLATE

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
IC693CBL302 15 METERS (50 FEET)
IC693CBL312, 0.15 METER (0.5 FEET)

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
IC693CBL313, 7.5 METERS (25 FEET)

NOTE
Each signal pair on the I/O bus must be
terminated at the end of the I/O bus
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION
with120 ohm resistors. This termina-

Î
tion can be done with the I/O Bus Termi- EXPANSION BASEPLATE
nator Plug, by using the 15 meter (50

ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
foot) cable with built-in terminating
resistors, or by building a custom cable

ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
with the resistors installed in the con-
nector at the end of the bus.

For more information, see Appendix G.

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION

ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
I/O BUS

Î ÎÎÎ
TERMINATOR

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
PLUG
IC693ACC307

DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION

* SPECIALIZED OPTION MODULES MUST BE IN CPU BASEPLATE

NOTE
A Model 351 or Model 352 local expansion system can have up to
8 baseplates in a system (One CPU baseplate and seven expansion baseplates).

Figure 2.9 – Example of Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 Local Expansion System

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–11
Product Description

1.10. Remote Expansion System Configuration

The following figure is an example of a typical Remote expansion system for the Model 331, Model 341,
Model 351 or Model 352 PLC (see NOTE below figure) showing a maximum configuration of a CPU baseplate
and four expansion baseplates. A remote system can have both remote and local expansion baseplates. The local
expansion baseplates can be no further than 15 meters (50 feet) from the CPU baseplate and all cables must use
the type of cable recommended for remote systems. The ”Y” cable, as shown, is optional to make connections
easier. You can make a cable with the ”Y” built into the cable: this cable configuration would look the same as
the example in Figure 2.9. See chapter 3 for more remote cable information.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
PC CPU BASEPLATE a44970

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
SERIAL C
P

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
U

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î NOTE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION
Î AVAILABLE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CABLE
REMOTE BASEPLATE IC693CBL300

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
CAN BE USED

Î
ÎÎ
FOR ”Y”
CONNECTIONS

DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
REMOTE BASEPLATE

NOTE
Each signal pair on the I/O bus must be
Î
ÎÎ TOTAL MAXIMUM
DISTANCE FROM

Î
terminated at the end of the I/O bus
MAIN BASEPLATE
with120 ohm resistors. This termina- TO LAST REMOTE

Î
tion can be done with the I/O Bus Termi- DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION BASEPLATE IS
nator Plug, by using the 15 meter (50

Î ÎÎ
Î
213 METERS
foot) cable with built-in terminating REMOTE BASEPLATE
resistors, or by building a custom cable (700 FEET)

ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
with the resistors installed in the con-
nector at the end of the bus.

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
For more information, see Appendix G.

DISCRETE/
ANALOG/OPTION Î
Î
REMOTE BASEPLATE
I/O BUS

Î TERMINATOR
PLUG
IC693ACC307

DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION

NOTE
A Model 351 or Model 352 remote expansion system can have up to
8 baseplates in a system (One CPU baseplate and seven expansion baseplates).

Figure 2.10 – Example of Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 Remote Expansion System

Page 2–12 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

2. POWER SUPPLY
The power supply for the Alspa C80–35 PLC is available in three versions, the difference being the input power
source requirements:
D IC693PWR324, Standard 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC input, 30W total output,
D IC693PWR325, 24/48 VDC input, 30W total output,
D CE693PWR330, High Capacity 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 30 W total output.

2.1. Standard Power Supply, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC Input

The Alspa C80–35 AC/DC input standard power supply (IC693PWR324) is available as a 30 watt wide range
supply which can operate from a voltage source in the range of 100 to 240 VAC or 100 to 150 VDC. This power
supply provides +5 VDC output, +24 VDC relay power output which provides power to circuits on Alspa C80–35
Output Relay modules and isolated +24 VDC output. The isolated +24 VDC is used internally by some modules
and can be used to provide power for some Input modules. The load capacities for each output of the power supply
are shown in the following table.

Table 2.5 – Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply Capacities for Alspa C80–35 Baseplates
Catalog Load
Number Capacity Input Output Capacities (Voltage/Power *)
IC693PWR324 30 Watts 100 to 240 VAC +5 VDC +24 VDC Isolated +24 VDC Relay
or 100 to 125 VDC 15 watts 20 watts 15 watts
* Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts.

Power supplies must reside in the leftmost slot in all baseplates and are connected to the backplane through the
backplane connector in the slot in which they are attached.
a44853
IC693PWR324
PWR
OK SYSTEM
CEGELEC
STATUS
RUN
ALSPA C80–35 INDICATORS
BATT

30W POWER SUPPLY

ÎÎÎÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

ÎÎÎÎÎ
INPUT
CONNECTIONS
FOR 100-240 VAC

ÎÎÎÎÎ
50/60 HZ 90VA
AC/DC POWER
SOURCE 125VDC, 50W

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
INTERNAL POWER SOURCE FOR
MODULES REQUIRING +

ÎÎÎÎÎ
24VDC 24 VDC
OUTPUT

ÎÎÎÎÎ
0.8A MAX.

ÎÎÎ
RS–485
B COMPATIBLE

ÎÎÎ
A SERIAL PORT
T

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
T
E BATTERY
LITHIUM R CONNECTORS
BACK–UP Y
BATTERY

Figure 2.11 – Alspa C80–35 Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply – IC693PWR324

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–13
Product Description

Note

Previous versions of this power supply had five terminals on the terminal
block. The new version (shown above), which has six terminals, is functionally
the same as the previous version. The change was made to conform to EMC
requirements.

2.1.1. Output Voltage Connections to Backplane

The following figure illustrates how these three output voltages are connected internally to the backplane on the
baseplate. The voltage and power required by modules installed on the baseplate is available on the baseplate
connectors.
a43845
POWER SUPPLY BACKPLANE USE/COMMENTS
I24V USED INTERNALLY ON ANALOG INPUT,
ANALOG OUTPUT AND DC INPUT MODULES.
ALSO AVAILABLE ON EXTERNAL
IGND TERMINALS ON DC INPUT MODULES AND
ON FRONT OF POWER SUPPLY FOR
USER APPLICATIONS.

R24V

USED INTERNALLY ON
RELAY OUTPUTS
RGND
SINGLE
POINT
CONNECTION
DC P5V

DC USED INTERNALLY ON CPU,

INPUTS, OUTPUTS, ETC.
LGND

2 POINT
CONNECTION
FGND EXTERNAL CONNECTION
TO EARTH GROUND.

Figure 2.12 – Interconnection of Power Supplies

Page 2–14 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

Table 2.6 – Specifications for Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply

Nominal Rated Voltage 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC
Input Voltage Range
AC 85 to 264 VAC
DC 90 to 150 VDC

Input Power 90 VA with VAC Input

(Maximum with Full Load) 50 W with VDC Input
Inrush Current 4A peak, 250 ms maximum
Output Power 15 watts maximum: 5 VDC and 24 VDC Relay
20 watts maximum: 24 VDC Isolated
30 watts maximum total (all three outputs)
Output Voltage 5 VDC: 5.0 VDC to 5.2 VDC (5.1 VDC nominal)
Relay 24 VDC: 24 to 28 VDC
Isolated 24 VDC: 21.5 VDC to 28 VDC
Protective Limits
Overvoltage: 5 VDC output: 6.4 to 7 V
Overcurrent; 5 VDC output: 4 A maximum

Holdup Time: 20 ms minimum

2.1.2. Field Wiring Connections to Standard AC/DC Power Supply

The Standard AC/DC power supply has six terminals for user connections. These connections are described below.

AC Power Source Connections

The Hot, Neutral and Ground wires from the 120 VAC power source or L1, L2 and Ground wires from the 240 VAC
power source connect to the system through the top three protected terminals on the terminal connector on the
power supply faceplate.

Overvoltage Protection Devices

The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal
board. This pin is normally connected to frame ground (pin 3) with the supplied jumper strap which is installed
at the factory. If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream, this feature can be disabled by
leaving pin 4 unconnected by removing the jumper strap.

If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage protection must be disabled during the test by removing the
terminal board strap. Re-enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–15
Product Description

a47106

3 Frame Ground
Jumper Strap Connects
Overvoltage Protection
Devices to Frame Ground
4

Screw Terminals
on Terminal Board

Figure 2.13 – Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap

DC Power Source Connections

The + and – wires from the 100 to 150 VDC power source connect to the top two protected terminals on the terminal
connector.

Isolated 24 VDC Supply

The bottom two terminals provide connections to the internally supplied Isolated 24 volt DC output which can be
used to provide power for input circuits (within power limitations of the supply).

Caution

If the Isolated 24 VDC supply is overloaded or shorted, the Programmable

Logic Controller will stop operation.

Page 2–16 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

2.2. High Capacity Power Supply, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC Input
The C80–35 AC/DC input High Capacity power supply (CE693PWR330) is available as a 30 watt wide range
supply which can operate from a voltage source in the range of 100 to 240 VAC or 100 to 150 VDC. This power
supply provides +5 VDC output, +24 VDC relay power output which provides power to circuits on C80–35 Output
Relay modules and isolated 24 VDC output. For applications requiring greater +5V current capacity than is
available with the standard supply, this supply allows all 30 watts to be consumed by the +5V. The isolated 24 VDC
is used internally by some modules and can be used to provide power for some Input modules. The load capacities
for each output of the power supply are shown in the following table.

Table 2.7 – High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply Capacities

Catalog Load
Number Capacity Input Output Capacities (Voltage/Power [)

CE693PWR330 30 Watts 100 to 240 VAC or +5 VDC +24 VDC Isolated +24 VDC Relay
100 to 125 VDC 30 watts 20 watts 15 watts
[ Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts.

a47086
PWR
CE693PWR330 SYSTEM
CEGELEC OK
STATUS
RUN
ALSPA C80–35 INDICATORS
BATT

HIGH CAPACITY
POWER SUPPLY

ÎÎÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
INPUT

ÎÎÎÎ
100-240 VAC
50/60 HZ 100VA

ÎÎÎÎ
125VDC, 50W
CONNECTIONS FOR

ÎÎÎÎ
AC/DC POWER SOURCE

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
+
24 VDC

ÎÎÎÎ
INTERNAL POWER SOURCE FOR
OUTPUT
MODULES REQUIRING 24VDC 0.8A MAX.

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
RS–485
B
A COMPATIBLE

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
T SERIAL PORT
T
E BATTERY
LITHIUM R CONNECTORS
Y
BACK–UP
BATTERY

Figure 2.14 – High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply - CE693PWR330

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–17
Product Description

2.2.1. Output Voltage Connections to Backplane

The following figure illustrates how these three output voltages are connected internally to the backplane on the
baseplate. The voltage and power required by modules installed on the baseplate is available on the baseplate
connectors.

a43845
POWER SUPPLY BACKPLANE USE/COMMENTS
USED INTERNALLY ON ANALOG INPUT,
I24V
ANALOG OUTPUT, AND DC INPUT MODULES.

ALSO AVAILABLE ON EXTERNAL

TERMINALS ON DC INPUT MODULES AND
IGND ON FRONT OF POWER SUPPLY FOR
USER APPLICATIONS.

R24V

USED INTERNALLY ON
RELAY OUTPUTS
RGND
SINGLE
POINT
CONNECTION
P5V
DC
DC USED INTERNALLY ON CPU,
INPUTS, OUTPUTS, ETC.
LGND

2 POINT
CONNECTION
FGND EXTERNAL CONNECTION
TO EARTH GROUND.

Figure 2.15 – Interconnection of Power Supplies

Page 2–18 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

Table 2.8 – Specifications for High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply
Nominal Rated Voltage 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC
Input Voltage Range
AC 85 to 264 VAC
DC 90 to 150 VDC

Input Power 100 VA with VAC Input

(Maximum with Full Load) 50 W with VDC Input
Inrush Current 4A peak, 250 ms maximum
Output Power 30 watts maximum: 5 VDC
15 watts maximum: 24 VDC Relay
20 watts maximum: 24 VDC Isolated
NOTE: 30 watts maximum total (all three outputs)
Output Voltage 5 VDC: 5.0 VDC to 5.2 VDC (5.1 VDC nominal)
Relay 24 VDC: 24 to 28 VDC
Isolated 24 VDC: 21.5 VDC to 28 VDC
Protective Limits
Overvoltage: 5 VDC output: 6.4 to 7 V
Overcurrent: 5 VDC output: 6.5 A maximum

Holdup Time: 20 ms minimum

2.2.2. Field Wiring Connections to High Capacity AC/DC Power Supply

CE693PWR330

The High Capacity AC/DC power supply CE693PWR330 has six terminals for user connections. These
connections are described below.

AC Power Source Connections

The Hot, Neutral and Ground wires from the 120 VAC power source or L1, L2 and Ground wires from the 240
VAC power source connect to the system through the top three protected terminals on the terminal connector on
the power supply faceplate.

Overvoltage Protection Devices

The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal
board. This pin is normally connected to frame ground (pin 3) with the supplied jumper strap which is installed
at the factory. If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream, this feature can be disabled by
leaving pin 4 unconnected by removing the jumper strap.

If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage protection must be disabled during the test by removing the
terminal board strap. Re-enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–19
Product Description

a47086

3 Frame Ground
Jumper Strap Connects
Overvoltage Protection
Devices to Frame Ground
4

Screw Terminals
on Terminal Board

Figure 2.16 – Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap

DC Power Source Connections

The + and – wires from the 100 to 150 VDC power source connect to the top two protected terminals on the terminal
connector.

Isolated 24 VDC Supply

The bottom two connections provide terminals for connections to the internally supplied Isolated 24 volt DC output
which can be used to provide power for input circuits (within power limitations of the supply).

Caution

If the Isolated 24 VDC supply is overloaded or shorted, the Programmable

Logic Controller will stop operation.

Page 2–20 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

2.3. Power Supply, 24/48 VDC Input

The Alspa C80–35 PLC DC input power supply (IC693PWR325) is available as a 30 watt wide range supply
designed for 24 VDC or 48 VDC nominal inputs. It will accept an input voltage range from 18 VDC to 56 VDC.
Although it is capable of maintaining all outputs within specifications with input voltages as low as 18 VDC, it
will not start with initial input voltages of less than 21 VDC. This power supply provides +5 VDC output, +24 VDC
relay power output which provides power to circuits on Alspa C80–35 Output Relay modules, and isolated 24 VDC
output. The isolated 24 VDC can be used to provide power for some Input modules. The load capacities for each
output of the power supply are shown in the following table.

Table 2.9 – DC Input Power Supply Capacities for Alspa C80–35 Baseplates
Catalog Load
Number Capacity Input Output Capacities (Voltage/Power *)
IC693PWR325 30 Watts 24 or 48 VDC +5 VDC +24 VDC Isolated +24 VDC Relay
15 watts 20 watts 15 watts

* Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts.

a47945
PWR
IC693PWR325 OK SYSTEM
CEGELEC
STATUS
RUN
ALSPA C80–35 INDICATORS
BATT

30W POWER SUPPLY

ÎÎÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

ÎÎÎÎ
INPUT
CONNECTIONS
FOR

ÎÎÎÎ
24/48VDC
DC POWER 50WATT
SOURCE

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
INTERNAL POWER SOURCE FOR
MODULES REQUIRING

ÎÎÎÎ
+
24VDC
24 VDC

ÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUT
0.8A MAX.

ÎÎÎ
RS–485
B COMPATIBLE

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
A SERIAL PORT
T
T

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
E BATTERY
LITHIUM R CONNECTORS
BACK–UP Y
BATTERY

Figure 2.17 – Alspa C80–35 DC Input Power Supply – IC693PWR325

2.3.1. Output Voltage Connections to Backplane

The following figure illustrates how these three output voltages are connected internally to the backplane on the
baseplate. The voltage and power required by modules installed on the baseplate is available on the baseplate
connectors.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–21
Product Description

a43845
POWER SUPPLY BACKPLANE USE/COMMENTS
USED INTERNALLY ON ANALOG INPUT,
I24V
ANALOG OUTPUT, AND DC INPUT MODULES.

ALSO AVAILABLE ON EXTERNAL

TERMINALS ON DC INPUT MODULES AND
IGND ON FRONT OF POWER SUPPLY FOR
USER APPLICATIONS.

R24V

USED INTERNALLY ON
RELAY OUTPUTS
RGND
SINGLE
POINT
CONNECTION
P5V
DC
DC USED INTERNALLY ON CPU,
INPUTS, OUTPUTS, ETC.
LGND

2 POINT
CONNECTION
FGND EXTERNAL CONNECTION
TO EARTH GROUND.

Figure 2.18 – Interconnection of Power Supplies

Table 2.10 – Specifications for 24/48 VDC Input Power Supply

Nominal Rated Voltage 24 or 48 VDC
Input Voltage Range
Start 21 to 56 VDC
Run 18 to 56 VDC
Input Power 50 watts maximum at full load
Inrush Current 4A peak, 100 ms maximum
Output Power 15 watts maximum: 5 VDC and 24 VDC Relay
20 watts maximum: 24 VDC Isolated
30 watts maximum total (all three outputs)
Output Voltage 5 VDC: 5.0 VDC to 5.2 VDC (5.1 VDC nominal)
Relay 24 VDC: 24 to 28 VDC
Isolated 24 VDC: 21.5 VDC to 28 VDC
Protective Limits
Overvoltage: 5 VDC output: 6.4 to 7 V
Overcurrent; 5 VDC output: 4 A maximum
Holdup Time: 14 ms minimum
Standards Refer to data sheet ALS 53002 Agency approvals, Standards
and General Specifications for C80–35, C80–75, CE80–20,
CE80–35 and CE80–15.

Page 2–22 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

2.3.2. Field Wiring Connections to DC Input Power Supply

DC Power Source Connections

The + and – wires from the 24/48 VDC power source connect to the top two protected terminals on the terminal
connector.

Isolated 24 VDC Supply

The bottom two connections provide terminals for connections to the internally supplied Isolated 24 volt DC output
which can be used to provide power for input circuits (within power limitations of the supply).

2.3.3. Calculating Input Power Requirements for DC Input Power Supply

The following graph is a typical 24/48 VDC power supply efficiency curve. A basic procedure for determining
efficiency of the 24/48 VDC power supply follows the figure.

50 a44963
45W
40

AVERAGE 30
INPUT

ÎÎ
POWER
(WATTS) 20

ÎÎ
10
ÎÎ
ÎÎ 5 10 15 20 25 30
TOTAL OUTPUT POWER (WATTS)

Figure 2.19 – Typical Efficiency Curve for 24/48 VDC Power Supply

Note

Start–up surge at full load is 4 amps for 250 milliseconds (maximum).

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–23
Product Description

D Determine total output load from typical specifications listed for individual modules in Chapter 3 (Table 3.2,
page 3–25).

D Use the graph to determine average input power.

D Divide the input power by the operating source voltage to determine the input current requirements.

D Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current.

D Allow for start–up surge current requirements.

D Allow margins (10% to 20%) for variations.

2.3.4. Status Indicators on Power Supply (Both Supplies)

Four LEDs on the power supply are located at the upper right front of the faceplate. The purpose of these LEDs
is as follows:

PWR

The top green LED, labeled PWR, provides an indication of the operating state of the power supply. The LED is
ON when the power supply has a correct source of power and is operating properly, and OFF when a power supply
fault occurs or power is not applied.

OK

The second green LED, labeled OK, is steady ON if the PLC is operating properly, and OFF if a problem is detected
by the PLC.

RUN

The third green LED, labeled RUN, is steady ON when the PLC is in the RUN mode.

BATT

The bottom red LED, labeled BATT, will be ON if the CMOS RAM backup battery voltage is too low to maintain
the memory under a loss of power condition; otherwise it remains OFF. If this LED is ON, the Lithium battery
must be replaced before removing power from the rack, or PLC memory may be lost.

2.3.5. Overcurrent Protection (All Supplies)

The 5V logic output is electronically limited to 3.5 amps. An overload (including short circuits) of the total output
power is sensed internally and causes the supply to shut down. The supply will continually try to restart until the
overload is removed. An internal fuse in the input line is provided as a backup. The supply will usually shut down
before the fuse blows. The fuse protects against internal supply faults.

Page 2–24 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

2.3.6. Timing Diagram

The timing diagram below shows the relationship of the DC input to the DC outputs and to the system signal
(PSOK) generated by the power supply. When power is first applied, the PSOK signal goes false. This line remains
false for a minimum of 20 msec after the +5V bus is within specifications, then it becomes true.

If DC input power is interrupted, the +5V bus will remain within specifications and PSOK will remain true a
minimum of 10 milliseconds. PSOK then goes false. The +5V bus will remain within specifications for an
additional 4 milliseconds minimum to allow an orderly shutdown of the system.

INPUT POWER MOMENTARY INPUP OWER a44964

ON POWER OFF
LOSS

VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
OVERSHOOT OVERSHOOT
5% (MAX) 5% (MAX)

+5V OUTPUT
(5.1V TYP.)
97% (MIN) HOLD HOLD
UP UP
TIME TIME
20MS z 20MS 10MS
(MIN) (MIN) (MIN)

4MS 4MS
(MIN) (MIN)

PSOK
z HOLD-UP TIME: 20 ms, minimum for IC693PWR324
14 ms, minimum for IC693PWR325

Figure 2.20 – Timing Diagram for all Alspa C80–35 Power Supplies

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–25
Product Description

2.3.7. CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply (All Supplies)

A 15–pin D–type female connector, accessed by opening the hinged door on the right front of the power supply,
provides the connection to a serial port which is used to connect the programmer for Alspa P8 programming
software, to connect the Hand–Held Programmer to the PLC, or for connection of other serial devices to the SNP
(Serial Network Protocol) Port. This serial port is RS–485 compatible.

a43832

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RS–485
COMPATIBLE
SERIAL PORT

Figure 2.21 – Serial Port Connector

2.3.8. CPU Serial Port Considerations

The serial port connector is only functional in a power supply that is installed in a baseplate that also contains the
CPU. This includes the 5 and 10-slot baseplates with built-in CPU for Model 311 and Model 313, and the 5 and
10-slot CPU baseplates for Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and Model 352.

The serial port is not functional when a power supply is installed in a Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 or
Model 352 expansion or remote baseplate.

Additionally, any device connected to the serial port that uses +5 VDC power from the Alspa C80–35 power supply
MUST be included in the calculation for maximum power consumption (see Chapter 3, ”Sample Calculations for
Power Supply Loads”).

2.3.9. Backup Battery for RAM Memory (All Supplies)

The long–life Lithium battery (IC693ACC301) used to maintain the contents of the CMOS RAM memory in the
CPU is accessed by removing the cover plate located at the bottom of the power supply faceplate. This battery is
mounted on a plastic clip attached to the inside of this cover.

The battery connects to the CPU through a cable which has one end wired to the positive and negative sides of the
battery and the other end wired to a connector that mates with one of two identical connectors mounted on the PLC.
This battery may be replaced with power applied to the PLC.

Page 2–26 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

a43833

BATTERY
CONNECTORS

ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
B

ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
A
T

ÎÎÎ
T
E

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
R
Y LITHIUM

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
BACK-UP
BATTERY

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 2.22 – Backup Battery for RAM Memory

Caution

If a Low Battery Warning (BATT LED turns ON) occurs, replace the
battery located in the power supply before removing power from the rack.
Otherwise, there is a possibility that data will be corrupted or the
application program will be cleared from memory.

2.3.10. Operation of Models 341/351/352 Without a Battery

This information is applicable only to systems with I/O being controlled by one of the affected C80–35 CPUs.
When using a Model 341, 351 or 352 CPU in a system without a battery, a standard 0.1” berg jumper should be
installed across either of the two power supply battery connectors to ensure proper operation of the CPU. This
jumper should not be installed if a battery is plugged into either the power supply or CPU battery connector.

2.3.11. Battery Accessory Kit

A Battery Accessory Kit (IC693ACC315) is available for the baseplates with embedded CPUs. The Battery
Accessory Kit consists of a battery with an attached connector mounted on a circuit board. The battery maintains
the contents of RAM memory when power is removed from the PLC and the power supply module is removed.
The Battery Accessory can be installed on any of the following programmable controller baseplates:

D IC693CPU311 (5-slot with CPU)

D IC693CPU313 (5-slot with CPU)

D IC693CPU323 (10-slot with CPU)

When the Battery Accessory is removed, a power supply module with a good battery must be installed and/or AC
or DC power applied within 20 minutes to avoid losing CPU data.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–27
Product Description

3. CPU FOR ALSPA C80–35 PLCS

The available Central Processing Units (CPU) for the Alspa C80–35 PLC differ in speed, I/O capacity, size of user
memory and physical form. The Model 311 (IC693CPU311), Model 313 (IC693CPU313) and Model 323
(IC693CPU323) CPUs are built into the printed circuit board, which also serves as the backplane, mounted in the
baseplate. The Model 331 (IC693CPU331), Model 341 (IC693CPU341), Model 351 (IC693CPU351) or Model
352 (IC693CPU352) CPU is available as a separate single slot module which must be installed in slot one (labeled
CPU/1) of the CPU baseplate. An illustration of a CPU module is shown below.

The high performance Model 351 and Model 352 CPUs are described separately later in this discussion, since
there are several differences as compared to the other CPUS.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ a43749

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CPU341

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 2.23 – Model 341 CPU

3.1. CPU Module Features

Each Alspa C80–35 CPU contains a microprocessor (80188 for models 311/313/323/331, 80C188XL for
model 341 or 80386EX for model 351 and 352) as the CPU processing element, memory mounted on the board.
The microprocessor provides all fundamental sweep and operation control and execution of all non-boolean
functions. Boolean functions in the Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 are handled by a dedicated VLSI Instruction
Sequencer Coprocessor (ISCP) with battery-backed RAM memory. A math coprocessor in the Model 352 provides
the capability for floating point math calculations.

Page 2–28 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

Memory on the CPU consists of on-board EPROM or EEPROM and on-board battery protected RAM for the
system software and the user’s application program. When installing a new or replacement CPU, ensure that the
battery is connected to provide backup for RAM memory. The Model 311, 313, 323, 331 and an earlier version
of the Model 341 CPUs have a User PROM option for storing user application programs, register data and
configuration data without battery back-up, as described on the § 3.2.

The Model 341 (current version), 351 and 352 CPUs have Flash memory for performing these functions. Note that
versions of the Model 341 CPU prior to firmware release 4.50 had EEPROM memory. The Read/Write/Verify
process is the same for Flash memory as it is for EEPROM operations. Flash memory operations are accessed from
the Program Utilities Function menu or from another Program Utilities screen in the Alspa P8 programming
software.

The Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 CPU modules have the provision for a battery to be connected directly to the
module so that it can be shipped or stored with an application program stored in RAM memory. This battery is not
to be used when the CPU module is installed in the baseplate and the backup battery is installed in the power supply.
The Model 311, 313 and 323 CPU (embedded in backplane) must be shipped with the power supply installed and
the battery connected in order to maintain the contents of RAM memory.

3.2. User PROM Option

Application programs are normally developed in the CPU’s RAM memory and executed from this RAM memory.
If additional program integrity or operation of the PLC without a battery is desired, an optional EEPROM or
EPROM can be installed in a spare socket (labeled PROGRAM PROM) on the Model 311, Model 313 and Model
323 baseplates or in a socket on the Model 331 CPU module (and on the Model 341 CPU prior to firmware release
4.50). EEPROMs can be written to and read from. EPROMS can be read when installed in the PLC, however they
must be written to using an external PROM burning device. The Model 331 CPU module (and earlier version of
Model 341) has a jumper (labeled JP1) located next to the EEPROM/EPROM socket to allow you to select either
EEPROM or EPROM. These jumper positions are shown below.

Jumper Selects

3–2 EEPROM
2–1 EPROM

A typical scheme for using these devices is to develop programs using an EEPROM. When the program in RAM
has been developed and debugged, it is saved to EEPROM. The EEPROM can then be removed from the PLC and
used as a master to make backup or multiple copies of the program to EPROM memory. The EPROM can then
be installed in the socket provided in the CPU and used as a non–volatile memory for “battery–less” operation,
or to run the same program in multiple PLCs.

When the EEPROM or EPROM is installed, the application program stored in the device automatically loads into
RAM memory when the CPU is powered–up. However, this only happens if EEPROM is selected as the “Program
Source” parameter during configuration with the Hand Held Programmer or Alspa P8 configuration software.

Caution
If EEPROM is selected and a PROM is not in the socket, or a blank PROM
is in the socket, on a power–up cycle a blank program will be placed into
the CPU’s RAM memory and the program in RAM memory will be lost.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–29
Product Description

EEPROM and EPROM memory devices are available from Cegelec. Catalog numbers for these devices are listed
in the following table.

Table 2.11 – EEPROM and EPROM Memory Catalog Numbers

PROM Third Party Source
Catalog Number Description Part Number Vendor Part Number
IC693ACC305 (Qty 4) 28C256 EEPROM, 350ns 44A725999–000 XICOR X28C256P or
XICOR X28C256P25
IC693ACC306 (Qty 4) 32Kx8 UV EPROM, 150ns 44A723379–000 NEC PD27C256AD–15
Atmel AT27C256–15DC1
Toshiba TC57256AD–15
Hitachi HN27C256AG–15
AMD AM27C256–150DC
Intel TD27C256A–1

3.3. Model 351 and 352 CPUs

Two high-performance CPUs are available for the Alspa C80–35 Model 351 and Model 352. The only difference
between the CPU 351 and CPU 352 is that the CPU 352 supports floating point math functions.

The CPU 351 (IC693CPU351) and CPU 352 (IC693CPU352) are high performance CPU modules for the
Alspa C80–35 that use an 80386EX microprocessor running at 25 MHz. The CPU 351 and CPU 352 are suited
to applications requiring an operating speed faster than speeds available with previous versions of Alspa C80–35
CPUs. In addition, the latest Alspa C80–35 CPU, the CPU 352 supports floating point math functions. These
functions are described in the ALS 52102 Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs Reference Manual.

The CPU 351 and CPU 352 have two serial ports built into the CPU, Port 1 is RS-232 compatible, Port 2 is RS-485
compatible. Note that the serial port on the power supply in the baseplate can also be used to connect the
programmer for Alspa P8 programming software, to connect the Hand-Held Programmer to the PLC or for
connection of other serial devices to the SNP Port. This serial port is RS-485 compatible.

Three LEDs on the module provide serial port status. A memory protect switch on the module allows for protection
of program and configuration data in flash memory. Each of the hardware features are described below.

3.3.1. User Memory for CPU 351 and CPU 352

User memory for the CPU 351 and CPU 352 consists of on-board battery protected RAM for the system software
and the user’s application program and flash memory (CPU 340 and 341 also have flash memory) for non-volatile
(no battery needed) retention of user data. This data includes the user program, configuration items, CPU ID (used
for SNP communications) and status tables.

Page 2–30 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

a45461

CPU 351 SNP

P1
P2

ON/RUN

OFF/
STOP

PORT 1
RS-232

PORT 2
RS-485

Figure 2.24 – Model 351 CPU

3.3.2. Flash Memory

The CPU 351 and CPU 352 use flash memory for storage of the operating system firmware, as described above.
This allows updates of the without disassembling the module or replacing EPROMs.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–31
Product Description

3.3.3. Firmware Upgrade Procedure

The operating system firmware is updated by connecting a PC compatible computer to the module’s port and
running the PC Loader software included with the firmware diskette.

The firmware upgrade is provided on a diskette and must be serially downloaded from a Personal Computer. A
PC/AT compatible or better PC with a minimum 640K of RAM, one 3.5” or high density 5.25” diskette, MS-DOS
version 3.3 or later, a hard drive and one RS-232 serial port is required. In addition, a serial cable is required. The
following serial cable kit is available:

D IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit with cable (RS-232/RS-485). Optionally, the cable can be
assembled from the following parts:

D IC690ACC900 RS-232 to RS-485/422 Converter Unit

D IC693CBL303 15-Pin RS-485 Serial Cable

D IC690CBL705 25-Pin RS-232 Serial Cable *

D IC690CBL702 9-Pin RS-232 Serial Cable *

* Only one of these cables is required. Selection depends on PC Serial Port Connector.

3.3.4. User References

The CPU 351 and CPU 352 have greater system capacity that other Alspa C80–35 CPU models, including
2048 Input points, 2048 Output points, 2048 words of Analog Inputs and 512 words of Analog Outputs. The
reference types, reference ranges and sizes for each memory type are shown in the following table.

Table 2.12 – CPU 351 and CPU 352 User References

Reference Type Reference Range Size

User Program Logic not applicable 80K Bytes
Discrete Inputs %I0001 - %I2048 2048 Bits
Discrete Outputs %Q0001 - %Q2048 2048 Bits
Discrete Globals %G0001 - %G1280 1280 Bits
Internal Coils %M0001 - %M4096 4096 Bits
Temporary Coils %T0001 - %T0256 256 Bits
System Status Bits %S0001 - %S0032 32 Bits
%SA001 - %SA032 32 Bits
%SB001 - %SB032 32 Bits
%SC001 - %SC032 32 Bits
System Registers %R0001 - %R9999 9999 Words
Analog Inputs %AI0001 - %AI2048 2048 Words
Analog Outputs %AQ000 - %AQ512 512 Words

Page 2–32 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

3.3.5. CPU 351 and CPU 352 Hardware Features

Hardware items of interest to the user are shown in the following figure and described on the following pages.
CPU 351 is shown in the figure, however the CPU 352 is physically the same.

a47101
CPU 351 SNP SNP PORT (on power supply) STATUS
P1 SERIAL PORT 1 (on module) STATUS
P2 SERIAL PORT 2 (on module) STATUS

ON/RUN

OFF/ MEMORY PROTECT KEYSWITCH

STOP

PORT 1
RS-232 PORT 1 (RS-232 COMPATIBLE)
(Pin 1 at bottom of connector)

PIN 1
(Top left of connector)

PORT 2 PORT 2 (RS-485 COMPATIBLE)

RS-485

Figure 2.25 – CPU 351 and CPU 352 Hardware Features (CPU 351 shown)

3.3.6. CPU 351 and CPU 352 Serial Ports

The CPU 351 and CPU 352 have two on-board serial ports which can be configured to behave as two independent
communications ports. For many applications, each port behaves like an independent window into the PLC for
access by other devices, such as industrial computers and color graphic terminals. Many applications, which access
the C80–35 PLC via the built-in serial port on the power supply using SNP protocol, can now access the C80–35
PLC through the serial ports on the CPU 351 or 352 module.

The two ports support all operations that are currently supported through the SNP port located on the C80–35 power
supply. The CPU 351 and CPU 352 serial ports are configurable using the Alspa P8 Configurator function. Each
port can also be configured using a COMMREQ.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–33
Product Description

3.3.7. Serial Port Connectors

Two individual ports are accessed by connectors on the front of the CPU 351 and CPU 352 for serial interfaces
to CRTs, bar code readers and other devices.

Port 1 the top port is RS-232 compatible. Access to Port 1 is through a 6-pin RJ-11 connector. This
connector has female contacts and is similar to modular jacks commonly used for telephones and
modems.

Port 2 the bottom port is RS-485 compatible. Access to Port 2 is through a 15-pin D connector that has
female contacts.

3.3.8. Serial Port Status LEDs

The CPU 351 and CPU 352 have three LED indicators which enable you to determine the status of the serial port
activity on the CPU without having a terminal connected.

SNP The LED (top LED) is ON when the SNP port on the PLC’s power supply is active (data being
transferred).

The function of the Port 1 (P1) and Port 2 (P2) LED indicators (middle and bottom LEDs, respectively) indicate
transmit and receive activity on serial ports 1 and 2, respectively.

P1 The LED (middle LED), will be ON when data is being transferred through Port 1, the RS-232
port.

P2 The LED (bottom LED), will be ON when data is being transferred through Port 2, the RS-485
port.

Page 2–34 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

3.3.9. Pin Assignments for CPU 351 and CPU 352 Serial Ports

The following two tables describe the pin assignments for each of the serial ports on the CPU 351 and CPU 352.

Table 2.13 – Port 1 RS-232 Signals

Pin Signal
Number Name Description
1* CTS Clear To Send
2 TXD Transmit Data
3 0V Signal Ground
4 0V Signal Ground
5 RXD Receive Data
6 RTS Request to Send

* Pin 1 is at the bottom of the connector as viewed from the front of the module.

Table 2.14 – Port 2 RS-485 Signals

Pin Signal
Number Name Description
1* Shield Cable Shield
2 NC No Connection
3 NC No Connection
4 NC No Connection
5 +5VDC Logic Power **
6 RTS(A) Differential Request to Send
7 SG Signal Ground
8 CTS(B‘) Differential Clear To Send
9 RT Resistor Termination
10 RD(A‘) Differential Receive Data
11 RD(B‘) Differential Receive Data
12 SD(A) Differential Send Data
13 SD(B) Differential Send Data
14 RTS(B’) Differential Request To Send
15 CTS(A’) Differential Clear To Send

* Pin 1 is at the top left of the connector as viewed from the front of the module.
** Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power
(100 mA maximum) for powering external options.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–35
Product Description

3.3.10. Communications Protocols for CPU 351 and CPU 352 Serial Ports

The SNP and SNP-X protocols are the only protocols currently supported by the CPU 351 and CPU 352 serial ports.
The CCM and RTU protocols are planned to be supported in a future version of the CPUs. The SNP protocol is
a proprietary communications protocol. The SNP protocol is the native communications protocol to all models
of the Alspa 8000 PLC product line.

The SNP-X protocol is a highly optimized addition to SNP. While it offers fewer functions than SNP, it is simpler
to use and provides a significant performance improvement over SNP. SNP-X is an extension of SNP and is
available when SNP is configured and operable.

3.3.11. SNP and SNP-X Protocols

The SNP and SNP-X protocol allows for the following types of operation:

D Master - the initiating device in a Master/Slave system.

D Slave - the responding device in a Master/Slave system.

After configuration, the SNP and SNP-X protocols are enabled on the selected port(s). The SNP and SNP-X
protocols can be enabled on none, one or both serial ports of the CPU 351 and CPU 352 using either the RS-232
or RS-485 electrical standard (as applicable). Any combination of protocols, ports and electrical standards are
available with one exception: the Alspa C80–35 CPU 351 and CPU 352 does not support RS-485 on port 1. Port
selection, data rate, parity, flow control, number of stop bits, timeouts and turnaround delay values can be
configured.

3.3.12. Configuring the CPU 351 and CPU 352 Serial Ports

When the CPU 351 or CPU 352 is powered-up, the serial ports are given a default configuration. This configuration
remains active until you configure the ports using the Alspa P8 programming software configurator function. You
can also configure the active settings on the ports by initiating a Serial Port Setup COMMREQ but this will not
change the configured value.

Caution

Both serial ports will be returned to the configured values when power is
cycled to the CPU 351 or CPU 352. If power is cycled and you have
previously initiated a COMMREQ to change the serial port configuration,
you will need to again initiate a Serial Port Setup COMMREQ.

To configure the CPU 351 and CPU 352 serial ports with a COMMREQ, a Serial Port Setup COMMREQ must
be sent to the port that is to be configured through the ladder diagram program. The SYSID of the COMMREQ
must be 1 and the TASK ID either 19 decimal (Port 1) or 20 decimal (Port 2). Length of the data block is 12 words
(24 bytes). The format for the data block of the Serial Port Setup COMMREQ is shown in the following table.

Page 2–36 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

Table 2.15 – Serial Port Setup COMM_REQ Data Block

Word Parameter Word Parameter

Start address +0 Command = 0FFF0h Start address +8 Bits per Character
Start Address +1 Protocol Start Address +9 Stop Bits
Start Address +2 Port Mode Start Address +10 Interface
Start Address +3 Data Rate Start Address +11 Duplex Mode
Start Address +4 Parity Start Address +12 Device Identifier bytes 1 and 2
Start Address +5 Flow Control Start Address +13 Device Identifier bytes 3 and 4
Start Address +6 Turnaround Delay Start Address +14 Device Identifier bytes 5 and 6
Start Address +7 Timeout Start Address +15 Device Identifier bytes 7 and 8

The SNP ID can also be changed by sending an SNP COMMREQ with the Change SNP ID command (7002).

The communication parameters for the Serial Port Setup COMMREQ are defined in the following table with the
default parameter shown in the right column.

Table 2.16 – Description of Communications Parameters

Parameter Values Default

Protocol 0 = DISABLED 1 = SNP SNP
Port Mode 0 = SLAVE 1 = MASTER 2 = PEER SLAVE
Data Rate 0 = 300 1 = 600 2 = 1200 19200
3 = 2400 4 = 4800 5 = 9600
6 = 19200
Parity 0 = NONE 1 = ODD 2 = EVEN ODD
Flow Control 0 = HARDWARE NONE
1 = NONE
2 = SOFTWARE
Turnaround Delay 0 = NONE 1 = 10 ms 2 = 100 ms NONE
3 = 500 ms
Timeout 0 = LONG 1 = MEDIUM 2 = SHORT LONG
3 = NONE
Bits per Character 0 = 7 bits 1 = 8 bits 8 bits
Stop Bits 0 = 1 stop bit 1 = 2 stop bits 1 stop bit
Interface 0 = RS232 (default for Port 1) RS232 (P1)
1 = RS485 (default for Port 2) RS485 (P2)
Duplex Mode 0 = 2-wire 1 = 4-wire 2 = point-to-point point-to-point
Device Identifier This is an identifier that distinguishes this device from others NULL
(8 bytes in length) * on the same network (for example: SNP ID, STA ADDR).

Note that for devices that use an SNP ID of 1,

enter 49 decimal (31 hexadecimal).

* For Alspa C80–35, only the first six bytes are used.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–37
Product Description

Note

The validity of values for various parameters depends on the type of protocol
configured and the availability of options supported by the firmware version
of the CPU.

The Serial Port Setup COMMREQ can be sent any time that the system is running, thereby allowing you to
configure a single port without interrupting the other port’s current activity. After sending a valid Serial Port Setup
COMMREQ, you should wait a minimum of two seconds before issuing the first COMMREQ to the port that has
just been configured.

3.3.13. Key Switch Functions

A dual function key switch allows you to select the RUN/STOP mode of operation and provides the added security
of memory protection. This key switch allows you to manually lock the saved version of the user program and
system configuration data in flash memory. The key switch has two positions for memory protection: ON (memory
protected) and OFF (memory unprotected). The memory protect function of the key switch is always enabled.

The same key switch has another function: it allows you to switch the PLC into STOP mode, into RUN mode and
to clear non-fatal faults. A configuration parameter must be set using the Alspa P8 configurator function to enable
the key switch to also be used as a RUN/STOP switch. See Chapter 2 of the ALS 52102 Alspa C80–35, C80–25
and C80–05 PLCs Reference Manual for detailed operation of this feature.

3.3.14. Compatibility With Existing CPUs

Programs that have been developed on existing Alspa C80–35 CPUs cannot be run directly on the CPU 351 or
CPU 352. If you want to run a program developed on another model of CPU, you must use Alspa P8 software to
translate those programs before loading the program onto a CPU 351 or CPU 352. Programs created or translated
for the CPU 351 or CPU 352 can be translated back for execution on other CPU models.

3.3.15. Compatibility With Hand-Held Programmer

The user program in a CPU 351 or CPU 352 cannot be viewed or edited with the Alspa 8000 Hand-Held
Programmer (IC693PRG301). The only operations supported by the CPU 351 or CPU 352 when using a
Hand–Held Programmer placed in the PROGRAM mode are writing to and reading from the CPU’s flash memory.
You must use Alspa P8 programming software to edit the CPU 351 or CPU 352 user programs. Additionally, the
Alspa 8000 Memory Card is not supported by the CPU 351 or CPU 352 .

Page 2–38 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

4. ALSPA C80–35 I/O MODULES

Several types of Cegelec I/O modules are available for use with an Alspa C80–35 PLC system. Refer to Table 1.5,
page 1–18, for a list of these modules. There are also many I/O modules available from other vendors (for example,
Horner Electric, Inc.) that can be used in a C80–35 PLC I/O system. See your local PLC distributor for more
information. For detailed information on discrete and analog I/O modules, refer to ALS 52118 Alspa C80–35 PLC
I/O Module Specifications. For more detailed information on option modules, refer to the applicable manual for
that module. The types of C80–35 I/O modules are briefly described below.

D Discrete Input
Alspa C80–35 discrete input modules convert AC and DC power levels from user devices to the logic levels
required by the PLC. An optical coupler provides isolation between the incoming power and the logic circuitry.
Discrete input modules are available that have 8, 16, or 32 points.

D Discrete Output
Alspa C80–35 discrete output modules convert logic levels into AC or DC power levels required for driving
user supplied devices. A power semiconductor provides the drive and isolation for each output point. Discrete
output modules are available that have 5, 8, 12, 16, or 32 points. Relay output modules with 8 or 16 Normally
Open relay circuits are also available.

D Analog Input
Alspa C80–35 analog input modules provide A/D (Analog to Digital) conversion by converting an analog
voltage into a scaled 12–bit number. Analog input modules are provided in four versions, a current module
and a voltage module, each having 4 input channels and a high density current input and a high density voltage
input module, each with 16 channels.

D Analog Output
Alspa C80–35 analog output modules provide D/A (Digital to Analog) conversion by converting a scaled
12–bit (current module) or 13–bit (voltage module) number into an analog voltage. Analog output modules
are provided in three versions, a current module and a voltage module, each with 2 output channels and a high
density current/voltage module with 8 analog output channels.

D Analog Combination Module

An analog combination module provides 4 A/D input channels and 2 D/A output channels on one module. Each
of the input and output channels can be configured individually for current or voltage mode.

D Option Modules
Option modules for the Alspa C80–35 PLC include: N80 Bus Controller, N80 Communications Module,
Enhanced N80 Communications Module, High Speed Counter, Axis Positioning modules (1 and 2 axis), I/O
Processor Module, Ethernet Interface module, FIP Bus Controller and FIP Remote I/O Scanner. Specialized
option modules, which must be installed in a Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 PLC system include:
Communications Control module, Programmable Coprocessor modules, Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor
module.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–39
Product Description

5. OPTION MODULES
The following pages provide basic descriptions of option modules for the Alspa C80–35 PLC. Detailed
descriptions of each of these modules can be found in the appropriate user’s manual.

5.1. N80 Communications Module

An N80 Communications Module (IC693CMM304) for the Alspa C80–35 PLC provides global communications
on an Alspa N80 network between Alspa C80–35 PLCs, and other Cegelec PLCs. Alspa C80–75 PLCs
communicate on this bus through their respective N80 Bus Controllers.

The Alspa N80 network is a token passing peer–to–peer, noise immune network optimized to provide high speed
transfer of real time control data. Up to eight Alspa C80–35 PLC CPUs, in any combination, can communicate
with each other over a single Alspa N80 serial bus using a standard twisted pair, shielded cable. For detailed
information on the N80 Communications Module refer to ALS 52501 N80 Communications Module (NCM) for
Alspa C80–35 PLC User’s Manual.

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
a42915
Alspa C80–35 MODEL 331 Alspa C80–35 MODEL 311

Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
C N N
P C C

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
U M M

N80 COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Alspa C80–75

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î Î
N
B

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
C

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 2.26 – Example of N80 Communications Network

5.2. Enhanced N80 Communications Module

The Enhanced N80 Communications Module (NCM+), IC693CMM305, is an intelligent module that provides
automatic global data communications between an Alspa C80–35 PLC and up to 31 other devices on an Alspa N80
network. The NCM+ can be located in any standard Alspa C80–35 CPU baseplate, expansion baseplate, or remote
baseplate (if an NCM module is present in a system, NCM + modules cannot be included in the system). However,
for most efficient operation, it is recommended that the module be installed in the CPU rack since the sweep impact
time of the NCM+ module depends on the model of PLC and the rack where it is located.

Page 2–40 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

Multiple NCM+ modules can be installed in an Alspa C80–35 PLC system with each NCM+ having its own N80
bus, which can serve up to 31 additional devices on the network. For example, this allows an Alspa C80–35 PLC
with three NCM+ modules to exchange global data with as many as 93 other devices automatically. In addition
to basic global data exchange, the NCM+ module can be used for various applications such as:

D Data monitoring by a personal computer or an industrial computer.

D Monitoring data from Alspa CE80–15 I/O blocks.

D Peer–to–peer communications among devices on the network.

D Master–slave communications among devices on the network (emulates remote I/O).

The Alspa N80 network connects to the terminal board on front of the NCM+ module. Terminal connections to
the bus are as shown below. For more information about the NCM+, refer to the ALS 52502 N80 Enhanced
Communications Module (NCM+) for Alspa C80–35 PLC User’s Manual.
a45138
ENHANCED
ALSPA N80 OK
COMM
COM

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ALSPA N80

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
COMMUNICATIONS

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MODULE
1

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
2
3 SER

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1
4

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
5
6

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
7
SER

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
8
2
9

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
10

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
11
12

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
13 SHD
IN

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
14
15

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
16

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
17
18 SHD

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
OUT
19

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
20

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
44A729182–016R02
FOR USE WITH
IC693CMM304 / 305

Figure 2.27 – Enhanced N80 Communications Module

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–41
Product Description

5.3. N80 Bus Controller (NBC)

The Alspa C80–35 Bus Controller (NBC), catalog number IC693BEM334, provides the interface between an
Alspa C80–35 PLC and an N80 I/O serial bus. The NBC receives and transmits control data of up to 128 bytes for
up to 31 devices on the N80 I/O bus. An N80 bus device can serve:

D Alspa CE80–15 blocks which provide an interface to a wide range of discrete, analog and special-purpose
field devices.

D Remote Drops, which consist of Alspa C80–75 I/O racks interface to the bus through Remote I/O Scanner
modules. Each of these drops can have any mix of Alspa C80–75 discrete and analog I/O modules, providing
up to 128 bytes of input data and 128 bytes of output data.

D Alspa CE80–20 I/O Station, which consists of a Bus Interface Unit (BIU) and up to eight additional Alspa
CE80–20 modules. The BIU provides intelligent processing, I/O scanning and feature configuration for the
I/O station.

D Alspa 8000 Hand-Held Monitor (HHM), which is a portable device that can also be permanently mounted.
The HHM provides a convenient operator interface for block setup, data monitoring, and diagnostics.

D Multiple hosts, for communications using datagrams and Global Data.

Page 2–42 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

a47051
N80
BUS OK
CONTROL
COM

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ N80

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
BUS
CONTROLLER

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1
2

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SER
3
1

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
4
5

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
6

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
7
SER
8

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
2
9

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
10

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
11
12

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SHD
13
IN

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
14
15

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 16

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
17
SHD

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
18
OUT
19

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
20

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
44A729182–068R01
FOR USE WITH

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC693BEM334

Figure 2.28 – N80 Bus Controller Module

A bus may feature I/O control enhanced by communications commands in the program. Or a bus can be used
entirely for I/O control, with many I/O devices and no additional communications. A bus can also be dedicated
to CPU communications, with multiple CPUs and no I/O devices. More complex systems can also be developed,
with dual CPUs and one or more additional CPUs for data monitoring.

5.3.1. Number of N80 Bus Controllers

Up to eight N80 Bus Controller or Enhanced N80 Communications Modules can be included in an Alspa C80–35
PLC system that has release 5.0 or later Alspa P8 software and release 5.0 or later CPU firmware. An N80 Bus
Controller cannot be installed in a system with an N80 Communication Module.

The I/O devices on a bus may be Alspa CE80–15 I/O blocks or standard Alspa C80–75 I/O modules in one or more
remote drops. The total number of I/O circuits that can be served by one N80 bus depends on the types of I/O
devices that are used and the memory available in the CPU.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–43
Product Description

Many Alspa CE80–15 I/O blocks have both inputs and outputs on the same block. Blocks configured in the Alspa
P8 software as having both inputs and outputs will occupy the identical number of references in both %I and %Q
memory, regardless of the block’s software configuration. Unused references cannot be assigned to other inputs
or outputs and should not be used in the application program.

5.3.2. Status LEDs

The LEDs on the front of the NBC indicate its operating status and should be on during normal operation.

OK Shows the status of the NBC. This LED turns on after power up diagnostics are completed.

COM Shows the status of the N80 communications bus. This LED is on steadily when the bus is
operating properly. It blinks for intermittent bus errors and is off for a failed bus. It is also off when
no configuration has been received from the PLC CPU.

5.3.3. Compatibility

Specific equipment or software versions required for compatibility with the NBC module are listed below.

Alspa C80–35 PLC

CPU: The NBC module can be used with CPU models: IC693CPU311K, 321K, 331L or later, IC693CPU313, 323,
341, 351 and 352, any version. The CPU firmware must be release 5.0 or later.

Alspa P8 software: rel. 5.0 (IC641SWP326E) or later is required.

Alspa CE80–15 Hand-Held Monitor

An Alspa Hand-Held Monitor can be used to display the NBC bus address, and its software version, HHM version
IC661HHM501H (rev. 4.5) or later is required. There is no Hand-Held Monitor connector on the NBC module,
but a Hand-Held Monitor can communicate with the NBC while connected to any other device on the bus.
Optionally, an additional HHM mating connector can be installed on the bus near the NBC.

Hand-Held Programmer

The NBC can be configured using an Alspa Hand-Held Programmer (IC693PRG301).

Page 2–44 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

Alspa CE80–15 I/O Blocks

Alspa CE80–15 I/O blocks can be present on the same bus as the NBC.

N80 Bus

The N80 bus is a shielded twisted-pair wire, daisy-chained between devices, and terminated at both ends. Proper
cable selection is critical to successful operation of the system. Suitable cable types are listed in the ALS 52301
Alspa CE80–15 I/O System and Alspa N80 Communications Network User’s Manual.

5.3.4. Diagnostics

Alspa CE80–15 blocks and other devices on the bus automatically report faults, alarms and certain other predefined
conditions to the PLC.

INPUTS AND FAULT MESSAGE a43556

FROM BLOCK 3
NBC

1 2 3 4

TOKEN
F F
F FAULT

Only one diagnostic message can be sent during any bus scan. If a fault message has already been sent (by another
device) during that scan, a device saves its own diagnostic message until the next available bus scan. For example,
if the communications token is currently at device 3, and faults occur at devices 3 and 4 at the same time, device
3 can send its diagnostic message if another message has not already been sent. Device 4 must wait at least one
more bus scan to send its diagnostic message.

The NBC stores any diagnostic messages it receives. They are read automatically by the Alspa C80–35 CPU. Faults
can then be displayed in the fault table using the Alspa P8 software. An Alspa Hand-Held Monitor must be used
to clear the faults from the fault table.

5.3.5. Datagrams

The Alspa C80–35 NBC supports all N80 datagrams. Refer to Chapter 3 of the ALS 52301 Alspa CE80–15 I/O
System and Alspa N80 Communications Network User’s Manual for details on using datagrams.

5.3.6. Global Data

Global Data is data that is automatically and repeatedly broadcast by an NBC. The Alspa C80–35 NBC can send
up to 128 bytes of Global Data each bus scan. It can receive up to 128 bytes of Global Data each bus scan from
each NBC on its bus.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–45
Product Description

Sending Global Data

Once set up by configuration, Global Data is broadcast automatically. Other devices that receive the Global Data
sent by an Alspa C80–35 PLC place it in these memory locations:

Alspa C80–35 PLC Other CPU Places Global Data in these Memory Location:
Sends Global Data To:
Alspa C80–35 PLC %I, %Q, %G, %R, %AI, %AQ. Memory type and beginning address are chosen during configu-
ration of the receiving NBC.
Alspa C80–35 NCM+ %I, %Q, %G, %R, %AI, %AQ
Alspa C80–35 PLC/NCM %G memory location corresponding to Device Number (16-23) of the Alspa C80–35 NBC that
sent the data.
Computer PCIM or QBIM Input Table Segment corresponding to Device Number of the Alspa C80–35
NBC that sent the data.

Receiving Global Data

The NBC can be configured to receive or ignore Global Data from any other NBC. The memory type and length
for incoming Global Data are also selected during configuration. The Alspa C80–35 CPU can place incoming
Global Data in %I, %Q, %G, %R, %AI, or %AQ memory.

See the following manuals for detailed information on the N80 Bus Controller and the Alspa CE80–15 I/O system:

D ALS 52301 Alspa CE80–15 I/O System and Alspa N80 Communications Network User’s Manual,

D ALS 52302 Alspa CE80–15 Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual,

D ALS 52511 Alspa C80–35 PLC Bus Controller for Alspa N80 Network (NBC) User’s Manual.

Page 2–46 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

5.4. Alspa CE80–20 I/O System

A brief description of the CE80–20 I/O system is provided on the following pages.

Alspa CE80–20 is a family of highly modular distributed I/O and control products. These products are suitable
for use in a wide range of host architectures, Alspa CE80–20 offers many features and benefits for your PLC
system, including:

D wiring savings and better system uptime,

D easy installation and maintenance,

D spare parts savings,

D low cost,

D feature flexibility,

D open architecture / adaptable to a variety of networks,

D distributed I/O,

D small, compact I/O modules with generic terminal wiring bases,

D DIN rail mounted.

The heart of the Alspa CE80–20 system is the Bus Interface Unit. The Bus Interface Unit provides intelligent
processing, I/O scanning and feature configuration for a group of up to eight I/O modules. Together, the Bus
Interface Unit and its modules make up a Alspa CE80–20 station as shown in the following illustration.

46403

Bus Interface Unit

I/O Terminal Block

I/O Modules

Figure 2.29 – Alspa CE80–20 Module

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–47
Product Description

The Bus Interface Unit and I/O modules are enclosed in sturdy, compact aluminum housings. Bus Interface Unit
and I/O modules bolt securely to separate Terminal Blocks, which provide all field wiring terminals. The I/O
Terminal blocks are generic and allow different I/O module types to be mounted on the same base. I/O Terminal
Blocks are available with either box-type or barrier-type terminals. All Terminal Blocks must be mounted on a
DIN rail. The DIN rail, which serves as an integral part of the grounding system, can also be mounted on a panel.

Each of the components of an Alspa CE80–20 station are described below.

5.4.1. N80 Bus Interface Unit

The N80 Bus Interface Unit interfaces Alspa CE80–20 I/O modules to a host PLC or computer via an N80 bus.
It is ideally suited for use with an Alspa C80–35 PLC. However, any type of PLC or computer capable of controlling
an N80 bus can be used as the host. It can exchange up to 128 bytes of input data and 128 bytes of output data with
the host, each N80 bus scan. It can also handle N80 datagram communications.

The Bus Interface Unit provides the I/O scanning, diagnostics and communications capabilities needed to link the
I/O modules to the control system. The intelligent processing capabilities of the N80 Bus Interface Unit allow the
configuration of features such as fault reporting, selectable input and output defaults, analog scaling and analog
range selection for the modules in the station. In addition, the N80 Bus Interface Unit performs diagnostic checks
on itself and its I/O modules, and relays diagnostic information to the host (if configured for fault reporting) and
to a Hand-Held Monitor.

The N80 Bus Interface Unit can be used on a bus controlled by redundant CPUs or Bus Controllers. It can also be
used on a dual bus.

The Bus Interface Unit mounts on a Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block. It can be removed and replaced if necessary
without removing the wiring or reconfiguring the I/O station.

5.4.2. N80 Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block

The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block provides connections for power wiring and single or dual communications
cables. It has built-in bus switching circuitry, allowing the Bus Interface Unit to be used on a dual (redundant) N80
bus. The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block stores the configuration parameters selected for the station.

5.4.3. FIP Bus Interface Unit

The FIP Bus Interface Unit interfaces Alspa CE80–20 I/O modules to a FIP bus.

The intelligent processing capabilities of the FIP Bus Interface Unit allow the configuration of features such as
fault reporting, selectable input and output defaults, analog scaling and analog range selection for the modules in
the station. In addition, the FIP Bus Interface Unit performs diagnostic checks on itself and its I/O modules, and
relays diagnostic information to the host (if configured for fault reporting) and to a Hand–Held Programmer.

The Bus Interface Unit mounts on a Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block. The Bus Interface Unit can be removed
and replaced if necessary without removing the wiring or reconfiguring the I/O station.

5.4.4. FIP Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block

The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block provides connections for power wiring and single or dual communications
cables. The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block stores the configuration parameters selected for the station.

Page 2–48 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

5.4.5. I/O Modules

As many as eight Alspa CE80–20 I/O modules (four I/O terminal blocks) can be connected to one Bus Interface
Unit. Alspa CE80–20 I/O Modules are available in many types to suit a wide range of application needs. Modules
can be installed and removed without disturbing field wiring. One or two I/O modules may be mounted on an I/O
Terminal Block.

5.4.6. I/O Terminal Blocks and Auxiliary I/O Terminal Blocks

An I/O Terminal Block provides mounting, electrical and field wiring connections. Each half of the I/O Terminal
Block can be mechanically keyed to accept only an I/O module of a specific type. Auxiliary I/O Terminal Blocks
can be easily attached to an I/O Terminal Block. They provide the extra connections needed for analog and
high-density discrete modules.

See the following manuals for detailed information on Alspa CE80–20:

D ALS 52307 Alspa CE80–20 – N80 Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual,

D ALS 52308 Alspa CE80–20 I/O Modules User’s Manual,

D ALS 52311 Alspa CE80–20 FIP Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–49
Product Description

5.5. FIP Bus Controller

The Alspa C80–35 PLC FIP Bus Controller (catalog number IC693BEM340) is used to interface a FIP bus to a
C80–35 PLC.

Alspa C80–75 PLC a46

ÎÎ

PS
CPU

FBC
Alspa C80–35 PLC

ÎÎ Î
PS
CPU

ÎÎ Î
FBC

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Optional Redundant FIP Bus

FIP Bus
Alspa CE80–20

Î ÎÎ
I/O Station
FIP Bus FIP Inter-

Î ÎÎ
PS
Scanner

Interface Unit face Module

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
Generic
Up to 8
Device
Alspa
Alspa CE80–35
CE80–20
Remote I/O Scanner
modules

Î ÎÎ
(4 shown).

Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Optional Expansion Rack

A FIP bus is used primarily for I/O control. It also is used to store configuration data to remote devices and to report
faults. Devices that can be on a FIP bus in a C80–35 PLC system include:

D C80–75 PLC, interfaced to a FIP bus by a Fip Bus Controller.

D CE80–20 Stations, CE80–20 I/O modules that are interfaced to the bus via a FIP Bus Interface Unit (BIU).

D Remote Drops, 80–35 I/O racks that are interfaced to the bus via Alspa CE80–35 FIP Remote I/O Scanner
Modules (FIP I/O Nests). Each remote drop can include one 5- or 10-slot main rack, one 5- or 10-slot expansion
rack and any mix of discrete and analog I/O modules.

D Generic Devices, such as general-purpose computers that are interfaced to the bus via a FIP Interface Module.

Page 2–50 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

The FIP Bus Controller is a standard, rack-mounted C80–35 PLC module. It plugs easily into the PLC’s backplane.
The latch on the bottom of the module secures it in position.

a46560
Module OK
Run
Carrier Detect Ch. 1
Transmit Enable Ch. 1
Carrier Detect Ch. 2
Transmit Enable Ch. 2

15-Pin Serial Connector RS-485

9-Pin FIP Fieldbus Connector

(channel 1)

9-Pin FIP Fieldbus Connector

(channel 2)

There are no DIP switches or jumpers to set on the module.

The C80–35 FIP Bus Controller has six status LEDs, an RS-485 serial port, and two identical FIP bus connectors.

5.5.1. Status LEDs

The 6 LEDs on the front of the FIP Bus Controller display module status and communications activity.

5.5.2. Serial Port

The 15-pin serial port is used to connect a computer for upgrading the operating firmware of the Bus Controller
and for configuring by an external configuration tool.

5.5.3. FIP Bus Connectors

The two 9-pin connectors on the FIP Bus Controller provide for attachment of one or two FIP buses. The two buses
provide a redundant bus capability.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–51
Product Description

5.6. Alspa CE80–35 FIP Remote I/O Scanner

The FIP Remote I/O Scanner (catalog number IC693BEM330) is an intelligent module that interfaces 80–35 I/O
modules to a FIP bus. Up to 19 I/O modules can be accommodated by using two 10-slot baseplates connected by
an expansion cable. Together, the Remote I/O Scanner and the modules it serves are referred to as an I/O Nest.
The FIP Nest can include most 80–35 I/O modules. For details, see ALS 52313 Alspa CE80–35 Remote I/O
Scanner User’s Manual.

The host CPU can be any type of CPU capable of communicating on a FIP bus. A module in the host (such as a
FIP Bus Controller) provides the necessary interface between the FIP bus and the host CPU.

Hand-Held 46550
Programmer

Host CPU
CPU I/O Nest

ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
FIP
Scanner

Bus
Controller
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FIP Bus
ÎÎÎ Expansion Cable,
up to 50 feet (15 Meters)
Up to 128 devices

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
The Alspa 8000 Hand-Held Programmer provides a convenient way to perform setup, monitoring and control
functions.

5.6.1. Features of the CE80–35 Remote I/O Scanner

The FIP Remote I/O Scanner performs the following basic functions:

D controls operation of the I/O nest in the selected mode,

D scans discrete and analog I/O modules and maintains I/O scan timing,

D maps I/O data to FIP application variables,

D detects module and system faults and reports them to the FIP network,

D permits standalone configuration using Hand-Held Programmer,

D retains its network configuration through loss of power,

D permits I/O forcing from the Hand-Held Programmer,

Page 2–52 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

D detects and records input transitions,

D supports FIP messaging services,

D responds to an external synchronization signal,

D can provide blinking or pulsed outputs,

D can provide input filtering and chatter detection.

5.6.2. FIP Bus Interface

The CE80–35 Remote I/O Scanner communicates at a data rate of 1 MHz. There are two versions of the FIP
communications standard: FIP and WORLD FIP. A DIP switch on the module is used to select the version that will
be used by the Remote I/O Scanner. (The same communications method will then be used on both bus cables).

The DIP switch on the module must be set to the FIP position for the Remote I/O Scanner to communicate with
a C80–75 PLC.

5.6.3. Module Description

The FIP Remote I/O Scanner is a standard C80–35 PLC module that plugs easily into the backplane of the

ÎÎÎÎÎ
baseplate.

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
FIP CH S2
1.0 MHz
CD1

TEN1
LEDs
46551

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
CD2

ÎÎÎÎÎ
TEN2

ÎÎÎÎÎ
C
H

ÎÎÎÎÎ
A
N

ÎÎÎÎÎ
N
E
L

ÎÎÎÎÎ
1 FIP Bus Connectors

ÎÎÎÎÎ
C
H

ÎÎÎÎÎ
A
N
N

ÎÎÎÎÎ
E
L

ÎÎÎÎÎ
2

ÎÎÎÎÎ
S
Y Synchro Connector

ÎÎÎÎÎ
N
C
H

ÎÎÎÎÎ
R
O Lug for Ground Wire

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–53
Product Description

5.6.4. Connectors
The front of the module has the following connectors:

CHANNEL 1 9-pin male D connectors for two FIP bus cables. A bus can be disconnected from the module
CHANNEL 2 without disturbing the continuity of the bus. The second bus is a backup for the first bus; its use
is optional.

SYNCHRO Connector for a FIP synchronization cable. It requires a mating connector such as Molex
#39–O1–4O31. The synchronization capability is not used in a C80–75 PLC application.

(ground) The lug below the Synchro connector is used for the module ground wire (provided). The other
end of the ground wire must be connected to the mounting bolt on the lower left corner of the
baseplate and to chassis ground.

5.6.5. LEDs
There are two pairs of LEDs at the top of the module. The upper pair is for channel 1 and the lower pair is for
channel 2.

CD1/CD2 the green Carrier Detected LEDs indicate the presence of a carrier-detect signal on their
respective channels.

TEN1/TEN2 the red Transmission Enabled LEDs indicate the module is generating transmissions on their
respective channels.

For more information, please see:

The ALS 52519 FIP Bus Controller (FBC) for Alspa C80–35 PLC User’s Manual for information about bus
installation and operation, and ALS 52313 Alspa CE80–35 Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual.

5.7. Axis Positioning Module

The Axis Positioning Module (APM), is an easy–to–use intelligent, fully programmable 1–axis (IC693APU301)
or 2–axis (IC693APU302) motion control module for the Alspa C80–35 PLC. The APM allows a PLC user to
combine high performance control with PLC logic solving functions in one integrated system. The APM can be
configured to operate in either standard positioning mode or follower mode. When used in the standard positioning
mode, it combines high-performance control with PLC logic solving functions in one integrated system. When
used in the follower mode, it provides high-performance electronic gearing for continuous master/slave
applications. The desired mode is easily selected by configuring a setup parameter in the Alspa P8–25/35
Configuration software.

The Alspa C80–35 and APM operate together as one integrated motion control package. The APM controls axis
motion and handles all direct communications to the drive and machine while the PLC automatically transfers data
between PLC tables and the APM.

The PLC also provides a means for connecting Operator Interfaces such as Alphanumeric Display System which
can control and monitor system operation. An example of an APM servo system showing the hardware and
software used to configure, program and operate the system is shown below.

Page 2–54 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

a45114

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
OPERATOR

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
INTERFACES

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
MACHINE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
C A O I A
P D U N P DRIVE
C T M

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
U

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ENCODER

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Alspa P8 THE MOTION
CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMER

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PACKAGE SOFTWARE PACKAGE

Figure 2.30 – Example of APM Servo System

The APM can be installed in any Alspa C80–35 CPU, expansion or remote baseplate, with up to three APM
modules in a Model 311, 313 or 323 system, and up to eight APM modules in a Model 331, 341, 351 or 352 system
(maximum of three per baseplate). Alspa P8 Configuration software is used to configure the APM.

Motion programs are normally created using the Motion Programmer software package, however a single short
program can be created using the Program Zero Editor within the Alspa P8 software package.

The APM front panel has two 24–pin high–density connectors for servo connections. The connector labeled A
contains connections for Drive 1. Connector B contains general purpose connections including Analog Inputs and
the Control Inputs and Outputs. To make wiring easier to the drive and machine, each high–density connector is
typically connected by a short cable to the terminal blocks.

I/O cable assemblies are available which connect the I/O connector on the faceplate to a terminal block. These
cables consist of a 24-pin I/O connector, a cable and a 25-pin D-type terminal block connector. Available cables
are:

D IC693CBL311 3 meters (10 feet)

D IC693CBL317 3 meters (10 feet) with an 8” external shield pigtail;

D IC693CBL320 1 meter (3 feet) with an 8” external shield pigtail

If you want to build an I/O cable that is a different length than the above, the 24-pin I/O cable connector is available
in three different kits (solder eyelet receptacle, crimp wire receptacle and IDC (ribbon) receptacle). The terminal
block is Weidmuller RD25 910648 or equivalent (must be compatible with the I/O cable IC693CBL311/317/320).

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–55
Product Description

For more information about the Axis Positioning Modules, see the following manuals:

D ALS 52205 Axis Positioning Module (APM) for Alspa 8000 PLCs Programming Manual,

D ALS 52403 Axis Positioning Module (APM) for Alspa C80–35 PLC Standard Mode User’s Manual,

D ALS 52607 Axis Positioning Module (APM) for Alspa C80–35 PLC – Follower Mode User’s Manual.

a45116

EN1 STAT
EN2 OK
AXIS POS CFG
MODULE

ONE
AXIS

C
O
M
M

B A

Figure 2.31 – Axis Positioning Module

5.8. High Speed Counter

The High Speed Counter (IC693APU300) for the Alspa C80–35 PLC is a single–slot module which can be used
in applications where pulse input rates exceed the input capability of the PLC or where too large a percentage of
PLC processing capability would be required. The High Speed Counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse
signals up to 80 KHz for industrial applications such as: meter proving, turbine flowmeter, velocity measurement,
material handling, motion control and process control.

Page 2–56 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

With direct processing the High Speed Counter module is able to sense inputs, count and respond with outputs
without needing to communicate with a CPU. It can be configured to count either up or down, to count both up
and down, or to count the difference between two changing values. The module can be configured to provide 1,
2, or 4 counters of differing complexity.

a43971
HIGH HIGH
SPEED OK SPEED OK
COUNTER COUNTER
CFG CFG

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ HIGH SPEED CNTR

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
HIGH SPEED 5/12/24 VDC
COUNTER I1

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1
5/12/24 VDC 2
I2

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I3
I1 3
I4

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
4
I2
I5
5

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I3 I6
6
I4

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I7
7
I5 I8

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
8
I6 I9
9

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I10
I7 10
I11

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I8 11
I12
I9 12

I10
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
13

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
14
I11

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
15 5V OPTION
I12
16 01

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
O1 17 02

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
O2 18 03
O3 19

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
04
O4 20

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SLOT 44A729182–019

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FOR USE WITH
IC693APU300

Figure 2.32 – High Speed Counter (HSC)

The High Speed Counter can be installed in any Alspa C80–35 baseplate and is configured using either the
Hand–Held Programmer or the Alspa P8–25/35 Programming Software Configuration function. Many features can
also be configured from the user’s application program. There are no jumpers to be set on the module. Two LEDs
at the top of the module indicate the operating status of the module and the status of configuration parameters.
Detailed information on the High Speed Counter can be found in ALS 52401 High Speed Counter for Alspa C80–35
PLC User’s Manual.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–57
Product Description

5.9. I/O Processor Module

The I/O Processor (IOP) module (IC693APU305) for the Alspa C80–35 PLC provides direct processing of rapid
pulse signals for industrial control applications such as:

D Fast response process control,

D Velocity measurement,
D Material handling, marking and packaging.

Direct processing means that the module is able to sense inputs, process the input information and control the
outputs without needing to communicate with a CPU.

During each CPU sweep, the I/O Processor communicates with the CPU through 32 discrete inputs (%I), 15 words
of analog inputs (%AI), 32 discrete outputs (%Q) and 6 words of analog outputs (%AQ). The %AQ outputs can
be used by the CPU program to set up timer values or send other controlling parameters to the I/O Processor.

a45380
I/O I/O
PROC 1 2 PROC 1 2
MODULE MODULE
3 4 3 4

CFG OK CFG OK

I/O PROCESSOR
I/O PROCESSOR 5/12/24 VDC
5/12/24 VDC 1 IN1
IN1 2 IN2
IN2 3 IN3
IN3 4 IN4
IN4 5 IN5
IN5 6 IN6
IN6 7 IN7
IN7 8 IN8
IN8 9 IN9/OUT5 V
I9/ 10 IN10/OUT6
05
I10/ 11 IN11/OUT7
06
12 IN12/OUT8
I11/
07 13 INCOM
I12/
08 14
OUT1 I
N 15 SHIELD V
OUT2 T
E 16 OUT1
OUT3 R 17 OUT2
N
OUT4 A 18 OUT3
L
OUT 1–8: 0.02A @ 5 VDC 19 OUT4
OUT 1–4: 1.0A @ 12/24 VDC 20 OUTCOM
OUT 5–8: 0.5A @ 12/24 VDC
4.0A/MODULE 44A729182–070R01
FOR USE WITH
IC693APU305

Figure 2.33 – I/O Processor Module

Page 2–58 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

The I/O Processor is configured using the Alspa Hand-held Programmer or the Alspa P8 Programming Software
Configurator function. Many configuration parameters can be modified from the user’s application program as
well. Each configuration parameter is set to a factory default value which is suitable for many applications. There
are no jumpers or DIP switches to set on the module. Six green LEDs at the top of the module indicate the operating
status of the module, the status of configuration parameters and the state of hardware outputs 1 to 4.

Module features include:

D Up to 12 positive logic (source) inputs with input voltage range selection of either 5 VDC (TTL) or 10 to 30
VDC (non-TTL),

D Up to eight positive logic (source) outputs: four outputs with 1 amp rating and four configurable outputs with
0.5 amp rating,

D Outputs protected by replaceable fuse (one fuse common to all outputs),

D Dedicated processor provides 500 µs I/O update,

D Counts per Timebase register for input rate measurement,

D Total Counts register (32-bit) accumulates total counts received by module,

D Four Strobe data registers for input position capture,

D Two Timer data registers for indicating input pulse length or input spacing in milliseconds,

D Thirty-two range comparators (outputs returned in %I and %AI data),

D Software configuration,

D Internal module diagnostics,

D Individual LEDs that indicate Module OK and Configured OK status,

D Individual LEDs that indicate state of Outputs 1 through 4,

D A removable terminal board for connection of field wiring.

Inputs can be used as count signals or edge-sensitive strobe signals. Outputs can be used to drive indicating lights,
solenoids, relays and other devices.

Power to operate the module’s logic circuitry is obtained from the 5VDC bus on the baseplate backplane. Power
sources for the input and output devices must be supplied by the user or by the +24 VDC isolated output of the
Alspa C80–35 power supply. The I/O Processor module provides a selectable threshold voltage to allow the inputs
to respond to either a 5 VDC signal level or a 10 to 30 VDC signal level. The threshold is selected by configuration.

All configuration parameters for the module are downloaded from the PLC to the I/O Processor after it passes its
internal diagnostics. Once the module has been successfully configured, the CONFIG OK LED will turn on.
Configuration parameters can be changed using Alspa P8 configuration software or the Hand-held Programmer.

Operation of the I/O Processor module is monitored by a watchdog timer circuit. If the watchdog timer detects a
module failure, it will force all outputs off and turn off the MODULE OK LED.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–59
Product Description

5.10. Ethernet Interface Module

The Ethernet Interface module (IC693CMM321) provides an interface that allows you to directly attach the Alspa
C80–35 PLC to an Ethernet LAN via a user-supplied transceiver and AUI cable, and to communicate with hosts
and other control devices on the network.

The Ethernet Interface for the Alspa C80–35 PLC has client/server capability. As a client it can initiate
communications with other PLCs containing Ethernet Interfaces. This is done from the ladder program using the
COMMREQ Function Block. As a server it responds only to requests from other devices such as a Host computer
running a Host Communications Toolkit application or another Alspa C80–35 PLC acting as a client.

The Ethernet Interface provides your PLC with a great deal of capability by allowing you to:

D Become operational quickly,

D Directly attach your PLC to an Ethernet network,

D Initiate transfer of data to the PLC from another device,

D Communicate simultaneously to multiple devices with up to 16 server connections,

D Be compatible with other Cegelec devices, as well as with devices from other vendors,

D Communicate from a Host computer (or other control device),

D Diagnose and maintain your system using diagnostic and station management tools.

The Ethernet Interface does not support the Alspa 8000 Hand-Held Programmer.

An Ethernet Interface module can be installed in any Alspa C80–35 baseplate, however only two Ethernet
Interface modules can be installed in a baseplate.

The Ethernet Interface connects to an Ethernet network via a user-provided transceiver cable and transceiver. The
following figure shows the layout of the Ethernet Interface.

Page 2–60 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

a45481
CMM 321 OK OK
ETHERNET LAN LAN
INTERFACE
SER SER

STAT STAT

RESTART

STATION
MANAGER
PORT

MAC
ADDRESS
LABEL

DOWNLOADER
PORT

SERIAL
NUMBER
LABEL

TRANSCEIVER
PORT

Figure 2.34 – Ethernet Interface Module

Four LEDs are located at the top of the board. The Restart pushbutton is located immediately below the LEDs.
The RS-232 serial port with the RJ-11 connector is the Station Manager port. The RS-485 serial port with the 15-pin
D connector located below the Station Manager port is the module’s Downloader port. The 14-pin AAUI
connector, facing downward, is the Transceiver port. The Default MAC Address label is attached to the outside
of the plastic housing.

5.10.1. Board Indicators

There are four LEDs on the Ethernet Interface: OK, LAN, SER and STAT. These LEDs can be ON, OFF,
BLINKING slow, or BLINKING fast. They indicate the state the Interface is in, traffic on the Transceiver port and
Downloader port, and when an exception event has occurred.

5.10.2. Restart Button

The Restart button serves four functions: LED test, Restart, Restart and Reload, and Restart and Enter Maintenance
Utility. The Restart button is inaccessible when the front cover of the Ethernet Interface is closed.

5.10.3. Serial Ports

There are two serial ports on the Ethernet Interface: the Station Manager Port and the Downloader Port.

The Station Manager Port

The 6-pin, RJ-11 phone jack, RS-232 port is used to connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the Station
Manager software on the Ethernet Interface. A cable is needed to connect the terminal or emulator to the Ethernet
Interface.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–61
Product Description

The Downloader Port

The 15-pin, D-type, RS-485 port is used to connect to the PC Downloader in case the communications software
in the Ethernet Interface needs to be updated.

5.10.4. AAUI (Transceiver) Port

The 14-pin AAUI port provides the electrical and mechanical interface to the user-provided IEEE 802.3
transceiver cable, which connects the AAUI Port to an external Ethernet-compatible transceiver). The external
transceiver is directly connected to the Ethernet cable.

5.10.5. Default MAC Address Label

The Default MAC Address label lists the Ethernet MAC address to be used by this module.

5.10.6. Serial Number Label

The Serial Number Label indicates the serial number of this Interface.

For more information, refer to the ALS 52512 Alspa C80–35 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications User’s Manual.

Page 2–62 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

5.11. Programmable Coprocessor Module

The Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) provides a high performance coprocessor for the Model 331,
Model 341, Model 351 or Model 352 (not available for Model 311, 313 or 323). The PCM supports the CCM
communications protocol, has two serial ports, supports MegaBasic programming language and is programmed
using a compatible PC.

The PCM is available in two versions. Each version is listed with the total memory on the board and the nominal
MegaBasic program memory size available to the user.

D Catalog Number IC693PCM301 has 192K Bytes of memory (47K Bytes for MegaBasic Program).

D Catalog Number IC693PCM311 has 640K Bytes of memory (190K Bytes for MegaBasic Program).

Î a43734

Î
PCM301 OK BD OK

Î
COPROC US1 P1 OK
US2 P2 OK

RESTART

BATTERY

Figure 2.35 – Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM)

The PCM contains an 80188 microprocessor as its main processing element, on–board memory, an interface to
the system bus and the serial ports, and a watchdog timer. The 80188 microprocessor handles all processing and
operation control on the board. A watchdog timer in the PCM is periodically reset by the PCM system software.
If the watchdog timer expires, the PCM will stop functioning and the Board OK LED will turn off.

A PCM can be installed in any slot in the CPU baseplate, except slot 1, which must contain the CPU module. The
Lithium battery for backup of RAM memory is installed in a battery mounting clip on the inside of the PCM
faceplate. This battery is disconnected for shipment from the factory and must be connected prior to installation
of the module. When the PCM is stored for extended periods of time, the battery should be disconnected, unless
you wish to retain the program in RAM memory.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–63
Product Description

See the following manuals for detailed information on Alspa C80–35 Programmable Coprocessor Modules:

D ALS 52203 PCM Development Software (PCOP) for Alspa 8000 PLCs User’s Manual,

D ALS 52402 Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) and Support Software for Alspa 8000 PLCs User’s
Manual.

5.12. Communications Control Module

The Communications Control Module (IC693CMM311) provides a high performance coprocessor for the Alspa
C80–35 PLC Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 or Model 352 (not available for Model 311, 313 or 323). The
CMM supports the CCM communications protocol, the RTU (Modbus) slave communications protocol and the
SNP protocol, and has two serial ports. Port 1 supports RS–232 applications and Port 2 supports either RS–232
or RS–485 applications. There is also a default set up which can be used for automatic configuration.

A “Y” cable is supplied with each Alspa C80–35 CMM module to separate the two logical ports from a single
physical connector (that is, it separates the signals). The Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 can have up to four CMMs
(in the CPU baseplate only). For more information on CMM communications, refer to ALS 52506 Serial
communication modules for Alspa 8000 PLCs User’s Manual.

Î a44902

Î
COMM OK OK

Î
COPROC US1 US1
US2 US2

RESTART

COMBINED
SERIAL PORT
PORT1
&
PORT2

Figure 2.36 – Communications Control Module (CMM)

Page 2–64 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

5.13. Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor

The Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module (IC693ADC311) is a coprocessor to the Alspa C80–35 PLC CPU
and is used in an Alphanumeric Display System. It performs Alphanumeric Display System display, report, and
alarm functions when interfaced to an Operator Interface Terminal (OIT), which can be a color or monochrome
OIT or Mini OIT, a Touch Mini OIT, a VT100 compatible terminal, or a compatible PC running TERMF.
Communications with the Alspa C80–35 CPU is done over the PLC system backplane.

Î
Î
a44535
ADC311 OK BD OK

Î
COPROC US1 P1 OK
US2 P2 OK

Î RESTART

Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ BATTERY

Figure 2.37 – Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module (ADC)

Features of the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor include:
D Single slot module,
D Runs Alphanumeric Display System software,
D 8 Mhz, 80C188 microprocessor,
D High performance access to PLC memory,
D Real time calendar clock synchronized to PLC,
D Reset pushbutton; three status LEDs,
D Soft Configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers),
D Easy fill–in–the–blank system building,
D Pop–up windows; pull down menus,
D Fifteen User definable function keys per screen,
D Printer logging to a serial printer.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–65
Product Description

Multiple Alphanumeric Display Coprocessors can be supported in a single Alspa C80–35 PLC system and must
be located in a Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 or Model 352 CPU baseplate. This module has a single serial
port connector which supports two serial ports with each port being dedicated to a specific operation. The top port,
port 1 is normally connected to an RS–232 serial COM port of a host computer for communications to PCOP at
19.2 Kilobaud. Alternately, port 1 may be connected to a serial RS–232 printer. Initially, port 2 is configured as
a 19.2 Kbaud RS–232 port. The bottom port can be used to interface to a terminal with keyboard input and screen
output similar to an OIT.

Programming and configuration are done using a PC–compatible computer with PCM Development Software
(PCOP) installed. The programming computer connects to the top port. The default setting is 19 200 bps. The PCM
Development Software is used to configure the serial port parameters and to install the Alphanumeric Display
System software onto the ADC.

There are no DIP switches or jumpers on this board that need to be set for configuration. The ADC must be
configured with Alspa P8 Configuration software prior to use.

See the following manuals for detailed information on Alspa C80–35 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor
Modules:

D ALS 52604 Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual,

D ALS 52605 Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual.

Page 2–66 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

6. RS–422/RS–485 TO RS–232 CONVERTER

The RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter (IC690ACC900) provides an RS–232 interface to external devices
requiring the RS–232 serial interface through conversion of the RS–422/RS–485 signals provided at the
RS–422/RS–485 ports in the Alspa C80–35 PLC. This converter provides a direct serial connection to the standard
serial COM port of a PC or other computer used as the programming device for the Alspa C80–35 PLC.

This converter is a small, convenient, self–contained device which requires only a cable connection to the Alspa
C80–35 RS–422/RS–485 port on one end and a cable connection to the RS–232 device on the opposite end.

ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
a44681

Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
Alspa C80–35 PC

ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
RS–485 RS–232
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CONVERTER

Figure 2.38 – Example of RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter Connection

in an Alspa C80–35 PLC System

The converter operates from a +5 VDC source, which is provided from the PLC backplane +5 VDC bus, through
the cable connection. The pin assignments for the connections on the cable required for the RS–232 connection
are compatible with available PCM compatible serial cables (IC690CBL701, PCM to PC/XT; IC690CBL705,
PCM to PS2; and IC690CBL702, PCM to PC–AT). The RS–422/RS–485 connection at the Alspa C80–35 serial
port on the power supply can be made with an available cable (same cable that used with the Hand–Held
programmer), IC693CBL303.

The three PCM compatible cables (IC690CBL701/702/705) are 3 meters (10 feet) in length, and the HHP
compatible cable (IC693CBL303) is 2 meters (6 feet) in length. For those users who may want to build their own
cables, pin assignments and recommended cable types for both cables required for use with the converter are
provided in Chapter 3, Installation Procedures, in this manual. For detailed information on this converter, refer
to Appendix D.

An Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) is also available for applications requiring ground isolation
where a common ground cannot be established between components, or to boost signal levels for greater distances
or to add more drops. For detailed information, refer to Appendix E.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–67
Product Description

7. MINICONVERTER KIT
The Miniconverter Kit (IC690ACC901) consists of an RS–422 (SNP) to RS–232 Miniconverter, a 6 foot (2 meter)
serial extension cable and a 9–pin to 25–pin Converter Plug assembly. The 15–pin SNP port connector on the
Miniconverter plugs directly into the serial port connector on the Alspa C80–35 power supply, Alspa C80–75 CPU
or Alspa C80–25 CPU. The 9–pin RS–232 port connector on the Miniconverter connects to an RS–232 compatible
device.

When used with a PC–compatible computer, one end of the extension cable plugs into the Miniconverter’s 9–pin
serial port connector, the other end plugs into the 9–pin serial port of the computer. The Converter plug (supplied
with kit) is required to convert the 9–pin serial port connector on the Miniconverter to the 25–pin serial port
connector on the PC.

The Miniconverter is shown in the following figure. For more information on the Miniconverter, refer to
Appendix F.

a44985

RS–422 RS–232
PORT PORT

Figure 2.39 – Alspa 8000 SNP Port to RS–232 Adapter

Page 2–68 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

8. PERSONAL COMPUTER INTERFACE CARD

The Personal Computer Interface card (PCIF-35), catalog number CE693PIF301, for Alspa C80–35 I/O provides
an alternative method of controlling Alspa C80–35 I/O. The PCIF-35 is an ISA compatible card that can be
installed in any PC/AT/ISA bus, 8-bit, half-size slot, connecting a personal computer with up to four Alspa C80–35
Expansion or Remote I/O baseplates. Up to 1280 bytes of I/O may be monitored and controlled by the personal
computer using computer language (for example, C) or third party control software.

47016
DOS-BASED MICROSOFT C/TURBO C WINDOWS-BASED
SOFTWARE PROGRAMS SOFTWARE
DOS TSR ROUTINE OR C LIBRARY WINDOWS DLL
OR
MS-DOS MS-DOS MS WINDOWS

I/O EXPANSION CABLE

PCIF-35

I/O EXPANSION CABLE I/O EXPANSION CABLE I/O EXPANSION CABLE

ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ALSPA C80–35

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ALSPA C80–35

Î Î Î ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î Î Î Î
ALSPA C80–35 ALSPA C80–35

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
5 OR 10 SLOT
BASEPLATE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
5 OR 10 SLOT
BASEPLATE
5 OR 10 SLOT
BASEPLATE
5 OR 10 SLOT
BASEPLATE

Figure 2.40 – Example of PCIF Interface to Alspa C80–35 I/O

Remote baseplates can be located up to 213 meters (700 feet) from the personal computer (expansion racks up to
15 meters (50 feet) connected through standard Cegelec expansion cables. The PCIF-35 card connects to the Alspa
C80–35 baseplates through a 25-pin connector on the front of the card. The PCIF card also has a 3-pin removable
terminal strip which provides connections to a watchdog supervised RUN output signal and relay.

Serial prewired I/O expansion cables which can be used with expansion and remote baseplates are available from
Cegelec. Catalog numbers and lengths of these cables are listed in Table 2.1, page 2–5. Note that the 3 foot cable
is configured as a ”Y” cable.

The PCIF-35 interfaces to all Alspa C80–35 discrete and analog I/O modules (except 16 channel analog modules
which are not currently supported by the PCIF-35). A variety of smart modules from Horner Electric, Inc. are also
supported. A manual describing the PCIF-35 is available from Horner Electric, Inc. An Important Product
Information notice (GFK-0889), which is included with the card provides basic information about the card,
including software installation procedures.

The Personal Computer Interface card when ordered by catalog number CE693PIF301 includes the PCIF-35 card
and two software interfaces: one for a direct interface to I/O modules based on rack and slot address and a second
one with a PLC type reference table interface with override capability.

A C Language Interface available from Horner Electric works with both Borland Turbo C and Microsoft C. The
source code for this interface is available from Horner Electric (catalog number HE693SRC844).

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–69
Product Description

Table 2.17 – Specifications for Personal Computer Interface Card

Supply Power:
Voltage
Current
Watchdog Relay
Initial Resistance
Maximum Switching Power
Maximum Switching Voltage
Maximum Switching Current
Maximum Carrying Current
UL/CSA Ratings
Minimum Operations (Mechanical)
Minimum Operations (Electrical)
4.75 to 5.25 VDC
230 mA maximum
0.05 ohms
60 Watts, 62.5 VA
220 VDC, 250 VAC
2 Amps
3 Amps
125 VAC at 0.3 Amps
110 VDC at 0.3 Amps
30 VDC at 1.0 Amp
100 000 000
500 000 (30 VDC at 1.0A, resistive)
100 000 (30 VDC at 2.0A, resistive)

Page 2–70 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Product Description

9. ALSPA 8000 HAND–HELD PROGRAMMER

The Alspa C80–35 PLC can also be programmed with the Hand–Held Programmer (HHP) (IC693PRG301)). The
HHP provides you with the tool required to program the Alspa C80–35 PLC using the Statement List Language.
With the HHP, you can develop, debug and monitor logic programs, monitor data tables, and configure PLC and
I/O parameters.

Note

The user logic program in a CPU 351 or CPU 352 cannot be viewed or edited
with the Hand-Held Programmer. You must use Alspa P8 programming
software for these functions with the CPU 351 or CPU 352.

The HHP connects to the CPUs serial port through a 15–pin D–type connector on the Alspa C80–35 PLC power
supply in the CPU baseplate. The physical connection is through a cable (IC693CBL303) that is 2 meters (6 feet)
in length. This cable also provides power connections to the HHP, and provides a signal that tells the PLC that an
HHP is attached. The HHP can be connected or disconnected to a PLC that is powered–up.

a43052
CEGELEC

ALSPA 8000 HHP

HAND HELD PROGRAMMER

OUT SETM RSTM TMR

LD MODE
OUTM SET RST ONDTR

D E F UPCTR
AND OR NOT BLK RUN
DNCTR

A I B Q CM G
FUNC DEL
AI AQ T S

7 8 9 R # SRCH

SLOT FOR
4 5 6 WRITE INS MEMORY
CARD

READ
1 2 3
VRFY

HE ENT
0 X CLR
DEC

SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR

TO CPU SERIAL PORT

Figure 2.41 – Hand–Held Programmer for the Alspa C80–35 PLC

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 2–71
Product Description

9.1. HHP Features

The keypad for the HHP is a sealed type with tactile feedback and has 42 keys, arranged in a matrix of six keys
across by seven keys down. A two–line by 16 character LCD display screen provides a means of visual information
to the user. The HHP also provides an interface to a removable memory card (IC693ACC303). The memory card
can be used with all models of CPU, except the CPU 351 and CPU 352. The HHP can program EEPROM memory
devices in the memory card, which will retain the program stored in it under no–power conditions. This memory
cartridge, through the HHP interface, provides a means for off–line storage and retrieval of the user’s application
program and system configuration data. The memory card plugs into a connector accessed through an opening on
the lower right side of the HHP. This feature provides program portability and a way to store different programs
for use as required.

9.2. HHP Modes of Operation

The HHP functionality is basically divided into four modes of operation which are selected through a key sequence
on the keypad. These modes are: program mode, protection mode, data mode and configuration mode.

Program mode allows you to create, change, monitor and debug Statement List logic. This mode also allows read,
write and verify functions with the memory card, EEPROM, or flash memory.

Protection Mode provides a way to control access to (protection of) certain PLC functions, including program
logic, reference data and configuration information. The use of this function is optional; however, it is convenient
in that it allows you to protect parts of the PLC system from accidental or deliberate modification. Protection is
provided through four levels of passwords assigned by the user.

Data Mode allows you to view, and optionally alter values in various reference tables. Several display formats can
be selected in which to view this data: binary, hexadecimal, signed decimal and timer/counter.

Configuration Mode allows you to define the types of I/O modules that are installed or will be installed in the PLC
system. You can also assign I/O module addresses to these modules. This feature is convenient in that it allows
you to write and test logic programs using discrete references assigned to I/O modules that are not yet installed.
In this mode, you can also configure CPU data, such as real–time clock (Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 only), coil
check and HHP characteristics, such as keyclick on or off. For detailed information about the Hand–Held
Programmer, refer to ALS 52202 Hand–Held Programmer for Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs User’s
Manual.

Page 2–72 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Chapter Installation Procedures

Note

Basic installation instructions described in this chapter cover installations that

are not in noisy or hazardous environments. The more stringent requirements
(Such as CE mark) are dealt with in ALS 52612 Installation Requirements for
Conformance to Standards. See also ALS 53002 Agency approvals, Standards
and General Specifications for C80–35, C80–75, CE80–20, CE80–35 and
CE80–15.

This chapter describes the procedures for installing the Alspa C80–35 PLC and preparing the control system for
use. Included are instructions for unpacking, inspecting, setting rack number DIP switches, installing the baseplate
on a panel, installing modules and connecting cables.

Questions Concerning Installation or Operation

The installation procedures in this chapter and the information in Chapters 1 and 2 provide the information needed
to install your Alspa C80–35 PLC. For information on programming and configuration refer to:

D ALS 52102 Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs Reference Manual,

D ALS 52201 Alspa P8–25/35/05 Programming Software for Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs User’s
Manual,

D ALS 52202 Hand–Held Programmer for Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs User’s Manual.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–1
Installation Procedures

1. HARDWARE PACKAGING – MODEL 331, 341, 351 AND 352

Six types of baseplates are available for the Alspa C80–35 Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 PLCs : a 5 and a 10–slot
CPU baseplate, a 5 and 10–slot expansion baseplate, and a 5 and 10–slot remote expansion baseplate. These
baseplates are designed to be panel mounted. Each baseplate is shipped in its own carton. Additional copies of this
manual, the ALS 52117 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual if required, can be ordered through your local
Cegelec PLC distributor or Cegelec sales office.

The Power Supply (PS) module, Central Processing Unit (CPU) module and other modules, which can include:
Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM), Communications Control Module (CMM), N80 Bus Controller
(NBC), N80 Communications Module (NCM), Enhanced N80 Communications Module (NCM+), Alphanumeric
Display Coprocessor module (ADC), High Speed Counter module (HSC), Axis Positionning Modules (APM 1 and
2 axis), I/O Processor Module (IOP), Ethernet Interface module, FIP Bus Controller module, FIP Remote I/O
Scanner module and discrete and analog I/O Modules, are shipped in individual boxes. The CPU baseplate requires
a power supply in the first slot to the left, and a Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 or Model 352 CPU module
in slot 1 (labeled CPU 1), which is adjacent to the power supply. The power supply and the CPU must be ordered
separately. Also, any of the specialized option modules (such as the PCM) must be installed in the CPU baseplate
and must be ordered as separate line items.

Expansion and remote baseplates are packed in individual shipping containers. Each expansion and remote
baseplate includes an I/O bus Terminator plug, which must be installed in the last open connector on the expansion
bus. The 15–meter (50–foot) I/O expansion cable has, the terminating resistors installed in the connector at the
end of the expansion bus and does not require the Terminator plug. All unused Terminator plugs can be disposed
of, or kept as spares. Each expansion baseplate requires a power supply to be installed in the leftmost slot. The
available 10 slots on each expansion baseplate can contain any combination of I/O modules or option modules,
with the exception that specialized option modules (such as the PCM) must reside in the CPU baseplate. You should
order enough of the I/O bus expansion cables of the required lengths to connect each expansion baseplate to the
expansion bus (you will need to build cables for a remote expansion system over 15 meters (50 feet) in length).
The prewired cables are each packed in individual shipping containers.

2. HARDWARE PACKAGING – MODEL 311, MODEL 313 AND

MODEL 323
The Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 311 is available as a 5–slot baseplate and Model 313 is available as a 5–slot
baseplate and Model 323 is available as a 10–slot baseplate, each designed to be panel mounted. A Cegelec power
supply is required in the leftmost slot on the baseplate. All other slots can contain I/O modules or certain option
modules (not specialized option modules). The Model 311, Model 313 and Model 323 CPU is built into the
baseplate and does not have to be ordered as a separate line item. Each baseplate and module ordered is packed
in an individual shipping container.

Page 3–2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

3. PROGRAMMER FOR ALSPA P8–25/35 SOFTWARE

If the PLC is to be programmed using Alspa P8–25/35 software, a programming computer is required to run the
software. The physical connection from the computer to the PLC can be through one of the available converters
(RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 converter, IC690ACC900; RS–422 to RS–232 miniconverter, IC690ACC901;
Isolated Repeater/Converter, IC655CCM590). For cable requirements for use with each of the converters, refer
to the applicable appendix (D, E, or F) in this manual.

It is recommended that all shipping containers and all packing material be saved in case it is necessary to transport
or ship any part of the system.

The Hand–Held Programmer and its cable are both packed in separate shipping containers. For more information,
refer to ALS 52202 Hand–Held Programmer for Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs User’s Manual, the
ALS 52117 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual and the ALS 52105 Alspa C80–25 PLC User’s Manual.

4. VISUAL INSPECTION
When you receive your Alspa C80–35 PLC system, carefully inspect all shipping containers for damage that may
have happened during shipping. If any part of the system is damaged, notify the carrier immediately. The damaged
shipping container should be saved as evidence for inspection by the carrier.

As the consignee, it is your responsibility to register a claim with the carrier for damage that happened during
shipment. However, Cegelec will fully cooperate with you, if such action is necessary.

5. PRE–INSTALLATION CHECK
After unpacking the Alspa C80–35 PLC racks, cables, all modules, and the programmer, record all serial
numbers. Serial numbers are required if you should need to contact Cegelec Product Service during the warranty
period of the equipment.

If you need Technical help, the Technical Support can be reached as listed below:

D Cegelec Industrial Controls Ltd

West Avenue
Kidsgrove – STOKE–ON–TRENT
Staffordshire ST71TW – UK
Phone: (44) 1782 781115
Fax: (44) 1782 781041

D Cegelec Division DPI

5, Avenue Newton
92140 CLAMART – France
Phone: 33 (0) 1 46 29 15 30
Fax: 33 (0) 1 46 29 16 06

D Cegelec Automatisierungsprodukte
Culemeyerstraße 1, D–12277, BERLIN – Germany
Phone: 49 (0)30 7496 3137
Fax: 49 (0)30 7496 3181

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–3
Installation Procedures

6. BASEPLATE INSTALLATION
Alspa C80–35 PLC baseplates are designed to be panel mounted. Each baseplate has standard attachment flanges
for mounting on an electrical panel. Baseplate dimensions and proper spacing requirements for installation
purposes for both the 5 and 10–slot baseplates with embedded CPU (Models 311 and 313 are 5–slot baseplates,
Model 323 is a 10–slot baseplate) and the 5 and 10–slot baseplates for Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and
Model 352 are shown in the following figures.

Note

All 5–slot baseplates have the same mounting dimensions and all 10–slot
baseplates have the same mounting dimensions. Baseplates must be mounted
in the orientation as shown in the following figures for proper cooling.

6.1. Load Ratings, Temperature and Mounting Position

The power supply load rating depends on the mounting position of the baseplate and the ambient temperature.

The load rating with the baseplate mounted upright on a panel is:
D 100% at 60_C (140_F)

ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î

Power supply load ratings with the baseplate mounted horizontally are:
D temperature at 25_C (77_F) - full load
D temperature at 60_C (140_F) - 50% of full load

Page 3–4 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

6.2. Model 311, 313 and 323 Baseplate Dimensions

Baseplate dimensions and spacing requirements for installation for Models 311, 313 and 323 baseplates are shown
below.

DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS a45422

* 102 265 * 102
(4.00) 10.43 (4.00) INCHES ARE IN PARENTHESIS
250 * 102
(4.00)

Î
(9.84)
218 REMOVABLE
142
(8.60) I/O

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ Î
(5.59)
TERMINAL
POWER BLOCK

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ Î
SUPPLY

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ Î
5.08 DIA
90
(0.20 ). 130
(3.54)

ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏ
(TYPICAL) (5.12)

20
(0.79)
ÎÎ
FRONT VIEW HINGED
DOOR
ÏÏ SIDE VIEW Î
* 102
(4.00)
* ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING

Figure 3.1 – Model 311 and 313 5–Slot Baseplate Mounting Dimensions and Spacing
Requirements

a43053
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS
* 102 443 * 102
INCHES ARE IN PARENTHESIS
(4.00) (17.44) 428 (4.00) * 102
(4.00)

ÎÎ
(16.85)
396 REMOVABLE 142
(15.60) I/O

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Ï
(5.59)
TERMINAL
POWER
SUPPLY BLOCK

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 5.08 DIA.

Ï ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Ï
90 (0.20) 130
(3.54) (TYPICAL) (5.12)

20
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FRONT VIEW HINGED
ÏSIDE VIEW
Î
(0.79) DOOR
* 102
(4.00)
* ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING

Figure 3.2 – Model 323 10–Slot Baseplate Mounting Dimensions and Spacing Requirements

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–5
Installation Procedures

6.3. Model 331, 341, 351 and 352 Baseplate Dimensions

Baseplate dimensions and spacing requirements for installation for Models 331, 341, 351 and 352 baseplates are
shown below.

a45424
265 DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS
* 102 * 102
10.43 INCHES ARE IN PARENTHESIS
(4.00) (4.00) *
250 102

ÎÎ
(9.84) (4.00)
REMOVABLE 142
218
I/O

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ ÎÎ
(8.60) (5.59)
TERMINAL
POWER SEE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ ÎÎ
BLOCK
SUPPLY
NOTE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ ÎÎ
90 5.08 DIA
(3.54) (0.20 ). 130

ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏ
(TYPICAL) (5.12)

20
(0.79)
ÎÎ
FRONT VIEW HINGED
DOOR
ÏÏ SIDE VIEW
ÎÎ
NOTE: * 102
IF THE CABLE IS USED, ALLOW ABOUT 6 INCH HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE (4.00)
ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR.
* ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING

Figure 3.3 – Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and Model 352 5–Slot Baseplate Mounting
Dimensions and Spacing Requirements

a43085
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS,
* 102 443 * 102
INCHES ARE IN PARENTHESIS
(4.00) (17.44) 428 (4.00) * 102

ÎÎ
(16.85) (4.00)
396 REMOVABLE 142

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ ÎÎ
(15.60) I/O (5.59)
TERMINAL
POWER
SEE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ ÎÎ
SUPPLY BLOCK
NOTE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ ÎÎ
90 5.08 DIA.
130 CONNECTOR
(3.54) (0.20)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ ÎÎ
(5.12) FOR
(TYPICAL)
EXPANSION

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ ÎÎ
CABLE

20 NOTE:
FRONT VIEW HINGED SIDE VIEW
(0.79) IF THE CABLE IS USED, ALLOW ABOUT 150 MM (6 INCH) HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE DOOR
ON THE RIGHT SIDEOF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR. * 102
(4.00)
* ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING

Figure 3.4 – Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and Model 352 10–Slot Baseplate Mounting
Dimensions and Spacing Requirements

Page 3–6 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

6.4. Baseplate Adapter Bracket

An optional Baseplate Adapter Bracket (catalog number IC693ACC308) allows a 10–slot baseplate to be mounted
in a 19” rack. Each baseplate installation requires only one of the adapter brackets. Install the adapter bracket by
inserting the tabs at the top and bottom of the adapter bracket into the corresponding slots at the top and bottom
of the baseplate as shown in the following figure.

RIGHT SIDE OF a43726

ÎÎ
BASEPLATE

Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
Î

Î ÎÎ
Î Î
Î
Figure 3.5 – Baseplate Adapter Bracket Installation

Dimensions for rack mounting of the 10–slot baseplate with the adapter bracket attached are shown in the following
figure.

480 a45047
(18.89)
465
(18.30)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS, INCHES ARE IN PARENTHESIS

Figure 3.6 – Baseplate Mounting Dimensions for 19” Rack Installation

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–7
Installation Procedures

6.5. Rack Number Selection – Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and
Model 352
The following information applies to both expansion baseplates and remote baseplates. The Model 331,
Model 341, Model 351 and Model 352 CPU determines the identification number assigned to each expansion and
remote rack (CPU rack is always rack 0) from three binary-encoded DIP switches. This number can be 1 to 4 for
Models 331 and 341 or 1 to 7 for a Model 351 or Model 352 system. These switches are part of a DIP switch package
located on the baseplate backplane directly above the connector for slot 1 and must be configured before the power
supply is installed.

To select the rack number, set the switches to either the open (binary 1) or closed (binary 0) position. Refer to
Figure 2.1 for the proper configuration for each rack number. The label above the DIP switch also shows the
settings for each rack number. The following figure shows this DIP switch package with an example of a rack
number selected (rack 2 selected in the example).
a43054

DIP EXPANSION RACK #

CEGELEC SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ALSPA C80–35 1 X X X
PROGRAMMABLE 2 X X X
CONTROLLER 3 X X X
X CLOSED
BASE 10–SLOT
EXPANSION

CLOSED (Switch in Left Position)

Figure 3.7 – Rack Number Jumpers (Rack 2 Selected)

Page 3–8 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

6.6. CPU 351 and CPU 352 Grounding Information

The CPU 351 and 352 must be connected to frame ground at the slot where it is installed. Two methods are provided
for making this ground connection. A ground wire, grounding bracket and sufficient screws are provided with the
CPU 351 and 352. The two grounding methods are described below.

1. The connection from the CPU 351 and CPU 352 to frame ground can be made using the green ground wire
(part number 44A735970-001R01). This wire has a stab-on connector on one end for connection to a mating
terminal on the bottom of the CPU, and a ring terminal on the other end for connection to a grounded enclosure.

a45515

BOTTOM VIEW
OF CPU MODULE USE 1 No.6
SELF TAPPING SCREW
STAB–ON (N666P14006B6)
CONNECTOR

MOUNT ON
44A735970–001R01 GROUNDED
ENCLOSURE

Figure 3.8 – CPU 351 and CPU 352 - Attaching Green Ground Wire
2. The second method, which can be used for systems in noisy environments consists of installing the green
ground wire and the optional grounding bracket (part number 44C715646-001R01). This bracket attaches to
the CPU using two self-tapping No.4 screws (part number N666P9004B6) and to the grounded enclosure using
two self-tapping No.6 screws (part number N666P14006B6). Two holes must be drilled in the enclosure for
mounting this bracket.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–9
Installation Procedures

a45514

CPU351 MODULE
(BOTTOM VIEW)

44C715646–001R01

USE 2 No.4 USE 2 No.6 MOUNT ON

SELF TAPPING SCREWS SELF TAPPING SCREWS GROUNDED
(N666P9004B6) (N666P14006B6) ENCLOSURE

Figure 3.9 – CPU 351 and CPU 352 - Mounting Grounding Bracket

When the grounding bracket is used, pin 1 of the connector that mates with the Port 2 connector is not
connected. A metal connector shell must be installed on the cable for this port. The cable shield must be
terminated at the metal shell.

Page 3–10 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

6.7. Hand–Held Programmer Mounting

The following illustration provides dimensions for the Hand–Held Programmer for those installations that may
require mounting of the Hand–Held Programmer,
50 (1.99) a45143
30 (1.20)

184
(7.24)

173
(6.81)

80 (3.150)
97 (3.82)

DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS,
INCHES ARE IN PARENTHESIS

Figure 3.10 – Outline Drawing and Dimensions for the Hand–Held Programmer

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–11
Installation Procedures

6.8. Battery Installation

The CPU, PCM and ADC modules have battery–backed CMOS memory. Before installing a PCM or ADC module
and before powering on the CPU, you must install the lithium battery used to back–up the CMOS memory. The
battery for the CPU is located in the power supply module. To access this battery remove the plastic cover at the
bottom of the faceplate. The battery for the other modules is located on the module.

The PCM, ADC modules and the power supply are shipped from the factory with the battery connector
disconnected from the battery. To connect a battery, use the following procedure:

D Remove the faceplate cover to access the battery mounting clip on back of this cover and the two connector
receptacles mounted on the printed circuit board.

D Place the battery in its mounting clip, firmly pushing it in place.

D Orient the battery connector with one of the mating receptacles on the board.
D Push the battery connector into the receptacle so that it locks into place.
D Replace the module faceplate cover.

The Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and Model 352 CPU modules provide connections for a battery so that
the CPU can be shipped or stored with a program stored in RAM memory. This battery must be disconnected when
a battery has been installed in the power supply.

To retain the contents of RAM memory in a Model 311, Model 313 or Model 323 CPU during shipment or storage,
the power supply must be installed in the baseplate.

a47052
PWR

CEGELEC OK
RUN
ALSPA C80–35 BATT

30W POWER SUPPLY

PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
INPUT
100-240 VAC
50/60 HZ 90VA

125VDC, 50W

LITHIUM BATTERY
(IC693ACC301)
MOUNTED ON
BATTERY CLIPS +
ON BACK OF 24 VDC
BATTERY COVER OUTPUT
0.8A MAX.

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
B
A

ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
T
T BATTERY CABLE

ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
E CONNECTS TO
R EITHER CONNECTOR
Y

Figure 3.11 – Battery Location in Power Supply

Page 3–12 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

6.9. Replacing a Battery

If the BATT LED on the power supply turns ON, replace the battery. A battery can be removed and a new one
installed with the baseplate powered on. To replace a battery (catalog number IC693ACC301), use the following
procedure:

D Remove the battery cover at the bottom of the power supply.

D Remove the battery from its mounting clip.

D Firmly insert the replacement battery into the battery mounting clip.

D Remove the old battery cable connector from its receptacle and properly discard the old battery.

D With the needle nose pliers, push the new battery connector firmly into one of the receptacle on the board.

Caution

The new battery must be replaced within 20 minutes of removing the old
battery to ensure that the contents of RAM memory will be retained if
power is lost.

D Replace the battery cover.

WARNING
Observe the following precautions when handling a Lithium battery. Do
not discard the battery in fire. Do not attempt to recharge the battery. The
battery may burst or burn or release hazardous materials.

Caution

Do not attempt to remove the circuit board from its module housing.
Failure to observe this caution may result in an electrostatic build–up and
discharge resulting in damage to MOS circuits. Discharge of the
non–rechargeable lithium battery can occur if the board contacts a
conducting surface, causing loss of memory contents.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–13
Installation Procedures

6.9.1. Battery Accessory Kit

A Battery Accessory Kit (IC693ACC315) is available for baseplates with embedded CPUs. The Battery Accessory
Kit consists of a battery with an attached connector mounted on a circuit board. The battery maintains the contents
of RAM memory when power is removed from the PLC and the power supply module is removed. The Battery
Accessory can be installed on any of the following programmable controller baseplates:

D IC693CPU311 (5-slot with CPU),

D IC693CPU313 (5-slot with CPU),

D IC693CPU323 (10-slot with CPU).

Caution

To avoid losing data on the CPU, the Battery Accessory must be installed
within 20 minutes after removing the power supply module (a good battery
must be installed in the power supply and/or AC or DC power must have
been applied to the power supply before removing the power supply).

When the Battery Accessory is removed, a power supply module with a good battery must be installed and/or AC
or DC power applied within 20 minutes to avoid losing CPU data.

Battery Accessory Installation

1. Insert the plug on the end of the battery cable into the 2-pin connector on the Battery Accessory board. The
battery plug is normally not plugged into the accessory connector. This prevents accidental discharge of the
battery during storage and handling.

2. Align the backplane connector on the Battery Accessory board with the power supply connector on the
baseplate backplane. Push the Battery Accessory board toward the baseplate until it is fully seated.

3. If the baseplate is to be shipped with the Battery Accessory board installed, ensure that the board is held in
place by packing material or cable ties. The cable ties can be installed in holes provided on both ends of the
accessory board and secured to the backplane.

Page 3–14 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

Battery life for a new battery installed in a backplane is about two years.

ÎÎ a45076

Î ÎÎ
Î POWER
SUPPLY
CONNECTOR

ÎÎ
BATTERY
PLUG

ÎÎ

Figure 3.12 – Battery Accessory Installation

6.9.2. Battery Installation – PCM, ADC

When installing a new or replacement PCM or ADC module that has a battery already mounted, and you do not
wish to retain the contents of the battery–backed RAM memory, before installing the module on the baseplate,
disconnect the battery cable connector from its receptacle for at least 10 minutes. This will discharge the battery
circuit and cause all of the memory contents to be lost. This will ensure that upon power–up, the memory will
appear to the software to be be unused (cleared) memory.

Note

Before installing the PCM or ADC module be sure to connect the battery
connector to a receptacle on the board after you have installed the module
following the above installation procedures.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–15
Installation Procedures

6.10. Module Location in Baseplates

The modules for your system can now be installed in their proper slots in the CPU baseplate and I/O expansion
baseplate(s) (Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 and Model 352 only). Only the Power Supply and CPU modules
must reside in specific slots – as shown in the following illustration. When a PCM, CMM, ADC or other specialized
option module is included in a Model 331, Model 341, Model 351 or Model 352 system, it must reside in the CPU
baseplate with the CPU since certain backplane signals are only found on the CPU baseplate backplane. The
discrete and analog I/O modules and option (not specialized) modules can be installed in any available slot in any
baseplate.

Caution

Before installing modules in baseplates, ensure that the total load

requirements of the modules for each baseplate do not exceed the total
current supplied by the baseplate power supply. If this caution is not
followed, erratic system operation may result.

Page 3–16 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

6.10.1. Number of Modules Per Alspa C80–35 PLC System

The following table lists the maximum number of each type of I/O and option modules that can be installed in an
Alspa C80–35 PLC system. The number of modules that can be installed in a system depends on several factors,
including available references for each CPU model, the current rating for each module to be installed in the system
and other installed modules. Before installing modules in a baseplate, verify that the total current rating of all of
those modules does not exceed the power rating of the power supply.

Table 3.1 – Maximum Number of Modules Per System

Module Type Model 311/313/323 Model 331/341 Model 351/352
Input and Output, Discrete 5 (5-slot baseplate) 49 (331/341) 49
10 (10-slot baseplate)
Input Module, Analog, 4-Channel 5 (5-slot baseplate) 40 64
8 (10-slot baseplate)
Input Module, Analog, 16-Channel 4 8 (Model 331) 51
12 (Model 341)
Output Module (Voltage), Analog, 2-Channel 5 (5-slot baseplate) 16 (Model 331) 48
6 (10-slot baseplate) 30 (Model 341)
Output Module (Current), Analog, 2-Channel 3 (5-slot baseplate) 15 (Model 331) 24
3 (10-slot baseplate) 15 (Model 341)
Output Module, Analog, 8-Channel 4 8 (Model 331) 79 (Model 351/352)
32 (Model 341)
Combination Input/Output Module, Analog 5 (5-slot baseplate) 21 (Model 331/341) 79 (Model 351/352)
4-Ch In/2-Ch Out 10 (10-slot baseplate)
Programmable Coprocessor Module n/a 4 4
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module n/a 4 4
Communications Control Module n/a 9 9
NCM Communications Module * 1 1 1
Enhanced NCM+ Communications Module * 2 2 2
High Speed Counter 4 (5/10-slot baseplate) 8 (Model 331) 79
32 (Model 341)
I/O Processor Module 2 (5-slot baseplate) 8 (Model 331) 64
4 (10-slot baseplate) 16 (Model 341)
N80 Bus Controller 8 8 8
Ethernet Interface Module Refer to ALS 52512 Alspa C80–35 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications
User’s Manual for details.
Axis Positioning Module Refer to ALS 52403 Axis Positioning Module (APM) for Alspa C80–35
PLC Standard Mode User’s Manual or ALS 52607 Axis Positioning
Module (APM) for Alspa C80–35 PLC – Follower Mode User’s Manual for
details.
* The Enhanced NCM+ Communications Module and the NCM Communications Module cannot be installed in the same PLC
baseplate, however, both modules can be present on the same bus.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–17
Installation Procedures

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ a43086

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DISCRETE INPUT/OUTPUT
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
MODEL 311/313 HIGH SPEED COUNTER

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I/O PROCESSOR
(5–SLOT) N80 COMMUNICATIONS

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ENHANCED N80 COMM.
AXIS POSITIONING

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
N80 BUS CONTROLLER
ETHERNET INTERFACE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DISCRETE INPUT/OUTPUT
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MODEL 313 HIGH SPEED COUNTER
I/O PROCESSOR
(10–SLOT) N80 COMMUNICATIONS

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ENHANCED N80 COMM.
AXIS POSITIONING

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
N80 BUS CONTROLLER
ETHERNET INTERFACE

DISCRETE INPUT/OUTPUT

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
MODEL 331/341 HIGH SPEED COUNTER
C

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I/O PROCESSOR
OR 351/352 N80 COMMUNICATIONS P
CPU (5–SLOT) ENHANCED N80 COMM.
U

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
AXIS POSITIONING
PCM / ADC / CMM

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
N80 BUS CONTROLLER
ETHERNET INTERFACE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DISCRETE INPUT/OUTPUT
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
MODEL 331/341 HIGH SPEED COUNTER

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
OR 351/352 I/O PROCESSOR C
N80 COMMUNICATIONS P

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CPU (10–SLOT) ENHANCED N80 COMM. U
AXIS POSITIONING

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PCM / ADC / CMM
N80 BUS CONTROLLER
ETHERNET INTERFACE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DISCRETE INPUT/OUTPUT
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MODEL 331/341 HIGH SPEED COUNTER
I/O PROCESSOR

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
OR 351/352 N80 COMMUNICATIONS
EXPANSION ENHANCED N80 COMM.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
AXIS POSITIONING
(5–SLOT) N80 BUS CONTROLLER
ETHERNET INTERFACE

( UP TO 4 EXPANSION BASEPLATES PER SYSTEM )

DISCRETE INPUT/OUTPUT
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MODEL 331/341 HIGH SPEED COUNTER
I/O PROCESSOR
OR 351/352 N80 COMMUNICATIONS

ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
EXPANSION ENHANCED N80 COMM.
AXIS POSITIONING
(10–SLOT)

ÎÎÎ
N80 BUS CONTROLLER
ETHERNET INTERFACE

Figure 3.13 – Valid Location of Modules in Baseplates

Page 3–18 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

Note

Configuration Files created by the Configuration Package on either Alspa P8

software or the Hand–Held Programmer must match the physical
configuration of the modules. If they do not match, the PLC may not operate
as expected. If a mismatch is detected, one or more faults will be logged in the
PLC Fault Table.

6.10.2. Power Supply

The same type of power supply is used in the CPU, expansion and remote baseplates. This power supply can be
the Standard AC/DC source input, the High Capacity AC/DC source input or the DC only source input supply. After
unpacking the power supply, install it in the leftmost slot in a baseplate. The power supply has a single terminal
board located on the left side of the faceplate for field wiring connections. This terminal board and its connections
are shown below for each power supply.

a47054
IC693PWR324 IC693PWR325 a47055

INPUT + INPUT
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS 100-240 VAC
50/60 HZ 90VA
FOR 24/48 VDC
FOR 50 WATT
DC POWER
AC/DC POWER 125 VDC, 50W
SOURCE
SOURCE

INTERNAL
POWER +
+ INTERNAL
SOURCE 24 VDC 24 VDC
FOR MODULES OUTPUT POWER SOURCE OUTPUT

REQUIRING
0.8A MAX. FOR MODULES –
0.8A MAX.

24VDC REQUIRING 24VDC

CE693PWR330 a47086
INPUT

100-240 VAC
50/60 HZ 90VA

125VDC, 50W
CONNECTIONS FOR
AC/DC POWER SOURCE

INTERNAL POWER +
SOURCE FOR 24 VDC
MODULES REQUIRING OUTPUT
24VDC 0.8A MAX.

High Capacity AC/DC Supply

Figure 3.14 – Power Supply Terminal Board and Connections

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–19
Installation Procedures

Power Supply vs. Temperature Considerations: The normal load rating of the power supply at 60°C (140°F)
is 100% when the PLC is mounted in its normal position on a pannel. Power supply load ratings with the PLC laying
horizontal on a surface, that is the baseplate (backplane) flat on a surface are:
D temperature at 25_C (77_F) – full load,
D temperature at 60_C (140_F) – 50% of full load.

6.11. AC Power Source Connections

6.11.1. Field Wiring Connections to Standard and High Capacity AC/DC Power
Supplies

Both Standard (IC693PWR324) and High Capacity (CE693PWR330) AC/DC power supplies have six terminals
for users connections. These connections are described below.

Provide the required AC power source for your system. The power supply terminal board will accept one 2.08 mm2
(AWG 14) or two 1.31 mm2 (AWG 16) copper 75°C (167°F) wires. Each terminal can accept solid or stranded
wires, but the wires in any given terminal should be the same type. The suggested torque for the power supply
terminal board is 1.36 Nm (12 in–lbs). Open the door protecting the terminal board and make the following
connections from the AC power source, and ground connections (system grounding requirements are described
in detail later in this chapter).

D Provide an AC power source for your system. Since the power supply is a wide range supply, it can operate
from an AC power source within the range of 100 VAC to 240 VAC at 50/60 Hz. The 100 VAC supply can
range from 90 to 132 VAC, and the 240 VAC supply can range from 180 to 264 VAC. No jumper is required
for selection of power source voltage.

D Connect the hot (L1, black wire) and neutral (N, white wire) for 100 VAC nominal input or L1 and L2, for
240 VAC nominal input, of a three wire AC power cord to the upper two terminals on the terminal board and
the safety ground wire (green wire) to the center ground terminal. The power cord plug should have the proper
pin configuration for either 100 VAC or 240 VAC.

Page 3–20 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

6.11.2. Overvoltage Protection Devices

The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal
board. This pin is normally connected to frame ground (pin 3) with the supplied jumper strap which is installed
at the factory. If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream, this feature can be disabled by
leaving pin 4 unconnected by removing the jumper strap.

If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage protection must be disabled during the test by removing the
terminal board strap. Re-enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap.

a47086

3 Frame Ground
Jumper Strap Connects
Overvoltage Protection
Devices to Frame Ground
4

Screw Terminals
on Terminal Board

Figure 3.15 – Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap

After all connections to the terminal board have been completed, the protective cover plate should be carefully
reinstalled.

WARNING
1. If the same AC power source is used to provide AC power to other
baseplates in an Alspa C80–35 PLC System, ensure that all AC input
connections are identical at each rack. Do not cross Line 1 (L1) and Line
2 (L2). A resulting difference in potential can injure personnel or cause
damage to equipment. Each baseplate must be connected to a common
ground.
2. Ensure that the protective cover is installed over all terminal boards.
During normal operation with an AC power source either 120 VAC or 240
VAC is present on the AC Power Supply. The cover protects against
accidental shock hazard which could cause severe or fatal injury to the
operator or maintenance personnel.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–21
Installation Procedures

6.12. Power Supply Line Filter for AC Power Supply

The Alspa C80–35 PLC and its associated hardware components have been designed for use in industrial
applications which are, in general, exempted from American FCC requirements. The AC power supply may not
comply with FCC requirements in non–industrial applications for conducted EMI on AC power lines. In a situation
where it is desired to satisfy the FCC requirements for non–industrial applications, a line filter should be used in
series with the AC power line.

6.13. DC Power Source Connections

Provide the required DC power source for your system. This can be from 18 to 56 VDC for the 24/48 VDC supply
or 100 to 150 VDC for the 125 VDC supply. Connect the + and – wires from the power source to the top two
protected terminals on the terminal board (+ to the top terminal, – to the second terminal). Refer to the discussion
on System Grounding Procedures below for proper grounding methods.

+24 VDC Output

As with the AC power supply, the bottom two terminals provide connections to the internally supplied isolated
24 volt DC output that can be used to provide power for input circuits (within power limitations of the supply).

WARNING
If the same DC power source is used to provide DC power to other
baseplates in an Alspa C80–35 PLC System, ensure that all DC input
connections are identical at each rack. Do not cross the Positive (+) and
Negative (–) lines. A resulting difference in potential can injure personnel
or cause damage to equipment. Each baseplate must be connected to a
common ground.

Page 3–22 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

7. SYSTEM GROUNDING PROCEDURES

All components of a programmable logic control system and the devices it is controlling must be properly
grounded. This is particularly important for the following reasons.

D A low resistance path from all parts of a system to earth minimizes exposure to shock in the event of short
circuits or equipment malfunction.

D The Alspa C80–35 PLC system requires proper grounding for correct operation.

The importance of a properly grounded system cannot be over emphasized.

7.1. Ground Conductors

D Ground conductors should be connected in a tree fashion with branches routed to a central earth ground point.
This ensures that no ground conductor carries current from any other branch. This method is shown in the
following figure.

D Ground conductors should be as short and as large in size as possible. Braided straps or ground cables (typically
green insulation with a yellow tracer – 3.3 mm2 (AWG #12) or larger) can be used to minimize resistance.
Conductors must always be large enough to carry the maximum short circuit current of the path being
considered.

a43059
Alspa C80–35 MOTOR DRIVES MACHINERY
PLC CABINET AND
RACK OTHER
ELECTRICAL
CONTROL
PROGRAMMING RACK EQUIPMENT
DEVICE

NOTE
SIGNAL AND POWER
EARTH CENTRAL CONNECTIONS
GROUND GROUND POINT ARE NOT SHOWN

Figure 3.16 – Recommended System Grounding

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–23
Installation Procedures

7.2. Alspa C80–35 PLC Equipment Grounding

Equipment grounding recommendations and procedures are listed below. These grounding procedures must be
properly followed for safe operation of your Alspa C80–35 PLC system.

7.2.1. Safety and Reference Ground

The metal back of the baseplate is ground, when properly installed. Safety and Reference ground connections
should be made from one of the mounting tabs to earth ground using a minimum 3.3 mm2 (AWG 12) wire and a
ring terminal. Use of a nut and star washer for each wire on the ground connection lug is recommended to ensure
adequate grounding.

WARNING
The baseplate must be grounded to minimize electrical shock hazard
which may result in severe personal injury.

All baseplates grouped together in an Alspa C80–35 PLC system must have a common ground connection. This
is especially important for baseplates that are not mounted in the same control cabinet.

The best way to provide proper ground connections is to ensure that the Alspa C80–35 PLC baseplate metal frame
is directly connected to the control panel in which the baseplate or baseplates are mounted. This can be
accomplished by connecting a ground strap from one of the ground lugs on either side of the baseplate to the control
panel or cabinet following applicable electrical safety codes.

7.2.2. Shield Ground

The aluminum baseplate is used for module shield grounding. Some Model 35 modules have a connection to the
baseplate when the module is fully inserted. Shield connections to the user terminal connector on the module are
routed to the baseplate through conductors on the module.

7.2.3. Programming Device Grounding

For proper operation, the programmer for Alspa P8 Software (PC or compatible computer) must have a ground
connection in common with the CPU baseplate. Normally, this common ground connection is provided by ensuring
that the programmer’s power cord is connected to the same power source (with the same ground reference point)
as the baseplate.

Page 3–24 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

8. POWER SUPPLY LOAD CAPACITY

The load capacity of the power supply in an Alspa C80–35 PLC baseplate is the sum of the internal loads placed
on it by all of the hardware components in the baseplate (backplane, modules, etc.). The power output of the power
supply voltages is 30 watts, maximum. The load required for each module is expressed in milliamperes for each
voltage. You must ensure that the total current for any one module does not exceed the rating for that voltage and
that the sum of all loads does not exceed the maximum rating for the power supply. Use of the Isolated +24 Volt
power supply output is optional; however, this output can be used to drive a limited number of input devices.

9. LOAD REQUIREMENTS FOR HARDWARE COMPONENTS

Table 3.2 shows the DC load required by each module and hardware component. All ratings are in milliamps. Input
and Output module current ratings are with all inputs or outputs on. Three voltages are listed in the table:

D +5 VDC provides primary power to operate most internal circuits,

D +24 VDC Relay Power provides power for circuits that drive the relays on Relay modules,
D +24 VDC Isolated provides power to operate a number of input circuits (input modules only).

Note that the figures listed in the table are maximum requirements, not typical.

Table 3.2 – Load Requirements (mA)

Catalog +24 VDC +24 VDC
Number Description +5 Relay Power Isolated
VDC
CF693MDL100 48 VDC Pos/neg Logic, FAST, 16 Point Input 80 – –
IC693ACC300 Input Simulator, 8/16 Points 120 – –
IC693ACC307 Expansion Bus Terminator Plug 72 – –
IC690ACC900 RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter 170 – –
IC690ACC901 RS–422 (SNP) to RS–232, Miniconverter kit
(version B, or later) 100 – –
(Version A) 150 – –
IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module 400 – –
IC693ALG220 Analog Input, Voltage 27 – 98
IC693ALG221 Analog Input, Current 30 – 110
IC693ALG222 Analog Input Voltage High Density (16 Channel) 112 41
IC693ALG223 Analog Input, Current, High Density (16 Channel) 120 – –
IC693ALG390 Analog Output, Voltage 32 – 120
IC693ALG391 Analog Output, Current 30 – 215
IC693ALG392 Analog Current/Voltage Output, 8 Channel 110 – –
IC693ALG442 Analog Current/Voltage Combination 4 Ch In/2 Ch Out 95 129
IC693APU300 High Speed Counter 250 – –
IC693APU301 Axis Positioning Module, 1–Axis 800 – –
IC693APU302 Axis Positionning Module, 2–Axis 800 – –
IC693APU305 I/O Processor Module 360 – –

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–25
Installation Procedures

Table 3.2 – Load Requirements (mA), continued

Catalog +24 VDC +24 VDC
Number Description +5 Relay Power Isolated
VDC
IC693MDL655 24 VDC Pos/Neg, 32 Point Input 195 – 224
IC693MDL730 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 2A, 8 Point Output 55 – –
IC693MDL731 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 2A, 8 Point Output 55 – –
IC693MDL732 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 0.5A, 8 Point Output 50 – –
IC693MDL733 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 0.5A, 8 Point Output 50 – –
IC693MDL734 125 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 6 Point Output 90 – –
IC693MDL740 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 0.5A, 16 Point Output 110 – –
IC693MDL741 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 0.5A, 16 Point Output 110 – –
IC693MDL742 12/24 VDC Pos. Logic ESCP, 1A, 16Point Output 130 – –
IC693BEM334 N80 Bus Controller 300 – –
IC693CHS391 10–slot CPU Baseplate (Model 331/341/351) 250 – –
IC693CHS392 10–slot Expansion Baseplate (Model 331/341/351) 150 – –
IC693CHS393 10–slot Remote Baseplate (Model 331/341/351) 460 – –
IC693CHS397 5–slot CPU Baseplate (Model 331/341/351) 270 – –
IC693CHS398 5–slot Expansion Baseplate (Model 331/341/351) 170 – –
IC693CHS399 5–slot Remote Baseplate (Model 331/341/351) 480 – –
IC693CMM304 N80 Communications Module for Alspa C80–35 200 – –
IC693CMM305 Enhanced N80 Communications Module for Alspa C80–35 300 – –
IC693CMM311 Communications Control Module 400 – –
IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module 750 – –
IC693CPU311 Alspa C80–35 5–Slot Baseplate 410 – –
IC693CPU313 Alspa C80–35 5–Slot Baseplate 430 – –
IC693CPU321 Alspa C80–35 10–Slot Baseplate 410 – –
IC693CPU323 Alspa C80–35 10–Slot Baseplate 430 – –
IC693CPU331 CPU (Model 331) 350 – –
IC693CPU341 CPU (Model 341) 490 – –
IC693CPU351 CPU (Model 351) 890* – –
IC693CPU352 CPU (Model 352) 910* – –
IC693MDL230 120 VAC Isolated, 8 Point Input 60 – –
IC693MDL231 240 VAC Isolated, 8 Point Input 60 – –
IC693MDL240 120 VAC, 16 Point Input 90 – –
IC693MDL241 24 VAC/DC Pos/Neg logic, 16 Point 80 – 125
* Note that the CPU 351 and CPU 352 do not support the A version (IC690ACC901A) of the miniconverter.

Page 3–26 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

Table 3.2 – Load Requirements (mA), continued

Catalog +24 VDC +24 VDC
Number Description +5 Relay Power Isolated
VDC
IC693MDL310 120 VAC, 0.5A, 12 Point Output 210 – –
IC693MDL330 120/240 VAC, 1A, 8 Point Output 160 – –
IC693MDL340 120 VAC, 0.5A, 16 Point Output 315 – –
IC693MDL390 120/240 VAC Isolated, 2A, 5 Point Output 110 – –
IC693MDL632 125 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 8 Point Input 40 – –
IC693MDL634 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 8 Point Input 80 – 125
IC693MDL645 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 16 Point Input 80 – 125
IC693MDL646 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, FAST, 16 Point Input 80 – 125
IC693MDL654 5/12 VDC (TTL) Pos/Neg Logic, 32 Point 195/ – –
440**
IC693MDL752 5/24 VDC (TTL) Negative Logic, 0.5A, 32 Point 260 – –
IC693MDL753 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 0.5A, 32 Point Output 260 – –
IC693MDL930 Relay, N.O., 4A Isolated, 8 Point Output 6 70 –
IC693MDL931 Relay, N.C. and Form C, 8A Isolated, 8 Point Out 6 110 –
IC693MDL940 Relay, N.O., 2A, 16 Point Output 7 135 –
IC693MAR590 120 VAC Input, relay Output, 8 in/8 Out 80 70 –
IC693MDR390 24 VDC Input, Relay Output, 8 In/8 Out 80 70 –
IC693PCM301 Programmable Coprocessor Module, 85K 425 – –
IC693PCM311 Programmable Coprocessor Module, 380K 400 – –
IC693PRG301 Hand–Held Programmer 170 – –
n/a Expansion Bus Termination Pack 72 – –

** Refer to module specifications in ALS 52118 Alspa C80–35 PLC I/O Module Specifications for more details.

Sample Calculations for Power Supply Loads

Following are examples of calculations for determining the total load placed on an Alspa C80–35 PLC power
supply by the Alspa C80–35 PLC hardware. All current figures are expressed in milliamps. The total current figures
are converted to watts. Note that although each output is rated at 15 or 20 watts (with the exception that the +5VDC
output for the High Capacity power supply is rated at 30 watts), the total combined output can be no more than
30 watts.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–27
Installation Procedures

Example 1: Alspa C80–35, Model 313 (10–slot baseplate)

+5V +24V Isolated +24V Relay
Backplane (Baseplate/CPU) 410
Hand–Held Programmer 170
Analog Output 32 120
Analog Input 27 98
High Speed Counter 190
24 VDC Input (16 points) 5 120
24 VDC Input (16 points) 5 120
24 VDC Output (16 points) 110
120 VAC Input (16 points) 90
120 VAC Output (12 points) 210
Relay Output (16 points) 7 135
Relay Output (8 points) 6 70
Totals (mA) 1261 458 205
(W) 6.31 10.99 4.92
Total Watts = 22.22

Example 2: Alspa C80–35, Model 331 (10–slot baseplate)

+5V +24V Isolated +24V Relay
Backplane (Baseplate) 250
Expansion Bus Terminator 72
Model 331 CPU 350
Hand–Held Programmer 170
Programmable Coprocessor 425
Analog Output 32 120
Analog Input 27 98
High Speed Counter 190
24 VDC Input (16 points) 5 120
24 VDC Output (16 points) 110
120 VAC Input (16 points) 90
120 VAC Output (12 points) 210
Relay Output (16 points) 7 135
Totals (mA) 1938 338 135
(W) 9.69 8.11 3.24
Total Watts = 21.04

Page 3–28 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

10. CABLE REQUIREMENTS

You will need several different types of cables when installing your Alspa C80–35 PLC System. These cables are
listed below along with a brief description of each type. A more detailed description of each type of cable can be
found on the following pages.

1. I/O bus expansion cables (Model 331/341/351 only). Available in five lengths:
D IC693CBL300 - 1 meter (3 feet), continuous shield,
D IC693CBL301 - 2 meters (6 feet), continuous shield,
D IC693CBL302 - 15 meters (50 feet), continuous shield,
D IC693CBL312 - 0.15 meters (0.5 feet ), continuous shield,
D IC693CBL313 - 7.5 meters (25 feet ), continuous shield,
D All of these cables are made with a continuous, or 100 % shield.
D Note that the 1 meter cable (IC693CBL300) can be used in a remote expansion system as a ”Y” adapter
cable for remote baseplates.
D The 15–meter cable (IC693CBL302) has I/O bus termination resistors built into one end (I/O bus
termination plug, IC693ACC307 is not required with this cable). This cable can be used when only
one expansion baseplate is to be attached to the CPU since the total distance of the local expansion
link is 15 meters (50 feet).
D If you are including remote baseplates in your PLC system, with cables lengths greater than 15 meters
(50 feet), you will need to build remote expansion cables having the required lengths for your system
(up to 213 meters (700 feet)). Detailed Information on building cables for use with a remote expansion
system can be found later in this Chapter (see Building Remote Cables).

2. Hand–Held Programmer cable. This cable, IC693CBL303 – 2 meters (6 feet) in length, has two uses in an
Alspa C80–35 PLC system. First, it is used to connect the Hand–Held Programmer to the 15–pin serial port
connector on the power supply. Second, it can be used to connect the RS–422/RS–485 Alspa C80–35 CPU
serial port on the Alspa C80–35 power supply to the RS–422/RS–485 port connector on the RS–422/RS–485
Converter.

3. PCM to Programmer cables. Three prewired cables (3 meters (10 feet) long) are available which provide
RS–232 signal connections between the RS–232 port on a PCM, CMM, or ADC and a serial port on the
programmer. These cables can also be used for connecting the serial port of these modules to the RS–232
connector on the RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter.
D IC690CBL701 – connects to a PC–XT or compatible,
D IC690CBL702 – connects to a PC–AT or compatible,
D IC690CBL705 – connects to a PS/2 or compatible.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–29
Installation Procedures

4. ”Y” cables (two versions) – 0.3 meter (1 foot). These cables connect to the serial port connector on option
modules to separate the two logical ports available at a single physical connector. IC693CBL305 is used with
PCM301/311, CMM311 and ADC311.

5. Cables for 32–point I/O modules, connecting the module to field devices, must be built by the user as required
for individual applications. An accessory kit containing the required 24–pin connectors is available from
Cegelec with enough components to assemble ten connectors. Catalog numbers for these connectors are
IC693ACC316 (Solder Eyelet Type), IC693ACC317 (Crimp Type), IC693ACC318 (Ribbon or IDC Type).

6. Cables for 32–point modules (with two 24–pin connectors). The I/O Interface cable (IC693CBL315) can be
used to connect I/O devices to the 24–pin connectors mounted on the applicable high–density modules (see
ALS 52118 Alspa C80–35 PLC I/O Module Specifications for detailed information). Two of these cables are
required per module.

7. I/O cable, IC693CBL311, IC693CBL317, IC693CBL320 for connecting a 24–pin connector on the Axis
Positioning Module to an external terminal block. Two of these connectors are required.

10.1. I/O Bus Expansion Cables

The I/O bus expansion cables (IC693CBL300, 301, 312, 313) used with the Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331, 341,
and 351 expansion system have a single male 25-pin D connector on one end and two (one male, one female) 25-pin
D connectors on the other end as shown in the detailed illustration below (A). The 15 meters (50 feet)
IC693CBL302 cable has a single male connector on the CPU baseplate end and a single terminal male connector
on the expansion baseplate end (B). The 1 meter (3 feet) cable IC693CBL300 can also be used as the Y adapter
cable in a remote expansion system. To connect one of these cables in an expansion system:

D Connect the single male connector to the 25–pin female connector on the right side of the CPU baseplate.

D Connect the male connector on the dual connector end of the cable to the 25–pin female connector on the first
expansion baseplate.

D Connect the unused 25–pin female connector on the dual connector end of the cable to either the single male
connector of a second I/O bus expansion cable to continue the I/O bus expansion chain, or to an I/O bus
Terminator plug if this is the last cable in the expansion chain.

Page 3–30 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

FEMALE
CONNECTOR a43853

Î Î
Î Î Î
A
Î ÎÎ Î
Î ÎÎÎ 1 METER
Î
Î
CABLE

MALE MALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR

Î
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
B
Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ15–METER
CABLE

MALE FEMALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR

Figure 3.17 – Detail of I/O Expansion Cables

Note

1. The maximum number of cables that can be included in a local I/O

expansion system is seven and the total maximum length of all cables in a
local I/O expansion system is 15 meters (50 feet). Failure to observe the
maximum cable length could result in erratic operation of the PLC system.
2. A CPU 351 or CPU 352 PLC system supports a maximum of seven I/O
expansion cables. A CPU 331 and 341 PLC system supports a maximum
of four I/O expansion cables.
3. The 15 meters (50 foot) I/O bus expansion cable (IC693CBL302), which
has a male connector on each end, has the I/O bus terminating resistors built
into the end connector on the cable. If this cable is used do not install the
I/O Bus Terminator plug (IC693ACC307) on the connector in the last
baseplate.

Caution

I/O Expansion cables should NOT be connected or disconnected with

power applied to the I/O expansion baseplate(s). Unexpected PLC
operation may result.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–31
Installation Procedures

Local I/O Expansion System Connections

The following figure shows how the I/O bus expansion cable is installed in a local I/O expansion system.

ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
PC CPU BASEPLATE a47057

ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ SERIAL C

ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î ÎÎ
Î
P
U NOTE

ÎÎÎÎÎ TOTAL MAXIMUM

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DISTANCE FROM
DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION MAIN BASEPLATE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î TO LAST EXPANSION

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
EXPANSION BASEPLATE BASEPLATE IS
15 METERS (50 FEET)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ I/O EXPANSION CABLES
DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION IC693CBL300 1 METER (3 FEET)

ÎÎ
IC693CBL301 2 METERS (6 FEET)
EXPANSION BASEPLATE IC693CBL302 15 METERS (50 FEET)

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ IC693CBL312, 0.15 METER (0.5 FEET)

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
IC693CBL313, 7.5 METERS (25 FEET)
* See NOTE

Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION

Î Î
NOTE
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
Each signal pair on the I/O bus must be

ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
terminated at the end of the I/O bus
with120 ohm resistors. This termina-

ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
tion can be done with the I/O Bus Termi-
nator Plug, by using the 15 meter (50
foot) cable with built-in terminating
resistors, or by building a custom cable
with the resistors installed in the con-
nector at the endof the bus. DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION

For more information, see Appendix G.

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
I/O BUS

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
TERMINATOR
PLUG

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
IC693ACC307

DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION

Figure 3.18 – Example of connecting Baseplates in a Local Expansion System

Page 3–32 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

10.2. Remote and Expansion System Cable Connections

The following figure shows cable connections in a typical remote expansion system. The System, as shown,
includes both remote and expansion baseplates. A remote system can have up to four remote baseplates, (up to
seven baseplates in a CPU 351 or 352 system) or a combination of remote and expansion baseplates as long as the
distance and cable requirements are followed.

CPU BASEPLATE a44965

CPU
C
BASEPLATE P
IC693CHS391/397 U

EXPANSION DISCRETE/ANALOG I/O/OPTION/

INTELLIGENT OPTION NOTE
BASEPLATE
EXPANSION BASEPLATE AVAILABLE
IC693CHS392/398
CABLE
MAXIMUM DISTANCE IC693CBL300
FROM CPU = 15 METERS CAN BE USED
(50 FEET)
FOR ”Y”
CONNECTIONS
DISCRETE/ANALOG I/O

REMOTE BASEPLATE
REMOTE
BASEPLATE
IC693CHS393/399

DISCRETE/ANALOG I/O

Î
REMOTE BASEPLATE
REMOTE
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
BASEPLATE
IC693CHS393/399

DISCRETE/ANALOG I/O
REMOTE
BASEPLATE
REMOTE BASEPLATE
IC693CHS393/399 I/O BUS
MAXIMUM DISTANCE TERMINATOR
FROM CPU = 213 METERS PLUG
(700 FEET) IC693ACC307

DISCRETE/ANALOG I/O

Figure 3.19 – Example of Connecting Baseplates in a Remote Expansion System

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–33
Installation Procedures

10.2.1. Building Remote Cables

The following information is provided to help you build the cables required when installing a system that requires
remote baseplates, and the distances between baseplates are not easily adapted to purchased cables. The total
length of the remote link depends on the type of cable that you use, with the maximum total length being 213 meters
(700 feet) when Belden type 8107 cable is used. Use of other types of cable may reduce the total length of the
remote link.

The maximum cable length in the figure is the total number of meters from the CPU baseplate to the last baseplate
in the system. The absolute maximum cable lengths are:

D expansion baseplates = 15 meters (50 feet),

D remote baseplates = 213 meters (700 feet).

Specifications for connectors and recommended cable type for building cables for a remote I/O expansion link are
listed in the following table.

Table 3.3 – Connector/Cable Specifications for a Remote Link

Item Description*
Cable: Belden 8107:
Computer cable, overall foil/braid shield, twisted–pair
30 volt/80_C (176_F)
0.2 mm2 (24 AWG) tinned copper, 7 x 32 stranding
Velocity of propagation = 70% **
Nominal impedance = 100Ω **
25 Pin Male Connector: Crimp – Plug = Amp 207464–1; Pin = Amp 66506–9
Solder – Plug = Amp 747912–2
25 Pin Female Connector: Crimp – Receptacle = Amp 207463–2; Pin = Amp 66504–9
Solder – Receptacle = Amp 747913–2
Connector Shell: Kit - Amp 745833-5
Metal-Plated Plastic (Plastic with Nickel over Copper)
Crimp Ring - AMP 745508-1, Split Ring Ferrules
** = Critical Information
* Vendor part numbers listed for user assembled cables are provided for reference only and do not suggest or imply that they are
preferred. Any part that meets the same specification can be used.

Page 3–34 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

10.2.2. Expansion Port Pin Assignments

The following table lists the expansion port pin assignments which you will need when building remote cables.
Note that all connections between cables are point–to point, i.e., pin 2 of one end to pin 2 of the opposite end, pin
3 to pin 3, etc. (See wiring diagrams for pin 1 connections.)

Table 3.4 – Expansion Port Pin Assignments

Pin Number Signal Name Function
16 DIODT I/O Serial Data Positive
17 DIODT/ I/O Serial Data Negative
24 DIOCLK I/O Serial Clock Positive
25 DIOCLK/ I/O Serial Clock Negative
20 DRSEL Remote Select Positive
21 DRSEL/ Remote Select Negative
12 DRPERR Parity Error Positive
13 DRPERR/ Parity Error Negative
8 DRMRUN Remote Run Positive
9 DRMRUN/ Remote Run Negative
2 DFRAME Cycle Frame Positive
3 DFRAME/ Cycle Frame Negative
1 FGND Frame Ground
7 0V Logic Ground

10.2.3. Shield Treatment

All Cegelec factory made cables are made with a continuous, or 100% shield. This means that the braided cable
shield is connected to the metal shell of the connector around the entire perimeter of the connector. This provides
a low impedance path to frame ground for any noise energy that is coupled onto the cable shield.

For custom length cables made per Figure 3.21, the best noise immunity is achieved when using a metallized
connector cover that makes contact with the cable’s braided and foil shielding and with the connector shell on the
terminating end.

Note

It is not sufficient to only solder the drain wire to the connector shell. It is
required that the cable’s shield be continuous across the entire length of the
cable, including at the terminations. Figure 3.20 shows the recommended
method for folding the braided shield back before inserting the cable into a
metallized cover.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–35
Installation Procedures

a45524

Foil & Braid

(to be folded back
over ferrule and Split–Ring Cable
ground wire) Ferrule Jacket

Conductors Ground Wire

Attach to Pin 1 for custom length cables
OR
Fold back for custom “Y” cables. *
* See text below for description of when to attach drain wire to pin 1.

Figure 3.20 – How to use Split-Ring Ferrules for Foil and Braided Cable Shield

For typical industrial applications, all expansion and remote baseplate cables can be made with plastic shell covers
and should be wired as shown in Figure 3.24. In either case, pin 1 should be wired into both ends of the custom
length cable and the recommendations listed below should be followed for the “Y” cables treatment in the remote
(IC693CHS393/399) baseplates.

When using 100% shielded cables all local (CPU and expansion) baseplates in the system must be solidly
referenced to the same ground point or a potential difference between baseplates could disturb signal transmission.

In remote baseplates, IC693CHS393E (and earlier) and IC693CHS399D (and earlier), it is necessary to remove
pin 1 of the mating cable where the cable plugs into the baseplate. This means that when using a factory made “Y”
cable, IC693CBL300, you must break pin 1 out of the male end where it plugs into the remote baseplate before
using it with one of these baseplates. Custom built “Y” cables for these baseplates should be built using
Figure 3.22.

Remote baseplates IC693CHS393F (and later) and IC693CHS399E (and later) have a change inside the baseplate
which alleviates the need to remove pin 1 from the mating cable. When using factory made “Y” cable with these
baseplates, it is not necessary to remove pin 1 from the cable. Custom built “Y” cables for these baseplates can
be made using either Figure 3.22 or Figure 3.23. Figure 3.23 shows how the factory made “Y” cable are made.

By removing pin 1 in custom built “Y” cables made for the earlier versions of remote baseplates, the pin 7 (0V)
signal reference originates in the main (CPU) baseplate. In these earlier versions of the remote baseplates, pin 1
was tied to pin 7 (0V) and also AC coupled to the remote frame ground. When using these baseplates in
combination with the 100% shielded “Y” cables, the pin 7 (0V) reference would be improperly DC coupled to the
remote frame ground through the D-subminiature connector shell, which is DC coupled to the remote frame
ground.

In the remote baseplates IC693CHS393F (and later) and IC693CHS399E (and later), the pin 1 shield signal is DC
coupled to the remote frame ground and not attached to pin 7 (0V). This allows the best noise immunity by
providing a good continuous cable shield and still allows the pin 7 (0V) signal reference to originate in the CPU
baseplate without the need for removing pin 1 in any factory or custom built cable. The D-subminiature connector
shell is still DC coupled to the remote frame ground.

Page 3–36 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

TWISTED PAIRS, SHIELDED a45525

PIN (7 PAIRS) PIN

DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/ ALSPA
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK C80–35
DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/ BASEPLATE
DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL EXPANSION
”Y”
DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/ PORT
CABLE
DPRERR 12 12 DPRERR
SINGLE
DPRERR/ 13 13 DPRERR/ OR
CONNECTOR
END DRMRUN 8 8 DRMRUN
DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/ ”Y”
DPFRAME 2 2 DPFRAME CABLE
DOUBLE
DPFRAME/ 3 3 DPFRAME/
CONNECTOR
0V 7 7 0V
END
NC NC
FGND 1 1 FGND

25–PIN 25–PIN SHIELD DRAIN WIRE 25–PIN 25–PIN

MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE
METALIZED SHELL METALIZED SHELL
NOTE:
Bold dashed line shows continuous (100%) shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together.

Figure 3.21 – Point-To-Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Custom Length Cables

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–37
 Installation Procedures

TWISTED SHIELDED a47076

ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
PIN PAIRS PIN

ÎÎ
Î
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/

Î ÎÎ
Î
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK
CABLE DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/

Î ÎÎ
Î
TO DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL
DOWNSTREAM DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/
REMOTE

Î Î
ÎÎ
RACK DRPERR 12 12 DRPERR EXPANSION
DRPERR/ 13 13 DRPERR/ BASEPLATE
OR

Î Î
DRMRUN

ÎÎ
DRMRUN 8 8 CONNECTOR
DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/
TERMINATION
2 2 DPFRAME

Î Î
ÎÎ
PLUG DPFRAME
DPFRAME/ 3 3 DPFRAME/

Î ÎÎ
Î
0V 7 7 0V
NC NC
FGND 1 1 FGND
NC

25–PIN 25-PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN

MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell
SHIELD DRAIN WIRE OR CUT PIN 1 HERE IN
SHIELD DRAIN WIRE NOT CONNECTED FACTORY MADE WYE CABLES
ONLY FOR REMOTE BASEPLATES IC693CHS393E,
IC693CHS399D (AND EARLIER REVISIONS OF EACH)

Î
PIN
16 DIODT

Î
17 DIODT/
24 DIOCLK

Î
25 DIOCLK/
20 DRSEL

Î
21 DRSEL/
12 DRPERR CABLE

Î
13 DRPERR/ FROM
DRMRUN UPSTREAM
8
RACK

Î
9 DRMRUN/
2 DPFRAME

Î
3 DPFRAME/

7 0V

Î
NC
1 FGND

25-PIN 25–PIN
MALE FEMALE
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell

NOTE:
Bold dashed line shows continuous (100%) shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together.

Figure 3.22 – Earlier Revisions of Remote baseplate (IC693CHS393/399) Custom “Y” Cable Wiring
Diagram

Page 3–38 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

TWISTED SHIELDED a47087

ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
PIN PAIRS PIN

ÎÎ
Î
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/

Î ÎÎ
Î
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK
CABLE DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/

Î ÎÎ
Î
TO DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL
DOWNSTREAM DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/
REMOTE

Î Î
ÎÎ
RACK DRPERR 12 12 DRPERR EXPANSION
DRPERR/ 13 13 DRPERR/ BASEPLATE
OR

Î Î
DRMRUN

ÎÎ
DRMRUN 8 8 CONNECTOR
DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/
TERMINATION
2 2 DPFRAME

Î Î
ÎÎ
PLUG DPFRAME
DPFRAME/ 3 3 DPFRAME/

Î ÎÎ
Î
0V 7 7 0V
NC NC
FGND 1 1 FGND

25–PIN 25-PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN

MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell
SHIELD DRAIN WIRE
SHIELD DRAIN WIRE CONNECTED
FOR REMOTE BASEPLATES IC693CHS393F,
IC693CHS399E (AND LATER REVISIONS OF EACH)

Î
PIN
16 DIODT

Î
17 DIODT/
24 DIOCLK

Î
25 DIOCLK/
20 DRSEL

Î
21 DRSEL/
12 DRPERR CABLE

Î
13 DRPERR/ FROM
DRMRUN UPSTREAM
8
RACK

Î
9 DRMRUN/
2 DPFRAME

Î
3 DPFRAME/

7 0V

Î
NC
1 FGND

25-PIN 25–PIN
MALE FEMALE
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell

NOTE:
Bold dashed line shows continuous (100%) shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together.

Figure 3.23 – Current Remote baseplate (IC693CHS393/399) Custom “Y” Cable Wiring Diagram

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–39
Installation Procedures

TWISTED PAIRS, SHIELDED a45527

(7 PAIRS)
PIN PIN
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK
DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/
DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL ALSPA
”Y” DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/ C80–35
CABLE DRPERR 12 12 DRPERR BASEPLATE
DRPERR/ 13 13 DRPERR/ EXPANSION
SINGLE DRMRUN 8 8 DRMRUN PORT
CONNECTOR DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/
END DFRAME 2 2 DFRAME OR
DFRAME/ 3 3 DFRAME/
0V 7 7 0V ”Y”
NC NC CABLE
FGND 1 1 FGND

25–PIN 25– PIN SHIELD DRAIN WIRE 25– PIN 25– PIN
FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE

Figure 3.24 – Point-To-Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise Immunity

10.2.4. Making a 100% Shielded Cable

Use the following steps to build a 100% shielded cable:

1. Strip approximately 15mm (5/8 inch) of insulation from your custom cable to expose the shield.

2. Remove the male Pin 1 from any connector plugging directly into an older version remote baseplate
(IC693CHS393E, IC693CHS399D, or earlier).

3. Put split-ring ferrule over cable insulation (Figure 3.20).

4. Fold the shield back over top of the cable insulation and ferrule.

5. Place the collar of the metal hood over top of the folded shield and securely clamp the hood.

6. Test your cable for continuity between both connector shells. If the metalized connector hood is not making
proper contact with the cable shield at either end, the continuity will be intermittent.

7. Plug the metal hooded cable onto a remote baseplate expansion port connector or into a Cegelec “Y” cable
and securely tighten the two screws. Installing and tightening the screws will electrically connect the shield
to the remote baseplate frame ground, which should in turn be connected to earth ground.

Page 3–40 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

10.3. Hand–Held Programmer Cable

The Hand–Held Programmer cable (IC693CBL303) provides the connections which allow the HHP and the PLC
to communicate. This cable supports the RS–422 specification. This cable also provides the power connections
for the HHP, and a signal which indicates to the PLC that the HHP is attached to the serial port, as opposed to another
device. To connect the HHP cable for the first time:

D Attach the 15–pin male D connector to the 15–pin female D connector on the power supply on the Model 331,
Model 341 or Model 351 CPU baseplate or on the power supply on a Model 311 or Model 313 baseplate.

D Attach the D connector on the other end to the mating connector on the HHP. These connections are shown
in the following figure.

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ HAND–HELD a43107

ÎÎÎ
PROGRAMMER

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
Alspa C80–35

ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
C
P

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
CABLE U
(IC693CBL303)

Figure 3.25 – Hand–Held Programmer Cable Connection to an Alspa C80–35 PLC

10.4. PCM to Programmer Cables

These cables provide RS–232 signal connections between the RS–232 port on a PCM, CMM, or ADC and a serial
port on the programmer.

These cables can also be used for connecting the serial port of these modules to the RS–232 connector on the
RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter.

PCM to Programmer Cable Description

Each of the cables physically appear the same, the difference being the internal pin connections. Each cable is
3 meters (10 feet) in length. Specifications for the cables are as shown in the following table. Wiring information
is provided in Figure 3.26, Figure 3.27 and Figure 3.28.

Table 3.5 – Specifications for IC690CBL701/702/705 Cables

Cable Length 3 meters (10 feet)

Connectors
PCM/ADC/CMM Side 25–pin, D–subminiature type, AMP 205208–1 or equivalent
Programmer Side 9–pin, D–subminiature type, AMP 205203–1 or equivalent
Cable Clamps
25–pin AMP 207908–7 or equivalent
9–pin AMP 207908–1 or equivalent
Cable Type 6 conductor, overall shield, non–paired 0.2 mm2 (AWG 24), type:
Belden 9536, or equivalent

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–41
Installation Procedures

Caution

The Alspa C80–35 PLC baseplate that contains the PCM, ADC, or CMM and
the programmer ground connections must be at the same ground potential.
Incorrect wiring will result in damage to the programmer or the module.

ÎÎ PIN PIN
Î a44033

ÎÎ
Î TD 2 3 RD
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
RD 3 2 TD
RTS 4 5 CTS

ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
PS/2 CTS 5 20 DTR PCM

Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
DCD 8 8 DCD
DTR 20 1 SHLD
GND 7 7 GND
25–PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN
MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE

Figure 3.26 – Wiring for PCM to PS/2 Cable (IC690CBL705)

ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
PIN PIN a42831

ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
TD 2 3 RD

ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
RD 3 2 TD
RTS 4 5 CTS

ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
XT CTS 5 20 DTR PCM
DCD 8 8 DCD

9–PIN
ÎÎÎ DTR
GND
9–PIN
9
7
1
7
25–PIN
SHLD
GND Î
ÎÎ 25–PIN
FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE

Figure 3.27 – Wiring for PCM to PC–XT Cable (IC690CBL701)

ÎÎ Î
PIN PIN a42832

ÎÎ Î
DCD 1 1 SHLD
RD 2 2 TD

Î
ÎÎÎ Î
TD 3 3 RD
AT PCM

ÎÎ Î
DTR 4 8 DCD
RTS 7 5 CTS

ÎÎ Î
CTS 8 20 DTR
GND 5 7 GND
9–PIN 9–PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN
MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE

Figure 3.28 – Wiring for PCM to PC–AT Cable (IC690CBL702)

Page 3–42 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

10.5. PCM to Programmer Cable Installation

D Select the proper cable for your programming device (IC690CBL701, IC690CBL702, or IC690CBL705).

D Connect the cable’s 9–pin female connector to the male RS–232 connector (serial port) on the selected
programming device.

D Connect the cable’s 25–pin male connector to the Port 1 connector on the ”Y” cable.

D Connect the 25–pin male connector on the ”Y” cable to the female connector on the front of the PCM, ADC,
or CMM module.

PS/2 a44747

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
IC697CBL705
RS–232 PCM

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
(DEFAULT PORT)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
IC693CBL305B

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PORT 1

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 3.29 – PCM to PS/2 Computer

ÎÎÎÎÎ PC–XT a44748

ÎÎÎÎÎ IC690CBL701

Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
RS–232 PCM

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
(DEFAULT PORT)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ IC693CBL305B

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ PORT 1

Figure 3.30 – PCM to PC–XT Computer

PC–AT a44749

IC690CBL702
RS–232 PCM
(DEFAULT PORT)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC693CBL305B

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PORT 1

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 3.31 – PCM to PC–AT Computer

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–43
Installation Procedures

11. RS–422/RS–485 TO RS–232 CONVERTER WIRING INFORMATION

The following information is provided for those who may want to build their own cables. More information on
converters can be found in Appendices D, E, and F.

11.1. RS–232 Interface Pin Assignments

The RS–232 interface of the converter is accessible through the 25–pin D subminiature female connector. The pin
assignment is compatible with the three cables described previously (IC690CBL701/702/705). The opposite end
of the connector, which connects to your RS–232 compatible device, should be selected to fit the requirements
of the device. Most of these devices use a 15–pin D subminiature female connector. Pin assignments for the RS–232
interface of the converter are listed below.

Table 3.6 – RS–232 Interface Pin Assignments

Pin Signal Name Description Signal Flow
1 Shield Cable shield
2 SD Transmitted Data Out
3 RD Received Data In
4 RTS Request To Send Out
5 CTS Clear To Send In
6 NC No connection
7 SG Signal Ground
8 DCD Data Carrier Detect In
9/19 NC No connection
20 DTR Data Terminal Ready Out
21 to 25 NC No connection

11.2. RS–422/RS–485 Interface Pin Assignments

The converter’s RS–422/RS–485 interface is accessed through the 15–pin D subminiature female connector. Pin
assignments are compatible with the HHP cable for the (IC693CBL303). Both ends of this cable are the same and
have a 15–pin male D subminiature connector. Pin assignments for the RS–422/RS–485 interface are shown in
the Table 3.7.

Table 3.7 – RS–422/RS–485 Interface Pin Assignments

Pin Signal Name Description Signal Flow
1 Cable Shield
2 DCD(A) Differential Data Carrier Detect Out
3 DCD(B) Differential Data Carrier Detect Out
4 ATCH/ Attach n/a
5 +5 VDC Logic Power In
6 RTS(A) Differential Request To Send Out
7 SG Signal Ground, 0V In
8 CTS(B’) Differential Clear To Send In
9 RT Resistor Terminator n/a
10 RD(A’) Differential Receive Data In
11 RD(B’) Differential Receive Data In
12 SD(A) Differential Transmit Data Out
13 SD(B) Differential Transmit Data Out
14 RTS(B) Differential Request To Send Out
15 CTS(A’) Differential Clear To Send In

Page 3–44 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

11.3. Jumper Configurations

There are three jumper locations on the converter board for selection of user options. Each jumper position has
three pins, as shown below. These jumper positions, labeled JP2, JP3 and JP4, are accessed by removing the square
plastic cover on the top of the converter. Configuration can be changed as required by carefully removing one or
more of the jumpers with a pair of needle nose pliers and placing it on the desired pair of pins.

Refer to the description of these selectable jumper positions in the following table and place the jumper on the
selected pair of pins. The pin numbers are 1, 2 and 3. Default jumper locations are indicated by a rectangle around
the pins for each jumper position. The default pin numbers are 1 and 2.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
a44680

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RS–422/RS485 ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ RS–232

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ 1

ÎÎÎÎ
Î
2
3

Figure 3.32 – Location of Jumpers for User Options

Table 3.8 – Jumper Configuration for RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

Jumper Label Jumper Description *

Position Position
JP2 DCD Default position 1 and 2 is used when the device communicating with the PLC does not
1 2 3
supply the Carrier Detect signal. JP2 forces the DCD signal active on the RS–485 port.

Use jumper positions 2 and 3 if the device does supply the Carrier Detect signal. This
allows the programming device to control DCD.
1 2 3

JP3 MODEM Default position 1 and 2 is used when an attached Modem does not require the Clear
1 2 3 To Send (CTS) signal. This allows the programming device to control the RTS signal.

Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used when the attached Modem does require the CTS
1 2 3 signal (most modems require this signal). This forces RTS to be continually active.
JP4 ATTACH Default position 1 and 2 is used for most applications communicating with the PLC
1 2 3 with a serial programming device.

Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used if the device communicating with the PLC is intended
1 2 3 to emulate the HHP protocol.

* Refer to the documentation for your serial device for signal requirements.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–45
Installation Procedures

11.4. Wiring Connections for the IC693CBL303 Cable

The specifications and wiring information for this cable are provided below. Note that in addition to being used
to connect the RS–485 serial port on the PLC to the converter, this cable is also used to connect the PLC to the
Alspa C80–35 Hand–Held Programmer.

RS–422
RS–232/RS–485
TWISTED SHIELDED PAIRS a44750
CONVERTER

Î Î Î
(IC690ACC900)
PIN PIN

Î ÎÎ Î
SHLD 1 1 SHLD

ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ATTCH 4 4 ATTCH
DCD (A) 2 2 DCD (A)

Î Î Î
DCD (B) 3 3 DCD (B)

Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
RT 9
RD (A’) 10 12 SD (A)

Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
RD (B’) 11 13 SD (B) ALSPA
9 RT 8000

ÎÎ Î Î Î
SD (A) 12 10 RD (A’) PLC

ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
SD (B) 13 11 RD (B’)

RS–422

ÎÎ Î Î Î
+5V 5 5 +5V PORT

ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
0V 7 7 0V

ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
RTS (A) 6 15 CTS (A’)
RTS (B) 14 8 CTS (B’)

ÎÎ Î
CTS (A’) 15 6 RTS (A)
CTS (B’) 8 14 RTS (B)

25–PI 15–PIN 15–PIN 15–PIN 15–PIN

FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
RS–232 PORT RS–485 PORT

PINS 9 AND 10 ARE JUMPERED AT BOTH ENDS OF CABLE TO CONNECT TERMINATING

NOTE: RESISTORS FOR THE RD SIGNAL WHICH IS INSIDE THE PLC POWER SUPPLY.

Figure 3.33 – Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303

Page 3–46 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

Cable Specifications

This information is essential if you who intend to build your own cable. The recommended cable types for this
cable are listed below and depend on the length of the cable.

Table 3.9 – Specifications for Cable (RS–422/RS–485)

Cable Length Wire Size Catalog Number
(mm2/AWG)
2m (6 feet) 0.21 mm2/AWG 24 Belden 9508
10m (30 feet) 0.35 mm2/AWG 22 Belden 9309
>10m to 300m 0.35 mm2/AWG 22 Same as for 10 m (30 feet). In addition, the +5 VDC logic power source for the
(980 feet) converter cannot be supplied by the PLC. It must be provided by an external power
supply connected to the +5V and SG pins at the converter end of the connector. The
+5V pin at the PLC connector must not be connected to the cable. The +5V and
SG connections from the power supply must be isolated from its own power line
ground connection. Be sure that there is no connection between the external supply
and the PLC except the SG cable connection.

1. Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only. Any cable having the same electrical characteristics is
acceptable. It is strongly recommended that you use stranded wire. Since it is sometimes hard to find a cable
with the desired number of twisted pairs (the Belden 9309 has an extra pair), you may end up with a cable with
extra pairs.

2. A greater cable length between the PLC and the converter increases the possibility of noise coupling into the
data and converter logic power circuits within the cable. The cable should be as short as possible in noisy
environments. In extreme cases, additional noise protection measures, such as double–shielded cables, may
be required.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–47
Installation Procedures

12. ”Y” CABLE

A ”Y” cable (IC693CBL305 for PCM301/311, ADC311 and CMM301) is supplied with each Alspa C80–35 PCM,
ADC and CMM module. The purpose of the ”Y” cable is to separate the two ports from a single physical connector,
that is, the cable separates the RS–232 from the RS–485 signals. In addition, the ”Y” cable allows cables used with
the Alspa C80–75 PCM to be fully compatible with the Alspa C80–35 PCM. The ”Y” cable and cable connections
are shown below and on the following page.

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ a44357

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
SHIELD 1
14

ÎÎÎÎ
RS–232 TD ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 TD 2
15 RS–232 CTS ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 RD 3
16 RS–232 RD ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 RTS 4
17 RS–232 DTR ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 CTS 5
18 RS–232 DCD ( PORT 2 )
NO CONNECTION 6
19 RS–232 RTS ( PORT 2 )
SIGNAL GROUND 7
20 RS–232 DTR ( PORT 1 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 DCD 8
21 RS–485 SD ( B ) (PORT 2 )
( PORT 2 ) RS–485 SD ( A ) 9
22 RS–485 RTS ( B ) ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 2 ) RS–485 RTS ( A ) 10

ÎÎÎÎ
23 RS–485 CTS ( B’ ) ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 2 ) RS–485 CTS ( A’ ) 11

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
24 TERMINATION ( RD ) (PORT 2)
( PORT 2 ) TERMINATION ( CTS ) 12

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
25 RS–485 RD ( B’ ) ( PORT 2 )

ÎÎÎ
( PORT 2) RS–485 RD ( A’ ) 13

Figure 3.34 – ”Y” Cable Connections

Page 3–48 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

ÎÎÎ
PORT 1
ÎÎÎ
PORT 2 a44358

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
SHIELD 1 SHIELD 1
14 14
RS–232 TD
ÎÎÎ RS–232 TD
ÎÎÎ
2 2
15 15
RS–232 RD 3 RS–232 RD 3
16 16
RS–232 RTS 4 RS–232 RTS 4
17 17
RS–232 CTS 5 RS–232 CTS 5
18 18
6 6
19 19
SIGNAL GROUND 7 SIGNAL GROUND 7
20 20
RS–232 DTR RS–232 DTR
RS–232 DCD 8 RS–232 DCD 8
21 21
RS–485 SD ( B )
9 RS–485 SD ( A ) 9
22 22
RS–485 RTS ( B )
10 RS–485 RTS ( A ) 10

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
23 23
RS–485 CTS ( B’ )
11 RS–485 CTS ( A’ ) 11

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
24 24
TERMINATION ( RD )

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
12 12

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
TERMINATION ( CTS )
25 25
RS–485 RD ( B’ )

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
13 RS–485 RD ( A’ ) 13

Figure 3.34 – ”Y” Cable Connections (continued)

RS–232
25–PIN FEMALE a44225
CONNECTOR PIN 1

ÎÎ
305 MM (1 FOOT)

ÎÎ LABEL

Î
PORT 1

ÎÎ
PORT 2
PCM COMM. CABLE
IC693CBL305B

RS–232 RS–232/RS–485
PIN 1 PIN 1
25–PIN MALE 25–PIN FEMALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR

Figure 3.35 – Detail of ”Y” Cable (IC693CBL304/305)

The ”Y” cable is 0.3 meter (1 foot) in length and has a right angle male connector on one end that connects to the
PCM module. The other end has a dual female connector with one connector for port 1 and the other for port 2.

In order to use an RS–232 cable on port 2 of the Alspa C80–35 PLC, either a special cable must be made following
to the serial port pin assignments shown above or a ”Y” cable must be used. The ”Y” cable allows use of standard
Alspa C80–75 cables (IC690CBL701/702/705) for the PCM or ADC. When installing the CMM module, use the
”Y” cable in conjunction with cables that you build for the CMM module according to directions in Chapter 8 of
ALS 52506 Serial communication modules for Alspa 8000 PLCs User’s Manual.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–49
Installation Procedures

13. I/O MODULE INSTALLATION AND WIRING

This section contains information on installing I/O modules and information relevant to field wiring to and from
those modules.

13.1. Installation and Removal of I/O Modules

The following procedures and recommendations should be followed when installing and removing I/O modules.

Note

Modules in expansion baseplates can be added, removed or replaced while the

PLC is in RUN mode if power is first removed from the expansion baseplate.
I/O data to/from this baseplate will not be updated while power is removed.

13.2. Inserting a Module

Use the following instructions as a guide when inserting a module into its slot in a baseplate.
D Select the slot into which the module is to be inserted. Grasp the module firmly with terminal board toward
you and with rear hook facing away from you.
D Align module with desired base slot and connector. Tilt module upwards so that top rear hook of module
engages slot on baseplate.
D Swing module downward until connectors mate and lock–lever on bottom of module snaps into place engaging
the baseplate notch.
D Visually inspect the module to be sure that it is properly seated.

a43055

Figure 3.36 – Inserting a Module

Page 3–50 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

WARNING
Do not insert or remove modules with power applied. This could cause the
PLC to Stop, damage to be incurred to the module, or result in personal
injury.

13.3. Removing a Module

Use the following procedure to remove a module from its slot.

D Locate release lever at bottom of the module and firmly press it up – towards the module.

D While holding the module firmly at top and fully depressing release lever, swing the module upward (release
lever must be free of its retaining slot).

D Disengage hook at top rear of module by raising the module up and moving it away from faceplate.

a43056

Î
PRESS
RELEASE LEVER

Figure 3.37 – Removing a Module

WARNING
Potentially dangerous voltages from user devices may be present on a
module’s screw terminals even though power to the rack is turned off. Care
must be taken any time that you are handling the module’s removable
terminal board or any wires connected to it.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–51
Installation Procedures

13.4. Wiring to I/O Modules

Wiring connections to and from user supplied input and output field devices are made to the detachable terminal
board supplied with I/O modules having up to 16 points. I/O modules with 32 points have two 24–pin connectors
on the front of the module which must be connected through a cable to field devices. The removable terminal board
makes it easy to prewire field wiring to the user supplied input and output devices, and to replace modules in the
field without disturbing existing field wiring.

13.5. Connections to Detachable Terminal Boards

All Alspa C80–35 PLC I/O terminal boards have 20 screw terminals that will accept from two 0.35 mm2 (AWG 22)
to one 2.1 mm2 (AWG 14) or two 1.3 mm2 (AWG 16) copper 90°C (194°F) wires. Each terminal can accept solid
or stranded wires, but the wires into any given terminal should be the same type. The suggested torque for the I/O
terminal boards is from 1.09 Nm (9.6 in–lbs) to 1.3 Nm (11.5 in–lbs). For 24 volt DC input, an internal 24 volt
power source can be connected to two terminals on the connector. Also, a 24 volt DC supply is available on the
power supply for a limited number of outputs. Wires are routed to and from the terminals out of the bottom of the
terminal board cavity.

13.6. Connections to Pin Connectors

Connections to the input circuits are made from the user’s input devices to two male (pin–type) 24–pin connectors
(Fujitsu FCN–365P024–AU) mounted on the front of the module. The connector mounted on the right of the
module (front view) interfaces with groups A and B. The connector on the left side of the module interfaces with
groups C and D. Cables connecting the module to field devices must be built by the user as required for individual
applications. An accessory kit containing the required 24–pin connectors is available from Cegelec with enough
components to assemble ten single–ended connectors.

Catalog numbers for these connectors are listed below. Catalog numbers are listed for three types of connectors:
solder pin, crimp pin, and ribbon cable.

Table 3.10 – Kits for 24–Pin Connectors

Cegelec Vendor
Catalog Number Catalog Number Description
IC693ACC316 FCN–361J024–AU Solder eyelet receptacle
(Solder Eyelet Type) FCN–360C024–B Backshell (for above)
IC693ACC317 FCN–363J024 Crimp wire receptacle
(Crimp Type) FCN–363J–AU Crimp pin (for above, 24 needed)
FCN–360C024–B Backshell (for above)
IC693ACC318 FCN–367J024–AUF IDC (ribbon) receptacle, closed cover
(Ribbon or IDC Type) FCN–367J024–AUH IDC (ribbon) receptacle, open cover

Note that additional tools from Fujitsu are required to properly assemble the crimped contact and ribbon cable type
connectors. The solder eyelet connectors (as provided in IC693ACC316) do not require any special tooling.

Page 3–52 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

Crimped Contact Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC317) require:

Hand Crimping Tool FCN-363T-T005/H

Contact Extraction Tool FCN-360T-T001/H

Ribbon Cable Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC318) require:

Cable Cutter FCN-707T-T001/H

Hand Press FCN-707T-T101/H
Locator Plate FCN-367T-T012/H

These tools need to be ordered from an authorized Fujitsu distributor.

It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling with sufficient lead time to meet your assembly
requirements for these connectors. These tools are generally not stock items and can have significant lead times
from distribution. If you have any further questions about this issue, please feel free to contact the Cegelec PLC
Hotline.

The I/O Interface cable (IC693CBL315) can be used to connect I/O devices to the 24–pin connectors mounted on
the applicable high density modules (see Appendix G for detailed information). Two of these cables are required
per module.

13.7. Installing a Terminal Board

To install a terminal board with no wires attached:

D Hook the hinge, located on the bottom of the terminal board, to the lower slot on the module.

D Push the terminal board towards the module until it snaps into place.

D Open the terminal board cover and ensure that the latch on the module is securely holding the terminal board
in place.

When installing a terminal board that has wiring attached verify that the terminal board is connected to the proper
module type. The following figure shows the recommended procedure for installation of a terminal board.

Caution

Check the labels on the hinged door and the module to ensure that they
match. If a prewired terminal board is installed on the wrong module type,
damage to the module may incur.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–53
Installation Procedures

a43062

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 3

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
REFER TO TEXT FOR
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 3.38 – Installing a Terminal Board

13.8. Removing a Terminal Board

To remove a terminal board:

D Open the plastic terminal board cover.

D Push up on the jacking lever to release the terminal block.

a43061

JACKING
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
LEVER

ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

Page 3–54 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

D Grasp pull–tab towards you until contacts have separated from module housing and hook has disengaged for
full removal.

PULL a43715

ÎÎ
TAB

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ

13.9. Terminal Board Posts

Notice that the terminal board has three posts on the left side. The top and bottom posts hold the terminal board
cover in place. The purpose of the middle post is to keep the cable wired to the terminal board in place. This middle
post can be easily snapped off if you do not require it to hold the wiring in place.

Since minimal force is required to snap off the middle post, you should be careful that you do not inadvertently
snap it off if you are using it to keep your wire runs in place.

13.10. Field Wiring Considerations

It is recommended that the following procedures be followed when routing and connecting field wiring from user
devices to the PLC or to Output devices to be controlled by the PLC.

D All low level signal wires should be run separately from other field wiring.

D AC power wiring should be run separately from DC field wiring.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–55
Installation Procedures

WARNING
You should calculate the maximum current for each wire and observe
proper wiring practices. Failure to do so may cause injury to personnel or
damage to equipment.

D Field wiring should not be routed close to any device that could be a potential source of electrical interference.

D If severe noise problems are present, additional power supply filtering or an isolation transformer may be
required.

D Ensure that proper grounding procedures, as previously described, are followed to minimize potential safety
hazards to personnel.

D Label all wires to and from I/O devices. Record circuit identification numbers or other pertinent data on the
inserts which go in the module’s faceplate door.

Page 3–56 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Installation Procedures

14. MECHANICAL SPARE PARTS KITS

Two spare parts kits (IC693ACC319 and IC693ACC320) are available that provide mechanical spare parts for I/O,
CPU, PCM, power supply and other special module assemblies. These kits provide the parts that allow you to
replace mechanical parts such as the module levers, or module doors that may accidentally break. A description
of the contents of each of the kits is provided in the following table.

Table 3.11 – Mechanical Spare Parts Kits

Spare Parts Kit Contents

IC693ACC319: (qty. 10) I/O, CPU, PCM case lever
Spare parts kit for I/O, (qty. 10) Spring pins cap
CPU and PCM modules (qty. 2) PCM module front cover
(qty. 2) PCM lens cap
(qty. 2) CPU module case
IC693ACC320: (qty. 2) Power supply lever
Spare parts kit for power (qty. 2) Spring pin for power supply lever
supplies (qty. 2) Spring for power supply lever
(qty. 2) Power supply lens cap
(qty. 2) Power supply terminal cover

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page 3–57
Installation Procedures

Page 3–58 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Appendix Glossary

This glossary is a definition of terms for the Alspa C80–35 Programmable Logic Controller.

Address A number following a reference type, which together refer to a specific user reference (e.g.,
for %Innnnn, %I is the reference type and nnnnn is the address).

Analog An electrical signal activated by physical variables representing force, pressure,

temperature, flow, etc.

Application Program
A program written by the user for control of a machine or process, that is, the application.

ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange)

An 8–bit (7 bits plus 1 parity bit) code used for data.

Backplane A group of connectors physically mounted on a board at the back of a rack into which
modules are inserted. The connectors are wired together by a printed circuit board.

Baseplate A frame containing the backplane for the system bus and connectors, into which modules
are inserted. In the Alspa C80–35 PLC Models 311 and 313, the baseplate also contains the
CPU.

Battery Connector A connector wired to a lithium battery which connects the battery to the CMOS RAM
memory devices. The battery connector is plugged into a receptacle accessed through a door
on the power supply faceplate.

Baud A unit of data transmission. Baud rate is the number of bits per second transmitted.

Bit (Binary Digit) The smallest unit of memory. It can be used to store only one piece of information that has
two states (e.g., One/Zero, On/Off, Good/Bad, Yes/No). Data that requires more than two
states (e.g., numerical values 000 to 999) requires multiple bits (see Word).

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page A–1
Glossary

Bus An electrical path for transmitting and receiving data.

Byte A group of binary digits operated on as a single unit. In the Alspa C80–35 PLC, a byte is
eight bits.

Circuit Wiring Diagram

Field wiring information that provides a guide to users for connecting field devices to input
and output modules. Each I/O module has a circuit wiring diagram printed on the inside
surface of an insert in the module’s hinged door.

Configuration Software
That portion of the Alspa P8 programming software package which provides the tools for
configuration of I/O and many system parameters.

CPU (Central Processing Unit)

The central device or controller that interprets user instructions, makes decisions, and
executes the functions based on a stored application program.

Data Memory User references within the CPU which are accessible by the application program for storage
of discrete or register data.

Discrete The term “discrete" includes both real and internal I/O that are one–bit user references.

Expansion Baseplate (Local)

A 5 or 10–slot baseplate added to an Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331, Model 341, or Model
351 system when the application calls for more modules than the main baseplate can
contain. An Alspa C80–35 PLC Model 331 or 341 system can have up to four expansion
baseplates (a Model 351 can have up to seven expansion baseplates) and the last baseplate
can be no more than 15 meters (50 feet) from the CPU baseplate.

Expansion Cable A cable which propagates the parallel I/O bus signals between expansion baseplates. The
total length of all expansion cables, from the main baseplate to the last expansion baseplate
in a local system, can be no more than 15 meters (50 feet). The total cable length in a remote
expansion system can be up to 213 meters (700 feet).

Firmware A series of instructions contained in ROM (Read Only Memory) which are used for internal
processing functions. These instructions provide the structure for application program
operations.

Grounding Terminal
A terminal on each power supply which must be connected to earth ground (through the AC
power source) to ensure that the rack is properly and safely grounded.

Page A–2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Glossary

Hardware All of the mechanical, electrical and electronic devices that comprise the Alspa C80–35
PLC and its applications.

Hinged Door A plastic door on the front of a module which, when open, allows access to certain module
hardware features.

Input Module An I/O module that converts signals from user devices to logic levels that can be used by the
CPU.

Input Scan Time The time required for the CPU to scan all I/O controllers for new input values. When Model
35 I/O is present, this includes the time to actually read each module.

I/O (Input/Output)
That portion of the PLC to which field devices are connected and which isolates the CPU
from electrical noise.

I/O Electrical Isolation

A method of separating field wiring from logic level circuitry. Typically, this is
accomplished through the use of solid–state optical isolation devices.

I/O Fault Table A fault table listing I/O faults. These faults are identified by time, date and location.

I/O Module A printed circuit assembly that interfaces between user devices and the Alspa C80–35 PLC.

K (Kilo) An abbreviation for kilo or exactly 1024 in the language of computers.

LED (Light Emitting Diode) Status Display

A display consisting of a group of LEDs with two rows of eight LEDs at the top of each
discrete I/O module. Each LED in the two groups of eight indicates the state of the respective
input or output point on the board.

Main Baseplate The baseplate in an Alspa C80–35 PLC system in which the CPU is installed. This rack must
always be included in a system and is always rack 0.

Memory Card A memory cartridge containing EEPROM memory which is inserted into a slot in the
Hand–Held Programmer. This memory cartridge provides the Hand–Held Programmer with
a means for off–line storage and retrieval of the application program and system
configuration data.

Microsecond One millionth of a second. 1 x 10 (–6) or 0.000001 second. Microsecond may be abbreviated
as micros.

Millisecond One thousandth of a second. 1 x 10 (–3) or 0.001 second. Millisecond may be abbreviated as
ms.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page A–3
Glossary

Mnemonic An abbreviation given to an instruction. The mnemonic is usually an acronym, formed by

combining initial letters or parts of words.

Model 35 I/O The Alspa C80–35 I/O subsystem consisting of discrete, analog and intelligent input and
output modules.

Module A replaceable electronic subassembly usually plugged into connectors on a backplane and
secured in place, but easily removed in case of a failure or system redesign. In the Alspa
C80–35 PLC, a combination of a printed circuit board and its associated faceplate (and
removable terminal connector on I/O modules) which, when combined, form a complete
assembly.

Molded Hinge A hinge at the top rear of each Model 35 I/O module type, which latches onto the top of the
baseplate when the module is installed. This hinge helps to keep the module securely in
place.

Noise Undesirable electrical disturbances to normal signals, generally of high frequency content.

Non–Volatile Memory
A memory (e.g., PROM) capable of retaining its stored information under no–power
conditions (power removed or turned off).

Off–Line Mode Off–Line mode is used for program development. The programmer does not communicate
with the PLC in Off–Line mode; the physical communications link may be intact, but the
programmer is specifically not performing communications with the PLC. Power flow
display and reference values are not updated.

On–Line Mode On–Line mode provides full CPU communications, allowing data to be both read and
written.

Output Data transferred from the CPU, through a module for level conversion to be used for
controlling an external device or process.

Output Devices Physical devices such as motor starters, solenoids, etc., that are switched by the PLC.

Output Module An I/O module that converts logic level signals within the CPU to usable output signals for
controlling a machine or process.

Panel Mounting Flange

Flanges, with mounting holes, on the sides of a baseplate used to mount the baseplate on an
electrical panel or wall.

Page A–4 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Glossary

Parallel Communications
A method of data transfer, whereby data is transferred on several wires simultaneously.

Peripheral Equipment
External devices that can communicate with a PLC (e.g., programmers and printers).

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)

A solid–state industrial control device which receives signals from user–supplied control
devices, such as switches and sensors, implements them in a precise pattern determined by
ladder diagram based application programs stored in user memory, and provides outputs for
control of processes or user–supplied devices such as relays or motor starters. It is usually
programmed in relay ladder logic and is designed to operate in an industrial environment.

PLC Fault Table A fault table listing PLC faults. These faults are identified by time, date and location.

Programmer The hardware device required to run Alspa P8 software. Connection is through an
RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 converter to communicate with the Alspa C80–35 PLC.

Programmer Port The serial port on the power supply module, accessible through a 15–pin connector, to
which the programmer must be connected in order to communicate with the PLC. Both the
Alspa P8 programmer and the Hand–Held Programmer connect to this port.

Programming Software
That portion of the Alspa P8 25/35 software package which is used to create ladder logic
programs.

PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory)

A retentive digital device programmed at the factory and not easily changed by the user.
PROM usually contains programs for internal system use.

Rack An Alspa C80–35 baseplate when it has modules installed in it.

Rack Number A unique number, from 0 to 4, assigned to an Alspa C80–35 Model 331 or Model 341
baseplate (0 to 7 for a Model 351) for rack identification purposes. The main rack is always
rack 0.

Rack Number DIP Switch

A three–position DIP switch located on the backplane directly behind the power supply,
which must be configured to select a unique rack number from 1 to 4 for Alspa C80–35 PLC
Model 331 or Model 341 expansion racks (1 to 7 for a Model 351). Rack numbers cannot be
duplicated in a system.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page A–5
Glossary

RAM (Random Access Memory)

A solid–state memory that allows individual bits to be stored and accessed at random. This
memory stores the Alspa P8 software, program files, and related data while power is applied
to the system. This type of memory, however, is volatile. Because data stored in RAM is lost
under no–power conditions, a backup battery is required to retain the contents under those
conditions. The backup battery used in the Alspa C80–35 PLC is a long–life lithium battery
mounted on the power supply, PCM and ADC modules.

Reference Type A specific group of memory types in the Alspa C80–35 PLC (e.g., %I references discrete
inputs and %Q references discrete outputs). The % symbol is used to distinguish machine
references from nicknames.

Register A group of 16 consecutive bits in register memory, referenced as %R. Each register is
numbered, beginning at 00001. Register memory is used for temporary storage of numerical
values and for bit manipulation.

Release Lever A molded lever on the bottom of each Model 35 I/O module, which when depressed
upwards, releases the module in its slot to allow removal of the module.

Remote Baseplate A 5 or 10-slot baseplate added to a Model 331 or Model 341 system when the application
calls for more modules than the main baseplate can contain and a baseplate is required more
than 15 meters (50 feet) from the CPU baseplate. A remote Model 331 or 341 system can
have up to four remote baseplates (or a combination of remote and expansion baseplates as
long as the distance and cable requirements are followed) with the last remote baseplate no
more than 213 meters (700 feet) from the CPU baseplate.
A Model 351 system can have up to seven expansion baseplates.

Remote I/O link A method of having Alspa C80–35 I/O physically installed at a location some distance from
the CPU baseplate in a Model 331, Model 341 or Model 351 system. Up to four remote
baseplates in a Model 331 or 341 system (up to seven baseplates in a Model 351 system) can
be linked in a daisy chain to the CPU baseplate at a location up to 213 meters (700 feet) from
the CPU. Remote baseplates can also be used in a local expansion system with expansion
baseplates (expansion baseplates cannot be used in a system located greater than 15 meters
(50 feet) from the CPU).

Removable Terminal Connector

The removable assembly which attaches to the front of a printed wire board and contains the
screw terminals to which field wiring is connected.

Restart Pushbutton
A pushbutton on the front of the module used to reinitialize the PCM or ADC module, or to
initiate a hard or soft reset of the module. The TCP/IP Ethernet Interface module also has a
restart pushbutton which has multiple functions.

Page A–6 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Glossary

RUN Mode A condition or state of the Alspa C80–35 PLC, where the CPU executes the application
program. RUN mode executes in the RUN/OUTPUTS ENABLED mode only. In
RUN/OUTPUTS ENABLED, all portions of the program sweep are executed.

Serial Communications
A method of data transfer, whereby the bits are handled sequentially rather than
simultaneously, as in parallel data transmission.

Serial Port An RS–485/422 port on the PLC, accessible through a 15–pin connector, to which the
programmer must be connected in order to communicate with the PLC. Both the Alspa P8
programmer and the Hand–Held Programmer connect to this port. The PLC can
communicate with other serial devices through this port. A protocol adaptor is needed when
communicating with an RS-232 device through this port. (The Alspa C80–35 CPU 351 has a
separate RS-232 port in addition to the RS-484 serial port).

STOP Mode A condition or state of the Alspa C80–35 PLC, where the CPU no longer executes the
application program. STOP mode can be STOP/NO IOSCAN or STOP/IOSCAN. In
STOP/NO IOSCAN mode, the PLC only communicates with the programmer and other
devices (NBC, PCM, etc.), recovers faulted boards, reconfigures boards and executes
background tasks. All other portions of the sweep are skipped. In STOP/IOSCAN mode, the
PLC CPU can monitor I/O. This feature provides a way to monitor and debug I/O without
executing the application program.

Storage Used synonymously with memory.

Termination Resistor Pack

A resistor pack used to properly terminate the I/O bus signals. It is physically installed inside
of a terminator plug (IC693ACC307), or termination resistors are connected internally in
the 15–meter (50–foot) I/O bus expansion cable (IC693CBL302).
Unexpected system operation may occur if the bus is not properly terminated.

Terminator Plug A connector containing a resistor pack which must be installed at the end of the I/O bus chain
to properly terminate I/O bus signals. In an Alspa C80–35 Model 331, Model 341 or Model
351 PLC system, this plug must be installed on the unused connector on the last I/O
expansion cable in the I/O bus chain. Unexpected System operation may occur if the bus is
not properly terminated.

User Memory The portion of system memory in which the application program and data is stored. This
memory is battery–backed CMOS RAM.

User Reference Type

A reference assigned to data which indicates the memory in which it is stored in the PLC.
References can be either bit–oriented (discrete) or word–oriented (register).

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page A–7
Glossary

Volatile Memory A type of memory that will lose the information stored in it if power is removed from the
memory devices. It requires a backup battery for retention of contents of memory. In the
Alspa C80–35 PLC, a lithium battery is used for this purpose.

Watchdog Timer A timer in the CPU used to ensure that certain hardware conditions are met within a
predetermined time. The watchdog timer value is 200 milliseconds, for all models of CPU,
except Model 351, which is 500 milliseconds.

Word A measurement of memory length, usually 4, 8 or 16–bits long. In the Alspa C80–35 PLC, a
word is 16–bits in length.

Page A–8 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Appendix Commonly Used Acronyms and
Abbreviations
B

A/D Analog–to–Digital
ADC Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module
ADS Alphanumeric Display System
APM Axis Positioning Module
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
AWG American Wire Gauge
BCD Binary Coded Decimal
CCM Communication Control Module (protocol)
CMM Communications Control Module
CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
CPU Central Processing Unit
COM Standard Serial COMmunications Port
D/A Digital–to–Analog
DIP Dual-In-Line Package (DIP switch)
EIA Electronic Industries Association (USA)
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
FCC Federal Communications Commission (USA)
H Hexadecimal
HHP Hand-Held Programmer
HSC High Speed Counter
I/O Input/Output
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IOC Input/Output Controller
IOP I/O Processor
ISCP Instruction Sequencer Coprocessor
K 1024
Kbyte Kilobyte (1024 bytes)
LAN Local Area Network
LED Light Emitting Diode
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LSB Least Significant Bit
Mbyte Megabyte (1 048 576 bytes)
MSB Most Significant Bit
NBC N80 Bus Controller
NC Normally Closed
NCM N80 Communications Module

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page B–1
Commonly Used Acronyms and Abbreviations

NCM+ Enhanced N80 Communications Module

NO Normally Open
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
PC Personal Computer
PCIF Personal Computer Interface card
PCM Programmable Coprocessor Module
PCOP (PCM Development Sofware)
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
PS Power Supply
RAM Random Access Memory
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
SL Statement List Language
SNP Serial Network Protocol

Page B–2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Appendix Serial Port and Cables

This appendix describes the serial port, converter and cables used to connect Alspa 8000 PLCs for SNP Protocol.
This information is included for reference and for those users who have applications that require cable lengths
different than the factory–supplied cables.

1. WHAT THIS APPENDIX CONTAINS

Information in this section includes:

D Communications Interface,
D Cable and Connector Specifications,
D Serial Port Configuration,
D RS–232/RS–485 Converter (Catalog No. IC690ACC900),
D Serial Cable Diagrams,
D Point–to–Point Connection,
D Multidrop Connection.

2. RS–422 INTERFACE
The Alspa 8000 PLC family of products are compatible with EIA RS–422 specifications. RS–422 drivers and
receivers are utilized to accomplish communications between several system components using multiple
driver/receiver combinations on a single cable with five twisted pairs. The total cable length cannot exceed 1200
meters (4000 feet).

A multi–drop system of eight drivers and receivers can be configured. The maximum common mode voltage
between each additional drop is the RS–422 standard of +7 Volts to –7 Volts. The driver output must be capable
of " 2 V minimum into 100 ohms. The driver output impedance must be at least 120 K ohms in the high impedance
state. The receiver input resistance is 12 K ohms or greater. Receiver sensitivity is " 200 millivolt.

Caution
Care must be taken that common mode voltage specifications are met.
Common mode conditions that exceed those specified will result in errors
in transmission and/or damage to Alspa 8000 PLC components.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page C–1
Serial Port and Cables

3. CABLE AND CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS

The cable assembly presents one of the most common causes of communication failure. For best performance
construct the cable assemblies according to the recommended connector parts and specifications.

Table C.1 – Connector/Cable Specifications

Item Description
Alspa 8000 PLC: Serial (RS–422) port with metric hardware
Connector: 15–pin male, D–Subminiature Type, Cannon DA15S (solder pot)
Hood: AMP 207470–1 connector shell
Hardware Kit: AMP 207871–1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips
Compatible PC: Serial (RS–232) port with standard RS–232 connector
Mating Connector: 25–pin female, D–Subminiature Type, Cannon DB25S (solder pot) with DB110963–3 hood or
Connectors: equivalent (standard RS–232 connector)
Compatible PC: Serial (RS–232) port with standard RS–232 connector
Connector: 9–pin female, D–Subminiature Type, Cannon DE9S (solder pot) with DE110963–1 hood or
equivalent (standard RS–232 connector)
PC–AT/XT: Serial (RS–232) port with standard RS–232 connector
Connector: 9–pin female, D–Subminiature Type, Cannon DE9S (solder pot) with DE110963–3 hood or
equivalent (standard RS–232 connector)
RS–232/RS–485 Converter: one 15–pin male and one 25–pin male connector
15–pin male connector requires metric hardware (same connector, hood and hardware as for Alspa 8000 PLC
listed above)
25–pin male D–Subminiature Type, Cannon DA25S (solder pot) with DB110963–3 hood or equivalent
(standard RS–232 connector)
Computer grade, 0.2 mm2 (AWG 24) (minimum) with overall shield
Catalog Numbers: Belden 9505, Belden 9306, Belden 9832
Cable: These cables provide acceptable operation for data rates up to 19.2 Kbps as follows:
RS–232: 15 meters (50 feet) maximum cable length
RS–422/RS–422: 1200 meters (4000 feet) maximum length. Must not exceed the maximum RS–422
Common Mode specification of +7V to –7V. Isolation at the remote end may be used to reduce or eliminate
Common Mode voltages.

At shorter distances under 15 meters (50 feet), almost any twisted pair or shielded twisted pair cable will work,
as long as the wire pairs are connected correctly

When using RS–422/RS–422, the twisted pairs should be matched so that both transmit signals make up one
twisted pair and both receive signals make up the other twisted pair. If this is ignored, cross–task resulting from
the mismatching will affect the performance of the communications system.

When routing communication cables outdoors, transient suppression devices can be used to reduce the
possibility of damage due to lightning or static discharge.
Care should be exercised that all connected devices are grounded to a common point.Failure to do so could
result in damage to the equipment.

Page C–2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Serial Port and Cables

4. ALSPA 8000 PLC SERIAL PORT

The Alspa 8000 PLC serial port is compatible with RS–422. An RS–232 to RS–422 converter is required to
interface to systems that provide RS–232 compatible interfaces. The Alspa 8000 PLC, RS–422 serial port provides
the physical connection for SNP communication. This port is a 15–pin D–type female connector located as follows:

D Alspa C80–75 PLC and Alspa C80–25 – on CPU Module,

D Alspa C80–35 PLC – on Power Supply.

Figure C.1 shows the serial port orientation and connector layout for the Alspa 8000 PLC types (note that the
orientation of the connector on the Alspa C80–25 CPU is rotated 90 degrees from the Alspa C80–35 connector
with pin 1 to the upper right). Table C–2 shows the pin numbering and signal assignment applicable to both PLCs.

Alspa C80–75 PLC Alspa C80–35 PLC a44521

PIN
15 8 1 9

PIN
9 15
1 8

NOTE
Alspa 8000 PLC CONNECTORS
USE METRIC HARDWARE.
(SEE CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS)

Figure C.1 – Alspa 8000 PLC, RS–422 Serial Port Connector Configuration

Table C.2 – Alspa 8000 PLC, RS–422 Serial Port Pin–out

Pin Number Signal Name Description
1 Shield
2 No Connection
3 No Connection
4 ATCH * Hand Held Programmer attach signal
5 +5V * +5V Power for: HHP and RS–232/485 Converter
6 RTS (A) Request To Send
7 Signal Ground Signal Ground, OV
8 CTS (B’) Clear To Send
9 RT * Terminating Resistor for RD **
10 RD (A’) Receive Data
11 RD (B’) Receive Data
12 SD (A) Send Data
13 SD (B) Send Data
14 RTS (B) Request To Send
15 CTS (A’) Clear To Send
* Signals available at the Connector but are not included in the RS–422 specification.
SD (Send Data) and RD (Receive Data) are the same as TXD and RXD.
(A) and (B) are the same as – and + . A and B denote outputs, and A’ and B’ denote inputs.
** Termination resistance for the Receive Data (RD) signal needs to be connected only on units at the end of the lines.
This termination is made on the Alspa 8000 PLC products by connecting a jumper between pins 9 and 10 inside the 15–pin
D–shell with the following exception. For Alspa C80–75 PLCs with Catalog Numbers IC697CPU731J, and
IC697CPU771G and earlier the termination for RD at the PLC is implemented by a jumper between pins 9 and 11.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page C–3
Serial Port and Cables

5. COMPATIBLE PC SERIAL PORTS

Compatible PC, RS–232 serial ports are a 25–pin D–type male connector or a 9–pin male connector.

Figure C.2 shows the serial port connector layout for both types. Table C.3 shows the pin numbering and signal
assignment for both connector types.

a44522
PC PC

13 5
25 9
PIN
6
1

PIN
12
1

Figure C.2 – PC RS–232 Serial Port Connector Configuration

Table C.3 – PC RS–232 Serial Port Pins–out

PC (25–pin connector) PC (9–pin connector)

Pin No. Signal Description Pin No. Signal Description
1 NC 1 NC
2 TD Transmit Data 2 TD Transmit Data
3 RD Receive Data 3 RD Receive Data
4 RTS Request to Send 4 RTS Request to Send
5 CTS Clear to Send 5 CTS Clear to Send
6 NC 6 NC
7 GND Signal Ground 7 GND Signal Ground, 0V
8 DCD Data Carrier Detect 8 DCD Data Carrier Detect
9,10 NC 9 DTR Data Terminal Ready
11 Tied to line 20 NC = Not Connected
12–19 NC
20 DTR Data Terminal Ready
21 NC
22 Ring Indicate
23–25 NC

Page C–4 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Serial Port and Cables

6. PC–AT/XT SERIAL PORT

The PC–AT, PC–XT computer’s, RS–232 serial port is a 9–pin D–type male connector as shown in the figure
below.

a44523
PC–AT/XT

5
9
PIN
6
1

Figure C.3 – PC–AT/XT Serial Port

Table C.4 – PC–AT/XT Serial Port Pins–out

PC–AT PC–XT
Pin No. Signal Description Pin No. Signal Description
1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 1 NC
2 RD Receive Data 2 TD Transmit Data
3 TD Transmit Data 3 RD Receive Data
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 4 RTS Request to Send
5 GND Signal Ground 5 CTS Clear to Send
6 NC 6 NC
7 RTS Request to Send 7 GND Signal Ground
8 CTS Clear to Send 8 DCD Data Carrier Detect
9 NC 9 DTR Data Terminal Ready
NC = Not Connected

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page C–5
Serial Port and Cables

7. RS–232/RS–485 CONVERTER
The RS–232/RS–485 Converter (IC690ACC900) can be used to convert from RS–232 to RS–422/RS–485
communications. The converter has one 15–pin female D–type port and one 25–pin female D–type port.

For detailed information on the converter, refer to Appendix D. Examples of serial cable diagrams, which include
the converter, are provided in the remainder of this appendix.

8. SERIAL CABLE DIAGRAMS

This section describes only a few of the many and various Point–to–Point and Multidrop serial port connections
for Alspa 8000 PLCs.

In the point–to–point configuration only two devices can be connected to the same communication line. The
communication line can be directly connected using RS–232 (15 meters, 50 feet maximum) or RS–485 (1200
meters, 4000 feet maximum). Modems can be used for longer distances.

Note

The cable connector for the Alspa C80–75 and Alspa C80–35 PLCs serial port
must be a right angle connector in order for the hinged door on the module to
close properly. Refer to Table C.1 Connector/Cable Specification.

8.1. RS–232 Point–to–Point Connections

The next three figures illustrate typical RS–232 point–to–point connection to Alspa 8000 PLCs.

IC690CBL705 OR EQUIVALENT RS–232/RS–485 RS–422 a44506

RS–232 CONVERTER TWISTED SHIELDED

Î Î Î Î
SHIELDED PAIRS (IC690ACC900) PAIRS
PIN PIN PIN PIN

Î Î Î Î
TD 2 3 RD DCD ( B ) 2 2
RD 3 2 TD DCD ( A ) 3 3
RTS 4 5 CTS RD ( B’ ) 10 12 SD ( A )

Î Î Î Î
PC CTS 5 4 RTS RD ( A’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )
(COMPATIBLE) DCD 8 8 DCD SD ( B ) 12 10 RD ( A’ ) ALSPA

Î Î Î Î
DTR 20 SD ( A ) 13 11 RD ( B ’ ) 8000
RT 9 ** 9 RD PLC
RS–232 CTS ( B’ ) 15 6 RTS ( B )

Î Î Î Î
PORT CTS ( A’ ) 8 14 RTS ( A )
RS–422
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ ) PORT

Î Î Î Î
+5V 5 * 5 +5V
GND 7 7 GND 0V 7 * 7 0V
1 SHLD SHLD 1 1 SHLD
25–PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
RS–232 RS–485
PORT PORT

* POWER SOURCE FOR POINT–TO–POINT CONNECTION (3 METERS) 10 FEET ONLY. CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND (3 METERS) 10 FEET AND FOR MULTIDROP
CONNECTION MUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE.
** TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON
ALSPA 8000 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR ALSPA
C80–75 PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

Figure C.4 – Compatible PC (25–pin) Serial Connection to Alspa 8000 PLCs

Page C–6 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Serial Port and Cables

IC690CBL702 OR EQUIVALENT RS–232/RS–422 RS–422 a44507

Î Î Î Î
RS–232 CONVERTER TWISTED SHIELDED
SHIELDED PAIRS (IC690ACC900) PAIRS

ÎÎ Î Î Î
PIN PIN PIN PIN
RD 2 2 TD DCD ( A ) 2 2

ÎÎ Î Î Î
PC–AT TD 3 3 RD DCD ( B ) 3 3
(COMPATIBLE) RTS 7 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A )
CTS 8 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )

Î
ÎÎ Î Î Î
RS–232 DCD 1 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ ) ALSPA
PORT DTR 4 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B ) 8000

Î Î Î
GND 5 7 GND RT 9 ** 9 RD PLC
CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A )
9–PIN 9–PIN RS–422
CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B )

Î Î Î
MALE FEMALE PORT
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )

Î Î Î
*
+ 5V 5 5 + 5V
1 SHLD 0V 7 * 7 0V
25–PIN SHLD 1 1 SHLD
MALE 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
RS–232 RS–422
PORT PORT

* POWER SOURCE FOR POINT–TO–POINT CONNECTION 3 METERS (10 FEET) ONLY. CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND 3 METERS (10 FEET) AND FOR MULTIDROP
CONNECTION MUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE.
* * TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE
ALSPA 8000 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR ALSPA C80–75 PLCs,
CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

Figure C.5 – PC–AT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Alspa 8000 PLCs

IC690CBL701 OR EQUIVALENT RS–232/RS–422 RS–422

a44508
RS–232 CONVERTER TWISTED SHIELDED

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
SHIELDED PAIRS (IC690ACC900) PAIRS
PIN PIN PIN PIN
PC–XT RD 2 2 TD DCD ( A ) 2 2

ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
(COMPATIBLE) TD 3 3 RD DCD ( B ) 3 3
RTS 7 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A )

ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î
CTS 8 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )
DCD 1 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ ) ALSPA
RS–232 DTR 4 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B ) 8000

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
PORT GND 5 7 GND RT 9 ** 9 RD PLC
CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A )
9–PIN 9–PIN
CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B )

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
MALE FEMALE RS–422
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ ) PORT
*

Î Î
+5V 5 5 +5V
1 SHLD 0V 7 * 7 0V
25–PIN SHLD 1 1 SHLD
MALE 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
RS–232 RS–422
PORT PORT

* POWER SOURCE FOR POINT–TO–POINT CONNECTION (3 METERS) 10 FEET ONLY. CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND 3 METERS (10 FEET) AND FOR MULTIDROP CONNECTION
MUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE.
** TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE
ALSPA 8000 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR ALSPA C80–75 PLCs,
CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

Figure C.6 – PC–XT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Alspa 8000 PLCs

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page C–7
Serial Port and Cables

8.2. RS–422 Point–to–Point Connection

If your host device is equipped with a RS–422 card you can connect directly to Alspa 8000 PLCs as illustrated in
Figure C.7.

a44509
HOST
COMPUTER PLC
PIN SHIELDED TWISTED PAIRS PIN
RD ( A’ ) 12 SD ( A )
RD ( B’ ) 13 SD ( B )
SD ( A ) 10 RD ( A’ )
SD ( B ) 11 RD ( B ’ )
* 9 RD
CTS ( A’ ) 6 RTS ( A )
CTS ( B’ ) 14 RTS ( B )
RTS ( B ) 8 CTS ( B’ )
RTS ( A ) 15 CTS ( A’ )
3
2
GND 7 GND
SHLD 1 SHLD

UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 15.2 METERS (50 FEET)

(WITHOUT ISOLATION)

* TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE

CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE
ON THE ALSPA 8000 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND
PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR ALSPA C80–75
PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT
THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

Figure C.7 – Typical RS–422, Host to PLC Connection, with Handshaking

8.3. Multidrop Connections

In the multidrop configuration, the host device is configured as the master and one or more PLCs are configured
as slaves. This method can be used when the maximum distance between the master and any slave does not exceed
1200 meters (4000 feet). This figure assumes good quality cables and a moderately noisy environment. A
maximum of 8 slaves can be connected using RS–422 in a daisy chain or multidrop configuration. The RS–422
line must include handshaking and use wire type as specified in the Cable and Connector Specifications paragraph.

The following illustrations shows wiring diagrams and requirements for connecting an PS/2, PC–AT/XT or
compatible computer to Alspa 8000 PLCs in an 8–wire multidrop, serial data configuration.

Page C–8 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Serial Port and Cables

Î ÎÎ Î
IC690CBL705 OR EQUIVALENT RS–232/RS–422 RS–422
RS–232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNECTIONS a44511
(IC690ACC900) INSIDE D–CONNECTORS
SLAVE

Î ÎÎ Î Î
PIN PIN PIN PIN STATION
TD 2 3 RD DCD ( A ) 2 2

Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
RD 3 2 TD DCD ( B ) 3 3
RTS 4 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A ) ALSPA
PC CTS 5 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B ) C80–75

Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
(COMPATIBLE) DCD 8 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ )
DTR 20 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B’ ) CPU
RT 9 * 9 RD RS–422

Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
RS–232 CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A ) PORT
PORT CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B )
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )

Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )
+5V 5 5 +5V
GND 7 7 GND 0V 7 7 0V
1 SHLD SHLD 1 1 SHLD
25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN

Î
MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
RS–232 RS–422
LAST
PORT PORT
PIN STATION

Î
POWER 5V 2
NOTE SOURCE 3

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE FOR 12 SD ( A ) ALSPA
TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A CONVERTER 0V 13 SD ( B ) C80–35
DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW. 10 RD ( A’ )

Î Î
MASTER CONVERTER SLAVE STATION LAST STATION 11 RD ( B’ ) PS
* 9 RD RS–422
PLC 15–PIN CONNECTOR
6 RTS ( A ) PORT
ALSPA C80–35 LOCATED

Î
ON POWER SUPPLY 14 RTS ( B )
15 CTS ( A’ )
ALSPA C80–75 LOCATED
ON THE CPU BOARD 8 CTS ( B’ )

Î
5 +5V
ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS 7 0V
INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC. IT IS 1 SHLD
NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES OF
CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE. 15– PIN 15– PIN
TO OTHER PLC’s MALE FEMALE

* TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE
ON THE ALSPA 8000 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR ALSPA
C80–75 PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

GROUND POTENTIAL: MULTIPLE UNITS, NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE, MUST HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR PROPER
OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.

Figure C.8 – PC (25–pin)/Alspa 8000 PLC Multidrop Connection

Note

The cable connector for the Alspa C80–75 and Alspa C80–35 PLCs serial port
must be a right angle connector in order for the hinged door on the module to
close properly. Refer to Table C.1 Connector/Cable Specification.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page C–9
Serial Port and Cables

IC690CBL701 OR EQUIVALENT RS–232/RS–422 RS–422 a44512

RS–232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNECTIONS
INSIDE D–CONNECTORS SLAVE

Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
(IC690ACC900)
PIN PIN PIN PIN STATION
TD 2 3 RD DCD ( A ) 2 2

Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
PC
RD 3 2 TD DCD ( B ) 3 3
(COMPATIBLE)
RTS 4 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A ) ALSPA

Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
CTS 5 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B ) C80–75
RS–232 DCD 8 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ )
PORT DTR 9 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B’ ) CPU

Î ÎÎ
Î Î
GND 7 7 GND RT 9 * 9 RD RS–422
9– PIN CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A ) PORT
9– PIN
CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B )

ÎÎÎÎ Î
MALE FEMALE
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )

ÎÎÎ Î
+ 5V 5 5 + 5V
0V 7 7 0V
1 SHLD SHLD 1 1 SHLD
25– PIN 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE

Î
RS–232 RS–422
LAST
PORT PORT
PIN STATION

Î
POWER 5V 2
NOTE SOURCE 3
WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE 12 SD ( A )

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
FOR ALSPA
TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE CONVERTER 0V 13 SD ( B ) C80–35
IN A DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW. 10 RD ( A’ )

Î Î
MASTER CONVERTER SLAVE STATION LAST STATION 11 RD ( B’ ) PS
PLC 15–PIN CONNECTOR * 9 RD RS–422
6 RTS ( A ) PORT

Î
ALSPA C80–35 LOCATED
14 RTS ( B )
ON POWER SUPPLY
15 CTS ( A’ )
ALSPA C80–75 LOCATED

Î
8 CTS ( B’ )
ON THE CPU BOARD
5 + 5V
ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS 7 0V
INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC. IT IS 1 SHLD
NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES OF
15– PIN 15– PIN
CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE.
TO OTHER PLC’s MALE FEMALE

* TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE
ALSPA 8000 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR ALSPA C80–75 PLCs,
CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.
GROUND POTENTIAL: MULTIPLE UNITS, NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE, MUST HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR
PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.

Figure C.9 – PC (9–pin)/Alspa 8000 PLC Multidrop Connection

RS–422

Î ÎÎ Î
IC690CBL702 OR EQUIVALENT RS–232/RS–422
RS–232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNECTIONS a44513
(IC690ACC900) INSIDE D–CONNECTORS
SLAVE

Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î Î
PIN PIN PIN PIN STATION
TD 2 3 RD DCD ( A ) 2 2

ÎÎ
PC-AT

ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
RD 3 2 TD DCD ( B ) 3 3
(COMPATIBLE) RTS 4 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A ) ALSPA
CTS 5 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )
C80–75

ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
RS–232 DCD 8 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ )
PORT DTR 9 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B’ )
GND 7 7 GND RT 9 9 RD CPU
*

ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A ) RS–422
9– PIN 9– PIN
CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B ) PORT
MALE FEMALE RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )

ÎÎÎÎ Î
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )
+5V 5 5 +5V
0V 7 7 0V
1 SHLD SHLD 1 1 SHLD
25– PIN 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN

Î
MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
RS–232 RS–422 LAST
PORT PORT PIN STATION

Î
POWER 5V 2
NOTE 3
SOURCE
WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
12 SD ( A ) ALSPA
TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE FOR 0V 13 SD ( B )
IN A DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW. CONVERTER C80–35
10 RD ( A’ )

ÎÎ Î
MASTER CONVERTER SLAVE STATION LAST STATION 11 RD ( B’ )
* 9 RD PS
PLC 15–PIN CONNECTOR
6 RTS ( A ) RS–422
ALSPA C80–35 LOCATED

Î
14 RTS ( B ) PORT
ON POWER SUPPLY
15 CTS ( A’ )
ALSPA C80–75 LOCATED 8 CTS ( B’ )
ON THE CPU BOARD

Î
5 +5V
ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS 7 0V
INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC. IT IS 1 SHLD
NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES OF
CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE. 15– PIN 15– PIN
TO OTHER PLC’s MALE FEMALE

* TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE
ALSPA 8000 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR ALSPA C80–75 PLCs,
CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.
GROUND POTENTIAL: MULTIPLE UNITS, NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE, MUST HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR PROPER
OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.

Figure C.10 – PC–AT/Alspa 8000 PLC Multidrop Connection

Page C–10 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Serial Port and Cables

IC690CBL701 OR EQUIVALENT RS–232/RS–422 RS–422 a44514

RS–232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNECTIONS
(IC690ACC900) INSIDE D–CONNECTORS SLAVE

Î Î Î Î
PIN PIN PIN PIN STATION
TD 2 3 RD DCD ( A ) 2 2

Î Î Î Î
PC–XT RD 3 2 TD DCD ( B ) 3 3
(COMPATIBLE) RTS 4 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A ) ALSPA
CTS 5 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )

Î Î Î Î
C80–75
RS–232 DCD 8 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ )
PORT DTR 9 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B’ ) CPU

Î Î Î
GND 7 7 GND RT 9 * 9 RD RS–422
9– PIN CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A ) PORT
9– PIN
CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B )

Î Î Î
MALE FEMALE
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )

Î Î Î
+ 5V 5 5 + 5V
0V 7 7 0V
1 SHLD SHLD 1 1 SHLD
25– PIN 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE

Î
RS–232 RS–422
LAST
PORT PORT
PIN STATION

Î
POWER 5 2
NOTE SOURCE V 3
WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE FOR 12 SD ( A ) ALSPA

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE CONVERTER 0V 13 SD ( B ) C80–35
IN A DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW. 10 RD ( A’ )

Î Î
MASTER CONVERTER SLAVE STATION LAST STATION 11 RD ( B’ ) PS
PLC 15–PIN CONNECTOR * 9 RD RS–422
6 RTS ( A ) PORT

Î
ALSPA C80–35 LOCATED
14 RTS ( B )
ON POWER SUPPLY
15 CTS ( A’ )
ALSPA C80–75 LOCATED

Î
8 CTS ( B’ )
ON THE CPU BOARD
5 + 5V
ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS 7 0V
INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC. IT IS 1 SHLD
NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES OF
15– PIN 15– PIN
CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE.
TO OTHER PLC’s MALE FEMALE

* TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE
ALSPA 8000 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR ALSPA C80–75
PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

GROUND POTENTIAL: MULTIPLE UNITS, NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE, MUST HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR PROPER
OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.

Figure C.11 – PC–XT/Alspa 8000 PLC Multidrop Connection

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page C–11
Serial Port and Cables

Page C–12 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Appendix RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

This appendix provides a detailed description of the RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter (IC690ACC900) for
the Alspa 8000 Programmable Logic Controllers.

1. FEATURES
D Provides the Alspa 8000 PLCs with an interface to devices that use the RS–232 interface.

D Allows connection to programming computer without a specific board.

D Easy cable connection to either an Alspa C80–75 PLC or an Alspa C80–35 PLC.

D No external power needed; operates from +5 volt DC power on the Alspa 8000 PLC backplane.

D Convenient, light weight self–contained unit.

2. FUNCTIONS
The RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter provides an RS–232 serial interface for the Alspa C80–75 and Alspa
C80–35 PLCs, which have a built–in RS–422/RS–485 interface. Specifically, it provides a serial connection
between an Alspa C80–35 or Alspa C80–75 PLC serial port and the serial port on the programming computer. The
programming computer can be a PS/2 or compatible PC computer.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page D–1
RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

3. LOCATION IN SYSTEM
The RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 converter is a free–standing device which requires two cables as the connections
between the PLC and the programmer. Its location is limited only by the length of the connecting cables as listed
in the interface specifications (see Table 5). The cable at the PLC end that connects to the RS–422/RS–485
connector on the converter can be up to 3 meters (10 feet) in length (without an external source of +5 VDC) and
up to 300 meters (1000 feet) in length with an external source of +5 VDC. The cable from the RS–232 connector
on the converter to the programming computer’s serial port can be up to 15 meters (50 feet) in length.

FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW a44694

ÎÎÎÎÎ
IC690ACC900A
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
CABLE ADAPTER
MADE IN USA

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure D.1 – Front and Rear View of Converter
ÎÎÎÎÎ
4. INSTALLATION
Installation of the RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter consists of connecting two cables. Select the proper
cables for your installation. Prewired cables (see below) are available from Cegelec, or if cables of different lengths
are required by your application, you can build your own cables. Specifications for building these cables are
provided later in this appendix.

You do not need to connect an external source of power to the converter for a cable length of 3 meters (10 feet),
or less, since the necessary power connections of +5 VDC and signal ground are derived from the PLCs backplane
bus through the cable which connects to the Alspa C80–35 or C80–75 PLC.

1. Select one of the three RS–232 compatible cables (3 meters in length) that will connect the programmer’s (or
other serial device) RS–232 serial port to the RS–232 port on the converter. The catalog numbers of these
cables are: IC690CBL701 (use with PC–XT or compatible personal computer), IC690CBL702 (use with
PC–AT or compatible personal computer), and IC690CBL705 (use with PS/2 or compatible personal
computer).

2. A standard 2–meter (6–foot) cable (HHP compatible) is available to connect the RS–422/RS–485 port on the
converter to the RS–485 port on the Alspa C80–35 or Alspa C80–75 PLC. The catalog number of this cable is
IC693CBL303.

Page D–2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

Installation of these cables should be done with the PLC powered–down.

D Connect the 25–pin male connector on the 3–meter cable to the 25–pin female connector on the converter.

D Connect the female connector (9–pin or 25–pin) on the opposite end of this cable to the male RS–232 connector
(serial port) on the selected programming (or other serial) device. If you build you own cable, use a connector
that is compatible with your serial device.

D Notice that both ends of the 2–meter RS–422/RS–485 compatible cable are the same; a 15–pin male connector
is attached at both ends. Connect one end of this cable to the 15–pin female connector on the RS–422/RS–485
connector on the converter.

D Connect the other end of this cable to the 15–pin female connector, which interfaces to the RS–485 compatible
serial port on the Alspa C80–35 or Alspa C80–75 PLC. For the Alspa C80–35 PLC, this connector is accessed
by opening the hinged door on the power supply. The serial port connector for the Alspa C80–75 PLC is on
the CPU module and is accessed by opening the hinged door on the module.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page D–3
RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

5. CABLE DESCRIPTION
The serial connection to the Alspa C80–75 PLC (see Figure D–1) is to the RS–422/RS–485 compatible serial port
connector, located at the bottom of the CPU module behind the hinged door, through an available 2–meter (6–foot)
serial interface cable – IC693CBL303. Wiring information and recommended cable and connectors are provided
for those who may want to build their own cable having a different length.

The serial connection to the Alspa C80–35 PLC is to the RS–485 compatible serial port connector located behind
the hinged door on the right front of the power supply, through the same 2–meter serial interface cable,
IC693CBL303, or equivalent, Figure D.2.

Alspa C80–75 a44695

Î Î
C
P
U PC

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RS–485 RS–232

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CONVERTER

Figure D.2 – Typical Configuration with Alspa C80–75 PLC

ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
a44681

Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
Alspa C80–35 PC

ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RS–485
ÎÎÎÎ RS–232
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CONVERTER

Figure D.3 – Typical Configuration with Alspa C80–35 PLC

Page D–4 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

5.1. RS–232 Interface Pin Assignments

Pin assignments and signal definitions for the RS–232 interface are listed below.

Table D.1 – RS–232 Interface for Converter

Pin Signal Name Function I/O
1 Shield Cable shield –
2 SD Transmitted Data Out
3 RD Received Data In
4 RTS Request To Send Out
5 CTS Clear To Send In
6 – No connection –
7 SG Signal Ground –
8 DCD Data Carrier Detect In
9/19 – No connection –
20 DTR Data Terminal Ready Out
21 to 25 – No connection –

5.2. RS–422/RS–485 Interface Pin Assignments

Pin assignments and signal definitions for the RS–422/RS–485 interface are listed below.

Table D.2 – RS–422/RS–485 Interface for Converter

Pin Signal Name Function I/O
1 Cable Shield
2 DCD(A) Differential Data Carrier Detect Out
3 DCD(B) Differential Data Carrier Detect Out
4 ATCH/ Attach (used with HHP) n/a
5 +5 VDC Logic Power In
6 RTS(A) Differential Request To Send Out
7 SG Signal Ground, 0V In
8 CTS(B’) Differential Clear To Send In
9 RT Resistor Terminator n/a
10 RD(A’) Differential Receive Data In
11 RD(B’) Differential Receive Data In
12 SD(A) Differential Send Data Out
13 SD(B) Differential Send Data Out
14 RTS(B) Differential Request To Send Out
15 CTS(A’) Differential Clear To Send In

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page D–5
RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

6. LOGIC DIAGRAM
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter.

a44539
RS–232/RS–485
RS–232 CONVERTER RS–485
25–PIN (IC690ACC900) 15–PIN
1 1
SHIELD SHIELD

9
TERMINATOR
RESISTOR
120 Ω
11
RD ( B’ )
2
SD
10
RD ( A’ )

13
SD (B )
3
RD
12
SD (A )

ÎÎ
CTS ( B’ )
MODEM

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
4 15
RTS
CTS ( A’ )

14
RTS ( B )
5
CTS
6
RTS ( A )

ÎÎDCD 3

ÎÎ
DCD 8 DCD ( B )

ÎÎ 2
DCD ( A )

LOGIC 5
+5
POWER
7
ÎÎ 7
SG

ÎÎ
SG
NC

ÎÎ
20 4
DTR ATTACH ATCH/

ÎÎ
Figure D.4 – RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter Logic Diagram

Page D–6 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

7. JUMPER CONFIGURATION
There are three jumper locations on the converter board for selection of user options. Each jumper position has
three pins, as shown in the following illustration. These jumper positions, labeled JP2, JP3 and JP4, are accessed
by removing the square plastic cover on the top of the converter. Configuration can be changed as required by
carefully removing one or more of the jumpers with a pair of needle nose pliers and placing it on the desired pair
of pins.

Refer to the description of these selectable jumper positions in the following table and place the jumper on the
selected pair of pins. The pin numbers are 1, 2 and 3. Default jumper locations are indicated by a rectangle around
the pins to be jumpered for each position. The default pin numbers are 1 and 2.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ a44680

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RS–422/RS485
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ RS–232

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ 1
2
3

Figure D.5 – Location of Jumpers for User Options

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page D–7
RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

Table D.3 – Jumper Configuration for RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

Jumper Jumper
Position Label Position Description [

JP2 DCD 12 3 Default position 1 and 2 is used when the device

communicating with the PLC does not supply the
Carrier Detect signal. JP2 forces the DCD signal
active on the RS–485 port.

123 Use jumper positions 2 and 3 if the device does

supply the Carrier Detect signal. This allows the
programming device to control DCD.

JP3 MODEM 123 Default position 1 and 2 is used when an attached

Modem does not require the Clear To Send (CTS)
signal. This allows the programming device to
control the RTS signal.

123 Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used when the

attached Modem does require the CTS signal (most
modems require this signal). Forces RTS to be
continually active.

JP4 ATTACH 123 Default position 1 and 2 is used for most

applications communicating with the PLC via a
serial programming device.

123 Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used if the device

communicating with the PLC is intended to
emulate the HHP protocol.

[ Refer to the documentation for your serial device for signal requirements.

Page D–8 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

8. EXAMPLE OF CABLE CONFIGURATIONS

Examples of cable configurations required when using the converter can be found in Appendix C. Specifications
for the converter are shown in the following table.

Table D.4 – Specifications for IC690ACC900 Converter

Power Requirements:
Voltage 5 volts DC, +5%
Current 170 mA, ±5%

RS–422/RS–485 Interface Cables:

Maximum cable length 300 meters (1000 feet)
Cable Type: [
2 meters (6 feet) Cable type: Belden 9508, 0.205 mm2 (AWG 24)
10 meters (30 feet) ] Cable type: Belden 9309, 0.325 mm2 (AWG 22) wire
. 10 meters, up to 300 meters Same cable as for 10 meters.
(1000 feet)]
Connector Type 15–pin D–type Male Subminiature (both ends)

RS–232 Interface Cable:

Maximum cable length 15 meters (50 feet)
Up to 15 meters (50 feet)
Connector Type 25–pin D–type Female Subminiature (converter end) 9–pin, 15–pin, or
25–pin (depending on type of connector on your serial device) D–type
Female Subminiature (programming device end)

[ Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only. Any cable having the same electrical characteristics is acceptable. It is
strongly recommended that you use stranded wire. Since it is sometimes hard to find a cable with the desired number of twisted
pairs (the Belden 9309 has an extra pair), you may end up with a cable with extra pairs.
] For distances over 3 meters (10 feet), the +5 volt DC logic power source must be provided externally by connecting an external
power supply to the +5V and SG (0V) connections at the converter end of the cable. The +5V pin at the PLC connector end
of the cable must not be connected to the cable. The +5V and SG connections from the external power supply must be isolated
from its own power line ground connection. Ensure that there is no connection between the external supply and the PLC except
the SG cable connection.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page D–9
RS–422/RS–485 to RS–232 Converter

Page D–10 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Appendix Isolated Repeater/Converter

This appendix describes how to use the Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) with Alspa 8000 PLCs. The
following topics are covered in this appendix.

D Description of the Isolated Repeater/Converter,

D System Configurations,

D Cable Diagrams.

This unit can be purchased from Cegelec. Please contact any Cegelec sales office or PLC distributor.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page E–1
Isolated Repeater/Converter

1. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER

The Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) can be used for the following purposes.

D To provide ground isolation where a common ground cannot be established between components.

D To boost RS–422 signals for greater distance and more drops.

D To convert signals from RS–232 to RS–422 or RS–422 to RS–232.

The figure on the next page shows the appearance of the unit and the location of features that are of interest to the
user.

Î
(TOP VIEW)
a42418

Î Î Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎRS422

ÎRS422

ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
POWER FUSE
CORD H

ÎÎ Î
115VAC
N
230VAC RS232C

ÎÎ Î
N
G

ÎÎ Î
ISOLATED RS232
ADAPTOR UNIT

ÎÎ J1
ÎÎÎ
POWER
J2

SWITCH

ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
FUSE
POWER
CORD

(BACK VIEW)

FUSE–1AMP

(SIDE VIEW)

Figure E.1 – Isolated/Repeater Converter

Page E–2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Isolated Repeater/Converter

Items of interest to the user on the Isolated Repeater/Converter are described below.

D Two 25–pin female D–type connectors (Two 25–pin male, D–type connectors (solder pot), are included for
user cabling.).

D 115/230 VAC power connection (internal) 4–position terminal block.

D Fused 1 Amp power protection.

D Power ON (green) indicator LED.

D Three–position toggle switch, recessed in the back of the unit, is set according to the system configurations
shown later in this appendix.

1.1. Logic Diagram of the Isolated Repeater/Converter

The figure below provides a functional look at the unit. Note the 3–position switch for controlling the J1 port
transmitters. This switch is discussed in System Configurations later in this appendix.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page E–3
Isolated Repeater/Converter

a44782
OPTICAL RS–422/RS–232C
RS–422 J2
ISOLATION
J1 2
SD (RS–232C)

22 22

RD ( B’ ) SD (B )
14 14

15 15

RD ( A’ ) SD (A )
23 23

8 4
RTS (RS–232C)

CTS ( B’ )
10
10
RTS (B )
RESISTOR
150 11
11 RTS (A )

CTS ( A’ ) 19
9

RD ( B’ )
17
25

ÎÎ
SD ( B ) 16
17

ÎÎ
RD ( A’ )
18
16

SD ( A ) 3
24 RD (RS–232C)

CTS ( B’ )
12

ÎÎ
12
RTS (B )

ÎÎ
13
13
RTS (A )
CTS ( A ’)
9

5
CTS (RS–232C)
( CTS)

(ON)
(SE)
ISOLATED 25
POWER SE (RS–232C)
115 SUPPLIES
VAC

Figure E.2 – RS–422 Isolated Repeater/RS–232 Converter Logic Diagram

Page E–4 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Isolated Repeater/Converter

Note

All inputs are biased to the inactive state. Inputs left unconnected will produce
a binary 1 (OFF) state on the corresponding output.

1.2. Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater/Converter

Table E.1 – Isolated Repeater/Converter Pin Assignments

J1 RS–422 Port (25–pin female connector) J2 RS–422/RS–232 Port (25–pin female

connector)
Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description
1 NC 1 NC
2 NC 2 SD Send Data (RS–232)
3 NC 3 RD Receive Data (RS–232)
4 NC 4 RTS Request to Send (RS–232)
5 NC 5 CTS Clear to Send (RS–232)
6 NC 6 NC
7 0V Ground Connection 7 0V Ground Connection
8 CTS(B’) Clear to Send (Optional Termination) 8 CTS(B’) Clear to Send Optional Termination)
9 CTS(A’) Clear to Send (Optional Termination) 9 CTS(A’) Clear to Send (Optional Termination)
10 CTS(B’) Clear to Send 10 RTS(B) Request to Send
11 CTS(A’) Clear to Send 11 RTS(A) Request to Send
12 RTS(B) Request to Send 12 CTS(B’) Clear to Send
13 RTS(A) Request to Send 13 CTS(A’) Clear to Send
14 RD(B’) Receive Data 14 SD(B) Send Data
15 RD(A’) Receive Data 15 SD(A) Send Data
16 SD(A) Send Data 16 RD(A’) Receive Data
17 SD(B) Send Data 17 RD(B’) Receive Data
18 NC 18 RD(A’) Receive Data (Optional Termination)
19 NC 19 RD(B’) Receive Data (Optional Termination)
20 NC 20 NC
21 NC 21 NC
22 RD(B’) Receive Data 22 SD(B) Send Data (Optional Termination)
23 RD(A’) Receive Data 23 SD(A) Send Data (Optional Termination)
24 SD(A) Send Data 24 NC

NC=No Connection
SD (Send Data) and RD (Receive Data) are the same as TXD and RXD.
(A) and (B) are the same as – and + A and B denote outputs, and A’ and B’ denote inputs.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page E–5
Isolated Repeater/Converter

Caution

The signal ground connections (pin 7 on each connector) must be made

between the Isolated Repeater/Converter and the PLC for J1, and the
Isolated Repeater/Converter and the host computer for J2.
Pin 7 of the J1 port is connected to the metal shell of the J1 connector. Pin
7 of the J2 port is connected to the metal shell of the J2connector. These
two signal ground connections are isolated from each other and are
isolated from the power system ground (green wire on the terminal block).
To maintain proper isolation, these signal grounds cannot be tied together.

RS–232 RS–422 ISOLATED REPEATER RS–422 a44783

SHIELDED RS–232 CONVERTER TWISTED SHIELDED

Î Î Î Î
PAIRS (IC655CCM590) PAIRS
PIN PIN J2 J1 PIN PIN
150 Ω

Î Î Î Î
TD 3 RD RD (B’) 22 2
** RD (A’) 23
RD 2 SD 3
RTS 5 CTS RD ( A’ )15 12 SD ( A )

Î Î Î Î
CTS 4 RTS RD ( B’ )14 13 SD ( B )
DCD SD ( A )16 10 RD ( A’ ) Alspa
HOST

Î Î Î Î
DTR SD ( B )17 11 RD ( B’ ) 8000
COMPUTER CTS ( A’ )11
* 9
6
RD
RTS ( A )
PLC

Î Î Î Î
CTS ( B’ )10 14 RTS ( B )
RTS ( A )13 15 CTS ( A’ ) RS–422
RTS ( B )12 8 CTS ( B’ ) PORT

Î Î Î Î
GND 7 GND 0V 7 7 0V
1 SHLD
25–PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN 15– PIN 25– PIN 15– PIN
MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
RS–232/ RS–422
RS–422 PORT ** SWITCH IN CENTER POSITION
PORT

115VAC

* TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES.
THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE ALSPA 8000 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE
15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR C80–75 PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771,
THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

Figure E.3 – Example RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Connection

Page E–6 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Isolated Repeater/Converter

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
The figures below show various ways you can connect the Isolated Repeater/Converter to convert signals, expand
the number of drops and obtain greater distance. Any system configuration can be reduced to a minimum number
of cables each covering a part of the overall system configuration. The following examples system configurations
below refer to these cables as Cables A through E which are described in Cable Diagrams later in this paragraph.

Downstream and Upstream Contention. In this paragraph, simple multidrop configurations are those where a
single Isolated Repeater/Converter is used. Complex multidrop configurations contain one or more multidrop
sections where an Isolated Repeater/Converter is included as one of the drops. In both simple and complex
multidrop configurations, the transmitters directed downstream from the master can be on at all times. There will
be no contention for the communication line because only one device (the master) transmits downstream.

In simple multidrop configurations, there will be no contention when transmitting upstream as long as devices
tri–state their drivers when idle and turn them on only when they have something to transmit. This is the case for
the Alspa C80–75 and Alspa C80–35 CMMS.

In complex multidrop configurations, however, special steps must be taken to switch the upstream transmitters of
the Isolated Repeater/Converter.

Switching Upstream Transmitters. For the RS–422 drivers to be active at the J2 port of the Isolated
Repeater/Converter, the RTS input at J1 must be true. The state of the RS–422 drivers at the J1 port depends on
the position of the switch on the unit. When the switch is in the center position, the J1 transmitters will always be
turned on. When the switch is in the CTS position, (toward the power cable), then either the RS–232 or RS–422
CTS signal must be true to turn on the J1 drivers.

Note

Note the position of the switch on the Isolated/Repeater Converter in the

system configurations below.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page E–7
Isolated Repeater/Converter

2.1. Simple Multidrop Configuration

This configuration shows how to connect a single Isolated Repeater/Converter for signal conversion or greater
distance.

RS–232 RS–422 RS–422 a44927

Alspa 8000 PLC (CABLE A) (CABLE B) *BRICK (CABLE D)
OR Alspa 8000 PLC
J2 J1
HOST
SW ON
Alspa 8000 PLC
* BRICK IS THE NICKNAME FOR THE
ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER

Figure E.4 – Simple System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter

2.2. Complex Multidrop Configuration

This configuration shows how to connect multiple Isolated Repeater/Converters for signal conversion, greater
distance and more drops.

RS–422 a44928
(CABLE C)
ALSPA 8000 PLC
ALSPA 8000
PLC
OR
HOST ALSPA 8000 PLC

RS–422 RS–422
(CABLE D) (CABLE D)
*BRICK *BRICK ALSPA 8000 PLC
J1 J1
J2 J2
RS–232 SW ON SW ON
(CABLE A)
ALSPA 8000 PLC

RS–422
(CABLE B)

RS–422 RS–422
(CABLE D) (CABLE D)
*BRICK *BRICK ALSPA 8000 PLC
J1 J1
J2 J2
SW ON SW ON

ALSPA 8000 PLC

RS–232
(CABLE E)
*BRICK ALSPA 8000 PLC
* BRICK IS THE NICKNAME FOR THE
ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER J1
J2

SW CTS

Figure E.5 – Complex System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter

Page E–8 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Isolated Repeater/Converter

2.3. Rules for Using Repeater/Converters in Complex Networks

When designing a complex multidrop network including PLCs and RS-422 repeater/converters (bricks), the
following rules apply:

Rule 1: When using a brick as a repeater, port J2 should always be directed toward the host device and Port J1
should always be directed away from the host device. The switch located on the side of the brick should always
be in the center position (ON). The only case in which Port J1 is directed toward the host is when the brick is used
as a converter (RS-232) at the slave. The switch is in the right position (CTS).

Rule 2: If an Alspa 8000 CMM slave device is located downstream of a brick, set the configuration of the CMM
serial port to NONE flow control with a 10 ms Modem Turnaround Delay (Applies to CCM, SNP and SNP-X
protocols only).

Rule 3: Do not place more than 3 bricks in a single communication path between the host and the slave devices.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page E–9
Isolated Repeater/Converter

3. CABLE DIAGRAMS
The cable diagrams below are referred to as Cables A–E from the system configurations in the previous figures.
These diagrams illustrate the principles for constructing your own cables and can be modified to fit your specific
application.

a44929

Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
PIN PIN J2 SW ON J1

Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
TD 2 3 RD
RD 3 2 SD

ÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
RTS 4 4 RTS
CTS 5 5 CTS

ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
ALSPA 8000 ISOLATED
DCD 8 REPEATER/
CMM

Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
DTR 20 CONVERTER
(BRICK)
PORT
1 OR 2

ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
GND 7 7 GND
SHLD 1

25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN

FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE

Figure E.6 – Cable A; RS232 CMM to Converter

a44930

ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
PIN PIN J2 SW ON J1

ÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ
SD (A) 9 16 RD (A’)
SD (B) 21 17 RD (B’)

ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
RD (A’) 13 15 SD (A)
ALSPA 8000 RD (B’) 25 14 SD (B)

ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
ISOLATED
CMM TERM 12 * 19 TERM
REPEATER/
TERM 24 18 TERM

ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
CONVERTER
PORT RTS (A) 10 * 10 RTS (B)
(BRICK)

ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
1 OR 2 CTS (A’) 11 12 CTS (B’)
RTS (B) 22 11 RTS (A)

ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
CTS (B’) 23 13 CTS (A’)
GND 7 7 GND
SHLD 1

25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN

FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE

* TERMINATE CONNECTION: ON THE CMM, INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHM RESISTOR.
ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER, INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR (SUPPLIED).

Figure E.7 – Cable B; RS422 CMM to Converter

Page E–10 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Isolated Repeater/Converter

SUBSTITUTE APPROPRIATE UP STREAM DEVICE a44931

(WITHIN DOTTED BOX) PER SYSTEM DIAGRAMS. SHIELDED MAKE CONNECTIONS
TWISTED INSIDE D–CONNECTORS

ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
PAIRS
PIN PIN

ÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
Î
SD (A) 9 13 RD (A’)
SD (B) 21 25 RD (B’)
ALSPA 8000 RD (A’) 13 9 SD (A)

ÎÎ
Î Î Î
ÎÎ
CMM RD (B’) 25 21 SD (B)
12 12 TERM ALSPA 8000
TERM
PORT 24 24 TERM CMM
TERM

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
1 OR 2 RTS (A) 10 * * 10 RTS (A)
CTS (A’) 11 11 CTS (A’) PORT
RTS (B) 22 22 RTS (B) I

ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
CTS (B’) 23 23 CTS (B’) OR
GND 7 7 0V 2 **

ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
SHLD 1 1 SHLD

25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN

FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE

ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
SW ON J1 PIN PIN J1 SW CTS J2
J2

Î Î
ÎÎ
SD (A) 16 15 RD (A’)
SD (B) 17 14 RD (B’)
RD (A’) 15 16 SD (A)

Î Î Î
ÎÎ Î
RD (B’) 14 17 SD (B)
RTS (B) 12 22 TERM ISOLATED
ISOLATED CTS (B’) 10 REPEATER/

Î Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
REPEATER/ RTS (A) 13 23 TERM CONVERTER
CONVERTER CTS (A’) 11 * 150 OHMS (BRICK)
(BRICK) TERM 22

ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
(USED AS A
TERM 23 CONVERTER)
GND 7 7 GND

Î ÎÎ
Î Î
* 150 OHMS

25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN

FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE

NOTE

WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES,

ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE
REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A DAISY PIN J2 SW ON J1
CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW.

ÎÎ
Î
16 RD (A’)
MASTER CMM SLAVE 1 17 RD (B’)
15 SD (A)

Î
ÎÎ Î
14 SD (B)
19 TERM ISOLATED
REPEATER/

Î
ÎÎ Î
18 TERM CONVERTER
* 150 OHMS (BRICK)

ÎÎ
Î Î Î
(USED AS A
CPU BUILT–IN PORT CMM SLAVE 2 REPEATER)
7 GND

25– PIN
MALE
ÎÎ
Î Î 25– PIN
FEMALE
Î
ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY
CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE
MOUNTED ON THE CMM. IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO TO OTHER DEVICES
USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES OF (MAXIMUM OF 8 DEVICES ON A MULTIDROP)
CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE
TRANSMISSION LINE. TERMINATE THE RD (B’) SIGNAL ONLY AT END
OF MULTIDROP CABLE

* TERMINATE CONNECTION ON FIRST AND LAST DROPS ONLY: ON THE CMM, INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHM
RESISTOR. ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER, INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR (SUPPLIED)

** ON THE CMM311, ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS–422/RS–485.

Figure E.8 – Cable C; RS422 Twisted Pair

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page E–11
Isolated Repeater/Converter

SHIELDED MAKE CONNECTIONS a44932

ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
TWISTED INSIDE D–CONNECTORS
PAIRS
J2 SW J1 PIN PIN

ÎÎ Î
ON
SD (A) 16 13 RD (A’)
SD (B) 17 25 RD (B’)

ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
RD (A’) 15 9 SD (A)
RD (B’) 14 21 SD (B)
ALSPA 8000

ÎÎ
RTS (A)

Î
CTS (A’) 11 10
ISOLATED CTS (B’) 10 22 RTS (B) CMM
REPEATER/

ÎÎ
PORT

ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
CONVERTER TERM 22
(BRICK) I
TERM 23 24 TERM OR

ÎÎ Î
GND 7 7 GND 2
*150 OHMS
* 1 SHLD
**

Î 25– PIN
FEMALE
Î 25– PIN
MALE
25– PIN
MALE
Î 25– PIN
FEMALE

NOTE

Î Î
WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES,
REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSION
LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE J1 J2
PIN SW CTS

Î Î
CABLE IN A DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS
SHOWN BELOW.
15 RD (A’)
14 RD (B’)

Î Î
16 SD (A)
MASTER CMM SLAVE 1 17 SD (B)
13 ISOLATED

Î Î
RTS (A)
12 RTS (B) REPEATER/
CONVERTER
(BRICK)

Î Î
22 TERM
(USED AS A

Î Î
23 TERM CONVERTER)
7 GND
CPU BUILT–IN PORT CMM SLAVE 2 * 150 OHMS

25– PIN
MALE
Î 25– PIN
FEMALE
Î
ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY
NECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE
CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON
THE CMM. IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO
USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES
OF CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF
THE TRANSMISSION LINE.

Î Î
PIN J2 SW ON J1

16 RD (A’)

Î Î
17 RD (B’)
15 SD (A)
14 SD (B)

Î Î
11 RTS (A) ISOLATED
10 RTS (B) REPEATER/
CONVERTER

Î Î
(BRICK)
19 TERM
(USED AS A

Î Î
18 TERM REPEATER)
7 GND
*

Î Î
150 OHMS

25– PIN 25– PIN

MALE FEMALE

TO OTHER DEVICES
(MAXIMUM OF 8 DEVICES ON A MULTIDROP)

TERMINATE THE RD (B’) SIGNAL ONLY AT END OF MULTIDROP CABLE

TERMINATE CONNECTION ON FIRST AND LAST DROPS ONLY: ON THE CMM, INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL
* 120 OHM RESISTOR. ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER, INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR (SUPPLIED)

** ON THE CMM311, ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS–422/RS–485.

Figure E.9 – Cable D; RS422 Twisted Pair

Page E–12 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Isolated Repeater/Converter

Î Î
ÎÎ Î
Î
J1 SW CTS J2 PIN PIN a45239

SD 2 3 RD

Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
RD 3 2 SD
5 CTS ALSPA 8000

Î ÎÎ Î
CTS 5 4 RTS CMM
ISOLATED
GND 7 7 GND
REPEATER/ PORT

Î ÎÎ Î
CONVERTER 1
(BRICK) OR
8 DCD 2

Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
20 DTR

1 SHLD

25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN

FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE

Figure E.10 – Cable E; RS-232 Converter to CMM

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page E–13
Isolated Repeater/Converter

Page E–14 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Appendix Miniconverter Kit

F
This appendix describes the Miniconverter Kit for use with Alspa 8000 PLCs.

1. DESCRIPTION OF MINICONVERTER
The Miniconverter Kit (IC690ACC901) consists of an RS–422 (SNP) to RS–232 Miniconverter, 2–meter (6–foot)
serial extension cable and a 9–pin to 25–pin Converter Plug assembly. The 15–pin SNP port connector on the
Miniconverter plugs directly into the serial port connector on the Alspa C80–35 power supply, Alspa C80–75 CPU
or Alspa C80–25 CPU. The 9–pin RS–232 port connector on the Miniconverter connects to an RS–232 compatible
device.

a44985

RS–422 RS–232
PORT PORT

Figure F.1 – Alspa 8000 SNP to RS–232 Miniconverter

When used with a PC–AT, or compatible computer, one end of the extension cable plugs into the Miniconverter’s
9–pin serial port connector, the other end plugs into the 9–pin serial port of the computer. The Converter plug
(supplied with kit) is required to convert the 9–pin serial port connector on the Miniconverter to the 25–pin serial
port connector on a PC–XT or PS/2 or compatible computer.

1.1. Pin Assignments, RS–232 Port

The pinout of the Miniconverter is shown in the following two tables. The first table shows the pinout for the
RS–232 port. The direction of signal flow is with respect to the Miniconverter.

Table F.1 – Miniconverter RS–232 Port

Pin Signal Name Direction
2 SD – Send Data Output
3 RD – Receive Data Input
5 GND – Ground n/a
7 CTS – Clear To Send Input
8 RTS – Request To Send Output

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page F–1
Miniconverter Kit

The pinouts were chosen to allow direct connection (using a straight through, or 1 to 1 cable (as provided with kit))
to the PC–AT. Most PC compatible computers equipped with an RS–232 port will provide a pinout compatible with
the one shown above.

1.2. Pin Assignments, RS–422 Port

Table F.2 is the pinout for the Miniconverter’s RS–422 serial port. The direction of signal flow is also with respect
to the Miniconverter.

Table F.2 – Miniconverter RS–422 Port

Pin Signal Name Direction
1 SHLD – Shield n/a
5 +5 VDC – Power Input
6 CTS(A’) – Clear To Send Input
7 GND – Ground n/a
8 RTS(B) – Request To Send Output
9 RT – Receive Termination Output
10 SD(A) – Send Data Output
11 SD(B) – Send Data Output
12 RD(A’) – Receive Data Input
13 RD(B’) – Receive Data Input
14 CTS(B’) Clear To Send Input
15 RTS(A) – Request To Send Output

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
The Miniconverter can be used in a point–to–point configuration as described above, or in a multidrop
configuration with the host device configured as the master and one or more PLCs configured as slaves.

The multidrop configuration requires a straight through (1 to 1) cable from the Miniconverter’s RS–422 port to
the first slave PLC’s SNP port. Other slaves will require a daisy chain connection between slaves. A maximum
of eight devices can be connected in an RS–422 multidrop configuration. All of the devices must have a common
ground. If ground isolation is required, you can use the Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) in place of
the Miniconverter.

When using the Miniconverter with a modem connection, it may be necessary to jumper RTS to CTS (consult the
user’s manual for your modem).

Page F–2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Miniconverter Kit

3. CABLE DIAGRAMS (POINT–TO–POINT)

When connecting the Miniconverter to PC and compatible computers with hardware handshaking, the following
cable connections should be used.

a44982
PIN PIN
TXD 2 2 RXD
RXD 3 3 TXD
CTS 7 7 RTS
RTS 8 8 CTS
GND 5 5 GND
1 DCD
6 DSR
4 DTR
MINICONVERTER PC–AT
RS–232 PORT 9–PIN
9–PIN CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR

Figure F.2 – Miniconverter to PC–AT

a44983
PIN PIN
TXD 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 2 TXD
CTS 7 4 RTS
RTS 8 5 CTS
GND 5 7 GND
8 DCD
6 DSR
20 DTR
MINICONVERTER PC–XT, PS/2
RS–232 PORT 25–PIN
9–PIN CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR

Figure F.3 – Miniconverter to PC–XT, PS/2

a44984
PIN PIN
TXD 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 2 TXD
CTS 7 4 RTS
RTS 8 5 CTS
GND 5 7 GND
MINICONVERTER COMPATIBLE PC
RS–232 PORT 9–PIN
9–PIN CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR

Figure F.4 – Miniconverter to 9–Pin PC–XT or compatible computer

(Additional Adapter Required)

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page F–3
Miniconverter Kit

Table F.3 – Miniconverter Specifications

Mechanical:
RS–422 15–pin D shell male for direct mounting to Alspa 8000 serial port.
RS–232 9–pin D shell male for connection to RS–232 serial port of a PC or compatible.
Electrical and General:
Voltage Supply +5 VDC (supplied by PLC power supply)
Typical Current Version A (IC690ACC901A) – 150 mA
Version B (IC690ACC901B) – 100 mA
Operating Temperature 0 to 70_ C (32 to 158_ F)
Baud Rate 38.4 K Baud maximum
Conformance EIA–422 (Balanced Line) or EIA–423 (Unbalanced Line)
Ground Isolation Not provided

Page F–4 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Appendix Cable Data Sheets

Cables used with the Alspa C80–35 Programmable Logic Controller are described in this manual and other
documents. This appendix provides a data sheet describing each of the Alspa C80–35 PLC cable types so that all
cable information can be found in one convenient location. Each data sheet contains the following information:

D Cable name and function,

D Applicable catalog numbers,

D Hardware description of cable: connector types, cable type, other relevant hardware,

D Wiring diagram of cable.

Information on these cables is included in this appendix:

D IC690CBL701
PCM to PC-XT,

D IC690CBL702
PCM to PC-AT,

D IC690CBL705
PCM to PS/2,

D IC693CBL300
I/O Expansion cable, 1 meter (3 feet), continuous shield,

D IC693CBL301
I/O Expansion cable, 2 meters (6 feet)), continuous shield,

D IC693CBL302
I/O Expansion cable, 15 meters (50 feet)), continuous shield,

D IC693CBL312
I/O Expansion cable, 0.15 meters (0.5 feet), continuous shield,

D IC693CBL313
I/O Expansion cable, 9 meters (30 feet), continuous shield,

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page G–1
Cable Data Sheets

D IC693CBL303
Hand-Held Programmer cable, 2 meters (6 feet),

D IC693CBL305
”Y” cable - Port expansion (used with PCM301, PCM311, and CMM311),

D IC693CBL315
I/O Interface cable for 24-pin connectors on high-density I/O modules, 3 meters (10 feet),

D IC693CBL311
I/O Interface cable for 24-pin connectors on APM301/APM302, 3 meters (10 feet).

D IC693CBL317
I/O Interface cable (with external shield pigtail) for 24-pin connectors on APU301/302, 3 meters (10 feet)

D IC693CBL320
I/O Interface cable (with external shield pigtail) for 24-pin connectors on APU301/302, 1 meter (3 feet)

Page G–2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Cable Data Sheets

1. IC690CBL701: PCM, ADC, CMM TO PC-XT CABLE

1.1. Function of cable

This cable provides RS-232 signal connections between the RS-232 port on a PCM, ADC, or CMM module and
a serial port on a PC–XT or equivalent Personal Computer.

1.2. Cable Specifications

Cable Length 3 meters (10 feet)
Connectors
PCM/ADC/CMM Side 25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1, or equivalent
Programmer Side 9-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205203-1, or equivalent
Cable Clamps
25-pin AMP 207908-7 or equivalent
9-pin AMP 207908-1 or equivalent
Cable Type Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired 0.21 mm2 (AWG 24), Belden 9536 or equivalent

1.3. Wiring Diagram

ÎÎ PIN PIN
Î
a42831

ÎÎÎ TD 2 3 RD
Î
ÎÎÎ Î
RD 3 2 TD

ÎÎÎ Î
RTS 4 5 CTS
PC-XT CTS 5 20 DTR PCM

ÎÎÎ DCD 8 8 DCD

Î
ÎÎÎ Î
DTR 9 1 SHLD
GND 7 7 GND
9– PIN 9– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN
FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE

Figure G.1 – PCM, ADC, or CMM to PC-XT Serial Cable

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page G–3
Cable Data Sheets

2. IC690CBL702: PC-AT TO PCM, ADC, CMM CABLE

2.1. Function of cable

This cable provides RTS-232 signal connections between the RS-232 port on a PCM, ADC, or CMM module and
a serial port on a PC-AT or equivalent Personal Computer.

2.2. Cable Specifications

Cable Length 3 meters (10 feet)
Connectors
PCM/ADC/CMM Side 25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1, or equivalent
Programmer Side 9-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205203-1, or equivalent
Cable Clamps
25-pin AMP 207908-7 or equivalent
9-pin AMP 207908-1 or equivalent
Cable Type Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired 0.21 mm2 (AWG 24), Belden 9536 or equivalent

2.3. Wiring Diagram

Î ÎÎ
PIN PIN a42832

ÎÎ DCD 1 1 SHLD
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
RD 2 2 TD

Î
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
TD 3 3 RD
PC–AT DTR 4 8 DCD PCM

Î
ÎÎÎ RTS 7 5 CTS
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
CTS 8 20 DTR
GND 5 7 GND

9– PIN 9– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN

MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE

Figure G.2 – PCM, ADC, or CMM to PC-AT Serial Cable

Page G–4 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Cable Data Sheets

3. IC690CBL705: PS/2 TO PCM, ADC, CMM CABLE

3.1. Function of cable

This cable provides RTS-232 signal connections between the RS-232 port on a PCM, ADC, or CMM module and
a serial port on a PS/2 or equivalent Personal Computer.

3.2. Cable Specifications

Cable Length 3 meters (10 feet)
Connectors
PCM/ADC/CMM Side 25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1, or equivalent
Programmer Side 25-pin female, D-subminiature type, AMP 205207-1, or equivalent
Cable Clamps
25-pin AMP 207908-7 or equivalent
Cable Type Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired 0.21 mm2 (AWG 24), Belden 9536 or equivalent

3.3. Wiring Diagram

PIN PIN a44033

ÎÎ TD 2 3 RD
Î
ÎÎ RD 3 2 TD
Î
ÎÎ Î
RTS 4 5 CTS
PS/2 CTS 5 20 DTR PCM

ÎÎ
Î Î Î
DCD 8 8 DCD

Î Î
DTR 20 1 SHLD
GND 7 7 GND
25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN
MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE

Figure G.3 – PCM, ADC, or CMM to PS/2 Serial Cable

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page G–5
Cable Data Sheets

4. IC693CBL300/301/302/312/313: I/O BUS EXPANSION CABLES

4.1. Function of cables

The I/O Bus expansion cables are used to extend the I/O bus to local expansion or remote baseplates in an Alspa
C80–35 I/O system when additional I/O slots are needed or baseplates are required some distance from the CPU
baseplate. The prewired I/O bus expansion cables can be used in a local expansion system with the last baseplate
no more than 15 meters (50 feet) from the CPU baseplate. They can also be used in a remote expansion system
within 15 meters (50 feet) of the CPU baseplate. For cable distances beyond 15 meters (50 feet), and up to 213
meters (700 feet), you must build cables of the required length (see Chapter 3 for detailed instructions).

All of the I/O bus Expansion cables are made with a continuous or 100 % shield. Also, the cable with catalog
number IC693CBL300 can be used for ”Y” connections in a remote expansion system.

4.2. Cable Lengths

D IC693CBL300
1 meter (3 feet), continuous shield,

D IC693CBL301
2 meters (6 feet), continuous shield,

D IC693CBL302
15 meters (50 feet), continuous shield,

D IC693CBL312
0.15 meters (0.5 feet), continuous shield,

D IC693CBL313
9 meters (30 feet), continuous shield.

Page G–6 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Cable Data Sheets

4.3. Cable Specifications (for Remote Expansion System)

Item Description*
Cable: Belden 8107:
Computer cable, braid over foil shield, twisted-pair
30 volt/80_C (176_F)
0.22 mm2 (AWG 24) tinned copper, 7 x 32 stranding
Velocity of propagation = 70% [
Nominal impedance = 100Ω [
25 Pin Male Connector: Crimp Plug = Amp 207464-1; Pin = Amp 66506-9
Solder Plug = Amp 747912-2
25 Pin Female Connector: Crimp Receptacle = Amp 207463-2; Pin = Amp 66504-9
Solder Receptacle = Amp 747913-2
Connector Shell: Kit - Amp 745833–5:
Metal–plated plastic (plastic with nickel over copper) [
Crimp ring – Amp 745508–1, split ring ferrule
[ = Critical Information
* Vendor part numbers listed for user assembled cables are provided for reference only and do
not suggest or imply that they are preferred.
Any part meeting the same specification can be used.

4.4. Expansion Port Pin Assignments

The following table lists the expansion port pin assignments you will need when building remote cables. All
connections between cables are point-to point, that is, pin 2 of one end to pin 2 of the opposite end, pin 3 to pin
3, etc.

Table G.1 – Expansion Port Pin Assignments

Pin Number Signal Name Function

16 DIODT I/O Serial Data Positive
17 DIODT/ I/O Serial Data Negative
24 DIOCLK I/O Serial Clock Positive
25 DIOCLK/ I/O Serial Clock Negative
20 DRSEL Remote Select Positive
21 DRSEL/ Remote Select Negative
12 DRPERR Parity Error Positive
13 DRPERR/ Parity Error Negative
8 DRMRUN Remote Run Positive
9 DRMRUN/ Remote Run Negative
2 DFRAME+ Cycle Frame Positive
3 DFRAME– Cycle Frame Negative
1 FGND Frame Ground for Cable Shield
7 0V Logic Ground

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page G–7
Cable Data Sheets

4.5. I/O Expansion Bus Termination

When two or more baseplates are cabled together in an expansion system, the I/O expansion bus must be properly
terminated. The I/O bus must be terminated at the last baseplate in an expansion system. Each signal pair is
terminated with 120 ohm, 1/4 watt resistors wired between the appropriate pins, as follows (also see Table G.1):

pins 16 - 17; 24 - 25; 20 - 21; 12 - 13; 8 - 9; 2 - 3

The I/O bus termination can be done one of the following ways:

D If an expansion system has only one expansion baseplate, the I/O bus can be terminated by installing as the
last cable, the 15 meters (50 foot) I/O Expansion cable, catalog number IC693CBL302. This cable has the
termination resistors installed in the end that connects to the expansion baseplate connector.

D You can also build a custom cable with termination resistors wired to the appropriate pins for installation at
the end of the bus.

4.6. Wiring Diagrams

The following wiring diagrams show the wiring configuration for I/O expansion system. A wiring diagram is
provided for both point-to-point cables and ”Y” cables.

For detailed information on building custom length cables, see Chapter 3.

TWISTED PAIRS, SHIELDED a45525

PIN (7 PAIRS) PIN

DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/ ALSPA
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK C80–35
DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/ BASEPLATE
DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL EXPANSION
”Y”
DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/ PORT
CABLE
DPRERR 12 12 DPRERR
SINGLE
DPRERR/ 13 13 DPRERR/ OR
CONNECTOR
END DRMRUN 8 8 DRMRUN
DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/ ”Y”
DPFRAME+ 2 2 DPFRAME+ CABLE
DOUBLE
DPFRAME– 3 3 DPFRAME–
CONNECTOR
0V 7 7 0V
END
NC NC
FGND 1 1 FGND

25–PIN 25–PIN SHIELD DRAIN WIRE 25–PIN 25–PIN

MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE
METALIZED SHELL METALIZED SHELL

NOTE:
Bold dashed line shows continuous (100%) shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together.

Figure G.4 – Point-to-Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Custom Length Cables

Page G–8 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Cable Data Sheets

TWISTED PAIRS, SHIELDED a45527

(7 PAIRS)
PIN PIN
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK
DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/
ALSPA
DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL
”Y” DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/ C80–35
CABLE DRPERR 12 12 DRPERR BASEPLATE
EXPANSION
DRPERR/ 13 13 DRPERR/
SINGLE DRMRUN 8 8 DRMRUN PORT
CONNECTOR DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/
END DFRAME+ 2 2 DFRAME+ OR
DFRAME– 3 3 DFRAME–
0V 7 7 0V ”Y”
NC NC CABLE
FGND 1 1 FGND

25–PIN 25– PIN SHIELD DRAIN WIRE 25– PIN 25– PIN
FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE

Figure G.5 – Point–to–Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise
Immunity

In remote baseplates, IC693CHS393E (and earlier) and IC693CHS399D (and earlier), it is necessary to remove
pin 1 of the mating cable where the cable plugs into the baseplate. This means that when using a factory made “Y”
cable, IC693CBL300, you must break pin 1 out of the male end where it plugs into the remote baseplate before
using it with one of these baseplates. Custom built “Y” cables for these baseplates should be built using Figure G.6.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page G–9
 Cable Data Sheets

TWISTED SHIELDED a47076

ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
PIN PAIRS PIN

ÎÎ
Î
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/

Î ÎÎ
Î
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK
CABLE DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/

Î ÎÎ
Î
TO DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL
DOWNSTREAM DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/
REMOTE

Î Î
ÎÎ
RACK DRPERR 12 12 DRPERR EXPANSION
DRPERR/ 13 13 DRPERR/ BASEPLATE
OR

Î Î
DRMRUN

ÎÎ
DRMRUN 8 8 CONNECTOR
DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/
TERMINATION
2 2 DPFRAME+

Î Î
ÎÎ
PLUG DPFRAME+
DPFRAME– 3 3 DPFRAME–

Î ÎÎ
Î
0V 7 7 0V
NC NC
FGND 1 1 FGND
NC

25–PIN 25-PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN

MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell
SHIELD DRAIN WIRE OR CUT PIN 1 HERE IN
SHIELD DRAIN WIRE NOT CONNECTED FACTORY MADE WYE CABLES
ONLY FOR REMOTE BASEPLATES IC693CHS393E,
IC693CHS399D (AND EARLIER REVISIONS OF EACH)

Î
PIN
16 DIODT

Î
17 DIODT/
24 DIOCLK

Î
25 DIOCLK/
20 DRSEL

Î
21 DRSEL/
12 DRPERR CABLE

Î
13 DRPERR/ FROM
DRMRUN UPSTREAM
8
RACK

Î
9 DRMRUN/
2 DPFRAME+

Î
3 DPFRAME–

7 0V

Î
NC
1 FGND

25-PIN 25–PIN
MALE FEMALE
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell

NOTE:
Bold dashed line shows continuous (100%) shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together.

Figure G.6 – Earlier Versions of Remote Baseplate Custom “Y” Cable Wiring Diagram

Remote baseplates IC693CHS393F (and later) and IC693CHS399E (and later) have a change inside the baseplate
which alleviates the need to remove pin 1 from the mating cable. When using factory made “Y” cable with these
baseplates, it is not necessary to remove pin 1 from the cable. Custom built “Y” cables for these baseplates can
be made using either Figure G.6 or Figure G.7. Figure G.7 shows how the factory made “Y” cable are made.

Page G–10 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Cable Data Sheets

TWISTED SHIELDED a47076

ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
PIN PAIRS PIN

ÎÎ
Î
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/

Î ÎÎ
Î
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK
CABLE DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/

Î ÎÎ
Î
TO DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL
DOWNSTREAM DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/
REMOTE

Î Î
ÎÎ
RACK DRPERR 12 12 DRPERR EXPANSION
DRPERR/ 13 13 DRPERR/ BASEPLATE
OR

Î Î
DRMRUN

ÎÎ
DRMRUN 8 8 CONNECTOR
DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/
TERMINATION
2 2 DPFRAME+

Î Î
ÎÎ
PLUG DPFRAME+
DPFRAME– 3 3 DPFRAME–

Î ÎÎ
Î
0V 7 7 0V
NC NC
FGND 1 1 FGND

25–PIN 25-PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN

MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell
SHIELD DRAIN WIRE
SHIELD DRAIN WIRE CONNECTED
FOR REMOTE BASEPLATES IC693CHS393F,
IC693CHS399E (AND EARLIER REVISIONS OF EACH)

Î
PIN
16 DIODT

Î
17 DIODT/
24 DIOCLK

Î
25 DIOCLK/
20 DRSEL

Î
21 DRSEL/
12 DRPERR CABLE

Î
13 DRPERR/ FROM
DRMRUN UPSTREAM
8
RACK

Î
9 DRMRUN/
2 DPFRAME+

Î
3 DPFRAME–

7 0V

Î
NC
1 FGND

25-PIN 25–PIN
MALE FEMALE
Metallized Shell Metallized Shell

NOTE:
Bold dashed line shows continuous (100%) shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together.

Figure G.7 – Current Remote baseplate (IC693CHS393/399)

Custom “Y” Cable Wiring Diagram

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page G–11
Cable Data Sheets

5. IC693CBL303: HAND-HAND PROGRAMMER CABLE

5.1. Function of cable

The Hand-Held Programmer cable provides the connections that allow the Hand-Held Programmer and the
Programmable Logic Controller to communicate. It can also be used to connect the RS-485 serial port on the PLC
to the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter (IC690ACC900).

5.2. Cable Specifications

The prewired cable (IC693CBL303) is 2 meters (6 feet) long. This is the cable used with the Hand-Held
programmer. If a different length cable is required for connection to the converter, refer to the information below
for specifications and wiring information.

This information is essential if you intend to build your own cable. The recommended cable types for this cable
are listed below and depend on the length of the cable.

5.2.1. Specifications for IC693CBL303 Prewired cable

Item Description
Connectors
Same connector is on 15-pin male, D-Subminiature Type, Canon DA15S (solder pot)
both ends
Hood AMP 207470-1 connector shell
Hardware kit AMP 207871-1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips
Cable Type Belden 9508:
0.21 mm2 (AWG 24)
Cable Length 2 meters (6 feet)

5.2.2. Wire Types for Custom Cables

Cable Length Wire Size Catalog Number
10m (30 feet) 22 (0.36 mm2) Belden 9309
>10 m (30 feet) 22 (0.36 mm2) Same as for 10 m. In addition, the +5 VDC logic power source for the converter cannot
to 300m (980 feet) be supplied by the PLC. It must be provided by an external power supply connected
to the +5V and SG pins at the converter end of the connector. The +5V pin at the PLC
connector must not be connected to the cable. The +5V and SG connections from the
power supply must be isolated from its own power line ground connection. Be sure that
there is no connection between the external supply and the PLC except the SG cable
connection.

1. Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only. Any cable having the same electrical characteristics is
acceptable. It is strongly recommended that you use stranded wire. Since it is sometimes hard to find a cable
with the desired number of twisted pairs (the Belden 9309 has an extra pair), you may end up with a cable with
extra pairs.
2. A greater cable length between the PLC and the converter increases the possibility of noise coupling into the
data and converter logic power circuits within the cable. The cable should be as short as possible in noisy
environments. In extreme cases, additional noise protection measures, such as double-shielded cables, may
be required.

Page G–12 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Cable Data Sheets

5.3. Wiring Diagram

The following wiring diagram is for the IC693CBL303 cable and for cables that may be built for connection to
the IC690ACC900 converter.

RS–422
RS–232/RS–485
TWISTED SHIELDED PAIRS a44750
CONVERTER

Î Î ÎÎ
(IC690ACC900) PIN PIN

Î Î ÎÎ
SHLD 1 1 SHLD
ATTCH 4 4

ÎÎ Î Î Î
ATTCH
DCD (A) 2 2 DCD (A)

Î Î
ÎÎÎ
DCD (B) 3 3 DCD (B)
RT 9

Î Î ÎÎ
RD (A’) 10 12 SD (A)
RD (B’) 11 13 SD (B) ALSPA

Î Î ÎÎ
9 RT 8000
SD (A) 12 10 RD (A’) PLC

ÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ
SD (B) 13 11 RD (B’)
RS–422

Î Î
+5V 5 5 +5V PORT

Î Î ÎÎ
0V 7 7 0V

ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î
RTS (A) 6 15 CTS (A’)
RTS (B) 14 8 CTS (B’)

Î Î
CTS (A’) 15 6 RTS (A)
CTS (B’) 8 14 RTS (B)

25–PI 15–PIN 15–PIN 15–PIN 15–PIN

FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
RS–232 PORT RS–485 PORT

PINS 9 AND 10 ARE JUMPERED AT BOTH ENDS OF CABLE TO CONNECT TERMINATING

NOTE:
RESISTORS FOR THE RD SIGNAL WHICH IS INSIDE THE PLC POWER SUPPLY.

Figure G.8 – Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page G–13
Cable Data Sheets

6. IC693CBL305: PORT EXPANSION (”Y”) CABLES

6.1. Function of cable

A ”Y” cable (IC693CBL305 for PCM301/311, ADC311 and CMM301) is supplied with each PCM, ADC, and
CMM module. The ”Y” cable is used to separate two ports available on a single physical connector; the cable
separates the RS-232 from the RS-485 signals. In addition, the ”Y” cable allows cables used with the Alspa C80–75
PCM to be fully compatible with the Alspa C80–35 PCM. The ”Y” cable and cable connections are shown below
and on the following page.

Each ”Y” cable is 0.3 meter (1 foot) in length and has a right angle male connector on one end that connects to
the PCM module. The other end has a dual female connector with one connector for port 1 and the other for port 2.

6.2. Cable Specifications

Cable Length
25 Pin Male Connector:
25 Pin Female Connector:
Connector Shell:
Cable Type
0.3 meter (1 foot )
Crimp Plug = Amp 207464-1; Pin = Amp 66506-9
Solder Plug = Amp 747912-2
Crimp Receptacle = Amp 207463-2; Pin = Amp 66504-9
Solder Receptacle = Amp 747913-2
Kit - Amp 207908-7
Separate Shell = Amp 207345-1;
Male Screw Retainer = Amp 205980-1
27 conductor cable, 0.09 mm2 (AWG 28) with overall shield, extra flexible

Page G–14 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Cable Data Sheets

6.3. Wiring Information

The following figure shows the pin configuration for each of the connectors on the ”Y” cable.

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ a44357

SHIELD
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ 1

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
14 RS–232 TD ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 TD 2
15 RS–232 CTS ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 RD 3
16 RS–232 RD ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 RTS 4
17 RS–232 DTR ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 CTS 5
18 RS–232 DCD ( PORT 2 )
NO CONNECTION 6
19 RS–232 RTS ( PORT 2 )
SIGNAL GROUND 7
20 RS–232 DTR ( PORT 1 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 DCD 8
21 RS–485 SD ( B ) (PORT 2 )
( PORT 2 ) RS–485 SD ( A ) 9
22 RS–485 RTS ( B ) ( PORT 2 )

ÎÎÎ
( PORT 2 ) RS–485 RTS ( A ) 10
23 RS–485 CTS ( B’ ) ( PORT 2 )

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
( PORT 2 ) RS–485 CTS ( A’ ) 11
24 TERMINATION ( RD ) (PORT 2)

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
( PORT 2 ) TERMINATION ( CTS ) 12
25 RS–485 RD ( B’ ) ( PORT 2 )

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
( PORT 2) RS–485 RD ( A’ ) 13

MALE CONNECTOR

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎPORT 1
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
PORT 2 a44358

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
SHIELD 1 SHIELD 1
14 14

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
RS–232 TD 2 RS–232 TD 2
15 15
RS–232 RD 3 RS–232 RD 3
16 16
RS–232 RTS 4 RS–232 RTS 4
17 17
RS–232 CTS 5 RS–232 CTS 5
18 18
6 6
19 19
SIGNAL GROUND 7 SIGNAL GROUND 7
20 20
RS–232 DTR RS–232 DTR
RS–232 DCD 8 RS–232 DCD 8
21 21
RS–485 SD ( B )
9 RS–485 SD ( A ) 9
22 22
RS–485 RTS ( B )
10 RS–485 RTS ( A ) 10

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
23 23
RS–485 CTS ( B’ )
11 RS–485 CTS ( A’ ) 11

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
24 24
TERMINATION ( RD )
12 TERMINATION ( CTS ) 12

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
25 25
RS–485 RD ( B’ )
13 13

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
RS–485 RD ( A’ )

DUAL FEMALE CONNECTORS

Figure G.9 – ”Y” Cable Connections

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page G–15
Cable Data Sheets

7. IC693CBL311/317/320: I/O INTERFACE CABLE FOR AXIS

POSITIONING MODULES

7.1. Function of cable

The I/O Interface Cable assembly consists of a 24-pin I/O connector, a cable and a 25-pin D-type terminal block
connector. This cable is used to connect the Axis Positioning Modules (IC693APU301 and IC693APU302) to
drives and machines. There are two male 24-pin connectors mounted on the front of each Axis Positioning Module.
Two of these I/O Interface cables are required for connections to and from the drive and machine. Catalog number
IC693CBL311 is 3 meters (10 feet) in length. The cable wire code list for these cables is provided in Table G.3.

An I/O cable assembly similar to IC693CBL311, but with the drain shield wire disconnected from pin B12 and
brought outside of the cable housing through an 8” pigtail, is also available in two lengths. Catalog number
IC693CBL317 is 3 meters (10 feet) in length and IC693CBL320 is 1 meter (3 feet) in length. This cable improves
the Axis Postioning APM’s noise immunity. The cable wire code list for these cables is provided in Table G.4.

To make wiring to the drive and machine easier, each connector on the module is typically connected by a a short
cable (the I/O Interface cable) to a terminal block. The cable that connects from the I/O connector to an external
terminal block can be shortened to meet the requirements of your installation.

Î Î
a45119

ÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
3 METERS

ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
B1 A1

ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
Î Î
B12 A12

I/O
CONNECTOR
TERMINAL BLOCK
CONNECTOR ÎÎ
Figure G.10 – I/O Connector Cable Specifications

7.2. Specifications
Cable Length 3 meters (10 feet) and 1 meter (3 feet)
Connector 24-pin female, Fujitsu part number
FCN-363J024 (crimp wire type).

7.3. Wiring Information

You must purchase the mating female (socket type) 24-pin connectors (which mate with the I/O Connector on the
faceplate of the APM). This connector is available under catalog number IC693ACC317. This connector has a
solder eyelet receptacle and is part of an accessory kit. Optionally, other types of the 24-pin connector (for different
physical connections) are also available.

Page G–16 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Cable Data Sheets

Catalog numbers for these connectors and their associated parts are listed in the following table. The list includes
catalog numbers for three types of connectors: solder pin, crimp pin and ribbon cable. Each accessory kit contains
enough components (D-connectors, backshells, contact pins, etc.) to assemble ten single-ended cables of the type
specified for each kit.

Table G.2 – Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits

Cegelec Vendor
Catalog Number Catalog Number Description
IC693ACC316 FCN-361J024-AU Solder eyelet receptacle
(Solder Eyelet Type) FCN-360C024-B Backshell (for above)
IC693ACC317 FCN-363J024 Crimp wire receptacle
(Crimp Type) FCN-363J-AU Crimp pin (for above, 24 needed)
FCN-360C024-B Backshell (for above)
IC693ACC318 FCN-367J024-AUF IDC (ribbon) receptacle, closed cover
(Ribbon or IDC Type) FCN-367J024-AUH IDC (ribbon) receptacle, open cover

Note

Wire for cables is 12 twisted pairs 0.21mm2 (AWG 24).

Additional tools from Fujitsu are required to properly assemble the crimped contact and ribbon cable type
connectors. The solder eyelet connectors (as provided in IC693ACC316) do not require any special tooling.

Crimped Contact Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC317) require:

Hand Crimping Tool FCN-363T-T005/H

Contact Extraction ToolFCN-360T-T001/H

Ribbon Cable Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC318) require:

Cable Cutter FCN-707T-T001/H

Hand Press FCN-707T-T101/H
Locator Plate FCN-367T-T012/H

These tools need to be ordered from an authorized Fujitsu distributor.

It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling with sufficient lead time to meet your assembly
requirements for these connectors. These tools are generally not stock items and can have significant lead times
from distribution. If you have any further questions about this issue, please feel free to contact the Cegelec PLC
Hotline.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page G–17
Cable Data Sheets

The following tables provide wiring information for the I/O Interface cable.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table G.3 – I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL311

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/O Connector 25-Pin Connector
Pin Number Cable Wire Color Codes Terminal Number*

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
no connection Wire 1 Pair 1 (Brown/Black) 25

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A1 Wire 2 Pair 1 (Brown) 12

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B1 Wire 1 Pair 2 (Red/Black) 24

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A2 Wire 2 Pair 2 (Red) 11

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B2 Wire 1 Pair 3 (Orange/Black) 23

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A3 Wire 2 Pair 3 (Orange) 10

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B3 Wire 1 Pair 4 (Yellow/Black) 22

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A4 Wire 2 Pair 4 (Yellow) 9

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B4 Wire 1 Pair 5 (Green/Black) 15

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A5 Wire 2 Pair 5 (Green) 2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B5 Wire 1 Pair 6 (Blue/Black) 14

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A6 Wire 2 Pair 6 (Blue) 1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B6 Wire 1 Pair 7 (Violet/Black) 16

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A7 Wire 2 Pair 7 (Violet) 3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B7 Wire 1 Pair 8 (White/Black) 17

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A8 Wire 2 Pair 8 (White) 4

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B8 Wire 1 Pair 9 (Gray/Black) 21

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A9 Wire 2 Pair 9 (Gray) 8

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B9 Wire 1 Pair 10 (Pink/Black) 20

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A10 Wire 2 Pair 10 (Pink) 7

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B10 Wire 1 Pair 11 (Light Blue/Black) 19

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A11 Wire 2 Pair 11 (Light Blue) 6

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B11 Wire 1 Pair 12 (Light Green/Black) 18

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A12 Wire 2 Pair 12 (Light Green) 5

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B12 Drain Wire (Shield) 13

* Same as Terminal Block Terminal Number.

Page G–18 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Cable Data Sheets

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table G.4 – I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL317 and IC693CBL320

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/O Connector 25-Pin Connector

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pin Number Cable Wire Color Codes Terminal Number 1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
no connection Wire 1 Pair 1 (Brown/Black) 25

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A1 Wire 2 Pair 1 (Brown) 12

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B1 Wire 1 Pair 2 (Red/Black) 24

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A2 Wire 2 Pair 2 (Red) 11

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B2 Wire 1 Pair 3 (Orange/Black) 23

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A3 Wire 2 Pair 3 (Orange) 10

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B3 Wire 1 Pair 4 (Yellow/Black) 22

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A4 Wire 2 Pair 4 (Yellow) 9

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B4 Wire 1 Pair 5 (Green/Black) 15

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A5 Wire 2 Pair 5 (Green) 2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B5 Wire 1 Pair 6 (Blue/Black) 14

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A6 Wire 2 Pair 6 (Blue) 1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B6 Wire 1 Pair 7 (Violet/Black) 16

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A7 Wire 2 Pair 7 (Violet) 3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B7 Wire 1 Pair 8 (White/Black) 17

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A8 Wire 2 Pair 8 (White) 4

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B8 Wire 1 Pair 9 (Gray/Black) 21

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A9 Wire 2 Pair 9 (Gray) 8

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B9 Wire 1 Pair 10 (Pink/Black) 20

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A10
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B10
Wire 2 Pair 10 (Pink)
Wire 1 Pair 11 (Light Blue/
7
19

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Black)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A11 Wire 2 Pair 11 (Light Blue) 6

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B11 Wire 1 Pair 12 (Light Green/Black) 18

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A12 Wire 2 Pair 12 (Light Green) 5

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
External Ring Terminal Drain Wire (Shield) 2 13
1 Same as Terminal Block Terminal Number.
2 16 gauge wire, green w/yellow tracer. 8” length (from back of connector), terminates with a #10 ring terminal.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page G–19
Cable Data Sheets

8. IC693CBL315: I/O INTERFACE CABLE (24-PIN) FOR 32 POINT

MODULES

8.1. Function of cable

This prewired cable is available for use with all Alspa C80–35 high-density (32 point) I/O modules that use the
Fujitsu 24-pin user I/O connector. Each of these modules has two of these connectors mounted side-by-side. I/O
Interface cables have a 24-pin connector on one end for connection to the module, and stripped and tinned wires
on the other end. Catalog numbers for 32 point modules having two 24-pin connectors are: IC693MDL654,
IC693MDL655, IC693MDL752 and IC693MDL753.

Connections to input circuits are made from the user’s input devices to two male (pin-type) 24-pin connectors
(Fujitsu FCN-365P024-AU) mounted on the front of the module. The connector mounted on the right of the module
(front view) interfaces with groups A and B; the connector on the left side of the module interfaces with groups
C and D. If a different length cable is required for connections to these modules, you can build your own cable.

8.2. Specifications
Cable Length 3 meters (10 feet)
Connector Fujitsu FCN-365S624-AU

8.3. Building Cables for 24-Pin Connectors

Cables connecting the module to field devices can be built to length as required for individual applications. You
must purchase the mating female (socket type) 24-pin connectors. The 24-pin connector kit can be ordered as an
accessory kit from Cegelec. Catalog numbers for these connectors and their associated parts are listed in the
following table. The list includes catalog numbers for three types of connectors: solder pin, crimp pin and ribbon
cable. Each accessory kit contains enough components (D-connectors, backshells, contact pins, etc.) to assemble
ten single-ended cables of the type specified for each kit.

Table G.5 – Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits

Cegelec Vendor
Catalog Number Catalog Number Description
IC693ACC316 FCN-361J024-AU Solder eyelet receptacle
(Solder Eyelet Type) FCN-360C024-B Backshell (for above)
IC693ACC317 FCN-363J024 Crimp wire receptacle
(Crimp Type) FCN-363J-AU Crimp pin (for above, 24 needed)
FCN-360C024-B Backshell (for above)
IC693ACC318 FCN-367J024-AUF IDC (ribbon) receptacle, closed cover
(Ribbon or IDC Type) FCN-367J024-AUH IDC (ribbon) receptacle, open cover

Additional tools from Fujitsu are required to properly assemble the crimped contact and ribbon cable type
connectors. The solder eyelet connectors (as provided in IC693ACC316) do not require any special tooling.

Page G–20 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Cable Data Sheets

Crimped Contact Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC317) require:

Hand Crimping Tool FCN-363T-T005/H

Contact Extraction ToolFCN-360T-T001/H

Ribbon Cable Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC318) require:

Cable Cutter FCN-707T-T001/H

Hand Press FCN-707T-T101/H
Locator Plate FCN-367T-T012/H

These tools need to be ordered from an authorized Fujitsu distributor.

It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling with sufficient lead time to meet your assembly
requirements for these connectors. These tools are generally not stock items and can have significant lead times
from distribution. If you have any further questions about this issue, please feel free to contact the Cegelec PLC
Hotline.

Pin connections with color codes are shown in the following table. Cables are made of 12 twisted pairs, wire size
is 0.21mm2 (AWG 24).

Table G.6 – Wire List for 24-Pin Connectors

ROW A ROW B
Pair Wire Color Code Pair Wire Color Code
Pin Number Pin Number
A1 1 BROWN B1 7 VIOLET
A2 1 BROWN/BLACK B2 7 VIOLET/BLACK
A3 2 RED B3 8 WHITE
A4 2 RED/BLACK B4 8 WHITE/BLACK
A5 3 ORANGE B5 9 GREY
A6 3 ORANGE/BLACK B6 9 GREY/BLACK
A7 4 YELLOW B7 10 PINK
A8 4 YELLOW/BLACK B8 10 PINK/BLACK
A9 5 DARK GREEN B9 11 LIGHT BLUE
A10 5 DARK GREEN/BLACK B10 11 LIGHT BLUE/BLACK
A11 6 DARK BLUE B11 12 LIGHT GREEN
A12 6 DARK BLUE/BLACK B12 12 LIGHT GREEN/BLACK

a45144
B ROW

Î Î
12 321

Î Î
CONNECTOR

A ROW 12 321

Note

Each wire should be identified with heat shrink tubing to tie the two wires that
are paired together. For example, place a short section of heat shrink tubing
over the black/white pair (pair 1), etc.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page G–21
Cable Data Sheets

Page G–22 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Appendix CPU Data Sheets

This appendix provides data sheets describing each of the Alspa C80–35 CPU modules. Each CPU is described
in a two-page data sheet, which provides a quick reference to all of the available CPU models. Each data sheet
has the following information:

D Model of CPU,

D CPU catalog number,

D Specifications for the CPU.

These CPU models are included in this appendix:

D IC693CPU311 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU, 1K Byte Register Memory,

D IC693CPU313 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU, 2K Bytes Register Memory,

D IC693CPU323 10-slot baseplate with embedded CPU,

D IC693CPU331 CPU module, 10 MHz,

D IC693CPU341 CPU module, 20 MHz, 80K Bytes User Program Memory,

D IC693CPU351 CPU module, 25 MHz,

D IC693CPU352 CPU module, 25 MHz, floating point.

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page H–1
CPU Data Sheets

1. CPU 311
a44563

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE 1

ÎÎ
CONTROLLER
BASE 5-SLOT
WITH CPU

CAUTION

USER PROGRAM
ÎÎ
SYSTEM
PROM
PROGRAM
PROM

AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
i HOUR

1 2 3 4 5
POWER
SUPPLY

Catalog Number: IC693CPU311

Page H–2 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 CPU Data Sheets

Catalog Number IC693CPU311

CPU Type 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU
Total Baseplates per System 1
Load Required from Power Supply 410 milliamps from +5 VDC supply
Processor Speed 10 MegaHertz
Processor Type 80188
Typical Scan Rate 18 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
User Program Memory (maximum) 6K Bytes
Discrete Input Points - %I 160 (maximum - combined inputs + outputs)
Discrete Output Points - %Q 160 (maximum - combined outputs + inputs)
Discrete Global Memory - %G 1280 bits
Internal Coils - %M 1024 bits
Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits
System Status References - %S 128 bits (%S, %SA, %SB, %SC - 32 bits each)
Register Memory - %R 512 words
Analog Inputs - %AI 64 words
Analog Outputs - %AQ 32 words
System Registers (for reference table viewing 16 words (%SR)
only; cannot be referenced in user logic program)

Timers/Counters 170
Shift Registers yes
Built-in Ports 1
Communications Serial - SNP
LAN - N80, Ethernet – FIP
Override no
Battery Backed Clock no
Interrupts no
Type of Memory Storage RAM, EPROM, EEPROM
PCM/CCM Compatibility no

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page H–3
CPU Data Sheets

2. CPU 313
a44563

ÎÎ
ÎÎ 1

ÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 5-SLOT

ÎÎ
WITH CPU

CAUTION SYSTEM PROGRAM

PROM PROM
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
i HOUR

POWER 1 2 3 4 5
SUPPLY

Catalog Number: IC693CPU313

Page H–4 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 CPU Data Sheets

Catalog Number IC693CPU313

CPU Type 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU
Total Baseplates per System 1
Load Required from Power Supply 430 milliamps from +5 VDC supply
Processor Speed 10 MegaHertz
Processor Type 80188
Typical Scan Rate 0.6 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
User Program Memory (maximum) 12K Bytes (6K bytes prior to release 7)
Discrete Input Points - %I 160 (maximum - combined inputs + outputs)
Discrete Output Points - %Q 160 (maximum - combined outputs + inputs)
Discrete Global Memory - %G 1280 bits
Internal Coils - %M 1024 bits
Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits
System Status References - %S 128 bits (%S, %SA, %SB, %SC - 32 bits each)
Register Memory - %R 1024 words
Analog Inputs - %AI 64 words
Analog Outputs - %AQ 32 words
System Registers (for reference table viewing 16 words (%SR)
only; cannot be referenced in user logic program)

Timers/Counters 170
Shift Registers yes
Built-in Ports 1
Communications Serial - SNP
LAN - N80, Ethernet – FIP
Override no
Battery Backed Clock no
Interrupts no
Type of Memory Storage RAM, EPROM, EEPROM
PCM/CCM Compatibility no

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page H–5
CPU Data Sheets

3. CPU 323
a45134

1
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

BASE 10–SLOT
WITH CPU

CAUTION SYSTEM PROGRAM

PROM PROM
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR.

POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPPLY

Catalog Number: IC693CPU323

Page H–6 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 CPU Data Sheets

Catalog Number IC693CPU323

CPU Type 10-slot baseplate with embedded CPU
Total Baseplates per System 1
Load Required from Power Supply 430 milliamps from +5 VDC supply
Processor Speed 10 MegaHertz
Processor Type 80188
Typical Scan Rate 0.6 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
User Program Memory (maximum) 12K Bytes (6K bytes prior to release 7)
Discrete Input Points - %I 320 (maximum - combined inputs + outputs)
Discrete Output Points - %Q 320 (maximum - combined outputs + inputs)
Discrete Global Memory - %G 1280 bits
Internal Coils - %M 1024 bits
Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits
System Status References - %S 128 bits (%S, %SA, %SB, %SC - 32 bits each)
Register Memory - %R 1024 words
Analog Inputs - %AI 64 words
Analog Outputs - %AQ 32 words
System Registers (for reference table viewing 16 words (%SR)
only; cannot be referenced in user logic program)

Timers/Counters 340
Shift Registers yes
Built-in Ports 1
Communications Serial - SNP
LAN - N80, Ethernet – FIP
Override no
Battery Backed Clock no
Interrupts no
Type of Memory Storage RAM, EPROM, EEPROM
PCM/CCM Compatibility no

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page H–7
CPU Data Sheets

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
4. CPU 331

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CPU331

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Catalog Number: IC693CPU331

Page H–8 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 CPU Data Sheets

Catalog Number IC693CPU331

CPU Type Single slot CPU module
Total Baseplates per System 5 (1 CPU baseplate + 4 expansion and/or remote)
Load Required from Power Supply 350 milliamps from +5 VDC supply
Processor Speed 10 MegaHertz
Processor Type 80188
Typical Scan Rate 0.4 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
User Program Memory (maximum) 16K Bytes
Discrete Input Points - %I 512
Discrete Output Points - %Q 512
Discrete Global Memory - %G 1280 bits
Internal Coils - %M 1024 bits
Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits
System Status References - %S 128 bits (%S, %SA, %SB, %SC - 32 bits each)
Register Memory - %R 2048 words
Analog Inputs - %AI 128 words
Analog Outputs - %AQ 64 words
System Registers (for reference table 16 words (%SR)
viewing only; cannot be referenced in user
logic program)

Timers/Counters 680
Shift Registers yes
Built-in Ports 1
Communications Serial - SNP, SNPX, RTU, CCM
LAN - N80, Ethernet – FIP
Override yes
Battery Backed Clock yes
Interrupts no
Type of Memory Storage RAM, EPROM, EEPROM
PCM/CCM Compatibility yes

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page H–9
CPU Data Sheets

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
5. CPU 341

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CPU341

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Catalog Number: IC693CPU341

Page H–10 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 CPU Data Sheets

Catalog Number IC693CPU341

CPU Type Single slot CPU module
Total Baseplates per System 5 (1 CPU baseplate + 4 expansion and/or remote)
Load Required from Power Supply 490 milliamps from +5 VDC supply
Processor Speed 20 MegaHertz
Processor Type 80C188XL
Typical Scan Rate 0.3 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
User Program Memory (maximum) 80K Bytes
Discrete Input Points - %I 512
Discrete Output Points - %Q 512
Discrete Global Memory - %G 1280 bits
Internal Coils - %M 1024 bits
Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits
System Status References - %S 128 bits (%S, %SA, %SB, %SC - 32 bits each)
Register Memory - %R 9999 words
Analog Inputs - %AI 1024 words
Analog Outputs - %AQ 256 words
System Registers (for reference table 16 words (%SR)
viewing only; cannot be referenced in user
logic program)

Timers/Counters >2000
Shift Registers yes
Built-in Ports 1
Communications Serial - SNP, SNPX, RTU, CCM
LAN - N80, Ethernet – FIP
Override yes
Battery Backed Clock yes
Interrupts yes
Type of Memory Storage RAM, Flash, EEPROM
PCM/CCM Compatibility yes

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page H–11
CPU Data Sheets

6. CPU 351

CPU 351 SNP

P1
P2

ON/RUN

OFF/
STOP

PORT 1
RS-232

PORT 2
RS-485

Catalog Number: IC693CPU351

Page H–12 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 CPU Data Sheets

Catalog Number IC693CPU351

CPU Type Single slot CPU module
Total Baseplates per System 8 (CPU baseplate + 7 expansion and/or remote)
Load Required from Power Supply 890 milliamps from +5 VDC supply
Processor Speed 25 MegaHertz
Processor Type 80386EX
Typical Scan Rate .22 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
User Program Memory (maximum) 80K Bytes
Discrete Input Points - %I 2048
Discrete Output Points - %Q 2048
Discrete Global Memory - %G 1280 bits
Internal Coils - %M 4096 bits
Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits
System Status References - %S 128 bits (%S, %SA, %SB, %SC - 32 bits each)
Register Memory - %R 9999 words
Analog Inputs - %AI 2048 words
Analog Outputs - %AQ 512 words
System Registers (for reference table viewing only; 16 words (%SR)
cannot be referenced in user logic program)

Timers/Counters >2000
Shift Registers yes
Built-in Ports 3
Communications Serial - SNP, SNPX, RTU, CCM
LAN - N80, Ethernet – FIP
Override yes
Battery Backed Clock yes
Interrupts yes
Type of Memory Storage RAM, Flash, EEPROM
PCM/CCM Compatibility yes
Floating Point Math Support no

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page H–13
CPU Data Sheets

7. CPU 352

CPU 352 SNP

P1
P2

ON/RUN

OFF/
STOP

PORT 1
RS-232

PORT 2
RS-485

Catalog Number: IC693CPU352

Page H–14 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 CPU Data Sheets

Catalog Number IC693CPU352

CPU Type Single slot CPU module
Total Baseplates per System 8 (CPU baseplate + 7 expansion and/or remote)
Load Required from Power Supply 890 milliamps from +5 VDC supply
Processor Speed 25 MegaHertz
Processor Type 80386EX
Typical Scan Rate .22 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
User Program Memory (maximum) 80K Bytes
Discrete Input Points - %I 2048
Discrete Output Points - %Q 2048
Discrete Global Memory - %G 1280 bits
Internal Coils - %M 4096 bits
Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits
System Status References - %S 128 bits (%S, %SA, %SB, %SC - 32 bits each)
Register Memory - %R 9999 words
Analog Inputs - %AI 2048 words
Analog Outputs - %AQ 512 words
System Registers (for reference table viewing only; 16 words (%SR)
cannot be referenced in user logic program)

Timers/Counters >2000
Shift Registers yes
Built-in Ports 3
Communications Serial - SNP, SNPX, RTU, CCM
LAN - N80, Ethernet – FIP
Override yes
Battery Backed Clock yes
Interrupts yes
Type of Memory Storage RAM, Flash, EEPROM
PCM/CCM Compatibility yes
Floating Point Math Support yes (see ALS 52102 Alspa C80–35, C80–25 and C80–05 PLCs
Reference Manual, for details of using floating point math).

ALS 52117 d–en Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual Page H–15
CPU Data Sheets

Page H–16 Alspa C80–35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52117 d–en
 Index

Symbols Alspa C80-35

125 VDC supply, 2-17
high capacity AC/DC supply, 2-17
Y" cable, 2-64
power supplies, 2-17
for expansion systems, 2-9
in remote expansion system, 2-9 , 2-12 Alspa C80-35 I/O, module types, 1-21
wiring diagram for current remote baseplates, Alspa C80-35 I/O modules
3-39 , G-11 analog input, 2-39
wiring diagram for earlier revision remote analog output, 2-39
baseplates, 3-38 availability of, 1-20
wiring diagram for earlier version baseplates, combination (discrete/in/out), 2-39
G-10 discrete input, 2-39
wiring diagram, remote system, 3-39 , G-11 discrete output, 2-39
wiring diagram, remote system (for earlier list of, 1-22
version baseplates), G-10
option, 2-39
"Y" cable terminal board, 1-23
connection to PCM modules, 3-43 Alspa C80-35 PLC, 2-44
for PCM, ADC, CMM modules, 3-48 125 VDC supply, 2-13
illustration of, 3-48 24/48 VDC supply, 2-21
wiring diagram, 3-48 , G-8 , G-13 , G-14 backplane, 2-10
baseplate installation, 3-4
configuration and programming, 1-11
A CPU capacities, 1-6
CPU module description, model 331/341,
2-28
AC line filter, 3-22
fault handling, 1-14
AC/DC high capacity power supply features, 1-4
AC power source connections, 2-19 hardware, 1-2
DC power source connections, 2-20 hardware packaging information, 3-2
illustration of, 2-17 I/O system, 1-20
overvoltage protection devices, 3-21 list of products described, 2-1
specifications, 2-19 model 311, 1-7 , 2-29
model 313, 1-7 , 2-29
AC/DC standard power supply model 323, 1-7 , 2-29
AC power source connections, 2-15 model 331, 1-8 , 2-28
DC power source connections, 2-16 model 341, 1-8 , 2-28
illustration of, 2-13 model 351, 1-8 , 2-30
overvolt